NSCP 2015 PDF

NSCP C101-15
E/)C/op
NATIONAL
STRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE
PHILIPPINES
2015
VOLUME I
BUILDINGS, TOWERS AND
OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES
SEVENTH EDITION
first Printing, 2016
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email : aseponline@gmail.com
Website: http://www.aseponline.org
1
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1' Printing, 2016
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES (NSCP)
CIOJ-15
Volume I
Buildings, To\vers and Other Vertical Structures
Seventh Edition, 2015
Copyright@2015, The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

All rights reserved. This publication or any part thereof must not be reproduced in any fonn \vithout the ,vritten pennission
of the Association Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP).
ISSN No.: 2094-5477
PUBLISHER
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

Suite 713 Future Point Plaza Condotninium
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City,
1I 00 Philippines
Telephone Nos. (+632) 410-0483
Facsimile No. (+632)411-8606
E-mail address aseponline@gmail.com
Website http://www.aseponline.org
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP) is a professional Association founded in 1961 to
represent the structural engineering co1nn1unity nation\vide. This docuinent is published in keeping \Vith the association's
objectives:
II Maintenance of high ethical and professional standards in the practice of structural engineering;
II Advancement of structural engineering kno\vledge;
• Promotion of good public and private clientele relationship; and
• Fellowship a1nong structural engineers, and professional relations ,vith other allied technical and scientific
organizations.
Print History
First Edition, 1972

Second Edition, 1981
Third Edition, 1987
Fourth Edition, 1992
Fifth Edition, 2001
Sixth Edition, 2010
Seventh Edition, 2016
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

ii
FOREWORD
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) exists to advance the structural engineering practice, a proactive
voice in the develop1nent of codes and standards, and contributes to nation building by advocating public safety and \velfare, and
sustainability of the built environment. For more than four decades no\v, ASEP has been the sole provider, recognized by the
Departlnent of Public Works and High\vays, of the National Structural Code of the Philippines, a referral code of the National
Building Code.
The first edition of the National Structural Code for Buildings (NSCB) \Vas published by ASEP in 1972. It was continuously
updated considering the latest design principles, technologies, and tnajor calamities experience world\vide. A second edition \Vas
released in 1982, third edition in l 987, fourth edition in 1992, fifth edition in 2001, and sixth edition of the National Structural Code
of the Philippines (NSCP) in 20 I 0.
Upon-the onset of the climate change phenomena, the Philippines \Vas greeted \Vith numerous natural disasters: Typhoon
Ketsana/Ondoy (165 kph) and Typhoon Parma/Pepeng (250 kph) in 2009, Typhoon Megi/Juan (295 kph) in 2010, Typhoon
Nesat/(Pedring (215 kph) in 2011, Typhoon Bopha/Pablo (280 kph) and Negros Occidental Earthquake (M6.7) in 2012, Bohol
Earthquake (M7.2) and Typhoon 1-laiyan/Y olanda (315 kph) in 2013. In 2014, ASEP Board, under the presidency of Engr. Carlos
M. Villaraza, decided that an update of the NSCP \Vas essential to address the effects of environn1ental changes. Thus, the task of
1naking the 7th Edition of the NSCP C 101-10 for Buildings, To\vers and other Vertical Structures \Vas set in 1notion.
111
The National Structural Code of the Philippines, 7 Edition has still maintained its co1nplete technical substance, updated to the
latest editions of applicable reference code counterparts. Major changes are noted in the seis1nic loading calculations, \Vhich no\V
takes into consideration a near-source factor for 2k1n and belo\V, as \veil as to adapt the latest fault 1naps provided by PHJVOLCS.
For the \Vind load calculations, \Vind zone n1aps are replaced by \Vind contour ,naps specific to the Philippine geography. It has been
a product of sustained effort of ASEP and realization of this endeavor has finally come to fruition during my incu1nbency.
On behalf of the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., let me express our grateful thanks to the 2014-2015
ASEP Board of Directors, 2015-2017 ASEP Board of Directors, the Co1nmittee on Codes and Standards chaired by Engr. E1nilio M.
Morales, Managing Director Ronaldo S. Ison, all co1n1nittee 1nen1bers, the Editorial Revie\v Board, and ASEP Secretariat for their
hard \Vork and dedication in coming out with this update.
'
FR
Pre i ent
Ass c iation ofStructural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.
201 to 2017
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1" Printing, 2016
iii
PREFACE TO THE NSCP VOLUME 1, SEVENTH EDITION, 2015
1. Introduction
ASEP recognizes the need for an up-to-date structural code addressing the design and installation of structural systems
through requirements e1nphasizing performance. The new National Stntctural Code of the Philippines (NSCP Volun1e I) is
designed to 1neet these needs through various 1nodel codes/regulations, generally frotn the United States, to safeguard the
public health and safety nationwide.
This' updated Structural Code establishes minimun1 require1nents for structural systems using prescriptive and
performance-based provisions. It is founded on broad-based principles that n1ake possible the use of ne\V 1naterials and
ne\V building designs. Also, this code reflects the latest seistnic design practice for earthquake-resistant structures.
2. Changes and Developments
In its drive to upgrade and update the NSCP, the ASEP Codes and Standards Com1nittee initially \Vanted to adopt the latest
editions of A1nerican code counterparts. Ho\vever, for cases \vhere available local data is limited to support the upgrade,
then so1ne provisions and procedures of the NSCP 7 111 edition \Vere retained.
This NSCP 7th edition is referenced fron1 the follo\ving:

a. Unifonn Building Code UBC-1997
b. International Building Code lBC-2009
c. A1nerican Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI 7-10
d. American Concrete Institute ACI318-14M
e. American Institute for Steel Construction AISC-05 \Vith Supplen1entary Seis1nic Provisions
f. American Iron and Steel Institute AISI SI 00-2007
g. Reinforced Masonry Engineering I-Iandbook of America
h. Concrete Masonry Handbook, 6th Edition
i. American National Standard Institute ANSI E!Aff!A-222-G-1-2007
J. A1nerican Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards
Significant revisions are su1n1narized as follo\vs:

a. Chapter I - General Requiren1ents
The changes n1ade in this chapter are the follo\ving:
a.1 Section 102 - Definition of Failure
a.2 Section l 03 - Classification of Structures
School buildings of 1nore than one story, hospitals, designated evacuation centers, structures
are under the essential facilities category. Section I 04 - Design Require1nents
Churches, Mosque and other related religious structures are under the special occupancy
category Section 104-Design Requiren1ents.
The provision for deflection of any structural men1ber under the serviceability require1nent is
deleted. This requirement for concrete and steel is specified in Chapters 4 and 5 respectively.
Ne\v requirements are added to the design revie\v section.
a.3 Section 105 - Posting and Instru1nentation

iv
The provision of installed recording accelerograph is adjusted.
a.4 Inclusion of Appendix I-A : Recom1nended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Revie,v of
Structures 2015
a.5 Inclusion of Appendix 1-B: Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording
Instrumentation for Buildings
b. Chapter 2 - Minimum Design Loads

The changes 1nade in this chapter are the follo,ving:
b. l Section 203 - Con1bination of Loads
The load factors and load con1binations are revised particularly the load cotnbinations
including ,vind load.
b.2 Section 205 - Live Loads
Additional loads are incorporated in the table for minimum uniform and concentrated loads
particularly the parking garage and ramp live load.
b.3 Section 207 - Wind Loads
Wind load provisions, ,vhich ,vere previously based on ASCE7-05, are updated based on
ASCE7-IO. In this edition, three different ,vind contour maps for the entire Philippine
archipelago are generated and provided for detennining the basic ,vind speeds for different
categories of building occupancies as defined in Table I 03-1. These n1aps provide basic ,vind
speeds that are directly applicable for detennining pressures for design strength. Strength
design ,vind load factor is 1.0; ,vhereas, allo,vable stress design wind load factor is 0.6.
Generally, basic ,vind speeds correspond to 3%, 7% and l5o/o probability of exceedance in 50
years (MRI - 1700,700 and 300 years, respectively). Four (4) permitted procedures in
detennining the design ,vind loads for n1ain wind-force resisting systems (MWFRS), for other
structures and building appurtenances and for co111ponents and cladding (C&C) are provided
such as;
• directional procedure for buildings of all heights,

• envelope procedure for lo,v-rise buildings,
• directional procedure for other structures and building appurtenances and
analytical procedure for co1nponents & cladding, and
• ,vind tunnel procedure
The ANSI EIA/TIA-222-0-2005 and ANSI EIA/TIA-2220-1-2007 are now fully referenced
for computing ,vind loads on steel antenna to,vers and antenna supporting structures.
b.4 Section 208 - Earthquake Loads
The near-source factors for 2-k,n distance fro1n a causative fault is included in addition to 5-
kn1, 10-km, 15-km distance and beyond l 5-kin distance.
ASCE/SEI 7-10, using spectral acceleration, is recognized as an alternative procedure in the
detennination of the earthquake loads.
c. Chapter 3- Earthworks and Foundations
The revisions made in this chapter are the follo,ving:
c.1 Provisions pertaining to the conduct and interpretation of foundation investigations for cases
involving liquefiable, expansive or questionable soils are adopted;
v
c.2 The section on footings is amended to incorporate provisions for differential settle1nent,
design loads and vibratory loads~
c.3 The section on pile foundations is ainended to incorporate new provisions on splicing of
concrete piles; and
c.4 The section on special foundations, slope stabilization and 1naterials of construction are added.
c.5 Provisions for construction in Zone 4 pertaining to reinforcetnent of Precast Prestressed Piles
have been revised to ensure consistency \Vith ACI 318.
c.6 The figure for cut slopes has been a1nended for clarity;
c. 7 The figure for fill slopes has been an1ended for clarity and some provisions have been
modified;
c.8 A table on the 1ninin1u1n required number of boreholes has been added to the section on
foundation investigation;
c.9 Provisions pertaining to n1inimu1n dimensions of ditches have been 1nodified;
c. l O The section on excavations and fills has been amended to incorporate provisions for scouring
and erosion protection as \Yell as support of excavations and open cuts;
c.11 Provision pertaining to general pile require1nents have been expand to include design of piles
and pile groups subjected to lateral loads.
c.12 A Section on MSE Structures and Sitnilar Reinforced Embank1nents and Fills has been added.
d. Chapter 4 - Structural Concrete
To reflect the reorganization of ACI 3 l 8-14 which contained a nun1ber of significant technical changes, the
ASEP adopted sin1ilar changes in the NSCP 2015 7th Edition. The latest ACI 318 \Vas reorganized as a men1ber-
based document, i. e., particular 111ember type, such as bea1n, coltunn, or slab \viii have separate sub-sections for
all require1nents to design that particular 111e1nber type. This \Viii eliininate the need to flip through several
Sections to con1ply \Vith all the necessary design requirements for a particular structural me1nber, as \Vas
necessary \Vith the old organization format.
d. I Section 40 I: General
General infonnation regarding the scope and applicability of NSCP 2015, Vol. 1 is provided. Additional sub-
section on interpretation is included to help users better understand Chapter 4, Structural Concrete.
d.2 Section 402: Notation and Terminology
The definition for hoops has been modified because the use of interlocking headed bars is a concern regarding
the possibility that it will not be adequately interlocked and because the heads could beco1ne disengaged under
con1plex loadings \Vell into the non-linear range of response. It is now defined as a closed tie or continuously
\VOund tie, n1ade up of one or several reinforce1nent ele1nents, each having seismic hooks at both ends.
A definition for special seismic systems, a tern1 used in Sections 418 and 419, has been added.
d.3 Section 403: Referenced Standards
The follo\ving referenced specifications have been added to Section 403.2.4:
• ASTM A370-14, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
• ASTM A I 085-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow
Structural Sections (HSS)
• ASTM Cl 73/CI 73M-14, Standard Test Method for Air- Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
Volu1netric Method

vi
• ASTM Cl582/CJ582M-l l, Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-
Induced Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
A ne\v referenced specification fro111 Australia and Ne\v Zealand, Section 403.2.6 is added. These
standards \Vere included as ACI 318 has no provisions related to Qualifications on the Use of Quenched
Te1npered QT/fhenno-Mechanically Treated Reinforcen1ent, \vhich are the type manufactured, sold,
and co1n1nonly used for building construction in the Philippines:
• AS/NZS 4671: 200 I, Steel Reinforcing Materials

• NZS 3101: 2006, Part 1 and Part 2, Concrete Structures Standard, and Design of
Concrete Structures
• NZS 3109, Amendment 2, Welding of Reinforcing Steel
• AS/NZS 1554.3: 2008, Part 3, Structural Steel Welding of Reinforcing Steel
The follo\ving referenced specifications have been deleted:
• ASTM Cl 09/CI09M-08, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 50 ,nm Cube Specimens)
• ASTM Cl92/Cl92M-07, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
Several referenced standards and specifications have been updated, as in most cases with every edition
of the NSCP. Note that the edition of every referenced standard is important. The NSCP does not
necessarily adopt ne\v editions of referenced standards unless they are vetted before the publication of
each edition of the standard.
d.4 Section 404: Structural System Requirements
This ne\v Section has been added to Chapter 4 to introduce structural systen1 requiren1ents.
This Section contains Sub-sections on Materials, Design Loads, Structural Systetn and Load
Paths, Structural Analysis, Strength, Serviceability, Durability, Sustainability, Structural
Integrity, Fire Resistance, Require1nents for Specific Types of Construction, Constn1ction and
Inspection, and Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures. Most of these Sub-sections refer to
the other Sections in the NSCP. The Sub-section on construction and inspection, for instance,
refers to Section 426. In the areas for Sustainability and Fire Resistance, the NSCP does not
have specific require1nents. This Sub-section on Sustainability allo\vs the licensed design
professional to specify in the construction docu1nents, sustainability require1nents in addition
to the strength, serviceability, and durability require1nents of the NSCP. The strength,
serviceability, and durability require1nents are required to take precedence over sustainability
considerations, though these require1nents are generally in harn1ony with sustainable
structures. In the Sub-section on Fire Resistance, the NSCP refers to the fire-protection
require1nents of the NSCP Chapter 4, Sub-section 420.6. l. Ho\vever, if the National Building
Code of the Philippines requires a greater concrete cover, such greater thickness shall govern.
d.5 Section 405: Loads
The following 1nodification has been n1ade in the provision for live load reduction because
there are still unincorporated areas \vhere there n1ay not be included in the previous editions of
1
the NSCP. The 7 h Edition, Sub-section 405.2.3 - Live load reductions shall be pennitted in
accordance \Vith the National Building Code of the Philippines, or in its absence, in
accordance with ASCE/SEJ 7.
For many Code revision cycles, ACI 318 retained provisions for service-level earthquake
forces in the design load combinations. In 1993, ASCE/SEI 7 converted earthquake forces to
strength-level forces and reduced the earthquake load factor to 1.0, and the n1odel building
vii
codes followed suit. In n1odern building codes around the \Vorld, earthquake loads are no\v
strength-level forces. Any references to service-level earthquake forces have been deleted.
d.6 Section 406: Structural Analysis

The follo\ving new item has been added in Sub-section 406.6.2.3:
(b) For fra1nes or continuous construction, it shall be pennitted to assu1ne the intersecting me1nber
regions are rigid.
Previous NSCP 61h Edition has been silent on the use of finite ele1nent analysis (FEA), though it is no\v
frequently used. Sub-section 406.9 no\v has provisions that are intended to explicitly allo,v the use of
FEA and to provide a frame,vork for the future expansion of FEA provisions, but not as a guide to,vard
the selection and use of FEA soft\vare. The ne\v Sub-section on diaphragms and collectors 1nakes
explicit reference to the use of FEA, which 1nakes it i1nperative that the NSCP 7th Edition recognize the
acceptability of its use.
d.7 Section 408: Two-Way Slabs
Sub-section 418.I 0.1 (corresponding to ACI 318M-l l. Section 18.9.1 ), says that a n1initnum
area of bonded reinforce1nent shall be provided in all flexural 1ne1nbers ,vith unbonded
prestressing tendons. The purpose of the minin1um unbonded reinforce1nent over the tops of
colu1nns is to distribute cracking caused by high local flexural tensile stresses in areas of peak
negative mo1nents. However, the high local flexural tensile stresses are not unique to slabs
with unbonded tendons. The new reorganized Sub-section 408.6.2.3 (corresponding to ACI
318M-14 Section 8.6.2.3) requires the same miniinum reinforce1nent in slabs ,vith unbonded
or bonded tendons, except that the area of bonded tendons is considered effective in
controlling cracking.
It ,vas also decided by the ACI 318 Co1nmittee, that if the sa1ne bonded reinforce,nent ,vere
required for both bonded and unbonded post-tensioned t\VO-\Vay systems, the structural
integrity requirements for both syste1ns should also be the sa1ne. The structural integrity
require1nents in ACI 3 l 8M-l l, Section 18.12.6 applied to t,vo-,vay post-tensioned slab
syste1ns ,vith unbonded tendons only. The structural integrity requirements in ACI 3 l 8M-I 4
Section 8.7.5.6 (corresponding to the NSCP 2015, Sub-section 408.7.5.6) now apply to two-
way post-tensioned slab systems with bonded as well as unbonded tendons.
d.8 Section 409: Beams
The use of open ,veb reinforce1nent for torsion and shear in slender spandrel beains by the
precast concrete industry as an alternative to the closed stirrups traditionally n1andated by this
Code. Eli1ninating closed stirrups is desirable because they cause reinforce1nent congestion;
production costs also increase significantly because pre-tensioning strand must be threaded
through the closed stirrups.
1
A new relevant Sub-section 409.5.4.7 for solid precast sections is added to the NSCP 7 h
Edition.
d.9 Section 412: Diaphragms
For the first tin1e, a new Section 412, added design provisions for diaphrag1ns in buildings
constructed in areas of Io,v seisn1icity (Zone 2) The new Section applies "to the design of non-
prestressed and prestressed diaphrag,ns, including:
(a). Diaphragtns that are cast-in-place slabs
(b). Diaphragms that co1nprise a cast-in-place topping slab on precast ele1nents

viii
(c). Diaphrag1ns that co1nprise precast ele1nents ,vith end strips formed by either a cast-
in-place concrete topping slab or edge beatns
(d). Diaphrag1ns of interconnected precast elements ,vithout cast-in-place concrete

topping
d.10 Section 418: Earthquake-Resistant Structures

There are a ntunber of significant and substantive changes to this Section.
Colutnn confinen1ent - The ability of the concrete core of a concrete reinforced colun1n to sustain con1pressive
strains tends to increase ,vith confinen1ent pressure. Confine,nent requiren1ents for colurnns of special n101nent
fra1nes, and for colun1ns not designated as part of the seis,nic-force-resisting systen1 in structures assigned to
seismic zone 4 (sin1ilar to ASCE 7-10 Seisn1ic Design Categories D, E, and F), with high axial load or high
concrete co1npressive strength are significantly different.
Transverse reinforce1nent - One itnportant ne\v requiren1ent for special n10111ent fraine cohunns are included in
Sub-sections 418.7.5.2 and 418.7.5.4. There are ne\v restrictions on the use of headed reinforce1nent to make up
hoops.
Special 1noment frame beam-column joints - For bean1-colu1nn joints of special 1noment fra1nes, clarification of
the develop1nent length of the bea111 longitudinal reinforcen1ent that is hooked, require,nents for joints \Vith
headed longitudinal reinforcen1ent, and restrictions on joint aspect ratio are ne,v. For beam-column joints of
special n1oment fra1nes, clarification of develop,nent length of bea1n longitudinal reinforce1nent that is hooked,
require1nents for joints ,vith headed longitudinal reinforcement, and restrictions on joint aspect ratio are ne,v.
Special shear walls - Subsection 418.10 (equivalent to AC! 318-14M-14 Section 18.10, previously
ACI 3 l 8M-l l Section 21. 9), has been extensively revised in vie\v of the performance of buildings in the Chile
earthquake of 2010 and the Christchurch, Ne,v Zealand, earthquakes of 2011, as wells as full-scale reinforced
concrete building tests. In these earthquakes and laboratory tests, concrete spalling and vertical reinforcen1ent
buckling ,vere at tiines observed at \Vall boundaries.
For ASTM A615 Grade 420 bars used as longitudinal reinforce111ent in special n10111ent fra111es and special shear
111
,valls, the NSCP 7 Edition no\v requires the same 111inin1um elongation as ASTM A706 reinforcement.
d.11 Section 419: Concrete: Design and Durability Requirements
Quite a fe,v changes have been n1ade in concrete durability requiren1ents, ,vhich are no,v located in this Section.
rl.12 Section 420: Steel Reinforcement Properties, Durability and Embedments
The definition of yield strength of high-strength reinforcement for Grade 420 (Grade 60) in this Section is no\V,
for the first ti1ne, the san1e as that in ASTM specifications, except for bars with less than 420 MPa, the yield
strength shall be taken as the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent.
Deformed and plain stainless steel \Vire and welded ,vire conforn1ing to ASTM A I022 is now pennitted to be
used as concrete reinforcen1ent.
Sub-section 420.2.2.5 requires "Defonned non-prestressed longitudinal reinforce111ent resisting earthquake

11101nent, axial force, or both, in special moment frames, special structural ,valls, and all the components of
special strnctural walls including coupling beams and wall piers" to be ASTM A706 Grade 420 (Grade 60),
ASTM 615 Grade 275 (Grade 40) or Grade 420 (Grade 60) reinforcement is permitted if two supplementary
require1nents are met, ,vhich are already part of the ASTM A706 specification. A third supplementary
require111ent is no,v added for ASTM A615 (Grade 60) reinforcen1ent to be permitted for use in special 111oment
frames, special structural ,valls. The minimun1 elongation in 200 nun (8") must no,v be the same as that ASTM
A615 (Grade 60) reinforcement.
One aspect of the Code con1pliance that the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines is cautioning
Designers and Constructors alike, is the introduction of ASTM 615 Grade 520 (Grade 75) in the Philippine
ix
market. Since this \Vas not covered by previous editions of the NSCP Vol. 1, it creates an i1npression of an
unregulated use of a ne\V high-strength reinforcement grade. NSCP 7th Edition.
To put it clearly, Sub-section 420.2.2.5, corresponding to AC! 3l8M-l4 Section 20.2.2.5, specifies the
use of deforn1ed non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcen1ent resisting earthquake-induced mo1nent,
axial force, or both, in special 1no1nent fra1nes, special structural \Valls, and all con1ponents of special
structural \Valls, including coupling beams, and wall piers which shall be in accordance \Vith (a) or (b ):
(a). ASTM A 706M, Grade 420
(b). ASTM A6l5M, Grade 280
There \Vas no 1nention that ASTM A615M, Grade 520, \Vas allo\ved, although the use of micro-alloyed
high-strength reinforcement may be allowed in the future through the issuance of a ne\v ASTM or
updated standard, and \Vith proper validation by the Department of Trade and Industry's Bureau of
Standards. It \vill be pren1ature to allo,v its use for special 1noment fran1es, special structural ,valls, and
all co1nponents of special structural walls, including coupling bean1s, and ,vall piers for Buildings
located in areas of high seismicity (zone 4). The same restrictions indicated in Sub-section 420.7.6, on
the use of quenched-tempered thermo-mechanically treated (QTffMT) reinforcing bars in structures
located in seis1nic zone 4 for Grade 420 reinforce1nent, shall also be applied to Grade 520, unless
proven in subsequent studies and tests.
d.13 Section 422: Sectional Strength
The follo,ving are the changes in Section 422:
For prestressed 1nembers, a new equation for the no1ninal axial strength at zero eccentricity has been
introduced in Sub-section 422.4.2.3.
Ne,v Sub-section 422.4.3.1, ,vhich requires that the nominal axial tensile strength of a non-prestressed,
composite, or prestressed n1ember, not to be taken greater than the maximun1 nominal axial tensile
strength of 1ne1nber.
d.14 Section 425: Reinforcement Details
T,vo changes sho,vn in Table 7 {part of Table 425. 3.2) are n1ade to elitninate the differences bet\veen
the required tail extension of a 90-degree or 135- degree standard hook, subject to a n1iniinum of 75
mm (3").
Mechanical or welded splices ,vith strengths belo,v l25o/o of the yield strength of the spliced reinforcing
bars are no longer permitted. The associated stagger requiren1ents have been deleted. Thus there is no
longer a need to specify "full" mechanical or "full" ,velded splices.
d.15 Section 426: Construction Documents and Inspection
In this section, the user \Vill probably require so1ne ti1ne to get used to, it starts ,vith the follo,ving:
426. l. l This Sub-section addresses (a) through (c):
(a) Design infonnation that the licensed design professional shall specify in the construction
documents,
(b) Compliance require1nents that the licensed design professional shall specify in the
construction docu1nents,
(c) Inspection requirements that the licensed design professional shall specify 1n the
construction documents,
Thus, construction and inspection requiren1ents have been consolidated, and they are now related to
construction documents. The construction requirements are designated either as "design information" or
"compliance requirements.'' These are largely existing 1naterial that has been rearranged. The
x
inspection require1nents in Sub-section 426.13 are taken fro1n Chapter 17 of the 20 l 5 Jnternational
Building Code (!BC) and were previously not part of AC! 318.
Provisions in ACI 318-11 and earlier editions, ,vhich explained basic statistical considerations
in mixture proportioning, are no longer found in ACI 318-14. Instead, ACI 301-10,
Specfflcations for Structural Concrete, is referenced.
These are so1ne other changes in the makeup ofNSCP 2016 7~1 Edition that should be noted:
I. There are t,vo ne,v Sections: Section 404, Structural System Requirements and
Section 412, Diaphragms.
2. Section 422, Structural Plain Concrete, no,v Section 414.
3. Section 423, Anchoring to Concrete, is no,v Section 417, ,vith no significant

changes.
4. Section 421, Earthquake-Resistant Stn1ctures, no,v Section 418.
5. Section 427, Strut-and-Tie Models is no,v Section 423, ,vith no significant

changes.
6. Section 420, Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures, is 110\.v Section 427.
7. Section 419, Shells and Folded Plates, is now Section 428.
8. Section 424, Alternative Design Method, no,v Section 429, is adapted from
earlier editions of the NSCP.
9. Section 425, Alternative Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete

Flexural and Compression Members, and Section 426, Alternative Load and
Strength Reduction Factors, have been discontinued.
10. On the other hand, Section 416, Precast Concrete, and Section 418, Prestressed
Concrete, no longer exist as separate entities. The provisions of these Sections
are no,v spread over several of the ne,v Sections.
Sub-section 418.18, Requiren1ents for post-tensioning ducts and grouting have also been re1noved as
being outdated. The Co1n1nentary no,v provides specification guidance.
e. Chapter 5: Structural Steel.
ASEP adapted the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 14th Edition in this updated
Structural Steel code. The revisions made in this chapter are the follo,ving:
e.1 The entire Structural Steel chapters are strea1nlined placing all chapter definitions under one
Definition heading, tables are i1n1nediately sho,vn ,vhere they are first n1entioned, figures dra,vn
larger, equation are all in boldface, extraneous user notes are re1noved, essential in-text definitions
italicized and in-text equation tenns are ,vritten in boldface for easy reference.
e.2 Change of headings and terms.
501.3.5 Filler Metal and Flux for Welding to 501.3.5 Consu1nables for Welding
510.10.3 Web Crippling to Web Local Crippling
557.5 Special Fabrication Require1nents. Weld tabs changed to Run-off tabs under
Exception.
A-6.3 Beams changed to Bearns Bracing
e.3 Creation of ne,v subtopic.

APPENDIX A-4
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume 1, 7th Edition, 1" Printing, 2016
xi
STRUCTURAL FIRE
A-4.2.3. l Thermal Elongation is created under A-4.2.3 Material Strengths at Elevated
Temperatures
APPENDIX A-6
STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS
A-6.4 Beam-Colu1nn Bracing
SECTION 529 BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF)

A section 529.3 \Vas created as heading for 529.3.l and 529.3.2
e.4 Revision in load factor
5 l 0.8 Colun1n Bases and Bearing on Concrete
2 0lO: $, =0.60(LRFD) n, =2s(ASD)
2015: </>, = 0.65(LRFD) ll, = 2. 31(ASD)
e.5 Revision in equations
B-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES

51 l .2.2c Branches ,vith Axial Loads in K-Connections
Q ,[, 0.2<,'' ] (511.2-7)

s=r + {o·:81.:n)+1
(511.2·7)
2010: : 2015:
APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts

n:
A, =!:._(d, -9382)2 A, = 0. 9382P) 2
2010: 4 ; 2015: 4 (db -
f. Chapter 6: Wood.
The revisions n1ade in this Chapter are the follo\ving:
f. I Section 616 - Design Provisions and Equations: The NOS 2015 Chapter 3 is adopted
almost in its entirety;
f.2 Section 617 - Sawn Lumber: The NOS 2015 Chapter 4 is adopted almost in its entirety;
f.3 Section 618 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber: The NOS 2015 Chapter 5 is adopted
almost in its entirety;
f.4 Tables 619.1-3 and 619.1-4 are revised based on NOS 2015; and
f.5 Other Sections affected are adjusted accordingly.
g. Chapter 7: Masonry
The revisions made in this chapter are the follo,ving:
g. l The specified yield strength of steel reinforcement is 420MPa instead of 413 MPa / 415 MPa;

xii
g.2 Section 710.6.3 and Section 7!0.7.1
I Omtn diameter instead ofNo.9 gage ,vire
g.3 Section 713.9.1

20m1n dia1neter instead of 19-gage
25111111 dian1eter instead of24-gage
3. Acknowledgment
The ASEP Codes and Standards Committee are indebted to Philippine Institute of Volcanology and Seismology
(PHIVOLCS) and to Dir. Renato V. Solidum, Ph. D. for his unselfish contribution specifically on Section 208 of
this code.
ASEP acknowledges the contribution of Dr. Teresita C. Bacolcol and Ms. Madeline Cabologan of PHIVOLCS for
the seismic maps used in this code.
ASEP acknowledges the contribution of Engr. Carlos M. Villaraza for his unselfish contribution on Chapter 2
Seismic/Earthquake Chapter.
The contributions of ASEP 1nembers and other users of this code ,vho have suggested improvements, identified
errors and recom1nended ite1ns are recognized.
ASEP also ackno,vledges the contribution of the industry partners, companies and individuals, ,vho continue to
support ASEP's nun1erous undertakings.
The ASEP Codes and Standards Committee also acknowledge Arch. Avigaile Genola Riola who designs the covers
of the NSCP Volume l, 20 IO Edition and NSCP Volume I, 2015 Edition.
xiii
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON.,1SCE.~1~\SEI' CARLOS M. VILLARAZA,MscE.F~\sEr
ASEP President, 2015-2017 ASE? President, 2014-2015
EMILIO M. MORALES.MsCE.F.ASEP ROMEO A. ESTANER0,1'11.D,F.ASEP,l'.I'.

Chabperson, Codes and Standards Conunittee AdviSer, Codes and Standards Co111111ittee
FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA.,1PA ..,1.A.SEI' ADAM C. ABJNALES,MEn~.. F~\SEl',i'.P.

Chairperson RONALDO S. ISON,'-''"'·'·''·
Chabpersons
JUANITO C. CUNANAN,,..,""
Co-Chailperson LESSANDRO ESTELITO O. GARCIANO,e..n,,um
ERNESTO F. CRUZ.,·..""'
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ.,1.cM,L\SEP,P.I'.
fVork Group Men1 bers
AND. FOUNDA'UON STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
MARK ALBERT H. ZARCO."'·"· JORGE P. GENOTA.F.ASEP,l'.I'.

Chainnan Chainna11
MARK I(, MORALES,M,C. JUANITO C. CUNANAN.""'"''

FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON,MSCE,M.ASEP BLAS N. ESPINOSA,,-.,,,,,
Work Group Me111ber WILFREDO S. LO PEZ,McM, F.ASEP, 1•.J>.
VINCI NICHOLAS R. VILLASENOR.e..o.., ..s"'·'·''·
DANILO A. DOMINGO,.ssm·
fVork Group Me1nbers
STRUCTURAL STEEL WOOD
ANTHONY VLADIMIR C. PIMENTEL,·..ssn·.,·.,·. CHRISTOPHER P.T. TAMAYOusm•,,.,.

Chainnan Chainnan
ALLAN B. BENOGSUDAN,MSCE,M.ASEP ARIEL P. SANTOS.~1Enr., F.ASEP
Co-Chainnan Co-Chainna11
MARK ELSON C. LUCI0,,1scF~M.ASEP MARK ELSON C. LUCIO,Msct:.,tAst:r

GILBERT B. MAGBUTAY,,..,,,,., fVork Group Me,nber
fVork Group Men1ber

xiv
MASONRY ASEP SECRETARIAT
CESAR C. PABALAN.,1.EugY.ASE!',P,P. AILYN C. ANONICAL
Chairn1a11 Adn1inistrative Officer
CHRISTOPHER P.T. TAMAYO.,·,,sec,•,,·.,·. MAY A. JACINTO
1Vork Group Me111ber Account Officer
CERELINE G. LUCASIA
JUNEB.CAIS
Ad111inistrative Sta.ff'
EDITORU.L BOARD
ROMEO A. ESTANERO, l'J,.IJ.,F.ASEP,P.P.

Chainnan
VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA.,n:ng.,F.ASEP,l'.P.
Chapter J, Chapter 2& Chapter 4
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ.,1c,1,r.ASEP,l'.P.
CHRISTOPHER P.T. TAMAYO.,•.,rn·.,,.,..
Chapter 2
ARIEL P. SANTOS.,n:ni,F,AS£1'
Chapter 3
DANILO A. DOMINGO,F.ASEP
Chapter 4
ALLAN B. BENOGSUDAN ..,1SCE,M ...\SEI'
Chapter 5
MARK ELSON C. LUCIO."~'"'
Chapter 6
CESAR C. PABALAN,M.Eng,F,ASE!',l'.I'.
Chapter 7
fVork Group Me111ber.s
xv
ASSOCIATION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE PHILIPPINESCOMMITTEE
ON CODES AND STANDARDS (2007-2016)
Letter of Acknowledgement and Appreciation
It is with a deep sense of professional satisfaction that the ASEP NSCP Code Committee has accomplished the
arduous task of updating the NSCP Structural Code for Buildings 2010 Edition to this new 2015 Edition, and
offers thi;; to the Membership, the General public as well as students in the allied professions.
This would not have been possible without the selfless efforts of the various ASEP NSCP Code Committee
Chairmen and Members as well as the ASEP Editorial Board and the Secretariat.
This NSCP 2015 Edition is not just a reprint as it contains important changes specifically in Earthquake and Wind
loading provisions as well as in the Qua!(fied Use of Quenched Tempered (QT) or Thermo- Mechanically Treated
Reir!forcement (TMT). (Subsection 420.7.6 - Structural Concrete)
In the case of the earthquake provisions, the ASEP board in an en bane session has decided to include the 2
kilometer Nearness Factors to the Provisions due to fairly recent instrumented records showing large increases in
Earthquake velocity and acceleration within the two kilometer distance near the causative fault. (Subsection
208.4.4.3 Minimum Design Load)
The wind loading provisions have also been revised with a more concise color coded map of wind velocities as
well as !so-contours
In the case of QT/TMT reinforcing bars, the qualifications on the use of these reinforcing bars have been
highlighted to warn the public on the ordinary construction practices and procedures normally applicable to Micro
alloyed rebars, which would not be applicable to QT/TMT REBARS as these would serve to weaken the rebar
and downgrade its strength properties to that of the core material.
In addition, such use in critical structures, where premature bond failure could result, would result in failure of the
structural element. The ASEP has preceded this publication with numerous lectures and symposia on the
detrimental effects of the use ofQT/TMT reinforcing bars in critical structures and high rise buildings specifically
in Seismic Zone 4.
We have also seen fit to provide anti-Piracy Provisions in this Edition in order to protect the Intellectual Property
rights of our organization. With this, it would be harder for unscrupulous individuals or organizations to replicate
and print unauthorized copies. We shall also be notifying sales outlets for the NSCP 2015 to accept only
authorized versions. The features will also make unauthorized copies easily detected, from the cover and allow
your Organization to prosecute offenders.
Sub,nitted by:

xvi
ASSOCIATION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE PHILIPPINES, INC. (ASEP)
OFFICERS AND BOARD OF DIRECTORS
2016-2017 2015-2016
OFFICERS OFFICERS
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON, ,1.AsEP FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON, M.ASEP
President President
DANILO A. DOMINGO, F.ASEP DANILO A. DOMINGO, F.AsEr
Vice-President Vice-President
JUANITO c. CUNANAN, >I.ASEi' GILBERT B. MAGBUTAY, >1.ASEP
Secreta1~v Secreta,y
MARK ELSON c. LUCIO, >I.ASEi' MARK ELSON c. LUCIO, >I.ASEi'
Treasurer Treasurer
DIRECTORS DIRECTORS
ADAM c. ABINALES, F.ASEl',P.I'. ADAM c. ABINALES, F.ASEI', P.P.
LESSANDRO ESTELITO 0. GARCIANO, ,1.AsEP JUANITO c. CUNANAN, >I.ASEi'
RONALDO s. ISON, F.ASEP. P.P. LESSANDRO ESTELITO 0. GARCIANO, M.ASEP
WALLACE D. LESTANO, F.ASEP RONALDO s. ISON, F.ASEl', l'.I'.
ARIEL P. SANTOS, F.ASEI' ARIEL P. SANTOS, F.ASEI'
FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA, ,1.AsEP FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA, M.ASEP
CARLOS M. VILLARAZA, F.ASEI' CARLOS M. VILLARAZA, F.ASEI'

!PP & Ex-Officio !PP & Ex-Officio
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS COLLEGE OF FELLOWS

RONALDO s. ISON, F.ASEl',l'.I'. RONALDO s. ISON, F.ASEP, P.P.
Cha11cellor Chancellor
WILFREDO s. LOPEZ, F.ASEP,l'.P. WILFREDO s. LOPEZ, F.ASEP,l'.P.
Scribe Scribe
MIRIAM L. TAMA YO, F.ASEl', l'.P. MIRIAM L. TAMAYO, F.ASEl',P.I'.
Bursar Bursar
xvii
ASSOCIATION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE PHILIPPINES, INC. (ASEP)
OFFICERS AND BOARD OF DIRECTORS
2014-2015
OFFICERS
CARLOS M. VILLARAZA, F.ASEP
President
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON, ,1.AsEr
Vice-President
DANILO A. DOMINGO, F.ASEI'
Secretary
GILBERT B. MAGBUTAY, M.ASEI'
Treasurer
DIRECTORS
JUANITO c. CUNANAN, ,1.ASEI'
GABRIEL URSUS L. EUSEBIO, M.ASEP
MARK ELSON C. LUCIO, M.ASEP
ARIEL P. SANTOS, F.ASEI'
PEDRO M. TOLENTINO, F.ASEI'
FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA, M.ASEP
VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA, F.ASEl',l'.I'.

!PP & Ex-Officio
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS
RONALDO S. ISON, F.ASEP,r.r.
Chancellor
WILFREDO s. LOPEZ, F.ASEl',l'.I'.
Scribe
MIRIAM L. TAMA YO, F.ASEI', P.I'.
Bursar

xviii
Republic of the Philippines
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Manila
BOD Ref. No. 001124

September 14, 2015
EIIIGII.. CAii.i.OS M, VILLARAZ.11

President
Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City
Dear Engr. Viliaraza:
Returned herewith is the updated National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP) Seventh
Edition 2015 approved by the DPWH Secretary as a referral code of the National Building Code
of the Philippines.
We advise that ASEP publish this Code in any newspaper of general circulation and in its
website for information of all concerned. It would be appreciated if ASEP could provide this
Department complimentary copies for our reference/file.
Encl: n/s
5.1.5 MCDC/DBP/RCA
- - · - - - · - - ·~tional Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1" Printing, 2016
xix
Republic of the Philippines
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFIFICIE OF THE SECRETARY
Manila
THE NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE Of THE l'HIUPPINES

(NSCI')
VOLUME I, BUILDINGS, TOWERS, AND OTHER VERTICAL
STRUCTURES, SEVENTH EDITION, 2015
AS A REFERRAL CODE OF THE
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE Of THE l'HIUPl'INES
Pursuant to the General Powers given to the Secretary of Public Works and Highways vested in
him by Section 203 of Presidential Decree 1096, otherwise known as the National Building Code
of the Philippines, the National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP) Seventh Edition, 2815
as prepared by the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP), is hereby
adopted as a Referral Code of PD 1096.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Chapter z MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
Chapter 3 EARTHWORKS AND FOUNDATIONS
Chapter 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Chapter 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Chapter 6 WOOD
Chapter 7 MASONRY
Approved in the Qty of Manila, Philippines

This 26th day of August In the year of our Lord
Tv;o Thousand and Fifteen
R~G~
Secretary
Dep:;:nt of Public Works and H r s

xx
NSCP C101-15
Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

VOLUME I
SEVENTH EDITION, 2015

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@gmail.com
Website:http://www.aseponline.org
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements 1-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 101 •.•.....•..•.....•........•...............••••....••..............•••.............•••.•............••.............•....•.......•..........••......•.......••.......••......• 2

TITLE, PURPOSE AND SCOPE ..........•.•...•..............•.•.............•••.•...........•••.............••...•....................•............•........•......•••.... 2
IOI.I Special Foundation Systems .......................................................................................................................................... 2
I 01.2 Purpose .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2
101.3 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2
IO 1.4 Alternative Systems ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
SECTION 102 ................•.......•.••.•............••••...........•••••.............•••.•............••............•.••.•................•••............•.•........•..........•...... 3
DEFINITIONS ....................•••.•.............•••.•...........•••..............••...............•••.............•..................••.•..................•........•.•.....••....... 3
SECTION 103 ........••••.•...••..........••..............••....................•.•.............•..........•................•.•..•••..................••............•.••......•••.......• 6
CLASSIFICATION ...............•••.............••••............••••..............••.•..............••............••••..................•••................••........•••........•... 6
OF STRUCTURES •.•.•.................•••..............•..............•.•.............•.•...............•...............•••..............•.••••.............•.............•••......• 6
103.1 NatureofOccupancy ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
SECTION 104 .......•......•............•...•..........••.•...•...............••..............••..........•.•.............•.....•............•.•....•.............••••••..........•...... 7
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....•.•........•••....................•.................•.........••...............•..................••••...•.............••...•..........••••..... 7
I 04.1 Strength Requirement. ................................................................................................................................................... 7
I 04.2 Serviceability Requirement .......................................................................................................................................... 7
I 04.3 Analysis ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7
I 04.4 Foundation Investigation .............................................................................................................................................. 8
I 04.5 Design Review ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
SECTION 105 ............•••••..............•••.............•.••..............••••............••••........•••...••..........•...••..................•.•..............•••...•........•.••. 9
POSTING AND !NSTRUMENTATION ..........•.•.............•••.•.............•••.•.............•.•..................•••............•....•••.............•••.•..... 9
105.1 Posting of Live Loads ................................................................................................................................................... 9
I 05.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumentation ......................................................................................................................... 9
SECTION 106 .........•••••..............•••.•.............•••.•...........•••••.............•••..............••••.............•••................••••...•.........•.•...••.............. 9
SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS ................................................................................................ 9
I 06.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9
I 06.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................ 9
106.3 Design Drawings ........................................................................................................................................................... 9
SECTION 107 •.............••••.............•.••••............•.••..............••••............•.••................•.............•.••.................••.............•••....•.••...... 10
STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS ....................................................... 10
I 07.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
107.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
107.3 Structural Inspector ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
I 07.4 Inspection Program ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
107.5 Types of Work for Inspection ..................................................................................................................................... 11
107.6 Approved Fabricators .................................................................................................................................................. 13
107.7 Prefabricated Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 13
107.8 Non-Destructive Testing ............................................................................................................................................. 14
107.9 Structural Observation ................................................................................................................................................. 15
APPENDICES
I-A - Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of Structures 2015 ...................................................... IA-I
I-A- Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings ................................... IB-1

1-2 CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements
101.4 Alternative Systems
The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the

use of any n1aterial, alternate design or ,nethod of
101.l Special Foundation Systems construction not specifically prescribed by this code,
provided any alternate has been pern1itted and its use
These regulations shall be kno\vn as the National authorized by the Building Official (sec Section I 02).
Structural Code of the Philippines 2015, Volume I, 7th
Edition, and may be cited as such and \vill be referred to Sponsors of any systen1 of design or construction not
herein as "this code." \Vithin the scope of this code, the adequacy of \Vhich had
been sho\vn by successful use and by analysis and test,
101.2 Purpose shall have the right to present the data on \vhich their
design is based to the Building Official or to a board of
The purpose of this code is to provide 111inimun1 examiners appointed by the Building Official or the project
requiren1ents for the design of buildings, to\vers and other owner/developer. This board shall be composed of
vertical structures, and 1ninin1u1n standards and guidelines competent structural engineers and shall have authority to
to safeguard life or lin1b, property and public \Velfare by investigate the data so sub1nitted, to require tests if any, and
regulating and controlling the design, construction, to fonnulate rules governing design and construction of
quality of n1aterials pertaining to the structural aspects of such systems to 1neet the intent of this code. These rules,
all buildings and structures \Vithin this jurisdiction. \vhen approved and pron1ulgated by the Building Official,
shall be of the sa1ne force and effect as the provisions of
101.3 Scope this code
The provisions of this code shall apply to the construction,

alteration, moving, demolition, repair, 1naintenance and use
of buildings, to\vers and other vertical structures \Vithin this
jurisdiction.
Special structures such as but not limited to single fa,nily

d\vellings, storage silos, liquid product tanks and
hydraulic flood control structures, should be referred to
special state of practice literature but shall refer to
provisions of this code as a minimutn \Vherever
applicable.
For additions, alterations, 1naintenance, and change in use

of buildings and structures, see Section 108.
Where, in any specific case, different sections of this code

specify different 1naterials, methods of construction or
other requiren1ents, the most restrictive provisions shall
govern except in the case of single fa111ily d\vellings. Where
there is a conflict bet\veen a general requiren1ent and a
specific requiren1ent, the specific requiretnent shall be
applicable.

CHAPTER 1 - General Requirement 1-3
BUILDING OFFICIAL is the ofltcer or other designated

authority charged \Vith the administration and enforcen1ent
of this code, or the Building Official's duly authorized
representative.
For the purpose of this code, certain tenns, phrases, \vords
and their derivatives shall be construed as specified in this CIVIL ENGINEER is a professional engineer licensed to
chapter and else\vhere in this code \Vhere specific practice in the field of civil engineering.
definitions are provided. Terms, phrases and \vords used in
the singular include the plural and vice versa. Tern1s, CIVIL ENGINEERING is the science or profession in
phrases and \Vords used in the 111asculine gender include the \Vhich a kno\vledge of the n1athe1natical and physical
feminine and vice versa. sciences gained by study and practice is applied \Vith
judge1nent to utilize natural and 1nan-n1ade resources and
The follo\ving tenns are defined for use in this code: forces in the planning, design, 1nanagen1ent, construction,
and 1naintenance of buildings, structures, facilities, and
ALTER or ALTERA Tl ON is any change, addition or utilities in their totality, for the progressive \Veil-being and
modification in construction or occupancy. for the benefit of 1nankind, enhancing the environ1nent,
com1nunity living, industry, and transportation, taking into
APPROVAL shall mean that the proposed work or consideration such aspects as functionality, efficiency,
con1pleted \Vork confonns to this code in the opinion of the econo,ny, safety, and environn1ental quality.
Building Official.
COMPACTION is the densification of a fill by
APPROVED as to n1aterials and types of construction, tnechanical or che1nical 1neans.
refers to approval by the Building Official as the result of
investigation and tests conducted by the Building Official, CONSTRUCTION FAILURE is a failure that occurs
or by reason of accepted principles or tests by recognized during const1uction and they are considered to be either a
authorities, technical or scientific organizations. collapse or distress, of a structural systetn to such a degree
that it cannot safely serve its intended purpose. 1
AS GRADED is the extent of surface conditions on
con1pletion of grading. CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
structural inspection \vhere the structural inspector is on the
AUTHORITY HA YING JURISDICTION is the site at all times observing the \Vork requiring stn1ctural
organization, political subdivision, office or individual inspection.
charged \vith the responsibility of adn1inistering and
enforcing the provisions of this code. EARTH MATERIAL is any rock, natural soil or fill or
any co1nbination thereof.
BEDROCK is in-place solid or altered rock.
ENGINEER-OF-RECORD is a civil engineer responsible
BENCH is a relatively level step excavated into earth for the structural design.
material on which fill is to be placed.
EROSION is the \Vearing a\vay of the ground surface as a
BORROW is earth 1naterial acquired fron1 an off-site result of the 1noven1ent of\vind or \vater.
location for use in grading on a site.
EXCAVATION is the mechanical removal of earth
BUILDING is any structure usually enclosed by walls 1naterial.
and a roof, constructed to provide support or shelter for an
intended use or occupancy. EXISTING GRADE is the grade prior to grading.
BUILDING, EXISTING is a building erected prior to the FAILURE is defined as an unacceptable difference
adoption of this code, or one for \Vhich a legal bet\veen expected and observed performance. This
building pennit has been issued. definition includes catastrophic structural collapse, but also
includes performance problems that are not necessarily
catastrophic or life-threatening, including "serviceability
proble1ns such as distress, excessive defonnation,
premature deterioration of 1naterials, leaking roofs and
facades, and inadequate interior environtnental control
systems." In the event of a significant failure, the parties
typically retain experts to detennine the cause of the
perceived failure. Occasionally a failure results fron1 a
single condition, but typically, failures result fro1n a LIMITED LOCAL COLLAPSE is a failure of a
con1bination of n1istakes. oversights, miscomtnunications, structural me1nber \Vithout affecting the adjacent n1en1bers
n1isunderstandings, ignorance, lapses, slips, inco1npctence, (e.g. destruction of one or t\vo columns in a multi-bay
intentional violations or non-con1pliance, and inadequate structure) ../
quality assurance. The causes for these conditions vary, but
1nay include sin1ple mistakes (such as sending infonnation OCCUPANCY is the purpose for which a building or
to a structural engineer ,vhen it should have been sent to the other structures or part thereof, is used or intended to be
architect), concl~sions based on faulty assu1nptions, an used.
e1nployee's "laziness, ignorance, or 1nalevolent urge,"
fatigue fro1n excessive ,vorkload, inadequate training, "tin1e PERIODIC STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
boxing" practices used to 1ninin1ize fees to a client, structural inspection \Vhere the inspections are 1nade on a
overreliance on computer-aided design and drafting periodic basis and satisfy the requiren1ents of continuous
(CADD). failure to understand and deliver client inspection, provided this periodic scheduled inspection is
require1ncnts. ti1ne pressures to a deliver a project by perfonned as outlined in the inspection progran1 prepared
certain deadlines, and ineffective coordination and by the structural engineer.
2
integration of the design teatn.
PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLY is a structural unit, the
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial integral parts of \vhich have been built up or assembled
1neans. prior to incorporation in the building.
FINISH GRADE is the final grade of the site that PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION is the inspection
conforms to the approved plan. required by this code to be perfonned by the civil engineer.
Such inspections include that perfonned by persons
FORENSIC ENGINEERING is the application of the art supervised by such engineer and shall be sufficient to forn1
and science of engineering in the jurisprudence systen1, an opinion relating to the conduct of the \Vork.
requiring the services of legally qualified engineers.
Forensic engineering may include investigation of the PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE is the spread of an initial
physical causes of accidents and other sources of clain1s local failure from ele1nent to elen1ent, eventually resulting
and litigation, preparation of engineering reports, testitnony in the collapse of an entire structure or disproportionately
at hearings and trials in ad1ninistrative or judicial large part of it../
proceedings, and the rendition of advisory opinions to
3
assist the resolution of disputes affecting life or property. ROBUSTNESS is the insensibility of a structure to local
failure. Frain this definition, it follo\vs that the robustness
GENERAL COLLAPSE is the immediate, deliberate is a property of the structure. 4
demolition of an entire structure by a triggering event (e.g.
explosion) .., ROUGH GRADE is the stage at which the grade
approxin1ately conforms to the approved plan.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER is a registered Civil
Engineer \Vith special qualification in the practice of SITE is any lot or parcel of land or contiguous co1nbination
Geotechnical Engineering as recognized by the Board of thereof, under the san1e o\vnership, \Vhere grading is
Civil Engineering of the Professional Regulation perfonned or pennitted.
Co1nmission as endorsed by the Specialty Division of
Geotechnical Engineering of the Philippine Institute of SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of
Civil Engineers (PICE). \Vhich is expressed as a ratio of vertical distance to
horizontal distance.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING is the application of
the principles of soil and rock 1nechanics in the SOIL is naturally occurring superficial deposits overlying
investigation, evaluation and design of civil \Yorks bedrock.
involving the use of ea1th n1aterials and foundations and the
inspection or testing of the construction thereof. SOILS ENGINEER See Geotechnical Engineer.
GRADE is the vertical location of the ground surface. SOILS ENGINEERING See Geotechnical Engineering.
GRADING is an excavation or fill or co1nbination thereof. STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an
edifice or building of any kind, or any piece of \York
KEY is a designed compacted fill placed in a trench artificially built up or co1nposed of pa1ts joined together in
excavated in ea1th 1naterial beneath the toe of a slope. son1e definite 1nanner.

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER is a registered Civil

Engineer \Vith special qualification in the practice of
Structural Engineering as recognized by the Board of Civil
Engineering of the Professional Regulation Co1111nission or
by the Specialty Division of the Philippine Institute of Civil
Engineers (PICE) together ,vith the Association of
Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) and
Institution of Specialist Structural Engineers of the
Philippines (lSSEP).
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING is a discipline of civil

engineering dealing ,vith the analysis and design of
structures that support or resist loads insuring the safety of
the structures qgainst natural forces.
STRUCTURAL FAILURE is the reduction of capability

of a st1uctural syste1n or con1ponent to such a degree that it
5
cannot safely serve its intended purpose.
Structural failures can be divided into various categories

based on consequential damages to include: Catastrophic
Failure \Vith Loss of Life, Catastrophic Failure in \Vhich No
Human Lives are Endangered, Failure Resulting 1n
Extensive Property Damage, and Failure Resulting in
5
Reduced Serviceability.
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is the visual observation

by a structural inspector of a particular type of construction
\VOrk or operation for the purpose of ensuring its general
co1npliance to the approved plans and specifications and
the applicable \vorkmanship provisions of this code as \Veil
as overall construction safety at various stages of
construction.
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION is the visual

observation of the structural system by the stn1ctural
observer as provided for in Section 107.9.2, for its general
conforn1ance to the approved plans and specifications, at
significant construction stages and at completion of the
structural system. Structural observation does not include
or \Vaive the responsibility for the structural inspections
required by Section I 07. I or other sections of this code.
TERRACE is a relatively level step constructed in the

face of a graded slope surface for drainage and 1naintenance
purposes.
I
Guide lo Investigation ofStruc/ural Failures, ASCE, 1986.
2
The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Technical Council on
Forensic Engineering.
3
Forensic Engineering,, 2"'1 Edi/ion, Keneth L. CaqJer, Edi/or, 2001.
4
Robustness of Buildings in Structural Codes, Dimitri.\" Diamantidis,
2009
5
Structural Failures in 1981.

Table I 03-1 Occupancy Category
OCCUPANCY OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTION OF

CATEGORY STRUCTURE
Occupancies having surgery and emergency

treatment areas,
103.1 Nature of Occupancy
Fire and police stations,
Buildings and other structures shall be classified, based on Garages and shelters f'or emergency vehicles and
the nature of occupancy, according to Table 103-1 for emergency aircrafi,
purposes of applying \Vind and earthquake loads in Chapter
Structures and shelters in emergency preparedness
2. Each building or other structures shall be assigned to the centers,
highest applicable occupancy category or categories.
Aviation control towers,
Assignment of the sa1ne structure to n1ultiple occupancy
categories based on use and the type of loading condition Structures and equipment in communication
centers and other facilities required for emergency
being evaluated (e.g. \Vind or seistnic) shall be pennissible. I Essential response.
Facilities
\Vhen buildings or other structures have multiple uses Facilities for standby power-generating equipment
for Category I structures,
(occupancies), the relationship bet,veen the uses of various
parts of the building or other structure and the Tanks or other structures contuining housing or
independence of the structural syste,n for those various supporting water or other fire-suppression material
or equipment required for the protection of
parts shal1 be exan1ined. The classification for each Category I, II or Ill, IV and V structres
independent structural system of a multiple-use building or
Public school buildings.
other structure shall be that of the highest usage group in
any part of the building or other structure that is dependent Hospitals,
on that basic structural systen1. Designated evacuation centers and
Power and communication transmission lines.
Occupancies and structures housing or supporting

toxic or explosive chemicals or substances,
II Hazardous
Facilities Non-building structures storing, supporting or
containing quantitieS of toxic oc explosive
substances.

Table 103-1 (cont'd)Occupancy Category
OCCUPANCY OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTION OF

CATEGORY STRUCTURE
Buildings with an assembly room with an 104.1 Strength Requirement

occupant capacity of 1,000 or more,
Educational buildings such as museums. Buildings, to\vers and other vertical structures and all
libraries, auditorium with a capacity of 300 or portions thereof shall be designed and constructed to
more occupants, sustain, \vithin the lin1itations specified in this code, all
Buildings used for college or adult education loads set forth in Chapter 2 and else\vhere in this code,
with a capacity of500 or more occupants, con1bined in accordance with Section 203.
Institutional buildings with 50 or more
tII Special incnpacitatcd patients, but not included in Design shall be in accordance \vith Strength Design, Load
Occupancy Category I, and Resistance Factor Design and Allo\vab!e Strength
Structures iv1cnta! hospitals, sanitariums, jails, prisons Design methods, as pem1itted by the applicable material
and other buildings where personal liberties of chapters.
inmates arc sitnilarly restrained,
Churches, Mosques, and other Religion 104.2 Serviceability Requirement

Facilities,
All structures with an occupancy of 5,000 or 104.2.1 General
more persons,
Structures and equipment in pov,·cr-gcncrating Structural systetns and 111e1nbers thereof shall be designed
stations, and other public utility facilities no\ to have adequate stiffness to Ii1nit deflections, lateral drifts,
included in Category I or Category II, and vibration, or any other defom1ations that adversely affect
required for continued operation.
the intended use and perfonnance of buildings, to\vers and
other vertical structures. The design shall also consider
IY Standard All structures housing occupancies or
Occupancy havingfunctionsnotlistcdinCategory I, II
durability, resistance to exposure to \\leather or aggressive
Structures orIIIandCategoryY. environ1nent, crack control, and other conditions that affect
the intended use and performance of buildings, to\vers and
y i\"Iisccllancous Privatcgarages,carports,shedsandfences other vertical structures.
Structures over I .5111high.
104.3 Analysis
Any systen1 or n1ethod of construction to be used shall be

based on a rational analysis in accordance with \Veil-
established principles of tnechanics that take into account
equilibrium, general stability, geon1etric con1patibility and
both short-tenn and long-term 1naterial properties.
Men1bers that tend to accutnulate residual deforn1ations
under repeated service loads shall have included in their
analysis the added eccentricities expected to occur during
their service ii fe. Such analysis shall result in a system
that provides a con1plete load path capable of transferring
all loads and forces from their point of origin to the
load- resisting elen1ents. The analysis shall include, but not
be limited to, the provisions of Sections 104.3.1
throughl04.3.3.
104.3.1 Stability against Overturning
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning

effects caused by the lateral forces specified with adequate
Factor of Safety (FOS). See Section 206.6 for retaining
walls, Section 207 for wind loading and Section 208 for
earthquake loading.

104.3.2 Self-Straining Forces The following may also be verified, that there are no 1najor
errors in pertinent calculations, dra\vings and specifications
Provisions shall be 1nade for anticipated self-straining and may also ensure that the stntcture as revie\ved, 111eet
forces arising fro111 differential settle1nent of foundations 1ninin1u1n standards for safety, adequacy and acceptable
and fron1 restrained dimensional changes due to standard design practice.
temperature, 1noisture, shrinkage, heave, creep and sitnilar
effects. The engineer-of-record shall submit the plans and
specifications, a signed and sealed statement by the
104.3.3 Anchorage structural engineer doing the revie\V that the above revie\v
has been perfonned and that n1ini1nun1 standards have been
Anchorage of the roof to \Valls and colutnns, and of \Valls ,net.
and columns to foundations shall be provided and
adequately detailed to resist the uplift and sliding forces See Section 208.5.3.6.3.2 for design revie\v require1nents
that result from the application of the prescribed forces. \Vhen nonlinear time-history analysis is used for earthquake
design.
Concrete and masonry \Valls shall be anchored to all floors,
roofs and other structural ele1nents that provide lateral In keeping \vith the ethical standards of the profession, the
support for the \Vall. Such anchorage shall provide a revie\ver or revie\vers shall not supplant the engineer-of-
positive direct connection capable of resisting the record as engineer-of-record for the project. The design
horizontal forces specified in Chapter 2 but not less than revie\v shall not in any \Vay transfer or di1ninish the
the minilnun1 forces in Section 206.4. responsibility of the engineer-of-record.
104.4 Foundation Investigation
Soil explorations shall be required for buildings. to\vers and

other vertical structures falling under Categories I, 11,III
and IV in accordance with Table I 03-1 or as required by
the Building Official or if the site specific conditions
n1ake the foundation investigation necessary.
Detailed requiren1ents for foundation investigations shall be

in accordance \Vith Chapter 3 of this code.
104.5 Design Revie,v
The design calculations, dra\vings, specifications and

other design-related documents for buildings, to\vers and
other vertical structures \Vith irregular configuration in
Occupancy Categories I, II or III \Vithin Seis111ic Zone 4,
structures under Alternative Syste1ns in Section 101.4, and
Undefined Strncturnl Systems not listed in Table
208-11, shall be subject to a review by an independent
recognized structural engineer or engineers to be ernployed
by the o\vner in accordance with the ASEP Design Peer
Revie\v Guidelines. The structural engineer or structural
engineers performing the revie\v shall have co1nparable
qualifications and experience as the structural engineer
responsible for the design. The revie\ver or reviewers shall
obtain a professional \Vaiver fron1 the engineer-of-record
\Vho shall be expected to grant such \Vaiver in keeping \vith
ethical standards of the profession as adopted in ASEP
guidelines for peer review (Appendix 1-A).
The design review shall, as a minimum, verify the general

con1pliance \Vith this code which shall include, but not be
limited to, the revie\v of the design load criteria, the
design concept, mathen1atical model and techniques.

105.1 Posting of Live Loads

106.1 General
The live loads for \Vhich each floor or portion thereof of a
coininercial or industrial building has been designed shall
Copies of design calculations, reports, plans,
have such design live loads conspicuously posted by the
specifications and inspection program for all
o,vner in that part of each story in ,vhich they apply, using
durable metal signs. It shall not be allo,ved to remove or constructions shall bear the signature and seal of the
engineer-of-record.
deface such notices. The occupant of the building shall be
responsible for keeping the actual load belo,v the allo,vable
lin1its. I 06.2 Specifications
105.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumentation The specifications shall contain infonnation covering the
material and construction requirements. The n1aterials and
construction require1nents shall confonn to the
105.2.1 General
specifications referred to in Chapters I to 7 of this code.
Unless waived by the Building Official, every building in
Seismic Zone 4 over 50 m in height shall be provided with 106.3 Design Drawings
not less than three approved Earthquake Recording
Instrnments (ER!). The ER! shall be interconnected for 106.3.1 General
cornn1on start and co1nmon ti1ning. Please refer to "ASEP
Guidelines and Implen1enting Rules on Earthquake The design drawings shall be drawn to scale on durable
Recording Instrnmentation for Buildings (Appendix 1-B). paper or cloth using permanent ink and shall be of
sufficient clarity to indicate the location, nature and extent
105.2.2 Location of the work proposed.The drawings shall show a complete
design \Vith sizes, sections, relative locations and
The instruments shall be located in the basement, connection details of the various 1ne1nbers. Floor levels,
midportion, and near the top of the building. Each colu1nn centers and offsets shall be dimensioned. Where
instru1nent shall be located so that access is n1aintained at available and feasible, archive copies shall be maintained in
all titnes and is unobstructed by roo1n contents. A sign durable medium such as compact disc (CD) and digital
stating "MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS versatile disc (DVD).
INSTRUMENT" shall be posted in a conspicuous
location. 106.3.2 Required Information
I 05.2.3 Maintenance The design drawings shall contain, but shall not be limited
to the general information listed in Section I 06.3.2.1 and
Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be 1naterial specific inforn1ation listed in Sections 106.3.2.2
provided by the owner of the building, subject to the and 106.3.2.3, as applicable.
monitoring of the Building Official. Data produced by the
instruments shall be made available to the Building Official 106.3.2.1 General Information
or any authorized agency upon request.
I. Name and date of issue of building code and
105.2.4 Instrumentation of Selected Buildings supple1nents, if any, to \vhich the design confonns.
All O\vners of existing structures selected by the 2. Strengths or designations of materials to be used.
authorities having jurisdiction shall provide accessible
space for the installation of appropriate earthquake- 3. Design strengths of underlying soil or rock. The soil
recording instruments, detern1ined by a Structural Engineer. or rock profile, when available, shall be provided.
4. Live loads and other loads used in design and clearly

indicated in the floor plans.

1-10 CHAPTER 1 -General Requirements
5. Seistnic design basis including the total base shear

coefficient; a description of the lateral load resisting
system; and the fundamental natural period in the
design in each direction under consideration.
6. Provisions for ditnensionalchanges resulting fro1n

creep, shrinkage, heave and ten1perature.
107.1 General
7. Ca1nber of trusses, bea1ns and girders, if required.
All construction or ,vork for which a permit is required
8. Explanation or definition of symbols and
shall be subject to inspection throughout the various ,vork
stages. One or more structural inspectors ,vho are registered
abbreviations used in the drawings.
civil engineers with experience in structural construction,
\Vho shall undertake co1npetent inspection during
9. Engineer-of-Record's professional license number
construction on the types of \vork listed under Section
and expiration date of the current Professional
107.5, shall be employed by the owner or the engineer-of-
Regulation Com1nission registration (PRC).
record acting as the o\vner1s agent.
106.3.2.2 Structural Concrete
Exception:
I. Specified compressive strength Ct;) of concrete at The Building Qfficia/ tnay ivaive the requiren1ent .for the
stated ages or stages of construction for \Vhich eachpart en1ploy1nent of a structural inspector ff the construction is
of structure designed. The 28-day compressive strength of a 1ninor nature.
ct:)shall be the basis of design in service condition.
In addition to structural inspections, structural observations
2. Anchorage embedment lengths or cut-off points of shall be performed when required by Section 107.9.
steel reinforcement and location and length of lap
splices. 107 .2 Definitions
3. Type and location of ,velded splices and 1nechanical See Section 102 for definitions.
connections ofreinforce1nent.
107.3 Structural Inspector
4. Magnitude and location of prestressing forces
including pres tressed cable layout 107.3.1 Qualifications
5. Minin1um concrete con1pressive strength (fci,)at time The structural inspector shall be a registered civil engineer
of post-tensioning. who shall demonstrate competence for inspection of the
particular type of construction or operation requiring
6. Stressing sequence _for post-tensioned tendons. structural inspection.
7. Details and location of all contraction or isolation 107.3.2 Duties and Responsibilities
joints specified for plain concrete in Chapter 4.
The structural inspector shall observe the work assigned for
8. State1nent if concrete slab is designed as a structural conformance to the approved design dra\vings and
diaphragm, as specified in Sections 421.9.4 and specifications. Any discrepancy observed shall be brought
421.9.5. to the im1nediate attention of the constructor for correction,
then, if uncorrected, to the owner, engineer-of-record
and/or to the Building Official.
The structural inspector shall verify that the as-built

drawings (see Section I 06.5) pertammg to the work
assigned reflect the condition as constructed.

The structural inspector shall also submit a final repo1t duly 107.5.3 Special Moment-Resisting Concrete Frame
signed and sealed stating \Vhether the \vork requiring
structural inspection \Vas, to the best of the inspector1s For special n101nent-resisting concrete fratne design seismic
kno\vledge, in conformance to the approved plans and load in structures within Seismic Zone 4, the structural
specifications and the applicable \vorkn1anship provisions inspector shall provide reports to the engineer-of-record
of this code. and shall provide continuous inspection of the placetnent of
the reinforcement and concrete.
107.4 Inspection Program
107.5.4 Reinforcing Steel and Prestressing Steel
The structural inspector shall prepare an appropriate testing Tendons
and inspection program that shall be submitted to the
o\vner, engineer-of-record and/or to the Building Official. 107.5.4.1 During all stressing and grouting of tendons in
He shall designate the portions of the \vork that requires prestressed concrete.
structural inspections.
I 07.5.4.2 During placing of reinforcing steel and
When structural observation is required by Section 107.9, prestressing tendons for all concrete required to
the inspection program shall describe the stages of have structural inspection by Section 107.5.1.
const1uction at \Vhich structural observation is to occur.
Exception:
The inspection progra1n shall include satnples of inspection
reports and provide time limits for submission of reports. The structural inspector neelf not be present continuousf.,v
cluring placing of reit!forcing steel ancl prestressing
107.5 Types of Work for Inspection tendons. provided the structural inspector has inspecteclfor
conforn1ance to the approvecf plans prior to the closing qf
Except as provided in Section I 07. I, the types of work for1ns or the delivelJ' of concrete to the jobsite.
listed below shall be inspected by a structural inspector.
107.5.5 Structural Welding
107.5.1 Concrete
107.5.5.1 General
During the taking of test specimens and placing of
concrete. See Section 107.5.12 for shotcrete. During the \Velding of any member or connection that is
designed to resist loads and forces required by this code.
Exceptions:
Exceptions:
I. Concrete for fou,ufations of residential builclings
acconunodating JO or /elver persons, or buildings 1. 1-Velding done in an approved fabricator's shop in
falling under Catego,y V of Table 103-1, provided the accorclance with Section 107.6.
Building Official finds that a structural hazard does 2. The structural inspector need not be continuous~y
not exist. present during welding of the following items.
2. For foundation concrete, other than cast-in-place provi,led the tnaterials, qualifications of H-'elding
drillecl plies ur caissons, lVhere the structural design is procedures and lvelders are verified prior to the start
based on anf~not greater than 17 lv!Pa. of lVOrk; periotfic inspections are ,nade o,f work in
progress; ancl a visual ins11ectio11 of all 1velds is_-111ade
3. Non-structural slabs on grade, including prestressecl prior to co,npletion or prior to shiJJ!nent of -shop
slabs on grade ivhen effective prestress in concrete is lvelding:
less than IO MPa.
a)Single-pass fillet lVeldc-i not e.v:ceeding 8 nun in siZe.·
4. Site work concrete .fully supported on earth and
concrete lVhere no special hazard exists. b) Floor and roqf deck welding.
c) Welded studs when used fi1r structural diaphragm
107.5.2 Bolts Installed in Concrete or co1nposite systen1s.
Prior to and during the placement of concrete around bolts d) Welded sheet steel for cold,formed steel .fiwning
\Vhen stress increases permitted by Section 426 are utilized. ,netnbers such as stucls andjoists,
e) Welding ofstairs and railing syste1ns.

107.5.5.2 Special Moment-Resisting Steel Frames 107.5.7.2 For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry
during preparation and taking of any required pris1ns or test
During the non-destructive testing (NDT) of welds specimens, at the start of laying units, after the placen1ent
specified in Section 107.8 of this code, the use of certified of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to each grouting
welders shall be required for welding structural steel operation, and during all grouting operations.
connections for this type of fran1e. Critical joint
connections shall be subjected to non-destructive testing Exception:
using certified NDT technicians.
Structural inspection as required in Sections 107.5. 7.1 and
107.5.7.2 need not be provided lrhen design stresses have
107.5.5.3 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
been adjusted as spec{fied in Chapter 7 to pern1it
noncontinitous inspection.
During the non-destructive testing of \Velds.
107.5.8 Reinforced Gypsum Concrete
107.5.6 High-Strength Bolts
When cast-in-place Class B gypsum concrete is being
The inspection of high-strength A325 and A490 bolts shall
mixed and placed.
be in accordance \vith approved internationally recognized
standards and the requiren1ents of this section. While the
107.5.9 Insulating Concrete Fill
\York is in progress, the structural inspector shall detennine
that the require1nents for bolts, nuts, \Vashers and paint;
During the application of insulating concrete fill when used
bolted parts; and installation and tightening in such
as part of a structural system.
standards are met. Such inspections n1ay be perforn1ed on
a periodic basis as defined in Section 107.
E'\ception:
The structural inspector shall observe the calibration The st,11ctz1ral inspections tnqv be li1nited to an initial
procedures when such procedures are required by the plans inspection to check the deck szuface and place,nent o..f
or specifications. 1-Ie shall 1nonitor the installation of bolts reinforcing steel. The structural i11s;1ector shall ,nonitor the
to determine that all layers of connected materials have preparation o.f co,npression test specilnens during this
been dra,vn together and that the selected procedure is initial inspection
properly used to tighten all bolts.
107.5.10 Spray-Applied Fire-Resistive Materials
107.5.7 Structural Masonry
During the application of spray-applied fire-resistive
107.5.7.1 For masonry, other than fully grouted open-end
materials.
hollo,v-unit masonry, during preparation and taking of any
required pris1ns or test speci1nens, placing of all masonry
units, placement of reinforce1nent, inspection of grout 107.5.11 Piling, Drilled Piers and Caissons
space, i1111nediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during
all grouting operations. During driving and load testing of piles and construction of
cast-in-place drilled piles or caissons. See Sections 107.5.1
and 107 .5.4 for concrete and reinforcing steel inspection.
Exception:
For holloiv-unit ,nasoru:v where the{ m is no 1nore than 10
A1Pa "for concrete units or 18 lv!Pa .for clay units, structural
inspection may be pe,formed as required Jbr fi1lly grouted
open-end holloiv-unit 1nasonry spec{fied in Section
!07.5.7.2.

107.5.12 Shotcrete 2. Verification of the fabricator's quality control

capabilities, plant and personnel as outlined in the
During the taking of test specimens and placing of all fabrication procedural manual shall be by an approved
shotcrete. inspection or quality control agency.
{!f:f:ception: 3. Periodic plant inspections shall be conducted by an

approved inspection or quality control agency to
;$1-t,i},iCrete 1vork .fzdfv supported on earth, 1ninor repairs and
monitor the effectiveness of the quality control
Jrhen, in the opinion of the Building Official, no special
program.
hazard exists.
107.7 Prefabricated Construction
107.5.13 Special Grading, Excavation and Filling
107.7.1 General
During earth\vork excavations, grading and filling
operations inspection to satisfy requirernents of Chapter 3
and Section 109.5. 107.7.1.1 Purpose
107.5.14 Special Cases The purpose of this section is to regulate 1naterials and
establish methods of safe construction \Vhere any structure
\York that, in the opinion of the st1uctural engineer, or portion thereof is wholly or partially prefabricated.
involves unusual hazards or conditions.
107.7.1.2 Scope
107.5.15 Non-Destructive Testing
Unless otherwise specifically stated in this section, all
In-situ non-destructive testing program, in addition to the prefabricated construction and all n1aterials used therein
requiren1ents of Section I 07 .8 that in the opinion of the shall conform to all the requirements of this code.
structural engineer may supplement or replace conventional
tests on concrete or other materials and asse1nblies. 107.7.1.3 Definition
107.6 Approved Fabricators See Section 102 for Definitions.
Structural inspections required by this section and 107.7.2 Tests of Materials

else\vhere in this code are not required \Vhere the work is
done on the premises of a fabricator approved by the Every approval of a n1aterial not specifically mentioned in
structural engineer to perfonn such work ,vithout structural this code shall incorporate as a proviso the kind and
inspection. The approved fabricator shall submit a nun1ber of tests to be n1ade during prefabrication.
certificate of compliance that the work \Vas performed in
accordance with the approved plans and specifications to 107.7.3 Tests of Assemblies
the Building Official and to the engineer or architect-of-
record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be The Building Official may require special tests to be made
contingent on con1pliance with the following: on asse1nblies to detern1ine their structural adequacy,
durability and weather resistance.
I. The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed
fabrication procedural manual reflecting key quality 107.7.4 Connections
control procedures that will provide a basis for
inspection control of \Vorkn1anship and the fabricator Every device used to connect prefabricated assemblies shall
plant. be designed as required by this code and shall be capable of
developing the strength of the largest member connected,
except in the case of me111bers forming part of a structural
frame designed as specified in Chapter 2. Connections
shall be capable of withstanding uplift forces as specified in
Chapter 2.
107.7.5 Pipes and Conduits
In structural design, due allowance shall be made for any

n1aterial to be removed or displaced for the installation of
pipes, conduits or other equip1nent.

107.7.6 Certificate and Inspection 107.8.2 Testing Program
107.7.6.1 Materials As a minin1um, the testing progra1n shall include the

following:
Materials and the assembly thereof shall be inspected to
deten11ine compliance ,vith this code. Every material shall 107.8.2.1 All complete penetration groove welds
be graded, marked or labeled where required else,vhere in contained in joints and splices shall be tested
this code. 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by
radiography.
107.7.6.2 Certificate
Exceptions:
A certificate of acceptance shall be furnished ,vith every
1. Tt11en approved, the non-destructfve testing rate for an
prefabricated assembly, except ,vhere the assen1bly is
individual welder or 1.velding operator ,nay be reduced
readily accessible to inspection at the site. The certificate
to 25 percent, provided the rt;iect rate is dernonstrated
of acceptance shall certify that the assen1bly in question has
to be 5 percent or less o.f the 1velds tested .for the
been inspected and tneets all the require1nents of this code.
ivelder or li!elding operator. A sa111pling qf at least 40
co1npleted H'elds .for a job shall be 1nade .for such
107.7.6.3 Certifying Agency reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as the
nzanber o.f ivelds containing rejectable clej'ects divided
To be acceptable under this code, every certificate of by the nun1ber o..f ivelds co,npleted, For evaluating the
approval shall be made by a nationally or internationally reject rate qf continuous ,velds over 900 nun in length
recognized certifying body or agency. 111here the e.[fective throat thickness is 25 111111 or less,
each 3()0 nun incren1ent or .fraction thereo.f shall be
107.7.6.4 Field Erection considered as one 1veld. For evaluating the reject rate
on continuous ivelds over 900 nun in length 1vhere the
Placement of prefabricated asse1nblies at the building site effective throat thickness is greater than 25 nun, each
shall be inspected to determine co1npliance \Vith this code. 150 mm of length or fi"action thereof shall he
considered one 1veld.
107.7.6.5 Continuous Inspection
2. For con1plete penetration groove lVelds on 111aterials
If continuous inspection is required for certain n1aterials less than 8 nun thick, non-destructive testing b· not
\vhere construction takes place on the site, it shall also be required; .for this 1veld;ng, continuous inspection is
required where the san1e materials are used in prefabricated required
constniction.
3. TY11en approved by the Building Q[ficial and outlined
in the project JJlans and :,pec{fications. this non-
Exception:
destructive ultrasonic testing ,nay be JU!(fonned in the
Continuous inspection ivill not be required during shop qj' an approved,fabricator utilizing qualffied test
pr(fabrication if the approved agent:v cert[fies to the techniques in the en1ployn1ent c~f the J(1bricator.
construction and fi1rnishes evidence qf con1pliance.
107.8.2.2 Partial penetration groove welds when used in
107.8 Non-Destructive Testing coltnnn splices shall be tested either by ultrasonic testing or
radiography \vhen required by the plans and specifications.
107.8.1 General For partial penetration groove \velds \Vhen used in column
splices, \Vith an effective throat less than 20 1nm thick,
In Seis1nic Zone 4, \Velded, fully-restrained connections nondestructive testing is not required; for this welding,
bet\veen the pri1nary n1embers of special n1oment-resisting continuous structural inspection is required.
frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods
perfonned by certified NOT technicians for con1pliance 107.8.2.3 Base metal thicker than 40 mm, when subjected
\Vith approved standards and job specifications. This testing to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall be
shall be a part of the structural inspection requirements of ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind
Section I 07.5. A program for this testing shall be such \Velds after joint completion.
established by the person responsible for structural design
and as sho\vn on plans and specifications. Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected
on the basis of the defect rating in accordance \Vith the
(larger reflector) criteria of approved national standards.

CHAPTER 1 -General Requirement 1-15
107.8.3 Others
The structural engineer 1nay accept or require in place non-

destructive testing of concrete or other 1naterials and
asse1nblies to supplement or replace conventional tests.
107.9 Structural Observation
107.9.1 General
Structural observation shall be provided in Seismic Zone 4

\Vhen one of the follo,ving conditions exists:
1. The structure is defined in Table I 03-1 as Occupancy

Category I, II, III and IV.;
2. The structure is in Seismic Zone 4, Naas set forth in

Table 208-4 is greater than 1.0, and a lateral design is
required for the entire structure;
3. When so designated by the structural engineer, or
4. When such observation is specifically required by the

Building Official.
107.9.2 Structural Observer
The o,vner shall e1nploy the engineer-of-record or another

civil engineer to perform structural observation as defined
in Section I 07.
Observed deficiencies shall be reported in writing to the

owner's representative, structural inspector, constructor and
the Building Official. If not resolved, the structural
observer shall submit to the Building Official a written
statement duly signed and sealed, identifying any
deficiency.
107.9.3 Construction Stages for Observations
The structural observations shall be performed at the

construction stages prescribed by the inspection progra1n
prepared as required by Section I 07.4.
It shall be the duty of the engineer-in-charge of

construction, as authorized in the Building Permit, to notify
the structural observer that the described construction
stages have been reached, and to provide access to and
n1eans for observing the components of the structural
system.

NSCP C101-15
APPENDIX 1-A
RECOMMENDED GUIDELINES ON
STRUCTURAL DESIGN PEER REVIEW
OF STRUCTURES 2015

Tel. No. : (+632) 410..0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Wehsite:http://www.aseponline.org

IA-1
About this Guidelines

Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of Structures 2015
Published by Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.
Copyright© 2015
Suite 713 Future Point Plaza Condominium I,
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City,
I 100 Philippines
Telephone Nos. +63 (2) 410-0483

Facsimile +63 (2) 411-8606
E-mail Address aseponline@gmail.com
Website http://www.aseponline.org
AboutASEP
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP) is the recognized organization of Structural
Engineers of the Philippines. Established in 1961, ASEP has been in existence for more than 50 solid years.
Print tlistory
2000
2015

lA-2
FOREWORD
Challenges have arisen but ASEP has re1nained steadfast and com1nitted in furthering its aitn 11 to advance structural engineering,
uphold high ethical values, and promote national and international professional collaborations .... "
Design peer review is incorporated in the National Structural Code of the Philippines to provide the means for professional
discussion and evaluation of special structural syste1n design that is beyond the Code 1s standard provisions. This revie\v is
critical to confinn the design or resolve problems that rnight be encountered in the structural syste1n behavior and building
safety at large. The Filipino structural engineers excel not only in the local but in the international field as well. They are
recognized not as competitors but as global pmtners for the benefit of humanity.
The Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of Structures eventually will evolve further as the need arises
to i111prove the means to pro1note life safety and share the structural engineering advancement.
We are grateful to those who have shared their knowledge and time in the formulation of these Guidelines both past and present
Committee members. It required one's unselfish devotion that often calls for self-sacrifice - be it time, physical presence, or the
sharing of expertise.
Carlos M. illaraza, F.AsEr

ASEP President (2014-2015)

IA-3
PREFACE
The advocacy of the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippine (ASEP) is to uphold the high standards in structural
engineering practice in the Philippines. ASEP has achieved this by updating the Philippine structural design codes and ensure
that these are at par with international standards, as well as adapt them for use in the Philippine setting.
This Design Peer Review Manual is the latest update which shall supplement the National Structural Code of the Philippines
(NSCP). The purpose of this manual is to provide an independent review of the structural design of a structure, and to assure
that it conforms with the requirements of the latest edition of the NSCP and related technical standards to promote life safety
and sound engineering design practices.
The provisions in the Manual does not require the conduct of peer revie\v on all types of structures but rather on certain features
of structures (i.e. importance, occupancy, vulnerability to earthquake). However, the owner 1nay use this Manual as reference
if peer revie\V of their structure is preferred. The use of this Manual is intended to pro1note exchange of design principles and
innovative ideas, and to practice good professional ethics an1ong the 0\vner, Engineer-of-Record, and Peer Reviewer.
This Manual shall only be used as intended and as stipulated in its objectives.
This Manual is a product of the dedication, knowledge, and efforts of the ASEP Committee on Design Peer Review.
Fr erick Fran s M. Sison

A P President (2015-2016)
Acknowledgements
Sincere thanks to past presidents Adam C. Abinales, Anthony Vladimir C. Pimentel, Christopher P. T. Tamayo, Miriam Lusica-
Tamayo, Ronaldo S. Ison, Carlos M. Yillaraza, past director Rico P. Gomez, and to the rest of ASEP members who provided
their inputs and guidance in the completion of this guide. The names and affiliations of all who assisted are included in the
Participants List at the end of this guide.
ASEP Design Peer Review Committee 2009-2015
Cover image by: EDS

IA-4
FY 2015-2016 FY 2014-2015
OFFICERS: OFFICERS:
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON CARLOS M. VILLARAZA

President President
DANILO A. DOMINGO FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON

Vice-President Vice-President
GILBERT B. MAG BUTAY GILBERT B. MA GB UTAY

Secretary Secretary
MARK ELSON C. LUCIO DANILO A. DOMINGO

Treasurer Treasurer
DIRECTORS: DIRECTORS:
ADAM C. ABINALES JUANITO C. CUNANAN

JUANITO C. CUNANAN GABRIEL URSUS L. EUSEBIO
LESSANDRO ESTELITO 0. GARCIANO MARK ELSON C. LUCIO
RONALDO S. ISON ARIEL P. SANTOS
ARIEL P. SANTOS PEDRO M. TOLENTINO
FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA FRANCIS ANTHONY G. VALDERRAMA
CARLOS M. VILLARAZA VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA

!PP & Ex-Officio !PP & Ex-Officio
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS
RONALDO S. ISON
Chancellor RONALDO S. !SON
Chancellor
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ
Scribe WILFREDO S. LOPEZ
Scribe
MIRIAM L. TAMAYO
Bursar MIRIAM L. TAMAYO
Bursar

!A-5
CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................................................................. I-A6
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................... I-A 7
BACKGROUND .................................................................................................................................................................. I-A8
OBJECTIVES OF THE DESIGN PEER REVIEW ......................................................................................................... I-A9
APPLICATION OF ASEP PEER REVIEW GUIDELINES .......................................................................................... I-A9
EXPECTED RESULTS OF DESIGN REVIEW: ........................................................................................................... I-AIO
STRUCTURES TO BE REVIEWED .............................................................................................................................. I-AlO
REVIEWER'S QUALIFICATION .................................................................................................................................. I-All
SCOPE OF REVIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ I-All
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED TO PEER REVIEWER ................................................................................. 1-Al 1
ITEMS TO BE REVIEWED ........................................................................................................................................... I-A 12
METHODOLOGY AND DETAILS OF REVIEW ........................................................................................................ 1-AlS
Design Basis Revielv......................................................................................................................................................... I-Al 5
Foundation Revieiv ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-Al 6
Pre-Tender Design Revielv ............................................................................................................................................... I-Al 6
MINIMUM REPORT REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... I-A16
Content ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-A I 6
Terms ofReview Procedure and Methodology to be Used............................................................................................... I-Al 7
Language to be Used ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-All
Mark-up and Comments .......................................................................................................... ......................................... 1-A I 7
Exa111ples of Revie~ver's Conunents/Wordi11gs .................................................................................................................. I-Al 8
REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-AIS
Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design

Peer Review of Structures 2015
IA-6
Abbreviations
A&D Analysis and Design

AC! A1nerican Concrete Institute
AISC Arnerican Institute of Steel Construction
ASCE A1nerican Societv of Civil En2:ineers
ASEP Association of Structural Engineers of the Philinnines, Inc.
BJM Building Information Model
CE Civil Engineer
CTBUH Council on Tall Buildings and Urban Habitat
DPWH Deoartment of Public Works and Highways
EOR Engineer-of-Record
IA! International Alliance for Interoperability
!BC International Building Code
IFC Industry Foundation Classes
NSCP National Structural Code of the Philinnines
PAGASA Philinnine Atmosoheric, Geophysical & Astronomical Services Administration
PHlVOLCS Philinnine Institute ofVolcanolorrv and Seismoloev
PR Peer Revie\ver
PRC Professional Re_gulations Commission
SE Structural Ene:ineer
SEC Security and Exchange Commissions
UBC Unifonn Building Code

IA-7
Introduction
Design review is incorporated in 1nost building codes to provide the 1neans for professional discussion and evaluation of
structural design of projects. Thus, these reviews are the eye openers for the resolution of problems encountered before a critical
phase of the construction project. Design review truly enhances the ideas for public safety overall and quality assurance.
Furthern1ore, it disse1ninates innovation through sharing of information.
Eaiihquake for instance is a phenon1enon that 1nan has been trying to study for centuries but up to present ti1ne is still
unpredictable. We, as structural engineers, are faced with the greatest challenge of formulating procedures on how to lessen if
not eli1ninate destruction and casualties due to this. We want to 1nake sure that the intent of our design is carefully follo\ved
and carried out in the 1nost professional 1nanner. The burden of setting up and observing rules on ho\v to achieve \vhat has been
planned rest upon our shoulders. Design review can be a valuable tool faced with this challenge.
This document establishes the guidelines for peer review. Since protecting lives and properties are the paramount goals of the
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP), the only way perhaps to realise these goals is to establish ground
rules for all our practicing civil engineers, structural engineers and consultants to follow strictly the Code provisions and
standards para1neters.
It is essential to good engineering practice to conduct independent peer review to achieve a concept of structural systen1 and
design tolerant to the crudeness in seismological predictions. The independent review of structures shall be deemed as the
1neans to pro1note life safety, achieve excellence in structural design and front of quality, i1nprove1nent/advance1nent and
disse1nination of structural engineering knowledge in the country.

IA-8
Background
To accomplish the objectives of ASEP, the Board of Directors for 1999-2000 has continued the program of the ASEP Board
of Directors for 1998-1999 by creating several committees as shown below. These objectives, as stated in its by-laws, shall be
the protection of the public welfare and the welfare of its constituents through the:
• Maintenance of highly ethical and professional standards in the practice of engineering
• Advancement of structural engineering knowledge;
• Promotion of good public and private clientele relationships, development of fellowships among CE and SE and
encourageinent of professional relations \Vith other allied technical and scientific organizations.
These objectives are focused on these three 1najor areas:
• Codes and Standards
• Fellowships and Linkages
• Technical Advance111ent
One of the committees created for the Codes and Standards is the Committee on Design Peer Review. The National Structural
Code of the Philippines (NSCP) 1992 Edition touches on independent design review under the section "A Design and
Construction Revie\v", \Vhich defines the structures required for the review considering seis1nic zones and occupancy
categories. However, the scope, procedures and docutnentation of the revie\V process are not 111entioned. Thus, this paper \Vill
include guidelines on the iinplen1entation of the design peer revie\v.
The same committee was revived by the President of the Board of Directors for 2009-20 I 0, Adam C. Abinales, from the point
of view of engineering practitioners, to improve and expand the guidelines to incorporate additional paran1eters and ethical
rules as \Vell as enhance the practice of peer revie\v. The co1nn1ittee's activities have continued under the ad1ninistration of the
following ASEP Presidents:
• Anthony Vladimir Pimentel (2010-2011)

• Vinci Nicholas R. Villasenor (2011-2012)
• Miriam L. Tamayo (2013)
• Carlos M. Villaraza (2015)
The Committee on Design Peer Review is composed of the following:
Chairman
Ernesto F. Cruz
Co-Chairman
Gabriel Ursus L. Eusebio
Members
Alden C. Ong
Marie Christine G. Danao
Edmondo D. San Jose

IA-9
Objectives of the Design Peer Review

The current trend in the local construction industry is the development of many high-rise buildings. On account of this, it is the
objective of this peer review to improve section 104.5 ofNSCP 2010, to ensure the aim for life safety, to observe economy in
design and to protect the investment of clients.
The Peer Review aims to carry out positive results in the following areas:
• To comply structural engineering design, drawings and specification with the minimum requirements ofNSCP and other
acceptable established codes and standards;
• To maintain the quality of projects;
• To i1nprove and maintain the high standards in the practice of structural engineering;
• To pro1note exchange of information and innovative ideas bet\veen the designers and revie\vers;
• To inform the Owner-Client on the benefits of this exercise and any possible cost implications resulting from the review;
• To define implementing matrix of all structures subject to practical independent review; and
• To promote professional ethics in the conduct of independent or peer review.
Application of ASEP Peer Review Guidelines

These ASEP guidelines are intended specifically for the mandatory conduct of a Design Review as per the National Structural
Code of the Philippines (NSCP Volume l, 2010 Edition).
As stipulated in NSCP Section 104.5, Design Review is required for the following:
1. Structures with irregular configuration in Occupancy Categories I (Essential Facilities), II (Hazardous Facilities) or III
(Special Occupancy Structures) in Zone 4;
2. Structures under Alternative Systems in Section 101.4; and,
3. Undefined Structural Systems (those not listed in Table 208-11).
For structures covered by the mandatory Design Review, all related works shall be deemed as included in the Engineer-of-
Record's scope of works, unless explicitly excluded in his work agreement.
For structures not included above but which are to be subjected to a Design Review as an additional requirement by the Owner,
the coverage, extent, and procedures shall be as mutually agreed upon by the Owner/Peer Reviewer, and the Engineer-of-
Record (EOR) and may not be as recommended in these Guidelines. Additionally, since works connected or related to such
Design Review are not covered by the basic structural services of the EOR, these shall be subject to a separate scope and
compensation for the EOR.

IA-10
Expected Results of Design Review:

• As professionals, independent design reviewers and EOR shall not engage in unfair practices. Both shall
observe fairness and professionalism in the practice of independent review. This shall not by any means be a
channel to conduct criticism nor be a means to discredit the reviewer or the EOR, and disenfranchise them of
the contract service they are awarded.
• There will be good understanding of the structures and relationships between the Owner-Client and the
structural engineering community resulting to enhanced programs of future developments and projects.
• There will be good relationships between designers and reviewers by improving the design through constructive
reporting.
• The review will be conducted smoothly in the light of fairness and professionalism, without unfair practice and
criticism to neither discredit nor disenfranchise any of the reviewer or EOR.
• The review will bring assurance to the Owner-Client of compliance to codes and standards, assurance of better
engineering of the proposed structure, the improvement in design and safety as well as improvement in
construction implementation and program, elimination of unsafe design and possible work delays from
unwanted and costly repairs, among others.
Structures to be Reviewed
Structures to be reviewed shall consist of all proposed new structures and addition to structures which shall be deemed crucial
to life safety and/or health of the public and peace if such structures or buildings would incur damage or failure or both.
The structures to be reviewed shall be as follows:
I. All structures more than 75-meter high (whichever is higher) from the exterior ground level.
2. Buildings, to\.Vers and other vertical structures \Vith irregularity in configuration (vertical and horizontal irregularity) under
occupancy Category I, II, and III (as per section I 03.1 NSCP VI edition) within the seismic zone 4.
3. Structures designed under alternative system (as per section 101.4 NSCP VI Edition) that intends to use other structural
materials, design approach and construction methodology not prescribed by the latest existing structural Code (NSCP VI
Edition, 20 I 0) or by other recognized international codes and standards.
4. Buildings, towers and other structures with undefined structural system not listed in Table 208-1 l ofNSCP VI Edition.
5. Essential facilities such as hospitals fire & police stations, emergency vehicle and equipment shelters and garages,
structures and equipment in con11nunication center, aviation control towers, private and public school buildings, water
supported structures and designated evacuation center, also buildings and structures for national defense.
6. Hazardous Facilities and the like structures housing, supporting or containing sufficient quantities of toxic or explosive
substances dangerous to the safety of the general public ifreleased due to damage or excessive deformation.

IA-ll
Reviewer's Qualification
The independent PR shall be nominated by the Owner-Client. The independent PR shall not be the design EOR or engineer
appointed by Builder/Contractor. In the case of Turnkey or Design and Build projects whose design is initiated by the
Contractor or Developer, the Contractor at his O\Vn expense shall appoint an independent recognized structural engineer to
conduct the services of design peer revie\v.
The independent PR shall have the following qualifications:
I. Civil engineer registered with the Professional Regulation Commission of the Philippines with more than 20 years of
related structural engineering experience similar to the structure to be revie\ved.
2. He must be a REGULAR ASEP Member in good standing.
3. Structural Engineers with comparable qualification and experience as the EOR responsible for the design (as per latest
NSCP).
4. Kno\vledgeable in current design soft\vare, tools, and other acceptable current con1puter progra1ns.
5. Have co1npetitive kno\vledge or experience in actual structural construction.
Scope of Review
The PR must review all items agreed to be reviewed with the Owner-Client and EOR per relevant/recommended items listed
in this Guide. The PR shall refer regularly to check for completeness of the review per applicable items listed in these guidelines.
The quantity of elements to be reviewed shall be in accordance with the second paragraph of the subsection Methodology of
Revie\V belo\v.
Information to be Furnished to Peer Reviewer

The revie\v docu111ents should be checked for cornpleteness and timeliness of the design docutnents sub1nitted per relevant
items recommended in this guide. The PR should assess the review documents received and report immediately to the Owner-
Client and/or his duly appointed representative for the following:
• If any of the design documents submitted are not sufficient for him to proceed with the review such that an entire document
is tnissing, for exainple the design criteria docu1nent is not included and the dra\vings do not reflect the design
parameters/information completely; or
• The documents given and received may enable him to start and work immediately but the PR have to stop soon for some
items of \vorks as some docu1nents are given as partial only; or
• The documents given and submitted are irrelevant to the project; or
• The documents received are of poor quality such as illegible, faintly printed, blurred, torn, and or unacceptably dirty or
laced with hazardous materials.

IA-12
• The PR shall also report if the items received were not delivered in good condition that may not enable him to proceed at
all; e.g. the docu1nents are wet due to improper handling, incotnplete or inadequate protection fro111 packaging 1naterials,
an1ong others.
The following items are to be furnished by the Owner-Client as applicable:
[J Printed copies or PDF/DWFx format of complete set of architectural and structural drawings;
O General building narrative (nun1ber of stories, gross building area, estin1ated construction cost, unique features, a111ong
others);
:J Geotechnical engineering report;
iJ Wind Tunnel Test report (if any);
O Site-specific spectra and ground-1notion tin1e histories (if any);
I] Major equipment or special loadings;
[i Existing building dra\vings/data if in1pacted by or iinpacting the threshold structure;
CJ Analysis models including User's Guide of software used by EOR (e.g. STAAD, ETABS, SAP, SAFE and midasGen).
It is recommended to include also interoperable files such as .$ET, .ANL, .S2K and .F2K to facilitate conversion of
data.;
iJ 3D model/BlM 1 file or *.ifc 2 file (if any);
[J Design basis;
LJ Design criteria;
[] Structural systems design narrative (including wind and seis1nic design para1neters);
[] Structural elements design calculations; and
c-1 Structural specifications.
Items to be Reviewed
The PR may include as appropriate/applicable any or all of the following:
Table 1: Checklist of Items to be Reviewed
Item
Design
Basis/Criteria
Description of the operational language and/or algorithms, capability and source of the software used,
includin the roofof ood com arisen with results of known and acce ted method of anal sis.
I Building Information Model (BIM) is a digital representation of physical and functional characteristics of a structure. As such it serves as
a shared kno,vledge resource for information about a structure forming a reliable basis for decisions during its life cycle from inception
On\Vtlfd.
Industry Foundation Classes (.ifc)-A file fonnat developed by the IAL IFC provides an interoperability solution bet,veen IFC-co1npatible
software applications in the construction and facilities management industry. The fonnat has established, international standards to import
and export building objects and their properties.

lA-13
Item
Design
Methods, Conformance to the governing codes used in the analysis and design.
Standards and
S ecifications
Analysis Input and output data including geometry, material constants, properties, loadings, assignments and
models paran1eters used in software used.
Foundation Appropriate values of dead, live, wind and seismic loads used.
Loads
Effects of wind and notional loads on the building or structure have been checked.
Piles Pile capacities have been designed for compressive axial load by applicable skin friction and end bearing
ca acities.
Review if the type of pile reactions used in the analysis models are appropriate/applicable.
Piles were checked ifrequired/applicable for combined buckling.
ile.
Isolated Pads/
Combined Checked for punching shear and bending moments.
Footings/
Tied Footin s
Raft
The building or structure has been designed to cater for probable differential and total settlement.
Lateral Load The presence in the structural framing of any plan and/or vertical irregularities mentioned in NSCP or
Resisting overnin codes.
Framing Limitations of lateral load resisting framing systems by NSCP, or by the Owner-Client prefeITed code and
Systems as standards and or fro1n an revailin local ordinance and re ulations in the vicinit of the ro osed structure.
assun1ed in the Details of seismic-resistant concrete structure were checked.
Design Basis/
Criteria
Slender
Columns
ned for.
Colu1nns
supporting Designed for bending moment due to frame action including effects of special load combination per code.
transfer beams

IA-14
Item Snecific Desi!!n Checks to be Carried Out

Columns
supporting long Designed for bending 1no1nent due to fran,e action.
span beams
Columns
supporting Designed for bending n1on1ent due to fratne action.
cantilever
bean1s
Colun,ns in a Desi2:ned for horizontal load and n1on1ent acting on colutnns due to arched or oitched roof.
t\VO coluinn Designed for bendin.g n1oment and shear at the colu111n base including connections.
fra1ne systen1 Designed for bending n101nent due to fran1e action.
Cantilever Cantilever support has been designed to resist bending n101nent and shear including 1nini1nu1n uplift loads
bean1s fro111 wind and seis1nic loads.
Designed for lateral stabilitv of beam.
Designed to meet allowable span depth ratio; else deflection against allowable limit per code including long-
term effects.
Long span Torsional rigiditv of beam has been checked.

bea1ns Designed for lateral restraint of beains.
Designed for sunnort and me1nber connections.
Designed to meet allowable span depth ratio; else deflection against allowable limit per code including long-
term effects.
Transfer beains Designed for torsional capacity.
Designed for shear capacity.
Designed for all relevant upper floor loads on the beam including effects of special load combinations per
code.
Designed for lateral restraint of beam.
Flat slabs/plates Aooronriate model used for analvsis.
Span/depth ratio of slab has been checked.
Adequacv of too and bottom reinforcement throughout slab panel has been checked.
Desi2:ned to resist punching shear fro1n colutnns.
Ooenings in slabs, especially near columns, have been designed for.
Torsional rieiditv at slab edees has been checked.
Effects of construction loads have been checked.
Engineering Clarity and consistency with the design intent of the architect and consultants, design bases and calculations,
dra\vings site survevs and investigations.
Comolete sections and details.
Consistency with and confonnance to the specifications.
Consistency of the revisions and/or ainendments to the design basis and criteria and their co1npliance \Vith
the design intent and Client requiren1ent.
Structural Consistency of design loading with the criteria and the equipment supplier/vendors data, finishes, plus the
calculations possible construction 1nethod requirements, effects of foreseen teriiporary \vorks and activities during
construction, a1nong others.
Usage of correct \Vind/seis1nic load para1neters for analysis and design with regards to the structures lateral
load resisting framin2: svstem, seistnic zone, material tvne and structural framing olan or vertical irregularity.
Seismic load analysis if requiring P-delta effects and/or dynamic method as to height limitations and
irregularities.
Load combinations and special load combinations as required and prescribed by the code.
Structural geon1etric model for co111pleteness of the structures vertical load carrying elements and for
consistency with the basis and criteria.

IA-15
Item
Member and elen1ent checks such as 1nini1nu1n reinforcen1ents and strength requirements,
slenderness effects, joints forces checks and connection requirements.
Structural Drift limitation of the structures (service and ultimate state).

defonnation
and
displace1nent Defonnation cornpatibility on non-lateral load resisting ele1nents.
checks
Stability/factors
of safety check clients.
Earth retaining Structure has been desi acit failure.
structures
Fraine
Methodology and Details of Review

The PR should agree with the Owner-Client and the EOR on the methodology of review. The review shall cover for
co1npleteness and ti1neliness of the design documents submitted per relevant itetns listed in this Guide.
The PR should assess the review documents with regards to the agreed number of elements to be checked with the Owner-
Client and/or his representative, ifat random, selected or full revie\v of the structure and any li111ited procedure.
Review may be agreed also for each phase or entirely on the final detailed design phase of the structure for review. While a
final detailed design review is basically econo1nical. a phased revie\v fro1n the beginning may be better in order to avoid the
errors fro1n the beginning and save also valuable tin1e in re-work.
Design Basis Review
The PR should do the following:

1. Revie\v design criteria to verify co1npliance \Vith the building code;
2. Assess assumptions made by the EOR; and
3. Review the proposed frame system/sand load path for vertical load-carrying elements.

lA-16
Foundation Review
The PR should do the fol!owing:

I. Establishes foundation loads via independent analysis. Alternatively, obtain foundation loads from EOR contingent upon
subsequent verification. The PR should obtain soil design parameters from geotechnical engineering report.
2. Perform independent analysis of representative foundation elements including spread footings, pile caps, foundation walls,
grade bea1ns and piles, a1nong others. Review of foundation elements is recom1nended, depending on the relative nature
or complexity of the project.
3. Revie\v specification sections pe11aining to foundation system including earthwork, piles, concrete \Vork, a1nong others.
4. Review perfonnance criteria for contractor-designed components such as slope protection syste1ns, mini piles, tie-do\vn
anchors, a1nong others.
Pre-Tender Design Review
The PR should cmry out the following:

1. Revie\v structural framing connections which are part of the primary syste1n including shear connections, braced frame
connections, 1noment-resisting connections, a1nong others. When connections are not detailed on the design drawings,
verify adequacy of the cited connection design loads/procedures.
2. Perform general review of design to evaluate presence of any conditions which might precipitate instability or structural
overstress.
3. Review specification sections pertaining to Primary Structural Support System.
4. Revie\V perfonnance criteria for contractor-designed con1ponents such as pre-cast concrete elements, shear connections,
braced fran1e connections, 1noment-resisting connections, cold-fonned metal fra1ning cotnponents (primary framing
components, not cladding), pre-engineered metal building systems, among others.
Minimum Report Requirements

Prior to the issuance of the final peer review report, the PR is encouraged to exchange review comments with the EOR in the
presence of the O\vner and/or his representative in order to resolve as many issues as possible.
Content
The following items shall be included in the final peer review report:
I. List of the documents on which the review was based;
2. Building Codes and Standards on which the peer review was based;
3. Methodology and assumptions of the review;
4. List of software/analysis tools used with descriptive statements about software, tools and other computer programs used
in the review;
5. Items to be subsequently reviewed by others (e.g. contractor-designed items);
6. Exclusions/limitations (e.g. peer review was limited to primary structural support systems);
7. Outstanding itetns/unresolved issues; and

IA-17
8. Results, findings, conclusions and reco1nmendations of the review.
9. The final peer review report shall be addressed to the Owner-Client/representative and the EOR. Upon completion of the
review, the PR shall issue a certificate stating that the peer review has been successfully completed
Terms of Review Procedure and Methodology to be Used
The revie\v analysis and design criteria tnust 1neet the require1nent of the O\vner-Client as defined in his design brief including
any applicable item in the Tenns of Reference which form part of their agreement with the EOR.
Preferably, the PR shall use the same design criteria and standards specified by the EOR. Deviations from the said criteria and
standards must be done only with the permission of the EOR.
Software to be used in the review should preferably be the same software used by the EOR (e.g. the same editions or versions).
The difference of versions should be agreed upon but a difference of one level may be considered acceptable unless the more
recent versions employ a different analysis procedures or features that are almost entirely different to the EOR's software
procedures or features.
Language to be Used
The manner of reporting shall always be factual. Numerical values and status to be presented must be taken purely from the
final design review docu1nents sub1nitted and fro1n the results of the independent review1s analysis and assessments per
applicable codes and standards.
The ter111s and phrases to be included in reporting any issue arising fro1n the design revie\V must be \Vritten carefully and reflect
professionalism. The PR must not use offensive nor malicious words or phrases. Thus, the report must be factual and
enlightening for the EOR and PR.
The assessn1ent of each part of the report should avoid tenns like erroneous, in error and misses, among others. Reporting
should preferably be neutral, for example, statement for bars needing additional quantity may be stated "underestimated" and
bars in element with quantities that maybe reduced may be stated that "bars are overestimated by as much as 25%".
The PR shall make comments that are clear, legible and complete so that the EOR will easily understand it. Clear comments
will eliminate confusion and reduce time spent in back-check.
Mark-up and Comments
Generally, comments should be complete, clear and legible.
If possible, the PR should use words which would apply to numerous drawings so that the comments do not need to be repeated
on each dra\ving.
When the PR makes the same specific comments at many different details, the comments should be identified by either creating
a standard, nu111bered list of com111ents with the co1n1nent nu1nbers referenced at each detail, or by 1narking the con11nents on
each detail.
The PR may use 1paste-on1 co1nments \Vhere applicable to save titne and to n1aintain uniformity of com1nents.

JA-18
Examples of Reviewer's Comments/Wordings
• Use specific co1nments such as: "ShoH' co,np!ete details in accordance 1vith your calculation in pages 17 to 24."
• Do not use vague comtnents such as: "Clarify 1velding."
o Avoid personalized \Vording such as: "Your calculations for this connection is in error."
o Provide code references for co1n1nents whenever possible: "Provide additional lath support at horizontal so/fits per. .. "
o If the properties of an ele1nent were i1nproperly used in calculations and the ele1nent is overstressed, the PR should \Vrite
a co1111nent on the sheet ,vhere the overstressed elen1ent is sho,vn such as:"W18 x 36 overstressed. Recheck Section
J\1odulus used in calculation. See AJSC page .... and your calculation sheet F-19. "
• The PR can make independent calculations when portions of the design professional's calculations are difficult to follow
or interpret: "Shear 1vall is overstressed along Gridline-A, ivall shears is in eYcess to alloivable by 13 kN/111."
• If the PR does extensive independent calculations, then he or she inust nurnber the calculations in sequence and rnark the
calculation page nu111ber on the com1nent to facilitate the back-check: Co1n11osite bea,n overstressed, recheck design loads.
See page 28. "
References
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., Reconnnended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Revieiv of
Structures. ASEP Committee on Design Peer Review 1999-2000
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code of the Philippines 1992, Volume 1.
Fourth Edition
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code ofthe Philippines 2001, Volume I, Fifth
Edition
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code of the Philippines 2010, Volume I, Sixth
Edition
Arnerican Council of Engineering Con1panies of Connecticut - Structural Engineers Coalition. Reconunended Guidelines for
Pe1.for1ni11g an Independent Structural Engineering Revieiv in the State of Connecticut. Docu111ent SEC/CT301-08.
American Concrete Institute, ACJ 318 (2008). Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (AC1 318-08) and
Co111111enta1J'.
American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE 7 (2005), lvfinimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE!SEI
7-05).
A1nerican Society of Civil Engineers, Ethics: GuidelinesjOr Professional Conduct for Civil Engineers. January 2008
Autodesk, Inc., Revit Structure 2011 User's Guide.
CTBUH 8'" World Congress 2008, The Role of PR in the Foundation Design of the World's Tallest Buildings, Baker, Kiefer,
Nicoson and Fahou111.
D. Matthew Stuart, Project Specific Peer Review Guidelines -A Professor Odyssey, Structure Magazine August 2010.
International Code Council, Uniform Building Code 1997.
IPENZ Practice Note 02, Peer Revie\v - Revieiving the ivork of another Engineer.
Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center Report No. 2010/05, Guidelines for Pe1for111a11ce-Based Seismic Design of
Tall Buildings, Version 1.0, November 2010.

NSCP C101-15
APPENDIX 1-B
GUIDELINES AND IMPLEMENTING RULES ON

EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION FOR
BUILDINGS

112 Panay Avenue, Qnezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No.: (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@o:mail.com

APPENDIX 1-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings 1-81
adequate earthquake records have been

various types of buildings or relevant provisions in the
Technology on building instrumentation for seismic NSCP have been amended, the waiver stated above is
n1onitoring has itnproved tre111endously in the past decade. temporarily suspended and buildings indicated in Table I
The purpose of this Guidelines and Implementing Rules on shall be provided with earthquake recording instruments.
Earthquake Recording Instru1nentation for Buildings is to
provide infonnation on the specifications and uses of ASEP therefore deemed it necessary to improve our
earthquake recording instruments or buildings as provided understanding of the building response based on real
in Section I 05.2 of the National Structural Code of the seismic event from local earthquake generators by
Philippines 2010 Volume 1, Sixth Edition [NSCP 2010]. pro1noting earthquake recording instru1nentation for
buildings as the NSCP provision was reiterated in the 200 l
The Guidelines and Implementing Ruleson Earthquake and 2010 Editions. Due to more recent developments in
Recording Instru1nentation for Buildings provide building instrumentation technology, a number of
earthquake instru1nentation sche1nes for certain buildings instrumentations are available to obtain the building
to record building response during 111ajor seistnic events for response, and satisfy and comply with the objective of the
subsequent analysis. Adequate analysis of building NSCP Section I 05 provisions. Hence, the requirement for
response during earthquake is an i1nportant para1neter in three (3) accelerographs is further enhanced and modified
building safety evaluation in the confirmation and to consider the latest and economical building instruments,
resu1nption of operations. thus, the combination or co1nbinations of accelerographs,
accelero1neters, velocity 1neters and data loggers are
Installation of earthquake recording instruments first considered. To measure building response due to long
appeared in the National Structural Code of the Philippines period earthquakes and distant sources nonnally critical to
1992 Edition. At that period, structural engineers were tall buildings, the addition ofvelocimeters is necessary.
mostly interested in the strength design capacity of the
buildings based on seis1nic paran1eters provided in the To further address the disaster 1nanage1nent effort in the
Uniform Building Code (UBC) of the United States, a country, essential facilities such as hospitals and so1ne
referral standard of the NSCP. This provision in the 1992 government buildings, which are important facilities in
NSCP, however, was not enforced. Code developers disaster response, are reco1nmended to be instru1nented. In
started to recognize the importance of not only strength but addition, with this new provision, building response from
serviceability in buildings as well. The experiences from low-rise structures can be obtained to determine building
the 1994 Northridge Earthquake in the US and the 1995 behavior due to near source or sho1i period earthquakes.
Kobe Earthquake in Japan gave credence to these
considerations.
The NSCP 2010 states that "Unless waived by the building

official, eve,y building in Seismic Zone 4 over fifty (50)
1neters in height shall be provided 1vith not less than three
(3) approved recording accelerograph. The accelerograph
shall be interconnected .for co1n1non start and conunon
timing." Due to recent earthquakes and proliferation of
high-rise buildings, the Philippines needs to have its own
earthquake records for validating the seismic design
parameters used, in order to support earthquake disaster
mitigation I remedial efforts; thus, there is the need to
implement the requirements for the earthquake recording
instru1nentation. Until such time that considerable sets of

1-82 APPENDIX 1-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings
III. OBJECTIVES OF THESE GUIDELINES IV. DEFINITION OF TERMS
Section 102 of the National Building Code of the ACCELEROGRAPH are accelerograph records the
Philippines (PD 1096) states that "It is hereby declared to acceleration of particles on the surface of the earth as a
be the policy ofthe State to safeguard l[fe, health, property, function of time, which is called an accelerogra1n. The
and public ,velfare, consistent 11•ith the principles of sound accelerograph generally records three mutually
environ111ental n1anage111ent and control; and to this end, perpendicular con1ponents of 1notion in the vertical and
make it the pwpose ofthis Code to provide for all buildings two orthogonal horizontal directions.
and structures, a fi·a1ne1,,vork of n1inin11an standards and
require111ents to regulate and control their location, site, ACCELERATION is the rate at which the velocity of a
design, qua!izv of nzaterials, construction, use, occupancy, particle changes with time.
and 111ainte11ance."
ACCELEROMETER is an instrument used to measure
In conformance thereto and as provided in the NSCP 2010, acceleration in the vertical and two orthogonal horizontal
these Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake directions. An accelero111eter has no built-in data recording
Recording Instrumentation for Buildings is developed to capacity and is attached to a multi-channel data logger or
improve the understanding of the actual dynamic behavior an accelerograph to record 111easured acceleration.
of buildings under earthquake loading and confirm the
design according to the NSCP. The recorded data can be ACCREDITED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER (ASE) is
used to improve the structural code thereby reducing loss a civil engineer \Vith special qualifications to practice
of lives and limbs as well as properties during future structural engineering with special training in earthquake
damaging earthquakes. The response data from several engineering and certified by ASEP.
buildings in a particular area or several areas \Vill also be
ACTIONS (GROUND MOTION) is a general term
used as basis for the government's earthquake disaster
including all aspects of ground motion, namely
mitigation/re1nedial and rehabilitation strategies including
acceleration, velocity, or displacen1ent fron1 an ea1ihquake
its emergency response and relief operations progra1ns.
or other energy source.
The instru1nents 1nay also be used to set off alanns at
specified intensity levels. They may also be used to trigger
BANDWIDTH is the frequency range that the sensor
automatic switching off utilities such as gas lines, electric
operates, measured in hertz. (Hz)
power lines and elevators as may be prudent in case of high
intensity earthquake. The recorded data are important
CHANNEL is a path along which information (as data or
parameters for building safety re-evaluation and
voice) in the form of electrical signal, passes; a band of
resumption of operations including post-earthquake
frequencies of sufficient width for a single radio or
evaluation of buildings.
television co1n1nunication.
CLUSTERED BUILDINGS is a group of buildings built

close together on a sizable tract of land in order to preserve
open spaces larger than the individual yard for common
recreation.
DAMPING is the energy dissipation properties of a

material or system under cyclic stress.
DATA LOGGER is a data logger is an electronic device

that records data over ti1ne or in relation to location either
with a built in instrument or sensor or via external
instru1nents and sensors.

DISPLACEMENT is the measured distance travelled by NATURAL FREQUENCY is the number of wave cycles
a particle fro1n an initial position. per second \Vhich a systen1 tends to oscillate in the absence
of any driving or damping force.
ENVIRONMENT is the aggregate of surrounding things,
conditions, or influences that may affect the operability of PEAK GROUND ACCELERATION (PGAJ is the
an instru1nentation device such as accelerograph, 1naxi1nu1n ground acceleration at a specific location for the
velocin1eter, etc. ti1ne interval.
ERi. Earthquake Recording Instrutnentations. PERIOD is the time interval required for one full cycle of
a \Vave.
FFT. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) is a numerical
algorithm to compute the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) REFUGE AREA is an area inside a building where people
and it's inverse. Fourier analysis converts tin1e to evacuate or asse1nble during a disaster or e111ergency i.e.
frequency and vice versa; an FFT rapidly computes such fire, but not for earthquake.
transfonnations by factorizing the OFT matrix into a
product of sparse factors. RESPONSE SPECTRUM is a plot of the peak or
amplitude of steady-state response ( displacement, velocity
GALS is the unit n1easure of acceleration equivalent to or acceleration) of a series of oscillators of varying natural
( 1/1 OOO)*g. Note that I 000 gals= lg. frequency that are forced into 1notion by the sa1ne base
vibration or shock.
g is acceleration due to gravity equals to 9.811n/s2 or 32.2
ft/s2. SIR. Seistnic Instrun1entation Roo1n.
INTENSITY is a number (written as a Roman numeral) STRONG MOTION is a ground motion of sufficient
describing the severity of an earthquake in ter111s of its amplitude to be of interest in evaluating the dan1age caused
effects on the earth's surface and on hun1ans and their by earthquakes or nuclear explosions.
structures.
TIME HISTORY is the sequence of values of any time-
INTENSITY METER is an intensity meter records and varying quantity (such as a ground n1otion 1neasure1nent)
stores the various data that are associated \Vith the reckoned at a set of[usually] equal time intervals.
earthquake and that it can notify those data to host system
as it equips data con11nunication function. In addition, it VELOCIMETER is an instrument used to measure
makes the "Earthquake Early Warning System" workable velocity of a particle.
\vith creating a syste1n net\vork by making use of optional
"earthquake early detecting function." VELOCITY is a measure of the rate of motion ofa particle
expressed as the rate of change of its position in a particular
IP67. The Ingress Protection rating system is a direction \Vith tiine.
classification system showing the degrees of protection of
the instrun1entation device fron1 solid objects and liquids.
The first m1mber refers to the protection against solid
objects, normally dust. If the first number is 0, there is no
protection provided. A number 5 refers to limited
protection against dust. The number 6 is for total protection
against dust. The second number of the IP rating system
refers to protection against liquids. A "O" indicates no
protection, \Vhile a "7" refers to protection against
iminersion between l 5 c1n to 1 111 for 30 1ninutes.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition. 2015

1-84 APPENDIX 1-8 - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings
V. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
The requirements of NSCP Section 105.2 shall apply to all

existing buildings listed in Table 1. located in Seismic
Zone 4 (entire Philippines except Palawan and Tawi-
Tawi), for which certificates of occupancies were issued.
Building permits shall only be issued for buildings
qualified for seistnic instrumentation when site or location
of SIR has been indicated or incorporated in the plan.
TABLE l. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
TYPE AND HEIGHT OF LOCATION REQUIREMENTS

BUILDING
GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS
A. Hospitals, schools and l. Three (3) accelerographs at 1. Accelerograph for

other buildings fifty Ground Floor I Lowest recording wavefonn and
(50) meters high and Basement; Middle Floor; transformed to FFT.
above and Floor Below Roof, or
2. Data output to include
2. One ( 1) accelerograph at acceleration response
Ground Floor I Lowest spectra and pseudo
Basement interphased with acceleration response.
two (2) accelerometers at
Middle Floor and Floor
3. With OPS capability.
Below Roof, or 4. Capability to send data to
data center of the
3. Three (3) accelerometers
governtnent.
with common data logger
at Ground Floor I Lowest
Basement; Middle Floor;
and Floor Below Roof
B. Hospitals with 50-bed One ( 1) accelerograph or one

capacity or 1nore and ( 1) accelerometer connected to
Schools with twenty a data logger, at Ground Floor I
(20) classrooms or more Lo\vest Basen1ent
but not less than three
(3) storey high
c. Provincial I City I One ( 1) accelerograph or one

Municipal Halls and ( 1) accelerometer connected to
Buildings a data logger, at Ground Floor
Level/Lowest Basement

TABLE 1. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS (continued)

TYPE AND HEIGHT OF LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
BUILDING
PRIVATE BUILDINGS
A. Buildings fifty (50) 111eters 1. Three (3) accelerographs at 1. Accelerograph for recording
high and above Ground Floor I Lowest waveform and transfonned to
Basement; Middle Floor; and FFT.
Floor Below Roof, or
2. Data output to include
2. One (1) accelerograph at acceleration response spectra
Ground Floor I Lo\vest and pseudo acceleration
Basement interphase with two response.
(2) accelerometers at Middle
3. For buildings above ninety
Floor and Floor Below Roof, or
(90) 1neters or thirty (30)
3. Three (3) accelerometers with storeys in height, additional
common data logger at Ground velocity meter at ground floor
Floor I Lo\vest Base1nent; I lowest basement shall be
Middle Floor; and Floor Below installed. Output data to
Roof include velocity response
spectra and pseudo velocity
B. Hospitals with 50-bed One (I) accelerograph or one (I) response spectra. Data logger
capacity or more and accelerorneter connected to a data to be part of the system.
Schools with 20 classrooms logger at Ground Floor I Lowest 4. With GPS capability.
or tnore but not less than Base1nent
three (3) storey high
c. Commercial Buildings with One (I) accelerograph or one (I)

occupancy of at least one accelerotneter connected to a data
thousand (1,000) persons or logger at Ground Floor I Lowest
gross floor area of at least Basen1ent
ten thousand ( 10,000)
square 1neters
Table I shows the types of buildings required to be

installed with earthquake recording instrumentation. The
requirements for installation of accelerograph are for
buildings located in cities and municipalities within a 200
km radius from a Type A faults as specified in the NSCP
2010 and as indicated from the active fault maps issued by
the Philippine Institute of Seismology and Volcanology
(PHIVOLCS).

For clustered buildings with completely similar design and For new buildings, the installation of these instruments
construction, it shall have a 1ninin1u1n of eighteen ( 18) shall form part of the requirements for Certificate of
channels with a co1nn1on data logger. The location of the Occupancy issued by the Building Official.
instruments shall be determined by an Accredited
4. Additional Requisite lnfor,nation of Buildings to be
Structural Engineer. instrzonented. It is necessary to establish a baseline
data to make effective use of the records to be
I. Maintenance. Earthquake Recording Instrutnents shall collected from the accelerograph(s) installed in the
be rnaintained in proper \Vorking condition. The building. The following information are required:
installation, servicing or re1noval of the instrun1ents
sh.all be done by qualified technical personnel of the • As-built blueprints,
supplier whose product co1nplies \Vith the 111inin1u1n o Structural design calculations,
specifications as specified in these Guidelines and
In1ple1nenting Rules. o Dynan1ic analysis (1node shapes and
frequencies) as used in the design
Maintenance of the instru1nents shall be by the o,vner calculations, if available, forced-vibration
of the building subject to the monitoring of the test results, and a1nbient-vibration test
Building Official or its designated representative. results, and
o Co1nprehensive subsurface soil exploration
2. Service Period. The 111axi1num service interval is one
and investigation report.
(I) year. If the instrument is inoperative at two
consecutive service inspections, then a re-inspection
VI. DATA PROCESSING
and servicing shall be required at a 1naxitnun1 service
interval of six (6) months until the instrument is
Mode111 strong 1notion instrun1ents have capabilities to
rendered fully operative. When the instrument
continuously requires repair for a period of four (4) store and transn1it digital data through teleco1nn1unications
consecutive years, or inoperative repeatedly for at links and other 1nedia, including the internet.
least three (3) times in a four (4)-year period, the
instrun1ent shall be replaced. I. The data from digital recordings are passed through a
correction algorithm that applies a high-frequency
3. Instrumentation of Selected Building. All owners of filter (50 Hz typical: I Hz=l cycle per second). Plots
existing buildings listed in Table I shall provide of the corrected acceleration, velocity, and
accessible space for the installation of appropriate displacen1ents for each channel of recording are
earthquake recording instru1nents. Location of said prepared.
instruments shall be determined by an Accredited
Structural Engineer. 2. Response spectra are calculated for periods up to about
half of the long-period limit. Linear plots of relative-
For proposed buildings, the Accredited Structural acceleration response spectra and plots of pseudo-
Engineer shall include the layout, instrument acceleration response are prepared if specified to the
specifications, installation require1nents, and location instru1nent supplier.
of the instrument in the structural plans submitted for
building permit purposes. 3. Fourier amplitude spectra, calculated by Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), are presented on linear axes and log-
The actual installation of the instruments shall be log axes. These sets of processed data are then
verified by the Building Official. provided to the user for evaluation, assess1nent of
facilities and structures, and research.
For existing buildings without ERi, the installation of
these instru1nents shall forn1 part of the require1nents
of the Annual Certificate of Inspection issued by the
Building Official.
For existing buildings with ERi, the building owner

shall be required to submit a certification from ASE
that the existing ERi confo1111 to these guidelines. If
the existing ERi do not conform to these guidelines,
the building owner shall upgrade such ERi.

VII. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS I • Continuous Monitoring: Capable for

REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHQUAKE continuous recording by 1nini1nu1n one (I)
RECORDING INSTRUMENTS year
l. The follo\ving are the 1ninin1un1 specifications for • AD converter: 24 bit or better.
Earthquake Recording Instruments to be used for
buildings listed in Table I. D. Titning.
A. Accelerographs/Accelerometers: • Interval: 1-Ialf second or less.

• Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 second per 100
o Minimun1 design life: Ten ( 10) years and seconds.
should be demonstrated and certified to have
a 40,000-hour mean time (minimum) • Type: GPS or NTP server.
bet\veen failures.
E. Triggering.
• Minimum of three (3) components - Vertical,
Longitudinal and Transverse
• Method: Pendulum or other device using
• Natural frequency: Above 50 Hz. earthquake motion as exciting force.
• Damping: Approximately 60 to 70 percent • Level: Accelerograph: 0.5 to I 00 gals,
critical. nominal I Velocimeter: 0.005 mm/s to I
1nn1/s
• Sensitivity: ±2000 gals or ±2g (full scale/V)
• Time: Full operation of accelerograph I
• Bandwidth: DC to I 00 Hz velocin1eter in not over 0.1 second after
e Environn1ent: IP67 or better activation.
• Input Range: ±2g - ±6g F. Power.
B. Velocin1eters • Battery maintained by trickle charger from

AC power and capable of powering the
• Minimum of three (3) components - Vertical, accelerograph and velocimeter for two (2)
Longitudinal and Transverse days after loss of power.
• Natural frequency: Above 50 Hz.
G. Co1nn1unication
• Damping: Approximately 60 to 70 percent
critical. • Ethernet: IO base-T or I00 base-TX
o Sensitivity: ±2 1n/s • Protocol: TCP/IP FTP/SFTP
• Bandwidth: 0.1 Hz to I 00 Hz
2. Records. When media is used for recording, a
• Environment: IP67 or better new media load shall be placed in the instruments
when the media re1naining is less than 1/3 of
C. Data Logger I Recording. (Common for original load. For instruments, memory should be
Accelerographs/Accelerometers and Velocimeters ) copied out and emptied when the ren1aining
amount is less than 1/3 of the original capacity.
• Sa1npling Frequency: A 1niniinu1n of 100
samples per second. 3. Refurbishing and Replacement. When the
instru1nent supplier finds that the instru1nent 1nust
• Time: From at least 20 seconds before the be removed from the building for repair, the
ground shaking begins until 30 seconds after instrument shall be replaced by a temporary
the last triggering level tnotion. identical instrun1ent, and the permanent
• RMS Noise: System noise shall be less than instrument shall be returned and 111ade operative
40 µg's measured over O- 30 Hz. within 60 days from the removal date.
O
Media: Digital storage 1nedia (111inimun1 of
32 GB)

4. Battery Inspection. The instrument shall be tested IX. DATARETRIEVALAND

,vith any charge device disconnected fro1n an INTERPRETATION
electric power source.
Immediately after the occurrence of an Intensity VJ
VIII. LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF THE earthquake or greater in the locality as determined by
INSTRUMENTS the Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (PHIVOLCS), the Building Official shall
I. General. issue a written notice to the building O\vner to retrieve
the data and to have the data interpreted by an
The instrument shall be located so that access by Accredited Structural Engineer. The retrieval and
qualified technical personnel is 1naintained at all ti1nes interpretation of the data shall be pe1formed by an
and is unobstructed by roon1 contents. A sign stating Accredited Structural Engineer. The data and
"MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS interpretation of the building shall be submitted by the
INSTRUMENT" shall be posted in a conspicuous Owner to the DPWH for storage, post-earthquake
location. No instru,nents shall be located in refuge safety evaluation of the building, and for e1nergency
area. response.
The preferred locations of the instrutnents are in small, X. DATA STORAGE AND ARCHIVING
seldotn-used roo1ns or closets near a colutnn (in a
vertically aligned stack), with adequate space to Data storage and archiving shall be at the DPWH
securely tnount the instrutnent and an approved Central Office or other data centers designated by the
protective enclosure attached securely to the floor. The DPWH. The ASEP, upon written request to the
locations shall be marked on the submitted structural DPWH, shall be provided the said data.
and architectural floor plans, and properly approved.
Xi. CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION OF
2. Buildings ivith three (3) or 111ore i11strun1e11ts. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING
INSTRUMENTATION
Buildings with three (3) or more
accelerographs/accelerometers shall be located in the Upon co1npliance of building O\Vners of these
ground floor/lowest basement, middle floor, and the Guidelines and hnpletnenting Rules on Earthquake
topmost floor of the building. When applicable, Recording Instrumentation, the Building Official shall
velocimeter shall be located in the lowest basement or issue a Certificate of Installation of Earthquake
ground floor level. The locations of the instru1nents are Recording Instru1nentation. The Certificate n1ust be
selected to provide the 111axin1u1n infonnation of the posted at the room/s where the instrument is located
building response from a major em1hquake. Such and in a conspicuous place, properly
information would form part of the valuable data in protected/secured, in the ground floor lobby of the
understanding the building's behavior during major building.
seistnic event.
XII. TESTING, INSPECTION AND
3. Orientation of the lnstrun1ents. COMMISSIONING
All instruments shall be installed with the same Building Owner, Building Official, and Supplier shall
orientation relative to the building, with the orientation inspect, test, and co1nn1ission the seis1nic 1nonitoring
chosen such that the reference or long di1nension of system together to ensure that the syste1ns are in
the instrument is aligned \Vith a 111ajor axis of the proper operational condition and comply with the
building. The orientation of the instrument shall be requirements of these guidelines. The Supplier must
clearly marked on the submitted structural plans. The sub1nit a certificate fron1 the 1nanufacturer that the
supplier-installer shall certify that the instruments are instrument is in good \Vorking condition.
oriented as per plan.
The Building Owner shall be responsible for the
protection and maintenance of the site of the ERi as
prescribed in these guidelines.

APPENDIX 1-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings I-B9
xm. SUPPORT AND MAINTENANCE
The seis111ic 1nonitoring system shall have a

1naintenance clearance as per the requirement of the
National Structural Code of the Philippines under
Section 105.2. "Maintenance and service shall be
provided by the owner of the building."
"The supplier shall provide guarantee that the system

shall have a maintenance period for at least IO years.
For the service period, the maximu1n service interval
is one year. The equiprnent obsolescence shall not
hinder the proper continuous operation of the
equipment throughout the IO years duration. When the
equipment's supplier finds that the instrument must be
removed from the building for repair, there must be a
service unit as a temporary replacement to continue
the collection of data, if and when there is an
occurrence of an earthquake during the duration of the
repair.
XIV. REFERENCES
I. D Skolniket. al. A Quantitative Basis for Building

Instrumentation Specifications, NSF CMMI Research
and Innovation Conference, 2009 (Hawaii).
2. M. Celebi. Seismic Instrumentation of Buildings:

Special GSNUSGS PROJECT (2002).
3. Guideline for ANSS Seismic Monitoring of

Engineered Civil Systems- Version 1.0.
4. National Building Code of the Philippines, PD I 096.
5. National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP),

Volume I, Buildings, Towers and Other Vertical
Structures, Sixth Edition, 2010.

NSCP C101-15
Chapter 2
MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

VOLUME I

112 Panay Avenue, Qnezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No.: (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 201 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 4
201.l Scope ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
SECTION 202 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4
DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4
SECTION 203 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
COMBINATIONS OF LOADS .............................................................................................................................................. 10
203.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
203.2 Symbols and Notations ................................................................................................................................................ 10
203.3 Load Cotnbinations using Strength Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design ................................................... 11
203.4 Load Combinations Using Allowable Stress or Allowable Strength Design .............................................................. 11
203.5 Special Seismic Load Combinations ........................................................................................................................... 11
SECTION 204 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 12
DEADLOADS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12
204.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12
204.2 Weights of Materials and Constructions ..................................................................................................................... 12
204.3 Partition Loads ............................................................................................................................................................ 12
SECTION 205 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15
LIVE LOADS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15
205.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15
205.2 Critical Distribution of Live Loads ............................................................................................................................. 15
205.3 Floor Live Loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 15
205.4 Roof Live Loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
205.5 Reduction of Live Loads ............................................................................................................................................. 19
205.6 Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction .......................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION 206 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
OTHER MINIMUM LOADS ................................................................................................................................................. 21
206.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 21
206.2 Other Loads ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
206.3 Impact Loads ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
206.4 Anchorage of Concrete and Masonry Walls ................................................................................................................ 21
206.5 Interior Wall Loads ..................................................................................................................................................... 21
206.6 Retaining Walls ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
206.7 Water Accu111ulation ................................................................................................................................................... 21
206.8 Uplift on Floors and Foundations ................................................................................................................................ 22
206.9 Crane Loads ................................................................................................................................................................ 22
206.JO Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas .......................................................................................................................... 22
SECTION 207 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 23
WIND LOADS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 23
207.1 Specifications .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
207 A General Requirements ................................................................................................................................................. 23
207 A. I Procedures ................................................................................................................................................................... 23
207 A.2 Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................... 25
207 A.3 Symbols and Notations ................................................................................................................................................. 29

2-2 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
207A.4 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 31

207 A.5 Wind Hazard Map ....................................................................................................................................................... 32
207A.6 Wind Directionality ....................................................................................................................................................... 35
207A.7 Exposure ...................................................................................................................................................................... 36
207 A.8 Topographic Effects ................................................................................................................................................... .46
207 A.9 Gust Effects .................................................................................................................................................................. .49
207 A.9.1 Gust Effect Factor ...................................................................................................................................................... 55
207 A. IO Enclosure Classification .............................................................................................................................................. 57
207 A. I I Internal Pressure Coefficient ....................................................................................................................................... 60
2078 Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS (Directional Procedure) ....................................................................................... 61
2078.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Part I: Enclosed, Partially Enclosed, and Open Buildings of All Heights ................................................................................. 62
2078.2 General Requirements ................................................................................................................................................. 62
2078.3 Velocity Pressure ......................................................................................................................................................... 62
2078.4 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting System ...................................................................................................... 68
Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings with h = 48 m ................................................................................................ 82
2078.5 General Requirements ................................................................................................................................................... 82
2078.6 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting System ...................................................................................................... 84
207C Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS (Envelope Procedure) ................................................................................... 104
Part I: Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Low-Rise Buildings ................................................................................................. 104
207C.2 General Requirements ................................................................................................................................................. I 04
207C.3 Velocity Pressure ....................................................................................................................................................... 105
207C.4 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting System .................................................................................................. 109
Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Low-Rise Buildings ....................................................................................................... 112
207C.5 General Requirements ................................................................................................................................................. 113
207C.6 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting System ..................................................................................................... 114
207D Wind Loads on Other Structures and Building Appurtenances - MWFRS ............................................................... 119
2070.2 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 119
2070.3 Velocity Pressure ....................................................................................................................................................... 119
2070.4 Design Wind Loads - Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid Signs .............................................................................. 122
2070.5 Design Wind Loads-Other Structures ..................................................................................................................... 122
207D.6 Parapets ....................................................................................................................................................................... 123
207D.8 Minimum Design Wind Loading ................................................................................................................................ 126
207E Wind Loads- Components and Cladding (C&C) ..................................................................................................... 130
207E. I Scope ......................................................................................................................................................................... 130
207E.2 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 132
207E.3 Velocity Pressure ....................................................................................................................................................... 133
Part I: Low-Rise Buildings ...................................................................................................................................................... 136
207E.4 Building Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 136
Part 2: Low-Rise Buildings (Simplified) ................................................................................................................................. 137
207E.5 Building Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Part 3: Buildings with h > 18 m ............................................................................................................................................ 139
207E.6 Building Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
Part 4: Buildings with h,,; 48 m (Simplified) ........................................................................................................................ 140
207E.7 Building Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Part 5: Open Buildings ............................................................................................................................................................ 155
207E.8 Building Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 155
Part 6: Building Appurtenances and Rooftop Structures and Equipment ............................................................................... 156
207E.9 Parapets ..................................................................................................................................................................... 156
207E. l O Roof Overhangs ........................................................................................................................................................ 157
207E. l 1 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for Buildings with h ,,; 18 m ........................................................................... 158
207F Wind Tunnel Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 180
SECTION 208 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 184
EARTHQUAKE LOADS ...................................................................................................................................................... 184
208.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................................... 184

Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................. 184

Symbols and Notations .............................................................................................................................................. 184
Basis for Design ........................................................................................................................................................ 185
Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related Effects ............................................................................................. 212
Earthquake Loads and Modeling Requirements ........................................................................................... 219
Detailed Systems Design Requirements .................................................................................................................... 221
Non-Building Structures ............................................................................................................................................ 229
Lateral Force on Elements of Structures, Nonstructural Components and Equipment Supported by Structures ...... 231
Alternative Earthquake Load Procedure .................................................................................................................... 236
SECTION 209 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 236
SOIL LATERAL LOADS ..................................................................................................................................................... 236
General ...................................................................................................................................................................... 236
SECTION 210 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 238
.RAIN LOADS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 238
Roof Drainage ........................................................................................................................................................... 238
210.2 Design Rain Loads .................................................................................................................................................... 238
210.3 Ponding Instability .................................................................................................................................................... 238
210.4 Controlled Drainage .................................................................................................................................................. 238
SECTION 211 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 238
FLOOD LOADS .................................................................................................................................................................... 238
General ...................................................................................................................................................................... 238
Definitions ................................................................................................................................................................. 238
Design Requirements ................................................................................................................................................ 239
Loads During Flooding ............................................................................................................................................. 240
Establishment of Flood Hazard Areas ....................................................................................................................... 242
Design and Construction ........................................................................................................................................... 242
Flood Hazard Documentation .................................................................................................................................... 242
Consensus Standards and Other Referenced Documents .......................................................................................... 243
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015

201.1 Scope The following tenns are defined for use in this section:
This chapter provides 1ninitntnn design load requireinents ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting of
for the design of buildings, towers and other vertical panels tnounted on pedestals to provide an under-floor
structures. Loads and appropriate load co1nbinations which space for the installation of mechanical, electrical,
have been developed to be used together for strength comn1unication or similar syste1ns or to serve as an air-
design and allowable stress design are set forth. supply or return-air plenum.
AGRICULTURAL BUILDING is a structure designed

and constructed to house farn1 in1ple1nents, hay, grain,
poultry, livestock or other horticultural products. The
structure shall not be a place of human habitation or a place
of e1nployn1ent ,vhere agricultural products are processed,
treated, or packaged, nor shall it be a place used by the
public.
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) is a method of

proportioning and designing structural me1nbers such that
elastically computed stresses produced in the members by
nominal loads do not exceed specified allowable stresses
(also called working stress design).
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a

building for the gathering together of 50 or more persons
for such purposes as deliberation, education, instruction,
\vorship, entertain111ent, a111use111ent, drinking or dining, or
awaiting transportation.
AWNING is an architectural projection that provides

weather protection, identity, or decoration and is wholly
supported by the building to which it is attached.
BALCONY, EXTERIOR, is an exterior floor system

projecting from and supported by a structure without
additional independent supports.
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are

considered to be imparted to the structure or the level at
which the structure, as a dynamic vibrator, is supported.
BASE SHEAR is the total design lateral force or shear at

the base of a structure.
BASIC WIND SPEED is a three-second gust speed at 10

m above the ground in Exposure C (see Section 207A.7.3)
as determined in accordance with Section 207 A.5.1 and ·
associated with an annual probability of0.02, (i.e. 50-year
111ean recurrence interval).
BEARING WALL SYSTEM is a structural system that

does not have a complete vertical load-carrying space
frame. See Section 208.4.6.1.

BOUNDARY ELEMENT is an element at edges of percentage of openings in the balance of the building
openings or at peritneters of shear walls or diaphrag1ns. envelope does not exceed 20 percent.
BRACED FRAME is essentially a vertical truss system of These conditions are expressed by the following equations:
the concentric or eccentric type that is provided to resist
lateral forces. l. A0 > 1.10A0 ;
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is essentially a complete 2. A0 > smaller of (0. 5 m 2 or 0. 01Ag)
space frame that provides support for gravity loads. See
Section 208.4.6.2. 3. A 0 ,!Agt :S 0. 20
BRACED WALL LINE is a series of braced wall panels
See symbols and notations.
in a single storey that 1neets the requireinents of Section
620.10.3.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, REGULAR-
SHAPED refers to a building or other structure having no
BRACED WALL PANEL is a section of wall braced in
unusual geo111etrical irregularity in spatial fon11.
accordance with Section 620.10.3.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURES, RIGID refer
BUILDING, ENCLOSED is a building that does not
to a building or other structure \Vhose fundamental
comply with the requirements for open or partially
frequency is greater than or equal to 1.0 Hz.
enclosed buildings.
BUILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM refers to a
BUILDING ENVELOPE refers to cladding, roofing,
building in which both windward and leeward wind loads
exterior \Vall, glazing, door assemblies, window
are transmitted through floor and roof diaphragms to the
asse1nblies, skylight assemblies, and other components
same ve1iical MWFRS (e.g., no structural separations).
enclosing the building.
CANTILEVERED COLUMN ELEMENT is a column
BUILDING, FLEXIBLE refers to slender buildings that
ele111ent in a lateral-force-resisting syste111 that cantilevers
have a fundan1ental natural frequency less than l .O Hz.
fro111 a fixed base and has 111inhnal 1no111ent capacity at the
top, with lateral forces applied essentially at the top.
BUILDING, LOW-RISE is an enclosed or partially
enclosed building that complies with the following
COLLECTOR is a member or element provided to
conditions:
transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to
vertical elen1ents of the lateral-force-resisting systen1.
I. Mean roof height, h, less than or equal to I Sm, and
COMPONENT is a part or element of an architectural,
2. Mean roof height, h, does not exceed least horizontal
electrical, mechanical or structural syste1n.
di!nension.
COMPONENT, EQUIPMENT is a mechanical or
BUILDING, OPEN refers to a building having each wall
electrical con1ponent or ele111ent that is part of a 111echanical
at least 80 percent open. This condition is expressed for
and/or electrical system.
each wall by the equation A 0 ~ 0. 8Ag. See symbols and
notations. COMPONENT, FLEXIBLE is a component, including
its attachments, having a funda111ental period greater than
BUILDING, PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building 0.06 s.
that complies with both of the following conditions:
COMPONENT, RIGID is a component, including its
l. the total area of openings in a wall that receives attachments, having a fundamental period less than or
positive external pressure exceeds the stnn of the areas equal to 0.06s.
of openings in the balance of the building envelope
(walls and roof) by more than I 0%; and COMPONENTS AND CLADDING refers to elements of
the building envelope that do not qualify as part of the
2. The total area of openings in a wall that receives MWFRS.
positive external pressure exceeds 0.5 m2 or 1 percent
of the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, and the

CONCENTRICALLY-BRACED FRAME is a braced DIAPHRAGM CHORD or SHEAR WALL CHORD is

fraine in ,vhich the 111embers are subjected primarily to the boundary elen1ent of a diaphragm or shear wall that is
axial forces. assun1ed to take axial stresses analogous to the flanges ofa
bea1n.
CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME
CONSTRUCTION is a type of construction in which the DIAPHRAGM STRUT (drag strut, tie, and collector) is
pri111a1y structural eletnents are formed by a systen1 of the element of a diaphragm parallel to the applied load that
repetitive ,vood fran1ing 1ne1nbers. collects and transfers diaphrag1n shear to the vertical
resisting elements or distributes loads \Vithin the
COVERING, IMPACT-RESISTANT is a covering diaphrag,n. Such men1bers 1nay take axial tension or
designed to protect itnpact-resistant glazing. con1press1on.
CRIPPLE WALL is a framed stud wall extending from DIAPHRAGM, UNBLOCKED is a diaphragm that has
the top of the foundation to the underside of floor fran1ing edge nailing at supporting n1e1nbers only. Blocking
for the lowest occupied leveL bet\veen supporting structural n1e1nbers at panel edges is
not included.
DEAD LOADS consist of the weight of all materials and
fixed equipment incorporated into the building or other DRIFT or STOREY DRIFT is the lateral displacement of
structure. one level relative to the level above or below.
DECK is an exterior floor systen1 supported on at least t,vo DUAL SYSTEM is a combination of moment-resisting
opposing sides by an adjacent structure and/or posts, piers, frames and shear \Valls or braced fra1nes designed in
or other independent supports. accordance with the criteria of Section 208.4.6.4.
DESIGN BASIS GROUND MOTION is that ground EA VE HEIGHT is the distance from the ground surface
tnotion that has a l O percent chance of being exceeded in adjacent to the building to the roof eave line at a pa11icular
50 years as detennined by a site-specific hazard analysis or wall. If the height of the eave varies along the wall, the
n1ay be detennined fro1n a hazard 111ap. average height shall be used.
DESIGN FORCE is the equivalent static force to be used ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a
in the detern1ination of wind loads for open buildings and steel-braced fran1e designed in confonnance \Vith Section
other structures. 528.
DESIGN RESPONSE SPECTRUM is an elastic EFFECTIVE WIND AREA is the area used to determine
response spectrum for 5 percent equivalent viscous GCP. For cladding fasteners, the effective wind area shall
damping used to represent the dynamic effects of the not be greater than the area that is tributary to an individual
Design Basis Ground Motion for the design of structures in fastener.
accordance with Sections 208.5 and 208.5.3.
ELASTIC RESPONSE PARAMETERS are forces and
DESIGN SEISMIC FORCE is the minimum total deformations detern1ined fro1n an elastic dynan1ic analysis
strength design base shear, factored and distributed in using an unreduced ground 1notion representation, in
accordance with Section 208.5. accordance with Section 208.5.3.
DESIGN PRESSURE is the equivalent static pressure to ESCARPMENT, also known as scarp, with respect to
be used in the determination of wind loads for buildings. topographic effect in Section 207 A.8, is a cliff or steep
.slope generally separating two levels or gently sloping
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system areas (see Figure 207A-8-1).
acting to trans1nit lateral forces to the vertical resisting
11
ele1nents. The term ndiaphragm includes horizontal ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are buildings, towers and
bracing systems. other vertical structures that are intended to remain
operational in the event of extreme environ,nental loading
DIAPHRAGM, BLOCKED is a diaphragm in which all from wind or earthquakes.
sheathing edges not occurring on fra1ning me1nbers are
supported on and connected to blocking. FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load specified in
Sections 204 through 208 and a load factor. See Section
203.3 for combinations of factored loads.

FIBERBOARD is a fibrous, homogeneous panel made HARDBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel

froin lignocellulosic fibers (usually ,vood or sugar cane made from lignocellulosic fibers consolidated under heat
bagasse J and having a density of less than 50 kg/m3 but and pressure in a hot press to a density not less than
more than 160 kg/m 3 . 50kg/m 3 •
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT or SYSTEM is one whose HILL, with respect to topographic effects in Section
deformation under lateral load is significantly larger than 207A.8, is a land surface characterized by strong relief in
adjoining parts of the systen1. Li1niting ratios for defining any horizontal direction (Figure 207A.8-2).
specific flexible elements are set forth in Section 208.5.1.3.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM is a horizontal
FOREST PRODUCTS RESEARCH AND truss systen1 that serves the satne function as a diaphragtn.
DEVELOPMENT INSTITUTE (FPRDI) is the
Department of Science and Technology's (DOST's) IMPACT-RESISTANT COVERING, is a covering
research and develop1nent arn1 on forest products designed to protect glazing, which has been shown by
utilization. It is 1nandated to conduct basic and applied testing in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and ASTM
research to help the ,vood-using industries disse1ninate E 1996 of other approved test methods to withstand the
intbrn1ation and technologies on forest products to end impact or wind-borne debris missiles likely to be generated
users. in ,vind-borne debris regions during design winds.
FREE ROOF is a roof ,vith a configuration generally IMPORTANCE FACTOR is a factor that accounts for
conforming to those shown in Figures 2078.4-4 through the degree of hazard to human life and damage to property.
2078.4-6 (monoslope, pitched, or !roughed) in an open
building with no enclosing walls underneath the roof INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME
surface. (IMRF) is a concrete fra1ne designed in accordance with
Section 412.
GARAGE is a building or portion thereof in which motor
vehicle containing tla1nmable or cotnbustible liquids or gas LATERAL-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is that part
in its tank is stored, repaired or kept. of the structural system designed to resist the Design
Seis1nic Forces.
GARAGE, PRIVATE, is a building or a portion of a
building, not inore than 90111 2 in area, in which only 1notor LIMIT STATE is a condition beyond which a structure or
vehicles used by the tenants of the building or buildings on member becomes unfit for service and is judged to be no
the pren1ises are kept or stored. longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit
state) or to be unsafe (strength limit state).
GLAZING is a glass or transparent or translucent plastic
sheet used in ,vindo\VS, doors, skylights, or curtain walls. LIVE LOADS are those loads produced by the use and
occupancy of the building or other structure and do not
GLAZING, IMPACT-RESISTANT is a glazing that has include dead load, construction load, or environn1ental
been tested in accordance with ASTM El886 and ASTM loads.
E 1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the
impact of wind-borne missiles likely to be generated in LOADS are forces or other actions that result from the
\Vind-borne debris regions during design winds. weight of all building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential
GLUED BUILT-UP MEMBERS are structural elements, 1noven1ents, and restrained dilnensional changes.
the section of which is composed of built-up lumber, wood Permanent loads are those loads in ,vhich variations over
structural panels or wood structural panels in combination tiine are rare or of s1nall 1nagnitude. All other loads are
with lumber, all parts bonded together with structural variable loads.
adhesives.
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN
GRADE (LUMBER) is the classification of lumber in (LRFD) METHOD is a method of proportioning and
regard to strength and utility in accordance with the designing structural elen1ents using load and resistance
grading rules of an approved lumber grading agency. factors such that no applicable limit state is reached when
the structure is subjected to all appropriate load
co1nbinations. The term 11 LRFD" is used in the design of
steel structures.

MACHINE-GRADED LUMBER (MGL) is a lumber ORDINARY MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME

evaluated by a 1nachine using a non-destructive test and (OMRF) is a moment-resisting frame not meeting special
sorted into different stress grades. detailing require1nents for ductile behavior.
MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the earthquake load
(MWFRS) is an assemblage of structural elements effects on structural eletnents siinultaneously occurring to
assigned to provide support and stability for the overall the lateral-force-resisting syste1ns along hvo orthogonal
structure. The systen1 generally receives wind loading fro1n axes.
1nore than one surface.
OVERSTRENGTH is a characteristic of structures where
MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure attached to the actual strength is larger than the design strength. The
and supported by the building and projecting over public degree of over-strength is 111aterial-and system-dependent,
right-of-way.
PARTICLEBOARD is a manufactured panel product
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT is the average of the roof eave consisting of particles of wood or con1binations of \VOOd
height and the height to the highest point on the roof particles and wood fibers bonded together with synthetic
surface, except that, for roof angles of less than or equal to resins or other suitable bonding syste111 by a bonding
10°, the mean roof height shall be the roof eave height. process, 10 accordance \Vith approved nationally
recognized standard.
MOISTURE CONTENT (MC) is the amount of moisture
in \vood, usually n1easured as the percentage of\vater to the PLYWOOD is a panel of laminated veneers conforming
oven dry weight of the wood. to Philippine National Standards (PNS 196) "Plywood
Specifications".
MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME is a frame in which
1ne1nbers and joints are capable of resisting forces Pll EFFECT is the secondmy effect on shears, axial forces
primarily by flexure. and 1no1nents of frame 1nembers induced'by the horizontal,:
displacen1ent of vertical loads fron1 various loading, ,vhen
MOMENT-RESISTING WALL FRAME (MRWF) is a a structure is subjected to lateral forces.
masonry wall frame especially detailed to provide ductile
behavior and designed in conformance \Vith Section RECOGNIZED LITERATURE are published research
708.2.6. findings and technical papers that nre approved.
NOMINAL LOADING is a design load that stressed a RIDGE, with respect to topographic effects in Section
member or fastening to the full allowable stress tabulated 207 A.8, is an elongated crest of a hill characterized by
in this chapter. This loading may be applied for strong relief in two directions (see Figure 207A.8-l). ·
approximately IO years, either continuously or
cumulatively, and 90 percent of this load may be applied ROTATION is the torsional movement of a diaphragm,
for the retnainder of the life of the 1ne1nber or fastening. about a vertical axis.
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber) refers to the commercial size SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist lateral forces,
designation of width and depth, in standard sawn lumber parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to
and glued laminated lu111ber grades; son1ewhat larger than vertical diaphragn1 or structural ,val!).
the standard net size of dressed lumber.
SHEAR WALL-FRAME INTERACTIVE
OPENINGS are apertures or holes in the building uses con1binations of shear ,valls and frames designed to,
envelope that allow air to flow through the building resist lateral forces in proportion to their relative rigidities{'
envelope and that are designed as ''open" during design considering interaction bet,veen shear ,valls and fra1nes on
winds as defined by these provisions. all levels.
ORDINARY BRACED FRAME (OBF) is a steel-braced

fra111e designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 527 or 528 or concrete-braced frame designed in
accordance with Section 421.

SHEATHING is a layer of boards or ofotherwood or fiber STRUCTURE is an assemblage of framing members

niaterials applied to the outer studs, joists, and rafters of a designed to support gravity loads and resist lateral forces.
building to strengthen structures and serve as a base for an Structures 111ay be categorized as building structures or
exterior weatherproof cladding. nonbuilding structures.
SHEATHING, WALL is a layer of boards or of other STRENGTH DESIGN is a method of proportioning and
wood or fiber 1naterials used to cover the \Vall studding. designing structural n1en1bers such that the con1puted
forces produced in the members by the factored load do not
STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER is exceed the 111en1ber design strength. The tenn strength
any 1ne1nber co111prising an asse1nbly of la1ninations of design is used in the design of concrete structures.
Ju111ber in \vhich the grain of all la1ninations is
approximately parallel longitudinally, in which the TOWERS AND OTHER STRUCTURES are
Ian1inations are bonded \Vith adhesives. nonbuilding structures including poles, 111asts and
billboards that are not typically occupied by persons but are
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a diaphragm used to also covered by this code.
transfer wall anchorage forces to diaphrag1n cross ties. It
also refers to a portion of a larger \Vood diaphragn1 TREATED WOOD is wood treated with an approved
designed to anchor and transfer local forces to priinary preservative under treating and quality control procedures.
diaphragn1 struts and the n1ain diaphragtn.
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME is a space
SOFT STOREY is one in which the lateral stiffness is less frame designed to carry vertical gravity loads.
than 70 percent of the stiffness of the storey above. See
Table 208-9. WALL ANCHORAGE SYSTEM is the system of
elements anchoring the wall to the diaphragm and those
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system, elements within the diaphragm required to develop the
\Vithout bearing ,valls, con1posed of 1ne1nbers anchorage forces, including sub-diaphragms and
interconnected so as to function as a co1nplete self- continuous ties, as specified in Sections 208.7.2.7 and
contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal 208.7.2.8.
diaphrag1ns or floor-bracing systen1s.
WALL, BEARING is any wall meeting either of the
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME following classifications:
(SCBF) is a steel-braced frame designed in conformance
with the provisions of Section 526. I. Any metal or wood stud wall that supports more than
1.45 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its own
SPECIAL MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) weight.
is a moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behavior and comply \Vith the requiren1ents given 2. Any masonry or concrete wall that supports more than
in Chapter 4 or 5. 2.90 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its own
weight.
SPECIAL TRUSS-MOMENT FRAME (STMF) is a
moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide WALL, EXTERIOR is any wall or element of a wall, or
ductile behavior and con1ply \Vith the provisions of Section any member or group of members, that defines the exterior
525. boundaries or courts of a building and that has a slope of
60 degrees or greater with the horizontal plane.
STOREY is the space between levels. Storey x is the
storey below level x. WALL, NONBEARING is any wall that is not a bearing
wall.
STOREY DRIFT RA TIO is the storey drift divided by
the storey height. WALL, PARAPET is that part of any wall entirely above
the roof line.
STOREY SHEAR, V x, is the summation of design lateral
forces above the storey under consideration. WALL, RETAINING is a wall designed to resist the
lateral displace1nent of soil or other materials.
STRENGTH is the capacity of an element or a member to
resist factored load as specified in Chapters 2, 3, 4, 5 and WEAK STOREY is one in which the storey strength is
7. less than 80 percent of the storey above. See Table 208-9.

2-10 CHAPTER 2- Minimum Design Loads
WIND-BORNE DEBRIS REGIONS are areas within

typhoon prone regions located at:
!. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water line 203.1 General
\vhere the basic ,vind speed is equal to or greater than
200 kph, or Buildings, to,vers and other vertical structures and all
portions thereof shall be designed to resist the load
2. In areas \Vhere the basic wind speed is equal to or combinations specified in Section 203.3, 203.4 and 203.5.
greater than 250 kph.
The 1nost critical effect can occur \vhen one or 1nore of the
WOOD OF NATURAL RESISTANCE TO DECAY contributing loads are not acting. All applicable loads shall
OR TERMITES is the heartwood of the species set forth be considered, including both earthquake and wind, in
below. Corner sapwood is permitted on 5 percent of the accordance \Vith the specified load con1binations.
pieces provided 90 percent or more of the width of each
side on which it occurs is heart,vood. Recognized species 203.2 Symbols and Notations
are:
dead load
• Decay resistant: Narra, Ka1nagong, Dao, Tangile. earthquake load set forth in Section 208.6.1
estin1ated 1naxi1nu1n earthquake force that
• Termite resistant: Narra, Ka1nagong. can be developed in the structure as set forth
in Section 208.6.1
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL is a structural panel F load due to fluids with well-defined
product composed primarily of wood and meeting the UBC pressures and 1naxin1u1n heights
Standard 23-2 and 23-3 or equivalent requirements of H load due to lateral pressure of soil and water
Philippine National Standards (PNS). Wood structural in soil
panels include all-veneer plywood, composite panels L live load, except rooflive load, including
containing a cotnbination of veneer and wood-based any permitted live load reduction
n1aterial, and 1nat-fonned panel such as oriented stranded L,. roof live load, including any pennitted live
board and wafer board. load reduction
p ponding load
WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit R rain load on the undeflected roof
in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe. T self-straining force and effects arising fron1
contraction or expansion resulting fro1n
te1nperature change, shrinkage, 1noisture
change, creep in con1ponent materials,
movement due to differential settlement, or
co1nbinations thereof
w load due to wind pressure

CHAPTER 2 - M1n1mum Design Loads 2-11
Load Combinations using Strength Design or No increase in allo\vable stresses shall be used \Vith these
Load and Resistance Factor Design load combinations except as specifically permitted by
Section 203.4.2.
Basic Load Con1binations
203.4.2 Alternate Basic Load Combinations
ere strength design or load and resistance factor design
ised, structures and all portions thereof shall resist the In lieu of the basic load co1nbinations specified in Section
st critical effects from the following combinations of 203.4.1, structures and portions thereof shall be pennitted
ctored loads: to be designed for the most critical effects resulting from
the following load combinations. When using these
alternate basic load co1nbinations, a one-third increase
(203-1)
shall be permitted in allowable stresses for all
1. Z(D + F + T) + 1. 6(L + H) con1binations, including W or E.
(203-2)
+ 0. S(Lr or R) D + H + F + 0. 75 [L + Lr (o. 6W or__!£__). (203-13)
1.4.
1.2D + 1. 6(Lr or R) + (f 1L or 0. SW) (203-3)
0.6D + 0.6W + H (203-14)
1.2D + 1.0W + f1L + 0.5(Lr or R) (203-4) E
0.6D+-+H (203-15)
1.4
1.2D + 1.0E + f1L (203-5)
D + L + (Lr or R) (203-16)
O. 9D + 1. OW+ 1. 6H (203-6)
D+L+0.6W (203-17)
O. 9D + 1. OE+ 1. 6H (203-7) E
D+L+- (203-18)
1.4
1.0 for floors in places of public assembly, ExceJJtion:

for live loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for
garage live load, or Crane hook loads neet.i not be co111binecl 1vith roo_f live loat.i
0.5 for other live loads or 1vith 111ore than one-half of the lvind load
Other Loads 203.4.3 Other Loads
:Where P is to be considered in design, the applicable load Where Pis to be considered in design, each applicable load
shall be added to Section 203.3. l factored as 1. 2P. shall be added to the combinations specified in Sections
203.4. l and 203.4.2.
Load Combinations Using Allowable Stress or
1Allowable Strength Design 203.5 Special Seismic Load Combinations
Basic Load Combinations For both allowable stress design and strength design for
concrete, and Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
:where allowable stress or allowable strength design is and Allowable Strength Design (ASD) for steel, the
ttsed, structures and all portions thereof shall resist the most following special load combinations for seismic design
· _critical effects resulting from the follo\ving co1nbinations shall be used as specifically required by Section 208, or by
of loads: Chapters 3 through 7.
D+F (203-8) 1.2D + f1L + 1.0Em (203-19)
D+H+F+L+T (203-9) 0. 9D ± 1.0Em (203-20)
D + H + F + (Lr or R) (203-10)
D + H + F + 0. 75[L + T(Lr or R)] (203-11)
D +H +F + (o. 6W or__!£__)
1.4
(203-12)

\Vhere
!1 1.0 for floors in places of public assembly,

for live loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for
204.1 General
garage live load, or
0.5 for other live loads
Dead loads consist of the weight of all materials o
the n1axin1u1n effect of horizontal and
construction incorporated into the building or oth
vertical forces as set forth in Section 208.6.1
structure, including but not lin1ited to walls, floors, roofi
ceilings, stainvays, built-in partitions, finishes, claddin
and other similarly incorporated architectural a
structural ite1ns, and fixed service equipment, including th
\Veight of cranes.
204.2 Weights of Materials and Constructions
The actual weights of tnaterials and constructions shall

used in determining dead loads for purposes of design. In
the absence of definite information, it shall be permitted t
use the minimum values in Tables 204-1 and 204-2.
204.3 Partition Loads
Floors in office buildings and other buildings wher

partition locations are subject to change shall be designed
to support, in addition to all other loads, a unifonnly
distributed dead load equal to 1.0 kPa.
Exception:
Access floor systenzs shall be designed to su11port,

addition to all other loads, a uniform(v distributed de
load not less than 0.5 kPa.

CHAPTER 2 -Minimum Design Loads 2-13
Table 204-1 Minimum Densities for Design Loads from Materials (kN/Jn 3)
Density Material Density
':Aluminum 26.7 Lilne

'Bituminous products Hydrated, loose 5.0
Aspha!tun1 !2.7 Hydrated, con1pactcd ........................................................ 7.1
~;:~w~c .: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :. !:~
Pctrokun1, cnide ................................................................ 8.6
2
Masonry. Ashlar Stone
Granite .......................
Li1nestone, crystalline
25.9
25.9
Petrolcuin, refined .............................................................. 7.9 Limestone, oolitic ............................................................. 21.2
Petroleum, benzine 7.2 Marble ..................................................... 27 .2
Petroleum, gasoline ......................................... 6.6 Sandstone ........................................ 22.6
Pitch ................................................................................... I0.8 Masonry, Brick
11.8 Hard, low absorption ........................................................ 20.4
Brass ,.......................................................................................... 82.6 Medium, medium absorption .......................... 18.1
Bronze ............ . 86.7 Soft, high absorption ......................................................... 15.7
Cast-stone masonry (cement. stone, sand) 22.6 Masonry, Concrete (solid portion)
Cement, portland. loose ............................................................. . 14.1 Lightweight units .. 16.5
Ceramic tile 23.6 Mediu111 weight units ............... 19.6
1.9 Normal weight units ..................................... 21.2
Cinder fill ............. . 9.0
Cinders. dry. in bulk 7.1 Masonry grout ............................................................................ 22.0
Coal Masonry, Rubble Stone

Anthracite, piled 8.2 Granite ............................................................................... 24.0
Ilituminous, piled 7.4 Limestone, crystalline ....................................................... 23.1
Lignite, piled .................. . 7.4 Liinestone, oolitic ............................................................. 21.7
Pent, dry, piled 3.6 Marble ............................................................................... 24.5
Sandstone ..................................... 21.5
.c,,nc.·e1c. plain Mortar, cement or lime ................ 20.4
Cinder ..... J 7.0
Expanded-slag aggregate .................................................. 15.7 Particle board .......................................... 7 .1
Haydite. burned-clay aggregate ........................................ 14.1 Plywood ................................................................................ 5.7
Slug .................................................................................... 20.7 Riprap. not submerged
Stone .................................................................................. 22.6 Litnestone 13.0
Vermiculite and perlite aggregate, nonload-bearing ..... 3.9-7.9 Sandstone .............................. 14.1
Other light aggregate, load bearing ... 11.0- ! 6.5 Sand
Com:rete, reinforced Clean and dry 14.1
Cinder ............................................. 17.4 River, dry 16.7
Slag .................................................................................... 21.7 Slag
Stone. including gravel ..................................................... 23.6
Bank .................................................................................. 11.0
Copper ........................................................................................ 87 .3 Bank screenings ................................................................ 17.0
Cork, compressed ....................................................................... 2.2 Much inc .................... I 5.1
Earth, not submerged Sand ................................................................................... 8.2
Clay, dry ............................................................................ 9.9 Slate ............................................................................................ 27.0
Clay, damp ........................................................................ 17.3 Steel, cold-drawn .......................................... 77.3
Clay and grave!, dry .......................................................... 15.7 Stone, quarried, piled
Silt, moist, loose ................................................................ 12.3
Basalt, granite, gneiss ....................................................... 15. J
Silt, moist, packed ............................................................. 15. !
Li1ucstone, marble, quartz ................................................ 14.9
Silt, flowing 17.0
Sandstone .......................................................................... 12.9
Sand and gravel, dry, loose ................................................ 15.7
Shale .................................................................................. 14.5
Sund and gravel, dry, packed ............................................... 17.3
Grccnstonc, hornblende 16.8
Sand and gravel, wet.................. 18.9
Terracotta, architectural
Earth, submerged
Voids filled ..... 18.9
Clny .............. 12.6
Voids unfilled ............... , ................................... 11.3
Soil ...................... 11.0
River mud .......................................................................... 14.l Tin 72.1
Sand or gravel .................................................................. 9.4 \Yater
Sand or gravel and clay ..................................................... I 0.2 Fresh .................................................................................. 9.8
Glass ........................................................................................... 25.1 Sea ..................................................................................... 10.l
Gravel, dry .................................................................................. J6.3 Wood (sec Chapter 6 for relative densities for Philippine wood)
Gypsum, loose ............................................................................ 11.0
Zinc, rolled sheet ........................................................................ 70.5
Gypsum. wallboard ..................................... 7. 9
~ ~
Iron
Cast ................. . 70.7
\Vrougbt .......... . 75.4
Lead I I 1.5

2-·14 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
Table 204-2 Minimum Design Dead Loads (kPa)
Co1nponent Load Component Load Component Load

CEILINGS FLOOR FILL FRAME WALLS
Acoustical fiber board ............ 0.05 Cinder concrete, per 111111 .......... 0.017 Exterior stud \Valls:
Gypsu111 board (per 111111 Light\veight concrete, per 1n111 .. 0.0l 5 50x l 00 @ 4001nn1, 15 1nn1
thickness) .......................... 0.008 Sand, per nnn ............................ 0.015 gypsu1n, insulated, 10 111111
Mechanical duct allowance ...... 0.20 Stone concrete, per 1nn1 ............ 0.023 siding ................................ 0.53
Plaster on tile or concrete ....... 0.24 FLOOR AND FLOOR FINISHES 50x 150 @ 400mm, 15 mm
Plaster on ,vood lath ............... 0.38 gypsum, insulated, 10 1n1n
Asphalt block (50 mm), 13 mm siding .............................. 0.57
Suspended steel channel
syste1n ................................. 0.10 mortar ..................................... 1.44 Exterior stud \Vall \Vith brick
Cement finish (25 n11n) on stone- veneer ................................ 2.30
Suspended 1netal lath and cement
concrete fill ............................. 1.53 Windo\VS, glass, fra1ne and
plaster ................................. 0.72
Cerai11ic or quarry tile (20 111111) sash .................................... 0.38
Suspended 1netal lath and
on 13 1nn11nortar bed ............. 0.77 Clay brick \Vythes:
gypsu1n plaster .................... 0.48
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 111m) I 00 111111 1.87
Wood furring suspension
on 25 1nn11no1tar bed ............. 1.10 200 111111 3.74
systen1 ................................. 0.12
Concrete fill finish (per 111m 300 111111 5.5 l
COVERINGS, Roof and Wall thickness) .............................. 0.023
400 mm 7.48
Asphalt shingles ......................... 0.10 Hard\vood flooring, 22 1nm ........ O. l 9
Ce1nent tile ................................. 0.77 Linoleun1 or asphalt tile, 6n1111 .... 0.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Clay tile (for mortar add 0.48 kPa) Marble and mortar on stone- tlollo\v Concrete Masonry Units
Book tile, 50 111111 .................... 0.57 concrete fill ............................. 1.58 Unplastered. Add 0.24 kPa for
Book tile. 75 mm .................... 0.96 Slate (per 1nn1 thickness) .......... 0.028 each face olastered
LudO\Vici ................................. 0.48 Solid flat tile on 25-01111 1nortar Grout I Wvthe thickness (111m)
Ro1nan ..................................... 0.57 base ......................................... 1.10 Spacing ; l 00 1 150 1 200
Spanish ................................... 0.91 Subtlooring, 19111m .................... 0.14 16.5-kN!tn3 Density of Unit-,----!
Co1nposition: Terrazzo (38 111111) directly on No erout ! 1.05 !---!J1.....U41l_
Three-ply ready roofing .......... 0.05 slab ......................................... 0.91 800 I l.40 ! l.53 I 2.0 I
Four-ply felt and gravel .......... 0.26 Terrazzos (25 111111) on stone- 600 ' 1.50 : !.63 ' 2.20
Five-ply felt and gravel. .......... 0.29 concrete fill ............................. 1.53 400 i l.79 1.92 2.54
Copper or tin ............................... 0.05
Corrugated asbestos-ce1nent
Terrazzo (25 mm) on 50-n1111 stone
concrete .................................. 1.53
Full ! 2.50 !
2.63 l 3.59
I 9.6-kN/m3 Density of Unit
roofing .................................... 0.19 Wood block (75 1n1n) on 111astic,
No grout ' 1.24 I l.34 ! l.72
Deck, metal 20 gage ................... 0.12 no fill ...................................... 0.48
300 , 1.59 11.?2!---"us
Deck, metal, 18 gage .................. 0.14 Wood block (75 mm) on 13-mm
Fiberboard, l 31n1n ...................... 0.04 111ortar base ............................. 0. 77 600 1. 69 1. 87 L~±L_
400 1.98 ! 2.1 l l 2.82
Gypsum sheathing, 13 1nm ......... 0.10 FRAME PARTITIONS
Insulation, roof boards (per 1nn1 Full i 2.69 !
2.82 -J 3.88
Movable partitions ........................ 0.24 2l.2-kN/m 3 Density of Unit
thickness)
Cellular glass .................. 0.0013
Movable partitions (steel) ............. 0.19 No rrrout I 1.39 ! l.44 ' I ~
Fibrous glass ................... 0.0021 Wood or steel studs, 13 m111 gypsu1n 800 ll.74 1Ts2! 2.39
Fiberboard ....................... 0.0028
board each side ......................... 0.38 600 : 1.83 l. 96 i 2.59
Perlite .............................. 0.0015
Wood studs, 50 x 100, unplastered ..... __'IQQ___ i 2.13 ' 2.2 2.92 i
0.19
Polystyrene foam ............ 0.0004 Full I 2.84 I 2.97 ' 3.97
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered one
Urethane foam \Vith skin ... 0.0009
side ............................................. 0.57
Plywood (per mm thickness) 0.0060
Wood studs 50 x l 00, plastered t\vo
Rigid insulation, 13 1n1n .......... 0.04
side ............................................. 0.96
Skylight, metal fran1e,
10111111 \Vire glass ................. 0.38
Slate, 5 mm ............................. 0.34
Slate, 6 mm ............................. 0.48
Waterproofing 1nembranes:
Bituminous, gravel-covered . 0.26
Bituminous, s1nooth surface .. 0.07
Liquid, applied ..................... 0.05
Single-ply, sheet .................. 0.03
Wood sheathing (per n1m
thickness) ............................ 0.0057
Wood shingles ............................ 0.14

205.3.3 Concentrated Loads
Floors shall be designed to support safely the uniformly

distributed live loads prescribed in this section or the
concentrated load given in Table 205-1 \Vhichever
ads shall be the maximum loads expected by the produces the greatest load effects. Unless otherwise
,,d use or occupancy but in no case shall be less than specified the indicated concentration shall be assumed to
required by this section. be uniformly distributed over an area 750-mm square and
shall be located so as to produce the maximum load effects
Critical Distribution of Live Loads in the structural member.
"' structural 1ne1nbers are arranged to create Provision shall be 1nade in areas \vhere vehicles are used or
fouity. members shall be designed using the loading stored for concentrated loads, L, consisting of two or 1nore
itions, ,vhich \vould cause 1naxin1u1n shear and loads spaced l.5n1 no1ninally on center \Vithout unifonn
-ing n101nents. This requirement 1nay be satisfied in live loads. Each load shall be 40 percent of the gross weight
rdance with the provisions of Section 205.3.2 or of the 1naxi1nun1 size vehicle to be acco1n1nodated. Parking
,4.2, where applicable. garages for the storage of private or pleasure-type motor
vehicles \Vith no repair or refueling shall have a floor
Floor Live Loads system designed for a concentrated load of not less than
9 kN acting on an area of0.015 1n2 \Vithout uniform live
General loads. The condition of concentrated or uniforn1 live load,
combined in accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4 as
rs shall be designed for the unit live loads as set forth appropriate, producing the greatest stresses shall govern.
Table 205-l. These loads shall be taken as the minimum
i/e loads of horizontal projection to be used in the design 205.3.4 Special Loads
-- buildings for the occupancies listed, and loads at least
al shall be assun1ed for uses not listed in this section but Provision shall be made for the special vertical and lateral
creates or accom1nodates si1nilar loadings. loads as set forth in Table 205-2.
here it can be detennined in designing floors that the

cftual live load ,vill be greater than the value sho,vn in
able 205-1, the actual live load shall be used in the design
pf.such buildings or portions thereof. Special provisions
.shall be made for machine and apparatus loads.
Distribution of Uniform Floor Loads
i~\.Vhere unifonn floor loads are involved, consideration may

~e limited to full dead load on all spans in combination with
/full live load on adjacent spans and alternate spans.

Table 205-1 Mini1nu1n Unifonn and Concentrated Live Loads

Use or Occupancy Uniform Load 1 Concentrated Load
Category Description kPa kN
Office use 2.4 9.0 2
I. Access floor syste1ns
Computer use 4.8 9.0 2
2. Annories -- 7.2 0
Fixed seats 2.9 0

3. Theaters.
assembly Movable seats 4.8 0
areas 3 and Lobbies and platforms 4.8 0
auditoriun1s
Stage areas 7.2 0
4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms
and sin1ilar recreational -- 3.6 0
areas
5. Cat\valk for n1aintenance
access
-- 1.9 1.3
6. Cornices and 111arquees -- 3.6 4 0
7. Dining roon1s and restaurants -- 4.8 0
8. Exit facilities 5 -- 4.8 O'

General storage and/or repair 4.8 -- 7
9. Parking Garages and Ramps Public parking and ramps 4.8 -- 7

Private (residential) or pleasure-
tvoe 111otor vehicle storage
2.4 -- 7
Wards and roon1s 1.9 4.5 2
I 0. Hospitals Laboratories and operating roon1s 2.9 4.5 2
Corridors above ground floor 3.8 4.5
Reading roo1ns 2.9 4.5 2
11. Libraries Stack rooms 7.2 4.5 2
Corridors above ground floor 3.8 4.5
Light 6.0 9.0 2
12. Manufacturing Heavy 12.0 13.4 2

Building corridors above ground
3.8 9.0
floor

Table 205-1 Minimum Uniform and Concentrated Live Loads (continued)
Use or Occupancy 1
Uniform Load Concentrated Load
Category Description kPa kN
Call centers and business processing
offices 2.9 9.0
13. Office Lobbies and ground floor corridors 4.8 9.0

Other offices 2.4 9.0 2
Press roon1s 7.2 11.0 2

14. Printing plants
Composing and linotype roon1s 4.8 9.0 2
Basic floor area 1.9 O'
Exterior balconies 2.9 1
0
15. Residential 8
Decks 1.9' 0
Storage 1.9 0
9
Restroo1ns
Revie\ving stands,
grandstands, bleachers, and 4.8 0
folding and telesco in seatino
Roof decks Same as area served or occupancy
Classroorns I. 9 4.5 2
19. Schools Corridors above ground floor 3.8 4.5
Ground floor corridors 4.8 4.5
20. Side\valks and drive\vays Public access 12.0
Light 6.0
21. Storage
Heavy 12.0
Retail 4.8 4.5 2

22. Stores
Wholesale 6.0 13.4 2
23. Pedestrian bridges and
\Valk\vays 4.8
Notes for Table 205~1

I
See Section 205.5 for live load reductions. 6
Individual stair treads shall be designed to support a 1.3 1V
concentrated load placed in a position that would cause
See Sec/ion 205.3.3, firs/ paragraph, for area of load
maximum stress. Stair stringers 111ay be designed for the
application.
uniform load set forth in the table.
I
AssembZr areas include such occupancies as dance halls, drill
See Section 205.3.3, second paragraph, for concentrated
rooms, gymnasiums, playgro1111ds, plazas, terraces and silni!ar
load~. See Table 205~2for vehicle barriers.
occupancies thal are generally accessible to the public.
1 s Residenlial occupancies include private dll'ellings, aparlments
For special~p111pose roofs, see Section 205.4.4.
and hotel guest rooms.
1
Exit facilities shall include such uses as corridors serving an 9
Restroom loads shall 1101 be less than the load for the
occupant load of JO or 111ore persons, exterior exit balconies,
occupancy with which they are associated, bu/ need 1101 exceed
stainrays,jire escapes and similar uses.
2.4 kPa.

Table 205-2 Special Loads'

Use or Occunancy Vertical Load Lateral Load
Category Description kPa kPa
L Construction, public access at site (live Walkway 7.2 -
load) Canopy 7.2 -
2. Grandstands, revie\ving stands,
bleachers, and folding and telescoping Seats and footboards 1.75 2 See 1Vote 3
seatine (live load)
Catwalks 1.9 -
3. Stage accessories (live load) Follow spot, projection
and control roo1ns
2.4 -
Over stages 1.0 -
4. Ceiling framing (live load) All uses except over
stat!es
0.5 4 -
5. Partitions and interior walls, - - 0.25
6. Elevators and dumbwaiters (dead and
- 2*total load -
live loads)
Total load including
7. Cranes (dead and live loads) l.25*total load 5 0.1 O*total load 6
i1noact increase
Exit facilities serving an
7
occupant load greater - 0.75 kN/m
8. Balcony railings and guardrails than 50 nersons
Other than exit facilities - 0.30 kN/m 7
Con1ponents - 1.2 8
9. Vehicle barriers - - 27 kN 9
10. Handrails - See Note IO See Note JO
11. Storage racks Over 2.4 m high Total loads 11 See Table 208-13
1.1 kN plus weight of
12. Fire sprinkler structural support - See Table 208-13
water-filled nine 12
Notes for Table 205-2
The 1ab11/alcd loads are minimum loads Where other ,·crtical load~ 1-c1111ircd by the design would cause greater stresses, th('.\' shall be used. Loads are in kPa unless
otherwi.1·e indicated in the table.
Units is kN!m.
Lareral S\\Y{\" braeing loads of 350 Nim parallel and 145 Nim pe11Jl'11d1c11lar to seal andfo()tboards.
Does not appZv to ceilings that hart' sufjicient acces.1·/rom below, .\11ch that acces.\ is not required 1rithi11 the space abave the ceilmg. Does not appZI' fO ceilings if the a/fie
areas above the ceiling are not prm•idcdwilh access. Thi.\ ffre load need 1101 be considered as acting sim11ltaneo11sly with other five load1- imposed upon the ceili11gfra111i11g
or /1.1· supporting str11c/11r1.,.
771e impact/1.1clors included are/or cn111c.1· 1dth sled wheds ruling 011 stcd rails. They may be modijh>d ifs11bsta11lfoti11g tec/1111n1l data acccplable to the building official
is s11b111i1ted. Lire loud\ on crane supporl girders muf lheir co1111cctio11s shall be taken as the mnrimum crane 1rhcd loads. For pendant-opermcd trarding crane support
girders and their co1111eclio11s, the impact factors shall be 1.10.
This applies in the direction paraf!d to the r/1111\'l{l' rwls (/011git11d111u/), Thcfiit'lorfor forces pcrpe11dic1tlar to the rm! is 0.20 * tlw INI/ISl'Ctsc trarc/i11g loads (lrolley, cab,
hooks and lifted loa,h}. Forces shall b,• applied at top of rail and may be dis1rib11tcd among rails ofm1dt1ple rail cranes um/ shafl be dislnlm!edwith due regard/or la/era/
stiffness of Ifie strucn1res supporting lhese /'ails.
A load per li11a1/ 111c1er (kN!m) 10 be applied hori::omally at right angles to the top rail.
]11/ermediate rails, pa11dfi!lcrs and tlwir connectiOII.\ shall be capable of 11·i1f1s1c111di11g a load of 1.2 kPa applied hor/::011/all.1· al right angles over the ell/ire fributary area,
including openings and spaces betl\"ee11 rails. Reactions due to !his loading need not be combined with 1/10.H' of Nole 7.
A hori::011/a{ load applied at right angles to the vc/1icle barrier at a height of ./50 111111 above the parking .rn1face. The force may be dislribured o~·era J00-111111 square.
11
' The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed handrail and s11pporli11g slr11ct11rc are capable of 1nthsto11di11g a load of m leas/ 890 N applied in any dii·cctio11
al any poilll 011 !he rail. These loads shall not be as.1·11111ed lo act cw1111/aliv£'~r ll'ith Nole 9.
11
Vertical 11wmbt•rs ofs1on1gc racks shall be prolectedfrom i111pac1forces of operating equipment, or racks shall be designed so thatfi1il11re of one ,·erlicaf member wil! 1101
cause collapse of more than the bqvor bc{\'S direclly supported by that member.

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-'l 9
/J The J.J-kN load is robe applied lo any singlejire sprinklC'r supporl point but 1101 simu//a11eo11s~1' to all s11pportjoi111s.
205.4 Roof Live Loads 205.4.4 Special Roof Loads
205.4.1 General Roofs to be used for special purposes shall be designed for
appropriate loads as approved by the building official.
Roofs shall be designed for the unit live loads, L,., set forth Greenhouse roof bars, purl ins and rafters shall be designed
in Table 205-3, The live loads shall be assumed to act to cany a 0.45 kN concentrated load, Lr, in addition to the
vertically upon the area projected on a horizontal plane. unifonn live load
205.4.2 Distribution of Loads 205.5 Reduction of Live Loads
Where uniform roof loads are involved in the design of The design live load determined using the unit live loads as
structural 111e1nbers arranged to create continuity, set forth in Table 205-1 for floors and Table 205-3, Method
consideration may be limited to full dead loads on all spans 2, for roofs 1nay be reduced on any 1ne1nber supporting
in combination with full roof live loads on adjacent spans 1nore than l 5 1n2 , including flat slabs, except for floors in
and on alternate spans. places of public assembly and for live loads greater than
4.8 kPa, in accordance with the following equation:
:Exception:
R = r(A - 15) (205-1)
fj,_t/ternate span /oacling need not be consideret.i ivhere the
'.ll11iforn1 ro<~f live load is 1. 0 kPa or n1ore.
The reduction shall not exceed 40 percent for members
For those conditions where light-gage metal preformed receiving load from one level only, 60 percent for other
structural sheets serve as the support and finish of roofs, members or R, as determined by the following equation:
roof structural 1ne1nbers arranged to create continuity shall
be considered adequate if designed for full dead loads on
all spans in con1bination ,vith the inost critical one of the R = 23.1(1 + D/L) (205-2)
following superimposed loads:
where
1. The uniform roof live load, L,, set forth in Table 205-
3 on all spans. A = area of floor or roof supported by the member, m2
D = dead load per square meter of area supported by the
2. A concentrated gravity load, L,., of9 kN placed on any member, kPa
span supporting a tributary area greater than l 8 in2 to L = unit live load per square meter of area supported by
create 1naxin1un1 stresses in the men1ber, \Vhenever the member, kPa
this loading creates greater stresses than those caused R = reduction in percentage,
by the uniform live load. The concentrated load shall r = rate of reduction equal to 0.08 for floors. See Table
be placed on the member over a length of0.75 m along 205-3 for roofs
the span. The concentrated load need not be applied to
1nore than one span sitnultaneously. For storage loads exceeding 4.8 kPa, no reduction shall be
made, except that design live loads on colun1ns 1nay be
3. Water accumulation as prescribed in Section 206.7. reduced 20 percent.
205.4.3 Unbalanced Loading The live load reduction shall not exceed 40 percent in
garages for the storage of private pleasure cars having a
Unbalanced loads shall be used where such loading will capacity of not tnore than nine passengers per vehicle.
result in larger n1embers or connections. Trusses and
arches shall be designed to resist the stresses caused by unit
live loads on one-halfofthe span if such loading results in
reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the
stresses produced by the required unit live load on the
entire span. For roofs \Vhose structures are co1nposed of a
stressed shell, framed or solid, wherein stresses caused by
any point loading are distributed throughout the area of the
shell, the requirements for unbalanced unit live load design
may be reduced 50 percent.

205.6 Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction L0 = unreduced design live load per square meter of area
supported by the member (Table 205-1)
As an alternate to Equation 205-1, the unit live loads set
forth in Table 205- l may be reduced in accordance with The influence area A1 is four times the tributary area for
Equation 205-3 on any n1en1ber, including flat slabs, a colu1nn, t\VO tin1es the tributary area for a bean1, equal to
having an influence area of 40 1n2 or n1ore. the panel area for a two-way slab, and equal to the product
of the span and the full flange width for a precast T-beam.
L = Lo [o.zs + 4.57 (~)] (205-3) The reduced live load shall not be less than 50 percent of
the unit live load L0 for n1e1nbers receiving load fro1n one
level only, nor less than 40 percent of the unit live load L 0
\Vhere
for other 1ne1nbers.
A1 = influence area, 111 2
L = reduced design live load per square 1neter of area
supported by the member
Table 205-3 Minimum Roof Live Loads I
Method I Method 2
Tributarv Area (m2 ) Maxi1nu1n
ROOF SLOPE Oto 20 20 to 60 Over 60 Unifonn Rate of Reduction
Load 2 Reduction, R
Uniform Load (kPa) (kPa) ,. (percentage
)
3
!. Flat or rise less than l-unit vertical in
3-unit horizontal (33.3% slope). Arch 1.00 0.75 0.60 l.00 0.08 40
and do1ne \Vith rise less than 1/8 of span.
2. Rise !-unit vertical to less than 3-unit
vertical in 3-unit horizontal (33.3% to
less than I 00% slope). Arch and dome 0.75 0.70 0.60 0.75 0.06 25
with rise l/8 of span to Jess than 3/8 of
span.
3. Rise 1-unit vertical in I-unit horizontal
( I 00% slope) and greater. Arch or 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
dome with rise 3/8 of span or greater.
4 No reduction JJer,nitted
4. Awnings except cloth covered. 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
5. Greenhouses, lath houses and

5 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
agricultural buildings.
I
For special-pwpose roofs, see Section 205.4.4.
1
See Sections 205.5 and 205.6 for live-load reductions. The rate of reduction r in Equation 205-1 shall be as indicated
in the table. The ,naxilnzan reduction, R, shall not exceed the value indicated in the table.
3
A flat roof is any roof with a slope less than I-unit vertical in 48-zmil horizontal (2% slope). The live loadforjlat roofs
is in addition to the ponding load required by Section 206. 7.
1
• See de.finition in Section 202.
5
See Section 205.4.4 for concentrated load requiren1ents .for greenhouse roof 111en1bers.

206.4 Anchorage of Concrete and Masonry Walls
Concrete and 1nasonry walls shall be anchored as required

General by Section 104.3.3. Such anchorage shall be capable of
resisting the load combinations of Section 203.3 or 203.4
In addition to the other design loads specified in this using the greater of the wind or earthquake loads required
chapter. structures shall be designed to resist the loads by this chapter or a 1ninimun1 horizontal force of 4 kNhn
specified in this section and the special loads set forth in of wall, substituted for E.
Table 205-2. See Section 207 for design wind loads and
Section 208 for design earthquake loads. 206.5 Interior Wall Loads
206.2 Other Loads Interior \Valls, pennanent partitions and te1nporary

partitions that exceed 1.8 m in height shall be designed to
Buildings and other structures and portions thereof shall be resist all loads to which they are subjected but not less than
designed to resist all loads due to applicable fluid a load, l, of 0.25 kPa applied perpendicular to the walls.
pressures, F, lateral soil pressures, H, ponding loads, P, The 0.25 kPa load need not be applied simultaneously with
and self-straining forces, T. See Section 206.7 for ponding \Vind or seisn1ic loads. The deflection of such \Valls under
loads for roofs. a load of 0.25 kPa shall not exceed 1/240 of the span for
walls with brittle finishes and 1/120 of the span for walls
Impact Loads with flexible finishes. See Table 208-13 for earthquake
design require1nents where such require1nents are 1nore
The live loads specified in Sections 205.3 shall be assumed restrictive.
to include allo,vance for ordinary impact conditions.
Provisions shall be 1nade in the structural design for uses Exception:
and loads that involve unusual vibration and i1npact forces.
See Section 206.9.3 for impact loads for cranes, and Flexible,.folding or JJortable partitions are not required to
Section 206.10 for heliport and helistop landing areas. nzeet the !oaci and deflection criteria but 1nust be anchored
to the sup11orting structure to 1neet the provisions of this
206.3.l Elevators coc/e.
All elevator loads shall be increased by I 00% for impact. 206.6 Retaining Walls
206.3.2 Machinery Retaining walls shall be designed to resist loads due to the
lateral pressure of retained material in accordance \Vith
For the purpose of design, the ,veight of 1nachinery and accepted engineering practice. Walls retaining drained soil,
moving loads shall be increased as follows to allow for where the surface of the retained soil is level, shall be
hnpact: designed for a load, H, equivalent to that exe1ied by a fluid
weighing not less than 4.7 kPa per meter of depth and
I. Elevator n1achinery 100% having a depth equal to that of the retained soil. Any
surcharge shall be in addition to the equivalent fluid
2. Light 111achinery, shaft- or n1otor-driven 20% pressure.
3. Reciprocating n1achinery or power-driven units 50o/o Retaining walls shall be designed to resist sliding by at
least 1.5 times the lateral force and overturning by at least
4. Hangers for floors and balconies 33% 1.5 titnes the overturning moment, using allo\vable stress
design loads.
All percentages shall be increased where specified by the
1nanufacturer. 206.7 Water Accumulation
All roofs shall be designed with sufficient slope or camber

to ensure adequate drainage after the long-term deflection
from dead load or shall be designed to resist ponding load,
P, combined in accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4.
Ponding load shall include water accumulation from any
source due to deflection.
206.8 Uplift on Floors and Foundations 206.9.4 Lateral Force
In the design ofbasen1ent floors and si1nilar approxi1nately The lateral force on crane run\vay bea1ns with electrically
horizontal ele111ents belo\v grade, the up\vard pressure of powered trolleys shall be calculated as 20% of the sum of
water, where applicable, shall be taken as the full the rated capacity of the crane and the weight of the hoist
hydrostatic pressure applied over the entire area. The and trolley. The lateral force shall be assumed to act
hydrostatic load shall be measured from the underside of horizontally at the traction surface of a run\vay beam, in
the construction. Any other upward loads shall be included either direction perpendicular to the beam, and shall be
in the design. distributed with due regard to the lateral stiffness of the
run\vay beatn and supporting structure.
Where expansive soils are present under foundations or
slabs-on-ground, the foundations, slabs, and other 206.9.5 Longitudinal Forces
con1ponents shall be designed to tolerate the 111ove1nent or
resist the up\vard loads caused by the expansive soils, or The longitudinal force on crane run\vay bea1ns, except for_)
the expansive soil shall be ren1oved or stabilized around bridge cranes \Vith hand-geared bridges, shall be calculated
and beneath the structure. as I0% of the maxi1nun1 wheel loads of the crane. The-'
longitudinal force shall be assumed to act horizontally at
206.9 Crane Loads the traction surface of a run\vay beam, in either direction
parallel to the beam.
206.9.1 General
206.10 Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas
The crane load shall be the rated capacity of the crane.
Design loads for the run\vay bea1ns, including connections In addition to other design requiretnents of this chapter,c
and support brackets of1noving bridge cranes and 1nonorail heliport and helistop landing or touchdown areas shall b
cranes shall include the 111aximu111 \Vheel loads of the crane designed for the follo\ving loads, con1bined in accordance
and the vertical impact, lateral, and longitudinal forces with Section 203.3 or 203.4:
induced by the 111oving crane.
I. Dead load plus actual weight of the helicopter.
206.9.2 Maximum Wheel Load
2. Dead load plus a single concentrated impact load, L
The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads covering 0.10 m2 of 0.75 times the fully loaded weigh,
produced by the weight of the bridge, as applicable, plus of the helicopter if it is equipped with hydraulic-tyJ '
the sum of the rated capacity and the weight of the trolley shock absorbers, or 1.5 times the fully loaded weigh
with the trolley positioned on its runway where the of the helicopter if it is equipped with a rigid or skid
resulting load effect is 1naxi111un1. type landing gear.
206.9.3 Vertical Impact Force The dead load plus a uniform live load, L, of 4.8 kPa. Th
required live load 1nay be reduced in accordance wit
The 111axin1u1n wheel loads of the crane shall be increased Section 205.5 or 205.6.
by the percentages shown belo\v to detennine the induced
ve11ical i1npact or vibration force:
I. Monorail cranes (powered) 25%
2. Cab-operated or remotely operated bridge

cranes (powered) 25%
3. Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered) 10%
4. Bridge cranes or 111onorail cranes \Vith

hand-geared ridge, trolley and hoist Oo/o

enclosed simple diaphragm buildings less than 18 m

in height.
Specifications • Section 207D discusses Other Structures anti Building

Appurtenances: A single section is detiicated to
I,i!dings and other vertical structures shall be designed deter111ining 1vind loads on non-building structures
id constructed to resist wind loads as specified and such as signs, rooftop structures, and tolvers.
presented in Sections 207A through 207F.
• Section 207E discusses about Co111ponents anti
Antenna to,vers and antenna supporting structures shall be Cladding. This code addresses the determination of
designed and constructed to resist wind loads as specified con1ponent anti cladding loads in a single section.
and presented in ANSI/TIA-222-G-2005, entitled as Ana(vtical and simplified methods are provided based
-,.'Structural Standards for Steel Antenna To1-vers and on the building height. Provisions for open buildings
Antenna Supporting Structures and ANSI/TIA-222-G- l- and building appurtenances are also addressed.
entitled as "Structural Standards for Steel Antenna
To1vers and .4ntenna Supporting Structures -Addendzan 1. • Section 207F discusses about Wind Tunnel Procedure.
General Requirements 207 A.I Procedures
207A.LI Scope
·1.t>e1,orr,wll ancl la_yout of the 1vind loacl provisions in this Buildings and other structures, including the Main Wind-
been significantly revisedJi-om NSCP 2001 and Force Resisting System (MWFRS) and all components and
20 l O editions. The goal was to improve the cladding (C&C) thereof, shall be designed and constructed
'i>~ga11izt1tio•n, clarity, and use of the wind load provisions to resist the ,vind loads detennined in accordance ,vith
'bv cr.,at,'ng incliviclual sub-sections organized according to Section 207A through 207F. The provisions of this section
major subject areas. The wind load define basic wind para1neters for use with other provisions
are noH' 11resented in Sections 207A through contained in this code.
as opposed to prior eclitions, Yi/here the provisions
contained in a single section. Co1111nenta1J'.'
,'lection 207r1 provhies the basic ivind cfesign The procedures specified in this code provide wind
para,neters that are applicable to the various lVind pressures and forces for the design of MWFRS andfor the
loacl cletcr111ination ,nethodologies outlinecl in Sections design of components and cladding (C&C) of buildings
2078 through 207F. Items covered in Section 207A and other structures. The proceclures involve the
include definitions, basic lVind speed, exposure cfeter111ination of1,vind clirectionalit;1 anti veloci(v JH-C!ssu1·e,
categories, internal pressures, enclosure the selection or cfcter111ination ofan appropriate gust effect
classification, gust-effects, and topographic factors, factor, and the selection o._f appropriate pressure or .force
an-1ong others.•4 general description ofeach section is coqfficients. The procedure allows for the level of
provided belo1v: structural reliability required, the effects of d(ffi,ring wind
exposures, the ;,peed-up ejfects of certain topographic
• Section 207B discusses about Directional Procedure features such as hills and esca1pn1ents, and the size and
fi!r Enclosed, Partially Enclosed, and Open Buildings geo111ehy of the building or other structure under
ofAll Heights: The procedure is the former "buildings consideration. The procedure differentiates between rigid
11{ all heights method" in NSCP 2010 (.4SCE 7-05), and.flexible buildings and other structures, and the results
Method 2. A simplified procedure, based on the general{v envelop the 111ost critical load conditions jhr the
Directional Procecfure, is providedfor buildings up to design of MWFRS as well as C&C.
48m in height.
The pressure and force coefficients provided in Sections
• Seclion 207C discusses about Envelope Procedure for 2078, 207C, 207D, and 207E have been assembled.fi-om
Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Low-Rise Buildings: the latest boundmy-layer wind-tunnel andfit!l-scale tests
This procedure is the former "low-rise buildings ancl fro,n previouszy available literature. Because the
method" in NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-05) Method 2. This bozaular;.1-layer 1-vincf-tunnel results 1-vere obtained _for
section also incorporates NSCP 2010 (.4SCE 7-05) spec/fie types of building, such as low- or high-rise
Method I for MWFRS applicable to the MWFRS of buihfings and buildings having specific tvpes ofstructural

.fi-cuning 5.vste,ns, the designer is cautioned against 207C, Part 2) and the Ana(vtical Procedure
incliscrin1inate interchange of values an1011g the _figures Components and Cladding (Section 207E).
and tables.
Lilnitations. The JJrovisions given under Sectio
207A.1.2 Permitted Procedures 207A.1.2 app(v to the majori(v of site locations ani
buildings and structures, but for son1e projects, these
The design ,vind loads for buildings and other structures, provisions ,nay be inadequate. Exan1JJles of sitii.'
including the MWFRS and C&C elements thereof, shall be locations and buildings and structures (or JJortions
detennined using one of the procedures as specified in this thereof) that ,nay require other approved standarcls,;<_
mticle. An outline of the overall process for the special studies using applicable recognized literatur(/
detern1ination of the ,vind loads, including section pertaining to ,vind effects, or using the lvind tunnel
references, is provided in Figure 207 A. l- l. procedure ofSection 207F include:
I. Site locations that hai-·e channeling effects or 1vake

Conune11ta1:v:
fi·o,n up1vind obstructions. Channeling effects ca
be caused by topographic features (e.g., a 111ountaiti
The design wind loads for buildings and other
gorge) or buildings (e.g., a neighboring tall.
structures, including the MWFRS and C&C elements
building or a cluster of tall buildings). Wakes can5i,.
thereof, shall be deter,nined using one ofthe proceifures
be caused by hills or by buildings or other))
as specified in this article. An outline of the overall
structures.
process for the deter,nination of the 1vind loads,
including section references, is provided in Figure
2. Buildings ,vith unusual or irregular geo,netri
207A.1-1.
shape, including barrel vaults, and other building,
whose shape (in plan or vertical cross-section
This version o_fthe 1vinli load standard provides several
differs significantZv fi'om the shapes in Figur'
procedures (as illustrated in Table 207A.1-1) f,'0111
207B.4-1, 207B.4-2, 207B.4-7, 207C.4-1, an
1vhich the (iesigner can choose.
207E.4-1 to 207£.4-7. Unusual or irregula
geornetric shapes include buildings ,vith ,nu/tip/
For MWFRS: setbacks, curved facalies, or irregular plan,i
resulting fro111 significant indentations
1. Directional Procedure for Buildings of All Heights projections, openings through the building,
(Section 207B) 1nulti-toiver buildings connected by bridges.
2. Envelope Procedure for Low-Rise Buildings 3. Buildings ivith response characteristics that result
(Section 207C) in substantial vortex-induced and/or torsional?
d.vna,nic effects, or d.vna111ic effects resulting_fron-i"J-
3. Directional Procedure"for Building Appurtenances aero-elastic instabilities such as flutter or:/
and Other Structures (Section 207D) galloping. Such dynamic effects are difficult
anticipate, being dependent on ,nany factors,
4. Wind Tunnel Procedure for All Buildings and Other should be considered '.Vhen any one or ,nore
Strnctures (Section 207FJ following apply:
For Components and Cladding: i. The height of the building is over 120 m.
1. Ana(vtical Procedure for Buildings and Building ii. The height of the building is greater than
Appurtenances (Section 207E) tin1es its ,ninilnzan ~{fective '.Vhith Bmin•
defined below.
2. Wind Tunnel Procedure/or All Buildings and Other iii. The lowest natural fi'equency of the buila'in1ri
Stnictures (Section 207F) is less than n 1 = 0.25 Hz.
A "simplified method"for which the designer can select iv. The reduced velocity
1vind pressures directly fro1n a table 1vithout a,rv v
calculation, when the building meets all the -~'->5
require,nents for apJJ/ication of the 1nethod, is provided n1Bmin
for designing buildings using the Directional Procedure
(Section 207B, Part 2), the Envelope Procedure (Section

4. Wind Tunnel Procedure for all buildings and all other

structures as specified in Section 207F.
z 0.6h
the nzean hourly velocity at height Z 207A.1.2.2 Components and Cladding
The 1ninin1un1 effective 1vidth Bmin is de.fined as the Wind loads on components and cladding on all buildings
minimum value of L, h;B;/'f, h; considering all wind and other structures shall be designed using one of the
directions. The sununations are JJe1forn1ed over the following procedures:
height Clfthe lntildingfor each 1:vbui direction, hit is the
}u::l,i;;ht above grade oflevel i, and Bi is the 11,fr.ith at level 1. Analytical Procedures provided in Parts l through 6.
f nornud to the ivind direction. as appropriate, of Section 207E; or
Bridges. cranes, electrical trans1n1ss1on lines, 2. Wind Tunnel Procedure as specified in Section 207F.
,guyed 111asts, higlnvay signs and lighting structures,
te!ecnn11nu11ication to1vers, and flagpoles. 207A.2 Definitions
f'Vhen unclertaking cietailed stucfies o.f the dyna,nic The following definitions apply to the provisions of
. response to 1rindforces, the fiu1dan1e11tal fi·equencies of Section 207:
the structure in each direction under consideration
/;houhl be establishecl using the structural properties APPROVED is an acceptable to the authority having
and dejorn1ational characteristics of the resisting jurisdiction.
elenzents i11 a proper~v substantiated analysis, and not
utilizing approxitnate equations baset.i on height. BASIC WIND SPEED, Vis a three-second gust speed at
l Om above the ground in Exposure C (see Section
Shielt!ing. Due to the lack of reliable ana(vtical 207 A. 7.3) as determined in accordance with Section
\procedures for predicting the effects of shielding 207A.5.1.
)-J]rovicled by buildings and other structures or by
'({Opographic features, reductions in veloci~v pressure BUILDING, ENCLOSED is a building that does not
<due to shielding are not JJertnitted under the provisions comply with the requirements for open or partially
:'.::Of this chaJJler. lfoH1ever, this does not preclzule the enclosed buildings.
i'.;:ctetertnination qfshie!tling effects and the corresponding
, ;, __reductions in velocizv pressure by ,neans o_l the lVind BUILDING ENVELOPE is a cladding, roofing, exterior
~-'titnnel procedure in Section 207F. \Valls, glazing, door assetnblies, windo\v asse1nblies,
skylight assemblies, and other components enclosing the
Main Wind-Force Resisting System building.
(MWFRS)
BUILDING AND OTHER STRUCTURE, FLEXIBLE
Wind loads for MWFRS shall be determined using one of are slender buildings and other structures that have a
the follo\ving procedures: fundamental natural frequency less than l Hz.
l. Directional Procedure for buildings of all heights as BUILDING, LOW-RISE are enclosed or partially
specified in Section 2078 for buildings meeting the enclosed buildings that comply with the following
require1nents specified therein; conditions:
2. Envelope Procedure for low-rise buildings as specified I. Mean roof height h less than or equal to l 8m.
in Section 207C for buildings meeting the
requirements specified therein; 2. Mean roof height h does not exceed least horizontal
ditnension.
3. Directional Procedure for Building Appmtenances
(rooftop structures and rooftop equipment) and Other BUILDING, OPEN is a building having each wall at least
Structures (such as solid freestanding walls and solid 80 percent open. This condition is expressed for each wall
freestanding signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice by the equation A 0 2: 0. 8Ag.
frameworks, and trussed towers) as specified in
Section207D; or
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 2015

where: the gross area of that wall in which A 0 is

identified, in m2
A0 total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive exte111al pressure, in m2
Section 207A-General Requirements: Use to detcnninetbe basic parameters for
,.,.,.
determining ,vind loads on both MWFRS and C&C. 1l1ese basic parameters arc:
Basic \Vind Speed, V, see Figure 207A.5-1A, B orC
\Vind directionality factor, Ka, see Section 207A.6
,.,. Exposure category, see Section 207A.7

Topographic factor, Ki:t, see Scction207A.8
,.,. Gust Effect Factor, sec Section 207 A.9

Enclosure classification, see Section 207A.10
Intemnl pressure coefficient, (GCp1), see Section 207A-l 1
I
I \Vind londs on the MWFRS may be
determined by:
I
Wind loads on the C&C may be
determined by:
I
Section 207B: Directionol procedure for ... .....
~ buildings of ult heights Section 207E:
- Envelope procedure in Parts land 2, or
--,-,l!J - Directional proeedurc in Parts 3, 4 nnd 5
Section 207C: Envelope procedure for lo,v rise - Building appurtenances (roof overhangs
~ ond parapets) in Part 6
buildings
Section 207D: Directional procedure for

~ building appurtcm.anccs (roof overhangs and parapets)
and other structures Section 207F: Wind tunnel procedure
--,-,l!J for any building or other structure
4 Section 207F: Wind tunnel pro<:edure for any

building or other structure
. . .. .
Figure 207 A.1-1

Outline of Process for Determining Wind Loads. Additional Outlines and User Notes are Provided at the Beginning of each
Chapter for more Detailed Step-By-Step Procedures for Determining the Wind Loads
These conditions are expressed by the following equations: ·

BUILDING, PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building
that complies with both of the following conditions:
1. A0 > 1. 10A 0 ;
1. The total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure exceeds the sum of the areas
2. A0 > 0.37 m 2 or O.OlAg, whichever is
of openings in the balance of the building envelope A 0 ,I Ag; ,,:; 0.20
(walls and roof) by more than 10 percent.
where:
2. The total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure exceeds 0.37 1112 . are as defined for Open Building
the sum of the areas of openings in the
or 1 percent of the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, building envelope (walls and roof) not
and the percentage of openings in the balance of the including A 0 , in 1112
building envelope does not exceed 20 percent. the sum of the gross surface areas of the
building envelope (walls and roof) not
including Ag, in m 2

ts can be part of the MWFRS when they act as For typical door and window systems supported on three
ls or roof diaphragms, but they may also be or more sides, the effective \Vind area is the area of the door
ihdividual con1ponents. The engineer needs to or \vindo\v under consideration. For simple spanning doors
priate loadings for design of co1nponents, which (e.g., horizontal spanning section doors or coiling doors),
ire certain co1nponents to be designed for 1nore large specialty constructed doors (e.g., aircraft hangar
~ ..tvpe of loading, for example, long-span roof doors), and specialty constructed glazing systems, the
sh;uld be designed for loads associated with effective wind area of each structural co111ponent
s and individual members of trusses should also be composing the door or \VindO\V systen1 should be used in
'for component and cladding loads (Mehta and calculating the design \Vind pressure.
/ 1998). Examples of cladding include wall
_iigs, curtain \Valls, roof coverings, exterior windo\VS MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM
and operable) and doors, and overhead doors. (MWFRS) can consist of a structural frame or an
asse111blage of structural ele111ents that \vork together to
RAGM in wind load applications has been added transfer \Vind loads acting on the entire structure to the
7-10. This definition, for the case of untapped ground. Structural elements such as cross-bracing, shear
·'decks, differs somewhat from the definition used in \Valls, roof trusses, and roof diaphrag111s are part of the
611 12.3 of ASCE 7-10 because diaphragms under Main Wind-Force Resisting System (MWFRS) when they
,Jciads are expected to re1nain essentially elastic. assist in transferring overall loads (Mehta and Marshall
1998).
TIVE WIND AREA, A is an effective wind area
rea of the building surface used to determine (GCp). WIND-BORNE DEBRIS REGIONS are defined to alert
ea does not necessarily correspond to the area of the the designer to areas requiring consideration of n1issi'le
ihg surface contributing to the force being considered. impact design. These areas are located within tropical
cases arise. In the usual case, the effective wind area cyclone prone regions where there is a high risk of glazing
correspond to the area tributary to the force failure due to the impact of wind-borne debris.
nent being considered. For exan1ple, for a cladding
the effective ,vind area 1nay be equal to the total area 207 A.3 Symbols and Notations
panel. For a cladding fastener, the effective wind
is the area of cladding secured by a single fastener. A The following symbols and notation apply only to the
,lion n1ay receive wind from several cladding panels. In provisions of Section 207A through 207F:
_Case, the effective \Vind area is the area associated \Vith
wind load that is transferred to the mullion. A effective \Vind area, in 111 2
Ar area of open buildings and other
second case arises where con1ponents such as roofing structures either non11al to the \Vind
ls, wall studs, or roof trusses are spaced closely direction or projected on a plane
ether. The area served by the component may become normal to the wind direction, in 111 2
g and narrow. To better approximate the actual load the gross area of that wall in which A 0
ribution in such cases, the width of the effective wind is identified, in m 2
used to evaluate (GCp) need not be taken as less than the sum of the gross surface areas of
€:-third the length of the area. This increase in effective the building envelope (walls and roof)
nd area has the effect of reducing the average wind not including Ag, in n1 2
sure acting on the component. Note, ho\vever, that this total area of openings in a wall that
live wind area should only be used in determining the receives positive external pressure, in
Cp) in Figures 207E.4-1 through 207E.4-6 and 207E.4- 111 2
:The induced wind load should be applied over the actual the sum of the areas of openings in the
~a tributary to the component being considered. building envelope (walls and roof) not
including A 0 , in 111 2
,-_or' 1nembrane roof systems, the effective \Vind area is the total area of openings in the building
~,,ea of an insulation board (or deck panel if insulation is envelope in 1112
()()( used) if the boards are fully adhered (or the membrane As gross area of the solid freestanding
1.s.adhered directly to the deck). If the insulation boards or wall or solid sign, in m 2
i1wmbrane are mechanically attached or partially adhered, a width of pressure coefficient zone, in
he effective \vind area is the area of the board or 111embrane 111
.cured by a single fastener or individual spot or row of
dhesive.

B horizontal dimension of building h mean roof height of a building or

measured nonnal to \Vind direction, in height of other structure, except that
m eave height shall be used for roof
111ean hourly wind speed factor in angle (J less than or equal to 10°, in n1
Equation 207A.9-16 from Table roof eave height at a particular wall, or
207A.9-1 the average height if the eave varies
3-s gust speed factor from Table along the wall
207A.9-1 height to top of parapet in
force coefficient to be used in 2078.6-4 and 207E.7-1
determination of wind loads for other I, intensity of turbulence
structures Equation 207 A.9-7
net pressure coefficient to be used in multipliers in Figure 207A.8-1
determination of wind loads for open obtain K,,
buildings \Vind directionality factor
external pressure coefficient to be Table 207 A.6-1
used in detennination of \Vind loads velocity pressure exposure coefficient
for buildings evaluated at height z = h
c turbulence intensity factor in K, velocity pressure exposure coefficient,
Equation 207A.9-7 from Table evaluated at height z
207A.9-1 K,, topographic factor
D diameter of a circular structure or Section 207 A.8
metnber, in 111 L horizontal diinension of a building
D' depth of protruding elements such as measured parallel to the wind
ribs and spoilers, in 111 direction, in 111
F design \Vind force for other structures, distance upwind of crest of hill or
inN escarpment in Figure 207 A.8-1 to
G gust-effect factor ,vhere the difference in ground
Gr gust-effect factor for MWFRS of elevation is half the height of the hill
flexible buildings and other structures or escarpment, in 111
(GCrl product of external pressure Lr horizontal diinension of return corne
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be for a solid freestanding wall or soli
used in detennination of \Vind loads sign from Figure 207D.4-1, in m
for rooftop structures L, integral length scale of turbulence. in'.
product of external pressure m
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be f integral length scale factor
used in detennination of \Vind loads Table 207 A.9-1, m
for buildings reduced frequency
product of the equivalent external Equation 207A.9-!4
pressure coefficient and gust-effect approximate lower bound
factor to be used in detennination of frequency (Hz) from
wind loads for MWFRS of low-rise 207A.9.2
buildings fundamental natural frequency, Hz
product of internal pressure design pressure to be used i
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be detennination of \Vind loads fo,
used in detennination of \Vind loads buildings, in Nim 2
for buildings wind pressure acting on leeward fl.le
co1nbined net pressure coefficient for in Figure 2078.4-8, in Nim 2
a parapet Pnet net design ,vind pressure
peak factor for background response Equation 207E.5-1, in Nim 2
in Equations 207 A.9-6 and 207 A.9-10 PnetlO net design wind pressure for Exposur
peak factor for resonant response in 8 at h = 10 m and I = 1. 0 frm
Equation 207A.9-10 Figure 207E.5-1, in Nim 2
peak factor for \Vind response in cotnbined net pressure on a parap~
Equations 207 A.9-6 and 207 A.9-10 from Equation 2078.4-5, in Nim2
H height of hill or escarpment in Ps net design \Vind pressure frot
Figure 207 A.8-1, in m Equation 207C.6-1, in Nim2

simplified design wind pressure for p damping ratio, percent critical for
Ps10
Exposure B at h = 10 m and buildings or other structures
I = 1.0 from Figure 207C.6- l, in € ratio of solid area to gross area for
N/m 2 solid freestanding wall, solid sign,
\Vind pressure acting on \vind\vard open sign, face of a trussed tower, or
Pw lattice structure
face in Figure 2078.4-8, in N/m 2
background response factor fro1n integral length scale power Jaw
Q exponent in Equation 207 A.9-9 from
Equation 207 A.9-8
q velocity pressure, in N/111 2 Table 207 A.9-1
velocity pressure evaluated at height adjustment factor for building height
q,.
z = h, in N/m2 and exposure from Figures. 207C.6-1
velocity pressure for internal pressure and 207E.5-1
q,
deten11ination, in N/m 2 value used in Equation 207 A. 9-15
velocity pressure at top of parapet, in (see Section 207 A.9.4)
Nhn2 e angle of plane of roof from horizontal,
velocity pressure evaluated at height z in degrees
Qz
above ground, in Nh112
R resonant response factor fro1n 207A.4 General
Equation 207A.9-12
values from Equations 207A.9-15 207A.4.1 Sign Convention
reduction factor fro1n
Equation 207 A.11-1 Positive pressure acts toward the surface and negative
R,, value from Equation 207A.9-13 pressure acts away from the surface.
s vertical di1nension of the solid
freestanding wall or solid sign from 207 A.4.2 Critical Load Condition
Figure 2070.4-1, in m
r rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs Values of external and internal pressures shall be co1nbined
v height-to-width ratio for solid sign algebraically to determine the most critical load.
v basic wind speed obtained from
Figure 207 A.5-1 A through 207 A.5- 207A.4.3 Wind Pressures Acting on Opposite Faces of
I C, in mis. The basic wind speed Each Building Surface
corresponds to a 3-s gust speed at IO
m above the ground in Exposure In the calculation of design wind loads for the MWFRS and
Category C for components and cladding for buildings, the algebraic
v, unpartitioned internal volu111e, 111 3 sum of the pressures acting on opposite faces of each
v, mean hourly wind speed at height z building surface shall be taken into account.
mis
w width of building in Figures 207E.4-3 Con11nenta1:v:
and 207E.4-5A and 207E.4-5B and
width of span in Figures 207E.4-4 and Section 207A.4.3 is includecf in the code to ensure that
207E.4-6, in m internal anti external pressures acting 011 a buihling
x distance upwind or downwind of crest surface are taken into account by deter111ining a net
in Figure 207 A.8-1, in m pressure fro1n the algebraic su111 of those pressures. For
height above ground level, in 111 additional ittforn1ation on the application of the net
equivalent height of structure, in 111 con1ponents and cladding wind 11ressure acting across a
nominal height of the atmospheric rnultilayered building envelope syste,n, including
boundary layer used in this code. air-permeable cladding, refer to Section C207E.1.5.
Values appear in Table 207A.9-1
exposure constant fro1n Table
207A.9-1
a 3-s gust-speed po\ver la\v exponent
from Table 207A.9-l
a reciprocal of a from Table 207 A. 9-1
a mean hourly wind-speed power Jaw
exponent in Equation 207 A.9-16 from
Table 207 A. 9-1
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume 1, 7th Edition, 2015
207A.5 Wind Hazard Map

2. A1ultiple ,naps ren1ove inconsistencies in the use o
207 A.5.1 Basic Wind Speed in1portance factors that actuall_v should va,:i,· ivitli
location and bet1veen tropical c_vclone-prone and
The basic wind speed, V, used in the detennination of non-tropical cyclone-prone regions for Occupanc
design \Vind loads on buildings and other structures shall Catego,:r ill, JV and V structures and acknoivlec(t;€
be determined from Figure 207 A.5-1 as follows, except as that the de,narcation betrveen tropical c:vclone a1u(:
provided in Section 207A.5.2 and 207A.5.3: 11011-tropical c:vclone 1vinds change 1vith
recurrence interval.
For Occupancy Category III, IV and V buildings and other
structures - use Figure 207 A.5-1 A. 3. The neH' n1aJJS establish u11iforn1i(v in the return'
11eriod .for the design-basis irincls, and they 1nor
For Occupancy Category II buildings and other structures clear{v convey that il?forn1ation.
- use Figure 207 A.5-IB.
4. The neH' n1aJJS, b_v providing the desig111vind SJJet!({:
For Occupancy Category I buildings and other structures direct(v, 111ore clearl.J-' i1?for1n 01v11ers and thei,;
- use Figure 207 A.5-1 C. consultants about the storn1 intensities .for ivhich
designs are pe1.forn1ed.
The \Vind shall be assu111ed to con1e frotn any horizontal
direction. The basic \Vind speed shall be increased \Vhere Selection of Retum Periods. In the development qf the~
records or experience indicate that the \Vind speeds are design wind speed map used in Section 207 NSCP 2010,);
higher than those reflected in Figure 207A.5-1. the Wind Load Subconunittee evaluated the 1vincih
itnportancefactor, lw, that had been in use since 1982.-:l
Co1111ne11ta1:v: The task co1111nittee recogni:::ed that using a uH{forni/1
value of the 1vind ilnportance factor JJrobab(v H'as notC:
This edition qf NSCP departs ji-0111 prior editions by appropriate because risk varies 11·ith location alona
0 thet-,
<
JJroviding 1vi11d ,naps that are direct~v OJJp/icable for coast.

{/::;
deter111ining pressures }Or strength £fesign approaches. _;){'
Rather than using a single ,nap H'ith ilnportance factors To detern1ine the return periods to be used in the neu::f
a1uf a loacf.factorfor each building occupanc_v category, ,napping aJJproach, the task conunittee neecfed to ,neet"'::
in this edition there are clifferent ,naps }Or d[fferent 1vith PAGASA scientists, gather historical records and)
categories of building occu11ancies. The updated ,naps evaluate representative return periotfs for ivind !J]Jeed5 ':<
are based on a neu· and 111ore co,nplete anal_vsis of determined in accordance with Section 207 NSCP 20101
tropical cyclone characteristics (Vicke1:v et al. 2008a, and earlier, u•herein deter111ination of pressures:;:
2008b and 2009) pe,formed o,-er the past 10 years. apJJropriate for strength design started n·ith 111appedJ
1vind speeds, but involve,! ,nultiplication by ilnJJortance -!
The decision to n1ove to ,nultiple-strength design ,naps factors and a 1vind load factor to achieve 11ressures that::
in conjunction 1vith a lVind load.factor o.f 1.0 instead of 1vere ap11ropriate for strength design. Further,nore, fr~
using a single ,nap used 1vith an ilnportance and a load 1vas assunzed that the variabili(v oj· the lvind speed'.!
jClctor of I. 6 relied on several factors bnportant to an don1inates the calculation of the ivincl load factor. The_;
accurate lvind specification: strength design 1vincl load, W r, is given as:
(C207A.5-1}
!. A strength design 1vi11cl speed ,nap brings the lvind
loading approach in line ivith that used.for seisn1ic
loads in that the_v both essential(v elirninate the use
of a load factor for strength design.

1.7
1.6
1.5
0
0
1.4
""
M
::,
""--
- DURST
::, 1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
1 10 100 1000 10000
GUST DURATION. sec
Figure C207 A.5-1

Maximum Speed Averaged overt s to Hourly Mean Speed
L\1,htirc CF is a bzdhling, co111ponent, or structure specific

'·1101fllcient that includes the effects of things like and from Equation C207A.5-4, the re/um period T
;:,::building height, building geo1ne11:i1. terrain, ancf gust associated 1t1ith the strength t.!esign ivilul SJJCet.f is:
{[actor as cotnputed using the procedures outlined in
_'.::)YSl~P 2010. V 50 is the 50-year return periocl design T = o. 00228 exp( 10,jwLF) (C207A.5-5)
\1rind speed. W LF is the 1,rind load factor, and / is the
t-:'irnportance jllctor. · Using the wind loadfactor of 1.6 as specified in Section
' 207 NSCP 201(), from Equation C207A.5-5 we get
tfftarting ivith the no,ninal return periocf o.f 50 years, the
"' ratio of the ivilul SJJeed for an.v return periocl to the 50-
T = 709 years, ant.I therejbre V design = V 109/-JWLF ;:::::;
tJ1e'ar return JJeriod ivind speed can be co,nputecl .fron1 V 700 / ,/WLF. Thus for Occupancy Categm:v IV
();eterka and Shahid (1998): structures, the basic ivind speed is associated it·ith a
return period o.f 700 years, or an annual exceeclance
Vr/V 50 = [0.36 + 0.11n(12T)] (C207A.5-2) probabili!V o/0.0014.
tvhere T is the re/urn period ill .vears ant.I vT is /he T- The importance.factor used in Section 207 NSCP 20!0
;\vear return period 1vi1u/ 5peed. The strength t.!esign 1vind a11ll earlier for the co1nputation <?( ivind loads .for the
::,;-_loacl, W r, occurs ·when: design of Occupancy Categmy I and II structures is
de.fined so that the no111inal 50-.vear return period non-
(C207A.5-3) troJJical cyclone ivind speed is increased to be
representative of a I 00-year return perioci value.
Fol/01ving the approach used above to estin1ate the
iThus,
resulti11g e.ffective stre11gth design return JJCriod
associated ivith a 50-year basic design SJJeed, in the case
Vr/Vs 0 = [0.36 + 0.11n(12T)] (C207A.5-4) of the I 00-.vear return periocl basic iv ind 5peed in the
non-tropical cyclone-prone regions, ive find that:
=,/WLF
T = 00228 exp[ 10(V1o0 /Vso),!Wid (C207A.5-6)

where for V 100 /V50 computedJi-om Equation C207A.5- Sin1ilar(v, if a lVind SJJeed is based upon Pa = 0.00143
4 with WLF - 1.6, we find T - 1,697 years. In the (700-:vear 111ea11 recurrence interval). there exists a
clevelopn1ent o.f Equation C207A.5-6, the tern1 3.5% probability that this speed will be equaled or
(V 100 /V 50 ) W LF replaces the W LF used in exceeded cluring a 25-year period, and a 6. 9%
Equation C207A.5-5. effective~v resulting in a higher probability of being equaled or exceeded in a 50-year
loacl .factor for Occupanc_v Catego1:v I, II ancl III period.
structures equal to W LF(V 10 0/V5 0 )2. Thus for
Occupancy Catego1:i· I and II structures, the basic ivincf So,ne JJroducts hai·e been evaluated and test rnethocls
speed is associated ivith a return JJeriocl of I, 700 ).tears, have been cfeveloped based on design 1vind speeds that
or an annual exceedance probabilitJ' of 0. 000588. are consistent ll'ith the 1111factored load effects tJ7Jically
Sirnilar~v. the 25-.vear return periocl irind SJJeed used in Allowable Stress Design. Table C207A.5-6
associated ·with OccuJJanc)' Catego1:r III. IV and V provides conversion fron1 the strength design-base,!
buildings equates to a 300-year return period 1vind cfesign H'ind 5pee,ls used in the ASCE 7-10 desig111vi11d
speed with a wind Joadfactor of 1.0. speed maps and the Section 207 NSCP 2010 design wind
speecis used in these product evaluation reports and test
JVbul S11eeds. The H'ind !1peed ,naps o.f Figure 107A.5-J ,nethods. A colunzn o.f values is also JJrovided to al/oiv
JJresent basic H'incl speecls fbr the entire archipelago of coordination with ASCE 7-93 design wind speeds.
the Philippines. The H'ind speec/s corre5pond to 3-sec
gust speeds at 10 111 above ground}Or exposure catego1:v 207A.5.2 Special Wind Regions
c.
Mountainous terrain, gorges, and special wind regions
Serviceability Wint! S11eetls. For applications of sho\vn in Figure 207 A.5- l shall be examined for unusual
serviceability, design using 1naxinuun like/_v events, or wind conditions. The authority having jurisdiction shall, if
other applications, it ,nay be desired to use 1vind SJJeeds necessary, adjust the values given in Figure 207 A.5-1 to
associated ii•ith rnean recurrence intervals other than account for higher local \Vind speeds. Such adjust,nent
those gil'en in Figures 207A.5-IA to 207A.5-IC. To shall be based on 111eteorological inforn1ation and an
accon1plish this, previous editions o..f NSCP 2010 estilnate of the basic \Vind speed obtained in accordance
provilled tables 1vith JClctors that enabled the user to with the provisions of Section 207 A.5.3.
,uljust the basic tlesign ivind SJJeed (previous/_'v having a
return perioll of50 years to 1vind speetls associated ivith Con1111entalJ':
other return periods.
Although the wind speed map of Figure 207A.5-I is valid
For ap11lications o.f serl'iceabili(v, design using for 1110St regions of the COl/11/J'.l,-', there are special region$'.
111axhn1un like/_v events, or other GJJJJlications, Appendix in iv/zich H'ilul speed a110111alies are knoH'll to exist. Sonze of
C'presents 111aps o..f11eak gust 11·iJu.l speeds at 10111 above these SJJecial regions are notetl in Figure 207A.5-l. 1Vind:i'.
ground in E.\posure C conclitions .for return periocis o.f blo1ring orer ,nountain ranges or through gorges or rive1i' ,
JI), 25, 50, and JOO years. valle_vs in these special regions can £!evelo1J speed, that ari< '
substantial/_v higher than the i·alues indicatecl on the nu.tp,-
The prohabili(v P n that the 1rincl speecl associateci 1vith 1Vhen selecting basic 1vbu.l speetl\' in these s11ecial regions,::
a certain annual probabili(v Pa lvill he equaleli or use o..f regional cli111atic clata and consultation 1rith a lvin,(,
exceetlecl at least once during an e.\JJosure period o.l n engineer or 111eteorologist is advised
years is given b_v:
It is also possible that a11on1alies in 1vind spee,is exist on a
P,, =1 (1 - Pa)" (C207A.5-7J 111icro111eteorological scale. For exa111ple, lvind SJJeecl-up
over hills a,ul escarp111e11ts is addressee/ in'
Section 207A.8. TVind speeds over conzplex terrain ,nay b~_
As an exa111JJle, (la 1vi11d speecl is basecf llJJon Pa= 0.02 better detern1inecl by H'ind-tunnel studies as clescribetl ii(
(50-.vear 111ea11 recurrence interval), there exists a Section 207F. Acijustme111s of wind speeds should be made.
probabilifv of 0.40 that this speed will be equaled or at the 1nicron1eteorological scale on the basis of 1vind;
exceedecf during a 25-year 11eriod, and a 0. 64 engineering or 1neteorological advice and used in
11robabili(v o.f being equaled or exceeded in a 50-.vear accordance ivith the 11rovisions of Section 207A.5.3 ivhen:i
JJeriod. such acljushnents are lvarranted Due to the co1nplexi(V cif
,nountainous terrain and valley gorges in f{aH'aii, there_
are to11ographic ivind speed-up effects that cannot be

solely by Figure 207A.8-I (Applied Research If 1neteorological data are used to justifJ; a 1vind speed
2001). lower than 177-lan!h 700-yrpeak gust at JO m, an analysis
ofsan1pling error is required to de111onstrate that the 1vind
Estimation of Basic Wind Speeds from record could not occur by chance. This can be
Regional Climatic Data acconzplished by shoiving that the difference beflveen
predicted speed and 177 km/h contains two to three
-areas outside tropical cyclone-prone regions, regional standarcl deviations ofsa111pling error (Silniu anti Scanlan
Jifuatic data shall only be used in lieu of the basic wind 1996). Other equivalent methods may be used
eeds given in Figure 207 A.5-1 when (I) approved
treine-value statistical-analysis procedures have been 207A.5.4 Limitation
ployed in reducing the data; and (2) the length of record,
µling error, averaging time, anen101neter height, data Tornadoes have not been considered in developing the
ity, and terrain exposure of the anemo1neter have been basic wind-speed distributions.
'.~en into account. Reduction in basic wind speed belovv
"that offigure 207 A.5-1 shall be permitted. 207 A.6 Wind Directionality
Ju tropical cyclone-prone regions, wind speeds derived The wind directionality factor, Kd, shall be determined
fi:om simulation techniques shall only be used in lieu of the from Table 207 A.6-1. This directionality factor shall only
basic wind speeds given in Figure 207 A.5-1 when be included in determining wind loads when the load
\~pproved si1nulation and extreme value statistical analysis combinations specified in Sections 2.3 and 2.4 are used for
-Procedures are usect. the design. The effect of wind directionality in determining
wind loads in accordance with Section 207F shall be based
'fll-"areas outside tropical cyclone-prone regions, \Vhen the on an analysis for wind speeds that conforms to the
basic wind speed is estimated from regional climatic data, requirements of Section 207 A.5.3.
tlie basic wind speed shall not be less than the wind speed
JfSS:ociated with the specified mean recurrence interval, and Co11unenta1y:
the estimate shall be adjusted for equivalence to a 3-s gust
ind speed at l Om above ground in Exposure C. The data The wind load/actor 1.3 in ASCE 7-95 included a "wind
'(lflalysis shall be perfonned in accordance \Vith this section. directionality factor" of 0.85 (Ellingwood 1981 and
Ellingwood et al. 1982). This factor accounts for two
effects: (1) The reduced probability of maximum winds
coming ji"Oln any given direction· and (2) the reduced
using regional clbnatic data in accordance 1vith the probabili(y of the 111axinuan pressure coefficient occurring
)ions q(Section 207A.5.3 and in lieu a/the basic wind for an;, given 1-vind direction. The lVind directionalityfactor
given in Figure 207A.5-1, the user is cautione,l that (identified as Kd in the code) is tabulated in Table 207A.6-
's_t fiu.:tors, velocity pressure exposure coefficients, l for c!ifferent structure types. As neiv research beconzes
<!}feet factors, pressure coefficients, and force available, this factor can be directly modified. Values for
cients qf this code are intended for use with the 3-s the factor were establishedji·om references in the literature
peed at I Om above ground in open counliy. It is ancl collective co1111nitteejuclg111e11t. The Kd value for round
1y, therefore, that regional clifnatic data based on chifnneys, tanks, and sirnilar structures is given as 0.95 in
rent averaging tin-1e, .for exa111ple, hour~v 1nean or recog11ition of the fact that the ltiind load resistance ,nay
mile, be adjusted to reflect peak gust speed, at ]Om not be exactly the sa111e in all directions as inzplied by a
,,grountl in open counhJ'. value of 1.0. A value o/0.85 might be more appropriate if
a triangular trussed fi·a,ne is shrouded in a round cover. A
'fig local data. it should be emphasized that sampling value of 1.0 might be more appropriate for a round
. can lead to large uncertainties in SJJecification ofthe chhnney having a lateral load resistance equal in all
peecl Satnpling errors are the errors associated ivith directions. The designer is cautioned by the footnote to
ited size of the climatological data samples (years Table 207A. 6-1 and the statement in Section 207A.6, where
cord. of annual extremes). It is possible to have a reference is made to the fact that this factor is on!y to be
error in lVind speed at an individual station ivith a used in conjunction 1vith the load con1binations specified
length of 30 years. While local records of limited in Sections 2.3 and 2.4 ofASCE 7-10.
must be used to define wind speeds in special
care and conservatisnz should be exercised in

207A.7 Exposure coefficient actual(v decreases (i.e., the sea s111:face

beco111es aeroc{vnan1ica!Zv s111oother) as the 1vind speecl
For each wind direction considered, the up,vind exposure increases fi1rther (Powell et al. 2003) or as the tropical
shall be based on ground surface roughness that is cyclone radius decreases (Vicke1y et al. 2008b). The
detennined fron1 natural topography, vegetation, and consequences of these studies are that the sutface
constructed facilities. roughness over the ocean in a tropical cyclone is
consistent ivith that of exposure D rather than exposure
("on1nu.>nta1:i·:
C. Consequent(v, the use o.f e:rposure D along the
tropical c,vclone coastline is non1 required.
The descriptions of the siaface roughness categories
anll e.,11osure categories in Section 207A. 7 hai,e been
For Exposure B the tabulated values of Kz correspond
expressetl as.far as possible in easi~v understood ·verbal
to Zo - 0.2 111, which is be/ow the (vpical value qf0.3 111,
tern1s that are strfficientZ,v precise for 1110s! practical
H'hereas .for Exposures C and D they correspond to the
applications. Up1vint.i szaface roughness conditions
required for Exposures B and D are shoH-'n
!)-pica! value o.r Zo, The reason for the d!fference in
Exposure B is that this catego,y o.f terrain, n·hich is
schematical!v in Figures C207A. 7-1 and C207A. 7-2,
applicable to suburban areas, often contains open
respective(v. For cases lvhere the des~gner ivishes to
patches, such as higlnt:a)/S, JJarking lots, and pll~ving
1nake a n1ore detailed assesstnent of the szojl1ce
fields. These cause local increases in the lvind !Jpeeds at
roughness categoJJ' anll exposure catego1:i', the
their eclges. By using an exposure coefficient
_fol/01,ving 1nore 111athe1natical description is o.fferelf.(or
corres1Jo1uling to a lol-l'er than l)pical value ofz 0 , so1ne
guidance (lr1-ri11 2006). The grouncl su,.face roughness is
allo1,vance is ,nade for this. The alternative H'ould be to
best 1neasured in tern1s ofa roughness length para1neter
introduce a 11un1ber of exceptions to use of Exposure B
callee/ z 0 . Each of the s1u:face roughness categories B
in suburban areas, 1vhich v.-'ould add an undesirable
through D correspond to a range of values of thL\'
/ei·el of complexity.
paranieter, as does the e\'en rougher catego1:v A used in
previous versions o.f the code in heavi~v built-up urban
The value o.fz 0 .for a particular terrain can be estbnated
areas but ren1ovecl in the present edition. The range of
.fl·orn the (lpical dilnensions oj· szuface roughness
z 0 in 1neters (111) .for each terrain catego,:i,• is gi'ven in
ele111e11ts and their spacing on the ground area using all
Table C207A. 7-1. Exposure A has beeu included in
empirical relationship, due to Lettau (1969), which is:
Table (~207A. 7-1 as a reference that ,na_v be use_ful 1,vhen
using the fVind Tunnel Procedure. Further if!for111ation
Sob
vn values oj'z0 in different types o,(terrain can be.found z 0 = O.SH 0 b - (C207A.7-l)
in Simiu and Scanlan (1996) and Table C207A.7-2 Aob
baser.I on Davenport et al. (2000) and fVieringa et al.
(2001). The roughness classijirntions in Table C207A.7- Hob the average height of the roughness in
2 are not intended to replace the use oj' e.\posure the UJJV.-'ind terrain
categories as required in the co,..le .for structural design Sob the average vertical frontal area per
pu17Joses. Holvever, the terrain roughness obstructioll JJresented to the 1rind
classifications in Table C207A. 7-2 may be related to Aob the average area o.f ground occupier.I by
ASCE 7 exposure categories b.v con1JJaring z 0 values each obstntction, inclucliug the OJJCll
between Table C207A. 7-1 and C207A.7-2. For example, area surrounding it
the z 0 values for Classes 3 and 4 in Table C207A. 7-2
.fall 1,vithin the range o.f z 0 values .for E.\posure C in Vertical fi'ontal area is dqfined as the area of the
Table C207A. 7-1. Similar!v. the z 0 values.for Classes 5 projection of the obstruction onto a vertical plane
and 6 in Table C207A.7-2 fi11/ within the range ofz 0 nor,nal to the 1,vi,u/ r.lirection. The area Sob 1na:v be
values/or Exposure Bin Table C207A.7-l. esthnated l~v sununing the aJ>proxilnate vertical frontal
areas of all obstructions 1vithin a selected area of
Research described in Powell et al. (2003), Donelan et upwind fetch and dividing the sum by the number of
al. (2004). and Vicke,,· el al. (2008b) showed that the obstructions in the area. The average height Hob n1a,v
drag coefficient over the ocean in high H'inds in tropical be estilnated in a si111ilar H'a.v by averaging the
cyclones did not continue to increase 1vith increasing itulividual heights rather than using the .fi·ontal areas.
wind speed as previous!v believed (e.g., Powell 1980). Likeivise Aob 1na,.v be estinrated by dividing the size o._f
These sllulies sho1,ved that the sea s111face drag the selected area o.f up1vi11d fetch by the nun1ber of
coefficient, anti hence the aerodynan1ic roughness of the obstructions in it.
ocean, reached a ,naxinuun at 1nean n·ind speeds of
about 30111/s. There is so111e evidence that the drag

deter111ination is defined as an "open JJatch. "An open

As an exa1nple, [(the upu indfetch consists JJriJnarily of
1 patch is defined as an opening greater than or equal to
single fa111i(v hornes ivith t;,pical height Hob = 6111, approxilnately 50 111 on each side (i.e., greater than
vertical_frontal area (including sonze trees on each lot) 50 m by 50 111). Openings smaller than this need not be
of 100111 2• and ground area per home of 1,000111 2, then considered in the deter111inatio11 of the exposure
zo is calculated to be z 0 = 0.5 x 20 x 100/1,000 = category.
0.3n1, ivhichjG!ls into exposure category B according to
Table C207A. 7-1. The ejject of open patches ofswface roughness C or D
on the use of exposure category B is sho1vn pictorially
Trees and bushes are porous and are defor111ed b_v in Figures C207A.7-3 and C207A. 7-4. Note that the plan
strong H'inds, ivhich relfuce their effective frontal areas location of any open patch may have a different effect
(ESDU. 1993). For con[fers and other evergreens 110 for differelll wind directions.
,nore than 50 percent of their gross frontal area can be
taken to be effective in obstructing the lvind For Aerial photographs, representative of each exposure
deciduous trees and bushes no rnore than 15 percent of l)pe, are included in the co1n1nenta1}' to aid the user in
their gross frontal area can be taken to be effective in establishing the proper exposure for a given site.
obstructing the wind. Gross fi'ontal area is d~fined in Obvious(v, the proJJer assessn1ent of exposure is a
this context as the projection onto a vertical plane ,natter of good engineering judgrnenl. This fact is
(normal to the wind) of the area enclosed by the particular(v true in light of the possibility that the
envelope o,,fthe tree or bush. exposure could change in one or ,nore lvind directions
due to firture de111olition and/or developn1ent.
Ho (j992) estimated that the majority of buildings
;'_-lj;erhaps as 111uch as 60 percent to 80 percent) have an
'.{)xq1osure category corresponding to Exposure B. While 207A.7.1 Wind Directions and Sectors
~'.-the relative(v sin1JJle definition in the code ivill nor111al(v
?suffice for most practical applications, oftentimes the For each selected wind direction at which the wind loads
''<_tesigner is in need of additional i11forn1ation, are to be determined, the exposure of the building or
rparticular(v with regard to the (fleet of large openings structure shall be determined for the two upwind sectors
':{?-' clearings (e.g., large parking lots, j;·eelvays, or tree extending 45° either side of the selected wind direction.
k:flearings) in the otherwise "nor,nal" ground szu:face The exposure in these two sectors shall be determined in
v,roughness B. The following is offered as guidance for accordance with Sections 207A.7.2 and 207A.7.3, and the
<;tfrese situations: exposure whose use would result in the highest wind loads
shall be used to represent the winds from that direction.
,Ilr1ic simple definition ofExposure B given in the body of
~{t_He code, using the szaface roughness catego1y
__-~i¢J:eflnition, is sholvn pictorially in Figure C207A.7-J.
'J7;his definition applies for the swface roughness B
i:j;_gndition prevailing 800 111 uplvind ivith insufficient
""open patches" as defined in the following text to
',qualify the use ofExposure B.
, opening in the szuface roughness B large enough to

e a significant effect on the exposure catego,}1

.
.-;,
.~
Notes: Not
1. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at 10 m above ground for Exposure C category. I.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted. 2.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area. 3.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions. 4.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 15% probability of exceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probability = 0.00333, MRI = 300 years). s.
6. Results are from PAGASA. 6.
Figure 207A.5-lA Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category III, IV and V Buildings and Other Structures

CHAPTER 2- Minimum Design Loads 2-39
.;
Notes:
I. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at IO m above ground for Exposure C category.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area.
). 4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 7% probability of exceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probabil ity= 0.00143, MR1 = 700 years).
6. Results are from PAGASA.
Figure 207A.5- lB Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category II Buildings and Other Structures
,:.
,
...
Cl
-ti
'- ~
Notes:
l. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at l Om above ground for Exposure C category.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 3% probability of exceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probability= 0.000588, MRI = 1700
years).
6. Results are from PAGASA.
Figure 207A.5-1C Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category I Buildings and Other Structures

BUILDING OR
WIND F h,;; 18m, d1 e: 450 m OTHER STRUCTURE
For h > 18m, d, e: greater of 790 m or 20h
/
ANY ROUGHNESS ROUGHNESS B T h ANY ROUGHNESS
Figure C2UIA.7-I
Upwind Surface Roughness Conditions Requires for Exposure B.
BUILDING OR
WIND d, e: greater of 1500 m or 20h OTHER STRUCTURE
ANY ROUGHNESS ROUGHNESSD ANY ROUGHNESS
(a)
BUILDING OR
d1 2: greater of 790 m or 20h, and
WIND OTHER STRUCTURE
d 2 ,;; greater of 180 m or 20h
ANY ROUGHNESS ROUGHNESSD ROUGHNESS BAND/OR C ANY ROUGHNESS

h
----11-(--->I
(b)
Figure C207A.7-2
Upwind Surface Roughness Conditions Required for Exposure D, for the Cases with
(a) Surface Roughness D Immediately Upwind of the Building, and (b) Surface Roughness Band/or C Immediately
Upwind of the Building

Table 207 A.6-1

Wind Directionality Factor, l(d
Structure Type Directionality Factor Kd*
Buildings
Main Wind Force Resisting System 0.85
Components and Cladding 0.85
Arched Roofs 0.85
Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures

Square 0.90
Hexagonal 0.95
Round 0.95
Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid

0.85
Freestanding and Attached Signs
Open Signs and Lattice Framework 0.85
Trussed Towers
Triangular, square, rectangular 0.85
All other cross sections 0.95
*Directiouality Factor Kd has been calibrated 1vith con1bi11atio11s of loads

specified in Section 203. This factor shall only be applied when used in
conjunction 1vith load co,nbinations SJJecified in Sections 203.3 and 203.4.
207A.7.2 Surface Roughness Categories 207A.7.3 Exposure Categories
A ground Surface Roughness within each 45° sector shall Exposure B: For buildings with a mean roof height of less
be determined for a distance upwind of the site as defined than or equal to 9 m, Exposure B shall apply where the
in Section 207 A. 7.3 from the categories defined in the ground surface roughness, as defined by Surface
following text, for the purpose of assigning an exposure Roughness B, prevails in the upwind direction for a
category as defined in Section 207A.7.3. distance greater than 450 m. For buildings with a mean roof
height greater than 9 m, Exposure B shall apply where
Surface Roughness B: Urban and suburban areas, wooded Surface Roughness B prevails in the upwind direction for
areas, or other terrain with nu1nerous closely spaced a distance greater than 790 m or 20 times the height of the
obstructions having the size of single-family dwellings or building, whichever is greater.
larger.
Exposure C: Exposure C shall apply for all cases where
Surface Roughness C: Open terrain with scattered Exposures B or D do not apply.
obstructions having heights generally less than 9 m. This
category includes flat open country and grasslands. Exposure D: Exposure D shall apply where the ground
surface roughness, as defined by Surface Roughness D,
Surface Roughness D: Flat, unobstructed areas and water prevails in the upwind direction for a distance greater than
surfaces. This category includes smooth mud flats, salt 1500 m or 20 times the building height, whichever is
flats, and unbroken ice. greater. Exposure D shall also apply where the ground
surface roughness itnmediately upwind of the site is
exposure B or C, and the site is within a distance of 180 m
or 20 times the building height, whichever is greater, from

n Exposure D condition as defined 111 the previous of sectors one or hvo is used to detertnine full x and y
loading individually, and then 75 percent a/these load,
are to be aJJJJlied in each direction at the san1e tin1e
f'Qr a site located in the transition zone bet\veen exposure according to the requirements of Section 207B.4.6 and
'3iitegories. the category resulting in the largest wind forces Figure 207B.4-8. The procedure defined in this section
for detern1ining 1,vind loads in each design direction is
'shall be used. not to be confused 1vith the detern1ination of the lVind
directionality factor K d· The K dfactor determinedfiwn
Section 207A.6 and Table 207A.6-l applies ji.,r all
_f1nediate ex11osure betiveen the preceding design wind directions. See Section C207A. 6.
'i\€s:f,S pernzitte,l in a transition zone proviclecl that it
, led by a rational'analysis 1nethod clefinecl in the Wind loads for cladding and low-rise buildings elements
literature, are deter111inecl using the uptvind exposure for the single
siujGce roughness in one of the eight sectors of
'i07A.7.4 Exposure Requirements Figure C207A. 7-5 that gives the highest cladding
pressures.
'/ NORTH I NORTHEAST
:«};LI)_
;}~J1e provision in Section 207A.5.1 requires that a
tt~_tructure be designed for 1,vinds fron1 all directions. A
tional procedure to deter,nine directional ,vind loads
ji>llows. Wind load for buildings using Section
I and Figures 207B.4-l, 207B.4-2 or 207B.4-3 EAST
deter111ined for eight ,vind directions at 45°
ervals. ,vith four/ailing along prin1a1:v building axes BUILDING OR
shown in Figure C207A.7-5. For each of the eight OTHER STRUCTURE
:ectlons, u11v.1ind e)q;osure is detern1i11ed for each of
45° sectors. one on each side of the ,vind direction
, The sector ,vith the exposure giving highest loads
be usecl to define ·wind loads for that direction. For
for 1,vinds fro111 the north, the exposure frorn Figure C207 A.7-5
one or eight, vvhichever gives the higher load, is Determination of Wind Loads
For ,vine/ frorn the east, the exposure fi·o1n sector from Different Directions
or three, 1,vhichever gives the highest load, is used.
1vind con1ing fi·o1n the northeast, the ,nos/ exposed
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume 1. 7th Edition, 2015

BUILDING OR OTHER
STRUCTURE
WIND
SURFACE ROUGHNESS
q
TYPES
B Cor D B Cor D B Cor D B
LENGTHOFOPEN 1
~.._m::::::::::::::_~~~../
PATCHES
X =1000 m
"OPEN PATCHES" -OPENINGS<: 50 m x 50 m

di, dz,_, d,;:,, 50 m
d 1 + dz + _+ d 1 ,,; 200 m
TOTAL LENGTH OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS B;:,, 800 m
WITHIN 1000 m OF UPWIND FETCH DISTANCE
Figure C207 A.7-3

Exposure B with Upwind Open Patches

BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE
::!30 m
OPEN PATCHES NOT

QUALIFYING FOR
WIND DIRECTION
CONSIDERED.
QUALIFYING OPEN
PATCHES FOR
WIND DIRECTION
SHOWN.
S30 m I
NOTE: ALL OPENINGS

SHOWN ARE "OPEN
PATCHES" (OPENINGS
~50mx50m)WITH
SURFACE
ROUGHNESS CORD.
50 m WIDE RADIAL LINE

IN DIRECTION OF WIND
WIND DIRECTION
BEING CONSIDERED
Figure C207A.7-4
Exposure B with Open Patches

207A.7.4.1 Directional Procedure (Section 207B) mean sea level (30.5 111 + [3.22 x JO. 7 111}) within the 3.21-
lan radit1s specified.
For each wind direction considered, wind loads for the
design of the MWFRS of enclosed and partially enclosed A wind tunnel stuc(v by Means et al. ( 1996) and observation
buildings using the Directional Procedure of Section 207B of actual wind damage has shown that the affected height
shall be based on the exposures as defined in Section His less than previously specified. Accordingly, Condition
207 A.7.3. Wind loads for the design ofopen buildings with (5) 1vas changed to 4.5 111 in Exposure C.
monoslope, pitched, or !roughed free roofs shall be based
on the exposures, as defined in Section 207A.7.3, resulting Buildings sited 011 the upper half of an isolated hill or
in the highest wind loads for any wind direction at the site. esca1p111ent n1aJ' experience significantly higher lvind
SJJeeds than buildings situated 011 lei1el ground. To account
207A. 7.4.2 Envelope Procedure (Section 207C) for these higher lvind speeds, the velocity pressure
exposure coefficients in Tables 2078.3-1, 207C.3-1,
Wind loads for the design of the MWFRS for all low-rise 207D.3-J, and 207£.3-1 are multiplied by a topographic
buildings designed using the Envelope Procedure of factor, K,,, determined by Equation 207.4.8-1. The
Section 207C shall be based on the exposure category topographic .feature (2-D ridge or esca1711nent, or 3-D
resulting in the highest \Vind loads for any \Vind direction axis.vnunetrical hill) is described b_v tH'O paran1eters, Hand
at the site. L1,. H is the height qf the hill or difference in elevation
betH'een the crest and that of the u111vind terrain. L1t is the
207 A. 7.4.3 Directional Procedure for Building distance upH'ind of the crest to lvhere the ground elevation
Appurtenances and Other Structures is equal to ha/fthe height qfthe hill. l( zt is determined/ram
(Section 2070) three ,nultipliers, K 1 , K 2 , and K 3 , 1rhiclz are obtainellfron1
Figure 207.4.8-1, respective(v. 1(1 is related to the shape
Wind loads for the design of building appurtenances (such ofthe topographic feature and the 111axinnun speed-up near
as rooftop structures and equip1nent) and other structures the crest, K 2 accounts for the reduction in speed-up 1vith
(such as solid freestanding \Valls and freestanding signs, distance up1vind or dolvnvvind of the crest, and K 3
chi111neys, tanks, open signs, lattice fra1ne\vorks, and accounts for the reduction in speed-up 1vith height above
trussed towers) as specified in Section 2070 shall be based the local ground s111face.
on the appropriate exposure for each wind direction
considered. The multipliers listed in Figure 207.4.8-1 are based on the
asst11nption that the 1vind approaches the hill along the
207A.7.4.4 Components and Cladding (Section 207E) direction of111axinuan slope, causing the greatest SJJeed-up
near the crest. The average 111axbnun1 up1l'ind slope of the
Design wind pressures for components and cladding shall hill is a11proxilnately H /2L1t, and 1neasuren1ents have
be based on the exposure category resulting in the highest shown that hills with slopes of less than about
wind loads for any wind direction at the site. 0.10 (H/L1, < 0.20) are unlike(v to produce sign//icant
speed-up of the wind. For values of H / L1, > 0.5 the
207 A.8 Topographic Effects speed-up effect is assumed to be independent ofslope. The
!lpeed-uJJ principal(v affects the 1nea11 1vind speed rather
Conunenta,r: than the anzplitude of the turbulent .fluctuations, and this
fact has been accou!ltetf_(or in the values o.f K 1 , K 2 . and
As an aid to the designer, this section ivas reivritte11 in K 3 given in Figure 207.4.8-1. Therefore, values qf Kz,
ASCE 7-98 to specify when topographic effects need to be obtained Ji-om Figure 207.4.8-1 are intended for use with
apJJ!ied to a particular structure rather than 1vhen they do veloci(v 11ressure exposure coefficients, Kh and Kz, 1vhich
not as in the previous version. In an effort to exclude are based Oil gust speeds.
situations 1vhere little or no topographic effect exists,
Condition (2) was added to include the fact that the It is not the intent a/Section 207.4.8 to address the general
topographic feature should JJrotrude significant~v above case of vv·ind.fiou' over hilly or co111plex terrain for ivhiclz
(b.v a.factor of hvo or 1nore) upn:ind terrain features be.fore engineering judg111ent, expert ad1•ice, or the Wint! Tunnel
it becon1es a factor. For exan1ple, if a significant upn1i11d Procedure as described in Section 207F ,na.v be required.
terrain feature has a height of 10 ,n above its base elevation Background material on topographic speed-up effects may
and has a top elevation of 30 n1 above 1nean sea level then be found in the literature (Jackson and Hunt 1975, Lemelin
the topographic feature (hill, ridge, or escmpment) must et al. 1988, and Walmsl~v et al. 1986).
have at least the H specified and extend to elevation 52 ,n

-The designer is cautioned that, at present, the code 2. The hill, ridge, or escarpment protrudes above the
contains no provision for vertical rvind speed-up because height of upwind terrain features within a 3.2-km
of a topographic effect, even though this plze1101nenon is radius in any quadrant by a factor of t\vo or more.
kno1vn to exist an(..f can cause adclitional uplift on roofs.
Additional research is required to quantifj, this effect 3. The structure is located as shown in Figure 207 A.8-1
be.fore it can be incorporated into the code. in the upper one-halfof a hill or ridge or near the crest
of an escarpn1ent.
207A.8.l Wind Speed-Up over Hills, Ridges, and
Escarpments 4. H/L1, ~ O.Z.
Wind speed-up effects at isolated hills, ridges, and 5. H is greater than or equal to 4.5 m for Exposure C and
escarp1nents constituting abrupt changes in the general D and 18 m for Exposure B.
topography, located in any exposure category, shall be
included in the design when buildings and other site 207 A.8.2 Topographic Factor
conditions and locations of structures 1neet all of the
follo\ving conditions: The wind speed-up effect shall be included in the
calculation of design wind loads by using the factor Kz,:
!. The hill, ridge, or escarpment is isolated and
unobstructed upwind by other similar topographic
features of comparable height for l 00 times the height Kz, = (1 + K1 + 1{2 + K,) 2 (207 A.8-1)
of the topographic feature (1008) or 3.2 km,
\Vhichever is less. This distance shall be n1easured where K 1, K 2 , and K 3 are given in Figure 207A.8-l.
horizontally from the point at which the height H of If site conditions and locations of structures do not meet all
the hill, ridge, or escarpment is detennined. the conditions specified in Section 207 A.8.1 then
Kz, = 1. 0.
Y(.)
ESCARPMENT 2-D RIDGE OR 3-D AXISYMMETRICAL HILL
Figure 207 A.8-1

Topographic Factor, Kz,

Table 207 A.8-1

Topographic Multipliers for Exposure C
K, Multiolier K, Multiolier K, Multiolier

3-D All 3-D
H/L,, 2-D 2-D x/L,, 2-D z/L,, 2-D 2-D
Axisym. Other Axisym.
Ridge Escarp. Escarp. Ridge Escarp.
Hill Cases Hill
0.20 0.29 0.17 0.21 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26 0.50 0.88 0.67 0.10 0.74 0.78 0.67
0.30 0.43 0.26 0.32 1.00 0.75 0.33 0.20 0.55 0.61 0.45
0.35 0.51 0.30 0.37 I.SO 0.63 0.00 0.30 0.41 0.47 0.30
0.40 0.58 0.34 0.42 2.00 0.50 0.00 0.40 0.30 0.37 0.20
0.45 0.65 0.38 0.47 2.50 0.38 0.00 0.50 0.22 0.29 0.14
0.50 0.72 0.43 0.53 3.00 0.25 0.00 0.60 0.17 0.22 0.09
3.50 0.13 0.00 0.70 0.12 0.17 0.06
4.00 0.00 0.00 0.80 0.09 0.14 0.04
0.90 0.07 0.11 0.03
1.00 0.05 0.08 0.02
I.SO 0.01 0.02 0.00
2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
1Vores:
1. For values of H / L1i, x/ L1i and z/ L1z other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
2. For!!...> 0.50, assume!!...= 0. 50 for evaluating K 1 and substitute ZH for L11 for evaluating K 2 and K 3.
L1, lh
3. Multipliers arc based on the assumption that wind approaches the hill or escarpment along the direction ofmaxinu1m slope.
4. Notation:
H Height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain, in meters.

L,, Distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment, in meters.
K1 Factor to account for shape of topographic feature and maximum speed-up effect
K, Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with distance upwind or downwind of crest.
K, Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with height above local terrain.
x Distance (upwind or downwind) fro1n the crest to the building site, in meters.
z Height above ground surface at building site, in meters.
µ Horizontal attenuation factor.
y Height attenuation factor.
Equations:
Kzt = (1 +Ki+ 1<2 + /(3) 2
K 1 determined frotn table below
K2 = (1 - .!c!.)
Jllh
/(
3
= e-yz/L1,
K /(H/L )
Hill Shape Ex osure y Upwind Do,vn,vind
B c D of Crest of Crest
2-dimensional ridges
( or valleys with negative) 1.30 1.45 1.55 3.00 I.SO 1.50
Hin Ki/(H/L,,)
2-diinensional escarp1nents 0.75 0.85 0.95 2.50 I.SO 4.00
3-dimensional axisy111metrical hill 0.95 I.OS 1.15 4.00 1.50 I.SO
Figure 207 A.8-2

Parameters for Speed-Up Over Hills and Escarpments

207A.9 Gust Effects <f>(z) thefimdamental model shape

(z/h)<
C'o1n1nenta1:i·: ( the mode exponent
p air density
NSCP 2001 contains a single gust effect factor of0.85 Cfx 1nean along-\vind force coefficient
fiw rigid buildings. As an option, the designer can 111 1 modal 111ass
/nco,porate specific features of the ivind environrnent
and building size to 1nore accurate(v calculate a gust f'µ(z)<f> 2 (z)dz
effect factor. One such JJrocedure is located in the bod.v
of the standard (Solari 1993a and 1993b). A procedure µ(z) mass per unit height
is also includedfor calculating the gust ejfectfactorfor K (1. 65)a /(a+ ( + 1)
flexible structures. The rigid structure gust factor is O
percent to JO percent lolver than the sbnple, but and Vz is the 3-s gust speed at height Z. This ca11 be
conservative. value of0.85 per111itted in the code ivithout =
evaluated by I\ b(z/33) 11 V, where Vis the 3-s gust
calculation. The procedures for both rigid and flexible speed in Exposure Cat the reference height (obtained
structures (I) provide a superior n1odel for flexible .fi'0/11 Figure 207A.5-I); b and a
are given in
structures that disJJlaJ:s the peak.factors gQ and gR and Table 207A.9-I.
(2) cause the.flexible structure ·value to n1atch the rigid
structure as resonance is renzoved A designer isji·ee to RMS A/011g-Wi11d Acceleration. The rms along-wind
use any other rational procedure in the approved acceleration a,(z) as a fimction of height above the
literature, as statecl in Section 207A.9.5. ground szaface is given by:
The gust effect factor accounts for the loading e.ffects in

the along-lvind direction due to 1vind turbulence- a.,, (z ) = 0. 85<f>(z)pBhCrxfri
m,
I,KR
structure interaction. It also accounts for along-ivind
loading effects due to d_vnan1ic a1n1;lificationforflexible
, huihfings and structures. It does 1101 include allo1vances (C207A.9-2)
--for across-ivind loading effect.,;;, vortex shedding,
instabili(v due to galloping or flutter, or t~v11a111ic ivhere Vz is the 111ean hour{v lvhul speecl at height Z. 111/s:
torsional effects. For structures susceptible to loading
q[fects that are not accounted for in the gust ~fleet
- z )ii
fc1ctor, infor111atio11 shouhf be obtainetlj,·0111 recog11izef} v, = -(
b 33 V (C207A.9-3)
/literature (Karee,n 1992 and 1985, Gurley and Kareen1
./993, Solari 1993a and 1993b, and Kareem and Smith
where band a are defined in Table 207A. 9-1.
1994) or.fi'O!n wind tunnel tests.
A-fll.t·bnu111 Alo11g-JVi11d Acceleration. The 111axiuuo11
Along-Wind Response. Based on the preceding
alo11g-1vind acceleration as a function of height above
definition ~f the gust effect factor, predictions of along
the ground sz11face is given bJ,:
1viJul response, for exa111ple, ,naxilnun1 displacen1ent,
root-n1ean-square (r1ns), and JJeak acceleration, can be
1nade. These response con1ponents are needed for XmaxCz) = g,a,(z) (C207A. 9-4)
survivabilitv and serviceabilitv lhnit states. In the
0.5772
'·follolving, ;xpressions for evall~ating these along-tvind g, = ,./2 !n(n1 T) + -o==== (C207A.9-5)
response co1npo11ents are given. ,./Z ln(n 1 T)
~ftLti111111n Along-JVind Displace111e11t. The ,naxinuun
lvhere T = the length of tilne over lvhich the 1ninitn1u11
\.'along-1vi11d displacenzent X 1nax(z) as a fz111ctio11 of
acceleration is con1puted, usually taken to be 3, 600 s to
height above the grozuul su,face is given b.v:
reJJresent 1 hour.
Approxbnate Fundan1ental Frequency. To esthnate the

</>(z)pBhCrxfri KG d.v11arnic response of structures, kno1vleclge of the
(C207A. 9-1 J
2m 1 (2mi 1 ) 2 fimdamental ji-equency (lowest natural fi'equency) ofthe
structure is essential. This value 1voulcl also assist in
where detern1ining if the dynan1ic response estin1ates are
necessa,~v. Most co1nputer codes used in the ana(vsis of
structures -i,,vould JJrovide estilnates of the natural of the building is ,nost in1portant; hence the height.;
.frequencies of the structure being ana~v=et.i. Ho1rever, 1veighted average is appropriate. This 111ethod is an
.for the preU1ni1u.11:i' design stages son1e en1pirical appropriate first-order equation .for a<.ldressing
relationships .for building period Ta (Ta = 1/n1 ) are buihlings ivith setbacks. Explicit calculation o.f gust
available in the earthquake chapters of ASCE 7. effect .factor per the other n1ethods given in Section
HoH·ever, it is noteH'Orthy that these expressions are ]07A. 9 can still be pe1formed.
based oil reco1111nendations .for earthquake design 1vith
inherent bias toirard higher estin1ates of.funda,nental Observationfron1 lvi11d tunnel testing ofbuildings 1vhere ,
frequencies (Goel and Chopra 1997 and 1998). For fi'equency is calculated using ana(vsis softivare reveals ;
irind design applications these values n1ay be the fol/01ving expression .for.frequenc,v. appropriate .for
unconservative because an estin1ated frequenc:v higher buildings less than about 120 m in height, applicable to
than the actual frequency lvoulcl yield loiver values o.f all buildings in steel or concrete:
the gust effect factor anti conconzitant~v a loH1er design
lvind JJressure. Ho1vever, Goel and Chopra (1997 and
1998) also cite lower bound estimates qffrequeucy that n1 = 100 / H (111) average value (C207A. 9-6)
are n1ore suited for use in 1vind applications. These
!01rer-bound exJJressions are nolv gi"ven in Section
207A.9.2; graphs of these expressions are shon•n in n 1 = 7 5 / H (111) lower bound value (C207A.9-7)
Figure C207A. 9-1. Because these expressions are based
on regular buildings, lhnitations based on height and
slenderness are required. The effective length Leff, uses
a height-weighted average qf the along-wind length of
the building for slenderness evaluation. The top JJortion
100
I
75
I
- -E<1uation 207A.9-2:22.2/H"0.8
60
\ ---·Equ:1tion 207A.9-3:43.5/H"0.9
\\ --Equlltion 207A.9-4:75!1-1
\ ~
' ''
•}
'
\ '"',I'' r-. r-
h
15 ' ,.
'• '• i"'i,...
..
r-. • ,.. 1-• •• .. ~
- .... -
••
0
0.000 0.500 I.000 1.500 2.000 2.500
Approximate Natural Frequency (hertz)
Figure C207 A. 9-1

Equations for Approximate Natural Frequency vs. Building Height

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-S·J
C207A. 9-7 for the lower bound value is

/Y)1,,ovided in Section 207A. 9.2. n1 = [..l/(2rrh2 )h/(EI/m) (C207A.9-12)
iinMa•d "'" fi11/-sc,1/emeasurements ofbuildings under the where h is the height, and E, I, and m are calculated
1-vind, the fo!lolving expression has been for the cross-section at the base. ,l depends on the wall
!.col·'ovos,,d for wind applications (Zhou and Kareem thicknesses at the tip and base, et and eb, and e.x.ternal
Zhou, Kijewski, and Kareem 2002): dia111eter at the tip and base, dt an1,i db, according to the
followingformula:
f,, 1 =150/H (C207A. 9-8)
-4d')] [ 6. 65 ]
fi-eqmmcy expression is based on older buildings ,l = [1. 9exp (<4 + O.
9
+ (!;)°"666
overestilnates the fi·equency conunon in U.S.
?c,ms.tru,ctilm for smaller buildings less than 120 m in
but becornes ,nore accurate for tall buildings (C207A.9-13)
IaPP,,·h,rthan 120 min height. The Australian and New
cZ<w/tmdStandl1rdAS.!N2'.S 1170.2, Eurocode ENVJ991- Equation C207A.9-12 reduces to Equation C207A.9-11
Hong Kong Code of Practice 011 Wind Effects for unifor111 1nasts. For fi·ee-standing lattice to1vers
tr2•11n,11 and others have adopted Equation C207A. 9-8 (1vithout added ancillaries such as antennas or lighting
bu,ildzng types and all heights. frames) (Standards Australia 1994):
;{Jj'ec,mt studies in Japan involving a suite of buildings

loiv-a,nplitude e~Ycitations have led to the
n1 = 150ow./h2 (C207A.9-14)
//fi1/lc1winr! expressions for natural fi·equencies of

(bu•ildz'ngs (Sataka et al. 2003): 1vhere w a is the average 1vidth of the sh1rcture in 1n and
h is tower height. An alternative formula for la/lice
=220 / H (m)(concrete buildings) (C207A. 9-9) towers (with added ancillaries) (Wya/11984) is:
= 164/H(m) (steel buildings) (C207A.9-JO) 111-

- (LN)2/3
-
(Wb)l/2
- (C207A. 9-15)
H H
e.n,re,"i<ms based on Japanese built.lings result in rvhere wb = to1ver base 1vhlth an,i LN = 270 111 for
I2/i1'f!iu,r estimates than those obtainedfi-om the square base to1vers, or 230111for triangular base torvers.
expression given in Equations C207,,L9-6
C207A. 9-8, particularly since the Japanese Structural Da,nping. Structural tiarnping is a 1neasure
set has li1nited observations .for the n1ore flexible ofenergy dissipation in a vibrating structure that results
+;~bf;:'.%~!;,,
I(
:s,e11sitive to 1vind effects and Japanese
0 1 tends to be stiffer.
in bringing the structure to a quiescent state. The
damping is defined as the ratio of the energy dissipated
in one oscillatio11 cycle to the 111axinn11n an1ount of
or poles ofun{for,n cross-section energy in the structure in that cycle. There are as ,nany
bending action dominates): structural da1nping 111echanis111s as there are ,nodes o.f
converting nzechanical energy into heat. The 111ost
(C207A.9-J I) bnportant 111echanisn1s are 1naterial da1nping and
inte,.facial damping.
El is the bending stiffizess ofthe section andm is In engineering practice, the danzping 111echanis1n is
Wmc1.rn'unit height. (This formula may be used for often approxirnateci as viscous da111ping because it leads
1vith a slight taper, using average value o.fEI and to a linear equation of nzotion. This darnping nzeasure,
(ECCS 1978). in ter,ns of the da1nping ratio1 is usually assigned based
on the construction rnaterial, for exa,nple, steel or
concrete. The calculation of dynamic load effects
requires dan-1ping ratio as an input. In ·wind
applications, dan1ping ratios of 1 percent and 2 percent
are (vpically used in the United States for steel and
concrete buildings at serviceability levels, respectively,
National Structural Cade of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
1\'hi/e ISO ( 1997) suggests I percent and 1.5 percent for earthquake engineering, is used/or the ivind loads, as it
steel anc:l concrete, res11ective(v. Da111ping values for is less sensitive to deviations fi·onz a linear ,node shape
steel su1111ort structures .for signs, chilnneys, and torvers ivhile still providing a gust effect factor generally equal
,nay be 111uch lower than buildings and ,nay fall in the to the gust factor calculated by the Section 207 NSCP
range qf0.15 11ercent to 0.5 J?ercent. Da,nping values of 2010 standard. This equivalence occurs on(v for
special structures like steel stacks can be as lo1v as 0.2 structures 1vith linear ,node shape and unifornz 1nass
percent to 0. 6 percent and 0.3 percent to 1.0 percent for clistribution, assz11nptio11s tacitl_v ilnplied in the previous
unlinet1 and linetl steel chilnne.vs, respectively (ASME formulation ofthe gust effect/actor, and thereby permits
1992 and CIC/ND /999). These values may provide a s1nooth transition .fi·on1 the existing procedure to the
so111e guitlance .for design. Da,nping levels useti i111t•ind forn1ulation suggestetl here. For a 111ore detailed
load applications are s,naller than the 5 percent discussion on this ivind loading procedure, see ISO
ckunping ratios conunon in seisn1ic applicatio11s because ( I 997) and Sat aka et al. (2003 ).
buihlings subjected lo n.'intl loads respond essential~v
elastical~v lVhereas buildings subjected to design level Along-Wind Equivalent Static Wind Loading.
earthquakes respond inelastical(v at higher da1nping The equivalent static ivind loading for the 1nean.
levels. background, and resonant co,nponents is obtained using
(
the procedure outlined in the following text.
)
Because the level of structural response in the
serviceabili(v and survivability states is d(fferent, the lvfean 11.Jfnd load co,nponent P1 at the ]th floor level is
dan11,ing values associatet.l ivith these states 111a.v differ. given by:
Further, ,iue to the nzunber of 1nechanis111s responsible
.for dan1ping, the lilnitetl fit!l-scale data ,nantfest a (C207A.9-/6)
dependence on/actors such as ,naterial, height. and (vpe
ofstructural s.vstern and foundation. The Co1111nittee on ,vhere
Dan1J1ing o.fthe Architectural Institute ofJapan suggests
j = floor level
ci(fferent da111ping values for these states based on a
Zj height qf the ]ti' floor above the ground
large da11111ing database described in Sataka et al.
(2003). level
qi = velocity pressure at height z 1
In addition to structural tfa,nping, aerodyna,nic er external pressztre coej]icient
darnping ,nay be experienced b.v a structure oscillating G 0. 925(1 + 1. 7 Bvl,)- 1 is the gust
in air. In general, the aerodynarnic dan1ping velocity factor
contribution is quite sn1all con1pared to the structural
Peak background lvind load co111ponent PBf at the ]tit
da,nping, ant.l it is positive in lo1v to 1noderate ivind
.fl.oar level is given sin1ilar(v b,,v:
speecls. De11endi11g on the structural shape. at so,ne
ivbul velocities, the aerodyna,nic da,nping n-za_v beco,ne
negative, 1vhich can lead to unstable oscillations. In
these cases. reference should be 1nade to recognized (C207A.9-!7)
literature or a ivilul tunnel stucZv.
Alternate Procedure to Calculate Wind Loads. lVhere

The concept of the gust effect factor implies that the
effect of gusts can be adequate!v accounted for by 1 71
0. 925 ( · ' gQQ )
nzultip(ping the ,nean 1vbui load distribution ivith height 1 + 1. 7gvl,
l~v a single factor. This is an aJJproxbnation. If a ,nore is the background co1npo11e11t of the gust
accurate representation of gust effects is required, the
effect/actor.
alternative procedure in this section can be used It
takes account of the fact that the inertial forces created Peak resonant ,vind load co,nponent PRJ at the ]th floor
by the building's ,nass, as it ,naves u1uier 1vind action, level is obtained by distributing the resonant base
have a d('f}'erent distribution with height than the ,nean bending 111on1ent response to each level
wind loads or the loads due to the direct actions ofgusts
(ISO 1997 and Sataka et al. 2003). The alternate
.fornzulation o.l the equivalent static load distribution (C207A.9-/8)
utilizes the peak base bending 1no111ent and e.\presses it
in tern1s of inertial forces at d(fferent building levels. A
base bending 1110111ent, instead of the base shear as in

the building height. Additional background can be fozmd

in ISO (1997) and Sataka et al. (2003).
(C207A.9-19)
Example: The following example is presented to
illustrate the calculation of the gust effect factor. Table
C207A.9-1 uses the given information to obtain values
- MGn (C207A.9-20)
Mn=~ ji'om Table 207A.9-I. Table C207A.9-2 presents the
G calculated values. Table C207A.9-3 summarizes the
calculated displace,nents and accelerations as a
function of the height, z.
M= I
}=1,n
Pizi (C207A.9-21)
Given Values:
Basic wind speed at reference
150 !an/h
1-vhere height in exposure C
Ct-< 1.3
CMj = vertical !oaci distribution factor
peak resonant conzponent of the base Da,nping ratio 0.01
Mn
bending ,nornent response Mode exponent 1.0
Wj portion of the total gravity load of the
building located or assigned to level j Type ofexposure B
n = total stories ofthe building Building height It = 183 m
<Pi first structural ,node shape value at level j
Building width B = 30.5111
M = ,nean base bending produced by 1nean
wind load Building depth L 30.5111
Building natural ji'equency n 1 0.2Hz
O. 925 ( 1. 71,gnR )
Gn
1 + 1. 7gvlz Building density 12 lb/ft3
is the resonant co,nponent of the gust 192.0817
effect factor. kg/111 3
1.2369
Alo11g-Wi11d Response. Through a simple static .-4lr densit;1
kg/m 3
ana!vsis the peak-building response along-wind
direction can be obtained by: Table C207A.9-l
Calculated Values
(C207A.9-22) 9.14 ft
1/3
1-vhere T T' 0 , and fn = n1ean, peak backgroun,i, and
1 c = 0.3
resonant response con1ponents of interest, for exanzple,
shear forces, n101nent, or displace,nent. Once the
b 0.45
equivalent static wind load distribution is obtained, any = 0.25
response co111ponent including acceleration can be 0.84
obtained using a sitnple static ana(vsis. It is suggested
that caution ,nus! be exercised when co,nbining the a 1/7
loads instead of response according to the preceding l 97.54m
expression, for exa,nple,
{ 1
(C207A.9-23)
because the background and the resonant load

conzponents have norrnally different distributions along

Rn 0.6!0
Table C207A.9-2
1} 5.113
Calculated Values
v 40.23 mis Rh 0.176
z 109.73 m 1J 2.853
1, 0.201 RL 0.289
L, 216.75 m Rz 0.813
Q2 0.616 Gt 1.062
32.95 mis K 0.501
Vz
v, 47.59 mis m, 10.88x106
kg
N, 1.31 3.787
BR
Rn 0.113
1J 0.852
Table 207A.9-3
.4/ong-1,vind Response - Exan1ple
RMS Acc.* RMS Acc.* Max:Acc.* Max Acc.*
Floor Zj (m) <P1 Xmaxj
(mls 2) (mg) (mls 2) (mg)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 18.29 0.10 0.03 0.00 0.41 0.02 1.6
JO 36.58 0.20 0.06 0.01 0.83 0.03 3.1
15 54.86 0.30 0.09 0.01 1.24 0.05 4.7
20 73.15 0.40 0.13 0.02 1.66 0.06 6.3
25 91.44 0.50 0.16 0.02 2.07 0.08 7.8
30 109.73 0.60 0.19 0.02 2.49 0.09 9.4
35 128.02 0.70 0.22 0.03 2.90 0.11 11.0
40 146.3 0.80 0.25 0.03 3.32 0.12 12.6
45 164.59 0.80 0.28 0.04 3.73 0.14 14.1
50 182.88 1.00 0.31 0.04 4.14 0.15 15.7
Aerodynamic Loatls on Tall Builtlings-An across-1vind and torsional responses in the ear~v design
I11teractive Database. Under the action of 1,vind tall stages. The database consists of high Ji-equency base
buildings oscillate silnultaneous(v in the along-1vind, balance 111easuren1ents involving seven rectangular
across-rvind, anti torsional directions. H1hile the along- building models. with side ratio D / B, where D is the
1vind loads have been successful~v treated in ter1ns of depth of the building section along the oncoming wind
gust loading factors based on quasi-steady and strip direction) Ji-om 113 to 3. three aspect ratios for each
theories. the across-1vind and torsional loads cannot be building ,node! in hvo apJJroach jlo1vs, na111eZv,
treated in this ,nanner, as these loads cannot be related BL 1 (a= 0. 16) and BL 2 (a = 0. 35) corresponding to
in a straigh(for~varli ,nanner to .fluctuations in the an OJJen and an urban environn1ent. The data are
approach jlov,,,1..ds a result, ,nost current codes and accessible 1vith a user-friend£v Java-based aJ7plet
standards provide little guidance for the across-1vind through the 1vorlcAvide Internet conununity at
and torsional response ISO (1997) and Sataka et al. http://aerodata.ce.1ul.edu/inte1facelinte1face.htn1l.
(2003).
Through the use o.f this interactive portal, users can
To provide son1e guidance at the prelilni11a1J' design select the geo111el!J and ditnensions of a ,node! building
stages of buildings, an interactive aerot~vnanzic loatfs fron1 the available choites and specify an urban or
database for assessing c~vna,nic 1vind-induced loads on suburban condition. Upon ,ioing so. the aerodyna,nic
a suite o.f generic isolatetf buildings is introduced. loa,l .5,pectra for the along-1vind. across-1vind, or
Although the ana(vsis based on this e..-rperinzental torsional directions is displa.ved 1vith a Java inte,face
database is not intended to replace 1vind tunnel testing per1nitting users to specifi.' a reduced frequency
in the final design stages, it provides users a (building frequency x building dilnension/ 1vind
111ethodology to approxilnate the previousZv untreated veloci(v) of interest and auto1natically obtain the

corresponding :,pectral value. When coupled lvith the Low-Rise Buildings, as defined in 207 A.2, are permitted to
supporting H'eb docu111e11tation. exanlJJles, and concise be considered rigid.
analvsis procedure, the database JJrovides a
corn/Jrehensive tool for co111putation of lvind-iluiuced 207A.9.2.1Limitations for Approximate Natural
response o.ftall buihiings, suitable as a clesign guide in Frequency
the preli111ina1J' stages.
As an alternative to performing an analysis to detennine
£,:a1n1,le: An exan1ple tall building is used to n 1 , the approximate building natural frequency, n 1 , shall
den1onstrate the analysis using the database. The be permitted to be calculated in accordance with Section
builcling is a square steel tall building 1vith size H x W 1 207A.9.3 for structural steel, concrete, or masonry
W 2 = 200 x 40 x 40 m and an average radius of buildings n1eeting the follo\ving require1nents:
gyration of I 8 111.
l. The building height is less than or equal to 91 m, and
The rhree fun£ia1ne11tal ,node frequencies, f 1 , are 0.2,
0.2, and 0.35 Hz in X. Y, and Z directions, respectively; 2. The building height is less than 4 times its effective
/he ,node shapes are all linear, or P is equal to 1.0, and length, Leff·
there is no n1odal coupling. The building density is equal
to 250 kg! 111 3 This building is located in Exposure A or The effective length, Leff, in the direction under
close to the BL 2 lest condition of the Internet-based consideration shall be determined from the following
database (Zhou et al. 2002). In this location equation:
(E.,11osure A}, the reference 3-sec design gust speed at a
50-ycar recurrence interval is 63 mis [ASCE 7-98},
which is equal to 18.9 ,n/s upon conversion to 1-h 1nean
wind speed with 50-yr MRI (207 x 0.30 = 62 mis). For (207A.9-1)
serviceabilit_,v requiren1e11ts, 1-h 111ean 1,vind speed lvith
JO-yr MRI is equal to 14 mis (207 x 0.30 x 0.74 = 46). The summations are over the height of the building
f'or the sake of illustration on(v, the first ,node critical
struclllral damping ratio, ;; 1 , is to be 0.01 for both \Vhere
survlvability and serviceabilizv design. h; is the height above grade oflevel i
L; is the building length at level i parallel to the
[Ising these aerodyna,nic t.fata and the procedures \Vind direction
provided on the Web and in ISO (1997), the wind load
e,f{i!cts are evaluated and the results are presented in 207A.9.3 Approximate Natural Frequency
Table C207A.9-4. This table includes base moments and
acceleration response in the along-lvilui direction The approximate lower-bound natural frequency (nu), in
obtained by the procedure in ASCE 7-02. Also the Hertz, of concrete or structural steel buildings meeting the
bui!t!ing experiences 1nuch higher across-lvind load conditions of Section 207A.9.2.I, is permitted to be
'ff..ffects 1-vhen con1pareci to the along-1vind response for determined from one of the following equations:
"'ihis exa1n11le, lvhich reiterates the signtficance oj. lvind
/load~· and their effects in the across-1vind liirection. For structural steel n101nent-resisting-frame buildings:
207A.9.J Gust Effect Factor nu= 22. 2/h 0 ·8 (207A.9-2)
The gust-effect factor for a rigid building or other structure

For concrete moment-resisting frame buildings:
is permitted to be taken as 0.85.
207A.9.2 Frequency Determination na = 43. 5/h0 ·9 (207A.9-3)
To determine whether a building or structure is rigid or

For structural steel and concrete buildings with other
flexible as defined in Section 207 A.2, the fundamental
lateral-force-resisting systems:
natural frequency, n,, shall be established using the
structural properties and defonnational characteristics of
the resisting elements in a properly substantiated analysis. na = 75/h (207A.9-4)

For concrete or 1nasonry shear wall buildings, it is also 1

permitted to use: Q= (207 A.9-8)
1 + 0. 63 (B + h)o.63
L,
(207A.9-5)
where B and h are defined in Section 207 A.3 and L, is the wl
\vhere mtegral length scale of turbulence at the equivalent heiaht
0 as
given by: in
n 2
=100 '\' (!!:..) A,
Cw A L, h·
B i=1 '
(
1 + 0.83 (~:) 2] L-=t(z)'
' 33
(207A.9-9)
ln Si:
\vhere
h mean roof height (m)

n nutnber of shear \Valls in the building In which f and E are constants listed in Table 207A.9-1.
effective in resisting lateral forces in the
direction under consideration 207 A.9.5 Flexible or Dynamically Sensitive Buildings
base area of the structure (m2 )
or Other Structures
horizontal cross-section area of shear ,vall
"i" (1n2) For flexible or dynamically sensitive buildings or other
length of shear wall "i" (m) structures as defined in Section 207 A.2, the gust-effect
height of shear wall "i" (m) factor shall be calculated by:
\\
207A.9.4 Rigid Buildings or Other Structures 11
For rigid buildings or other structures as defined in Section 2
207 A.2, the gust-effect factor shall be taken as 0.85 or (207A.9-IO)
calculated by the fommla: !1
2
_
G - 0. 925
(1 + 1. 7gQlzQ)
l
(207A.9-6) gQ and gv shall be taken as 3.4 and gn is given by:
r.
p
1 + 1 · 7 gv z
1, =cc:) 1/6 (207 A.9-7)

gn =,Jz ln(3600n1 )
0.577
+--;=====
(207 A. 9-11)
2
,/2 In(3600n 1) '

(
ln Si:
R, the resonant response factor, is given by:
(207 A. 9-12)
where 1, is the intensity of turbulence at height z
z
where is the equivalent height of the structure defined as
R = 7.47N,
0. 6h, but not less than Zmin for all building heights h. Zmin (207 A.9-13)
" (1 + 10. 3N,)5/3
and c are listed for each exposure in Table 207 A.9-1; gQ
and gv shall be taken as 3.4. The background response Q
is given by: (207A.9-14)

207A.10 Enclosure Classification

for 1/ > 0 (207A.9-1 Sa)
Conunenta,~v:
R, = 1 forq =0 (207A.9-15b) Accordingly, the code requires that a cleter111ination be

111ade of the a,nount of openings in the envelope to assess
where the subscript fin Equation 207 A.9-15 shall be taken enclosure classification (enclosed, partia/~y enclosecl, or
ash. B, and L, respectively, where h, B, and Lare defined open). "Openings" are specifical(v defined in this version
in Section 207 A.3. of the code as "apertures or holes in the building envelope
n1 fundamental natural frequency 1vhich allolv air to flo1v through the building envelope and
1vhich are designed as "open" during design 1vinds. "
R, R,. setting 1/ = 4. 6n 1 h/Vz
Exa,nples include doors, operable 1.vindo1vs, air intake
R, R 8 settingq = 4.6n1 B/i7, exhausts for air conditioning and or ventilation svste111s
R, RL setting 1/ = 15.4n1 L/i7,
gaps around doors, deliberate gaps in claddil;g, and
p damping ratio, percent of critical (i.e. for 2%
flexible and operable louvers. Once the enclosure
use 0.02 in the equation)
classification is known, the designer enters Table 207A.11-
Vz mean hourly wind speed (m/s) at height z
1 to select the apJJropriate internal pressure coefficient.
determined from Equation 207A.9-16:
_vz = -( z )" (88)

b 33 60 v
(207 A.9-16)
This version of the code has four ter111s applicable to
enclosure: 1vind-bor11e debris regions, glazing, i111pact-
resistant glazing, and ilnpact protective syste,n. "~Vind-
ln SI: borne debris regions" are specified to alert the designer to
areas requiring consideration of111issile itnpact design and
potential openings in the building envelope. "Glazing" is
defined as "any glass or transparent or translucent plastic
sheet used in lvindoH's, doors, skylights, or curtain i-valls."
"Impact resistant glazing" is spec/fically defined as
where b and a are constants listed in Table 207 A. 9-1 and
"glazing that has been shown by testing to withstand the
V is the basic wind speed in km/h.
iTnpact of test 111issiles. " "bnpact protective sys terns" over
glazing can be shutters or screens designe,i to lvithstand
207A.9.6 Rational Analysis
i-vind-borne debris ilnpact. bnpact resistance of glazing
and protective syste111s can be testecl using the test 111ethod
In lieu of the procedure defined in Sections 207 A.9.3 and
specified in ASTM El 886-2005 (2005), with missiles,
207A.9.4, determination of the gust-effect factor by any
i111pact speeds, and pass/fail criteria specified in ASTM
rational analysis defined in the recognized literature is
El996-2009 (2009). Other approved test 111ethods are
permitted.
acceJJtable. Origins of111issile bnpact provisions contained
in these standards are summarized in Minor (1994) and
207A.9. 7 Limitations Twisdale et al. (1996).
Where combined gust-effect factors and pressure Attention is drawn to Section 207A.10.3, which requires
coefficients (GCp), (GCp;), and (GCpf) are given in glazing in Catego,y I, JI, Ill. and JV buildings in wind-
figures and tables, the gust-effect factor shall not be borne debris regions to be protected lVith an ilnpact
determined separately. protective syste,n or to be ,nade ofi,npact resistant glazing.
The option of unprotected glazing was eli111inatedfor most
buildings in the 2005 edition of the standard to reduce the
an1ount of ivind and water da1nage to buildings during
design lvind stor,n events.

Table 207A.9-l
Terrain Exposure Constants
Exposure a z, a b a b c f(m) € Zmin(m)*

B 7.0 365.76 1/7 0.84 1/4.0 0.45 0.30 97.54 1/3.0 9.14
c 9.5 274.32 119.5 1.00 1/6.5 0.65 0.20 152.4 1/5.0 4.57
D l 1.5 213.36 1/11.5 1.07 1/9.0 0.80 0.15 198.12 l/8.0 2.13
* Zmin = nzininuan height used to ensure that the equivalent height Z is greater of 0. 6h or Zmin· For buildings lVith
h $ Zmin, Z shall be taken as Zmin·
other cases. potential sources of debris ,nay be present,

Prior to the 2002 edition of the standard, glazing in the but extenuating conclitions can lon·er the risk. These
lower 18 m o/Catego1:v II. III, or IV buildings sited in extenuating conditions include the type of,naterials and
lVind-horne debris regions 1vas required to be protectec! surrounding construction, the le1/el ofprotection ojfered
lVith an ilnpact JJrotective systern, or to be ,nade of b.v surrozouiing exposure conditions, and the clesign
ilnpact-resistant gla::::ing, or the area o..f the glazing H'as wind speed. Therefore, the risk ,ifimpact may dijferji'Oln
assiuned to be open. Recogni::::ing that gla::::i11g higher those postulated as a result ofthe conditions specifical(v
than 1(;i 111 above grade n1ay be broken b.v 1vi11d-borne enu111erated in the code and the referenced ilnpact
tlebris ..,,.,,,J,en a debris source is present, a neH' provision sta,uiards. The conunittee recognizes that there are
1vas added in 2002. 1'Vith that neH' provision, aggregate vastly differing opinions. even lt:ithin the standar,!s
sw:fi1ced roofs on buildings within 450 111 of the ne\1' conunittee, regartling the significance of these
building need to be evaluated. For example, roof para111eters that are not fir!Zv considered in developing
aggregate, inclzuling gravel or stone used as ballast that standardi::ed debris regions or re..ferenced ilnpact
is not protected by a sufficient{v high J)arapet should be criteria.
consiclered as a debris source..Accordingly, the glazing
in the ne1v huihling, fi·on1 9 1n above the source building Recogni::ing that the de_finition of the lvind-borne debris
to grade 1,vould need to be protected 1,vith an i111_pact regions given in NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98) through
protective systen1 or be 1nade o.f bnpact-resistant NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-05) was large!v based 011
glazing. {f loose roof aggregate is proposed for the nelr engineering judgrnent rather than a risk and reliabili(v
buihling, it too should be considered as a debris source ana{vsis, the clejinition of the rvind-borne debris regions
because aggregate can be blorvn a.ff the roo_f and be in ASCE 7-10 for Occupancy Catego1y III and IV
propelled into glazing on the leeward side of the builciings and structures has been chosen such that the
building. Although other {vpes ofwind-bome debris can coastal areas included in the 1vind-bor11e debris regions
ilnpact glazing higher than 18 ,n above grade, at these defined 1vith the nerv 1vinci s11eed ,naps are
higher elevations, loose roof aggregate has been the apJJroxilnateZv consistent ivith those given in the JJrior
1,re,!01ninate debris source in previous lVind events. The editions for this risk category. Tints, the nelv 1vi11d speed
requiren1ent,for protection 9 111 above the debris source contours that define the rvilui-borne ciebris regions in
is to account for debris that can be lifted during flight. Section 207A.I0.3.l are not direct conversions of the
The _follo1ving references provide .further inforn1ation rvin,i speed contours that are ciefinecl in NSCP 2010
regarcling clebris ,ia1nage to glazing: Beason et al. (ASCE 7-05) as shown in Table C207A.5-6. As a result
(1984), Minor (1985 and 1994), Kareem (1986), and qf this sh!fi, adjustments are needed to the Wind Zone
Behr and Minor (1994). designations in ASTM E 1996 for the determination of
the appropriate nzissile size for the ilnpact test because
Although lvind-borne debris can occur in just about any the Wind Zones are based 011 the NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-
condition, the level o.f risk in co1nparison to the 05) wind speed maps. Chapter 6.2.2 of ASTM E 1996
postulated clebris regions and in1pact criteria ,nay also should be as follows:
be lower than that determined for the pwpose of
standar,ii::ation. For exa111ple, individual buildings 111ay 6.2.2 Unless otherwise specified. select the wind
be site,i alvay fron1 likeZv ciebris sources that n·ould zone base,! on the basic ivind speed as.fol/01,vs:
generate sign(ficant risk o._filnpacts sin1ilar in ,nagnitude
to pea gravel (i.e., as sbnulated by 2 gra111 steel balls in 6.2.2. I Wind Zone I - 2 IO Aph :S basic wind speed <
in1pact tests) or butt-on 2 x 4 ilnpacts as requireli in 225 kph.
in1pact testing criteria. This situation describes a
condition o.f lolv vulnerabili~v onZv as a result of lilnited
clebris sources n'ithin the vicinity of the building. In

CHAPTER 2 - f\1inimun1 Design Loads 2-59
207A.10.3 Protection of Glazed Openings
6.2.2.2 Wind Zone 2 - 225 kph :S basic wind speed< 240 Glazed openings in Occupancy Category I, I!, III or IV
kph at greater than I. 6 kn1 .fron1 the coastline. The buildings located in tropical cyclone-prone regions shall be
coastline shall be ,neasured.frorn the 1nean high rvater protected as specified in this Section.
,nark.
207A.10.3.l Wind-borne Debris Regions
6.2.2.3 Wind Zone 3 - basic wind speed 2'. 240 kph, or
basic wind speed 2'. 225 kph and within 1.6 km of the Glazed openings shall be protected in accordance with
coastline. The coastline shall be ,neasuretl fron1 the Section 207 A. l 0.3.2 in the following locations:
n1ean high H-'ater ,nark.
I. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water line
lloi+·ever, 1'Vhile the coastal areas included in the ivind- \Vhere the basic \Vind speed is equal to or greater than
borne debris regions {k:fined in the ne1v 1rind speed 58 mis, or
,naps.for Risk Category II are approxilnate(v consistent
with those given in NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-05), significant 2. In areas where the basic wind speed is equal to or
re,luctions in the 1vind-borne debris regions for this risk greater than 63 111/s.
catego1}' occur in the area around Jacksonville, Florida,
in the Florida Panhandle, and inland fron1 the coast o.f For Occupancy Category Ill and JV buildings and
iYorth Carolina. structures, except health care facilities, the \Vind-borne
debris region shall be based on Figure 207 A.5-IA. For
The introduction o.f se11arate risk-based n1aps .for Occupancy Category III health care facilities and
d[fJ°erent risk categories provides a 111eans for achieving Occupancy Category II buildings and structures, the wind-
a 1nore risk-consistent approach .for defining 1vind- borne debris region shall be based on Figure 207 A.5- lB.
borne ,iebris regions. The approach selected 1vas to link Occupancy Categories shall be determined in accordance
the geographical tiejinition of the 1vind-borne debris with Section I 03.
regions to the 1vind ~peed contours in the ,naps that
correspond to the particular risk catego1:v. The resulting Exception:
expansion oj' the 1vind-borne debris region for
()ccupancy Catego1:i' I and II buihlings and structures Glazing locatecl over 18-tn above the grouncl and-over 9 m
(wind-borne debris regions in Figure 207A.5-IC that above- _agig;regate-sur;faced~roqft:;, _including roofs ~vlth
are not part o..f the lVind-borne debris regions definetl in gravel .or stone ballast, located within 450 m of the
Figure 207A.5-IB) was considered appropriate.for the building shall be permitted to be unprotected.
tn,es of buildings included in Occupancy Categ01:v I
and 11. A review of the types of buildings and structures 207A.10.3.2 Protection Requirements for Glazed
current{v inclzuied in Occupanc.v Catego1y III suggests Openings
that life safety issues 11·ould be ,nost ilnportant, in the
CXJJandec{ lvind-borne debris region. for health care Glazing in buildings requiring protection shall be protected
facilities. Consequent{v, the conunittee chose to app{v \Vith an in1pact-protective systen1 or shall be itnpact-
the expanded 1vind-borne debris protection requirernent resistant glazing.
to this type qf Occupancy Categ01:v Ill facilities and not
to all Occupml(\' Catego1:1· Ill buildings and structures. Impact-protective systems and impact-resistant glazing
shall be subjected to missile test and cyclic pressure
207A. 10.1 General differential tests in accordance with ASTM E 1996 as
applicable. Testing to demonstrate compliance with ASTM
For the purpose of detennining internal pressure E 1996 shall be in accordance with ASTM E 1886. lmpact-
coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as enclosed, resistant glazing and i111pact protective systems shall
partially enclosed, or open as defined in Section 207 A.2. comply with the pass/fail criteria of Section 7 of ASTM
E 1996 based on the missile required by Table 3 or Table 4
207A. 10.2 Openings of ASTM E 1996.
A determination shall be made of the amount of openings Bxceptio,t.·

in the building envelope for use in determining the
enclosure classification.

O CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
1zing and in1pact-protective systen1s in buildings and pressure coefficients can reach values o.f ±0.8 (or possihlv
tctures classified as Occupancy Category I in even higher 011 the negalii'e side). ~
ordance with Section l 03 shall comply with the
~
hanced protection" requirements of Table 3 of ASTM For JJartial(v encloset.l buildings containing a hu:ge
)96. Glazing and in1pact-protective systems in all other unpartitioned space, the re:,,ponse tilne o.f the internal
,ctures shall comply with the "basic protection"
uirements of Table 3 of ASTM El 996.
JJressure is increased, and this increase reduces the ahility
o_f the internal JJressure to respond to rapid changes in
I_::
Enclo
pressure al aJl OJJening. The gust .factor applicable to the
internal pressure is there.fore reduced. Equation ]07A. l J~
ser 1Vote: 1. 1vhich is based on Vicker;· tnuf Bloxhanz ( !992) and
Iririn and Dunn ( 1994), is JJrovided as a 1nea11s o_f,u(iusting
',e wind cones that are specified in ASTM E 1996 .for the gust factor .for this e..(f(,ct on structures H'ilh la1J;e P:
:e in deter,nining the Cl]Jp/icab/e nzissile si::e for the internal spaces, such as stadiun1s ancl arenas.
,pact test, have to be adjusted.for use 11•ith the 11·ilul
1eecl 111aps of this code and the corresponding 11'b1d- Because r~f the nature £?f tro11ical (rclone H'inds and
Jrne debris regions, see Section C207A.I0.3.2. CXJJosure to debris ha:::artlv (Afinor an(/ Behr 1993 ). gla:::.ing Notes:
locatetl heloH' 18 111 abo\'e the grozouf /ere/ o.f buildings
sited in 1vi11d-bor11e t!ehris regions has a lride(r va1:ving I. Pl
a11cl co111parative(r higher rulnerabili(r to breakage jl·on1 ar
IA.10.4 Multiple Classifications
1nissi!es. unless the ~£Jla:::ing can n·ithstan,f reasonahle 2. v
, building by definition complies with both the "open" nzissile loads and subsequent 1rind /oa,ling, or the gla:::ing SJ
I "partially enclosed" definitions. it shall be classified as is protcctet.f by suitable shullers. (See Section C'107A. 1Ojbr 3. 1
"open" building. A building that does not comply with tliscussion o.f gla:::ing above 18 111. fVhen gla:::ing is I,
1er the "open" or "partially enclosed" definitions shall breached by 1nissiles, tfei:elopnzent <~f higher internal
classified as an "enclosed" building. pressure ,nay result, 1rhich can overloacl the cladtling or
structure (( the higher JJressure H'as 1101 accounte£fji>r in
7A.11 Internal Pressure Coefficient
the lfcsign. Breaching o.f gla:::ing can also result i11 a
sign(f}cant a1no1111t o.f lrater h?flltration, lrhiclz t)']Jical(v
results in considerable ,knnage to the building and its
111111entary:
contents (Sur1:r ct al. 1977, Reinlzohl 198], a1uf Stubhs and 207/
Pen:r 1993).
internal pressure col:{ficient values in
rJle ]07A.l 1-1 H'ere obtainecl fro111 irind tunnel tests
The i,~fluence o_(co1n11art111entali:::atio11 011 the distrihutio11 For
,11hopoulos et al. 1979) andfii/1-scale data (Yeatts and
hta 1993). Even though the irind tunnel tests n·ere o.f increased internal pressure has not been researched. fl unp:
the SJJace bchituf brcachetf gla::ing is S<.!J,arated_fro,n the coe1
,ducted JJri111ari(v .for loH'-rise buihli11gs, the internal
rcnzaincfer (~f the building by a s1!fficie11tfr strong and rcd1
·ssure coefficient values are assu111ed to be valid /Or
reasonah(v airtight co111JJartn1ent, the increased internal
'h/ings o.f any height. The values (GCpt) = +0.18 anti
pressure H·ould likc(r he co1?fi11cd to that co1n11artn1enl.
18 arc fbr enclosed buil,Hngs. It is assu111ed that the R,
Hon·ever. {( the co1n1n.1rtn1e11t is hreaclzed (e.g., by an open
?,ling has no do111i11a11t OJJening or 01u!nings a,u.l that the
corridor t!oor or hy collaJJSe o.f the co111partJne11t irall}, the
all leakage paths that t!o exist are essential(r unlfOr,nly
increased internal pressure H'ill spread beyo1ul the initial
tribute,! 01•er the buihling 's envelope. The internal
co111;1art111e11t quite raJ>hf(v. The next co111par1111c11t 1nczr
'ssurc' col~[fich:nt values.for1u1rtial(r enclose,! huihlings contain the higher pressure. or it too couhl be breached.
·zu1u! that the buihfing; has a ,lo,ninant opening or
thereb.r alloiring the high internal pressure to continue to
:>J1i11gs. For such a building, the internal 1,ressure is
JJropagatc. Because o.fthe great anzount £~( air leakage that
·tale,/ by the exterior pressure at the OJJening ancl is
c~flen occurs al large hangar doors, t.lesigners o_f hangars
,tcal(l' increased substantial(v as a result. Net load,·, that
shouhl consilfer utili:::i11g the internal 11ressure coe.fficients
the co111bination o..f the internal anti exterior 1n·essures,
forpartial(r rnclosed buildings in Table 207A.1 l-1.
.' there.fore also sign{ficant(v increased 011 the bui/cling '
.faces that tlo not contain the OJJening. There.fore, higher
207A.l l.1 Internal Pressure Coefficients
Cp;) values ql +0.55 and -0.55 are applicah!e to this
\e. These values inchule a reduction .factor to account Internal pressure coefficients. (GC,,;), shall be determined
· the lack of 1,e,fect correlation betlreen the internal
from Table 207 A. I I-I based on building enclosure
:ssure an,{ the external JJressures 011 the building
classifications determined from Section 207 A. I 0.
ff.ices not containing the opening (lririn 1987 and Beste
d Cer,nak 1996). Taken in isolation, the internal

Table 207A.1 l-l 207B Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS

Internal Pressure Coefficient, (Gepi) (Directional Procedure)
Main Wind Force Resisting Con1111e11ta1:-i,1:

System and Components and All Heights
Clad din The Directional Procedure is the for1ner "buildings of all
heights" provision i11 Method 2 of NSCP 2010 (.4SCE 7-
Wans & Roofs 05) for MWFRS. A simplified method based 011 this
(Ge ;) Directional Procedure is provided.for buildings up to 49 111
in height. The Directional Procelfure is considerelf the
Open Buildings 0.00
trallitional approach in that the pressure coefficients
+0.55 re.fleet the actual loacfing 011 each su,:face of the buihling
Partially Enclosed Buildings
-0.55 as a .function (~{ lriluf direction. 11a1nef.i', H'hufs
+0.18 pe1pe1ulicular or J.Jarallel to the rillge line.
Enclosed Buildings
-0.18
Notes: 207B.1 Scope
I. Plus and 1ninus signs signify pressures acting to\vard 207B. I.I Building Types
and a\vay fro111 the internal surfaces, respectively.
2. Values of (Gepi) shall be used with q 2 or qi, as This chapter applies to the determination ofMWFRS wind
specified. loads on enclosed, partially enclosed, and open buildings
3. T\vo cases shall be considered to deten11ine the critical of all heights using the Directional Procedure.
load require111ents for the appropriate condition:
I. Part I applies to buildings of all heights where it is
1. a positive value of ( Gep;) applied to all internal
necessary to separate applied \Vind loads onto the
surfaces windward, leeward, and side walls of the building to
11. a negative value of (Ge1, 1) applied to all properly assess the internal forces in the MWFRS
internal surfaces 1ne1nbers.
207 A.11.l .1 Reduction Factor for Large Volume 2. Part 2 applies to a special class of buildings designated
Buildings, Ri as enclosed silnple diaphrag1n buildings, as defined in
Section 207 A.2, with h ~ 48 m.
For a partially enclosed building containing a single,
unpartitioned large voltune, the internal pressure 207B.1.2 Conditions
coefficient, (Ge1, 1), shall be multiplied by the following
reduction factor, Ri: A building \vhose design \Vind loads are detern1ined in
accordance with this chapter shall comply with all of the
following conditions:
R, = 1.0 or
I. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
as defined in Section 207 A.2.
R 1 = 0.5
1+[1*. 1
'
g
< 1.0 (207A.l l-l) 2. The building does not have response characteristics
1naking it subject to across-\vind loading, vortex
shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter: or it
does not have a site location for \Vhich channeling
effects or buffeting in the wake ofupwind obstructions
,vhere warrant special consideration.
A0g total area of openings in the building
envelope (walls and roof), in m 2
Vi unpartitioned internal volun1e, in 111 3

207B.1.3 Limitations Part I: Enclosed, Partially Enclosed, and Open

Buildings of All Heights
The provisions of this chapter take into consideration the
load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with 207B.2 General Requirements
along-wind vibrations of flexible buildings. Buildings not
meeting the requirements of Section 2078.1.2, or having The steps to determine the wind loads on the MWFRS for
unusual shapes or response characteristics shall be enclosed, pm1ially enclosed and open buildings of all
designed using recognized literature docu111enting such heights are provided in Table 207B.2-l.
wind load effects or shall use the wind tunnel procedure
specified in Section 207F.
User Note:
207B.1.4 Shielding
Use Part 1 ofSection 207B to deter,nine 1vi11d 11ressures
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to 011 the MWFRS of enclosed, partially enclosed or an
apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other 011en building 1vith any general plan shape, building
structures or terrain features. height or roof geonzetJ:v that ,natches the figures
provided. These JJrovisions utilize the traditional "all
heights" nzethod (Directional Procedure) by calculating
1vind pressures usi11g SJJecific i.vind JJressure equations
applicable to each buildi11g szuface.
207B.2.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section

207A
The following wind load parameters shall be determined in

accordance \Vith Section 207 A:
• Basic Wind Speed, V (Section 207 A.5)

• Wind directionality factor, Kd (Section 207A.6)
• Exposure category (Section 207A.7)
• Topographic factor, Kz, (Section 207A.8)
• Gust-effect factor (Section 207A.9)
• Enclosure classification (Section 207 A. l 0)
• Internal pressure coefficient, (GCp;)
(Section 207A.l l)
207B.3 Velocity Pressure
207B.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient
Based on the exposure category detennined in Section

207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz or
K,., as applicable, shall be determined from Table 207B.3-
l. For a site located in a transition zone between exposure
categories that is near to a change in ground surface
roughness, intermediate values of l(z or K1t, between those
shown in Table 207B.3- l are permitted provided that they
are determined by a rational analysis method defined in the
recognized literature.

Table 2078.2-1
Steps to Determine MWFRS Wind Conunenta1y:
Loads for Enclosed, Partially Enclosed and Open
8uildinas of All Heiohts The velocity pressure exposure coefficient J(z can be
obtained using the equation:
Determine risk categmy of building or other
structure, see Table I 03-1
2/a
2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the For 4.57111 :S (C207B.
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5- 2. 01 ( :c:) Z :S Zg 3-1)
IA, 8 ore l(z
3: Detennine \Vind load para1neters:

21
(C207B.
2. 01 ( 4
~ 57) For z < 4.57 111 3-2)
,.. Wind directionality factor, Kd , see
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
>" Exposure category, see Section 207A.7 in 1-vhich values a.la and Zg are given in Table 207A.9-J.
:,. Topographic factor, I<zt, see
These equations are no1v given in Tables 207B.3-J,
Section 207A.8 and Table 207 A.8-1
207C.3-l, 207D.3-l, and 207£.3-1 to aid the user.
",, Gust Effect Factor, G, see Section 207 A. 9
)..- Enclosure classification, see
Changes were implemented in NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98).
Section 207 A. IO
including truncation of /( 2 values for E.\posures A and B
,.. Internal pressure coefficient, (GCp;), see
below heights of 30 111 and 9 m, respective(v, applicable to
Section 207 A. I I and Table 207A.11-1
Compo11e11/s and Cladding and the Envelope Procedure.
Detennine velocity pressure exposure
Exposure A 1vas elitninateci in the 2002 edition of,-1SCE 7.
coefficient, K 2 or K1,, see Table 2078.3-1
Detennine velocity pressure qz or qh In the NSCP 2010 (.4SCE 7-05) standard, the Kz
Equation 2078.3-1 expressions \\'ere unchanged ji-0111 NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-
98). Holl'ever, the possibili(v of inte,polating between the
Determine external pressure coefficient, Cp or standard eXJ}osures using a rational 1nethod H'as achled in
CN the NSCP 20 l O (ASCE 7-05) edition. One rational method
',- Figure 207B.4- l for \Valls and flat, gable, is provided in the following text.
hip, n1onoslope or 1nansard roofs
,.. Figure 2078.4-2 for domed roofs To a reasonable ap11roxi111ation, the en1pirical exponent a
,.. Figure 2078.4-3 for arched roofs and gradient height Zg in the prececling expressions
",, Figure 2078.4-4 for monoslope roof, (Equations C207B.3-l and C207B.3-2) for exposure
open building coefficient K 2 111ay be related lo the roughness length z 0
:.,.. Figure 2078.4-5 for pitched roof, open (where z 0 is defined in Section C207A. 7) by the relations
building
",, Figure 2078.4-6 for !roughed roof, open a= C1Zo -0.133 (C207B.3-3)
building
,.. Figure 2078.4-7 for along-ridge/valley
and
wind load case for 1nonoslope, pitched or
!roughed roof, open building
zu-
_ C z 0,125 (C207B.3-4)
Calculate wind pressure, p, on each building 2 0
surface
1-vhere
> Equation 2078.4-1 for rigid buildings
,. Equation 2078.4-2 for flexible buildings
,. Equation 2078.4-3 for open buildings Units ofz0 , zg Ct Cz
Ill 5.65 450
The preceding relationships are based on 1natching the

ESDU boundw;v layer model (Harris and Deaves 1981 and
ESDU 1990 and 1993) empirical(y with the power law
relationship in Equations C207B.3-l and C207B.3-2, the
ESDU model being applied al latitude 35° with a gradient
ivind (?f75 n1/s. {fz 0 has been deter111inecffor a 1u1rticular O forx>x 1

upwind fetch. Equations C107B.3-J through C207B.3-4
can he used to eraluate I( z, The corresponclence b<!tiveen In the preceding relationshiJJS
z 0 and the JJaran1eters a ancf Zg i1111,lied b_v these
relations/zips does not align exact~v ivith that described in
the con11nenta1r to ASCE 7-95 ancl 7-98. Hoivever, the
tf(ff'erences are relath·ely s1nall ancl not o..f 11ractical
consequence. The ESDU bouncla1:i' la.i,·cr ,node! has also Tiu! constant c 3 = 1.0 k111. The length X1
been used to clerive the.fol/oiring silnp/{fied 1nethot1 (frlrin < K 33 ,u (1riluf going fi·o,n sn1oother terrain llJHV!
l( 33 ,d
2006) of' ei·a!uating K 2 fblloiring a transition ,(ro111 one to rougher terrain doir,nrind) or X 1 = 100 k111J.for l( 33,d
s,u:face roughness to another. For 1nore precise estilnates K 33 ,u (H'ind going fi·o111 rougher terrain l!JJH'ind t
the reacler is re._ferred to the original ESDU ,nodcl (lfarris sn1ootlu!r terrain cloH'llH'incl).
and Dcarcs 1981 and ESDU 1990 and 1993).
The ab(n·e t!escriJJtio11 is in ter,ns o,f a single roughne
!11 u11(for111 terrain. the ivi11d t,·a1,)cls a szdflcie11t t!istance change. Tiu: n1cthod can be extended to nntltiple roughne
over the terrain .for the planeta1:v boundtn:v layer to reach changes. The extension t!fthe 111ethod is best described
an equilihriu111 state. The ex;Josure coejficient ,·alues in an exa11111lc. Figure C207B.3-1 shon:s· H'iluf n ith an initia1
Table 207B.3-J are inte1u.led.for this condition. SuJJJJose JJrqfile characteristic <~f Exposure D encou11tering a
that the site is a distance x 111iles doH·nn·ind qfa change in e.\JJanse qf B roughness. _follo\red bJ-' a ji1rthcr e.\JJanse o
terrain. The equi!ibrhu11 ralue <?f the exposure coe,(ficient D roughness and then so,ne 111orc B roughness agai
at height z .for the terrain roughness £lon·1nvi11d t~f the ln:fbre it arrires at the building site. This situation is
change ivill be lfe11otccl by Kzd• and the equilihrizun i·alue re11rese11tatit·e (~( 11·i1uf.fro111 the sea ,f/on•ing o,·er an outer
.fbr the terrain roughness upivind o..f the change 11·ill be strzjl o.f lane!. then a coastal 11·ateriray, (111(1 then son1e:
£le noted by K zu· The lifect oj' the change in terrain suburhau roughness b('.(ore arriving al the building site,
roughness on the exposure coe,fficie11t at the site can be The ahore nu!lhod,fbr a single roughness change is first
reJJresentetl by ac!iusting J( 2 d b.v an incren1ent LlK, thus usccl to conzpute the pro.file o.f K 2 al station 1 in f~igure,,
1
arriving at a corrected raluc K 2 .f()r the site. C207B.3-J. Call this pro.file K~ ). Tl,c value o,f'LlKfor theJ
transition betn·ecn stations 1 and 2 is then cfeter111inec{t
using the equilibrizan value o.l K 33 ,u .for the roug/111ess-~_
K 2 = Kzd + LlK (C207B.3-5) in1111ediatef.r u1-nvind of station I, i.e., as though the-I
roughness UJlH'ind o,f station I extencled to injini(v. This~
2
value o,f Lll( is then atfded lo the equilibriu111 value Ki ) oJ-''
In this l'XJJrcssion LJK is calculatclf using: the exJJosure cof!.fficient.for the roughness bet1veen stations l
1 and 2 to obtain the pr(~(ile l~fK 2 at station 2, 1l'hich ive
2
n·ill call Ki2 ). Note hon·cver. that the value of K~ ) in this,
(C207B.3-6) 1vay cannot be an.v loH·cr than K; 1
). The JJrocess Ls: then
repeatecff()r the transition betH'ecn stations 2 anti 3. Thus,
LlK fbr the transition fi·o,n station 2 to station 3 is
calculated using the value o.f K 33 ,u .for the equilibrhun
prc!filc o.f the roughness inunetliatcf.v upiviluf o._f station 2,
and the value o,f K 33 ,d j'or the equilibrh1111 pro.file of the
1vhere K 33,d and K 33 ,u arc re.\JJectirely the tfoir,nvind and roughness £knrnn·in,l o_(station 2. This value o_filK is then
3
UJJivind equilibriu111 values o.f e.\JlOsure coc:[ficient at 10 111 cul,led to K:2 ) to obtain the prc!file K~ ) at station 3, H'ith
height. and the.fimction F 4 "(x) is given by: 3
the linzitation that the value o.f 1(1 ) cannot be an.v higher
2
than K~ ).
(C207B.3-7J
For x 0 < x < x1

I for x < Xo

(D 0 Building
0. 6Zlx10-co.62-1.00J'-z.3
d,
• +~,1/ Site
From Equation C207B.3-7

= 0.00241 mi
F""(x) = log 10 ( 6._21)/ log 10 ( _6. 21 ) = 0.36

0 36 0 00241
Figure C207B.3-1
lYfultiple Roughness Changes Due to Therqforefi'Oln Equation C207B.3-6
Coastal 1VaterJvaJ'
0.82
;le I sin 1/c rou 1/zn<?ss chcuzac: SuJJJJose the bu ifcling ilK = (1. 00 - 0. 67) O. 0. 36 = 0. 15
67
1 high and its local surroundings art! suburban H'ith
ghness length z 0 = 0.3 111. I-Ioi\'ever, the site is 0.6 lun
Note that because lilKI is 0.15, which is less than the 0.38
nivind <Jf the cclge (~( the suburbs. beyont.f i1'hich the
1 terrain is characteristic (~{ open co1111t1J' H'ith z 0 =
value of IK33 .u - K 33 ,dl, 0.15 is retained. Final!v, fi-om
_ 111. From Equations C207B.3-l, C207B.3-3. and Equation C207B.3-5, the mlue ofK, is:
(J7B,3-4,j(n· thc open terrain
_ C z -0.133
K, = K,d + ill(= 0. 82 + 0.15 = 0. 97
- 1 0 6.62 9.5
xo. 066-0.133
Because the value 0.97.fbr Kz lies hetireen the ·values 0.88
=CzZo o.12s 1,273 276111 and 1.16, which would be derivedfi-0111 Table 207B.3-1 for
xo. 0660125 E.\JJosures B a1ui C' res11ectb,·e~v, it is an acceptable
interpulation. {fit falls helou· the ExJJosure B value, then
'ho,,vJ;,,.,, applyin,f{ Equation C'207B.3-J at 20 111 anll JO the Exposure B value o_f K z is to be us eel. The value K z =
0. 97 1nay be co111pareli lvith the ralue 1.16 that H'oulci be
required by the si111ple 792 ,n fl!tch length require111e11t qf
Section 207A.7.3.
1.16 and
The 111ost co1n111011 case o.fa single roughness change ivhere
an interJJo!atecl value t?f K z is needec/ is .for the transition
1.0 ji·onz Ex11os111·e C' to E.,JJosu1r! B, as in the exanzple just
described. For this JJarticular transition, using the (vpical
values (?fz 0 o.f0.02 ,n and 0.3 111, the precedingjOrnut!ae
can be sinzpl{/lell to:
6. 62x1. o-0.133 6.62
= CzZoo.12s 6 1
1, Z73x1. o 0·125 ]88 Ill K2 = K,d ( 1 + 0.146log10 ( -: )) (C207B.3-9J
66 2/6.19
K,<1 = Z. 01 ( 1, 273 ) 0. 77 and 1rhere xis in 111iles, and Kzd is co111puted us)ng a = 6.62.
l(zB lllUI Kzc are the exposure coe_fficients in the stantlarcl
E:qJosures C and B. Figure C207B.3-2 illustrates the
0.67 transitionfi·o,n terrain roughness(' to terrain roughness B
fi·o,n this expression. Note that it is acceptable to use the
(l}Jical z 0 rather than the /oiver liJnit .for E:q.1osure B in
Equation C207B.3-8 deriving this for111ula because the rate oj' transition of the
ivhuf pro.files is llepenclent Oil average roughness over
Xo sign[ficant distances, not local roughness anonzalies. The
potential e.ffCcts of local roughness anon1alies, such as
parking lots and pla_ving fields, are covered b_v using the 1-vhere the exposure coefficient is required at the 15~
::.tandarti Exposure B value o.fexposure coe_fficient, K zB• as height. The exJJosure coe.fflcient at station 3 at 15 111 heig
a lott'CI' !hnit to the calculated value of K z· is calculated as shown in Table C207B.3-l.
Exan1p!e 2: MultiJJ!e Roughness Change St1JJpose u·e have The value o.fthe exposure coefficient at 15 n1 at station 3
a coastal U'aterH'(~V situation as illustrated in Figure seen ji-0111 the table to be 1.067. This is above that
C'207B.3-1, 1vhere the 1vind conzes fro,n open sea ivith Exposure B. which would be 0.81, but well below that
roughness type D, for 1,vhich 11'e assun1e z 0 = 0. 003 m, Exposure D, 1vhich n·oulti be 1.17, and sin1ilar to tha(fo
and J?asses over a strip of land 1.61 kn1 ivide, rrhich is Exposure C. which would be 1.09. ·
coverecl in buildings that JJroduce (vpical B (ipe roughness.
i.e. z 0 = 0. 3 m. It then JJasses over a 3.22-knz H'ide strip
o_j' coastal a·ateriva:v 1rhere the roughness is again
characteri=etf l~v the 01.1e11 H'ater value z 0 = 0. 003 1n. It
Nm
cali
then trarels over 0.16 kn1 o.froughness ~vpe B (z 0 = 0.3 111
hejOre arriving at the site, station 3 in Figure C207B.3-1. rou
hei,
fi'o
207
300
TRANSITION FROM EXP. C, x - 0 km
Vel,
Z 0 = 0.02 mTO
calc
Z 0 = 0.30m
x = 0.08 km
q
E x = o. 32 km w
w
c
o2
(!) x = 0.80 km
w
6 x = 1.60 km
"'
<(
1-
::i:
(!)
ii] 3 EXP. B
::i:
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
K,
Figure C207B.3-2
Transitionfron1 Terrain Roughness C to Terrain Roughness B, Equation C207B.3.l-9 T
SI
0
a

Table C207B.3-J
Tabulated Exposure Coefficients
Transition fron1 sea to station 1 K10,u K10,d K1s,d FJK LIK1s Kc1)
z
1.215 0.667 0.758 0.220 0.137 0.895
Transitionji-on1 sea to station 2 K10,u K10,d K1s.d FtlK LIK1s Kc2J
z
0.667 1.215 1.215 0.324 -0.190 I.II I
Transitionfi·o,n sea to station 3 K10,u K10,d K,s,d FA!( LIK1s K(3J
z
1.215 0.667 0.667 0.498 0.310 1.067
1Vote: The equilibriu111 values o..f the exposure coefficients. K 10,u, K 10,d and K 15 ,d (do1vn1vinci value of K z at 15 1n), i.vere
calculated from Equation C207B-1 using a and z 8 values obtained fi'Oln Equations C207B-3 and C207B-4 with the
roughness values given. Then F JK is calculated using Equations C207B-7 and C207B-8, and then the value ofLIK at 15 111
height, LIK 1s, is calculated.fi'Oln Equation C207B-6. Finally, the exposure coefficient at 15 mat station i, K;i{ is obtained
j,"0111 Equation C207B-5.
207B.3.2 Velocity Pressure Co111111e11ta1:v:
Velocity pressure, q,, evaluated at height z shall be The basic lVind speet.l is converted to a veloci(v pressure
calculated by the following equation: 'lz in (Nlm 1) at height z by the use qf Equation 207B.3-
I.
q, = 0. 613K,K,,KdV2(N/m );V in mis
2
(2078.3-1)
The constant 0.613 reflects the rnass density c~lair.for
,vhere the standard atnzosphere, that is, ten1perature qf 15 °C
and sea level pressure o..l JOI.325 kPa, and dilnensions
\Vind directionality factor, see associated 1vith 1vind speed in ,nls. The constant is
Section 207 A.6 obtained as follows:
velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see
Section 2078.3. 1 constant JIJ[(l.225 kglnr1)1(9.81 mls1)J
K,, topographic factor defined, see [(mis)}' [9.81 Nlkgj
Section 207 A.8.2 0.613
v basic wind speed, see Section 207A.5
'lz velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207B.3- l at height z
'lzt velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207B.3-l at mean roof height h
The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except where

sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection
of a different value of this coefficient for a design
application.

2078.4 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting Table 207B.3-l

System Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, Kh and K 2
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Part I
2078.4.1 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Rigid
Height above Exposure
Buildings
2round level, z
Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of buildings of all
Im) B c D
0 -4.5 057 0.85 1.03
heights shall be determined by the following equation:
6.0 0.62 0.90 1.08
7.5 0.66 0.94 1.12
(207B.4-l) 9.0 0.70 0.98 1.16
12.0 0.76 1.04 1.22
\Vhere
15.0 0.81 1.09 1.27
q qz for windward walls evaluated at 18.0 0.85 1.13 1.31
height z above the ground 21.0 0.89 1.17 1.34
q q It for leeward \Valls, side \Valls, and 24.0 0.93 1.21 1.38
roofs, evaluated at height h 27.0 0.96 1.24 1.40
q h for windward walls, side walls, 30.0 0.99 1.26 1.43
lee\vard \Valls, and roofs of enclosed 36.0 1.04 1.31 1.48
buildings and for negative internal 42.0 1.09 1.36 1.52
pressure evaluation in partially enclosed 48.0 1.13 1.39 1.55
buildings 54.0 1.17 1.43 1.58
qz for positive internal pressure 60.0 1.20 1.46 1.61
evaluation in partially enclosed buildings 75.0 1.28 1.53 1.68
where height z is defined as the level of 90.0 1.35 1.59 1.73
the highest opening in the building that 1.41 1.64 1.78
105.0
could affect the positive internal
120.0 1.47 1.69 1.82
pressure. For buildings sited in wind-
135.0 1.52 1.73 1.86
borne debris regions, glazing that is not
150.0 1.56 1.77 1.89
i1npact resistant or protected with an
impact resistant covering shall be treated Notes:
as an opening in accordance with Section
207A.10.3. I. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient K z, may be
determined from the following formula:
For positive internal pressure evaluation,
qi 1nay conservatively be evaluated at For 4.5 111 ,,:; Z ,,:; Zg For z < 4.5 m
height h(qi = q")
gust-effect factor, see Section 207 A.9 2/a
external pressure coefficient fro1n Kz = Z. 01 ( z/zg ) Kz = Z. 01 ( 4. 5/zg) 2/a
Figures 207B.4-l, 207B.4-2 and 207B.4-
3 2. a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207 A.9.1.
internal pressure coefficient fron1
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height
Table 207A.11-1
z is acceptable.
q and qi shall be evaluated using exposure defined in
4. Exposure categories are defined Section 207A.7.
Section 207A.7.3. Pressure shall be applied simultaneously
on windward and leeward walls and on roof surfaces as
Co1111nenta1y:
defined in Figures 207B.4-l, 207B.4-2 and 207B.4-3.
Loads on Main Wind-Force Resisting Systen1s: In
The numerical constant of 0.613 should be used except
Equations 207B.4-I and 207B.4-2, a velocity pressure
where sufficient weather data are available to justify a
tern1 qi appears that is defined as the ''velocitJ' pressure
different value of this constant for a specific design
for internal pressure deter1nination. " The JJOsitive
application. The mass density of air will vary as a function
internal pressure is dictated by the positive exterior
of altitude, latitude, temperature, weather, and season.
pressure on the irindivard face at the point ivhere there
Average and extreme values of air density are given in
is an opening. The positive e.Yterior pressure at the
Table C207B.3-2.
opening is governed by the value of q at the level of the

not qJt. For positive internal pressure and judgtnent fi·o111 1vind tunnel stzulies have been used
val,,wtion. q, n1a._v conservative/;, be evaluated at height to specijy either zero or slightly negative pressures
= q1i). For lolv buildings this does not ,nake 111uch (-0.18) depending on the negative pressure coefficient.
'lff&re11ce. but for the example ofa 90-m tall building in These values require the designer to consider a zero or
B with a highest opening at 18 111, the slightly positive net 1vi11d pressure in the load
liff<ere,,,ce behveen q90 and q1a represents a 59 percent co111binalions a/Section 203.
in internal pressure. This difference is
.J/;}nrca,'istic and represents an unnecessaJJ' degree of Table C207B.3-2
Accordingly, q, = q,. for positive Ambient Air Density Values/or Various Altitudes
pressure evaluation in partial(v enclosed
,)1ii'dil1gs where height z is defined as the level of the
Altitude A111hie11t Air Te111perat11re
opening in the building that could affect the
Ift,osil'ive internal pressure. For buildings sited in lVi11d-
>ilim·ne debris regions, lvith glazing that is not in1pact
Minb1111111 Average Ma:ri1111un
Meters
{;'fiisL!,taJ'lt or protected lVith an in1pact protective systen1, (kg/111 3) (kgl,11 3) (kg/111 3)
should be treated on the asszanption there lvill be an
0 1.1392 1.2240 1.3152
305 1.1088 1.187] 1.2720
The pressure coefficients for 610 1.0800 1.1520 1.2288
':i.tc1w;r,11:c:, are se11arated into /lvo categories: 914 1.0512 1.1184 1.1888
1000 1.0432 1.1088 1.1776
Directional Procedure for buildings of all heights 1219 1.0240 1.0848 1.1488
(Figure 2078.4-1) as specified in Section 207Bfor 1524 0.9984 1.0544 1.1120
buildings 1neeting the require111ents specified 1829 0.9728 1.0224 1.0752
therein. 2000 0.9584 1.0064 1.0560
2134 0.9472 0.9920 1.0400
Envelope Procedure for /ow-rise buildings having 2438 0.9232 0.9632 1.0048
a height less than or equal to 18 m (Figure 207C.4- 2743 0.8976 0.9344 0.9712
I) as specified in Section 207C for buildings 3000 0.8784 0.9104 0.9456
111eeting the requiren1ents specified therein. 3048 0.8752 0.9072 0.9408
generating these coefficients. t1vo distinctZv different

'Ca.om·ooc/n,s ,vere usecl. For the pressure coefficients
in Figure 207B.4-1, the more traditional approach
followed and the pressure coefficients reflect the
{a,ctu,a/ loading on each swji,ce of the building as a
ffi,'nc1'io11 o/lvind direction; narnely, ,vinds pe17;endicular
vm·aflel to the ridge line. Observations i111vind tunnel
sho,v that areas of ve,y lo,v negative pressure and
slightly JJOsitive pressure can occur in all roof
l.'1,tn,ct,,ire·s. particularly as the distance ji'Oln the
C.)vinclw,,ra' elil,;e increases and the ,vind strea,ns reattach
the sio:face. These pressures can occur even for
or lolV slope roof structures. Experience

207
Th<
\Vit
det
N1
Figure C207B.4-J to
Applicatio11 of Mi11i111u111 Wind Load ar
pl
th
Figure 2078.4-2. Fra111e loads 011 Llonze roo}S are cuiapted Figure 207B.4-3. The pressure andforce co~fjicient values
in these tables are u11cha11gedfiw11 ANSI A58.l-1972. The F,
ji-0111 the Eurocode {1995). The loads are based 011 data
obtainecl in a nzodeled allnosJJheric bouncla1:i,·-la_ver floit' coe_fficients spec{fied in these tables are based on 1vind- h·
that does not fid(v con1p(v ivith requiren1ents for H:ind- tu11nel tests conclucted untler conditions o.f unifor,n _fioiv p
tu111u!l testing spec{fiecl in this colie (Bless111an 1971 ). and loH' turbulence, ancl their validi~r in turbulent p
]\
Loads for three do111cs (h 0 /D = 0. 5, f /D = 0. 5),(ho/ bounda1:i,1-Ia,.ver.floivs has yet to be co1nplete{v establishecl
D = O,f/D = =
0.5). and (hD/D O,f/D 0.33) are = Adcfitional pressure coefficients .for conditions not
rough(v consistent with data of Taylor (1991). who used an specified herein may be found in SIA (1956) and ASCE
affnospheric bounda,y la_ver as required in this code. Tvvo (1961).
load cases are de_finecl, one o_firhich has a linear variation
o,fpressure.fron1,4 to Bas in the Eurocode (1995) and one 207B.4.2 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Flexible
in 1rvhich the JJressure at A is heh/ constant.fro,n 0° to 25°; Buildings
these IH'O cases are based 011 conzparison oj' the Eurocode
provisions with T,zvlor (I 991). Case A {the Eurocode Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible
calculation) is necessaJJ' in 111any cases to define 1naxin1111n buildings shall be determined from the following equation:
UJJlift. Case B is necessary to prOJJerfv de.fine positi've
pressures .fOr so111e cases, irhich cannot be isolated H'ith
(2078.4-2)
current infor1nation. and ll'hich result in 1naxin111111 base
shear. For donzes larger than 60 111 in dia1neter the
designer shouhl consider use o..f lVind-tunnel testing. where q, q 1, Cp, and ( GCP 1) are as defined in Section
Resonant response is not considered in these 11rovisions. 2078.4.1 and Gr (gust-effect factor) is determined in
VJ/ind-tunnel testing should be usetf to consicfer resonant accordance with Section 207 A.9.5.
response. Local bending 1no111e11ts in the tio111e shell 1na.v be
larger than predicted b.v this n1ethocl tfue to the d{fference
bellveen instantaneous local JJressure distributions and
those predicted by Figure 207B.4-2. If the dome is
supported on i·ertical rvalls direct{v beloiv, it is appropriate
to consider the it'alls as a "chin1ne.v" using Figure 207D.5-
I.

207B.4,3 Open Buildings with Monoslope, Pitched, or under the roof and restrict the 1vituljlo1v. Restricting the
Troughed Free Roofs floiv can introduce substantial UJJH'arli acting pressures
on the botto111 szaface of the roof, tints increasing the
The net design pressure for the MWFRS of open buildings resultant uplift load on the roof Figures 2078.4-4
with monoslope, pitched, or troughed roofs shall be through 2078.4-6 and 207£.8-1 through 207£.8-3 q!Jer
determined by the following equation: the designer two options. Option I (clear wind flow)
implies little (less than 50 percent) or no portion of the
cross-section below the roof is blocked. Option 2
p = q1,GCN (N/m2 ) (207B.4-3) (obstructed wind flow) implies that a significant portion
(more than 75 percent is typical!v referenced in the
\Vhere literature) of the cross-section is blocked b_v goods or
q 11 velocity pressure evaluated at 1nean roof ,naterials heloiv the roof. Clearly, values ivoulcl change
height h using the exposure as defined in fro111 one set of coefficients to the other .follo1rving sorne
Section 207 A.7.3 that results in the highest sort of sn1ooth, but as yet unknovi1n, relationship. In
wind loads for any wind direction at the developing the provisions included in this code, the
site 50 percent blockage value was selected for Option I.
G gust-effect factor from Section 207 A. 9 1vith the expectation that it represents a so111e1vhat
CN net pressure coefficient detennined fron1 conservative transition. If the designer is not clear about
Figures 207B.4-4 through 207B.4-7 usage of the space belon1 the roof or (f the usage couhf
change to restrict free air flo1v, then design loads for
both options should be used.
Net pressure coefficients, CN, include contributions fro1n
top and bottom surfaces. All load cases shown for each roof
angle shall be investigated. Plus and minus signs signify
pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of 207B.4.4 Roof Overhangs
the roof, respectively.
The positive external pressure on the bottom surface of
For free roofs with an angle of plane of roof from windward roof overhangs shall be determined using
horizontal (J less than or equal to 5° and containing fascia CP = 0.8 and combined with the top surface pressures
panels. the fascia panel shall be considered an inverted determined using Figure 207B.4-l.
parapet. The contribution of loads on the fascia to the
MWFRS loads shall be determined using Section 207B.4.5 207B.4.5 Parapets
with qP equal to q,,.
The design wind pressure for the effect of parapets on
Conunenta,:v: MWFRS of rigid or flexible buildings with flat, gable, or
hip roofs shall be determined by the following equation:
Figures 2078.4-4 through 2078.4-6 and 207£.8-1
through 207£.8-3 are presented for wind loads on 207B.4-4
MWFRSs and components and cladding of open
buildings 1vith roofs as shov,-n, resJJectively. This work is
\Vhere
based on the Australian Standard AS] 170.2-2000, Part
2: Wind Actions, with modifications to the MWFRS Pp combined net pressure on the parapet due
JJressure coefficients based on recent stuclies (Alflnan to the combination of the net pressures
and Uematsu and Stathopoulos 2003). from the front and back parapet surfaces.
Plus (and minus) signs signify net
Two load cases, A and 8, are given in Figures 2078.4-4 pressure acting toward (and away from)
through 2078.4-6. These pressure distributions provide the front (exterior) side of the parapet
loacl, that envelop the results fi'om detailed wind-tunnel velocity pressure evaluated at the top of
tneasure,nents o_f silnultaneous nor1nal forces and the parapet
moments. Application of both load cases is required to co1nbined net pressure coefficient
envelop the co1nbinations of 1naxinnun nortnal forces +1.5 for windward parapet
\'and 1110,nents that are appropriate for the particular -1.0 for leeward parapet
roqf shape and blockage configuration.
The roof wind loading on open building roofs is highly

deJJetulent upon whether goocfs or ,naterials are stored
207B.4.6 Design Wind Load Cases 111ore uncler .full (not reduced) base shear. The liesigner
,nay 1Fish to app{v this level o.f eccentrici(v at .full 1vi11d
The MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind loads /oa,iing for certain nzore critical buildings even though it
have been detennined under the provisions of this chapter, is not requirecf by the code. The present nzore nzoderate
shall be designed for the wind load cases as defined in torsional loacl require111ents can in JJart be just[fied by the
Figure 207B.4-8. .fact that the ciesign 1ri11dforces tend to be upper-bozauijbr
,nost co,11111011 building shapes.
Exce1Jtia11:
In buildings ivitlz sonze structural syste,ns, nzore severe
[Jui/dings rneeting the requiren,ents of Section D 1. I <~l loading can occur 1vhe11 the resultant }rind load acts
Appendix D. ASCE 7-10 need only be designedfor Case I diago11al(v to the building. To accou11t for this ejfect and
and Case 3 of Fi1=,rure 2078,4-8. the .fact that 111an.i· buildings exhibit 1naxin1u111 reSJJonse in
the across-1vi11d direction (the standarcl current(v has no
The eccentricity e for rigid structures shall be 1neasured ana~rtical procedure .for this case). a structure slzoulcl be
from the geometric center of the building face and shall be capable of resisting 75 JJercent of the design ivind load
considered for each principal axis (ex, ey ). The apJJ!ied sinzultaneous(v along each principal axis as
eccentricity e for flexible structures shall be determined required by Case 3 in Figure 207B.4-8.
from the following equation and shall be considered for
each principal axis (ex, ey ): For .flexible buildings, c~vna,nic efj'ects can increase
torsional loading. Additional torsional locufing can occur
because o.f eccentrici(v betlveen the elastic shear center
2 and the center o.f nzass at each level of the structure.
eQ + 1. n1,j(gQQeQ) + (gnRen) 2 Equation 207B.4-5 accountsjor this (fleet.
e =----ca=========~
2
1. n1,j(gQQeQ) + (gnRen) 2 It is ilnportant to note that sign{ficant torsion can occur on
!01r-rise buil<.lings also (lsyu,nov and Case 2000) cnul,
207B.4-5 there_fore, the 1vind loading require,nents o.f Section
\Vhere 207B.4.6 are now applicable to buildings ofa/1 heights.
eQ eccentnc1ty e as detennined for rigid As discussed in Section 207F, the lvind tunnel procedure
structures in Figure 207B.4-8 should ahva.vs be considered .for builcfings 1vith unusual
eR distance between the elastic shear center shapes, rectangular buildings 1vith larger aspect ratios,
and center of 1nass of each floor and cfyna,nical(v sensitive buildings. The e_ffects of torsion
I,, gQ, Q, gn, and R shall be as defined in Section can ,nore accurate(v be deter,ninedfor these cases and.for
207A.9 the n1ore nor,nal building shapes using the H'ind tunnel
procedure.
The sign of the eccentricity e shall be plus or mmus,
\Vhichever causes the 1nore severe load effect. 207B.4. 7 Minimum Design Wind Loads
Con11ne11tary: The wind load to be used in the design of the MWFRS for
an enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be less
Wind tunnel research (lsyumov I 983, Boggs et al. 2000, than 0.77 kN/m 2 multiplied by the wall area of the building
lsyumov and Case 2000. and Xie and !Jwin 2000) has and 0.38 kN/m 2 multiplied by the roof area of the building
sholvn that torsional load is caused by no11-uniforn1 projected onto a vertical plane nonnal to the assu1ned \Vind
pressure on the different faces of the building Ji-om wind direction. Wall and roof loads shall be applied
flow around the building. inte1:ference effects of nearby simultaneously. The design wind force for open buildings
buildings and terrain, and b.v dyna,nic e_ffects on ,nore shall be not less than 0.77 kN/m 2 multiplied by the area Ar·
flexible buildings. load Cases 2 and 4 in Figure 207B.4-8
SJJecifles the torsional loacling to 15 percent eccentricit;,· Co111n1e11tary:
utuler 75 percent of the 111axi11nun 1,vind shear for Load
Case 2. Although this is ,nore in line 1vith lvind tunnel This section SJJecifies a 1nini11ua11 ivind load to be applied
experience on square and rectangular buildings ivith hori=ontal(v on the entire vertical projection ofthe building
as11ect ratios up to about 2.5, ii 1110.v not cover all cases, as shown in Figure C207B.4-I. This load case is to be
even for synunetric and con11no11 building shapes ivhere applied as a separate loa,i case in addition to the 11or1nal
larger torsions have been observed For e:a.nnJJle, it1ind load cases specified in other portions of this chapter.
tunnel studies often sho1v an eccentrici(v of 5 percent or

ELEVATION
GABLE, HIP ROOF
q,GCp
q1,GCp
.L-;..i..,.,..,.,..,.,.,,.,..,.,-,+-,;;.I
i - - - - [;---,.; i----L~--i
PLAN ELEVATION ELEVATION
MONOSLOPE ROOF (NOTE 4)
i-----L.-----i i------1;-----
PLAN ELEVATION
MANSARD ROOF (NOTE 8)

Figure 2078.4-1
External Pressure Coefficients, Cp, Walls and Roofs Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

Wall Pressure Coefficients, C

Surface L/B c Use With
Windward Wall All values 0.8 q,
0-1 -0.5
Leeward Wal I 2 -0.3 q,,
2: 4 -0.2
Side Wall All values -0.7 q,,
Roof Pressure Coefficients, Cv, for use with q,,

Windward Leeward
Wind
An~ le, e (dei rees) An,Ie, e (dei rees)
Direction
h/L IO 15 20 25 30 35 45 2: 60 IO 15 2: 20
Normal -0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0*
-0.3 -0.5 -0.6
to C".0.25 -0.18 0.0* 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 o.01e
Ridge -0.9 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0*
-0.5 -0.5 -0.6
fore 2: 0.5 -0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 o.01e
10° -1.3** -1.0 -0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 0.0*
-0.7 -0.6 -0.6
2:10 -0.18 -0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.0ie
Normal Horizontal distance frotn
to windward edge
cp *Value is provided for interpolation purposes
Ridge Oto h/2 -0.9, -0.18
,,;o.5
fore< h/2 to h -0.9, -0.18 **Value can be reduced linearly \Vith area over ,vhich
10° and h to 2 h -0.5, -0.18 it is applicable as follows
Parallel > 2h -0.3, -0.18
to ridge Area (m 2) Reduction Factor
for all e Oto h/2 -1.3**, -0.18
,,; 9.3 m2 1.0
2:1.0
23.2 1n 2 0.9
> h/2 -0.7, -0.18
2: 92.9 m2 0.8
Notes:
l. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
2. Linear interpolation is permitted for values of L/B, h/L and e other than shown. Interpolation shall only be carried out
bet\veen values of the sa1ne sign. Where no value of the sa1ne sign is given, assun1e 0.0 for interpolation purposes.
3. Where t,vo values of CP are listed, this indicates that the ,vind,vard roof slope is subjected to either positive or negative
pressures and the roof structure shall be designed for both conditions. Interpolation for intermediate ratios of h/ L in this
case shall only be carried out between CP values of like sign.
4. For 1nonoslope roofs, entire roof surface is either a ,vind,vard or lee\vard surface.
5. For flexible buildings use appropriate Gr as determined by Section 207B.9.4.
6. Refer to Figure 207B.4-2 for domes and Figure 207B.4-3 for arched roofs.
7. Notation:
B horizontal din1ension of building, 1n, 1neasured nonnal to wind direction.
L horizontal dimension of building, m, measured parallel to wind direction.
h mean roof height in meters, except that eave height shall be used fore ,,; 10°
z height above ground, m
G gust effect factor.
q,. q,, velocity pressure, (N/m2 ), evaluated at respective height.
e Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
8. For mansard roofs, the top horizontal surface and leeward inclined surface shall be treated as leeward surfaces from the
table.
9. Except for MWFRS at the roof consisting of moment resisting frames, the total horizontal shear shall not be less than that
determined by neglecting wind forces on roof surfaces.
I 0. For roof slopes greater than 80°, use CP = 0.8

A (hp ID= 015)

... A(!;, IO=O)
...
'1lA
A(hp JD J: 1.0)
a- .., C(hplO=O)
I~
0.0
~,
~.,
-0•
J -0,
·1.0
j -12
·1A
.,.
.,.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Ratio of Rise lo Diameter, f/D
External Pressure Coefficients for Domes with a Circular Base

(Adapted from Eurocode, 1995)
Two load cases shall be considered:
Case A: C1, values between A and Band between Band C shall be dctern1ined by linear interpolation along arcs on the don1C purallcl to the wind
direction;
Case B: CP shall be the constant value of A for 9 $ 25°, and shall be determined by linear interpolation from 25° to Band from B to C.
Values denote Cp to be used with q{liD+f) where hD + f is the height at the top of the dome.
Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
CP is constant on the dome surface for arcs of circles perpendicular to the wind direction; for exan1plc, the arc passing through 8-8-8 and all arcs parallel
to 8-B-B.
For values of hD / D between those listed on the graph curves, linear interpolation shall be permitted.
9 = 0° on dome spring line, (} = 90° at dome center top point. f is measured from spring line to top,
The total horizontal shear shall not be less than that determined by neglecting wind forces on roof surfaces.
For f /D values less than 0.05, use Figure 2078.4-l.
Figure 2078.4-2
External Pressure Coefficients, Cµ, Domed Roofs Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

Conditions Rise-to-span c
ratio, r Windward Center Lee,vard
uarter half uarter
Roof on elevated 0 < r < 0.2 -0.9 -0.7-r -0.5
structure 0.2 $ r < 0.3 * 1.Sr - 0.3 -0.7-r -0.5
0.3 $ r $ 0.6 2.75r - 0.7 -0.7-r -0.5
Roof springing from -0.7-r
0 <r $ 0.6 1.4r -0.5
round level
*1Vhen the rise-to-span ratio is 0. 2 :5 r :5 0. 3, alternate coefficients given by 6r- 2.1 shall also be used/or
the ,vindward quarter.
Notes:
I. Values listed are for the determination of average loads on main wind force resisting systems.
2. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. For wind directed parallel to the axis of the arch, use pressure coefficients from Figure 207B.4-l with wind directed parallel to ridge.
4. For components and cladding: {I) At roof perimeter, use the external pressure cocflicicnts in Figure 207E.4-2A, Band C with (J based on spring-line
slope and (2) for remaining roof areas, use exten1al pressure coefficients of this table 1nultiplied by 0.87.
Figure 2078.4-3
External Pressure Coefficients, Cp, Arched Roofs, 0.25 $ h/ L $ 1.0
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

L L
0.5L O.SL O.SL 0.5L
Wind Wind
Direction
Direction~---
<=
'("' 180°
~/l;//////:~777777
Wind Direction, = 0° Wind Direction, 180° =
Load Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind
Case Flow Flow
A 1.2 0.3 -0.5 -1.2 -1.2 0.3 -0.5 -1.2

O' B -1.1 -0. l -1.l -0.6 -1.1 -0. l -1.1 -0.6
A -0.6 -1 -1 -1.5 0.9 1.5 -0.2 -1.2
B -1.4 0 -1.7 -0.8 1.6 0.3 0.8 -0.3
A -0.9 -l.3 -1.1 -1.5 l.3 1.6 0.4 -1.1
B -1.9 0 -2.1 -0.6 1.8 0.6 1.2 -0.3
A -.15 -1.6 -1.5 -1.7 1.7 1.8 0.5 -1
B -2.4 -0.3 -2.3 -0.9 2.2 0.7 l.3 0
A -1.8 -1.8 -1.5 -1.8 2.1 2.1 0.6 -1
B -2.5 -0.5 -2.3 -1.1 2.6 1.6 0.1
A -1.8 -1.8 -1.5 -1.8 2.1 2.2 0.7 -0.9
B -2.4 -0.6 -2.2 -1.1 2.7 I.I 1.9 0.3
A -1.6 -1.8 -l.3 -1.8 2.2 2.5 0.8 -0.9
B -2.3 -0.7 -1.9 -1.2 2.6 1.4 2.1 0.4
Cmv and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and boltom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
Clear wind Oow denotes relatively unobstructed wind llow with blockage less than or equal to 50o/o. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind llow (> 50% blockage).
For values of 8 between 7 .5° and 45°, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of (J less than 7.5°, use load coefficients for 0".
Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
L horizontal di1ncnsion of roof, measured in the along wind direction, 111

h mean roof height, m
y direction of wind, 0
(J angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 2078.4-4
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Monoslope Free Roofs e :,; 45°, y = 0°, 180°
0.25 :S h/ L :S 1.0 Open Buildings

Wind
Direction
=>oo
y ==
h
Roof Wind Direction, y = 0°, 180°

Angle Load Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
e Case CNw CNL CNw CNL
A I. I -0.3 -1.6 -1
7.5°
B 0.2 -1.2 -0.9 -1.7
A 1.1 -0.4 -1.2 -1
15°
B 0.1 -1.1 -0.6 -1.6
A 1.1 0.1 -1.2 -1.2
22.5°
B -0.1 -0.8 -0.8 -1.7
A 1.3 0.3 -0.7 -0.7
30°
B -0.1 -0.9 -0.2 -1.1
A 1.3 0.6 -0.6 -0.6
37.5°
B -0.2 -0.6 -0.3 -0.9
A I.I 0.9 -0.5 -0.5
45°
B -0.3 -0.5 -0.3 -0.7
Notes:
I. CNw and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
2. Clear wind now denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50o/o. Obstructed wind now denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind flow(> SOo/o blockage).
3. For values of O between 7.5° and 45", linear interpolation is permitted. For values of O less than 7 .5°, use monoslopc roof load coefficients.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away fro1n the top roof surface, respectively.
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L horizontal dimension of roof, 1ncasured in the along wind direction, m
h mean roof height, 111
() angle of plane ofrooffroin horizontal, 0
Figure 2078.4-5
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Pitched Free Roofs e $ 45°, y = 0°, 180°
0.25 $ h/ L $ 1.0 Open Buildings

Wind
Direction
=>oo
'Y =
h
Roof Wind Direction, v 0°, 180°=

Angle Load Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
e Case CNw CNL CNw CNL
A -l.l 0.3 -1.6 -0.5

7.5° 1.2 -0.9 -0.8
B -0.2
A -1.1 0.4 -1.2 -0.5
15° -0.6 -0.8
B 0.1 1.1
A -1.1 -0.1 -1.2 -0.6
22.5° 0.8 -0.8 -0.8
B -0.1
A -1.3 -0.3 -1.4 -0.4
30° 0.9 -0.2 -0.5
B -0.1
A -1.3 -0.6 -l.4 -0.3
37.5° 0.6 -0.3 -0.4
B 0.2
A -l.l -0.9 -1.2 -0.3
45° 0.5 -0.3 -0.4
B 0.3
CNw and CNL denote net pressures (contributions fro1n top and bottom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to SOo/o. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind flow(> 50% blockage).
For values of (J between 7 .5° and 45°, linear interpolation is pcnnitted. For values of 6 less than 7 .5°, use monos!ope roof load coefficients.
Plus and n1inus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
Notation:
L horizontal dimension of roof, 1neasured in the along wind direction, m
h mean roof height, tn
8 angle of plane of roof fro1n horizontal, 0
Figure 207B.4-6
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Troughed Free Roofs e 5 45°, y =0°, 180°
0.25 5 h/ L 5 1.0 Open Buildings

L
7
I l;::::d
.__..::::,,,.(} ~dge
Distance
from
Windward
Edge
e
11 Wind Direction
y=90°
Wind Direction
r=90°
11 Wind Direction
'Y = 90°
Horizontal
Distance Clear Wind Obstructed
from Roof Angle Flo,v Wind Flow
Load Case
Windward e
Edge Cmv CNL
All Shanes A -0.8 1.2
,s; h
e < 45° B 0.8 0.5
All Shanes A -0.6 -0.9
> h, ,s; Zh e < 45° B 0.5 0.5
All Shanes A -0.3 -0.6
> Zh e < 45° B 0.3 0.3
Notes:
I. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50°/o. Obstructed wind !low denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind flow{> SOo/o blockage).
3. Plus and n1inus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
4. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
5. For monoslopc roofs with theta less than 5 degrees, CN values shown apply also for cases where gamma= 0 degrees and 0.05 less than or equal to h/ L
less than or equal to 0.25. See Figure 2078.4-4 for other h/L values.
6. Notation:
L horizontal dimension of roof, tncasured in the along wind direction, m
h mean roof height, 111. See Figures 2078.4-4, 2078.4-5 or 2078.4-6 for a graphical depiction of this ditncnsion.
9 angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 2078.4-7
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Free Roofs e ,s; 45°, y = 90°, 270°
0.25 ,s; h/ L ,s; 1.0 Open Buildings
Association nf Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

l'LX
PWX "u
CASE1 CASE3
By
By
11.563 I' WY I
9.75PWY
ll.75l'LY IJ.$631' LX
IJ.56JPu•
M7 = 0.75 (Pwx+P1.JBxex Mr= 0. 75 (Pwr+PLY}Byey Mr= 0.563 (Pwx+P1.JBxex + 0.563 (Pwr+Pu)Byey
ex=± 0.15 Bx ey=±O.J5B, ex=±0.15Bx er=±0.15Br
CASE2 CASE4
Case 1: Full design \Vind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the structure, considered
separately along each principal axis.
Case 2: Three quarters of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the
structure in conjunction with a torsional 1no1nent as sho\vn, considered separately for each principal axis.
Case 3: Wind loading as defined in Case I, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
Case 4: Wind loading as defined in Case 2, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
Notes:
I. Design wind pressures for windward and leeward faces shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of 2078.4.1 and 207B.4.2 as applicable
for building of all heights.
2. Diagrams show plan views of building.
3. Notation:
Pwx,Pwy Windward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
PLx,Piy Leeward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
e(ex,ey) Eccentricity for the x, y principal axis of the structure, respectively.
Mr Torsional motnent per unit height acting about a vertical axis of the building.
Figure 207B.4-8
Design Wind Load Cases All Heights

Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings with 207B.5 General Requirements

h=48m
207B.5.I Design Procedure
This section has been added to ASCE 7-10 to cover the
conunon practical cases o..f enclosed si111ple diaphrag,n The procedure specified herein applies to the determination
buildings up to height h = 48 m. Two classes of buildings of MWFRS wind loads of enclosed simple diaphragm
are covered hv this 111ethod. Class 1 buildings have h $; buildings, as defined in Section 207 A.2, with a mean roof
18m with plan aspect ratios L/B between 0.2 and 5.0. height h ~ 48 m. The steps required for the determination
Cases A through Fare described in Appendix D, ASCE 7- of MWFRS wind loads on enclosed simple diaphragm
10 to allou• the designer to establish the lines o_fresistance buildings are shown in Table 2078.5-1.
l>f the MWFRS in each direction so that the torsional load
cases o.f Figure 207B.4-8 need not be considered. Class 2
builclings lurve 18m < h $; 48 111 lvith JJ/an aspect ratios User Note:
<if L/B between 0.5 and 2.0. Cases A through E l>f
Appendix D, ASCE 7-10 are described to allow the Part 2 of Section 2078 is a simplified method for
tlesigner to establish the lines o..fresistance of the A-flt'FRS determining the wind pressures for the MWFRS of
so that the to1sional load cases of Figure 2078.4-8 need enclosed, si,nJJle diaJJhrag,n buildings 1vhose height
not be considerecf. h is s; 4 n1. The 1vi11d pressures are obtained direct~v
.fro,n a table. The building ,nay be of any general plan
For the type qf builclings covered in this 1nethod, the shape and roof geon1e/Jy that ,natches the SJJecified
internal building pressure cancels out and need not be figures. This n1ethod is a sin1]J/(fication o.fthe traditional
considered.for the design o.fthe 1\fTVFRS. Design net lvind "all heights" method (Directional Procedure)
J?ressures .for rooft and lvalls are tabulated (.iirectl.v in contained in Part 1 a/Section 2078.
Tables 2078.6-1 and 2078.6-2 using the Directional
Procedure as ,lescribed in Part I. Guhielines .for
deter1nining the exterior pressures on 1rvind~rard, lee1vard,
and side walls are provided in footnotes to Table 2078.6-
1.
The requiren1ents in Class 2 buildings for natural Ind/ding

fi'equency (75/h) and structural damping (/3 =
1.S°/o critical) are necessary to ensure that the Gust Effect
Factor, Gf· which has been calculated and built into the
design proce,lure, is consistent 1rvith the tabulated
pressures. Theji·equency o/75/h represents a reasonable
lolver bound to values found in practice. If calculated
.frequencies are found to be loiver, then consideration
should be given to stiffening the building. A structural
damping value of 1.5 %, applicable at the ultimate wind
speeds as defined in the 11e1r 1rvilul speed ,naps, is
conservative for 1nost conunon building (vpes and is
consistent 1vith a da,nping value o.f 1% for the ultilnate
wind speeds divided by 1. 6 as contained in the NSCP 20 JO
(ASCE 7-05) wind speed map. Because Class 1 buildings
are limited to h ~ 18 m, the building can be assumed to
be rigid as defined in the glossm:v, and the Gust Effect
Factor can be assumed to be 0.85. For this class of
buildings fi·equency and dan1ping need not be considered.

Table 2078.5-1 4. The topographic effect factor K zt = 1. 0 or the wind

Steps to Determine MWFRS Wind pressures detennined fron1 this section shall be
Loads Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings multiplied by K 2 , at each height z as determined from
( h :S48 m) Section 207A.8. It shall be permitted to use one value
of K 2 , for the building calculated at 0. 33/t.
Determine risk category of building or other Alternatively it shall be permitted to enter the pressure
structure, see Table I 03-1 table with a wind velocity equal to Vfl{;, where K 2 ,
Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the is determined at a height of 0. 33/t.
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
JA, Bore Class 2 Buildings:
Detennine ,vind load parameters:
l. The building shall be an enclosed simple diaphragm
;,., Wind directionality factor, Kd, see building as defined in Section 207 A.2.
;;., Exposure categ01y B, C or D, see 2. The building shall have a mean roof height 18 m
Section 207 A. 7 (18 m < h :S 48 m).
,.. Topographic factor, K 2 ,, see 3. The ratio of L/B shall not be less than 0.5 nor more
Section 207A.8 and Figure 207A.8-l than 2.0 (0. 5 :S L/ B :S 2. 0).
)"' Enclosure classification, see
Section 207A. IO 4. The fi.mdamental natural frequency (HeiiZ) of the
building shall not be less 75/h where his in meters.
Enter table to detennine net pressures on
walls at top and base of building respectively,
Ph , Po, Table 2078.6-1
5. The topographic effect factor K 2 , =
1. 0 or the wind
pressures detennined fro1n this section shall be
Enter table to detennine net roof pressures, multiplied by K,, at each height z as determined from
Pz, Table 2078.6-2 Section 207 A.8. It shall be permitted to use one value
of K,, for the building calculated at 0. 33h.
Detern1ine topographic factor, Kzt, and apply Alternatively it shall be permitted to enter the pressure
factor to wall and roof pressures (if
table with a wind velocity equal to V fl{;, where K,,
applicable), see Section 207 A.8
is determined at a height of 0. 33h.
Apply loads to walls and roofs
simultaneously. 2078.5.3 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
207A
/.2078.5.2 Conditions Refer to Section 207 A for determination of Basic Wind

Speed V (Section 207A.5) and exposure category
(Section 207A.7) and topographic factor K 2 , (Section
fn addition to the requirements in Section 2078. l.2, a
207A.8).
:!building whose design ,vind loads are detennined in
.~ccordance with this section shall meet all of the following
;conditions for either a Class I or Class 2 building (see 2078.5.4 Diaphragm Flexibility
Figure 2078.5-1):
The design procedure specified herein applies to buildings
1 Buildings:
having either rigid or flexible diaphragms. The structural
analysis shall consider the relative stiffness of diaphragms
and the vertical elements of the MWFRS.
The building shall be an enclosed simple diaphragm
building as defined in Section 207 A.2.
Diaphragms constructed of wood panels can be idealized
as flexible. Diaphragms constructed of untapped metal
The building shall have a mean roof height h :S 18 m.
decks, concrete filled metal decks, and concrete slabs, each
having a span-to-depth ratio of 2 or less, are permitted to
The ratio of L/ B shall not be less than 0.2 nor more
be idealized as rigid for consideration of \Vind loading.
than 5.0 (0. 2 :S L/ B :S 5. O).

2078.6 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting H'all sznface is required, internal pressure 1nust be
System included as defined in Part I ofSection 1078.
2078.6.1 Wall and Roof Surfaces-Class 1 and 2 The clistribution of 1vall pressures be!lreen lrindlvarcl and
Buildings leeward wall sw:faces is usefi,l for the design qffloor and
roo..f c/iaphragn1 ele111e11ts like clrag strut collector becun\',
Net wind pressures for the walls and roof surfaces shall be as well asfor MWFRS wall elements. The values defined in
determined from Tables 2078.6-1 and 2078.6-2. Note 4 of Table 207B. 6-1 are obtained as follows: The
respectively, for the applicable exposure category as external pressure coc1ficient .for all 1rinchrard \Valls ls
determined by Section 207 A. 7. CP = 0.8/0r all L/B values. The lee1vard ivall CP value IS
(-0.5)for L/ B valuesfi-0111 0.5 to 1.0 and is (-0.3) for L/B
For Class 1 building with L/ B values less than 0.5, use = 2.0. ,Voting that the lecivardn·a/1 pressure is co11stantfi1r'
wind pressures tabulated for L/ B = 0. 5. For Class I the _full height o.f the building, the leelrard v,a!I pressure
building with L/ B values greater than 2.0, use wind can be calculatetl as a percentage o.f the P1t value in tlz(?
pressures tabulated for L/B = Z. 0. table. The percentage is 0.5/(0.8 + 0.5) x JOO= 38%for
L/ B = 0.5 to 1.0. The percentage is 0.31(0.8+0.3) x I 00 =
Net wall pressures shall be applied to the projected area of 27?/0 .for L/ B = 2.0. Jnte1polt1tion betlreen these t,vo
the building walls in the direction of the wind, and exterior JJercentages can be usecljOr L/B ratios bellreen 1.0 and_
side wall pressures shall be applied to the projected area of 2.0. The 1vi!ubrarcl 11·all 1n·essure is then calculated as th{!_
the building walls normal to the direction of the wind d(fference benreen the total net pressure fron1 the table
acting outward according to Note 3 of Table 2078.6-1, using the Ph and p 0 ralues and the constant leen•arcl 1val[
simultaneously with the roof pressures from Table 2078.6- pressure.
2 as shown in Figure 2078.6-1.
Sideira/1 pressures can be calculatecl in a sinzilar 1nan11ef
Where t\VO load cases are shown in the table of roof to the l1'indn·arcl (l/l(./ lee,rard n·all pressures by taking a
pressures, the effects of each load case shall be investigated JJercentage of the net ,val! JJressures. Tlze Cp value ,(or
separately. The MWFRS in each direction shall be side\\'alls is (-0.7). Tims, for L/B = 0.5 to 1.0, the
designed for the \Vind load cases as defined in Figure percentage is II. 7/(0.8 + 11.5) x JOO = 54%. For L/ B = 2.0,
2078.4-8. the percentage is II. 7/(0.8 + 0.3) x JOO = 64%. Note that
the sicleH·all pressures are constant up the.full height qftlu:'
E.rception.' hui!ding.
'The torsional load case:,, in Figure 2078,4-8 (Case 2 an,! The pressures tabulated f'or this 111etlzo1.f are basecl on
(~ase 4) need not be considered/Or builclings 1-vhich 1neet silnplifying conservative assunzptions 111acle to the d{fj'erent
the requiren,ents <~lAppentlix D. ASC'E' 7-JO, pressure coe_fficient (GCp) cases tabulated in Figure
207B.4-l, which is the hasisfor the traditional all heights
('on1111enta1:v: building procedure (ciefined as the Directional Procedure
in this code) that has been a JJart o.f the standarcl since
1Vall and ro°'lnet pressures are shcn'v'/1 in Tables 207B.6-J 1972. The external pressure coe_fficients Cp}'or ro£?f.\' have
a11cl 2078.6-2 anti are calculated using the external heen multiplied hy 0.85, a reasonable gust e[fectfi1ctor.fr1t'
1n·essure coe..[ficients in Figure 207B.4-l. Along u•ind net 1nost co1n1no11 roo,f fi·an1ing. and then co1nbined irith an
1vall JJressures are apJJliecl to the JJrojected area o..f the internal JH'essurc coe_fficientjiJr encloseLI buildings (plus d,:
builcling 1ralls in the clirection c~f tlze 11'ind, and exterior 1ninus 0.18) to obtain a net JJressure coejf,.cient to serve as
shleiva/1 JJressures are a11pliecl to the projectecl area o_(tlze the basis"for JJressure calculation. The linear 1rall 11ressure
huihling H'alls nornzal to the direction r~l tlze 1vind acting 1.Jiagra111 has been conceive,! so that the a11plied pressures,
outvrarcl. silnultaneous/._v 1vith the roof 1n·essures .fi·o,n J,·0111 the table produce the sanu: overturning 1110111e11t as the
Table 207B.6-2. Distribution o..f the net ii·a/1 Jlressures nzore exact pressures .fi·onz Part 1 o.f Section 207B. For
betvveen 1vindn·arcl and lee1varcl 1vall s1u:faces is cle_fined in detern1i11ation of" the ,val! pressures tabulated. the actual
Note 4 qf Table 207B.6-l. The magnitude of exterior gust ejfect factor has been calculated .fronz Equation
side,vall pressure is deternzined j,·0111 Note 2 o.f Table 207A. 9-10 based 011 building height, 1vind spee,f, exJJosure,
207B.6-J. It is to be noted that all tabulated pressures are fi·equency. atui the assunzed clanzping value.
defined 1vithout consideration of internal JJressures
because internal pressures cancel out 1vhe11 considering
the net effect on the MWFRS of. simple diaphragm
builclings. fVhere the net 1vind pressure on any inclividual

207B.6.2 Parapets Con1111enta1:v:
The effect of horizontal wind loads applied to all vertical The effect of vertical wind loading on a windward roof
surfaces of roof parapets for the design of the MWFRS overhang is specified in Section 207B.4.4 of Part 1. A
shall be based on the application of an additional net positive pressure coefficiellf of +0.8 is specified This
horizontal wind pressure applied to the projected area of co,npares to a net pressure coefficient tabu/atell for the
the parapet surface equal to 2.25 times the wall pressures 1vinc/u:ard edge =one 3 o.f -1.06 (derived ji·on1
tabulated in Table 207B.6-l for L/ B = 1. 0. The net 0.85 x -1.3 x 0.8 - 0.18). The 0.85 factor represents the
pressure specified accounts for both the wind\vard and gust factor G, the 0.8 multiplier accounts for the effective
leeward parapet loading on both the windward and leeward 1vincl area re,fuction to the 1.3 value o.f Cp specified in
building surface. The parapet pressure shall be applied Figure 2078.4-1 of Part I, and the -(1.18 is the internal
sin1t1ltaneously \Vith the specified \Vall and roof pressures pressure contribution. The ratio of coefficients is 0.811. 06
shown in the table as shown in Figure 207B.6-2. The height = 0.755. Thus, a multiplier of 0. 75 011 the tabulated
h used to enter Table 207B.6-I to determine the parapet pressure for =one 3 in Table 207B.6-2 is specified.
pressure shall be the height to the top of the parapet as
shown in Figure 2078.6-2 (use h = "-,,).
Co111111enta1:i ·:
The q(fect ,?(parapet loadi11g 011 the MWFRS is specified i11

_Section 207B.4.5 ofPart I. The net pressure coe.fflcient_for
the ivinchvard JJarapet is +1.5 and for the leelrarcf paraJJet
is -!.!I. The combined effect of both produces a 11et
coe(ficie11t of +2.5 applied to the wi11dward swface to
t:rccou11t .for the cunnrlative effect on the MfVFRS in a
siJnple diaphragn1 building. This pressure coejf,cient
compares to a net pressure coefficient of 1. 3Gr for the
tabulated horizo11tal wall pressure p,. at the top of the
building. Asszoning a loH·er-bozoui gust .factor
Gf ::::: 0. 85, the ratio of the JJarapet JJressure to the H'all
pressure is 2.51(0.85 xJ.3) = 2.25. Thus, a value of 2.25 is
-assunu1d as a reasonable constant to app(r to the tabulated
,t·all pressure Ph to account for the additional JJaraJJet
loading 011 the MWFRS.
207B.6.3 Roof Overhangs
The effect of vertical wind loads on any roof overhangs

shall be based on the application of a positive wind
pressure on the underside of the windward overhang equal
to 75% of the roof edge pressure from Table 2078.6-2 for
Zone 1 or Zone 3 as applicable. This pressure shall be
applied to the windward roof overhang only and shall be
applied simultaneously with other tabulated wall and roof
pressures as shown in Figure 2078.6-3.

O.ZL::; B :5 SL
PLAN
CLASS 1 BUILDING
. .. l
r=•=========r"'""'·" ELEVATION
h = 18m
WAI
I.
0. SL :5 B :5 ZL
SEE
·I
L
PLAN
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT, h
CLASS 2 BUILDING
h = 18to48 m
ELEVATION
J\/ote: Roofform may be flat, gable, mansard or hip
Figure 2078.5-1
Building Geometry Requirements Building Class, h ,,; 48 m
Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings

SEE FIGURE 2078.6-2 FOR

PARAPET WIND PRESSURES ROOF PRESSURES
SEE TABLE 2078.6·2
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT h
WIND
WALL PRESSURES
B
SEE TABLE 2078.6·1
h
PLAN
ELEVATION
Figure 2078.6-1
Application of Wind Pressures Wind Pressures - Walls and Roof, h,,;; 48 m

2-88 CHAPTER 2 - M1111murn Design Loads
---· Pp ·-----;-----
.
ADDITIONAL LOAD ON MWFRS FROM
ALL PARAPETS AND PARAPET
I SURFAC ES
I
I
- I
I MEAN ROOF HEIGHT h
. I
I
. I
I
-- - I
p,, WALL
PRESS UREFROM .
TABLE 207 B.6·1
AT HEIGHT h
h
Pp= 2. 25 TIMES THE PRES SURE

DETERMINED FROM TABLE 2078.6-1
FOR A HEIGHT MEASURED TOTHE
TOP OF THE PAPARET, hp
Figure 2078.6-2
Application of Parapet Wind Loads Parapet Wind Loads, h eo; 48 m

ROOF EDGE PRESSURE FROM TABLE

ZONES 1 OR 3 AS APPLICABLE
P1 ORp3
WIND DIRECTION
Povh = 0. 75p1 OR 0. 75p3 AS APPLICABLE, APPLIED AS

Povh
AN ADDITIONAL UPWARD LOADING (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
TO ROOF NEGATIVE EDGE PRESSURES SHOWN
Figure 207B.6-3
Application of Roof Overhang Roof Overhang Wind Loads. h cc; 48 m
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7t11 Edition, 2015

' .
h
h
Po 1
PLAN WIND PRESSURE ELEVATION
Notes to Wall Pressure Table 2078.6-1:

I. From table for each Exposure (8, C or D), V, L/ Band h, determine Ph (top number) and Po {bottom number) horizontal along-wind net wall pressures.
2. Side wall external pressures shall be uniforn1 over the wall surface acting outward and shall be taken as 54°/o of the tabulated p 11 pressure for 0. 2 $
L/B $ 1. 0 and 64% of the tabulated p 11 pressure for 2.0 $ L/B $ 5. 0. Linear interpolation shall apply for 1. 0 < L/8 < 2.0. Side wall external
pressures do not include effect of internal pressure.
3. Apply along-wind net wall pressures as shown above to the projected urea of the building walls in the direction of the wind and apply external side wall
pressures to the projected area of the building wal!s normal to the direction wind, sin1ultaneously with the roof pressures frotn Table 2078.6-2.
4. Distribution of tabulated net wall pressures between windward and leeward wall faces shall be based on the linear distribution of total net pressure with
building height as shown above and the leeward cxtenm! wall pressures assumed uniformly distributed over the leeward wall surface acting outward at
38o/o ofp11 for 0.2:::;; L/B:::;; 1.0 and 27% ofph IOr 2.0:::;; L/B:::;; 5.0. Linear interpolation shall be used for 1.0 < l/8 < 2.0. The remaining net
pressure shall be applied to the windward walls as an external wall pressure acting towards the wall surface. \Vindward and leeward wall pressures so
determined do not include effect of internal pressure.
5. Interpolation between values ofV, hand L/B is permitted.
Notation:
L building plan dimension parallel to wind direction, m

B building plan din1ension perpendicular to wind direction, m
P1i,Po along-\vind net wall pressure at top and base of building respectively, Pa
Figure 2078.6-1
Application of Wall Pressures Wind Pressures - Walls, h :S 48 rn

CHAPTER. 2 - Minimum Design
Table 207B.6-!
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Walls (kN/1112)
Exposure B
v (kph) 150 200 250 300 350
h (m),
0.5 1 2 0.5 l 2 0.5 l 2 0.5 l 2 0.5 I 2
LIB
l.24 l.22 1.09 2.39 2.36 2.15 4.03 3.96 3.63 6.25 6.11 5.61 9.14 8.90 8.17
48
0.83 0.82 0.67 1.6 l l.59 l.33 2.72 2.67 2.24 4.22 4.12 3.47 6.17 6.00 5.09
l.20 1.19 l.06 2.31 2.29 2.08 3.88 3.82 3.50 6.00 5.88 5.40 8.76 8.57 7.86
45
0.82 0.81 0.66 l.58 l.56 1.30 2.65 2.61 2.19 4.09 4.01 3.39 5.96 5.81 4.96
l. l 6 1.15 1.03 2.23 2.21 2.00 3.73 3.68 3.37 5.75 5.64 5.19 8.38 8.17 7.51
42
0.79 0.80 0.65 1.54 1.53 1.27 2.57 2.54 2.14 3.97 3.89 3.30 5.83 5.64 4.79
1.13 1.12 1.00 2.14 2.13 1.93 3.57 3.53 3.23 5.49 5.40 4.97 7.97 7.82 7.22
39
0.78 0.79 0.64 1.50 1.49 l.25 2.50 2.47 2.09 3.84 3.78 3.21 5.58 5.47 4.66
1.08 1.09 0.96 2.06 2.05 1.85 3.42 3.38 3.09 5.23 5.15 4.74 7.56 7.43 6.86
36
0.77 0.77 0.64 l.46 l.45 l.22 2.42 2.40 2.03 3.71 3.66 3.12 5.39 5.27 4.54
l.04 l.05 0.93 l.98 l.97 l.77 3.26 3.23 2.94 4.97 4.90 4.51 7.20 7.05 6.55
33
0.76 0.76 0.63 l.43 1.42 1.19 2.35 2.33 l.98 3.58 3.54 3.03 5.18 5.10 4.37
l.Ol l.00 0.89 1.90 l.88 l.69 3.10 3.08 2.80 4.70 4.65 4.27 6.79 6.64 6.15
30
0.73 0.74 0.61 1.39 1.38 1.16 2.27 2.26 l.92 3.45 3.41 2.93 5.01 4.86 4.23
0.97 0.96 0.86 1.85 l.80 1.60 2.94 2.92 2.65 4.43 4.39 4.02 6.51 6.28 5.72
27
0.73 0.72 0.60 1.35 l.34 1.13 2.20 2.19 l.86 3.32 3.28 2.83 4.75 4.62 4.08
0.93 0.92 0.81 1.71 l.71 l.52 2.77 2.76 2.49 4.16 4.13 3.77 5.93 5.88 5.41
24
0.71 0.72 0.60 1.31 1.31 1.10 2.12 2.11 l.80 3.18 3.16 2.72 4.53 4.50 3.88
0.88 0.89 0.77 l.62 1.61 1.43 2.60 2.59 2.33 3.88 3.86 3.50 5.52 5.45 4.97
21
0.69 0.69 0.57 l.27 1.27 l.07 2.04 2.04 l.74 3.05 3.03 2.61 4.35 4.27 3.71
0.83 0.85 0.73 1.52 1.52 1.34 2.43 2.42 2.16 3.60 3.58 3.23 5.07 5.03 4.59
18
0.68 0.68 0.55 l.23 1.23 l.03 1.97 l.96 l.67 2.91 2.90 2.50 4.06 4.08 3.55
0.78 0.78 0.69 1.41 l.41 1.24 2.25 2.25 l.99 3.31 3.30 2.95 4.60 4.56 4.13
15
0.65 0.65 0.56 1.19 1.19 l.00 l.89 1.89 1.61 2.78 2.77 2.39 3.89 3.85 3.34
0.74 0.74 0.63 1.31 1.31 1.14 2.07 2.07 1.82 3.03 3.03 2.69 4.20 4.20 3.77
12
0.65 0.63 0.52 l.15 1.15 0.97 1.82 1.82 l.55 2.66 2.66 2.29 3.67 3.69 3.22
0.67 0.67 0.57 1.19 l.19 l.03 1.88 l.88 l.64 2.74 2.74 2.40 3.77 3.77 3.31
9
0.62 0.62 0.53 1.10 1.10 0.94 1.74 1.74 1.49 2.53 2.53 2.19 3.46 3.46 3.05
0.59 0.59 0.51 l.07 l.07 0.93 l.68 l.68 l.46 2.43 2.43 2.12 3.33 3.33 2.93
6
0.59 0.59 0.51 l.05 l.05 0.91 1.65 1.65 l.43 2.39 2.39 2.08 3.27 3.27 2.87
0.38 0.38 0.33 0.67 0.67 0.58 l.05 l.05 0.91 l.51 1.51 1.33 2.04 2.04 1.85
3
0.38 0.38 0.33 0.67 0.67 0.58 l.05 I.OS 0.91 l.51 1.51 1.33 2.04 2.04 1.85
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7\11 Edition, 2015

Table 2078.6-1
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Walls (kN/m 2 )
Exposure C
v (kph) 150 200 250 300 350

h(m), 2 0.5 I 2
0.5 I 2 0.5 I 2 0.5 I 2 0.5 I
LIB
1.58 1.58 1.42 3.10 3.06 2.75 5.21 5.11 4.62 8.04 7.85 7.10 11.72 11.40 7.10
48
1.16 1.16 0.97 2.28 2.25 1.89 3.83 3.76 3.19 5.92 5.77 4.89 8.66 8.36 4.89
1.56 1.55 1.38 3.01 2.97 2.68 5.06 5.04 4.49 7.79 7.61 6.89 1l.28 I 0.53 6.89
45
0.68 1.16 0.96 2.24 2.21 1.87 3.75 3.74 3.13 5.78 5.65 4.81 8.90 7.84 4.81
1.56 1.51 1.33 2.92 2.89 2.60 4.90 4.87 4.36 7.53 7.37 6.68 10.84 !0.3 I 6.68
42
1.18 1.13 0.94 2.19 2.17 1.85 3.67 3.65 3.07 5.65 5.53 4.71 8.16 7.77 4.71
1.48 1.48 1.29 2.83 2.81 2.52 4.73 4.66 4.22 7.26 7.12 6.46 10.5 10.28 6.46
39
1.13 1.12 0.94 2.15 2.13 1.81 3.59 3.53 3.01 5.50 5.39 4.62 7.93 7.78 4.62
1.43 1.43 1.27 2.74 2.72 2.44 4.56 4.50 4.07 6.98 6.85 6.23 10.09 9.85 6.23
36
1.10 I.IO 0.92 2.10 2.09 1.83 3.50 3.45 2.95 5.35 5.25 4.51 7.70 7.56 4.51
1.39 1.39 1.23 2.65 2.63 2.36 4.39 4.33 3.92 6.69 6.59 5.98 9.63 9.51 5.98
33
1.08 1.09 0.90 2.06 2.04 1.97 3.41 3.37 2.89 5.20 5.11 4.41 7.50 7.29 4.41
1.37 1.36 1.20 2.55 2.44 2.27 4.21 4.17 3.76 6.40 6.31 5.73 9.17 8.62 5.73
30
1.08 1.06 0.89 2.01 2.00 1.70 3.31 3.28 2.82 5.04 4.97 4.30 7.26 7.14 4.30
1.32 1.31 1.16 2.45 1.90 2.18 4.02 3.99 3.60 6.09 6.02 5.47 8.72 6.43 5.47
27
1.06 1.06 0.87 1.96 1.95 1.67 3.22 3.19 2.75 4.87 4.82 4.18 6.94 6.88 4.18
1.26 1.27 1.11 2.35 2.34 2.08 3.83 3.81 3.42 5.78 5.72 5.19 8.28 8.11 5.19
24
1.04 1.07 0.87 1.92 1.91 1.63 3.12 3.10 2.67 4.70 4.66 4.05 6.72 6.61 4.05
1.23 1.21 1.06 2.24 2.24 1.98 3.63 3.62 3.24 5.45 5.41 4.89 7.75 7.67 4.89
21
1.02 1.26 0.84 1.90 1.86 1.59 3.02 2.99 2.59 4.53 4.34 3.92 6.58 5.60 3.92
1.16 1.16 1.01 2.13 2.13 1.88 3.43 3.42 3.05 5.12 5.08 4.58 7.26 7.16 4.58
18
0.99 1.00 0.83 2.07 1.81 1.55 2.92 2.75 2.51 4.36 3.05 3.77 7.21 1.94 3.77
1.10 1.07 0.99 2.01 2.01 1.76 3.22 3.21 2.85 4.77 4.75 4.25 6.70 6.71 4.25
15
0.98 0.96 0.81 1.76 1.76 I.SO 2.82 2.81 2.43 4.17 4.16 3.63 5.82 5.86 3.63
1.05 0.56 0.91 1.89 1.89 1.64 3.01 2.99 2.63 4.41 4.39 3.90 6.09 6.62 3.90
12
0.94 0.94 0.80 1.71 1.71 1.46 2.71 2.71 2.34 3.99 3.98 3.47 5.60 5.56 3.47
0.98 0.97 0.83 1.75 1.75 1.51 2.87 2.76 2.41 4.02 4.02 3.53 4.88 5.55 3.53
9
0.92 0.92 0.78 1.65 1.65 1.41 2.60 2.60 2.25 3.80 3.79 3.30 5.28 5.24 3.30
1.01 0.90 0.78 1.60 1.60 1.38 2.55 2.53 2.40 3.65 3.65 3.18 4.69 4.92 3.18
6
0.87 0.87 0.76 1.58 1.58 1.36 2.49 2.48 2.37 3.60 3.60 3.13 4.91 4.97 3.13
0.56 0.56 0.49 1.01 1.01 0.88 1.59 1.59 1.38 2.30 2.30 2.00 3.14 3.14 2.00
3
0.56 0.56 0.49 I.OJ 1.01 0.88 1.59 1.59 1.38 2.30 2.30 2.00 3.14 3.14 2.00

Table 2078.6-1
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Walls (kN/111 2 )
Exposure D
v (kph) 150 200 250 300 350

h (m), 2 0.5 I 2 0.5 1 2 0.5 1 2 0.5 I 2
0.5 I
LIB
1.80 1.80 1.59 3.50 3.45 3.08 5.87 5.75 5.15 9.00 8.79 7.86 12.98 12.66 11.27
48 8.24
1.39 1.36 1.16 2.70 2.66 2.25 4.52 4.43 3.76 6.93 6.77 5.74 JO.OJ 9.78
1.77 1.76 1.56 3.42 3.37 3.01 5.72 5.61 5.02 8.76 8.56 7.67 12.63 12.30 11.04
45
1.37 1.37 1.15 2.66 2.62 2.22 4.44 4.36 3.70 6.80 6.65 5.65 9.83 9.55 8.13
1.74 1.73 1.53 3.33 3.29 2.94 5.56 5.46 4.89 8.51 8.33 7.46 12.26 11.99 10.73
42 7.97
1.36 1.36 1.13 2.61 2.58 2.19 4.36 4.28 3.65 6.66 6.52 5.56 9.56 9.36
1.69 1.69 1.49 3.24 3.21 2.86 5.40 5.31 4.76 8.24 8.08 7.25 11.83 11.61 10.39
39
1.34 1.29 1.12 2.57 2.54 2.16 4.27 4.20 3.59 6.52 6.39 5.46 9.4 9.23 7.82
1.64 1.65 1.45 3.15 3.12 2.78 5.23 5.15 4.62 7.97 7.82 7.03 11.46 11.21 10.07
36
1.31 1.17 1.13 2.52 2.49 2.12 4.18 4.12 3.52 6.37 6.25 5.36 9.17 9.07 7.67
1.87 1.61 1.41 3.06 3.03 2.70 5.05 4.99 4.47 7.69 7.55 6.80 IO.SJ 10.77 9.77
33
l.31 1.29 1.16 2.47 2.45 2.08 4.08 4.03 3.46 6.21 6.10 5.26 8.93 8.73 7.44
2.78 1.57 1.38 2.96 2.94 2.62 4.87 4.82 4.32 7.39 7.28 6.55 9.40 !0.39 9.38
30
1.29 1.28 1.07 2.41 2.40 2.05 3.98 3.94 3.39 6.04 5.95 5.14 8.63 8.48 7.35
1.53 1.52 1.34 2.86 2.84 2.52 4.68 4.64 4.16 7.08 6.99 6.29 10.!5 9.96 8.94
27
1.25 1.26 1.06 2.35 2.35 2.01 3.88 3.84 3.32 5.87 5.79 5.02 8.35 8.26 7.14
1.48 1.47 1.28 2.75 2.74 2.43 4.49 4.45 3.98 6.76 6.68 6.01 9.62 9.51 8.60
24
1.25 1.24 1.05 2.31 2.30 1.97 3.78 3.75 3.24 5.69 5.62 4.89 8.07 7.94 6.95
1.43 1.43 1.24 2.64 2.63 2.32 4.28 4.26 3.80 6.42 6.36 5.72 9.13 8.97 8.12
21
1.22 1.22 1.03 2.26 2.25 1.93 3.67 3.65 3.15 5.50 5.45 4.75 7.80 7.68 6.79
1.37 l.39 1.20 2.52 2.52 2.22 4.07 4.05 3.60 6.07 6.03 5.40 8.57 8.51 7.68
18
1.20 1.19 1.00 2.21 2.20 1.88 3.56 3.54 3.06 5.31 5.27 4.60 7.52 7.45 6.56
1.31 l.32 1.14 2.40 2.40 2.10 3.85 3.83 3.39 5.70 5.67 5.06 7.99 7.98 7.16
15
1.19 1.17 1.00 2.15 2.14 1.84 3.44 3.43 2.97 5.10 5.08 4.43 7.17 7.13 6.26
1.26 1.24 1.08 2.27 2.27 1.97 3.61 3.61 3.16 5.31 5.30 4.69 7.40 7.38 6.60
12
1.16 1.14 0.98 2.09 2.09 1.79 3.36 3.32 2.87 4.89 4.88 4.26 6.60 6.82 6.00
1.19 1.17 1.02 2.12 2.12 1.83 3.36 3.35 2.92 4.91 4.90 4.30 6.77 6.81 5.98
9
1.13 1.13 0.96 2.02 2.02 1.73 3.20 3.20 2.76 4.68 4.67 4.07 6.47 6.43 5.68
1.10 1.09 0.93 1.97 1.97 1.69 3.09 3.09 2.68 4.49 4.49 3.91 6.20 6.21 5.39
6
1.09 1.09 0.93 1.95 1.95 1.67 3.06 3.06 2.65 4.45 4.44 3.86 6.15 6.11 5.29
0.70 0.70 0.60 1.25 1.25 1.08 1.96 1.96 1.70 2.83 2.83 2.47 3.86 3.86 3.40
3
0.70 0.70 0.60 1.25 1.25 1.08 1.96 1.96 1.70 2.83 2.83 2.47 3.86 3.86 3.40

Roof Pressure - MWFRS

Exposure Adjustment Factor
60
Ex sure Adjustment Factor
h(m) Exp B Ex D
48 0.808 1.111
50
45 0.804 1.114
42 0.800 1.116
39 0.795 1.118
E 40
.,: 36 0.791 1.123
,..: 33 0.785 1.125
:c
C) 30 0.780 1.128
~ 30 27 0.774 1.134
C)
z 24 0.767 1.136
i5
..., 21 0.759 1.141
~ 20 18 0.750 1.148
15 0.740 1.152
12 0.728 1.160
9 0.712 1.166
10
6 0.691 1.189
3 0.662
0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT FACTOR
Notes to Roof Pressure Table 2078.6*2:
I. From table for Exposure C, V, h and roof slope, determine roof pressure p 1, for each roof zone shown in the figures for the applicable roof form. For
other exposures B or D, multiply pressures from table by appropriate exposure adjusttncnt factor as determined fro111 figure below.
2. Where two load cases are shown, both load cases shall be investigated. Load case 2 is required to investigate n1aximum overturning on the building from
roof pressures shown.
3. Apply along~wind net wall pressures to the projected area of the building walls in the direction of the wind and apply exterior side wall pressures to the
projected area of the building walls normal to the direction of the wind acting outward, sin1ultaneously with the roof pressures from Table 2078.6~2.
4. \Vhere a value of zero is shown in the tables for the Oat roof case, it is provided for the purpose of interpolation.
5. Interpolation between V, hand roof slope is permitted.
Figure 2078.6-2
Application of Roof Pressures Wind Pressures - Roofs, h ~ 48 m

Flat Roof
]· (O< !Odell)
Gable Roof
I Hip Roof
--
._
Monoslope
Roof
'
IMansard Roof
I
Figure 207B.6-2
Application of Roof Pressures Wind Pressures-Roofs, h,,; 48 111

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/m2 )
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 - 250 kph, h = 3 - 12 m
Exposure C
v (kph) 150 200 250
Load Zone Zone Zone
h (n1) Roof Slope Case l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -1.00 -0.89 -0.23 NA NA -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 NA NA -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
Flat < 2: 12 {9.46") 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.(10
I -0.99 -0.48 -!.00 -0.89 -0.73 -1.76 -1.18 -1.78 -1.58 -1 .30 -2.72 -1.9! -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
3:12(14.0°) 2 0.14 -0.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.25 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.39 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.80 -0.66 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -1.43 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -2.24 -1.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
4: 12 (18.4°) 0.43 -0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.50 -0.49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.77 -0.79 0.00 0.00
'I -0.64 -0.66 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -1.15 -!. !6 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -l.80 -l.81 -2.77 -2.47
OJ){)
-2.03
12 5:12 ( 22.6°) 2 0.37 -3.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.03 -0.86 0.00 0.00 0,(l()
I -0.52 -0.66 -1.!4 -0.89 -0.73 -0.92 -1.16 -!.78 -!.58 -l.30 -1.44 -1.8! -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
6:12 (26.6°) 2 0.41 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.!4 -0.86 0.00 0.00 0.0()
I 2.87 -0.()6 -0.98 -0.89 -0.73 -0.07 -1.16 -1.78 -l.58 -l.30 -0.83 -I.SI -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
9:12 (36.9°) 2 0.49 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.86 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.16 -0.66 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -0.30 -1.!6 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -0.47 -!.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
12:12 (45.0°) 2 0.59 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.36 -0.86 0.00 0.00 OJ)()
I NA NA -0.93 -0.83 6.55 NA NA -1.67 -! .49 -1.22 NA NA -2.61 -2.32 -l.90
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46°) 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.92 -0.45 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -1.64 -1. I ! -1.67 -l.49 -!.22 -2.56 -I.SO -2.61 -2.32 -1.90
3:12 ( !4.0°) 2 0.14 -0.19 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.37 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.01)
I -0.75 -0.60 -0.')3 -0.83 -0.68 -!.34 -1.08 -1.67 -1.49 -1.22 -2.!0 -l.66 -2.61 -2.32 -1.9()
4: !2(18.4°) 2 2.55 2.56 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.47 -0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.60 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -I.OS -!.08 -l.67 -I .49 -1.22 -!.69 -l.70 -2.61 -2.32 .\_(JO
9 5:12 ( 22.6°) 2 0.36 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.62 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.97 -0.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.49 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -0.87 -1.08 -1.67 -!.49 -1.22 -1.35 -1.70 -2.6! -2.32 -1,9()
6:12 (26.6°) 2 0.39 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.8! 0.00 o.oo 0.00
I -0.29 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.(18 -0.50 -I.OS -1.67 -1.49 -l.22 -0.78 -1.70 -2.61 -2.32 .].()()
9:!2 (36.9°) 0.45 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 -0.52 o.oo 0.00 0.00
'I -0.!7 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -0.27 -l.08 -1.67 -I .49 -1.22
0.90
-0.44
·0.81
-!.67
0.00
*2,61
0.00
-2.32
0.00
-!.90
12:!2 (45.0°) 2 1.81 -0.?9 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.28 -0.84 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 NA NA -! .54 ·!.37 -!.12 NA NA -2.40 -2.14 - l.63
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°) 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 o_oo NA NA 0.00 0,00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.85 -0.43 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 ·l .50 -1.02 -1.54 -1.37 -l.12 -2.35 -1.65 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
3:12 ( 14.0°) 2 0.13 -0.!7 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.22 -0.31 0.00 (U)O 0.00 0.34 -0.48 (l.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.69 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -l .24 -0.94 -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -1.93 -!.00 -2.40 -2.14 ·! .63
4: 12 {18.4"') 2 0.23 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.43 -0.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.67 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.56 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -0.99 -1.00 -! .54 -!.37 -1.!2 -J.55 -l.56 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
6 5:12 { 22.6°) 2 0.33 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.57 -0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.89 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.45 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -0.80 -1.00 -1.54 -l.37 -!. J? -1.25 -1.56 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
6:12 (26.6°) 2 0.35 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.63 -0.48 0.00 ().[)(} 0.00 0.98 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.26 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -0.46 -!.00 -1.54 ·1.37 -1.12 -0.72 -1.56 <~.40 -2.!4 -! .63
9:12 (36.9°) 2 0.41 -0.26 0.00 o.oo 0.00 0.75 -0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.83 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.15 -0.56 -0.87 -0.7(, -0.63 -0.04 -1.00 -!.54 -!.37 -1.12 -0.40 -l.13 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
12:12(45.0°) 2 0.41 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0,00 0.75 -0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.18 -1.18 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 NA NA -l.35 -l.21 -0.99 NA NA -2.!2 -1.89 2.22
Flat< 2:12 (9.4(/') 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.73 -0.36 -0,76 -0.67 -0.56 -l.33 -0.91 -1.35 -1.2! -0.99 -2.08 -! .4(1 -2.12 -!.89 2.22
3:!2{14.0°) 2 0.11 -0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.!') -0.27 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.30 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.6! -0.47 -0.7(1 -0.67 -0.56 -1.09 0.88 -!.35 -1.21 -0.99 -!.70 -2.16 -2.12 -1.89 2.22
4: 12 (!8.4°) 2 0.22 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.38 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.59 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.47 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.87 -0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 -1.37 -1.38 -2.!2 -1.89 2.22
3 5:12 ( 22.6°) 2 0.28 -0.25 0,00 0.00 0.00 0.51 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.79 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.38 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.71 -0.88 -1.35 -1.2! -0.99 -1.!0 -!.38 -2.12 -! .89 2.22
6:12 (26.6°) 2 0.32 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.56 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.21 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.4! -0.88 -! .35 -! .21 -0.99 -0.63 -l.38 -2.12 -1.89 ?.22
9:12 (36.9°) 2 0.38 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.12 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.48 -0.88 -l.35 -l.21 -0.99 -0.36 -1.85 -2.!2 -1.89 2.22
12:12 (45.0°) 2 0.38 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.!8 0.00 0.00 0.00

Table 2078.6-2
Exposure C
Vlk'lh) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope
Case l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -l.74
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.92 -2.66 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -2.33 -1.58 .?,38 .?,\2 -1.74
3:12 (!4.0°)
2 0.56 -0.79 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.22 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
4: !2 (18.4°)
2 J.12 -1.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.58 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 !.48 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.07 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6:12 (26.6°)
2 1.64 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.20 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9:12 {36.9°)
2 1.96 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.68 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -0.40 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
!2:12 (45.0")
2 1.96 -! .24 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
F!ut < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.68 -2.50 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 - 1.7!
3:12(1·L0°)
2 0.53 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.03 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -!.89 -!.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
4: 12 (18.4")
2 1.05 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.43 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -l.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
9 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.40 -l.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.73
0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.95 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
6:12 (26.6°)
2 1.54 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.13 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -0.71 -!.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
9:12 (36.9°)
2 1.84 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 o.oo 0.00 0.00
I -0.64 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -0.40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 1.84 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 NA NA -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flut < 2:12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.38 -2.30 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -2.27 -! .54 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
3:12(14.0°)
2 0.49 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.78 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -1.86 -!.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12(18.4°)
2 0.96 -0.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.23 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -1.49 -!.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 -1.07
1.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.79 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -l.20 -!.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6°)
2 1.42 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.04 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
9:12(36.9°)
2 1.69 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.58 -2.20 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:12 (45.0°}
2 1.69 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flut < 2:12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.99 -2.03 -3.05 -2.72 -2.?3 -2.23 -! .52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (!4.0°)
2 0.43 -0.61 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.46 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -1.83 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12(18.4°)
2 0.85 -0.87 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.98 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -1.47 -!.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.13 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.59 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -I.IS -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
6: 12 (26.6")
2 1.25 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.92 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9:12 (36.9°)
2 ! .49 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.52 -0.44 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0°)
2 I .49 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

c;HAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
2-98
Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/111 2)
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 250 kph, h = 15 - 24 m
Exposure C
V(knh) 150 200 250
Load Zone Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope Case l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 NA NA -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 NA NA -3.2! -2.86 -2J4
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°) NA NA NA NA
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 O.ll(I
I -1.14 -0.57 -1.16 -I.OJ -0.84 -2.02 -1.37 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -3.15 -2.21 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
3:12 (14.0") 0.17 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.29 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.45 -0.64 0.00 0.00
2 0.00
I -8.45 -0.74 -1.16 -!.03 -0.84 -J.66 -1.34 <?:.05 -! .83 -l.50 -2.59 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -234
4: ! 2 ( 18.4")
2 0.32 -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.57 -0.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.90 -0.92 0.00 0.00 o.oo
I -0.75 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -!.33 -1.34 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -2.08 -2.09 -3.21 -2.8(, -2.34
24 5:12 ( 22.6°) 0.42 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.76 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.19 -!.00 0.00 0.()()
2 0.00
I -0.60 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -J.00 -!.34 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -1.67 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
(J:12(26.6°) 0.47 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.84 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.32 -1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
9:!2 (36.9°)
'I -0.34 -0.74 -1.16 -I .03 -0Ji4 -0.62 -1.34 -2.05 -!.83 -! .50 -0.97 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2J-I
2 NA -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.01 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 I.!] -1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.19 -0.74 -1.!(i -I.OJ -0.84 -0.35 -1.34 -2.05 -I .t\3 -1.50 -0.54 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
12:12 (45.0°) 0.56 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.01 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.57 -!.00 0.00 0.00 o.on
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
'
I NA NA -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 NA NA -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 NA NA -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.!0 -0.55 -L 13 -1.00 -0.83 -1.96 -!.33 -2.00 -l.78 -! .46 -3.06 -2.15 -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
3:12(14.0°)
2 0.15 -0.22 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.28 -0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.44 -0.62 0.00 0.00 o.no
I -0.90 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -1.61 -I.JO -2.00 -l.78 -1.46 -2.51 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
4: 12 (18.4°) 0 .0,, -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.56 -0.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -O.SlJ 0.00 0.00
2 0.00
I -0.72 -0.73 -1.13 -!.00 -0.83 -! .29 -[.30 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -2.02 _')_OJ -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
21 5:12 ( 22.6°) 0.42 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.74 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.16 -0.97
2 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.58 -0.73 -!.13 -1.00 -0.83 -0.59 -!.30 -2.00 -1.78 -l.4() -!.6? -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
6: !2 (26.6°) 0.45 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.28 -0.97 0.00 0.00 0.00
9:12 (36.9°)
'
I -0.34 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -0.(lO -1.30 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -0.94 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.28
2 0.55 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.97 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.19 -0.73 -l.13 -!.00 -0.83 -0.34 -1.30 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -0.53 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.2l<
[2:[2(45.0°)
2 0.55 ·0.3() 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.62 0.00 o.oo 0.00 !.53 -0.97 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -I.OS -0.97 -0.80 NA NA -1.93 -1 .72 -1.41 NA NA -3.02 -2.69 -2.2!
Finl< 2:12 (9.46°) NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 o.no
3:12{!4.0°)
'I -l.07 -0.53 -I .OS -0.97 -0.80 -UJO -J.2() -1.93 -!.72 -1.4 l -2.96 -2.08 -3.02
0.00
-2.69 -2.21
2 0. !(J -0.22 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.27 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.43 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.87 -0.70 -! .08 -0.97 -0.80 -!.56 -1.26 -1.93 -1.72 -1.4! -2.44 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.2[
4: 12 {[8.4°) -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.54 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.84 -0.86 ().00
2 0.31 0.00 0.00
I -0.70 -0.70 -1.08 -0.97 -0.80 -].25 -l.26 -1.93 -J.72 -1.41 -l.95 -l.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.2 I
18 5:12 ( 22,6°) 0.40 -0.35 0.00 0.72 -0.60 0.00
2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.!2 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.57 -0.70 -1 .OS -0.97 -0.80 -1.00 -!.26 -1.93 -1.72 -! .41 -1.57 -!.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
(,;12 (26.(i 0 ) -0.(,0
2 0.45 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.79 {}.()() 0.00 0.00 1.24 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.32 -0.70 -!.08 -0.97 -0.80 -0.58 -1.26 -J.!)J -1.72 -1.4! -0.90 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
9:!2 (36.9°) 0.00 0.95 -0.60
0.54 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.94
12:12 (45.0°)
'I 0.0! -0.70 -1.08 -0.97 -0.80 -0.33 -1.26 -!.93 -1.72 -1.41 -0.51 -1.97
0.00
-3.02
0.00
-2.69
0.00
-2.21
2 0.54 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.48 -0.94 ().O{) 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -l.04 -0.94 -0.76 NA NA -1.86 -\.66 -1.36 NA NA -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°) NA o.ou NA NA
NA (l.00 0.00 0.00 0.CJO 0.00 NA NA
3:12 (14.0°)
'
I -l.04 -0.51 -1.04 -0.94 -0.76 -J.82 -1.24 -1.86 -1.66 -1.3() -2.85 -2.00
0.00
-2.!JI
0.00
-2.59
0.00
-2.12
2 0.[5 -0.22 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.26 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.41 -0.58 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.84 -0.69 -1.04 -0.94 -0.76 -l.50 -1.21 -l.86 -1.66 -1.36 _?_34 -1.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2. [2
4: 12(18.4°) 0.29 -0.30 0.00 0.00 U.00 0.52 -0.53 0.00 0.00
2 0.00 0.81 -0.83 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.68 -0.69 -!.04 .().()4 .0.76 -1.20 -1.21 -!.86 -1.66 -1.36 -1.88 -1.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
15 5:12 ( 22.6°) 0.38 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0,00 NA -0.58 0.00 0.00 0.00 I.OS -0.91
6:12 (26.6°)
'
I -0.56 -0.69 -1.05 -0.94 -0.76 -0.!)7 -!.21 -1.86 -1.66 -1.36 ~1.51 -J.89
0.00
-2.9!
0.00
-2.59
0.00
-2.12
2 0.42 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.76 -0.58 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.19 -0.9! 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.05 -0.69 -1.04 ·0.94 -0.76 -0.52 -1.2! -1.86 -! .66 -1.36 -0.87 -!.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
9:12 (36.9°) -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.91 -U.58 0.00
2 0.51 0.00 0.00 1.00 ·0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00
I 1.67 -0.69 -! .04 -0.94 -0.76 -0.32 -1.21 -1.86 -1.66 -1.36 -0.49 -1.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
!2:12 (45.0°) 0.51 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.91 -0.58 0.00 0.00 0.{)()
2 1.42 -0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00

I j
Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/1112 )
Exposure C
v (kph) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
h (n1) Roof Slope
Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 5
1 NA NA -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 NA NA -2.38 -2.!2 -1.74
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.53 -3.08 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -2.33 -J .58 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.65 -0.92 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.73 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -1.91 -!.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.29 -!.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -2.99 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -! .54 -! .55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
24 5:12 ( 22.6°)
1.72 -l.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
'1 -2.44 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6:12 (26.6")
2 1.89 -l .44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1.39 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.!2 -1.74
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.27 -1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.78 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -0.40 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12:12 {45.0°)
2 2.27 -1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.!7 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 NA NA -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
Flat< 2:12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.41 -2.99 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 -l.71
3;12 (14.0°)
2 0.63 -0.90 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.62 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -1 .89 -1 .53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
4: 12 (18.4")
2 1.25 -1.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -2.91 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
21 5:12(22.6°)
2 1.67 -1.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -2.63 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
6:12 (26.6") 0.00
2 1.84 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00
1 -1.35 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
9:12 (36.9")
2 2.20 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.76 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -0.40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.20 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 NA NA -2.31 -2.06 -l.69
Flat< 2:12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.26 -2.90 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -2.27 -1.54 -2.31 -2.06 -! .69
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.6! -0.87 0.00 o.oo 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.51 -2.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -1.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.21 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 o.oo 0.00 0.00
1 -2.82 -2.R3 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -1.49 -1.50 -2.3 ! -2.06 -1.69
18 5:12 ( 22.6") 0.00 0.00
2 1.62 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00
1 -2.26 -2.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6°)
2 1.78 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1.31 .'.>.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.13 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.74 -2.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:12 (45.0°) 0.00
2 2.13 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00
1 NA NA -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -!.66
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.10 -2.79 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -2.23 -1.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.59 -0.83 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 .J.37 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -I.SJ -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12 (18.4") -0.65 0.00 0.00
2 1.17 -1.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 0.00
1 -2.71 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -1.47 -! .48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
15 5:!2 ( 22.6°)
2 1.56 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -2.18 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -I.IS -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -! .66
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.72 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1.26 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9:12 (36.9°) -0.71 0.00 0.00
2 2.05 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 0.00
1 -0.71 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.05 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/m 2 )
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 -250 kph, h = 27-36 m
Exposure C
v (k h) 150 200 250
Load Zone Zone Zone
h (n1) Roof Slope
Case 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5
Flat < 2: ! 2 (9.46°) NA NA -1.26 -!.II -0.92 NA NA -1.34 -l.20 -0.97 NA NA -2.79 -2.48 -2.(14
2
-1.23 -0.62 -1.26 -1.11 -0.92 -1.31 -0.65 - 1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -2. 73 -1.93 -2.79 -2.48 <!J14
3:12 (!4.0°}
2 0.18 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.19 -0.27 NA 0.00 0.00 0.39 -0.56 0.00 0.00 0.00
4: 12 (18.4°) -I.OJ -0.82 -1.26 -I.I I -0.92 -!.08 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -2.25 -1.81 -2.79 -2.48 -2.04
2
-0.82 -0.82 -1.26 -I.I! -0.92 -0.86 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -1.80 -l.81 -2.79 -2.48 -2JJ4
36 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 0.46 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.50 -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.87 0.00 0.00 O.UO
-0.65 -0.82 - !.26 -1. ll -0.92 -0.69 -0.87 - !.34 -1.20 -0.97 - ! .45 - l.81 -2. 79 -2.48 -2.04
6:12 (26.6°)
2 -4.19 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.55 -0.41 NA 0.00 0,00 l.14 -0.87 0.00 0.00 (U)()
9:12 (36.(JO) -0.37 -0.82 -1.26 -!.11 -0.92 -OAO -0.87 -1.34 -!.20 -0.97 -0.84 -1.81 -2.79 -2.48 -2Jl4
0.62 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 1.37 -0.87 0.00 0.00 0.00
!2;!2 (45.0°) -0.21 -0.82 -1.26 -l.l 1 -0.92 -0.23 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -0.47 -l.8! -2.79 -2.48 -2.0-t
2 0.62 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 ! .37 -0.87 0.00 0.00 0.00
Flat < 2: 12 (9.4 60 ) f--c-+--cNccA~\-'NccAc;-+-·71".2,'3+~·1"c.;;1O-f-·i'Occ.8c.'i+-:Ncc',7\-f-fN:'cAc...;f-,·lcc.3ec3-f-·"-1."1c-S+-:·Oc,.'c;)6-f-fN~A'-i-cN7'A~t-c-·c''.'°73"-t-·-c2cc.4~4+~·2:CJ"'ll'-II
2 MM
-1.22 -0.60 -
-1.23 -
-1.10 -
-0.89 -M!.28 NA
-0.65 -
-1.33 - S
-1.1 -
-0.96 MM
-2.68 -1.90 -
-2.73 -
-2.44 -
-2.00
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.!7 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.17 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.39 -0.55 0.00 0.00
4: 12 {18.4°) -1.00 -0.82 - !.23 -1. l O -0.89 - l.06 -0.85 - 1.33 - I. 18 -0.96 -2.21 -1.78 -2.73 -2.44
2 -0.02 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.37 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.77 -0.78 0.00 0.00
-0.80 -0.82 - !.23 - !. !O -0.89 -0.85 -0.85 -1.33 - l.18 -0.96 - 1.77 -l.78 -2. 73 -2.44 -2.(Hl
33 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 0.46 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.-t!J -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.02 -0.85 0.00 0.00 {)_{)()
-0.63 -0.82 -1.23 - !. IO -0.89 -0.68 -0.85 -1.33 - !.18 -0.96 - l .42 - l. 78 -2. 73 -2.44 -2.00
6:!2 (26.6°)
2 0.51 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.54 -0.4! 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
9:[2(3().9°) -0.36 -0.82 -1.23 - I. IO -0.89 -0.39 -0.85 -1.33 - !. 18 -0. 96 -0.82 -1. 78 -2. 73 -2.44 -2.00
2 0.6! -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.34 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.20 -0.82 -1.23 -1.10 -0.89 .0.22 -0.85 -1.33 -1.18 -0. 96 -0.46 -1. 78 -2. 73 -2.44 -2.01!
2 0.6[ -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.34 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 12 9 60 l---'--+-~N~A'-i--'N~A~+-·~1.=2~1+-~·1~.0~8-l-~·~0.~8'~)+-~N~'A~i-'N"'-'A--l-·~1~.3~0-l-~·~1.~1<~,+-·~0~.9~5+~N~'Ac,_+-~N~A,__f-".2~.(~,8-f-·=2=.3~9+~·1~'~'6'-I
Flat..; : ( .4 ) 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 o.on
-1.!9 -0.59 -!.21 -I.OS -0.89 -l.27 -0.63 -!.30 -1.!6 -0.95 -2.63 -1.86 -2.68 -2.39 -!.96
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.17 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.18 -0.26 ().()() 0.00 0.00 0.38 -0.53 0.00 0.00 0.()0
-0.98 -0.79 -1.21 - !.08 -0.89 -1.05 -0.84 - l.30 -1. ! 6 -0.95 -2.16 - !.74 ·2.68 -2.39 - l.96
4: 12(18.4°)
2 -l.41 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.36 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.75 -0.77 0.00 0.00 0.00
5:12 ( 22.6°) -0. 79 -0.79 -1.21 - l.08 -0.89 -0.84 -0.84 -1.30 - !. l (l -0.95 • !. 74 - !.74 -2.68 -2.39 -1.9(1
30
2 0.44 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.48 -0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 -0.84 0.00 0.00 o.oo
-0.63 -0.79 - 1.2 ! - l.08 -0.89 -0.68 -0.84 -1.30 -1.16 -0. 95 - l.39 -1. 74 -2.68 -2.39 -1.96
6:12(26.6°)
2 0.50 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.54 -0.40 0.00 0,00 0.00 LIO -0.84 0.00 0.00 0,00
9:12 (36.9°) -0.36 -0.79 -1.21 -1.08 -0.8 1) -0.38 -(UM -I.JO -1.16 -0.95 -0.8! -1.74 -2.68 -2.39 -1.96
2 o.59 -0.38 o.oo o.oo o.oo o.64 -0.40 o.oo o.oo o.oo 1.32 -0.84 <1.00 o.oo a.on
12:12 (45.0°) -0.20 -0.79 -!.21 -1.08 -0.89 -0.22 -0.84 -1.30 -1.16 -0.95 -0.46 -1.74 -2.68 -2.39 -!.96
2 0.59 -0.38 o.oo o.oo o.oo o.6-t -o.4o o.oo o.oo o.oo 1.32 -0.84 o.oo o.oo o.on
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°) NA NA -1.17 -!.05 -0.87 NA NA -!.28 -l.14 -0.94 NA NA -2.72 -2.42 -L99
2
3:12 (14.0°) -1.17 -0.57 -1.17 -l.05 -0.87 -1.25 -0.63 ·1.28 -!.14 -0.94 -2.66 -!.88 -2.72 -2.42 -l.99
2 0.18 -0.24 o.oo 0.00 0.00 0.18 -0.25 0.00 0.1)0 0.00 0.38 -0.54 0.00 0.00 0.00
-2.20 -0.77 -1.17 -1.05 -0.87 -1.03 -0.83 -1.28 -l.14 -0.94 ·2.19 -l.77 -2.72 -2.42 -1.99
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 0.33 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.35 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.76 -0.78 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.78 -0.77 -1.!7 -1.05 -0.87 -0.84 -0.83 -1.28 -1.14 -0.94 -1.76 -1.77 -2.72 -2.42 -1.99
27 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 0.44 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.47 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 I.OJ -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
6:12 (26.6°) -0.63 -0.77 -1.17 -1.05 -0.87 -0.66 -0.83 -l.28 -1.14 -0.94 -1.41 -1.77 -2.72 -2.42 -!.9()
2 0.49 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.68 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
9:12 (36.9°) -0.35 -0. 77 • 1.17 - !.05 -0.87 -0.37 -0.83 - t.28 - I. !4 -0.94 -0.82 - !.77 -2. 72 -2.42 -1.99
2 NA -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.63 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.26 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00
·0.21 -0.77 -1.17 - !.05 -0.87 -0.21 -0.83 -1.28 ~ !.14 -0.9-t -0.46 - !. 77 -2. 72 -2.42 -1.99
12:!2 (45.0°)
0.57 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 13.1 -8.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.33 -0.85 0.00 0.00 0.00

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads- Roof(kN/m 2 )
Exposure C
V (knh) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope 5
Case 1 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4
I NA NA -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
Flat< 2:12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.94 -3.36 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -2.33 -1.58 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0") 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.71 -!.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47
'I -4.06 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -l.74
4: !2 (18.4") -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 J .40 -1 .44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66
I -3.26 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
36 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.87 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.62 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6:12 (26.6") -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.06 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98
I -1.51 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9:12 (36.9°) -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.47 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07
I -0.85 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -0.40 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -l.74
12:12 (45.0") 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.47 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
Flat< 2:12 {9.46") NA NA 0.00
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.85 -3.30 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
3:12 (14.0°) -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 0.70 -0.98 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33
I -3.98 -3.22 -4,94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.89 .J.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
4: 12 (18.4") 0,65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 1.38 -1.41 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.20 -3.?J -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.52 -I.SJ -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
33 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 !.84 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.57 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.7!
6:12 (26.6°) 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.03 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.49 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -0.71 -!.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
9:12 (36.9°) 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.42 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.84 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -0.40 -I .53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°) -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.42 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 LIS
I NA NA -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 NA NA -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°) NA
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.75 -3.23 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -2.27 -! .54 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
3:12 (14.0°) 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 0.69 -0.96 0.00 0.00
I -3.91 -3. !5 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -!.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -! .69
4: 12 (18.4") -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 1.35 -1.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65
I -3.!3 -3.14 -4.8..J. -4.32 -3.54 -1.49 -I.SO -2.3 ! -2.06 -1.69
30 5:!2 ( 22.6")
2 1.80 -1.5 ! 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.52 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6") -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 1.99 -I.SO 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95
I -1.46 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -0.70 -I.SO -2.31 -2.06 -l.69
9:12 (36.9") -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 2.38 -1.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13
I -0.82 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -0.39 -I.SO -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:12 (45.0°) 0.00 !.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
-1.51 0.00 0.00
'I 2.38
NA NA -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flat< 2:12 {9.46") NA NA
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.65 -3.16 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -2.23 -!.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:!2 (14.0") -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 0.67 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32
I -3.82 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -1.83 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12 (18.4") 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 (),00
2 l.32 -1.35 0.00 0.00
I -3.07 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -1.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
27 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.76 H1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.46 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -I. IS -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
6:!2 (26.6°) -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
2 1.94 -1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93
I -1.42 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9:12 (36.9°) 0.00 1.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
2.32 -1.47 0.00 0.00
'I -0.80 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0") 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
2 2.32 -1.47 0.00

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 - 250 kph, h = 39 - 48 111
Exposure C
v k h) 150 200 250
Load Zone Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 2 3 45
Case
NA NA -l.34 -1.20 -0.97 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -!.74 NA NA -3.71 -2.57
Flat< 2:12 (9.46") NA NA 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00
2 NA
-1.31 -0.65 -1.34 -l.20 -0.97 -2.33 -1.58 -2.38 -2.12 -l.74 -3.64 -2.56 -3.71 -2.57
3:12 (!4.0°) -0.27 NA 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.53 -0.74 0.00 0.00
2 0.19
-1.08 -0.87 -!.34 -1.20 -0.97 -1.91 -!.55 -2.38 -2.!2 -1.74 -2.99 -2.42 -3.7! -2.57
4: 12 (18.4°) -0.37 NA 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.83 0.00 0.00
2 0.37
-0.86 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -!.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74 -2.40 -2.42 -3.71 -2.57
48 5:!2(22.6") -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.38 -1.16 0.00 0.00
0.50
6:12 (26.6°)
' -0.69 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74 -1.93 -2.42 -3.71 -2.57
0.55 -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.53 -1.16 0.00 0.00
9:12 (36.9°)
' -0.40 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74 -1.12 -2.42 -3.71 -2.57
2 0.65 -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.23 -!.06 0.00 0.00
-0.23 -0.87 -1.34 -1.20 -0.97 -0.40 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -!.74 -0.63 -2.42 -3.71 -2.57
12:12 (45.0°) -0.41 NA 0.00 0.00 l.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.82 -1.16 0.00 0.00
0.65
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
' NA NA -1.33 -l.18 -0.96 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -!.71 NA NA -3.66 -1.08
2
-1.28 -0.65 -1.33 -!.!8 -0.96 -2.30 -!.56 -2.34 -2.09 -l.71 -3.59 -2.52 -3.66 -I.OS
3:12 (!4.0°) 0.17 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.52 -0.73 0.00 0.00
2
-1.06 -0.85 -!.33 -l.18 -0.96 -1.89 -!.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71 -2.96 -2.38 -3.66 -1.08
4: 12 (18.4°) 0.37 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.02 -0.35 0.00 0.00
2
-0.85 -0.85 - !.33 -1.18 -0. 96 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71 -2.37 -2.38 -3.66 - 1.08
45 5:12 ( 22.6°) 0.49 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.36 -!.14 0.00 0.00
2
-0.68 -0.85 -1.33 -1.18 -0.96 - !.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1. 7 ! -1.90 -2.38 -3.66 - l.08
6;12 (26.6°)
0.54 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.50 -1.!4 0.00 0.00
9;12 (36.9°)
' -0.39 -0.85 -1.33 -1.18 -0.96 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71 -I.JO -2.38 -3.66 -!.08
2 0.65 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.26 -1.!4 0.00 0.00
-0.22 -0.85 -1.33 -1.18 -0.96 -0.40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -l.71 -0.62 -2.38 -3.66 -I.OS
12;12 {45.0°)
2 0.65 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.!5 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.80 -1.14 0.00 0.00
Flat < 2 ; 12 (9 .4 60 ) f---'-f-fNNc'AA'-jf-cNN,.,'~"-\-+-'-fl.ccJ'f-0+:,-le,·lc,6'-f_:-:!.0·',9"-5+2N,cA"-f-ccN'c'A'-,-';-2',.Jccl-f._:-cc2.!'O(e_>+:,-lc'.6c;9-f.-N"f'A--f--'N"A'-!-C-3,c.6,cl'-f_:-c,3"3.2"-2+~"-i
2 , 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00
-!.27 -0.63 -l.30 -!.!6 -0.95-2.27 -1.54 -2.3! -2.06 -1.69 -3.54 -2.49 -3.61 -3.22
3:12 (!4.0°} 0.18 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.5! -0.72 0.00 0.00
2
-!.05 -0.84 -!.30
-l.16 -0.95-l.86 -!.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69 -2.91 -2.35 -3.61 -3.22
4: 12(18.4°)
2 0.36 -0.37 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 LOI -1.03 0.00 0.00
-0.84 -0.84 - 1.30
-1.16 -0. 95
-1.49 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69 -2.34 -2.35 -3.6 ! -3.22
42 5:12 ( 22.6°) 0.48 -0.40 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.34 -1.12 0.00 0.00
2
-0.68 -0.84 -1.30
-1.16 -0.95 -1.20 -I.SO -2.31 -2.06 -1.69 -I.SS -2.35 -3.6! -3.22
6;12 (26.6°)
0.54 -0.40 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.48 -1.12 0.00 0.00
9:12 {36.9°)
' -0.38 -0.84 -I.JO
-1.16 -0.95 -0.70 -1.50 -2.Jl -2.06 -l.69 -1.09 -2.35 -3.6! -3.22 -2.(,·l
2 0.64 -0.40 0.00
0.00 0.00 !.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.24 -1.!2 0.00 0.00 0.flil
-0.22 -0.84 -1.30
-1.16 -0.95 -0.39 -l.50 -2.31 -2.06 -l.69 -0.61 -2.35 -3.61 -3.22 -2,64
12:12 {45.{) 0
)
2 O.fr4 -0.40 0.00
0.00 0.00 !.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.77 -1.!2 0.00 0.00 0.00
Flat <: : (') .4 0 )
2 12 6
I--C:--t-c-NccA'--l--'N7 A~t--c-l.c'2,-8+,,·lcc.eel4-+_-c.O-cc9c_4+-'N7A~·-+-C:N~A'--1~-1~.1~1-+__-~1-cc03'-l--'-1-".6"6+-N'-"'A-l--'-N"-A'-f-"-lc..4ccl4 __-c.3'-'.0"4-I -2 .49
2 ~
-1.25 ~-0.63 -
-l.28 - -!.14 -
-0.94 ~-2.23 ~
-!.52 -
-2.27 -
-2.03 -
-1.66 -3.34 ~ -2.35~ -3.41- -
-3.04 ~ -
3;12 (14.0°) 1--c:-,-+-,c-,.'c1s'-l--'_o;c.,"s-+-oc-."'oo'-l--'o".o"'o-+-o""."oo'-l--'o".,'=2-+-_-co."o=-,+cco'c.oc;o-+-o~.o"o'-l--'o".o"o+~o"'.470s'--+-_"'o=.6"s+-'o".o"o'-+--"o."ooc'-I o.oo
-1.03 -0.83 -1.28 -!.!4 -0.94 -l.83 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66 -2.75 -2.22 -3.41 -3.04 -2.49
4: 12 (!8.4°)
2 0.35 -0.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.97 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.84 -0.83 -!.28 -1.14 -0.94 -!.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.0J -1.66 -2.20 -2.22 -3.41 -3.04 -2.49
39 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 0.47 -0.39 o.oo o.oo o.oo o.85 -0.11 o.oo o.oo o.oo 1.21 -1.06 o.oo o.oo o.on
-0.66 -0.83 -1.28 -1.14 -0.94 -1.!8 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66 -1.77 -2.22 -3.41 -3.04 -2.49
6:12 {26.6") -0.68 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.40 -1.06 0.00 0.00 0.00
' -0.37 -0.83 -1.28 -1.14 -0.94 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66 -I.OJ -2.22 -3.41 -3.04 -2.49
2 0.63 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.12 -0.7! 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.26 -1.06 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.21 -0.83 -1.28 -1.14 -0.94 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66 -0.58 -2.22 -3.41 -3.04 -2.-1\J
12:!2 (45.0°)
2 13.l -8.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 !9.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.67 -1.06 0.00 0.00 0.00

Table 2078.6-2
Exposure C
V (koh) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope
Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 5
Flat< 2: 12 (9.46°)
l NA NA -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.25 -3.56 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -2.33 -1.58 -:!.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12(14.0°)
2 0.76 -1.06 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
l -4.3! -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.9! -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.!2 -1.74
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.49 -1.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
l -3.46 -3.43 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -!.74
48 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 l.99 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.78 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -! .23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6: [ 2 (26.6°)
2 2.20 -! .66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.61 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.62 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.91 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.9! -0.40 -1.55 -2.38 -2.!2 -1.74
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.62 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
Flat < 2: ! 2 (9.46°)
I NA NA -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -!.71
NA NA NA NA
'
I -5. [8 -3.52
0.00
-5.27
0.00
-4.70
0.00
-3.86 -2.30 -1.56
0.00
.?.34
0.00
-2.09
(J.00
-1.71
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.75 -1.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.25 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -1.89 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.47 -!.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.41 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -l.52 -!.53 -2.34 -2.<)9 -1.7!
45 5:!2 ( 22.6°)
2 1.96 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.74 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
6:12 (26.6°)
2 2.17 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.59 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -l.71
9:!2 (36.9°)
2 2.59 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.90 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -0.40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.59 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
Flat< 2: 12 (9.46°)
I NA NA -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 NA NA -2.3 ! -2.06 -1.69
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.10 -3.47 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -2.27 -1.54 -2.3! -2.06 -1.69
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.74 -1.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.!9 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -1.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.0(, -t.69
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.45 -l .49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.36 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -!.49 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
42 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.93 -!.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.70 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -1.20 -!.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6°}
2 2.13 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.57 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -l.69
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.55 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.88 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:!2 (45.0")
2 2.55 -! .62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
Flat< 2:12 (9.46°)
I NA NA -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.02 -3.41 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -2.23 -l.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (14.0°}
2 0.72 -1.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.13 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -1.83 -1.48 .?,27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 l .43 -1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.31 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -l.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
39 5:12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.90 -! .59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.66 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -1.18 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
6:12 (26.6")
2 2.10 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.54 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -! .66
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.51 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 l.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.87 .3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12(45.0°}
2 2.5 I ~1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.S -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

zo7C.3 Velocity Pressure Table 207C.2- I

Steps to Determine Wind Loads on MWFRS
207C.3.1 Velocity Pressure Ex1)osurc Coefficient Low-Rise Buildings
Based on the Exposure Category determined in Section

Step I : Dctcnninc occupancy category of building or
207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz or
other structure, see Table I 03-1
Kh, as applicable, shall be determined from
Table 207C.3- l. Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
for a site located in a transition zone between exposure IA, B orC
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
roughness, intermediate values of Kz or Kh, between those
shown in Table 207C.3- I, are permitted, provided that they >" Wind directionality factor, Kd, see
are determined by a rational analysis method defined in the Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
recognized literature.
>" Exposure category B, C or D, see
Section 207 A. 7
)> Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
)," Enclosure classification, see
Section 207 A. l O
>" Internal pressure coefficie!l,t, ( GCpi), see

Step 4: Dctcnninc velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Tables 207C.3-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qz or qh, sec
Equation 207C.3- I
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient,
( GCp), using Figure 207C.4-1 for flat and
gable roofs.
User Note:
See Commentary Figure C207C.4-l for guidance on hip
roofs.
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, from
Equation 207C.4-l
National Structural Code of the Philipp:· Jolume I, 7th Edition. 2015

2- 106 CH/\PTER 2 Minimum D("):,ign Loads
..
Comment01y: (bending moment, shear, thrust) independent 0 1· w · ~
• · T '.} fn1,1
dtrect,on. , o capture all appropriate structural actio
See commentmy 10 Section C207B.3. l. the building must be designed for all wind directions 7'
c~nsidering in turn each corner of the building as ,:'e
207C.3.2 Velocity Pressure wlfldward or reference corner shown in the eight sketches
o.f Figure 207C.4-I. At each corner, two load palterns are
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be applied, one for each wind direction range. The end zone
calculated by the following equation: creates the required structural actions in the end.frame or
bracing. Note also that for all roof slopes. all eight load
ca.~es must be considered individually to determine the
critical loading for a given structural assemblage or
component thereof Special alfention should be given to
where roofmembers, such as trusses, which meet the definition of
Kd wind <lircelionalily factor, see Section MWFRS but are not part of the lateral resisting system.
207A.6 When such members span at leastfrom the eave to the ridge
Kz velocity pressure exposure cocl'licient, see or support members spanning at least from eave to ridge,
Section 207C.3. l they are not required to be designedfor the higher end zone
«zt topographic factor defined, see Scelion load~ under MWFRS. The interior zone loads should be
207A.8.2 applied This is due to the enveloped nature ofthe load~for
V basic wind speed, sec Section 207 A.5.1 roof members.
qz velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207C.3- I at mean roof height h To develop the appropriate "pseudo" values o.f (GC1)f),
investigators at the University o.f Western Ontario
The numerical coefficient 0.6 l 3 shall be used except where (Davenport et al. 1978) used an approach that consisted
surticient climatic data are available to justify the selection essentially ofpermitting the building model to rotate in the
of a di l'lcrcnl value of this factor for a design application. wind tunnel through a full 360° while simultaneously
monitoring the loading conditions on each of the surfaces
Commentary: (Figure C207C.4-I). Both Exposures B and C were
considered Using in_fiuence coefficients for rigidframes, it
See commentary to Section C207B.3.2. was possible to spatially average and time average the
surface pressures to ascertain the maximum induced
external force components to be resisted. More
Loads o,i Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems:
specifically, the following structural actions were
evaluated: ·
The pressure coefficients for MWFRS are basically
separated into two categories:
I. Total uplifJ.
1. Directional Procedure for buildings of all heights 2. Total horizontal shear.
(Figure 207B.4-l) as specified in Section 207B for
3. Bending moment at knees (two-hinged.frame).
buildings meeting the requirements specified therein.
4. Bending moment at knees (three-hingedframe).
2. Envelope Procedure for low-rise buildings
5. Bending moment at ridge (two-hinged frame).
(Figure 207C.4-J) as spec/fled in Section 207C for
buildings meeting the requirements spec/fled therein.
The next step involved developing sets qf ''pseudo"
In generating these coefficients, two distinctly different pressure co~fficients to generate loading conditions that
approaches were used. For the pressure coefficients given would envelop the maximum induced fo'r~e components to
he resisted.for all possible wind directions and exposures.
in Figure 207B.4-I, the more traditional approach was
Note, for example, that the wind azimuth producing the
followed and the pressure co~fficients reflect the actual
loading on each surface of the building as a function of maximum bending moment at the knee would not
wind direction, namely, wind~ perpendicular or parallel to necessarily produce the maximum total uplift. The
maximum induced external force components determined
the ridge line.
for each of the preceding Jive categories were used to
develop the coefficients. The end result was a set ~f
For low-rise buildings, however, the values of (GCpf)
coefficients that represent fictitious loading conditions but
represent ''pseudo'' loading conditions that, when applied that conservatively envelop the maximum induced force
to the building, envelop the desired structural actions

'·
co111ponents (bendil1g moment, shear. and thrust) 10 be seem lo indicale that some reduclion in pressures for
resisted, independent of wind direction. huildinKs located in Exposure B is jusrjfied. The ASCE
Task Commilfee m1 Wind Load~ believes it is desirable lo
The original sel of coefficients was generated for the de.~ign buildings .for the exposure conditions consistent
ji-aming of conventional pre-engineered buildings, that is. with the exposure designations d~{tned in the standard. In
single-storey moment-resi.Hing frames in one of the the case of low buildings, the effect qf the increased
principal directions and bracing in the other principal intensify ofturbulence in rougher terrain (i.e .. Exposure A
direction. The approach was later extended to single- or B vs. C) increases the local pressure coefficients.
storey moment-resisting frames with interior columns Beginning in NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98) the effect qf' the
(Kavanagh et al. 1983). increased turbulence intensity on the load1· is treated with
the truncated pr<?fi/e. u~·ing this approach, the actual
Subsequent wind tunnel studies (/syumov and Case /995) building exposure is used and the prqfile lruncation
have shown that the (GCPI) values of Figure 207C.4-I are corrects for the underestimate in the loads that would he
also applicable to low-rise buildings with structural obtained otherwise.
systems other than moment-1·esisting frames. That work
examined the inslantaneous wind pressures on a /ow-rise Figure 207C. 4-1 is most appropriate.for low buildings with
huilding with a 4: 12 pitched gable roqf and the resulting width greater than twice their height and a mean roof
wind-inducedforces on its MWFRS. Two d[fferent MWFRS height that does not exceed JO m. The original da!abas~
were evaluated. One consisted = of shear walls and mof included low buildings with width no greater than .five
11·us.w:s al d(fferenr spacing. The othe1· had moment- times their eave height. and eave height did not exceed
resisting frames in one direction, positioned at the same JOm. In the absence of more appropriate data,
spacing as the roof trusses, and diagonal wind bracing in Figure 207C.4-l may also he usedfo1· buildings with mean
the other direction. Wind tunnel tests were conducted.for roqf height that does not exceed the least horizontal
both tiposures Band C. The.findings<?! this study showed dimension and is less than or equal to J8m. Beyond these
that the (GCpf) values of Figure 207C.4-l provided extended limits, Figure 207B.4-I should be used.
satisfactmy estimates of the wind forces for both (ypes qf
stn1ctural systems. This. work confirms the validity of All the research used to develop and refine the low-rise
Figure 207C.4-I, which reflects the combined action of building method for MWFRS loads was done on gable-
wind pressures on d{fferent external sw:faces <?!a building ruqfed buildings. In the absence ofresearch on hip-roqfed
and thus takes advantage ofspatial averaging. buildings, the ASCH commillee has developed a rational
method ofapplying Figure 207C.4-J to hip roqfs based on
In the original wind tunnel experiments, both B and C its collective experience. intuition, and judgment. This
exposure terrains were checked. In these early suggested method is presented in Figure C207C.4-2.
experiments, Exposure B did not include nearby buildings.
In general, the force components, bendinf{ moments, and Research (lsyumov 1982 and lsyumov and Case 2000)
so forth were found comparable in both expo.mres, indicated that the low-rise method alone underestimates
although (GCpf) values associated with Exposure B the amount of torsion caused by wind load~. In
1errain would he higher than that for Exposure C terrain ASCE 7-02, Note 5 was added to Figure 207C4-I to
because of reduced velocity pressure in Exposure B account for this torsional e_ffect and has been carried
terrain. The (GCpf) values given in Figures 207C.4-I, forward through subsequent editions. The reduction in
loading on only 50 percent of the building results in a
207E.4-I, 207E.4-2A, 27E.4-2R, 27F.4-2C, 27£.4-3,
tot:1·ional load case without an increase in the predicted
27£.4-4, 27E.4-5A, 27E.4-5B, and 27£.4-6 are derived
base shear for the building. The provision will have little
from wind tunnel studies modeled with Exposure C terrain.
or no effect on the design of MWFRS that have well-
However, they may also be used in other exposures when
distributed resistance. However, it will impact the design
the veloci(y pressure representing the appropriate
qfsystems with centralized resistance, such as a single core
exposure is used.
in the center <fihe building. An illustration ofthe intent qf
the note on two of the eight load patterns is shown in
In comprehensive wind tunnel studies conducted by Ho at
Figure 207C.4-I. All eight paflerns should be modified in
the University qf Weslern Ontario (1992), it was
this way as a separate set qfload conditions in addition to
determined that when low buildings (h < 18 m) are the eight basic patterns.
embedded in suburban terrain (Exposure B, which
included nearby buildings). the pressures in mo.~t cases are
Internal pressure co~fflcients ( GCpi) to be used fhr loads
lower than those curre,uly used in existing standards and
codes, although the values show a very large scatter on MWFRS are given in Table 207A.I I-I. The internal
because qfhigh turbulence and many variahles. The results pressure load can be critical in one-storey moment-

..
resisting frames and in the top storey ofa building where
the MWFRS consists ofmoment resisting frames. Loading
cases with positive and negative internal pressures should
be considered The internal pressure load cancels out in
the derermination oftotal lateral load and base shear. The
designer can use judgment in the use of internal pressure
loading/or the MWFRS qfhigh-rise buildings.
Figure C207C.4-I
Unsteady Wind Loads on Low Buildings for Given Wind Direction (After Ellingwood 1982)
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. {ASEP}

'·
zo7C.4 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting 207C.4.2 Parapets
System
The design wind pressure for the effect of parapets on
zo7C.4.l Design Wind Pressure for Low-Rise MWFRS oflow-rise buildings with flat, gable, or hip roofs
Buildings shall be determined by the following equation:
Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of low-rise (207C.4-2)

buildings shall be determined by the following equation:
where
(207C.4-1)
combined net pressure on the parapet due
to the combination of the net pressures
where from the front and back parapet surfaces.
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof Plus (and minus) signs signify net
height h as defined in Section 207 A.3 pressure acting toward (and away from)
(GCpt) = external pressure coefficient from the front (exterior) side of the parapet
Figure 207C.4-1 velocity pressure evaluated at the top or
(GCp 1) intemal pressure coefficient from the
Table 207A.l I-I parapet
combined net pressure coefficient
207C.4.1.1 External Pressure Coefficients (GCp1 ) + 1.5 for windward parapet
-1.0 for leeward parapet
The combined gust effect factor and external pressure
coefficients for low-rise buildings, (GCp 1 ), are not
permitted to be separated.
Commentary:
Load Case A Load Case B ;$"~-::

~~ OOedfon
Figure C207C.4-2
Hip Roofed Low-Rise Buildings
Notes:
I. Adapt the loadings shown in Figure 207C.4-I for hip roofed buildings os shown above. flor a given hip roof pitch use the roof coefficients from the Case A tnble for bo!h
Load Case A and Load Caise B.
2. The total horizonlttl shear shall oot he less thon Iha\ dcletmined by neglecling the wind forces on roof surfaces.

2· 110 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
LOAD CASE A
\\'-~~
Din:iotft'lfl
w;.1.w,t
('Oft'IC,
LOADCASEB
Basic Load Cases
Figure 207C.4-1
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Part I External Pressure Coefficients {GCvt)
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings, h :5 18 m Low-rise Walls and Roofs

CHAPTFR 2 - Minimum Design Lmids 2-111
Roof LOAD CASE A

Angle 8 Buildin > Surface
(degrees} 2 3 4 IE 2E 3E 4E
0-5 0.40 -0.69 -0.37 -0.29 0.61 -1.07 -0.53 -0.43
20 0.53 -0.69 -0.48 -0.43 0.80 -1.07 -0.69 -0.64
30-45 0.56 0.21 -0.43 -0.37 0.69 0.27 -0.53 -0.48
90 0.56 0.56 -0.37 -0.37 0.69 0.69 -0.48 -0.48
Roof LOADCASEB
Angle 8 Buildino Surface
(degrees) 2 3 4 5 6 IE 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E
0.4
0-90 0.61
0.45 0.69 0.37 0.45 0 0.29 0.48 1.07 0.53 0.48 0.43
Noles:
l. Plus and minus signs signify pn:ssures acting lowun.l und away from lhe surfaces, respectively.
2. for values ol' (J other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
3. The building must be designed for all wind directions using the 8 loading paucms shown. The load patterns are applied to each building
comer in turn as the Windward Comer.
4. Combina1io11s of exlernal ,md internal pressures (sec Table 207 A.11-1) shall be ev11lualed Hs required to ohlain the most severe loadings.
5. For the torsional load cases shown below, the press11res in zones designated with a "T" (IT, 2T, :n, 4T, ST, C.T) shall be 25% ol'the ft,11
<lesig11 wind pressures (zones I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
Lrceptio11: One storey buildings with h less than or equal to 9 m. buildings two storeys or less framed with light fi'ame
con.1·truction. and buildings two storeys or less designed wi1h flexible diaphmgms need tu be desig11edfor the torsional load cases
Torsional loading shall apply to all eight basic toad patterns using the figures below upplie<l al each Windward Corner.
6. For purposes of designing a building's MWFRS, lhc total horizontal shear shall not be less than that t.lelermine<l hy neglecting the wind
forces on th(l roof.
Exception: This provision dues 1101 apply /0 b11ildinf!,S us in?, moment framC'.s ji,r the MWFRS.
7. For Oat roofs, use 8 = o• and locate the zone 213 and zone 2F./.~E houndary at the mid-width of the building.
8. The pressure coefficient ( GCvf), when negative in Zone 2 and 21.::, shall be applied in Zone 2/2E for a distance from the edge of the roof
equal 0.5 times the hori7.ontal dimension of the building parallel to the direction ofMWFRS being t.lesignc<l or 2.5 times the eave height
at the windward wa!l, whichever is less; the remainder of 7.nne 2/2E extending to the ridge line shall use the pressure coefficient ( Gc,.1 )
for :r.one 3/3 F..
9. Notation:
a: 10% orleast hori:.wntal dimension or. 4h, whichever is smaller, hul not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimensi1111 or 0.9 m
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave ht:ighl shall he used for 8 5 10°.
8: Angle of plane ofrooffmm horizontal, in degrees
®....
Case A Torsion
CascB T o , s i ~ : -
Transverse Direction Longitudinal Direction
Torsional Load Cues
Figure 207C.4-1 (continued)
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Pru1 I .External Pressure Coefficients {GCpr)
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings, h ~ l8m Low-rise Walls and Roofs

2-112 CHAPT[R 2 - Minirnum Design L0c1ds
207C.4.3 Roof Overhangs Part 2: l<'.ncloscd Simple Diat>hragm Low~Rise

Buildings
The positive external pressure on the bottom smface of
windward roof overhangs shall be determined using Commenta1y:
CP = 0. 7 in combination with the top surface pressures
determined using Hgure 207C.4- I. This simplified approach (f the Envelope Procedure is
for the relatively common low-rise (h '.':: l 8m) regular
207C.4.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads shaped, simple diaphragm building case (.Yee definitions
/01· ".~imple diaphragm building" and "regular-shaped
The wind load to be used in the design of the MWFRS for building') where pressures for the roof and walls can
an enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be less be selected directly .from a table. Figure 207C.6-J
than 0.77 kN/m 2 mulLiplied by the wall area of the building provides the design pressures for MWFRS for the
and 0.38 kN!m 2 multiplied hy the roof" area or the building spectfied conditions. Values are provided.for enclosed
projected onto a vertical plane normal Lo the assumed wind buildings only ((GCpi) = ±0.18).
direction.
Table 207C.3- l I lorizontal wall pressures are the net sum of the
Velocity Pressure Exposure Coef'licients, Kh and Kz windward and leeward pressures on vertical projection
ofthe wall. I!orizontal m<dpressures are the net sum of
Height above Exposure the windward and leeward pressures on vertical
2round level, z projection ofthe roof Vertical ro<~fpressures are the net
m B c D sum of the external and internal pressures on the
0-4.6 0.70 0.85 1.03 horizontal projection ofthe roof
6.1 0.70 0.90 1.08
7.6 0.70 0.94 1.12 Note that.for the MWFRS in a diaphragm building, the
9.1 0.70 0.98 1.16 internal pressure cancels.for loads on the walls and for
12.2 0.76 l.04 1.22 the horizontal component qf loads on the roof This is
15.2 0.81 1.09 1.27 true because when wind forces are transferred by
18 0.85 1.13 l.31 horizontal diaphragms (e.g., .floors and roofs) to the
vertical elements of the MWFRS (e.g., shear walls, X-
bracing, or moment frames), the collection qf wind
Notes:
forces.from windward and leeward sides qfthe building
occurs in the horizqntal diaphragms. Once tran.~ferred
I. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient K:e may be
into the horizontal diaphragms by the vertically
dctcnnined from the following formula:
spanning wall systems, the wind forces become a net
for 4.57 rn. 5 z5 Zg For z < 4.57 m horizontal wind force that is delivered to the lateral
force resisting elements ofthe MWFRS. There should be
Kz no structural separations in the diaphragms.
Additionally, there should be no girts or other horizontal
= 2.01(4.57/zg) 21a members that transmit significant wind loads directly to
vertical frame members of the MWFRS in the direction
Note: z shall not be taken less than 9 m in exposure B. under consideration. The equal and opposite internal
2. a and zg are tabulated in Table 207 A.9-1. pressures on the walls cancel each other in the
horizontal diaphragm. This simplified approach of the
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height
Envelope Procedure combines the windward and
z is acceptable.
leeward pressures into a net horizontal wind pressure,
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207A.7.
with the internal pressures canceled. The user is
cautioned to consider the precise application of
Commentary
windward and leeward wall load., to members uf the
roof diaphragm where openings may exist and where
This section specifies a minimum wind load to be applied
particular members, such as drag struts, are designed
horizontally on the entire vertical projection ofthe building
The design of the roof members of the MWFRS for
as shown in Figure C207B.4-J. This load case is to be
vertical loads is influenced by internal pressures. The
applied as a separate load case in addition to the normal
m(lximum uplift, which is contmlled by Load Case B, is
load cases specffied in other portions of this chapter.
produced by a positive internal pressµre. AI a roofslope

oJ approximately 28° and above the windward rv~f Ki 0. 70

pressure becomes positive and a negative internal Kzr /.0
pressure used ill Load Case 2 in the tahle may produce Pressure co14fficients are from Figure 207C.4-I.
a co11trollir1g case. From 25° to 45°, both positive and
negative internal pressure cases (load Cases I and 2, Wall elements resisting two or more simultaneous wind-
l'espectively) must be checlcedfhr the 1·00/ induced stn,ctural actions (e.g., bending, uplift, or
shear) should be designedfor the interaction ofthe wind
For the designer to use this methodfor the design ~f the loads as part of the MWFRS. The horizontal loads in
MWFRS, the building must conform to all f~f the Figure 207C.6-I are the sum qf the windward and
requirements listed in Sechon 207A.8.2; otherwise the leeward pressures and are ther4ore not applicable as
Directional Procedw·e, Part I of the Envelope individual wall pressures.for the interaction load cases.
Procedure, 01· the Wind Tunnel Procedure must be used. Design wind pressures, Psfor zones A and C, should be
This method is based on Part I f?( the Envelope multiplied by +0.85.for use on windward walls and by-
Procedure. as shown in Figure 207C.4-I, for a specific 0. 70 for use on leewa1·d walls (the plus sign signffies
group of buildings (simple diaphragm buildings). pressures acting towm·d the wall surface). For side
However. the torsional loadingfrom Figure 207C.4-J is walls, Psfor zone C multiplied by-0.65 should be used.
deemed to be too complicated.for a simpl[/ied method. These waif elements must also be checked for 1he
The last requirement in Section 207C.6.2 prevents the various separate~y acting (not simultaneous) component
use ofthis methodfor buildings with lateral .\ystems that and cladding load cases.
are sensitive to torsional wind loading.
Main wind:force resisting roqf memhe1·s spanning at
Note 5 of Figure 207C.4-l identifies seveml building least from the eave to the ridge or supporting members
types that are known to he insensitive to torsion and mqy spanning at least from eave to ridge are not required to
ther~fore be designed using the provisions ~l he designed for the higher end zone loads. The interior
Section 207C6. Additionally, buildings whose lateral zone loads should be applied. This is due to the
resistance in each principal direction is provided by two enveloped nature ofthe loads.for roof members.
shear walls, braced frames. or moment.frames that are
spaced apart a distance not less than 75 percent of the 207C.5 General Requirements
width ofthe building measured normal to the orthogonal
wind direction. and other building types and element The steps required for the determination of MWFRS wind
arrangements described in Section 207B.6. I or loads on enclosed simple diaphragm buildings are shown
2078.6.2 are also insensitive to torsion. This property in Table 207C.5-l.
could be demonstrated by designing the building using
Part I ~f Section W7C, Figure 207C.4-l, and showing
1hat the torsion load cases defined in Nole 5 do not User Note:
govern the design of any of the lateral resisting
elements. Alternatively, it can be demons/rated within
Part 2 ~f Section 207C is a simplified method to
the context ofPart 2 qfSection 207C by d14fining torsion determine the wind pressure on the J\l{Wf'RS ofenclosed
load cases based on the load~ in Figure 207C.6-1 and simple diaphragm low-rise buildings having a .flat,
reducing the pressures on one-halfofthe building by 75 gable or hip roof The wind pressures are obtained
percent, as de.~crihed in Figure 207C.4-I, Note 5. !f directly fi·om a table and applied on horizontal and
none of the lateral elements are governed by these vertical projected surfaces ofthe building. This method
torsion cases, then the building can be designed using is a simplification qfthe Envelope Procedure contained
Part 2 of Section 207C; otherwise the building must be in Part 1 qfSection 207C.
designed using Part I of Section 207B or Part 1 of
Section 207C.
207C.5. t Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
Values are tabulatedfor Exposure Bath = 9.0 m. and
207A
«zt = 1.0. Multiplying factors are provided for other
exposures and heights. The following values have been
The following wind load parameters are specified in
used in preparation ofthe figures:
Section 207A:
Expo.mre B
(GCp1) ± 0.18 (enclosed building) • Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207 A.5)
h 9.0m • Exposure category (Section 207A.7)
0.85
••
• Topographic factor K zt (Section 207 A.8) 207C.6 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Rcsistlog
System
• Enclosure classification (Section 207 A. 10)
Table 207C.5- I 207C.6.1 Scope
Steps to Dctcm1ine Wind Loads on MWFRS Simple
Diaphragm Low-Rise Buildings A building whose design wind loads arc determined i,
accordance with this section shall meet all the condition:
of Section 207C.6.2. ff a building does not meet all of tht!
Step I : Determine occupancy category of building or
conditions of Section 207C.6.2, then its MWFRS wind
other structure, see Table I 03-1
loads shall be determined by Part I of this chapter, by lhe
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the Directional Procedure of Section 2078, or by the Wind
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A.5- Tunnel Procedure of Section 207F.
IA, B orC
207C.6.2 Conditions
)" Exposure category B, C or D, see For the design of MWFRS the building shall comply with
Section 207 A.7 all of the following conditions:
),"' Topographic factor, Kzi, see Section

t. The building is a simple diaphragm building as
207A.8 and Figure 207A.8-l
defined in Section 207 A.2.
Step 4: Enter figure to determine wind pressures for
h = 9 m, Pno, see Figure 207C.6- l 2. The building is a low-rise building as defined in
Section 207 A.2.
Step 5: Enter figure to determine adjustment for
building height and exposure, A, see
3. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 207A.2
Figure 207C.6-1
and confonns to the wind-borne debris provisions of
Step 6: Determine adjusted wind pressures, Ps, see Section 207A. I0.3.
Equation 207C.6-1
4. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
as defined in Section 207 A .2.
5. The huilding is not classified as a flexible building as

defined in Section 207 A.2.
6. The building does not have response characteristics

making it subject to across wind loading, vorlex
shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter; and it
does not have a site localion for which channeling
warrant special consideration.
7. The building has an approximately symmetrical cwss-

scction in each direction with either a flat roof or a
gable or hip roof with 8 :s; 45 ° .
8. The building is exempted from torsional load cases as

indicated in Note 5 off'igure 207C.4- l, or the torsional
load cases defined in Note 5 do not control the design
of any of the MWFRS of the building.

207C.6.3 Design Wind Loads 207C.6.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads
Simplified design wind pressures, Ps, for the MWFRS of The load effects of the design wind pressures from Section
Jow-rise simple diaphragm buildings represent the net 207C.6.3 shall not be less than a minimum load defined by
pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied to the assuming the pressures, Ps, for zones A and C equal to
horizontal and vertical projections of building surfaces as +766 Pa, Zones Band D equal to+ 383 Pa, while assuming
shown in Figure 207C.6-1. For the horizontal pressures Ps for Zones E, F, G, and II are equal to 0.0 Pa.
(Zones A, B, C, D), Ps is the combination of the windward
and leeward net pressures. Ps shall be determined by the
following equation:
(207C.6-l)
where
J1 adjustment factor for building height and
exposure from Figure 207C.6- I
Kzt topographic factor as defined in
Section 207 A.8 evaluated at mean roof
height, h
p530 simplilicd design wind pressure for
Exposure B, at h.:.... 9 m from Figure 207C.6-
l

2- J-16 CHAPTF.R 2 - lvli11i111t1111 Oesinn Loads
..
Windward
f;l)JTiff
CASE CASE
A B
Notes:
1. Pressures shown are applied to the horizonral and vertical projections, for exposure 13, at Ii - 9 m. Adjusl to other exposures and height
with adjustmem factor A.
2. The load patterns show shall he applied Lo each comer of the building in tum as the reli:rence comer. (Sec Figure 207C.4-I)
3. For Case 1.l usc 6 = 0°.
4. Load cases I and 2 must he checked for 25" < 0 $ 45°. Load case 2 al 25" is provided only for interpolation between 25° and 30".
5. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the prnjecle<l surfaces, respectively.
6. Fo,· roof slopes other than those shown, linear inteqmlation is permincd.
7. The total horizo11tal load shall not he less than that determined by assuming p, = 0 in zones 1.l and D.
8. Where zone E or G falls on a roof' overhang on the windward side of the building, use E 011 and GQl1 Ji,r the pressure on the horizontal
projection of the overhang. Overha11gs on tile leeward and side edges shall have the basic zone pressure applied.
9. Notation:
a: 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.411, whichever is smaller, bul not kss than either 4% of' least horizontal dimension or 0. 9 m
h: Mean roof height, in meters, ~xcept that cave height shall b~ used for roof angles< rn°.
6: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Figure 207C.6- l
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Method 2.Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h ~ 18 m Walls and Roofs

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Lmids 2-117
--
9 9sj C
Wind Roof
Zones
Load Horizontal Pressures Vertical Pressures Overhan2s

Speed AngJe
- (1<oh) (deerccs)
Oto 5°
10°
Case
I
I
A
0.66
0.74
B
-0.34
-0.31
c
0.44
0.49
D
-0.2
-0.18
E
-0.79
-0.79
F
-0.45
-0.48
G
-0.55
-0.55
H
-0.35
-0.37
EOH
-1.11
-1.11
GOH
-0.87
-0.87
15° I 0.83 -0.27 0.55 -0.16 -0.79 -0.52 -0.55 -0.39 -I.I I -0.87
20° I 0.91 -0.24 0.61 -0.13 -0.79 -0.55 -0.55 -0.42 -1.l l -0.87
JSO
I 0.83 0.13 0.6 0.14 -0.37 -0.5 -0.27 -0.41 -0.68 -0.58
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.14 -0.27 -0.04 -0.18 0 0
I 0.74 0.51 0.59 0.41 0.06 -0.45 0.02 -0.39 -0.26 -0.3
30 to 45°
2 0.74 0.51 0.59 0.41 0.29 -0.22 0.25 -0.16 -0.26 -0.3
Oto 5° I 1.17 -0.61 0.78 -0.36 -1.41 -0.8 -0.98 -0.62 -1.97 -1.54
10" I 1.32 -0.55 0.88 -0.32 - l.41 -0.86 -0.98 -0.67 -1.97 -1.54
15° 1 1.48 -0.48 0.98 -0.28 -1.41 -0.92 -0.98 -0.7 -l.97 -l.54
20° 1 1.62 -0.43 1.08 -0.23 -1.41 -0.98 -0.98 -0.74 -1.97 -1.54
200
I 1.48 0.23 1.07 0.25 -0.65 -0.89 -0.47 -0.72 -1.22 -1.03
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.25 -0.48 -0.07 -0.32 0 0
l 1.32 0.9 I.OS 0.72 0.1 -0.8 0.03 -0.68 -0.46 -0.53
30 to 45°
2 1.32 0.9 1.05 0.72 0.51 -0.39 0.44 -0.28 -0.46 -0.53
Oto 5° 1 1.83 -0.95 1.22 -0.57 -2.2 -1.25 -1.53 -0.97 -3.08 -2.41
10° I 2.06 -0.86 1.37 -0.49 -2.2 -1.34 -1.53 -1.04 -3.08 -2.41
11
15° I 2.31 -0.76 1.53 -0.44 -2.2 -1.44 -1.53 -1.09 -3.08 -2.41
20° I 2.53 -0.67 1.69 -0.37 -2.2 -1.53 -l.53 -1.16 -3.08 -2.41
250
I 2.31 0.37 1.67 0.39 -1.02 -l.39 -0.74 -1.13 -1.9 -1.62
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.39 -0.76 . -0.11 -0.49 0 ()
I 2.06 1.41 1.64 J.13 0.16 -1.25 0.05 -l.07 -0.72 -0.83
30 to 45"
2 2.06 1.41 l.64 1.13 0.79 -0.62 0.68 -0.44 -0.72 -0.83
Figure 207C.6- I
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Method 2 Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h S 18 m Walls and Roofs, Simplified De.sign Wind Pressure, p59 _0 (Pa)
(Exposure B at h = 9.0 m with I = 1.0

2-118 CHAPTER 2 - Minirnum Design Loads
--..
Basic Zones
Roof -
Wind
Speed
(kph)
Angle
(del'rccs)
Load
Case A
Horizontal Pressures
B c D E
Vertical Pressures
F G H
Overhanns
EOH GO}{ ---
Oto 5° I 2.63 -1.37 1.75 -0.81 -3.17 -1.8 -2.2 -1.39 -4.44 -3.47
~
10° l 2.97 -1.24 1.98 -0.71 -3.17 -1.93 -2.2 -1.49 -4.44 -3.47
-2.2 -1.57 -4.44 -3.47
-
15° I 3.32 -1.09 2.2 -0.63 -3.17 -2.08
-2.2 -l.67 -4.44 -3.47
-
20° I 3.65 -0.96 2.43 -0.53 -3.17 -2.2
300 -2.74
1 3.32 0.53 2.4 I 0.56 -1.47 -2 - l.06 -1.62 -2.33
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.56 -1.09 -0.15 -0.71 0 0
I 2.97 2.03 2.36 1.62 0.23 -1.8 0.08 -1.55 -1.04 -1.19
30 to 45°
2 2.97 2.03 2.36 1.62 1.14 -0.89 0.99 -0.63 -1.04 -1.19
Oto 5° 1 3.59 -1.86 2.38 -1.11 -4.32 -2.45 -3 -1.9 -6.04 -4.73
10° I 4.04 -1.69 2.69 -0.97 -4.32 -2.62 -3 -2.04 -6.04 -4.73
15° I 4.52 -1.48 3 -0.86 -4.32 -2.83 -3 -2.14 -6.04 -4.73
20° I 4.97 -1.3 I 3.31 -0.72 -4.32 -3 -3 -2.28 -6.04 -4.73
350
I 4.52 0.72 3.28 0.76 -2 -2.73 -l.45 -2.21 -3.73 -3.18
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.76 -1.48 -0.21 -0.97 0 0
I 4.04 2.76 3.21 2.21 0.31 -2.45 0.11 -2.1 - t .41 -1.62
30 to 45°
2 4.04 2.76 3.21 2.21 1.55 -1.21 1.35 -0.86 -1.41 -1.62
Ad,iustmcnt Factor for Building Height and Exposure, l
Mean Roof Exposure

Height (m) B c D
0-5 1.0 1.21 1.47
6 1.0 1.29 1.55
8 l.O l.35 l.61
9 1.0 1.40 l.66
It 1.05 1.45 l.70
12 1.09 1.49 1.74
14 1.12 1.53 J.78
15 1.16 1.56 1.81
17 1.19 1.59 UM
18 l.22 1.62 l.87
Figure 207C.6-l (continued)

Main Wind Force Resisting System · Method 2 Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h ~ 18 m Walls and Roofs, Simplilicd Design Wind Pressure, Ps9.0 (Pa)
(Exposure Bath::- 9.0 m with I - t .0

CHAl.>TcR 2- Minimun1 Desi(Jn I.mids 2-119
207D Wind Loads on Other Structures and Building designed using recognized literature dornmcnting such
Appurtenances" MWFRS wind load elfocts or slrnll use the Wind Tunnel Procedure
specified in .Section 207F.
207D.1 Scope
207D.L4 Shielding
2070. 1.1 Structure Types
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to
This section applies to the determination of wind loads on apparent shielding afforded by huildings and other
building appurtenances (such as roonop slrucLUrcs an<l structures or terrain features.
rooftop equipment) and other structures ohll heights (.such
as solid freestanding walls and freestanding solid signs, 2070.2 General Requirements
chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks, and
trussed towers) using the Directional Procedure. 2070.2. 1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in
Section 207A
The steps required for the determination of wind loads on
building appurtenances ::1n<l other structures are shown in The following wind load parameters shall be determined in
Table 2070.1-1. accordance with Section 207 A:
• Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207A.5)

User Note:
• Wind directionality Factor Kd (Section 207A.6)
Use Section 207!) to determine wind pressures on the
Ml,f!FRS of solid freestanding walls. .freestanding solid • Exposure category (Section 207A.7)
signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs. lat!ice.frameworh
and trussed towers. Wind load~ on rooftop structures • Topographic factor K:e, (Section 207A.8)
and equipment may he determined from the provisions
qfthis chapter. The wind pressures are calculated using
• Enclosure elassi Ii cation (Section 207 A. I0)
spec[fic equations based upon the Directional
P1YJcedure.
207D.3 Velocity Pressure
207D.3. I Velocity Pressure Exposure Coenicient

2070.l.2 Conditions
Based on the exposure category determined in
A structure whose design wind loads are determined in Section 207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coctfo:icnt
accordance with this section shall comply with all or the
Kz or K11 , as applicable, shall be determined from
Table 2070.3-1.
1. The structure is a regular-shaped structure as defined
For a site located in a transition zone between exposure
in Section 207 A.2.
roughness, intermediate values of Kz or Kh, between those
2. The structure does not have response characteristics shown in Table 2070.3-1, arc permitted, provided that they
making it subject to across-wind loading, vortex are determined by a rational analysis method dcJinc<l in the
shedding, or instahility due to galloping or flutter; or it recognized literature.
does not have a site location for which channeling
Commentary:
warrant special consideration.
See commentary, Section C207B.3.l.
2070.1.3 Limitations

load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with
along-wind vibrations of flexible structures. Structures not
meeting the requirements of Section 207D.1.2, or having
unusual shapes or response characteristics, shall be
2-1 20 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
2070.3.2 Velocity Pressure Table 2070.1- l

Steps to Determine Wind Loads on MWFRS Rooftop
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be Equipment and Other Structures
calculated by the following equation:
Step 1: Determine occupancy category of building or
(2070.3-
other structure, see Table I 03- 1
1)
Step 2: Detennine the basic wind speed, V, for the
where
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A.5-
Kd wind directionality factor, see IA, B ore
Section 207 A.6
Skp 3: Determine wind load parameters:
Kz ...: velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, see Section 207D.3.1 '.lo>- Wind directionality factor, K d, see
Kzt topographic factor defined, see Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6- l
Section 207 A.8.2
).- Exposure category B, C or D, see
v basic wind speed, see Section 207 A .5
Section 207 A.. 7
qh velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 2070.3-1 at height h ),,- Topographic factor, K zt, see
Section 207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except
where sufficient climatic data arc available to j ustify the
> Gust Eflect Factor, G, see Section 207 A.9
selection of a different value of this factor for a design Step 4: Detenninc velocity pressure exposure
application. coefficient, Kz or Kh, see Table 2070.2- 1
Step 5: Detennine velocily pressure qz or q 10 see
Equation 2070.3 -1
Step 6: Determine force coefficient, C,:
};.,. Solid freestanding signs or solid

freestanding walls, Figure 2070.4-1
~ Chimneys, tanks, roollop equipment
Figure 2070.5-1
};.,. Open signs, latlice frameworks
Figure 2070.5-2
~ Trussed towers Figure 2070.4-3
Step 7: Calculate wind force, F:
~ Equation 2070.4- 1 for signs and waUs
};> Equation 2070.6-1 and Equation 2070.6-
2 for rooftop structures and equipment
),),, Equation 2070.5-1 for other structures

CHAPTFR?. - Minimum Design Loads 2-121
Commentmy: the local mean net pressure coefficient data (for wind
direction 45°} from the referenced wind tunnel studies
See commenlaty, Section C207B.3.2. to generate force coe.f}icients for square regions starting
at the windward edge. Pressures near this edge increase
Figure 207D.4-J. The force coefficients for solid significantly as the length ofthe structure increases. No
freestanding walls and signs in Figure 207D.4-l date data were available on the spatial distribution of
back to ANSI A58.l-1972. It was shown by Letchford pressures for struc/ures with low aspect ratios (B / s <
(2001) that these do/a originated from wind tunnel 2).
studies performed by Flachshart in the early 1930s in
smooth uniform .flow. The current values in Figure The sample illustration for Case C at the top of
207D.4-l are based on the results of boundary layer Figure 207D.4-l is for a sign with an aspect ratio
wind tunnel studies (letchford 1985, 2001, Holmes BI s == 4. For signs ofdiffering B / s ratios, the number
1986. Letchford and I Iolmes 1994. Ginger et al. l 998a of regions is equal to the number of force co~fficient
and l998b, and Letchford and Robert.mn 1999). entries located below each 8/s column heading.
A surface curvefl,1 to Letchford's (2001) and Holmes 's For oblique wind directions (Case C), increased force
(1986) area averaged mean net pressure coefficient data coefficients have been observed on aboveground signs
(equivalent to mean force coefficients in this case) is compared to the same aspect ratio walls on ground
given by the following equation (Letc~ford 1985, 2001 and Ginger et al. 1998a). The
ratio offorce co~fficients between above-ground and
1. 563 + 0.0042 ln(x) - 0.06148y} on-ground signs (i.e., s/h == 0. 8 and 1.0, respectively)
c, = { +0.009011[1n(x)]2- 0.2603y2
-0. 08393y[ln(x)]
/o.s is 1.25, which is the same ratio used in the Australian I
New Zealand Standard (.)tandards Australia 2002).
Note 5 qf Figure 207D.4-l provides for linear
where x == B/s and y == s/h interpolation between these two cases.
The 0.85 term in the denominator mod/fies the wind For walls and signs on the ground (s/h = 1). the mean
tunnel-derivedforce coefficients into a.format where the vertical center of pressure ranged from 0. Sh to 0. 6h
gust effect factor as defined in Section 207A.9 can be (Holmes 1986, Letc~ford 1989, Letchford and Holmes
used 1994, Robertson et al. 1995, 1996, and Ginger et al.
1998a) with 0. SSh being the average value. For
Force coefficients for Cases A and B were generated above-ground walls and signs, the geometric center best
.from the preceding equation, then rounded off to the represents the.expected vertical center ofpressure.
nearest 0.05. That equation is only valid within the
range,?( B/ s ands/ h ratios given in the figure.for Case The reduction in CI due to porosity (Note 2) follows a
A andB. recommendation (l.etchford 2001). Both wind tunnel
and full-scale data have shown that return corners ,I
Of all the pertinent studies. only Letchford (2001) significantly reduce the net pressures in the region near I
specifically addressed eccentricity (i.e., Case B). the windward edge of the wall or sign (Letchford and
Letc~ford reported that his data provided a reasonable Robertson 1999). I
match to Cook's (1990) recommendation for using an
eccentricity of 0.25 times the average width of the sign.
However, the data were too limited in scope to justify
changing the existing eccentricity value of0.2 times the
average width ufthe sign, which is also used in the latest
Australian I New Zealand Standard (Standards
Australia 2002).
Case C was added to account for the higher pressures

observed in both wind tunnel (Letc~ford 1985, 2001,
!To/mes 1986, Letchjord and Holmes 1994, Ginger et al.
1998a and l998b, and Letc~ford and Robertson 1999)
and.full-scale studies (Robertson et al. 1997) near the
windward edge ofa freestanding wall or sign/or oblique
wind directions. Linear regression equations were.fit to
2070.4 Design Wind Loads - Solid Freestanding Walls turbulent boundary-layer flows has yet to be completely
and Solid Signs establi.thed. Additional pressure coefficients/or conditions
not specified herein may be found in two references (SIA
2070.4.1 Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid 1956 and ASCE 1961).
Freestanding Signs
With regard to Figure 207D.5-3. the.force coefficient.,· ore
The design wind force for solid freestanding walls and a refinement of the coefficients specified i11 1INSI A58. I -
solid freestanding signs shall be determined hy the 1982 and in ASCE 7-93. The force coefficients spec((red
following formula: are offered as a simplified procedure that may be usedfor
trussed towers and are consistent with force coefficients
given i11 ANSIIEIAITIA- 222 E-1991. Structuml Standards
(2070.4-1) for Steel Antenna Towers a11c/ Antenna Supporting
Structures. and force coefficients recommended by
where
Working Group No. 4 (Recommc11dtttio11s for G,~ved
qh velocity pressure evaluated at height h Masts), lntemational Association for Shell and Spatial
(defined in Figure 2070.4-1) as determined Structures (1981).
in accordance with Section 207D.3.2
G = gust-effect factor from Section 207A.9 It is not the intent of this code to exclude the use of other
CI net force coefficient from Figure 2070.4-1 recognized literature for the design of special structures,
As ::= the gross area of the solid freestanding wall such as transmission and telecommunications towers.
or freestanding solid sign, m2 Recommendc,aons for wind loads on tower guys are 1101
provided as in previous e~litions of the code. Recog11ized
2070.4.2 Solid Attached Signs literature should be referenced for the design of these
special structures as is noted in Section 207D. /.3. For the
The design wind pressure on a solid sign att<1ched to the design of.flagpoles. see ANSIINAAMM FPIOOJ-97, 4th
wall ofa building, where the pl.ine of the sign is parallel to Ed. Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flogpole:..
and in contact with the plane of the wall, and the sign does
not extend beyond the side or top edges of the wall, shall 2070.5 Design Wind Loads-Other Structures
be detennined using procedures for wind pressures on
walls in accordance with Section 207E, and setting the The design wind force for other structures (chimneys,
internal pressure coefficient ( GC p,) equal to 0. tanks, rooftop equipment for h > 60 ~ , and similar
slruclurcs, open signs, lauiec frameworks, and trussed
towers) shall be det~rmined by the following equation:
This procedure shall also be applicable to solid signs
attached to but not in direct contact with the wall, provided
the gap hetween the sign and wall is no more than 0.9 m (2070.5-1)
and the edge ofthe sign is at least 0.9 m in from free edges
of the wall, i.e., side and top edges and bottom edges of where
elevated walls.
velocity pressure evaluated at height z as
Commentary: defined in Section 2070.3, of the centroid
of area Ar
Signs attached to walls and subject to the geometric G gust-effect factor from Section 207A.9
limitations qf Section 207D.4.2 should experience wind Cr force coefficients from Figures 2070.5-1
pressures approximately equal to the external pressures on through 2070.5-3
the wall to which they are altached. The dimension projected area normal lo the wind except
requirements fur signs supported by frameworks, where where CI is specified for the actual surface
there is a small gap between the sign and the wall, are area, m2
based on the collective judgment ofthe committee.
Figures 207D.5-J, 207D.5-2 and 207D.5-3. With the

exception of Figure 207D.5-3, the pressure and force
coefficient values in these tables are unchangedfrom A NS!
A58.l -1972. The coefficients specified in these tables are
based un wind-tunnel tests conducted 1111der condition,') of
uniform flow and low turbulence, and their validity in

CHAPTER 2 · Minimum Design Loads 2-123
2070.S.l Rool'top Structures and Equipment for areas that are relatively small with respect to that of the
Buildings with h :S 18 m buildings they are on. Because GCr is expected to
approach I. 0 as At or Ar approaches that of the building
The liitcra l force Fh on rooftop structures and equ ipment (Bh or BL), a linear interpolation is included as a way to
located on buildings with a mean roof height h :S 18 m avoid a step.function in load tf the designer wants to treat
shall be determined from Equation 2070.5-2. other sizes. The research in Hosoya et al (2001) only
treated one value of Ar (0.04Bh). The research in Kopp
and Traczuk (2008) treated values of A1 = 0. 02Bh and
(207D. 5-2)
0. 03Bh, and values of Ar= 0. 0067BL.
where
In both cases the research alw showed high uplifts on the
1.9 for rooftop structures and equipment top ofrooftop. Hence uplift load should also be considered
with A1 less than (0. 1Bh). (GCr) shall be by the designer and is addressed in Section 207D.6.
pennitted to be reduced linearly from 1.9
to 1.0 as the value of A1 is increased from 2070.6 Parapets
(0 . 1Bh) to (Bh)
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof Wind loads on parapets are specified in Section 2078.4.5
height of the building for buildings of all heights designed using the Directional
- vertical projected area of the roo!lop Procedure and in Section 207C.4.2 for low-rise buildings
stmcturc or equipment on a plane normal designed using the Envelope Procedure.
to the direction of wind, m2
Commentary:
The vertical uplift force, F v, on rootiop structures and
equipment shall be determined from Equation 2070.5-3. Prior to the 2002 edition ofthe standard, no provisions for
the design ofparapets had been included due to the lack of
(207D.5-3) direct research. In the 2002 edition of this standard, a
rational method was added based on the committee's
Where collective experience, intuition, and judgment. In the 2005
edition. the parapet provisions were updated as a result of
l.5 fo r rooftop struclures and equipment research performed at the University of Western Ontario
with A r less Lhan (0.1BL). (GCr) shall be (Mans et al. 2000, 2001) and at Concordia University
permitted to be reduced linearly from 1.5 (Stathopoulos et al. 2002a. 2002b).
to 1.0 as the value of Ar is increased from
(0.1BL) to (BL) Windpressures on a parapet are a combination ofwall and
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof roof pressures, depending on the location of the parapet
height of the building and the direction of the wind (Figure C207D. 7-1). A
- hori7.ontal projected area of rooftop windward parapet will e.xperience the positive wall
structure or equipment, m2 pressure on its front surface (exterior side of the building)
and the negative roof edge zone pressure on its back
Commentary: surface (roQf side). This behavior is based on the concept
that the zone of suction caused hy the wind s tream
This code requires the use of Figure 207D.5-1 for the separation at the roof eave moves up to the top of the
determinati.on of the wind force on small structures and parapet when one is present. Thus the same suction that
equipment located on a rooftop. Because ofthe small size acts on the roof edge will also act on the back of the
of the structures in comparison to the building, it is p arapet.
expected that the wind force wilI be higher than predicted
by Equation 207D.6-1 due to higher correlation of The leeward parapet will experience a positive wall
pressures across the structure surface, higher turbulence pressure on its back surface (roofside) and a negative wall
on the building roof, and accelerated wind speed on the pressure on its.front surface (exterior side qfthe building).
roof There should be no reduction in the positive wall pressure
to the leeward parapet due to shielding by the windward
A limited amount ofresearch is available to provide better parapet because, typically, they are too far apart to
guidance for the increased force (Hosoya et al. 2001 and experience this effect. Because all parapets would be
Kopp and Traczuk 2008). Bused on this research, the.force des igned for all wind directions, each parapet would in
of Equation 207D.6-l should be increased for units with
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 201 5

turn be the windward and leeward parapet and, therefore, The internal pressure that may be present inside a parapet
must be designed for both sets ofpressures. is highly dependent on the porosity ofthe parapet envelope,
In other words, it depends on the likelihood of the wall
For the design ofthe MWFRS, the pressures used describe surface materials to leak air pressure into the internal
the contribution ofthe parapet to the overall wind loads on cavities of the parapet. For solid parapets. such as
that system. For simplicity, the front and back pressures on concrete or masonry, the internal pressure is zero because
the parapet have been combined into one coefficient for there is no internal cavity. Certain wall materials may be
MWFRS design. 'flie designer should not typically need the impervious lo air leakage, and as such have little or no
separate front and back pressures for MWFRS design. The internal pressure or suction, so using the value ofGC,,,Jor
internal pressures inside the parapet cancel out in the an enclosed building may be appropriate. However,
detenrtination of the combined co~fjicient. The summation certain materials and systems used to construct parapets
of these external and internal, front and back pressure containing cavities are more porous, thus justifying the use
coefficients is a new term GCpn, the Combined Net of the GCpi values for partially enclosed buildings, or
Pressure Coefficient for a parapet. higher. Another factor in the internal pressure
determination is whether the parapet cavity connects to the
For the design of the components and cladding, a similar internal space of the building, allowing the building's
approach was used. However, it i.v not possible to simplify internal pressure to propagate into the parapet. Selection
the coefficients due to the increased complexity of the ofthe appropriate internal pressure coefficient is left to the
components and cladding pressure coefficients. In judgment ofthe design professional.
addition, the front and back pressures are not combined
because the designer may be designing separate elements
on each face of the parapet. The internal pressure is
required to determine the net pressures on the windward
and leeward swfaces of the pc,rapet. The provisions guide
the designer to the correct GCP and velocity pressure to
use/or each su,face, as illustrated in Figure C207D.7-l.
Interior walls that protrude through the roof, such as party
walls and fire walls, should be designed as windward
parapets for both MWFRS and components and cladding.

t> • H ..
Figure C207D.7-l
Design Wind Pressures on Parapets

2070.7 Roof Overhangs Commentary:
Wind loads on roof overhangs are specified in This section specifies a minimum wind load to be app/ietJ
Section 2078.4.4 for buildings of all heights designed horizontally on the entire vertical projection ofthe building
using the Directional Procedure and in Section 207C.4.3 or other structure. as shown in Figure C207B.4-J. Thi\
for low-rise buildings <lcsigned using the Envelope load case is to be applied as a separate load case ii,
Procedure. addition to the normal load cases specified in other
portions ofthis chapter.
2070.8 Minimum Design Wind Loading
The design wind force for other structures shall be not less
than 0.77 kN/m2 multiplied by the area A 1 .
Table 2070.3-1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, K1i and K,
I leight above ground Ex osure

level, z (meters) B c D
0 - 4.5 0.572 0.846 1.027
6.0 0.621 0.899 1.080
7.5 0.662 0.942 1.123
9.0 0.697 0.979 1.159
12.0 0.757 1.040 1.218
15.0 0.807 1.090 1.267
urn 0.850 1.133 1.307
21.0 0.888 1.170 1.343
24.0 0.923 1.204 1.375
27.0 0.955 1.234 l.403
30.0 0.984 1.261 1.429
36.0 1.036 1.311 1.475
42.0 l.083 1.354 1.515
48.0 1.125 1.393 1.551
54.0 1.164 1.428 1.583
60.0 1.199 l.460 1.612
75.0 1.278 1.530 1.676
90.0 I.347 1.590 l.730
105.0 1.407 1.642 1.777
120.0 1.462 1.689 1.819
135.0 l.512 1.731 1.856
150.0 l.558 1.770 1.891
Noles:
I. The velocity pressure expo~ure coefficient K,. may be determined from lhe f(>llowing formula:
For4.5 m:<,; z ~ Zg For z <4.5 in
2/a
K, = 2. 01 ( z/zg) z/" K, = 2.01 ( 4.57/z1)
2. The constant~ a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207A.9-1.

3. Linear interpolation for intcnncdiate values of height z is penniUed.
4. Exposure categoritls are defined i11 Section 207A.7.

• I
I
I --- 1.1:
--
I
• CAIE:.t
F
t
I
I
- / ~F F F
CMEC
F
I
~ j
-
a.t'WATIOII WW i
!+-•• 1,-,f.-....i.,. ·~I
~
c.:•
j:illJ.' ~1:-w-t-'8 I
I
*!.! -
CflOU.IEC'llON YEW
.6.:..1
c.,._,.. • . _ •
......1 t.:~
f'I.MVIEWI
-
--.,... , .....
•• ."" ... ·-
ao
s om.
I .Ill
g1
I.IV
112
....
I .Iii .....
g~ l
.....
-"'
4
I 3li '
'""' ,~
10
.....
:a>
,.:m
.... ....,.a
1.W
:at e
;m
••
....., .., ·~ ,. ,....
IIA U!i 1,..; I .illO
...,
,. .. ,..... ,..-
0.7 IIKI I.A l .'11 t'l'tl U6 l(jl) UD l.lli Ui l.liil 1..65
... . ·-
O.& UII I 111 1.76 no 1.70 UII 1.711 UII t.10 us
0-3
Q.2
.:0.11 ...
115
1'6 IIO
ua 116
uo
,
!.Ill
1.10
I .Ill
IJWI
uo
uo
us
,
IM
1.16 1.15 uo
Ill<
Ull ,
--
._,
--
!;,.---=C
;-.er:
_..,.
011>•
2
2..21,
3
2.80
•
2.11 '
,.ur
Mpld~ ....
6
:ucr
7
..
1AO' 166'
• ,.• .. 10
_s.,g•
,.
_..,
Otu
Ali;lld A*I. SM
13
,..,
411(1'
HS
•.30"
_
,.to 2.00 u,
tlD2a 1.81 I.JD 2.15
,
2.25 230 2..35 2.A5 •!02'1
o• ,.....
~,-":'~~"'™ ,,.
2!111>• 1.16 1.:11 1.& 1.56 t.711 1,75 21llo91 2.00 U5
••
-r- uo
1.10 t.Olo
"'""'°" .,·-
....... .,,
1.ll5 I.QI 1.00
us
-·-
.. .,&t 115
-·--=
S.1>10. O,IIO 1.10
.....
u
.,
IG
·-o• /•
- 11
·I ~11•
"' 0.65
Notes:
I. The term "signs" in notes hclow also api,lies to "freestamling walls".
2. Signs with openings comprising less than 30% of the gross area arc classi!ie<l as solid signs. Force coefficients for solid signs with
openings shall be permiucd Lo he mulliplie<l by the reduction factor (1 - (1 - e) 15). •
3. To allow for both normal and oblique wind directions, the following cases shall he considered:
For s/h < 1:
CASE A: n:sultanc force acts normal to the face of !he sign through the geometric center.
CASE 13: resultant force acts normal to the face orthe sign a( a <li8Lance from the geometric center toward the windward
edge equal to 0.2 times the average width of the sign.
for BIs ~ 2, CASE C must also be considered:
CASE C: resultant forces act normal to the foce of Lhe sign through the geometric centers of each region.
For s/h = 1:
The 8ame cases a8 above except that the ve11ical locations of the resultant forces occur at a distance ahove the geomelric
center equal to 0.05 times the average height of the sign.
4. For CASE C: where s/h > 0.8, force coefficients shall he multiplied hy the reduction factor (1. 8 - s/h).
5. Linear interpolation is permitted for values of s/h, 8/s and L./s other than shown.
6. Notation:
B: horizontal dimension of sign, m; E: ratio of solid area lo gross area;
h: height of the sign, m Lr: horizontal dimension ofrctum comer, m
s: vertical dimension of the sign, m;
Figure 2070.4- l
Design Wind Loads Force Coefficients (C1) Other Structures
All Heights of Solid Freestanding Walls & Solid Freestanding Signs

Cross-Section h/D
Type of Surface
7 25
uare wind normal to face) All 1.3 1.4 2.0
uare wind alono dia onal) All 1.0 1.1 1.5
Hexa lOnal or Octa onal All 1.0 l.2 1.4
Round (D.jii; > 2. 5) Moderate! Smooth 0.5 0.6 0.7
Rouoh ( 0'/D = 0.02 ) 0.7 0.8 0.9
(D.jii; > 5. 3, Din m. qz in N/m2) Ver Rm.1oh D'/1)-" 0.08 ) 0.8 1.0 1.2
Round (D.jii;::; 2. 5)
All 0.7 0.8 1.2
(D qz ::; 5. 3, Din m, qz in N/m2 )
Notes:
I. The design wind force shall be t8lculated hascu on lhe area of the slructure pr~jeeted on a plane normal to the wind direction. The
force shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
2. Linear interpolation is permincd for Ji/ D values other than ~hown .

.1. Norat.ion:
D: diameter of' circular cross-section and least horizontal dimension of ~quare, hexagonal or oclagonijl crnss-sections at elevation
untler consideration, in meters;
D': deplh of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers, tn; and
h: height of struclttre, m; and
q,: velocity pressure evalualcd at height z above ground, Nltn 2
4. For roo11op equipment on buildings with a mean roof height of h ~ 18 m, t1se Section 2070.5. I,
Figure 2070.5-1
Other Structures Force Coefficients, Cr
Chimneys, Tanks, Rooftop Equipment, & Similar Structures
Flat-Sided Rounded Members

E
Members D qz s; 5. 3 D qz > 5.3
< 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
0.1 to 0.29 1.8 l.3 0.9
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 J.]
Noles:
I. Signs with openings comprising 30% OT more of the gross area are classified as open sig11s.
2. The calculation of the design wind force.~ shall be based on th.: area of all exposed members and clements projected on a plane
normal to the wind direction. Forces shall be assumed to act parallel to the win<l direction.
3. The area Ar consistent with these force coefficients is the solid area proje<.:ted 11ormal to the wind direction.
4. Notutiou:
f: ratio of solid area to gross area;

D: diamelerofa typical round member, m;
q,.: velocity pressure evaluated at height z ahov.: ground, N/m2
Figure 2070.5-2
Other Structures Force Coefficients, Cr All Heights of Open Signs & Lattice Frameworks

Tower Cross Section c,

Square
Triangle
Notes:
J. For all wind directions considered, the area Ar consistent with the specilied force coeflicients shall be the solid area of a tower face
pr~iectcd on the plane of that face for the tower segment under cousideration.
2. The specified force coefficients are for towers with structural angles or similar flat sided members.
3. For towers containing rounded members, it is acceptable to multiply the specified force coefficients by the following factor when
determining wind forces on such members:
0. S1E2 + 0. 57, but not> 1.0

4. Wind forces shall be applied in the directions resulting in maximum member forces and reactions. For towers with square cross-sections,
wind forces shall he multiplied by the following factor when the wind is directed along a tower diagonal:
t + 0. 7SE, but not> 1.2

5. Wind forces on tower appurtenances such as ladders, conduits, lights, elevators, etc., shall be calculated nsing appropriate force
coefficients for these elements.
6. Notation:
E: ratio of solid area to gross area of one tower face for the segment under consideration.
Figure 207D.5-2
Other Structures Force Coetlicients, c, Trussed Towers of All Heights

2-130 CHAPTER 2 · Minimum Design Loads
207E Wind Loads - Components and Cladding indicate that some reduction in pressures for compunems 4.
(C&C) and cladding of buildings located in Exposure B ia
justified. Hence, the code permits the use ofthe applicable
Cnmmenlmy: exposure categ01y when using these coefficients.
In developing the set ofpressure coefficients applicable.for The pressure coefficients given in Figure 207E.6-l for
the design qf components and cladding (C&C) as given in buildings with mean height greater than 18 m were
Figures 207£.4-1, 207E.4-2A, 207£.4-28, 207E.4-2C, deve/opedfhllowing a similar approach. but the influence
207£.4-3, 207£.4-4, 207E.4-5A, 207£.4-58, and 207£.4- of exposure was not enveloped (Stathopoulos and
6. an envelope approach was followed but using d(fferent Dumitrescu-Brulotte 1989). There.fore, exposure
method~ than for the MWFRS ofFigure 207C.4-l. Because catego1·ies B. C, or D may be used with the values of( GCp)
of the small ~ffective area that may be involved in the in Figure 207£.6-1 as appropriate.
design of a particular component (consider, e.g.. the
ej)ective area associated with the design ofo fl1sre11er), the 207E.l Scope
point wise pressure fluctuotiom,· 111(1)' be highly correlt,ted
over the e:f/ective area ofinterest. Consider the local purlin 207E.l.l Building Types
load5 shown in Figure C207C.4-J. The approach involved
spatial averaging and time averaging of the point This chapter applies to the determination of wind pressures
pressures over the effective area transmitting loads to the on components and cladding (C&C) on buildings.
purlin while the building model was permitted to rotate in
the wind tunnel through 360°. As the induced localized I. Part I is applicable to an enclosed or pa1tially
pressures may also vary widely as a.function ofthe specific enclosed:
location on the building. height above ground level,
exposure, and more importantly, local geometric • Low-rise building (see definition in
discontinuities and location qf the element relative to the Section 207J\.2)
boundaries in the building sut:faces (walls, roof lines),
these factors were also enveloped in the wind tunnel tests. • Building with h ~ 18 m
Thus.for the pressure coefficients given in Figures 207E.4-
I, 207E.4-2A, 207£.4-28, 207E.4-2C, 207£.4-3. 207E.4-4. The building has a flat roof, gable roo( multispan
207E.4-5A. 207E.4-5B, and 207£.4-6, the directionality of gable roof, hip root~ monoslope roof, stepped roof, or
the wind and influence qfexposure have been removed and sawtooth roof and the wind pressures arc calculated
the swfaces ofthe building "zoned" 10 reflect an envelope from a wind pressure equation.
qf the peak pressures possible for a given design
application. 2. Part 2 is a simplified approach and is applicable to an
enclosed:
As indicated in the discussion for Figure 207C.4-J, the
wind tunnel experiments checked both Exposure B and C • Low-rise building (sec definition in
terrains. Basically (GCp) values associated with Exposure Section 207 A.2)
!J terrain would be higher than those for Exposure C
terrain because of reduced velocity pressure in Exposure • Building with It :::;; 18 m
B terrain. The (GCp) values given in Figures 207£.4-1,
207E.4-2A, 207£.4-28, 207E.4-2C, 207£.4-3, 207£.4-4, The building has a flat roof, gable roof, or hip roof and
207E.4-5A, 207£.4-58, and 207E.4-6 are associated with the wind pressures are determined directly from a
Exposure C terrain as obtained in the wind tunnel. table.
However, they may also be usedfor any exposure when the
correct velocity pressure representing the appropriate 3. Part 3 is applicable to an enclosed or partially
exposure is used as discussed below. enclosed:
The wind tunnel studies conducted by ESDU (/990)
• Building with h > 18 m
determined that when low-rise buildings (h < /8 m) are
embedded in suburban terrain (Exposure B). the pressures The building has a flat roof, pitched root~ gable roo1:
on components and cladding in most cases are lower than
hip roof, mansard rool~ arched roof, or domed roof and
those currently used in the standards and codes, although
the wind pressures arc calculated from a wind pressure
the values show a very large scatter because of high
equation.
turbulence and many variables. The results seem to
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, lnc. (ASEP)

4. Part 4 is a simplified approach and is applicable to an Commentary:

enclosed:
Air-permeable roof or wall claddings allow partial air
• Building with h :s; 48 m pressure equalization between Jheir exterior and interior
swfaces. Examples include siding. pressure-equalized rain
The building has a Oat roof, gable roof~ hip roof, screen walls. shingles, tiles, concrete roof pavers, and
monoslopc rool: or mansard roof and the wind aggregate roofsurfacing.
pressures arc dclcnnincd directly from a table.
The peak pressure acting across an air-permeable
5. Part 5 is applicable to an open building of all heights cladding material is dependent on the characteristics of
having a pitched free roof, monoslope free roof, or other components or layers of a building envelope
trough free roof. assembly. At any given instant the total net pressure across
a building envelope assembly will be equal to the sum of
G. Part 6 is applicable to building appurtenances such as the partial pressures across the individual layers as shown
roof overhangs and parapets and rooftop equipment. in Figure C207E.l-l. However, the proportion ofthe total
net pressure borne by each layer will vary from instant to
207E. I .2 Conditions instant due to .fluctuations in the external and internal
pressures and will depend on the porosity and stiffness of
A building whose design wind loads arc determined in each layer. as well as the volumes ofthe air spaces between
accordance with this chapter shall comply with all of the the layers. As a result, although there is load sharing
following conditions: among the various layers, the sum of the peak pressures
across the ;ndividua/ layers will typically exceed the peak
I. The building is a regular-shaped building as defined in pressure across the entire system. In the absence of
Section 207 A.2. detailed information on the division of loads, a simple,
conservative approach is to assign the entire dijjerential
2. The building docs not have response characteristics pressure to each layer designed to cany load.
making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding, or instability due to galloping or flutter; or it To maximize pressure equalization (reduction) across any
does not have a site location for which channeling cladding system (irrespective of the permeability of the
effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind obstructions cladding itse!f), the layer or layers behind the cladding
warrant special consideration. should be:
207El.3 Limitations • relatively stiffin comparison to the cladding material

and ·
load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with • relatively air-impermeable in comparison to the
along-wind vibrations of flexible buildings. The loads on cladding material.
buildings not meeting the requirements of Section
207E. 1.2, or having· unusual shapes or response Furthermore, the air space between the cladding and the
characteristics, shall be <lctcnnincd using recognized next acfjacent building envelope su,:face behind the
literature documenting such wind load cflccts or shall use cladding (e.g., the exterior sheathing) should be as small
the wind tunnel procedure specified in Section 207F. as practicable and compartmentalized to avoid
communication or venting ben11een different pressure
207E.1.4 Shielding zones ofa building's surfaces.
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to The design wind pressures derived from Section 207E
apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other represent the pressure differential between the exterior and
structures or terrain features. interior su,:f'aces of the exterior envelope (wall or roof
system). Because of partial air-pressure equalization
207E. 1.5 Air-Permeable Cladding provided by air-permeable claddings, the components and
cladding pres.mres derived from Section 207E can
Design wind loads determined from Section 207.E shall be overestimate the load on air-permeable cladding elements.
used for air-permeable cladding unless approved test data The designer may elect either to use the loads derived.from
or recognized literature demonstrates lower loads for the Section 207E or to use loads derived by an approved
type of air-permeable cladding being considered. alternative method If the designer desires to determine the

2-132 CHAPTER 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
pressure differential across a specific cladding element in

combination with other elements comprising a specffic
building envelope assembly, appropriate Juli-scale
pressure measurements should be made on the applicable
building envelope assembly, or reference should be made
to recognized literature (Cheung and Melbourne /986,
!laig /990, Baskaran /992, Southern Building Code
Congress International 1994, Peterka et al. 1997, ASTM
2006, 2007, and Kala et al. 2008) for documentation
pertaining to wind loadr. Such alternative method,; may
vary according to a given cladding product or class of
cladding products or assemblies because each has unique
features that affect pressure equalization.
EXTERIOR lAYERIStffATHING
AIRSPACE WAU.CAVITY
Q.ADOING
I
I
I
BUILD NG BUILD NG
EXTERIOR aI b t d INTERIOR
•I • • •
I
I
Fl ·1 = pt"eSSY'e dilf•ential across daddrlg layer
jS · =presstl'e dlferential aaoss exleria layer/sheathing
~ · =Pf8SSl,fe differential.aaoss iNetior r&yerlfiniSh
I
I
Figure C207E. I- l
Distribution of Net Components and Cladding Pressure Acting on a Building Surface
(Building Envelope) Comprised of Three Components (Layers)
207E.2 General Requirements • Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207A.5)

• Wind directionality factor Kd (Section 207/\.6)
207E.2.l Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
207A • Exposure category (Section 207 A.7)
• Topographic factor Kzt (Section 207A.8)
The following wind load parameters are specified in • Gust Elfoct Factor (Section 207 A.9)
Section 207 A:
• Enclosure classification (Section 207 A. I0)

• Internal pressure coefficient (GCpt) topographic factor defined, see

(Section 207 A. I I). Section 207 A.8
basic wind speed, see Section 207 A.5
2071';.2.2 Minimum Design Wind Pressures velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207£.3-1 at height h
The design wind pressure for components and cladding of
buildings shall not be less than a net pressure ofO. 77 kN/m2 The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except where
acting in either direction nonnal to the surface. sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection
of a different value of this factor for a design application.
207E.2.3 Tributary Areas Greater than 65 m2
Commentary:
Component and cladding elements with tributary areas
greater than 65 m2 shall be pennitted to be designed using See commentary, Section C207B. 3. 2.
the provisions for MWFRS.
Figures 207E.4-l, 207E.4-2A, 207E.4-2B, and
207E.2.4 F.xtcrnal Pressure Coefficients 207E.4-2C. The pressure coefficient values provided in
!hesefigures are to be used/or buildings with a mean roof
Combined gust effect factor and external pressure height of 18 m or less. The values were obtainedfrom wind-
coefficients for components and cladding, (GCp), are tunnel tests conducted at the University o,f Western Ontario
given in the figures associated with this chapter. The (Davenport et al. 1977, 1978), at the James Cook
pressure coefficient values and gust effect factor shall not University of North Queensland (Bes/ and Holmes 1978),
be separated. and at Concordia University (Stathopoulos 1981,
Stathopoulos and Zhu 1988. Stathopoulos and Luchian
207E.3 Velocity Pressure 1990, 1992. and Stathopoulos and Saathoff 1991). These
coefficients were r~fined to reflect results offull-scale tests
207E.3. t Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient conducted by the National Bureau ofStandards (Marshall
1977) and the Building Research Station, England (Eaton
and Mayne 1975). Pressure coejjicientsfor hemispherical
Based on the exposure category determined in
domes on the ground or on cylindrical structures were
Section 207 A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient
based on winef-tunnel tests (Taylor 1991). Some of the
Kz or Kh, as applicable, shall be determined from
characteristics ofthe values in the figure are as.follows:
Table 207E.3-1. For a site located in a transition zone
between exposure categories, that is, near to a change in 1. The values are combined values of (GCp). The gust
ground surface roughness, intermediate values of Kz or effect factors from these values should not be
Kh, between those shown in Table 207E.3-l, are pennitted, separated
provided that they are determined by a rational analysis
method defined in the recognized literature. 2. The velocity pressure qh evaluated at mean roof
height should be used with all values of ( GC p).
Commentary: 3. The values provided in the figure represent the upper
bounds of the most severe values for any wind
See commentaty, Section C207B.3.J. direction. The reduced probability that the design
wind speed may not occur in the particular direction
207E.3.2 Velocity Pressure for which the worst pressure coefficient is recorded
has not been included in the values shown in the
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be figure.
calculated by the following equation:
4. The wind-tunnel values, as measured. were based on
the mean hourly wind speed. The values provided in
qz = 0. 613KzKztKdV2 (N/m2);V in
(2071:::.3-l)
the figures are the measured values divided by (I.53)2
mis (see Figure C207A.5-1) to adjust for the reduced
pressure coefficient values associated with a 3-s gust
where speed
wind directionality factor, sec Section
Each component and cladding element should be designed
207A.6
fur the maximum positive and negative pressures
velocity pressure exposure coefficient, sec
(including applicable internal pressures) acting on it. The
Section 207.E.3. l
2-1~4 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
pressure coe/ficient values should be determined/or each Figure 207£.6-I. The pressure co4fkients shown in this
component and cladding element on the basis of its figure r~flecl the results obtained from comprehensive
location on the building and the effective urea for the wind tun11el studies carried out (Stathopoulos and
element. Research (Stathopoulos and Zhu 1988, 1990) Dumitrescu-Brulotte 1989). The availability <f more
indicated that the pressure coefficients provided generally comprehensive wind tunnel data hus also allowed a
apply to facades with architectural features. such as simpltflcation of the zoning for pressure coe/Jicients, .fla1
balconies, ribs, and various.facade textures. in ASCE 7-02, rooj~ are now divided into three zones, and walls are
the roof slope range and values of (GCp) were updated represented by two zones.
based on subsequent studies (Stathopoulos et al. 1999,
2000, 2001). The external pressure co~[ftcients and zones given in
Figure 207£.6-1 were established by wind tunnel tests on
Figures 207£.4-4, Z07E.4-5A, and 207£.4-SB. These isolated "box-like" buildings (Akins and Cermak 1975 and
.figures present values of (6Cp) for the design of roof Peterka and Cermak 1975). Boundary-Laye~· wind-tunnel
components and cladding for buildings with multispan tests on high-rise buildings (mostly in downtown city
centers) show that variations in pressure coefficients and
gable roof~ and buildings with monoslope roofs. The
the distribution of pressure on the different building
coefficients are based on wind tunnel studies (Stathopoulos
.facades are obtained (Templin and Cermak 1978). These
and Mohammadian 1986, Suny and Stathopoulos /988,
variations are due to building geometry, low attached
and Stathopoulos and Saathoff 1991).
buildings, nonrectangular cross-sections, setbacks, and
sloping surfaces. in addition, surrounding buildings
Fig1tre 207£.4-6. The values of(GCp) in this figure are for
contribute to the variations in pressure. Wind tunnel tests
the design of roof components and cladding for buildings indicate that pressure coefficients are not distributed
with sawtooth roofs and mean roof height, h, less than or symmetrically and can give rise to torsional wind loading
equal to 18 m. Note that the coefficients for corner zones
on the building.
on segment A d{fferfrom those co~fficients for corner zones
on the segments designated as B, C. and D. Also, when the
Boundary-layer wind-tunnel tests that include modeling of
roofangle is less than or equal to 10°, values of (GCp)/or
surrounding buildings permit the establishment of more
regular gable roofs (Figure 207E.4-2A) are to be used. The exact magnitudes and distributions of (GCp) for buildings
coefficients included in Figure 207E.4-6 are based on wind
that are not isolated or "boxlike" in shape. ·
tunnel studies reported by Saathoff and Stathopoulos
(1992).
Figure 107£.4-7. This figure for cladding pressures on

dome ror?fs is based on Taylor (1991). Negative pressures
are to be applied to the entire sutface, because they apply
along the foll arc that is perpendicular to the wind
direction and that passes through the top of the dome.
Users are cautioned that only three shapes were available
to define values in this _figure (h 0 / D = 0. 5, f / D =
0.5; h 0 /D = 0.0, f/D = 0.5; and ho/D = 0.0, fl
D = 0.33).

Table 207E.3- l
Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, Kh and K7.
Exposure
Height above ground level, z
{m)
B c D
0 - 4.5 0.70 0.85 1.03
6.0 0.70 0.90 1.08
7.5 0.70 0.94 1.12
9.0 0.70 0.98 l.16
12.0 0.76 l.04 1.22
15.0 0.81 1.09 1.27
l8.0 0.85 1.1 J 1.31
21.0 0.89 1.17 1.34
24.0 0.93 L.21 1.38
27.0 0.96 1.24 1.40
30.0 0.99 1.26 1.43
36.0 1.04 1.31 1.48
42.0 1.09 1.36 1.52
48.0 l.13 1.39 1.55
54.0 1.17 1.43 1.58
60.0 1.20 1.46 1.61
75.0 1.28 1.53 1.68
90.0 1.35 1.59 1.73
105.0 1.41 1.64 1.78
120.0 l.47 1.69 1.82
135.0 l.52 1.73 l.86
150.0 1.56 1.77 1.89
Notes:
I. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz may be determined lrmn tne following formula:
For 4.57 m ::, z $ zg For z < 4.57 m
K, = 2.01 ( z/zg) 2/u K, = 2.01( 4.57/zg) 2/a

2. « and z1 arc tabulated in Table 207 A.9-1.
3. Linear interpolation for intennediate values of'height z is acccptahl.:.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Seel ion 207 A.7.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume r. 7th Edition, 2015

Part I: Low-Rise Buildings 207E.4.2 Design Wind Pressures
Commentary: Design wind pressures on component and cladding

clements of low-rise buildings and buildings with
The component and cladding tables in Figure 207E. 5 -1 are s
h 18 m shall be determined from the following equation:
a tabulation ofthe pressures on an enclosed, regular, 9-m
high building with a roof as described The pressures can 207E.4-I
be modified to a dffferent exposure and height with the
same adjustment/actors as the MWFRS pressures. For the
designer to use this method for the design of the where
components and cladding, the building must conform to all velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof
five requirements in Section 207E. 6; otherwise one qf the height has defined in Section 207E.3
other procedures specified in Section 207£.1.1 must be external pressure coefficients given in:
used
• Figure 207E.4-1 (walls)
207E.4 Building Types • Figures. 207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2C (flat
roofs, gable roofs, and hip roofs)
The provisions of Section 207E.4 are applicable to an • Figure 207E.4-3 (stepped roofs)
enclosed and pa,tially enclosed: • figure 207E.4-4 (multispan gable roofs)
• Figures 207E.4-5A and 207E.4-58
• Low-rise building (see definition in Section 207A.2) (monoslope roofs)
• Figure 207E.4-6 (sawtooth roofs)
• Building with h s 18 m • Figure 207E.4-7 (domed roofs)
• Figure 2078.4-3, footnote 4 (arched roofs)
The building has a flat roof, gable roof, multispan gable internal pressure coefficient given in
root: hip roof, monoslope roof, stepped roof, or sawtooth Table 207A.1 l-l
root: The steps required for the determination of wind loads
on components and cladding for these building types are
shown in Table 207£.4-1.
207E.4.1 Conditions User Note:
For the detel'mination of the design wind pressures on the Use Part 1 o/Section 207E to determine wind pressures
components and claddings using the provisions of on C&C of enclo.;ed and partially enclosed low-rise
Section 207£.4.2 the conditions indicated on the selected buildings having r()(?f shapes as specffied in the
figure(s) shall be applicable to the building under applicahle _figures. The provisions in Part I are based
on the Envelope Procedure with wind pressures
consideration.
calculated using the specified equation as applicable to
each building surface. For buildings for which these
provisions are applicable this method generally yields
the lowest wind pressures of all analytical methods
contained in this code.

Table 207E.4-1 Part 2: Low-Rise Buildings (Simplified)

Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Enclosed and Parlially Enclosed 207E.5 Building Types
Low-rise Buildings
The provisions of Section 207E.5 are applicable to an
Step 1: Dctennine risk category of building or other enclosed:
structure, see Table l 03-1
Slep 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the • I.ow-rise building (see definition in Section 207A.2)
1A, B orC • Building with h S 18 m
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters: The building has a flat roof, gable roof, or hip roof. The
}> Wind directionality factor, Kd, sec steps required for the detennination of wind loads on
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 J\.6-1 components and cladding for lhcse building types are
shown in Table 207E.5- l.
~ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
207A.7 207E.5.1 Conditions
:,. Topographic factor, Kzt, sec Set.:tion
207A.8 and Figure 207A.8-1 For the design of components and cladding the building
shall comply with all the following conditions:
~ Enclosure classification, sec Section
207A.10 I. The mean roof height h must be less than or equal to
~ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCp 1), see 18 m (i.e. h S 18 m).
Scclion 207 A.11 and Table 207 A.11-1
2. The building is enclosed as defined in
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure Section 207 A.2 and confom1s to the wind-borne debris
coefficient Kie or Kh, see Table 207E.3-J provisions ofSeclion 207 A.10.3.
Slep 5: Determine velocity pressure, q 11 , see
Equation 207E.3-l 3. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
as defined in Section 207 A.2.
(GC11 ) 4. The building does not have response characteristics
making it .suhject to across wind loading, vortex
~ Walls, see Figure 207E.4-l
shedding, or instability due to galloping or flutter; and
~ Flat roofs, gable roofs, hip roofs, see
il docs not have a site location for which channeling
Figure 207E.4-2
>"' Stepped roofs, see Figure 207E.4-3 warrant special consideration.
'.\,i, Multispan gahle roofs, .see Figure 207E.4- 5. The building has either a flat roof, a gable roof with
4
(} S 45°, or a hip roof with 9 S 27°.
~ Monoslopc roofs, sec Figure 207E.4-5
).> Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 207E.4-6
}> Domed roofs, see Figure 207E.4-7
~ Arched roofs, see Figure 2078.4-3
footnote 4
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation 207E.4- J

207E.5.2 Design Wind Pressures Table 207E.5-I

Steps to Detem1ine C&C
Net design wind pressures, P11et, for component and Wind Loads Enclosed Low-rise Buildings
cladding of buildings designed using the procedure (Simplified Method)
specified herein represent the net pressures (sum of internal
and external) that shall be applied normal to each building
Step Detennine risk category, see Table 103-1
surface as shown in Figure 207E.5-1. p,,et shall be
l:
determined by the following equation:
Step Dctcnnine the basic wind .speed, V, for the
2: applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
Pnet = AKztPnet9 (207E.5-l)
I A, B orC
where Step Detennine wind load parameters:
3:
adjustment factor for building height and » Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
exposure from Figure 207E.5- I 207A.7
topographic factor as defined in
Section 207 A.8 evaluated at 0.33 mean »- Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section
roof height, 0. 33h 207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
Pnet30 net design wind pressure for Exposure B,
Step Enter figure to determine wind pressures
=
at h 9 m, from Figure 207E.5-1
4: =
at h 9 m., Pnet9 , see Figure 207E.5-1
Step Enter figure to determine adjustment for
5: building height and exposure, .A., see Figure
207E.5-I
User Note:
Step Determine adjusted wind pressures, Pnet, see
Part 2 of Section 207£ is a simplified method to 6: Equation 207E.5-l.
determine wind pressures on C&C ofenclosed /ow-rise
buildings having .fiat, gable or hip roof shapes. The
provisions of Part 2 are based on the Envelope
Procedure of Part 1 with wind pressures determined
from a table and aqjusted as appropriate.

Piut 3: Buildings with h > 18 m 207E.6.2 Design Wind Pressures
Commentmy: Design wind pressures on component and cladding for all

buildings with h > 18 m shall be determined from the
In Equation 207£.6-1 a velocity pressure tenr,, qi, appear.Y following equation:
that is d~fined as the "velocity pressure for inlerna/
pressure determination. " The positive internal pressure is 207E.6-I
dictated by the positive exterior pressure on the windward
face at the point where there is an opening. The positive where
exterior pressure al the opening is governed by the value
ofq at the level ofthe opening. not qh. For positive internal q qz for windward walls calculated at height z
pressure evaluation, q I may conservatively be evaluated at above the ground
=
height h (q 1 qh). For low buildings this does not make q qh for leeward walls, side walls, and roofs
much difjerence. but for the example of a 91.5-m-tall evaluated at height h
building in Exposure B with the highest opening at 18 m, qh for windward walls, side walls, leeward
the d[fference between q9 ,1 s and q 18 represents a 59 walls, and roofs of enclosed buildings and for
percent increase in internal pressure. This is unrealistic negative internal pressure evaluation in
and represents an unnecessary degree of conservatism. partially enclosed buildings
=
Accordingly, q 1 qz for positive internal pressure q:e for positive internal pressure evaluation in
evaluation in partially enclosed buildings where height z partially enclosed buildings where height z is
is defined as the level ofthe highest opening in the building defined as the level of the highest opening in
that could affect the positive internal pressure. For the building that could atfoct the positive
buildings sited in wind-borne debris regions, glazing that internal pressure. For positive internal
is not impact resistant or pro/ected with an impact pressure evaluation, q; may conservatively be
proteclive system, q, should be treated as an opening. evaluated at height lt(qi =qh)
External pressure coefficients given in:
207E.6 Building Types • Figure 207 E.6-1 for walls and flat roofs
• Figure 207R.4-3, footnote 4, for arched
The provisions of Section 207E.6 are applicahle to an roofs
enclosed or partially enclosed huilding with a mean roof • Figure 207E.4-7 for domed roofs
height h > 18 m with a flat roof, pitched roof, gable roof, • Note 6 of Figure 207E.6- I
hip root: mansard root: arched roo(: or domed roof. The Internal pressure coefficient given in
steps required for the determination of wind loads on Table207A.l l-l
components and cladding for these building types are
shown in Table 207E.6-l. q and qi shall he evaluated usmg exposure defined in
Section 207 A.11-1
207E.6.1 Conditions
Exception:
For the determination of the design wind pressures on the
component and cladding using the provisions of In buildings with a mean roof height h greater thQJ'I I8 m
Section 207E.6.2, the conditions indicated on the selected and less than 27.4 m, ( GCP) values from Figures 207E.4-
figure(s} shall be applicable to the building under
I through 207E.4-6 shall be permitted to be used if the
consideration.
height to width ratio is one or less.
User Note:
Section Part 3 ({! Section 207£ for determining wind

pressures for C&C of enclosed and partially enclosed
buildings with h > 18 m having roofshapes as specified
in the applicahle figures. These provisions are based on
the Directional Procedure with wind pressures
calculated from the specified equation applicable to
each building swfw.:e.

Table 207E.6- l Part 4: Buildings with h ~ 48 m (Simplified)

Enclosed and Paitially Enclosed Commentary:
Building with h > 18 m
This section has been added to ASCE 7-/0 to cover the
common practical case ofenclosed buildings up to height
Step I : Determine risk category, see Table I 03-1
h = 49 m. Table 207E. 7-2 includes wall and roofpressurer
Step 2: Detennine the basic wind speed, V, for the forflat roofs((} < JO"). gahle rooft, /tip roq(s, monos/ope
applicable ri!>k category, see Pigure 207 A.5- roofs, and ma11sard roofs. Pressure~· are derived .from
lA, D orC Figure 207£.6-1 (/lot roofs}, Figure 207E.4-2A, B. and C
(gable and hip roofs). and Figure 207E.4-5A cmd B
(111011osfope roofi1 of Part 3. Pressures were selected for
>" Wind directionality factor, Kd, see each zone thal encompasses the largest pressure
Section 207A.6 and Table 207A.6- I coefficients for the comparah/e zones from the different
roofshapes. Thus, for some C(tSes. the pressures tabulated
» Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
are conservative i11 order to mqlntain simplicity. The ( GCp)
207A.7
values from 1hese figures 11·ere combined with an intemnl
).a- Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section pressure coefficient(+ or- 0. J8) 10 obtain a net coefficient
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1 .from which pressures were calc11/(ltecl. Tlie tc,bulated
pressures are applicable to the entire zone shown in the
).>- Enclosure classilication, see Section
various figures.
207A.10
);> Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), sec Pressures are shownjor an effective wind area o/0.93 m2.
Section 207A.l land Table 207A.l l-l A reduction facto,· is also shown to obtain pressures jar
larger effective wind areas. The reduction factors are
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure based on the graph ofexternal pressure coejjicienls shown
coefficient Kz or Kh, see Table 207E.3-l in the figures in Part 3 and are based on the most
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, sec Table conservative reduction for each zone from the various
207E.3 -I jigu,res.
Step 6: Detennine external pressure coefficient, 207E.7 Building Types

(GCP)
The provisions of Section 207E.7 are applicable to an
)"' Walls and flat roofs, (9 < 10°), see
enclosed building h~ving a mean roof height h ::; 49 m
Figure 207E.6-1
with a flat roo( gable roof, hip roof, monoslope roof, or
)"" Gable and hip roofs, see Figure 207E.4-2 mansard roof. The step::; required for the detennination of
per Note 6 o fFigure 207E.6-l wind loads on components and cladding for these building
types are shown in Table 207E.7-l.
~ Arched roofs, see Figure 207B.4-3,
footnote 4
>" Domed roofs, see Figure 207E.4-7
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation 207£.6-
1
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. {ASEP)

Ci-1/\PTE:R 2 Minin1urn De:si~11 Luc.ids 2-141
2071t:.7.1 Wind Loads-Components and Cladding
207E.7.1.1 Wall and Roof Surfaces User Note:
Design wind pressures on the designated zones of walls Part 4 r?f Seaiun 207F, is a simplified method .f<>r
and roofs surfaces shall be determined from de1ermining wind pressures for C&C ol enclosed and
Table 207E.7·2 hased on the applicable basic wind speed partially enclosed buildings with h ~ 49 m. having roof
V, mean roof height h, and roof slope IJ. Tabulated shapes as specified in the applicahle figures. These
pressures shall be multiplied by the exposure adjuslmcnt provisions are based on the Directional Procedure fi'om
factor (EAF) shown in tin: table if exposure is different Part 3 with wind pressures selected direct/y.fiwn a table
than Exposure C. Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on and adjusted as applicable.
an effective wind area of 0.93 m2• Reductions in wind
pressure for larger effective wind areas may be taken based Table 207E. 7- 1
on the reduction multipliers (RF) shown in the table. Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Pressures are to be applied over the entire zone shown in Enclosed Building with h > 4·8.8 m
the figures. Final design wind pressure shall be determined
from the following equation:
Step Detennine risk category, see Table l 01-1
P = Puibt.:(EAF)(RF)Ku (207E.7-I) I:
Step Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
where 2: applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.S-
I A, B orC
RF elfrctive area reduction factor from
Table 207E.7-2 Step Determine wind load parameters;
EAF Exposure adjustment factor from 3:
Table 207E.7-2 .:.- Exposure category R, C or D, sec Section
Kzt topographic factor as defined in 207A.7
Section 207 A.8 Step Enter Table 207£.7-2 to determine pressure on
4: walls and root; p, using Equation 207E.7-1.
207E.7.l.2 Parapets Roof types are:
Design wind pressures on parapet surfaces shall be based )" Flat roof(O < to 0 )
on wind pressures for lhc applicable edge and corner zones ~ Gahlc roof
in which the parapet is locatc<l, as shown in
Table 207£.7-2, modified based on the following two load > Hip roor
cases:
>" Monoslope roof
~ Mansard roof
• Load Case A shall consist or applying the applicable
positive wall pressure from the table to lhc front Step Determine topographic factors, K11t, and apply
surface of the parapet while applying the applicable 5: factor to pressures determined from tables (if
negative edge or corn~r zone roof pressure from the applicable), see Section 207 /\.8
table to the back surface.
• Load Case B shall consist of applying the applicable Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on an cffoctive wind
positive wall pressure from the table to the back of the area of 0.93 m2 • Reduction in wind pressure for larger
parapet surface and applying the applicable negative effective wind area may be taken bas.ed on the reduction
wall pressure from the table to the front surface. factor shown in the table. Pressures are to be applied to the
parapet in accordance with Figure 207£.7-l. The height h
lo be used with Figure 207E.7-I to detenninc the pressures
shall be the height to the top of the parapet. Determine final
pressure from Equation 207£.7-1.
Commentary:
Parapet component and cladding wind pres.mres can be

obtained from the tables as shown in the parapet .figures
fro m the table. The pressu res obtained are slightly Commentary:
conservative based on the net pressure coefficients fo r
to
parapets compared roof zones from Part 3. Two load Comp onent and cladding pressures for roof overhangs can
cases must be considered based on pressures applied to be obtainedfrom the tables as shown in Figure 207E. 7-2.
both windward and leeward p arapet surfaces as shown in These p ressures are slightly conservative and are based on
Figure 207£. 7-1. the external pressure coefficients contained in Figure
207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2CfromPart 3.
207E.7 .1.3 Roof Overhangs
Design wind pressures on roof overhangs shalI be based on

wind pressure::; shown for the applicable zones in Table
207E.7-2 modified as described herein. For Zones 1 and 2,
a multiplier of 1.0 shall be used on pressures shown in
Table 207E.7-2. For Zone 3, a multiplier of 1.15 shall be
used on pressures shown in Table 207E.7-2.
Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on an effective wind

area of 0.93 m2• Reductions in wind pressure for larger
effective wind areas may be taken based on the reduction
multiplier shown in Table 207£.7-2. Pressures on roof
overhangs include the pressure from the top and bottom
surface of overhang. Pressures on the underside of the
overhangs are equal to the adjacent wall pressures. Refer to
the overhang drawing shown in Figure 207£.7-2.
Determine final pressure from Equation 207£.7-1.

©
Flat Roof Gable Roof
e< lO deg
Hip Roof
Mansard Roof
Figure 207E.7-2
C & C Zones C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h ~ 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

Roof and Wall Pressures-Components and Cladding

Exposure Ad,justment Factor
48
45
EKposure Adjustment t'actor
42
h (m.) 1!:xp B ExpD
39 48.0 o.go9 1.113
'.16 45.0 0.805 1.116

42.0 O.ROI I.I Ill
,,-.. 33
e 39.0 0.796 1.121
-=-
.c 30 36.0 0.792 1.125
·?
::c:
27 33.0 0.7!!6 1.128
30.0 0.781 1.132
Oll 24
.s 27.0 0.775 1.137
:E
·; 21 24.0 0.76R 1.141
= 18 21.0
18.0
0.760
0.751
1.147
1.154
15
15.0 0.741 1.161
12 12.0 0.729 1.171
9.0 0.713 1.1g3
9
6.0 0.692 1.201
6 4.5 0.677 1.214
3
0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 I.OS 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25
Exposure Adjustment Factor
Notes lo Component and Cladding Wind Pressure Table:

I. For 1.:ach l'Oof form, Exposure C, V and h detem1ine roof and wall cladding pressures for the applicable zone from tables
above. For other exposures B or D, multiply pressures from table by the appropriate exposure adjustment factor dete1mined
from figure above.
2. Interpolation between h values is penniucd. For pressures at other V values than shown in the table, mulliply tahle value
for any given V 'in the tahlc as shown above:
Pressure al desired V = pressure from table at V 'x[V desired IV F
3. Where two load cases are shown, both positive and negative pressures shall be considered.
4. Pressures arc shown for an effective wind area =- 0.93 m2 • For larger effective wind areas, the pressure shown may be
reduced by the reduction coefficient applicable to each zone.
Notation:
h mean roof height (m)
V Basic wind speed (kph)
Table 207E.7-2 (continued)
C & C Zones C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h ~ 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

Reduction Factors
Effective Wind Area
1- - --1- --l- - l- -1- J.- - 1-- -·1- - - - ll- -1-- 1 - l -~-1---1-1- 1- - - - l - -l- -l - --l~ - 1 -.J-
1- - - -1- - - - - - t- - 1- - - -1- -
1- - --1- -1- -1- -1- •- - •- --1- - - -1 - -·l--1--1- ·~ ~1- l - - -- 1- - -1--4-- 1- 4-1-1--I - 1
1- - - -1- --1- -1-- 1- -+-1- e- - ~~;,-t--d---1--j,- f--l-+- I 1- - - -1- - - 1- - ~ '-1-
0.9-1-- -l- --+-l--++-!-f-l.+-- -l~irP~-+=~..l-l-+-- --l-- .:.:i:=:::~-1,-1-4-+4-1 0.9
, __ _ ..._ _.,_ _ __ ,__,_,_, 1 -- - -1- --1-- 1- -1- -1- l-l-- 1-1-- -~ - -~ - - 1--1-1-1-1
~. ...i-..i
0.6+ - - - - 4 - - - f - -f-j--l--l-H-,1-- -4----l--l--l-+-+-+++--~l-~-+-...... 0.6
1- - --1- - 11-..i- ~ 1- - - -1- - - -1- --1-- 1- - 1 - - 1 - ~ 1- - -+ -- -l- - l- - l- -l-f-l--l-l
- - - - - t - .....- - - ..._ - •- - - -•- - -1 -- 1- ~ . J - .l--l-l 1--- - -l -- -l- -1- -1----1-I-I--I-I
1.9 4.5 9.3 18.6 46.5 93

Effective Wind Area (m 2)
Reduction Factors
Effective Wind Area
Roof Form Si1m Pressure Zone 1 Zonc2 Zone3 Zone4 ZoncS
Flat Minus D D D c E
Flat Plus NA NA NA D D
Gable, Mansard Minus B c c c E
Gable, Mansard Plus B B B D D
Hip Minus B c c c E
Hio Plus B B B D D
Monoslope Minus A B D c E
Monoslooe Plus c c c D D
Overhan2s All A A B NA NA
Table 207E.7-2 (continued)
C & C Etfoctive Wind Area C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h ~ 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

2-146 CHAPTER 2 - Mirri11rurn Design Loads
Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding - Part 4
C&C, V = 150 -200 kph, h - 4.5 · 15 m
Exposure C
v (kph) ISO 200
Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roof Form
Case I 2 3 4 s l 2 3 4 s
I -1.5579 -2.4453 -3.3328 -1.0649 - l.9523 -2.7696 -4.3473 -5.9249 -1.8932 -3.4708
Flat Roof
2 NA NI\ NA 1.0649 1.0649 NA NI\ NA 1.8932 1.8932
GHble Roof I -1.1635 - 1.9523 -2.9384 -1.2621 -1.9523 -2.061\5 -3.4708 -5.2238 -2.2438 -3.4708
Mansard Roof 2 0.6705 0.6705 0.6705 1.1635 1.0649 1.1920 1.1920 1.1920 2.0685 1.8932
15 -4.8732 -2.2438
I -1.0649 -1.8537 -2.7412 -1.2621 -l.9523 · 1.8932 -1.2955 -3.4708
Hip RooJ'
2 0.6705 0.6705 0.6705 1.1635 1.0649 1.1920 1.1920 1.1920 2.06!!5 1.8932
Monoslope I -1.3607 -1.7551 -3.0370 -1.2621 -1.9523 -2.4191 -3.1202 -5.3990 -2.2438 -3.4708
Roof 2 0.5719 0.5719 0.5719 1.1635 1.0649 1.0167 1.0167 1.0167 2.0685 1.8932
I -1.4865 -2.3332 -3.1799 -1.0161 -1.8628 -2.6426 -4.1479 -5.6531 -l .8063 -3.3116
flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.0161 1.0161 NI\ NA NA l.l\063 l.8063
Ciahlc Roof I -1.1101 -1.8628 -2.8036 -1.2042 -1.8628 -1.9736 -3.3116 -4.9841 -2.1408 -3.3116
Mansard Roof 2 0.6397 0.6397 0.6397 I. I IOI 1.0161 l.1373 1.1373 1.1373 1.9736 1.8063
12
I -1.0161 -1.7687 -2.6154 -1.2042 -1.l\628 - 1.8063 -3.1444 -4.6496 -2.1408 -3.3116
llip Roof
2 0.6397 0.6397 0.6397 l.1101 1.0161 1.1373 I. I 373 l.1373 1.9736 1.8063
Monoslopc I -1.2983 -1.6746 -2.8977 -1.2042 -1.862l\ -2.3081 -2.9771 -5.1514 -2.1408 -3.3116
Roof 2 0.5457 0.5457 0.5457 1.1101 1.0161 0.9701 0.9701 0.9701 1.9736 1.8063
I -1.4007 -2.1986 -2.9964 -0.9574 -1.7553 -2.490 I -3.9086 -5.3270 -1.7021 -3.1206
Flat Roof
2 NI\ NA NA 0.9574 0.9574 NA NI\ NA 1.7021 1.7021
Gable Roof I -1.0461 -1.7553 -2.6418 -1.1347 -1.7553 -1.8597 -3.1206 -4.6966 -2.0173 -3.1206
Mansard Roof 2 0.6028 0.6028 0.6028 1.0461 0.9574 1.0717 1.0717 1.0717 1.8597 1.7021
9
I -0.9574 -1.6667 -2.4645 -1.1347 - l.7553 - 1.702 I -2.9629 -4.3814 -2.0173 -3.1206
Hip Rool'
2 0.6028 0.6028 0.6028 1.0461 0.9574 1.0717 1.0717 1.0717 1.8597 1.7021
Monoslope I -1.2214 -1.5780 -2.7305 -1.1347 -1.7553 -2.1749 -2.8053 -4.8542 -2.0173 -3.1206
Roof 2 0.5142 0.5142 0.5142 1.0461 0.9574 0.9141 0.9141 0.914( 1.8597 1.7021
I -1.3435 -2.1088 -2.8741 -0.9184 -l.6837 -2.3885 -3.7490 -5.1096 -1.6126 -2.9932
Fial Roof
2 NA NI\ NI\ 0.9184 0.9184 NA NA NA 1.6.126 1.6126
Gable Roof I -1.0014 -1.61\37 -2.5340 -1.0884 -1.6837 -1.7838 -2.9932 -4.5049 -1.9350 -2.9932
Mansard Roof 2 0.5782 0.5782 0.5782 1.0034 0.9184 1.0280 1.0280 1.0280 1.7838 l.6326
7.5
I -0.9184 -1.5986 -2.3639 -1.0884 -1.6837 -1.6326 -2.8420 -4.2025 -1.9350 -2.9932
Hip RooJ'
2 0.5782 0.5782 0.5782 1.0034 0.9184 1.0280 1.0280 1.0280 1.7838 1.6326
Monoslope I -1.1735 -1.5D6 -2.6190 -1.0884 -1.6837 -2.0862 -2.6908 -4.6561 -1.9350 -2.9932
Roof 2 0.4932 0.4932 0.4912 1.0034 0.9184 0.8768 0.8768 0.8768 1.7838 1.6326
I -1.2864 -2.0191 -2.7518 -0.8793 -1.6120 -2.2869 -3.5895 -4.8921 -1.5632 -2.8658
Flul Roof
2 NA NA NA 0.879., 0.8791 NI\ NI\ NA l.5632 1.5632
Gable Roof I -0.9607 -1.6120 -2.4262 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.7079 -2.8658 -4.3132 -1.8526 -2.8651!
Mansard Roof 2 0.5536 0.5516 0.5536 0.9607 0.879) 0.9!l42 0.9842 0.91!42 1.7079 1.5632
6
I -0.8793 -1.5306 -2.2633 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.5632 -2.721 I -4.0237 -1.8526 -2.8658
Hit> Roof
2 0.5536 0.5536 0.5536 0.9607 0.8793 0.9842 0.9842 0.9842 1.7079 1.5632
Monoslopc I -1.1235 -1.4492 -2.5076 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.9974 -2.5763 -4.4579 -1.8526 -2.8658
Roof 2 0.4722 0.4722 0.472.2 0.9607 0.8793 0.8395 0.8395 0.8395 1.7079 l.5632
I -1.2149 -1.9069 -2.5990 -0.8304 -1.5225 -2.1598 -3.3901 -4.6204 -1.4763 -2.7066
Flat Roof
2 NI\ NA NA 0.8304 0.8304 NA NA NA 1.4763 1.4763
Gahle Roof I -0.9073 -1.5225 -2.2914 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.6130 -2.7066 -4.0736 -1.7497 -2.7066
Mansard Roof 2 0.5229 0.5229 0.5229 0.9073 0.8304 0.9295 0.9295 0.9295 1.6130 1.4763
4.5
I -0.8304 -1.4456 -2.1376 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.4763 -2.5699 -3.8002 -1.7497 -2.7066
Hip Roof
2 0.5229 0.5229 0.5229 0.9073 0.8304 0.9295 0.9295 0.9295 1.6130 1.4763
Monoslope I -1.0611 ·1.3687 -2.3683 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.8864 -2.4332 -4.2103 -1.7497 -2.7066
Roof 2 0.4460 0.4460 0.4460 0.9073 0.8304 0.7928 0.7928 0.7928 1.6130 1.4763

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h '- 4.5 - 15 m
Exposure C
v (kph} 250 300
l.oad Zont Zone
h (m) Roof form
Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 s
l -43276 -6.7926 -9.2577 -2.9581 -5.4232 -6.2317 -9.7814 -13.3311 -4.2596 -7.8093
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.9581 2.9581 NA NA NA 4.2596 4.2596
Gable Roof 1 -3.2320 -5.4232 -8.1621 -3.5059 -5.4232 -4.6541 -7.8093 -11.7534 -5.0485 -7.8093
Mansard Roof 2 1.8625 1.8625 1.8625 3.2320 2.9581 2.6820 2.6820 2.6820 4.6541 4.2596
IS
I -2.9581 -5.1493 -7.6143 -3.5059 -5.4232 -4.2596 -7.4149 -10.9646 -5.0485 -7.8093
Hip Roof
2 1.8625 1.8625 1.8625 3.2320 2.9581 2.6820 2.6820 2.6820 4.6541 4.2596
Monos lope I -3.779l\ -4.8754 -8.4360 -3.5059 -5.4232 -5.4429 -7.0205 -12.1479 -5.0485 -7.8093
Roof 2 1.5886 1.5886 1.5886 3.2320 2.9581 2.2876 2.2876 2.2876 4.6541 4.2596
I -4.1291 -6.4810 -8.8330 -2.8224 -5.1744 -5.9458 -9.3327 -12.7196 -4.0642 -7.4511
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.8224 2.8224 NA NA NA 4.0642 4.0642
Gable Roof I -3.0X37 -5.1744 -7.7877 -3.3451 -5.1744 -4.4406 -7.451 I -11.2143 -4.8169 -7.451 I
Mansard Roof 2 1.7771 1.7771 1.7771 3.0837 2.8224 2.5590 2.5590 2.5590 4.4406 4.0642
12
I -2.8224 -4.9nl -7.2650 -3.345 I -5.1744 -4.0642 -7.07411 -10.4617 -4.8169 -7.451 I
Hip Roni'
2 1.7771 1.7771 1.7771 3.0837 2.8224 2.5590 2.5590 2.5590 4.4406 4.0642
Monoslope I -3.6064 -4.6517 -8.0490 -3.3451 -5.1744 -5.1932 -6.6985 -11.5906 -4.8169 -7.4511
Roof 2 1.5157 1.5 I 57 1.5157 3.0837 2.8224 2.1826 2.1826 2.1826 4.4406 4.0642
I -3.8908 -6.1071 -8.3234 -2.6596 -4.8759 -5.6028 -K.7943 -1 l.9R58 -3.8298 -7.0212
Flat Rool'
2 NA NA NA 2.6596 2.6596 NA NA NA 3.8298 3.8298
Gable Roof I -2.9058 -4.l\759 -7.3384 -3.1521 -4.8759 -4.1844 -7.0212 -10.5671 -4.5390 -7.0212
Mansard Roof 2 1.6745 1.6745 1.6745 2.9058 2.6596 2.4113 2.4113 2.4113 4.1844 3.8298
9
I -2.6596 -4.6296 -6.8459 -3.1521 -4.8759 -3.8298 -6.6666 -9.8581 -4.5390 -7.0212
Hip Roof
2 1.6745 1.6745 1.6745 2.9058 2.6596 2.4113 2.4113 2.4113 4.1844 3.8291!
Monos lope I -3.3983 -4.3834 -7.5847 -3.1521 -4.8759 -4.8936 -6.3120 -I0.9219 -4.5390 -7.0212
Roof 2 1.4283 1.4283 1.4283 2.9058 2.6596 2.0567 2.0567 2.0567 4.1844 3.l\298
1 -3.7320 -5.8579 -7.9837 -2.5510 -4.6768 -5.3741 -8.4353 -11.4965 -3.6735 -6.7147
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.5510 2.5510 NA NA NA 3.6735 3.6735
Gable Roor 1 -2.7872 -4.6768 -7.0389 -3.0234 -4.6768 -4.0136 -6.7347 -10.1360 -4.3537 -6.7347
Mansard Rool' 2 1.6062 1.6062 1.6062 2.7872 2.5510 2.3129 i.3129 2.3129 4.0136 3.6735
7.5
1 -2.5510 -4.4406 -6.5665 -3.0234 -4.6768 -3.6735 -6.3945 -9.4557 -4.3537 -6.7347
Hip Roof
2 1.6062 1.6062 1.6062 2.7872 2.5510 2.3129 2.3129 2.3129 4.0136 3.6735
Monoslopc 1 -3.2596 -4.2044 -7.2751 -3.0234 -4.676l\ -4.6939 -6.0544 -10.4761 -4.3537 -6.7347
Roof 2 1.3700 1.3700 1.3700 2.7872 2.551() 1.9721! 1.9728 1.9728 4.0136 3.6735
I -3.5732 -5.6086 -7.6440 -2.4425 -4.4778 -5.1454 -8.0764 -J 1.0073 -3.5171 -6.4481
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.4425 2.4425 NA NA NA 3.5171 3.5171
Gable Roof I -2.6686 -4.4778 -6.7394 -2.8948 -4.4778 -3.8428 -6.4481 -9.7047 -4.1685 -6.4481
Mansard Roof 2 I .5378 1.5378 1.5378 2.6686 2.4425 2.2145 2.2145 2.2145 3.8428 3.5171
6
I -2.4425 -4.2517 -6.2871 -2.8948 -4.4778 -3.5171 -6.1224 -9.0534 -4.1685 -6.4481
Hip Roof
2 1.5378 I .5378 1.5378 2.6686 2.4425 2.2Jll5 2.2145 2.2145 3.8428 3.5171
Monoslope I -3.1209 -4.0255 -6.9655 -2.8948 -4.4778 -4.4941 -5.7968 -10.0303 -4.1685 -6.4481
Roof 2 1.3117 1.3117 Ull7 2.6686 2.4425 1.8888 l.8K88 1.8888 3.8428 3.5171
I -3.3747 -5.2970 -7.2193 -2.3068 -4.2291 -4.8596 -7.6277 • 10.3958 -3.3217 -6.0899
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.3068 2.3068 NA NA NA 3.3217 3.3217
Gable Roof I -2.5204 -4.2291 -6.3650 -2.7339 -4.2291 -3.6293 -6.0899 -9.1655 -3.9369 -6.0X99
Mansard Roof 2 1.4524 1.4524 1.4524 2.5204 2.3068 2.0915 2.0915 2.0915 3.6293 3.3217
4.5
I -2.3068 -4.0155 -5.9378 -2.7339 -4.2291 -3.3217 -5.7823 -8.5504 -3.9369 -6.0899
Hip Roof
2 1.4524 1.4524 1.4524 2.5204 2.3068 2.0915 2.0915 2.0915 3.6293 3.3217
Monoslope I -2.9475 -3.8019 -6.5785 -2.7.'B9 -4.2291 -4.2444 -5.4747 -9.4731 -3.9369 -6.0899
Roof 2 1.2388 1.23!!8 l.23l\8 2.5204 2.3068 1.7839 1.7839 1.7839 3.6293 3.3217

Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding - Pai1 4
C&C, V = 350 kph, h :.: 4.5 - 15 m
Exposure C
v (kph) 350
Load Zone
h (rn) RoofForrn
Case 1 2 3 4 5
1 -8.4820 -13.3 136 -18.1451 -5.7978 -10.6294
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.7978 5.7978
Gublc Roof I -6.3347 -1 0.6294 -15.99711 -6.8715 -10.6294
Mansard Roof 2 3.6505 3.6505 3.6505 6.3347 5.7978
15
1 -5.7978 -10.0925 -14.9241 -6.8715 -10.6294
Hip Rool'
2 3.6505 3.6505 3.6505 6.3347 5.7978
Mono slope I -7.4084 -9.5557 -16.5346 -6.87 15 -10.6294
Roof 2 3.1137 3.11 37 3.1137 6.3347 5.7978
I -8.0929 -12.7029 -1 7.3128 -5.53 19 - 10.1418
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.53 19 5.5319
Gable Roo f I -6.0441 - l0.1418 -152639 -6.5563 - 10.1418
Munsard Roof 2 3.4830 3.4830 3.4830 6.0441 5.53 19
12
1 -5.53 19 -9.6296 - 14.2395 -6.5563 - 10.1418
!lip Roof
2 3.4830 3.4830 3.4830 6.0441 5.5319
Moooslopc 1 -7.0685 -9.1174 -15.7761 -6.5563 - 10.1418
Roof 2 2.9708 2.9708 2.9708 6.044 1 5.53 19
I -7.6260 -11.9700 -16.3139 -5.2127 -9.5567
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.2127 5.2127
Gable Roof 1 -5.6954 -9.5567 -14.3833 -6.1781 -9.5567
Mansard Roof 2 3.2821 3.2821 3.282 1 5.6954 5.2127
9
I -5.2127 -9.0740 -13.4180 -6.1781 -9.5567
Hip Roof
2 3.282 1 3.21\21 3.2821 5.6954 5.2 127
Monos lope I -6.6607 -8.59 14 -14.8660 -6.1781 -9.5567
Roof 2 2.7994 2.7994 2.7994 5.6954 5.2127
I -7.3148 - t 1.4814 -15.6481 -.S.0000 -9.1666
l11at Roof
2 NA NI\ NA 5.0000 5.0000
Gable Roni' l -5.4629 -9.1666 -13.7962 -5.9259 -9. 1666
Mansard Roof 2 3.1 481 3.1481 3. 1481 5.4629 .5.0000
7.5
1 -5.0000 -8.7037 -12.8703 -5.9259 -9. 1666
Hip Roof
2 31481 3.1481 3.1481 5.4629 5.0000
Monos lope 1 -6.3889 -8.2407 -14.2592 -5.9259 -9.1666
Roof 2 2.6852 2.6852 2.6852 5.4629 5.0000
1 -7.0035 - 10.9929 -14.9822 -4.7872 -8.7766
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 4.7872 4.7872
Gable Roof I -5.2305 -8.7766 -13.2092 -5.6737 -8.7766
Mansard Roof 2 3.0J42 3.0142 3.0142 5.2305 4.7872
6
I -4.7872 -8.3333 -12.3226 -5.6737 -8.7766
Hip Roe.if
2 3.0142 3.0142 3.0142 5.2305 4.7872
Monos lope I -6.1 170 -7.8900 -13.6524 -5.6737 -8.7766
Rnof 2 2.5709 2.5709 2.5709 5.2305 4.7872
I -6.6144 -10.3K21 -14.1498 -4.5213 -8.2890
Flat Roof
2 NA NJ\ NA 4.5213 4.5213
Gable Roor I -4.9399 -8.2890 -12.4753 -5.3585 -8.2890
Munsard Roof 2 2.8467 2.8467 2.8467 4.9399 4.5211
4.5
I -4.521 3 -7.8703 -I 1.63KO -5.3585 -8.2890
Hip Rnof
2 2.8467 2.X467 2.8467 4.9399 4.5213
Monos lope 1 -5.7772 -7.4517 -12.8939 -5.3585 -8.2890
Roof 2 2.4281 2.4281 2.4281 4.9399 4.52 13

Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding Part 4
C&C, V - 150-200 kph, h-= 18 - 33 m
Exposure C
v {kph) 150 200
Load Zone Zone
It (m) Roof Form
Case l 2 3 4 5 l 2 J 4 s
I -I .843R -2.R940 -3.9443 · l.2603 -2.3106 -3.2778 · 5.1450 -7.0121 -2.2405 -4.1077
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2603 1.2603 NA NA NA 2.2405 2.2405
Gable Roof I -J .3770 -2.3106 -3.4775 -1.493 7 -2.3106 -2.4480 ·4.1077 ·6.1822 -2.6555 -4.1077
Mansard Roof 2 0.7935 0.7935 0.7935 1.3770 1.2603 1.4107 1.4107 1.4107 2.4480 2.2405
33
I -1.2603 -2.1939 -3.2441 -1.4937 -2.31()6 -2.2405 -3.9002 -5.7673 -2.655) -4.1077
llip Roof
2 0.7935 0.7935 0.7935 1.3770 1.2603 1.4107 1.4107 1.4107 2.4480 2.2405
Monoslopt: I -1.6104 -2.0772 -3.5942 -1.4937 -2.3106 -2.8629 -3.6927 -6.3897 -2.6555 -4.1077
Roof 2 0.6768 0.6768 0.6768 1.3770 1.2603 I .2033 1.2033 1.2033 2.4480 2.2405
I -1.8009 -2.8267 -3.8526 -1.2310 -2.256R -3.2016 -5.0253 -6.8490 -2.1884 -4.0121
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2310 1.2310 NA NA NA 2.1884 2.1884
Gable Roof I -1.3450 -2.2568 -3.3966 -1.4590 -2.2568 -2.3911 -4.0121 -6.0385 -2.5937 -4.0121
Mansard Roof 2 0.7751 0.7751 0.7751 1.3450 1.2310 1.3779 1.3779 1.3779 2.3911 2.1884
30
I -1.2310 -2.1428 -3.1687 -1.4590 -2.2568 -2.1884 -3.8095 -5.6332 -2.5937 -4.0121
Ilip Roof
2 0.7751 0.7751 0.7751 1.3450 1.23 l O 1.3779 1.3779 1.3779 2.3911 2.1884
Monoslopc I -1.5729 -2.0289 -3.5106 -1 .4590 -2.2568 -2.7963 -3.6069 -6.2411 -2.5937 -4.0121
Roof 2 0.6611 0.6611 0.6611 1.3450 1.231() 1.1753 1.1753 1.1753 2.3911 2.1884
I -1.7723 -2.7819 -3.7914 -1.2115 -2.2210 -3.1508 -4.9455 -6.7403 -2.1537 -3.9485
Flal Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2115 1.2115 NA NA NA 2.1537 2.1537
Gabk Roof I -1.3236 -2.22IO -3.3427 -1.4358 -2.2210 -2.3531 -3.9485 -5.9426 -2.5525 -3.9485
Mansard Roof 2 0.7628 0.7621! 0.7628 1.3236 1.2115 1.3560 l.3560 13560 23531 2.1537
27
l -1.2115 -2.1088 -3.111!4 -1.4358 -2.2210 -2.1537 -3.7490 -5.5438 -2.5525 -3.9485
Hip Roof
2 0.7628 0.7628 0.7621l I .3216 1.2115 1.3560 1.3560 1.3560 2.3531 2.1537
Monos lope 1 -1.5480 -1.9967 -3.4549 - l.435K -2.2210 -2.7520 -3.5496 -6.1420 -2.5525 -3.9485
Roof 2 0.6506 0.6506 0.6506 1.3236 1.2 I IS 1.1566 1.1566 1.1566 2.3531 2.1537
I - 1.7294 -2.7146 -3.6997 -1.1821 -2.1673 -3.0746 -4.8259 -6.5772 -2.1016 -3.8529
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.\821 1.1821 NA NA NA 2.1016 2.1016
Ciahlc Roof I -1.2916 -2.1673 -3.2619 -1.401 J -2.1673 -2.2962 -3.8529 -5.7988 -2.4908 -3.8529
Mansard Roof 2 0.7443 0.7443 0.7443 1.2916 1.1821 1.3232 T.3232 1.3232 2.2962 2.1016
24
I -I.I 821 -2.0578 -3.0429 -1.4011 -2.1673 -2.1016 -3.6583 -5.4097 -2.4908 -3.8529
Hip Roof
2 0.7443 0.7443 0.7443 1.2916 1.1821 1.3232 1.3232 1.3232 2.2962 2.1016
Monoslope 1 -1.5105 -1.9484 -3.3713 -1.4011 -2.1673 -2.6854 -3.4637 -5.9934 -2.4908 -3.8529
Roof 2 0.6349 0.6349 0.6349 1.2916 1.1821 1.1286 1.1286 1.1286 2.2962 2.1016
I -1.6723 -2.6248 -3.5774 -1.1431 -2.0956 -2.9729 -4.6664 -6.3598 -2.0321 -3.7256
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.1431 1.1431 NA NA NA 2.0321 2.0321
Gable Roof I -1.2489 -2.0956 -3.1540 - 1.3547 -2.0956 -2.2203 -3.7256 -5.6072 ·2.4084 -3.7256
Mansard Roof 2 0.7197 0.7197 0.7197 1.2489 1.1431 1.2795 1.2795 1.2795 2.2203 2.0321
21
I -1.1431 -1.9898 -2.9423 -1.3547 -2.0956 -2.0321 -3.5374 -5.2308 -2.4084 -3.7256
Hip Roof
2 0.7197 0.7197 0.7197 1.2489 1.1431 1.2795 1.2795 1.2795 2.2203 2.0321
Monos\opc I -1.4606 -1.8839 -3.2599 -1.3547 -2.0956 -2.5966 -3.3492 -5.7953 -2.4084 -3.7256
Roof 2 0.6139 0.6139 0.6139 1.24119 1.1431 1.0913 1.0913 1.0913 2.2203 2.0321
I -1.6151 -2.535 I ~3.4551 -1.1040 -2.0240 -2.8713 -4.5061l -6.1424 -1. 9626 -3.5982
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.1040 1.1040 NA NA NA I.9626 1.9626
Gable Roof I -1.2062 -2.0240 · 3.0462 -1.3084 -2.0240 -2.1444 -3.5982 -5.4155 -2.3261 -3.591!2
Ma11sard Roof 2 0.6951 0.6951 0.6951 1.2062 1.1040 1.2357 1.2357 1.2357 2.1444 1.9626
18
I -1.1040 -1.9218 -2.8417 -1.3084 -2.0240 -1.9626 -3.4165 -5.0520 -2.3261 -3.5982
Hip Roof
2 0.6951 0.6951 0.6951 1.2062 1.1040 1.2357 1.2357 1.2357 2.1444 1.9626
Monos lope I -1.4107 -1.8195 -3.1484 -1.3084 -2.0240 -2.5078 -3.2347 -5.5972 -2.3261 -3.5982
Roof 2 0.5929 0.5929 0.5929 1.2062 1.1040 1.0540 1.0540 1.0540 2.1444 1.9626

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h -= 18 - 33 m
Exposure C
v (kp h) 250 JOO
Load Zone Zont
h(m) RoofFo,·m
Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 5
I -5.1216 -8.0390 -10.9564 -3.5009 -6.4182 -7.375 I -11.5761 -15.7772 -5.0412 -9.2422
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.5009 3.5009 NA NA NA 5.0412 5.0412
Gable Roof l -3.8250 -6.4182 -9.6598 -4.1492 -6.4182 -5.5080 -9.2422 -1 3.9100 -5.9748 ·9.2422
Mansard Roof 2 2.2042 2.2042 2.2042 3.8250 3.5009 3.1741 3. 1741 3.1741 5.5080 5.0412
33
I -3.5009 -6.0941 -9.0114 -4.1492 -6.4 t 82 -5.0412 -8.7755 -12.9765 -5.9748 -9.2422
llip Roof
2 22042 2.2042 2.2042 3.8250 3.5009 3.1741 3.1741 3.1741 5.5080 5.0412
Monoslope I -4.4733 -5.7699 -9.9839 -4.1 492 -6.4 1!12 -6.4416 -8.3087 -14.3768 -5.9748 -9.2422
Roof 2 J.8RO J l.8801 l.8801 3.8250 3.5009 2.7073 2.7073 2.7073 5.5080 5.0412
I -5.0025 -7.8520 · 10.7016 -3.4 194 -6.2690 -7.2036 · I 1.3069 - 15.4103 -4.9240 ·9.0273
Flat Roof"
2 NA NA NA 3.4194 3.41 94 NA NA NA 4.9240 4.9240
Gahlc Roof t -3.7360 -6.2690 -9.4351 -4.0527 -6.2690 -5.3799 -9.0273 -13.5866 -5.!B58 -9.0273
Mansard Roof 2 2.1530 2.1530 2.1530 3.7360 3.41 94 J.1003 3.!003 3. 1003 5.3799 4.9240
30
I -3.4194 -5.9524 -8.8019 -4.0527 -6.2690 -4.9240 ·8.5714 -12.6747 -5.83 5!\ -9.0273
Hip Roof
2 2.1530 2.1530 2. 1530 3.7360 3.4194 3.1003 3. 1003 3.1003 5.3799 4.9240
Monoslopc 1 -4.3693 -5.6357 -9.7517 -4.0527 -6.2690 -6.2918 -8. 1155 -14.0425 -5.8358 -9.0273
Roor 2 1.8364 1.8364 1.8364 3.7360 3.4194 2.6444 2.6444 2.6444 5.3799 4.9240
1 -4.9231 -7.7274 -10.5317 -3.3652 -6.1695 -7.0893 -11.1275 -1 5. 1656 -4.8458 -!\.8840
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 33652 3.3652 NA NA NA 4.8458 4.8458
Gable Roof t -3.6767 -6.1695 -9.2853 -3.9883 -6.1695 -5.2945 -8.8840 - 13.3709 -5.7432 -R.8840
Mansard Roof 2 2.l HS8 2.1 1811 2.l 18R 3.6767 3.3652 3.051 t 3.05 11 3.0511 5.2945 4.!1458
27
I -3.3652 -5.l\579 -8.6622 -3.9883 -6.1695 -4.!1458 -8.4353 -12.4735 -5.7432 -8.8840
Hip Roof
2 2. 1188 2.l 188 2.1188 3.6767 '.U652 3.0511 3.051 l 3.05 11 5.2945 4.845R
Monos lope I -4.2999 -5.5463 -9.5969 -3.9$83 -6.1695 -6.1919 -7.9866 - 13.8196 -5.7432 -8.8840
Roof 2 1.8072 1.8072 1.8072 3.6767 33652 2.6024 2.6024 2.6024 5.2945 4.8458
l -4.11040 -7.5404 -10.2769 -3.283 7 -6.0202 -6.9171! - 10.8582 -14.7987 -4.7286 -8.6691
Fial Roof
2 Ni\ NA NA 3.2837 3.2R37 NA NA NA 4.72!\6 4.7286
UableRoof I -3.5878 -6.0202 -9.0607 -3.8918 -6.0202 -5.1664 -B.6691 - 13.0474 -5.6043 -8.6691
Mansard Roof 2 2.0675 2.0675 2.0675 3.5878 3.2837 2.9773 2.9773 2.9773 5.1664 4.7286
24
I -3.2!\37 -5.7161 -8.4526 -3.8918 -6.0202 -4.7286 -8.2313 -12.1 717 -5.6043 -8.6691
Hip Roof
2 2.0675 2.0675 2.0675 3.5878 3.2837 2.9773 2.9773 2.9773 5.1 664 4.7286
Monoslope I -4.1959 -5.4121 -9.3647 -3.R9 I 8 -6.0202 -6.0421 -7.7934 - 13.4R52 -5.6043 -8.6691
Roof 2 1.7635 J.7635 1.7635 3.5878 3.2837 2.5394 2.5394 2.5394 5.1664 4.7286
l -4.6452 -7.2912 -9.9372 -3.1752 -5.8212 -6.6891 -1 0.4993 -14.3095 -4.5723 -83825
flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.1752 3.1752 NA NA NA 4.5723 4.5723
Gable Roof I -3.4692 -5.8212 -8.7612 -3.7632 -5.82 12 -4.9956 -8.3825 -12.616 1 -5.4190 -8.3!\25
Mansard Roof 2 1.9992 l.9992 1.9992 3.4692 3.1752 2.8788 2.8788 2.8788 4.9956 4.5723
21
I -3.1752 -5.5272 -lU732 -3.7632 · 5.8212 -4.5723 -7.9591 - 11.7694 -5.4190 ·8.3825
Hip Roof
2 1.9992 1.9992 l.9992 3.4692 3. 1752 2.8788 2.8788 2.8788 4.9956 4.5723
Monos lope I -4.0572 -5.2332 -9.0552 -3.7632 ·5.8212 -5.8423 -7.53 5!\ .JJ.0394 -5.41 90 -8.3825
Roof 2 l.7052 1.7052 1.7052 34692 3.1752 2.4555 2.4555 2.4555 4,9956 4.5723
1 -4.4864 -7.(l419 · 9.5974 -3.0666 -5.6222 -6.4604 -10.1403 -13.8203 -4.4160 ;8.0959
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.0666 3.0666 NA NA NA 4.4160 4.4160
Gable Roof I -3.3506 -5.6222 -8.4616 -3.6345 -5.6222 -4.8248 -8.0959 -12.1848 -5.2337 -8.0959
Mansard Roo f 2 1.9308 1.9308 1.9308 3.3506 3.0666 2.7804 2.7804 2.7804 4.8248 4.4160
18
I -3.0666 -5.3382 -7.8937 -3.6345 -5.6222 -4.4160 -7.6870 - 11 .3670 -5.2337 -8.0959
Hip Roof
2 1.9308 1.930!\ 1.9308 3.3506 3.0666 2.7804 2.7804 2.78()4 4.8248 4.41 60
Monos lope I -3.9185 -5.0543 -8.7456 -3.6>45 -5.6222 -5.6426 -7.2782 -12.5937 -5.2337 -8.0959
Roor 2 1.6469 1.6469 1.6469 3.3506 3.0666 2.3715 2.37 15 2.37 15 4.8248 4.4 160

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 350 kph, h = 18 - 33 m
Exposure C
v (kph) 350
I,uad Zone
h(m) RoflfForm
Case 1 2 3 4 5
I -10.031\4 -15.7564 -21.4745 -6.8617 -12.5797
Flat Roof
2 Ni\ NA NA 6.8617 6.!!617
Gable Roof I -7.4970 -12.5797 - 18.9331 -8.1323 -12.5797
Mansar<l Roof 2 4.3203 4.3203 4.3203 7.4970 6.!!617
33
I -6,1\617 -11.9444 · 17.6624 -8.1323 -12.5797
Hip Roof
2 4.3203 4.3203 4.3203 7.4970 6.8617
Monoslopc I -8.7677 -I 1.3090 - 19.5685 -R. 1323 -12.5797
Roof 2 3.6850 3.6850 3.6850 7.4970 6.8617
l -9.8049 -15.3900 -20.9751 -6.7021 -12.2872
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.7021 6.7021
Gahle Roor 1 -7.3227 -12.2872 -18.4928 -7.9432 -12.2872
Mansard Roof 2 4.2198 4.2198 4.2198 7.3227 6.7021
30
I -6.7021 -11.6666 -17.2517 -7.9432 -12.2872
Hip Roof
2 4.2198 4.2198 4.2198 7.3227 6.7021
Monoslope I -8.5638 -11.0460 -19.1134 -7.9432 -12.2872
Roof 2 3.5993 3.5993 3.5993 7.3227 6.7021
I -9.6493 -15.1457 -20.6421 -6.5957 -12.0921
Flat Roor
2 NA NA NA 6.5957 6.5957
Gable Roof I -7.2064 -12.0921 -18.1993 -7.8171 -12.0921
Mansard Roof 2 4.1529 4.1529 4.1529 7.2064 6.5957
27
I -6.5957 -11.4814 -16.9778 -7.8171 -12.0921
Hip Roof
2 4.1529 4.1529 4.1529 7.2064 6.5957
Monoslope I ·K.4279 -10.8707 -18.8100 -7.8171 -12.0921
Roof 2 3.5421 3.5421 3.5421 7.2064 6.5957
I -9.4158 -14.7793 -20.1427 -6.4361 -11.7996
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.4361 6.4361
Gable Roof I -7.0321 -11.7996 -17.7590 -7.62KO -11.7996
Man.~ard Roof 2 4.0524 4.0524 4.0524 7.0321 6.4361
24
I -6.4361 -11.2036 -16.5671 ·7.62XO -11.7996
llip Roof
2 4.0524 4.0524 4.0524 7.0321 6.4361
Monoslopc I -8.2240 -I0.6077 -18.3549 . 7.6280 -11.7996
Roof' 2 3.4564 3.4564 3.4564 7.0321 6.4361
I -9.1046 -14.2907 -19.4768 -6.2234 -11.4095
flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.2234 6.2234
Gahle Roof I -6.7996 -11.4095 -17.1719 -7.3758 -11.4095
Mansard Roof 2 3.9184 3.9184 3.9184 6.7996 6.2234
21
1 -6.2234 -10.8333 -16.0194 -7.3758 -11.4095
Hip Roof
2 3.9184 3.9184 3.9184 6.7996 6.2234
Monoslope I -7.9521 -10.2570 -17.7481 -7.3758 -11.4095
Roof 2 3.3422 3.3422 3.3422 6.7996 6.2234
I -8.7933 -13.8021 -18.8110 -6.0106 - 11.0194
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.0106 6.0106
Gable Roof I -6.5671 -11.0194 -16.5848 · 7.1237 -11.0194
Mansard Roof 2 3.7!!45 3.7845 3.7845 6.5671 6.0106
18
I -6.0106 -I0.4629 ·15.4717 -7.1237 ·11.0194
Hip Roof
2 3.71!45 3.7845 3.7845 6.5671 6.0106
Monoslopc I -7.6802 -9.9064 -17.1414 -7.1237 -11.0194
Roof 2 3.2279 3.2279 3.2279 6.5671 6.0I06

Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding - Pm1 4
C&C, V = 150-200 kph, h = 36- 48 m
Exposure C
v (kph) ISO 200
Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roofl•'orm
Case 1 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5
1 -1.9867 -3.1184 -4.2501 -1.3580 -2.4897 -3.5319 -5.5438 -7.5556 -2.4142 -4.4261
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3580 1.1580 NA NA NA 2.4142 2.4142
Gahlc Roof I -1.4837 -2.4897 -3.7471 -1.6095 -2.4897 -2.6378 -4.4261 -6.6615 -2.8613 -4.4261
Mansard Roof 2 0.8550 0.8550 0.8550 l.4837 1.3580 1.5201 1.5201 1.520] 2.6378 2.4142
48
l - l .3580 -2.3639 -3.4956 -1.6095 -2.4897 -2.4142 -4.2025 -6.2144 -2.8613 -4.4261
I lip Roof
2 0.8550 0.8550 0.8550 1.4837 1.3580 1.5201 1.5201 1.5201 2.6378 2.4142
Monoslope I - J.7352 -2.2382 -3.8728 -1.6095 -2.4897 -.3.0848 -3.9790 -6.8850 -2.8613 -4.4261
Roof 2 0.7293 0.7293 0.7293 1.4837 1.3580 1.2965 1.2965 l.2965 2.6378 2.4142
I -1.9724 -3.0959 -4.2195 -1.3482 -2.4718 -3.5065 -5.5039 -7.5013 -2.3969 -4.3942
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3482 1.3482 NA NA NA 2.3969 2.3969
Gable Roof I -1.4731 -2.4718 -3.7201 -1.5979 -2.4718 -2.6188 -4.3942 -6.61.36 -2.8407 -4.3942
Mansard Roof 2 0.8489 0.8489 0.8489 1.4731 1.3482 I .5091 1.5091 1.5091 2.6188 2 ..3969
45
I -1.3482 -2.3469 -3.4705 -1.5979 -2.4718 -2.3969 -4.172.3 -6.1697 -2.8407 -4.3942
Hip Roof
2 0.8489 0.8489 0.8489 1.4731 1..3482 1.5091 1.5091 1.5091 2.6188 2.3969
Monos lope I -1.7227 -2.2221 -3.8450 -1.5979 -2.4718 -3.0627 -.3.9504 -6.8355 -2.8407 -4.3942
Roof 2 0.7241 0.7241 0.7241 1.4731 1.3482 1.2872 1.2872 1.2872 2.6188 2.3969
I -J.943R -3.0511 -4.1583 -1.3287 -2,4359 -3.4557 -5.4241 -7.3926 -2.3621 -4.3.306
rlatRoof
2 NA NA NA 1.3287 1.3287 NA NA NA 2.3621 2.3621
Gable Roof I -1.4517 -2.4359 -3.6662 -1.5 747 -2,4359 -2.5808 -4.3306 -6.5177 -2.7996 -4.3306
Mansard Roof 2 0.8366 0.8366 0.8366 1.4517 1.3287 1.487:l I .4873 1.4873 2.5808 2.3621
42
1 -1.3287 -2.3129 -3.4202 -1.5747 -2.4359 -2.3621 -4.1118 -6.0803 -2.7996 -4.3306
Hip Roof
2 0.8366 0.8366 0.8366 1.4517 1.3287 1.4873 I .4873 1.4873 2.5808 2.3621
Monoslope I -1.6978 -2.1899 -3.7892 -1.5747 -2.4359 -3.0183 -3.8931 -6.7364 -2.7996 -4.3306
Roof 2 0,7136 0.7136 0.7136 1.4517 1.3287 l.2685 1.2685 1.2685 2.5808 2.3621
l -1.9152 -3.0062 -4.0972 -1.3092 -2.4001 -3.4049 -5 ..3444 -7.2839 -2.3274 -4.2669
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3092 l.3092 NA NA NA 2.3274 2.3274
Oahlc Roof I -1.4304 -2.4001 -3.6123 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.5429 -4.2669 -6.4219 -2.7584 -4.2669
Mansard Roof 2 0.8243 0.8243 0.8243 1.4304 1.3092 1.4654 1.4654 1.4654 2.5429 2.3274
39
I -1..3092 -2.2789 -3.3699 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.3274 -4.0514 -5.9909 -2.7584 -4.2669
llip Roof
2 0.8243 0.8243 0.8243 1.4304 1.3092 1.4654 1.4654 1.4654 2.5429 2.3274
Monoslope I -1.6728 -2.1577 -3.7335 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.9739 -3.8359 -6.6374 -2.7584 -4.2669
Roof 2 0.7031 0.7031 0.7031 1.4304 1.3092 l.2499 1.2499 1.2499 2.5429 2.3274
I -1.8724 -2.9389 -4.0054 -l.2798 -2.3464 -3.3287 -5.2247 -7.1208 -2.2753 -4.1713
Fl.ii Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2798 1.2798 NA NA NA 2.2753 2.2753
Gabli: Roof I -1.3984 -2.3464 -3.5314 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.4860 -4.1713 -6.2781 -2.6966 -4.1713
Mansard Roof 2 0.8058 0.8058 0.8058 1.3984 1.2798 I .4326 1.4326 l.4326 2.4860 2.2753
36
I -1.2798 -2.2279 -3.2944 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.2753 -3.9607 -5.8567 -2.6966 -4.1713
Hip Roof
2 0.8058 0.!!058 0.8058 t.3984 1.2798 1.4326 1.4326 l.4326 2.4860 2.2753
Mono~lopc I -1.6354 -2.1094 -.3.6499 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.9073 -3.7500 -6.4888 -2.6966 -4.171]
Roof 2 0.6!!73 0.6873 0.6873 1.3984 1.2798 1.2219 1.2219 1.2219 2.4860 2.2753

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum DP.sign Loads 2-153
Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h = 36 - 48 m
Exposure C
v (kph) 250 300
Load Zone 7,one
h(m) Roofl<'orm
Case 1 2 3 4 s 1 2 3 4 s
1 -5.5186 -8.6622 -11.8057 -3.7722 -6.9158 -7.9468 · 12.4735 - 17.0002 -5.4320 -9.9587
Flat Roof
2 NJ\ NA NA 3.7722 :U722 :,IA NA NA 5.4320 5.4320
Gable Roof I -4.1215 -6.9158 -10.4086 -4.4708 -6.9158 -5.9350 -9.9587 - 14.9883 -6.4379 -9.9587
Mansard Roof 2 2.3751 2.3751 2.3751 4.1215 3.7722 3.4202 3.4202 3.4202 5.9350 S.4320
48
I -3.7722 -6.5665 -9.7100 -4.4708 -6.9158 -5.4320 -9.4557 -11.9824 -6.4379 -9.9587
llip Roof
2 2.3751 2.3751 2.3751 4.1215 3.7722 3.4202 J.4202 3.4202 5.9350 5.4320
Monoslopc I -4.8201 -6.2172 -10.7579 -4.4708 -6.9158 -6.9409 -8.9528 -1.5.4913 -6.4379 -9.9587
RooJ' 2 2.0258 2.0258 2.0258 4.1215 3.7722 2.9172 2.9172 2.9172 5.9350 5.4320
I -5.4789 -8.5998 -I 1.7208 -3.7451 -6.8660 -7.8897 -12.3838 -16.1\779 -5.3929 -9.8871
Flat Roof'
2 NA NA NA 3.7451 3.7451 NA NA NA 5.3929 5.3929
Gable Roof I -4.0919 -6.K660 -10.3337 -4.4386 -6.8660 -5.8923 -9.8871 -14.8805 -6.3916 -9.8871
Mansard Roof 2 2.3580 2.1580 2.3580 4.0919 3.7451 3.3956 3.3956 JJ956 5.8923 5.3929
45
I -3.7451 -6.5192 -9.6402 -4.4386 -6.8660 -5.3929 -9.3877 -13.8818 -6.3916 -9.8871
Hip Roof
2 2.3580 2.351\0 2.3580 4.0919 3.7451 3.3956 3.3956 3.3956 5.8923 5.3929
Monoslnpe I -4.7854 -6.1725 -10.6805 -4.4386 -6.1\660 -6.8910 -8.8884 -15.3799 -6.3916 -9.8871
Roof 2 2.0113 2.0113 2.() l 13 4.0919 3.7451 2.8962 2.8962 2.8962 5.8923 5.3929
I -5.3995 -8.4752 -11.5509 -3.6908 -6.7665 -7.7753 -12.2043 -16.6333 -5.3148 -9.7438
flat l{oof
2 NA NA NA 3.6908 3.6908 NA NA NA 5.3148 5.3148
Gable Roof I -4.0326 -6.7665 -10.1839 -4.3743 -6.7665 -5.8069 -9.7438 -14.6649 -6.2990 -9.7438
Mansar<l Roof 2 2.3238 2.3238 2.3238 4.0326 3.6908 3.3463 3.3463 3.3463 5.8069 5.3141\
42
I -3.6908 -6.4248 -9.5004 -4.3743 -6.7665 -5.3148 -9.2517 -13.6806 -6.2990 -9.7438
Hip Roof'
2 2.3238 2.3238 2.3238 4.0326 3.6901\ 3.3463 3.3463 3.3463 5.8069 5.3148
Monos lope 1 -4.7160 -6.0830 .J0.5257 -4.3743 -6.7665 -6.7911 -8.7595 -15.1570 -6.2990 -9.7438
Roof 2 1.9821 1.9821 l.9821 4.0326 3.6908 2.8542 2.1\542 2.8542 5.8069 5.3148
1 -5.3201 -8.3506 -11.3810 -3.6365 -6.6670 -7.6610 · 12'.0248 -16.3887 -5.2366 -9.6005
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.6365 3.6365 NA NA NA 5.2366 5.2366
Gable Roof' I -3.9733 -6.6670 -10.0342 -4.3100 -6.6670 -5.7215 -9.6005 -14.4492 -6.2064 -9.6005
Mansard Roof 2 2.2897 2.2897 2.2897 3.9733 3.6365 3.2971 3.2971 3.2971 5.7215 5.2366
39
I -3.6365 -6.3303 -9.3607 -4.3100 -6.6670 -5.2366 -9.1156 -13.4794 -6.2064 -9.6005
llip Roof
2 2.2897 2.2897 2.21\97 3.97.D 3.6365 3.2971 3.2971 3.2971 5.7215 5.2366
Monoslopc l -4.6467 -5.9936 -10.3709 -4.3100 -6.6670 -6.6912 -8.6307 -14.9341 -6.2064 -9.6005
Roof' 2 1.9530 1.9530 1.9530 3.9733 3.6365 2.8123 2.8123 2.8123 5.7215 5.2366
I -5.2010 -8.1636 -11.1262 -3.5551 -6.5177 -7.4895 -11.7556 -16.0218 -5.1194 -9.3855
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.5551 3.5551 NA NA NA 5.1194 5.1194
Gable Roof I -3.8843 -6.5177 -9.8095 -4.2135 -6.5177 -5.5934 -9.3855 -14.1257 -6.0674 -9.3855
Mansard Roof 2 2.2384 2.2384 2.2384 3.8843 3.5551 3.2233 :l.2233 3.2233 5.5934 5.1194
36
I -3.5551 -6.1886 -9.1512 -4.2135 -6.5177 -5.1194 -8.9115 -13.1777 -6.0674 -9.3855
Hip Roof
2 2,2384 2.2384 2.2384 3.8843 3.5551 3.2233 3.2233 3.22.D 5.5934 5.1194
Monoslope I -4.5427 -5.8594 -10.1387 -4.2135 -6.5177 -6.5414 -8.4375 -14.5997 -6.0674 -9.31!55
Roof 2 1.9092 l.9092 1.9092 3.8843 3.5551 2.7493 2.7493 2.7493 5.5934 5.1194

Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding Part 4
C&C, V ~ 350 kph, h = 36 - 48 m
Exposure C
v (kph) 350
Load Zone
h(m) Roofl<'orm
Case l 2 3 4 5
1 -10.8165 · 16.9778 -21.1392 -7.3936 - 13.5549
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.3936 7.3936
Gable Roof I -8.0782 -13.5549 -20.400K ·8.7628 - 13.5549
Mansard Roof 2 4.6552 4.6552 4.6552 8.0782 7.3936
48
I -7.3936 -12.8703 -19.0316 -8.7628 • 13.5549
Hip Roof
2 4.6552 4.6552 4.6552 l!.0782 7.3936
I -9.4474 -12.1857 -21.0854 -8.7628 - 13.5549
Monoslope Roof
2 3.9706 3.9706 .1.9706 8.0782 7.3936
I -10.7387 -16.8557 -22.9727 -7.3404 - 13.4574
Fial Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.3404 7.3404
Gable Roof I -8.0201 -13.4574 -20.2540 -8.6997 -13.4574
Mansard Roof 2 4.6217 4.6217 4.6217 8.0201 7.3404
45 -13.4574
I -7.3404 -12.7777 -18.8947 -8.6997
Hip Roof
2 4.6217 4.6217 4.6217 8.0201 7.3404
l -9.3794 -12.0980 -20.9337 -8.6997 -1.1.4574
Monoslope Roof
2 3.9421 3.9421 3.9421 8.0201 7.3404
I -I 0.5831 -16.6114 -22.6398 -7.2340 -13.2623
Flut Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.2340 7.2340
(,able Roof l -7.9038 -13.2623 -19.9605 -8.5736 -13.2623
Mansard Roof 2 4.5547 4.5547 4.5547 7.9038 7.2340
42 -IK.6209 -8.5736 -13.2623
I -7.2340 -12.5925
Hip Roof 7.2340
2 4.5547 4.5547 4.5547 7.9038
I -9.2435 -l l.9227 -20.6303 -8.5736 -13.2623
Monoslope Roof 7.2340
2 3.8849 3.8849 3.8849 7.9038
I -10.4274 -16.3671 - 22.3068 -7.1276 -13.0673
Flul Roof 7.1276
2 NA NA NA 7.1276
Gable Roof I -7.7876 -13.0673 -19.6670 -8.4476 -13.0673
Mansard Roof 2 4.4878 4.4878 4.4878 7.7876 7.1276
39 I -7.1276 -12.4073 -18.3470 -8.4476 -13.0673
Hip Roof
2 4.41178 4.4878 4.4878 7.7876 7.1276
1 -9.1075 · 11.7474 -20.3269 -8.4476 -13.0673
Monoslop..: Roof
2 3.8278 3.8278 3.8278 7.7876 7.1276
1 -10.1940 -16.0007 -21.8074 -6.9680 -12.7748
l'lat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.9680 6.9680
(iahlc Roof 1 -7.6132 -12.7748 -19.2267 · 8.2584 -12.7748
Mansard Roof 2 4.3873 4.3873 4.1873 7.6132 6.9680
36 -8.2584 -12.7748
1 -6.9680 -12.1296 -17.9363
Hip Roof
2 4.3873 4.3873 4.1873 7.6132 6.%80
I -8.9036 -11.4844 -19.8718 -8.2584 -12.7748
Monoslope Roof
2 3.7421 3.7421 3.7421 7.6132 6.9680
----
Part 5: Open Buildings Net pressure coefficients CN include contributions from top
and bottom surfaces. All load cases shown for each roof
Commentary: angle shall be investigated. Plus and minus signs signify
pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of
In determining loads on component and cladding elements the roof, respectively.
for open building roofs using Figures 207E.8-l, 207£.8-2
and 207E.8-3. it is important for the designer to note that
User Note:
the net pressure coefficient CN is based on contributions
from the top and bottom surfaces of the roof This implies
that the element receives load ji-om both swfaces. Such Use Part 5 of Section 207E for determining wind
pressures .for C&C of open buildings having pitched,
would not be the case if the surface below the roqf were
separated structurally from the top roof swjace. In thif monos/ope or !roughed roofs. These provisions are
based on the Directional Procedure with windpressures
case. the pressure coefficient should be separated for the
calculated from the specified equation applicable to
effect qftop and bottom pressures, or conservatively, each
surface could be designed using the CN value ji-om Figures
each roofsurface.
2071::.8-/, 207£.8-2 and 207£.8-3.
Table 207£.8-1
207E.8 Building Types Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Open Buildings
The provisions of Section 207E.8 are applicable to an open
building of all heights having a pitched free roof,
monosloped free roof, or troughed free root: The steps Step I : Detcnninc risk category, see Table 103-1
required for the determination of wind loads on Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
components and cladding for these building types is shown applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
in Table 207E.8- I. lA, Bore
207E.8.l Conditions Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:

~ Wind directionality factor K 20
For the determination of the <lcsign wind pressures on sec Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
components and claddings using the provisions of Section
207E.8.2, the conditions indicated on the selected figure(s) ~ Exposure category 8, C or D, see Section
shall be applicable to the building under consideration. 207/\.7
.
;... Topographic factor Kzt, see Section
207E.8.2 Design Wind Pressures 207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
The net <lesign wind pressure for component and cladding ~ Gust effect factor, G, sec Section 207 A.9
clements of open buildings of all heights with monoslope, Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
pitched, and troughed roofs shall be determined by the
following equation:
coeflicient, «z or Kh, see Table 207E.3-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure,
see Equation 207E.3-1
(207E.8-J)
Step 6 : Detenninc net pressure coefficients, CN
where >" Monosloped roof, sec Figure 207E.8-1
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof ~ Pitched roof, see Figure 207E.8-2
height h using the exposure as defined in
Section 207A.7.3 that results in the highest ~ Troughed roof, see Figure 207E.8-3
wind loads for any wind direction at the site Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, see Equation
gust-effect factor from Section 207 A.9 207E.8-1
net pressure coefficient given in:
• Figure 207E.8- J for monosloped roof
• Figure 207E.8-2 for pitched roof
• Figure 207E.8-3 for troughed roof

Part 6: Buitding Appurtenances and Rooftop • Load Case B: Leeward Parapet shall consist of
Structures and Equipment applying the applicable positive wall pressure from
Figure 207E.4-l (h :::; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6- J
207E.9 Parapets (h > 18 m) to the windward surface of the parapet,
and applying the applicable negative wall pressure
The design wind pressure for component and cladding from Figure 207E.4-l (h s; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6-J
clements of parapets for all building types and heights, (h > 18 m) as applicable to the leeward surfact:. Edge
except enclosed buildings with h :::; 48 m for which the and corner zones shall be arranged as shown in the
provisions of Part 4 are used, shall be determined from the applicable figures. (GCp) shall be determined for
following equation: appropriate roof angle and effective wind area from
the applicable figures.
(207E.9-l)
If internal pressure is present, both load cases should be
evaluated under positive and negative internal pressure.
where
velocity pressure evaluated at the top of the The steps required for the determination of wind loads on
parapet component and cladding of parapets arc shown in Table
(GCv) external pressure coefficient given in 207E.9-1.
• Figure 207E.4-1 for walls with h > 18 m
• Figures 207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2C for flat User Note:
roof's, gable roofs, and hip roofs
• Figure 207£.4-3 for stepped roofs Use Part 6 of Section 207E for determining wind
• Figure 207E.4-4 for multispan gable roofs pressures for C&C on roff overhangs and parapets u.f
• Figure 207E.4-5A and 207E.4-5B for buildings. These provisions are hosed un the
monoslope roofs Directional Procedure with wind pressures calculated
• Figure 207E.4-6 for sawtooth roof's from the specffied equation applicable to each roof
• Figure 207E.4-7 for domed roofs of all overhang or parapet sur.face.
heights
• Figure 207E.6-1 for walls and flat roofs
with h > 18 m
• Figure 2078.4-3 for footnote 4 for arched
roofs
internal pressure coefficient from
Table 207A.l l-l, based on the porosity of the
parapet envelope
Two load cases, see Figure 207E.9- J, shall be considered:
• Load Case A: Windward Parapet shall consist of

applying the applicable positive wall pressure from
Figure 207E.4-1 (h :::; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6-1
(h > 18 m) to the windward surface of the parapet
while applying the applicable negative edge or comer
zone roof pressure from Figures 207E.4-2 (A, B or C),
207E.4-3, 207E.4-4, 207E.4-5 (A or B), 207E.4-6,
207E.4-7, Figure 2078.4-3 footnote 4, or Figure
207£.6-1 (h > 18 m) as applicable to the leeward
surface of the parapet.

Table 207E.9-1 207E.10 Roof Overhangs

Parapets The design wind pressure for roof overhangs oi enclosed
and pa,tially enclosed buildings of all heights, except
enclosed buildings with h $ 48 m for which the provisions
Step I: Dctennine risk category, see Table I 03-1 of Part 4 are used, shall be detennined from the following
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the equation:
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A.5-
1A, 8 orC
(207E.10-1)
Step 3: Dctcm1inc wind load parameters:
~ Wind dircclionality factor «zt, where
see Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1 velocity pressure from Section 207E.3.2
}.> Exposure category B, C or D, see Section evaluated at mean roof height h using
207A.7 exposure defined in Section 207A.7.3
);:> Topographic factor K 2 , , see Section external pressure coefficients for overhangs
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1 given in Figures 207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2C ( flat
).> Enclosure classification, see Section roofs, gable roofs, and hip roofs), including
207A.10 contribulions from top and bottom surfaces of
~ Internal pressure coefficient, ( GCpi), see overhang. The external pressure coefficient
Section 207 A.11 and Table 207 A.11-1 for the covering on the underside of the roof
Step 4: DcLCrmine velocity pressure exposure overhang is the same as the external pressure
coefficient, Kh, at the top of the parapet sec coefficient on the adjacent wall surface,
Table 207E.3- l adjusted for effective wind area, determined
from Figure 207E.4-1 or Figure 207E.6-l as
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qp, at the top of applicable
the parapet, see Equation 207E.3-1 internal pressure coefficient given in
Step 6: Determine external pressure coeflicicnt for Table 207 A.11-1
wall and roof surfaces adjacent to parapet,
(GCp)
> Walls with h :::; 18 m, see Figure 207E.4-
l
~ Flat, gable and hip roofs, see Figures
207E.4-2A to 207E.4.2C
)"' Stepped roofs, see rigure 207E.4-3
> Multispan gable roofs, see Figure
207E.4-4
}> Mono.slope roof.Cl, Figures 207E.4-5A and
207E.4-5B
)"' Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 207E.4-6
};;> Domed roofs of all heights, see Figure
207E.4-7
:,,. Walls and flat roofs with h > 18 m, see
Figure 207E.6-1
> Arched roofs, see footnote 4 of Figure
2078.4-3
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, see Equation
207E. 9-1 on windward and leeward face of
parapet, considering two load cases (Case A
and Case B) as shown in Figure 207E.9-l

The steps required for the <letermination of wind loads on 207E.11 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for
components and cladding of roof overhangs are shown in Buildings with h s; 18 m
Table 207E.10-1.
The components and cladding pressure on each wall of the
Table 207E.l0-l rooftop structure shall be equal to the lateral force
Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads determined in accordance with Section 2070.5.1 divided
Roof Overhangs by the respective wall surface are of the rooftop structure
and shall be considered to act inward and outward. The
components and cladding pressure on the roof shall be
Step 1: Determine risk category, see Table l 03-1 equal to the vertical uplift force determined in accordance
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the with Section 2070.5. l divided by the horizontal projected
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A.5- area of the roof of the rooftop strncture and shall be
IA, B orC considered to act in the upward direction.

~ Wind directionality factor «zt,
see Section 207A.6 and Table 207A.6-l
~ Exposure category B, C or D, sec Section
207A.7
).)- Topographic factor «zo see Section
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
:,.,. Enclosure classification, see Section
207A.10
internal pressure coefficient,
see Section 207 A. l l
Table 207A. I l-l
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, Kh, see Table 207£.3-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, at mean roof
height h using Equation 207E.3-1
( GCp), using Figures 207E.4-2A through C
for flat, gabled and hip roofs
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, using
Equation 207 E. l 0-1, refer to
figure 207E. l 0-1

-1.8
-1.6
-1.4
-CSJ -1.4
_ (4) -......... ~
-1.2
-1.0
--~ -- ....... -I.I
-0.8 -0.8
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
+0.2
+0.4
-a
~
+0.6
+0.8
+1.0
h'4J&0J
+o.7
+1.0
~ +1.2
~ 0.1 0.9 l.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
Effective Wind Area, m2
Notes:
I. Vertical scale denotes CCI' to be used with qh.

2. Horizontal scale denotes cffeelive wind an:a, m2•
4. Each compo11ent shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GC,, for walls shall be reduced hy IO% when 8 $ 10 ° .
6. Notation:
a I 0% ofleast horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dirne11sion or 0.9 m.
h mean roofhcighl, m, ex.cept thal eave height shall be used for 8 $ 10 ° .
8 aogle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4- l
External Pressure Coefficients, GCP Walls, h ~ 18 m Enclosed
Partially Enclosed Buildings

·"'1at-··
L
a '3 2) 2) 3
r 1 ~
I I
I
I
-t I
I
I
j '.2) <D CZ
I
I
-1.8
I
-3.0 UJ I
-2.8 - Roof -- > - .2JI (
0.. -2.6 \.
u L
I
c.,
+J'
c::
-2.4
-2.2 ""I
I,.
\..
,_ a
r
2 2 j3
·-ij3
(I)
( .)
-2.0
-1.8
~ i)
""'-.. "' -1.8 0.. -).2
U -3.0
, -~
-1.6
0
0 -L4 '- ...... ......\ C., -2.8
u - l.2 ~ -2.6
(I) rCTJ
s -11 (I)
-1.0 -1.0 ....... -2.4
-0.9 u
C/:J
C/:J
-0.8 ~
(+-i -2.2
0 -0.6 <1)
'--
-2.0
-s
~
ro
-0.4
-0.2
u
0
(I)
-1.8
.,..
·I,?
~
-1.6
(I) 0
.......
x +-0.2 µ~ ~ 2
ttl.3
VJ
<1)
-1.4
~ -l-0.4
;..... ·1.2
~ -I.I
+0.6
~ -1.0
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 I 8.6 46.5 92.9
a ~ .8 .OJ
Effective Wind Area, m 2 B
><:
~.6
µ.:i 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
Notes:
I. Vertical scule denotes GC~ 1,, he used with qh .
2. Horizonta l scule denotes effective wind area, 111 2•
J. Plus and minus signs sign ify pressures acting toward and away from the ~urfaees, respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. If a parapet equal to or higher than 0.9 m is provided around the perimeter of the roof with 8 :5: 7 • , the negative values of GC1, in Zone 3 shall be equal
to those for Zone 2 and pMitivc value.~ o f GCp in Zones 2 and 3 shall be set equal to those for wall Zones 4 and 5 respectively in Figure 207E.4-1.
6. Values u f GCp for roof overhang s include pressure Clinlributions from horh upper and lower s urfs=.
7. Notation:
a I 0% of least hori,.ontal dimension or 0. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not les~ than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 9 m.
h cave height shall be used !i)r 9 :S 10 • .
8 angle of p lane or roof from horizonta~ 0
Figure 207E.4-2A
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Gable Roofs fJ ~ 7° , h ~ 18 m
Associ ation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

-3.0
-2.8
Q.. r(3 J
' u -2.6
-...........
-26
1 (
-
c.,
i::
·-
~
(1)
Q
"
-2.4
-2.2
-2.0
-1.8
-1.6
~
........,.,,_
~
1--
Roof
-
-20
•• 7
'-H .... ~
(_2 ) (1) (l) -1.4
.... ~
0
) u -1.2
[]TI
-1.2
-1.0
~
.()9
-0.8 .() B
00 -0.6
tl'l
(!)
L $-< -0.4
a.
r --la.I-- -E
~
ro
-0.2
0
-
(!)
><:
u.J
+o.2
+o.4
+o.6
-+-0.8
l-(i)(i)&6)
0. 1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.<, 46.S

~ .l
~.s
92.9
Q.. Effective Wind Area, m 2

u
c.,
-·-=
(1)
Q
"
-3.6
Overhan ·3•7
~ .3.4
~
(1)
-3.2
0
u -3.0
s
tl:l
Cf.)
(l)
-2.!!
-2.6
-2.4
-
1-o
-2.2
~
l ro -2.00.1·
-
0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
(l
E
r (1)
K
Effective Wind Area, m 2
Notes:
w
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with q,,.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, m1 .
4. Each component shall be desigm:d lor maximum positive and negative pressures.
S. Values of GCp for roof overhangs include pressure contributions from both upper and lower surfaces.
6. For hip rools with 7 < H $ 27°, edge/ridge strips and pressure coe!licients for ridges of gabled roofa shall apply on each hip.
7. zs•,
For hip ronfa with 9 :5: Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
8. Nolation:
A l 0% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 411, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% ofleast horizontal dimension 0.9 m.
h mean roof height, m, except that cave height shall be used for 8 $ 10 ° •
() angle of plane of roof' from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-2B
External Pressure Coefficients, GCP Gable/Hip Roofs 7° < 8 ~ 27°, h S 18 m
.Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

--jO.j- -ja.1a.i- -jCll--

l u0..
-1
l.6
- IA
2) 8(~ Roof
a. , 3_ 0 ·l.2 ·12
r I I 15 "' -1.0 · 1.0
·-13)
.0.8 {2 ·OJI
I I (.) .o.6
I I !+::
<....;
-0.4
Q) .0.2
I I
I I u0 0
+0.2
- ·-- -
I I Q)
1-r +-0.4
2 Q) CD 2 ;:I
rn
ell
+0.6
~O.R 1) 2) &(3 ...
I I ~
•o,
+1.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
-e
0....
ro
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
I I ....x
Q)
_L I I ~
Effective Wi nd Area, m2
a.. "3 2- 2 3
r
~ -3.0
d -2.8
...r -2.6
Overhan_g
s::
·-
(l)
(.)
~
-2.4
-2.2
u
Q)
0
-2.0
-1.8
-- -2.0
-l.8
Q)
-1.6 .__ --- .__
~
·r ell
en
e
-1 .4
-1.2
h
t -E
Poe
ro
(l)
-LO
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
><l Effective Wind Area, m 2

.w.:i
Notes:
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be uNed with qh,
2. Horizon tal scale denotes effective wind area, m2
4. Each component shall he Jesigncd for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCP for roof overhangs in clude pm1~ure contributions from hoth upper and lower s urfaces.
6. Notation:
a I0% orleast horizontal dimension or 0. 4-h, whichcve~ is smaller, but not le~s than either 4% of least horizontal dimension 0.9 m.
8 angle of pl~nc o l'rooffrom h(lrizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-2C
External Pressure Coefficients, GCP Gable Roofs 27° < ~ 45°, h :'.5: 18 m e
Enclosed, Partia1\y Enclosed Buildings

-t' l
lJ
h1 ~ 3m
b = 1.Sh1
b < 30m
h1
0.30 to 0.70
h
Wi
w
= 0.25 to 0.75
/ ~2
l 'r
~
Notes:
I.
t
i-- -
Wi~, ~=====:,2_
·----~-i--_-_w_ ---i
On the lower level of flat, stepped roofs shown in Figure 207E.4-3, the zone designations and pn:ssurc coefficients shown in Figure 207E.4-2A shall
apply, except that at the roof-upper wall intersection(s), Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2 and 7.onc 2 shall be treated as Zone I. Positive values of Ge,.
equal to those for walls in Figure 207E.4-I shall apply on the cross-hatched areas shown in Figure 207E.4-3.
2. Notation:
b 1. Sh 1 in Figure 207E.4-3, but not greater than 30 m.
h1 h, or h 2 in Figure 207E.4-3; h"' h 1 + Iii; 111 ~3.1 m; litfh"" 0. 3 to O. 7.
W Building width in Figure 2076.4-3.
W1 W 1 or W 2 orW3 in Figure 207E.4-3. W"" W 1 + W 2 or W 1 + W:t + W 3 ; WJW"" 0.25 to 0. 75.
6 Angle of plane ofroof'from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-3
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Stepped Roofs, h $ 18 m

a
r l
I
I
I ELEVATION OF BUILDING (2 or More Spans)
l I
I l
I I
I I
2) (l) (1) 2
I I
I I
I l
I I
I I
I I
.l PLAN AND ELEVATION OF A SINGLE SPAN MODULE
a
t
-3.0 -3.0
-2.8 1-m
0... ·2.6 - 10°< (} S 30° ·2.7 -2.8
-2,6
U
C., -2.2
"i-2.0
-2.4
-VJ ' '_,
~
-2.2 u0...
c.,
-2.4
-2.2
~~ -~ -2.0
·- <1) -1.8
C,) -1.6
~ -1.4
(,i..j
(I)
llIJ .1.7
·1,6
-1.4
0
·-s
<1)
C,)
-1.8
-1.6
-1.4
0 -1.2 (I) -1.2
U-1.0
~ ·0.8
u
0
(I)
-1.0
-0.8
~ ·0.6
en .o.4 ~
C'-l
.0.6
-0.4
~
.o:; VJ
-E
-0.2 (l) -0.2
~
<:,;i
0
+0.2
-- -E
~
<:,;i
0
+0.2
~
~
Notes:
+0.4
+0.6
+0.8
0.1
TiJC2J&3J
0.9 l.9

4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
~.~
~6
-
(I)
~
~
+0.4
+0.6
+0.8
+1.0
+l.2 . __ _ ___.___..____._....____.__ _..___,
I. Vertical scale denotes GCP lo be used with qh. 0. 1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
2. Horizontal s<.:ale denotes effective wind area A, m2 Effective Wind Area m2
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respec!lve1;,. · '
4. F.ach component shall he designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. For 9 ~ 10°, values of'GCP lrom figure 207E.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a I0% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, whiehev~r is smaller, but nol less lhan either 4% of least hofizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
h mean mol'height, m, except that the eave height shall he used for 9;::; 10°
W building module width, m
8 angle of plane of' roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-4
External Pressure Cocffi<.:ients, GCP Multispan Gable Roofs, h ~ 18 m

-3.0
r 20.1 r2a1 -2.8
r(Y)
-2.6
- r c. r,. -2.6
[ ®: Cf) 1G) -2.4

I u
2r C) -2.2
"Ill
....
I l
_ _ _J
I I
I
1="-2.0
·-::E
(l) -1.8
-OJ ' ~
....
-1.8
I
I
I Q)
I
'2
<..)
(l)
0
-1.6
-1.4
(2')
__() ) """' ............
'-
' -1.6
., 5
.\.}
I u -1.2 -1.2
-I.I
I ' ~ -LO -Q)
rL ®~
I
- --, ·1 ( l ~ -0.8
I I rr,
(1) -0.6
_I $....
--f
I (~J (~ _J(l -E
Q... --0.4
ce
(1)
--0.2
0
~
+0.2
ALLZONm +0.2
~
w +0.4
t0.3
+0.6
+0.8
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
J
Noles:
I~- - w- -1
I. Vertical scale denotes GCP to be used with q 11 •
2. Horizontal scale denotes effoctive wind area A, m2
3. Plus and rninu8 signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Each compommt. shall be designed for maximum positive and negalive pressures.
5. for 8 S 3", values or GCP from Figure 207h.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a I 0% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not Jess lhan either 4% of least horizontal <linltmsion or 0.9 m.
h eave heigh.I shall he used for 8 :s; 10"
W building widtb, m
(J angle of plane orrooffrom horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-5A
Extemal Pressure Coefficients, GCv Monoslope Roofs, 3° < e ~ 10° ,h ~ 18 m

-3.0
r2a1 1 ° r-_J
·2.9
~
-2.8
-2.6
' '"
r G) L -- 2
I
--, -r
I c.. -2.0
a ·2.4
·2.2
~ ...
' ·2.0
l _ _ _J
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
u
d
....:-
s::
·-
<l)
u
-1.8
-1.6
-l.4
-
"12)
.......
-- ....... ...........
-1.6
-l.l
-1.2
-l.2
-Q)
0 I
I
CD ,2
I
!..i=
q::;
11)
0
-1.0
-0.8
-I.I
u
-- , l
r G)
I -0.6
1 ~
~ -0.4
I Cl:)
I tfl
I 11) -0.2
I
l
;.....
I
r 2
- - _J
-
_J_
-r a a
~
~
0
+o.2
+o.4
+il.3
t-0.4
K +o.6
UJ
+o.8
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9

I
J
I. w .I
Notes:
I. Vertical scal1;1 denotes cc,,
to be used with qh.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wiud area A, m2
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away frorn the s11rlaces, respectively.
4. Each component shall he designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Notation:
a I 0% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension 0.9 m
It mean roof height, m
W building width, m
8 angle of plane of roof fron, hori:wntal,"
Figure 207E.4-5B
External Pressure CoeJlicients, GCp Monoslope Roofs, 10° < e ::; 30°, h::; 18 m

lal ,« r-
_ l
r 2 a -4.4
-4,2 ~(SPANA)
2f_ - -,I 1 ....\
-4.0 ............
I
I
-3.8
-3.6 --..l -3.7
I
I
CD u
0.. .J.4
-l.2
r-(2)
''.,
..
·l.l
0 -3.0
r...
...
Iii..
i -2.8
-(J)(SPAN B.C & D) .,....
.~
~
~
0
(!)
-2.6
-2.4
-2.2
iTJ
,.......
.....
~
',,' .....
' Iii...'
.......
-1.6
-
· 21
_J 0
'
-2 I
a u -2.0
r'lllllli.. ~
~
-1.8
.............. .,.... · 1.9
' ~
r.l':l
c,:i
(I)
;.....
-1.6
-1.4
-1.2
"'1'1111....
~
-
. J.6
1 -E
c<:$ -LO
..0.8
- I. I
____l .....
(!)
..0.6
~ ..0.4
t:I.J
..0.2
0
~
+-0.2
i-0.4 +o.4
J i')
ill - r=. - ~ ~;;,:;:
+o.6
+o.1
+-0.ll +ol
u~
Elevation of Building (2 or Mo1·e Spans) +1.0 _(31 +J, I
+1.2
+1.4
\Jj
Noles:
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 %.5 92.9
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with q1,.

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective win<l a~a A, m2
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, rcspcclivcly.
4. Eacb componeut shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pn:ssu,·es.
5. For 8 S 10", values ofGCP from Figure 207E.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, whichever is smaller, bul not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
h mean roof heigh!, m, except that the eave height shall he used for 9 ::;; 10•
W building module width, m
Figure 207E.4-6
External Pressure Coefficients, GCP Sawtooth Roof.<;, h ~ 18 m

WincJ.
f
Win<l.
h
External Pressure Coefficient for Domes with a Circular Base

e , degrees Ne ativc Pressures Positive Pressures Positive Pressures
0- 90 0 - 60 61 - 90
cc ~o.9o +o.9o +o.so
Notes:
1. Values denote GCp to be used with q(ho+/l• where h 0 + f is lhe height al lhc top of the dome.
2. Plus and minlls signs signify pressures acting loward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. Each component shall he designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
4. Values apply to OS ho/D S 0. 5,0.2 Sf /D S 0. 5.
5. 8 = 0° on dome springlin1;:, 8 = 90° at dome center top point. f is measured from spring line to top.
Figure 207E.4-7
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Doomed Roofs, All Heights
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structure8

Flat Roof Hip Roof (7° < 9::; 27")
Gable Roof (0 ::; 7°) Gable Roof (7" < 9 !:: 45~)
O Interior Zones • End Zones .Corner Zones

Roofs Zone I/Walls - Zone 4 Roofs - Zone 2/Walls - Zone 5 Roofs - Zone 3
Notes:
I. =
Pressures shown an: applied noTmal to the surface, for ex.posure B, at h 9 m. Adjust to other conditions using Equation 207E.S· l.
2. Plus aml minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
3. For hip roof.~ with 8 :5 25", Zone 3 shall bdreated as Zone 2.
4. For eftective wind areas between those given, value may be interpolated, othenvise use the value associated with the lower effective wind area.
5. Notation:
a I0% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
h mean roof height, in, excep( that lhe eave heigh( shall be used for (J < 10"
Figure 207E.5-l
Design Wind Pressures Walls and Roofs, h $ 18 m
Enclosed Buildings

Net Design Wind Pressure, Pnet (kPa) (Exposure Bath = 10 m with I = 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effecllve Basic Wind Speed V (kph)
Zone wind area
(sq. m.) 150 200 250 300 350
I 1.0 0.30 -0.75 0.54 .1.33 0.84 -2.08 1.22 -2.99 l.65 -4.07
1 2.0 0.28 -0.73 0.51 -1.29 0.79 -2.02 1.14 -2.91 1.55 -3.96
I 4.5 0.26 -0.70 0.46 -1.25 0.72 -l.95 1.04 -2.81 1.4 l -3.83
.,..."' 1 9.5 0.24 -0.68 0.43 ·1.22 0.67 -1.90 0.96 -2.74 1.31 -3.72
... -5.02 1.65 -6.83
...
<>D
~
2 1.0 0.30 -J.25 0.54 -2.23 0.84 -3.48 1.22
2 2.0 0.28 -1.12 0.51 -1.99 0.79 -3.11 1.14 -4.48 1.55 -6.10
t--
g 2 4.5 0.26 -0.94 0.46 - 1.68 0.72 -2.62 1.04 -3.77 1.41 -5.14
0
2 9.5 0.24 -0.81 0.43 - 1.44 0.67 -2.25 0.96 - 3.24 1.31 -4.41
'-
0
3 0.30 -1.89 0.54 -3.36 0.84 -5.25 1.22 -7.56 J,65 -10.29
~ 1.0
l.14 -6.26 1.55 -8.52
3 2.0 0.28 -1.56 0.51 -2.78 0.79 -4.34
3 4.S 0.26 -1.l 4 0.46 -2.02 0.72 -3.16 1.04 -4.55 1.41 -6.19
3 9.S 0.24 -0.81 0.43 -1.44 0.67 -2.25 0.96 -3.24 1.3) -4.41
l 1.0 0.43 -0.68 0.77 -1.22 1.20 -1.90 1.72 -2.74 2.34 -3.72
2.14
..
.,......
1
1
2.0
4.5
0.39
0.34
-0.66
·0.64
0.70
0.61
-I.I 8
-1.14
1.09
0.95
-1.85
-1.78
1.57
1.37
-2.66
-2.56 1.86
-3.62
-3.48
I 9.5 0.31 -0.62 0.55 -1.10 0.85 -1.72 1.23 -2.48 1.67 -3.38
~
...,;~ 2 1.0 0.43 -1.19 0.77 -2.12 l.20 -3.32 1.72 -4.77 2.34 -6.50
r-- 0.70 -1.95 1.09 -3.04 1.57 -4.38 2.14 -5.96
2 2.0 0.39 - 1.10
""s 2 4.S 0.34 -0.97 0.61 -1.72 0.95 -2.69 1.37 -3.88 1.86 -5.27
r-- 0.55 -1.56 0.85 · 2.44 1.23 -3.51 1.67 -4.77
A 2 9.5 0.31 -0.88
._ 1.0 0.43 -1.76 0.77 -3.14 1.20 -4.90 1.72 -7.05 2.34 -9.60
0 3
~ 3 2.0 0.39 -1.65 0.70 -2.93 1.09 -4.57 l.57 -6.59 2.14 -8.96
3 4.5 0.34 -1.49 0.61 -2.66 0.95 -4.15 1.37 -5.98 1.86 -8.14
3 9.5 0.31 -1.38 0.55 -2.45 0.85 -3.83 1.23 -5.52 1.67 -7.52
I 1.0 0.68 -0.75 1.22 -l.33 1.90 -2.08 2.74 -3.00 3.72 -4.09
.......t'b
I 2.0 0.66 -0.71 1.18 -1.27 1.85 -1.98 2.66 -2.85 3.62 -3.88
I 4.S 0.64 -0.66 l.14 -1.17 1.78 -1.83 2.56 ·2.63 3.48 -3.59
..,.. 1 9.5 0.62 -0.62 1.10 -1.10 1.72 -1.72 2.48 -2.48 3.38 -3.38
2 I,() 0.68 -0.88 l.22 -1.56 1.90 -2.44 2.74 -3.51 1.72 -4.77
•n -4.55
st 2 2.0 0.66 -0.84 I. I 8 -1.49 UIS -2.32 2.66 -3.34 3.62
.9 2 4.S 0.64 -0.79 1.14 -1.40 1.78 -2.18 2.56 -3.14 3.48 -4.27
r-.
M
2 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.10 -1.33 1.72 -2.08 2-.48 -3.00 3.38 -4.09
/\
'-
<:> 3 1.0 0.68 -0.88 l.22 -1.56 1.90 -2.44 2.74 -3.51 3.72 -4.77
0 -3.34 3.62 -4.55
i:i:. 3 2.0 0.66 -0.84 1.18 - 1.49 1.85 -232 2.66
3 4.5 0.64 -0.79 l.l4 -1.40 1.78 -2.18 2.56 -3.14 3.48 -4.27
3 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.10 -1.33 1.72 -2.08 2.48 -3.00 3.38 -4.09
4 1.0 0.75 -0.81 1.33 -1.44 2.08 -2.25 2.99 -3.24 4.07 -4.41
4 2.0 0.72 -0.78 1.27 -1.38 l.99 -2.16 2.86 -3.12 3.90 -4.24
4 4.5 0.67 -0.73 1.19 -1.30 1.86 -2.01 2.68 -2.93 3.65 -3.98
4 9.5 0.64 -0.70 l.l3 -1.24 1.77 -1.94 2.55 -2.80 3.46 -3.81
4 46.5 0.56 -0.62 0.99 -l.10 1.55 -1.72 2.23 -2.48 3.03 -3.38
~
~ s 1.0 0.75 -1.00 1.33 -1.78 2.08 -2.78 2.99 -4.00 4.07 -5.45
s .2.11 0.72 -0.94 l.27 -1.67 1.99 -2.60 2.86 -3.75 3.90 -5.10
s 4.5 0.67 -0.85 1.19 -I.SO l.86 -2.35 2.68 -3.38 3.65 -4.60
5 9.S 0.64 -0.78 1.13 -1.38 1.77 -2.J 5 2.55 -3.10 3.46 -4.22
5 46.5 0.56 -0.62 0.99 -1.10 1.55 -1.72 2.21 -2.48 3.03 -3.38
Note: For effective areas between those given above the load may he inte1polnted, otherwise use the load associared with the lower effective
area. The final value, including all permit1ed reductions, used in rhe design shall not be less than that required by Section 2071::.2.2.
Figure 207E.5- I (continued)

Design Wind Pressures on Walls and Roofs of Enclosed Buildings with h :S 18 m
Components and Cladding

Roof Overhang Net Design Wind Pressure, Pnet (kPa)

(Exposure Bat h = 10 m with I = 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effective Basic Wind Soeed V (kph)

wind
Zone
al'ea ISO 200 250 300 350
(sq.m)
2 0.9 - 1.19 -2.12 -3.31 -4.76 -6.48
..."'.... 2 1.9 - 1.17 -2.08 -3.25 -4.69 -10.27
lo
...
OD
2 4.6 - 1.14 -2.03 -3.17 -4.57 -6.38
""
....
~
2
3
9.3 -l.13 -2.00
-3.35
-3.13 -4.51 -8.21
0.9 -1.89 -5.24 -7.55 -6.22
0
.....
0
3 1.9 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -5.45
~ 3 4.6 -1.00 -1.78 -2.78 -4.00 -6.14
3 9.3 -1.25 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -6.83
.,
...... 2 0.9 -1.5 I -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -8.21
-1.51
...~
"C)
2
2
1.9
4.6 -1.51
-2.68
-2.68
-4.19
-4.19
-6.03
-6.03
-l3.3R
-8.21
....
.... 2 9.3 -l.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -12.17
s 3 0.9 -2.46 -4.37 -6.82 -9.83 -8.21
.... 3 1.9 -2.24 -3.97 -6.21 -8.94 • 10.45
A
'-
c: 3 4.6 -1.92 -3.41 ·5.33 -7.67 -8.21
0
IX 3 -1.70
.."'f: 2
9.3
0.9 -1.38
-3.02
-2.45
-4.71
-3.83
-6.79
-5.52
-9.24
-7.52
...
o,D 2 1.9 -1.35 ·2.40 -3.75 -5.40 -7.52
-3.57
""
II)
2 4.6 -1.29
-1.25
-2,29 -5.14 -7.34
""~ 2 9.3 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -7.34
.... 3 0.9 -1.38 -2.45 -3.83 -5.52 -7.00
"' 3 1.9 -1.35 -2.40 -3.75 -5.40 -7.00
....
A
Q 3 4.6 -1.29 -2.29 -3.57 -5.14 -6.83
~ 3 9.3 -1.25 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -6.83
Adjustment Factor
for Building Height and Exposure, ..l
Mean roof height Exposure

(m) B c D
4.5 1.00 1.21 1.47
6.0 1.00 l.29 1.55
7.5 1.00 1.35 1.61
9.0 LOO 1.40 1.66
10.5 1.05 1.45 1.70
12.0 1.09 1.49 l.74
13.5 1.12 l.53 l.78
15.0 1.16 1.56 1.81
16.5 1.19 l.59 1.84
18.0 1.22 1.62 1.87
Figure 207E.5-l (continued)

Design Wind Pressures on Walls and Roofs of Enclosed Buildings with h ~ 18 m
Components and Cladding

. l B ~ - - -0
:::.;;.P
::._:;
1.;.:...
9_..!;
...~6_,.._,.--.--.
3J_J _ _ 2 3 . 3.6 1 - - - - - - - ' - - - L - - - l' - . . . . J - - l - - , I - - I

- 3.4 1-,..----+--+--l-+--f--·I--I
- 3.Z - 3.2
I - 3.0 l - - - - . . . i . - - . ; ~ - - 1- - 1 - ~ - 1 ---1
I - 2.S 1-----+--+---::i,,__-1---1--j.--f
2 CD -~6 1------1-~l----l--"P....+--1--~
I I -14
- l.2 J::~=$~tt=t~~
I I - 2.0 1-,....,,.--+-+.-...:~ c-4--l--l--l
1 r -::t . l 8 - 1.8
3 L,- -2 - - r J3 j - 1.d
- 1.4 -1."'4
-1.6
- 1.2 1------1-~I-=....=-+~-+-~
• 1•0
- 1.0
- 0.9
-ns
. 0.6 1------1---+---1-+--1--~
. Q7
I -n~ 1-------~--1---'---1.-"----1--'
I . 0.2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 -.......- - 1 . . -.......--I
I 0
I + 0.2 1-------1---1..--1---1.-,I.---I--I
I + 0.4 1-------i---+-~-4-~l--f---l
I + O.ti + O.G
+ a., ~~~±=t~t:E=c:rj + o.9
I
5 +LO
I
I 0.1 0.9 1.11 4.Ci P.3 Ul.6 ..Ci.S 9:U
I
I
I
I
I
WALL ELEVATION
Notes:
I. Vertical scale denotes GC1, lo he used wilh nppr,11>riate q2 or qh .

2. I lori/Ontnl scale dcnolcs c1Tce1ivc wind nrca. m2
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures ncllng towurd 1111d away from the surlnces, rcspt:ctivt:ly.
4. Use q r with posilivc vnlucs ofGC1, nnd q 1, with negative values of GCP.
5. Each componcnl shnll be designed lbr 111a.~imu111 positive arid negative pressures.
6. Coc llicionts uro for roof.~ with angh: 0 ::; 10 • . l·or olhcr roof angles and gcomelry, use CCP values from Figure 207E.4-2A, B and C and attendant qh
hased on exposure defined in Section 207A.7.
7. ff a parapet e4ua] to or higher thun 0.9 m is pm vidcd around the perimeter of the roof with 6 ::; 10 ° , Zone 3 shall he treated as Zone 2.
8. Notalion:
a I 0% of lcasl hori1011uil dimension, hut not less than 0.9 in.
O
h mcun roofhc ighl , m, except lhut co ve height ~hall be used for 6 $ lO •
z height obovc ground, 111

6 ungle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.6- 1
External Pressure Coefficients, GC,, Walls and Roofs, h > 18 m
.Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

Windward parapet Leeward parapet

Load Case A Load Case B
Top parapet
pi
ps
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
l. Windward parapet pressure (p 1 ) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p 5 ) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p 2 ) is determined using the negative roof pressure (p 7 ) zones 2 or 3 from Table 207.E.7-2.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
I. Windward parapet pressure (p3) is detennined using the positive wall pressure (p 5) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p 4 ) is detcnnined using the negative wall pressure (p6 ) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
Figure 207E.7-l
Parapet Wind Loads Application of Parapet Wind Loads, h ~ 48.8 m

I
[Ps
Pw
Povh l.O x roof pressure p from tables for edge Zo_ncs 1, 2
Povh 1.15 x roof pressure p from tahles for corner Zone 3
Notes:
I. p,,.,,,
~ roof pressure at overhang for edge or comer zone a~ applicable from figures in roof pressure table.
2. Povh from figures includes load l"rom both top and bottom surface of' overhang.
3. Pressure Ps at soflit of overhang can he assumed ~ame as wall pressure, p.,.
Figure 207E.7-2
Roof Overhang Wind Loads Application of Overhang Wind Loads, h:::; 48 m

CHAPTER ~ - Minimum fJesign t rn=u-Js /.··175
~ - - - . --1a
a
r
1
h
1J111///lllll/l/l
Roof Effective CN
Angle Wind Area Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
8 Zone3 Zone2 Zone l Zone3 Zone2 Zone 1
::; a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.l 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
oo > a2, 1.2 -1.l
1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -l.1 1.2 -l.l 1.2 -1.l 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
::; a2 3.2 -4.2 2.4 -2. l 1.6 -1.4 l.6 -5.1 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -l.7
> az, l.6 -1.4 -1.7
7.5° 2.4 -2.1 2.4 -2. l 1.2 -2.6 l.2 -2.6 0.8
_::; 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 [.6 -1.4 1.6 -l.4 1.6 -1.4 0.8 -l.7 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -l.7
::; a2 3.6 -3.8 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -l.9 2.4 -4.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
> a2, 1.8 -l.9 -2.l
15° ::; 4.0a 2
2.7 -2.9 2.7 -2.9 l.8 -3.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2
> 4.0a2 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 l.2 -2.l l.2 -2. l 1.2 -2.1
::; a2 5.2 -5 3.9 -3.8 2.6 2.5 3.2 -4.6 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -2.3
> a2, 2.6 2.5 -2.3
30° 3.9 -3.8 3.9 -3.8 2.4 -3.5 2.4 -3.5 1.6
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 2.5 1.6 -2.3 l.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3
sa 2 5.2 -4.6 3.9 -3.5 2.6 2.3 4.2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
> a2, 2.6 2.3 -1.9
45° 3.9 -3.5 3.9 -3.5 3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.6 2.3 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9
Notes:
I. CN denotes net pressures (contributions from top und bottom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed wind How denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind !low (>50% blockage).
3. For values of 8 other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
4. Plus and minus signs signiiy pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and m:gative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a I 0% ofleast horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
L Horizontal dimension ofhuilding, measured in along wind direction, m
Figure 207E.8-1
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Monoslope Free Roofs,() ::; 45°, 0.25::; h/ L ::; 1.0
Open Buildings

1-·-- L ---1·1
3
2 2
2
1 1
2
3 lllll/ll/ll/7777/ll/l
Roof Effective c"

8 Zone3 Zone2 Zone l Zone3 Zone2 Zone t
< a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 l -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> az, 1.2 -l.l 0.5
oo < 4.0a2
1.8 -l.7 1.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 -1.2
> 4.0a 2 1.2 - I.I 1.2 -l.l 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
< a2 2.2 -3.6 l.7 -1.8 I.I -1.2 l -5. l 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
> az, I.I -1.2 0.5 -1.7
7.5() 1.7 -l.8 1.7 -1.8 0.8 -2.6 0.8 -2.6
2
< 4.0a
> 4.0a 2 J.1 -1.2 1.2 -1.2 l.l -1.2 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7
< a2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 I.I -1.l l -3.2 o_8 -2.4 0.5 . 1.6
> a2, 1.1 -l.l 0.5 -1.6
15 11 1.7 -l.7 1.7 -1.7 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 I. I -l.l 1.1 -l.l l.l - 1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
< a2 2_6 -1.8 2 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 l -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> az, 1.3 -0.9 -1-.8 0.5 -1.2
30° 2 -l .4 2 -1.4 0.8 -1.8 0.8
< 4.0a2
> 4_0a2 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -l.2
< a2 2.2 -1.6 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 I -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> a:z, 1.1 -0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45° 1.7 -1.2 1.7 -1.2 0.8 -1.8 0.8
< 4.0a 2
> 4.0a 2 I.I -0.8 1.1 -0.8 l.l -0.8 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Notes:
1. CN <lcnotes net pressures (contributions Ii-om !op and bo"om surfaces).
2. Cleur wind flow denotes rt:latively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind now (>50% blockage).
3. For values of 8 other than those shown, linear interpolation is pennitled.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the lop roof surface, respectively.
5. Components and cladding clements shall he designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Nolalion:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0. 4h, wltichever is ~ma lier hut not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m. Dimension
''a" is as shown in Figure 207E.8- 1.
L Horizontal dimension of building, measured io along wind direction, m
9 angle nf plane of roof Ii-om horizoutal, 0
Figure 207E.8-2
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Pitched Free Roofs,() :::; 4-5°, 0.25:::; h/ L S 1.0
Open Buildings

e > 10°
i -- - - L - - -- L
3
2
2
t
1 I h
1 1
2
2 ! l/7///lllllllll//ll/l
3 3
Roof Effective CIIJ

8 Zone3 Zone2 Zone 1 Zone3 Zone2 Zone l
:::; a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 I -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
oo > a2, 1.2 -1.l 0.5
-1.2
l.8 -1.7 l.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 l.2 -1.1 1.2 -l.l 1.2 -I. I 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
:::; a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 l.2 -1.l I -4.8 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
> a2, -1.7
1.2 -I.I
0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4
0.5 -1.6
7.5° < 4.0a2
l.8 -1.1 1.8
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.l 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
:::; a2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -l.7 1.1 -I.I l -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> a2, 1.1 -1.l -1.8 0.5 -1.2
15° < 4.0a2
1.7 -1.7 l.7 -1.7 0.8 -1.8 0.8
> 4.0a2 1.1 -I.I I.I -l.l l.l -1.l 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
~
a2 1.8 -2.6 l.4 -2 0.9 -1.3 I -2.8 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -1.4
> a2, 0.9 -1.3 -2.l 0.5 -1.4
30° l.4 -2 l.4 -2 0.8. -2. l 0.8
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -l.3 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -l.4 0.5 - l.4
< a2 1.6 -2.2 l.2 -1.7 0.8 -1.1 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> a2, 0.8 -l.l -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45° 1.2 -1.7 l.2 -l.7 0.8 -1.8 0.8
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 0.8 -l.l 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -l.l 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Notes:
I. CN denotes net pressures (contribmions from top and hotlom surfaces).
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind llow with blockage less than or equal lo 50%. Obslructcd wind flow denotes objects below roof
inhibiling wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of 9 other than those shown, linear interpolation is pennitled.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, n:spectively.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
Dimension "a" is as shown i11 Figure 207E.R- I.
L Horizontal dimension of building, measured in along wind direction, m
8 angle of plane of roof from horizonlal, 0
Figure 207E.8-3
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Troughed Free Roofs, () ~ 45°, 0.25~ h/ L ~ 1.0
Open Buildings
2-178 CHAPTER 2 - Mmimum Design Loads
Windward parapet Leeward parapet

Load Case A Load Case B Top parapet
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
I. Windward parapet pressure (p 1) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p5 ) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p 2 ) is determined using the negative roof pressure (p 7 ) zones 2 or 3 from the applicable figure.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
I. Windward parapet pressure (p3 ) is determined using the positive wall pressure (p5 ) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (p 4 ) is detcnnined using the negative wall pressure (p6 ) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
User Note:
See Note 5 in Figure 207E.4-2A and Note

7 in Figure 207£.6-1 for reductions in
component and cladding roof pressures
when parapets 0. 9 m or higher are
present.
Figure 207E.9-1
Parapet Wind Loads C&C - Part 6, All Building Heights All Building Types

Notes:
I. Net roof pressure p 0 .,11 on roof overhangs is detennined from interior, edge or comer zones as applicable from figures.
2. Net pressure Povh from figures includes pressure contribution from top and bottom surfaces of roof overhang.
3. Positive pressure at roof overhang soffit Ps is the same as adjacent wall pressure p..,.
Figure 207E. l0-I

Wind Loading- Roof Overhangs, C&C, All Building Heights All Building Types

? ·wo Cl 1/\['TH~ 2 Mi11illtllll1 De: inn I O:"!d~;
207F Wind Tunnel Procedure accelerations. Each <?{these models, together with a mode{
of the surroundings (proximity model), can provide
Wind tunnel testing is spec(fied when a sti-ucture contains information other than wind loads, such as snow loud~ on
any 1?{ the characteristics d4ined in Sections 207B. J.3, complex roofs, wind data to evaluate environmental impact
207C.l.3, 207D.l.3, m· 207£.1.3 or when the designer on pedestrians, and concentrations of air-pollutant
wishes to more accurately determine the wind load~. For emissions for environmental impact determinations.
some building shapes wind tunnel testing can reduce the Several references provide detailed information and
conservatism due to enveloping of wind loads inherent in guidance fur the determination of wind load~ and other
the Directional Procedure, Envelope Procedure, or types of design data by wind tunnel tests (Cermak 1.977,
Analytical Procedure/or Components and Cladding. Also, Reinhold 1982, ASCE 1999, and Boggs and Peterka 1989).
wind tunnel testing accounts for shielding or channeling
and can more accurately determine wind loads for a Wind tunnel tests frequently measure wind loads that are
complex building shape than the Directional Procedure, sign{ficantly lower than required by Sections 207A, 207/J,
Envelope Procedure, or Analytical Procedure for 207C. 207D, and 207£ due to the shape ofthe building. the
Components and Cladding. It is the intent of the code that likelihood that the highest wind speeds occur at directions
any building or other structure be allowed to use the wind where the building's shape or pressure coefficients are less
tunnel testing method to determine wind loads. than their maximum values, specffic buildings included in
Requirements for proper testing are given in Section a detailed proximity model that may provide shielding in
207F.2. excess of that implied by exposure categories, and
necessary conservatism in enveloping load coefficients in
It is common practice to resort to wind tunnel tests when Sections 207C and 207£. In some cases, adjacent
design data are required for the following wind-induced structures may shield the structure sufficiently that
loads: removal of one or two structures could significantly
increase wind loads. Additional wind tunnel testing withow
J. Curtain wall pressures resulting fi·om irregular specific nearby buildings (or with additional buildings if
geomet,y. they might cause increased loads through channeling or
!JU/feting) is an effective method for determining the
2. Across-wind and/or torsional loads. influence ofadjacent buildings.
3. Periodic load~ caused by vortex shedding. For this reason, the code limits the reduction that can be
accepted from wind tunnel tests to fW percent ofthe result
4. Loads resulting from instabilities, such as .flutter or obtained from Part I 1?{Section 2078 or Part I of Section
galloping. 207C, or Section 207£, if the wind tunnel proximity model
included any specific infl.uential buildings or other objects
Boundary-layer wind tunnels capohle of developing .flows that, in thejudgment ofan experienced wind engineer. are
that meet the conditions stipulated in Section 207F.2 likely to have substantially if!fluenced the results heyond
1ypically have test-section dimensions in the .following those characteristic of the general surroundings. ff there
ranges: width of2 to 4 m, height of2 to 3 m, and length of are any such buildings or objects, supplemental testing can
15 to 30 m. Maximum wind speeds are ordinarily in the be performed to quantify their effect on the original results
range of IO to 45 mis. The wind tunnel may he either an and possibly justify a limit lower than 80 percent, by
open-circuit or closed cil'cuit type. removing them from the detailed proximity model and
replacing them with characteristic ground roughness
Three basic types ofwind-tunnel test models are commonly consistent with the adjacent roughness. A specific
used. These are designated as follows: (1) rigid Pressure influential building or object is one wilhin the detailed
Model (PM), (2) rigid high-frequency base balance model proximity model that protrudes well above its
(H-FBBM), and (3) Aero-elastic Model (AM). One or more surroundings, or is unusually close to the subject building,
<f the models may be employed to obtain design load~ for or may otherwise cause substantial sheltering ~[feet or
a particular building or structure. The PM provides local magnification ofthe wind loads. When these supplemental
peak pressures for design <?{ elements, such as cladding test results are included with the original results, the
~r
and mean pressures, for the determination overall mean acceptable results are then considered to be the higher of
both conditions.
loads. The H-FBBM measures overall fluctuating load~
(aerodynamic admillance) for the determination of
dynamic responses. When motion ofa building or structure However, the absolute minimum reduction permitled is 65
influences the wind loading, the AM is employed.for direct percent ofthe baseline result for components and cladding,
measurement of overall loads, deflections. and and 50 percent/or the main windforce resisting system. A
higher reduction is permitted for MWFRS, because
Association of Slructural Enginee1s of thP. Philiµpine:,. Inc. (ASEP)

CHAI-> I t--1~ ? - Mi11irnt1rn l"lesiqn L nm Is ). .. JH 1
components and cladding loadf are more subject lo 207F.1 Scope

changes due to local channeling effects when surroundings
change and can easily be dramatically increased when a The Wind Tunnel Procedure shall be used where required
new adjacent building is constructed It is also recognized by Sections 2078.1.3, 207C. I .3, and 207D. I .3. The Wind
that c/addingfaifures are much more common than failures Tunnel Procedure shall be permitted for any building or
Qf the MWFRS. In addition, for the case of MWFRS it is structure in lieu of the design procedures specified in
easily demonstrated that the overall drag coefficient for Scclion 2078 (MWFRS for buildings of all heights and
certain common building shapes. such as circular simple diaphragm buildings with h ~ 49 m, Section 207C
cylinders especially with rounded or domed tops, is one- (MWFRS oflow-rise buildings and simple diaphragm low-
ha(f or less of the drag coefficient for the rec/angular risc buildings), Section 207D (MWFRS for all other
prisms that form the basis of Section 207B, 207C, and structures), and Section 207E (components and cladding
207E. for all building types and other structures).
For components and cladding, the BO-percent limit is

defined by the interior zones 1 and 4 in Figures 207£.4-1, User Note:
207E.4-2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207£.4-3, 207£.4-4,
207E.4-5A, 207E.4-5B, 207£.4-6, 207£.4-7, and 207£.5- Section 207F ml~V always be used for determining wind
1. This limitation recognizes that pressures in the edge pressures for the MWFRS and/or for C&C of any
zones are the ones most likely to be reduced by the specific building or structure. This method is considered to
geomet1J1 of real buildings compared to the rectangular produce the most accurate wind pressures of any
prismatic buildings assumed in Section 207E. Therefore, method specified in this Code.
pressures in edge and corner zones are permitted to be as
low as 80 percenl of the interior pressures from Section 207F.2 Test Conditions
207E without the supplemental tests. The 80 percent limit
based on zone 1 is directly applicable to all roofareas, and Wind tunnel tests, or similar tests employing fluids other
the 80 percent limit based on zone 4 is directly applicable than air, used for the determination of design wind loads
to all wall areas. for any building or other structure, shall be conducted in
accordance with this section. Tests for the determination of
The limitation on MWFRS loads is more complex because mean and fluctuating forces and pressures shall meet all of
the load effects (e.g., member stresses or forces, the following conditions:
deflections) at any point are !he combined effect ofa vector
ofapplied loads instead ofa simple scalar value. in general I. The natural aunospheric boundary layer has been
the ratio of forces or moments or torques (force modeled tq account for the variation of wind speed
eccentricity) at various floors throughout the building with height.
using a wind tunnel study will not be the same as those
ratios determined from Sections 207B and 207C, and 2. The relevant macro-(integral) lcnglh and micro-length
therefore comparison between the two methods is not well scales of the longitudinal component of atmospheric
defined. Requiring each load effect.from a wind funnel test lurbulence are modeled to approximately the same
to be no less than 80 percent of the same e_ffect resulting st:ale as that used to model the building or structure.
from Sec/ions 207B and 207C is impractical and
unnecessarily complex and detailed, given the approximate 3. The modeled building or other structure and
nature of the 80 percent value. instead, the intent of the surrounding structures and topography are
limitation is effectively implemented by applying it only to geometrically similar to their full-scale counterpa,ts,
a simple index that characterizes the overall loading. For except lhat, for low-rise buildings meeting the
.flexible (!all) buildings, the most descriptive index c?[ requirements of' Section 207C. I .2, tests shall be
overall loading is the base overturning moment. For other permitted for the modeled building in a single
buildings, the overturning moment can be a poor exposure site as defined in Section 207A.7.3.
characterization ofthe overall loading, and the base shear
is recommended instead 4. The projected area of the modeled building or other
structure and surroundings is less than 8 percent of the
test section cross-sectional area unless co1Tection is
made for blockage.
5. The longitudinal pressure gradient in the wind tunnel

test section is accounted for.
Ndtional Structural Code of the Philiµpines Volume I. 7th Edition. 2015

6. Reynolds number effects on pressures and forces arc Database·Assisted Design. Wind-tunnel aerodynamics
minimized. databases that contain records of pressures measured
synchronously al large numbers of locations on the
?°. Response characteristics of the wind tunnel exterior surface ofbuilding models have been developed by
instrumentation are consistent with the required wind researchers, e.g., Simiu et al. (2003) and Main and
measurements. Fritz (2006). Such databases include data that permit a
designer to determine, without specific wind tunnel tests
207F.3 Dynamic Response wind-induced forces and moments in Main Wind Fore;
Resisting Systems and Components and Cladding of
Tests for the purpose of dctennining the dynamic response selected shapes and sizes ofbuildings. A public domain set
of a building or other structure shall be in accordance with of such databases, recorded in tests conducted at the
Section 207F.2. The structural model and associated University of Western Ontario (Ho et al. 2005 and St.
analysis shall account for mass distribution, stiffness, and Pierre et al. 2005) for buildings with gable roofs is
damping. available on the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) website: www.nist.gov/wind.
207F.4 Load Effects Interpolation softwarefor buildings with similar shape and
with dimensions close to and intermediate between those
207F.4.1 Mean Recurrence Intervals of Load Effects included in the set of databases is also available on that
site. Because the database results are for generic
The load effect required for Strength Design shall be surroundings as permilled in item 3 of Section 207F.2,
determined for the same mean recurrence interval as for the interpolation or extrapolation from these databases should
Analytical Method, by using a rational analysis method, be used only if condition 2 of Section 2078.I.2 is true.
defined in the recognized literature, for combining the Extrapolations from available building shapes and sizes
directional wind turmel data with the directional are not permitted, and interpolations in some instances
meteorological data or probabilistic models based thereon. may not be advisable. For these reasons. the guidance of
The load effect required for Allowable Stress Design shall an engineer experienced in wind loads on buildings and
be equal to the load effect required for Strength Design familiar with the usage ofthese databases is recommended
divided by l.6. For buildings that are sensitive to possible All databases must have been obtained using testing
variations in the values of the dynamic parameters, methodology that meets the requirements for wind tunnel
sensitivity studies shall be required to provide a rational testing specified in Section 207F.
basis for design recommendations.
207F.4.3 Limitations on Loads
Commentary:
Loads for the main wind force resisting system determined
Examples of analysis methods for combining directional by wind tunnel testing shall be limited such that the overall
wind tunnel data with the directional meteorological data principal loads in the x and y directions are not less than 80
or pmbabilistic models based thereon are described in percent of those that would be obtained from Part I of
Lepage and lnvin (1985), Rigato et al. (2001), isyumov et Section 2078 or Part I of Section 207C. The overall
al. (2003), lnvin et al. (2005), Simiu and Filliben (2005). principal load shall be based on the overturning moment
and Simiu and Miyata (2006). for flexible buildings and the base shear for other bui Idings.
207F.4.2 Limitations on Wind Speeds Pressures for components and cladding determined by
wind tunnel testing shall be limited to not less than 80
The wind speeds and probabilistic estimates based thereon percent of those calculated for Zone 4 for walls and Zone
shall be subject to the limitations described in Section l for roofs using the procedure of Section 207E. These
Zones refer to those shown in Figures 207E.4- l, 207E.4-
207A.5.3.
2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207E.4-3, 207£.4-4, 207E.4-
5A, 207E.4-5B, 207E.4-6, 207E.4-7, and 207E.6-I.
Commentary:
The limiting values of 80 percent may be reduced to 50
Section 207F.4.2 specifies that the statistical methods used
percent for the main wind force resisting system and 65
to analyze historical wind speed and direction data for
percent for components and cladding if either of the
wind tunnel studies shall be subject to the same limitations
specified in Section 207F.4.2 that apply to the Analytical following conditions applies:
Method.

I. There were no specific influential buildings or objects

within the detailed proximity model.
2. Loads and pressures from supplemental tests for all

significant wind directions in which specific
influential buildings or objects are replaced by the
roughness representative of the adjacent roughness
condition, but not rougher than exposure B, are
included in the test results.
207F.S Wind-Borne Debris
Glazing in buildings in wind-borne debris regions shall be

protected in accordance with Section 207 A. I0.3.

?.· 181\ Cl 1/\PTER 2 · Minimum Design Loc1c1s
SECTION208 that portion of the base shear, V, considered

EARTHQUAKE LOADS concentrated at the lop of the structure in addition
to F 11
208.l General lateral force at Level i for use in Equation 208-
14
208. l.l Purpose g acceleration due to gravity= 9 .815 m/sec 2
h;, hn, hx = height above the base to Level i, n or x,
The purpose of the succeeding earthquake provisions is respectively, m
primarily lo design seismic-resistant structures to I importance factor given in Table 208-1
safeguard against major structural damage that may lead lo IP importance factor for nonstructural component as
loss of life and property. These provisions are not intended given in Table 208-1
to assure zero-damage to structut'es nor maintain their L live load
functionality after a severe earthquake. Level i level of the structure refoned to by the
subscript i
208.1.2 Minimum Seismic Design "i 1" designates the first level above the base
Level n that level that is uppermost in the main
Structures and portions thercor shall, as a minimum, be portion of the structure
designed and constructed to resist the effects of seismic Level x that level that is under design consideration
ground motions as provided in this section. "x I" designates the first level ahove the base
M maximum moment magnitude
208.l.3 Seismic and Wind Design Na near-source factor used in the determination of Ca
in Seismic Zone 4 related lo both the proximity of
When the code-prescribed wind design produces greater the building or structure to known faults with
effects, the wind design shall govern, but detailing magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-4 and 208-5
requirements and limitations prescribed in this section and Nv near-source factor used in the detenniuation of C11
referenced sections shall be made to govern. in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the proximity of
the building or structure to known faults with
208.2 Detinitions magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-4 and 208-6
Pl plasticity index of soil determined in accordance
Sec Section 202. with approved national standards
R numerical coefficient representative of the inherent
208.3 Symbols and Notations over-strength and global ductility capacity of
lateral-force-resisting systems, as set forth in Tahle
A8 ground floor area of structure to include area 208-11 or208-12
covered by all overhangs and projections, m2 r a ratio used in determining p~· - the
A, the combined effective area of the shear walls in redundancy/reliability factor. See Section 208.5.
the f.irst storey of the structure, m2 SA,5 8 ,Sc,So,SE,SF = soil profile types as set forth
Ae the minimum cross-sectional area in any in 'fable 208-2
horizontal plane in the first storey of a shear wall, T elastic fundamental period of vibration of the
m2 structure in the direction under consideration,
Ax the torsional amplification factor at Level x sec
a11 numerical coefficient specified in Section 208.7 V base shear given by Equations. 208-8, 208-9,
and set forth in Table 208-13 208-10, 208-11 or 208-15
Ca seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208-7 Vx the design storey shear in Storey x
Ct numerical coefficient given in Section 208.5.2.2 W = the total seismic dead load defined in Section
Cv seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208-8 208.5.2.l
D dead load = that portion of W located at or assigned to
De the length of a shear wal I in the first storey in the Level i or x, respectively
direction parallel to the applied forces, m = the weight of an element or component
E,Eh,Em,Ev = earthquake loads scl forth in Section = the weight of the diaphragm and the clement
208.6 tributary thereto at Level x, including applicable
Fx design seismic force applied to Level i, n or x, portions of other loads defined in Section
respectively 208.6.1
Fp design seismic force on a part of the structure z seismic zone factor as given in Table 208-3
Fpx design seismic force on a diaphragm

.
Cl·l!\f)TER 2 Minin1L1rn Dc-isig n Loc1cls 2 185
= Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, 208.4.2 Occupancy Categories I

which is the total drift or total storey dritl that I
occurs when the structure is subjected to the For purposes or earthquake-resistant des ign, each structure I
Design Basis Ground Motion, including shall be placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in
I
estimated elastic and inelastic contributions to Table I03-1. Table 208-1 assigns importancc factors, I and
the total deformation dclinc<l in Section Ip, and structural observation requirements for each
208.6.4.2, mm category.
Design Level Response Displacement, which is i
the total drifl or total storey drift that occurs Table 208-1 - Seismic Importance factors
when the structure is subjected to the design
seismic forces, mm Seismic Seismic
Occupancy
= horizontal displacement at Level i relative to the Importance Importance 2
Category I
base due to applied lateral fon.:es, ft, for use in Factor, I Factor, /7)
Equation 208-14, mm I. Essential I
1.50 1.50
p Redundancy/Reliability Factor given by Facilities J
Equation 208-20 II. Hazardous
1.25 1.50
Seismic :force Amplification Factor, which is Facilities
required to account for structural over-strength III. Special
and set forth in Table 208-11 Occupancy l.00 1.00
I
Structures
I
208.4 Basis for Design IV. Standard
Occupancy 1.00 l.00
208.4.1 General Structures
v. Miscellaneous l.00 LOO I
The procedures and the limitations for the design of structures
structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning, I See Table W3-J .fhr occupancy catego ry listing
site characteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural 2
The limitation (![ 11> for panel connections in Section
system and height in accordance with this section.
Structures shall be designed with adequate strength to 208. 7.2.3 shall be 1.0.for the entire connector
3 Structural observation requirements a re given in Section
withstand the lateral displacements induced by the Design
Basis Ground Motion, considering the inelastic response of 107. 9
the structure an<l the inherent redundancy, over-strength ' Fnr anchorage ofmachinery and equipmenf required/or
and ductility of the lateral force-resisting system. life-so/ety syst~ms, the value of Ip shaII be taken as 1.5 I
The minimum design strength shall be based on the Design 208.4.3 Site Geology and Soil Charactcristics
Seismic Forces detcmlincd in accordance with the static
lateral force procedure of Section 208.5, except as Each site shall be assigned a soil profiIle type based on
modified by Section 208.5.3.5.4. properly substantiated geotechnical da ta using the site
categorization procedure set forth in Section 208.4.3.1.l
Where strength design is used, the load combinations of and Table 208-2.
Section 203.3 shall apply. Where Allowable Stress Design
is used, the load combinations of'Section 203.4 shall apply. Exception:
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail
Allowable Su·ess Design may be used to evaluate sliding
or ove11uming at the soil-structure interface regardless of to determine the soil profile type, Type S O shall be used
the design approach used in the design of the structure, Soil Profile Type SE or SF need not be assumed unless the
provided load combinations of Section 203.4 arc utilized. building official determines that Type S I! ors,, may be
present at the site or in the event that Type SE or SF is
established by geotechnical data.
Nationo1I Structural Code of the Pt1ilippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
I
208.4.3.1 Soil Profile Type 5. The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil Profile
Type SF requiring site-specific evaluation shall be
Soil Profile Types SA, S 8 , Sc, Sv and SE are defined in considered. If the site corresponds to these criteria, the
Table 208-2 and Soil Profile Type SF is defined as soils site shall be classified as Soil Profile Types, and a
requiring site-specific evaluation as follows: site-specific evaluation shall be conducted.
1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under 208.4.3.l.1 Site Categorization Procedure
seismic loading, such as liquefiable soils, quick and
highly sensitive clays, and collapsible weakly 208.4.3.1.1.1 Scope
cemented soils.
This section describes the procedure for detennining Soil
2. Peats and/or highly organic clays, where the thickness Profile Types SA through SF as defined in Table 208-2.
of peat or highly organic clay exceeds 3.0 m.
3. Very high plasticity clays with a plasticity index, Pl>

75, where the depth of clay exceeds 7.5 m.
4. Very thick soft/medium stiff clays, where the depth of

clay exceeds 35 m.
Table 208-2 - Soil Profile Types
A verae:e Soil Properties for Ton 30 rn of Soil Protilc
Undrained
Soil Profile Soil Profile Name I Generic
Shear Wave Velocity, SPT, N (blows/ Shear
Type Description
Vs (m/s) 300mm) Strength, Su
(kPa)
SA Hard Rock > 1500
Ss Rock 760 to 1500

Sr. Very Dense Soil and Soft Rock 360 to 760 > 50 > 100
Sn Stiff Soil Profile 180 to 360 15 to 50 50 to 100
s,,1 Soft Soil Profile < 180 < 15 <50
Soil Requiring Site-specific Evaluation.
Sp See Section 208.4.3.1
I Soil Profile Type SE also includes any soil profile with more than 3. 0 m ofsoft clay defined as a soil with plasticity index,
Pl> 20, Wmc ~ 40% and Su< 24 kPa. The Plasticity Index, Pl, and the moi.~ture content, Wine, shall be determined
in accordance with approved national standards.
A soil profile with V 8 < 180 m/s or any

208.4.3.1.1.2 Definitions
profile with more than 3 m of soft clay defined
as soil with Pl> 20, Wmc ~ 40 percent and
Soil profile types are defined as follows:
Su< 25 kPa
Soils requiring site-specific evaluation, refer to
SA Hard rock with measured shear wave velocity,
Section 208.4.3.1
Vs> 1500m/s
S8 Rock with 760 m/s < v 5 $ 1500 m/s
Sc Very dense soil and soft rock with 360 m/s <
Vs< 760 m/s or with either N > 50 or Su~
100kPa
SO Stiff soil with 180 m/ s $ vs $ 360 m/ s or
with 15 $ N $ 50 or 50 kPa $ Su $
100 kPa

208.4.3.1.l.2.1 Vs, Average Shear Wave Velocity 208.4.3.1.1.2.4 Rock Profiles, SA and S8
vs shall be determined in accordance with the following The shear \~ave velocity for rock, Soil Profile Type s8 ,
equation: shall be either measured on site or estimated by a
geotechnical engineer, engineering geologist or
seismologist for competent rock with moderate fracturing
(208-1) and weathering. Softer and more highly fractured and
weathered rock shall either be measured on site for shear
wave velocity or classified as Soil Profile Type Sc.
where
di thickness of Layer i , m The hard rock, Soil Profile Type SA, category shall be
v si shear wave velocity in Layer i , mis supported by shear wave velocity measurement either on
site or on profiles of the same rock type in the same
208.4.3.1.1.2.2 N, Average Field formation with an equal or greater degree of weathering
Standard Penetration Resistance and and fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known to
N ch, Average Standard Penetration be continuous to a depth of 30 m, surficial shear wave
Resistance for Cohesionless Soil velocity measurements may be extrapolated to assess Vs.
Layers The rock categories, Soil Profile Types SA and S 8 , shall
not be used if there is more than 3 meters of soil between
N and Nch shall be determined in accordance with the the rock surface and the bottom of the spread footing or mat
following equation: foundation.
The definitions presented herein shall apply to the upper

30 m of the site profile. Profiles containing distinctly
(208-2) different soil layers shalt be subdivided into those layers
designated by a number from 1 to n at the bottom, where
there are a total of n distinct layers in the upper 30 m. The
ds symbol i then refer to any one of the layers between I and
Nch = d (208-3) n.
"'4-l=t
11 Nl·
I
where 208.4.3.1.1.2.5 Soft Clay Profile, SE
thickness of Layer i in mm The existence of ii. total thickness of soft clay greater than
the total thickness of cohesionless soil layers 3 m shall be investigated where a soft clay layer is defined
in the top 30 m by Su < 24 kPa, Wmc ~ 40 percent and Pl > 20. If
the standard penetration resistance of soil these criteria are met, the site shall be classified as Soil
layer in accordance with approved nationally Profile Type SE.
recognized standards
208.4.3.1.1.2.6 Soil Proftles Sc, S 0 and SE
208.4.3.1.l.2.3 s 11 , Average Undrained Shear
Strength Sites with Soil Profile Types Sc, SD and SE shall be
classified by using one of the following three methods with
Su shall be determined in accordance with the following Vs, N and Su computed in all cases as specified in Section
equation: 208.4.3. l. I .2.
l. Vs for the top 30 meters (Vs method).

Su = d (208-4)
-'
}::"t= tSut 2. N for the top 30 meters (N method).
where
3. NcH for cohesionless soil layers (Pl< 20) in the top
d, the total thickness (100 - ds) of cohesive 30 m and average Su for cohesive soil layers (PI>
soil layers in the top 30 m 20) in the top 30 m (Su method).
s 1,i the undrained shear strength in accordance
with approved nationally recognized
standards, not to exceed 250 kPa
I
208.4.4 Site Seismic Hazard Characteristics Table 208-4 - Seismic Source Types
Seismic hazard characteristics for the site shall be Seismic Source

established based on the seismic zone and proximity of the Seismic Definition
Seismic Source
site to active seismic sources, site soil profile Source
Description
characteristics and the structure's importance factor. Type Maximum Moment
Magnitude, M
208.4.4.1 Seismic Zone
Faults that arc
The Philippine archipelago is divided into two seismic capable of
zones only. Zone 2 covers the provinces of Palawan producing large
(except Busuanga), Sulu and Tawi-Tawi while the rest of A magnitude events 7.0 ~ M ::; 8.4
the country is under Zone 4 as shown in Figure 208- l. Each and that have a
structure shall be assigned a seismic zone factor Z, in high rate of seismic
accordance with Table 208-3. activity.
Table 208-3 Seismic Zone Factor Z All faults other

B than Types A and 6.S ~ M < 7.0
ZONE 2 4
c.
z 0.20 0.40
Faults that arc not

208.4.4.2 Seismic Source Types capable of
producing large
Table 208-4 defines the types of seismic sources. The magnitude
location and type of seismic sources to be used for design c earthquakes and
M < 6.5
shall be established based on approved geological data; see that have a
Figure 208-2A. Type A sources shall be detennined from relatively low rate
Figure 208-2B, 2C, 2D, 2E or the most recent mapping of of seismic activity.
active faults by the Philippine Institute ofYolcanology and
Seismology (PHIVOLCS). 1Suhduction sources shall be evaluated on a site-
specific basis.

... ......
•
.•• •
•
ZONE4
ZONE2
Figure 208-1 Referenced Seismic Map of the Philippines

National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edilion, 2015
2. rno CHAPTER ?. - Minimum D8sign !..OROS
Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches

in the Phitippines
...
Q
- Earthcium soun:n
.. ...
A~I~• F•utts
-
(j
ti
~ . . . -line·-·-·-
-
~--~
llo&lh · Y - 1 1 -
n,,,,,1om11a...
Conv•,vtnct ZOn•
........ Tton«I
• • • • Co41hllon mM
C11><lllC1!1™"""'"'111y
.. _.......
en _ _ .,_
N
I/II: . . . . . , .....
10<>
A
m
ioo 300
,...
.... ,,.,.
...
.....t
0.
,, .:
...
• ...
of
Figure 208-2A Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in the Philippines

CH/\PT[f~? ~,11111,rnm1 1)1.':;iun 1 o:1rl<; ;! 191
Distribution of Active Faults in

Cordillera Administrative Region (CAR)
l!t.rtllquaka loorce,
A1;Uv1 Faull•
J
_.......
........ aot•NIIWJfl
.._ ]
0Nlled11119·,,..... i.t ..~~
....._
~----C.~I C•ty/Nll.#IICic,lllty
-- -
.-
.-
.- .-
.~
/N
0
C2
10
A
"';;:::,0 ... s
so
Figure 208-2B Distribution of Active Faults in Cordillera Administrative Region (CAR)

\
2-192 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design l.oRds

in Region 1
...,/
_.........,.......
---
-··--OM'IN--. .................
- - - - ll"4,l'd\
I
/
(
:a/
\ -~L- /
,I
/,,,
...
) I
I ,'-
l l
•
N
,.......:e'"'...__.=2wa• ,u>e.•
._.,-~~--
.......•...!!:.:-~
A
Figure 208-2C Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region l

Distribution of Active Faults c1nd Trenches

in Region 2
_.....,..._.~
----
..__
_ °"""".,,_.....
--·""-"-
~
{}.
..... -
•
.....
<O tO
=·....
IO 100
Figure 208-2D Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 2

in Region 4A
:'
i
---·· ~ ..............._..... ..__.._.. 1
,,..,. ... ,,...,.,.

,.,........,.,
\
N
I
!
o,o~JO.Otc>
A
n ••kW• •
&&S4
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 4A

National Structural Code of Hie P!1iliripines Volume l. /tl1 F dition, 2015
(.>
fl
I "'
r z {)'
c.·p·
,/'/
+
1111·
I
pfH ,I I
r }d (
•
•
. / / .
L Ii I
I
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 4B

Distribution of Active Faults in
Region 5
c,.,.........._
...-
~\
\
\ <,
'\ '·'<>
,•,
,.· ........
N
,
A
Figure 208-2£ Distribution of Active Faults in Region 5
Nntional Structural Code uf thfl Pt1ilippines Volume 1, 7th E'dition. 2015

2 Hl8 CHt\PTE:R 2 Mm,mum Oes,un I nacls
Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 6

Eanhquake Sourcu
~I
1;,"'
,.
l
- ·-·--
----
:ldld "'- . tt,ce. ~
....
Convergence lo.,.
..
·.
li
II
I/
0 10
A
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 6
CHAP ITR ;., - Minirnrnn r )m,i~1n 1 nc1rls /- rnq
Distribution of Active Faults in Region 7
--
- - -
• ~ ........... C#W'I
-----
__,. 0
/)D
.-orUEIITAL
'! lO
CJ
A 1' <O
s
60
.... .....
Figure 208-2G Distribution of Active Faults in Region 7
National Struc.;tuml Code of the Philippines VolurnC'l I, ltl1 hlition. ::!01 !i

2· ?.00 c:f 11\PTc l~ ;., . Minirn11111 I )~sign Loml!:i
Distribution of Active Faults in Region 8
E•rthqu•ka Sources
~
Active Faults
8*11oo·-- .. -
~~~
. ~-i · - .... · OuMd Ii,.,.. t1•u It •~prorlm.ile
·. )'-4J..jj~"' App~tirNt• olttl'lore ptojtcllon
C\
~
f\ ~\'\
\) ,, ,
~ HOftfHERNSAMAR
\
\'-~
. ~ .,
I
,0
~ ~ I
A - N
0 10 20 JO so
E!! :;::,ttt, '° 5
Figure 208-2JI Distribution of Active Faults in Region 8
Association of Structurnl [ngi11cers of the Pt1ilippirius. Inc:. (ASl:.P)

CHI\PTFR 2 Minimum Oesiqn Lo~ds 2-201
r .
.0 .
. ·..
,
L. :
'1
\ :,
It
J IH1
liilJ1
II!f
lI I I · I
• I~ '
·J
Figure 208-21 Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Autonomous Region of Muslim Mindanao (ARMM)
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 71h Edition. 2015

Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 9
_____·l'G&·~
Earthqwik• Sourus
,,,.
Acilve F•ullw
...,
r --..-DMlledflii.-
Convergence Z,,.,..
...... t,einua
~-
a
P'JIIYGI.C:J
..___.,,_._, ___
.............I Y I V l , o , ~........ ~ v
M~'!=.~~......
10
A
20
N
30
Figure 208-2J Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 9
tVi:,ocic~tion of Sli'uctu;-al E11qineers of tt1e Plliliµpine~. Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTFR ;> Minimum OP.sign I o:icls ? 20:l
Distribution of Active Fau Its in Region 10
EM1hquake Sou~H
Acfln Fauli.
- • • • llMNd lif'llt • I I ~ hi .a,pc.tN'II

\
AoJ:i,o~o~,-¢t'KllOft
c.....,CII)--
\
- \\
,o
"'=:
A llO <O ...
!223
Figure 208-2K Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region IO
Nationril Struc:lural Code of the Philipµines Volume I. 7th Edition. 20·15

Distribution of Acttve F au Its and Trenches

in Region 11
- - -
.-
\ ,,, ____
t
\1
jj
\
(
\
\ \
•-t ---
Ac11ve Ftillta
·------
- 60lid h - lrtca II CltfUI\
----- 08:ehed ..... -ht.'tl • •p,pt'O. . .
Convef'G9ne. Z.One
~ T.......,
A
==
ID lll JD tO IO
Figure 208-2L Distribution of Active Faults in Region 11
.....
CH!\r'·! L R ;.> - Minimtirn Da:.ign l..o!Jck: :~ 205

in Region 12
1----·-
: ~~P'(f«ta,n
<:onve,geftc• Zort1t
\
..._. ___., _
-i"J
.0 N
• 10
A,,,
J<) .., ..
'-
Figure 208-2M Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 12

Nation;:il Structur<1I Code of the P11ilippines VohmH:~ I. 7th Edition. 20'15
2-206 Cl IArTCR 2 Minimum Of's ign l ORriS

in Region 13
Active Feuhe
\
...·-·-- \
--
··----
COCIV11111"'CI Zone .......... \
\.\
' ...
\ .. \-
\
r:,,
t\
\
\
\
\
\
\
'
.r
l
__... N
A
--
t 10
+1
• JD .. ..
Figure 208-2N Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 13
Association of Strnclural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

.
CllAPffH 2 ·· Minimum DP.sinn l oRds 2··207
I
208.4.4.3 Seismic Zone 4 Near-Source f.ictor 4. The exceptions to Section 515.6.5 shall 1101 apply,
except for columns i none-storey buildings or columns
In Seismic Zone 4, cnch site shall be assigned 11e,1r-source at !he top storey 011 nul!istorcy buildings.
factors in accordance with Tables 208-5 and 208-6 based I
5. None of the follo wing structural irregularities is I
on the Seismic Source Type as set forth in Section
present: Type I, 4 o r 5 of Table 208-9, and Type I or
208.4.4.2.
4 of Table 208-10.
For high rise structures and essential facilities within
208.4.4.4 Seismic Resp onse Coenicients
2.0 km of a major fou It, a site spcci lie seismic elastic design
response spectrum is recommended lo he obtained for the
Each structure shall be assigned a seismic coefficient, Cu,
specific area.
in accordance with Tab!e 208-7 and a seismic coefficient,
I C11 , in accordance with· !'able 208-8. I
Table 208-5 Near-Source Factor Na
Seismic Closest Distance To Table 208-7 Seismic Coefficient, Ca
Source Known Seismic Sourc1? I
Soil Profile Scismk Zone Z
T· e :S 2 km ~ 5 km .2. lOkm
A 1.5 1.2 1.0
Ty1>e z :::: 0.2 Z = 0.4
B 1.3 1.0 1.0 0.16 032Na.
c 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.20 0.40Nn I
0.24 OAONII
1
Table 208-6 Near-Source Factor, Nv 0.28 0.44N,,
0.34 0.44Na
Seismic Closest Distance To
Source Known S~ismic Source2
s,., s'ee Footnote I lJ/Table 208-8
Tye ~ 2km 5km IOkm .2. 15km
A 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.0 Table 208-8 Sc ismie Coefficient, C11
B 1.6 1.2 l.O 1.0 Soil Profile Seismic Zone Z
c 1.0 1.0 l.O 1.0 T ypc
1----
z = 0.2 Z= 0.4
Notesfor Tables 208.5 and 208.6: 0 .16 0.32Nv
The Near-Source Factor may be ba.ied on the Linear ).20 0.40Nv
intetpolation qf values for distances orher than those s 0 .32 0.56Nv
shown in the table. s 0 .40 0.64Nv
2
The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken
s ).64 0.96Nv
Se e Footnote I of Table 208-8
as the minimum distance between the site and 11,e area
described hv the vertical projection of the source on I
Site-specific geotechn ical investi>;ation and dynamic site
the surface (i.e., sw:face projection ofj'ault plane). The response anafysis s hall be pe1jhrmed to determine
swface projection need nor include portions of the seismic coefjicienrs
source at depths of10 km or greater. The largest value
of the Near-Source Factor considering all sources 208.4.S Contiguration Requirements
shall he used.f()r design.
Each su·ucture shall be designated as being structurally
The value or Na used to determine Ca need not exceed 1.1 regular or irregular in accordance with Sections 208.4.5.J
for !-ltruclln·cs complying with all the following conditions: and 208.4.5.2.
I. The soil profile type is SA, 5 8 , Sc or S". 208.4.5.1 Regular Structurcs

2. p = 1. 0.
Regular structures have no significant physical
3. Except in single-storey structures, rcsidcnlial building discontinuities in plan or vertical configuration or in their
accommodating IO or fewer persons, private garages, latcral-forec-rcsisting S),stems such as the irregular features
carports, sheds and agricultural buildings, moment described in Scc!ion 208.4.5.2.
frame systems designated as part of the lateral-force-
resisting system shall be special moment-resisting
frames.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Editio n.2015
'
2-208 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Oosign Loads
208.4.5.2 Irregular Structures Table 208-9 Vertical Structural Irregularities

Reference
I. Irregular structures have significant physical Irregularity Type and Definition
Section
discontinuities in configuration or in their lateral-
force-resisting systems. Irregular features include, but 1. Stiffness Irregularity - Soft
are not limited to, those described in Tables 208-9 and Storey
A soft storey is one in which the
208-10. t\11 structures in occupancy Categories 4 and 208.4.8.3
lati,"Tal stiffness is Jess than 70 % of
5 in Seismic Zone 2 need to be evaluated only for ltem 2
vertical irregularities of Type 5 (Table 208-9) and that in the storey above or less than
horizontal irregularities of Type l (Table 208-10). 80 percent of the average stilTness
of the three stories above.
2. Structures having any of the features listed in Table
208-9 shall be designated as if having a vertical 2. Weight (Mass) Irregularity
irregularity. Mass irregularity shall be
considered to exist where the
208.4.8.3
Exception: effective mass ofany storey is more
Item 2
Where no storey drift ratio under design lateral forces is than 150 % of the eflective mass o f
greater than 1.3 times the storey drift ratio of the storey an adjacent storey: A roof that is
above, the structure may be deemed to not have the Iightcr than the flo or below need
structural irregularities oJType I or 2 in Tobie 208-9. The not be considered.
storey drift ratio for the top two stories need 1101 be 3. Vertical Geometric Irregularity
considered. The storey driftsfl>r this deter111i11t1tion mm1be Vertical geometric irregularity shall
calculated neglecting torsional effects. • be considered to exist where the
horizontal dimension of the lateral- 208.4.8.3
3. Structures having any of the features listed in Table force-resisting system in any storey Item 2
208-10 shall be designated as having a plan is more than 130 % of that in an
in-egularity. adjacent storey. One-storey
cnthouses need not be considered.
4. In-Plane Discontinuity In
Vertical Lateral-Force-Resisting
Element Irregularity 208.5.8.1.5.
An in-plane offset of the Iateral- 1
load-resisting elements greater than
the len lh of those elements.
5. Discontinuity In Capacity -
Weak Storey Irregularity
A weak storey is one io which the
~torey strength is less than 80 % of
that in the storey above. The storey 208.4.9. l
strength is the total strength of all
seismic-resisting elements sharing
the storey for the direction under
consideration.

CHAPTER 2 -- Minimum n0sign L.rn=ids 2-209
Table 208-10 Horizontal Structural Irregularities 208.4.6 Structural Systems

Reference ~truel~iral systems shall be classilic<l us one of the types
Irregularity Type and Definition
Section hstc<l m Table 208-1 I an<l delined in this section.
I. Torsional Irregularity - To Re
Considered When Diaphragms Are 208.4.6.1 Bearing Wall System
Not Flexible
Torsional irregularity shall be A structural system without a complete vertical load-
considered to exist when the 208.7.2.7
carrying space frame. Bearing walls or bracing systems
maximum storey drilt, computed Item 6 provide support for all or most gravity loads. Resistance to
including accidental torsion, at one lateral load is provided by shear walls or braced frames.
end of the structure transverse to an
axis 1s more than 1.2 times the
208.4.6.2 Building Frame System
average of the storey drifts of the two
ends of the structure.
A structural system with an essentially complete space
2. Re-Entrant Corner Irregularity frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to
or
Plan configurations a strncture and
lateral load is provided by shear walls or braced frames.
its lateral-force-resisting system 208.7.2.7
contain re-entrant corners, where both Items 6
208.4.6.3 Moment-Resisting Frame System
projections of the strncture beyond a and 7
re-entrant corner are greater than 15
A structural system with an essentially complete space
% of the plan dimension of the
frame providing support for gravity loads. Moment-
structure in the !!ivcn direction.
resisting frames provide resistance to lateral load primarily
3. Diaphragm Discontinuity
by flexural action of members.
I rrcgu la rity
Diaphragms with abrupt
208.4.6.4 Dual System
discontinuities or vanat1ons in
stiffness, including those having 208.7.2.7
hem 6 A structural system with the following features:
cutout or open areas greater than 50 %
or the gross enclosed area of the
diaphragm, or changes in effective I. An essentially complete space frame that provides
diaphragm stiffness of more than 50 support for gravity loads.
% from one storev to the next. 2. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls or
4. Out-Of-PJane Offsets Irregularity 208.5.8.5. braced frames and moment-resisting frames (SMRF,
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, 1 IMRF, MMRWF or steel OMRF). The momcnl-
such as out-of-plane offsets of the 208.7.2.7 resisting frames shall be designed to independently
vertical elements hem 6; resist at least 25 percent of the design base shear.
5. Non-parallel Systems Irregularity
The vcrlieal lateral-load-resisting 3. The two systems shall be designed to resist the total
design base shear in proportion to their relative
elements arc not parallel to or 208.7.l rigidities considering the interaction of the dual system
symmetric about the major orthogonal
axes of the lateral force-resisting at all levels.
syslems.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume t, 7th Edition, 2015

208.4.6.5 Cantilevered Column System 208.4.8 Selection of Lateral Force Procedure
A structural system relying on cantilevered column Any structure may be, and certain structures defined below
elements for lateral resistance. shall be, designed using the dynamic lateral-force
procedures of Section 208.5.3 .
208.4.6.6 Undefined Structural System
208.4.8.1 Simplified Static
A structural system not listed in Table 208-1 I.
The simplified static lateral-force procedure set forth in
208.4.6.7 Non-building Structural System Section 208.5.1 . i may be used for the fo llowing structures
of Occupancy Category TV or V:
A structural system conforming to Section 208.8 .
I. Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family
208.4.7 Height Limits dwellings) not more than three stories in height
excluding basements that use light-frame construction.
Height limits for the various structural systems in Seismic
Zone 4 arc given in Table 208-1 I. 2. Other buildings not more than two stories in height
excluding basements.
Exception:
Regular structures may exceed these limits by not more 208.4.8.2 Static
than 50 percent for unoccupied stmctures, which are not
accessible to the general public. The static lateral force procedure of Section 208.5 may be
used for the following structures:
1. AIL slructw·es, regular or irregular in Occupancy

Categories IV and V in Seismic Zone 2.
2. Regular structures under 75 min height with lateral

force resistance provided by systems listed in Table
208-11, except where Section 208.4.8.3, Item 4~
applies.
3. Irregular structures not more than five stories or 20 m

in height.
4. Structures having a nexible upper portion i:mpported

on a rigid lower portion where both portions of the
structure considered separately can be classified as
being regular. the average storey stiffness of the l.ower
portion is at least IO times the average storey stiffness
of the upper portion and the period of the entire
structure is not greater than 1.1 Limes the period of the
upper portion considered as a separate structure fixed
at the base.

CHAPTER 2 - MinimlllTI Desil'.)n Loads 2-211
208.4.8.3 Dynamic 208.4.9 System Limitations
The dynamic lateral-force procedure or St.:clion 208.5.3 208.4.9.1 Discontinuity

shall be used for all other structures, including the
following: Structures with a discontinuity in capacity, vertical
in-egularity Type 5 as defined in Table 208-9, shall not be
I. Structures 75 m or more in height, except as permitted over l wo stories or 9 m in height where the weak storey has
by Section 208.4.8.2, Item 1. a calculated strength of less than 65 % of the storey above.
2. Structures having a sliffness, weight or geometric Exception:

ve11ical irregularity of Type 1, 2 or 3, as defined in
Where the weak storey is capable ofresisting a total lateral
Table 208-9, or struclurcs having irregular features not
seismic force of n 0 times the design force prescribed in
described in Table 208-9 or 208-10, cxccpl as
Section 208.5.
permitted by Section 208.4. I 0.3.1.
208.4.9.2 Undefined Structural Systems
3. Structures over five stories or 20 m in height in
Seismic Zone 4 not having the same structural system
For undefined structural systems not listed in Table 208-
throughout their hcighl except as permitted by Section
208.5.3.2. 11, the coefficient R shall be substantiated by approved
cyclic test data and analyses. The following items shall be
4. Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile addressed when establishing R:
Type SF, that have a period greater Lhan 0.7 s. The
analysis shall include the effects of the soils at the site I. Dynamic response characteristics,
and shall confonn to Section 208.5.3.2, hem 4. 2. Lateral force resistance,
Alternative Procedures 3. Over-strength and strain hardening or softening,

208.4.8.4
4. Su·ength and stiffness degradation,
208.4.8.4.1 Genera)
5. Energy dissipation characteristics,
Alternative lateral-force procedures using rational analyses 6. System ductility, and
based on well-established principles of mechanics may be
used in lieu of those prescribed in these provisions. 7. Redundancy.
208.4.9.3 Irregular Features

208.4.8.4.2 Seismic Isolation
Seismic isolation, energy dissipation and damping systems All structures having irregular features described in Table
may be used in the analysis and design of structures when 208-9 or 208-10 shall be designed to meet the additional
requirements of those sections referenced in the tables.
approved by the building official and when special
detailing is used to provide results equivalent to those
obtained by the use of conventional structural systems. 208.4.10 Determination of Seismic Factors
208.4. l 0.1 Determination of n0
For specific elements of the structure, as specifically

identified in this code, the minimum design strength shall
be the product of the seismic force over-strength factor n 0
and the design seismic forces set forth in Section 208.5. For
both Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design, the
Seismic Force Over-strength Factor, n 0 , shall be taken
from Table 208-11.

208.4.10.2 Determination ot R seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 m in height in

Seismic Zone 4.
The value for R shall he taken from Table 208-11.
208.4.10.3.3 Combinations along the Same Axis
208.4.10.3 Combin ations of Structural Systems
Where a combination of different structu ral systems is
Where combinations of structural systems are incorporated utili7.cd to resist lateral forces in the same direction, the
into the same structure, the requirements of th is section value of R used for design in that direction shall not be
shall be satisfied. greater than the least value for any of lhe systems utilized
in that same direction.
208.4.10.3. 1 Vertical Combinations
208.5 Minimum Design Lateral Forces and R elated
The value of R used in the design of any storey shall he less Effects
than or equal to the value of R used in the given direction
for the storey above. 208.5.1 Simp111icd Static Force Procedure
Exception: Structures conforming to the requirements of Section

208.4.8 .1 may be designed using this procedure.
This requirement need not be applied to a storey where the
dead weight above that storey is le1·s than l Opercenl ofthe Simplified J>esign Base Shear
208.5.1.1
total dead weight of the structure.
The total design base shear in a given direction shall be
Structures may be designed using the procedures of this determined from the following equation:
section under the following cond itions:
3Ca
The entire structure is designed using the lowest R of the V= - W (208-5)
lateral force-resisting systems used, or R
l. The following two-stage static analysis proct::dures w here the value or Ca sh all be based on Table 208-7 for the
may be used for structures conforming to Section soil profile type. When the soil properties are not kn own
in sufficient detail to determine the soil pro!ile type, Type
208.4.8.2, Item 4.
1.l The fl exible upper portion shall be designed as a S 0 shall be used in Seismic Zone 4, and Type Si,- shall be
separate structure, supported laterally by the rigid used in Seismic Zone 2. in Seismic Zone 4, the Near-
lower portion., using the appropriate values of R Source Factor, Na, need not be greater than 1.2 if none of
andp. the foll owing structural irregularities arc present:
1.2 The rigid lower portion shall be designed as a 1. Type 1, 4 or 5 of Table 208-9, or
separate slructure using the appropriate va lues of
R and p. The reactions from the upper portion 2. Type 1 or 4 of Table 208-10.
shall be those determined from the analysis of the
upper portion ampIi fied by the ratio of the ( R / ()) 208.5.1.2 Vertical Distribution
of the upper portion over ( R / p ) of the lower
portion. The forces at each level shall be calculated using the
following equation:
208.4. 10.3.2 Combinations along Different Axes
In Seismic Zone 4 where a structure has a bearing wall 3Ca

F x = - R w t· (208-6)
system in only one di rection, the val uc of R used for design
in the orthogonal direction shall not be greater than that
used for the bea.ring wall system. where the value or Ca shall be determined as in Section
208.5.1.1.
Any combination of bearing wall systems, building frame
systems, dual systems or moment-resisting frame systems
may be used to resist seismic forces in structures less than
50 m in height. Only combinations of dual systems and
special moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist

208.5.1.3 llorizontal Distribution of Shear where

the average of the displacements at the
The design storey shear, Vx, in any storey is the sum of the
extreme points of the stmcture at Level x,
forces Ft and Fx above that storey. V x shall be distributed
mm
to the various elements of the vertical lateral force-resistino
. . "' the maximum displacement at Level x,
system m proportion to their rigidities, considering the
mm
rigidity or the diaphragm. Sec Section 208.7 .2.3 for rigid
elements that arc not intended to be part of the lateral foree-
The value of Ax need not exceed 3.0
resisting systems.
208.5.1.5 Overturning
Where diaphragms are not flexible, the mass at each level
shall be assumed to be displaced from the calculated center
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning
of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5 percent of
effects caused by earthquake forces specified in Section
the building dimension al that level perpendicular to the
208.5.2.3. At any level, the overturning moments to be
direction of the force under consideration. The effect of
resisted shall be determined using those seismic forces (Ft
this displacement on the storey shear distribution .shall be
and F x) that act on levels above the level under
considered.
consideration. At any level, the incremental changes of the
design overturning moment shall be distributed to the
Diaphragms shall be considered flexible for t11e purposes
various resisting elements in the manner prescribed in
of distribution of storey shear and torsional moment when
Section 208.5.1.3. Overturning effects on every element
the maximum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more
shall be carried down to the foundation. Sec Sections 207.1
than two times the average storey drift of the associated
and 208.7 for combining gravity and seismic forces.
storey. This may be determined by comparing the
computed midpoint in-plane deflection of the diaphragm
itself under lateral load with the storey drift of adjoining 208.S.l.S.l Elements Supporting Discontinuous
vertical-resisting ch.:mcnts under equivalent tributary
Systems
lateral load.
208.5.1.5. 1.1 General
208.S.l.4 Horizontal Torsional Moments
Where any portion of the lateral load-resisting system is
Provisions shall he made for the increased shears resultino discontinuous, such as for vertical irregularity Type 4 in
0
Table 208-9 or plan i1Tegularity Type 4 in Table 208-10,
from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not flexible.
concrete, masonry, steel and wood elements supporting
The most severe load combination for each clement shall
such discontinuous
. systems shall have the <lesion strength
be considered for design. ~
to resist the comhination loads resulting from the special
seismic load combinations of Section 203.5.
The torsional design moment at a given storey shall be the
moment resulting from eccentricities between applied
de.sign lateral forces at levels above that storey and the
Exceptions:
vertical-resisting elements in that storey plus an accidental I. The quantity Ern in Section 208.6 need not exceed the
torsion. maximum force that can be transferred to the element
by the lateralforce-resisting system.
The a~cidental torsional moment shall be detennined by
assummg the mass is displaced as required by Section 2. Concrete slabs supporting light-frame wood shear
208.5.1.3.
wall .vystems or light-frame steel and wood structural
panel shear wall systemv.
Where torsional irregularity exists, as defined in Table
208-10, the effects shall be accounted for by increasing the For Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
dete1mined using an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
accidental .torsion at each level by an amplification factor,
Ax, determined from the following equation: resistance factor, </), of 1.0. This increase shall not be
combined with the one- third stress increase pemlitted by
Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
2
load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
Ax= 011wx (208-7)
' [ 1. 20a-vg]

208.5.1.5. 1.1.2 Detailing requirements in Seismic 208.S. t .6 Applicability

Zonc4
Sections 208.6.2, 208.6.3, 208.5.2.1, 208.5.2.2, 208.5.2.3,
In Seismic Zone 4, elements supporting discontinuous 208.6.4, 208.6.5 and 208.5.3 shall not apply when using the
systems shall meet the tallowing detailing or member simplified procedure.
limitations:
Exception:
I. Reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry elements For buildings with relatively .flexible structural systems,
designed primarily as axial-load members shall the building qfjicial may require consideration of Pt::.
comply with Scction 421.4.4.5. effects and drift in accordance with Sections 208.6.3.
208.6.4 and 208.6.5. !J.5 shall be determined using design
2. Reinforced concrelc elements designed primarily as seismic forces from Section 208.5. I.I.
flexural members and supporting other than light-
frame wood shear wall system or light-frame steel and Where used, 1::.111 shall be taken equal to 0.01 times the
wood structural panel shear wall systems shall comply storey height of all stories. In Section 208.7.2.7,
with Sections 421.3.2 and 421.3.3. Strength 3C
computations for portions of slabs designed as Equation 208-22 shall read Fpx = 7Wpx and need not
supporling elements shall include only those p01tions exceed CaWpx, but shall not he less than 0. 5CaWpx· R and
of the slab that comply with the requirements of these .n0 shall be taken from Table 208- l l.
sections.
208.5.2 Static Force Procedure
3. Masonry elements designed primarily as axial-load
carrying members shall comply with Sections 208.5.2.1 Design Base Shear
706.1.12.4, Item I, and 708.2.6.2.6.
The total design base shear in a given direclion shall be
4. Masonry clements designed primarily as flexural determined from the following e4uation:
members shall comply with Section 708.2.6.2.5.
5. Steel elements designed primarily as axial-load (208-8)

members shall comply with Sections 515.4.2 and
515.4.3.
The total design base shear need not exceed the following:
6. Steel elements designed primarily as flexural members
or trusses shall have bracing for both top and bottom
beam flanges or chords at the location of the support (208-9)
of the discontinuous system and shall comply with the
requirements of Section 515.6.l.3.
The total design base shear shall not be less than the
7. Wood elemenls designed primarily as flexural following:
members shall he provided with lateral bracing or
solid blocking at each end of the element and at the
connection location(s) of the discontinuous system. V =0.11C 4 lW (208-10)
208.5.1.5.2 At Foundation In addition, for Seismic Zone 4, Lhe total base shear shall
also not be less than the following:
See Sections 208.4.1 and 308.4 for overturning moments
to be resisted at the foundation soil interface.
0. 8ZNvl
V= W (208-11)
R
...........
'
208.5.2.2 Structure Period distribution. The elastic deflections, {h shall be calculated

using the applied lateral forces, ft.
The value or T shall be determined from one of the
following methods: 208.5.2.3 Vertical Distribution of Force
1. Method A: The total force shall be distributed over the height of the
structure in conformance with Equations 208-15, 208-16
For all buildings, the value T may be approximated from
and 208-17 in the absence of a more rigorous procedure.
the following equation:
11
(208-12)
V=Ft+ _LFi (208-15)
where i=l
0.0853 for steel moment-resisting frames

0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment- The concentrated force Ft at the top, which is in addition
rcsisting frames and eccentrically braced to Fn, shall be detennined from the equation:
frames
0.0488 for all other buildings Ft= 0.07TV (208-16)
Alternatively, the value of Ct for structures with concrete The value of T used for the purpose of calculating Ft shall
or masomy shear walls may he taken as 0. 0743/..jA;. be the period that corresponds with the design base shear
as computed using Equation 208-4. Ft need not exceed
0. 25V and may be considered as zero where Tis 0.7 s or
The value of Ac shall be dctcnnincd from the following
less. The remaining portion of the base shear shall be
equation:
distributed over the height of the structure, including Level
n, according to the following equation:
(208-13)
(208-17)
The value of D,Jhn used in Equation 208-13 shall not
exceed 0.9.
At each level designated as x, the force F x shall be applied
2. Method B: over the area of the building in accordance with the mass
distribution at that level. Structural displacements and
The fundamental period T may be calculated using the
design seismic forces shall be calculated as the effect of
structural properties and deformational characteristics or
forces Fx and Ft applied at the appropriate levels above the
the resisting elements in a properly substantiated analysis.
base.
The analysis shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 208.6.2. The value of T from Method B shall
208.S.3 Dynamic Analysis Procedures
not exceed a value 30 percent greater than the value of T
obtained from Method A in Seismic Zone 4, and 40 percent
208.5.3.1 General
in Seismic Zone 2.
Dynamic analyses procedures, when used, shall conform to
The fundamental period T may be computed by using the
the criteria established in this section. The analysis shall be
following equation:
based on an appropriate ground motion representation and
shall be performed using accepted pl'inciples of dynamics.
(208-14) Structures that are designed in accordance with this section

shall comply with all other applicable requirements of
these provisions.
The values of f I represent any lateral force distributed

approximately in accordance with the principles of
Equations. 208-15, 208-16 and 208-17 or any other rational

208.5.3.2 Ground Motion 4. For structures on Soil Prolile Type SF, the following
requirements shall apply when required by Section
Tpe ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be 208.4.8.3, Item 4:
one having a I 0-percent probability of being exceeded in
50 years, shall not be reduced by the quantity R and may 4.1 The ground motion representation shall be
be one of the following: developed in accordance with Items 2 and 3.
I. An elastic design response spectrum constructed in 4.2 Possible amplification ofbuilding response due to
accordance with Figure 208-3, using the values of Ca the effects of soil-structure interaction and
and Cv consistent with the specific site. The design lengthening of building period caused by inelastic
acceleration ordinates shall be multiplied by the behavior shall be considered.
acceleration of gravity, 9.815 m/sec2 • 5. The vertical component of ground motion may be
defined by scaling corresponding horizontal
2. A site-specific elastic design response spectrum hased accelerations by a factor of two- thirds. Alternative
on the geologic, tectonic, seismologic and soil factors may be used when substantiated by site-
characteristics associated with the specific site. The
specific data. Where the Near-Source Factor, Na, is
spectrum shall be developed for a damping ratio or
greater than 1.0, site-specific vertical response spectra
0.05, unless a different value is shown to be consistent
shall be used in lieu of the factor of two-thirds.
with the anticipated structural behavior at the intensity
of shaking established for the site.
3. Ground motion time histories developed for the

specific site shall be representative of actual
earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
histories, either individually or in combination, shall
approximate the site <lesign spectrum conforming to
Section 208.5.3.2, Item 2,
Co,;trol Periods
2.5Ca
-;; T, = Cvl2.5Ca
,g
Tu = 0.2Ts
11 Ca
2 3 4 5
Period (T/Ts)
Figure 208-3
Design Response Spectra

1-? I!
208.5.3.3 .\'lathematical Model for the modes considered. al least 90 percent or the
participating mass of lhc structure is included in the
A mathematical model of the physical strm:turc shall calculation or response for each principal horizontal
represent the spatial c\istribmion of' the mass and stiffoess direction.
of the structure to an extent that is adequate for the
calculation of the significant lcaturcs of its dynamic 208.5.3.5.3 Combining Modes
response. A three-dimensional model shall be used for the
dynamic analysis of' structures with highly irregular plan The peak member forces, displacements, storey forces.
configurations such as those having a plan irregularity storey shears and base reactions for each mode shall be
defined in Table 208-10 and having a rigid or semi-rigid combined by recogniLcd methods. When three-
diaphragm. The stiffness properties used in the analysis dimensional models arc used for analysis, modal
and general mathematical modeling shall be in accon.latKC interaction effects shall he rnnsidered when combining
with Section 208.6.2. modal maxima.
208.5.3.4 Descl'iption of Analysis Procedures 208.5.3.5.4 Reduction of Elastic Response

Parameters for Design
208.5.3.4.1 Hesponsc Spectrum Analysis
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced for purposes
An elastic dynamic analysis ofa structure utilizing the peak of design in accordance with the following items, with the
dynamic response of all modes having a significant limitation that in no case shall the Elastic Response
contribution to total structural response. Peak modal Paramelcrs be reduced such that the corresponding design
responses arc calculated using the ordinates of the base shear is less than the Elastic Response Base Shear
appropriate n.:sponsc spectrum curve which correspond to divided by the value or R.
the modal periods. Maximum modal contributions arc
combined in a statistical manner to obtain an approximate· I. For all regular structures where the ground motion
total structural response. representation complies with Section 208.5.3.2, Item
1, Elastic l{esponse Parameters may be reduced such
208.5.3.4.2 Time History Analysis that the corresponding design base shear is not less
than 90 percent of the base shear determined in
An analysis of' the dym,mic response of a structure at each accordance with Section 208.5.2.
increment of time when the base is subjected to a specific
ground motion time history. 2. For all regular structures where the ground motion
representation complies with Section 208.5.3.2, Item
208.5.3.5 Response Spectrum Analysis 2, Elastic Response Parameters may· be reduced such
that the corresponding design base shear is not less
208.5.3.5.1 Response Spectrum Rc1>resentation than 80 percent of the base shear determined in
and Interpretation of Results accordance with Section 208.5.2.
The ground motion representation shc1ll be in accordance 3. for all irregular structures, regardless of the ground
with Section 208.5.3.2. The corresponding response motion representation, Elastic Response Parameters
parameters, including forces, moments and displacements, may be reduced such that lhe corresponding design
shall be denoted as Elastic Response Parameters. Elastic base shear is 1101 less than I00 percent of the biise shear
Response Parameters may be reduced in accordance with determined in accordance with Section 208.5.2.
Section 208.5.3.5.4.
The corresponding reduced design seismic forces shall be
The base shear for a given direction, determined using used for design in accordance with Section 203.
dynamic analysis must not be less than the value obtained
by the equivalent lateral force method of Section 208.5.2. 208.5.3.5.5 Directional Effects
In this case, all corresponding response parameters arc
adjusted propo11ionatcly. Directional effects for horizontal ground motion shall
confonn to the requirements of Section 208.6. The effects
208.5.3.5.2 Number of Modes of vertical ground motions on horizontal cantilevers and
pre-stressed elements shall he considered in accordance
The requirement of Section 208.5.3.4.1 that all significant with Section 208.6. Alternately, vertical seismic response
modes be included may be satisfied by demonstrating that may be determined by dynamic response methods; in no

2-21 8 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
case sha!! the response used for design be less than that 208.5.3.6.2 Elastic Time History Analysis
obtained by the static method.
Elastic time history shall conform to Sections 208.5 .3.J
208.5.3.5.6 Torsion 208.5 .3.2, 208.5.3.3. 208.5.3.5.2, 208.5.3.5.4:
208.6.5.3.5.5, 208.6.5.3.5.6, 208.5.3.5.7 and 208.5.3.6.1
The analysis shall account for torsional e flccts , including and 208.6.6.1. Response parameters from elastic time-
accidental torsional effects as prescribed in Section history analysis shall be denoted as Elastic Response
208.5.J.4. Where three-dimensional models are used for Parameters. All element'> shall be designed using Strength
analys is, effects of accidental torsion shull be accounted for Design. Elastic Response Parameters may be scaled in
by appropriate adjustments in the model such as adj ustmcnl accordance with Section 208.5.3 .5.4.
of mass locations, or by equivalent static procedures such
as provided in Section 208.5.1 .3. 208.5.3.6.3 Nonlinear Time History Analysis
208.5.3.5. 7 Dual Systems 208.5.3.6.3.l Nonlinear Time History
Where the lateral forces are resisted by a dual system as Nonlinear time history analysis shall meet the requirements
defined in Section 208.4.6.4, the combined system shall be of Section 208.4.8.4, and time histories shall be developed
capable of resisting the base shear determined in and results determined in accordance with the requirements
accordance with this section. The moment-resisting frame of Section 208.5.3.6.l. Capacities and characteristics of
shall conform to Section 208.4.6.4, ftem 2, and may be nonlinear clements shall be modeled consistent with test
analyzed using either the procedures of Section 208.5.2.3 data or substantiated analysis, considering the Importance
or Lhose of Section 208.5.3.5 . Factor. The maximum inelastic response displacement
shall not be reduced and shall comply with Section 208.6.5.
208.5.3.6 Time History Analysis
208.5.3.6.3.2 Design Review
208.5.3.6.1 Time History
When nonlinear Lime-history analysis is used to justify a
Time-history analysis shall be performed with pairs of structural design, a design review of the lateral- force-
appropriate horizontal ground-motion time- history resisting system sllall be performed by an independent
components that shall be selected and scaled from not less engineering team, includ ing persons licensed in the
than three recorded events. Appropriate time hisLories shall appropriate disciplines and experienced in seismic analysis
have magnitudes, fault distances and source mechanisms methods. The lateral-force-resisting system design review
that are consistent with those that control the d~sign-basis shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
earthquake (or maximum capable earthquake). Where
three appropriate recorded ground- motion time-history !. Reviewing the development of site-specific spectra
pairs are nol available, appropriale simulated g round- and ground-motion time histories.
motio n time-history pairs may be used lo make up the total
number required. For each pair of horizontal ground- 2. Reviewing the preliminary design of the lateral-force-
moLion components, the square root of the sum of the resisting system.
squares (SRSS) of the 5 percent-damped site-specific
spectrum of the scaled horizontal components shall be 3. Reviewing the Jina! design of the lateral-force-
constructed. The motions shall be scaled such that the resisting system and all supporting analyses.
average value of the SRSS spectra docs not fall below 1.4
times the 5 percent-damped spectrum of the design-basis The engineer-of-record shall submit with the plans and
earthquake for periods from 0. 2 T second to 1. 5 T seconds. calcul ations a statement by aII members of the engineering
Each pair of time histories shall be applied simultaneously team doing the review staling that the above review has
to the model considering torsional effects. been performed.
The parameter o finterest shall be calculated for each time-

hist.ory analysis. If three time-history analyses arc
performed, then the maximum res ponse of the parameter
of interest shall be used for design. lf seven or more time-
hislory analyses are performed, then the average value of
the response parameter of interest may be used for design.

C'.HAPT FR / - · Minirnt 1m l)P.!".i(ln I o;:irls
208.6 Earthquake Loads and Modeling or the element storey shear

r max is tic lined as the largest
Requirements ratios, r;, which occurs in any of the storey levels at or
/ below the two-thirds height level of the bui l<ling.
208.6.I Earthquake Loads
for bral:cd fran1cs, the value ol'r; is equal to the maximum
Structures shall be designed for ground motion producing horizontal force component in a single bntl:l: clement
!ilructural response and seismic forces in any horizontal divided by the total storey shear.
direction. The l"ollowing earthquake loads shall be used in
the load combinations set forth in Section 20J: For moment frames, r; shall be taken as the maximum of
the sum or the shears in any two adjacenl columns in a
moment frame bay divided by the storey shear. For
(208-18)
columns common to two hays wilh moment-resisting
connections on opposite sides at Level i in the direction
(208-19)
under consideration, 70 percent of the shear in that column
where may be used in the rnlumn shear summation.
E the earthquake load on an element of the for shear walls, ri shall be taken as the maximum value of
strucuire resulting from the combination of the product of the wall shear multiplied by 3/lw and
the horizontal component, E1., and the divided by the total storey shear, where lw is the length of
vertical component, Ev the wall in meter.
thl: earthquake load due to the base shear,
V, as set forth in Section 208.5.2 or the For dual systems, ri shall be taken as the maximum value
design lateral forc.:e, F p, as set forth in ofr1 as defined above considering all lateral-load-resisting
Section 208.9 clements. The lateral loads shall be distributed to clcmcnLs
the estimated maximum earthquake force based on relative rigidities considering the interadion or
that can be developed in the structure as set the dual system. For dual systems, the value ofp need not
forth in Section 208.6. l, and used in the exceed 80 percent of the value calculated above.
design of specific elements of the structure,
as specifically identified in this section p shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater
the load effect resulting from the vertical than 1.5. For special moment-resisting frames, except
c.:omponent or the earthquake ground when used in dual systems, p shall not exceed 1.25. The
motion and is equal to an addition of numhcr or bays of special moment-resisting frames shall
0. 5CaID lo the dead load effect, D, for be increased to red_uce r, such that p is less than or equal
Strength Design, and may be taken as zero to 1.25.
for Allowable Stress Design
the seismic force amplification factor that is Exception:
required to account for structural AB may be taken as the average floor area in the upper
overstrength, as set forth in Section setback portion of the building where a larger base area
208.4.10.1 exists at the groundfloor.
p Rcliahility/Redundancy Factor as given hy
the following equation: When calculating drift, or when the structure is located in
6.1 Seismic Zone 2, p shall be taken equal to l .O.
p~2---- (208-20)
rmaxJ7i;; The ground motion producing lateral response and design
seismic forces may be assumed to act non-concurrently in
where the direction of each principal axis of the structure, except
rmax the maximum element-storey shear ratio. as required by Section 208.7.2.
For a given direction of loading, the
clement-storey shear ratio is the ratio oftlte Seismic dead load, W, is the total dead load and applicable
design storey shear in the most heavily po1tions of other loads listed below.
loaded single element divided by the total
design storey shear. I. In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of
25 percent of the floor live load shall be applicable.
For any given Storey Level i, the element-storey shear ratio
is denoted as ri· The maximum clement-storey shear ratio
2-220 CHAPTER 2 ·· Minimum Design Loads
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a 208.6.4.1 Determination of A5

load of not less than 0.5 kN/m2 shall be included.
A static, elastic analysis of the lateral force-resisting
3. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be system shall be prepared using the design seismic forces
included. from Section 208.5.2.1. Alternatively, dynamic analysis
may be performed in accordance with Section 208.5.3.
208.6.2 Modeling Requirements Where Allowable Stress Design is used and where drifl is
being computed, the load combinations of Section 203.3
The mathemalical model of the physical structure shall shall be used. The mathematical model shall comply with
include all elements or the lateral-force-resisting system. Section 208.6.2. The resulting deformations, denoted as
The model shall also include lite stiffoess and strength of ll.5 , shall be determined at all critical locations in the
elements, which are signiticanl lo the distribution of forces, structure. Calculated drift shall include translational and
and shall represent the spatial distrihution of the mass and torsional dcllcctions.
stiffness of the structure. In addition, the model shall
comply with the following: 208.6.4.2 Determination of ll.M
l. Stiffness properties of reinforced concrete and The Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, AM, shall
masonry clements shall consider the effects of cracked be computed as follows:
sections.
(208-21)
2. For steel moment frame syslcms, the contribution of
panel zone defomwtions to overall storey drift shall be Exception:
included.
Alternatively, ~m may be computed by nonlinear time
history analysis in accordance with Section 208.5.3.6.3.
208.6.3 PA Effects
The analysis used to determine the Maximum Inelastic
The resulting member forces and moments and the storey
Response Displacement /iM shall consider PA effects.
dritls induced by Pll. eftects shall be considered in the
evaluation of overall structural frame stability and shall be
208.6.5 Storey Drift Limitation
evaluated using lhc forces producing the displacements of
lls. PA need not be considered when the ratio of secondary
moment to primary moment does not exceed 0.1 O; the ratio Storey drifts shall be computed using the Maximum
may be evaluated for any storey as the product of the total Inelastic Response Displaccmcnl, AM·
dead and floor live loads, as required in Section 203, above
the storey times the seismic drift in that storey divided by 208.6.5.1 Calculated
the product of the seismic shear in that storey times the
height of that storey. In Seismic Zone 4, P/1 need not be Calculated storey dritt using ll.r,i shall not exceed 0.025
considered when the storey drift ratio docs not exceed times the storey height for structures having a fundamental
0. 02/R. period of less than 0. 7 sec. For structures having a
fundamental period of 0. 7 sec or greater, the calculated
storey drift shall not exceed 0.020 times the storey height.
208.6.4 Drift
Drift or horizontal displacements of the structure shall be Exceptions:

computed where required by this code. For hoth Allowable I. These drift limits may be exceeded when it is
Stress Design and Strength Design, the Maximum Inelastic demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by
Response Displaccmcnl, liM, of the structure caused by the both stntctural elements and nonstructural elements
Design Basis Ground Motion shall be determined in that could affect l!fe safety. The drfft used in this
accordance with this section. The drifts corresponding to assessment shall be based upon the Matimum
the design seismic forces of Section 208.5.2. l or Section Inelastic Response Displacement, AM.
208.5.3.5, 4 5 , shall be determined in accordance with
Section 208.6.4.J. To determine 4 111 , these drifts shall be 2. There shall be no drift limit in single-.~torey steel-
amplified in accordance with Section 208.6.4.2. framed structures whose primary use is limited to
storage, factories or workshops. Minor accessory
uses shall be allowed Structures on which this
exception is used shall not have equipment attached to

the structural frame or shall have such equipment ln Seismic Zones 2 and 4, provision shall be made for the
detailed to accommodate the additional dr(ft. Walls effects of earthquake forces acting in a direction other than
that are laterally supported by the steel frame shall he the principal axes in each of the following circumsJances:
designed to accommodate the drift in accordance with
Section 208. 7.2.3. I. The structure has plan irregularity Type 5 as given in
Table 208-10.
208.6.5.2 Limitations
2. The structure has plan irregularity Type l as given in
The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated Table 208- IO for both major axes.
drift may disregard the limitations of Equations. 208-11
and 208-10 and may be based on the period determined 3. A column of a structure forms part or two or more
from Equations. 208-14 neglecting the 30 or 40 percent intersecting lateral-force-resisting systems.
limitations of Section 208.5.2.2.
Exceplion:
208.6.6 Vcrticat Component
If the axial load in the column due to seismic forces acting
The following requirements apply in Seismic Zone 4 only. in either direction is less than 20 percent of the column
Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed for a axial load capacity.
net upward force of 0. 7CalWP.
The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may
he satisfied by designing such elements for 100 percent or
In addition to all other applicable load combinations,
the prescribed design seismic forces in one direction plus
horizontal pre-stressed components shall be designed using
30 percent of the prescribed design seismic forces in the
not more than 50 percent of the dead load for the gravity
perpendicular direction. The combination requiring the
load, alone or in combination with the lateral force effects.
greater component strength shall be used for design.
Alternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions
208.7 Detailed Systems Design Requirements
may be combined on a square root of the sum of the squares
(SRSS) basis. When the SRSS method of combining
208.7.1 General
directional effects is used, each tcnn computed shall be
assigned the sign that will result in the most conservative
All structural framing systems shall comply with the result.
requirements of Section 208.4. Only the elements of the
designated seismic-force-resisting system shall be used to
resist design forces. The individual components shall be
designed to resist the prescribed design seismic forces
acting on them. The components shall also comply with the
specific requirements for the material contained in
Chapters 4 t11rough 7. In addition, such framing systems
and components shall comply with the detailed system
design requirements contained in Section 208.7.
All building components in Seismic Zones 2 and 4 shall be

designed to resist tJ1e effects of the seismic forces
prescribed herein and the effects of gravity loadings from
dead and floor live loads.
Consideration shall be given to design for uplill effects

caused by seismic loads.

122 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
8.7.2 Structural Framing Systems or the Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, AM,
considering PA[effects determined in accordance with
ur types yf general building framing systems defined in Section 208.6.4.2 or the deformation induced by a storey
ction 208.4.6 are recognized in these provisions and drift of 0.0025 times the storey height. When computing
Jwn in Table 208-11. Each type is subdivided by the expected deformations, the stiffening effect of those
ics of vertical elements used to resist lateral seismic elements not part of the lateral-force-resisting system shall
·ces. Special framing requirements arc given in this be neglected.
:tion and in Chapters 4 through 7.
For elements not part of the lateral-force-resisting system,
8.7.2.t Detailing for Combinations of Systems the forces inducted by the expected defonnation may be
considered as ultimate or factored forces. When computing
r components common to different structural systems, the forces induced by expected deformations, the
: more restrictive detailing requirements shall be used. restraining effect of adjoining rigid structures and
nonstructural elements shall be considered and a rational
8.7.2.2 Connections value of member and restraint stiffness shall be used.
Inelastic deformations of members and connections may be
mnections that resist design seismic forces shall be considered in the evaluation, provided the assumed
signed and detailed on the drawings. calculated capacities arc consistent with member and
connection design and detailing.
8.7.2.3 Deformation Compatihility
For concrete and masonry elements that are part of the
I structural framing elements and their connections, not lateral- force-resisting system, the assumed flexural and
1uircd by design to be part of the lateral-force-resisting shear stiffness properties shall not exceed one half of the
stem, shall be designed and/or detailed lo be adequate to gross section prope11ies unless a rational cracked-section
1intain support of design dead plus live loads when analysis is performed. Additional deformations that may
bjected to the expected deformations caused by seismic result from foundation flexibility and diaphragm
rees. PA effects on such elements shall be considered. deflections shall be considered. For concrete elements not
;pected deformations shall be determined as the greater part of the lateral-force-resisting system, see Section 421.9.

Table 208-1 lA Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Concrete
System Limitation and

R !lo Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System
Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone4
A. BeurinJ! Wall Svstems
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL 50
• Or<lina1y reinforced concrete shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL NP
B. Building Frame Systems
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls or braced
5.0 2.8 NL 75
frames (shear walls)
• Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls or braced
5.6 2.2 NL NP
frames
• Intermediate prccasl shear walls or braced frames 5.0 2.5 NL JO
C. Moment-Resisting Frame Systems
• Special reinforced concrete moment frames 8.5 2.8 NL NL
• Intermediate reinforced concrete moment frames 5.5 2.8 NL NP
• Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames 3.5 2.8 NL NP
D. Dual Systems
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls 8.5 2.8 NL NL
• Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls 6.5 2.8 NL NP
E. Dual Svstem with Intermediate Moment Frames
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls 6.5 2.8 NL 50
• Ordinarv reinforced concrete shear walls 5.5 2.8 NL NP
• Shear wall frame interactive system with ordinary
reinforced concrete moment frames and ordinary 4.2 2.8 NP NP
reinforced concrete shear walls
F. Cantilevered Column Bui/dine Sv.ftems
• Cantilcvcrc<l column elements 2.2 2.0 NL JO
G. Shear Wall- Frame Interaction Svstems 5.5 2.8 NL 50

Table 208-11 B Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Steel

Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R no Seismic Zone. m
Zonc2 Zonc4
A. Beari11t? Wall Svslems
• Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension-only 2.8 2.2 NL 20
bracing
2.2 NL 50
• Braced frames where bracing carries eravitv load 4.4
• Light framed walls sheathed with steel sheets
NL 20
structural panels rated for shear resistance or steel 5.5 2.8
sheets
• Light-framed walls with shear panels of all other 4.5 2.8 NL 20
ligh.1 materials
2.8 2.2 NL NP
• Lieht-framed wall systems usinf!. flat strao bracin~
B. B11ildittf! Frame S11stems
• Steel eccentrically braced frames (ERF), moment- 8.0 2.8 NL 30
resisting connections at columns awav from links
• Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), non-
30
moment-resisting connections at columns away 6.0 2.2 NL
from links
S1,ecial concentrically braced frames (SCBF) 6.0 2.2 NL 30
•
• Ord inarv concentrically braced frames (OCBF) 3.2 2.2 NL NP
• Light-framed walls sheathed with steel sheet 6.5 2.8 NL 20
structural panels I sheet steel panels
• Light frame walls with shear panels of all other 2.5 2.8 NL NP
materials
• Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF), non- 7.0 2.8 NL 30
moment-resisting beam-column connection
• Buckling-restrained braced frames, momenl- 8.0 2.8 NL 30
resisting beam-column conneclions
7.0 2.8 NL 30
• Soecial steel olate shear walls (SPSW)
C. Mmnent-Resistim.1 Frame Svstem.~
8.0 3.0 NL NL
• Soecia l moment-resistini?. frame (SMRf)
• Intennediate steel moment frames OMF) 4.5 3.0 NL NP
3.5 3.0 NL NP
• Ordinary moment frames (OMF)
3.0 NL NP
• Soecial truss moment frames (STMF) 6.5
• Special composite steel and concrete moment 8.0 3.0 NL NL
frames
• Intermediate composite moment frames 5.0 3.0 NL NP
6.0 3.0 50 NP
• Comnosite oartially restrained moment frames
3.0 3.0 NP NP
• Ordinarv con1Dosite moment frames
D. Dual Svstems with Special Moment Frames
8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Steel eccentrically braced frames
7.0 2.8 NL NL
• Soecial steel con.centricallv braced frames
• Composite steel and concrete eccentrically braced 8.0 2.8 NL NL
frame

Table 208-11 B ( continued) Eai1hquake-Force-Rcsisting Structural Systems of Steel

Building Height
R no Limitation by Seismic
Zone, m
Zone2 Zonc4
• Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced
6.0 2.8 NL NL
frame
• Comoosite steel olatc shear walls 7.5 2.8 NL NL
• Bucklin~-restrained braced frame 8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Special steel plate shear walls 8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Masonrv shear wall with sleet OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Steel EBF with steel SMRF 8.5 2.8 NL NL
• Steel EBF with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Special concentrically braced frames with steel
7.5 2.8 NL NL
SMRF
• Special concentrically braced frames with steel
4.2 2.8 NL 50
OMRF
E. Dual Svstem with Intermediate Moment Frames
• Special steel concentrically braced frame 6.0 2.8 NL NP
• Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced 5.5 2.8 NL NP
frame
• Ordinary comnosite braced frame 3.5 2.8 NL NP
• Ordinary composite reinforced concrete shear walls
5.0 3.0 NL NP
with steel elements
r: Cantilevered Column Bttildin!! Svstems
• Special steel moment frames 2.2 2.0 JO 10
• Intermediate steel moment frames 1.2 2.0 10 NP
• Ordinarv steel moment frames 1.0 2.0 10 NP
• Cantilevered column elements 2.2 2.0 NL 10
G. Steel System.t Specifically Detailed for Sei.'lmic .
3.0 3.0 NL NP
Resistance. Excludin!! Cantilever Svstems

Table 208-1 IC Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Masonry

Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R !lo Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone4
A. Hearin Wal/S stems
• Masonr shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL 50
B. Bui/din , Frame Svstems
shear walls 5.5 2.8 NL 50
C. Moment-Re:~istinu Frame S stems
• Mason moment-resistin wall frames (MMRWF 6.5 2.8 NL 50
D. Dual Systems
• Masonry shear walls with SMRf 5.5 2.8 NL 50
• Mason shear walls with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Mason shear walls with concrete JMRF 4.2 2.8 NL NP
• Masonry shear walls with masonry MMR WF 6.0 2.8 NL 50
Table 208-11 D Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Wood

R Building Height Limitation by
Seismic Zone meters)
Zone 2 Zone 4
• Light-framed walls with shear panels: wood

structural panel walls for structures three stories or 5.5 2.8 NL 20
less
• Heavy timber braced frames where bracing carries
2.8 2.2 NL 20
ravit load
NA NA
• Ordinar I heavy timber-braced frames 5.6 2.2 . NL 20
208.7.2.3.1 Ad.joining Rigid Elements connections and fasteners in accordance with the following
provisions:
Moment-resisting frames and shear walls may be enclosed
by or adjoined by more rigid clements; provided it can be l. Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative
shown that the participation or failure of the more rigid movement between stories of not less than two times
elements will not impair the vertical and lateral- load- storey drill caused by wind, the calculated storey dritl
resisting ability of the gravity load and lateral-force- based on 11 111 or 12.7 mm, whichever is greater.
rcsisting systems. The effects of adjoining rigid elements
2. Connections to permit movement in the plane of the
!>hall be considered when assessing whether a structure
panel for storey drift shall be sliding connections using
shall be designated regular or irregular in Section 208.4.5.
slotted or oversize holes, connections that pcnnit
movement by bending of steel, or other connections
208.7.2.3.2 Exterior ~lcmcnts
providing equivalent sliding and ductility capacity.
Exterior non-bearing, non-shear wall panels or elements
3. Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility
that arc attached to or enclose the exterior shall be designed
and rotation capacity to preclude fracture of the
to resist the forces per Equation 208-27 or 208-28 and shall
concrete or brittle failures at or near welds.
accommodate movements of the structure based on A111 and
temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical T
c

4. The body of the connection shall be designed for the other clements of the lateral-force-resisting system. For
force determined by Equation 208-28, where RP = Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
./ 3. 0 anda,,= 1.0. detennincd using an allowable stress increase of I. 7 and a
resistance factor, 8, of 1.0. This increase shall not be
5. All fasteners in the connecting system, such as bolts, combined with the one-third stress increase permitted by
inserts, welds and dowels, shall be designed for the Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
forces detennined by Equation 208-28, where RP = load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
=
1. 0 and aP 1. 0.
208.7.2.5 Concrete Frames
6. Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be auache<l to,
or hooked around, reinforcing steel or otherwise Concrete frames required by design to be pa1t of the lateral-
terminated to effectively transfer forces to the force-resisting system shall conform to the following:
reinforcing steel.
I. Jn Seismic Zone 4 they shall be special momcnt-
208.7.2.3.3 Ties and Continuity resisting frames.
All parts of a structure shall be interconnected and the 2. fn Seismic Zone 2 they shall, as a minimum, be
connections shall be capable of transmiuing the seismic intermediate moment-resisting frames.
force induced by the parts being connected. As a minimum,
any smaller portion of the building shall be tied to the 208.7.2.6 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls
remainder of the building with clements having at least
strength to resist 0. SCal times the weight of the smaller Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors
portion. and roofs that provide out-of-plane lateral support of the
wall. The anchorage shall provide a positive direct
A positive connection for resisting horizontal force acting connection between the wall and floor or roof construction
parallel to the member shall be provided for each beam, capable of resisting the larger of the horizontal forces
girder or truss. This force sJ1all not be less than 0. 3Cal specified in this section and Sections 206.4 and 208.9. In
times the dead plus live load. addition, in Seismic Zone 4, diaphragm to wall anchorage
using embedded straps shall have the straps attached to.or
hooked around the reinforcing steel or otherwise
208.7.2.4 Collector Elements
terminated to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing
steel. Requirements for developing anchorage forces in
Collector elements shall be provided that are capable of
diaphragms arc ~iven in Section 208.7.2.6. Diaphragm
transferring the seismic forces originating in other portions
deformation shall be considered in the design of the
of the structure to the element providing the resistance to
supported walls.
those forces.
208.7.2.6.1 Out-of-Plane Wan Anchorage to
Collector elements, splices and their connections to
resisting elements shall resist the forces determined in
Flexible Diaphragms
accordance with Equation 208-22. Jn addition, collector
This section shall apply in Seismic Zone 4 where flexible
elements; splices, and their connections to res,stmg
diaphragms, as defined in Section 208.5.1.3, provide lateral
elements shall have the design strength to resist the
support for walls.
comhinc<l loads resulting from the special seismic load of
Section 203.5.
l. Elements of the wall anchorage system shall be
Exception: designed for the forces specified in Section 208.9
=
where RP 3. 0 and ap 1. 5. ·=
In structures. or portions thereof, braced entirely by light-
frame wood .~hear walls or light-frame steel and wood 2. [n Seismic Zone 4, the value of F P used for the design
structural panel shear wall systems, collector elements, of the clements of the wall anchorage system shall not
splices and connections to resisting elements need only be be less than 6.1 kN per lineal meter of wall substituted
designed to resist forces in accordance with Equation 208- for E.
22.
3. Sec Section 206.4 for minimum design forces in other
The quantity EM need not exceed the maximum force that seismic zom~s.
can be transferred to the collector by the diaphragm and

4. When elements of the wall anchorage system are not accordance wilh Section 208.5.2 using a R 1101
loaded concentrically or arc not perpendicular to the exceeding 4.
wall, the system shall be designed to resist all
components of the forces induced by the eccentricity. 4. Diaphragms suppo1ting concrete or masonry walls
shall have continuous ties or struts between diaphragm
5. When pilasters are present in the wall, the anchorage chords to distribute the anchorage forces specified in
force at the pilasters shall be calculated considering Section 208.7.2.7. Added chords of subdiaphragins
the additional load transferred from the wall panels to may be used to form subdiaphragms to transmit the
the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage force anchorage forces to the main continuous crosstics. The
at a floor or roof shall be that specified in Section maximum length-to-width ratio of the wood structural
208.7.2.7, Item 2. sub-diaphragm shall be 2 Y:z: 1.
6. The strength design forces for steel clements of the 5. Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support
wall anchorage system shall be 1.4 times the forces concrete or masonry walls, the anchorage shall
otherwise required by this section. conform to Section 208.7.2.7. In Seismic Zone 2 and
4, anchorage shall not be accomplished by use of
7. The strength design forces for wood elements of the toenails or nails subject to withdrawal, woo<l ledgers
wall anchorage system shall be 0.85 times the force or framing shall not be used in cross-grain bending or
otherwise required by this section and these wood cross-grain tension, and the continuous ties required
elements shall have a minimum actual net thickness of by Item 4 shall be in addition to the diaphragm
63.5 mm. sheathing.
208.7.2.7 Diaphragms 6. Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements in

structures in Seismic Zone 4, having a plan irregularity
I. The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not of Type I, 2, 3 or 4 in Table 208-10, shall be designed
exceed the permissible deflection of the attached without considering either the one-third increase or the
elements. Pennissible deflection shall be that duration of load increase considered in allowable
deflection that will permit the attached element lo stresses for elements resisting ea11hquake forces.
maintain its structural integrity under the individual
loading and continue to support the prescribed loads. 7. ln structures in Seismic Zone 4 having a plan
irregularity of Type 2 in Table 208-10, diaphragm
2. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist chords and drag memhers shall be designed
the forces detcnnined in accordance wilh the considering independent movement of the projecting
following equation: wings of the structure. Each of these diaphragm
elements shall be designed for the more severe or the
following two assumptions:
(208-22)
a. Motion of the projecting wings m the same
direction.
The force F px determined from Equation 208-22 need
not exceed 1. OCalWpx, but shall not be less than b. Motion or the projecting wings in opposing
directions.
0.5Ca1Wpx·
Exception:
When the diaphragm is required to transfer design
This requirement may be deemed satisfied ifthe procedures
seismic forces from the vertical-resisling elements
ofSection 208.5.3 in conjunction with a three-dimensional
above the diaphragm to other vertical-resisting
model have been used to determine the lateral seismic
clements below the diaphragm due to offset in the
placement of the elements or to changes in sliffness in forces for design.
the vertical elements, these forces shall be added
to those determined from Equation 208-22. 208.7.2.8 Framing below the Base
3. Design seismic forces for flexible diaphragms The strength and stiffness of the framing between the base
providing lateral suppo1ts for walls or frames or and the foundation shall not be less than that of the
masonry or concrete shall be determined using superstructure. The special detailing requirements of
Equation 208-22 based on the load determined in Chapters 4, 5 and 7, as appropriate, shall apply to columns

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-2?.9
supporting discontinuous lateral-force-resisting elements When applicable, design strengths and other detailed
and to SMRF, IMRf, EBF, STMF and MMRWF system design criteria shall be obtained from other sections or their
elements below the base, which are required to transmit the referenced standards. The design of non-building
forces resulting from lateral loads to the foundation. structures shall use the load combinations or factors
specified in Section 203.3 or 203.4. for non-building
208.7.2.9 Building Separations structures designed using Section 208.8.3, 208.8.4 or
208.8.5, the Reliability/Redundancy Factor, p, may be
All structures shall be separated from adjoining structures. taken as 1.0.
Separations shall allow for the displacement lim. Adjacent
buildings on the same prope1ty shall be separated by at When applicable design stl'cngths and other design criteria
least dMT where are not contained in or referenced by this code, such criteria
shall be obtained from approved national standards.
(208-23)
208.8.1.3 Weight W
and AM 1 and 4Mz are the displacements of the adjacent
buildings. The weight, W, for non-building structures shall include all
dead loads as defined for buildings in Section 208.6.1. For
When a structure adjoins a property line not common to a purposes of calculating design seismic forces in non-
public way, that structure shall also be set back from the building structures, W shall also include all normal
property line by at least the displacement A111 of that operating contents for items such as tanks, vessels, bins and
piping.
structure.
Exception: 208.8.t.4 Period
Smaller separations or property line setbacks may be The fundamental period of the structure shall be
permitted when justified by rational analyses based on determined by rational methods such as by using Method
maximum expected ground motions. B in Section 208.5.2.2.
208.8 Non-Building Structures 208.8.1.5 Drift
208.8.1 General The dritl limitations of Section 208.6.5 need not apply to
non-building structures. Drift limitations shall be
208.8.l.1 Scope established for structural or nonstructural elements whose
failure would cause life hazards. Pli effects shall be
Non-building structures include all self- supporting considered for structures whose calculated drifts exceed
structures other than buildings that carry gravity loads and the values in Section 208.6.3.
resist the effects of earthquakes. Non-building structures
shall be designed to provide the strength required to resist
the displacements induced by the minimwn lateral forces
specified in this section. Design shall conform to the
applicable provisions of other sections as modified by the
provisions contained in Section 208.8.
208.8.1.2 Criteria
The minimum design seismic forces prescribed in this

section are at a level that produces displacements in a fixed
base, elastic model of the structure, comparable to those
expected of the real structure when responding to the
Design Basis Ground Motion. Reductions in these forces
using the coefficient R is permitted where the design of
non-building structures provides sufficient strength and
ductility, consistent with the provisions specified herein for
buildings, to resist the effects of seismic ground motions as
represented by these design forces.

Table 208-12 Rand 0. 0 1 Factors for Non-building calculated member forces and moments does not exceed
Structures 2.8.
/
STRUCTURE TYPE R !lo 208.8.3 Rigid Structures
I. Vessels, including tanks and Rigid structures (those with perio<l T less than 0.06 s) and
pressurized spheres, on braced 2.2 2.0
their anchorages shall be designed for the lateral force
or unbraced legs.
obtained from Equation 208-24.
2. Cast-in-place concrete .silos and
chimneys having walls 3.6 2.0
continuous to the foundations V =0. 1CalW (208-24)
3. Distributed mass cantilever
structures such as stacks,
2.9 2.0 The force V shall be distributed according to the
chimneys, silos and skirt-
distribution of mass and shall be assumed to act in any
suooorted vertical vessels.
horizontal direction.
4. Trussed towers (freestanding or
guyed), guyed stacks and 2.9 2.0
208.8.4 Tanks with Supported Bottoms
chimnevs.
5. Cantilevered column-type 2.0
2.2 Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with supported bottoms,
structures.
founded at or below grade, shall be designed to resist the
2.0
6. Cooling towers. 3.6 seismic forces calculated using the procedures in Section
2.0 208.9 for rigid structures considering the entire weight of
7. Bins and hoppers on braced or 2.9 the tank and its contents. Alternatively, such tanks may be
unbraced legs.
designed using one of the two procedures described below:
2.0
8. Storage racks. 3.6
2.0 1. A response spectrum analysis that includes
9. Signs and billboards. 3.6 consideration of the actual ground motion anticipated
I 0. Amusement structures and 2.0 at the site and the ine11ial effects of the contained fluid.
2.2
monuments. 2. A design basis prescribed for the particular type of
l l.All other self-supporting 2.0 tank by an approved national standard, provided that
2.9
structures not otherwise covered. the seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in
confonnance with the provisions of Sections 208.4.4.2
208.8.1.6 Interaction Effects and 208.4.4.3, respectively.
In Seismic Zone 4, structures that support flexible 208.8.5 Other Non-building Structures
nonstructural clements whose combined weight exceeds 25
percent of the weighl of the structure shall be designed Non-building structures that are not covered by Sectjon
considering interaction effects between the structure and 208.8.3 and 208.8.4 shall be designed to resist design
the supported elements. seismic forces not less than those determined in accordance
with the provisions in Section 208.5 with the following
208.8.2 Lateral Force additions and exceptions:
Lateral-force procedures for non-building strnctures with I. The factors R and n.<> shall be as set forth in Table
structural systems similar to buildings (those with 208-12. The total design base shear determined in
structural systems which are listed in Table 208-11) shall accordance with Section 208.5.2 shall not be less than
be selected in accordance with the provisions of Section the following:
208.4.
V =0.56CalW (208-25)
Exception:
Additionally, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear
Intermediate moment-resisting frames (JMRF) may be used shall also not be less than the following:
in Seismic Zone 4 for non-building structures in
Occupancy Categories III and IV if (1) the structure is less
than 15 m in height and (2) the value R used in reducing 1.6ZNvl
V= W (208-26)
R

CHAPTFf~?. ·- Minimum Dosign 1_0..1cl!.: :.! :.!31
2. The vertical dislrihution of the design seismic forces 208.9.2 Design for Total Lateral Force
in structures covered by this section may be
determined by using the prov1s1ons of' Section The tolal design lateral seismic force, Fp, shall be
208.5.2.3 or by using the procedures of Section determined from !he following equation:
208.5.3.
(208-27)
£,.;cepfion:
For irregular structures assigned to Occupancy
Categories I and II that cannot be modeled as a single Alternatively, F 11 may he calculated using the following
mass, the pl'Ocedzwes ({/'Section 208.5.3 shall be used equation:
3. Where an approved national standard provides a basis

for the ea11hquake-rcsistan1 design of a particular Lypc _ a1,Cal1, ( hx)
F1, - R 1 + 3 h W 11 (208-28)
of non-building structure covered by this seclion, such p y
a standard may be used, subject to the limitations in
this section:
Exceptthat Fp shall not be less than 0. 7CalpWp and need
The seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in not he more than 4CalpW11 •
conformance with the provisions of' Sections 208.4.4 and
208.4.2, respectively. where
The values for total latentl force and totnl base overturning the clement or component attachment
momenl used in design shall not be less than 80 percent of elevation with respect to grade.
the values that would be obtained using these provisions .. hx shall not be lakcn less than 0.0.
h,. the structure roof' elevation with respect to
208.9 Lateral Force on F..lcmcnts of Structures, grade.
Nonstructural Components and Equipment the in-structure Component Amplification
Supported by Structures Factor that varies from 1.0 to 2.5.
208.9.1 General A value for aP shall be selected from Table 208-13.

Alternatively, this factor may be determined based on the
Elements of structures and their attachments, permanent dynamic prope11ies or empirical data or the component and
nonstructural components and their attachments, and the the structure that suppo11s it. The value shall not be taken
attachments for permancnl equipment suppo1ted by a less than 1.0.
structure shall be designed lo resist the total design seismic
forces prescribed in Section 208.9.2. R,> is the Component Response Modification factor that
shalt be taken from Table 208-13, except that RP for
Attachments for floor- or roof-mounted equipment anchorages shall equal 1.5 for shallow expansion anchor
weighing less than 1.8 kN, and furniture need not be bolls, shallow chemical anchors or shallow cast-in-place
designed. anchors. Shallow anchors arc those wilh an cmhcdment
length-to-diameter ratio ofless than 8. When anchorage is
Attachments shall include anchorages and required constructed of non-ductile malcrials, or by use or adhesive,
bracing. Friction resulting from gravity loads shall not be R1, shall equal 1.0.
considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
The design lateral forces determinc<l using Equation 208-
When the structural failure of the lateral-force-resisting 27 or 208-19 shall be distributed in proportion lo the mass
systems of non-rigid equipment would cause a life hazard, distribution of the element or component.
such systems shall be designed to resist the seismic forces
prescribed in Section 208.9.2.
When permissible design strengths and other acceptance

criteria arc not contained in or referenced by this code, such
criteria shall he ohtained from approved national standards
su~jccl to the approval of the building official.

Forces dete1mined using Equation 208-27 or 208-28 shall

be used to design members and connections that transfer
th,se forces to the seismic-resisting systems. Members and
connection design shall use the load combinations and
factors specified in Section 203.3 or 203.4. The
Reliability/Redundancy Factor, p, may be taken equal to
1.0.
For applicable forces and Component Response

Modification factors in connectors for exterior panels and
diaphragms, refer to Sections 208.7.2.3 and 208.7.2.7.
Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions, which

result in the most critical loadings for design.

Table 208-13 llorizontal Force Factors, ap and RP for Table 208-13 (continued)
Elements of Structures and Nonstrnctural Components
:/
and Equipment
Element or 2.
Category
Element or
Comoonent I ap Rp Footnote
1. Exterior and interior ornamentations
Category
Comoonent aP RP 1-'ootnote Nonstructural and aooenda2es.
I . Elements of I. Walls includim the followin ~ Components a. Laterally
Structures a. Unbraced braced or
(cantilevered) 2.5 3.0 anchored to
parapets the structural
2.5 3.0
b. Exterior walls frame at a
at or above the point below
ground floor their centers
and parapets 1.0 3.0 2 of mass
braced above b. Laterally
their centers braced or
of gravity anchored to
c. All interior- the structural
1.0 3.0
bearing and frame at or
1.0 3.0 2 above their
non-bearing
walls centers of
2. Penthouse mass
(except when 2. Signs and
2.5 3.0
framed by an billboards
2.5 4.0 3. Storage racks
extension of
the structural (include
2.5 4.0 4
frame) contents) over
3. Connections 1.8 m tall.
for 4.Permanent
prefabricated floor-
structural supported
1.0 3.0 3 cabinets and
elements other
walls. Sec also book stacks 1.0 3.0 5
Section . more than 1.8
208.7.2 min height
(include
contents)
5.Anchorage
and lateral
bracing for 3, 6, 7,
1.0 3.0
suspended R
ceilings and
li2ht fixtures
6.Access floor 4, 5, 9
1.0 3.0
svstcms
7. Masonry or
concrete
J.O 3.0
fences over
1.8 m hi2h
8. Partitions. 1.0 3.0

Table 208-13 (continued) Table 208-13 (continued)

Element or Element or
., Category aP RP footnote Category Footnote
Component Com onent
3. Equipment I. Tanks and 4. Other I. Rigid
vessels Components components
(include with ductile 1.0 3.0 l
contents), 1.0 3.0 material and
including attachments.
support 2. Rigid
systems. components
with
2. Electrical, 1.0 1.5 1
nonduclile
mechanical 5, JO. material or
and plumbing 11, 12.
attachments
equipment and 1.0 3.0 13, 14.
3. Flexible
associated 15. 16
components
conduit and with ductile 2.5 3.0 1
ductwork and
material and
piping.
attachments.
3. Any flexible 4. Flexible
equipment components
laterally with
2.5 1.5 1
braced or nonductile
anchored to 5, 10, material or
2.5 3.0
the structural 14, attachments.
frame at a 15, 16
Notes for Table 208.13
point bclo,.., I See Section 208.2 for definitions offlexihle components
their center of and rigid components.
mass 2 See Section 208.8. 7.2.3 and 208. 7.2. 7 for concrete and
4.Anchorage of masonry walls and Section 208.9.2.for connections for
emergency
panel connectors.for panels.
power supply 3
systems and Applies to Seismic Z:mes 2 and 4 only.
4 Ground supported steel storage rack~ may he designed
essential
communicatio using the provisions of Sections 208.8. Load a~d
ns equipment. resistance.factor design may be used/or the design of
Anchorage cofd:formed steel members. provided seismic design
and support .forces are equal to or greater than those specified in
systems for 1.0 3.0 17, 18 Section 208.9.2 or 208.8.3 as appropriate.
5
battery racks Only anchorage or restraints need he designed.
and fuel tanks 6 Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other
necessary for equipment or partitions that are laterally supported by

operation of the ceiling. For purposes ~f determining the seismic
emergency .force, a ceiling weight ofnot less than 0.2 kPa shall be
equipment. used.
See also 7
Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum
Section board screw or nail attached to suspended members
208.7.2 that support a ceiling at one level extending from :...val!
5. Temporary to wall need not be analyzed. provided the walls are not
containers over 15 meters apart.
with 1.0 3.0 19 II
Light .fature.~ and mechanical services installed in
flammable or
metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay-in
hazardous
panel ceilings shall he independently supported from
materials.

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loc1ds 2-235
the structure above as spec{{ted in UBC Standard 25-2, e.,pansinn anchors, the design fi>rces for the anchors
Petri 111. calculated hy r:·quations. 208-27, or 208-28 (including
9 limits). shall he additionally multiplied hy facto,· of2. 0.
WP for access floor systems shall he the dead load of
the access.floor system plus 25 percent ofthe.floor live 15
Equipment anchorage shall not he designed such that
load plus a 0.5 kPa partition load allowance. load~ are resisted by gravity .fi"iction (e.g., friction
10 clips).
Equipment includes, but is not limited ro, boilers,
16
chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, air-handling units, l:):pansion anchon-, which are required to resist
cooling towers, control panels, motors, switchgear, seismic load~ in tension, shall not be used where
tran.~formers and /(fe-safety equipment. it shall include operational vibrating loads are present.
major conduit, ducting and piping, which services such 17
Movement r?f" components within electrical cabinets,
machine,:y and equipment and fire sprinkler systems. rack-and skid-mounted equipment and portions ofskid-
See Section 208. 9. 2 for additional requirements for mounted electromechanical equipment that may cause
determining aP .for nonrigid or flexibly mounted darnage to other components hy displacing, shall be
equipment. restricted by al/achment to anchored equipment or
II support.frames.
Seismic restraints may he omittedfrom piping and duct
supports ifall the.fhllowing conditions ore satisfied: 18
Batteries on racks shall be restrained against
1
1.1 Lateral motion of the piping or duct will not cause movement in all direction due to earthquake.forces.
damaging impact with other systems. 19
Seismic restraints may include straps. chains. bolts.
11 2
• The piping or duct is made of ductile material with barriers or other mechanisms that prevent sliding,
ductile connections. .falling and breach of containment qf.flammable and
11
J Lateral motion of the piping or duct does not cause toxic materials. Friction.forces may not be used to resist
impact r?ffragile appurtenances (e.g., .,prinkler heads) lateral load~ in the restraints unless positive uplift
with any other equipment, piping or structural member. restraint i.1· provided which ensures that the ji"iction
11 4
Lateral motion of' the piping or duct does not cause fhrces act continuously.
loss qfsystem vertical support.
208.9.3 Specifying Lateral Forces
IJ.S Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length
have top connections that cannot develop moments.
116
Design specifications for equipment shall either specify the
Support members cantilevered up fi·om the floor are design lateral forces prescribed herein or reference these
checkedfor stability. provisions.
12
Seismic restraints may be omitted .from electrical
raceways, such as cable trays, conduit and hus ducts, (l 208.9.4 Relative Motion of Equipment Attachmenb
all the jbllowing conditions are sati.~fied:
121
l,ateral motion <{! the raceway will not cause For equipment in Categories l and l[ buildings as defined
damaging impact with other systems. in Table I03-1, the lateral-force design shall consider the
11 2
Lateral motion ofthe 1·acewqy does not cause loss of effects of relative motion of the points or attachment to the
system vertical support. structure, using the drill based upon /1 111 •
,z.3 Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length
have top connections that cannot develop moments. 208.9.5 Alternative Designs
12 4
Support memhet:,· cantilevered up from the floor are
checked.for stahility. Where an approved national standard or approved physical
13
test data provide a basis for the earthquake-resistant design
Piping, ducts and electrical raceways. which must he
of a pai1icular type of equipment or other nonstmctural
functional following an earthquake, .,panning hetween
component, such a standard or data may be accepted as a
different buildings ur structural systems shall be
basis for design of the items with the following limitations:
sufficiently .flexible to withstand relative motion of
support points assuming out-of-phase motions.
11
l. These provisions shall provide minimum values for
Vihration isolators supporting equipment shall he the design of the anchorage and the members and
designedfiJr lateral loads or restrained.from di.,placing connections that transfer the forc(!s to the seismic-
laterally by other means. Restraint shall alw he resisting system.
provided, which limits vertical displacement, such that
lateral restraints do not become disengaged. aP and 2. The force, FP' and the overturning moment used in lite
Rpfor equipment supported on vibration isolators shall design ofl11e nonstruclural component shall not be less
he taken as 2.5 and 1.5, respectively, except that jf the th~n 80 percent~~- the values that would be obtained
isolation mounting frame is supported by shallow or usrng lhese provisions.
208.10 Alternative Earthquake Load Procedure SECTIONl09

SOIL LATERAL LOADS
Tbc earthquake load procedure of latest edilion of
ASCEISEI 7 prior to the release of this code may be used 209.1 General
in determ ining the earthquake loads as an alternative
procedure subject to reliable research work commissioned Basement, foundation and retaining walls shall be designed
by the owner or the engineer-on-record to provide for all to resist lateral soil loads. Soil loads specified in Table 209.
data required due to the non-availability of PHIVOLCS- l shall be used a~ the minimum design lateral soil loads
issued spectral acceleration maps for all areas in the unless specified othctwise in a soil investigation report
Phi Iippines. approved by the building official. Basement walls and
other walls in which horizontal movement is restricted at
The engineer-on-record shall be responsible for the t.hc top shall be designed for at-rest pressure. Retaining
spectral a.ccclcration and other related data not issued by walls free to move and rolate at the top are permitted to be
PTIIVOLCS used in the determination of the earthquake designed for active pressure. Desibrn lateral pressure from
loads. This alternative earthquake load procedure shall be surcharge loads shall be added to the lateral earth pressure
su~ject to Peer Review and approval of the Building load. Design lateral pressure shall be increased if soils with
Ollicial. expansion potential are present at the site.
Exception:
Basemen/ walls extending not more than 2.4 m below grade
and supporting flexible floor systems shall be permitted to
be designed for active pressure.

CHAPTFR 2 - fvlinim1m1 Design Loads 2-237
Table 209-1 - Soil Lalcral Load govern. Submerged or saturated soil pressures
shall include the weight ~f the buoyant soil plus
Design J ,atcral
Unified the hydrostatic load~.
Description of Soil f,oad •
Soil O
Unsuitahle as hack/ill material.
Backfill Material kPa per m depth
c Classificat " The definition and classification of soil
Active At-rest
ion material.~· shall be in accordance with ASTM
pressure pressure
Well-graded, D2487.
clean gravels; uw 5 10
gravel-sand mixes
Poorly graded
clean gravels; GP 5 10
gravel-sand mixes
Silty gravels,
poorly graded GM 6 10
gravel-sand mixes
Clayey gravels,
poor! y graded
gravel-and-clay
GC 7 10
mixes
Well-graded,
clean sands;
SW 5 IO
gravelly sand
mixes
Poorly graded
clean sands; sand- SP 5 10
!!ravel mixes
Silty sands, poorly
graded sand-silt SM 7 10
mixes
Sand-sill clay mix
with nlastic fines
SM-SC 7 16
Clayey sands,
poorly graded SC 10 16
sand-clay mixes
Inorganic silts and
clavev sills
ML 7 16
Mixlurc of
inorganic silt and ML-CL 10 16
clav
Inorganic clays of
low to medium CL 10 16
plasticity
Organic silts and
silt clays, low OL Note b Note b
plasticity
Inorganic c1ayey
MH Note b Note b
silts, elastic silts
Inorganic clays of
CH Note b Noteb
hicl1 plasticity
Organic clays and
silty clays
OH Note b Note b
a Design lateral soil loads are given for moist

conditions for the specified soils al their
optimum densities. Actual field conditions shall
SECTION2l0
RAIN WADS Sl<:CTION 21 t
; f·'LOOD LOADS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----i
210.1 RoofDrainage
21 l.l General
Roof drainage systems shall be designed in accordance
with the provisions of the code having jurisdiction in the Within flood hazard areas as established in Section 21 ( .3,
area. The flow capacity of secondary (overflow) drains or all new construction of buildings, structures and portions
scuppers shall not be less than that of the primary drains or of buildings and structures, including substantial
scuppers. improvement and restoration of substantial damage to
buildings and structures, shall be designed and constructed
210.2 Design Rain Loads to resist the etlcets of flood hazards and flood loads. For
buildings that arc located in more than one flood hazard
Each portion of a roof shall be designed to sm,tnin the load area, the provisions associated with the most restrictive
or rainwater that will accumulate on it if the primary f1ood hazard area shall apply.
drainage system for that portion is blocked plus the
uniform load caused by water that rises above the inlet or 211.2 Definitions
the secondary drainage system at its design flow.
The following words and terms shall, for the purposes of
this section, have the meanings shown herein.
(210-1)
where BASE FLOOD refers to flood having a 1-percent chance
of being equaled or exceeded in any given year.
d 11 additional depth of water on the undeflected
roof above the inlet of secondary drainage
BASE FLOOD RLEVATION (BFE) is the elevation of
system at its design J1ow (i .e., the hydraulic
the base flood, m, including wave height, relative to the
head), tnm
datum to be set by the specific national or local government
d,. depth of waler on the undeflected roof up to
agency.
the inlet of secondary drainage system when
the primary drainage system is blocked (i.e.,
BASEMENT is the po11ion of a building having its floor
the static head), mm
subgrade (below ground level) on all sides.
R rain load on the undeflected roof, kPa
DESIGN F LOOD is the flood associated with the greater
When the phrase "undeflected roof' is used, deflections
of the following two ·areas:
from loads (including dead loads) shall not be considered
when detennining the amount of rain on the roof.
1. Area with a flood plain subject lo a 1-perccnt or greater
210.3 Ponding Instability
or
chance flooding in any year; or
2. Arca desibrnated as a flood han1rd area on a
For roofs with a slope less than 6 mm per 300 mm, the community's fl()od hazard map, or otherwise legally
design calculations shall include verification of adequate designated.
stiffness to preclude progressive deflection.
DESIGN FLOOD RLEVATION (DFE) is the elevation
210.4 Controlled Drainage of the "design flood," including wave height, m, relative to
the datum specified on the community's legally designated
Roofs equipped w1lh hardware to control the rate of flood ha7.ard map. The design flood elevation shalJ be the
drainage shall be equipped with a secondary drainage elevation of the highest existing grade of the perimeter of
system al a higher elevation that limits accumulation of the building plus the depth specified on the flood hazard
water on the roof above that elevation. Such roots shall be map.
designed to sustain the load of rainwater that will
accumulate on them to the elevation of the secondary DRY FLOODPROOFING is a combination of design
drainage system plus the uniform load caused by water that modifications that results in a building or structure,
rises above the inlet of the secondary drainage system at its including the attendant utility and sanitary facilities, being
design flow determined from Section 210.2. Such roofs water tight with walls substantially impermeable to the
shall also be checked for ponding instability in accordance passage of water and with structural components having
with Section 210.3. the capacity to resist loads as identified in the code.

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION refers to buildings and construction means the first placement of' permanent
structures for which the "stm1 of construction" commenced construction of a building (including a manufactured
before the effective date of the ordinance or standard. home) on a site, such as the pouring ofa slab or footings,
"Existing construction" is also referred to as ''existing installation of pilings or construction or columns.
structures." Permanent construction does not include land preparation
(such as clearing, excavation, grading or filling), the
EXISTING STRUCTURE See "Existing construction." installation of streets or walkways, excavation for a
basement, footings, piers or foundations, the erection or
FLOOD or FLOODING is a general and temporary temporary forms or the installation or accessory huildings
condition of partial or complete inundation ofnormally dry such as garages or sheds not occupied as dwelling units or
land from: not part of the main building. For a substantial
improvement, the actual "sta11 of construction" means the
I. The overflow of inland or tidal waters. first alteration of any wall, ceiling, floor or other structural
part of a building, whether or not that alteration affects the
2. The unusual and rapid accumulation or runoff or external dimensions of the building.
surface waters from any source.
SUBSTANTIAL DAMAGF. refers to damage to any
FLOOI> l>AMAGJ<'.-Rl<:SISTANT MATI<:RIALS are origin .sustained by a structure whereby the cost of
construction material capable of withstanding direct and restoring the structure to its before-damaged condition
prolonged contact with floodwaters without sustaining any would equal or exceed 50 percent of the market value of
damage that requires more than cosmetic repair.
the structure before the damage occu1Tcd.
FLOOD HAZARD AREA refers to the greater of the SUBSTANTIAL IMPROVEMENT refers to any repair,
following two areas: reconstruction, rehabilitation, addition or improvement of
a building or strncture, the cost of which equals or exceeds
l. The area within a flood plain subject to a I-percent or 50 percent of the market value of the structure hefore the
greater chance of flooding in any year. improvement or repair is started. ff the .structure has
2. The area designated as a flood hazard area on a sustained suhstanlial damage, any repairs are considered
community's flood hazard map, or otherwise legally suhstantial improvement regardless of the actual repair
designated. work performed. The term does not, however, include
either:
l<'LOOD HAZARD AREA SUBJECT TO HIGH
VELOCITY-WA VE ACTION refers to area within the I. Any projccl for improvement of a building required to
flood hazard area that is subject to high velocity wave correct existing health, sanitary or safety code
action. violations identified by the building official and that
are the minimum necessary to assure safe living
FLOODWA Y is the channel of the river, creek or other conditions.
watercourse and the adjacent land areas that must be
reserved in order to discharge the base flood without 2. Any alteration of a historic structure provided that the
cumulatively increasing the water surface elevation more alteration will not preclude the .structure's continued
than a designated height. designalion as a historic structure.
LOWEST FLOOR refers to the floor of the lowest 211.3 Design Requirements
enclosed area, including basement, but excluding any
unfinished or flood-resistant enclosure, usable solely for 211.3.1 Design Loads
vehicle parking, building access or limited storage
provided that such enclosure is not built so as to render the Structural systems of buildings or other structures shall be
structure in violation of this section. designed, constructed, connected, and anchored to resist
flotation, collapse, and permanent lateral displacement due
START OF CONSTRUCTION refers to the date of to action of flood loads associated with the design flood
permit issuance for new construction and substantial (see Section 211.3.3) and other loads in accordance with
improvements to existing structures, provided the actual the load comhinalions of Section 203.
start of construction, repair, reconstruction, rehabilitation,
addition, placement or other improvement is within 180
days after the date of issuance. The actual start of

?.-240 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
211.3.2 Erosion and Scour 21 1.4.3 Hydrodynamic Loads
The effects of erosion and scour shall be included in the Dynamic effects of moving water shall be determined by
cflculation of loads on buildings and other structures in detailed analysis utilizing basic concepts of flui:
flood hazard areas. mechanics.
211.3.3 Loads on Breakaway Walls Exception:

Where water velocities do not exceed 3.05 mis, dynamic
Walls and partitions required by ASCE/SEJ 24, to break
effects of moving water shall be permilled to be
away, including their connections to the structure, shall be
converted into equivalent hydrostatic louds by
designed for the largest of the following toads acting
increasing the DFE for design pwposes by an
perpendicular to the plane of the wall:
equivalent surcharge depth. dh, on the headwater side.
and above the ground level only, equul to
I. The wind load specified in Section 207.
(211-1)
2. The eat1hquake load specified in Section 208.
3. 0.48 kPa. where
The loading at which breakaway walls arc intended to v average velocity of water, m/s
collapse shall not exceed 0.96 kPa unless the design meets g acceleration due to gravity, 9.81 m/s 2
the following conditions: a coetlicient of drag or shape factor (not less
than 1.25)
I. Breakaway wall collapse is designed to result from a
flood load less than that which occurs during the base The equivalent surcharge depth shall be added to the DFE
flood. design depth and the resultant hydrostatic pressures applied
to, and uniformly distributed across, the vertical projected
2. The supporting foundation and the elevated po11ion of area of Llte building or structure that is perpendicular to the
the building shall be designed against collapse, flow. Surfaces parallel to the flow or surfaces wetted by the
permanent lateral displacement, and other structural Lail waler shall be su~jccl to the hydrostatic pressures for
damage due to the effects of flood loads in depths to the DFE only.
combination with other loads as specified in Section
203. 211.4.4 Wave Loads
21 J.4 Loads During Flooding Wave loads shall be determined by one of the following
three methods: (I) by using the analytical procedtm:s
211.4.1 Load Basis outlined in this section, (2) by more advanced numerical
modeling procedures, or (3) hy lahoratory test procedures
In flood hazard areas, the structural design shall be based (physical modeling).
on the design flood.
Wave loads are those loads that result from water waves
211.4.2 Hydrostatic Loads propagating over the water surface and striking a building
or other structure. Design and construction of buildings and
Hydrostatic loads caused by a depth of water to the level of other structures subject to wave loads shall account for the
the DFE shall be applied over all surfaces involved, both following loads: waves breaking on any po11ion of the
above and below ground level, except that for sw-faces building or structure; uplift forces caused by shoaling
exposed to free water, the design depth shall be increased waves beneath a building or structure, or po11ion thereof;
by 0.30 m. Reduced uplift and lateral loads on surfaces of wave run-up striking any portion of the building or
enclosed spaces below the DFE shall apply only if structure; wave-induced drag and inertia forces; and wave-
provision is made for entry and exit of floodwater. induced scour at the base of a building or structure, or its
foundation. Wave loads shall be included forbolh V-Zones
and A-Zones. Jn V-Zoncs, waves arc 0.91 m high, or
higher; in .coastal lloodplains landward or the V-Zone,
waves arc less than 0.91 m.

Nonbreaking an<l broken wave loads shall be calculated 211.4.4.2 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical Walls
using the procedures described in Sections 2 I 1.4.2 and
211.4.3 that show how to calculate hydrostatic and Maximum pressures and net forces resulting from a
hydrodynamic loads. normally incident breaking wave (depth-limited in size,
with Hb = 0. 78d.~) acting on a rigid vertica I wall shall
Breaking wave loads shall be calculated using the be calculated by the following:
procedures described in Sections 2 I 1.4.4.1 through
211.4.4.4. Breaking wave heights used in the procedures (211-5)
described in Sections 211.4.4.1 through 211.4.4.4 shall be
calculated for V-Zones and Coastal A-Zones using and
Equations 211-2 and 211-3. (211-6)
Hh = 0. 78d5 (211-2) where

where Pmax maximum combined dynamic (Cpywds)
and static (1. 2ywds) wave pressures, also
Hb breaking wave height, m
refoned to as shock pressures, kN/m2
ds local still water depth, m
net breaking wave force per unit length of
structure, also referred to as shock,
The local still water depth shall be calculated using
impulse, or wave impact force, kN/m,
Equation 211-3, unless more advam:ed procedures or
acting near the still water elevation
laborato,y tests permitted by this section are used.
dynamic pressure coctfa:icnt (1. 6 <
CP < 3.5) (seeTable211-1)
ds = 0. 65(BFE - G) (211-3)
unit weight of water, kN/m3, 9.80 kN/m 3
for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m 3 for salt
where
water
still water depth, m at base of huilding or
G ground elevation, m
other stru~ture where the wave breaks
211.4.4.1 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical Pilings and This procedure assumes the vertical wall causes a reflected
Columns or standing wave against the waterward side of the wall
with the crest of the wave at a height of I .2d, above the still
The net force resulting from a breaking wave acting on a water level. Thus, the dynamic static and total pressure
rigid vertical pile or column shall be assumed to act at the distributions against the wall are as shown in Figure 211-
still water elevation and shall be calculated by the l.
following:
This procedure also assumes the space behind the vertical
(211-4) wall is dry, with no fluid balancing the static component of
where the wave force on the outside of the wall. rf free water
exists behind the wall, a portion of' the hydrostatic
= net wave force, kN component of the wave pressure and force disappears (sec
unit weight of water, in lb per cubic kN/m3, Figure 211-2) and the net force shall be computed by
-: 9.80 kN/m3 for fresh water and 10.05 Equation 211-7 (the maximum combined wave pressure is
kN/m1 for salt water still computed with Equation 211-5).
unit weight of water, kN/m3, 9.80 kN/m3 for
fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for salt water (211-7)
cocflicient of drag for breaking waves, =
1.75 for round piles or columns, and= 2.25 where
for square piles or columns
net hreaking wave force per unit length of
D pile or column diameter, m for circular
structure, also referred to as shock, impulse,
sections, or for a square pile or column, 1.4
or wave impact force, kN/m, acting near the
times the width of the pile or column, m
still water elevation
breaking wave height, m
L
dynamic pressure coefficient (1. 6 < Cp < 211.5 Establishment of Flood Hazard Areas
3. 5) (sec Table 211-1)
'y,.. unit weight of water, kN/m3, = 9.80 kN/m 3 To establish flood hazard areas, the governing body shall
for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m1 for salt adopt a flood haz~rd map and sup~orting data. The flood
water hazard map shall mcludc, at a mm11num, areas of special
still water depth, m at base of building or flood hazard where records are available.
other structure where the wave breaks
211.6 Design and Construction
211.4.4.3 Breaking Wave Loads on Non-vertical
Walls The design and construction of buildings an<l structures
located in flood hazard areas, including flood hazard areas
Breaking wave forces given by Equations 211-6 and 211-7 subject to high velocity wave action.
shall be modified in instances where the walls or surfaces
upon which the breaking waves act arc non-vertical. The 211.7 Flood Hazard Documentation
horizontal component of breaking wave force shall be
given by The following documentation shall be prepared and ~ealed
by an engineer-of-record and submitted to the building
(211-8) official:
where I. For construction in llood hazard areas not subject to
Fnv horizontal component of breaking wave high-velocity wave action:
force, kN/m
net breaking wave force acting on a vertical I. I The elevation of the lowest floor, induding the
surface, kN/m basement, as required by the lowest floor
a vertical angle between non-vertical surface elevation.
and the horizontal
l.2 For fully enclosed areas below the design tlood
211..4.4.4 Breaking Wave Loads from Obliquely elevation where provisions to allow for the
Incident Waves automatic ently and ex it of floodwaters do not
meet the minimum requirements, construction
Breaking wave forces given by Equations 211-6 and 211-7 documents shall include a statement that the
shall he modified in instances where waves are obliquely design will provide for equalization of hydrostatic
incident. Breaking wave forces from non-normally flood forces.
incident waves shall be given by
1.3 For dry flood-proofed nonresidential buildings,
(211-9) construction documents shall include a statement
that the dry Hood-proofing is designed.
where
Foi horizontal component of obliquely incident 2. For construction in flood hazard areas subject to high-
breaking wave force, kN/m velocity wave action:
a net breaking wave force (normally incident
waves) acting on a vertical surface, kN/m 2.1 The elevation of the bottom of the lowest
horizontal structural member as required by the
211.4.5 Impact Loads lowest floor elevation.
impact loads are those that result from debris, ice, and any 2.2 Construction documents shall include a statement
object transported by floodwaters striking against buildings that the building is designed, including that the
and structures, or pai.1s thereof: Impact loads shall be pile or colwnn foundation and building or
determined using a rational approach as concentrated loads structure to be attached thereto is designed to be
acting horizontally at tl1e most critical location at or below anchored to resist flotation, collapse and lateral
the DFE. movement due to the effects of wind and flood
loads acting simultaneously on all building
components, and other load requirements of
Section 203.

2.3 For breakaway walls designed to resist a nominal ASCE/SEI

load of less than 0.5 k[>a or more than LO kPa, American Society of Civil Engineers
construction documents shall include a statement Structural Engineering Institute
that the breakaway wall is designed. 1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Res ton, VA 20191-4400
Table 211-1 Value of Dynamic Pressure Coefficient, Cp
ASCE/SEI 24
Building Category c,, Section 5.3.3
l 1.6 Flood Resistant Design and Construction, 1998
II 2.8
]J 3.2
JV 3.5
211.8 Consensus Standards and Other Referenced

Document~
This section lists the consensus standards and other

documents which are adopted by reference within this
chapter:
Vertical Wall
- Crest of refle(ted wave
1
J.2d.1 - - - C.n:st (?fincident wave
O.SSd,
Stillwater level
Hydrostatk press~
Ground elevation
Figure 211-1
Normally Incident Breaking Wave Pressmes Against a Vertical Wall
(Space Behind Vertical Wall Is Dry)

Vertical Wall
- - Crest of reflected wave
1.2 d.v
Dynamic pressure:
1-:~: of mcidont wave
--------------- Stittwater level
d.,
Net hydrostatic pressure
'
!
/
:
Ground elevation
Figure 211-2
Nonnally incident Breaking Wave Pressures Against a Vertica! Wall
(Still Water Level Equal on Both Sides of Wall)

CHAPTFR?. - Minim11m Design 1.oacl~ 2 2'1t>
NSCP C101-15
The Wind Loads Subcommittee would like to express its sincerest gratitude
To the following DLSU undergraduate and post-graduate students who have helped and contributed in the
preparation of the tables and figures, proofreading and editing of the contents of the whole Section 207 - Wind
Loads under the supervision of Engr. Adam C. Abinales and Dr. Lcssandro Estclito 0. Garciano who are faculty
members of the Civil Engineering Department, Gokongwei College of Engineering, De La Salle University.
Undergraduate students:
• CACAPIT, JENKIN JOSE BORROMEO
• HO, RY AN AARON DE GUZMAN
• MACARAEG, CARLO JOSHUA MENDOZA
• MAGPJ\NTAY, TYRONE JOHN ALVAREZ
• MAS, MICHAEL JAYSON SARJ\LLERO
• MEDRANO, BRYAN JOSEF TAPALES
• PABILONA, WfNCENT NICOLE KIU
• SANCHEZ, JONATHAN ALFONSO DELLOSA
Graduate students:
• AYTONA, EDUARDO DEGUZMAN
• APNOY AN, DEXTER HANSEL CODIMDIM
• BALDO, JAN NICHOLAS SANGWA Y
• CABALBAG, JOSEPH RODRIGUEZ
• CARINO, JI\N MAE NIGOS
• DE LA CRUZ, JONAS PAUL B.
• ESPJNO, CECILIO II BAGO
• FULLEROS, SHEENA MAE CAYETANO
• GAPUZ, EMERSON OCOL
• lLUMIN, RIZAL YN CENTJNO
• LACSAMANA-AQUINO, JANICE KA YE COLOM!\
• MOHAMMED, MURPHY PONCE
• NAVAL, JELEAN NADINE GODOY
• RANOSA, LOVELY LORENZO
• SANTIAGO, ELEAZAR HIPOL
• VICENCIO, MARION RY AN ALUNING
• ZAMORA, JOHN TULJAO
AND most especially to Ms. THELMA A. CINCO, Assistant Weather Services Chiet: Impact Assessment and
Applications Section, Climatology and Agrometeorology Division and her staff at the Philippine Atmospheric
Geophysical and Astronomical Services Administration (PAGASA) under the Department _of Science and
Technology (DOST) who provided the historical data needed to develop the wind contour maps.

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium I
Tel. No.: (+632) 410-0483
1''ax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline{algmail.com
Website: http://www.aseponline.org
National Structural Code or the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

.,
NSCP C101-15
Chapter3
EARTHWORKS AND
FOUNDATIONS

VOLUME I

Tel. No. : (+632) 41{M)483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@ifilaiI.com
Website:http://www.aseponllne.org

CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks and Foundations 3-1
Table ol' Contents
SECTION 301 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................... ......................... ............................................3-3

301.l Scope ... ....................................................................................................................................................... ......... .3-3
301.2 Quality and Design ........................................................................................................... ....................... ................ ... 3-3
301.3 Allowable Rearing Pressures ................................... ............... ................................................................................... .3-3
301.4 Definitions .. ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
SECTION 302 - EXCAVATION AND FILLS ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
302.1 General .......................................................................................................................................................................3-3
302.2 Cuts .......... .................... ......... .................................................................................................................................... .3-3
302.4 Fills .................................................... ........................................................................................ ................................. 3-5
302.5 Setbacks .... .................................................................................................................................................................3-6
302.6 Drainage and Terracing ..... ........................................................................................... .... ........... ............................ ... 3-6
302.7 Erosion Control ................................................................... ........................................................................... ............3-7
SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION .........................................................................................................3-8
303.l General ......... .......... .. .................................................................................................................................................. 3-8
303.2 Soil Classification ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
303.3 Questionable Soils ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
303.4 Liquefaction Study .. ............................ .................... ................................................................................ ................... 3-9
303.5 Expansive Soils ....... .................................................................................................................................................. .3-9
303.6 Co1nprcssiblc Soils ... .. ............................................................................. ....... .................................. ........................ J-10
303.7 Reports ........... ........... ............................................................. ................................................................................. 3- I O
303.8 Soil Tests ...................... ... .... ...... .... ........ ...... ........ .....................................................................................................3-10
303.9 Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength Loss ......................................................................................................... 3- 12
303. l O Adjacent Loads ............. .................................................................................... ................................................ ........ 3-12
303 .l l Drainage ............ .. ...................................................................... ............................................................................... 3-12
303.12 P late Load Tesl .................................. .......................................................................................................................3- 12
SECTION 304 - ALLOWABLF. FOUNDATION AND I .ATERAL PRESSURES ......................................................3-12
304. l From Ueotcehnical Site Investigation and Assessment.. .......................................................................................... 3-12
304.2 Presumptive Load-Bearing and Lateral Resisting V alues ............ .................. :... ......................................................3- I3
304.3 Minimum Allowable Pressures ... .... .......... ..... ........... .............. ........................................................ .........................3- l 3
304.4 Foundations Adjacent to Existing Rctaining/13asemcnt Walls .. ............................................................................... 3- 13
SF.CTION 305 - FOOTINGS ...............................................................................................................................................3-14
305.1 Uencral ............... ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- I 4
305.2 FootingDesign ................................................................................................................. ........................................ 3- 14
305.4 Stepped Foundations .. .... ............... ..................... .................... .................................................................................. 3-14
305.5 Footings on or Adjacent LO Slopes.................................................................................... ........................................ 3-l 5
305.6 Foundat ion Plates or Sills ............. ........................................................................................................................... .3-16
305.7 Designs Employing Lateral Bearing ..... ................................... .......................................................................... ...... 3-16
305.8 Grillage Footings .......... ........................................................... .............................................................. ...................3-l 7
305.9 Bleacher Footings............................................................ ................................................... ................ ......... .. ...........3-l 7

3-2 CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks and Foundations
SECTION 306 • PILES-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 3-17

306'.l General ............................................................................... ,........................................................ ............................ 3-17
306.2 Interconnection ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-17
306.3 Determination of Allowable Loads.......................................................................................................................... 3-17
306.4 Static Load Test. ..................................................................... ................................................................................. 3-18
306.5 Dynamic Load Test ................................................................................................................................................. 3-18
306.6 Column Action ........................................................................................................... ............................................. 3-18
306.7 Group Action ............................................................................................................................................. ... ........... 3-18
306.8 Lateral Loads .................................................................. ......................................................................................... 3-18
306.9 Piles in Subsiding Areas .............................................................................................................. ............................ 3-19
306.10 Water Jetting...................................................................... ...................................................................................... 3-19
306.10 Protection of Pile ·Materials ............................. ............................... ......................................................................... 3-19
306.12 Allowable Loads .................................. .................................................................................................................... 3-19
306.13 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses .................................................................................................................... 3-19
SECTION 307 ·PILES-SPECIFIC REQUIREIVI ENTS .................................................................................................. 3-20
307.1 Round Wood Piles ....................................................................... ............ ....................................................... - ..... .. 3-20
307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles ................................. ......................... .............. ............. ................................ 3-20
307.3 lvfctal-Cased Concrete Piles ........................................................................................ ........ .......................... ........... 3-20
307.4 Precast Concrete Piles ........................................... ................................................ .............. .................................... 3-21
307.5 Preeast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioned) ..................... .. ........................................................................... 3-21
307.6 Structural Steel Piles ....................................................................... ......................................................................... 3-22
307.7 Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe Piles ........................................................................................................................ ...... 3-22
SECTlON 308 ·FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION-SEISMIC WNE 4 ..................................................................... 3-23
308.1 General ................................................. ........................................ .............................................. ............................. 3-23
308.2 Foundation and Gcotcchnical Investigations ....................................................................... .................... ................ 3-23
308.3 Footing Foundations ................................................................................................................................................ 3-23
308.4 Pier and Pile Foundations ............................................................................... ........ ................................................. 3-23
308.5 Driven Pile Foundations ...................... ... .......... ................... .................................. .................... ............. ....... .......... 3-24
308.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations ....................................................................................................................... 3-26
SECTION 309 - SPECIAL FOUNDATION, SLOl:>E STABILJZATlON _AND MATERIALS. OF
CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................... 26
309. I Special Foundation Systems ................................ .............................. .. ....... ..,.......................................................... 3-26
309 .2 Acceptance and Approval ...................................... .. ......................... .......................................................... ............. 3-26
309.3 Specific Applications ................................ ............ ...................................................................... ............................. 3-26

CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks afld Foundations 3-3
SECTION 301 SECTION 302

v GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
---~--- EXCAVATIONS AND FILLS
301.1 Scope 302.1 General
This chapter sets forth requirements for excavations, fills, Excavation or fills for buildings or structures shall be
footings and foundations for any building or structure. constructed or protected such that they do not endanger life
or property. Reference is made to Section 109 of this code
301.2 Quality and Design for requirements governing excavation, grading and
earthwork construction, including fills and embankments.
The quality and design of materials used structurally in
excavations, fills, footings and foundations shall conform to 302.2 Cuts
the requirements specified in Chapters 4, 5, 6 and 7.
302.2.l General
301.3 Allowable Bearing Pressures
Unless otherwise recommended in the approved
Allowable stresses and design fonnulas provided in this gcotechnical engineering report or engineering report, cuts
chapter shall be used with the allowable stress design load shall confonn to the provisions of this section. In the
combinations specified in Section 203.4. absence of an approved geotechnical engineering report,
these provisions may be waived for cuts 3 m or less in
301.4 Definitions height, involving intact rock or hard soil, that are not
intended to support structlUes.
See Sections I 02 and 202.
302.2.2 Slopes
The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for

the intended use and shall be no steeper than I unit vertical
in 2 units horizontal (50% slope) unless a geotechnical
engineering report, stating that the site has been
investigated, and giving an opinion that a cut at a steeper
slope shall be stable and not create a hazard to public or
private property, is submitted and approved. Such cuts shall
be protected against erosion or degradation by sufficient
cover, drainage, engineering and/or biotechnical means.
302.3 Excavations
302.3.1 Footings
Existing footings or foundations which may be undermined

by any excavation shall be underpinned adequately or
otherwise protected against settlement and shall be
protected against lateral movement.

302.3.2 Protection of Adjoining Property 302.3.3 Support of Excavations and Open Cuts
'The following provisions shall apply unless prevailing local Excavations or open cuts in excess of l .5m in depth shall
laws are deemed more stringent from an engineering have adequately designed shoring or support lo protect
standpoint: against collapse.
I. Before commencing the excavation, the person making
or causing the excavation lo be made shall notify in
writing the owners of adjoining building not less than
IO days before such excavation is lo be made and lhat
the adjoining building shall be protected. The condition
of the adjoining building shall be documented to
include photographs prior to excavation. Technical
documents pertaining to the proposed underpinning
and excavation plan shall be provided the owner of the
adjacent property.
FOR: a) H s. 20.0m: FOR: X.,.." 2 for pro,:,e,Jy COl'l1Mldtd flll1

w,it2.om: x..., • 1 for cuts on hard sell and IPermit Arn Boundary
h11' 10.0m: Intact rock
X1n1n • for loose or uncompacted soils,
b) H :t 20.0m: a thorough soll lnv•tlsatlon to
W,24.0m: be conducted by a certified li:;sbirtl
h1!i 10.0m: Geotechnlcal Enalneer Is required 0.6m
Imin.
f . . .,. . . . . . . ,
Tap of Slop•-
N1tural or Ftnleh Gracie
T- - -
I Toe of Slope
T f
1 P,opel'ly designed lnteroeptor
dralna wl1h outfalls spaced at
re9ular lntecvals
FOR: a) H =height of slope
b) w, • wkllh ot tarrace
Figure 302-1 Cut Slopes
2. Unless it can be shown through a detailed gcotcchnical

investigation that underpinning is unnecessary, any
person making or causing an excavation shall protecl
the excavation so that the soil of adjoining property
will not cave in or settle.
In cases where the adjacent existing structure will have
more basements than the proposed building, the foundation
of the proposed building should be designed so as not to
impart additional lateral earth pressures on the existing
building (see Section 304.4}.

302.4 Fills 302.4.3 Fill Material
-'302.4.1 General Any organic or deleterious material shall be removed and

will not be permitted in fills. Except as permitted by the
Unless otherwise recommended in the approved geotechnical engineer, no rock or similar irreducible
gcotechnical engineering report, fills shall conform to the material with a maximum dimension greater than 200 mm
provisions of this section. In the absence of an approved shall be buried or placed in tills.
geotechnical engineering report or engineering report, these
provisions may be waived for minor fills (IT :S 2.0 m) not Exception:
intended to suppo1t structures.
The placement of larger rock may be permitted when the
geotechnical engineer properly devises a method of
Fills to be used to support the foundations of any building
placement, and continuously inspects its placement and
or structure shall be placed in accordance with accepted
approves the fill stability. The following conditions shall
engineering practice. A geotcchnical investigation report
also apply:
and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both
acceptable to the building ollicial, shall be submitted when /. Prior to issuance of the grading permit, potential rock
required by the building official. disposal areas shall be delineated on the grading plan.
2. Rock sizes greater than 300 mm in maximum
No fill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to
dimension shall be 3 m or more below grade, measured
any building or structure unless such building or structure is
vertically.
capable of withstanding the additional vertical and
horizontal loads caused by the fill or surcharge. 3. Rocks shall be placed so as to assure.filling ofall voids
with well-graded soil.
Fill slopes shall not be constructed on natural slopes steeper
than I unit vertical in 2 units hori~ontal (50% slope). 302.4.4 Compaction
302.4.2 Preparation of' Ground All fills shall be compacted in lifls not exceeding 20 cm in
thickness to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum density
The existing ground surface shall be adequately prepared lo as determined by ASTM Standard D-1557. In-place densily
receive fill by removing any deleterious materials, shall be determined in accordance with ASTM 0-1556,
non-complying fill, topsoil and other unsuitable materials, D-2167, D-2922, D-3017 or equivalent. F'or clean granular
and by scarifying to provide a bond with the new fill. materials, the use of the foregoing procedures is
inappropriate. Relative density criteria shall be used based
Where the natural slopes are steeper than I unit vertical in on ASTM 05030-04. A minimum of three lest~ for every
S units horiwntal (20%, slope) and the height is greater than 500 m2 area should be performed for every lifi to verify
1.5 m, the ground surface shall be prepared hy benching compliance with compaction requirements.
into sound bedrock or other competent material as
detennined by the gcotechnical engineer. The bench under 302.4.5 Slope
the toe of a fill on a slope steeper than I unit vertical in
5 units horizontal (20% slope) shall he at least 3 m wide. The slope of Jill surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for
the intended use. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than I unit
The area beyond the toe of fill shall be sloped to drain or a vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope) unless
paved drain shall be provided. When fill is to be placed substantiating data justifying steeper slopes arc submitted
over a cut, the bench under the toe of till shall he at least and approved.
3 m wide but the cut shall he made before placing the fill
and acceptance by the geotechnical engineer as a suitable
foundation for fill.

302.S Sethacks 302.6.2 Terraces

:f
302.5.1 General Terraces at least 2.0rn in width shall be establ ished al not
more than I 0.0m vertical intervals on all Cllt or fill slopes to
Cut and fill slopes shall be set back from site boundaries in control surface drainage and debris except lhat where only
accordance with this section subject to verification with one terrace is required, it shall be at mid-height. For cut or
detailed slope stability study. Setback dimensions shall be fill slopes greater than 20.0m in vertical height, terraces at
horizontal distances measured perpendicular to the sile lea::il 4.0m in width shall be established at not more than
boundary. Setback dimensions shall be as shown in JO.Orn vertical intervals. Terrace widths and vertical
Figure 302-1. spacing for cut and fill slopes greater than 40.0m in height
shall be designed by the Geotcchnical Engineer and
302.5.2 Top of Cut Slope approved by the Building Official. Suitahk access shall be
provided to permit proper cleaning and maintenance.
The top of cut slopes shall not be made nearer to a site
boundary line than one Ji{lh of the vertical height of cul Swales or ditches on terraces shall be designed to
with a minimum of 0.6 m and a maximum of 3 m. The effectively collect surface water and discharge to an outfall.
setback may need to be increased for any required Jt shall have a minimum gradient of0.5 percent and must be
interceptor drains. paved wilh reinforced concrete not less than 75 mm in
thickness or an approved equal paving material.
302.S.3 Toe of Fill Slope
A single run of swale or ditch shall not collect runoff from a
The toe of a fill slope shall be made not nearer Lo the site tributary area exceeding l ,000 m2 (projected area) without
boundary hne than one half the height of the slope with a discharging into a down drain.
minimum of 0.6 m and a maximum or 6 m. Where a fill
slope is lo be localed near the site boundary and the 302.6.3 Subsurface Drninage
adjacen t off-site properly is developed, special precautions
shall be incorporated in the work as the bllilding official Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with surface drainage
deems necessary to protect the adjoining property from as necessary for stability.
damage as a result of such grading. These precautions may
include but are not limited to: 302.6.4 Disposal
I. Additional setbacks.
All drainage facilities shall be designed lo carry waters to
2. Provision for retaining or slough walls. the nearest practicable drainage way approved by the
Building Oilicial or otfier appropriate jurisdiction as a safe
3. Mechanical stabilization or chemical treatment of the
place to deposit such waters. Erosion of ground in the area
till slope surface to minimize erosion.
of discharge shall be prevented by installation of non-
4. Rockfall protection erosive down drains or other devices or splash blocks.
5. Provisions for the control ofsurfaee subsurface waters.
Building pads shall have a drainage gradient of 2 percent
toward approved drainage facilities, unless waived by the
302.5.4 Modification of Slope Location
Building Official.
The building oClicial may approve alternate setbacks. The
Note:
building official may require an investigation and
recommendation by a qualified gcolechnical engineer to The gradient from the building pad may be I percent if all
demonstrate that the intent of this section bas been satislied. of the following conditions exist throughout the permit
area:
302.6 Drainage and Terracin,::
I. No proposed .fills are greater than 3 m in maximum
depth.
302.6.1 General
2. No proposed finish cut or .fill slope faces have a
Unless otherwise indicated on the approved grading plan, vertical height in excess of3 m.
drainage facil ities and terracing shall conform to the
3. No existing slope faces steeper than I unit vertical in
provisions of th is section for cut or fill slopes sleeper than
JO unit.v horizontal (10% slope) have a vertical height
I unit vertical in 3 units horizontal (33.3% slope).
in excess of3m.

CHAPTER 3- Earthworks and Foundations 3-7
302.6.S Interceptor Drains and biological attack, mechanical damage, creep,

installation damage and pH conditions to the reinforcement.
Paved or Lined interceptor drains shall be installed along
the top of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area Select Granular Backfill shall consist of sound, durahle,
above slopes toward the cut has a drainage path greater than granular material free from organic matter or other
12 m measured horizontally. Unless specified otherwise by deleterious material (such as shale or other soft particles
the Engineer of Record, interceptor drains shall he paved with poor durability).
with a minimum of 75 mm of concrete or gunite and
reinforced. They shall have a minimum depth of 300 mm The select granular backfill materials for these earth
and a minimum paved width of 750 mm measured structures shall conform to Grading Requirements as stated
horizontally across the drain. The slope of drain shall be in Table 302. l
approved by the building official. Interceptor drains shall be
provided with outfalls spaced at regular intervals sunicient Table 302-1 Grading Requirements
enough to avoid overflow of drains. In cases where neither
reinforced concrete nor reinforced gunitc shall be used as Standard Sieve Percent by Mass Passing
the paving material for the drain, sufficient testing on the Opening (mm) Designated Sieve
alternative material must he conducted to detennine its (AASHTO T 27 and T 11)
effectiveness and durability as a channel lining material. 100 100
0.0425 0-60
302.7 Erosion Control 0.075 0-15
302.7.1 Slopes The angle of internal friction for the backfill material shall
not be less than 34°.
The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and
maintained to control against erosion. This erosion wntrol The assigned cohesion value during the design stage for the
may consist of biotechnical or geosynthetic intervention baeklill material within the reintorced zone shall not exceed
adapted to the local conditions. The protection for the 5 kPa.
slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and prior to
callin~ for final approval. Where cut slopes arc not subject The soils should be compacted to no less than 95% MOD
to erosion due to the erosion-resistant character of the determine according to AASIITO T 99 Method C or D and
materials, such protection may be omitted. corrected for oversi7.ed material according to AASHTO T
99, Note 9.
302.7.2 Other Devices
The material shall have a Plasticity Index of not more than
Where necessary, check dams, crihhing, riprap or other 15 for rigid faced MSE structures, and not more than 20 for
devices or methods shall be employed to control erosion flexible or ductile faced MSE structures, as determined by
and provide safety. AASHTOT90.
302.7.2 Scour Protection Electrochemical requirements for Mechanically Stabilized

Earth (MSE) retaining walls with metallic reinforcements
Retaining structures and foundations located on stream shall comply with summarized in Table 302-2.
banks and beds shall be provided with appropriate
countermeasures, designed on the hasis of a detailed Table 302-2 Electrochemical Requirements
engineering study, for long-tenn protection against scouring
and erosion. Test Requirements
Res is tivity, AASHTO
302.8 MSE Structures and Similar Reinforced 3000 0.-cm min. I
T288
.Embankments and l<'ills pH, AASHTO T 289 5.0 to 10.0
Su I fate Content
The design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) 200 ppm max.
AASHTOT290
Structures and Similar Reinforced Embankments and Fills Ch loride Content
shall incorporate provisions for internal and external 100 ppm max.
AASHTOT 291
drainage.
Electrochemical requirements for Mechanically Stabilized
The design for the required reinfor,cement shall take into Earth MSE retaining walls with Geosynthetic
consideration the detrimental effects of corrosion, chemical

reinforcements specify lhat the pH shall be between 5.0 to SECTION 303

I0.0 as determined hy AASI ITO T 289.
FOUNDATION' INVESTIGATION
303. l General
Foundation investigation shall he conducted and a

Professional Report shall be submitted at each building site
For structures two storeys or higher, an exhaustive
geotechnical study shall be performed to evaluate in-situ
soil parameters fur foundation design and analysis. The
minimum required number of boreholes per structure based
on footprint area is summarized in Table 303-1. All or these
boreholes should fall within the footprint of the structure,
and should generally be uniformly distributed throughout
the building footprint. Unless specified by the consulting
Geotechnical Engineer, all boreholes should be drilled to a
depth of at least five meters into hard strata or until a
suitable hearing layer is reached. For buildings with
basements, the depth of boring should extend to twice the
least dimension of the structure's footprint (2B) added to
the depth of the basement.
Table 303-1 Minimum required number of horeholes per

structure.
FOOTPRINT AREA OF MINIMUM REQUIRED

STRUCTURE (m 2) NUMBF.ROli'
BOREHOLES*
A ~ 50
50 <AS: 500 2
A ?;500 2 + (A/1000)**
(Rounded Ur to Nearest
Integer)
*The minimum required number of boreholes should in no

w~y be construed as an upper limit value.
** "A" corresponds to the footprint area of the structure in

?
m-.
An exhaustive geotechnical investigation should also be

conducted in cases or:
1) questionable soils, expansive soils, or problematic

soils (e.g. liqucliable, organic, compressible,
sensitive, etc.);

2) to dclerminc whether the cx1stmg groundwaler Exception:

table is above or within 1.5 meters hclow the
The building qfficial may waive this evaluation upon receipt
elevation or lhe lowest lloor level;
<?f'writfen opinion of a quaf(f,ed geotechnicaf engineer that
3) where such floor is localed below the finished
liqu~faction is not probable.
ground level adjacenl to the foundation;
4) in cases where the use of pile foundalions and/or
303.5 Expansive Soils
ground improvement are anticipated;
5) in areas underlain by rock strata where the rock is
Soils meeting all lour of the following provisions shall be
suspected to be or queslionable characteristics or
considered expansive:
indicate variations in the structure or t11e rock or
where solution cavities or voids are expected to be I. Plasticity index (PI) of 15 or greater, detem1ined in
present in lhc rock; and accordance wilh ASTM D 4318.
6) other cases deemed necessary by the Geotechnical
Engineer. 2. More than 10 percent of the soil particles pass a No.
200 sieve (75 m), determined in accordance with
ASTM0-422.
The Building Official may require that the interpretation
and evaluation of the results of the foundation investigation 3. More than IO percent of the soil particles are less lhan
be made by a geotechnical engineer. 5 micrometers in size, detennined in accordance with
ASTM D-422.
303.2 Soil Classification
4. Expansion index greater than 20, determined in
accordance with ASTM 0-4829.
For the purposes of this chapter, the definition and
classilicalion of soil materials for use in Table 304-1 shall Tests that show compliance with Items I, 2 and 3 shall not
be according to ASTM 0-2487. he required if the test prescribed in llem 4 is conducted.
Soil classification shall be based on observation and any 303.5.l Design for Expansive Soils
necessary tesls of the materials disclosed by borings or
excavations made in appropriate locations. Additional Footings or foundalions for buildings and structures
studies may be necessary tu evaluate soil strength, t11e ellect founded on expansive soils shall he designed in accordance.:
of moisture vanatlon on soil-hearing eapacily, with Seclion 1805.8.l or 1805.8.2.
compressibility, liquefaction susceptibility and expansion
potential. Footing or foundation design need not comply with Section
303.5.3 or 303.5.4 where the soil is removed in accordance
303.3 Questionable Soils with Section 303.5.4, nor where t11e building official
approves stabilization of the soil in aecordam:e with Seclion
Where the classification, strength or compressihility of the 303.5.5.
soil arc unknown, or where a load bearing value superior to
that specified in this code is claimed, the Building Official 303.5.2 Foundations
shall require that these be verified through the necessary
geotechnical study stipulated in Section 303. I. footings or foumlalions placed on or within the active zone
or expansive soils shall be designed to resist differential
303.4 Liquefaction Study volume changes and to prevent struclural damage to t11e
suppo11ed structure. Deflection and racking of lhe supported
A liquefaction susceptibility assessment in accordance with shall he limited tu that which will not interfere with the
accepted practice is warranted if hoth conditions below arc usability and serviceability of the structure.
discovered during the course of the geotechnical
investigation: Foundations placed below where volume change occurs or
below expansive soil shall comply with the following
I. Shallow ground water, 2 m or less.
provisions:
2. Unconsolidated saturated sandy alluvium (N < 15)
1. Foundations extending into or penetrating expansive
soils !ihall be designed to prewnl uplift of the
supported structure.
2. Foundations penetrating expansive soils shall be
designed to resist forces exerted on the foundation due

to soil volume changes or shall be isolated from the If wide, massive loads within the structures to be built on
el(.pansive soil. compressible fine-grained soils are to be expected for
;,
prolonged periods of time, the sctllcmcnl crlects on existing
303.5.3 Slab-on-Ground, Foundations adjacent structures should be evaluated as well.
Moments, shears and deflections for use in designing slab- 303.7 Reports
on-ground, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils shall
be determined in accordance with WRJ/CRSJ Design qf' The soil classification and design-bearing capacity shall be
Slab-on-Ground Foundations or PT! Standard shown on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to
Requil'emenls for Analysis of Shallow Concrete Table 305-1. The building offit:ial may require submission
Foundations on Expansive Soils. Using the moments, of a written report of !he investigation, which shall include,
shears and deflections determined above, non-prcs!rcssed but need not be limited to, the following information:
slabs-on-ground, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils
I. A plot showing the location of all test borings,
shall be designed in accordance with PT/ Standard
surroundings and/or in-situ tests and excavations.
Requirements for Design qf' Shallow Post-Tensioned
Concrete Foundations on Expansive Soils. Il shall be 2. Technical descriptions and classifications of the
pem1itted to analyze and design such slabs by other materials encountered.
methods that account for soil-structure interaction, the
3. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
defonned shape of the soil support, the place or stiffened
plate action of the slab as well as both center till and edge 4. Recommendations for foundation type and design
lift conditions. Such alternative methods shall be rational criteria, including bearing capacity, provisions to
and llte basis for all aspects and parameters of the method mitigate the effects of differential settlements and
shall be available for peer review. expansive soils, provisions to mitigate the effects of
liquefaction and soil strength loss, provisions for
303.5.4 Removal of Expansive Soils special foundation solutions, provisions for ground
improvement measures, and ellects of loads on and due
Where expansive soil is removed in lieu of designing to adjacent structures.
footings or foundations in accordance with Section 302.3.2,
5. Expected total and differential scttlcmcnl.
the soil shall be removed to a depth sufficient to ensure a
constant moisture content in the remaining soil. 6. Laboratory test results of soil samples.
Fill material shall nol contain expansive soils and shall
7. Field borehole log containing the following
comply with Section 302.3.3.
information
Exception: a. Project location
Expansive soil need not be removed to the depth ofconstant b. Depth of borehole
moisture, provided the confining pressure in the expansive
c. Ground elevation
soil created by the fill and .mpported structure exceeds the
swell pressure provided that the confining pressure d. Ground water table elevation
resulting from the fill and structural dead loads exceed the
e. Date started and finished
swell pressure by 20%.
The soil classification and design-bearing capacity shall be
303.5.5 Stabilization shown on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to
Table 305-1.
Where the at:tivc zone or expansive soils is stabilized in lieu I
of designing footings or foundations in accordance with When expansive soils are present, the Building Official
Section 306.2, the soil shall be stabilized by chemical, may require that special provisions be made in the
dewatering, pre-saturation or equivalent established foundation design and conslruclion to safeguard against
techniques. damage due to this expansiveness. The building official
may require a special investigation and report to provide
303.6 Compressible Soils these design and construction criteria.
If the borehole data show that the proposed structures arc to 303.8 Soil Tests
be built above comprt:ssiblc Line-grained soils (with N< 6 ),
it is recommended that consolidation tests be performed in Tables 303-2 and 303-3 summarize the commonly used
accordance with ASTM D 2435 to determine the settlement field and laboratory tests needed in determining the in-situ
parameters for the site.

soil parameters for use in foundation design and analysis. Table 303-3 Geophysical Tests
Field Test ASTM Output Data I

-
Table 303-2 Laboratory and Field Tests Designation Parameter
Obtained
Laboratory I ASTM/Tcst Output Data I Geopll.vsical Te.~ls
Field Test Desig1111tlon Parameter Seismic D 5777-00 Mapi. subsurface
Obtained refraction geologic conditions,
Cla.~~ijication ofSoils lithologic units and
fractures.
Moisture content 02216-05 Moisture/ water
content Seismic D71 2X Map the top of
refraction bedrock. Estimate
Grain size 0422-63 Soil gradation clas1ic wave velocity
analysis of subsurface
Atterberg Limits 0431 8-05 Liquid limit, materials.
plastic limit Ground 06432-11 Maps lateral
uses 02487-00 Classification of Penetrating continuity of
soils Radar (GPR) lithologic units and
Specific Gravity 0854-05 Specific gravity detects changes in
the acoustic
Shrinkage Lim it D427-04 Shrinkage limit properties of
Organic Matter 02974-00 Moi~turc content, subsurface
ash content and geomatcriaL<;.
percent organic
mauer in soil Crossho!e 04428 p-wave and s-wave
Swedish Weight JIS N,w· Vlllut: seismic survey velocity
Sounding Test Al221:2002 indicating, dt:tennination, elastic
undrained soil shear Tl1{1Ciuli determination
strength
UCT Test (Soils) 02166-00 Strength Down hole D 7400 p-wave and s-wavc
parameters seismic survey velocity
Tri-axial (UU D2850-03a Strength determination,
Test) parameters elastic moduli
Tri-axial (CU 04767-04 Strength <lctennination
Test) parameters Geo-resistivity _o 6431 -99 Determine
Oedometcr ( 1-D 02435-04 Consol idation Survey horizontal lrnvel ing
Consolidation) parameters compression and
Laboratory Vane D4648-05 Strength shear seismic
Shear parameters waves at test sites.
Direct Shear 03080-04 Strength
Test parameters
UCT for Intact 02938-95 Strength
Rock parameters
Standard D!586-99 N-value
Penetration Test
Modified Proctor 01557-02 Maximum dry
Test density
Standard Proctor 0698-00a Maximum dry
Test density
Field Density 01556-00 Maximum dry
Test density
CBR Lab Test 01883 -05 CBR
Cone Penetration 03441-05 Soil strength
Test parameters
L
303.9 Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength Loss SECTION 304

When required by Section 303.3, the potential for soil
ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND
liquefaction and soi! strength loss during earthquakes shall LATERAL PRESSURES
be evaluated during the geotechnical investigation. The
gcotechnical evaluation shall assess potential consequences 304.1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and
of any liquefaction and soil strcngtJ1 loss, including Assessment
estimation or differential settlement, lateral movement or
reduction in foundation soil-bearing capacity, and discuss The recommended allowahle foundation and lateral
mitigating measures. Such measures shall be given pressures shall be estimated from a reasonably exhaustive
consideration in the design of the building and may include, gcotechnical site investigation and assessment, which shall
but arc not limited to: ground stabilization, selection of include al least the following:
appropriate foundation type and depths, selection of
a. Description of regional geologic characteristics;
appropriate structural systems to accommodate anticipated
displacements, or any combination or these measures. b. Characterization of in-situ geotechnical conditions;
The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss shall be c. Factual report on the in-situ and laboratory tests
evaluated for a site peak ground acceleration that, as a performed to characterize the site (See Section 303. 7
for a list of in-situ and laboratory tests commonly
minimum, confonns to the probability of cxccedance
specified in Section 208.6.2. Peak ground acceleration may carried out for gcotechnical site characterization);
be determined based on a site-specific study taking into d. Disclosure of the assumptions and the applicable
account soil amplification cllects. analytical or empirical models used in estimating the
allowable foundation and lateral pressures;
In the absence of such a study, peak ground acceleration
may be assumed equal to the seismic zone factor iff e. Calculations carried oul and Factor of Safety (FS)
assumed in arriving at the recommended allowable
Table 208-3.
foundation and lateral pressures; and
303.10 Adjacent Loads f. Evaluation of existing potential geologic hazards am\
those that may be induced or triggered by the
Where footings arc placed at varying elevations, the ellect construction/installation of the structure.
or adjacent loads shall be included in the foundation design.
The geotechnical site investigation and assessment shall be
pcrfonned by a geotcchnical engineer.
303.11 Drainage
A geotechnical investigation and assessment shall be
Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of
presented in a report. The report, together with a brief
surface water around buildings. (Sec also Section 305.5.5.)
resume and a sworn statement of accountability of the
and ensure that scour will not threaten such structures.
geotechnical engineering consultant who prepared it, shall
he included in the submittals to be reviewed and examined
303.12 Plate Load Test by the building official or government authority in charge
of issuing the relevant permits such as environmental
The plate load test is generally used for determination of
compliam;e certificate and/ur building permit.
soil subgrade properties for rigid foundations. If used for
building foundations, it must be emphasized that the Depth
of Inlluence is only up to twice (28) the width (B) of the
test plate. Care must be used when extending the results to
deeper depths as well as layered soils and variable
subsurface conditions.

304.2 Presumptive Load-Bearing and Lateral For clay, sandy clay, silty clay and clayey silt, in no case
Resisting Values shall the lateral sliding resistance exceed one-half the dead
y'
load.
When no exhaustive geotechnical site assessment and
investigation is perfonned, especially when no in-silu or 304.3 Minimum AIJowablc Pressures
very limited tests are carried oul, the presumptive load-
bearing and lateral rcsisling values provided in Table 304-1 The recommended allowable foundation and laleral values
shall be used. Use of these values requires that the shall be with the allowable stress design load eomhinations
foundation design engineer has, at the least, carried out an specified in Section 203.4.
inspection of the site and has become familiar with the
predominant soil or rock characteristics of lhe sir.e. 304.4 Foundations Ad.iacent to Existing
Retaining/Basement Walls
Presumptive load-bearing values shall apply to materials
with similar physical charactcrislics and dispositions. Mud, In cases where the adjac:cnt building will have more
organic silt, organic clays, peat or unprepared fill shall not basements than lhc proposed building, the foundation of the
be assumed to have a pn::sumptive load-bearing capacily proposed building should be designed so as not to impart
unless data from a geotechnical site assessment and additional lateral earth pressures on the existing huilding.
investigation to substantiate the use of such a value arc
suhmittcd.
Table 304-1 Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressure
Lateral
4
Allowable Bearing Lateral Sliding
li'oundation Below ~atural
Class of Materials' Grade1
Pressure 2
(kPa) (kPa/m of Resistance6
Coefficients
depth) (kPa)
I. "Inlact" Tuffaceous Sandstone" 1,000 300 - -

2. "Lightly Weathered" Tulfaceous Sandstone b 500 150 - -
3. Sandy Gravel and /or Gravel(GW & GP) 100 30 · 0.35 -
4. Well-graded Sand, Poorly-graded Sand, Silty Sand,
Clayey Sand, Silly Gravel and Clayey Gravel (SW, 75 25 0.25 -
SP, SM, SC, GM and GC)
5. Clay, Sandy Clay, Silty Clay and Clayey Silt (CL, ML, 50 c 15 - 7
MH, and CH)
I A g"olechr1i('(I/ si1e inv~stigalio11 is rr.mmmendedfiw .voil classijit,a1io11 (Refer to S1u:1io11 .'l!l.i).
All values ofallowable.fn1111da1ion prf!.nure <1teji:Jr footings havin;: a minimum wi,//h of 300,nm a11d a 111i11im11m depth ,,f300mm i11to 1he 11atural grad•. facel't (1s noted in
Footnl)t1.~ 'a·, "'' increase of2Q% is allouv:d fi,r em:h '1ddi1;orl(J/ 300mm of n;idsl, and/(lr d,:ptlr to a ,mvcimmu ,~lue of1hrce Ii/UP.$ th,~ de:,·ignated value. Ar1 increase of011e-1hird
is pP.rmUIP.d wlten u.\'iug tire <1/te,-nale food combina,ions in S,u:rion 203.4 1/u.,t ;ncl,,de wind or earlhqt11Jke food,;
J The re.,i.,tance ntlues derived.fi-om the ra/Jle an, permilled tr, be increased by the talm/m· v,1/u" jiJt· f!ctclr additium1/ JOO mm of depth w a maximum of 15 time., the tabular
vnl11e.. /so/ai,d ""'"·' for uses .rnch us flagpoles or signs and ,,oles med 111 ,11ppu,·t buildings thai are nnl a,/,,erwlr affecif!d by " I 2mm motion at lhe gro11nd swfa,·e d11e 10
shurt-teon /aseral loads are penniflr.d f11 he d,,sigue,I u:;ing hue,·aJ-bearing vnhws r.,1ua/ 1r, two timc~s 1he tabular values.
I
lateral bearing am:/ .rliding resi.,·fcmce muy be (,'C>mbined.
' Coe.fJicie11/ tn he multi11lfod 1,y the dead load.

0 /,ateral slidi11g re~istam,e valt,e to be m11/ti1>iied hy the mnlact are<1. In 110 case.slta/l th" lateral sliding re3is1<mce exceed one-l1a/f1he dead load.
" M11s1 sarisfy l>oth UC:T,,.,,= .lMpa a11d RQV ?:.7(/
• M11stsati.,fy hnth /jCJ;.,;,.~ /,\1pa and RQD ?:.50
•· No inr.1v,(l.,e .,hall he 111/owedfur an ir1cre<1se of width.

305.2.1 Design Loads

SECTION 305
FOOTIN~G
~S;:__~~~~~~~ Footings shall be designed for the most unfavorable load
effects due to combinations of loads. The dead load is
305.J General permitted to include the weight of foundations, footings
and overlying fill. Reduced live loads as permitted in the
Footings and foundations shall be constrncted of masonry, Chapter on Loadings are permitted to be used in the
concrete or treated wood in conformance with Chapters 4, design of footings.
6 and 7. Footings of concrete and masonry shall be of
solid material. Foundations supporting wood shall extend 305.2.2 Vibratory Loads
at least 150 mm above the adjacent finish grade. Footings
shall have a minimum depth as indicated in Table 305-1, Where machinery operations or other vibratory loads or
unless another depth is warranted, as established by a vibrations are transmitted to the foundations,
foundation investigation. consideration shall be given in the Report to address the
foundation design to prevc_nt detrimental disturbances to
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and the soil.
foundation systems in those areas subject to scour and
water pressure by wind and wave action. Buildings and 305.3 Bearing Walls
foundations subject to such loads shall be designed in
accordance with approved national standard Bearing walls shall be supported on masonry or concrete
foundations or piles or other permitted foundation system
Table 305-1 Minimum Requirements for J,'oundations ,.1..i that shall be of sufficient size to support all loads.
Thickness or
Where a design is not provided, the minimum foundation
Number of Width Thicknes~ Depth R~low
Foumlalion Wall (If ol' Undisturbed
requirements for stud bearing walls shall be as set forth in
Flour. (mm)
Supported by Footing Footing Ground Tahlc 305-1, unless expansive soils ofa severity to cause
the Fountlallons Uni, (mm) (mm) Surface (nun)' differential movement are known to exist.
Concrete
Mason,.y
300 150 300 Exceptions:

-
I 150 150
- --
450
J. A one-story wood or metal-frame building not used
2 200 200 375 175
- - for human occupancy and not over 40 m2 in floor
250 450 200 600 area may be constructed with walls supported on a
3 250
wood foundation plate permanently under the water
I
Where unusual conditions are found, ji)otings and ji111ndations shall table when permitted by the building official.
he us required in Section .105. I.
2. The support of buildings by posts embedded in earth
2 The ground under the floor may be excavated ro the elevation of the shall be designed as specified in Section 305. 7. Wood
top ofthefimting. posts or poles embedded in earth shall be pressure
! Foundalion may suppon a mof in addition to the stipularcd number treated with an approved preservative. Steel posts or
ofjloor.,. Foundalions supporting roojv only shall be as required/or poles shall be protected as specified in Section
supporting one floor.
306.10.
305.2 Footing Design
305.4 Stepped Foundations
Except for special provisions of Section 307 covering the
Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
design of piles, all po1tions of footings shall be designed
ground slopes more than I unit vertical . in 10 units
in accordance with the structural provisions of this code
horizontal ( l 0% slope) shall be level or shall be stepped
and shall be designed to minimize differential settlement
so that both top and bottom of such foundation are level.
when necessary and the effects of expansive soils when
present.
Slab-on-grade and mat-type footings for buildings located

on expansive soils may be designed in accordance with
the geotechnical recommendation as pennitted by the
building official.

CHAPTER 3 ·- Earthworks and Foundations 3-15
I
Face of Footing
I
~ :·w· :
Top of Slope
/
H/2 but
need not
exeffd WI ,_.:-...,..........-,-&.,....--.-...,....--1-
face of Struwn
I
6.0m l •
j
I
• '
l
I
. . -1~--------- \ T
H
\_ ~-nmbo
S.. tha'I 3-0n but
nNd not axceed 9.0m
1
FOR: a) H =height of slope
Property dRigned intsn:eptar
drains with outti11l1 apaced .t
proper intervala (whenever POUit>'9)
b) W 1 = width of te,raoe
Figure 305-1 Setback Dimensions for Building Clearanc<: for Stable Natural Slopes on Finn and Intact Ground
305.5 Footings on or Adjacent to Slopes 305.5.3 Footing Setback from Descending Slope
Surface
305.5.1 Scope
Footings on or adjacent to slope surfaces shall he founded
The placement of buildings and structures on or adjacent in firm material with an embedment and setback from the
to slopes steeper lhan I unit vertical in 3 units horizontal slope surface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral
(33.3% slope) shall be in accordance with this section. support for the footing without detrimental settlement.
Except as provided for in Section 305.5.6 and
305.5.2 Building Clearance from Ascending Slopes Figure 305-1, the following setback is deemed adequate
to meet the criteria. Where the slope is steeper than I unit
In general, buildings below slopes shall be set a sufficient vertical in I unit horizontal (100% slope), the required
distance from the slope lo provide protection from slope setback shall be measured from an imaginary plane 45
drainage, erosion and shallow failures. Except as degrees to the horizontal, projected upward from the toe
provided for in Seclion 305.5.6 and Figure 305-1, lhc of the slope. ·
following crilcria will be assumed to provide this
protection. Where the cxi!;ting slope is steeper than 1 unit 305.5.4 Pools
verl ical in I unit horizontal ( I00% slope), the toe of the
slope shall be assumed to be at the intersection of a The setback between pools regulated by this code and
horizontal plane drawn from the top oftJ1e foundation and slopes shall be equal to one half the building footing
a plane drawn tangent lo the slope at an angle of 45 setback distance required by this section. That portion of
degrees to the horizontal. Where a retaining wall is the pool wall within a horizontal distance of 2 meters
constructed at the toe of the slope, the height of the slope from the lop of the slope shall he capable of supporting
shall be measured from the top of the wall to the top of the water in the pool without soil support.
the slope.
305.5.5 Foundation Elevation
On graded sites, the top of any exterior foundation shall

extend above the elevation of the street gutter al point of
discharge or the inlel of an approved drainage device a
minimum of300 mm plus 2 percent. The building otlicial
may permit alternate elevations, provided it can be
demonstrated that required drainage lo the point of
discharge and away from the structurc is provided at all
locations on the site.
National Structural Code or the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
l__
305.5.6 Alternate Setback and Clearance 305.7.2 Design Criteria

;,
The Building Official may approve alternate setbacks and 305.7.2.1 Non-constrained
clearances. The building official may require an
investigation and recommendation of a qualified engineer The following formula may be used in determining the
to demonstrate lhat the intent of this section has been depth of embedmcnt required to resist lateral loads where
satisfied. Such an investigation sha!I include no constraint is provided at the ground surface, such as
consideration of material, height of slope, slope gradienl, rigid floor or rigid ground suriltce pavement.
load intensity and erosion characteristics of slope
material.
(305- 1)
305.5.7 Reinforced Slopes
Footings on or adjacent lo slopes reinforced using rock

anchors, soils nails, geosynthcthics or any other similar where:
ground improvement technique shall be founded such that
it does not interfere with or impair the function of the 2.3P
reinforcing elements. The Building Official may require A= Sib
the recommendation of a geotechnical engineer lo
demonstrate that the reinforced slope can safely carry the b diameter of round post or footing ur diagonal
structural loads it will be subjected to. dimension of square post or footing, m.
d depth of embe<lment in earth in m but not over
305.6 Foundation Platcli or Sills 3.5 m for purpose of computing lateral pressure,
m
Wood plates or sills shall be bolted tu the foundation or h = distance from ground surface to point of
foundation wall. Steel bolts with a minimum nominal application of P, m
diameter of 12 mm shall be used in Seismic Zone 2. Steel P applied lateral force, kN
bolts with a minimum nominal diameter of 16 mm shall S1 - allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set
be used in Seismic Zone 4. Bolts shall be embedded at forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth of one
least 180 mm into the concrete or masonry and shall be third the depth of embedmcnt, kPa
spaced not more than 2 meters apart. There shall be a S3 ... allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set
minimum oJtwo bolts per piece with one bolt located not forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth equal to
more than 300 mm or less than seven bolt diameters from the depth of embedment, kPa
each end of the piece. A properly si:ted nut and washer
shall be tightened on each bolt lo the plate. Foundation 305.7.2.2 Constrained
plates and sills shall be the kind of wood specified in
Chapter 6. The following formula may be used to determine the
depth of embedmcnt required to resist lateral loads where
305.7 Designs Employing Lateral Bearing constraint is provided at the ground surface, such as a
rigid floor or pavement.
305.7.1 General Ph
d2 = 4.25 S 3b {305-2)
Construction employing posts or poles as columns
embedded in caith or embedded in concrete footings in
the earth may be used and designed to resist both axial
and lateral loads. The depth to resist lateral l(rnds shall be
determined by means uf the design criteria established
herein or other methods approved by the building official.

305.7.2.3 Vertical load

SECTION306
/The resistance to vertical loads is determined by the PILES-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
allowable soil-bearing pressure set for1h in Table 304-1.
306.1 General
305.7.3 Backfill
Pile foundations shall he designed and installed on thc
The backfill in the annular space around column not basis of a foundation investigation as defined m
embedded in poured footings shall be by one of the Section 303 where required by lhe building official.
following methods:
The investigation and report provisions of Section 303
I. Backfill shall be of concrete with an ultimate strength
shall he expanded to include, bllt not be limited tu, the
of 15 MPa al 28 days. The hole shall not be less than following:
I00 mm larger than lhc diameter or lhc column at its
hottorn or I 00 mm larger than the diagonal l. Recommended pile types and installed allowable
dimension ofa square or rectangular column. axial capacities, and estimated settlement.
2. Backfill shall be or clean sand. The sand shall be 2. Driving criteria.
thoroughly compacted by tamping in layers not more
:l. Installation procedures.
than 200 mm in thickness.
4. Field inspection and reporting prm:cdures (lo include
305.7.4 Limitations procedures for verification of the installed bearing
capacity where required).
The design procedure outlined in this section shall he
5. Pile load test requirements.
subject to the following limitations:
The use of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter
305.7.4. t The frictional resistance for rctaini ng walls
shall be permillcd, subject to the approval of the building
and slabs on silts and clays shall he limited to one half of
official upon submission of acceptable lest data,
the normal force imposed on the soil by the weight of the
calculations or other information relating to the properties
footing or slab.
and load-carrying capacities or such piles.
305.7.4.2 Posts cmhedded in earth shall not be used to

306.2 Interconnection
provide lateral support for structural or nonstructural
materials such as plaster, masonry or concrete unless
Individual pile caps- and caissons of every slruclure
bracing is provided.
subjected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by tics.
Such tics shall be capable of resisting, in tension or
305.8 Grillage Footings
compression, a minimum horizontal force equal to 10
percent of the largest column vertical load.
When grillagc footings of strucLUral steel shapes arc used
on soils, they shall be completely embedded in concrete. Exception:
Concrete cover shall be at least 150 mm on the bottom
and at least 100 mm at all other points. Other approved methods may be used where if can be
demonstrated that equivalent restraint can be provided.
305.9 Bleacher Footings
306.3 Determination of Allowahlc Loads
Footings for open-air seating facilities shall comply with
Chapter 3. The allowable axial and lateral loads on piles shall be
detem1incd by an approved formula, hy a fo11ndalion
Exceptions: investigation or by load tests. Static axial compressive
pile load test shall he in accordance with J\STM Standard
Temporary open-air portable bleachers may be supported D-1143, and lateral load testing or piles shall conform
upon wood sills or steel plates placed directly upon the with ASTM Standard 0-3966. Dynamic pile tests shall
ground surface, provided soil pressure does not exceed be in accordance with ASTM Standard D-4945. Static
50kPa. axial tensile load testing to determine the uplitl capacity
of pile-soil systems shall be in accordance with ASTM
Standard D-3689.

'3-18 CHAPTEF. '.l - 1::81'1hwmk:, ,;nd ;=,;,mdations
306.4 Static Load Test 306.7 Group Action
Static axial compressive pile load test shall be in Consideration shall he given to the reduction or allowable
accordarn:.:e with ASTM Standard D-1143. The huilding pile load when piles are placed in groups.
official may require that the test be wnducted under the
supervision of a gcotcdmical engineer cxpericncc;d ,ind Where soil conditions make such load reductions
knowledgeable in the practice of static pile load testing advisable or necessary, the allowable axial and lateral
loads determined for a single pile shall be reduced by any
When the allowable axial compressive load of a single rational method or formula submitted to lhc; building
pile is determined hy a swic load test. one of the olfa:ial.
following methods shall be used:
306.8 Lateral Loads
Method I. It shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield
point under test load. The yield point shall be defined as The design of piles subjected lo lateral loads shall be
that point at which an increase in load produces ,i consistent with the design rules given Sections 306.1
disproportionate increase in settlement. through 306. 7, where appl icahle. For foundations
involving piles subjected to lateral, the investigation and
Method 2. It shall not exceed one hair or the load, which report provisions or Section 303 shall be expanucd to
causes a net settlement, aller deducting rebound, of include, but not be limited to:
0.03 mm/kN of test load, which has been applied lor a I. Allowahle lateral load capacity of recommended pile
period of at least 24 hours.
type.
Method 3. It shall not exceed one hair or that load under 2. Resulting lateral displacements at allowable lateral
which, during a 40-hour period of continuous load loau.
application, no additional settlement takes place.
3. Lateral pile load test requirements.
306.5 Dynamic Load Test 306.8.1 The design resistance of piles subjected tu lateral
loaus, should be assessed based on one of the following
High-strain dynamic load test may be used to determine failure mechanisms:
the bearing capacity of piles, in accordance with
ASTM Standard D-4945. The building official may I. For short piles, rotation or translation as a rigid hody
require that the lest be conducted by a geotechnical
engineer experienced an<l knowJedgeahle in the practice 2. For long slender piles, b~nding failure· of the pile,
of dynamic load testing. accompanied by 'local yielding and displa1.;ement of
the soil near the top or the pile.
306.6 Column Action
306.8.2 Pile Groups
All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capahle or lateral support shall confonn with the The group effects shall be considered when assessing the
applicable column fonnula as specified in this code. Such resistance ortaterally loaded pile groups.
piles driven into firm ground may be considered fixed and
laterally supporled at 1.5 m below the ground surface and 306.8.3 Group interaction clkcts as well as head fixity
in soft material at 3 m from the ground surface unless shall he accounted tor when deriving the lateral resistance
otherwise prescribed by the building official after a or pile groups from results or load tests performed on
foundation investigation hy an approved agency. individual piles.
306.8.4 When assessmg lateral load resistance from

results of suhsurfacc investigation and pile strength
parameters, the transverse resistance or a pile or pile
group shall be calculated using a compatible set of
structural effects of actions, ground reactions and
displacements, and consider the possibility or structural
failure or U1e pile in the ground as well as the degree of
freedom of rotation of piles at the conneetiori with the
structure.
l
306.9 Piles in Subsidinl,! Areas 306.12 Allowable Loads
Where piles are driven through subsiding fills or other The allowable loads based on soil conditions shall be
subsiding strata and derive support from underlying established in accordance with Section 306.
finner materials, consideration shall be given to the
downward friclional forces, which may be imposed on the Exception:
piles by the subsiding upper strata.
Any uncased cast-in-plc,ce pile may be assumed to
Where lhc influence or subsiding tills is considered as develop a jrictionq/ resistance equal to one sixth of the
imposing loads on the pile, the allowable stresses bearing 11a/11e ofthe soil mcilerial at minimum depth~ set
specified in this chapter may he increased if satisfactory forth in Table 305-1 but not to exceed 25 kPa unless a
substantiating data arc submitted. greater value is allowed by the building official after a
foundation investigation as specified in Section 303 is
306. t O Water Jetting submitted. Frictional resistance and bearing resistance
shall not be assumed to act simultaneously unless
Installation of Piles by water shall not be used except recommended after a foundation investigation as
where and as specilically permitted by the building
specij)ed in Section 303.
official. When usc<l, jetting shall be carried out in such a
manner that the carrying capacity or existing piles and 306.13 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses
strll(.;tures shall nol be impaired. After withdrawal of the
jet, piles shall be driven down until the required resistance Allowable compressive stresses greater than those
is obtained. specified in Section 307 shall be permitted when
substantialing data justifying such higher stresses are
306.10 Protection of Pile Materials submitted to and approved by the building official. Such
substantiating data shall be included in the foundation
Where the boring records of sile conditions indicate investigation report in accordance with Section 306. l.
possible deleterious action on pile materials because of
soil constituents, changing water levels or other faclors,
such materials shall be adequately protected by methods
or processes approved by the geotechnical engineer.
The effectiveness or such methods or processes for lhc

paiticular purpose shall have been thoroughly eslablished
by satisfactory service records or other evidence, which
demonstrates the effectiveness ur such prolectivc
measures.

SECTION 307 307.2.2 Allowable Stresses

fILES-SPECIDC REQUIREMENTS
The allowable compressive stress in lhe concrete shall not
307.1 Round Wood Piles exceed 0.33{~. The allowable compressive stn.-ss of
reinforcement shall not exceed 34 percent of the yield
307.1.l Material strength of the steel or 175 MPa.
Except where untreated piles are permitted, wood piles 307.3 Metal-Cased Concrete P iles
shall be pressure treated. Untreated piles may be used
only when it has been established that the cutoff will be 307.3.1 Material
below lowest groundwater level assumed to exist during
the life oflhe structure. Concrete used in metal-cased concrete piles shall have a
1.pccified compressive strength f ~ of not less than
307.1.2 Allowable Stresses 17.5 MPa.
The allowable unit stresses for round woodpiles shall not 307.3.2 lnslallation
exceed those set forth in Chapter 6.
Every metal cc1sing for a concrete pile shall have a sealed
The allowable values listed in, for compression parallel to tip with a diameter of not less than 200 mm.
the grain at extreme fiber in bending are based on load
sharing as occurs in a pile cluster. For piles which Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have
support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25 shells driven !or their full length in contact with the
shall be applied to compression parallel to the grain surrounding soil and left permanently in place. The shells
values and 1.30 to extreme fiber in bending values. shall he sufficiently strong to resist collapse and
sullicientl y watertight to exclude water and foreign
307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Pince Coocrete Piles material during the placing of concrete.
307.2.1 Material Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing
as to ensure against distortion or or injury to piles already
Concrete piles cast in place against earth in drilled or in p lace. No pile shall be driven within four and one-half
bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to ensure average pile diameters of a pile filled ,vith concrete less
the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a fuJl. than 24 hours old unless approved by the geotcchnical
sized shaft. engineer.
The length of such pile shall be limited lo not more than 307.3.3 Allowable Stresses
30 times the average diameter. Concrete shall have a
specified compressive strength f~ of not less lhan Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified in
17.5 M Pa. Section 307.2.2, except t hat the allowable concrete stress
may be increased to a maximum value of 0.40/~ for lhat
Exception: portion of the pile meeting the following conditions:
The length of pile may exceed 30 times the diameter l. The thickness of the metal casing is not less than
provided the design and installation qf the pile foundation 1.7 mm (No. 14 carbon sheet steel gage).
is in accordance with an approved .foundation
2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams of
investigation report.
equal strength and is or a configunition that will
provide confinement to the cast-i n-placc concrete.
3. The specified compressive strength f~ shall not

exceed 35 MPa and the ratio of steel minimum
specified yield strength F y to concrete spcc.:ified
compressive strength { ~ shall not be less than 6.
4. The pile diameter is not greater than 400 mm.

CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks ancl Foundations 3-21
307.4 Prccast Concrete Piles 307.5.2.2 Transverse Reinforcement
/ 307.4.1 Materials 'fies or spiral reinforcement shall not be spaced more than
75 mm apart center to center, for a distance of 600 111111
Precast concrete piles shall have a specified compressive from the ends and not more than 200 mm elsewhere.
strength {~ of not less than 20 MPa, and shall develop a
compressive strength of not less than 20 MPa before At each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be
driving. spaced 25 mm center to center.
307.4.2 Reinforcement Tics Fur piles having a diameter of 600 mm or less, wire shall
not be smaller than 5.5 mm (No. 5 B.W.gage).
The longitudinal reinforcement in driven prccast concrete
piles shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals. For piles having a diameter greater than 600 mm but less
Ties and spirals shall not be spaced more than 75 mm than 900 mm, wire shall not be smaller than 6 mm
apart, center lo center, for a distance of 600 mm from the (No. 4 B.W.gage).
ends and not more than 200 mm elsewhere. The gage of
ties and spirals shall he as follows: For piles having a dia1m:ter greater than 900 mm, wire
shall not he smaller than 6.5 mm (No.3 B.W.gauge).
1. For piles having a diameter of 400 mm or less, wire
shall not he smaller than 5.5 mm (No. 5 B.W.gage).
307.5.3 Allowable Stresses
2. For piles, luiving a diameter of more than 400 mm
and less than 500 mm, wire shall not be smaller than Precast prestressed piling shall be designed to resist
6 mm (No.4 13.W.gage). stresses induced by handling and driving as well as by
loads. The effective prestress in the pile shall not be less
3. for piles having a diameter of 500 mm and larger,
than 2.5 Mra for piles up to 10 m in length, 4 MPa for
wm: shall not be smaller than 6.5 mm
piles up to 15 m in length, and 5 MPa for piles greater
(No.3 B.W. gage).
than 15 meters in length.
The compressive stress in the concrete due to externally
applied load shall not exceed:
Precasl concrete piling shall be designed to resist stresses
induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The
allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified in f<: =0. 33{~ - 0. 27{pc (307-1)
Section 307.2.2. where
307.5 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles {pc effective prestress stress on the gross
(Pretensioned} section.
Effective prestress shall be based on an assumed loss of
307.5.1 Materials 200 MPa in the prestrcssing steel. The allowable stress in
the prcstressing steel shall not exceed the values specified
Precast preslressed concrete piles shall have a specified in Section 418.6.
compressive strength{~ of not less than 35 MPa and shall
develop a compressive strength of not less than 27 MPa 307.5.4 Splicing
before driving.
Where required, splicing for concrete piles shall be by use
307.5.2 Reinforcement of embedded and properly anchored thick steel plates at
the ends being joined which shall then be fully welded, or
307.5.2.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement by use or adequate sized dowel rods and steel receiving
sleeves. The dowels and the faces shall then be joined by
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be high-tensile structural epoxy. Metal splice cans arc not allowed.
seven-wire strand conforming to ASTM Standards.
Longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally tied with
steel ties or wire spirals.

307.6 Structural Steel Piles 307.7.2 Allowable Stresses
30,:6.1 Material The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength Fy of the steel or 0.33
Structural steel piles, steel pipe piles and fully welded of the specified compressive strength f~ of concrete,
steel piles fabricated from plates shall eonfonn to one of provided Fy shall not be assumed greater than 250 MPa
the material specifications Iisled in Section 50 I .3.
for computational purposes.
Exception:
The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the When justified in accordance with Section 306. I 2, the
minimum specified yield strength Fy or 85 MPa, allowable stresses may be increased to O. 50 F y·
whichever is less.
307.7.3 Minimum Dimensions
Exception:
When justified in accordance wilh Section 306.12, the Driven piles of uniform section shall have a nominal
allowable axial stress may be increased above 85 MPa outside diameter ofnot less than 200 mm.
and 0. 35F,.., but shall not exceed 0. SF,...
307.6.3 Minimum Dimensions
Sections of driven H-piles shall comply with the

following:
l. The flange projection shall not exceed 14 times the
minimum thickness of metal in either the flange or
the web, and the flange widths shall not be less than
80 percent of the depth of the section.
2. The nominal depth in the direction of the web shall
not be Jess than 200 mm.
3. Flanges and webs shall have a minimum nominal
thickness of IO mm.
Sections of driven pipe piles shall have an outside

diameter of not less than 250 mm and a minimum
thickness of not less lhan 6 mm.
307.7 Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe Piles
307.7.t Material
The steel pipe of concrete-filled steel pipe piles shall

conform to one of the material specifications listed in
Section 501.3. The concrete in concrete-filled steel pipe
piles shall have a specified compressive strength{~ of not
less than 17 .5 MPa.

SECTION308 308.3 Footing Foundalions

>' FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION- Where a structure is assigned tu Seismic Zone 4 in
SEISMIC ZONE 4 accordance with Section 208.4, individual spread footings
founded 011 soil defined in Section 208.4.3 as Soil profile
308.l General Type SE or SF shall be interconnected oy tics. Tics shall
be capable of carrying, in tension or compression, unless
In Seismic Zones 4, the fm1her requirements or this it is demonstrated that equivalent restraint is provided by
section shall apply to the design and construction or reinforced concrete beams within slabs on grade or
foundations, foundation components and the connection reinforced concretes labs on grade.
of superstructure elements thereto. See Section 421. IO
for additional requirements for structural concrete 308.4 Piel' and Pile Foundations
foundations resisting seismic forces.
Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 in
308.2 Foundation and Geotcchnical Investigations accordance with Section 208.4, the lollowing shall apply.
Individual pile caps, piers or piles shall be interconnected
Where a structure is determined to oe in Seismic Zone 4 by ties. Tics shall be capable of carrying, in tension and
in accordance with Section 208.4, an investigation shall compression, unless it can be demonstrated that
oe conducted and shall include an evaluation of the equivalem restraint is provided hy reinforced concrete
following potential hazards resulting from earthquake beams within slabs on grade, reinforced concrete slabs on
motions: slope instability, liquefaction and surface rupture grade, conlincment by competent rock, hard cohesive
due lo faulting or lateral spreading. soils or very dense granular soils. Concrete shall have a
specified compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi
In addition, the following investigations shall also be met: . (20.68 MPa) at 28days.
I. A determination of lateral pressures on basement and
Exception:
retaining walls due to earthquake motions.
Piers supporting foundation walls, isolated interior posts
2. An assessment or potential consequences of any
detailed so the pier is not subject to lateral loads. lightly
liquefaction and soil strength loss, including
loaded exterior dech and patios and occupuncy category
estimation of differential settlement, lateral
IV and V specified in Section I 03 not exceeding two
movement or reduction in foundation soil-bearing
stories of light)rame construction, are not subject to
capacity, and shall address mitigacion measures. Such
interconnechon if it can be shown the soils are of
measures shall oe given consideration in the design
adequate stif.J'ness: subject to the approval of the building
of the structure and can include but are not limited to
of!iciol.
ground stabilization, selection of appropriate
foundation type and depths, selection of appropriate
structural systems to accommodate anticipated
displacements or any combination of these measures.
The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss
shall be evaluated for site peak ground acceleration
magnitudes and source characteristics consistent with
the design earthquake ground motions. Peak ground
acceleration shall he detennined from a site-specific
study taking into account soil amplification effects,
as specified in Section 208.4.

308.4.1 Connection to Pile Cap 308.5 Driven Pile Foundations
For piles required to resist uplift forces or provide 308.5.1 Precnst Concrete Piles
rotational restraint, design of anchorage of pile:; into the
pile cap shall be provided considering the combined effect Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4, a
of axial fo rces due lo uplift and bending moments due to minimum longitudinal steel rei nforcement ratio of O.O l
Jixity to the pile cap. Anchorage shall develop a minimum shall he provided for precast non-prestrcssed concrete
of 25 percent of the strength of the pile in tension. piles. The longitudinal reinforcing shall be confined with
Anchorage into the pile cap shalJ be capable of closed ties or equivalent spirals of a minimum 3/8 in
developing the follo wing: ( 10 mm) diameter. Transverse confinement reinforcing
shall be provided al a maximum spacing of eight times the
I. In the case of uplift, the lesser of the nominal tensile diameter or the smallest longitudinal bar, but not to
strength of the longitudinal reinforcement in a exceed 6 in. (152 mm), within three pile diameters of the
concrete pile, or the nominal tensile strength of a bottom ofthc pile cap. Outside of the confinement region,
steel pile, or the pile uplift soil nominal strength closed tics or equivalent spirals shall be provided at a 16
factored by 1.3 or the axial tension force resulting longitudinal-bar-diamcler maximum spacing, but not
from the load combinations of Section 203. greater than 8 in. (200 mm). Reinforcement shall be full
length.
2. In the case of rotational restraint, the lesser of the
axial and shear forces, and moments resulting from For Site Classes D through r, Transverse confinement
the load combinations of Section 203 or development reinforcement consisting of closed tics or equivalent
of the lull axial, bending and shear nominal strength spirals shall he provided in acconlance wilh
of the pile. Sections 2 l.6.4.2 through 21.6.4.4 of ACI 318 for the full
length of the pile.
308.4.2 Dcsi~n Details fnr Pier s, Piles and Grade
Beams In other than Site Classes E or F, the specified transverse
confinement reinforcement shall be provided within three
Piers or piles shall be designed and constructed to pile diameters below the bottom of the pile cap, but it is
withstand maximum imposed curvatures from earthquake permitted to use a transverse reinforcing ratio of not less
ground motions and stmcture response. Curvatures shall than one-half of that required in Section 2 1.6.4.4{a) of
include free-field soil strains modified for soil-pil e- ACl 318 throughout the remainder of the pile length.
structure interaction coupled wi th pier or pile
deformations induced by lateral pier or pile resistance to
structure seismic forces. Concrete piers or piles on soil
type SE or SF sites, as determined in Section 208.4.3,
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with
Sections 410 within seven pile diameters of the pile cap
and lhe interfaces of soft to medium stiff clay or
liquefiable strata. Grade beams shall be designed as
beams in accordance Section 4. When grade beams have
the capacity to resist the forces from the load
combinations in Section 203.
308.4.3 Flexural Strength
Where the vertical lateral-force-resisting elements are

columns, the grade beam or pile cap flexura l strengths
shall exceed the column llexural strength. The connection
between batter piles and grade beams or pile caps shall be
designed to resist the nominal strength of the p ile acting
as a short column. Batter piles and their coru1eetion shall
be capable of resisting forces and moments from the load
ur
combinations Section 203 .

CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks ancl Foundations 3-25
308.5.2 Precast Prestressed Piles but not less than:
Wf,ere a struclure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4, lhe

following shall apply: Ps
f~ (1 1. 4P]
=0.12 /yh 2+ /~Ag (308.5.3)
For the upper 20 ft (6 m) of preeast prcstressed piles, the

and need not exceed:
minimum volu metric ratio of spirnl reinforcement shall
not be ll:ss than 0.007 or the amount required by lhe
Ps = 0.021 (308.5.4)
following equation: where

Pile cross-sectional area, mm 2
Ps = 0.12/~/f yh (308.5. l)
Core area defined by spirnl oulside diameter,
where mni2
Specified compressive strength or !~ Specilied compressi ve strength of concrete,
f~ MPa <:: 4 I .4 MPa
corn.:rete, MPa Yield strength of spi ral reinforcement
[yh
/yh = Yield strength of spiral reinforcement, ~ 586 MPa
586 MPa p Axial load on pile resulting from the load
Ps Spiral reinforccmenl index combination I .2n 1- 0.SL + 1.0£, k.N
(volume spiral/volume of core) Volumetric ratio (volume of spiral/ volume of
Ps
core)
A minimum of one-half of the volumetric ratio of spiral
reinforcement required by I::q. 308.5.1 shall be provided This required amount of s piral rcinfon.:ement is permitted
for the remaining lenglh of the pile. to be obtained by providing an inner and outer spiral.
Requireme nts of ACl 318, Chapter 2 1, need not apply. When transvc.:rse reinforcement consists of reclangular
hoops and cross lies, the total cross-sec.:tional area of
Where the total pile length in the soil is 35 Ii ( I 0.668 mm) lateral transverse reinforcement in the ductile region with
or less, the lateral transverse reinforcement in lhe ductile spacings, and perpendicular to dimension, he, i.hall
region shall occur through the length of the pile. Where conform to:
the pile length exceeds 35 It (10,668 mm), the ductile pile
(f~) (
region shall be taken as the greater of 35ft ( I0,668 mm) or
the distance from the underside of the pile cup to the point
of zero curvoturc plus three times the least pile Ash = 0. 3shc f yl, Ai:
_Ach -1
) [12 - 1. 4 f~Ag
P ]
dimension.
(308.5.5)
In the ductile region, the center-to-center spacing of the hut not kss than:
(f{~ )[12 + 1.f~Ag4P]

spirals or hoop reinforcement shall not exceed one-fifth
of the least pile dimension, six times the diameter of the (308.S.6)
longitudinal strand, or 8 in (203 mm), whichever is Ash= 0. 12shc yh
smaller.
where
Spiral reinfon.:ement shall be s pliced by lapping one full ~ 483 MPa
turn, by welding, or by the use of a mechanical connector. Cross-sectional dimension of pile core
Where spiral reinforcement is lap spliced, the ends of the measured center to center of hoop
spiral shall terminate in a seismic hook in accordam;e reinforcement, mm
with ACI 318, except that the bend shall he not less than Spacing of transverse reinforcement
13 5'>.
s
measured along length of pi le, mm
Axial load, N
Where the transverse reinforcement consists of circular
Cross-sectional area of transverse
spirals, the volumetric ratio of spiral transverse
rcinforcemenl, mm2
reinforcement in the ductile region shall comply with the
,~
2
A~ Gross area of pile, mm
following:
= Specified compressive strength of concrc.:te,
MP a
(308.5.2)

The hoops and cross ties shall be equivalent to deformed

~ars not less than IO mm in size. Rectangular hoop ends
SECTION 309
shall terminate at a corner with seismic hooks. SPECIAL FOUNDATION,
SLOPE STABILIZATION AND
Outside of the length of the pile requiring transverse
confinement reinforcing, the spiral ur hoop reinforcing MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
with a volumetric ratio not less !han one-half of that
required for transverse conlinemcnt reinforcing shall be 309.1 Special Foundation Systems
provided.
Special foundation systems or materials other than
308.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations specified in the foregoing Sections may be introduced
provided that such systems can be supported by
Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 a calculations and theory Lo be providing safe fou ndation
minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio of 0.005 shall systems anti when approved by the Engineer of record.
he provided for uncased cast-in-place drilled or augcred Materials for incorporation into the foundation should
concrete piles, piers or caissons in the top one-half of the have proven track record of successful usage in similar
pile length a minimum length of l O feet (3,048 mm) applications.
below ground or throughout the llexural length of the pile,
whichever length is greatest. The flexural length shall Ix; 309.2 Acceptance and Approv11l
taken as the length of the pile to a point where the
concrete section cracking moment strength multiplied by Structure support on improved ground using such special
0.4 exceeds the required moment strcngLh at that point. systems or proprietary systems may be approved subject
There shall be a minimum of four longitudinal bars with to suhmittal of calculations and other proof of acceptance
transverse confinement reinforcement provided in the pile and successful usage.
within three times the least pile dimension of the hollom
of the pile cap. A transverse spiral reinforcement ratio of 309.3 Specific Applications
not less Lhan one-half of that required in Section 41 O for
other than Sui! Profile Type Se, SF or as dctcnnioed in Specialty foundation systems may be applied or used
Secti on 208.4.3 or lique!iable sites is permitted. Tie specifically to address any or combinations of !he
spacing throughout the remainder of the concrete section following: Bearing Capacity Improvement, Li4uefaction
shall neither exceed 12-longitudinal-bar diameters, mitigation, slope stability enhancement, control and/or
one-hull' Lhe least dimension of the section, nor J 2 inches acceleration of Consolidation selLlernents or immediate
(305 mm). Tics shaU he a minimum or lOmm bars for settlements, increase in soil shear capacity, increased
piles with a least dimension up to 20 inches (508 mm), pulJoul or overtumiog capacity, special m1chors in soil
and 12 mm bars for larger piles. und rock and other beneficial effects. Controlled low
strength materials (CLSM) to reduce fill loads may be
allowed for use where applicable.

NSCP C101-15
Chapter4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

VOLUME I

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium l
Tel. N.o.: {+632) 410-0483

.Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: aswon!ine@~majI.com

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete 4-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 401 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................................ 7
401.1 Scope ............ ....... ..... .... ..... ............. ....... .... .......... ............................................................................. ............................. 7
401.2 General .................................................................................................................................................... ..... ............. .... 7
40!.3 Purpose ............ ........................ ........... ..................................... ........... ................ ........................................................... 7
401.4 Applicability .......................... ....................................................................... .. ............. ............ .. ........................... ......... 7
401.5 Interpretation ..................... ............................................................. ..... .................. .................... ............. ....................... 8
401.6 Building Official .... ........................... ...... .............. ...... ................................... .............. ........... ............. .... ..................... 8
401.7 Licensed Design Professional ............. ............. ....... ...... ....................................... ......................................................... 8
401.8 Construction Documents and Design Records .............................................................................................................. 9
401.9 Testing and Inspection.................................................. ............................................... ..... ........................... .................. 9
401.10 Approval of Special Systems of Design, Construction, or Alternative Con!'.truction Materials ....................... ............. 9
401.11 Provisions for Earthquake Resistance ....................................................... .................................................................... 9
SECTION 402 ........................................................................................................................................................_. ............... ........... 9

NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY...................................................................................................................................... 9
402.l Scope ......... ............. ........ ....................................... ......... .............. ...................... ........................................................... 9
402.2 Notation ................................................................................. ....... ......................... ......... ........... ............. ....................... 9
402.3 Terminology .............. ........................ .... .............. ................................ ........................ ............................................. ... 20
SECTION 403 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 28
REFERENCED STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................................28
403. l Scope .............. :............................................................................................................................................................ 28
403.2 Referenced Standards .................................................................................................................................................. 28
SECTION 404 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 31
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................... 31
404.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................... 31
404.2 l'vlaterials ............................................. ........................................................... .'............................................................. 3 l
404.3 Design Loads ............................................................................................................................................................... 31
404.4 Structural System and Load Paths ............................................................................................................................... 3 I
404.5 Structural Analysis ...................................................................................................................................................... 32
404.6 Strength .......... ..................... .... .......... .. .................. ................................................................................ ...................... 32
404.7 Serviceability..... ............. .. ..... ............... ........ .. .... ........ ........... ......................................................... ............. ................ 32
404.8 Durability ..... ..................... ..... ...... .. .......................... .. ........ .... .. ...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ........................................... 32
404.9 Sustainability.. ..................... .................... .. .......................... ............. ....... ....................... ......... .................. .................. 33
404.10 Structural Integrity .............................. .... ....................... .............. ...................... ........ .... ........... .............. .. ., .......... ...... 33
404.11 Fire Resistance ........................... ..................................... ...... ............ ........... .......... .......... ........................................... 33
404.12 Requirements for Specific Types of Construction............ ........ ...... .. ..... ....................... ............................................... 33
404.13 Construction and Inspection ...................................................................... .. .......................................... ......... ........... .. 34
404.14 Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures ................................................................................................................. 34
SECTION 405 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 34
LOADS ............................................................................................................,. .................................................................................. 34
405.l Scope ... ............ .................... ..... .. ......................................... .......... ..................... .............. ....................................... .... 34
405.2 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 34
405.3 Load Factors and Co1nbinations .................................................................................................................................. 34
SECTION 406 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 36
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS.................................................................................................................................................. 36
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ?'h Edition. 2015

4-2 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
406.1 Scope ..... ............. ,-.. ,.................................................................................................................................................... 36

;<)6.2 General ......... .......................................................................................... ..... ............ ................... .............................. ... 36
406.3 Modeling Assumptions ............................................................................................................................................... 37
406.4 Arrangement of Live Load .............. ........................................................................................................................... 3 7
406.5 Simplified Method of Analysis for Non-Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-way Slabs .................................. 37
406.6 First-order Analysis ....................... ........................ .............. ....... -............. .................. ........... ........ .................... ........ 38
406.7 Elastic Second-order Analysis ......................................... ............... ................................................ ............................. 41
406.8 Inelastic Second-Order Analysis ...................................................................................................................... ........... 41
406.9 Acceptability of Finite Element Analysis .................................................................................................................... 42
SECTION 407 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 42
ONE-WAY SLABS .................................................................................................................................................................. 42
407 .1 Scope ................................................. ........................................................... ....................................................... ........ 42
407 .2 General ....................... ..................... ..... .................................. .. ........................ ........................................................... 42
407.3 Design Limits ........................................................................................................................ ...................... .............. .. 42
407.4 Required Strength ....................................................................................................................................................... 43
407 .5 Design Strength ........................................................................................................................................................... 44
407 .6 Reinforce1nent Limits .. ................................................................................................................... ............................. 44
407.7 Reinforcement Detailing .............................................................................................................................................. 45
SECTION 408 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 47
TWO-WAY SLABS ................................................................................................................................................................. 47
408.1 Scope .......................... .................................................................................. .............. ........................................... ...... 47
408.2 General ....................... ............................................................................. .................................................................... 47
408.3 Design Limits ...... ............................... ........ ........................... .......... ........ ......... ........................................................... 48
408.4 Required Strength ................................................................................ ...................................... ....... ....... ................ .... 49
408.5 Design Strengtl1 ........................................................................ ........................................................ ....... .................... 51
408.6 Reinforcement Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 52
408.7 Reinforcement Detailing............................................................................... ............................................................... 52
408.8 Non-Prestressed Two-Way Joist Systems ........................................... ......................... ................... ............................ 56
408.9 Lift-slab Construction ... ......... ...... ...... ........ ............ ..... ....................... .... ............................ .................................... ... ... 57
408.JO Direct Design Method .............................................................. ................................................................ ,,................. 57
408.11 Equivalent Frame M ethod ................................................... .................................: ...................................................... 60
SECTION 409 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 61
BEAMS ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
409.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................... 61
409.2 General .................................................................................................................................. ...................................... 61
409.3 Design Limits ........................................................... ...................................................... .. .......... ................................. 62
409 .4 Required Strength ..... ....... ......................................... ............................ .......................... ..... ........................................ 63
409.5 Design Strength ........................................................................................................................................................... 63
409.6 Reinforcement Limits ............... ...................... ..................................................................................................... .. .... .. 64
409.7 Reinforcement Detailing .. ......... ................ ............................. ............... ....................................... .............. .................. 65
409.8 Non-Prestressed One-way Joist Systems .................. .................. ................................................................................. 68
409.9 Deep Beams ............................................................................ ..................................................................................... 69
SECTION 410 ....................................................................................................................- ................... _,,, ............................ 70
COLUMNS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 70
410.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ ............................... 70
410.2 General ........................................................................................................................................................... ............. 70
410.3 Design Limits .... .............. ............................................... ........................ ............................................... ...................... 70
410.4 Required Strength ..................................... .................................................... ................... ............................................ 70
410.5 Design Strength .......... ................................................................................................................................................. 71
410.6 Reinforcement Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 7 1

CHAPTEH 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-3
410.7 Reinforcement Detailing ........................................... ................................................. .. .... ............... .............. .............. 71

SECTION 411 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 74
\VALLS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
411.1 Scope .............................................. ....... .................................................. .................................................................... 74
411.2 General ......................................... ................ ........... ..... .. ................................................. ............................................ 74
411.3 Design Limits .......................................................................................................................... .................. .. ................ 74
411.4 Required Strength ....... ................................................................................................................. .... ............................ 75
411.5 Design Strength ................................................................... ..................... ................................................................... 75
411.6 Reinforcc1ncnt Limits ............................................. ... .............................. ...................................... .. ........... ................ 76
411.7 Reinforcement Detailing .............................................................. ........... .. .......... ........... ............... .............................. 77
411.8 Alternative Method for Out-of-Plane Slender Wall Analysis .................................... ...... ..... ...................................... 78
SECTION 412 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
DIAPH.RAGlVIS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 79
412.l Scope .............................. .............................................. ...................................... ............. ............................................ 79
412.2 General ..................... ...... .. .......................... ............................................ .......... ............................. ................... ........... 79
412.3 Design Limits ........... ...... ............................ ........................................................ ................. ........... .... ....... ....... ........... 80
412.4 Required Strength ..... ...... ............................................................ ....... ...... .................................................... ................ 80
412.5 Design Strength .............. .. ........................... .............................. ............ ............. ......................................................... 80
412.6 Reinforcement Limits .............................................................. .. .................................................................................. 82
412. 7 Reinlorcement Detailing ....................................................................... ........................................................... ........... 82
SECTION 413 .......................................................................................................................................................................... t .............................................. 83
FOUNDATIONS.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 83
413.1 Scope ......................................... ........ .. ....... .. ......................................... .................................... .................................. 83
413.2 General ..................................................................................... ............................................................... .................... 83
413.3 Shallow Foundations ............................................................................. ............ ................... ............... ........................ 84
413.4 Deep Foundations .................................................................... .............. ............................................. ..... .. .. ................ 85
SECTION 414 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 86
.
PLAIN CONCRETE .................................................................................................................................................................... ~ ................................
. 86
414.1 Scope ........................... ........ ..... ...... ......................................... ........ ...... ........................ .............................................. 86
414.2 General ................................................................................................................................. ....................................... 86
414.3 Design Limits .............................................................................................................................................................. 86
414.4 Required Strength.................................................................................. ...................................................................... 87
414.5 Design Strength ..................................................................................................................... ............ ........ .................. 88
414.6 Reinforce1nent Detailing ..................................................................................... ........................................................ 89
SECTION 415 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 90
BEAM-CONCRETE AND ...................................................................................................................................................... 90
SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 90
415.1 Scope ................................. .............. ................. ....................................................... .............. ..... ....... ................... ....... 90
415.2 General ....... ........... ...... ........ ......................................... ..... .................................................. .................. .. ......... .... ....... 90
415 .3 Trans for of Column Axial Force through the Floor System ........................................................................................ 90
415.4 Detailing of Joints ........................ ..................... ...................... ...................................... ........ ................... ....... .. ... ....... 90
SECTION 416 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 91
CONNECTION BETWEEN 1.VIEMBERS ............................................................................................................................. 91
416.1 Scope ......... , .................................... .................. ................................................. .................... ......................... .. ........... 91
416.2 Connections of Precast Members ............................................... .............................. ..... ..................... ..... .................... 91
416.3 Connections to Foundations ....................................................... ...................... .... ..... ........................ ...... .................... 92
416.4 Horizontal Shear Transfer in Composite Concrete Flexural Members ........................... ............................................ 94
I\Jationa1 Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7u, Edition. 2015

4-4 CHAPTER 4 - Structur~I Concrete
416.5 Brackets and Corbels ........................... ................ ........... ....... ............................................................... ....................... 95
~CTJON 417 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 97
ANCHORING TO CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................................ 97
417.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................. .......... 97
417.2 General ............................................ .......................... .......................... ....... ..... ........................................ ............ .... .. .. 98
417 .3 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors....................................................................................................... .. 100
417.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading ........................................... ....................... .................................... .......... 102
417.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading ........................... ....... .................................................... ....... .. ......... ....... .. .. 105
417.6 Interaction ofTensile and Shear Forces ............................ ....... ............................. .. .......... .. ....... ............................... 108
417.7 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thicknesses to Preclude Splitting Failure............................ ..................... 108
417 .8 Installation and Inspection of Anchors ...................................................................................................................... 109
SECTION 418 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... tlO
EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................. 110
418.1 Scope ................... ........................................... .............................................. ....... .................................... ............. ..... 110
418.4 lnterrn.ediate Moment Frames ................ ................... ..... .................. ........ ............ ........... ......... ............................ ...... 111
418.5 Intennediatc Precast Structural Walls........................................................................................................................ 113
418.6 Beams of Special Moment Frames .. .......................................... ........ ............................. ........... .......................... ...... 113
418.7 Columns of Special Moment Frames ............. ......... ...... ............ ...... .................... ................... .............................. .... .. 115
418.8 Joints of Special Moment Fra1nes .... ...... .. ........ .......................... ..................................... ..................................... ...... 117
418.9 Special Moment Frames Constructed Using Precast Concrete ....................................... ......................... .................. 119
418.10 Special Structural Walls ........... ................................... ................... ................ .............. ........... ... ............................... 119
418.J I Special Structural Walls Constructed Using Precast Concrete .................................................................................. 123
418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses .................... .................. ........ ......... ........................... ......................... ................................. 123
418.13 Foundations ............................................................................................................................................ ...... ............. 125
418.14 Members Not Designated as Part of the Seismic-Force-Resisting System................................................ .............. .. 127
SECTION 419 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 128
CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................... 128
419.l Scope ............................................................................................................. ........................ .............. ........ ............ .. 128

419.2 Concrete Design Properties ............. ...... .............................. ....... .............. ..... ............... .......... ........ .............. ............. 128
419.3 Concrete Durability Requirements ....... ........................ .......................................... :.. ... .................................. :.......... 129
419.3.l Exposure Categories and Classes .. ...... .............................. ......................................................................... ............... 129
419.4 Grout Durability Requirements ..................... ................................. .......................................................................... . 131
SECTION 420 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 131
STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTJES, DURABILITY, AND EMBEDMENTS .................................................. 131
420.l Scope ................. ..... .................... ....... ..... ........... ............. ....... .............................. .. ............................. ...... ................. 131
420.2 Non-Prestressed Bars and Wires ................................. .................. ......... ................................ ..... ............................... 131
420.3 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Bars ... ... ...................... ................ ......... .... ........ ....................... ................ ............... 132
420.5 Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement .......... ..... .............. .... ......... .. .......... .... ............. ....................... ........ ...................... 136
420.6 Provisions for Durability of Steel Reinforcement .................... .... ......... .. .............. ................ .................................... 136
420.7 Embedments ............................................................... ... .............. ....................... ................................. ...... ............. ... 138
SECTION 421 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 139
STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS ............................................................................................................................ 139
421.l Scope ............................................................................................ ...... ............................................................ ....... .... 139
SECTION 422 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14l
SECTIONAL STRENGTH ................................................................................................................................................... 142
422. l Scope ........................................................................ .................. .... ...........-...................................... ....... ........ .......... 142
422.2 Design Assumptions for Moment and Axial Strength.. - ............................ .... .............. .... .......... ..... .... .................... .. 142

422.3 Flexural Strength ................................................................ ............................................................................ ........... 143
422.4 Axial Strength or Comhined Flexural and Axial Strength .. .................. .......................................................... .......... 143
422.5 One-way Shear Strenglh .............................................................. ........... ................... ......................... ....... ...... .......... 144
422.6 Two-\Vay Shear Strength ........................................................................ .. .......................................... ...... ...... .......... 147
422.7 Torsional Strength ................................................................................................................... .................................. 150
422.8 Bearing ............................................................................................................................. .............. ........................... 152
422. 9 Shear Friction .................................................................... ...................................................... ....................... ........... 152
S~CTfOl'i' 423 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 154
STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS ............................................................................................................................................... 154
423.1 Scope ........................................................................................ .... ............. ................................................................ 154
423.2 General ............................................................. ....................... .................................................................................. 154
423.3 Design Strength ................................................. ................ .. ........................... ........... .............. .................................. 154
423.4 Strenglh of Struts .............................................. ............ .................. ........................................... .. .............................. 154
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Hottle-Shaped Struts .......................................................................................................... I 55
423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing................................................................................................................................... 155
423.7 Strength of Ties .............................................................. ...................................................................... .................... 155
423.8 Tie Rein1orccmcnt Detailing ...................... .. .............. ..... .............. ............................................................ ................ 156
423. 9 Strength of Nodal Zones................................... .......... .. .... ............. ............... .......... ................................................... 156
SECTION 424 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
SERVICEABII.ITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 157
424.1 Scope .......... ....... ............................................. .......... .. .................. ............. ..................... ........................................... 157
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravily Loads ............................................................................... ....................... 157
424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in One-Way Slabs and Beams ............................. .............. ......................... 158
424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcemcnl ................................................................. ................................ .. ........... I 59
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prcstressed Concrete Flexural Memhers .............................................................................. 160
SECTlON 425 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 161
REINFORCK!\1~NT DRTAILS ........................................................................................................................................... 161
425.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................ .................., ...... ................ 161
425.2 :tvlinimum Spacing of Reinforcement ........................................................... :........... ................................................. 161
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crossties, and Minimum Inside Rend Diameters ............... ....................... ........... 162
425.4 Develop1nent of Reinforcement ...................................................................... .. ........ ... ......... .................................... 163
425.5 Splices ........................................................................................ ........... ................................. ............ .. ... ......... ......... I 67
425.6 Bundled Reintorce1nenl. ................................................. ..... ...................................................................................... 169
425.7 Transverse Reinforcement.. ............................................ .. ..... ..................... ............................................... ................ 169
425 .8 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers ............................. ....... .................................... ....................................... 172
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons ................................................................................. .............. .......... 172
SECTION 426 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 175
CONSTRUCTlON DOCUJ\'IENTS AND INSPl!:CT'lON .................................................................................................. 175
426.1 Scope ..................................................................... ....................... ........ .................. ......... .......................... ................ 175
426.2 Design Criteria ........................................................ .................................................................. ............... .... .............. 175
426.3 Member Information ......................................................... .............. ............................ ................................ .. ............ 175
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixture Requirements ..... ......... ........................................................... ........... ..................... 175
426.5 Concrete rroduction and Construction .................. ............................ ................................................... ..................... 178
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction Requirements ............ ............... ......... .. .. .............. .................................. 181
426. 7 Anchoring to Concrete .................................................................. ........................ .... .. ............................. ................. 182
426.8 Embedments ........................ .... ....... ............ ...................... ........................... ..................... ......................................... 182
426.9 Additional Requirements for Precast Concrete ......................................................................................................... 183
426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed Concrete ............................... ........... ......................................................... 183
426.1 I Fom1work .................................................................................................................................................................. 184
426. I 2 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance ................................................................................................................ ........ 185
Ncltional Structum! Code of the Philippines Volurn<:J I, yl!• Edr:i,'n. J.O 15

CHAPTF.R 4 .. Structural Cor;cmte <1 •.!j
422.3 Flexural Strength ........ ................................... .............................. ....................................... ....................................... 143

r 422.4 Axial Strength or Combined Flexural and Axial Strength ........................................................................................ 143
422.5 One-way Shear Strength ........................................................................................................................ .................... 144
422.6 Two-Way Shear Strength ..... .................... ............................. ....................................... ........... .................................. 147
422.7 Torsional Strength ........................................ ....................... .......................... .......................................................... .. 150
422.8 Bearing ................................................ ............................................. ....................... ....................... ........... ................ 152
422.9 Shear Friction ........................................ ............. ............... ............................... ......... ................................................ 152
SECTION 423 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 154
STRUT-AND-Tl Ii: l\10DELS ............................................................................................................................................... 154
423.1 Scope ........ .................................................................................... .. ........................ ............ ....................................... 154
423.2 General ..... .... ....... ................................................................................................... ............................................. ...... 154
423.3 Design Strength ................ ...................................... ................. ....... ...................................... ..... ................................ 154
423.4 Strength ofStruts .......................... ....................... ............................................................. ............... .......................... 154
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Boule-Shaped Struts ........................ .... .................................................................. ............ 155
423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing .......................................... ......................... ....................................... ......................... 155
423.7 Strength ofTies ......... ............. ........ ........ .............. .. ................................................................................ .... .............. 155
423.8 Tie Reinforcement Detailing ........ ........................ ................... .. ............................................ .................................... 156
423.9 Strength of Nodal Zones............................................... ............. .............. .......... ......... ............... ...... ..................... ..... 156
SECTION 424 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1S7
SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 157
424.1 Scope ....................................................................... ,............................... ........... ................ .............. ......................... 157
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravity Loads .................... ................ .. ..................... .... .. ..................................... 157
424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in One-Way Slabs and Beams ................... ................................................. 158
424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement ............ .............. ... .................... ............. ....... ........................... .............. 159
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prestressed Concrete Flexural Members ................................. .. ....................... .................... 160
SECTION 425 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 161
REINFORCEMENT DETAILS ........................................................................................................................................... 161
425.1 Scopc ........ .... .................................................. .. ..................... .............. .............................. .................... .. :.... ............. 161
425.2 Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement .......................... .................. .................... :...................... .................:............... 161
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crosstics, and Minimum Inside Bend Diameters ................................................. 162
425.4 Development of Reinforcement ..... ..................... ...................................................... ......................................... ....... 163
425.5 Splices ..... .... ................................................ .......................... ....... ....... .... ....... ........................ ....................... ............ 167
425.6 Bundled Reinforce1nent ........................................................................ .... ......................... ........ ................ ................ 169
425.7 Transverse Reinforcement. ......... ......................... .... ................ ........................................................... ....................... 169
425.8 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers ........................... ........... ............. ....... ,... ................................. ... ............. 172
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons .............................................................................. ....... ............... ..... 172
SECTION 426 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 175
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION .................................................................................................. 175
426.1 Scope ..................... ....................... .. .............. ......... ......... .............. .. ....................... .................................................... 175
426.2 Design Criteria ................... ................... ........ ........ ........... ............ ................ ....................... ...... ............... ............... .. 175
426.3 Member Infonnation ...... .................. ................. ........... .................. ........................................... ......................... ....... 175
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixture Requirements .................... ....... ...... .. ......... .. ........... ..... ................................... ...... .. 175
426.5 Concrete Production and Construction .............................................................. ............... .............. ....... .................... 178
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction Requirements ...................................... .. ............................................ .... 181
426.7 Anchoring to Concrete ... ......................... ............................................. ................................... ........................... ..... .. I 82
426.8 Embedments ... ... .................... ................ .................................... .............. ....... ........... .................. .......... ........... .... .. ... 182
426.9 Additional Requirements for Precast Concrete ................. ...................................................................... ............. ..... 183
426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed Concrete .... ....... ............. ....... .... .......... ............... ................ ..... .................. 183
426. l I Fonnwork ............................................................................ ......................... .. ........................................................... 184
426.12 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance .................................................. .... ..... ,................. ........ ............. ............... ....... 185
Nationa! Stfudural Codu of tl1e Philippines Volume I,?';, l:.dition. 2015

426.13 fnspection .................................................................................. ........................ ...... ............ ...................................... 187

'
SECTION 427 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 188
STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ......................................................................................... 188
427.l Scope ......................................................................................................................................................................... 188
427.2 General ........................................................................................................................... .................. ......................... 188
42 7.3 Analytical Strength Evaluation ....................................................... ........................................................................... I 88
427 .4 Strength Evaluation by Load Test ............................................................................................................................. 189
427.5 Reduced Load Rating ................................................................................................................................................ 190
SECTION 428 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 191
BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE THIN SHELLS ................................................................... 191
428.1 Scope and Definitions ........................................................................................................ ........................................ 191
428.2 Analysis and Design .................................................................................................................................................. 19 I
428.3 Design Strength ................................................................................... ............. ......................................................... 192
428.4. l Cast-in-place Non-Prestresscd Concrete ........................................................... ......................... ..... ........................... I 92
428.4.2 Cast-in-place Prestresscd Concrete .................................................................... ........................................................ 192
428.4.3 Prccast Non-Prcstressed or Prestrcssed Concrete Manufactured Under Plant Conditions ......................................... I 92
428.4.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements for Corrosive Environments ......... ............................................................. 193
428.5 Shell Reinforcement ....................... ,.................................. ............................................................. ........................... 193
428.6 Construction .............................................................................................................................................................. 194
SECTJON 429 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 194
ALTERNAT.E DESIGN METHOD ..................................................................................................................................... 194
429 ..1 Notations ...... .... .......... :........... .................................................................................................................................... 194
429.2 Scope ......................................................................................................................................................................... 194
429.3 General ................................................. .......................................................... ........................................................... 194
429.4 Permissible Service Load Stresscs............................................................................................................................. 194
429.5 Development and Splices of Reinforcement. ................................................ .............. ............. .................................. 195
429.7 Compression Members With or Without Flexure ...................................................................................................... 195
429.8 Shear and Torsion ...................................................................................................................................................... 195
APPENDlX A .......................................................................................................................:................................................. 199
APPENDIX B ......................................................................................................................................................................... 201

CHt\PTEn 4 -- Slrw:t,m.;1 C.-:;r;e,ete 4··"1
SECTION 401 401.2.S This chapter provides the minimum requirements

for the materials, design, construction, and strength
.6ENERAL REQUIREMENTS evaluation or structural concrete members and systems in
any structure designed and construded under the
401.1 Scope requirements ufthe general building code.
401.1.1 This section addresses (a) to (h): 401.2.6 ModHications to this Code that are adopted by a
particular government agency or local government are
a. General requirements of this Chapter; part of that organization's requirements, but arc not part
of this Code.
b. Purpose of this Chapter;
401.2.7 This chapter provides the minimum requirements
c. Applicability of this Chapter; for the materials, design, construction, and strength
evaluation of structural concrete members and systems in
d. Interpretation of this Chapter; any structure within this Code.
e. Definition of building official and the licensed design 401 .3 Purpose

professional;
401.3.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide for
f. Construction documents; public health and safety by establishing minimum
requirements for strength, stability, serviceability,
g. Testing and inspection; durability, and integrity of concrete structures.
h. Approval of special systems of design, construction, 401.3.2 This chapter does not address all design
or alternative construction materials. considerations.
401.2 General 401.3.3 Construction means and methods are not

addressed in this section.
401.2.1 Chapter 4 refers to the structural concrete
provision of the National Structural Code of the 401.4 Applicability
Philippines, Volume I (NSCP Vol. I), 7th Edition and may
be cited as such, and will be referred to herein as "this 401.4.1 This chapter shall apply to concrete structures
Code". designed and constructed under the requirements of the
general building code:
401.2.2 This chapter provides minimum requirements
for the design and construction of structural concrete 401.4.2 Applicable provisions of this chapter shall be
elements of any building or other structure under pennitted to be used for structures not governed by the
requirements or the National Building Code of the general building code.
Philippines of which this chapter of the National
Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume I, forms a 401.4.3 The design of thin shells and folded plate
part. This chapter also covers the strength evaluation of concrete structures shall be in accordance with Section
existing concrete structures. 428.
For structural concrete, f~ shall not be less than 17 MPa. 401.4.4 Design and construction of structural concrete
No maximum value off~ shall apply unless restricted by slabs cast on stay-in-place, non-composite steel deck are
a specific code provision. governed by this chapter.
401.2.3 This chapter is in English, with SI units, 401.4.5 Design and construction of one- and two-
published by the Association of Structural Engineers of family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings
the Philippines, Inc. (townhouses) and their accessory structures may be
designed until such time provisions of the National
401.2.4 ln case of conflict between this edition and other Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume III, Housing is
earlier versions, this latest version governs. published.
11
National Structural Code of the Philippine~ Volume Li l::cition, 2015
401.4.6 This chapter docs not apply to the design and 401.5.S The following words and terms in this section
il}Stallation of concrete piles, drilled piers, and caissons shall be interpreted in accordance with (a) through (e):
embedded in ground except as provided in (a) or (b):
a. The word "shall" is always mandatory;
a. For portions in air or water, or in soil incapable of
providing adequate lateral restraint to prevent b. Provisions of this section are mandatory even if the
buckling throughout their length. See also Sect. word "shall" is not used;
418.13.l.2.
c. Words used in the present tense shall include the
b. For structures in region of high seismic risk or future;
assigned to high seismic performance or design
categories d. The word "and" indicates that all of the connected
items, conditions, requirements, or events shall apply;
401.4.7 This chapter does not govern design and
construction of slabs-on-ground, unless the slab transmits e. The word "or" indicates that all of the connected
vertical loads or lateral forces from other portions of the items, conditions, requirements, or events are
structure to the soil. alternatives, at least one of which shall be satisfied.
401.4.8 For unusual structures, such as arches, tanks, 401.5.6 In any case in which one or more provisions of
reservoirs, bins and silos, blast-resistant structures, and this Chapter arc declared by an appropriate court to be
chimneys, provisions of this section shall govern where invalid, that ruling shall not affect the validity of the
applicable. For tanks and reservoirs refer also to ACI 350, remaining provisions of this Chapter, which are severable.
ACI 334.lR, and ACI 372R. The ruling of the court shall be effective only in that
court's jurisdiction, and shall not affect the content of
401.4.9 This chapter does not govern the composite interpretation of this Chapter in other jurisdictions.
design of structural concrete slabs cast-in-place,
composite steel form deck. Concrete used in the 401.5.7 If conflicts occur between provisions of this
construction of such slabs shall be governed by Sections code and standards and documents referenced in Section
40 I to 406 of this chapter, where applicable. Portions of 403, this Chapter shall apply.
such slabs designed as reinforced concrete are govemed
by this chapter. 401.6 Building Official
401.5 Interpretation 401.6.1 All referen~es in this chapter to the building

official shall be understood to mean the persons who
401.S.1 The principles of interpretation in this Section administer and enforce this Code.
shall apply to this Chapter as a whole unless otherwise
stated. 401.6.2 Actions and decisions by the building official
affect only the specific jurisdiction and do not change this
401.5.2 This Chapter consists of sections and Code.
appendices, including text, headings, tables, figures,
footnotes to tables and figures, and referenced standards. 401.6.3 The building official shall have the right to
order testing of any materials used in concrete
401.5.3 This Chapter shall be interpreted in a manner construction lo determine if materials are of the quality
that avoids conflict between or among its provisions. specified.
Specific provisions shall govern over general provisions.
401.7 Licensed Design Professional
401.5.4 This chapter shall be interpreted and applied in
accordance with the plain meaning of the words and terms 401.7.1 All references in this Code to the licensed design
used. Specific definitions of words and tenns in this professional shall be understood to mean the person who
section shall be used where provided and applicable, is licensed and responsible for, and in charge of, the
regardless of whether other materials, standards, or structural design or inspection.
resources outside of this section provide a ditlerent
definition.

CHAPTER 4 ·- St,uctural Con,:.rete 4-9
401.8 Construction Documents and Design Records

SECTION 402
,401.8.1 The licensed design professional slwll provide NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY
in lhe construction documents the information required in
Section 426 and that required by the jurisdiction. 402.1 Scope
401.8.2 Calculations pertinent to design shall be filed 402.1.1 This section defines notation and term inology
wilh the construction documents if required by lhc used in this chapter.
building official. Analyses and designs using computer
programs shall be permitted provided design assumptions, 402.2 · Notation
user input, and computer-generated output are submitted.
Model analysis shnll be permiued to supplement a = shear span, distance between
ca lcu lations. rnncentrated load and face of
supports, mm.
401.9 Testing and lnspectlon a depth of equivalent rectangular stress
block., mm.
401.9.1 Concrete materials shall be tested in a,, shear span, equal to distance from
accordance with the requirements of Section 426. center of concentrated load to either:
(a) face of support for continuous or
401.9.2 Concrete construction shall be inspected in cantilevered members, or (b) center
accordance with the general building code and in of support for simply supported
accordance with Sections 417 and 426. members, mm.
A area of that part of cross section
401.9.3 Inspection records shall include infonnation between flexural tension face and
required in Sections 417 and 426. center of gravity of gross section,
mm2.
401.10 Approval of Special Systems of Design, Area of an individual bar or wire,
Construction, or Alternative Construction mm 2 •
Materials Atrrg net bearing area of the head of stud,
anchor bolt, or headed defonned bars,
401.10.1 Sponsors of any system of design, mrn2 .
construction, or alternative construction materials within ·- area of concrete section resisting
the scope of this Chapter, the adequacy of which has heen shear transfer, mm2.
shown by successful use or by analysis or test, but which ~ area of contact .sur.facc being
docs not conform to or is not covered by this Chapter, investigated for horizontal shear,
shall have the right 10 present the data on which their mm2.
design is based to the building official or to a committee - greater gross cross-sectional area of
of competent structural engineers appointed by the the slab-beam strips of the two
building official. This committee shall have the authority orthogonal equivalent frames
to .investigate the data so submitted, require tests, and intersecting at a column of a two-way
formulate nales governing design and construction of such stab, mm 2•
systems to meet the intent of this Code. These rules, when cross-sectional area of a member
approved by the building official, and promulgated, shall measured to the outside edges of
be of the same force and effect as the provisions of this transverse reinforcement, mm 2•
Code. area enclosed by outside perimeter of
concrete cross section, mm2 •
401.1 l Provisions for Earthquake Resistance ::. cross-sectional area at 011e end of a
strut in a strut-and-tie model, taken
401.11.1 In regions of moderate (seismic zone 2) or perpendicular to the axis of the strut,
high seismic risk (seismic zone 4), provisions of Section mm 2
418 shall be satisfied. = area of that part of cross section
between the flexural tension face and
centroid of gross section, mm2
11
Nutional S truc turo1I Code oftha Philippines Volume I, i Editro11 . 20 15
gross area of concrete section area enclosed by centerline of the

bounded by web thickness and length outermost closed transverse torsional
of section in the direction of shear reinforcement, mm2 •
force considered in the case of walls, total area occupied by duct,
and gross area of concrete section in sheathing, and prestressing
the case of diaphragms, not to exceed reinforcement, mm2•
the thickness times the width of the = area of prestressed reinforcement in
diaphragm, mm 2. tension zone, mm2 •
area of concrete section of an = total area of prcstressing
individual pier, horizontal wall reinforcement, mm2 .
segment, or coupling beam resisting area of non-prestressed longitudinal
shear, mm1 . tension reinforcement, mm2•
area of reinforcement in bracket or A's area of compression reinforcement
2 '
corbel resisting design moment, rnm2 mm.
gross area of concrete section, mm2. area of primary tension
For a hollow section, A 0 is the area reinforcement in a corbel or bracket,
of the concrete only and does not mm2 .
include the area of the void(s). effective cross-sectional area of
total area of shear reinforcement anchor intension, mm2•
parallel to pnmary tension Ase.v effective cross-sectional area of
reinforcement in a corbel or bracket, anchor in shear, mm 2 •
mm2. total cross-sectional area of
effective cross-sectional area within a transverse reinforcement, including
joint in a plane parallel to plane of crossties, within spacing s and
beam reinforcement generating shear perpendicular to dimension be, mm2 •
in the joint, mm 2• total area of surface reinforcement at
A, total ·area of longitudinal spacing s, in the i-th layer crossing a
reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2• strut, wilh reinforcement at an angle
m1mmum area of longitudinal a, to the axis of the strut, mm 2•
reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2. A s.min = minimum area of flexural
area of reinforcement in bracket or reinforcement, mrn2•
corbel resisting factored tensile force = total area of oon-prestressed
2
Nuc, mm . longitudinal reinforcement bars or
area of a face of a nodal zone or a sceel shapes, and excluding
section through a nodal zone, mrn 2• prestressing reinforcement, mm 2.
projected influence area of a single area of steel shape, pipe, or tubing in
adhesive anchor or group of adhesive a composite section, mm2.
anchors, for calculation of bond area of structural steel shape, pipe or
strength intension, mm2 . tubing in a composite section, mm2 •
projected influence area of a single total area of longitudinal
adhesive anchor, for calculation of reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2•
bond strength in tension if not limited area of prestressing reinforcement in
by edge distance or spacing, mm2. a tie, rnm2•
projected concrete failure area of a total cross-sectional area of all
single anchor or group of anchors, transverse reinforcement within
for calculation of strength in tension, spacing s that crosses the potential
mm2 • plane of splitting · through the
projected concrete failure area of a reinforcement being developed,
single anchor, for calculation of mm 2•
strength intension if not limited by area of non-prestrcssed reinforcement
edge distance or spacing, mm2 . in a tie, mm2 .
gross area enclosed by torsional shear area of shear reinforcement within
flow path, mm2 . spacings, mm2 .
total area of reinforcement in each
group of diagonal bars in a
diagonally reinforced coupling beam,

CHAP ff I:::: 4 ··· S!ructumi Cnncml8 ,i 1:
mm 2. measured in the direction

area of shear friction reinforcement, perpendicular lo b 1 , mm.
mnl. nominal bearing strength, N.
area of shear reinforcement parallel factored bearing load, N.
to tlexural tension reinforcement distance from extreme compression
within spacing s 2 , mm 2• fiber to neutral axis, mm.
Av.min minimum area of shear reinforcemenl critical edge distance required to
within spacings, mm 2 • develop the basic strength as
Ave projected concrete failure area of a controlled by concrete breakout or
single anchor or group of anchors, for bond of a post-installed anchor in
calculation of strength in shear, mm2• tension in uncracked concrete
projected concrete failure area of a without supplementary reinforcement
single anchor, for calculation of to control splitting, mm.
strength in shear, if not limited by Ca,max - maximum distance from center or an
comer influences, spacing, or anchor shaft to the edge of concrete,
member thickness, mm2 • mm.
loaded area for consideration of Ca,,nin minimum distance from center of an
bearing strength, mm2 • anchor shaft to the edge of concrete,
maximum area of the portion of the mm.
supporting surface that is distance from the center of an anchor
geometrically similar to and shali to the edge of concrete in one
concentric with the loaded area. direction, mm. If shear is applied to
the area of the lower base of the anchor, Cut is taken in the direction
largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or of the applied shear. ff tension is
tapered wedge contained wholly applied to the anchor, ca, is the
within the support and having its mnumum edge distance. Where
upper base equal to the loaded area. ,mchors subject to shear arc located
The sides of the pyramid, cone, or in narrow sections of limited
tapered wedge shall be sloped one thickness, See Section 417.5.2.4.
vertical to two horizontal, mm2• c'a1 limiting value of Cat where anchors
b width of compression face of arc located less than 1.5ca 1 from
mcmbcr,mm. three or more edges, mm.
cross-sectional dimension of member distance from center . of an anchor
cure measured to the outside edges of · shaft to the edge of concrete in the
the transverse reinforcement direction perpendicular to Cat, mm.
composing area Ash, mm. lesser of: (a) the distance from center
Effective flange width of T section, of a bar or wire to the nearest
mm. concrele surface, and (b) one-half the
perimeter of critical section for two- center-to-center spacing of bars or
way shear in slabs and footings, mm. wires being developed, mm.
width of a strut, mm. clear cover of reinforcement, mm.
the effective slab width resisting projected distance from center of an
YrMsc· anchor shaft on one side of the
width of lhal part of cross section anchor required to develop the full
containing the closed stirrnps bond strength of a single adhesive
resisling lorsion, mm. anchor, mm.
width of cross section at contact distance from the interior face of the
surface being investigated for column to the slab edge measured
horizontal shear, mm. parallel to Ct, bul not exceeding Ci,
web width or diameter of circular mm.
section, mm. dimension of rectangular or
dimension of the critical section b 0 equivalent rectangular column,
measured in the direction of the span capital, or bracket measured in the
for which moments are detennined, direction of the span for which
mm. moments arc being detcm1ined, mm.
dimension of the critical section b 0 dimension of rectangular or
Nations! Structural Code of the Pl1ilippines Vol um<-) I, i'' Edition. 2015
equivalent rectangular column, concrete, MPa.

capital, or bracket measured in the El flexural sliffness of member, N-mm2 •
direction perpendicular to c1 , mm. (El)eff Effective flexural stiffness of
c cross-sectional constant to define member, N-mm2 •
torsional properties of slab and beam. modulus of elasticity of prestressing
compressive force acting on a nodal reinforcement, MPa.
zone, N. modulus of elasticity of
a factor relating actual moment reinforcement and structural steel,
diagram to an equivalent uniform excluding prcstrcssing reinforcement,
d
moment diagram.
distance from extreme compression
fiber to centroid of longitudinal
,~ MPa.
specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa.
tension reinforcement, mm. square root of specified compressive
d' distance from extreme compression strength of concrete, MPa.
fiber to centroid of longitudinal fee effective compressive strength of the
compression reinforcement, mm. concrete in a strut or a nodal zone,
outside diameter of anchor or shaft MP a.
diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, compressive strength of concrete at
or hooked bolt, mm. time of initial prestress, MPa.
d'a value substituted for da if an square root of specified compressive
oversized anchor is used, mm. strength of concrete at time of initial
Nominal maximum size of coarse prestress, MPa.
aggregate, mm. fem measured average compressive
nominal diameter of bar, wire, or strength of concrete, MPa.
prestressing strand, mm. fct average splilting tensile strength of
distance from extreme compression lightweight concrete, MPa.
fiber to centroid of prestressed stress due to unfactored dead load, at
reinforcement, mm. extreme fiber of section where tensile
diameter of pile at footing base, mm. stress is caused by externally applied
distance from extreme tension fiber loads, MPa.
to centroid of tension reinforcement, decompression stress; stress in the
mm. prestressing steel when stress is zero
D dead loads or related internal in the concrete at the ~ame level as
moments and forces. the centroid of the prestressing steel,
eftect of service dead load. MPa.
distance from the inner surface of the compressive stress in concrete, after
shaft of a J- or L-bolt to the outer tip allowance for all prestress losses, at
of the J- or L-bolt, mm. centroid of cross section resisting
distance between resultant tension externally applied loads or at junction
load on a group of anchors loaded io of web and flange where the centroid
tension and the centroid of the group lies within the flange, MPa. In a
of anchors loaded in tension, mm; composite member, f pc is resultant
eN, is always positive. compressive stress at centroid of
distance between resultant shear load composite section, or at junction of
on a group of anchors loaded in shear web and flange where the centroid
in the same direction, and the: lies within the flange, due to both
centroid of the group of anchors prestress and moments resisted by
loaded in shear in the same direction, precast member acting alone.
mm; ev, is always positive. compressive stress in concrete due to
E effect of horizontal and vertical effective prestress forces, after
earthquake-induced forces. allowance for all prestress losses, at
modulus of elasticity of concrete, extreme fiber of section if tensile
MP a. stress is caused by externally applied
modulus of elasticity of beam loads, l'v1Pa.
concrete, MPa. /ps stress in prestressing steel at nominal
modulus of elasticity of slab flexural strength, MPa.
Association or Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

Cl·iAFTEF~ 4 ··· Struc1uml Conn.,w 4-1:3
specified tensile strength of three or more edges, mm.

prestressing reinforcement, MPa. - storey height for storey x.
{py specified yield strength of laterally unsuppo1ted height al
prcstressing reinforcement, MPa. extreme compression of wall or wall
fr modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa. pier, mm., equivalent to lu for
fs tensile stress in reinforcement at compression members, mm.
service loads, excluding prestrcssing depth of shear head cross section,
,~ reinforcement, MPa.
compressive stress in reinforcement
under factored loads, excluding
mm.
height of entire wall from base to top,
or clear height or wall segment or
prestrcssing reinforcement, MPa. wall pier considered, mm.
fsc effective stress in prcstressed maximum center to center horizontal
reinforcement (aller allowance for all spacing ofhuop or crosstie legs on all
prestress losses), MPa. faces of the column, mm.
fsi stress in the i·th layer of surface H effect of service load due lo lateral
reinforcement, MPa. earth pressure, ground water
ft extreme fiber stress in tension in the pressure, or pressure of bulk
pre-compressed tensile zone materials., N.
calculated at servi<.:c loads using I moment of inertia of section of beam
gross section properties after about the centroidal axis, mm4.
allowance of all prestress losses, moment of inertia about centroidal
MPa. axis of gross section of beam, mm4.
futa specified tensile strength of anchor moment of inertia of cracked section
steel, MPa. transformed to concrete, mm4.
spc<.:ified yield strength of non- . effective moment of inertia for
prestressed reinforcement, MPa. computation of deflection, mm4.
[ya specified yield strength of anchor moment of inertia of gross concrde
steel, MPa. section about centroidal axis,
specified yield strength of transverse neglecting reinforcement, mm 4.
reinforcement, MPa. moment of inertia about of slab ahout
F effecl of service lateral load due to centroidal axis, mm4.
fluids with well-defined pressures moment of inertia of reinforcement
and maximum heights. ahout centroidal ax,s of member
4
nominal strength at face of a nodal cross scdion, mm •
zone, N. moment of inertia of structural steel
nominal strength of a strut, N. shape, pipe or tubing about centroidal
nominal strength of a tie, N. axis of composite member cross
factored force on the face of a node, section, mm4 •
N. k effective length factor for
factored compressive force in a strut, compression mcmhers.
N. <.:oefficient for basic concrete
factored tensile force in a tie, N. breakout strength in tension.
overall thickness of member, mm. coeHicient for pry out su:ength.
thickness of shell or folded plate, concrete strength factor.
mm. confinement effectiveness factor.
thickness of mtimher in which an wobble friction coefficient per mm of
anchor is located, measured parallel prestressing tendon. ,
to anchor axis, mm. torsional stiffness of torsional
dimension of anchorage device or member; moment per unit rotation.
single group of closely spaced transverse reinforcement index, mm.
devices in the direction of bursting coefticienl associated with the 5%
being considered, mm. frnctile.
etlective embedment depth of anchor, span length of beam or one-way slab;
mm. clear projection of cantilever, mm.
h'er limiting value of hef where anchors additional embedment length beyond
are located less than 1.Shet from centerline of support or point of
National Structural Code ofthe Philippines Volurm:, I. i" Edition. 2C~ 5

4-14 Ct-lAPTER 4 -· Structural Concrete
inflection, mm. = length of span m direction

length along which anchorage of a tic perpendicular to l i , measured center-
must occur, mm. to-center of supports, mm.
width of bearing, mm. == effect of service live load.
length of a compression member in a == development length, mm.
frame, measured center-to-center of effect of service roof live load.
the joints, mm. design moment
development length in tension of maximum unfactored moment due to
deformed bar, defonned wire, plain service loads, including PA effects.
and deformed welded wire M == moment acting on anchor or anchor
reinforcement, or pretensioned group, N-mm.
strand, mm. == maximum moment in member due to
development length in compression service loads at stage deflection is
of deformed bars and defom1ed wire, calculated, N-mm.
mm. = moment at the face of the joint,
development length in tension of corresponding to the nominal flexural
deformed bar or deformed wire with strength of the column framing into
a standard hook, measured from that joint, calculated for the factored
outside end of hook, point of axial force, consistent with the
tangency, toward critical section, direction of the laternl forces
mm. considered, resulting in the lowest
load bearing length of anchor for flexural strength.
shear, mm. factored moment amplified for the
length of clear span measured face- effects of member curvature used for
to-face of supports, mm. design of compression member, N-
length, measured from joint face mm.
along axis of member, over which cracking moment, N-mm.
special transverse reinforcement must = moment causing flexural cracking at
be provided, mm. section due to externally applied
compression lap splice length, mm. loads, N-mm
tension lap spl ice length, mm. moment at the face of the joint,
span of member under load test, corresponding to the nominal tlexural
taken as the shorter span for two-way strength of the girder including slab
slab systems, mm. Span is the lesser where in tension, framing into that
of: (a) distance between centers of joint
supports, and (b) clear distance M,,. factored moment modified to account
between supports plus thickness h of for effect of axial compression, N-
member. Span for a cantilever shall mm.
be taken as twice the distance from M max maximum factored moment at section
the face of support to cantilever end. due to externally applied loads, N-
transfer length of prestressed mm.
reinforcement, mm. = nominal flexural strength at section,
unsupported length of column or N-mm.
wall,mm nominal flexural strength of beam
length of shear head ann from including slab where in tension,
centroid of concentrated load or framing into joint, N-mm.
reaction, mm. nominal flexural strength of column
length of entire wall, or length of framing into joint, calculated for
wall segment or wall pier considered factored axial force, consistent with
in direction of shear force, mm. the direction of lateral forces
fx length of prestrcssing tendon element considered, resulting m lowest
from jacking end to any point x , mm. flexural strength, N-mm.
length of span in direction that = total factored static moment, N-mm.
moments are being determined, = required plastic moment strength of
measured center-to-center of shearhead cro.ss section, N-mm.
supports, mm. probable flexural strength of

members, with or without axial load. n modular ratio or elasticity, bul not
determined using the properlics of the less tlHm 6
mcmher at lhc joint laces assuming a Es/Ee
tensile strength in lhc longitudinal n - number of items. such as. bars, wires,
bars of at least 1. 2 5f y and a monostran<l anchorage devices,
strength-reduclion factor <J> of 1.0, N- anchors or shearhead arms.
mm. number of longitudinal bars around
maximum moment in wall due to the perimeter of a column core with
service loads, excluding P4 effects, rectilinear hoops that are laterally
N-mm. supported by the corner of hoops or
factored slah moment that is resisted hy seismic hooks. A hundle of bars
by the column at a joint, N-mm. is counted as a single bar.
Mstab pmtion or slab faclored momenr N - design axial load normal to cross
balanced hy support moment, N-mm section occurring simultaneously
factored moment at section, N-mm. with V; to be taken as positive for
momenl at the mid-hcight section of compression, negative for tension.,
the wall due lo factored lateral and and to include effects or lcnsion du1.:
eccentric vertical loads, not including to creep and shrinkage.
P4 effects, N-mm. number of bars 111 a layer being
momenL resistance contributed by spliced or developed at a criti1.:al
shearhead reinforcement, N-mm. section.
lesser factored end moment on a N lcnsion force acting on anchor or
compression member, to be taken as anchor group, N.
positive if member is bent in single nominal bond strength intension or a
curvature, negalive if bent in double single adhesive anchor, N.
curvature, N-mm. nominal bond strength inlension of a
Mtns factored end momenl on a group of adhesive anchors, N.
compression member at the end at basic concrete breakout strength in
which M 1 al:ts, due lo loads that tension or a single anchor in cracked
cause no appredahle sidcsway, concrete, N.
calculated using a first-order elastic Basic bond strength in lension of a
frame analysis, N-mm. single adhesive anchor, N.
factored end moment on compression lhc resultanl tensile force acting on
member at the end at which M 1 acts, the portion of lhc concrete cross
due to loads that cause appreciable section that 1s subjected to tensile
sidesway, calculated using a first- stresses due to lhc combined effects
or<ler elaslic frame analysis, N-mm. or service loads and effective
greater factored end moment on prestress, N.
compression member. If transverse nominal concrete breakout strength in
loading occurs between supports, tension of a single anchor, N.
M 2 is lakcn as the largest moment N<:bg nominal concrete breakout strength in
occurring in member. Value of M 2 tension or a group of anchors, N.
is always positive, N-mm. basic concrete pryout strength of a
Mz.min minimum value or M2 , N-mm. single anchor, N.
M2n.~ factored end moment on compression Ncpg basic concrete pryout strength of a
member at the end at which M 2 acts, group of anchors, N.
due to loads that cause no appreciable nominal strength iri tension, N.
sidesway, calculated using a first- pullout strength in tension of a single
order elastic frame analysis, N-mm. anchor in cracked concrete, N.
factored end moment on compression Np11 nominal pullout strength in tension of
member at the end at which M 2 acts, a single anchor, N
due to loads that cause appreciable nominal slrength of a single anchor
sidesway, calculated using a first- or individual anchors in a group of
order elastic frame analysis, N-mm. anchors in tension as governed by lhe
steel strength, N.
4-16 CHAPTER 4 -· Structural Concrele
N.,b side-face blowout strength of a single Pli secondary moment due to individual
anchor, N. member slenderness, N-mm.
Nsbg side-face blowout strength uf a group Pll secondary moment due to lateral
of anchors, N. deflection, N-mm.
N., factored axial force normal to cross = prestressing tendon force at any point
section occurring simultaneously x.
with Vu or Tu; to be taken as factored dead load per unit area, k.Pa.
positive for compression and factored live load per unit area, kPa.
negative for tension, N. = factored load per unit area, kPa.
factored tensile force applied to = stability index. for a storey.
anchor or individual anchor m a = radius of gyration of cross section of
group of anchors, N. a compression member, mm.
N.,a,g total factored tensile force applied to R :: reaction, N .
anchor group, N. R == cumulative load effect of service rain
factored tensile force applied to most load.
highly stressed anchor in a group of s = spacing of shear reinforcement in
anchors, N. direction parallel to longitudinal
Nun,s == . Factored sustained tension load, N. reinforcement, mm.
Nu, factored horizontal tensile force s center-to-center spacing of items,
applied at top of bracket or corbel such as longitudinal reinforcement,
acting simultaneously with V ui to be transverse reinforcement, tendons, or
taken as _positive for tension, N. anchors, mm.
P ep outside perimeter of the concrete s Standard deviation, MPa.
cross section, mm. St = center-to-center spacing of
perimeter of centerline of outermost reinforcements in the i-th layer
closed transverse torsional adjacent to the surface of the
reinforcement, mm. member, mm.
critical buckling load, N. = center-to-center spacing of transverse
nominal axial compressive strength reinforcements within the length
ofa member, N. 10 , mm.
P n,1Mx maximum nominal axial compressive == sample standard deviation, MPa.
strength ofmembcr, N. spacing of wire to be developed or
nominal axial tensile strength of spliced, mm.
member, N. clear distance between adjacent webs,
P nt,max Maximum nominal ax.ial tensile mm.
strength of member, N. Sz center-to-center spacmg of
nominal axial load strength at zero longitudinal shear or torsional
eccentricity, N. reinforcement, mm.
prestressing force at jacking end, N. = elastic section modulus of section.
factored prestressing force at = moment, shear or axial force at
anchorage device, N. connection corresponding to
prestressing force evaluated at development of probable strength at
distance I"" from the jacking end, N intended yield locations, based on the
prestressing tendon force at jacking governing mechanism of inelastic
end. lateral deformation, considering both
unfactored axial load at the design, gravity and earthquake load effects.
mid-height section including effects Sm = elastic section modulus; mm3 .
of self-weight, N. S,; = nominal moment, shear, axial,
factored post-tensioned tendon force torsional, or bea:ri.ng strength.
at the anchorage device. = yield strength of connection, based
factored axial load at given on f y, for moment, shear, or ax,ial
eccentricity, ~ <f,P n · force, MPa.
Factored axial force; to be taken as waJJ tliickness of hellow section, mm.
positive for compression and thickness of flange, mm.
negative for tension, N.

T cumulative effects of service Vcpg nominal concrete pryout strength of a
temperature, creep, shrinkage, group of anchors, N.
differential seulemenl, and shrinkage Vcw nominal shear strength provided by
compensating concrete. concrete where diagonal cracking
T tension force acting on a nodal zone results from high principal tensile
in a strut-and-tie model, N. stress in web, N.
cracking torsional moment, N-mm. shear force at section due to
total test load, N. unfactored dead load, N.
threshold torsional moment, N-mm. Design shear force for load
factored torsional moment at section, combinations including earthquake
N-mm. effects, N.
u strength of a member or cross section permissible horizontal shear stress,
required to resist factored loads or MPa.
related internal moments and forces v, factored shear force al section due to
in such combinations as stipulated in externally applied loads occurring
this Code. simultaneously with Mmax, N.
design shear stress, MPa. nominal shear strength, N.
Stress corresponding to nominal lwo- nominal horizontal shear strength, N.
way shear strength provided by vertical component of effective
concrete, M Pa. prestress force at section, N.
equivalent concrete stress nominal shear strength provided by
corresponding to nominal two-way shear reinforcement, N.
shear strength of slab or footing, nominal strength in shear of a single
MPa. anchor or group or anchors as
equivalent concrete stre~s governed by the steel strength, N.
corresponding to nominal two-way factored shear force at section, N.
shear strength provided by factored shear force applied to a
reinforcement, MPa. single anchor or group of anchors, N.
Maximum factored two-way shear Yua,g total factored shear force applied to
stress calculated around the perimeter anchor group, N.
of a given critical section, MPa. Vua,l factored shear force applied to most
factored shear stress on the slab highly stressed anchor in a group of
critical section for two-way action anchors, N.
due to gravity loads without moment Factored shear force along horizontal
transfer, MPa. interface m composite concrete
v design shear force al section flexural member, N.
shear force acting on anchor or factored horizontal shear in a storey,
anchor group, N. N.
v
.L applied shear perpendicular to the density, unit weight, of normal-
edge, N. weigbt concrete or equilibrium
applied shear parallel to the edge, N. density of lightweight concrete, kg/
basic concrete breakout strength in m3.
shear of a single anchor in cracked factored live load per unit area.
concrete, N. factored load per unit length of beam
nominal shear strength provided by or one-way slab, N/mm.
concrete, N. width of a strut perpendicular to the
nominal concrete breakout strength in axis of the strut, mm.
shear of a single anchor, N. effective height of concrete
nominal concrete breakout strength in concentric with a tie, used to
shear of a group of anchors, N. dimension nodal zone, mm.
nominal shear strength provided by Wt.mat> maximum effective height of
concrete where diagonal cracking concrete concentric with a tie, mm.
results from combined shear and w/cm maximum water-cementitious
moment, N. materials ratio.
nominal concrete pryout strength of a eftect of wind load.
single anchor, N. service-level wind load, N.
t-faiional Structur,;I Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7''' Edition, 201 ~i

4-18 CHAPTER 4 - S\ru,tural Concrete
x shorter overall dimension of the ratio of maximum factored

rectangular part of cross section, mm. sustained shear within a storey to the
y longer overall dimension of maximum factored shear m that
rectangular part of cross section, mm. storey associated with the same load
Ye distance from centroidal axis of gross combination.
section, neglecting reinforcement, to Pdns = ratio used to account for reduction of
tension face, mm. stiffness of columns due to sustained
a angle between inclined sti rrups and axial loads.
longitudinal ax.is of member. Pn = factor used to account for the effect
a angle defining the orientation of of the anchorage of ties on the
reinforcement. effective compressive strength of a
a total angular change of prestressing nodal zone.
tendon profile in radians from tendon = factor used to account for the effect
jacking end to any point x. of cracking and confining
coefficient defining the relative reinforcement on the effective
contribution of concrete strength to compressive strength of the concrete
nominal wall shear strength in a strut.
ratio of flexural stiffness of beam /Jc ratio of torsional stiffness of edge
section to flexural stiffness of a width beam section to flexural stiffness of a
of slab bounded laterally by width of slab equal to span length of
centerlines of adjacent panels, if any, beam, center-to-center of supports.
on each side or the beam. EcbC
Ecblb ZEcsls
Er:sls
average value of
on edges of a panel.
a, for all beams
= factor relating depth of equivalent
rec tangular compressive stress block
to depth o f neutral axis.
a1 in direction of I! l · Yt factor used to determine the fraction
a, in direction of 1!2 •
angle between the axis of a strut and
of M sc transferred by slab flexure at
slab-column connections.
Yp = factor for type of prestressing
the bars in the i-th layer of
reinforcement.
reinforcement crossing that strut.
= 0.55 for f py/f pu not less than 0.80.
total angular change of tendon profile
from tendon jacking end to point {).40 for f py/f pu not less than 0.85.
under considerations, radians. == 0.28 for f py/f pu not less than 0.90.
as constant used to compute V c in slabs Ys -: factor used to determine the portion
and footings. of reinforcement located in center
ratio of flexural stiffness of shear band of footing.
head arm to surrounding composite Yv == factor used to determine the fraction
slab section. of M sc transferred by eccentricity of
orientation of distributed shear at slab-column connections.
reinforcement in a strut. Yv = 1 - y,
orientation of reinforcement 6 Moment magnification factor used to
orthogonal to a 1 in a strut. reflect effects of member curvature
p ratio of long to short dimensions: between ends of compression
clear span for two-way slabs, sides of member.
column, concentrated load or reaction moment magnification factor for
area; or sides of a footing. frames not braced against ~ideways,
ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to reflect lateral drift resulting from
to total area of tension reinforcement lateral and gravity loads.
at section. -= design displacement, mm.
ratio of long side to short side of == computed, out-of-plane deflection at
concentrated load or reaction area mid-height of wall corresponding to
cracking moment, Mer, mm.
maximum deflection measured
during the second test relative to the
Association of Structural Engineers oi ttie Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

position of the structun: at the value of net tensile strain in the
beginning of the second test, mm. extreme layer of longitudinal tension
AtP increase in stress in prestrc.:ssing reinforcement used to define a
reinforce,rn:nt due co factored loads, cumprcssio11-co111rutlcd section.
MPa. 9 angle bc.:twccn axis of s!rut,
4/ps stress in prcstrcssing reinforce,rn:nt at compression diagonal, or
service loads less decompression compression field and the tension
stress, MPa. chord of the members.
diilcrcnce hetween the stress that can - correction fiu;tor related to unit
be developed in the strand at the.: weight of concrete.
section under consideration and the modification factor to retle<.:t the
stress required to resist factored reduced mechanical propc11ies of
bending moment at section, M11 /<J>, lightweight concrete relative to
MP a. normal-weight concrete or the same
measured maximum dellection, mm. compressive strength.
calculated, om-o1~planc deflection at - modification factor to re11e<.:t the
mid-height of wall corresponding to reduced mechanical propc1ties or
nominal flexural strength, M 11 , mm. lightweight concrete in certain
relative lateral deflection bc.:twccn the concrete anchorage applications.
top and bottom or a storey due to multiplier used for additional
Vus, mm. dcJlcction due to long-term effects.
residual deflection measured 24 hours coefficient of friction.
after removal of the test load. For the numher of identical arms of
first load test, residual det1ection is shearhead.
measured relative to the position· of post-tensioning curvature friction
the srmcture at the heginning of the coefficient.
first load test. For the second load time-dependent fac!or for sustained
test, residual deflection is measured load.
relali vc to the pos1twn of the p ratio of non-prestressed tension
!itructure at the beginning of the reinforcement.
second load test, mm. p As/(lwd)
measured residual deflection, mm. p ratio of'As to bd
maximum detlection at or near p' ratio of compression reinfon.:emcnt,
midheight due to service loads, mm A's to bd.
out-ol~plane deflection due.: to service reinforcement ratio producing
loads, mm. balanced strain conditions.
calculated out-of-plane deflection at Pt ~ ratio of area of distrihutcd
mid-height of wall due to factored longitudinal reinforcement to gross
loads, mm. concrete.: area perpendicular to that
design storey drift of storey x, mm. reinforcement.
maximum deflection, during first ratio or prcstressed reinforcement,
load test, measured 24 hours after ApstO bd.,.
application of the full test load, mm. ratio or volume of spiral
Ps
c-: maximum deflection, during second reinforcement to total volume of core
load lest, measured 24hours after confined by the spiral, measured out-
application or the full test load. to-out of spirals.
Deflection is measured relative to the ratio of area of distributed transverse
Pt
position of the strncture at the reinforcement to gross concrete area
beginning of second load lest, mm. perpendicular to that reinforcement.
maximum usable strain at extreme Pv ratio oftic reinforcement area to are,t
concrete compression fiber. of contact surface.
net tensile strain in extreme layer of Av
longitudinal tension reinforcement at Pv
bvs
nominal strength, excluding strains ratio of tension rei nforccmcnt, As to
Pw
due to effective prestress, creep,
bwd·
shrinkage, and temperature. strength-reduction factor.
stiffness reduction factor. length based on confining

<l>k characteristic bond stress of adhesive reinforcement.
i'. Tcr
anchor in cracked concrete, MPa. factor used to modify development
characteristic bond stress of adhesive length based on reinforcement size.
Tuner factor used to modity development
anchor in uncracked concrete, MPa. t/Jt
factor used to modify development length for casting location intension.
V'c factor used to modify development
length based on cover. t/Jw
factor used to modify tensile strength length for welded defonned wire
V'c,N reinforcement in tension.
of anchors based on presence or
absence of cracks in concrete. amplification factor to account for
factor used to modify tensile strength overstrength of the seismic-force-
V'cp,N res1stmg system determined in
of post-installed anchors intended for
use in uncracked concrete without accordance with the general building
supplementary reinforcement to code.
account for the splitting tensile reinforcement indices for flanged
stresses due to installation. sections computed as for w, wP and
factor used to modify tensile strength w' except that b shall be the web
V'cp,Na
or adhesive anchors intended for use width, and reinforcement area shall
in uncracked concrete without be that required to develop
supplementary reinforcemenl to compressive strength of web only.
account for the splitting tensile
stresses due to installation. 402.3 Terminology
V'c,P factor used to modify pullout strength
of anchors based on presence or ADHESIVE are chemical components formulated from
absence of cracks in concrete. organic polymers, or a combination of organic polymers
factor used to modify shear strength and inorganic materials that cure if blended together.
of anchors based on presence or
absence of cracks in concrete and ADMIXTURE is a material other than water, aggregate,
presence or absence of or hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and
supplementary reinforcement. added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify
V'e factor used to modify development its properties.
length based on reinforcement
coating. AGGREGATE is a granular material, such as sand,
t/Jec,N factor used to modify tensile strength gravel, crushed stone and iron blast-furnace slag, and
of anchors based on eccentricity or when used with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic
applied loads. cement concrete or mortar.
V'ec,Na factor used to modify tensile strength
of adhesive anchors based on AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT is an agbrregate
eccentricity of applied loads. meeting the requirements of ASTM C330 and having a
3
V'ec,v factor used to modify shear strength bulk density with a dry, lose weight of 1120 kg/m or
of anchors based on eccentricity of less, determined in accordance with ASTM C29. In some
applied loads. standards, the term lightweight aggregate is being
V'ed.N
factor used to modify tensile strength replaced by the term low-density aggregate.
of anchors based on proximity to
edges of concrete member. ANCHOR is a steel element either cast into concrete or
V'ed,Na factor used to modity tensile strength post-installed into a hardened concrete member and ui;ed
of adhesive anchors based on to transmit applied loads to the concrete.
proximity to edges of concrete
member. ANCHOR, CAST-IN is a headed bolt, headed stud, or
V'ed,V factor used to modify shear strength hooked bolt (J- or L-bolt) installed before placing
of anchors based on proximity to concrete.
edges of concrete member.
factor used to modify shear strength ANCHO~ HEADED BOLT is a cast-in steel anchor
t/Jh.V
of anchors located in concrete that develops its tensile strength from the mechanical
members wjth ha< 1. Scat· interlock provided by either a head or nut at the embedded
factor used to modify development end of the anchor.
Association of Structural Englneers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

ANCHOR, HOOKED BOJ .T is a cast-in anchor ANCHORAGE Dl!:VICI!: in posl-tcnsioned members the
anchored mainly by bearing or tlie 90-degree bend (L- hardware used to transfer force from prestre:scd
bolt) or 180-<lcgree bend (J-bolt) against the concrcLc, al rei nforcerncnt to the c.:uncrete.
its cmbcdded end, and having a minimum e1i equal to
3da, ANCHORAGE DF.VICF:, BASIC MONOSTRAND is
an anchorage dcvkc used with any single strand or a
ANCHOR, HEADED STUD 1s a steel anchor single I6mm. or smaller diameter bar that is in accordance
conforming to the requirements of AWSD l. IM and with Sections 425.8.1,425.8.2 and 425.9.3.1 a.
affixed lo a plate or similar steel attachment by the stud
arc welding process before casting. ANCHORAG~ DEVICE, BASJC MlJLTISTRAND is
an anchorage device used with multiple strands, bars, or
ANCHOR, HORIZO:'-JTAL OR UPWARDLY wires, or with single bars larger than 16 mm diameters
INCLINED is an anchor installed in a hole <lrilled that satisfies Sections 425.8.1, 425.8.2 and 425.9.3.1 b.
horizontally or in a hole drilled at any orientaiion above
horizontal. ANCHORAGE Dl:VICE, SPECIAL is an anchorage
device that satisfies tests required in Section 425. 9 .3.1 c.
ANCHOR, POST-J~STAU.ED, is an am:hor installed
in hardened concrete; adhesive, expansion, and undercut, ANCHORAGE ZON.F.. in post-tensioned members,
anchors arc examples of post-installed anchors. portion of the member through which the concentrated
prcsLressing force is transferred Lo the concrete and
ANCHOR, ADHF,SIVF.. is a post-installed anchor, distributed more uniformly across the section; its extent is
inserted into hardened concrete with an anchor hole equal lo the largest dimension of the cross section; for
diameter not greater than 1.5timcs the anchor diameter, anchorage <lcviccs located away from the end of a
that transfers loa<ls LU the concrete by bond between the member, the anchorage zone includes the disturbed
anchor and the adhesive, and bond bctwccn the adhesive regions ahead or and behind the anchorage device.
and the concrete.
ATTACHMENT is a structural assembly, external to the
ANCHOR, ADHESIVE-STEEL ELEMENTS are steel surface of the concrete that trnnsmils loads to or receives
elements for adhesive anchors include threaded rods, loads from the anchor.
deformed reinforcing bars, or internally thrca<lcd steel
sleeves with extemal dcfonnations. B-REGION is a portion of a member in which it is
reasonable to assume that strains due to flexure vary
ANCHOR, F,XPANSION is a post-installed anchor, linearly through section.
inse1tcd into hardened concrete that transfers loads to or
from the con~rete by dircct bearing or friction or both. BASE OF STRUCTURE is a level at which the
horizontal earthquake ground motions are assumed lo be
ANCHOR, lJNDERCUT is a post-installed anchor that imparted to a building. This level does not necessarily
<lcvclops its tensile strength from thc mechanical interlock coincide with the ground level.
provided by undercutting or the concrete at the embe<ldcd
end of the anchor. Undercutting is achieved with a special BEAM is a member subjected primarily to flexure and
drill before installing the anchor or alternatively by the shear, with or without axial force or torsion; beams in a
am:hor itself during its installation. moment frame that forms part of the lateral-force-resisting
system are predominantly horizontal members; a girder is
ANCHOR GROUP is a number of similar anchors a beam.
having approximately equal effective emhcdmcnt depths
BOUNDARY EU:MENT 1s a portion along wall and
with spacing s between adjacent anchors such Lhat the
diaphragm e<lgc, including edges of openings,
protected areas overlap.
strengthened by longitudinal and transverse
rein forccmcnt.
ANCHOR PULLOUT STRENGTH is the strength
corresponding to the anchoring device or a major
BUILDING OFFICIAL is a term used in a gcncrnl
component of the device sliding out from the concrete
building code to identify the person charged with
without breaking out a substantial portion of the
administration and enforcement of provisions of the
surrmmding concrclc.
building code. Such term as building inspector is a
variaLion of the title.:, and the term "building official" as
4·22 CHAPTER 4 - Structur<1i Concrete
used in this Code, is intended to include those variations, CONCRETE, NON-PRESTRESSED is a reinforced
as ;well as others that are used in the same sense. concrete with at least the minimum amount of non-
• prestressed reinforcement and no prestressed
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS are materials that reinforcement; or for two-way slabs, with less than the
have cementing value if used in concrete either by minimum amount ofprestrcssed reinforcement.
themselves, such as portlan<l cement, blended hydraulic
cements, and expansive cement, or such materials in CONCRETE, NORMALWEIGHT is a concrete
combination with fly ash, raw or other calcined natural containing only aggregate that conforms to ASTM C33.
pozzolans, silica fume, and slag cement.
CONCRETE, PLAIN is a concrete with no
COLLECTOR is an clement that acts in axial tension or reinforcement or with less reinforcement than the
compression to transmit forces between a structural minimum amount specified for reinforced concrete.
diaphragm and a vertical element of the seismic-force-
rcsisting system. CONCRETE, PRECAST is a concrete element cast
elsewhere than its final position in the structure.
COLUMN is a member, usuaJJy vertical or predominantly
vertical, used primarily to support axial compressive load, CONCRETE,PRESTRESSED is a concrete in which
but that can also resist moment, shear, or torsion. Columns internal stresses have been introduced to reduce potential
used as part of a lateral-force-resisting system resist tensile stresses in concrete resulting from service loads.
combined axial load, moment, and shear. Refer to moment
frame. CONCRETE, REINFORCED is a concrete reinforced
with at least the minimum amounts of non-prcstressed or
COLUMN CAPITAL i.s an enlargement of the top of a preslressed reinforcement required by this Code.
concrete column located directly below the slab or drop
panel that is cast monolithically with the column. CONCRETE, SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT is a concrete
containing only normal weight fine aggregate that
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS is a construction- cunfonns tu ASTM C33M and lightweight coarse
related Code requirements directed to the contractor to be aggregate that conforms to ASTM C330M.
incorporated into construction documents by the licensed
design professional, as applicable. CONCRETE, STEEL FIBER-REINFORCED is a
concrete containing a prescribed amount of dispersed,
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS randomly oriented, discontinuous deformed steel fibers.
arc concrete flexural members of precast or cast-in-place
concrete elements, ronstructed in separate placements but CONCRETE STRENGTH, SPECIFIE.D
connected so that all elements respond to loads as a unit. COMPRESSIVE is a compressive strength of concrete
used in design and evaluated in accordance with
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED SECTrON is a provisions of this Code, MPa. Whenever the quantity /~
cross section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme is under a radical sign, square root of numerical value
tension reinforcement at nominal strength is less than or only is intended, and result has units of MPa.
equal to the compression-controlled strain limit.
CONCRETE BREAKOUT STRENGTH is a strength
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED STRAIN LIMIT is corresponding tu a volume of concrete surrounding the
a net tensile strain at balanced strain conditions. anchor or group of anchors separating from the member.
CONCRETE are mixture of portland cement or any other CONCRETE PRYOUT STRENGTH is a strength
hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and corresponding to formation of a concrete spall behind
water, with or without admixtures. short, stiff anchors displaced in the direction opposite to
the applied shear force.
CONCRETE, ALL-LIGHTWEIGHT is a lightweight
concrete containing only lightweight coarse and fine CONNECTION is a region of a structure that joins two
aggregates that conform to ASTM C330. or more members; a connection also refers to a region that
joins members of which one or more is precast.
CONCRETE, LIGHTWEIGHT is a concrete
containing lightweight aggregate and an equivalent CONNECTION, DUCTILE is a connection that
density, as determined by ASTM C567, between 1440 experiences yielding as a result of the earthquake design
and 1840 kg/m 3 • displacements.
/\ssociation of Structu,a: E.ngineers of tne Philippines, Inc. (ASF.P)

CONNECTION, STRONG is a connection hetween DISTANCE SLEEVE is a sleeve that encases the center
one or more precast clements tha! remains elastic while part or an undercut anchor, a tor4ue-controllcd expansion
adjoining members expericm;c yielding as a result of the anchor, or a displacement-controlled expansion anchor,
ea11hquakc design displacements. but does l\OI expand.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS is a written and graphic DROP PANEL is a projection helow the slab used to
documents and specifications prepared or assembled for reduce the amount of negative reinforcement over a
describing the location, design, materials, and physical column or the minimum required slab thickness, and to
characteristics of the clements of a project necessary for increase the slah shear strength.
obtaining a building permit and construction of the
project. DUCT is a conduit, plain or corrugated, to accommodate
prcstrcssing reinforcement for post-tensioning
CONTRACTION JOINT is a formed, sawed, or tooled applications.
groove in a concrete stn1cLurc lo create a weakened plane
and regulate the location of cracking rc!;ulting from the DURABILITY is an abilily of a structure or member to
dimensional change of different parts of the structure. resist deterioration that impairs performance or limits
service life of the structure in the relevant environment
COVER, SPECIFIED CONCRETF, is a distance considered in design.
between the outermost surface of embedded
reinforcement and the closest outer surface of the EDGE DISTANCE is a distance from the edge of the
concrete. concrete surface to the center of the nearest am:hor.
CROSSTI E is a continuous reinforcing bar having a 1£FFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION is a distance

seismic hook at one end and a hook not less than 90- measured from extreme compression fiher to centroid of
dcgrec hooks with at least six-diameter extension at the tension reinforcement.
other end. The hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal
bars. The 90-degree hooks of two successive crossties EFFECTIVE l:l\1BF.DMENT D[PTH is an overall
engaging the same longitudinal bars shall be alternated depth through which the anchor transfers force to or from
end for end. the surrounding concrete; effective emhedment depth will
normally he the deplh or the concrete failure surface in
J>-REGION is a po11ion of a memher within a distance, tension applications; for cast-in headed anchor bolts and
h, from a force discontinuity or a geometric discontinuity headed studs, the effective cmhedment depth is measured
from the bearing; contact surface of the head.
DESIGN DISPLACEMEI\"T is a total calculated lateral
displacement expected for the design-basis earthquake. EFFECTIVE PRESTRl!:SS is a stress remaining in
prestressing reinforcement after all losses in Section
DESIGN INFORMATION is project-specific 420.3.2.6 have occurred.
information lo he incorporated into construction
documents hy the licensed design professional, as EMBEDMENTS is an items embedded in concrete,
applicable. excluding reinforcement as defined in Section 420 and
anchors as defined in Section 417. Reinlurccmcnt or
DESlGN LOAD COMBINATION is a combination of anchors welded, bolted or otherwise connected to the
factored loads and forces. embedded item to develop the strength of the assembly are
considered to be part of the embedmcnt.
DESIGN STOREY DRIFT RATIO is a relative
difference of design displacement in bclwcen the top and EMBEDMENTS, Pl PE is an embedded pipes, conduits,
bottom of a storey, divided by the story height. and sleeves.
DEVELOPM~NT LENGTH is a length of embedded F,MBEDMENT LENGTH is a length of embedded

reinforcement, including prestressing strand, required to reinforcement provided beyond a critical section.
develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical
section. ~QUILIBRIUM DENSITY is a density of lightweight
concrete determined in accordance with ASTMC 567
DISCONTINUITY is an abrupt change in geometl'y or after exposure to a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 percent and
loading. a temperature of 23 ± 2.00 °C for a period of time
sufficient to reach constant density.
EXPANSION SLEEVE is an outer part of an expansion JACKING FORCE In prestressed concrete, temporary
a~hor that is forced outward by the center part, either by force exerted by device that introduces tension into
applied torque or impact, to bear against the sides of the prestressing reinforcement.
prcdrilled hole. Refer to anchor, expansion.
JOINT is a po11ion of structure common to intersecting
EXTREME TENSION REINFORCEMENT is a layer members.
of prestressed or non-prestressed reinforcement that is the
farthest from the extreme compression fiber. LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL is an
individual who is licensed to practice structural design as
FINrTE ELEMENT ANALYSIS is a numerical defined by the statutory requirements of the Professional
modeling technique in which a structure is divided into a Regulation Commission (PRC) or jurisdiction in which
number of discrete elements for analysis. the project is to be constructed and who is in responsible
charge of the structural design.
FIVE PERCENT FRACTILE is a statistical term
meaning 90 percent confidence that there is 95 percent LOAD are forces or other actions that result from the
probability of the actual strength exceeding the nominal weight of all building materials, occupants, and their
strength. possessions, environmental effects, differential movement,
and restrained dimensional changes; permanent loads are
HEADED DEFORMED BARS is a deformed those loads in which variations over time are rare or of
reinforcing bars with heads attached at one or both ends. small magnitude; all other loads are variable loads.
HEADED SHEAR STUD REINFORCEMENT is a LOAD, DEAD is the weight of the members, supported
reinforcement consisting of individual headed studs or structure, and pennanent attachments or accessories that
groups of studs, with anchorage provided by a head at are likely to be present on a structure in set'Vice; or loads
each end, or by a head at one end and a common base rail meeting specific criteria found in the general building
consisting of a steel plate or shape at the other end. code; without load factors.
HOOP is a closed tie or continuously wound tie. A closed LOAD, FACTORED is a load, multiplied by appropriate
tie, made up of one or several reinforcement elements, load factors.
each having seismic hooks at both ends. A closed tie shall
not be made up of interlocking headed defonned bars. LOAD, LIVE is a load that is not permanently applied to
Section 425.7.4. a structure, but is likely to occur during the service life of
the structure (excluding environmental loads); or loads
INSPECTION is an observation, verification, and meeting specific criteria found in the general building
required documentation of the materials, installation, code; without load factors.
fabrication, erection or placement of components and
connections to determine compliance with construction LOAD, ROOF LIVE is a load on a roof produced during
documents and referenced standards. maintenance by workers, equipment, and materials, and
during the life of the structure by movable objects, such as
INSPECTION, CONTINUOUS is the full time planters or other similar small decorative appurtenances
observation, verification, and required documentation of that are not occupancy related; or loads meeting specific
work in the area where the work is being performed. criteria found in the general building code; without load
factors.
INSPECTION, PERIODIC is the part-time or
intermittent observation, verification, and required LOAD, SERVICE are all loads, static or transitory,
documentation of work in the area where the work is imposed on a structure or element thereof, during the
being perfonned. operation of a facility, without load factors.
ISOLATION JOINT is a separation between adjoining LOAD PATH are sequence of members and connections
parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane, at a designed to transfer the factored loads and forces in such
designed location such as to interfere least with combinations as are stipulated in this Code, from the point
performance of the structure, yet such as to allow relative of application or origination through the structure to the
movement in three directions and avoid formation of final support location or the foundation.
cracks elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or
part of the bonded reinforcement is interrupted. MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS (MPII) published instructions for the
Association of Strucluml Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

correct installation of the and1or tmder all covered POST-TENSIONING is a method of prestrcssing in
installalion wnditions as supplied in the product which prcstrcssing reinforcement is lcnsionc<l after
·•' packaging. concrete has hardened.
MOJ>UI.US OF ~LASTICITY is a ratio of normal PRECOMPRr..SSF:D TENSILE ZOI\~ is a portion ofa

stress to corresponding strain for tensile or compressive prestressed member where flexural tension, calculaled
stresses below proportional limit of material. using gross section properlics, would occur under service
loads if the pn.:strcss force was not present.
MOMENT FRAME is a frame in which beams, slabs,
columns, and joints rcsi~t forces predominantly shear, and PRETENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which
axial force; 13cams or slabs are predominantly horizontal prcstrcssing reinforcement is tensioned before concrete is
or nearly horizontal; Columns arc predominantly vertical cast.
or nearly vertical.
PROJECTED AR~A is an area on the free surface ufthe
MOMENT l'IUME, ORDINARY is a cast-in-place or concrete member that is used to represent the larger base
prccast concrete beam-column or slab-column frame of the assumed n.:ctilincar failure surface.
complying with Section 418.3.
PROJECTED l1'1FLUENCI<: ARF,A is a rectilinear area
MOMl'.:NT FRAME, INTERMIWIATF. is a cast-in- on the free surfaceor the concrete member that is used to
place frame or two-way slab-column frame beams calculate the bond strength of adhesive anchors.
complying with Section 418.4.
REINFORCE'\'IK~T is a steel element or elements
MOMENT FRAMF., SPECIAL is a cast-in-place embedded in concrete and conforming to Section!> 420.2
beam-column frame complying with Sections 418.2.3 through 420.5. Prestressed reinforcement in exlernal
through 418.2.8.: and, Sections 418.6 through 418.8. A tendons is also considered rcinforccmcnl.
precast beam-column frame complying with Sections
418.2.3 through 418.2.8 and 418.9. REINFORCEMENT, DEFORMED is a deformed hars,
welded bar mats, deformed wire, and welded wire
NET TEI\Sll,F, STRAIN is a tensile strain al nominal reinforcement conforming to Sections 420.2.1.3,
strength exclusive uf strains due to effective prcstress, 420.2.1.5, or 420.2.1.7, excluding plain wire.
creep, shrinkage and temperature.
REJNFORCEMEI\T, JlLAIN are bars or wires
NODAL ZONE is a volume of concrete around a node conforming to Section 420.2.1.4 or 420.2.1.7 that tlo
that is assumed to transfer strut-and-tie forces through the not conform to definition of deformed reinforcement.
node.
REINFORCEMENT, PIU:STIU:SSF.D is a prestressing
NODE is a point in a stnn-and-tic model where the axes reinforcement that has been tensioned lo impart forces to
or the struts, ties, anti concentrated forces acting on the concn.:tc.
joint intersect.
REINFORCEMENT, HONDU) PRl!:STR~SSED is a
ON ~-WAY CONSTRUCTION is members designed to pretensioned reinforcement or pn.:strcsscd reinforcement
be capable of supporting all loads through bending in a in a bonded tendon.
single direction; re!er lo two-way construction.
REINFORCEMl!:NT, PR~STRESSING is a high-
PEl>~STAL is a member with a ratio of height-to-least strength reinforcement such as strand, wire, or bar
lateral dimension less than or equal to three used conforming to Section 420.3.1.
primarily to support axial compressive load; for a tapered
member, the least lateral dimension is the average or the REJNFORCEMF.NT, WRLDF.D WIRE is a plain or
lop and bottom dimensions of the smaller side. deformed wire fabricated into sheets or rolls conforming
to Section 420.2.1.7.
PLASTIC HINGE REGION is a length of frame
element over which flexural yielding is intended to occur REINFORCEMF:NT, WELD~D DEFORMED
due to earthquake design displacements, extending not STF:EL BAR MAT . is a mat conforming to Section
less than a distance h from the critical ~cction where 420.2.1.5 consisting of two layers of deformed bars at
flexural yielding initiates. right angles to each other welded at the intersections.
-1-26 CHJV'TER 4 - S,ructur;.~I Concr::;te
REINFORCEMENT, ANCHOR is an reinforcement SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH is a tensile

used tar transfer the full design load from the anchors into strength of concrete determined in accordance with
the structurnl member. ASTM C496M as described in "Specification.~ fo r
lightweight Aggregate for Structural Concrete" (ASTM
REJNFORCEMENT, SUPPLEMENTARY is a C330).
reinforcement that acts to restrain the potential concrete
breakout but is not designed to transfer the full design STEEL ELEMENT, BRITTLE is an element with a
load from the anchors into the structural member. tensile test elongation of less than 14 percent, or reduction
in area of less than 30 percent at failure.
SEISMIC D.ESIGN CATEGORY is a classification
assigned to a structure based on its occupancy category STEEL ELEMENT, DUCTILE is an element with a
and the severity of the design earthquake ground motion tensile test elongation of at least 14 percent and reduction
at the site, as defi ned in Section 402 of this Code. in area of at least 30 percent; Steel element meeting the
requircmentS of ASTM A307 shall be considered ductile;
SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is a portion except as modified by for earthquake effects, deformed
of the structure designed to resist earthquake eftects reinforcing bars meeting the requirements of ASTM
required by the legally adopted general building code A6 I5M, A706M, or A955M shall be considered as ductile
using the applicable provisions and load combinations. steel elements.
SEl~MIC HOOK is a hook on a stirrup, or crosstie STIRRUP is an reinforcement used to resist shear and
having a bend not less than 135 degrees, except that torsion stresses in a structural member; typically
circular hoops shall have a bend not less than 90 degrees; deformed bars, deformed wires, or welded wire
hooks shall have a 6db, hut not less than 75 mm. The reinforcement either single leg or hent into L, U or
hooks shall engage the longitudinal reinforcement and lhe rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at an
extension shall project into the interior of the stirrup or angle to longitudinal reinforcement. Rcfor to "tie."
hoop.
STRENGTH, DESIGN is a nominal strength multiplied
SHEAR CA P is a projection below the slab used to by a strength reduction factor, ef,.
increase the slab shear strength.
STRENGTH, NOMINAL is strenb'1.h of a member or
SHEATHING is a material encasing prestrcssing cross section calculated in accordance with provisions and
reinforcement to prevent bonding of the p restressing assumptions of the strength design method of this chapter
reinforcement with the surrounding concrete, to provide before application of any s!rength reduction factors.
corrosion protection, and to contain the corrosion
inhibiting coating. STRENGTH, REQUJ RED is strength of a member or
cross section required to resist factored loads or related
SPACING is a center-to-center distance between adjacent internal moments and forces in such combinations as are
items, such as longitudinal reinforcement, transverse stipulated in this chapter.
reinforcement, prestressing reinforcement, or anchors.
STRESS is the intensity of force per unit area.
SPACING, CLEAR is a least dimension between the
outermost surfaces of adjacent items. STRESS LENGTH is a length of anchor, extending
beyond concrete in which it is anchored, subject to full
SPAN LENGTH is a distance between supports. tensile load applied to anchor, and for which cross-
scctional area is minimum and constant.
SPECIAL SEISMIC SYSTEMS is a structural systems
that use special moment frames, special structural walls, STRUC TURAL CONCRETE is a concrete used for
or both. structural purposes, including plain and reinforced
concrete.
SPECIAL TY lNSERT is a prcdesigned and
prefabricated cast-in anchors specifically designed for STRUC TURAL DIAPHRAGM is a member, such as a
attachment of bolted or slotled connections. floor or roof slab, that transmits forces acting in the plane
of the member to the vertical clements of the seismic-
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is a continuously wound force-resisting system. A structural diaphragm may
reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix. include chords and collectors as part of the diaphragm.
Associ.:ition of Structural Engine(HS of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY is an ability of a struclurc TENDON, EXTF.RNAL is a tendon external to the
through strength, redundam;y, ductility, and detailing of member concrelc cross section 111 post-tensioned
reinforcement to redistribute stresses and maintain overall applications .
stability if localized damage or s igni lk,mt overstress
occurs. TENDON, U:'IBONOED is a tendon in which prcstresscct
reinforcement is prevented from bonding lo the concrete.
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM inten.:onnccted members The prcstressing for(.;e is pem1anently tra nsferred to Lhe
designed to meet performance req uirements. concrete at the lcndon ends by the andmrages only.
STRUCTURAL TRUSS is an assemblage or reinforced TENSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross

concrete members subjected primarily to axial forces. section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme
tensi on steel at nominal stre ngth is grealer than or equal to
STRUCTURAL WALL is a wall proportioned to resisl 0.005.
combinations of shears, moments, and ax ial forces in the
plane of the wall; a shear wall is a structural wall. TIE is a loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing
longitudinal reinforcement; a continuously wound bar or
STRUCTURAL WALL, ORDI NA RY REI N FORCED wire in the form of a circle, rectangle, or otJ,cr polygon
CO'.'!CRETE is a wall complying with the requirements shape wilhout re-entrant comers is acccptahle; refer to
of Sections 4 11. stirrup or hoop; or a tension member in a slrut-and-tie
model.
STRUCT URAL W ALL, OROINARY rLAIN
CONCRF,TE is a wall complying with the TRANSFER is an act of transferring stress in
requirements of Section 4 14. prestrcssing reinforcement from jacks or pretensioning
bed to con1.:rcte member.
STRUCTURAL WALL, INTERMF..DIATE
PRECAST is a wall complying with Section 4 18.5. TRANSFER LF.NGTH is a length of embedded
pretensioned reinforcement requi red to transfer the
STRUCTURAL WALL, SPECIAL is a cast-in-p)a(.;c effective prestrcss to the concrete.
structural wall in accordance with Sections 4 18.2 .3
through 41 8.2.8 and 418. l O; or precast structural wall TWO~WAY CONSTRUCTION are members designed
accordance with Sections 4 18.2.3 through 4 18.2.8 and to be capable of supporting loads through bending in two
418.11. directions; Some slabs and foundations are considered
two-way con:-;truction. Refer to one-way cons tnwtion.
STRUT is a compression member in a slrut-and-tie model
representi ng the resultant of a parallel or a fan-shaped WALL is a vertical element designed to resist axfal load,
(.;OJnpression lidd. lateral load, or both, w ith a horizontal length-to-thickness
ratio greater than three, used to enclose or separate spa1.:es.
STRUT, BOTTLF.-SHAPED is a struL that is wider at
mid-length than at its ends. WALL SEGME~T is a portion of wall bounded by
ve11ical or horizontal openings or edges.
STRUT-AND-TIE MODRL is a trnss model of a
structural member or of a D-rcgi on in su1.:h a member, WALL SEGMENT, HORIZONTAL is a segment of
a structural wall, hounded vc,tically by two openings or
made up of struts and ties connedcd at nodes, capable of
by an opening and an edge.
transferring the factored loads to the supports or to
adjacent B-regions.
WALL SEGMENT, V~RTICAL is a segment of a
srructural wall, bounded horizonwlly by two openings or
TENDON In post-tensioned members, a tendon is a
by an opening and an edge; Wall piers an: vertical wall
complete assembly consisting of anchorages, prestrcssing
segrnems.
reinforcement, and sheathing with coating for unbounded
applications or duc ts fil led with grout for bonded
WALL PU:R is a vertical wall segments with dimensions
applications.
and reinforcement inlend<:d to result in shear demand
heing limited by flexural yielding of the vcrti(.;11]
TENDON, BONDED is a tendon in which p restressed
reinforcement in the pier.
reinfom.:ment is continuously bonded to the con(.;rcte
through grouting of ducts embedded within Lhc concrete
cross section.
4-28 CHJl..PTER 4 - Struclurnl Concrete
WATER-Cli:Mli:NTITIOUS MATERIALS RATIO is a SECTION 403

ratio of mass of water, excluding that absorbed by the
aggregate, 10 the mass of cemenLitious materials in a REFERENCED STANDARDS
mixture, stated as a decimnl.
403.1 Scope
WORK is the entire construction or separately
identifiable parts thereof that are required to be furni shed 403.1 Standards, or specific sections thereof, cited in
under the construction documents. this Code, including J\nnex, Appendices, or Supplements
where prescribed. are referenced without exception in this
YU:LD STRENGTH is a specified mmtmum yield Code, unless specifically noted. Cited standards arc listed
strength or yield point of reinforcement; yield strength or in the following with their serial designations, including
yield point shall be determined in tension according to year of adoption or revision.
applicable ASTM standards as modified by this section.
403.2 Refer·enced Standards
403.2.l American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
Article Desi m1tion Title

Article 5.10. 9.6 AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Article 5.10.9.7.2 Design Specifications,
Article 5.10.9.7.3 6th Edition, 2012
AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Article 10.3.2.3 Construction Specifications,
3rd Edition, 20 lO
403.2.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Standard/ Section
Title
Desi nation
Section 4.2.3 of
Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 301-JO
Building Code Requirements for
ACI 318.2-14
· Concrete Thin Shells
Residential Code Requirements for
ACI 332-14
Structural Concrete and Commenta
Qualification of Post-Installed
ACI 355.2-07 Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and
Com men tar
Qualification of Post-
ACI 355.4- I I lnstalled Adhesive Anchors in
Concrete
Acceptance Criteria for Moment
ACl374.l-05
Frames Based on Structural Test in
Specification for Un bonded Singlc-
ACI 423.7-07
Strand Tendon Materials
Acceptance Criteria for Special
Unbondi.!d Post-Tensioned Precast
ACI ITG-5 .1-07
Structural Walls Based on Validation
Test in
Associa tion of Structural Engineen: of the Philippines, Jnc. (ASEP)

CHf,PTEFl 4 ··· ::.;t,u,;tul'-31Cor.cr<,i te 4-29
403.2.3 American Society of Civi l Eng ineers Standard

Title
(ASCF.)/Structural Engineering Institute (SEI) Dcsi2nation
,' Standard Specifi cation for
Section High- Strength Low-Alloy
Title
Desilrnation Structural Steel, up to 345 MPa
A588/A588M-IO
Section 2.'.3.3. Minimum Yield Point, with
Load Combinations Atmospheric Corrosion
including Flood Loads ASCE/SEI 7-1 0 Minimum Resistance
Section 2.3.4, Design Loads for Bui !dings Standard Specifaation for
Load Combinations and Other Structures Deformed and Plain Carbon-
A615/A615M-12
excluding Atmospheric Steel Bars for Concrete
(ce Loads Reinforcement
Steel Deformed and Plain
403.2.4 ASTM International A 706/A 706M-09b Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
St:mdard Standard Specification for
Title
Desls:nation A722/A722M-1 2 Uncoated High-Strength Steel
Standard Specification for Bars for J>restressing Concrete
A36/A36M-12
Carbon Structural Steel Standard Specification for Zinc-
Standard Specification for Pipe, A767/A767M-09 Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, for Concrete Reinforcement
A53/A53M- 12
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Standard Specification for
Seamless A775/A775M-07b Epoxy-Coated Steel
Standard Specification for Reinforcing Bars
A 184/A I 84M-06 Welded Deformed Steel Bar · Standard Specification for Steel
(201 1) Mats for Concrete A820/A820M-l 1 Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced
Reinforcement Concrete
Standard Specification [or High- Standard Specification for
A242/A242M-04
Strength Low-Alloy Structural A884/A884M-12 Epoxy- Coated Steel Wire and
(2009)
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and A934/A934M-07 Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated
A307-1 2
Threaded Rod, 420 MPa Tensile Steel Reii1fo1•cing Bars
Strength Standard Specification for
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-
A955/A955M-12CI
A416/A416M-12a Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven- Steel Bars for Concrete
Wire for Prestressed Concrete Reinforcement
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Headed Steel Bars for
Wire for Prcstressed Concrete Concrete Reinforcement
A42 1/A42 LM-IO A970/A970M-1 2
including Supplementary including Annex A I
Requirement I, Requirements or Class HA
Low- Relaxation Wire Headed Dimensions
A992/A992M-I I
Cold- formed Welded and Structural Steel Shapes
A500/ A500M-1 Oa Seamless Carbon Steel Standard Specification for Rail-
Stroctural Tubing in Rounds Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed
A996/A996M-09b
and Shapes Bars for Concrete
Standard Specification for Hot- Reinforcement
ASOI-07 Formed· Welded and Seamless Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing Deformed and Plain Stainless
Al 022/A I022M-07 Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Standard Specification for
High- Strength Low-Alloy for Concrete Reinforcement
A572/A572M-l 2a Columbium- Vanadium
Structural Steel
11
NBtiOM! Structur~I Col1e of tt1e Philippines Vo!ume I. i Edition.2015
4<:!0 CHI\PTE!~ ti - Structurr-il Concrc\e
Standard Standard
Title Title
Ocsii:nation Desienation
Deformed and Plain, Low- C330/C330M-09 Lightweight Aggregates for
AI035/A 1035M-l l Carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars Structural Concrete
for Concrete Reinforcement Sl.Sndard Test Method for
Standard Specification for Steel C496/C496M-1 l Splitting Tensile Strength of
Al044/A l044M-05
Stud Assemblies for Shear Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
(2010)
Reinforcement of Concrete Standard Test Method or
Standard Speci fication for Zinc C567/C567M-l l Determining Density of
Al055/A JOSSM-1 0 c1 and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Structural Lightwe ight Concrete
Reinforcing Bars Standard Specification for
C595/C595M- 12<1
Standard Specification for Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) Steel - Blended Hydraulic Cements
Standard Specification for Coal
A1060/A J060M-11 el Welded Wire Reinforcement, Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Plain and Deformed, for C618-12a
Natural Pozzolan for Use in
Concrete Concrete
Carhon- Steel Wire and Welded Concrete Made by Volumetric
A1064/Al064M- 12 C685/C685M- I l
Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Batching and Continuous
Deformed, for Concrete Mixing
Standard Test Method for Standard Specification for
Bulk Densily("Unit Weight") C845/C845M- l 2
C29/C29M-09 Expnnsive Hydraulic Cement
and Voids in Aggregate Standard Specification for Slag
Standard Practice for C989/C989M- l 2a Cement for Use in Concrete and
C3 l/C3 1M-12 Making and Curing Concrete Mortars
Test Specimens in the Field Standard Test Method for
Standard Specification for Length Change of Hydraulic-
C33/C33M- 13 Cl012/CI 012M-13
Concrete A!!:eregates Cement Mortars Exposed to a
Standard Test Method for Sulfate Solution
C39/C39M-12a Compressive Strength of Standard Specification for
Cylindrical Concrete Soecimens C1017/C\Ol 7M-07 Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Standard Test Method for Producing Flowing Concrete
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Standard Practice for
C42/C42M-13
Cores and Sawed Beams of Laboratories Testing Concrete
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Cl077-13
Standard Specification for Use in Construction and
C94/C94M- I 2a
Ready- Mixed Concrete Criteria for Laboratory
Standard Specification for Evaluation
Cl44-ll
Ai:tl?regate for Masonry Mortar Standard Spccificntion for Fiber-
Ct 116/Cl t6M-l0a
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete
Cl50/Cl50M-12
Portland Cement Standard Performance
Standard Practice for Sampling Cl 157/CI 157M-J 1 Specification for Hydraulic
Cl72/Cl 72M-l0
Freshly Mixed Concrete Cement
Standard Test Method for Air Standard Test Method for
CJ218/1218M-
Content of Freshly Mixed Water-Soluble Chloride in
Cl 73/ 173M-12 99(2008)
Concrete by the Volumetric Mortar and Concrete
Method Standard Specification for Silica
Standard Test Method for Air CI240-12 Fume Used in Cementitious
Content of Freshly Mixed Mixtures
C231/C23 1M-10 Concrete hy the Pressure Standard Test for
Cl 580-09c1
Method Water-Soluble Sulfate in Soil
Admixtures to Inhibit Ch loride-
C260/C260M-l0a Air-Entraining Admixtures Cl 582/Cl582M- l l
Induced Corrosion of
For Concrete
Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
As~;ociation of Structurn! Engineers of the Philippines, lr.c. (/\SEP)

CH APTi:'R 4 ·•· S tructur:al Concrete, 4-31
Standard SECTION 404

Title
Designation
Standard Specification for STRUCTURAL SYSTEM
C l602/C 1602M-12
Mixing Water Used in the REQUIREMENTS
Production of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete 404.1 Scope
Standard Test Method for I
Flexural Performance of Fibcr- 404.1.1 This section shall apply to design of structurnl
C 1609/Cl 609M-12 Reinforced Concrete (Using concrete in structures or portions of structures defined in
Beatn W ith Third- Point Section 401.
Loading)
Standard Test Method for 404.2 Materials
0516-11
Sulfate Ion in Water
Standard Test Method for 404.2.1 Design properties of concrete shall be selected
04130-08 Sulfate Ion in Brackish Water, to be in 1:1ccordance with Section 419.
Seawater, and Brines
404.2.2 Design properties or
rcinforcemenl shall be
403.2.5 American Welding Society (A WS) selected to be in accordam:c with Section 420.
Standnrd 404.3 Design Loads

Title
Desi nation
A WS D l.4/D l.4M: Structurnl Welding Code 404.3.1 Loads and load combinations considered in
2011 Reinforcing Steel design shall be in accordance wilh Section 405.
AWS 01.l/Dl.lM: Structural Welding Code
2010 Steel 404.4 Structural System and Load Paths
403.2.6 Australian Standard (AS) and New Zealand 404.4.1 The structural system shall include (a) through
Standard (NZS) (g), as applicable:
Stand:ird a. Floor construction and roor construction, including

Title
Desi nation one-way and two-way slabs;
Steel Reinforcing
AS/NZS 4671: 2001
Material b. Beams and joists;
NZS 310 1: 2006 Concrete Structures Standard
Part I & Part 2 Design of Concrete Structures c. Column;
NZS 3 109 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
Amendment 2 d. Wall;
Struct ural Steel Wclding-
AS/NZS 1554.3: 2008
Welding of Reinforcing Steel e. Diaphragn1s;
Part 3
r. Foundations;
g. Joints, connections, and anchors as required to

transmit forces from one component to another.
404.4.2 Design of structural meinbers including joints

and connections given in Section 404.4.1 shall be in
accordance with Sections 407 through 418.
404.4.3 It shall be permitted to design a structural

system comprising structural members not in acco rdance
with Sections 404.4.1 and 404.4.2, provided the structural
system is approved in accordance with Section 401 . IO. I.
N2tiorm1 i~tructural Cod~, ,,'r ttw Ph:lipplnt% VoilJ1ne I, i'' Edilkv1, 2.01ti
.l1
404.4.4 The structural system shall be designed to resist 404.4.7.4 Diaphragms shall be designed to resist
the factored loads in load combinations given in Section applicable lateral loads from soil and hydrostatic pressure
4oel.3 without exceeding the appropriate member design and other loads assigned to the diaphragm by structural
strengths, considering one or more continuous load paths analysis.
from the point of load application or origination to the
final point of resistance. 404.4.7.5 Collectors shall be provided where required to
transmit forces between diaphragms and vertical
404.4.S Structural systems shall be designed to elements.
accommodate anticipated volume change and differential
settlement. 404.4.7.6 Diaphragms that are part of the seismic-force-
resisting system shall be designed for the applied forces.
404.4.6 Seismic-Force-Resisting System In structures assigned to seismic :lone 4, the diaphragm
design shall be in accordance with Section 418.
404.4.6.l Every structure shall be assigned to a seismic
zones 4, or 2, in accordance with the general building 404.5 Structural Analysis
code or as determined by the authority having jurisdiction
in areas without a legally adopted building code. 404.5.1 Analytical procedures shall satisfy
compatibility of deformations and equilibrium of forces.
404.4.6.2 Structural systems designated as part of the
seismic-force-resisting system shall be restricted to those 404.5.2 The methods of analyses given in Section 406
systems designated by the general building code or as shall be permitted.
detennincd by the authority having jurisdiction in areas
without a legally adopted building code. 404.6 Strength
404.4.6.3 Structural systems assigned to seismic zone 2 404.6.1 Design strength of a member and its joints and
shall satisfy the applicable requirements of this Code. connections, in terms of moment, axial force, shear,
Structures assigned to seismic zone 2 are not required to torsion, and bearing, shall be taken as the nominal
be designed in accordance with Section 418. strength Sn, multiplied by the applicable strength
reduction factor q,.
404.4.6.4 Structural systems assigned to seismic zone 4
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 418 in addition to 404.6.2 Structures and structural members shall have
applicable requirements of other sections of this Code. design strength at all sections, c/>Sn, greater than or equal
to the required strength U calculated for the factored
404.4.6.5 In structures assigned to seismic zone 4, loads and forces in sucn combinations as required by this
structural members assumed not to be part of the seismic- Section or the general building code.
force-resisting system shall be permitted, provided their
effect on the response of the system is considered and 404.7 Serviceability
accommodated in the structural design. Consequences of
damage to structural and nonstructural members that are 404.7.1 Evaluation of perfonnance at service load
not a part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be conditions shall consider reactions, moments, torsions,
considered. shears, and axial forces induced by prestressing, creep,
shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation,
404.4.7 Diaphragms restraint of attached structural members, and foundation
settlement.
404.4.7.1 Diaphragms, such as floor or roof slabs, shall
be designed to resist simultaneously both out-of-plane 404.7.2 For structures, structural members, and their
gravity loads and in-plane lateral forces in load connections, the requirements of Section 404. 7.1 shall be
combinations given in Section 404.3. deemed to be satisfied if designed in accordance with the
provisions of the applicable member sections.
404.4.7.2 Diaphragms and their connections to framing
members shall be designed to transfer forces between the 404.8 Durability
diaphragm and framing members.
404.8.1 Concrete mixhires shall be designed in
404.4.7.3 Diaphragms and their connections shall be accordance with the requirements of Sections 419.3.2 and
designed to provide lateral support to vertical, horizontal, 426.4, considering applicable environmental exposure to
and inclined elements. provide required durability.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc (ASEP)

CHAPTEf~ 4 -- S!ructur~il Cor.c,ete 4.33
404.8.2 Reinforcement shall be protected from 404.12 Requirements for Specific Types of
corrosion in accordance with Section 420.6. Construction
404.9 Sustainability 404.12.t Precast Concrete Systems
404.9.1 The licensed design professional shall be 404.12.1 Design of prccast concrete members and
permitted to specify in the construction documents connections shall include loading and restraint conditions
sustainability requirements in addition to strength, from initial fabrication to end use in the structure,
serviceability, and durability requirements of this Code. including form removal, storage, transportation, and
erection.
404.9.2 The strength, serviceability, and durability
requirements of this Code shall take precedence over 404.12.1.2 Design, fabrication, and construction of
sustainability considerations. precast members and their connections shall include the
effects of tolerances.
404.10 Structural Integrity
404.12.1.3 When precast members are incorporated into
404.10.1 General a structural system, the forces and defonnations occurring
in and adjacent to connections shall be included in the
404.10.1.1 Reinforcement and connections shall be design.
detailed to tie the structure together effectively and lo
improve overall structural integrity. 404.12.1.4 Where system behavior requires in-plane
loads to be transferred between the members of a precast
404.10.2 Minimum Requirements for Structural floor or wall system, (a) and (b) shall be satisfied:
Integrity
a. In-plane load paths shall be continuous through hoth
404.10.2.1 Structural members and their connections shall connections and members.
be in accordance with structural integrity requirements in
Table 404. I0.2. l. b. Where tension loads occur, a load path of steel or
steel reinforcement, with or without splices, shall be
Table 404.10.2.1 provided.
Minimum Requirements for Structural Integrity
404.12.1.S Distribution of forces that act perpendicular
Member Type Section to the plane of precasl memhers shall be established by
Non-prestressed two-way slahs 408.7.4.2 analysis or test. ·
Prcstressed two-way slabs 408.7.5.6
Non-prestressed two-way joist systems 408.8.1.6 404.12.2 Prestressed Concrete Systems
Cast-in-place beams 409.7.7
Non-prcstrcssed one-way joist systems 409.8.1.6 404.12.2.1 Design of prestressed members and systems
Precasl joints and connections 416.2.1.8 shall be based on strength and on behavior at service
conditions at all critical stages during the life of the
404.11 Fire Resistance structure from the time preslress is first applied.
404.11.1 Structural concrete members shall satisfy the 404.12.2.2 Provisions shall be made for effects on
fire protection requirements of the general building code. adjoining construction of elastic and plastic defonnations,
deflections, changes in length, and rotations due to
404.11.2 Where the general building code requires a prestressing. Effects of temperature change, restraint of
thickness of concrete cover for fire protection greater than attached strnctural members, foundation settlement, creep,
the concrete cover specified in Section 420.6.1, such and shrinkage shall also he considered.
greater thickness shall govern.
404.12.2.3 Stress concentrations due to prestrcssing
shall be considered in design.
404.12.2.4 Effect of loss of area due to open ducts shall

he considered in computing section properties before
grout in post-tensioning ducts has attained design
strength.
National Structural Code of tM Philippines Volume I, 7'~ Edition, 2015

404.1 l .2.5 Post-tensioning tendons shall be permitted SECTION 405
to _.be external to any concrete section of a member.
Strength and serviceability design requirements of this LOADS
Code shall be used to evaluate the effects of external
tendon forces on the concrete stn1cturc. 405.1 Scope
404.J 2.3 Composite Concr ete Flexural Members 405.1.1 This Section shall apply to selection of load
factors and combjnations used in design, except as
404.12.3.I This Chapter shall apply lo composite permitted in Section 427.
concrete flexural members as defined in Section 402.
405.2 General
404.12.3.2 fndividual members shall be designed for all
critical stages of loading. 405.2.l Loads shall include self-weight; applied loads;
and effects of prestrcssing, earthquakes, restraint of
404.ll.3.3 Members shall be designed to support all volume change, and differential settlement.
loads introduced prior to full development of design
strength of composite members. 405.2.2 Loads and seismic zones shall be in
accordance with the general buil ding code, or determined
404.12.3.4 Reinforcement sha II be detailed to minimize by another authority having jurisdiction in areas without a
cracking and to prevent separation of individual legally adopted building code.
components of composite members.
405.2.3 Live load reductions shall be pcnnitted in
404.12.4 Composite Steel and Concrete accordance with the general building code or, in the
Construction absence of a general building code, in accordance with
ASCE/SEI 7.
404.12.4.1 Composite compression members shall
include all members reinforced longitudinally with 405.3 Load Factors and Combinations
structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or without
longitudinal bars. 405.3.1 Required strength, U, shall be at least equal to
the effects of factored loads in Table 405.3.1 , with
404.12.4.1 The design of composite compression exceptions and additions in Sections 405.3.3 through
memlx.-rs shall be in accordance with Section 41 0. 405.3.12.
404.12.5 Structural Plain Concrete Systems Tuble 405.3.i Load Combinations

Primary
404.12.5.1 The design of structural plain concrete Load Designation Equation
members, both cast-in-place and precast, shall be in Load
accordaocc with Section 414. U = l .4D (405.3la) D
U = J .2D + l.6L + 0.5 (Lr or R 405 .3 l b l
404.13 Construction and Inspection U = l.2D + 1.6 (Lr or R)
(405.31c) Lr or R
+ I .OL or 0.5W)
U = l.2D + l.OW + I.OL
404.13.l Specifications for construclion execution shall
+ 0.5 (Lr or R)
(405.3 l d) w
be in accordance with Section 426.
U = l.2D + I.OE+ I.OL (405.31 e E
404.13.2 Specifications for construction execution shall U = 0.9D + I.OW 405.31 w
be in accordance with Section 426. U = 0.9D + l.O E 405.31 E
404.14 Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures 405.3.2 The d lect of one or more loads not acting
simultaneously shall be investigated.
404.14.1 Strength evaluation of existing structures shall
be in accordance with Section 427. 405.3.3 The load factor on live load l in Eqs. 405.3. Jc,
405.3. ld, and 405.3.1 e shall be permitted to he reduced to
0.5 except for (a), (b), or (c):
a. Garages;
b. Areas occupied as places of public assemhly;
Association of Structural Engmesrs of the Philippines, Inc:. (ASEP)

CHJ~PTF.I~ t.1, -- Slructurnl Concreta 4-35
c. Areas where L is greater than 4.8 kPa. 405.3.8 If lateral earth pressure H is present, it shall be
included in the load combination equations of Section
405.3.4 If applicable, L shall include (a) through (f): 405.3.1 in accordance with (a), (b), or(e):
a. Concentrated live loads; a. If H acts alone or adds to the primary load, it shall be
included with a load factor of 1.6 in Eq. 405.3.1 a
b. Vehicular loads; through 405.3.1 c;
c. Crane loads; b. ff the effect of H is permanent and counteracts the

primary load, it shall be included with a load factor or
d. Loads on hand rails, guardrails, and vehicular 0.9 in Eq. 405.3.1 f and 405.3.lg;
barrier systems;
c. lfthe effect of H is not permanent but, when present,
e. Impact eftects; counteracts the primary load, H shall not be included
in Eq. 405.3. la through 405.3.lg.
f. Vibration effects.
405.3.9 If a structure is in a flood zone, the Hood loads
405.3.5 If wind load Wis based on service-level loads, and the appropriate load factors and combinations of
1.6W shall he used in place of 1.0W in Eqs. 405.3.ld ASCFJSEI 7 shall be used.
and 405.3.1 f, and 0. SW shall be used in place of 0. SW
in Eq. 405.3. lc. 405.3.10 Required strength U shall include internal load
effects due to rca.ctions induced by prestressing with a
405.3.6 The structural effects of forces due to restraint load factor of 1.0.
of volume change and differential settlement, T, shall be
considered in combination with other loads if the effe'cts 405.3.11 For post.tensioned anchorage zone design, a
of T can adversely affect structural safety or performance. load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the maximum
The load factor for T shall he established considering the prcstressing reinforcement jacking force.
uncertainty associated with the likely magnitude of T, the
probability that the maximum effect of T will occur
simultaneously with other applied loads, and the potential
adverse consequences if the effect of T is greater than
assumed. The load factor on T shall not have a value less
than 1.0.
405.3.7 If fluid load F is present, it shall be included in

the load combination equations of Section 405.3.1 in
accordance with (a), (b), (c) or (d):
a. If F acts alone or adds to the effects of D, it shall be

included with a load factor of 1.4 in Eq. 405.3. Ia;
b. If F adds to the primary load, it shall be included

with a load factor of 1.2 in Eq. 405.3.lb through
405.3.lc;
c. If F adds to the primary load, it shall be incl.uded

with a load factor of 1.2 in Eq. 405.3.1 b through
405.3.le;
d. If the eflcct of F is permanent and counteracts the

primary load, it shall be included with a load factor of
0.9 in Eq. 405.3. I g.
e. If the effect of F is not permanent but, when present,

counteracts the primary load, F shall not be included
in Eq. 405.3. la through 405.3. lg.
National Structural C0de of Hie Phllippines Voiume i . 7'h Edition. 20·1 t;

4-36 CHAPTER ,1 - Structural Coricrt1te
406.2.4.4 A member or region shall be pennitted to be

SECTION 406 analyzed and designed using the strut-and-tie method in
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS accordance with Section 423.
406.1 Scope 406.2.5 Slenderness effects shall be permitted tu be

neglected if (a) or (b) is satisfied:
406.1.l This seclion shall apply to methods of
a. For columns not braced against sidesway
analysis, modeling of members and structural systems,
and calculation of load effects.
kf
_u:;:; 22 (406.2.Sa)
406.2 General r
b. For columns braced against sidesway

406.2.1 Members and structural systems shall be
permitted to be modeled in accordance with Section
kt
406.3. _u ~ 34 + 12M.JM2 (406.2.5b)
T
406.2.2 All members and structural systems shall be

analyzed for the maximum effects of loads including the and
arrangements of live load in accordance with Section
406.4.
kt
_u::;; 40 (406.2.5c)
r
406.2.3 Methods of analysis permitted by this Section
shall be (a) through (e): where M 1 / M 2 is negative if the column is bent in single
curvature, and positive for double curvature.
a. The simplified method for analysis of continuous
beams and one-way slabs for gravity loads in Section If bracing elements resisting lateral movement of a storey
406.5; have a total stiffness of at least 12 times the gross lateral
stiffness of the columns in the direction considered, it
b. First-order in Section 406.6; shall be permitted to consider columns within the storey
to be braced against sidesway.
c. Elastic second·order in Section 406. 7 ( d) inelastic
seeond·orders in Section 406.8 (e) Finite clement in 406.2.5.1 The radius of gyration, r, shall be permitted to
Section 406.9; be calculated by (a),(b),or (c):
d.
e.
Inelastic second-order in Section 406.8;
Finite element in Section 406.9.

a. r = fr, (406.2.5.1)
406.2.4 Additional analysis methods that are permitted b. 0.30 times the dimension in the direction stability
include Sections 406.2.4.l through 406.2.4.4. is being considered for rectangular columns;
406.2.4.1 Two-way slabs shall be permitted to be

analyzed for gravity loads in accordance with (a) or (b): c. 0.25 times the diameter of circular columns.
a. Direct design method in Section 408.10;

406.2.5.2 For composite columns, the radius of gyration,
b. Equivalent frame method in Section 408.l I. r, shall not be taken greater than: ·
406.2.4.2 Slender walls shall be permitted to be analyzed

in accordance with Section 411.8 for out-of-plane effects. (406.2.5.2)
406.2.4.3 Diaphragms shall be permitted to be

analyzed in accordance with Section 412.4.2.
Longitudinal bars located within a concrete core encased
by structural steel or within transverse reinforcement
Association oi Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (/\SEP)

surrounding a structural steel core shall be permitled to be 0. 5bw and an effective flange width less than or cqt1al to
used in calculating Asx and lsx· 4bw,
•'
406.2.6 Unless slenderness e11ecls arc neglected as
406.3.2.3 For prcstressed T-beams, it shall be permitted
permitted by Section 406.2.5, the design of columns,
to use the geometry provided by Sections 406.3.2.1 and
restraining beams, and other supporting members shall be 406.3.2.2.
based on the factored forces and moments considering
second order effects in accordance with Se<.:tions 406.6.4,
406.4 Arrangement of Live Load
406.7, or 406.8. Mu including second-order effects shall
not exceed 1. 4Mu due to first-order effects.
406.4.1 For the design of floors or roofs to resist
gravity loads, it shall be pennitted to assume that live load
406.3 Modeling Assumptions
is applied only to the level under consideration.
406.3.1 General 406.4.2 For one-way slabs and beams, it shall he
permitted tu assume (a) and (b):
406.3.1.1 Relative stiffnesses of members within
structural systems shall be based on reasonable and
a. Maximum positive Mu near midspan occurs with
consistent assumptions.
factored L on the span and on alternate spans;
406.3.1.2 To calculate moments and shears caused hy
b. Maximum negative Mu at a support occurs with
gravity loads in columns, beams, and slabs, it shall be
factored L on adjacent spans only.
pennitted to use a model limited to the members in the
level being considered and the columns above and below
406.4.3 For two-way slab systems, factored moments
that level. It shall be permitted to assume far ends of
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 406.4.3.1,
columns built integrally with the structure to he fixed. ·
406.4.3.2, or 406.4.3.3, and shall be at least the moments
resulting from factored L applied simultaneously to all
406.3.1.3 The analysis model shall consider the effects
panels.
of variation of member cross-sectional properties, such as
that due to haunches.
406.4.3.t If the arrangement of L is known, the slab
406.3.2 T-beam Geometry system shall be analyzed for that arrangement.
406.3.2.1 For non-prestressed T-beams supporting 406.4.3.2 If L is variable and does not exceed 0. 75D, or
monolithic or composite slabs, the effective flange width the nature of l:. is such that all panels will be loaded
b 1 shall include the beam web width bw plus a~ effective simultaneously, it shall be permitted to assume that
maximum Mu al all sections occurs with factored L
overhanging tlange width in accordance with Table
applied simultaneously to all panels.
406.3.2.l, where h is the slab thickness and Sw is the
clear distance to the adjacent web.
406.4.3.3 For loading conditions other than those
defined in Section 406.4.3.1 or 406.4.3.2, it shall be
Table 406.3.2.1: Dimensional Limits for Effective
permitted to assume (a) and (b):
Overhan~ing Flange Width for T-Beams
a. Maximum positive Mu near midspan of panel occurs
Effective overhanging flange
Flange location width, beyond face of web with 75 percent of factored L on the panel and
alternate panels;
Bh
Each side of web Least of: s,..,/2 b. Maximum negative Mu at a support occurs with 75
.e./8 percent of factored Lon adjacent panels only.
6h
One side of web Least of: Sw/2
406.5 Simplified Method of Analysis for Non-
f~/12
Prestressed Continuous Beams and Onc~way
Slabs
406.3.2.2 Isolak<l non-prestressed T-beams in which the
flange is used to provide additional compression area 406.5.1 It shall be permitted to calculate Mu and Vu
shall have a flange thickness greater than or equal to due to gravity loads in accordance with this section for
National StructtJr,i! Code of the Phiiippini.is \/cJlurnr~ I. 7t;, ···,,·.

t:.u1t1o;a., 2l'1"
, .J
4-38 CHAPTER 4 ·- Struc!urn1 Concrete
continuous beams and one-way slabs satisfying (a) Table 406.5.4 Approximate Shears for
thro~h (e):
Non-Pre~tressed Continuous Beams and One-Way
Slabs
a. Members are prismatic;
Location v..
b. Loads are uniformly distributed; Exterior face offir~t interior
SU ort
c. L :S 3D; Face of all other supports
d. There are at least two spans; 406.5.5 Floor or roof level moments shall he resisted
by distributing the moment between columns immediately
e. The longer of two adjacent spans does not exceed above and below the given floor in proportion to the
the shorter by more than 20 percent. relative column stiffnesses considering conditions of
reslraint.
406.5.2 Mu due lo gravity loads shall be calculated in
accordance with Table 406.5.2. 406.6 First-order Analysis
Table 406.S.2 Approximate Moments for Non- 406.6.1 General
Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-Way Slabs
406.6.1.1 Slenderness effects shall be considered in
Moment Location Condition M ..
accordance with Section 406.6.4, unless they are allowed
Discontinuous end
lo be neglected by Section 406.2.5.
inlegral with Wu.f~/14
End span support
Positive Discnnlinuous e11d
· 406.6.t.2 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
WufV11 elastic first-order analysis shall be permitted in
unreRtrained
Interior accordance with Section 406.6.5.
All WufU16
snans
Member built 406.6.2 Modeling of Members and Structural
Integrally with System~
supporting
w,.-e~/24
Interior face
of exterior spandrel beam
406.6.2.1 Floor or roof level moments shall be resisted
support Me111herbuilt by distributing the moment between columns immediately
integrally with w.,f~/16
supporting column above and below the· given floor in proportion to
Exterior lace the relative column stiffnesses and considering conditions
Two spans Wuf';.,/9
of first of restraint.
interior More than two
support WufU10
spans 406.6.2.2 For frames or continuous construction,
Negative( I I consideration shall be given to the effect of tloor and roof
Face of
Other /\II Wuf~/11 load patterns on transfer of moment to exterior and
SUDDOrtS interior columns, and of eccentric loading due to other
a) Slabs with spans causes.
oot t:xceeding 3m.
Face of all b) Beams where 406.6.2.3 It shall be permitted to simplify the analysis
supports ratio of sulJl or
Wuf;./12 model by the assumptions of (a), (h), or both:
satisfying column stillnesses
(a) or (h) to beam stiffness
exceeds 8 at each a. Solid slabs or one-way joist systems built integrally
end of span with supports, with clear spans not more than 3m.,
shall be pennitted to be analyzed as continuous
[l]To ealculatt: negative momeuts, f,. shall be th.e average of members on knife edge supports with spans equal to
the adjacent clear span lengths. the clear spans of the member and width of support
beams otherwise neglected;
406.5.3 It Moments calculated in accordance with
Section 406.5.2 shall not be redistributed. b. For frames or continuous construction, it shall be
permitted to assume the intersecting member regions
406.5.4 Vu due to gravity loads shall be calculated in are rigid.
accordance with Table 406.5.4.
Association or Struclur:;11 Er.gineen,; of the Philippines. Iii~. (ASEP)

406.6.3 Section Properties agreement with results of comprehensive tests and

analysis and I of other frame members shall be in
406.6.3.1 Factored Load Analysis accordance with Sections 406.6.3.1.1 and 406.6.3.1.2.
406.6.3.1.1 Floor Moment of inertia and cross-sectional 406.6.3.2 Service Load Analysis
area of members shall be calculated in accordance with
Tables 406.6.3.1.1 (a) or 406.6.3.1.1 (b), unless a 406.6.3.2.l Immediate and time-dependent deflections
more rigorous analysis is used. If sustained lateral loads due to gravity loads shall be calculated in accordance with
arc present, I for columns and walls shall be divided by Section 424.2.
( 1 + Pds) where Pds is the ratio of maximum factored
sustained shear within a storey to the maximum factored 406.6.3.2.2 It shall be permitted to calculate immediate
shear in that storey associated with the same load lateral deflections using a moment of inertia of 1.4 times I
combination. defined in Section 406.6.3.1, or using a more detailed
analysis, but the value shall not exceed Is.
Table 4 0 6.6.3.1.l(a) Moment of Inertia and Cross-
Sectional Area Permitted for Elastic Analysis at 406.6.4 Slenderness Effects, Moment Magnification
Factored Load Level Method
Member Moment of Cross-Sectional 406.6.4.1 Unless Section 406.2.5 is satisfied, columns

and condition Inertia Area
and stories in structures shall be designated as being
Columns 0.70/g
nonsway or sway. Analysis of columns in nonsway
Uncracked 0.70/g frames or storeys shall be in accordance with Section
Walls 406.6.4.5. Analysis of columns in sway frames or storeys
Cracked 0.35/g t.OA6
shall be in accordance with Section 406.6.4.6.
Beams 0.35/g
0.25/ij 406.6.4.2 The cross-sectional dimensions of each

Flat plates and flat slabs
member used in an analysis shall be within IO percent of
the specified member dimensions in construction
documents or the analysis shall be repeated. If the
Table 406.6.3. t. t (b) Alternative Moments of Inertia stiffnesses of Table 406.6.3.1.1 (b) are used in an analysis,
for Elastic Analysis at Factored Load the assumed member reinforcement ratio shall also be
within JO percent of the specified member reinforcement
Alternative Value of I for Elastic Analysis in construction documents.
Member Minimum J ~faximum
Columns 0.35/8 (0,80 + 2.S-;;;
A,r) (I - P•)
Mu - 0.SP. I&
Pvh 0.875/g 406.6.4.3 It shall be permitted to analyze columns and
and walls
stories in structures as nonsway frames il' (a) or (b) is
Beams,
satisfied:
flat
plates, 0.25/~ (0.10 + 2sp)(1.2-o.2~h 0.5/g
and flat a. The increase in column end moments due tu second
slabs order effects docs not exceed 5 percent of the first
Note: l'or continuous flexural r(u:mhers, I shall be permitted to be taken order end moments;
as the uverage of value~ obtained for the critical positive and negative
moment sections. Pu and Mu shall he calculated from the load b. Q in accordance with Section 406.6.4.4.1 does not
combination under consideration, or the combination of Pu and M,. that
produces the least value of I. exceed 0.05.
406.6.3.1.2 For factored lateral load analysis, it shall be 406.6.4.4 Stability Properties
pennitte<l to assume I = 0. 51 g for all members or to
calculate I by a more detailed analysis, considering the 406.6.4.4.1 The stability index for a storey, Q, shall be
reduced stiffness of all members under the loading calculated by:
conditions.
( 406.6.4.4.1)
406.6.3.1.3 For factored lateral load analysis of two-way
slab systems without beams, which are designated as part
of the seismic-force-resisting system, I for slab members where L Pu and V us are the total factored vertical load
shall be defined by a model that is in substantial and horizontal storey shear, respectively, in the story
National Structura! Codr~ oftr1e Philippines \Ioli.mm !. 7t1i l::d,tiDn. 2015

4-40 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
being evaluated, and IJ. 0 is the fi rst-order relative lateral c

defleQtion between the top and the bottom or that storey
o= 1 - ...!.L ~ 1. 0
111
(406.6.4. 5.2)
0.1S Pc
due to V us·
406.6.4.4.2 The critical buckling toad, Pc, shalt be 406.6.4.5.3 Cm shall be in accordance with (a) or (b):
calculated by:
a. For columns without transverse loads applied
between supports:
(406.6.4.4.2)
(406.6.4.5.3a)
406.6.4.4.3 The effective length factor k shall be
calculated using Ee in accordance with Section 419.2.2
where M 1 / M 2 is negative if the column is bent in single
and I in accordance with Section 406.6.3.1. I. For
curvature, and positive if bent in double curvature;
nonsway members, k shall be pcnnitted to be taken as
1.0, and for sway members, k shall be at least 1.0. b. For columns with transverse loads applied between
supports.
406.6.4.4.4 For non-composite columns, (E l)eff shall
be calculated in accordance with (a), (b), or (c): Cm = 1. 0 ( 406.6.4.5 .3b)
a. 0.4Eclg 406.6.4.5.4 M 2 in Eq. 406.6.4.5. l shall be at least

(El)eff = 1 + pdns (406.6.4.4.4a)
M z, mrn calculated according to Eq. 406.6.4.5.4 about
each axis separately.
b. 0. 2Eclg + E5 15 e
(El)eff = 1 + Pdns
(406.6.4.4.4b)
Mz,mtn =P14(15 + 0. 03h) ( 406.6.4 .5 .4)
c. Eel
(El)eff = 1 + pans (406.6.4.4.4c) If Mi.min exceeds M2 , Cm shall be taken equal to l .O or
calculated based on the ratio of the calculated end
moments MtfM2 , using Eq. 406.6.4.5.3a.
where fJdns shall be the ratio of maximum factored
sustained axial load to maximum factored axial load 406.6.4.6 Moment Magnification Method: Sway
associated with the same load combination and I in Eq. Frames
406.6.4.4.4c is calculated according to Table
406.6.3 .1.1 (b) for columns and walls. 406.6.4.6.1 Moments M 1 and M 2 at the ends of an
individual column shall be calculated by (a) and (b).
406.6.4.4.5 For composite columns, (El)eff shall be
calculated by Eq. 406.6.4.4.4b, Eq. 406.6.4.4.5, or from a
a. (406.6.4.6. la)
more detailed analysis.
b. (406.6.4.6.Ib)
_ (0.2Ec18 )
(EJ)eff - l p + Esl sx (406.6 .4.4.5)
+ dns
406.6.4.6.2 The moment magnifier 85 shall be
calculated by (a), (b), or (c). If l>s exceeds 1.5, only (b) or
406.6.4.5 Moment Magnification Method:
(c) shall be permitted:
Nonsway Frames
406.6.4.5.1 The factored moment used for design of

columns and walls, Mc, shall be the first-order factored a. ( 406.6.4 .6.2a)
moment M2 amplified for the effects of member
curvature.
b. ( 406.6.4.6.2b)
(406.6.4.5.1)
c. Second-order elastic analysis.
406.6.4.S.2 Magnification factor o shall be calculated
by:
Assoc1at1on of Structural Engineers of the Phllipplnes. Inc (ASEP)

where IP u is lhc summation of all the lactored vertical 406.7 F.lasHc Second-order Analysis
loads in a storey and r, P" is the summation for all sway
resisting columns in a storey. Pc is calculated using Rq. 406.7.1 General
40(i.6.4.4.2 with 1£ delcrmine<l for sway members from
Seclion 406.6.4.4.3 and (El)eff from Section 406.6.4.4.4 406.7.l.l An elastic second-order analysis shall consider
or 406.6.4.4.5 HS appropriate with Pds substinncd for the inllucnce of axial loads, presence of cracked regions
Pd11s· along the length of the member, and effects of load
duration. These considerations arc satisfied using the
406.6.4.6.3 Flexural members shall be designed for the cross-sectional properties de1ined in Section 406.7.2.
total magniJicd end momcnts of the columns al the joint.
406.7.1.2 Slenderness eHec!s along the length of a
406.6.4.6.4 Second-order effects shall be considered column shall be rnnsidered. Il shall be permitted lo
along the length of columns in sway frames. It shall be calculate these cflccts using Section 406.6.4.5.
permitted lo account for these effects using Section
406.6.4.5, where Cm is calculated using M1 and M 2 from 40(i.7.t.3 The cross-seclional dimensions of each
Section 406.6.4.6.1. member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness
effects shall he within 10 percent of the specified member
406.6.5 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous dimensions in construction documcnls or the analysis
Flexural Members shall be repeated.
406.6.5.l Except where approximate values l'or moments 406. 7.1.4 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
are used in accordance with Section 406.5, where elastic second-order analysis shall he permitted in
moments have been calculated in accordance with Section accordance with Section 406.6.5.
406.8, or where moments in two-way slabs are
determined using pattern loading specified in Section 406.7.2 Section Properties
406.4.3.3, reduction of moments at sections of maximum
negative or maximum positive moment calculated by 406.7.2.1 Factored Load Analysis
elastic theory shall be permitted for any assumed loading
arrangement if(a) and (b) are satisfied: 406.7.2.1.1 It shall be permitlcd to use section properties
calculated in accordance with Section 406.6.3.1.
a. Flexural members arc continuous;
406.7.2.2 Service I ,oad Analysis
b. E1 ~ 0. 0075 at the section at whid1 moment ,s
reduced. 406.7.2.2.t Immediate and time-dependent deflections
due to gravity loads shall be calculated in accordance with
406.6.5.2 For presln.:sscd members, rnomcnts include Section 424.2.
those due to factored loads and those due to reactions
induced by prcstressing. 406.7.2.2.2 Alternalively, it shall be permitted to
calculate immediate deflections using a moment of inertia
406.6.S.3 At the section where lhc momenl is reduced, of 1.4 times I given in Section 406.6.3.1, or calculated
re<listribuliun shall not exceed the lesser of 1000£c using a more detailed analysis, hut the value shall not
percent and 20 percent. exceed lg.
406.6.5.4 The reduced moment shall be used to calculate 406.8 Inelastic Second-Order Analysis
rcdistribulcd moments at all other sections within the
spans such lhat static equilibrium is maintained after 406.8.1 General
redistribution of moments for each loading arrangement.
406.8.1.1 An inelastic second-order analysis shall
406.6.5.5 Shears and support reaclions shall be consider material nonlinearity, member curvature and
calculated in accordance with static equilibrium lateral drift, duration of loads, shrinkage and creep, and
considering the redistributed moments tor each loading interaction with the supporting foundation.
arrangement.
406.8.1.2 An inelastic second-order analysis procedure
shall have been shown to result in prcdiclion of strength
in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive
-1-42 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural ConcrtW:>
tests of statically indeterminate reinforced concrete SECTION 407

stntctures.
ONE-WAY SLABS
406.8.1.3 Slenderness effects along the length of a
column shall he considered. It shall be permitted to 407.l Scope
calculate these effects using Section 406.6.4.5.
407.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
406.8.1 .4 The cross-sectional di mcnsions of each prestressed and prestressed slabs reinforced for flexure in
member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness one direction, including:
effects shall be within IO percent of the specified member
dimensions in construction documents or the analysis a. Solid slahs;
shall be repeated.
b. Slabs cast on slay-in-place, non-composite steel deck;
406.8.I.5 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
inelastic second-order analysis shall not be permitted. c. Composite slabs of concrete elements constructed in
separate placements but connected so that all
406.9 Acceptability of Finite Element Analysis elements resist loads as a unit;
406.9.1 Finite element analysis to determine load d. Precast, prestressed hollow-core slabs.
cfl'ects shall be perm itted.
407.2 General
406.9.2 The finite element model shall be appropriate
for its intended purpose. 407.2.1 The effects of concentrated loads and openings
406.9.3 For inelastic analysis, a separate analysis shall
be performed for each factored load combination. 407.2.2 Materials
406.9.4 The licensed design professional shall confirm 407.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be selected
that the results are appropriate for the purposes of the to be in accordance w ith Section 4 19.
analysis.
407.2.2.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall
406.9.5 T he cross-sectional dimensio ns of each be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
member used in an analysis shall be within 10 percent of
the specified member di mensions in construction 407.2.2.3 Materials, design and detailing requirements
documents or the analysis shall be repeated. for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with
Section 420.7.
406.9.6 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
inelastic analysis shall not be permitted. 407.2.3 Connection to Other Members
407.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, slab-column

joints shall satisfy Section 415.
407.2.3.2 For prccast construction, connections shall

satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 41 6.2.
407.3 Design Limits
407.3.1 Minimum Slab Thickness
407.3.1.1 For solid non-prcstresscd slabs not supporting

or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be
damaged by large deflections, overall slab thickness h
shall not be less than the limits in Table 407.3.1.1, unless
the calculated deflection limits of Section 407.3.2 are
satisfied.
Assot-:lation of Struct1Jral Engineers of the Philippines, Inc (AS E:P)

Table 407.3.1.1 Minimum Thickness of Solid 407.3.3 Reinforcement Strain Limit in Non-
Non-Prcstressed One-Way Slabs Prcstressed Slabs
Support condition Minimum hit J 407.3.3.t For non-prestressed slabs, e, shall be at least
SimL1lv suooortcd e;zo 0.004.
One end continuous f/24
Both ends continuous f/28 407.3.4 Stress Limits in Prcstrcssed Slabs
Cantilev~r f/10
Ill F.xpre~sion Hpplicablc for normal weight com:rele anti f y= 420 MPa. 407.3.4.l Prestressed slabs shall be classified as Class U.
For other cases, minimum h shall be modifieu in accordance with T, or C in accordance with Section 424.5.2. ·
Sections 407.3.1.1.1 through 407.3.1.1.3, as appropriate.
407.3.4.2 Stresses in prcstrcssed slabs immediately after
407.3.1.1.1 For f y other than 420 MPa, the expressions transfer and at service loads shall not exceed the
in Table 407.3.1.1 shall be multiplied by ( 0.4 + permissible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and 424.5.4.
[y/700).
407.4 Required Strength
407.3.1.1.2 For non-prestressed slabs made of
lightweight concrete having We in the range of 1440 to 407.4.1 General
1840 kglm1, the expressions in Table 407.3.1.1 shall be
multiplied by the greater of(a) and (b): 407.4.1.1 Required strength shallbe calculated m
accordance with the factored load combinations in
a. 1. 65 - 0. 0003w c Section 405.
b. 1.09 407.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in

accordance wilh the analysis procedures in Section 406.
407.3.1.1.3 For non-prestressed composite slabs made
of a combination of lightweight and normal weight 407.4.1.3 For prestressed slabs, effects of reactions
concrete that are shored during construction, where the induced by prestressing shall be considered in accordance
lightweight concrete is in compression, the modifier of with Section 405.3. l l.
Section 407.3.l.l.2 shall apply.
407.4.2 Factored Moment
407.3.l.2 The thickness ofa concrete lloor finish shall
be permitted to be included in h if it is placed 407.4.2.1 For sla~s built integrally with suppo1ts, Mu at
monolithically with lhe floor slab, or if the floor finish is the support shall he permitted to be calculutcd at the face
designed to be composite with the t1oor slab in of support.
accordance with Section 416.4.
407.4.3 Factored Shear
407.3.2 Calculated Detlection Limits
407.4.3.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, Vu at
407.3.2.1 For non-prestresscd slabs not satisfying the support shall be permiued to be calculated at the face
Section 407.3.1 an<l for prcstressc<l slabs, immediate and of support.
time-dependent deflections shall be calculalcd in
accordam;e with Section 424.2 and shall not exceed the 407.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
limits in Section 424.2.2. critical section located d from the face of support for 11011-
prestresscd slabs or h/2 from the face of support for
407.3.2.2 For non-preslresscd composite concrete prestressed slabs shall be permitted to be designed for Vu
slahs satisfying Section 407.3.1, deflections occurring at that critical section if(u) through (c) are satisfied:
after the member becomes composite need not be
calculated. Deflections occurring before the member a. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear,
becomes composite shall be investigated, unless the pre- introduces compression into the end region or the
compositc thickness also satisfies Section 407.3.1. slab;
b. Loads are applied at or near the top surface of the

slab;
--
c. No concentrated load occurs between the face or 407.6 Reinforcement Limits

,,!iupport and critical section.
407.6.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in Non-
407.5 Design Strength Prestresscd Slabs
407.S.t General 407.6.1.l A minimum area of flexural reinforcement

As, min shall be provided in accordance with Table
407.5.1.l For each applicable factored load combination, 407.6.1.1.
design strength at all sections shall satisfy <J>Sn ? U
including (a) and (b):
Table 407.6.l.1 A 5 , min for Non-Prestressed One·Way
Slabs
Reinforcement
Type
[y, MPa As.min
Interaction between load effects shall be considered.
Deformed 0.0020Ag
<420
407.S.1.2 </> shall be detennined in accordance with bars
Section 421.2.
Deformed 0.0018 x 420
bars or welded Greater Ag
407.S.2 Moment ~ 420 Fy
wire of:
reinforcement 0.0014Ag
407.5.2.1 Mn shall be calculated m accordance with
Section 422.3.
·407.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in
407.5.2.2 For prestressed slabs, external tendons shall be Prestressed Slahs
considered as unbonded tendons in calculating flexural
strength, unless the external tendons are effectively 407.6.2.1 For slabs with bonded prestressed
bonded to the concrete section along its entire length. reinforcement, total quantity of As and Aps shall be
adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the
407.5.2.3 lf primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that cracking load calculated on the basis offr as given in
is considered to he a T-beam flange is parallel to the Section 419.2.3.
longitudinal axis of the beam, reinforcement
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam shall be 407.6.2.2 For slabs with both flexural and shear design
provided in the top of the slab in accordance with (a) and strength at least twice the required strength, Section
(h). This provision does not apply to joist construction: 407.6.2.1 need not be satisfied.
a. Slab reinforcement perpendicular to the beam shall 407.6.2.3 For slabs with unbonded tendons, the
be designed to resist the factored load on the minimum area of bonded defonncd longitudinal
overhanging slab width assumed to act as a reinforcement, As,min, shall be:
cantilever;
As, min ? 0. 004Act (407.6.2.3)
b. Only the effective overhanging slab width in
accordance with Section 406.3.2 need be considered. where Act is the area of that part of the cross section
between the flexural tension face and the centroid of the
407.5.3 Shear gross section.
407.5.3. t V nshall be calculated m accordance with 407.6.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement

Section 422.5.
407.6.3.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,
407.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal shear Av,min shall be provided in all regions where Vu> <J>Vc.
strength, V11 h, shall be calculated in accordance with
For precast prestressed hollow-core slabs with untopped
Section 416.4.
h > 315mm, Av.min shall be provided in all regions
where Vu > O.Sq>Vcw•

407.6.3.2 If shown by testing that the required Mn and 407.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
V n can he developed, Section 407.6.3.1 need nut be
,/ satisfied. Such tests shall simulate effects of differential 407.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be in accordance
seltlcment, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change, with Section 425.2.
based on a realistic assessment of these effects occurring
in :icrvice. 407.7.2.2 for non-prestressed and Class C prestrcssed
slabs, spacing of bonded longitudinal reinforcement
407.6.3.3 If shear reinforcement is requi red, Av, min, closest to the tension face shall not exceed s calculated in
shall be in accordance with Section 409.6.3.3. accordance with Section 424.3.
407.6.4 Minimum Shrinkage and Temperature 407.7.2.3 Maximum spacing s of deformed

Reinforcement reinforcement shall be the lesser of3h and 450 mm.
407.6.4.1 Reinforcement shall be provided to resist 407.7.2.4 Spacing of reinforcement required by Section
shrinkage and temperature stresses in acco rdance with 407.5.2.3 shall not exceed the lesser of Sh and 450 mm.
Section 424.4.
407.7.3 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed
407.6.4.2 If prcstressed shrinkage and temperature Slabs
reinforcement in accordance with Section 424.4.4 is used,
Sections 407 .6.4.2.1 through 407 .6.4.2.3 shall apply. 407.7.3.1 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
reinforcement al each section of the slab shall be
407.6.4.2.1 Fur monolithic, cast-in-place, post-tensioned developed on each side of that section.
beam-and-slab construction, gross concrete area shall
consist of the total beam area including the slab thickness 407.7.3.2 Critical locations for development of
and the slab area within half the clear distance to adjacent reinforcement arc points of maximum stress and points
beam webs. It shall be permitted to include the eHccti ve along the span where bent or terminated tension
force in beam tendons in the calculation of total prestress reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
force acting on gross concrete area.
407.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point
407.6.4.2.2 If slabs are supported on walls or not cast at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a
monolithically with beams, gross concrete area is the slab distance at least the greater of d and 12db, except at
section tributary lo the tendon or tendon group. supports of simply-supported spans and at free ends of
cantilevers .
407.6.4.2.3 At least one tendon is required in the slab
between faces of adjacent beams or walls. 407.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement
shall have an embcdment length at least ld beyond the
407.7 Reinforcement Detailing point where bent or terminated tension reinforcement is
no longer required to resist flexure.
407.7.1 General
407.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be
407.7. l.l Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is
accordance with Section 420.6.1 . satisfied :
407.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and a. Vu ::; (2/3),PVn at the cutoff point;
prestresse<l reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4. b. For 36 mm</> bars and smaller, continuing
reinforcement provides double the area required for
407.7.1.3 Splices of defonned reinforcement shall he in flexure at the cutoff point and Vu ::; ( 3/ 4),PV n;
c. Stirrup area in excess of that required for shear is
407.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with provided along each terminated bar or wire over a
Section 425 .6. distance 3/4d Crom the termination point. Excess
stirrup area shall be not less than 0 . 41bw s//yt ·
Spacing s shall not exceed d/(8fJb)·
4-46 CHAPTER 1.1, - Stl'ucturai Concre,e
407.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for 407.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Prcstressed
tcnsipn reinforcement where reinforcement stress is not Slabs
directly proportional to moment, such as in sloped,
stepped, or tapered slabs, or where tension reinforcement 407.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
is not parallel lo the compression face. member in a manner that maintains the specified
eccentricity between the tendons and the concrete
407.7.3.7 In slabs with spans not exceeding 3 m, welded centroid through the full range of anticipated member
wire reinforcement, with wire size not exceeding MW30 deflections.
or MD30, shall be permitted to be curved from a point
near the top of slab over the support lo a point near the 407.7.4.2 If non-prcstressed reinforcement is required to
bottom of slab at mid-span, provided such reinforcement satisfy flexural strength, the detailing requirements of
is continuous over, or developed at, lhe support. Section 407.7.3 shall be satisfied.
407.7.3.8 Termination of Reinforcement 407.7.4.3 Termination of Prestressed

Reinforcement
407.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third of the
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend 407.7.4.3.l Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
along the slab bottom into the support. F.or prccast slabs, designed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9.
such reinforcement shall extend at least to the center of
the bearing length. 407.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with Section
407.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth of the 425.8.
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend
along the slab bottom into the support at least l50 mm. 407.7.4.4 Termination of Deformed Reinforcement
in Slabs ,vith Unbonded Tendons
407.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points or inflection,
db for positive moment tension reinforcement shall be 407.7.4.4.1 Length of deformed reinforcement required
limited such that fd for that reinforcement satisfies (a) or hy Section 407.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
(b). If reinforcement terminates beyond the centerline of (b):
supports by a standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at
least equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be a. At least f,i/3 in pos1t1ve moment areas and be
satisfied. centered in those areas;
a. t d ~ (1. 3Mn/Vu + f u) if end or reinforcement is b. At least ln/6 on each side of the face of support.
confined by a compressive reaction;
407.7.5 Shear Reinforcement
h. .fd ~ (Mn/Vu + .fa) if end of reinforcement is not
confined by a compressive reaction. 407.7.5.1 If shear reinforcement is required, transverse
reinforcement shall be detailed according to Section
where Mn is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the 409.7.6.2.
section is stressed to f y and Vu is calculated at the
section. 407.7.6 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
At a support, fa is the embedment length beyond the 407.7.6.1 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement in
center of the support. accordance with Section 407.6.4 shall be placed
perpendicular to flexural reinforcement.
At a point of inflection, la is the embedment length
beyond the point of inflection, limited to the greater of d 407.7.6.2 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement
and 12db.
407.7.6.2.1 Spacing of deformed shrinkage and
407.7.3.8.4 Al least one-third of the negative moment temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
reinforcement at a support shall have an embedment Sh and 450 mm.
length beyond the point of inflection at least the greatest
of d, 12db, and ln/16.
Associc.1tion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASf P)

407.7.6.3 Prcstrcsscd Reinforcement
SECTION 408
,/
407.7.6.3.1 Spacing of slab tendons required by Section TWO-WAY SLABS
407.6.4.2, and the distance between face of beam or wall
to the nearest slab ltmdon, shall not exceed 1.8 m. 408.1 Scope
407.7.6.3.2 If spacing of slab tendons exceeds 1.4 m., 408.1.l This section shall apply to the design of non-
additional deformed shrinkage and temperature prcstressed and prestresscd slabs reinforced for flexure in
reinforcement confom1ing to Section 424.4.3 shall be two directions, with or without heams between suppo1ts,
provided parallel to the tendons, except Section 424.4.3.4 including (a) through (<l):
need not be satisfied.
a. Solid slabs;
In calculating the area of additional reinforcement, it shall
be pe1milled to take the gross concrete area in Tahle b. Slabs cast on stay-in-place, non-composite steel deck;
424.4.3.2 as the slab area hetween faces of heams. This
shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall extend c. Composite slabs of concrete elements constructed in
from the slab edge for a distance not less than the slab separate placements but connected so that all
tendon spacing. elements resist loads as a unit;
d. Two-way joist systems in accordance with Section

408.8.
408.2 General
408.2.1 A slab system shall be pcnnitted to be

designed by any procedure satisfying equilibrium and
geometric compatibility, provided thal design strength at
every section is at least equal to required strength, and all
serviceability requirements are satisfied. The direct design
method of Section 408.10 or lhc e4uivalent frame method
of Section 408.11 is pennitted for design where
applicable.
408.2.2 The effects of concentrated loads and openings

408.2.3 Slabs prestressed with an average effective

compressive stress less than 0.9 MPa shall be designed as
non-prestrcssed slabs.
408.2.4 A drop panel in a non-prcstressed slab, where

used to reduce lhe minimum required thickness in
accordance with Section 408.3.1.1 or the quantity of
deformed negative moment reinforcement at a support in
accordance with Section 408.5.2.2, shall satisfy (a) and
(b):
a. The drop panel shall project below the slab at least

1/4 of the adjacent slab thickness;
b. The drop panel shall extend in each direction from

the centerline of support a distance not less than 1/6
the span length measured from center-to-center of
supports in that direction.
Nationa! Struct1Jr;.3J Co<:!0 C'f th:::- Phi.:ippi,-!t'$ Volume l, t: Edition. 2015

4-48 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
408.2.S A shear cap, where used to increase the critical Table 408.3.1.l Minimum Thickness of
s~tion for shear at a slab-column joint, shall project Non-Prcstressed Two-Way Slabs without
below the slab soffit and extend horizontally from the Interior Beams (mm.) Pl
face of the column a distance at least equal to the
thickness of the projection below the slab soffit. Without drop pa11cls 131 With drop ponels 131
Interior lnh:rior
Exterior pands Exterior panels
408.2.6 Materials panels pnncls
Wilh Wilh<,ut With
Without
408.2.6.l Design properties for concrete shall be lr, edge edge edge "dge
141
MPul2) bt•m~ beams
141 beams bcam~
selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
2RO fn/33 e./36 fn/36 ln/36 fn/40 t./40
408.l.6.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall 420 fn/30 t'n/33 ln/33 e,J33 fn/36 en/36
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420. 520 .e./28 1./31 t./31 e./31 .e./34 1./34
408.2.6.3 Materials, design and detailing requirements [I) i,.is the clear span in the long direclion, measured face-to-face or
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with supports ( mm.).
12I For {y between tile values given in the table, minimum thickness
Section 420. 7.
shull be calculated by linear intefJ)olalion
[JI Drop panels as given in Seclion 408.2.4.
408.2. 7 Connections to Other Members
l4 I Slabs with heams between columns along exterior edges. The value
of a for the edge beam shall be calculated in accordance with
408.2.7.1 Connections of two-way slabs to supporting 1
Section 40R.I0.2.7. Exterior panels shull be considered to be without
members shall be in accordance with Section 415. edge beams if a 1 is less than 0.8.
408.3 Design Limits 408.3.1.2 For non-prestressed slabs with beams spanning
between supporls on all sides, overall slab thickness h
408.3.1 Minimum Slab Thickness shall satisty the limits in Table 408.3.1.2, unless the
calculated deflection I imits of Section 408.3.2 are
408.3.l.1 For non-prestressed slabs without interior satisfied.
beams spanning between supports on all sides, having a
maximum ratio of long-to-short span of 2, overall slab Table 408.3.1.2 Minimum Thickness ofNon-
thickness h shall not be less than the limits in Table Prestresscd Two-Way Slabs with Beams Spanning
408.3.1.1, and shall be at least the value in (a) or (b}, between Supports on All Sides _
unless the calculated detlection limits of Section 408.3.2
are satisfied: am
Ill Minimum h, mm
Ujm ~0.2 Secrion 40~.3. l.1 ~pplies (a)
a. Slabs without drop panels as given in Section 408.2.4
1,.(0.0~) (b)'2)[3J
...................................................................... 125 mm. Greater
0.22 < u,,,. ~ 2.0 36 + Sfi(«tm - 0.2)
of:
125 (c)
b. Slabs drop panels as given in Section 408.2.4 . . ..
....... ........... ................. ................................... 100 rrun. Greater rn (11.8.!L..)
,,-,.uu <JF1131
«trn > 2.0 of: 36 +9
90 (e)
Ill a ,,, is lhe average value or a. 1 for all beams on edges of a panel
1
and a 1 shall he calculated in accordance with Section 408.10.2.7.
(2Jt. is the clear ~pan in lhe long direction, measun::d lace-lo-face of
beams (mm.).
131p is the ratio of clear spans in long to short directions of slab.
408.3.1.2.l At discontinuous edges of slabs conforming

to Section 408.3.1.2, an edge beam with a 1 ;::: 0. 80 shall
be provided, or the minimum thickness required by (b) or
(d) of Table 408.3.1.2 shall be increased by at least 10
percent in the panel with a discontinuous edge.
408.3.1.3 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall

be permitted to be included in h if it is placed
Associiilion of Structural Engineers ot r.rie Philippines. Inc (/\SEP)

C~{t\PTi.+~ 4 ··· Structural Cont":rete 4-49
monolithically with the floor slab, or if the tloor finish is 406. Alternatively, the provisions of Section 408.1 o for
designed to he composite wilh the floor slab in the direct design method shall be permitted for the
JI accordance wilh Section 416.4. analysis of non-prcstressed slabs and the provisions of
Section 408.11 for the equivalent frame method shall be
408.3.1.4 If single- or mulliplc-leg stirrups are used as permitted for the analysis of non-prestrcsse<l and
shear reinforcement, the slah thickness shall be sufficient prestressed slabs, except Sections 408.11.6.5 and
to satisfy the requirements ford in Section 422.6.7.1. 408.11.6.6 shall not apply to prestressed slabs.
408.3.2 Calculated Deflection Limits 408.4.1.3 For prestresscd slabs, effects of reactions
induced by preslressing shall be considered in accordance
408.3.2. l Immediate and time-dependent deflections wilh Section 405.3.11.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 424.2 and
shall not exceed the limits in Section 424.2.2 for two-way 408.4.1.4 For a slab system supported by columns or
slabs given in (a) through (c): walls, dimensions c 1, c 2 , and .f11 shall be based on an
effective support area. The eHective support area is the
a. Non-prestrcssed slabs not satisfying Section 408.3.1; intersection or the bottom surface or the slab, or drop
panel or shear cap if present, with the largest right circular
b. Non-prestressed slabs without interior heams cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge whose surfaces are
spanning between the supports on all sides and located within the column and the capital or bracket and
having a ratio of long-to-short span exceeding 2.0; are oriented no greater than 45 degrees to the axis of the
column.
c. Prestressed slahs.
408.4.1.5 A column strip is a design strip with a width
408.3.2.2 For non-prestre!;scd composite concrete slabs on each side of a column centerline equal to the lesser of
satisJying Sections 408.3. l.l or 408.3.1.2, deflections 0. 25/2 and 0. 2511 . A column strip shall include beams
occurring after the member becomes composite need not within the strip, if present.
be calculated. De1lcctions occurring before the member
becomes composite shall be investigated, unless the pre- 408.4.1.6 A middle strip is a design strip hounded by
composilc thickness also satisfies Sections 408.3.1.1 or two column strips.
408.3.1.2.
408.4.l.7 A panel is bounded by column, beam, or wall
408.3.3 Reinforcement Strain Limit in Non- centerlines on all sides.
Prestresscd Slabs
408.4.J.8 For monolithic or fully composite construction
408.3.3.1 For non-prestresscd slabs, Ee shall he at least supporting two-way slahs, a beam includes that portion or
0.004. slah, on each side of the beam extending a distance equal
to the projection of the beam above or below the slab,
408.3.4 Stress Limits in Prestrcssed Slabs whichever is greater, but not greater than four times the
slab thickness.
408.3.4.1 Prestressed slabs shall be designed as Class U
with ft ~ 0. 50fH. Other slresses in prestrcssed slabs 408.4.l.9 Combining the results of a gravity load
immediately atler lransfer and at service loads shall not analysis with the results of a lateral load analysis shall be
exceed the permissible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and permitted.
424.5.4.
408.4.2 Factored Moment
408.4 Required Strength
408.4.2. 1 For slabs huilt integrnlly with supports, Mu at
408.4.1 General the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
or support, except if analyzed in accordance with Section
408.4.2.2.
408.4.1. 1 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the faclorcd load combinations rn
Section 405. 408.4.2.2 For slabs analyzed using the direct design
method or the equivalent frame method, Mu at the
support shall he located in accordance with Section
408.4.1.2 Required strength shall he calculated in
accordance with the analysis procedures given in Section 408.10 or 408.11, respectively.
N2lionc1! Structu(al Corle of the PhfHppines Vclunif; ,, 7'1' Edition. 201 ti

408.4.2.3 Factored Slab Moment Resj11ted hy the 408.4.2.3.6 The fraction of M sc nol calculated to be
Column resisted by llexure sh1:1ll be assumed to he resistec1 by
eccentricity of shear in aecortfance with Section
408.4.2.3.1 l f gravily load, wind, earthquake, or other 408.4.4.2.
effects cause a transfer of moment between the slab and
column, a traction of M sc, the factored s lab moment 408.4.3 Factored One-Way Shear
resisted by the column at a joint, ~hall be tra nsferred by
flexure in accordance with Sections 408.4.2.3.2 through 408.4.3.1 For slabs huilt inlegrally with suppons, Vu at
408.4.2.3.5. the supporr shall be permitted lo be calculated 1:1L the face
of support.
408.4.2.3.2 The frac tion of factored slab moment
resisted by the column, y rM.,c, shall be assumed to be 408.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
trnnsfcrred by flexure, where y I shall be catc.ulaled by: critical section located d from the face of s upport for
non-prestrcssed slabs and h / 2 from the face of support
1 for prcslresscd slabs shall be perm itted to be designed for
(408.4.2.3.2) V 11 at that critical section if(a) through (c) are ,,alistied:
a. Support reaction, in din:ction of applied shear,

introduces compression into the end regions of the
408.4.2.3.3 The effective s lab width bslab fo r resisting slab;
y 1M s,· sh1:11l be the width of column or capita l plus 1. Sil
of slab or d rop panel on c:ithcr side of column or capital. b. Loads are applied at or near the top surface of' lhe
slab;
408.4.2.3.4 For non-prestressed slabs, where the
limitations on Vug and Ee in Table 408.4.2.3.4 are c. No concentrated load occurs between the face of
satisfied, y f shall be pennitted to be increased to the support and critical section.
maximum modified values provided in Table 408.4.2.3.4 ,
where Ve is calculated in accordance with Section 4118.4.4 Fnctorcd Twn-Way Shear
422 .6.5, and Vug is the factored shear stress on the slab
408.4.4.1 Critical S ection
critical section for two-way action due to gravity loads
without moment transfe r.
408.4.4.1.1 Slabs s h1:1ll be cva(u1:1led for two-way shear in
the vicinity of coh.imns, concentrated loads, and reaction
408.4.2.3.5 Concentration of reinforcement over lhe
are1:1s at i.:ritic1:1! sections in accordance · wiU1 Section
column by closer spacing o r additional reinforcement
422.6.4.
shall he used to resist moment on the effective slab width
defined in Sections 408.4.2.3.2 and 408.4.2.3.3.
408.4.4.J.2 Slabs reinforced with stirrups or headed
shear stud re inforcement shall be evaluated for two-way
Table 408.4.2.3.4 Maximum Modified Values ofyf for
shear at critical sections in accordance w ith Section
Non-Prestrcssed Two-Way Slabs 42 2.6.4.2.
f't
Column Span (witltin Maximum Modified 408.4.4.1.3 Slabs re infori.:ed with shearheads shall be
v ui
Location Oi rcdion h.d at,) Yt evaluated for two-way shear at critical sections in
accordance with Section 422.6.9.8.
Corner Either
$ O.!iip11, .::! 0.004 J.O
column diredion
408.4.4.2 Factored Two-Way Shear Stress Uuc to
l:'erpcn-
cticular to $ 0.75cj> v, ~0.004 1.0
Shear and Factored Slab Moment
the edge Resisted by the Column
Edge
column 1.25
Parallel IV 408.4.4.2. l For two-way shear with factored s lab
the edge $ 0.44>vc ~ 0.0HI
l +(n ~ <- 1.0
J
moment resisted by the column, factored shear stress V u
shall he calculated al critical sections in accordani.:e with
1.25 Section 408.4.4. I. f.actored shear stress 1.111 corresponds to
J11tcrior Either ~ $1.0
:5 0.4ipvc a combination of Vug a nd t he shear stress pro duced by
column ctirectioJl 0.010
1+(D~ Y.vMsc , where Y v is given in Section 408.4.4.2.2 and Msc
is given in Section 408.4.2.3.1.
CHAPTER 4 - Strnctural Conr-rete 4.51
408.4.4.2.2 The fraction of M sc transferred by 408.5.3 Shear

..,. eccentricity of shear, y 11 M$c• shall he applied at the
centroid of the critical section in accordance with Section 408.5.3.1 Design shear strength of slabs in the vicinity of
408.4.4.1, where: columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas shall be the
more severe of Sections 408.5.3.1.1 and 408.5.3.1.2.
Yv = 1-y, ( 408.4 .4.2.2)
408.5.3.1.1 For one-way shear, where each critical
408.4.4.2.3 The factored shear stress resulting from section to be investigated extends in a plane across the
YvM sc shall be assumed to vary linearly about the entire slab width, V,1 shall be calculated in accordance
centroid of the critical section in accordance with Section with Section 422.5.
408.4.4.1.
408.S.3.l.2 For two-way shear, v 11 shall be calculated in
408.5 Design Strength accordance with Section 422.6.
408.5.1 General 408.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal shear

strength, Vnn, shall be calculated in accordance with
408.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, Section 416.4.
design strength shall satisfy (/>Sn ;;?:: U, including (a)
through (d). Interaction between load effects shall be 408.5.4 Openings in Slab Systems
considered.
408.5.4. 1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in slab
a. 4>Mn ?! Mu at all sections along the span in each systems if shown by analysis that all strength and
direction; serviceability requirements, including the limits on
deflections, arc satisfied.
b. (/>Mn~ YrM.~c within bstab as defined in Section
408.4.2.3.3; 408.5.4.2 As an alternative to Section 408.5.4.1,
openings shall be permitted in slab systems without
c. q>Vn 2:: Vu at all scdions along the span m each beams in accordance with (a) through (d):
direction for one-way shear;
a. Openings of any size shall be pennitted in the area
d. <J>vn ~ Vu at the critical sections defined in Section common to intersecting middle strips, but the total
408.4.4.1 for two-way shear. quantity ofreinforcement in the panel shall be at least
that required.for the panel without the opening;
408.5.1.2 4> shall he in accordance with Section 421.2.
b. At two intersecting column strips, not more than 1/8
408.5.1.3 Jf shearhcads are provided, Sections 422.6.9 the width of column strip in either span shall be
and 408.5.1.l(a) shall he satisfied in the vicinity of the interrupted by openings. A quantity of reinforcement
column. Beyond each ann of the shearhead, Section at least equal to that interrupted by an opening shall
408.5.1. l(a) through (d) shall apply. be added on the sides of the opening;
408.5.2 Moment c. At the intersection of one column strip and one

middle strip, not more than l/4 of the reinforcement
408.5.2.1 Mn shall be calculated m accordance with in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. A
Section 422.3. quantity of reinforcement at least equal to that
interrupted by an opening shall he added on the sides
of the opening;
408.5.2.2 In calculating Mn for non-prestressed slabs
with a drop panel, the thickness of the drop panel below
the slab shall not be assumed to be greater than 1/4 the d. ff an opening is located within a column strir or
distance from the edge of drop panel to the face of closer than 10/t from a concentrated load or reaction
column or column capital. area, Section 422.6.4.3 for slabs without shearheads
or Section 422.6.9.9 for slabs with shcarheads shall
be satisfied.
408.5.2.3 In calculating M 11 for prestrcssed slabs,
external tendons shall be considered as unbonded unless
the external tendons are effectively bonded to the slab
along its entire length.
National Structursl Code of the Philippine$ Vnlume I. 7'" E,Jition, .2015

4.52 CHAP'fER 4 - Sinictwa: Ccnn~ie
408.6 Reinforcement Limits Table 408.6.2.3

Minimum Bonded Deformed Longitudinal
408.6.1 Minimum l<'Jexural Reinforcement in Non- Reinforcement As.min in Two-Way Slabs
Prcstressed Slabs with Bonded or Unbonded Tendons
408.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement, Calculated f c after 2

Region As. min mm
As, mtn shall be provided near the tension face in the all losses MPa
-·
direction of the span under consideration in accordance Positive
!, ~ 0.17/1Z Not required (a)
with Table 408.6. l. I. Moment 0.17../71 < f, :s; o.s.ftf N,
(b)[IJ.12J.f4]
O.Sfv
Table 408.6.l.1 Negative
As.min for Non-Prestrcssed Two-Way Slabs moment (c) 131.(4]
at
ft~ 0.5/fl 0.00075A,1
columns
Reinforcement
{y, MPa As,minmm.2 [IJ The value off, shall not exceed 420 MPa.
tyoe
Deformed bars <420 0.0020Ag 121 N, ~ the resultant tensile force acting on the portion of the
concrete cross seclion that is ,ubjccter.1 to tensile stresses r.luc
Deformed bars 0.0018 x 420 to the combined effects of service !oar.ls and effective
Greater {y A, pres tress.
or welded wire ~ 420
of:
reinforcement 0.0014A8 IJJ A, 1 = grealer gross cross-sectional area of the stab beam strips
of the two orthogonal equivalent frames intersecting at a
column of a two-way slab.
4
1 1 For slahs with bonded tendons, it shall be permined to reduce
408.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in A,. mtn by the arec1 of the bonded pre~lrcssed rcinforcemet1l
Prestressed Slabs located within the area u.~ed to determine N• for positive
moment. or within tht width of slab defined in Section
408.7.5.3(a) for negative moment.
408.6.2.1 For prestrcssed slabs, the effective prestress
force A.,,sf se shall provide a m11111nurn average
408.7 Reinforcement Detailing
compressive stress of 0.9 MPa on the slab section
tributary to the tendon or tendon group. For slabs with
408.7.1 General
varying cross section along the slab span, either parallel
or perpendicular to the tendon or tendon group, the
408.7.l.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
minimum average effective prestress of 0.9 MPa is
accordance with Section 420.6.1 .
required at every cross section tributary to the tendon or
tendon group along the span.
408.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
408.6.2.2 For slabs with bonded prestressed prestresscd reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4.
reinforcement, total quantity of As and Aps shall be
adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the
408.7.1.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement shall
cracking load calculated on the basis off r defined m
be in accordance with Section 425.5.
Section 41 9.2 .3.
408.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be detailed in accordance
408.6.2.2.J For slabs with both flexural and shear design
with Section 425.6.
strength at least twice the required strength, Section
408.6.2.2 need not be satisfied.
408.7.2 Flexural Reinforcement Spacing
408.6.2.3 For prestressed slabs, a m1111111um area of
408.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be in accordance
bonded deformed lo11gitudinal reinforcement, As. min , shall
with Section 425.2.
be provided in the pre-compressed tensile zone in the
direction of the span under consideration in accordance
408.7.2.2 For non-prestressed solid slabs, maximum
with Table 408.6.2.3.
spacing s o f deformed longitudinal reinforcement shall be
the lesser of 2h and 450 mm at critical sections, and the
lesser of 3h and 450 mm at other sections.
408.7.2.3 For prestressed slabs with uniformly

distributed loads, maximum spacing s of tendons or
Association of Structural Engineers ar the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

groups of tendons in at least one direction shall he the a. Positive moment rcinforccmenl shall extend to the
,,. lesser of 8h and 1.5 m. edge of slab and have cmbe<lment, straight or
hooked, at least 150 mm. into spandrel beams,
408.7.2.4 Concentrated loads and openings shall be columns, or walls;
considered in detennining tendon spacing.
b. Negative moment reinforcement shall be bent,
408.7.3 Corner Restraint in Slabs hooked, or otherwise anchored into spandrel beams,
columns, or walls, and shall be developed at the face
408.7.3.1 At exterior corners of slabs supported by edge of support.
walls or where one or more edge beams have a value off
greater than 1.0, reinforcement at top and bottom of slab 408.7.4.l.2 Where a slab is not supported by a span<lrel
shall be designed to resist Mu per unit width due to comer beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or where a slab
effects equal to the maximum positive Mu per unit width cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of
in the slab panel. reinforcement shall be permitted within the slab.
408.7.3.1.1 Factored moment due to comer effects, Mu, 408.7.4.1.3 For slabs without beams, reinforcement
shall be assumed to be about an axis perpendicular to the extensions shall be in accordance with (a) tltrough (c):
diagonal from the comer in the top of the slab and about
an axis parallel to the diagonal from the comer in the a. Reinforcemenl lengths shall be at least in accordance
bottom of the slab. with Figure 408. 7.4. I .3{a), and if slabs act as primary
members resisting lateral loads, reinforcement
408.7.3.1.2 Reinforcement shall be provided for a lengths shall he at least those required by analysis;
distance in each direction from the comer equal to 1/5 the
longer span. b. If adjacent spans are unequal, extensions of negative
moment reinforcement beyond the face of support in
408.7.3. 1.3 Reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the accordance with Figure 408. 7.4. l.3(a) shall be based
diagonal in the top of the slab and perpendicular to the on the longer span;
diagonal in the bottom of the slab. Alternatively,
reinforcement shall be placed in two layers parallel to the c. Bent bars shall be pennitted only where the depth-lo
sides of the slab in both the top and bottom of the slab. span ratio pennits use of bends of 45 degrees or less.
408.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestrcsscd 408.7.4.2 Structural Integrity

Slabs
408.7.4.2.1 All bottom deformed bars or defonnc<l wires
408.7.4.1 Termination of Reinforcement within the column strip, in each direction, shall be
continuous or spliced with full mechanical, full welded, or
408.7.4.1.l Where a slab is supported on spandrcl Class B tension splices. Splices shall be located in
beams, columns, or walls, anchorage of reinforcement accordance with Figure 408. 7.4.1.3(a).
perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall salisfy (a) and
(b):
11
National S\ructurai Code of the Philippiner-; Volurne I, i Edition, 2015
4-54 CHAPTER 4 - Structural ConcretfJ
... LOCATION
MINIIIUM • Aa
-
AT.CTION
i
WffllOUT DROP PANELS
0.30ln I , 0.30t,,. • 1 } \
I
0.331.i
WITH DRO, PANl!U
O33/n j 'j
t
50l)b
1,1 ; ~.20t.. •f •, 020 1 f! 0.201 ·: I• 0.20ln° 1 .IJ
TOP I ~ . ,. --: , . ·- :' 1 : I I . I
ReMAINOER
IL1
COLUMN
fflllP
,,i
~~ ,-,somm
Ili : :
!l
l
'I
I
l:
1 150mm--:rf
l It1
·~
BOTTOII 100%
l l LA,-...... i ,..=-,;::::..
i
.
OI wket WII
conronn 10 4811.7.u
--------...
,-_.;;..--
l\
!
I i
11-.. ....1, ,.1 1
TOP
,
,t
0.22l11 0.22(n -,.-
I· ·
f-r 0.22ln
i • •I
~t.J
I r:1 :::J ~1so mm rlT
IOTTOM
FeAAIIIICIER _ ,
1
r-tq- - - -mm- - - - -
l-150
....
:: • l- 0. 151,
Mu. 0.15(., ~ ..,.. ...... :n ,J..
1 iI
Figure 408.7.4.I.3(a)
Minimum Extensions for Deformed Reinforcement in Two-Way Slabs without Beams
(a) Slat> of normal proportions
Punching sheer cracit 0.3in

not Intercepted by top
reinforcement- - - '
(b) Thick slab
Figure 408.7.4.1.J(b)
Punching Shear Cracks in Slabs with Rcinforcemcint Extensions Consistent with Figure 408.7.4.1.3(a)
Associetion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

408.7.4.2.2 At least two of the column strip bottom bars 408.7.5.S Termination of Deformed Reinforcement
or wires in each direction shall pass within the region in Slabs with Unbonded Tendons
•' bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column
and shall he anchored at exterior supports. 408.7.5.5.t Length of deformed reinforcement required
by Section 408.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
408.7.4.2.3 In slabs with shcarheads where it is not (b):
practical to pass the bottom bars through the column in
accordance with Section 408. 7.4.2.2, at least two hottom a. In pos1t1ve moment areas, lcnglh of reinforcement
bars or wires in each direction shall pass through the shall be at least I n/3 and be centered in those areas;
shearhcad as close to the column as practicable and be
continuous or spliced with full mechanical, foll welded, or b. In negative moment areas, reinforcement shall extend
Class I3 tension splices. At exterior columns, the bars or at least l n/6 on each side of the face of support.
wires shall be anchored at the shearhcad.
408.7.5.6 Structural Integrity
408.7.5 Flexural Reinforcement in Prestressed
Slabs 408.7.5.6.1 Except as permitted in Section 408.7.5.6.3,
at least lwo tendons with 12 mm. diameter or larger strand
408.7.5.1 External tendons shall be attached to the slab shall he placed in each direction at columns in accordance
in a manner that maintains the specified eccentricity with (a) or (h):
between the tendons and the concrete centroid through the
full range of anticipated member dcflct:tions. a. Tendons shall pass through the region bounded by
the longitudinal reinforcement orthe column;
408.7.5.2 If bonded deformed longitudinal reinforcement
is required to satisfy flexural strength or for tensile stress h. Tendons shall be anchored within the region hounded
conditions in accordance with Eq. 408.6.2.3(b), the by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column, and
detailing requirements of Section 407. 7 .3 shall be the anchorage shall he located beyond the column
satisfied. centroid and away from the anchored span.
408.7.5.3 Bonded longitudinal reinforcement required by 408.7.5.6.2 Outside of the column and shear cap faces,
Eq. 408.6.2.3( e) shall be placed in the top of the slab, and the two structural integrity tendons required by Section
shall he in accordance with (a) through (c): 408. 7.5.6.1 shall pass under any orthogonal tendons in
adjacent spans.
a. Reinforcement shall be distributed between lines that
are 1. Sh outside opposite faces of the column 408.7.5.6.3 Slabs with tendons not satisfying Section
support; 408.7.5.6.1 shall be permitted if bonded bottom deformed
reinforcement is provided in each direction in accordance
b. At lcasl four deformed bars, deformed wires, or with Sections 408.7.5.6.3.1 through 408.7.5.6.3.3.
bonded strands shall be provided in each direction;
408.7.5.6.3.1 Minimum bottom dcfonm:d reinforcement
c. Maximum spacing s between bonded longitudinal As in each direction shall he the greater of (a) and (b):
reinforcement shall not exceed 300 mm.
408.7.5.4 Termination of Pl'estressed Reinforcement a. (408.7.5.6.3.Ja)
408.7.5.4.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be

2.1bwd
designed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9. A.= (408.7.5.6.3.lb)
b. ., - -
[y -
408.7.5.4.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
shall he designed and detailed in accordance with Section where bw is the width of the column face through which
425.8. the reinforcement passes.
408.7.5.6.3.2 Bottom deformed reinforcement

calculated in Section 408.7.5.6.3.1 shall pass within the
region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
column and shall he anchored at exterior supports.
408.7.S.6.3.3 Bottom deformed reinforcement shall be Table 408.7.7.1.2

anch9red
•
to develop f y beyond the column or shear cap Shear Stud Location and Spacing Limits
face.
Maximum
Direction Description diSlance or
408.7.6 Shear Reinforcement - Stirrups ofnm1- of Condllion
spacing,
lUrement measurem~nl mm.
408.7.6.1 Single-leg, simple-U, multiple-U, and closed Distance
stirrups shall be permitted as shear reinforcement. from
column face
408.7.6.2 Stirrup anchorage and geometry shall be in to first All d/2
peripheral
accordance with Section 425. 7.1. line of
Perpen- shear studs
408.7.6.3 If stirrups are provided, location and spacing dicular to Non pre-
shall be in accordance with Table 408.7.6.3. column stressed Vu ~ <J,O.S.ffj 3d/4
Constant slab with
face
Spacing
Table 408.7.6.3 Non pre-
between d/2
First Stirrup Location and Spacing Limits stressed Vu > ,j>0.5.ffj
peripheral
slab with
lines of
Prestrcssed slabs
Maximum shear studs
distance
conforming to Section 3d/4
Direction of Description of
measurement or spacing, 422.6.5.4
measurement
mm. Spacing
between
Distance from adjacent
column face to first d/2 Parallel
shear sluds
Perpendicular to stirrup to
on All 2d
column face column
Spacing between peripheral
d/2 face line nearest
stirrups
to column
Spacing between face
Parallel to column vertical legs of 2d
face slirrups
408.8 Non-Prestressed Two-Way Joist Systems
408.7.7 Shear Reinforcement- Headed Studs 408.8.1 General
408.7.7.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be 408.8.1.1 Non-prestressed two-way joist construction
permitted if placed perpendicular to the plane of the slab. consists of a monolithic combination of regularly spaced
ribs and a top slab designed to span in two orthogonal
408.7.7.1.1 The overall height of the shear stud assembly directions.
shall be at least the thickness of the slab minus the sum of
(a) through (c): 408.8.J.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm. at any
location along the depth.
a. Concrete cover on the top flexural reinforcement;
408.8.1.3 Overall depth of ribs shall not exceed 3.5
b. Concrete cover on the base rail; times the minimum width.
c. 1/2 the bar diameter of the flexural tension 408.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
reinforcement. 750mm.
408.7.7.1.2 Headed shear stud reinforcement location and 408.8.1.5 V cshall be pennitted to be taken as 1.1 times
spacing shall be in accordance with Table 408.7.7.1.2. the values calculated in Section 422.5.
408.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom bar

in each joist shall be continuous and shall be anchored to
develop f y at the face of supports.
Ast;;ociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, lnr.. (ASEP)

CHAP1 EH 4 - Strucluml Conr:rnt~ 4-~17
408.8.1.7 Reinforcement area perpendicular to the ribs 408.10.J.2 Variations from the limitations in Section
shall satisfy slab moment strength requirements, 408. I 0.2 shall be permitted if demonstrated hy ana lysis
considering load concentrations, and shall be at least the that equilibrium and geometric compatibility are satisfied,
shrinkage and temperature reinforcement area in the design strength at every section is at least equal to the
accordance with Section 424.4. required strength, and serviceability conditions. including
limits on dcOcction, are met.
408.8.1.8 Two-way joist construction not satisfying the
limitations of Sections 408.8.1.1 through 408.8. I .4 shall 408.10.l.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports
be designed as slabs and beams. shall be treated as square supports with the same urea.
408.8.2 Joist Systems with Structural Fillers 408.10.2 Limitations for Use of Direct Design
Method
408.8.2.1 If permanent burned clay or concrete tile
fillers of material having a unit compressive strength at 408.10.2.1 There ~hall be at least three continuous
least equal to f~ in the joists are use<l, Sections spans in each direction.
408.8.2.1. l and 408.8.2.1.2 shall apply.
408.10.2.2 Successive span lengths measured center-to
408.8.2.1. l Slab thickness over fillers shall be at least center of supports in each direction shall not differ by
the greater of 1/12 the clear distance between ribs and more than one-third the longer span.
40mm.
408.10.2.3 Panels shall be rectangular, with the ratio of
408.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative longer to shorter panel dimensions, measured center to
moment strength, it shall be permitted to include the center of supports, not to exceed 2.
vertical shells of tillers in contact with the ribs. Other
portions of fillers shall not be inducted in strength 408.10.2.4 Column offset shall not exceed IO percent of
calculations. the span in direction of offset from either axis between
centerlines of successive columns.
408.8.3 Joist Systems with Other Fillers
408.10.2.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and
408.8.3.1 If fillers not complying with Section 408.8.2. l uniformly distributed over an entire panel.
or removable forms are used, slab thickness shall be at
least lhc greater of 1/12 the clear distance between ribs 408.10.2.6 Un factored live load shall not exceed two
and 50 mm. times the unfactored dead load.
408.9 Lift-slab Construction 408.J0.2.7 For a panel with beams between supports on
all sides, Eq. 408.10.2.?a shall be satisfied for beams in
408.9.1 ln slabs constructed with lift-slab methods the two perpendicular directions.
where it is impractical to pass the tendons required by
Section 408.7.5.6.1 or the bottom bars required by Section
408.7.4.2 or 408.7.5.6.3 through the column, at least two (408.10.2.7a)
post-tensioned tendons or two bonded bottom bars or
wires in each direction shall pass through the lifting collar
as close to the column as practicable, and be continuous where a 11 and a 12 are calculated by
or spliced with full mechanical, full welded, or Cluss B
tension splices. At exterior columns, the reinforcement
shall be anchored at the lifting colhir. (408.1 0.2.?b)
408.10 Direct Design Method

408.10.3 Total Factored Static Moment for a Span
408.1 O.J General
408.10.3.1 Total factored static moment, M 0 , for a span
408.10.1.l Two-way slabs satisfying the limits in shall be calculated for a strip bounded laterally by the
Section 408. l 0.2 shall be perrnitled to be designed in panel centerline on each side of lhe centerline of supports.
accordance with this section.
Natiorii,11S,ructurfl! Code ol the Philippine~; Volunm I. i" Eliiiion. 201 ti

4-58 CH.APTER 4 - Stwctu;al Concrete
408.10.3.2 The absolute sum of positive and average 408.10.4.5 Negative Mu shall be the greater of the two
negptive Mu in each direction shall be at least: interior negative Mu calculated for spans framing into a
common support unless an analysis is made to distribute
qufzt~ the unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffnesses
(408.10.3.2)
Mo= 8 ofadjoining elements.
408.10.3.2.l In Eq. 408.10.3.2, f" is the clear span length 408.10.4.6 Edge beams or edges of slabs shall be
in the direction that moments are considered, shall extend designed to resist in torsion their share of exterior
from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets, or walls, negative Mu.
and shall be at least 0. 65l'i.
408.10.5 Factol'ed Moments in Column Strips
408.I0.3.2.2 In Eq. 408.10.3.2, if the transverse span of
panels on either side of the centerline of supports varies, 408.I0.5.l The column strip shall resist the portion of
1 2 shall be taken as the average of adjacent transverse interior negative Mu in accordance with Table 408. l 0.5.1.
spans.
Table 408.10.5.l
408.10.3.2.3 In Eq. 408.10.3.2, if the span adjacent Portion of Interior Negative Mu in Column Strip
and parallel to a slab edge is being considered, the
distance from edge to panel centerline shall be substituted l fl
for 1 2 • 0.5 1.0 2.0
0 0.75 0.75 0.75
408.10.4 Distribution of Total Factored Static ~ 1.0 0.90 0.75 0.45
Moment Note: Lincnr interpolations shall be made bctwee11 values show11.
408.10.4.1 In an interior span, M 0 shall he distributed 408.10.5.2 The column strip shall resist the portion of
as follows: 0. 65MO to negative moment and 0. 3SMO to exterior negative Mu m accordance with Table
positive moment. 408.10.5.2.
Table 408.10.5.2
408.10.4.2 In an end span, M0 shall be distributed Portion of Exterior Negative Mu in Column Strip
inaccordance with Table 408.10.4.2.
Table 408.10.4.2 Pc
Distribution Coetlicicnts for End Spans 0.5 1.0 2.0
0 l.O 1.0 1.0
Slabwllhout Exterior
0
Slab ~2.5 0.75 0.75 0.75
with bean~• hchve~n edge fully
beams interior supports reslralned 2:1.0
0 1.0 l.O LO
Rxterior behveen Without With ~2.5 0.90 0.75 0.45
edge Hit edge edge Note: Linear interpolations shall be made betwee11 values shown. PTis
unrestrained SUl)POrts beam beam calculated using Eq. 408.I0.5.2a where C is calculated using Eq.
Interior 408.I0.5.2b.
0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
neii~tive
Positive 0.63 0.57 (l.52 0.50 0.35 (408.l0.5.2a)
Exterior ()
neiiative 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
x)x3y (408.10.5.2h)
C=I ( 1-0.63y
408.10.4.3 Modification of negative and positive
3
factored moments by up to IO percent shall be permitted
if the total factored static moment for a panel, M 0 , in the 408.10.5.3 For T- or L-sections, it shall be permitted to
direction considered is at least that calculated by Eq. calculate the constant C in Eq. 408.10.5.2b by dividing
408.10.3.2. Moment redistribution in accordance with the section, as given in Section 408.4.1.8, into separate
Section 406.6.5 is not pennitted. rectangular parts and summing the values of C for each
part.
408.10.4.4 Critical section for negative Mu shall be at
the face of rectangular supports. 408.10.5.4 If the width of the column or wall is at least
(3/4)/2 , negative Mu shall he uniformly distributed
across .f2.
As!;oeio1tion of Structui~! Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

408.J0.5.5 The column strip s hall resisl the porlion of 408.10.7 Factored Moments iu Columns and Walls
positive M,, in acrnnlance with Table 408.1 0.5.5.
408.10.7.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a
Table 408.10.5.5 slab system sha ll res ist momen ts caused by factored loads
Portion of Positive Mu in Column Strip on the sla b system .
f . ff 408.10.7.2 At an interior s upport. columns or walls

afl f 2f f1. 0.5 1.0 2 .0 above a nd below the slab shall resist the factored moment
() 0.60 0.60 0.60 calculatect by Eq. 408.10.7 .2 in direct propo rtion to their
2:1. 0 0.90 0.75 0.45 stiffnesses unless a general analysis is made.
Note: Line~r in1crpoh11io11s sholl he nrndc between values shown.
408.10.5.6 For slabs with beams between supports, the (408.1 0.7.2)
slab ponion of column strips shall res ist column strip
mome nts not resisted by beams. where qnu', f 2' , and f 1 / , reler to the shorter span.
408.10.5. 7 Factored Moments in Beams 408.10.7.3 The gravity load moment to be transferred
between s lab a nd edge column in accordance wi th Section
408.10.5.7.1 [foa ms between supports shall resist the 408.4.2.3 shall not be less than 0. 3M0 .
po1iio n of column strip M« in accordance with Table
408.10.5.7. I. 408.10.8 Factored Shear in Slab Systems with Beams
Table 408.111.5.7.l 408.10.8.l 13eams between suppons shall resist the

Portion of Column Strip Mu in Beams portion of shear in accordance with Table 408. I0.8.1
caused by factored loads on tributary areas in accordance
Distribution coefficient with Figure 408. I 0.8. I.
0 0
2:1.0 0.85 Table 408.10.8.l Portion of Shear Resisted by Beam
Nole: l .incar interpolation shall be made between vn lues shown.
(a,1 f .i./f1) Distribution Coefficienl
0 0
408.1().5.7.2 In addition lo moments calculated 2'. 1.0 1.0
according to Section 408.10.5. 7.1, bcums shall resist
moments ca used by factored loads applied directly to the Nore: Line-.ir intcrpolalion shall he madi, between values sh,lwn.
beams, including the weight of the beam stem above and
below the slab.
408.10.6 Factored Moments in Middle Strips
408.10.6.1 T hat portion of negative and positi ve

factored moments not resisted by column .strips shall be
proportionately as.signed to corresponding hal f middle
strips.
408.10.6.2 lJach midd le strip shall resist the sum or the

mome nts assigned to its two half middle 1.trips.
408.10.6.3 A middle strip adjacent and parallel to a wall

supported edge shall resist twice the mo mem assigned to
the half middle strip corresponding to the first row of
Figure 408.10.8. 1
interio r supports.
Tributary Area for Shear on an Interior Beam
408.10.8.2 In addition to shears calculated aeeon.!ing lo loading, a separate analysis of each floor or roof with the
Section 408.10.8.1, beams shall resist .shear.,; caused by for ends 01· columns considered lixcd is permitted.
factored load:; applied directly to the beams, inclu<ling the
weight of the beam stem above and hclow the slab. 408.11.2.6 If slab-beams are analy1.ed separately, ii.
shall be permitted to calculate the moment at a given
408.10.8.3 Calculation of required slab shear strength support by a!>!>uming that tile slab-beam i!i lix.ed at
based on the assumption that loads is distributed to suppo11s two or more panels away, provided the slab
supporting bcams in accordance with Sc<.:tion 408.10.8.1 continues beyond the assumed fixed supports.
shall he permitted. Shear resistance Lo total V11 occurring:
011 a panel slmll be provided. 408.1 l.3 Slab-Reams
408.11 Equivalent Frame Method 408.11.3.t '!'he moment of ine11ia of slah-bcams lrom
the center of the column to the face of the <.:olumn,
408.11.1 General hraekct, or capital shall be assumed equal to the moment
or inertia of the slah-hcam at the face of the column,
408.11.1.1 All sections of slabs and supporting bracket, or rnpital divided by the quantity (1 - c,./t1Y,
mcmbers in two-way slah systems dcsigncd by the where c2 and .f2 arc measured transverse to the direction
equivalent frame method shall resist moments and shears of the span for which moments are being determined.
obtained from an analysis in accordance with Sections
408.11.2 through 408.1 1.6. 408.1 l.3.2 Variation in momcnl of ine11ia along the
axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
408.11.1.2 Live load shall be arranged m acrnrdance
with Section 406.4.3. 408.11.3.3 It shall be permitted to usc the gross cross-
sectional area of concrete to determine the moment of
408.11.1.3 rt shall be permitted to account for the inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside or joints
contribution of metal column capitals to stiffness, or column capitals.
resistance to moment, and resistance to shear.
408.1 l.4 Columns
408.11.1.4 Il shall be permitted to neglect the change in
length of columns and slab!> due to direct stress, and 408.11.4. t The moment of inertia of columns from top
deflcclions due to shear. lo bouom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed to
be infinite.
408.11.2 ~quivalent Frames
408.11.4.2 Variation ii1 moment of inertia along the axis
408.11.2.1 The strncture shall he modeled hy equivalent of columns shall be taken into account.
frames on column lines taken longitudinally and
transversely through the building. 408.11.4.3 It shall be permitted to use the gross cross-
scctional area or concrete to determine the moment or
408.11.2.2 Each equivalent frame shall consist of a row inertia of columns at any cross scction outside of joints or
of columns or supports and slab-beam strips bounded column capitals.
laterally by the panel centerline on each side or the
centerline of columns or supports. 408.11.5 Torsional Members
408.ll.2.3 Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge !>hall 408.11.5.1 Torsional members shall be assumed to havc
be bounded by that edge and the centerline of the adjacent a constant cross section throughout their length consisting
panel. of the gfcatcsl of(a) through (c):
408.11.2.4 Columns or supports shall he assumed to be a. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the
attached lo slab-bcam strips by torsional members column, hrackct, or capital in the direction of the
transverse lo the direction of the span for which moments span for which moments are heing determined;
are being calculated and extending to the panel centerlines
on each side or a column. b. For monolithic or fully composite construction, the
portion of slab specified in (a) plus that part of the
408.11.2.5 Analysis or each equivalent frame in its transverse beam ahovc and hclow thc slab;
entirety shall be permitted. Alternatively, for gravity
c. The transverse beam m accordance with Section
408.4.1.8.
SECTION 409
BEAMS
408.11.5.2 Where beams frame inlo columns in the
direction of the span for which moments are being 409.1 Scope
calculakd, the torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by
the ratio of the moment or inertia of the slab with such a 409.1.l This section shall apply to the design of non-
heam lo the moment of inertia of the slab without such a prestressed and prestresscd beams, includ ing:
beam.
a. Composite beams of concrete elements constructed in
408.11.6 Factored Moments separate placements but connected so that all
elements resist loads as a unit;
408.11.6.1 At interior supports, the critical section for
negative Mu in both column and middle strips shall be h. One-way joist systems in accordance with Section
taken at the face of rectilinear supporls, hut not farther 409.8;
away lhun 0.175L\ from the center of a column.
c. Deep beams in accordance with Section 409. 9.
408.11.6.2 At exterior supports without brackets or
capitals, the critical section for negative M 11 in the span 409.2 General
perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at the face or the
supporting element. 409.2.1 Materials
408.11.6.3 At exterior supports with brackets or 409.2.1. l Design properties for concrete shall be
capilals, the critical section for negative Mu in the span selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from
the face of the supporting clement not exceeding one-half 409.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall
lhc projection of the bracket or capital beyond the face of be selected l'o he in accordance with Section 420.
the supporting element.
409.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements
408.11.6.4 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports for embedmeots in concrete shall be in accordance with
shall he assumed to be square supports with the same area Section 420.7.
for location of critical section for negative design
moment. 409.2.2 Connection to Other Members
408.tt.6.5 Where slab systems within limitations or 409.2.2.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-column
Section 408.10.2 are analyzed by the equivalent frame joints shall satisfy Section 415.
method, it shall be permitted to reduce the calculated
moments in such proportion that the absolute sum of the 409.2.2.2 For precast construction, connections shall
positive and average negative design moments need not satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 416.2.
exceed the value obtained from Eq. 408.10.3.2.
409.2.3 Stability
408.11.6.6 It shall be permitted tu distribute moments at
critical sections to column strips, beams, and middle strips 409.2.3.1 lf a beam is not continuously laternlly braced,
in aooordance with the direct design method in Section (a) and (b) shall be satisfied:
408.1 0 provided that Eq. 408. J0.2. 7a is satisfied.
a. Spacing of lateral bracing shall not exceed 50 times
the least width of compression t1ange or face;
b. Spacing of lateral bracing shall take into account

effects of eccentric loads.
409.2.3.2 In prestressed beams, buckling or thin webs

and tlangcs shall be considered. If there is intermittent
conlact between prestn.:ssed reinforcement and an
oversize duct, member buckling between contact points
shall be considered.
409.2.4 'f-Beam Construction 409.3.1.l.1 for f y other than 420 MPn. the expressions
in Tahlc 409.3.l.1 shall be multiplied by
409.2.4.1 In T-bearn construction, Oangc and web ( 0.4 + / y/700).
concrete shall he pla(.;ed mono) ithieally or made
compo::.itc in accord1J11Ce with Section 416.4. 409.3.1. 1.2 For non-prestrcsscd beams made of
lightweight concrete having We in the range of !440 to
409.2.4.2 Effective flange width shall he in accorda.nce 1840 kglm3, the expressions in Table 409.3.1.1 slrnll be
with Section 406.3.2. multi plied by the greater of(a) and (b):
409.2.4.3 For T-beam flanges where lhe primary fl exural a. 1. 65 - 0. 0003wc;

slab reinforcement is parallel to the longitudinal ax is of
the beam, rein forcement in the flange perpendicular to the
b. 1.09.
longitudinal axis of the beam shall he in accordance with
Section 407.5 .2.3.
409.3.1.1.3 For non-prestrcssed composite beams made
or a combination of lightweight and normal-weight
409.2.4.4 For torsional design accord ing to Section concrete shored during construction, and where the
422.7. the overhanging flan ge width used lo calculate
lightweight concrete is in compression, the modifier of
Ac,,,Ag, and Pep shall be in accordance with (a) and (b): Section 409.3.1.1.2 shal I apply.
a. The overhanging flange widlh shall include that 409.3. 1.2 The th ickness of a concrete floor finish shall
portion of slab on each side of the beam extending a be permiued to be included in h if it is placed
distance equal to the projection of the beum above or monolithically \Vilh the beam, or if the Boor finish is
below the slab, whichever is greater, but not greater designed to be composite with the beam in accordance
than four times the slab thickness; with Sect ion 4 16.4.
b. The overhanging flanges shall be neglected in cases 409.3.2 Calculated Deflection Limits
where the parameter AP 2 / Pc,> for solid sections or
A p2 /Pep for hollow sections calculated for a beam 409.3.2.1 For non-prcstresscd beams not satisfying
with flanges is less than that calculated for the same Section 409.3.1 and for prestressed beams, immediate and
beam ignori ng the flanges. ti me-dependent deflections shall be ca lculated in
accordance with Section 424.2 and shall not exceed the
409.3 Desig n Limits limits in Section 424.2.2.
409.3.1 M inimum Beam Depth 409.3.2.2 For non-prestressed composite concrete beams
satisfying Section 409.3.l, deflections occurring atl:er the
409.:U.1 For non-prcstresscd beams not supporting or member hc<.:omes composite need not be calculaled.
attached Lo partitions or other cons truction likely Lo be Deflections occurring before the member becomes
damaged by large deflections, overall beam depth Ii shall composite shall be investigated unless the pre-composite
satis fy the limits in Table 409.3.1.1 , unless the ca lculated depth also satisfies Section 409.3 . l.
denection limits of Section 409.3.2 arc satisfied.
409.3.3 Reinfo r cement Strain L im it in
Table 409.3.1.1 Non-Prestressed Beams
Minimu m Dept h of Non-P rcstressed Beam s
409.3.3.1 For non-prestrcssed beams with Pu <
0. 1 0/~Ag, Et shall be at least 0.004.
Suppor t Coudit iou M inimum hfll
Simply supported f /16 409.3.4 Stress Limits in Prestressed Beams
One end continuous f/18.5
Both ends continuous .f/21 409.3.4.1 Preslressed beams shall be classified as Class
Cantilever l/8 U, T, or C in accordance with Section 424.5.2.
111 Expressions appli1:able for normal wo:ight con1:rctc and / Y - 420 MPa.
for other cases, minimum h shall be modi lied in 01:cordance with 409.3.4.2 Stresses in prestrcssed beams immed iately
Sections 409.3.1.1. l through 409.3.1.1.3, as appropriate. after transfer and at service loads shall not exceed
perm issible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and 424. 5.4.
409.4 Required Strength preslrcssed beams shall be permitted lo be designed for
Tu at lhat critical section un less a concentrated torsional
409.4.l General moment oc.curs within this distance. In that case, the
critical section shall be taken at the face of the support.
409.4. t.1 Required strength shall he calculated m
accordance with the factored load combinations m 409.4.4.4 It shall be permitted to reduce T u m
Seclion 405. accordance with Section 422.7.3.
409.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in 409.5 Design Strength

accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406.
409.5.1 General
409.4.1.3 For prestressc<l beams, effects of reactions
induced by prestressing shall he considered in accordance 409.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
with Section 405.3.1 J. design strength at all sections shall satisfy <f>S» 2:: U
including (a) through (d). Interaction between load effects
409.4.2 :Factored Moment shall be considered.
409.4.2.1 for beams built integrally with supports, Mu

at the support shall be permit.Led to be calculated at the
face or support.
409.4.3 Factored Shear
409.4.3.1 Fur beams built integrally with supports, Vu al

the support shall he permitted to be calculated at the face
of supporL 409.5.1.2 </> shall be determined in accordance with
Section 421.2.
409.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
critical section located d from the face or support for non- 409.5.2 Moment
prcstressed hcams and h/2 from the face of support for
prestressed beams shall be permitted to be designed for 409.5.2.1 If P 11 < 0. 10f~A 11 , M 11 shall he calculated in
V,. al that critical section if(a) through (c) arc satistied: accordance with Section 422.3.
a. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, 409.5.2.2 IJ Pu 2:: 0. 10/~Ag, M 11 shall be calculated in
introduces compr~-;sion into the end region of the
beam;
409.5.2.3 For prestresscd beams, external tendons shall
b. Loads are applied al or near the top surface of the be considered as unbonded tendons in calculating flexural
beam; strength, unless the extemal tendons are eflective ly
bonded to the concrete along the entire length.
c. No concentrated load occurs between the face of
support and critical section.
409.5.3 Shear
409.4.4 J.actored Torsion 409.5.3.1 V n shall be calculated in accordance with
Section 422.5.
409.4.4. l Unless determined by a more detailed analysis,
it shall be pennitted to take the torsional loading from a 409.5.3.2 For composite concrete beams, horizontal
slah as uniformly distributed along the beam.
shear strength V 111z shall be calculated in accordance with
Section 416.4.
40.9.4.4.2 For beams built integrally with supports, Tu at
the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
409.5.4 Torsion
of support.
409.5.4.1 lf Tu < <J,Tth where T th is given in Section
409.4.4.3 Sections between the face of support and a 422.7, it shall be permitted to neglect torsional effects.
critical section located d from the face of support for non- The mini mum reinforcement requirements of Section
prestressed beams or h/2 from the face of support for
409.6.4 and the dclailing requirements or Sections 409.7.5
and 409.7.6.3 need not be satisfied . u.
o. 2sffi
{y b..,d
409.5.4.2 T n shall be calculated in accordance with
Section 422.7.
b.
409.5.4.3 Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
required for torsion shall be added lo that req uired for the
V 11 , M 11 • and P., that act in comhination with the torsion. 409.6.1.3 If As provided at every section is al least one-
third greater than As required by analysis, Sections
409.S.4.4 For prcstrei,sed beams, the total area of 409.6.1.1 and 409.6. l .2 need not be satisfo.:d.
longitudinal reinforcement, As and A,,s, at each section
shall he designed to resist M 11 at that section, plus an 409.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in
additional concentric longitudinal tensile force equal to Prcstresscd Beams
Atfy , based on Tu at that section.
409.6.2.l For beams with bonded preslressed
reinforcement, totc:11 quantity of A5 and Aps shall be
409.5.4.S It shall be pcnnitted to reduce the area of
longitudinal torsional reinforcement in the tlexural adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 limes the
cracking load calculated on the basis of /,. defined in
compression zone by an amounl equal to M11 /(0. 9dfy),
Section 419.2 .3.
where M 11 occurs simultaneously with T 11 at that section,
except that the longitudinal reinforcement area shall not
409.6.2.2 For beams with both flexural and shear design
be less than the minimum required in Section 409.6.4.
strength at least twice the req uired strength, S(..-ction
409.6.2.1 need not he satisfied.
409.5.4.6 For solid sections with an aspect ratio,
hf b, ~ 4. 5 , it shall be pem1itted to use an alternative 409.6.2.3 For beams with unbondcd tendons, the
design procedure, provided the a.dequc:1cy of the procedure
minimum area of bonded defonned longitudinal
has hec:n shown by analysis and substantial agreement
reinforcement As.mtn shall be:
with results of comprehensive tcsl.s. The minimum
reinforcement requirements of Section 409.6.4 need not
he satisfied, but the detailing requirements of Sections As.min = 0. 004Acc ( 409 .6.2. 3)
409.7.5 and 409.7.6.3 apply.
where A ct is the area of that patt of the cross section
409.5.4.7 For solid prccast sections with an aspect ratio between the llexural tension face and the centroid of the
h/ b1 ~ 4 . 5 , it shall be pennitred to use an alternative gross section. ·
design procedure and open web reinforcement, provided
the adequacy uJ the procedure and reinforcement have 409.6.3 Minimum Shear Reinfo rcement
been shown by analysis and substantial agreement with
results of comprehensive tests. The mm1mum 409.6.3.t A minimum area of shear reinforcement,
reinforcement requirements of Section 409.6.4 and Av.min, shall he provided in all regions where Vu >
detailing requirements of Sections 409.7.5 and 409.7.6.3 0. S<J,Vc except for the cases in Table 409.6.3.1 , where at
need not be satisfied. least Av,111111 shall be provided where Vu > (/>V c·
409.6 Reinforcement Limits 409.6.3.2 .If shown by testing that the required Mn and
V11 can be developed, Section 409.6.3 . l need not he
409.6.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in Non- satisfied. Such tests shall simulate effects of differential
Prestrcssed Beams settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change,
based on a realistic assessment of these effects occurring
409.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement in service.
As,minsball he provided at every section where tension
reinforcement is required by analysis . 409.6.3.3 lf shear reinforcement is required and torsional
effects can be neglected according to Section 409 .5 .4 .1,
409.6.1.2 A,.,m,n shall be the greater of (a) c:1nd (b), Av.min shc:111 be in accordance with Tahlc 409.6.3.3
except as provided in Section 409.6.1.3. For a statically
determinate heam with a flange in tension, the value of
bw shall be the lesser of b r an<l 2 bw·
I
CI-IAPT ER 4 ·· Structural Concrete 4-65
Table 409.6.3.1
Cases Where Av.min is not Required
if0.5(/JY,. < Vu s </>Ve a.
Conditions
h < 250 mm
fntegral with Slab h ::; greater of 2.St1 or 0.Sbw
and
h < 600 mm
Construcled with steel
fibered reinforced h .$; 600 mm
normal·weighl 409.7 Reinforcement Detailing
concrete conforming
to Sections and 409.7.1 General
426.4.1.5.1 (a),
426.4.2.2(d), and 409.7.1.l Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in ,,
426.12.5.J(a)and with accordance with Section 420.6. l.
'::; 40 MPa
Vu 5 0.17</>Jffbwd
II
'oist s stem in accordance with Section 409.8
409.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
Table 409.6.3.3 Required At>,mtn prcstressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4.
Beam Type
Non-prcstres.~ed (T,bW
409.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be in
and prestresscd 0.06Zv1c/- a
Greater y, accordance with Section 425.5.
with A,,,J;. < or: - -- - b~w--'---l--1
0.40 (Aps + f,.u +As+ {y) 0.35, h
/vt
409.7.t.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with
{T,bw
0.062v /cf,- c Section 425.6.
Grcater vi
Prcstress~d with of: b..,
Lesser 0.35-,. d 409.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
A,,..f,. ~ 0.40 (A,,.,+ !,,u + 'Yt
of:
As + /y)
e 409.7.2.l Minimum spacing s shall be m accordance
with Section 425.2.
409.6.4 Minimum Torsional Reinforcement 409.7.2.2 For non-prestressed and Class C prestressed
beams, spacing of bonded longitudinal reinforcement
409.6.4.l A minimum area of torsional reinforcement closest to the tension face shall not exceed s given in
shall be provided in all regions where Tu ~ <J>Tth Section 424.3.
409.7.2.3 For non-prestressed and Class C prestressed
409.6.4.2 If torsional reinforcement is required, beams with h exceeding 900 mm., longitudinal skin
minimum transverse reinforcement (Av+ 2At)m;,Js reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed on both side
shall be the greater of (a) and (b): faces of the beam for a distance h/2 from the tension
face. Spacing of skin reinforcement shall not exceed s
b given in Section 424.3.2, where Cc is the clear cover from
a. 0.062.[f;2'.. the skin reinforcement to the side face. It sJ1all be
{yt
pennitted to include skin reinforcement in strength
0. 35 bw calculations if a strain compatibility analysis is made.
b.
{yt
409.7.3 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed
Beams
409.6.4.3 If torsional reinforcement 1s required,
minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement At.min shall 409.7.3.l Calculated tensile or compressive force in
be the lesser of (a) and (b): reinforcement at each section of the beam shall be
developed on each side of that section.
National Structural Code ofth0 Philippines Volume I, l'h Edltion. 2016
.
I
I
4-66 Cl·li\PTEH ,) - Stwotur~li Concrate
409.7.3.2 Critic.:al locations for development of 409.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points of inllection,
reinforcement arc points of maximum stress and points db for positive moment tension reinforcement shall be
alo~g lhe span where bent or tenninated tension limited such that f for that reinforcement satisfies (a) or
reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure. (b); If reinforcement terminates beyond the centerline of
supports by a standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at
409.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point least equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be
at which it is no longer required lo resist flexure for a satisfied.
distance equal to the greater of d and 1Zd,, , except at
supports of" simply-supported spans and at free ends of a. td :s; (1.3M,JVu + fu) if end of reinforcement is
cantilevers. confined by a compressive reaction;
409.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement b. .fd :s; (M,JYu + fu.) if end of reinforcement is not
shall have an embedment length at least t d beyond the confined by a compressive reaction.
point where bent or te1minated tension reinforcement is
no longer required to resist flexure. Where: Mn is calculated assuming all reinforcement
at the section is stressed to f y and V11 is calculated at
409.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be the section. At a support, I a is the cmbedment length
terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is beyond the center of the support. At a point of
satisfied: inflection, la is the embedment length beyond the
point of inflection limited to the greater of d
a. Vu ~ (2/J)q,Vn at the cutoff point; and 12d,,.
b. For 36 mm <P bars and smaller, continuing 409.7.3.8.4 At least one-third of the negative moment
reinforcement provides double the area required for reinforcement at a support shall have an embedmcnl
flexure at the cutoff point and Vu~ (3/4)</>V,1 • length beyond the point of inflection at least the greatest
of d, 12db , and .f11 /16 .
c. Stirrup or hoop area in excess of that required for
shear and torsion is provided along eat:h tenninated 409.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Prestt·essed
bar or wire over a distance 3/4d from the Beams
termination point. Excess stirrup or hoop area shall
be at least 60bws/ f yt• Spacing s shall not exceed 409.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
member in a manner that maintains the specified
d/8fJb-
eccentricity between ~he tendons and the concrete
409.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for centroid through the full range or anticipated member
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is not det1ections.
stepped, or tapered beams; or where tension 409.7.4.2 If non-prestressed reinforcement is required to
reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face. satisfy flexural strength, the detailing requirements of
Section 409.7.3 shall be satisfied.
409.7.3.7 Oevelopment of tension reinforcement by
bending across the web to be anchored or made 409.7.4.3 Termination of Prestressed Reinforcement
continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of
beam shall be permitted. 409.7.4.3.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
desigoed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9.
409.7.3.8 Termination of Reinforcement
409.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers shall
409.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third the be designed and detailed in accordance with Section
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend 425.8.
along the beam bottom into the support al least 150 mm.,
except for preeast beams where such reinforcement shall 409.7.4.4 Termination of deformed reinforcement in
extend at least to the center of the bearing length. beams with unbonded tendons
409.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth the 409.7.4.4.1 Length of dcfonned reinforcement required
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend by Section 409.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
along the beam bottom into the support at least J 50 mm. (b):
,l\ssoGiaUon Gt Structur;{I Engin,,efs of th,~ Philipprnf.!S, Inc. (J\S!:.P)

a. Al least f n/ 3 in pus1t1ve mon,ent areas and he be continuous with longitudi nal reinforccrnent mid, if
centered in those areas; extended into a region of compression, shall be anchored
d / 2 beyonci mid-depth of'mcmbcr.
h. At lea.st .f11 / 6 on each side ol' the face or support in
negative moment areas. Table 409.7.6.2.2 Maximum Spacin ~ of Shear
Reinforcemi:nt
409.7.5 Longit udinal Torsional Rclnforccmcn(
Maxim nm s, mm
409.7.S.1 Jf tersional reinforcement is required. Non-
longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be distri buted vs prcstrcssed
Prestrcsscd
around the perimeter of closed stirrups that satisfy Section beam
beam
425 .7.1.6, or hoops with spacing not greater than 300 mm .
tl 3h
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be inside the stirrup
or hoop and at least one longitudinal har or tendon shall !, o::n JRbwd
l.esscr -
2
-4
of:
be placed in each corner.
600
409.7.5.2 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall
have a diameter at least 0.042 times the transverse
> 0.33fj)_bwd
Lesser
d
-4 . '3h
-
8
reinforcement .spacing, but not less than 10 mrn. of:
300
409.7.5.3 I .ongitndinal torsional reinforcement shall
extend for a distance or at least (bt + d) beyond the point 409.7.6.3 Torsion
required by analysis.
409.7.6.3.1 If rcqui red, transverse torsional reinforcement
409.7.5.4 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be shall be closed stirrups satisfying Section 425. 7.1.6 or
developed at the face of the support at both ends of the hoops.
beam.
409. 7.6.3.2 Transverse torsional reinforcement shall
409.7.6 Transverse Reinforcement extend a d istance of at least (b e + d) beyond the point
required by analysis.
409.7.6.1 General
409. 7.6.3.3 Spadng of transverse torsional reinforcement
409.7.6.1.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be in shull not exceed the lesser of Ph f B and 300 111111.
accordance with this section. The most restrictive
requirements shall apply. 409.7.6.3.4 For hollow sections, the distance from the
centerline of the transverse torsional rei nforccmcnt to the
409.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall be in inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall be at
accordance with Section 425.7. least 0. 5A 0 1i/ Ph ·
409.7.6.2 Shear 409.7.6.4 Lateral Support of Compression

Reinforcement
409. 7.6.2. l If required, shear rci nforccment shall be
provided using stirrups, hoops, or longitudinal bent hars. 409. 7.6.4.l Transverse reinforcement shall be provided
thro ughout the distance where longitudinal compression
409.7.6.2.2 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement reinfo rcement is required. Latera l suppm t of longitudinal
shall be in accordance with Tahle 409.7.6.2.2. compression reinforcement shall be provided by closed
stirrups or hoops in accordance with Sections 409. 7 .6.4.2
409.7.6.2.3 Inclined stirrups and longitudinal b,trs bent lo through 409.7.6.4.4.
act as shear reinforcement shall he spaced so that every
45-<legree line, extending d / 2 toward the reaction from 409.7.6.4.2 Size of transverse reinforcement shall be at
mid-depth or member to longitudinal tension least (a) or (b). Deformed wire or welded wire
reinforce ment, shall be crossed hy at least one line of reinforcement of equivalent area shall be pcrmiued.
shear reinforcement.
a. IO mm cp for longitudinal bars 32 mm </> and smallcr;
409.7.6.2.4 Longitudinal bars bent. to act as shear
reinforcement, if extended into a region of tension, shall
4-68 CHAPTER 4 ·- :3\ruc:tural Concrete
b. 12 mm </> for longitudinal bars 36 mm '1> and larger 409.7.7.3 Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement
anq. for longitudinal bundled bars. shall pass through the region bounded by the longitudinal
reinforcement of the column.
409.7.7.4 Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement

409.7.6.4.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not at non continuous supports shall be anchored to develop
exceed the lcasl of (a) through (c): f y at the face of the support.
a. 16db of longitudinal reinforcement; 409.7.7.5 Ir splices are necessary in continuous

structural integrity reinforcement, lhe reinforcement shall
h. 48db of transverse reinforcement; be spliced in accordance with (a) and (b):
c. Least dimension of beam. a. Positive moment reinforcement shall be spliced at or

near the support;
409.7.6.4.4 Longitudinal compression reinforcement
shall be arranged such that every comer and alternate b. Negative moment reinforcement shall be split:ed at or
compression bar shall be enclosed by the comer of the near mid-span.
transverse reinforcement with an included angle of not
more than 135 degrees, and no bar shall be farther than 409.7.7.6 Splices shall be full mechanical, full welded,
l SO mm. clear on each side along the transverse or Class B tension lap splices.
reinforcement from such an enclosed bar.
409.8 Non-Prestressed One-way Joist System~
409.7.7 Structural Integrity Reinforcement in Cast-
in-Place Beams 40~.8.l General
409.7.7.1 For beams along the perimeter of the structure, 409.8.1.1 Non-prestressed one-way Joist construction
structural integrity reinforcement shall be in accordance consists of a monolithic combination of regularly spaced
with (a) through (c): ribs and a top slab designed to span in one direction.
a. At least one-quarter the maximum positive moment 409.8.1.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm at any
reinforcement, but nut less than two bars or strands, location along the depth.
shall he continuous;
409.8.1.3 Overall depth of. ribs shall not exceed 3.5
b. At h:ast one-sixth the negative moment reinforcement times the minimum width.
at the support, but not less than two bars or strands,
shall be continuous; 409.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
750 mm.
c. Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement shall
be enclosed by closed stirrups in accordance with 409.8.J.5 Vc shall be permitted to be taken as I. I times
Section 425.7.1.6 or hoops along the clear span of the the value calculated in Section 422.5.
beam.
409.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom bar
409.7.7.2 For other than perimeter beams, structural in each joist shall be continuous and shall be anchored to
integrity reinforcement shall be in accordance with (a) or develop f y at the face of supports.
(b):
409.8.1. 7 Reinforcement perpendicular to the ribs shall
a. AL least one-quarter the maximum positive moment be provi.ded in the slab as required for flexure,
reinforcement, but not less than two bars or strands,, considering load concentrations, and shall be at least that
shall be continuous; required for shrinkage and temperature in accordance
with Section 424.4.
b. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be enclosed by
closed stirrups in accordance with Section 425.7.1.6 409.8.1.8 One-way joist construction not satisfying the
or hoops along the clear span of the beam. limitations of Sections 409 .8.1.1 through 409.8.1.4 shall
be designed as slabs and beams.
/\s:;oci:1tion of Structurc1I Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

409.8.2 Joi.~l Systems with Structural Fillers 409.9.3 Reinforc ement Limits
409.8.2.l If penna nenl burned clay or concrete tile 409.9.3.1 Distributed reinforcement along lhe side faces
lillers of material having a unit compressive strength at of deep beams shall be al least that required i11 (a) and (b):
least equal to f~ in the joists arc useu, Sections
409.8.2 . I. l and 409.8.2.1 .2 shall apply. a. The area of uistributcd reinforcement perpendicular
lo the longitudinal axis of the beam, Av :;hall be at
409.8.2.1.1 Slah thickness over tillers shall be al least least 0. 0025bws, where s is the s pacing of the
the greater of 1/ 12 the clear distance between ribs and 40 distributed transverse reinforcement;
mm.
b. The area or distributed reinforcement parallel to the
409.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative longitudinal axis of th e beam, Avh, shall be at leas t
moment strength, il shall be permitted to include lhe 0. 0025bws 2 , where s 2 is the spacing of the
vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs. Other distributed longitudinal reinforcement.
portions of fillers shall not be included in strength
calculations. 409.9.3.2 The minimum area of flexural tension
reinforcement, As,mln , shall be determined in accordance
409.8.3 Joist Systems with Other Fillers with Section 409.6.1.
409.8.3.1 lf fillers not complying with Section 409.8.2. l 409.9.4 Reinforcement Detailing
or removable forms arc used, slab thickness shall he at
lcaf.t the greater of 1/12 the clear distance between ribs 409.9.4.l Concrete cover shall he in acco rdance with
and 50 mm. Section 420.6.1.
409.9 Deep Beams 409.9.4.2 Minimum spacing for longitudinal

reinforcement shall be in at:eordance with Section 425.2.
409.9.l General
409.9.4.3 Spacing of distributed reinfon;cment required
409.9.1.1 Deep beams are members that arc loaded on in Section 409.9.3.1 shall not exceed the lesser ofd/5
one face and supported on the opposite face such thal and 300 mm.
strut-like cornprcssion clements can develop between the
loads and supports and that satisfy (a) or (b): 409.9.4.4 Development of tension reinforcement shall
account for distribution of stress in reinforcement that is
a. Clear span docs not exceed fom limes the overall not directly proportional lo the bending moment.
member depth, h;
409.9.4.5 At simple supports, positive momenl tension
b. Conce ntrated loads ex ist wilh in a distance 2h from reinforcement shall be anchored to develop f y at the face
the face of the support. of the support. Ir a deep beam is designed using Section
423, the posili vc moment tension rei nforcement shall be
409.9.1.2 Deep beams shall be designed taking into anchored in accordance with Sections 423 .8.2 mtd
account nonlinear distribution or longitudinal strain over 423.8.3 .
the depth of the beam.
409.9.4.6 At interior supports, (a) and (b) shall be
409.9.1.3 Strut-and-lie rnodds in accordance with satisfied:
Section 423 are deemed to satisfy Section 409.9.1.2.
a. Negative moment tension reinforcement shall be
409.9.2 Dimensional Limits continuous with that of the adjacent spans;
409.9.2.1 Deep beam dimensions shall be selected such b. Positive moment tension reinforcement shall he
that: continuous or spliced with that of the adjacent spans.
(409.9.2.1)
410.3.1.2 Foor colum ns with cross sections larger than
SECTION 410 requi red by conside rations of loading, it shall he
COLUMNS permitted to base gross area considered, required
reinforcement, ,md design strength on a reduced effec!ive
4.1 0.l Scope area, not less than one-hal r lhe total area. This provision
shall not apply to columns in special moment fra mes
410.1.J This section shall apply to the design of designed in accordance with Section 418.
non-presrressed, prestresscd, arnJ composite columns,
including reinforced concrete pedestals. 410.J.t.3 For columns built monolithically with a
concrete wall, the outer limits of the effective cross
410.1.2 Design of plain concrete pedestals shall he in section of the column shall not be ta ken greater
accordance with Section 414. than40mm. outside the transverse reinforcement.
410.2 General 410.3.J.4 For columns with two or more interlm:king

spirals, outer limits or the cffcc! ive cross section shall be
410.2.l Materials taken at a distance outside the spirals equal to the
minimum required concrete cover.
410.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
selected to be in accordance with Section 419. 410.3.1.5 Tr a reduced effective area is considered
according to Sections 4 10.3.l.J through 4 10.3. 1.4,
410.2.1.2 Design prope1tics for steel reinlorce1rn.:nl and structural analysis and design of oLher parts of the
structural skel used in composite columns shall be structure that interact wilh the column shall be based on
selected to be in 11t.:cordance with Section 420. the actual cross section.
410.2.1.3 Materials, dcsign, and detailing requirements 410.3.1.6 For composite columns with a concrc(c. core
for cmbedmcnts in concrete shall be in accordance with encased by strncturnl steel, the thickness of the steel
Section 420.7. encasement shall be at least (a) or (b ):
410.2.2 Co mposite Columns

a. b 1/y for cw.:h face ol' width b;
4J0.2.2.l If a structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing is ~3.Es
used as longitudinal reinforcement, the column shall be
designed as a composite column.
b. h 1/y for circular sections of diamcl1.:r It.
410.2.3 Connection to O ther Members J~
410.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-column 4J0.4 Required Strength
and slab-column joints shall satisfy Section 4 15.
4 10.4.1 Ge neral
410.2.3.2 For precast construction, connections shall
satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 416.2. 410.4.1.l Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the facton:d load combinations m
410.2.3.3 Connections of columns to found ations shall Section 405.
satisfy Section 416.3.
4 10.4. 1.2 Requ ired strength shall be calculated in
410.3 Dci;ign U mits accordance with the analysis procedures in ~ection 406.
410.3.1 Dimensional Limits 4 10.4.2 Factor ed Axial Force and Moment
410.3.1.1 Por columns with a square, octagonal, or other 4 10.4.2. l P,, and M u occurring simultaneously for each
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to base gross applicable factored load combination shall be considered.
area considered, required reinforcement, and design
strength on a circular section with a diameter equal lo the
least lateral di mension of the actual shape.
CHAFTEF, 4 ·- Structural Concrete 4.7 i
410.5 Design Strength 410.6.2 Minimum Shear Rei nforcement
410:5.1 Gcnenl 410.6.2.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,

Av,min• shall he provided in all regions where Vu >
410.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, O.S<f,Vc.
design strength at all sections shall satisfy cpsn ~ ·u,
including (a) through (d). lnlcraction between load cffecls 410.6.2.2 If shear reinforcement is required, A,,,min shall
shall be considered: be the greater of(a) and (b):
a. fT,bWS
0. 062y 1 , - ,
yt
bwS
b. 0.35 -,
ye
410. 7 Reinforcement Detailing

410.5.l.2 cp shall be detennined m accordance with
Section 42 1.2. 410.7.1 General
410.5.2 Ax ial Force and Moment 410. 7.1. l Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
accordance with Section 420.6.l.
410.5.2.1 Pn and Mn shall be calculated in accordance
with Section 422.4. 410.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
prestrcssed rei nforcement shall be in accordance with
410.5.2.2 For composite columns, forces shall be Section 425.4.
transterred between tlie steel section and concrete by
direct bearing, shear connectors, or bond in accordance to 410.7.1.3 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with
the axial strength assigned to each component. Seclion 425.6.
410.5.3 Shear 410.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
410.5.3.1 Vn shall be calculated in accordance with 410.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall he in accordunce
Section 422.5 . with Section 425.2.
410.5.4 Torsion 410.7.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
410.5.4,1 If T" 2'! <PTth, where Tth is given in Section 410.7.3.J For non-prestrcssed columns and for
422.7, torsion shall be considered in accordance with prestressed columns with average { pe < 1.60 MPa, the
Section 409. minimum number of longiludinal bars shall be (a), (b), or
(c):
410.6 Reinforcement Limits
a. Three within triangular ties;
410.6.l Minimum and Maximum Longitudinal
Reinforcement b. Four within rectangular or circul ar ties;
410.6.1.l For non-prestressed columns and for c. Six enclosed by spirals or for columns or special
prestressed columns with average f pe < 1.6 MPa, area of moment frames enclosed by circular hoops.
longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least 0. OlAI! but
410.7.3.2 For composite columns with stnictural steel
shall not exceed 0. 08Ag · cores, a longitudinal bar shall be located at every comer
of a rectangular cross section, with other longitudinal bars
410.6.1.2 For composite columns with a structural steel spaced not farther apart Uian one-half Lhe least side
core, area of longitudinal bars located within the dimension oftbe composite column.
transverse reinforcement shall be at least 0. 01(Ag -
Asx), but shall not exceed 0. 08(A.,.. - As,}
r·~atiomil Structural Code 0fth<~ Pliil1ppines Volurne i, 7"' F.:dition, 20i6

4-72 CHAPTEI:'{ 4 ·· Struciu•('II Conc:relt,
410.7.4 Offset Bent Longitudinal Reinforcement Table 410.7.5.2.2 Tension Lap Splice Class
410.7.4.1 The slope of the inclined portion of an offset Tensile Splice type
Splice details
bent longitudinal bar relative to the longitudinal axis of bar stress
the column shall not exceed 1 in 6. Porlions of bar above ~ 50% bars spliced at any
and below an offset shall be parallel to axis of column. section and lap splices on
Class A
~ O.S{y adjacent bars staggered by
410.7.4.2 If the column face is offset 75 mm or more, at least .ea
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent and separate Other Class B
dowels, lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to > O.Sf., All cases Class B
the offset column faces, shall be provided.
410.7.5.3 End-bearing Splices
410.7.5 Splices of Longitudinal Reinforcement
410.7.S.3.1 If the har force due to factored loads is
410.7.5.1 General compressive, end-bearing splices shall be permitled
provided the splices are staggered or additional bars arc
410.7.5.1.1 Lap splices, mechanical splices, butt-welded provided at splice locations. The continuing bars in each
splices, and end-bearing splices shall he permitted. face of the column shall have a tensile strength at least
O. 25{">' times the area of the vertical reinforcement along
410.7.5.1.2 Splices shall satisfy requirements for all that face.
factored load combinations.
410.7.5.3.2 For composite columns, ends of structural
410.7.5.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall he steel cores shall be accurately finished to bear at cnd-
in accordance with Section 425.5 and shall satisfy the bearing splices, with positive provision for alignment of
requirements of Section 4 JO. 7 .5.2 for lap splices or one core above the other in concentric contact. Bearing
Section 410.7.5.3 for end-bearing splices. shall be considered effective to transfer not greater than
50 percent of the total compressive force in the steel core.
410.7.5.2 Lap Splices
410.7.6 Transverse Reinforcement
410.7.5.2.1 If the bar force due to factored loads is
compressive, compression lap splices shall be permitted. 410.7.6.J General
It shall be permitted to decrease the compression lap
splice length in accordance with (a) or (b), but the lap 410.7.6.1.1 Transverse- reinforcement shall satisfy the
splice length shall be at least 300 mm.: most.restrictive requirements for reinforcement spacing.
a. For tied columns, where ties throughout the lap splice 410.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall be
length have an effective area not less than 0. 0015hs in accordance with Section 425.7.2 for ties, Section
in both directions, lap splice length shall he permitted 425.7.3 for spirals, or Section 425.7.4 for hoops.
to be multiplied by 0.83. Tie legs perpendicular to
dimension h shall be considered in calculating 410.7.6. t.3 For prestressed columns with average
effective area; f pe ~ 1. 6 M Pa, transverse ties or hoops need not satisfy
the l6d1, spacing re4uirement of Section 425.7.2.1.
b. For spiral columns, where spirals throughout the lap
splice length satisfy Section 425. 7.3, lap splice length 410.7.6.1.4 For composite columns with a structural
shall be permitted to be multiplied by0.75. steel core, transverse ties or hoops shall have. a minimum
d1, of 0.02 times the greater side dimension of lhe
410.7.5.2.2 If the bar force <lue to factored loads is composite column, but shall be at least 10 mm <P and
tensile, tension lap splices shall be in accordance with need not be larger than 16 mm(/,. Spacing shall satisfy
Table 410. 7.5.2.2. Section 425.7.2.1, but not exceed 0.5 times the least
dimension of the composite column. Deformed wire or
welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area shall be
permitted.
.Association r,f Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

r=--~,-- .
CHi,PTER 4 -· Stmctur.,I Concrnle ~-13
410.7.6.1.5 Longitudinal rei nforcement shall be laterally 410.7.6.4 Lateral Sup))Ort of Offset Bent
supported using tics or hoops in accordance with Section Longitudinal Bars
410.1.6.2 or spirals in accordance with Section 410.7.6.3,
unless wsLS nnd structural analyses demonstrate adequate 410.7.6.4.I Where longitudinal hars are offset,
strength and feasibility of construction. horizontal support shall be provided by ties, hoops,
spirals, or parts of the tloor construction and shall be
410.7.6.1.6 If anchor bolts arc placed in the top of a designed to resist 1.5 times the horizontal component of
column or pedestal, the bolts shall be enclosed by the calculated force in the inclined portion or the offset
transverse reinforcement that also surrounds at least four bar.
longitudinal bars within Lhe column or pedestal. The
transverse reinforcement shall be distributed within 125 410.7.6.4.2 If transverse reinforcement is provided to
mm. of the top of the colunm or pedestal and shall consist resist forces that result from offset bends, ties, hoops, or
of at least l wo 12 mm </> or three 10 mm <f, bars. spirals shall be placed not more than 150 mm. from points
of bend.
410.7.6.2 Lateral Support of Longitudinal Bars
Using Ties or Hoops 410.7.6.5 Shear
410.7.6.2.l n any storey, the bottom tie or hoop shall be 410.7.6.5.1 Ir required, shear reinforcement shall be
located not more than one-half the tie or hoop spacing provided using ties, hoops, or spirals.
above the top of footing or slab.
410.7.6.5.2 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
410.7.6.2.2 In any storey, the lop tie or hoop shall be shall be in accordance with Table 410.7.6.5.2.
located not more than one-half the tie or hoop spacing
below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in the slab, Table 410.7.6.5.2 Maximum Spacing of Shear
drop panel, or shear cap. If beams or brackets frame into Rei nforccment
all sides of the column, the top tic or hoop shall be located
not more than 75 mm below the lowest horizontal Maximum s, mm.
reinforcement in the shallowest beam or bracket. Non- Prestrelised
v$ prestresscd column
410.7.6.3 Lateral Support of Longitudinal Bars column
Using Spirals d 3h
s; 0.33.Jllbwd
Lesser
2 -4
of:
410.7.6.3.1 n any storey, the bottom of the spiral shall . 600
be located at the top of footing or slab. d 3h
Lesser -
> 0.33.Jllbwd of:
4 8
410.7.6.3.2 In any storey, the lop of the spiral shall be 300
located in accordance with Table 410.7.6.3.2.
Table 410.7.6.3.2 Spiral Extension Requirements at

Top of Column
Framing at
column e"'"
nd" '-----1----E_x_te_n_s1·_o_n_r_eq_u_i_rc_m_e_n_ts_ _-1
Beams or brackets Extend to the level of the lowest
frame into all sides of horizontal reinforcement in memb~
the column s1moor1cd above.
Extend t(l the level of th e lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members
Beams or brackets do
not frame into all sides
supported above. Additional column
ties shall extend above termination
of the column
of spiral to bottom of slab, drop
oanel, or shear cao.
Extend to the level at which the
Columns with capitals diameter or width of capital is twice
that of the column.
Nal1ona, Structural Co<ll~ of 'Lhe Philippines Volunm I. in Editior., ~·:O 18
I -
411.2.3 Load Distribution
SECTION 411
WAtLS 41 t.2.3.1 Unless otherwise demonstrated by an amtlysis,
the horizontal length of wall considered as effective for
411.l Scope resisting each concentrated load shall not exceed the
lesser or the center-lo-center distance between loads, and
41 J.1.1 This section shall apply to the design the bearing width plus four times the wall thickness.
of non-prestrcssed and prestressed walls including (a) Effective horizontal length for bearing shall not extend
through (c): beyond vertical wall joints unless design provides for
transfer of forces across the joints.
a. Cast-in-place;
41 J.2.4 Intersecting Elements
b. Precast in-plant;
411.2.4.l Walls shall be anchored to intersecting
c. Precast on-site including lilt-up. elements, such as floors and roofs; columns, pilasters,
buttresses, or intersecting walls; and lo footings.
411.1.2 Design of special structural walls shall be in
accordance with Section 418. 41 t .3 Design Limits
4Jt.1.3 Design of plain concrete walls shall be 411.3.1 Minimum Wall Thickness
in accordance with Section 414.
411.3.1.1 Minimum wall thicknesses shall he in
411. t.4 Design of cantilever retaining walls shall he accordance with Tahle 411.3.1. l. Thinner walls arc
in accordance with Sections 422.2 through 422.4, with permitted if adeguate strength and stability can be
minimum hori7.ontal reinforcement in accordance with demonstrated by structural analysis
Section 41 1.6.
Table 411.3.1.1
4ll.2 General Minimum Wnll Thickness, h
Wall tvoe Minimum thickness, h
411.2.1 Materials lOOmm
Greater
Bearing111 of:
a.
41 t.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall he
1/25 the lesser of
selected to he in accordance with Section 419.
unsupported
b.
length and
unsupported
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420. height
Greater
411.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements Non-bearing JOO mm c.
of:
for embcdments in concrete shall be in accordance with
1/30 the lesser of
Section 420.7. unsupported
d.
length and
411.2.2 Connection to Other Members unsupported
height
411.2.2. 1 For precast walls, connections shall be
Exterior
designed in accordance with Section 416.2. e.
basement and 190mm
Foundation Pl
411.2.2.2 Connections of walls to foundations shall
saLisly Section 416.3. [1 I Only applies to walls designed in accordance with the simplified
design method of Section 411.5.3.
411.4 Required Strength 411. 5.2 Axial I ,oad and I n-pl a ne or Out-of-plane
F lexure
JI 411.4.1 General
411.5.2.1 For bearing walli;, P" and M,1 (in-plane or om-
411.4.1. l Rcquin:d stn.:ngth shall be calculated in ot~ plane) shall be calculated in accordancc with .Section
accordance with the fac tored load combinations m 422.4. Alternatively, axial load and out-of-plane flexure
Section 405. shall he permitted to be considered in accordance with
Section 41 r .5.3.
411.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in
act:ordancc with the analysis procedures in Section 406. 411.5.2.2 For nonbcaring walls, Mn. shall be calculated
in accordance with Section 422.3.
411.4. l.3 Slenderness effects shall be calculated in
accordance with Sections 406.6.4, 406.7, or 406.8. 411.5.3 Axial Load and Out-of-Plane Flexure -
Alternatively, om-of-plane slenderness analysis shall be Simplified Design Method
pennittcd using Section 4 I I .8 for walls m eeting the
requirements of that section. 411.5.3.1 rr the resultant uf all factored loads is lot:ated
within the middle third of the thickness of a solid wall
411.4.1.4 Walls shall be designed for eccentric axial with a rectangular cross section, P 11 shall be permitted to
loads and any lateral or other luads lo which they are be calculated by:
subjected.
2
411.4.2 Factored Axial Force and Moment <f,P11 = 0. SS<j,f~A g [ 1 - ( kt~) ) (411.5.3.1 )
32
411.4.2.1 Walls sha 11 be designed for the maxi mum
factored moment., M w that can accompany the factored 411.5.3.2 Effcctive length factor, k, for use with Eq.
axial force for each applicable load combination. The 411.5.3.l shall be in accordance with Table 411.5.3.2.
factored axial force, P 11 , at given eccentricity shall not
exceed q,P10 max where P n, max shall be as given in Table 411.5.3.2 Effective Length Factor k fur Walls
Section 422.4.2. 1 and strength reduction factor <J,
shall be that for compression-controlled sections in Boundary conditions k
Section 421.2.2. The maximum factored moment Mu Walls braced top and bottom against lateral
shall he magnified for slenderness effects in accordance translation and
with Sections 406.6.4, 406.7, or 406.8. a. Restrnined against rotation at one or both
0.8
ends (top, bottom, or both)
411.4.3 F"actored Shear b. Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
Walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0
411.4.3 .1 Walls shall be designed for the maximum in-
plane V" and out-of-plane V 11 • 411.5.3.3 </> in Eq. 411.5.3.1 shall be that for
compression controllcd sections in Section 42 l .2.2 .
411.5 Design Strength
411.5.3.4 Wall reinforcement shall be at least that
411.5.1 General required by Section 41 1.6.
411.S.1. l For each applicable factored load combination, 411.5.4 In-plane Shear
design strength at all sections shall satisfy <f>Sn ~ U,
including (a) through (c). Interaction between a:xial load 4 U.5.4.1 V n shall be cakulated in accordance with
and moment shall be considered. Sections 411.5.4.2 through 411.5.4.8. Altemativcly, for
walls with hw ~ 2fw.• it shall be pennittcd to design for
in-plane shear in accordance with the strut-and-tic method
of Section 423. In all cases, reinforcement shall satisty the
limits of Sections 4 l 1.6, 4 r 1.7.2, and 41 1.7 .3.
411.5.1.2 <P shall be determined in accordance with

Section 421.2.
4-76 CHAPTER 4 - StruciUral Concrete
411.5.4.2 For in-plane shear design, is h thickness of 411.5.4.8 V5 shall be provided by transverse shear
wal,l and d shall be taken equal to 0. 8.fw· A larger value reinforcement and shall be calculated by:
of d, equal to lhe distance from extreme compression
fiber to center of force of all reinforcement in tension,
shall be permitted if the center of tension is calculated by (411.5.4.8)
a strain compatibility analysis.
411.5.4.3 Vn at any. horizontal section shall not exceed 411.5.S Out-of-plane Shear
o. 83.j f ~hd .
411.S.5.1 Vn shall be calculated in accordance with
411.5.4.4 Vn shall be calculated by: Section 422.5.
(411.5.4.4) 411.6 Reinforcement Limits
411.5.4.5 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in 411.6.1 If in-plane Vu :5 0. 5cf>Vc, minimum Pt and
accordance with Section 411.5.4.6, V c shall not exceed minimum Pt shall be in accordance with Table 411.6.1.
These limits need not be satisfied if adequate strength and
0. 17lffchd for walls subject to axial compression or stability can be demonstrated hy structural analysis.
exceed the value given in Section 422.5.7 for walls
subject to axial tension. 411.6.2 If in-plane Vu ~ 0. Scf>V c , {a) and (b) shall be
satisfied:
411.5.4.6 rt shall be permitted to calculate V c in
accordance with Table 411.5.4.6, where N11 is positive for a. Pt shall be at least the greater of the value calculated
compression and negative for tension and the quantity by Eq. 411.6.2 and 0.0025, but need not exceed Pc in
Nu/Ag is expressed ink.Pa. accordance with Table 411.6. l.
411.5.4.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a Pt ~ 0. 0025 + 0. 5(2. 5 - ltwlfw)(Pt - 0. 0025)
distance lw/2 or one-half the wall height, whichever is
less, shall be pem1itted to be designed for (411.6.2)
V c calculated using the detailed calculation options in b. Pc shall be at least 0.0025
Table 411.5.4.6 at a distance above the base of lw/2 ur
one-halflhe wall height, whichever is less.
Table 411.5.4.6 V c: Non-Prcstressed and Prestresscd Walls
Calculation Option Axial force Ve

Compression 0.17).flJhd (a)
Simplified 0.17 ( 1 +0.29N)

T g }..flJhd (b)
Tension Greater of:
0 (c)
0.271
f1J hd + Nud
4( (d)
w
Tension or [ ,. ( o uJ{.' + 02 ,"';.)]

Detailed Lesser of: 0.05J.J1j + hd
Compression -MuVu -~
l
2
w
(e)
Equation shall not apply if (Mu/Vu - .fw/2) is

negative.

Table 411.6.1 Minimum Reinforcement for Walls with In-plane Vu ::; 0. 5</>V c
Type of
Minimum Minimum
Wall Type Non-pre..-.tresscd
Reinforcement
Bar/Wire Size fr MPa Loni:itudina!121 , Pt Transverse, Pt
2: 420 0.0012 0.0020
~ 16 mm <J,
Ueforrncd Bars < 420 (l.00 15 0.0025
Cast-in-place > 16 mm <b Anv (l.0015 0.0025
Welded Wire
~ MW200 or M 0200 Any 0.0012 0.0020
Reinforcement
Ddormed Bars or
Precastr 11 Welded Wire Any Any 0.0010 0.001 0
Reinforcement
ill Prestrcssed walls with nn average effccLive compn.:ssivc stress of al leasL 1.6 MPa ueed not nieet the requirement for minimum longi111d111al
reinfon.:emcnl, Pr·
121 In one-way prccast, pn:stresscd walls not "~dcr tha n 3.7 m and not mechanically conni,cted to cause restraint in the trnnsvcrse direction, the
minimum reinforcemen t rcquircme11t in the direction normal to the tlexurAI reinforcc1mmt need 11<)L be su tisficd.
411.7 Reinforcement Detailing 4ll.7.2.3 For walls with h greater than 250 mm., except
basement walls and cantilever retaining walls, distributed
41 l.7.1 General reinforcement for each direction shall be placed in two
layers parallel with wall faces in accordance with (a) and
411.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in (b):
accordarn..:e with Section 420.6.1.
a. One layer consisting of a l least I/2 and not exceeding
411.7.1.2 Dcvelopmcrit lengths of deformed and 2/3 of total reinforcement required for each direction
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with shall be placed at least 50 mm., hut not exceeding
Section 425.4. /l/3, from the exterior surface;
411.7. l.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement shall b. The other layer consisting of the balance of required
be in accordance wilh Section 425.5. reinforcement in that direction, sh·a11 be placed at
least 20 mni, but not greater than h / 3 , from the
411.7.2 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement interior surface.
4 l J.7.2.1 Spacing, s, of longitudinal bars in cast-in-place 4U.7.2.4 Flexural tension reinforcement shall he well
walls shall not exceed the lesser of 3h and 450 mm. If distributed and placed as close as practicable to the
shear reinforccmcn! is required for in-plane strength. tension face.
spacing of longitudinal reinforcement shall not exceed
.fw/ 3. 411.7.3 Spacin~ ofTransversl! Reinforcement
411.7.2.2 Spacing, s, of longitudinAI bars in precast 411.7.3.1 Spacing, s, of transverse reinforcement in Cast-
walls shall nol exceed the lesser of (a) and (b): in-place walls shall not exceed the lesser of 3h and 450
mm. Tf shear reinforcement is rcquin:d for in-plane
a. Sh; strength, s shall not exceed .f.,.,/3.
h. 450 mm. fo r exterior walls or 750 mm. for interior 411.7.3.2 Spacing, s, of transverse bars in precast walls
walls. shall not exceed the lesser uf (n) and (b ):
If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane strength, s a. Sh;

shall not exceed the smallest of3h, 450 mm., and fw/3.
b. 450 mm. for exterior walls or 750 mm. for interior
walls.
If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane strength, s

shall not exceed the smallest of 3h, 450 rnm., and fw / 5.
4-76 CH/\f'Ttf~ 4 ·· Stwctur,11 ConcmtP
411.7.4 Lateral Support of Longitudinal 411.8.2.2 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall
.. Reinforcement above any section shall be assumed to be distributed over
a width equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each
41 I. 7.4.1If longitudinal reinforcement is required for side that increases at a slope of 2 vertical to 1 hori1.ontal,
axial strength or if Ase exceeds 0. OlAg, longiLudinal but not extending beyond (a) or {b):
reinforcement shall he laterally supported by transverse
tics. a. The spacing of the concentrated loads;
411.7.5 Reinforcement Around Openings b. The edges of the wall panel.
411.7.S.1 In addition to the minimum reinforcement 411.8.3 Factored Moment

required by Section 411.6, at least two l 6 mm (/> bars in
walls having two layers of reinforcement in both 411.8.3.1 Mu at mid-height of wall due tu combined
directions and one 16 mm q, bar in walls having a single flexure and axial loads shall include the effects of wall
layer of reinforcement in both di rections shall be provided deflection in accordance with (a) or (b):
around window, door, and similarly sized openings. Such
bars shall be anchored to devt:lop f Y in tension at the a. By iterative calculation using
corners of the openings.
(411.8.3.la)
411.8 Alternative Method for Out-of-Plan e Slender
Wall Analysis where M ua is the maximum factored moment at
midhcight of wall due to lateral and eccentric vertical
411.8.l General loads, not including Pll effects.
411.8.1.1 It shall be permitted to analyze out-of-plane Av. shall be calculated by:

slenderness effects in accordance with this section for
walls satisfying (a) through (e):
SM.,.e~
fl., = - - - - - - (411.8.3.Jb)
a. Cross section is constant over the height of the wall; (0. 75)48Ec/ er
b. Wall is tension-controlled for out-of-plane moment where I er shall be calculated hy:

effect;
3
tPMn is at least. Mer, where M er is calculated using Es ( Pv. Ii ) l!w'"
c. I = - A + - - (d- c) 2
er Ee s {y 2d
+--3
(411.8.3. lc)
fr as provided in Section 419.2.3;
d. Pu at the mid-height section does not exceed and the value of E sf Ee shall be at least 6.
0.06/~A8 ;
b. By direct calculation using:
e. Calculated out-of-plane deflection due to service
loads, fls , including Pfl effects, does not exceed
M ua
.fc/150. Mu = _(_l__S_P_u-fc--) (41 l.8.3.ld)
411.8.2 Modeling (O.75)48Eclc,·
411.8.2.1 The wall shall be analyzed as a simply- 411.8.4 Out-of-Plane Detlcctioo - Service Loads
supported, axially-loaded member subject to an out-of-
plane unifonnly distributed lateral load, with maximum 411.8.4.1 Out-of-plane deflection due to service loads,
moments and detlections occurring at mid-height. Ll 5 , shall be calculated in accordance with Table
41 1.8.4. l , where Ma is calculated by Section 411.8.4.2.
As:;ociation of Structura! Engineers of th,:: Philippines, lnr. u:..sr: P)

CHAPTER. 4 - Structural Concrete 4-79
Table 41 J .8.4.1 Calculation of 4s SECTION 412

DIAPHRAGMS
(a) 412.1 Scope
~ (2/3)Mcr
412.1.1 This ~ection shall apply to the design or
> (2/3)M,r As'= (Z/ 3 )A . + (Ma - (2 /3) M,,.) (b) non-prestressed and prestrossed diaphragms, including (a)
" (Mn - (2/3)Mcr) through (d):
4ll.8.4.2 The maximum moment Ma at mid-height of a. Diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs;
wall due to service lateral and eccentric vertical loads,
including P5 As effects, shall be calculated by Eq . b. Diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-place topping
411.8.4.2 with iteration of deflections. slab on prccast clements;
c. Diaphragms that comprise precast elements with end

(411.8.4.2)
strips formed by either a cast-in-place concrete
topping slab or edge beams;
411.8.4.3 Acr and An shall be calculated by (a) and (b):
d. Diaphragms of interconnected prccast elements
without cast-in-place concrete topping.
SM,,.i~
a. Acr = 48E }g (4 l l .8.4.3a)
4 412.1.2 Diaphragms in structures assigned to seismic
zone 4 shall also satisfy requirements of Section 418.12.
SM11f~
b. An = 48E, I,r (4 1 l.8.4.3b)
412.2 General
412.2.1 Design shall consider (a) through (e):

411.8.4.4 I er shall be calculated by Eq. 411.8.3.1 c.
a. Diaphragm in-plane forces due to lateral loads acting
on the building;
b. Diaphragm transfer forces;
c. Connection forces between the diaphragm and

vertical framing or nonstructural clements;
d. Forces resulting from bracing vertical or sloped

building elements;
e. Diaphragm out-of-plane forces due to gravity and

other loads applied to the diaphragm surface.
412.2.2 Materials
412.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be

selected to be in accordant,-e with Section 419. !

be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
1
National Structural Cod0 of tl1c~ Philippines Volume I, 7 ri Edition, 2016
_,
4-80 CHAPTff< 4 -- Stn;chual Cor:crett1
412.3 Design Limits d. A finite element model considering diaphragm

tlexihility;
'412.3.t Minimum Diaphragm Thickness
e. A strut-and-tie model in accordance with Section
412.3.1.1 Diaphragms shall have thickness as required 423.2.
for stability, strength, and stiffness under factored load
combinations. 412.5 Design Strength
412.3.1.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall have a 412.5. t General

thickness not less than that required for floor and roof
elements in other parts of this Code. 412.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
design strengths of diaphragms and connecrions shall
412.4 Required Strength satisfy <PSn ~ U. Interaction between load ertects shall be
considered.
412.4.1 General
412.5.J.2 </> shall be dctem1ined m accordance with
412.4.1.l Required strength of diaphragms, collectors, Section 42 l.2.
and their connections shall be calculated in accordance
with the factored load combinations in Section 405. 412.5.1.3 Design strengths shall be in accordance with
(a), (b), (c), or (d):
412.4.1.2 Required strength of diaphragms that are part
of floor or roof construction shall include effects of out- a. For a diaphragm idealized as a beam whose depth is
of-plane loads simultaneous with other applicable loads. equal to the full diaphragm depth, with moment
resisted by boundary reinforcement concentrated at
412.4.2 Diaphra~m Modeling and Analysis the diaphragm edges, design strengths shall be m
accordance with Sections 412.5.2 through 412.5.4;
412.4.2.l Diaphragm modeling and analysis
requirements of the general building code shall govern b. For a diaphragm or a diaphragm segment modeled as
where applicable. Otherwise, diaphragm modeling and a strut-and-tie system, design strengths shall be in
analysis shall be in accordance with Sections 412.4.2.2 accordance with Section 423.3;
through 412.4.2.4.
c. For a diaphragm idealized with a finite-element
412.4.2.2 Modeling and analysis procedures shall satisfy model, design strengths shall be in accordance with
requirements of Section 406. Section 422. Non-uniform shear distributrons shall be
considered in design for shear. Collectors in such
412.4.2.3 Any set of reasonable and consistent designs shall be provided to transfer diaphragm
assumptions for diaphragm stiffness shall be permitted. shears to the vertical elements of the lateral-force-
resisting system;
412.4.2.4 Calculation of diaphragm in-plane design
moments, shears, and axial forces shall be consistent with d. For a diaphragm designed by alternative methods,
requirements of equilibrium and with design boundary such methods shall satisfy the requirements of
conditions. lt shall be pennitted to calculate dc~ign equilibrium and shall provide design strengths al least
moments, shears, and axial forces in accordance with one equal to required strengths for all elements in the load
of(a) through (e): path.
a. A rigid diaphragm model if the diaphragm can be 412.5.1.4 lt shall be pe1mitted to use pre-compression
idealized as rigid; from prestrcssed reinforcement to resist diaphragm forces.
b. A flexible diaphragm model if the diaphragm can be 412.5.1.5 ff non-prestrcssed, bonded prestressing
idealized as flexible; reinforcement is designed to resist collector forces,
diaphragm shear, or tension due to in-plane moment, the
c. A bounding analysis in which the design values arc value of steel stress used to calculate resistance shall not
the envelope of values obtained by assuming upper exceed the lesser of the specified yield strength and 420
bound and lower bound in-plane stiffnesses for the MPa.
diaphragm in two or more separate analyses;
Acis(iciatio;1 of Structure.I Engineers of thE) Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

412.5.2 Moment and Axial Force
412.5.3.4 For a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-place,
cross-sectional dimensions shall he selected to satisfy F.q.
412.5.2.1 It shall be permitted to design a diaphragm to 412.5.3.4.
resisl in-plane moment and axial force in accor<lance with
Sections 422.3 and 422.4.
(412.5.3.4)
412.5.2.2 It shall be permitted to resist tension due to
moment by (a), (b), (c), or (d), or those methods in where lhc value of
exceed 8.3 MPa.
m used to cakulate v n shall not
comhinatiun:
a. Deformed bars conforming to Section 420.2.1; 412.5.3.5 For diaphragms that arc cast-in-place concrete
topping slabs on precast clements, (a) and (b) shall he
b. Strands or hars conforming to Section 420.3.1, either satisfied:
prestresscd or non-prestrei;sed;
a. Vn shall be calculated in accordance with Eg.
c. Mechanical connectors crossing joints between 412.5.3.3, and cross-sectional dimensions shall be
precast elements; selected to satisfy Eq. 4 I 2.5.3.4. Aw shall be
c,tlculalcd using the thickness of the topping slah for
d. Pre-compression frorn prcstressc<l reinforcement. non-composite topping slab diaphragms and the
combined thickness uf cast-in-place and precast
412.5.2.3 Non-prestrcssed reinforcement and mechanical elements for composite topping slab diaphragms. For
connectors resisting tension due to moment shall be composite topping slab diaphragms, the value off~
located within h/4 of the tension edge of the diaphragm, in Eqs. 412.5.3.3 and 412.5.3.4 shall not exceed the
where h is diaphragm deplh measured in the plane Qf the lesser off~. for the prccast members and {~ for the
diaphragm at that location. Where diaphragm depth topping slab;
changes along the span, it shall b~ pem1itted to develop
reinforcement into adjaceot diaphragm segments that a.re b. V11shall not exceed the value calculated in accor<lance
not within the h /4 li mit. with the shear-friction provisions of Section 422.9
considering the thickness of the topping slab above
412.5.2.4 Mechanical connectors crossing joints between joints between precasl elements in non~composite
precast elements shall be designed to resist required and composite topping slab diaphragms and the
tension under the anticipated joint opening. reinforcement crossing the joints between the precast
members.
412.S.3 Shear
412.5.3.6 For diaphragms that are interconnected precast
412.5.3.1 This set:tion shall apply to diaphragm in-plane elements without a concrete topping, and for diaphragms
shear strength. that are precast elements with end strips formed by either
a cast-in-place concrete topping s lab or edge beams, it
412.5.3.2 q, shall be 0.75, unless a lesser value is shall be permitted to design for shear in accordance with
required by Section 421.2.4. (a), (b), or hoth.
412.5.3.3 for a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-place, a. The nominal strength of grnuted joints shall not
V 11 shall be calculated hy Eq. 412.5.3.3. ex.cced 0.55 MPa. Reinforcement shall be designed to
resist shear through shear-friction in accordance with
Section 422.9. Shear-friction reinforcement shall be
in addition to reinforcement designed lo resist tension
(412.5.3.3) due to moment and axial force;
where Acv is the gross area or concrete bounded by b. Mechanical connectors crossing Jomts between
diaphragm wch thickness and depth, reduced by void precast elements shall be designed lo resist required
areas if present; the value of m used to calculate vn shear under anticipated joint opening.
shall not exceed 8.3 MPa; and Pt is distributed
reinforcement oriented parallel to the in-plane shear.
Nalion;,1! ;Aru,.;t:;ra! C•Jt'ie of th0 Phi!ippine~ Voii;me r, 7''' falition. 2010
~-
412.5.3.7 For any diaphragm, where shear is transferred 412.6.3 Reinforcement designe<l lo resist diaphragm
from the diaphragm lo a collector, or from the diaphragm in-plane forces shall be in addition to reinforcement
or collector lo a vertical dement of the lateral-force- designed to resist other load effects, except reinforcement
resisting system, (a) or (h) shall apply: designed to resist shrinkage and temperature effects shall
be permitted Lo also resist diaphragm in-plane forces
a. Where shear is transfc1Ted through concrete, the
shear-friction provisions of Section 422.9 shall he 412.7 Reinforcement Detailing
satisfied;
412.7.l General
b. Where shear is transferred through mechanical
connectors or dowels, effects of upli1l and rotation of 412.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be 1n
the vertical element or the lateral-forc.:c-resisting accordance with Section 420.6.J.
system shall be considered.
412. 7.1.2 Development lenglhs of deformed and
412 .5.4 Collectors prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4, unless longer lengths are required by
412.5.4.l Collectors shall extend from lhe ve11ical Section 418.
elements of the lateral-force-resisting system across all or
part of the diaphragm depth as required to transfer shear 412. 7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be in
from the diaphragm to the vertical element. rt shall be accordance with Section 425.5.
permitted lo discontinue a collector along lengths of
vertical clements of the lateral force-resisting system 412.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be m m.:cordance with
where transfer of design collector forces is nol required. Section 425.6.
412.5.4.2 Collectors shall be designed as tension 412.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing

members, compression members, or both, in accor<lanc.:e
with Section 422.4. 412.7.2.1 Minimum spacing sof reinforcement shall be
in accordance with Section 425.2.
412.5.4.3 Where a collector is designed to transfer forces
to a ve,tical element, collector reinforcement shall extend 412.7.2.2 Maximum spacing s of deformed
along Lhe vertical element at least the greater of (a) and reinforcement shall be the lesser of five times the
(b): diaphragm thickness an<l 450 mm.
a. The length required to develop the reinforcement in 412.7.3 Diaphragm and Collector Reinforcement
tension;
412.7.3.1 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms that
b. The length required to transmit the design forces to are part or lloor or roof construction shall satisfy
the vertical element tlnough shear-friction in reinforcement detailing of one-way slabs in accordance
accordance with Section 422.9, through mechanical with Section 407. 7 or two-way slabs in accordance with
conneclors, or through other force transfer Section 408.7, as applicable.
mechanisms.
412.7.3.2 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
4 t 2.6 Reinforcement Limits reinforcement at each section of the diaphragm or
collector shall be developed on each side of that section.
412.6.1 Reinforcement to resist !;hrinkage and
temperature stresses shall he in accordance with Section 412.7.3.3 Reinforcement provided to resist tension shall
424.4. extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required
to resist tension at least 14 , except at diaphragm edges
412.6.2 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms that and at expansion joints.
are part of floor or roof construction shall satisfy
reinforcement limits for one-way slabs in accordance with
Section 407.6 or two-way slabs in accordance with
Section 408.6, as applicable.
SECTION 413 413.2.3 ~arthquake Effects
FOUNDATIONS 413.2.3.1 Strnctural members extending below the base

or the structure that arc required to transmit forces
411.l Scope resulting from earthquake effects to the foundation shall
be designed in accordance with Section 418.2.2.3.
413.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
prestressed and prestresscd foundations, including 413.2.3.2 For structures assigned to seismic zone 4,
shallow foundations (a) 1hrough (e) and, where shallow and deep foundations resisting ea1thquake-
applicable, deep foundations (f) through (i): induccd forces or transferring earthquake-induced forces
between structure and ground shall be designed in
a. Strip footings; accordance with Section 418.13.
b. Isolated footings; 413.2.4 Slabs-On-Ground
c. Combined footings; 413.2.4.1 Slabs-on-ground that transmit vertical loads or

lateral forces from other parts of the strncture to the
d. Mat foundations; ground shall be designed and detailed in accordance willi
applicable provisions of this Code.
e. Grade beams;
413.2.4.2 Slahs-oo-gruund that transmits lateral forces as
f. Pile caps; part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be
designed in accordance with Section 418.13.
g. Piles;
413.2.5 Plain Concr ete
h. Drilled piers;
413.2.5.1 Plain concrete fotmdations shall he designed in
I. Caissons. accordance with Section 414.
413.1.2 Foundations excluded by Section 401.4.6 are 413.2.6 Design Criteria

excluded from this section.
413.2.6.1 Foundations shall be proportioned to resist
413.2 General factored loads and induced reactions.
413.2.1 Materials 413.2.6.2 Foundation systems shall he permitted to he

designed by any procedure satisfying equilibrium and
413.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be geometric compatibility.
selected to he in accordance with Secti on 419.
413.2.6.3 Foundation design in accordance with strut-
413.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall and-tie modeling, Section 423, shall be permitted.
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
413.2.6.4 External moment on any section of a strip
413.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements footing, isolated footing, or pile cap shall be calculated hy
for embcdments in concrete shall he in accordance with passing a vertical plane through the member and
Section 420.7. calculating the moment of the forces acting over the entire
area of member on one side of that vertical plane.
413.2.2 Connection to Other Members
413.2.7 Critical Sections for Shallow Foundations
413.2.2.1 Design and detailing of cast-in-place and and Pile Caps
precast column, pedestal, and wall connections to
foundations shall he in accordance with Section 41 6.3. 413.2.7.1 Mu at the supported member shall he
penniUed to be calculated at the critical section defined in
accordance with Table 413.2.7 .1.
Naforral Srrw;twal Cor.1c-: <>f the Pil!iippines Volume I. :"'' i::(litiot\ 2.0'lfi
,.
Table 413.2.7.l 413.3.1.2 Overall depth of foundation shall be selected

Location of Critical Section for M 11 such that the effective depth of hottom reinforcement is at
least 150 mm.
Suooortcd member Location of critical section
Column or pedestal Face of column or oedestal 413.3.1.3 In sloped, stepped, or tapered foundations,
Halfway between face of depth and location of steps or angle of slope shall be such
Column with steel hasc that design requirements are satisfied at every sel:tion.
column and edge of steel base
plate
plate
Concrete wall Face of wall 413.3.2 Onc~Way Shallow Foundations
Halfway hetween center and
Masonry wall 413.3.2.1 The design and detailing of one-way shallow
face of masonry wall
foundations, including strip footings, combined footings,
413.2.7.2 The location of critical section tor factored and grade beams, shall be in accordance with this section
shear in accordance with Sections 407.4.3 and 408.4.3 for and the applicable provisions of Sections 407and 409.
one-way shear or Section 408.4.4.1 for two-way shear
shall be measured from the location of the critical section 413.3.2.2 Reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly
for Mu in Section 413.2.7.1. across entire width of one-way footings.
413.2.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete 413.3.3 Two-Way Isolated Footings

columns or pedestals shall he permitted to be treated as
square members of equivalent area when locating critical 413.3.3. t The design and detailing of two-way isolated
sections for moment, shear, and development of footings shall be in accordance with this section and the
rei nforccmcnl. applicable provisions of Sections 407 and 408.
413.2.8 Development of Reinforcement in Shallow 413.3.3.2 In square two-way footings, reinforcement

Foundations and Pile Caps shall be distributed uniformly across entire width of
footing in both directions.
413.2.8.1 Development ur reinforcement shall be m
accordance with Section 425. 413.3.3.3 In rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be
distributed in accordance with (a) and (b).
413.2.8.2 Calculated tensile or compression force in
reinforcement at each section shall be developed on each a. Reinforcement in the long direction shall be
side of that section. distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
413.2.8.3 Critical sections fur development of b. For reinforcement in the short direction, a portion of
reinforcement shall be assumed at the same locations as the total reinforcement, l'sAs, shall be distributed
given in Section 413.2.7.1 fur maximum factored moment uniformly over a band width equal to the length of
and at all other vertical planes where changes of section short side of footing, centered on centerline or
or reinforcement occur. column or pedestal. Remainder of reinforcement
required in the short dircction,(1 - y s)As, shall be
413.2.8.4 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for distributed unifonnly outside the center band width
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is nol of footing, where Y.s is calculated by:
stepped, or tapered foundations; or where tension (413.3.3.3)
rei nforcemcnt is not parallel to the compression face. r.~ = (P + 1)
413.3 Shallow Foundations where Pis the ratio oflong to short side of footing.
413.3.1 General 413.3.4 Two-Way Combined Footings and Mat

Foundations
413.3.1.1 Minimum base area of foundation shall be
calculated from unfactored forces and moments 413.3.4.1 The design and detailing of combined footings
transmitted by foundation to soil or rock and permissible and mat foundations shall be in accordance with this
hearing pressure selected through principles or soil or section and the applicable provisions of Section 408.
rock mechanics.
.t-,f.soci,.ition of Structural En9in0ern of tht"l Philippine(,. Inc. {/.\SEP)
~----~~.. , ---~.....----.....
CHAPTER 4 - Structural Cont:(ete 4-85
413.3.4.2 The direct design method of Section 408.lO 423.4.3, where Ps = 0. 60.l and ,l is in accordance with
shall not be used to design combined footings and mat Section 4 I9.2.4.
foundations.
413.4.2.5 Calculation of factored shear on any section
413.3.4.3 Distribution of bearing pressure under through a pile cap shall be in accordance with (a) through
combined footings and mat foundations shall be (c):
consistent with properties of the soil or rock and the
structure, and with established principles of soil or rock a. Entire reaction from any pile with its center located
mechanics. d..,,i!e/2 or more out'lide the section shall be
considered as producing shear on that section;
413.3.4.4 Minimum reinforcement in non-prestressed
mat foundations shall be in accordance with Section b. Reaction from any pile with its center locate dr,ile/2
408.6.1.1. or more inside the section shall be considered as
producing no shear on that section;
413.4 Deep Foundations
c. For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion
413.4.I General of the pile reaction to be considered as producing
shear on the section shall be based on a linear
413.4.l.l Number and arrangement of piles, drilled interpolation between full value at dpue/2 outside
piers, and caissons shall be detc1mincd from unfactored
the section and zero value at dpile/2 inside the
forces and moments transmitted lo these members and
section.
t>ennissible member capacity selected Lhrough principles
or soil or rock mechanics.
413.4.3 Deep Foundation Members
413.4.2 Pile Caps
413.4.3.1 Portions of deep fo undation members in a ir,
water, or soils not capable of providing adequate restraint
4 13.4.2.1 Overall depth of pile cap shall be selected such
throughout the member length to prevent lateral buckling
that the effective depth of bottom reinforcement is at least
shall be designed as columns in accordance with the
300 mm .
app licable provisionU>f Section 410.
413 .4.2.2 Factored moments and shears shall be
permitted to be calculated with the reaction from any pile
assumed to be concentrated at the centroid of the pile
section.
413.4.2.3 Except for pile caps designed in accordance

with Section 4 13.2.6.3, U1e pile cap shall be designed such
that (a) is satisfied for one-way foundations and (a) and
(b) are satisfied for two way foundations.
a. <f,Vn ~ Vu, where Vn shall be calculated in

accordance with Section 422.5 for one-way shear, Vu
shall be calculated in accordance with Section
4 l3.4.2.5, and <f, shall be in accordance with Section
421.2;
b. r/Jvn ~ Vu , where v 11 shall be calculated in

accordance with Section 422.6 for two-way shear,v u
shall be calculated in accordance with Section
41 3.4.2 .5, and <f, shall be in accordance with Section
42l.2.
413.4.2.4 If the p ile cap is designed in accordance with

strut-and-tie modeling as permitted in Section 4 13.2.6.3,
the effective concrete compressive strength of the struts,
f ce, shall be calculated in accordance with Section
111
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7 Edition, 2016
-··
4-HG CHJ\Pi"Ef~ ,I -- St;·uct:ir<::11 Concrett1
111. foundation or basement walls not less than

SECTION 414 J 90 mm. thick and retaining no more than 1.2
PLAIN CONCRETE m. of unbalanced fill.
414.l Scope 414.1.5 Plain concrete shall not be permitted for

columns and pile caps.
414.1.1 This scclion shall apply tu the design of plain
concrete members, including (a) and (b): 414.2 General
a. Members in building structures; 414.2.l Materials
b. Members in non-building structures such as arches, 414.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
underground utility structures, gravity walls, and selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
shielding walls.
414.2.1.2 Steel reinforcement, if required, shall be
414.1.2 This section shall not govern the design of selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
cast-in-place concrete piles and piers embedded in
ground. 414.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with
414.l.3 Plain concrete shall be pcnnitted only in cases Section 420.7.
(a) through (d):
414.2.1 Connection to Other Members
a. Members that are continuously supported by soil or
supported by other structural members capable of 414.2.2.1 Tension shall not be transmitted through
providing continuous vertical support; outside edges, construction joints, contraction joints, or
isolation joints of an individual plain concrete element.
b. Members for which arch action provides compression
under all conditions of loading; 414.2.2.2 Walls shall be braced against lateral
translation.
c. Walls;
414.2.3 Precast
d. Pedestals.
414.2.3.1 Design of_precast memhers shall consider all
414.1.4 Plain concrete shall be permitted for a loading conditions from initial fabrication to completion
stmcturc assigned to seismic zone 4, only in cases (a) and of the structure, including form removal, storage,
(b): transportation, and erection.
a. Footings supporting cast-in-place reinforced concrete 414.2.3.2 Precast members shall be connected to transfer
or reinforced masonry walls provided the footings arc lateral forces into a structural system capable of resisting
reinforced longitudinally with at least two continuous such forces.
reinforcing bars. Bars shall be at least 12 mm </> and
have a total area of not less than 0.002 times the 414.3 Design Limits
gross cross-sectional area of the footing. Continuity
of reinforcement shall be provided at comers and 414.3.1 Bearing Walls
j ntersectiuns;
414.3.1.1 Minimum bearing wall thickness shall be in
b. Foundation clements (i) through (iii) for detached accordance with Table 414.3.1.l.
one- and two-family dwellings not exceeding three
storeys and constructed with stud bearing walls:
1. Footings supporting walls;
ii . Isolated footings supporting columns or

pedestals;
/\ssociatio:1 ,if Struclumi Eriginne:1;; uf :he Philippin<.3s. Inc. (ASf:P)

CHAP n:f-; 4 - Structural Concret(i 4-87
Table 414.3.1.1 Minimum Thickness of Bearing Walls 414.4 Required Strength
Wall t e Minimum thickness 414.4.1 General

General - - t- G
::::--rea-· t-c-r ,....:.1:.:.4!.::0:.:;m:!.:m=:...::.:=~~-- -
I
ot: 414.4.1.l Required strength shall be calculated m
1/24 lhe lesser of unsupported accordance with the factored load combinations defined
length and unsuooorted hci2ht
in Section 405.
Exkrior basement 190 rnrn
Foundation - ---t-:l;-;;9::::0-m-m
- -=--- - - - - - - - - ~
414.3.2 Footings accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406.
414.4.1.3 No flexural continuity due to tension shall be

414.3.2.1 Footing thickness shall be at least 200 mm.
assumed between adjacent structural plain concrete
elements.
4 t 4.3.2.2 Base area of footing shall he determined from
unfactored forces and moments transmitted by footing to
414.4.2 Walls
soil and permissible soil pressure selected through
principles of soil mechanics.
414.4.2.1 Walls shall be designed for an eccentricity
414.3.3 Pedestals
corresponding to the maximum moment that can
accompany the axial load but not less than 0. lOll, where
h is the wall thickness.
414.3.3.1 Ratio of unsupported height to average least
lateral dimension shall not \..-xceed 3.
414.4.3 Footings
414.3.4 Contraction and Isolation Joints
414.4.3.1 General
414.3.4.1 Contraction or isolation joints shall be
provided to divide structural plain concrete members into 414.4.3.1.1 For footings supporting circular or regular
tlcxurally discontinuous elements. The size of each polygon-shaped concrete columns or pedestals, it shall be
element shall be selected to limit stress caused hy restraint pennitted to assume a square section of equivalent area
to movements from creep, shrinkage, and temperature for determining critical sections.
effects.
414.4.3.2 Factored Moment
414.3.4.2 The number and location of contraction or
isolation joints shall be detennined considering (a) 414.4.3.2.1 The critical section for Mu shall be located
through (t): in acx:ordance with Table 4 14.4.3.2.l.
a. Influence of climatic conditions; Table 414.4.3.2. 1 Location of Critical Section for M.,
b. Selection and proportioning of materials; Sunnortcd member Location of critical section

Column or pedestal Face of column or pedestal
c. Mixing, placing, and curing of concrete; Halfway between face of
Column with steel base
column and edge of steel base
plate
d. Degree of restraint to movement; olate
Concrete wall Face of wall
e. Stresses due to loads to which an element is Halfway between center and
Masonry wall
subjected; face of masonry wall
f. Construction techniques.
Natiom:il Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, t" Edition . 2016
,j
414.4.3.3 Factored One-Way Shear 414.5.l.4 Flexure and axial strength calculations shall be
based on a linear stress-strain relationship in both tension
411.4.3.3.1 F";r one-way shear, critical sections shall be and compression.
located h from (a) and (b) where h is the footing
thickness. 414.S.l.5 .l for lightweight concrete shall be m
a. Location defined in Table 414.4.3.2.1;
414.5.1.6 No strength shall be assigned to steel
b. Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas. reinforcement.
414.4.3.3.2 Sections between (a) or (b) of Section 414.5.1.7 When calculating member strength in flexure,
414.4.3.3.I and the critical section for shear shall be combined flexure and axial load, or shear, the entire cross
pennitted to be designed for Vu at the critical section for section shall be considered in design, except for concrete
shear. cast against soil where overall thickness h shall be taken
as 50 mm less than the specified thickness.
414.4.3.4 Factored Two-Way Shear
414.5.1.8 Unless demonstrated by analysis, horizontal
414.4.3.4.l For two-way shear, critical sections shall be length of wall to be considered effective for resisting each
located so that the perimeter b 0 is a minimum but need vertical concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-
not be closer than h/2 to (a) through (c): center distance between loads, or bearing width plus four
times the wall thickness.
a. Location defined in Table 414.4.3.2. l;
414.S.2 Flexure
b. Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas;
414.S.2.1 Mn shall be the lesser of Eq. 414.5.2.la
c. Changes in footing thickness. calculated at the tension face and Eq. 414.5.2.lb
calculated at the compression face:
414.4.3.4.2 For square or rectangular columns,
concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical section for (414.5.2.la)
two-way shear shall be pennitted to be calculated
assuming straight sides.
(414.5.2.lb)
414.5 Design Strength
where Sm is the corresponding elastic section modulus.
414.S.l General
414.5.3 Axial Compression
414.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
design strength at all sections shall satisfy </>Sn ~ U, 414.S.3.1 P n. shall be calculated by:
including (a) through (d). Interaction between load effects
shall be considered.
(414.5.3.1)
414.5.4 Flexure and Axial Compression

c. 4>V,1 ~ Vu 414.5.4.1 Unless permitted by Section 414.5.4.2, member
dimensions shall be proportioned to be in accordance with
Table 414.5.4.l, where Mn is calculated in accordance
with Section 414.5.2.l(b) and Pn is calculated in
414.5.1.2 q, shall be determined in accordance with
accordance with Section 414.5.3.l.
Section 421.2.
414.5.1.3 Tensile strength of concrete shall be permitted

to be considered in design.

CHAPTER 4 ... Structural Concrete 4-89
Table 414.S.4.l Table 414.5.6.1

Combined Flexure and Axial Compression Nominal Bearing Strength
Relative Geometric
Locat~w-"~~-1-~~-I_n~te_r_a_ctt_·o_n_ __.Eq_u_at_io_n~ ~~i
Conditions
Tension face sMu - APu
m g
r7i
~ 0.42;t" f! (a)
Supporting surface is
wider on all sides
Lesser
of:
JA:iA 1 (0.8Sf:A,)
than the loaded area 2(0.8Sf;A1 )
Other 0.8Sf: A,
Compression face (b)
414.6 Reinforcement Detailing
414.S.4.2 For walls of solid recta ngular cross section 414.6.1 At least two 16 mm</> bars shall be provided
where M 11 :s; Pu (h/ 6), Mu need not be considered m around all window and door openings. Such bars shall
design and Pn is calculated by extend at least 600 mm beyond the comers of openings.
I
(414.5.4.2)
414.S.5 Shear
414.5.5.l V11 shall be calculated in accordance with

Table 41 4.5.5.1.
Table 414.5.5.1 Nominal Shear Strength
Shear
Nominal shear strength, Vn
Action
One-way 0.1U!flbwh (a)
( 1 + ~) (o.1V.J!c'boh)[ll (b)
Lesser
Two-way
of:
2{0.1 V.J7lb0 h) (c)
I l) fJ is the ratio of long side lo ~ilort side of concentrated load or

reaction area.
414.5.6 Bearing
414.5.6.1 Bn shall be calculated in accordance with

Table 414.5.6.l.
National Structliral Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7m Edition, 2016
.
·- -
SECTION 415 concrete strength wilh vertical dowels and spirals as
required to achieve adequate strength;
BEAM-CONCRETE AND
SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS c. For beam-column and slab-column joinls lhal are
restrained in accordance with Section 415.2.4 or
415.2.5, respectively, it shall be pem1itted to
415.1 Scope
calculate the design strength of the column on an
assumed concrete strength in the column joint equal
415.1.t This section shall apply to the design and
lo 75 percent of column concrete strength plus 35
detailing of cast-in-place beam-column and slab-column
percenl of 11oor concrele strength, where the value of
joints.
column concrete strength shall not exceed 2.5 times
the tloor concrete strength.
415.2 General
415.4 Detailing of Joints
415.2.t Beam-column and slab-column joints shall
satisfy Section 415.3 for transfer of column axial force 415.4.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints that are
lhrough the floor system. restrained in acwrdancc with Section 415.2.4 or 415.2.5,
respectively, and are not part of a seismic-force-resisting
415.2.2 If grnvily load, wind, earthquake, or other system need nol salisfy the provisions for transverse
lateral forces cause transfer of moment at beam-column or reinforcement of Section 415.4.2.
slab-column joints, the shear resulting from moment
415.4.2 The area of all legs of transverse
transfer shall be considered in the design of the joint.
reinforcement in each principal direction of beam-column
and slab-column joints shall be at least the greater of (a)
415.2.3 Beam-column and slab-column joints that
and (b):
transfer moment to columns shall satisfy the detailing
provisions in Section 415.4. Beam-column joints wilhin bs
special moment frames, slab-rnlumn joints within a. 0.062ffc,-
yt
intcm1cdiatc moment frames, and beam-column and slab-
column joints using frames not designated as pa1t of the bs
b. 0.35,-
seismic-force-resisting systems in structures assigned to yt
seismic zone 4,shall satisfy Section 418.
where b is the dimension of the column section
415.2.4 A beam-column joint shall be considered to be perpendicular to the direction under consideralion.
restrained if the joint is laterally supported on four sides
by beams of approximately equal depth. 415.4.2.1 Al beam-column and slab-column joints, an
area of transverse reinforcement calculated in accordance
415.2.5 A ,,;Jab-column joint shall be considered lo be with Section 415.4.2 shall be distributed within the
restrained if the joinl is lalerally supported on four sides column height not less than the deepest beam or slab
by the slah. element framing into the column.
415.3 Transfer of Column Axial Force through the 415.4.2.2 For beam-column joinls, lhe spacing or the
Floor System transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed one-half the
depth of the shallowest beam.
415.3.1 If {~ of a column is greater than 1.4 times that
of the floor system, transmission of axial force through 415.4.3 If longitudinal beam or column reinforcement
the 1loor syslem shall in accordance with (a), (b), or (c): is spliced or terminated in a joint, closed transverse
reinforcement in accordance with Section 410.7.6 shall be
a. Concrelc of compressive strength specified for the provided in the joint, unless the joint region is restrained
column shall be placed in the floor al the column in accordance with Section 415.2.4 or 415.2.5.
location. Column concrete shall extend outward at
least 600 mm. into the floor slab from face or column 415.4.4 Development of longitudinal reinforcement
for lhe full dcplh of the slab and be integrated with terminating in the joint shall be in accordance with
floor concrete; Section 425.4.
b. The Design strength of a column through a floor

system shall be calculated using the lower value of
SECTION 416 416.2.1.8 Integrity tics shall be provided in the vertical
longitudinal, and transverse d irections and around th~
CONNECTION BETWEEN pcrirnetcr of a structure in accordance with Section
MEMBERS 416.2.4 or4] 6.2. 5.
416.1 Scope 4l6.2.2 Required Strength
416.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of joints 416.2.2.1 Required strength or connections and adjacent
and connections at the intersection of concrete members regions shall be calculated in accordance with the factored
and for load transfer between concrete surfaces, including load comhinations in Section 405.
(a) through (d):
416.2.2.2 Required strength of co nnections and adjacent
a. Connections ofpreca~t memlx:rs; regions shall he calcula1ed in accordance -with the analysis
procedures in Section 406.
b. Connections between founda1ions and either casl-in-
place or precast members; 4 J6.2.3 Design Strength
c. Horizontal shear strength of composite concrete 416.2.3. l for each applicable load com bi nation, design
llcxural members; 1,trengths or precast memher connections shal I satisfy
d. Brackets and corbels.

(416.2.3.1)
416.2 Connections of Precast Members
416.2.3.2 cf, shall be determined in accordance with
416.2.1 General Section 421.2.
416.2.1.l Translcr of forces by means of grouted joints, 416.2.3.3 At the contact surface between supported and
shear keys, bearing, anchors, mechanical connectors, steel supporting members, or between a supported or
reinforcement, reinforced topping, or a comhination or supporting member and an intermed iate bearing element,
these, shall be permitted. nominal bearing strength for concrete surfaces, B 11 , shall
be calculated in accordance with Section 422.8. 8 11 shall
416.2.1.2 Adequacy of connections shall he veri fied by be Lhe lesser of the nominal concrc1e bearing strengths for
analysis or test. the supported e r supporting member surface, and shall not
exceed the strength of intennediatc hearing elements, if
416.2. t.3 Connection details that rely solely on friction present.
caused by gravity loads shall not be pennitted.
416.2.3.4 If shear is the primary result of imposed
416.2.1.4 Connections, and regions or members adjacent loading and shear transfer occurs across a given plane, it.
w connections, shall he designed to resist forces and shall be permitted to calculalc V n in accordance with the
accommodate deformations due to all load effocts in the shear friction provisions in Section 422.9.
prccast structural system.
416.2.4 Minimum Connection Strength and
416.2.J.5 Design or connections shall consider structural Integrity Tie Requirements
effocts or restraint of volume change in accordance with
Section 405.3.6. 416.2.4.1 Unless where the provisions of Section 416.2.5
govern, longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall
416.2.1.6 Design of connections shall consider the connect precast members to a lateral force-resisting
effects or tolerances specified for fabrication and erection system, and vertical integrity ties shall he provided in
of precast members. accordance with Section 416.2.4.3 to connect adjacent
floor and roof levels.
416.2.1.7 Design of a connection with multiple
components shall consider the differences in stiffness, 416.2.4.2 Where prccast members fonn floor or roof
strength, and ductility of the components. diaphragms, the connections between the diaphragm and
those members being laterally supported by the
diaphragm shall have a nominal tensile strength of not
less than 4.4 kN per linear m.
4 _92 CHAPTER 4 .. Structur~il (:ont:mte
416.2.4.3 Vertical integrity tics shall be provided at 416.2.5.2 Vertical integiily ties shall satisfy (a) through
horizontal joints between all vertical precast structural (c):
members, except cladding, and shall satisfy (a) or (b):
a. Integrity ties shall be provided in all wall panels and
a. Concrete connections hetween precast columns shall shall be continuous over the height of the building;
have vertical integrity tics, with a nominal tensile
strength of at least 1.4Ar in N, where Ag is the gross b. Integrity tics shall provide a nominal tensile strength
area of the column, mm . For columns with a larger of at least 44 kN per horizontal meter or wall;
cross-section than required by consideration or
loading, a reduced effective area based on the cross c. At least two integrity ties shall be provided in each
section required shall be permitted. The reduced wall panel.
effective area shall he at least one-half the gross area
of the column; 416.2.6 Minimum Dimensions at Bearing
Connections
b. The Connections between precast wall panels shall
have at least two vertical integrity ties, with a 416.2.6.1 Dimensions of bearing connections shall
nominal tensile strength of at least 44 kN per tie. satisfy Section 416.2.6.2 or 416.2.6.3 unless shown by
analysis or test that lesser dimensions will not impair
416.2.5 Integrity Tie Requirements for Precast performance.
Concrete Bearing Wall Structures Three
I'
Storeys or More in Height 416.2.6.2 For precast slabs, beams, or stemmed
members, minimum design dimensions from the face of
416.2.5.1 Integrity ties in floor and roof systems shall support to end of precast member in the direction of the
satisfy (a} through({): span, considering specified tolerances, shall be in
accordance with Table 416.2.6.2.
a. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall be
provided in floor and roof systems to provide a Table 416.2.6.2
nominal tensile strength of at least 22 kN per meter Minimum Design Dimensions from Face of
of width or length; Support to End of Precast Member
b. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall be Member t e Minimum distance, mm.
provided over interior wall supports and hetween the Solid or hollow-core I /180
floor or roof system and exterior walls; Greater of: i -- -50
slab
-----1
c. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall he

positioned in or within 600 mm. of the plane of the
Beam or stemmed
member ___
t ,/180
Greater o1: i - -- 75
_,
floor or roof system;

416.2.6.3 Bearing pads adjacent to unannore<l faces shall
be set back from the face of the support and the end of the
d. Longitudinal integrity ties shall be oriented parallel to supported member a distance not less than 12 mm. or the
Hour or roof slab spans and shall be spaced not chamfer dimension at a chamfered face.
greater than 3.0 m on center. Provisions shall be
made to transfor forces around openings;
416.3 Connections to Foundations
e. Transverse integrity tics shall be oriented 416.3.1 General
perpendicular to floor or roof slab spans and shall he
spaced not greater than the hearing wall spacing;
416.3.1.1 Factored forces and moments at base of
columns, walls, or pedestals shall be transferred to
f. Integrity ties at the perimeter of each 11oor and root:
supporting foundations by bearing on concrete and hy
within 1.2 m of the edge, shall provide a nominal reinforcement, dowels, anchor holts, or mechanical
tensile strength or at least 71 kN.
connectors.
416.3.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical

connectors between a supported member and foundation
shall be designed to transfer (a) and (h}:
AssocicJtion of Structurol Engine,m; of th~ f·'hilipp:nes. Irie. (,\SEP)

a. Compressive forces that exceed the lesser or !he and shall not exceed the strength of intermediate hearing
com:rcte hearing strengths or eithe r the supported clement~, if pres;;nt.
member or the foundation, calculated in accordance
with Section 422 .8; 416.3.3.5 At the contact surface between supported
member and foundation, V 11 shall be c,1lculated in
b. J\ny calculated tensile force across the interface. accordance with the shear friction provisions in Section
422.9 or by other appropriate means.
416.3.1.3 At the base or a composi te column with a
structural steel core, (a) or (b) shall be satisfied: 416.3.3.6 At the base or a precast column, pedestal, or
wall, anchor bolts and anchors for mechanical
a. Base of structural steel section s hall be designed lo connections shall be designed in accordance with Section
transfer the total factored forces from the entire 417. Forces developed during erection shall be
composite member to the foundation; considered.
b. Base or st1uctural steel section shall be designed to 416.3.3.7 J\t the base or a precas( column, pedestal, or
transfer the factored forces fro m the steel core o nly, wall, mechanical connectors shall he designed lo reach
and the remainder of the total factored forces shall be their design strength before anchorage fai lure or failure of
transfe1Ted to the foundation by compression in the surrounding concrete.
concrete and hy reinforcement.
416.3.4 :\1inimnm Reinforcement for Connections
416.3.2 Required Strength Between Cast-hi-Place Members And
Foundation
416.3.2.1 Factored forces and moments transferred to
foundations s hall he calculated in accordance with the 416.3.4.1 For connections between a cast-in-place
fac tored load combinations in Section 405 and analys is column or pedestal and foun dation, As crossing the
procedures in Section 406. interface shall be at leas t 0. 005Ax, where Ag i s the gross
area of the supported member.
416.3.3 Design Strength
416.3.4.2 For connections between a cast-in-place wall
416.3.3.1 Design strengths of connections between and foundat ion, area of vertical reinforcement crossing
columns, wal Is, or pedestals and foundations shall satisfy the interilwc shall saLisfy Section 41 J.6.1.
Eq. 416.3.3.J for each applicable load combination. For
connection~ between precasl members and foundations, 416.3.5 Details for Connections between Cast-in-
requ irements for vertical integrity lies in Sect ion Placc Members and Foundation
4 16.2.4.3 or 4 16.2 .5.2 shall be satisfied.
416.3.5.1 At !he base of a cast-in-place column,
q,S 11 2::: U (4l 6.3.3. I) pedestal, o r wall, reinforcement required to satisfy
Sections 4 16.3.3 and 4 16.3.4 shall he provided either by
where Sn is the nominal flexural, shear, axial, torsional, extending longitudinal bars into supporting foundation or
or hearing stre ngth of the connection. by dowels.
416.3.3.2 rp shall be dete rmined in accordance with 416.3.5.2 Where moments are transferred to the
Section 421.2. fou ndation, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical
connectors shall satisfy Section 410.7.5 for splices.
416.3.3.3 Combined moment and axial slrcngth of
connections shall be calculated in accordance with 416.3.5.3 ff a pinned or rocker connection is used at the
Section 422.4. base of a cast-in-place column or pedestal, the connection
to foundation shall satisfy Section 4 16.3.3.
416.3.3.4 At the contact surface between a suppo11cd
mem ber and foundation, or between a s upported member 416.3.5.4 At footings, it shall be permitted to lap splice
or foundation and an intermediate bearing element, 40 mm cf) a nd 58 mm (/) longitudinal bars, in compression
nominal bearing strength, 8 11 , shall be calculated in only, with dowels to satisfy Section 416.3.3.1. Dowels
accordance with Section 422.8 for concrete surfaces. Bu shall satisfy (a) through (c):
shall be the lesser of the nominal conc rete benring
s trengths for the supported member o r foundation s urface, a. Dowels shall not he larger than 36 mm </>;
4-94 CHf\PTEf"{ ,) -· Stn.JGttJWI C0nc; ,'.'te
b. Dowels shall extend into supported member at least

the greater of the development lt:ngth of the tf,V11 h 2:: Vu (416.4.3.1)
~~ longitudinal bars in compression, Ide• and the where nominal horizontal shear strength, V,.h, is
compression lap splice length of the dowels, fsc; calculated in accordance with Section 416.4.4.
c. Dowels shall extend into the fooling at least .fde of 416.4.3.2 <j, shall be determined in accordance with
the dowels. Section 421.2.
416.3.6 Details for Connections between Precast 416.4.4 Nominal Horizontal Shear Strength
Members and Foundation
416.4.4.1 If Vu > <J>(3. 5bvd). Vnh shall be taken as V,1
416.3.6.1 At the base of a precast column, pedestal or calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.
wall, the connection to the foundation shall satisfy
Section 416.2.4.3 or 416.2.5.2. where, bv is the width of the contact surface, and d is in
416.3.6.2 If the applicable load combinations of Section
416.3.3 result in no tension at the base of precast walls,
416.4.4.2 If Yu :;:; <j,(3. 5bvd), Vnh shall be taken as V11
vertical integrity ties required hy Section 416.2.4.3(1">) calculated in accordance with Table 416.4.4.2, where
shall be permitted to be developed into an adequately
Av.min is in accordance with Section 416.4.6, bv is the
reinforced concrete slab-on-ground.
width of the contact surface, and d is in accordance with
Section 416.4.4.3.
416.4 Horizontal Shear Transfer in Composite
Concrete Flexural Members
416.4.4.3 In Table 416.4.4.2, d shall be the distance
from extreme compression fiber for the entire composite
416.4.1 General
section to the centroid of prestresscd and non-prestresse<l
longitudinal tension reinforcement, if any, but need not be
416.4.1.1 In a composite concrete Hcxural member,
taken less than 0. 80/t for prestressed concrete members.
horizontal shear forces shall be provided at contact
surfaces of interconnected elements.
416.4.4.4 Transverse reinforcement in the previously
cast concrete that extends into the cast-in-place concrete
416.4.1.2 Where tension exists across any contact
and is anchored on both sides of the interface shall be
surface between interconnected concrete elements,
pennittcd to be included as tics for calculation of Vnh .
horizontal shear transfer by contact shall be permitted
only where transverse reinforcement is provided in
accordance with Sections 416.4.6 and 416.4.7. 416.4.5 Alternative Method for Calculating Design
Horizontal Shear Strength
416.4. t.3 Surface preparation assumed for design shall
be specified in the construction documents. 416.4.5. t As an alternative to Section 416.4.3.1, factored
horizontal shear V11ti shall be calculated from the change
416.4.2 Required Strength in flexural compressive or tensile force in any segment of
the composite concrete member, and Eq. 416.4.5.1 shall
be satisfied at all locations along the horizontal interface:
416.4.2.l Factored forces transferred along the contact
surface in composite concrete flexural memhers shall be
calculated in accordance with the factored load t/>Vnh ~ Vuh (416.4.5.l)
combinations in Section 405.
Norn inal horizontal shear strength, Vnit, shall be
416.4.2.2 Required strength shall be calculated in calculated in accordance with Section 416.4.4.1 or
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406. 416.4.4.2, where area of contact surface shall be
substituted for bvd and V uh shall be substituted for Vu .
416.4.3 Design Strength Provisions shall be made to transfor the change in
compressive or tensile force as horizontal shear force
416.4.3.1 Design strength for horizontal shear transfer across the interface.
shall satisfy Eq. 416.4.3.1 at all locations along the
horizontal interface in a composite concrete Hexural 416.4.5.2 Where shear transfer reinforcement is
member, unless Section 416.4.5 is satisfied: designed to resist horizontal shear to satisfy Eq. 416.4.5. I,
the tie area to tie spacing rntio along the m~mbcr shall
AsSL)Ciation of Struc;twai Engine·~rs Df tlie P,1,1ir··pin8s, Ir.(;. (.'-\SEF')

CHAPTER 4 -· Structural Concrnte 4-95
approximately renecL the distribution of interface shear

forces in Lhe composite concrete fle>. ural member.
416.4.5.3 Transverse reinforcement in a previously cast

section lhal extends into the cast-in-place section and is I
unchored on both sides or the interface shall be permiu.cd

to be included as ties for calculation of V nh ·
Table 416.4.4,2
Nominal HoTizontal Sbe.11 r Strength
Shear transfer
C ontact s1111·ace prepara t ion Iii
r einfo rcement
Concrete placed against ha rdened concrete

(a)
intentionally roughened to a full amplitude Lesser of:
A,,~ Av,min of approximately 6 mm.
3.Sbud (b)
Concrete placed against hardened concrete
not intc111ionallv rouJ.\hcncd 0.55b.,d (c)
Concrete placed against hardened concrete
Other cases O.SSb,,d (d)
intentionally roughened
[1 l Concrete contact surface shall be clean and li'ee of laitanco 41.6.4.7.3 Shear transfer reinforcement shall be
developed in interconnected elements in accordance with
41 6.4.6 Minimum Reinforcement for Horizontal Section 425.7.1.
Shear Transfer
416.5 Brackets and Corbels
41 6.4.6.1 Where shear transfer
reinforcement is
designed to resist horizontal shear, Avmin shall be the 416.5.1 General
greater of (a) and (b): '
416.5.1.1 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to-depth
ratio a.,/ d ·s 1. 0 and with factored horizontal tensile
force Nuc S Vu shall be penn itted to be designed in
b. o. 35 bi:s 416.5.2 Dimensional Limits
416.5.2.1 E ffec tive depth d for a bracket or corbel shall

416.4.7 Reinforcement Detailing for Horizontal be cal culated al the face of the support.
Shear Transfer
416.5.2.2 Overall depth of bracket or corbel at the
41 6.4.7. l Shear transfer reinforcement shall consist of outside edge of the bearing area shall be at least 0 . Sd .
single bars or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical legs
of welded wire reinforcement.
416.4.7.2 Where shear transfer reinforcement is

designed to resist horizontal shear, longitudinal spacing of
shear transfer reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
600 mm and four times the least dimension of the
supported element.
National Structurni Code of t he Philippines Volume i, i 11

Edition, 2016
L
4-91:i CHAPTER 4 -· Structur.11 Concrete
416.5.2.3 No part of the bearing area on a bracket or 416.5.3.4 Horizontal tensile force acting on a bracket or
corbel shall project farther from the face of support than corbel shall be treated as a live load when calculating
(a}or(b): N uc, even if the tension results from restraint of creep,
shrinkage, or temperature change.
a. End of the straight portion of the primary tension
reinforcement; 416.5.3.5 Unless tensile forces are prevented from being
applied to the bracket or corbel, N uc shall be at least
h. Interior face of the transverse anchor bar, if one is 0.2Vu.
provided.
416.5.4 Design Strength
416.5.2.4 For normal-weight concrete, the bracket or
corbel dimensions shall be selected such that V ul </> shall 416.5.4.1 Design strength at all sections shall satisfy
not exceed the least of(a) through (c): <f,$11
~ U, including (a) through (e). Interaction between
load effects shall be considered.
b. (3. 3 + 0. 08f~)b111 d
416.5.4.2 cf, shall be determined m accordance with

Section 421.2.
416.5.2.5 For all-lightweight or sand-lightweight ·
416.5.4.3 Nominal tensile strength Nn provided by An
concrete, the bracket or corbel dimensions shall be
shall be calculated by
selected such that V ul <P shall not exceed the lesser of (a)
and (b):
(416.5.4.3)
a. ( 0. 2 - 0. 07 ';;) f~bwd 416.5.4.4 Nominal shear strength Vn provided by

Avf shall be calculated in accordance with provisions for
shear-friction in Section 422.9, where Avf is the area of
reinforcement that crosses the assumed shear plane.
416.5.4.5 Nominal flexural strength M 11 provided by Ar

shall be calculated in accordance with the design
416.5.3 Required Strength assumptions in Section 422.2.
416.5.3.1 The section at the face of the support shall be 416.5.5 Reinforcement Limits
designed to resist simultaneously the factored shear Vu,
the factored horizontal tensile force N uc, and the factored 416.5.5.1 Area of primary tension reinforcement, Ase,
moment Mu given by [V ullv + N uc(h - d) ]. shall be at least the greatest of(a) through (c):
416.5.3.2 Factored tensile force, N uc, and shear, Vu,

shall be the maximum values calculated in accordance
with the factored load combinations in Section 405.
b. (2/3)Avf + A 11
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406,
and the requirements in this section.
Association of Stn1cturat Engineers of th~ Philippin~;;, Inc (ASEP)
L.- -
CHAPTEI? 4 ··· Structurn! Concrett> 4-97
416.5.5.2 Total area of closed stirrups or ties parallel to

SECTION 417
... prim~ry tension reinforcement, Ah, shall be at least:
ANCHORING TO CONCRETE
(416.5.5.2)
417.1 Scope
416.5.6 Reinforcement Detailing
417.1.1 This section provides design requirements for
anchors in concrete used to transmit structural loads by
416.5.6.1 Concrete cover shall be in accordance with
means of tension, shear, or a combination of tension and
Section 420.6.1.3.
shear between: (a) connected structural elements; or (b)
safety-related attachments and structural elements. Safety
416.5.6.2 Minimum spacing for deformed reinforcement levels specified arc intended for in-service conditions,
shall be in accordance with Section 425.2. rather than for short-term handling and construction
conditions.
416.5.6.3 At the front face of a bracket or corbel,
primary tension reinforcement shall he anchored by (a), 417.1.2 This section applies to cast-in anchors and to
(b), or (c):
post-installed expansion (torque-controlled and
displacement-controlled), undercut, and adhesive anchors.
a. A weld to a transverse bar of at least equal size that is Adhesive anchors shall be installed in concrete having a
designed to develop f y of primary tension minimum age of 21 days at time of anchor installation.
reinforcement; Specialty inserts, through-bolts, multiple anchors
connected to a single steel plate at lhe embedded end of
b. Bending the primary tension reinforcement back to the anchors, grouted anchors, and direct anchors such as
form a horizontal loop; powder or pneumatic acluated nails or bolts are not
included in the provisions of this section. Reinforcement
c. Other means of anchorage that develops f y· used as part of the embedment shall be designed in
accordance with other parts of lhis Chapter.
416.5.6.4 Primary tension reinforcement shall be
developed at the face of the support. 417.1.3 Design provisions are included for the
following types of anchors:
416.5.6.5 Development of tension reinforcement shall
account for distribution of stress in reinforcement that is a. Headed studs and headed bolts having a geometry
not directly proportional to the bending moment. that has been demonstrated to result in a pullout
strenglh in ·uncracked concrete equal to or exceeding
416.5.6.6 Closed stirrups or ties shall be spaced such that 1.4Np, where NP is given in Eq. 417.4.3.4;
Ah is uniformly distributed within (2/3)d measured
from the primary tension reinforcement. b. Hooked bolts having a geometry that has been
demonstrated to result in a pullout strength without
the benefit of friction in uncracked concrete equal to
or exceeding 1. 4Np, where NP is given in
Eq. 417.4.3.5;
c. Post-installed expansion and undercut anchors that

meet the assessment criteria of ACJ 355.2;
d. Adhesive anchors that meet the assessment criteria of

ACI 355.4M.
417.1.4 Load Applications that are Predominantly High

Cycle Fatigue or Impact Loads are not covered by this
Section.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume :, 711 ' Edition, 20 Io

4--98 CHl\f'TEF~ 4 - Structural Concret,-;
417.2 General 417.2.3.4 Requirements for Tensile Loading

..
417.2.1 Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed 417.2.3.4.1 Where the tensile component of the strength-
for critical effects of factored loads as determined by level earthquake force applied to a single anchor or group
elastic analysis. Plastic analysis approaches are pcrmilled or anchors is equal to or less than 20 percent of the total
where nominal strength is controlled by ductile steel factored anchor tensile force associated with the same
elements, provided that deformational compatibility is load combination, it shall he pennitted to design a single
taken into a<.:count. anchor or group of anchors to satisfy Section 417.4 and
the tensile strength requirements of Section 417.3.1.1.
417.2.J .1 Anchor group effects shall be considered
wherever two or more anchors have spacing less than the 417.2.3.4.2 Where the tensile component of the strength-
critical spacing as follows: level earthquake force applied to anchors exceeds 20
percent of the total factored anchor tensile force
Failure Mode Under associated with the same load combinalion, anchors and
Critical Spacing their attachments shall he designed in accordance with
lnvesti2ation
Section 417.2.3.4.3. The anchor design tensile strength
Concrete breakout in tension 3het
shall be determined in accordance with Section
Bond strength in tension 2CNA 417.2.3.4.4.
Concrete breakout in shear 2ca1
417.2.3.4.3 Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy
one of options (a) through (d):
Only those anchors susceptible to the particular failure
mode under investigation shall be included in the group. a. For single anchors, the concrete-governed strength
shall be greater than the steel strength of the anchor.
417.2.2 The design strength of anchors shall equal or For anchor groups, the ratio of the tensile load on the
exceed the largest required strength calculated from the most highly stressed anchor to the steel strength of
applicable load combinations in Section 405.3. that anchor shall be equal to or greater than the ratio
of the tensile load on tension loaded anchors to the
417.2.3 Seismic Design concrete-governed strength of those anchors. In each
case:
417.2.3.1 Anchors in structures assigned to seismic zone
4 shall satisfy the additional requirements of Scclions 1. The steel strength shall be taken as 1.2 times the
417.2.3.2 through 417.2.3.7. nominal steel strength of the anchor;
417.2.3.2 The provisions of this section do not apply to 11. The concrete-governed strength shall be taken as
the design or anchors in plastic hinge zones of concrete the nominal strength considering pullout, side
stmctures under earthquake forces. face blowout, concrete breakout, and bond
strength as applicable. Fur consideration or
417.2.3.3 Post-installed anchors shall be qualified for pullout in groups, the ratio shall be calculated for
earthquake loading in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI the most highly slressed anchor.
355 .4M. The pullout strength NP and steel strength in
shear Vsa of expansion and undercut anchors shall be In addition, the following shall be satisfied:
based on the results of the ACI 355.2 Simulated Seismic
Tests. For adhesive anchors, the steel strength in shear iii. Anchors shall transmit tensile loads via a ductile
Vsa and the characteristic bond stresses Tuner and TtT steel element with a stretch length of at least
shall be based on results of the ACI 355.4M Simulated eight anchor diameters unless otherwise
Seismic Tests. determined by analysis;
1v. Where anchors are subject to load reversals, the

anchor shall he protected against buckling;
v. Where connections are threaded and the ductile

steel elements are not threaded over their entire
length, the ratio of f utalf ya shall not be less
than 1.3 unless the threaded portions arc upset.
Association cf Structura.t Ennineers of 11,fi Philippine,;, inc. (ASEP;

The upsel portions shall nol be included in the 417.2.3.4.5 Where anchor reinforcement is provided in
stn:tch length; accordance with Section 417.4.2.9, no reduction in <le~ign
tensile strength beyond lhat specilicd in Section 417.4.2.9
v1. Deformed reinforcing bars used as ductile steel shall be required.
elements to resist earlhquake clkcts shall be
limited to /\STM A6 I 5M Grades 280 and 420 417.2.3.5 Requirements for Shear I .oading
satisfying the requirements of Section
420.2.2.5(b) or ASTM A 706M Grade 420. 417.2.3.5.l Where lhe shear component of the strcngth-
lcvcl earthquake force applied to the anchor or group of
b. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for anchors is equal lo or less than 20 percent of thc total
the maximum tension that can be lransmittcd to the factored anchor shear force associated with the same load
anchor or group of anchors based on the development combination, it shall be pcrmitled lo design lhc anchor or
of a ductile yield mechanism in the auachmcnL in group of anchors to satisfy Section 417.5 and the shear
tension, flexure, shear, or bearing, or a combination strenglh requiremcnls of Section 417.3.1.1.
of those conditions, and considering both material
overstrcngth and strain hardening effects for the 417.2.3.5.2 Where the shear component of the sln.:ngth-
attachment. The anchor design tensile strength shall level earthquake force applied to anchors exceeds 20
be calculated from Section 417.2.3.4.4; percent of the total factored anchor shear force associated
with the same load combination, anchors and their
c. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for attachments shall be designed in accordance with Seclion
the maximum lcnsion thal can he transmitted to the 417.2.3.5.3. The anchor design shear slrength for resisting
anchors hy a non-yielding attachment. The anchor canhquakc forces shall he determined in accordance with
design tensile strenglh shall be cakulatcd from Section 417.5.
Section 4 J 7.2.3.4.4;
417.2.3.5.3 Anchors and their attachments shall he
d. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for designed using one ofoptions (a) tl1rough (e):
the maximum tension oblained from design load
combinations that include E, with E increased hy n. 11 • a. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
The anchor design tensile strength shall satisfy the the maximum shcar that can he transmitted to the
lensile strength rcquiremcnls of Section 417.2.3.4.4. anchor or group of anchors based on the development
of a ductile yield mechanism in the attachment in
417.2.3.4.4 The anchor design tensile strength for flexure, shear, or hearing, or a comhination of those
resisting earthquake forces shall be determined from condilions, and considering both material
consideralion of (a) through (c) for lhc failure modes overstrength and strain hardening effects in the
given in Table 417 .3.1.1 assuming the concrete is cracked attachment;
unless il can he demonstrated that the ctmcrctc remains
uncracked: b. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
the maximum shear that can he transmitted to the
a. </>N sa for a single anchor, or for lhe most highly anchors by a non-yielding attachment;
stressed individual anchor in a group of anchors;
c. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
b. 0. 75</>Ncb or 0. 75</>Ncbg, except that N,:b or Nchg the maximum shear ohtained from design load
need not he calculated where anchor rcinforcemcnl comhinations that include E, with E increased hy n11 •
satisfying Section 417.4.2.9 is provided; The anchor design shear strength shall satisfy the
shear strength requirements of Section 417.3.1.1.
c. 0. 75</>Npn for a single anchor, or for the most highly
stressed individual anchor in a group of anchors; 417.2.3.5.4 Where anchor reinforcement is provided in
accordance with Section 417.5.2.9, no reduction in design
shear strength beyond that specified in Section 417.5.2.9
d. 0. 7 5</>N sb or 0. 7 5</>N.<hg;
shall be required.
e. 0. 75q,Na or 0. 75</>Nag• 417.2.3.6 Single anchors or groups of anchors lhat arc

subjected to both Lension and shear forces shall be
where <f, is in accordance with Section 417 .3.3. designed to satisfy the requirements of Section 417 .6,
with the anchor design tensile strength calculated from
Section 417.2.3.4.4.
4-100 CHAPTER 4 - Structurnt Concret~~
417.2.3.7 Anchor reinforcement used in structures c. Pullout strength cast-in, post-installed expansion, or
assigned to seismic zone 4 shall be deformed undercut anchor in tension (Section 417 .4.3);
reinforcement and shall be limited to ASTM A6 I 5M
Grades 280 and 420 satisfying the requirements or d. Concrete side-face blowout strength of headed
Section 420.2.2.S(b) or ASTM A706M Grade 420. anchor in tension (Section 417.4.4);
417.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed horizontally or e. Bond strength of adhesive anchor in tension (Section
upwardly inclined shall be qualified in accordance with 417.4.5);
ACI 355.4M requirements for sensitivity lo installation
direction. f. Steel strength or anchor in shear (Section 417.5.1);
417.2.5 For adhesive anchors subjected to sustained g. Concrete breakout strength of anchor in shear
tension loading, Section 417.3.1.2 shall be satisfied. for (Section 417.5.2);
groups of adhesive anchors, Eq. 417.3.1.2 shall be
satisfied for the anchor that resists the highest sustained h. Concrete pryout strength of anchor in shear (Section
tension load. Installer certification and inspection 417.5.3).
requirements for horizontal and upwardly inclined
adhesive anchors subjected to sustained tension loading In addition, anchors shall satisfy the required edge
shall be in accordance with Sections 417.8.2.2 through distances, spacings, and thicknesses to preclude splitting
417.8.2.4. failure, as required in Section 417.7.
417.2.6 Modification factor la for lightweight 417.3.1.1 The design of anchors shall he in accordance
concrete shall be taken as: with Table 417.3.1.1. In addition, the design of anchors
shall satisfy Section 417 .2.3 for earthquake loading and
Cast-in and undercut anchor concrete failure .......... 1. OA Section 417.3.1.2 for adhesive anchors subject to
sustained tensile loading.
Expansion and adhesive anchor concrete failure .... 0. 8A
417.3.1.2 For the design of adhesive anchors to resist
Adhesive anchor bond failure per Eq. 417.4.5.2 ...... 0. 6.A. sustained tensions loads, in addition 10 Section 417 .3. l.l,
Eq. 417 .3.1.2 shall be satisfied.
where A is detennined in accordance with Section
419.2.4. It shall be permitted to use an alternative value of 0. 55</>Nba ~ Nua,s (417.3.1.2)
Au a where tests have been perfonned and evaluated in
accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI :H5.4M.
where N ba is determined in accordance with Section
417.2.7 The values of/~ used for calculation purposes 417.4.5.2.
in this chapter shall not exceed 70 MPa for cast-in
anchors, and 55 MPa for post-installed anchors. Testing is 417.3.1.3 When both N ua and V ua are present,
required for post-installed anchors when used in concrete interaction effects shall be considered using an interaction
with f~ greater than 55 MPa. expression that results in computation of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
417.3 General Requirements for Strength of This requirement shall be considered satisfied by Section
Anchors 417.6.
417.3.1 Strength design of anchors shall he based 417.3.2 The nominal strength for any anchor or group
either on computation using design models that satisfy the of anchors shall be based on design models that result in
requirements of Section 417.3.2, or on test evaluation predictions of strength in substantial agreement with
using the 5 percent fractile of applicable test results for results of comprehensive tests. The materials used in the
the following: tests shall be compatible with the materials used in the
structure. The nominal strength shall be based on the 5
a. Steel strength of anchor in tension (Section 417.4 .1 ); percent fractile of the basic individual anchor strength.
For nominal strengths related to concrete strength,
b. Concrete breakout strength of anchor in tension modifications for size effects, the number of anchors, the
(Section 417.4.2); etlects of close spacing of anchors, proximity to edges,
depth of the concrete member, eccentric loadings of
anchor groups, and presence or absence of cracking shall
Ai,scciation of Structural Engineers of the P11ilippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CJ-1,t\PTEr--: 4 - Struct:mi1 Cor;Grete 4-101
be taken into account. Limits on edge distances and

,, anch.or spacing in the design models shall he consistent
with the tests that verified the model.
'I
Table 417.3.1.1 Required Strength of Anchors, Except as Nuttd in Section 417.2.3 ,I
Failure mode Single anchor Anchor eroup111 I
Individual anchor in a group Anchors as a !:>mun
Steel strength in tension (Section 417.4.1 ) <f>N.a > Nua <f>Nsa > Nuai
Concrete breakout strength in tension (Section 417.4.2) </>Neb~ N,1a </>Nct>I!. e:'. Nua.e
Pullout strength in tension (Section 417.4.3) c/JN,:m ;;=: Nun </>Nnn ~ Nua.i
Concrete side-face blowout sl rcngt·h in tension (Section 417.4.4) <f>Nsb ~ Nua ¢N.<b~ ~ Nua.e
Bond strength of adhesive anchor intension (Section 417.4.5) ¢Nu~ Nua </>Nao e:'. Nua.•
Steel strength in shear (Section 417.5.1 ) <Pl'sa ;;:: V..,. <Plf.o ~ Vuai.
Concrete breakout strength in shear (Section 417.5.2) </>Vc1, ~ Vua </>Ve/JI!. e:'. Vua.e
Concrete pryout strength in shear (Section 417.5.3) </>\{.,, ~ Vua </>\1c.,o e:'. Vua,•
r,1 Required strengths for steel and pullout failure modes shall be calculated for the most highly stressed anchor in lhc group.
417.3.2.1 The effect of reinforcement provided to ii. Shear loads .. ...... .. ............................... 0.60
restrain the concrete breakout shall be permitted to be
included in the design models used to satisfy Section c. Anchor governed by concrete breakout, side-face
417 .3.2. Where anchor reinforcement is provided .in blowout, pullout, or pryout strength
accordance with Sections 417.4.2.9 and 417.5.2.9,
calculation of the concrete breakout strength in Condition A Condition B
accordance with Sections 417.4.2 and 417.5.2 is not
required. i. Shear loads ................... 0.75 ................. 0.70
417.3.2.2 For anchors with diameters not exceeding II , Tension loads

IOOmm, the concrete breakout strength requirements shall Cast-in headed sluds,
be considered satisfied by the design procedure of headed bolts,
Sections 417.4.2 and 417 .5.2. or
hooked bolls ................. O.75 ................ . 0.70
417.3.2.3 For adhesive anchors with embedment depths
4da ::;:; her $ 20da, the bond strength requirements shall
be considered satisfied by the design procedure of Section Post-installed anchors with category as determined from
417.4.5. ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M
417.3.3 Strength reduction factor q, for anchors in Condition A Condition B

concrete shall be as follows when the load combinations
of Section 405.3 are used: Category l ........................... 0.75 ........................ 0.65
(Low sensitivity to installation and high reliability)
a. Anchor governed by strength of a ductile steel
element Category2 .................... ........0.65 ......,. ............... 0.55
(Medium sensitivity to installation and medium
1. Tension loads .................................... 0.75 reliability)
11. Shear loads ........................ ................. 0.65 Category 3 ........................... 0.55 ...................... 0.45
(High sensitivity to installation and lower reliability)
b. Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel
element Condition A applies where supplcmcnta1y reinforcement
is present except for pullout and pryout strengths.
1. Tension loads ......................... ............0.65
Condition B applies where supplementary reinforcement
is not present, and for pullout or pryout strength.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume 1, 7'1) Edition. 2011:i
4-102 CHft.F'Tf.R 4 -- Shucturnl ConcrGte
417.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading 417.4.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength of a
single anchor in tension in cracked concrete, N h, shall not
417.4.1 Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension exceed
(4l 7.4.2.2a)
417.4.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension
as governed by the steel, Nsa, shall he evaluated by
calculations based on the properties of the anchor material where kc = 10 fur cast-in anchors, kc = 17 for post-
and the physical dimensions of the anchor. installed anchors.
417.4.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension, The value of kc for post-installed anchors shall he
N sa, shall not exceed permitted to be increased above 17 based on ACI 355.2 or
ACI 355.4M product-specific tests, hut shall not exceed
(417.4. l.2) 10.
Alternatively, for cast-in headed studs and headed bolts

where Asc.N is the effective cross-sectional area of an with 280 mm ::; hef ~ 635 mm., N 1, shall not exceed
2
anchor in tension, mm , and f uta shall not be taken
greater than the smaller or 1. 9 f ya and 860 MPa. (417.4.2.2b)
417.4.2 Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in

Tension 417.4.2.3 Where anchors are located less than 1. 5hef
from three or more edges, the value of he/ used for lhe
417.4.2. t The nominal concrete breakout strength in calculation of ANi: in accordance with Section 417.4.2.1,
tension, N cb or a single anchor or N cbg of a group of as well as for the equations in Sections 417.4.2.1 through
anchors, shall not exceed: 417.4.2.5 shall he the larger of (ca,max)/1. Sand s/3,
wheres is the maximum spacing between anchors within
a. For a single anchor; the group.
A Ne 417.4.2.4 The modification factor for anchor groups

Neb= A-t/Jed.N,t/Jc,N,V'cp,NNb (417.4.2.1 a) loaded eccentrically in tension, l/Jec,N , shall be calculated
Ncn
as
1
b. for a group of anchors; t/Jec,N = (. Ze~) ( 417.4.2.4)
l + 3hef
but 't/Jec N shall not be taken greater than l.O. If the
loading 'on an anchor group is such that only some
(417.4.2.lb) anchors are in tension, only those anchors that are in
tension shall be coosidered when detennining the
eccentricity eN for use in Eq. 4 l 7.4.2.4 and for the
Faclors t/Jec.N, t/Jed.N, t/Jc.N, and t/Jcp,N are defined in calculation of N cbg according to Eq. 417.4.2. lb.
Sections 417.4.2.4, 417.4.2.5, 417.4.2.6, and 417.4.2.7,
respectively. AN,is the projected concrete failure area of a ln the case where eccentric loading exists about two axes,
single anchor or group of anchors that shall be
the modification factor, V'ec,N shall be calculated for each
approximated as lhe base of the rectilinear geometrical
axis individually and the product of these factors used as
figure that n.:sults from projecting the failure surface
t/Jec,N in Eq. 417.4.2.lb.
outward 1. Sher from the centerlines of the anchor, or in
the case of a group of anchors, from a line through a row
417.4.2.5 The modification factor for edge effects for
of adjacent anchors. ANi: shall not exceed nANco, where 11
single anchors ur anchor groups loaded in tension, t/Jed,N•
is the number of anchors in the group that resist tension.
shall be calculated as:
nANco is the projected concrete failure area of a single
anchor with an edge distance equal to or greater than
1. Sher If Ca,mtn ~ 1. 5hef, then when t/Jed,N = 1. 0
( 417 .4.2.5a)
(417.4.2.lc)
.i\r,t,och~k.:n of Structural Engi;mers of the Pl;i!ippines, lnc. (ASEF')

CHl~PTER 4 - Structurai Concrt1te 4-103
If Ca,,nin 417.4.2.8 Where an additional plate or washer is added

Ca,min < l.Shef, then t/Jed,N = 0. 7 + 0. 3 1. Sher at the head of the anchor, it shall be permitted to calculate
(417.4.2.5b) the projected area of the failure surface by projecting the
failure surface outward 1. Sher from the effective
417.4.2.6 For anchors located in a region of a concrete perimeter of the plate or washer. The effective perimeter
member where analysis indicates no cracking at service shall not exceed the value at a section projected outward
load levels, the following modification factor shall be more than the thickness of the washer or plate from the
permitted: outer edge of the head of the anchor.
a. t/Jc.N= 1.25 for cast-in anchors;
417.4.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
accordance with Section 425 on hoth sides of the breakout
b. t/Jc,N= 1.4 for post-installed anchors, where the value surface, the design strength of the anchor reinforcement
ofkc used in E4. 417.4.2.2a is 17; shall be pennitted to be used instead of the concrete
breakout strength in determining <J>Nn. A strength
Where the value of kc used in Eq. 417.4.2.2a is taken reduction factor of 0. 75 shall be used in the design of the
from the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M product evaluation anchor reinforcement.
report for post-installed anchors qualified for use in both
cracked and uncracked concrete, the values of kc and 417.4.3 Pullout Strength of Cast-In, Post-Installed
1Pc,N shall be based on the ACf 355.2 or AC[ 355.4M Expansion and Undercut Anchors in
product evaluation report. Tension
Where the value of kc used in Eq. 4 I 7.4.2.2a is taken 417.4.3.1 The nominal pullout strength of a single cast-
from the ACI 355.2 or AC[ 355.4M product evaluation in, post-installed expansion, and post-installed undercut
report for post-installed anchors qualified for use m anchor in tension, Np 11 , shall not exceed
uncracked concrete, 1Pc,N shall be taken as 1.0.
(417.4.3.1)
When analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
t/Jc,N shall be taken as 1.0 for both cast-in anchors and
post-installed anchors. Post-installed anchors shall be where 1Pc,P is defined in Section 417.4.3.6.
qualified for use in cracked concrete in accordance with
ACL 355.2 or ACI 355.4M. The cracking in the concrete 417.4.3.2 For post-installed expansion and undercut
shall be controlled by flexural reinforcement distributed anchors, the values of NP shall be based on the 5 percent
in accordance with Section 424.3.2, or equivalent crack fractile of resuJts of tests perfonned and evaluated
control shall be provided by confining reinforcement. according to ACI 355.2. It is not permissible to calculate
the pullout strength in tension for such anchors.
417.4.2.7 The modification factor for post-installed
anchors designed for uncracked concrete in accordance 417.4.3.3 For single cast-in headed studs and headed
with Section 417.4.2.6 without supplementary bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout strength
reinforcement to control splitting, t/Jcp,N, shall be in tension using Section 417.4.3.4. For single J. or L·
calculated as follows using the critical distance Cac as bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout strength
defined in Section4l7.7.6. in tension using Section 417.4.3.5. Alternatively, it shall
be permitted to use values of N" based on the 5 percent
If Ca,min ~ Cac, then whcnt/J,..,,,N = 1.0 (417.4.2.7a) fractilc of tests performed and evaluated in the same
manner as the ACI 355.2 procedures but without the
benefit or iiiction.
Ca,111in
[f Ca.min < C4 c, then whem/Jcp.N = -c-
ac 417.4.3.4 The pullout strength in tension of a single
(417.4.2.Sh) headed stud or headed bolt, N,,, for use in Eq. 417.4.3.l,
shall not exceed:
but t/Jcp,N determined from Eq. 417.4.2. 7b shall not he
taken less than 1.Sherlcac, where the critical distance (417.4.3.4)
Cuc is defined in Section 417. 7 .6.
417.4.3.5 The pullout strength in tension of a single

For all other cases, including cast-in anchors, t/Jt-p,N shall
hooked bolt, N ,.., for use in Eq. 417.4.3. I shall not exceed:
be taken as 1.0.
National Structurdl Code of the Philippines Vo!ume L lth Edition. 201i3
- -- - = - ' -
·1-10'1 C!·li>PH:R 4 -· Stna~turnl Cnncwtr,
(417.4.3.5)
(417.4.5.lb)
417.4.3.6 For an anchor located in a region of a concrete
member where analysis indicates no cracking at service
load levels, the following modification factor shall be Factors t/Jec,Na, t/Jed.Na, and t/Jcp,Na are defined m
pcrmitled: Sections 417 .4.5.3, 417 .4.5 .4, and 417 .4.5.5, respectively.
ANa is the projected influence area of a single adhesive
(417.4.3.6)
anchor or group of adhesive anchors that shall be
approximated as a rectilinear area that projects outward a
Where analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
distance CNa from the centerline of the adhesive anchor,
t/>c.P shall be taken as 1.0. or in the case of a group of adhesive anchors, from a line
through a row of adjacent adhesive anchors. ANa shall not
417.4.4 Concrete Side-Face Blowout Strength of a
exceed nANao, where n is the number of adhesive
Headed Anchor in Tension anchors in the group that resist tension loads. ANau is the
projccled influence area of a single adhesive anchor with
417.4.4.1 For a single headed anchor with deep
an edge distance equal to or greater than CNa:
emhedment close to an edge (her> 2.5ca 1), the nominal
side-face blowout strength, N sh, shall not exceed: (417.4.5.lc)
(417.4.4.l} where
Ir ca2 for the single headed anchor is less than 3ca1 , the (417.4.5.ld)
value of N sb shall be multiplied by the factor
(1 + Ca2/Ca1)/4 where 1. 0 $ Caz/Cat $ 3. 0.
and constant 7.6 carries the unit of MPa.
417.4.4.2 For multiple headed anchors with deep
cmbcdmcnt close to an edge (he/> 2.Sca 1 ) and anchor 417.4.5.2 The basic bond strength of a single adhesive
spacing less than 6ca 1, the nominal strength of those anchor in tension in cracked concrete, N ba, shall not
exceed
anchors susceptible to a side-face blowout failure N sbg
shall not exceed:
(417.4.5.2)
Nsbg::::: ( 1 +6 :aJ Nsb (417.4.4.2)
The characteristic bond stress, t'cr, shall be taken as the 5
percent fractile of results of tests performed and evaluated
where s is the distance between the outer anchors along according to ACI 355.4M.
the edge, and N sb is obtained from Eq. 417.4.4.1 without
modification for a perpendicular edge distance. Where analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
adhesive anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked
417.4.5 Bond Strength of Adhesive Anchor in concrete in accordance with AC! 355.41\11.
Tension
For adhesive anchors located in a region of a concrete
417.4.5.1 The nominal bond strength in tension, Na ofa member where analysis indicates no cracking at service
single adhesive anchor or Nag of a group of adhesive load levels, Tuner shall be permitted to be used in place of
anchors, shall not exceed t'cr in Eq. 417.4.5.2 and shall be taken as the 5 percent
fractile of results of tests performed and evaluated
a. For a single adhesive anchor: according to AC! 355.4M.
It shall be permitted to use the minimum characteristic

(417.4.5.1 a) bond stress values in Table 417.4.5.2 provided (a) through
(e) are satisfied:
b. For a group of adhesive anchors: a. Anchors shall meet the requirements of ACI 355.4M;
P,Hrnciation or Structur?.I Engineers ot t:1e Philippines, Inc. (/\SEP)
-
.1 .. 1()i)
h. Anchors shall be installed in holes drilled wilh a

rotary impacl drill or rock d rill; then 1/Jed,N<i = 1. 0 (4 J 7.4 .5.4a)
c. Concrete at time of anchor installation shall have a

minimum compressive s trength of 17 MPa;
en.min
then W ed.Na = 0. 7 + 0. 3 - - (41 7.4.5.4b)
CNa
d. Concrete at time o r anchor installation shall have a
minimum age of 2 l days;
4 17.4.5.5 T he modification factor for adhesive anc hors
c. Concrete te mperature at ti me of anchor inslallation
designed for uncrackcd concrete in accordance wi th
shall be at least I0°C.
Section 4 17 .4.5.2 without supplementary reinforcement to
control splitting, 'Pep.Na, shall be calculated as:
Table 417.4.5.2 Mini mum C ha r acteris tic Bond
St resses 111121 ff Ca.min ~ Cuc•
Moist ure
Peak in-
Installation content
service
then 1/Jcp.Na = 1. 0 (417.4.5.Sa)
and of concret1: Tttner,
Temperatu re r ,,, J\1Pa
~Hvice at time or M.Pa
of co ncrete,
en viro nment ancho r oc lf Ca.m in < C,u ,
installa tion
Dry to fo ll y Ca,min
Outdoor 79 1.4 4.5 then 1/J ed,Na = 0. 7 + 0. 3 - - (4 l 7.4.5.4b)
salura tcd
CNa
Indoor Drv 43 2.1 7.0
111 Where anchor design includes sustai ned tension loading, mu ltiply vah,cs of Ter
and t:..,." by 0.4. but VJcp,Na detem1ined from Eq. 4 17 .4.5.Sb shall not be
1' 1 Where anchor design includes eal'lh4uake loads for stn,ctur~s assigned to taken less than CNal Cac, where the critical edge distance,
seismic zone 4, mul tipl y values of ~ .. by 0.8 and Tvner by 0.4. Cac, is defi ned in Section 4 17 .7.6. For all other cases,
t/Jcp.N11 s hall be taken as 1.0.
417.4.5.3 The modificalion faclor for adhesive anchor
groups loaded eccentrically in tension, VJ ec,Nu, shall be 417.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading
calculated as:
417.S.l Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear
1
'Pee.Na = ( 1 + _fl'..
e' ) (417.4.5.3) 417.5.1.l The nominal strength of an anchor in shear as
t:Na governed by steel , Vsa , s hall be evaluated by calculations
based on the properties of the anchor material and the
but 1/Jec,Na shall not be taken greater than 1.0. physical dimension~ o f the anchor. Where concrete
breakout is a potential failure mode, the required steel
lf the loading on an adhesive anchor group is such that shear strength shall be consistent with the assumed
only some adhesi ve anchors are in tension, only those breakout s urface.
adhesive anchors that are in tension shall be considered
when determining the eccentricity erv
for USC in E4.. 4 l 7.5.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor in shear,
41 7.4.5 .3 and for lhc calculation of N ug according to Eq. Vsa, shall not exceed (a) through (c):
4 17.4.5. lb.
a. For cast-i n headed s tud anchor;
In the case where eccentric loading exists about two
orthogonal axes, the modification factor, VJec,Na, shall be V sri =A .fe,vfuta (417.5. l.2a)
calculated for each axis individually and the product o f
these factors used as tfl ec.Na in Eq. 41 7 .4.5.1 b. where A se v is the effective cross-sectional area of an
anchor in ~hear, mm2, and f uta shall not be taken greater
417.4.5.4 The modification factor for edge effects for than the smaller of 1. 9f ya and 860 MP a.
single adhesive anchors or adhesive anchor groups loaded
in tension, "1cd,Na, shall be calculated as: b. For cast-in headed bolt and hooked bolt anchors and
for post-installed anchors where sleeves do not
extend through the shear plane;
N:,tinm) i S11uc·tL1rnl Cod~; ol fr:e PhilippinH;; Volume I. 7111 falition, 201 6

4-106 CHAPT1:.r..: 4 - Struci1,rnl Coner<~!<~
edge for a single anchor or a group of anchors. It shall he

V.rn = 0. 6Ase.vfuta (417.5. l.2h)
permitted lo evaluate Ave as the base of a truncated half-
pyramid projected on the side face of the member where
where Ase,v is the effective cross-secrional area of an the top of the half-pyramid is given by the axis of the
anchor in shear, mm 2, and futa shall not be taken greater anchor row selected as critical. The value of Cat shall be
than the smaller oft. 9/ ya and 860 MPa. taken as the distance from the edge to this axis. Av~ shall
not exceed nAvco, where n is the number of anchors in
c. For post-installed anchors where skcvcs extend the group.
through the shear plane, V.~a shall be based on the Avco is the projected area for a single anchor in a deep
results of tests performed and evaluated according to member with a distance from edges equal or greater than
AC[ 355.2. Alternatively, Eq. 4 I 7.5.1.2b shall be
permitted tu be used.
1. Scat in the direction perpendicular lo the shear force. It
shall be permitted to evaluate Avco as the base of a half
pyramid with a side length parallel to the edge of 3c121
417.5.1.3 Where anchors are used with built-up grout and a depth of 1. 5c12 1
pads, the nominal strengl11s of Section 417.5.1.2 shall be
multiplied by a factor 0.80.
(417.5.2.lc)
417.5.2 Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in

Where anchors are located at varying distances from the
Shear
edge and the anchors are welded to the attachment so as
to distribute the force to all anchors, it shall be permitted
417.5.2.1 The nominal concrete breakouL strength in to evaluate the strength based on the disrance tu the
shear, Vch of a single anchor or Vebg of a group or farthest row of anchors from the edge. In this case, it shall
anchors, shall not exceed: be permitted to base the value of ca1 on the distance from
the edge to the axis of the farthest anchor row that is
a. For shear force perpendicular to the edge on a single selected as critical, and all of the shear shall be assumed
anchor; to he carried by this critical anchor row alone.
Ave 417.5.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength in shear

V,,,=-A t/Jed,v,t/Jc.v,t/Jh,v,Vb (417.5.2.la)
VCQ of a single anchor in cracked concrete, Vb, shall be the
smaller of (a) and (b ):
b. For shear force perpendicular to the edge on a group 2
of anchors; a. V1, = (0.6(::/ ~)Aa/t'cCca 15
1) ·
(417.5.2.2a)
Ave
v,bg = A-t/Jec,v, t/Jed,V, t/Jc,V, t/Jh.V, vb
Vco where t e is the load-bearing length of the anchor for
shear:
(417.5.2.lb)
te = hef for anchors with a constant stiffness over the
c. For shear force parallel to an edge, Vcb or Vcbg shall full length of embedded section, such as headed studs and
be permitted lo be twice the value of the shear force post-installed anchors with one tubular shell over full
determined from Eq. 417.5.2.la or 417.5.2.lb, length of the embedment depth;
respectively, with the shear force assumed to act
perpendicular to the edge and with t/Jed,V taken equal le =2da for torque-controlled expansion anchors with a
to 1.0; distance sleeve separated from expansion sleeve, and
le $ 8da in all cases.
d. For anchors located at a corner, the limiting nominal
concrete breakout strength shall be determined for
b. (4l7.5.2.2a)
each edge, and the minimum value shall be used.
417.5.2.3 For cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or

Factors t/Jec.v, t/Jed,v, t/Jc,V, and t/Jh.v are defined 111
hooked bolts that are continuously welded to steel
Sections 417.5.2.5, 417.5.2.6, 417.5.2.7, and 417.5.2.8,
attachments having a minimum thickness equal to the
respectively. Vb is the basic concrete breakout strength
greater of 10 mm. and half or the anchor diameter, the
value for a single anchor. Av, is the projected area of the
basic concrete breakout strength in shear of a single
failure surface on the side of the concrete member at its
/~si;0ciation of Structural Enr.;ine~rs of the Pl1ilippinr1$, !nr;. (.L\SEP)
1
4.100 CH.O.PTER ·1 - Slruc!ur~,, Con,rntt1
417.5.3 Concrdc Pryout Strt:ngth of Anchor in 4 I 7.7 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and
Shear Thicknesst!s to Preclude Splitting Failure
417.5.3.l The nominal pryout strength, Veµ for a single Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors and
anchor or V cpg for a group of anchors, shall not exceed: minimum thicknesses or members shall conform to
Sections 417. 7 .1 through 417. 7 .6, unless supplemenlary
a. For a single anchor; rei uforcement is provided to control splitting. Lesser
values from product-specilic tesls performed in
(417.5.3.la) accordirnce with ACT 355 .2 or ACT 355.4M shall be
permitted.
For cast-in, expansion, and underct1t anchors, N cp shall be
taken as N cb determined from Eq. 4 17.4.2.1 a, and for 417.7.1 Unless determined in accordance with Section
adhesive anchors, N cp shall be the lesser of N n 417.7.4, minimum center-to-center spacing of anchors
determined from Eq. 417.4.5.1 a and N cb determined from shall be 4da for cast-in anchors that will not be torqued,
Eq. 417.4.2.la. and 6d 11 for torqued cast-in anchors and post-installed
anchors.
b. For a group of anchors:
417.7.2 Unless determined in accordance with Section
(417.5.3.lb) 417.7.4, minimum edge distances for cast-in anchors that
will not be torqued shall he based on specified cover
requirements for reinforcement in Section 420.6.1. For
For cast-in, expansion, and undercul anchors, N cpg shall
cast-in anchors that will be torqued, the minimum edge
be taken as Nq,g determined from Eq. 41 7.4.2.1 b, and for distarn:cs shall he 6d11 •
adhesive anchors, N q,g shall be the lesser ofN ag
determined from Eq. 41 7.4.5.1 b and N cpg determined 417.7.3 Unless determined in accordance with Section
from Eq. 41 7 .4.2. lb. 417. 7.4, minimum edge distances for post-installed
anchors shall he based on the gre!lter of specified cover
In Eq. 417.5.3.la and 417.5.3.lb, kcp = 1.0 for her < requirements for reinforcement in Section 420.6.1, or
65 mm.; and kcp = 2. 0 for hef ~ 65 mm. minimum edge distance requirements for the products as
determined by tests in accordance with i\C I 355 .2 or ACl
417.6 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces 355.4M, and shall not be less than twice the maximum
aggregate size. In the absence of product-specific AC I
Unless determined in accordance with Section 417.3.1.3, 355.2 or ACI 355 .4M test information, the minimum edge
anchors or groups of anchors that are subjected 10 both distance shall not be less than:
shear and axial lbads shall be designed to satisfy Lhe
requirements of Sections 417.6.1 through 4 17.6.3. The Adhesive anchors .............. ................................... 6da
values of <J>N II and </>V II shall be the required strengths as
determined from Section 417 .3.1.1 or from Section Undercut anchors .................................................. 6du
417.2.3.
Torque-controlled anchors ................................... Sda
417.6.1 If Vu11 /(<J>V11 ) $ 0.2 for the governing
strength in shear, then full strength in tension shall be Displacement-controlled anchors ..................... 10da
pennitted: q,N 11 2 N 1111 •
417.7.4 For anchors where instaJlation docs not
417.6.2 If Nual(</>N 11 ) $ 0. 2 for the governing produce a splitting force and that will not be torqued, if
strength in tension, then full strenglh in shear shall be the edge distance or spacing is less than those specified in
permitted: </>Vn 2 Yua· Sections 417.7. 1 to 417 .7.3, calculations 1.hall be
perfonncd by substituting for da a smaller value d~ that
417.6.3 If Vuuf (</>V11) > 0. 2 for the governing meets the rcqu irements of Sections 417. 7. l to 417. 7. 3.
slrcngth in shear and Nuu f((j)N 11 ) > 0.2 for the Calculaled forces applied to the anchor shall be limited to
governing strength in tension, then: the values corresponding to an anchor having a diameter
of d~.
N V
~+~<12 (417.6.3) 417.7.S Unless detennined from tests in accordance
<J>N,, <J>Vn - .
with ACI 355.2, the value of h er for an expansion or
undercut post-inslalled anchor shall nol exceed the greater
A~t;,)ci::ition ot Slructurrii Er:yln,w rs of the Pr;1llr.pine$. Inc. (ASEP)
-·
CHJ.l,f)TEI~ 4 ... S!r1Jctur<'!1 Concrete <1·109
of 2/3 of the member thickness, h.,, and the member 417.8.2.1 For adhesive anchors, the construction
thickness minus I 00 mm. documents shall specify proof loading where required in
accordance with ACI 355.4M. The construction
417.7.6 Unless determined from tension tests in documents shall also specify all parameters associated
accordance with AC[ 355.2 or AC[ 355.4M, the critical with the characteristic bond stress used for the desigr.
edge distance, Cac, shall not be taken less than: according to Section 417.4.5, including minimum age of
concrete; concrete temperature range; moisture condition
Adhesive anchors .............................................. 2hef of concrete at time of installaliun; type of lightweight
concrete, if applicable; and requirements for hole drilling
Undercut anchors ........................................ 2. Sh.:f and preparation.
Torque-controlled expansion anchors ............. 4hef 417.8.2.2 Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or
upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall
Displacement-controlled expansion anchors ... 4hef be performed by personnel certified by an applicahle
ce11ification program. Certification shall include written
and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRS[
417.7.7 Construction documents shall specify use of Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or
anchors with a minimum edge distance as assumed in equivalent.
design.
417.8.2.3 The acceptability of certification other than the
417.8 Installation and Inspection of Anchors ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification shall
be the responsibility of the licensed design professional.
417.8.1 Anchors shall be installed by qualified
personnel in accordance with the construction documents 417.8.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed in horizonlal or
and, where applicable, manufacturer's instructions. The· upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension
constniction documents shall require installation of post- loads shall be continuously inspected during installation
installcd adhesive anchors in accordance with the by an inspector specially approved for that purpose hy the
Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions (MPH). building official. The special inspector shall furnish a
Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by report to the licensed design professional and building
personnel trained to install adhesive anchors. official that the work covered by the report has been
performed and thal the materials used and the installation
417.8.2 Installation of anchors shall be inspected in procedures used confonn with the approved construction
accordance with Section 401.9 and the general building documents and the Manufacturer's Printed Installation
code. Adhesive anchors shall be also subject to Sections Instructions (MPH).
417.8.2.1 through 417.8.2.4.
Nationa! Siri;cturnl c,,<Je of Iha PhiliDpines Vo,:Jmc L 7tt1 Er.iitir.m, 201fi

a. Ordinary moment frames shall satisfy Section 418.3;
SECTION 418
" EARTHQUAKE"RESISTANT b. Ordinary reinforced concrete stmctural walls need
STRUCTURES nol satisfy any detailing provisions in Section 418,
unless required by Seel ion 418.2.1.3 or 418.2.1.4.
418.l Scope
c. Intermediate moment frames shall satisfy Section
418.1.l This section shall apply to the design of non- 418.4;
prestressed and prestressed concrclc structures assigned to
seismic zone 4, including, where applicable: d. Intermediate precast walls shall satisfy Section 418.5;
a. Struclural systems designated as part of t11e seismic- e. Special moment frame!> shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3
force-resisting system, including diaphragms, through 418.2.8 and 418.6 through 418.8;
moment frames, struclural walls, and foundations;
f. Special moment frames constructed using prccast
h. Members not designated as part of the seismic-forcc- concrete shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3 through
resisting system but required to support other loads 418.2.8 and418.9;
while undergoing deformations associated with
earthquake effects. g. Special structural walls shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3
through 418.2.8 and 418.1 O;
418. t.2 Structures designed according to the
provisions of this chapter are intended to resist eat1hquake h. Special structural walls constructed using µrecast
motions through ductile inclasLic response of selected concrete shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3 through
members. 418.2.8 and 418.11.
418.2 General 418.2.1.6 /\. reinforced concrete structural system not

satisfying this section shall be permitted if it is
418.2.t Structural Systems demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that
the proposed system will have strength and toughness
418.2.1.l All structures shall be assigned to a seismic equal to or exceeding those provided by a comparable
zone in accordance with Section 404.4.6.1. reinforced concrete slructure satisfying this section ..
418.2.1.2 All members shall satisfy Sections 401 to 417 418.2.2 Analysis and Proportionini: of Structural
and 419 lo 426. Structures assigned to seismic zones 4., or Members
2, also shall satisfy Scclions 418.2.1.3 lhrough 4 I 8.2.1. 7,
as applicable. Where Section 418 conflicts witl1 other 418.2.2.1 The interaction of all structural and
sections of this Code, Section 418 shall govern. nonstructural members that ailccl the linear and nonlinear
response of the structure to eaithquake motions shall be
418.2.1.3 Slructures assigned lo seismic zone 2 shall considered in tlte analysis.
satisfy Sections 418.2.2 and 418.2.3.
418.2.2.2 Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the
418.2.1.4 Structures assigned to seismic zone 4 shall seismic force-resisting system shall he pcrmitted provided
satisfy Sections 418.2.2 through 418.2.8 and Sections their effccl on the response of the system is considered in
418.12 through 418.14. lhe structural design. Consequences of failure of structural
and nonstructural members that are not a part of the
418.2.1.5 Structural systems dcsignaLed as part of the scismic-force-rcsisling system shall be considered.
seismic-force-resisting system shall be restricted to those
designated by the general building code, or determined by 418.2.2.3 Structural members extending below the ba~e
other authority having jurisdiction in areas without a of structure that are required to transmit forces resultinR
legally adopted building code. Except for areas of low from earthquake effects to the foundation shall comply
seismic risk, for which Seclion 418 does not apply, (a) with the requirements of Section 418 that are consistent
through (h) shall be satisfied for each structural system with the seismic-force-resisting system above the base of
designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system, in structure.
addition to Sections 418.2.1.3 through 418.2. l.5:
-- -
418.2.3 Anchoring to Concrete yielding of reinforcement is likely lo occur as a result of
lateral displacements beyon<l lhc linear range of hehavior.
#' 418.2.3.1 Anchors resisting earlhquake-induced forces in
structures assigned to seismic zones 4 or 2 shall be in 418.2.8.2 Welding of stirrups, ties, inserls, or other
accordance with Section 417.2.3. similar elements lo longitudinal reinforcement required by
design shall not he permitted.
418.2.4 Strength Reduction Factors
418.3 Ordinary Moment Frames
418.2.4. t Strength reduction factors shall he m
accordance with Section 421. 418.3.1 Scope
418.2.5 Concrete in Special Moment Frames and 418.3.1.1 This section shall apply to ordinary moment
Specia) Structural Walls frames forming part oflhe seismic-force-resisting system.
418.2.5.1 Specified compressive strength or concrclc in 418.3.2 Beams shall have al least two continuous hars
special moment frames and special structural walls shall at bolh top and hottom faces. Continuous bottom bars
he in accordance with the special seismic systems shall have area nol less lhan one-fourth the maximum area
requirements of Table 419.2.1.1. of bottom bars along the span. These bars shall be
anchored to develop f y in tension at lhe lace of support.
418.2.6 Reinforcement in S1>ccial Moment Frames
and Special Structural Walls 418.3.3 Columns having unsupported length .fu :5 5c 1
shall have <f>Vn at least the lesserof(a)and (b):
418.2.6.1 Reinforcement in special momenl frames and
special structural walls shall he in accordance with the a. The shear associated with development of nominal
special seismic systems requirements of Section 420.2.2.
moment strengths of' the column at each restrained
end of the unsupported length due to reverse
418.2.7 Mechanical Splices in Special Moment
Frames and Special Structural Walls curvature bending. Column flexural strength shall be
calculated for the factored axial force, consislcnt with
418.2.7.l Mechanical splices shall be classified as (a) or the direction of the lateral forces considered,
(b): resulting in the highest tlexural strengtlt;
a. Type I - Mechanical splice conforming to Seclion b. The maximl_lm shear obtained from design load
425.5.7;
combinations t11al include E, with !l 0 E substituted
for E.
b. Type 2 - Mechanical splice conforming to Section
425.5. 7 and capable of developing the specified
tensile slrength or the spliced hars. 418.4 Intermediate Moment Frames
418.2.7.2 Type 1 mechanical splices shall not he located 418.4.t Scope

wilhin a distance equal to twice the member depth from
the column or beam face for special moment frames or 418.4.1.1 This section shall apply to intermediate
from critical sections where yielding of the reinforcement moment frames including two-way slabs without beams
is likely to occur as a result of lateral displacements forming parl oi'the seismic force-resisting system.
beyond the linear range of behavior. Type 2 mechanical
splices shall be pe1miued at any location, except as noted 418.4.2 Beams
in Section 418.9.2.1 (c).
418.4.2.1 Beams shall have at least two continuous bars
418.2.8 Welded Splices in Special Moment Frames at hoth top and bottom faces. Continuous bottom bars
and Special Structural Walls shall have area not less than one-fourth the maximum area
of bottom bars along the span. These bars shall be
418.2.8.1 Welded splices in reinforcement resisting anchored lo develop f y in tension at lhc face or support.
earthquake-induced forces shall conform to Section
425.5.7 and shall nol be located within a distance equal 418.4.2.2 The positive moment strength at the face of
to twice the member depth from the column or beam face the joint shall be at least one-third the negative moment
for special moment frames or from critical sections where strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the
........
negative nor the positive moment strength ,it any section b. The maximum shear obtained from factored load
aloug the length of the beam shall be less than one-lillh combinations that illclude E, with fi 0 F. snbstituted
the maxim um moment strength provi<lcd at the face of for E.
either joint.
418.4.3.2 Columns shall he spirally reinforced in
418.4.2.3 <J>Vn shall be at lcasllhe lesser of (a) and (b): accordance with Section 410 or shal I he in accordance
with Sections 418.4.3.3 through 418.4.3.5. Provisions of
a. The sum or the shear associated with development of S1:clion 418.4.3.6 shall apply to all columns supporting
nominal moment strengths or
the beam at each discontinuous stiff members.
restrained end of the clear span due to reverse
418.4.3.3 At both ends of the column, hoops shall be
curvature bending and the shear calculated for
provided al spacing s0 over a length l 0 measured from
factored gravity loads; the joint face. Spacing s0 shall not exceed the smallest of
(a) through (d):
b. The maximum shear obtained from design loa<l
combinations that include E, with E taken as twice a. 8 Limes the diameter or the smallest longitudinal bar
that prescribed by thc general building code. enclosed;
418.4.2.4 At both ends or the beam, hoops shall be b. 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar;
provided over a length of al least 2h measured from the
face of the supporting member toward mid-span. The first c. One-hair of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of
hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm from the face the column;
of the supporting member. Spacing or hoops shall not
exceed the smallest of(a) through (d):
d. 300 mm.
a. d I 4;
Length f" shall not be less than the largest of(e), (f), and
(g):
b. Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
bar enclosed; e. One-sixth of the clear span of the column;
c. 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar; f. Maximum cross-sectional dimension of the column;
d. 300 mm. g. 450mm.
418.4.2.5 Transverse reinforcement spacing shall not 418.4.3.4 The first hoop shall be locuted not more than
exceed d/2 throughout the len1:,rth of the beam. s 0 /2 from the joint face.
418.4.2.6 In beams having factored axial compressive 418.4.3.5 Outside of length / 0 , spacing of transverse
force exceeding AJ~/10, transverse reinforcement reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section
required by Section 418.4.2.5 shall conform to Section 410.7.6.5.2.
425.7.2.2 and either Section 425.7.2.3 or 425.7.2.4.
418.4.3.6 Columns suppo11ing reactions from
418.4.3 Columns discontinuous stiff members, such as walls, shall be
provided with transverse reinforcement at the spacing, s 0 ,
418.4.3.1 q,V11 shall he at least the lesser of(a) and (h): in accordance with Section 418.4.3.3 over the full height
hencath the level at which the discontinuity occurs if tlle
a. The shear associated with development of nominal portion of factored axial compressive force in thes\.:
moment strengths of U1e column at each restrained members related to earthquake effects cxcec<ls Ag/~/10.
end of the unsupported length due to reverse Ir design forces have been magnified to account for the
curvature bending. Column flexural strength shall be overstrcngth or the vertical elements of the scismic-force-
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with resisting system, the limit of Avf~/10 shall be increased
the direction of the lateral forces considered,
to A,J~/4. Transverse reinforcement shall extend above
resulting in the highest flexural strength;
and below the column in accordam:c with Section
418.7.5.6(b).
418.4.4 Join ts 418.5.2 General
418.4.4.1 Ucam-column joints shall have lransverse 418.5.2.1 In connections between wall panels, or
reinforcement conforming to Section 415. hetween wall panels and the foundation, yielding shall he
restricted to steel elements or reinforcement.
418.4.5 Two-Way Slabs without Beams
418.5.2.2 For elements of the connection that are not
418.4.5. t Factored slab moment at the support including designed to yield, the required strength shall he based on
earthquake effects, E, shall be calculated for load 1. 5Sy of the yielding portion of the connection.
combinalions given in Eq. 405.3.le and 405.3.lg.
Reinforcement to resist M sc shall be placed within the 418.5.2.3 In structures assigned to seismic zone 4, wall
column strip defined in Section 408.4.1.5. piers shall be designed in accordance with Section
418.10.8 or418.14.
418.4.5.2 Reinforcemenl placed within the effective
width given in Section 408.4.2.3.3 shall be designed to 418.6 Ucams of Special Moment Frames
resist y1 M sc· Etlectivc slah width for exterior and corner
connections shall not extend beyond the column face a 4.18.6.1 Scope
distance greater than Ct measured perpendicular to the
slah span. 418.6.1.t This section shall apply to heams of special
moment frames that form pa11 of the seismic-forcc-
418.4.5.3 At leasl one-half of the reinforcement in the rcsisting system and arc proportioned primarily to resist
column strip at the support shall be placed within the flexure and shear.
effective slab width given in Section 408.4.2.3.3.
418.6.1.2 Beams of special moment frames shall frame
418.4.5.4 At least one-quarter or the top reinforcement at into columns of special moment frames satisfying Section
the suppott in the column strip shall be continuous 418.7.
throughout the span.
418.6.2 Dimensional Limits
418.4.5.5 Continuous hottom reinforcement in the
column strip shall be at least one-third of the top 418.6.2.1 Beams shall satisty (a) thrnugh (c):
reinforcement al the support in the column strip.
a. Clear span, .fn, shall be at least 4d;
418.4.5.6 Al least one-half of all bottom middle strip
reinforcement and all bottom column strip reinforcement
b. Width, bw, shall be at least the smaller of 0. 3h and
at mid-span shall be continuous and shall develop f y at
250mm;
lhc face of support as defined in Section 408.10.3.2.1.
c. Projection of the beam width beyond the width of the
418.4.5. 7 At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and
bottom reinforcement at the support shall be developed at supporting column on each side shall not exceed lhe
the face of support as defined in Section 408.10.3.2.1. smaller of c2 and 0. 7Sc 1 .
418.4.5.8 At the critical seelions for columns defined in 418.6.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
Section 422.6.4.1, two-way shear caused by factored
gravity loads shall not exceed 0. 4<J, V c, where Vc shall he 418.6.3.1 Reams shall have at least two continuous bars
calculated in accordance with Section 422.6.5. This at hoth top and bottom faces. At any section, for top as
requirement need not he satisfied if the slab satisfies well as for bottom reinforcement, the amount of
Section 418.14.5. reinforcement shall be at least that required by Section
409.6.1.2 and the reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed
418.5 Intermediate Prccast Structural Walls 0.025.
418.5.1 Scope 418.6.3.2 Positive moment strength al joint face shall be

at least one-ha! r the negative moment strength provided at
418.5. 1.1 This section shall apply to intem1edia1c precast that face of the joint. Both the negative and the positive
structural walls fonning pa11 of the seismic-force-resisting moment slrength at any section along member length shall
system. be at least one-fourth the maximum momenl strength
provided at face of either joint.
........
418.(i.3.3 Lap splices of deformed longitudinal a. Over a lcngth equal to twice the beam depth
reinforccmen! shall be pcrmiHcd if hoop or spiral Jlleasurcd from the face of the supporting column
,,· reinforcement is provided over the lap lc.:ngth. Spacing of toward mid-span, at bo1h cnds of the beam;
the transverse reinfon.:c1m:11t enclosing the lap spliced
bars shall not cxcecJ the smalkr of d/ 4 and I 00 nun. Lap b. Ovc.;r lengths equal to twice the heam depth on both
splices shall not be used in locations (a) through (c): sides of a scc.:tion where Jlcxural yielding is likely to
occ.:ur as a result of lateral displacements beyond the
a. Within lhc joints; cla.•aic range of behavior.
b. Within a dislance of twice the beam depth from the 418.6.4.2 Where hoops are required, primary longitudinal
face of the joint; reinforcing hars closest to the tension and compres::.ion
faces shall have lateral support in accordance with Section
c. Within a distance of twice the beam depth from 425.7.2.3 and 425.7.2.4. The spacing of transversely
nitical sections where flexural yielding is likely to suppo1ted tlexurnl reinforcing bars shall not exceed 350
occur as a result of lateral displacements beyond the mm. Skin reinforcement required by Section 409.7.2.3
elastic range of behavior. need not be laterally supported.
418.6.3.4 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section 418.(i.4.3 Hoops in heams shall he permitted to he made
418.2.7 and welded splices shall conform to Section up of two pieces of rcinforcemenl: a stirrup having
418.2.8. seismic hooks at both ends and closed by a crosstie.
ConsecuLive erossties cngaging the same longitudinal har
418.6.3.5 Unless used in a special moment frame as shall have their 90-degree hooks at opposite sides of the
permitted by Section 418. 9 .2.3, pres tressing shall satisfy flexural member. If the longitudinal reinforcing bars
(a) through (d): secured by the crossties are confined by a slah on only
one side or the heam, the 90-<lcgree hooks of the crosslics
a. The average pn:strcss, /'pc, calculated for an area shall be placed on that side.
equal to the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the
beam multiplied hy the perpendicular cross-sectional 418.6.4.4 The first hoop shall he located nut more than
dimension shall not exceed the lesser of 3.5 MPa and 50 111111 from the face of a supporting column. Spacing of
f~/10; the hoops shall not exceed the smallest of(a) through (c):
b. Prestressing steel shall be unbonded in potential a. d/4;

plastic hinge regions, and the calculated strains in
prestressing steel under lhc design displac.:ement shall b. Six times the diameter of the smallest primary
be less than one percent; Jlexural reinforcing bars excluding longitudinal skin
reinforcement required by Section 409.7.2.3;
c. Prestressing steel shall not contribute more than one-
fomth of the positive or negative flexural strength at
c. 150 mm.
the critical section in a plastic hinge region and shall
be anchored al or beyond the exterior face of the
joint; 418.6.4.5 Where.: hoops arc required, they shall be
designed to resist shear according to Section 418.6.5.
d. Anchorages of post-tensioning tendons res1stmg
carthquake-induc.:ed forces shall be capable of 418.6.4.6 Where hoops arc not required, stirrups with
allowing tendons to withstand 50 cycles of loading, seismic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a distance
with prestresscd reinforcement forces bounded by 40 not more than d/2 throughout the length of the heam.
and 85 percent of the specified tensile.: strength of the
prestressing steel. 418.6.4. 7 In beams having factored axial compressive
force exceeding Ag/~/10, hoops satisfying Sections
4 t 8.6.4 Transverse Reinforcement 418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided along
lengths given in Section 4 I 8.6.4.1. Along the remaining
418.6.4.1 Hoops shall he provided in the following length, hoops satisfying Section 418. 7.5.2 shall have
regions or a beam: spacing, s, not excec.:<ling the smaller of six times the
diameter of t11c smallest longitudinal beam hars an<l 150
mm Where concrete cover over transverse reinforcement
exceeds l 00 mm, additional transverse reinforccmcnt
- -
ha ving cover not exceeding 100 mm and spaci ng nol 418.7.3.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall
exceeding 300 mm shall he provided. satisfy
418.6.5 S hear Strength (41 8.7.3.2)
418.6.5.1 De,~ign Forces where
The design shear force, Ve, shall he calculated from sum of nominal flexural strengths or
conside ration o f the forces on the portion of the beam columns fram ing into the joinL, evaluated at
between faces of the j oinlS. It shall he assumed that the fa.:cs of the joint Column tlexurnl
moments of opposite sign corresponding to probable strength shall he calculated for the factored
flexu ral strength, M pn act at the joint faces and that the axial force, consistent with the direction of
beam is loaded wi th the factored tri butary gravity load the lateral forces considered, resulting in
along its span. the lowest Ilcxural strength.
418.6.S.2 Tran sverse Reinforcement s um of nominal Jlcxu ral s trengths of the

beams framing into the joint, evaluated at
Tranliverse reinforcement over the lengths identified in lhe fact:s of lhc joint. In T -beam
Sectio n 41 8.6.4.1 s hall be designed to resist shear construction, where the s lab is in tension
assuming Ve = 0 when both (a) and (b) occur: under moments at the face of the joint, slab
reinlo rcemenl within an etkctive slab
a. The earthquake-ind uced shear fo rce calculated m width defined in accordance with Section
accordance with Section 418.6.5.l represents at least 406.3.2 shall be assumed to contribute to
M 11 b if the slab reinforcement is developed
one-half o f the maximum required shear strength
at the cri tical sect ion for fl exure.
w ithin those lengths;
b. The factored axial compressive force, Pu, including Flexural strengths s hall be s ummed s uch that the column
moments oppose the beam moments. Equation 41 8.7.3.2
earthquake effects is less than A~t::120 .
shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both
directions in the vertical plane of the fra me considered.
418.7 Cnlumns nf Special Moment Frames
41.8.7.3.3 If Section 418.7.3.2 is not s·atisfiecl at a joint,
418.7.1 Scope the lateral strength and stiffness of the columns framing
into that joint shall be ignored when calculating strength
418.7.J.l Tiiis section s hall apply to columns of special and stiffnt:ss of the structure. These columns shall
momenl frames that form parl of the scismic-force- conform to Section 418.14.
resisling system and are proportioned primarily to resist
flexure, s hear, and axial force.~. 418.7.4 Longitudinal Reinforcement
418.7.2 Dimensional Limits 418.7.4.1 Area of longi tudinal reinforcement, Ast, shall be
at least 0 . 01Ag and shall not exceed 0 . 06Ag
418.7.2.1 Columns shall satisfy (a) and (b):
418.7.4.2 In columns with circular hoops, there shall he
a. The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on al least six longitudinal bars.
a straight line passing through the geometric centroid,
shall be at least 300 mm; 418.7.4.3 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section
418.2.7 and welded splices shall confom1 to Section
b. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension lo 418.2.8. Lap splices shall be perm itted only within the
the perpendicular dimension shall be at least 0.4. center half of the member length, shall be designed as
tension lap splices, and shall be enclosed within
transverse reinforcement in accordance with Sections
418.7.3 Minimum Flexural Strength of Columns
418.7.5.2 and 418. 7.5.3.
418.7.3.1 Columns shall satisfy Section 418.7.3.2 or

418.7.3.3 :
<l-1 i (5 CHt,PTff< .:i - S!rnciu,::i: Concmle
418. 7.5 Transverse Reinforcement b. Six times the diameter of lhe smallest longitudinal
bar;
,f18.7.5.1 Transverse reinforcement required in Sections
418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided over a c. s0 as cakulaled by
length f 0 from each joinl face and on both sides of any
= 100 + ( 350- h)
section where flexural yielding is likely to occur as a
result of lateral displacements beyond the elastic range of S0 x (418.7.5.3)
behavior. Length .fO shall be at least the largest of (a) 3
ti1rough ( c ):
The value ofs 0 from Eq. 418.7.5.3 shall not exceed 150
mm. and need not be taken less than I00 mm.
a. The depth of the column at the joint face or at the
section where flexural yielding is likely to occur;
418.7.5.4 Amount of transverse reinforcement shall be in
accordance with Table 418.7.5.4.
b. One-sixth of the clear span of the column;
The concrete strength factor, k 1, and confinement

c. 450mm.
effectiveness factor, kn, arc calculated according to Eq.
418.7.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall he m 418. 7.5.4a and 4 I 8.7.5.4b.
accordance with (a) through (t):
a. k 1 = {; + o. 6 ;::: 1. o (418.7.5.4a)
a. Transverse rcinfurcemenl shall comprise either single 5
or overlapping spirals, circular hoops, or rectilinear
hoops with or without crossties;
n,
b. kn=-- (418.7.5.4b)
b. Bends of rectilinear hoops and crosslies shall engage n, -2
peripheral longitudinal reinforcing bars;
where n, is the number oflongitudinal bars or bar bundles
c. Crossties of the same or smaller bar size as the hoops around the perimeter of a column core with rectilinear
shall be permilled, subject to the limitation of Section hoops that are laterally supported by the comer of hoops
425.7.2.2. Consecutive crosstics shall be alternated or by seismic hooks.
end for end along the longitudinal reinforcement and
around the perimeter of the cross section; 418.7.5.5 Beyond the length .fO given m Section
418.7.5.1, the column shall contain spiral or hoop
d. Where rectilinear hoops or crossties arc used, they reinforcement satisfying Sections 425. 7.2 through
shall provide lateral support to longitudinal 425.7.4 with spacing, s, not exceeding the smaller of six
reinforcement in accordance with Sections 425.7.2.2 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal column
and 425.7.2.3; bars and 150 mm., unless a larger amount of transverse
reinforcement is required by Section 418.7.4.3 or 418.7.6.
e. Reinforcement shall be arrange such that the spacing
hx of longitudinal bars laterally supported by the 418.7.5.6 Columns supporting reactions from
comer of a crosstie or hoop leg shall not exceed 350 discontinued stiff members, such as walls, shall satisfy (a)
mm around the perimeter of the column; and (b):
f. Where Pu> 0.3Ag{~ or {~ > 70 MPa in columns a. Transverse reinforcement required by Sections
with rectilinear hoops, every longitudinal bar or 418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided over
bundle of bars around the perimeter of the column the full height at all levels beneath the discontinuity if
core shall have lateral support provided by the comer the factored axial compressive force in these
columns, related to earthquake effect, exceeds
of a hoop or by a seismic hook, and the value of hx
shall not exceed 200 mm Pu shall be the largest value A1/~/10. Where design forces have been magnified
in compression consistent with factored load to account for the overstrcngth of the vertical
combinations including E. elements of the seismic-force-resisting system, the
limit of Ag{~/10 shall be increased to Ag/~/4;
418.7.5.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smallest of(a) through (c): b. Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
disconlinued member at leasl f d of the largest
a. One-fourth of the minimum column dimension; longitudinal column bar, where id is in accordance
A5sodat:on of Stfuctural i::ngineer~ of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
---
CHAPTER 4 - Strnc!ural Concrnte ,t.117
with Section 418.8.5. Where the lower end of the the largest longitudinal column bar at the point of
rolunm tenninates on a wall, the required transverse termination. Where the column terminates on a
reinforcement shall extend into the wall at least .fd of footing
Table 418.7.5.4
Transverse Reinforcement for Columns of Special Moment Frames
Transverse
Conditions Applicable Expressions
Reinforcement
Pu S 0.30Ag/; and Greater of (a) A /,'
Ash 0 3 (i - 1) ~ (a)
f/ s 70 MPa
and (b) . Ac11 fyL
sbc
for rectilinear 0.09 ,~ (b)
hoop Pu > 0.30Ag[/ or Greatest of (a), /ye
f: > 70 MPa (b), and (c)
o.21c,1cllTT
Pu
(c)
"t cli
Pu s 0.30Ag[d and Greater of A
0.45(-g - 1) ~
f.' (d)
Ps r: s 70 MPa (d) and (e) Ach fvt
for spiral or
circular hoop
0.12 r: (e)
P11 > 0.30AJ/ or Greatest of
fvt
f/ > 70 MPa (d), (e), and (f)
Pu
0.35krknfA (f)
yt ch
or mat, the required transverse reinforcement shall 418.7.6.2 Transverse Reinforcement

extend at least 300 mm into the footing or mat.
418.7.6.2.1 Transverse reinforcement over the lengths
418.7.5.7 If the concrete cover outside the confining .f0 , given in Section 418.7.5.1, shall be designed to resist
transverse reinforcement required by Sections 418.7.5.1, shear assuming Ve= 0 when both (a) and (b) occur:
418.7.5.5, and 418.7.5.6 exceeds 100 mm, additional
transverse reinforcement having cover not exceeding 100 a. The earthquake-induced shear force, calculated in
mm. and spacing not exceeding 300 mm shall be accordance with Section 418. 7 .6.1, is at least one-half
provided. of the maximum required shear strength within f 0 ;
418.7.6 She11r Strength b. The factored axial compressive force, Pu, including
eaithquake effects is less than Ag/~/20.
418.7.6.1 Design Forces
418.8 Joints of Special Moment Frames
418.7.6.1.1 The design shear force Ve shall be
calculated from considering the maximum forces that can 418.8.1 Scope
be generated at the faces of the joints at each end of the
column. These joint forces shall be calculated using the 418.8.t.l This section shall apply to beam·column joints
maximum probable flexural strengths, M,,,., at each end of of special moment frames forming part of the scismic-
the column associated with the range of factored axial force-resisting system.
forces, Pu, acting on the column. The column shears need
nol exceed those calculated from joint strengths based on 418.8.2 General
Mpr of the beams framing into the joint. Jn no case shall
Ve be less than the factored shear calculated by analysis 418.8.2.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at
of the structure. the joint face shall be calculated assuming that the stress
in the flexural tensile reinforcement is 1. 25{y·
418.8.2.2 Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in

a column shall extend to the far face of the confined
column core and shall be developed in tension in
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7tt, Edition, 2016
.........
accordance with Section 418.8.5 and in compression in Table 418.8.4.l
accordance with SecLion 425.4.9. Nominal Joint Shear Strength V II
418.8.2.3 Where longitudinal beam reinforcement Joint contiouration

extends through a beam-column joint, the column For joints confined by
dimension parallel to the beam reinforcement shall be at beams on all four faces 11 l
least 20 times the diameter of the largest longitudinal For joints confined by
beam bar for nonnal-weight concrete or 26 times the beams on three faces or
diameter of the largest longitudinal bar for lightweight on two o osite faces Pl
concrete. f,or other cases
Kcfer to Section 4 l 8.&.4.2.
418.8.2.4 Depth h of the joint shall not be less than one- 2
( 1 ). shall be 0.75 for lightweight ~·oncrele and 1.0 for normal-
half of depth h of any beam framing into the joint and weighl con1:rel1:. Ai is given in Scdion 4 l 8.8.4.J.
generating joint shear as part of the seismic-force-
resisting system. 418.8.4.2 [n Table 418.8.4.1, a joint face is considered to
be confined by a beam if the hcam width is at least thrcc-
418.8.3 Transverse Reinforcement quaners of the ellective joint width. Extensions of beams
al least one overall beam depth h beyond the joint face
418.8.3.1 Joint transverse reinforcement shall satisfy are considered adequate for confining that joint face.
Sections 418.7.5.2, 418.7.5.3, 418.7.5.4, and 418.7.5.7, Extensions or beams shall satis1y Sections 418.6.2(b),
except as permitted in Section 418.8.3.2. 418.6.3.1, 418.6.4.2, 418.6.4.3, and 418.6.4.4.
418.8.3.2 Where beams frame into all four sides of the 418.8.4.3 Effective cross-sectional area within a Jomt,
joint and where each beam width is at least three-fourths
Aj, shall be calculated from joint depth limes cffoclivc
the column widt11, the amount of reinforcement required
joint width. Joint depth shall be the overall depth of the
by Section 418.7.5.4 shall he permitted to he reduced by
column, h. Effective joint width shall be the overall width
one-hall: and the spacing required by Section 418.7.5.3
or the column, except where a beam founes into a wider
shall he permitted to he increased to I 50 mm within the
column, effective joint width shall not exceed the smaller
overall depth h of the shallowest framing beam.
of(a) and (b):
418.8.3.3 Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the
a. Beam width plus joint depth;
column core shall be confined by transverse
reinforcement passing t11rough the column t11at satisfies
b. Twice the smaller perpendicular distance from
spacing requirements of Section 418.6.4.4, and
longitudinal axis of beam to column side.
requirements of Sections 418.6.4.2, and 418.6.4.3, if such
confinement is not provided by a heam framing into the
418.8.5 Development Length of Bars in Tension
joint.
418.8.3.4 Where beam negative moment reinforcement 418.8.5.1 For bar sizes 10 mm q, through 36 mm q,
is provided by headed deformed bars that terminate in the terminating in a standard hook, f di, shall be calculated by
joint, the column shall extend above the top of the joint a Eq. 418.8.5.1, but l dh shall be al least the larger of Sdb
distance at least the depth h of the joint. Alternatively, the and 150 mm. for normal-weight concrete and at least the
hcam reinforcement shall be enclosed by additional larger ol'10db and 190 mm. for lightweight concrete.
vertical joint reinforcement providing equivalent
confinement to the top face of the joint. (418.8.5.1)
The value of A shall be 0. 75 for lightweight and 1.0 for

normal-weight concrete.
The hook shall he located within the confined core of a

column or of a boundary element, wit11 the hook bent into
418.8.4 Shear Strength the joint.
418.8.4.1 V11 of the joint shall be m at:cordance wit11 418.8.5.2 For headed deformed bars satisfying Section
Table 418.8.4.1. 420.2.1.6, development in tension shall be in accordance
I
I
-
CHf,PTH{ 4 -- Structtir.31 C:.1nr;rete 4· 110
with Section 425.4.4, except clear spacing between bars a. Requirements of Sections 418.6 through 418.8 for
shall ~e permitted to be at least 3db or greater. special moment frames constructed with cast-in-place
concrete;
418.8.S.3 For bar sizes 10 mm 4> through 36 mm <f,, fd,
the development length in tension for a straight bar, shall b. Provision Section 418.6.2.1 (a) shall apply to
be at least the larger of (a) and (b): segments between locations where flexural yielding
is intended to occur due to design displacements;
a. 2.5 times the length in accordance with Section
418.8.5.1 if the depth or the concrete cast in one lift c. Design strength of the strong connection, </>Sn, shall
beneath the bar does not exceed 300 mm; be at least Se;
d. Primary longitudinal reinforcement shall be made

b. 3.25 times the length in accordance with Section
continuous across connections and shall be developed
418.8.5.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in one lift outside both the strong connection and the plastic
beneath the bar exceeds 300 mro. hinge region;
418.8.5.4 Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass e. For column-to-column connections, 4'S11 shall be at
through the confined core of a column or a boundary least 1. 4Se, q,M n shall be at least 0. 4M pr for the
clement. Any portion or f d not within the confined core column within the story height, and q>Vn shall be at
shal I he increased hy a factor of 1.6. least Ve in accordance with Section 418. 7.6.1.
418.8.5.S If epoxy-coated reinforcement is used, the 418.9.2.3 Special moment frames constructed using
development lengths in Sections 418.8.5.1, 418.8.5.3, and precast concrete and not satisfying Section 418. 9.2.1 or
418.8.5.4 shall be multiplied by applicable factors in 418.9.2.2 shall satisfy (a) through (c):
Section 425.4.2.4 or 425.4.3.2.
a. ACI 374.l;
418.9 Special Moment Frames Constructed Using
Precast Concrete b. Details and materials used in the test specimens shall
he representative of those used in the structure;
418.9.l Scope
c. The design procedure used to proportion the test
418.9.1.1 This section shall apply to special moment specimens shall define the mechanism by which the
frames constructed using precast concrete forming part of frame resists gravity and earthquake effects, and shall
the seismic-force resisting system. establish acceptance values for sustaining that
mechanism. Portions or the mechanism that deviate
418.9.2 General from Code requirements shall be contained in the test
specimens and shall be tested to determine upper
418.9.2.1 Special moment frames with ductile bounds for acceptance values.
connections constructed using precast concrete shall
satisfy (a} through (c): 418.10 Special Structural Walls
a. Requirements of Sections 418.6 through 418.S for 418.10.1 Scope

special moment frames constructed with cast-in-place
concrete; 418.10.1.1 This section shall apply to special structural
walls and all components of special st:ructural walls
b. V11 for coIU1ections calculated according to Section including coupling beams and wall piers forming part of
422.9 shall be at least 2Ve, where Ve is in the seismic-force-resisting system.
accordance with Section 418.6.5.1 or 418.7.6.J;
418.10.1.2 Special structural walls constructed using
c. Mechanical splices of beam reinforcement shall be precast concrete shall be in accordance with Section
located not closer than h/2 from the joint face and 418.1 l in addition to Section 418.10.
shall satisfy Section 418.2.7.
4 t 8.10.2 Reinforcement
418.9.2.2 Special moment frames with strong connections
constructed using precast concrete shall satisfy (a) 418.10.2.1 The distributed web reinforcement ratios, Pt
through (e): and Pc, for structural walls shall he at least 0.0025,
N::itional Structural Code <if the PhilipµiMs Vnlume I, 7th Edi!ien, 20 i 6

4 .. 120 CHt,PTE:R 4 - Siru,.:,rnal Concrete
except that if Vu does not exceed 418.10.4.4 For all vertical wall segments sharing a
O. ()83Ac 17l[R;, P1 and Pt shall be permitted to be common lateral force, VII shall not be taken larger than
reduced to the values in Section 411.6. Reinforcement 0. 66Acv!fc, where Acv is the gross area of concrete
spacing each way in stmctural walls shall not exceed 450 bounded by web thickness and length of section. For any
mm. Reinforcement contributing to Vn shall be one of the individual vertical wall segments, V 11 shall not
continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane. be taken larger than 0. 83Acw!fc, where Acw is the area
of concrete section of the individual vertical wall segment
418.10.2.2 At least two curtains of reinforcement shall considered.
be used in a wall if V 11 > 0.17AcvA!fc or hwflw 2::
Z. 0, in which hw and fw refer to height and length of 418.10.4.5 For horizontal wall segments and coupling
entire wall, respectively. beams, Vn shall not be taken larger than 0. 83Acw!fc,
where Acw is the area of concrete section of a horizontal
418.10.2.3 Reinforcement in structural walls shall be wall segment or coupling beam.
developed or spliced for f y in tension in accordance with
Sections 425.4, 425.5, and (a) through (c): 418.10.5 Design for Flexure and Axial Force
a. Longitudinal reinforcement shall extend beyond the 418.10.5.1 Structural walls and portions of such walls
point at which it is no longer required to resist flexure su~ject to combined flexure and axial loads shall be
by least 0. 8lw, except at the top of a wall; designed in accordance with Section 422.4. Concrete and
developed longitudinal reinforcement within effective
b. At locations where yielding of longitudinal flange widths, boundary elements, and the wall web shall
reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of lateral be considered effective. The effects of openings shall be
displacements, development lengths of longitudinal considered.
reinforcement shall be 1.25 times the values
calculated for f y in tension; 418.10.5.2 Unless a more detailed analysis is perfonned,
effective flange widths of flanged sections shall extend
c. Mechanical splices of reinforcement shall conform to from the face of the web a distance equal to the lesser of
Section 418.2.7 and welded splices of reinforcement one-half the distance to an adjacent wall web and 25
shall conform to Section 418.2.8. percent of the total wall height.
418.10.3 Design Forces 418.10.6 Boundary .Elements of Special Structural

Walls
VII shall be obtained from the lateral load analysis in
accordance with the factored load combinations. 418. l 0.6.t The need for special boundary elements at the
edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in accordance
418.10.4 Shear Strength with Section 418. I0.6.2 or 418.10.6.3. The requirements
of Sections 418.10.6.4 and 418.10.6.5 shall also be
418.10.4.1 V 11 of structural walls shall not exceed: satisfied.
418.10.6.2 Walls or wall piers with hwflw 2:: 2. 0 that are
(418.10.4.1) effectively continuous from the base of structure to top of
wall and are designed to have a single critical section for
tlexure and axial loads shall satisfy (a) and (b) or shall be
where the coefficient ac is 0.25 for hwflw :s; 1. 5, is designed by Section 418. I0.6.3:
0.17 for hw/f w 2 2. 0, and varies linearly between 0.25
and 0.17 for hivftw between 1.5 and 2.0. a. Compression zones shall be reinforced with special
boundary elements where
418.10.4.2 Tn Section 418.10.4.1, the value of ratio
hw! I w used to calculate VII for segments of a wall shall
be the larger of the ratios for the entire wall and the (418.10.6.2;
segment of wall considered.
418.10.4.3 Walls shall have distributed shear and c corresponds to the largest neutral axis depth
reinforcement in two orthogonal directions in the plane of calculated for the factored axial force and nominal
the wall. If hw/f111 does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement moment strength consistent with the direction of the
ratio Pt shall be at least the reinforcement ratio Pt·
Association of Structural Enginee;s of the f>l1ilipplnes, Inc. (ASEP)

I !
.··!- i ·.:: :
design ciisplaccment Ou· Ratio liuf hw shall nol h1.: reinforcement spacing limit or
Scctioi, 418.7.5.J(a)
1ak.en less than 0.005. shall be one-third of 1hc kast dimension of the
houndary element;
b. Where special boundary clements are required hy (a),
the special boun<la1y clcm1.:nl transverse r. The amount of transverse reinfon:cmcnt shall be in
reinforcement shall extend vertically above and accordance with Table 418.10.6.4( t}
below the critical section at least the larger of fw and
Mu/4Vu, except as pennilted in Section Table 418.10.6.4(f)
418.10.6.4(g). Transverse Reinforcement for
Special Boundary 1<:lcmcnts
418.10.6.3 Structural walls not designed in accordance
with Section 418.10.6.2 shall have special boundary Transverse
Applicable expressions
clements al boundaries and edges around openings or reinforcement
A f/
structural walls where the maximum extreme fiber
compressive stress, rnrrcsponding to load combinations
Ash
sbc Greater
03(-!\
• Ach
-1)~ fvc
(a) I
including canhquak.e effects, E, exceeds 0. 2f~. The

0.09 t:.
For rectilinear of
spedal boundary element shall he permitted to he (b)
hoop fvt
discontinued where the calculated compressive stress is
less than 0. 1Sf~. Stresses shall be calculalc<l for the A f.'
0.15 ( ~ -1 ) ~ (c)
factored loads using a linearly elastic model and gross Ps Greater t-
Ach f,,t
section properties. For walls with flanges, an effective For spiral or of f' (d)
flange width as given in Section 418.10.5.2 shall he used. circular hoop 0.12 /
lvt
I
418.10.6.4 Where special boundary elements arc g. Where the critical section occurs al the wall base, the
required by Section 418.10.6.2 or 418.10.6.3, (a) through boundary element transverse reinforcement al the
(h) shall be satisfied: wall base shall extend into the suppmt at least fd, in
accordance with Section 418.10.2.3, of the lm·gcst
a. The houndary clement shall extend horizontally from longitudinal reinforcement in the special boundary I
the extreme compression fiber a distance be al least element. Where the special boundary clement
the larger of c - O. H\v and c/2, where c is the terminates on a footing, mat, or pile cap, special
largest neutral axis depth calculated for the factored boundary element transverse reinforcement shall
axial force and nominal moment strength consistent extend at least 300 mm into the footing, mat, or pile
wiU1 Ou; cap, unless _a greater extension is required hy Section
408.13.2.3;
b. Width of flexural compression zone b over the
horizontal distance calculated by Section h. Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall extend
4 l 8.10.6.4(a), including flange if present, shall he at lo within 150 mm or lhe end of the wall.
least hu/16; Reinforcement sh,tll be anchored to develop f y
within the confined core of the boundary ck:ment
c. For walls or wall piers with hwf fw ~ 2. 0 tlrnt are using standard hooks or heads. Where the confined
effectively continuous from the hasc of structure to boundary clement has sufficient length to develop the
top of wall, designed to have a single critical section horizontal web reinforcement, and AJy/s of the
for t1exure and axial loads, and with c/fw ~ 3/8, horizontal web reinforcement does nut exceed
width of the flexural compression zone b over the A 5 f ytf s of the boundary element transverse
length calculated in Section 418.10.6.4(a) shall be
reinlorcement parallel to the horizontal weh
greater than or equal to 300 mm;
reinforcement, it shall he pcnnitted to terminate the
horizontal web reinforcement without a standard
<l. In Hanged sections, the buun<lary element shall
hook or head.
include the effective flange width in compression and
shall extend at least 300 mm. into the web;
418.10.6.5 Where special boundary elements arc not
required by Section 418.10.6.2 or 418.10.6.3, (a) and (b)
c. The boundary element transverse reinforcement shall
shall be satisfied:
satisfy Sections 418.7.5.2(a) through (e) and Section
418.7.5.3, except the value hx in Section 418.7.5.2
a. If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio al the wall
shall not exceed the lesser of 350 mm and two-thirds
boundary exceeds 2. 8/f y, boundary transverse
of the boundary element thid<ness, and the transverse
,1.122 C:·!P,PTE F 4 ··· :;;tru<.:lura! C:oncrf_•tn
reinforcement shall satisfy Section 418. 7 .5 .2(a) Vn = 2Av11f y sin a$; 0. 83ffcAcw
through (c) over the distance calculated in accordance
with Section 418.l0.6.4(a). The longitudinal spacing (418.10.7.4)
of transverse reinforcement at the wall boundary shall
no! exceed the lesser of 200 mm and 8db of the where a is the angle between the diagonal bars and
smallest primary flexural reinforcing bars, except the the longitudinal axis of the coupling beam;
spacing shall not exceed the lesser of I SO mm and
6db within a distance equal to the greater off w and b. Each group of diagonal bars shall consist of a
M ul 4V u above and helow critical sections where minimum of four bars provided in two or more
yielding of longitudinal reinforcement is likely to layers. The diagonal bars shall be embedded into the
occur as a result of in elastic lateral displacements; wall al least 1.25 times the development length for {y
in tension;
b. Except where Vu in the plane of the wall is less than
0. 083AcvA.ft:, horizontal reinfon:ement c. Each group of diagonal bars shall be enclosed by
terminating at the edges of structural walls without rectilinear transverse reinforcement having out-to-out
boundary elements shall have a standard hook dimensions of at least bw/2 in the direction parallel
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge to bw and bw/5 along the other sides, where bw is
reinforcement, shall be enclosed in U-stirrups having the weh width of the coupling beam. The transverse
the same size and spacing as, and spliced lo, the reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section
horizontal reinforcement. 418.7.5.Z(a) through (e), with Ash not less than the
greater of (i) and (ii):
418.10.7 Coupling Beams
418.10.7.1 Coupling heams with (l1Jh) 2: 4 shall satisfy

i)
0.09sb,-
,~
f yt
the requirements of Section 418.6, with the wall boundary
interpreted as heing a column. The provisions ol' Sections
ii) Ag- 1) -f~
418.6.2.l(b) and 418.6.2.l(c) need not be satisfied if it 0.3sbc ( -
can be shown hy analysis that the beam has adequate Ach f yt
lateral stability.
For the purpose of calculating Ag, the concrete cover in
418. 10.7.2 Coupling beams with (111 / h) < 2 and with Section 420.6.1 shall be assumed on all four sides of each
Vu exceeding 0. 33l!fcAcw shall he reinforced with two group of diagonal bars. The transverse reinforcement shall
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical have spacing measure~ parallel to the diagonal bars
about the mid-span, unless it can be shown that loss of satisfying Section 418.7.5.3(c) and not exceeding 6db of
stiffness and strength of the coupling beams will not the smallest diagonal bars, and shall have spacing of
impair the vertical load-carrying ahility of the structure, crossties or legs of hoops measured perpendicular to the
the egress from the structure, or the integrity of diagonal bars not exceeding 350 mm. The transverse
nonstructural components and their connections lo the reinforcement shall continue through the intersection of
structure. the diagonal bars. At the intersection, it is permitted to
modify the arrangement of the transverse reinforcement
418.10.7.3 Coupling beams not governed by Section provided the spacing and volume ratio requirements are
418.10.7.1 or 418.10.7.2 shall be permitted to be satisfied. Additional longitudinal and transverse
reinforced either with two intersecting groups of reinforcement shall be distributed around lhe beam
diagonally placed bars symmetrical ahout the mid-span or perimeter with total area in each direction of at least
according to Sections 418.6.3 through 418.6.5, with the 0. 002bws and spacing not exceeding 300 mm.
wall boundary interpreted as being a column.
d. Transverse reinforcement shall be provided for the
418.10.7.4 Coupling beams reinforced with two entire beam cross section in accordance with Section
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical 418.7.5.Z(a) through (e) with Ash not less than the
about the mid-span shall satisfy (a), (b), and either (c) or greater of (i) and (ii):
(d), and the requirements of Section 409.9 need not be
satisfied:
i)
,~
O. 09sb, -/
yt
a. V 11 shall be calculated by
Association ot Structwal EngineNs or the Pt1iiippin(,::;, !nc (/\SEP)

--
C!-1/\PTEI~ 4 -· Slfuelu,~I Ccncrela 4-12'.~
the design shear force from the wall pier into the adjacent
ii) _ 0. 3sbc ( -Ag - 1 ) -f~ wall segments.
. Ach f yt
418.10.9 Construction Joint8
Longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smaller of 150 mm and 6db of the smallest 418.10.9.1 Construction joints in strnctural walls shall be
diagonal hars. Spacing of crosstics or legs or hoops both specified according to Section 426.5.6, and contact
ve11ically and horizontally in the plane of the beam cross surfaces shall be roughened consistent with the condition
section shall not exceed 200 mm. Each crosstie and each selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
hoop leg shall engage a longitudinal bar of equal or
greater diameter. It shall be permitted to configure hoops 418.10.10 Discontinuous Walls
as spcl:ilied in Section 418.6.4.3.
418.10.10.1 Columns supporting discontinuous structural
418.10.8 Wall Piers walls shall be reinforced in accordance with Section
418.7.5.6.
418.10.8.1 Wall piers shall satisfy the special moment
frame requirements for columns of Sections 418.7.4, 418.11 Special Structural Walls Constructed Using
418.7.5, and 418.7.6, with joint faces taken as the top and Precast Concrete
bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. Alternatively,
wall piers with (lw/bw) > 2.S shall satisfy (a) through 418.11.1 Scope
(f):
418.11.1.1 This section shall apply to special structural
a. Design shear force shall be calculated in accordance walls constructed using prccast concrete forming part of
with Section 418.7.6.1 with joint faces taken as the the seismic-force resisting system.
top and hottom of the clear height of the wall pier. lf
the general building code includes provisions lo 418.J 1.2 General
account for overstrength of the scismic-force-
rcsisting system, the design shear force need not 418.11.2.1 Special structural walls constructed using
exceed fi 0 times the factored shear calculated by precast concrete shall satisfy Section 418. 10 and 418.5.2.
analysis of the structure for earthquake load effects;
b. Vn and distributed shear reinforcement shall satisfy precast concrete and unbonded post-tensioning tendons
Section 418.10.4; and not satisfying the requirements of Section 418.11.2.l
are pcnnitted provided they satisfy the requirements of
c. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoops except it ACI ITG 5.1.
shall be permitted to use single-leg horizontal
reinforcement parallel lo tw where only one curtain 418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses
of distributed shear reinforcement is provided.
Single-leg horizontal reioforccment shall have 180- 418.12.1 Scope
degree bends at each end that engage wall pier
boundary longitudinal reinforcement; 418.12.1.1 This section shall apply to diaphragms and
collectors forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
d. Vertical spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not system in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
exceed 150 mm;
418.12.t.2 Section 418.12.l 1 shall apply to structural
e. Transverse reinforcement shall extend at least 300 trusses forming part of the seismic-force-resisting system
mm. above and below the clear height of the wall in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
pier;
418.12.2 Design Forces
f. Special boundary elements shall be provided if
required by Section 418. l 0.6.3. 418.12.2.1 The earthquake design forces for diaphragms
shall be obtained from the general building code using the
418.10.8.2 For wall piers at the edge of a wall, horizontal applicable provisions and load combinations.
reinforcement shall be provided in adjacent wall segments
above and below the wall pier and he designed to transfer
CHAPTf:R 4 -- Slructurnl Concrete 4-123
the design shear force from the wall pier into the adjacent
ii)
A f'
_0. 3sbc (-g - 1) ,...!_ wall segments.
• Ach f ye
418.10.9 Construction Joints
Longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smaller of 150 mm and 6db of the smallest 418.10.9.1 Construction joints in structural walls shall be
diagonal bars. Spacing of crossties or legs of hoops both specified according to Section 426.5.6, and contact
vertically and horizontally in the plane of the beam cross surfaces shall be roughened consistent with the condition
section shall not exceed 200 mm. Each crosstie and each selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
hoop leg shall engage a longitudinal bar of equal or
greater diameter. It shall be permitted to configure hoops 418.10.10 Discontinuous wans
as specified in Section 418.6.4.3.
418.10.10.1 Columns supporting discontinuous slructural
418.10.8 Wall Piers walls shall be reinforced in accordance with Section
418.7.5.6.
418.10.8.1 Wall piers shall satisfy the special moment
frame requirements for columns of Sections 418.7.4, 418.11 Special Structural Walls Constructed Using
418.7.5, and 418.7.6, with joint faces taken as the top and Prccast Concrete
bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. Alternatively,
wall piers witJ1 (lwf bw) > 2.5 shall satisfy (a) through 418.11.1 Scope
(1):
418.11.J.l This section shall apply to special structural
a. Design shear force shall be calculated in accordance walls constructed using precast concrete forming part of
with Section 418.7.6.l with joint faces taken as the the seismic-force resisting system.
top and bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. lf
the general building code includes provisions to 418.11.2 General
account for overstrength of the seismic-force-
resisting syslem, the design shear force need not 418.11.2.1 Special strnctural walls constructed using
exceed n. 0 times the factored shear calculated by precast concrete shall satisfy Section 418.10 and 4 I 8.5.2.
analysis of the structure for earthquake load eftects;
b. Vn and distributed shear reinforcement shall satisfy precast concrete and unbonded post-tensioning tendons
Section 418. I0.4; and not satisfying the requirements of Section 418. l l .2. I
are permitted ptovided they satisfy the requirements of
c. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoops except it ACI ITG 5.l.
shall be pennitted to use single-leg horizontal
reinforcement parallel to .fw where only one curtain 418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses
of distributed shear reinforcement is provided.
Single-leg horizontal reinforcement shall have 180- 418.12.1 Scope
degrec bends at each end that engage wall pier
boundary longitudinal reinforcement; 418.12.l.1 This section shall apply to diaphragms and
collectors forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
d. Vertical spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not system in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
exceed 150 mm;
418.12.l.2 Section 418.12.11 shall apply to structural
e. Transverse reinforcement shall extend at least 300 lrusses forming pa1t of the seismic-force-resisting system
mm. above and below the clear height of the wall in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
pier;
418.12.2 Design Forces
f. Special boundary elements shall be provided if
required by Section 418.10.6.3. 418.12.2.1 The earthquake design forces for diaphragms
shall be obtained from the general building code using the
418.10.8.2 For wall piers at the edge of a wall, horizontal applicable provisions and load combinations.
reinforcement shall be provided in adjacent wall segments
above and below the wall pier and be designed to transfer
Nc1tional Structural Code of the Philippine:3 Volurmi I. 7ih faiition. 2016

418.12.3 Seismic Load Path 418.12.7.2 Ronded tendons used as reinforc<.:mcnt to
resist collector for<.:cs, diaphragm shear, or flexural
4".f8.12.3.l All diaphragms and their connections shall he tension shall he designed such that the stress due tu design
designed and detailed to provide for transfer of forces to earlhquake forces does not exceed 420 MPa. Prc-
collector clements and to the vertical elements of t11c compression from unbonded tendons shall be permitted to
seismic-force-resisting system. resist diaphragm design for<.:cs if a seismic load path is
provided.
418.12.3.2 Elements of a structural diaphragm system
that are subjected primarily to axial forces and used 10 418.12.7.3 All reinforcement used lo resist collector
transfer diaphragm shear or flexural forces around forces, diaphragm shear, or flexural tension shall be
openings or other discontinuities shall satisfy the developed or spliced for f y in tension.
requirements for collectors in Sections 418.12. 7.5 and
418.12:/.6. 418.12.7.4 Type 2 splices are required where mechanical
splices are used to transfer forces between the diaphragm
418.12.4 Cast-In-Place Composite Topping Slab and the vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting
Diaphragms system.
418.12.4.l A cast-in-place composite topping slab on a 418.12.7.5 Collector elements with compressive stresses
precast floor or roof shall be pem1ittcd as a strnctural exceeding 0. 2{~ at any se<.:tion shall have transverse
diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place topping slab is reinforcement satisfying Sections 4 I 8.7.5.2(a) through
reinforced and the surface of the previously hardened 418.7.5.2(e) and 418.7.5.3, except the spacing limit of
concrete on which the topping slab is placed is clean, free Section 418.7.5.3(a) shall be one-third or the least
of laitance, and intentionally roughened. dimension of the collector. The amount of transverse
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Tahle
418.12.S Cast-in-Place Non-Composite Topping Slab 418.12. 7.5. The specified transverse reinforcernent is
Diaphragms permitted to be discontinued at a section where the
calculated compressive stress is less than 0. 15{~.
418.12.5.1 A cast-in-place non-composite topping on a
precast {lour or roof shall be permitted as a structural If design forces have been amplified to account for the
diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place topping slab acting overstrength of the vertical elements of the scismic-force-
alone is designed and detailed to resist the design resisting system, the limit or 0. 2{~ shall be increased to
earthquake forces. 0. Sf~, and the limit of 0.15{~ shall be increased to
0.4{~.
418.12.6 Minimum Thickness of Diaphragms
Table 418.12.7.5
418.12.6.1 Concrete slabs and composite topping slabs Transverse Reinforcement for Collector Elements
serving as diaphragms used to transmit emthquake forces
shall be at least 50 mm thick. Topping slabs placed over Transverse
reinforcement Applicable expressions
precast floor or roor clements, acting as diaphragms and
not relying on <.:umposite action with the precast clements As1t
to resist the design earthquake forces, shall he at least 65
sbc 1:
0.09-,. (a)
mm thick.
for yt
rectilinear hoo
418.12.7 Reinforcement
A8 f,.'
Ps 0.45 ( - - 1)-=- (b)
418.12.7.1 The mm,mum reinforcement ratio for Greater Ac11 f~t
for spiral or 1--
of
diaphragms shall be in conformance with Section 424.4. circular hoop 0.12 r: (c)
Except for post-tensioned slabs, rt:inforcement spacing fvt.
each way in Hour or roof systems shall not exceed 450
mm. Where welded wire reinforcement is used as the 418.12.7.6 Longitudinal reinforcement detailing for
distrihuted reinforcement to resist shear in topping slabs collector elements at splices and anchorage zones shall
placed over precast floor and roor clements, the wires satisfy (a) or (b):
parallel to the joints between the precast elements shall be
spaced not less than 250 mm on center. Reinforcement a. Center-to-center spacing of at least three longitudinal
provided for shear strength shall be rnntinuous and shall bar diameters, hut not less than 40 mm, and concrete
be distributed uniformly across the shear plane.
- ->
1 I,
,,
clear cover of at least two and one-half longitudinal 418.12.10 Construction Joints
bnr diamc.:tcrs, but not less than 50 111111;
418.12.10.l Construclion joints in diaphragms shall be
b. Arca of tranwer.se reinJ'orcenicnl. providing Av at sped licd according to Section 426.5.6, and contacl
least the greater of' 0.062ffc(bws/{y,) and surfaces shall be roughened consislcnl with the condition
0.3Sbwsff yt, except as required in Section selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
418.12.7.5
418.12.11 Structural Trusses
4 lS.12.8 Flexural Strength
418.12.11.1 Structural tmss elements with compressive
418.12.8. t Diaphragms and portions of diaphragms shall slresses exceeding 0. 2/~ at any section shall have
be designed for flexure in accordance with Section 412. transverse reinforcement, in accordance with Sections
The effects of openings shall be considered. 418.7.5.2, 418.7.5.3, 418.7.5.7, and Table 418.12.11.1,
over the length of the element.
418.12.9 Shear Strength
Table 418.12.11.1
Transverse Reinforcement for Structural Trusses
418.12.9.1 V 11 ol'uiaphrngms shall nol exceed:
Transverse
(418.12.9.1) Ap1>licable ex1>ressions
reinforcement
Ash A f,'
For cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms on prc(;asl floor 0.3 ( ~ - l) _.!:._ (a)
or roof members, Ac., shall be calculate<l using only the <ih<:
Greater of
llch [ye
thickness or lopping slab for non-composilc topping slab
diaphragms and the combined thickness of cast-in-place
for
rectili11 ear hoQp
o.o9 r: (b)
f,,t
and pn:cast dcmenls fur composite lopping slab
diaphragms. For composite topping slab diaphragms, the A /;'
value of /~. used to calculate Vn shall not exceed the Ps, 0.45 ( ~ - 1 )._!;_ (c)
llclt {yr
smaller of t:: for the precast members and /~ for the for s piral or Greater of
topping slab. circular hoop
0.12[
r: (d)
yl
418.12.9.2 Vn of diaphragms shall not exceed
0. 66Acvffc· 418.12.11.2 AII continuous rei nforcenient m structural
truss clements shall be <leveloped or spliced for f y m
418.12.9.3 /\hove joints between precast clements in tension.
non-composite and composite cast-in-place topping slab
diaphragms, Vn shall not exceed: 418.13 Foundations
(418.12.9.3) 418.13.1 Scope
where Avr is the total area of shear friction reinforcement 418.13.1.1 This section shall apply to foundations
within the lopping slab, including bolh distributed and resisting ca1thquakc-induccd forces or transferring
houndary reinforcement, that is oriented perpendicular t.o earthquake-induced forces between structure and ground
joints in the precast system and coefficient of frictioil, µ, in structures assigned tu seismii.: zone 4.
is 1. OA, where A is given in Section 419.2.4. At least
one-half of' Avf shall be uniformly distributed along the 418.13.1.2 The provisions in rhis section for piles, drilled
length or the polential shear plane. The area of distributed piers, caissons, and slabs-on-ground shall supplement
reinforcement in the topping slab shall satisfy Section olher applicable Code design and construction criteria,
424.4.3.2 in each direction. including Sections 401.4.5 and 40 l .4.6.
418.12.9.4 Above joints between precast elements in 418.13.2 l:<'ootings, Foundation Mats, and Pile Caps
non-composite and composite cast-in-place topping slab
diaphragms, V n shall not exceed the limits in Section 418.13.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement of columns and
422.9.4.4, where Ac is calculated using only the thickness structural walls resisting forces induced by earthquake
of the topping slab. eflects shall extend into the footing, mat, or pile cap, and
shall be fully developed for tension at the interfai.:e.
418.13.2.2 Columns designed assuming fixed-end a structural diaphragm and part of the seismic-force-
conditions at the foundalion shall comply with Section resisting system.
418.13.rt and, if hooks are required, longitudinal
reinforcement resisting flexure shall have 90-degree 418.13.4 Piles, Piers, and Caissons
hooks near the bollum of the foundation with the free end
of Lhe bars oriented toward the center of the column. 418.13.4.1 Piles, piers, or caissons resisting tension loads
shall have continuous longitudinal reinlorcement over the
418.13.2.3 Columns or houndary elements of special lengLh resisting design tension forces. The longitudinal
structural walls that have an edge within one-half the reinforcement shall be detailed to transfer tension forces
fooling depth from an edge of the footing shall have within Lhe pile cap to supported strnctural members.
transverse reinforcement in accordance with Sections
418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 provided below the top of 418.13.4.2 Where tension forces induced by earthquake
the footing. This reinforcement shall extend into the effects are transferred hetween pile cap or mat fotmdation
footing, mat, or pile cap a length equal to the development and precast pile by reinforcing bars grouted or post-
length, calculated for f y in tension, of the column or installed in the top of the pile, the grouting system shall
boundary element longitudinal reinforcement. have been demonstrated by Lest to develop at least
1. 25/ y of the bar.
418.13.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift forces
in boundary clements of special stnictural walls or 418.13.4.3 Piles, piers, or caissons shall have transverse
columns, flexural reinforcement shall he provided in the reinforcement in accordance with Sections 418.7.5.2(a)
lop of the footing, mat or pile cap to resisL actions through (e), 418.7.5.3 and 418.7.5.4 excluding
resulting from the factored load combinations, and shall requirements of(c) and (f) of Table 418.7.5.4 at locations
be at least that required by Section 407.6.1 or 409.6.1. (a) and (b):
418.l 3.2.5 Structural plain concrete in footings and a. At the top of the member for at least live times the
basement walls shall be in accordance wilh Section member cross-sectional dimension, and at least 1.8 m
414.1.4. below the bottom of the pile cap;
418.13.3 Grade Beams and Slabs-on-Ground b. For the portion of piles in soil that is not capable of
providing lateral suppmt, or in air and water, along
418.13.3.1 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal the entire unsupported length plus the length required
ties between pile caps or footings shall have continuous in (a).
longiLudinal reinforcement that shall be developed within
or beyond the supported column or anchored within the 418.13.4.4 For precast concrete driven piles, the length
pile cap or footing at all discontinuities. of transverse reinforcement provided shall be sufficient to
account for potential variations in the elevation of pile
418.13.3.2 Grade heams designed to act as horizontal tips.
tics hctween pile caps or foolings shall he sized such that
the smallest cross-sectional dimension shall be aL least 418.13.4.S Concrete piles, piers, or caissons in
equal Lu the clear spacing between connected columns foundations supporting one- and two-story stud bearing
divided by 20,-.but need not exceed 450 mm. Closed tics wall construction arc exempt from the transverse
shall be provided at a spacing noL to exceed the lesser of reinforcement requirements of Sections 418.13.4.3 and
one-half the smallest orthogonal cross-sectional 418.13.4.4.
dimension and 300 mm.
41S.13.4.6 Pile caps incorporating hatter piles shall be
418.13.3.3 Grade beams and beams that are part of a mat designed to resist the full compressive strength of the
foundation subjected to flexure from columns that are part batter piles acting as short columns. The slenderness
of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be in effects of batter piles shall he considered for the portion
accon.lam;c with Section 418.6. of the piles in soil that is not capable or
providing lateral
support, or in air or waler.
418.13.3.4 Slabs-on-ground that resist earthquake forces
from walls or columns that are part of the seismic-force-
resisting system shall be designed as diaphragms in
accordance with Section 418.12. The construction
documents shall clearly indicate that the slab-on-ground is
......... --
CHAPTER 4 - Stri ,ctural Concre te 4-127
418.14 Members Not Designated as Part of the 418.14.3.3 Where the induced moments or shears exceed
Seismic-Force-Resisting System (/,Mn or </JVn of the frame member, or if induced
moments or shears are not calculated, (a) through (d) shall
418.14.1 Scope be satisfied:
418.14.1.1 This section shall apply to members not a. Materials, mechanical splices, and welded splices
designated as part orthe seismic-force-resisting system in shall satisfy the requirements for special moment
structures assigned to seismic zone 4. frames in Sections 418.2.5 through 418.2.8;
418.14.2 Design Actions b. Reams shall satisfy Sections 418.14.3.2(a) and

418.6.5;
418.14.2.1 Members not designated as part of the
seismic force-resisting system shall be evaluated for c. Columns shall satisfy Sections 418.7.4, 418.7.5, and
gravity load combinations of (1. ZD + 1. OL + 0. ZS) or 418.7.6;
0. 9D, whichever is critical, acting simultaneously with
the design displacement liu· The load factor on the live d. Joints shall satisfy Section 418.8.3.1.
load, L, shall be pennitted to be reduced to 0.5 except for
garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and 418.14.4 Precast Beams and Columns
all areas where L is greater lhan 4.8 kPa.
418.14.4.1 Prccast concrete frame members assumed not
418.14.3 Cast-In-Place Beams, Columns, and Joints to contribute to lateral resistance, including their
connections, shall satisfy (a) through (d):
418.14.3. t Cast-in-place beams and columns shall be
detailed in accordance with Section 418.14.3.2 or a. Requirements of Section 418.14.3;
418.14.3.3 depending on the magnitude of moments and
shears induced in those members when subjected to the b. Ties specified in Section 418.14. 3 .2(b) over the entire
design displacement liu , Tf effects of 0 11 arc not explicitly column height, including the depth of the beams;
checked, the provisions of Section 418.14.3.3 shall be
satisfied. c. Structural integrity reinforcement, in accordance with
Section 404.1 O;
418.14.3.2 Where the induced moments and shears do
not exceed the design moment and shear stren1,,>th of the d. Bearing length at the support of a beam shall be at
frame member, (a} through (c) shall be satisfied: least 50 mm longer than determined from Section
416.2.6.
a. Beams shall satisfy Section 4 I 8.6.3.1. Transverse
reinforcement shall be provided throughout the 418.14.5 Slab-Column Connections
length of the beam al spacing not to exceed d/2 .
Where factored axial force exceeds Ar,{ ~/10, 418.14.5.1 For slab-column connections of two-way
transverse reinforcement shall be hoops satisfying slabs without beams, slab shear reinforcement satisfying
Section 418.7.5.2 at spacing so, according to Section the requirements of Section 408.7.6 or 408.7.7 shall be
4 I 8.14).2(b); provided at any slab critical section defined in Section
422.6.4.1 if Ax./ hsx. ~ 0. 035 - (1/20)('Vug/ (/,vc)·
b. Columns shall satisfy Sections 418.7.4.1, 418.7.5.2, Required slab shear reinforcement shall provide v.( ~
and 418.7.6. The maximum longitudinal spacing of 0. 29..{fl at the slab critical section and shall extend at
hoops shall be s 0 for the full column length. Spacing least four times the slab thickness from the face of the
s 0 shall not exceed the smaller of six diameters of the support adjacent to the slab critical section. The shear
smallest longitudinal bar enclosed and 150 mm; reinforcement requirements of this provision shall not
apply if tl.x/ llsx $' 0. 005.
c. Columns with factored gravity axial forces exceeding
0.3SP 0 shall satisfy Sections 418.14.3.2(b) and The value or (tl.xf hsx) shall be taken as the greater of the
41 8.7 .5.7. The amount of transverse reinforcement values of the adjacent storeys above and below the slab-
provided shall be one-half of that required by Section column connection. Ve shall be calculated in accordance
418. 7.5.4 and spacing shall not exceed s0 for the full with Section 422.6.5. Vug is the factored shear stress on
column length.
the slab critical section for two-way action due to gravity
loads without moment transfer.
Na tiona! S tructurai Code cf \he Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2016
..
-
I
4-128 CHAPTER 4 ··· Structural Concrete
418.14.6 Wall Piers SECTION 419

418.14.6.1 Wall piers not designated as part of the
CONCRETE: DESIGN AND
seismic-force resisting system shall satisfy the DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS
requirements of Section 418.10.8. Where the general
building code includes provisions to account for 419.1 Scope I
overstrength of the seismic-force-resisting system, it shall

I
be pennitted io calculate the design shear force as fl. 0 419.1.l This section shall apply to concrete, including:
times the shear induced under design displacements, 8u.
a. Properties to be used for design;
I
b. Durability requirements
419.1.2 This section shall ap ply to durability

requirements for grout used for bonded tendons in
419.2 Concrete Design Properties

I
419.2.1 Specified Compressive Strength I
I
419.2.1.1 The value of /~ shat I be specified in I
construction documents and shall be in accordance with

(a) through (c):
a. Limits in Table 419.2.1.1;
b. Durability requirements in Table 419.3.2.1;
c. Structural strength requirements.
Table 419.2.1.1 Limits for/~
Mini'mum Maximum
Application Concrete
,:.,
MPa f~,MPa
I
Normal-weight
General and 7 None I
Ii \twei ht
11
Special
moment Normal-weighl 2I None
frames 11
and special
structural Lightweight 2I 35lll 11
walls
[Ii The limit is permilled to be exceeded where demonstrated by I
experimenwl evidence that members made· with lightweight

concrete provide strength and toughness equal to or ex~eeding those
of comparable members made with normal weight concrete of the
same strength.
419.2.1.2 The specified eompressive strength shall be I
used for proportioning of concrete mixtures in Section

426.4.3 and for testing and accepta nee of concrete in
Section 426.12.3. I
I
Association of Structurn1 Engineers of the Philippines. !nc. (ASEP)
I
I
l
-- .~
1 ..
i'I
GHAPTER 4 ··· Strur;tilral Concini~:,
419.2.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, f~ shall he based 419.2.4.3 If the measured average splitting tensile
on 2~ day tests. lfother than 28 days, test age for f~ shall strength of lightweight concrete, f ct, is used to calculate
he indicated in the construction documents. .ii., laboratory tests shall be condu<.:tc<l in accordance with
ASTM C330M to establish the value of f ct and the
419.2.2 Modulus of Elasticity corresponding value of f cm and it shall be calculated
hy;
419.2.2.1 Modulus of elasticity, Ee, for concrete shall
be permilled to be calculated as (a) or (b):
.ii.= let s 1.0 (419.2.4.3)
0. 56-Jfcm
a. For values of We between 1440 and 2560 kg/ mJ
The concrete mixture tested in order to calculate ,l shall
(419.2.2.1.a) he representative of that to be used in the Work.
b. For normal weight concrete 419.3 Concrete Durability Requirements
419.3.1 Exposure Categories and Classes

Ee = 4700.ffc (in MPa) (419.2.2.1.b)
419.3.l.l The licensed design professional shall assign
419.2.3 Modulus of Rupture exposure classes in accordance with the severity of the
anticipated exposure or members for each exposure
419.2.3.1 Modulus or rupture, {,., for concrete shall be category in Table 419.3.1.1.
calculated by:
Table 419.3.1.1
Ir = o. 62J.ffi (419.2.3. D Exposure Categories and Classes
where the value of ,l 1s m accordance with Section Cate2orv Cl~ss Condition

419.2.4. FO Concrete not exposed to freezinl!-and-thnwinu cye lcs
Fl Concrete exposed to freezing-and-thawing cycles
with limited exoosure lo waler
419.2.4 I ,ightweight Concrete heezingand
F2
Concrete exposed to freezing·and·lhawing cycles
thawing(F) with freuuenl ex1,osure to water
Concrete exposed lo frcc:i:ing-aml-lhawing cycles
419.2.4.1 To account for the properties of lightweight F3 with frequent exposure to warcr and cxposuru 10
concrt:te, a modification factor ,l is used as a multiplier dcicin chemicals
of .ffcin all applicable provisions of this Code.
Waler-soluble sulfate
(So,?·)
Oissolved Sulfate
(Sol·)
in soil, percent by
in waler, ppm 121
419.2.4.2 The value of ,l shall he hased on the ma~s111
composition of the aggregate in the concrete mixture in

so so 1 • < 0.10 so 2 • < 150
SI 0.10 $ sot· < 0.20 $so;-<

1so 1soo
accordance with Table 419.2.4.2 or as permitted in nr seawater
Section 419.2.4.3. S2 0.20 < so 2 • :5: 2.00 1500 < so 2 • < 10,000
Table 419.2.4.2 S1 so 2 • > 2.00
so 2 • > 10.000
Concrete dry in 8ervice. Concrete in contact with
Modification Factor In contact WU
water and low fler!llcabilirv is not reuuired
with
water (W) WI Concrcle in contact with water and low pcnncability
Concrcle Composition of 11ggrcgates .il is re<1uired
Fine: ASTM C330M co Concrete dry or protected from moisture
All·lighlweight 0.75 Corrosion Concrete c.xpos"'d lo moisture hut not to an external
Coarse: ASTM C330M Cl
proteelion of source of chlorid"'s
Fine: Combination of ASTM
Lightweight, fine reinforcement Concrete exposed lo moisture and an external source
hi end
C330M and C33M 0.75 lo 0.85 111 (C) C:2 of chlorides from deicing chemicals, sail, brackish
Coarse: ASTM C330M
Sand-lightweight
Fine: ASTM C:BM ,,, waler, seawater. or spray from these sources
.. be de1ennlncd by AS.IM
Percent sulfate by mass m soil shall
. C 1580
0.85
Coarse: ASTM C330M (lJ Concentration of dissolved sulfates in water in ppm shall be dete1mined hy
Fine: ASTM C33M ASTM 05 J 6 or ASTM D4 I 30
Sand-lighlweighl,
Coarse: Combination of 0.1\5 lo 1.001?1
coar~e blend
ASTMC330M and C33M
Normal-weiltht Fi,,e or Coarse: ASTM C33M l.00
419.3.2 Requirements for Concrete Mixtures
Ill.
Linear 1111erpola11on Imm 0. 7S to 0.85 1s pcrm,ucd based on the
absolute volume of normal weight fine aggregate as a fraction of the 419.3.2.1 Based on the exposure classes assigned from
total absolute volume of fine aggrr<gate.'21Linear interpolation from Table 419.3.1. l, concrete mixtures shall confonn to the
0.85 to 1.00 is permitted based on the ahsolute volume of normal-
weight coarse aggregate as a fraction of the lt)tal ahsolute volume of most restrictive requirements m Table 419.3.2.1.
coarse aggregate.
i\!,;t.ii:mal Siruct1m:.1! Cnde ,if the Philrp[."•ines Vohime I, lti1 Er1ition 2016
-
,J. 1JO C Ht-\PTE f{ 4 - Str:.1r:1u1nl Conrr,~1,~
Table 419.3.2.1 Requirements for Concrete by Exposure Class
Additional requirements
Exposure Maximum M inimum
w /cm lll Limits on cemcntitious
Class f ~,MPa Ai r content
materials
FO NIA 17 NIA NIA
Fl 0.55 24 Table 419.3.3.l NIA
f2 0.45 31 Table 419.3.3. l NIA
F3 0.40 1' 1 35111 Tahle 4 19.3.3. 1 Section 426.4.2.2(b)
Cemcntitious materials PJ - Types
ASTM ASTM ASTM Calcium chloride admixture
CJ 50M C595M C 1157M
No Type No Type No Type
so NIA 17
restriction restriction restriction
No restriction
Types IP,IS, or
SJ 0.50 28 Jl [4)151 l'fwith (MS) MS No restriction
designation
Types JP,JS, or
yll]
S2 0.45 31 lTwith (HS) HS Not permitted
designation
Types IP,lS, or
Vplus HS plus
TTwith (HS)
pozzolan pozzolan or
SJ 0.45 31 designation Not permitted
or slag slag cement
1
61 plus pozzolan or (6J
cement
slag cement161
WO NIA 17 None
WI 0.50 28 None
Maximum watcr-soluhle chloride ion
(Cl-) content in concrete, ¥ercent by weight of
cement 7J Additional provisions
Non-pn:slressed
Prestrcssed concrete
concrete
co NIA 17 1.00 0.06
None
Cl NIA 17 0.30 0.06
C2 0.40 35 0. 15 0. (){> Concrete cover 1• 1
111 The maximum w/cm limits in Table 4J9.3.2.I do not apply lo lightweight concrete.
111 For plain concrete, the maximumw I cm shalf l)e 0.45 and the minimum f;. shall l)e 31.0 MPa.
Ill Alternative combinations of ccmcntitious materials to those listed in Table 4 19.3.2.J are permitted when tested for sulfate resistance and meeting the
criteria in Section 426.4.2.2(c).
141 For seawater exposure, other types ol' portland cements with triculcium aluminnte (C., A) contents up tu IO percent a~ permitted if the wicm docs not
exceed 0.40.
(5) Other availal)le types of cement such as Type I or Type ll1 are permitted in Exposure Classes S 1 or S2 if the C,A contents are less than Rpercent for
Exposure Class SJ or Jess than S percent for Exposure Class S2.
'fhe amount of the specific source of the pozzolan or slag cement to be tL~ed shall be at least the amount that has been determined by service record to
lo! improve sulfate resi,tancc when used in concrete C(intaining Type V cement. Alternatively, the amoun t of the specific source of the poz;zolan or slag
cement to be used sha ll be at Jeasl Lhc amount tesLed in accordanci, with ASTM C l 012 and meeting lhe criteria in Section 426.4.2.2(c).
171 Wntcr-soluble chloride ion content that is conlrihutcd from the ingredients incl uding water, aggn:gates, ccmentitious materials, and admixtures shall he
,~, determined on the concrete mixture by ASTM C I 2 J 8M at age between 28 and 42 days.
Concrete cover shaJJ be in accordance wilh Section 420.6.
As1,;,_,ciaiion ,,, Structur::il Engine(~rs of tl1El Philippines, lnr. (i>,SF.P)
--
CHr\PlEF~ 4-- su·11ctu;-~I Concreh~ 4-:31
419.3.3 Additional Requirements for Freezing and SECTION 420

Thawing Exposure
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
419.3.3.1 Normal-weighl and lightweighl concrete PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
subject to freezing and thawing Exposure Classes FI, F2,
or F3 shall be air entrained. Except as permitted in Section
EMBEDMENTS
419.3.3.3, air content shall conform to Table 419.3.3.1.
420.1 Scope
Table 419.3.3.1
420.1. t This section shall apply to sleet reinforcement,
Total Air Content for Concrete Exposed to Cycles of
and shall govern (a) through (c):
Freezing and Thawing
Nominal maximum Tarnet air content. oercent

a. Material properties;
a1!!!1'C£ate size, mm. Fl F2 and F3
10 6 7.5 b. Properties to be used for design;
12 5.5 7
20 5 6 c. Durabilily requirements, including minimum
25 4.5 6 specified cover requiremcnls.
40 4.5 5.5
50 4 5 420.1.2 Provisions of Scclion 420.7 shall apply to
75 3.5 4.5 cmbcdments.
419.3.3.2 Concrete shall be sampled in accordance with 420.2 Non-Prcstrcsscd Bars and Wires
ASTM C 172, and air content shall be measured in
accordance with ASTM C23 IM or ASTM CJ 73M. 420.2. 1 Material Properties
419.3.3.3 For f~ exceeding 35 MPa, reduction of air 420.2.1.1 Non-prestressed bars and wires shall be
content indicated in Table 419.3.3.1 hy 1.0 percentage deformed, except plain bars or wires are permitted for use
point is pennitted. in spirals.
419.3.3.4 The maximum percentage of ponolans, 420.2.1.2 Yield slrength ornon-prestressed bars and
including fly ash and silica fume, and slag cemenl in wires shall be determined by either (a) or (h):
concrete assigned to Exposure Class F3, shall be in
accordance with Section 426.4.2.2(h). a. The offset· method, using an offset of 0.2 percent in
accordance with ASTM A370;
419.3.4 Alternative Combinations of Ccmcntitious
Material~ for Sulfate Exposure h. The yield point by the halt-of-force method, provided
the non-prestresscd har or wire has a sharp-kneed or
419.3.4.1 Alternative combinations of cementitious well-defined type of yield point.
materials to those listed in Section 419.3.2 are pennitted
when tested for sulfate resistance. Testing and acceptance 420.2.1.3 Deformed bars shall conform to (a), (b), (c),
criteria shall conform to Table 426.4.2.2(c). (d), or (e).
419.4 Grout Durability Requirements a. ASTM A615M - carbon steel;
419.4.1 Water-soluhle chloride ion content of grout for b. ASTM A706M - low-alloy steel;
bonded tendons shall not exceed 0.06 percent when tested
in accordance with ASTM Cl 2 I 8M, measured by mass of c. ASTM A996M - axle steel and rail steel; bars from
chloride ion to mass of cement. rail steel shall be Type R;
d. ASTM A955M - stainless steel;
e. ASTM Al035M - low-carbon chromium steel.
Naiion<1I Structural Code of 1'12 Philippinc,s Volume I. 7th Ediiion, 2016
-- -· -- ----=-------------..
4-132 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Com:rele
420.2.J.4 Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall 420.2.2.4 Types of non-prestressed bars and wires to be
conform to ASTM A6 I5M, A 706M, A955M, or specified for particular structural applications shall be in
A1035M. accordance with Table 420.2.2.4(a) for deformed
reinforcement and Table 420.2.2.4(b) for plain
420.2.1.5 Welded deformed bar mats shall conform to reinforcement.
ASTM A I 84M. Deformed bars used in welded deformed
bar mats shall t:onform to ASTM A615M or A706M. 420.2.2.5 Defonncd non-prestrcssed longitudinal
reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced moment, axial
420.2.1.6 Headed deformed bars shall conform to ASTM force, or both, in special moment frames, special
A970M, including Annex A 1 requirements for Class HA structural walls, and all components of special structural
head dimensions. walls including coupling beams and wall piers shall be in
accordance with (a) or (b):
420.2.1.7 Defonned wire, plain wire, welded deformed
wire reinforcement, and welded plain wire reinforcement a) ASTM A706M, Grade 420;
shall conform to (a) or (b), except that yield strength shall
be determined in accordance with 420.2.l.2: b) ASTM A615M Grade 280 reinforcement if (i) and
are satisfied and ASTM A6 l 5M Grade 420
a. A 1064M - carbon steel; reinforcement if (i) through (iii} arc satisfied.
b. /\1022M - stainless steel. I. actual yield strength based on mill tests does not
exceed f y by more than 125 MPa;
420.2.1.7.1 Deformed wire sizes MD25 through MD200
shall be permitted. ii. ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual
yield strength is at least 1.25;
420.2.1.7.2 Defonned wire sizes larger than MD200 ·
shall be permitted in welded wire reinforcement if treated iii. minimum elongation in 200 mm shall be at least
as plain wire for calculation of development and splice 14 percent for bar sizes IO mm </> through 20
lengths in ae1.:ordance with Sections 425.4.7 and 425.5.4, mm</>, at least 12 percent for bar sizes 25 mm</>
respectively.
through 36 mm </>, and at least IO percent for bar
sizes 40 mm </> and 58 mm </>.
420.2.l.7.3 Except as pennined for welded wire
reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with Section 420.3 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Ban
425.7.1, spacing of welded intersections in welded wire
reinforcement in direction of calculated stress shall nol
420.3.1 Material Properties
exceed (a) or (b):
420.3.l.1 Except as required in Section 420.3. l .3 for
a. 400 mm for welded deformed wire reinforcement;
special moment frames and special structural walls,
prestressing reinforcement shall conform to (a), (h), (c),
b. 300 nm1 for welded plain wire reinforcement. or (d):
420.2.2 Design Properties a. ASTM A416M- strand;
420.2.2.1 For non-prestressed bars and wires, the stress b. ASTM A42lM-wire;
below f y shall be Es times steel strain. For strains greater
than that corresponding to f y, stress shall be considered c. ASTM A42IM - low-relaxation wire including,
independent of strain and equal to f y· Supplementary Requirement Sl "Low-Relaxation
Wire and Relaxation Testing";
420.2.2.2 Modulus of elasticity, Es, for nonprcstressed
bars and wires shall be pe1mitted to be taken as 200,000 d. ASTM A722M - high-strength bar.
Mra.
420.3.1.2 Prestressing strands, wires, and bars not listed
420.2.2.3 Yield strength for non-prestressed bars and in /\STM A4 I6M, A42 IM, or A 722M are permitted
wires shall be based on the specified grade of provided they confonn to minimum requirements of these
reinforcement and shall not exceed the values given in specifications and are shown by test or analysis not tu
Section 420.2.2.4 for the associated applications. impair the pcrfonnance of the member.
,\r,socia!ion o1I Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP}

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-133
420.3.1.3 Prestressing reinforcement resisting beams and wall piers, cast using precast concrete shall
-earthquake-induced moment and axial force, or both, in comply with ASTM A4 l 6M or A722M.
special moment frames, special structural walls, and all
components of special structural walls including coupling
Table 420.2.2.4(a)
Non-Prestressed Deformed Reinforcement
Maximum AnnJicable ASTM Specification

value offy or f yt
Usage Application permitted for Deformed Deformed Welded wire Welded
design calculations, Bars Wirej; deformed
reinforcement
MPa bar mats
Special
Flexure, axial Refer to Not
seismic 420 Not permitted Not pcnnitted
force, and Sect. 420.2.2.5 permitted
svstems
shrinkage and
temperature Other A6 l SM, A 706M, Al064M, A!064M,
550 Al84M[I)
A955M, A996M AI022M Al022M
Special A6 I 5M, A706M,
seismic 700 Al064M Al064Mf2 l,
A955M, A996M, Not permitted
Lateral support svstems Al022M Al022Ml2l
Al035M
of longitudinal A6 I 5M, A706M,
bars or concrete Spirals 700 AI064M,
A955M, A996M, Not permitted Not permitted
confinement AI022M
Al035M
Others A615M, A706M, Al064M, Al064M,
550 NQt permitted
A955M, A996M Al022M Al022M
Special
Seismic A6 I 5M, A706M, Al064M,
420 Not permitted Not permitted
Svstems A955M, A996M Al022M
Spirals 420 A6 I 5M, A706M, Al064M, A1064M,

A955M, A996M Al022M Not permitted
Al022M
Shear Al064M and
Shear A615M, A706M, Al064M,
420 A 1022M welded Not permitted
friction A955M, A996M AI022M
plain wire
Stirrups, ties, A6 l 5M, A706M, Al064M, AI064M and
550 A 1022M welded Not permitted
hoops A955M, A996M Al022M
deformed wire
Longitudinal
Torsion and 420 A615M, A706M, AI064M, AI064M,
A955M, A996M Not permitted
transverse Al022M AI022M
111
Welded deformed bar mats . . shall be permitted to he assembltd usmg A615M or A706M deformed bars.
121
ASTM Al064M and A\022M are not permilted in special seismic systems where the weld is requin:d to resist stresses in response to confinement,
lateral support of longitudinal bars, shear, or other actions.

4-'134 CHAPTER 4 -· Structural Concrnte
Table 420.2.2.4(h) Non-Prcstrcssed Plain Spiral Reinforcement
Maximum Applicable
value off>' or {ye ASTM
Usage Application Specification
permitted for design
calculations, MPa Plain Bars Plain Wires
A615M,
Spirals in special A706M, AI064M,
700
seismic systems A955M, Al022M
Lateral support of A I035M
longitudinal bars or
Concrete
confinement A615M,
A706M, Al064M,
Spirals 700
A955M, Al022M
AI035M
A615M,
Shear A706M, Al064M,
Spirals 420
A955M, Al022M
AI035M
Torsion in A615M,
A706M, A1064M,
Non-prestressed Spirals 420
beams
A955M, Al022M
A 1035M
Table 420.3.2.2 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Bars
Maximum value offpu

Type permitted for design Applicable ASTM Specification
calculations, MPa
Strand (stress-relieved
and low-relaxation) 1860 A416M
A42!M
Wire (stress-relieved and
1725 A421M
low-relaxation)
Including Supplementary Requirement SI
"Low-Relaxation Wire and Relaxation Tcstin "
High-strength bar 1035 A422M
420.3.2 Design Properties permitted for members with bonded prestressed

reinforcement if all prestrcsscd reinforcement is in the
420.3.2.1 Modulus uf elasticity, E ,., for prestressing tension zone and fps~ 0. Sfpu·
reinforcement shall be determined from tests or as
reported by the manufacturer.
420.3.2.2 Tensile strength, f pu, shall be based on the

specified grade or type of prcstressing reinforcement and
(420.3.2.3.l)
shall not exceed the values given in Table 420.3.2.2.
Where Yp is in accordance with Table 420.3.2.3.1.
420.3.2.3 Stress in Bonded Pres tressed
Reinforcement at Nominal Flexural If compression reinforcement is considered for the
Strength, fps calculation of fps by Eq. 420.3.2.3.1, (a) and (b) shall be
satisfied.
420.3.2.3.l As an alternative to a more accurate
calculation offps based on strain compatibility, values or a. If d' exceeds 0. 15dp, the compression
fps calculated in accordance with Eq. 420.3.2.3.1 shall be reinforcement shall be neglected in Eq. 420.3.2.3.1.
Asso,::.atr,)n nf Struch!ral Engineer.$ nf tlrn Phi!lpp:nes. Inc. (ASl.::P)

b. [f compression reinforcement is included in Eq. Table 420.3.2.5.1

420.3.2.3.1, the tenn Maximum Permissible Tensile Stresses in Prcstressed
Reinforcement
{pu d/y '] Sta2e Location Maximum tensile stress

[ Pp f~ + dp f~ (p - p) 0.94fnv
0.80fvu
shall not be taken less than 0.17. Maximum
During At jacking Least jacking force
Table 420.3.2.3.1 stressing end of: recommended
Values of Yp for Use in Equation (Sect. 420.3.2.3.1) by the supplier
of anchorage
frJYffvu Yv device
2: 0.80 0.55 At post·
2 0.85 0.40 Immediately tensioning
2: 0.90 0.28 atler force anchorage 0.70/pu
transfer devices and
420.3.2.3.2 For pretensioned strands, the strand design couplers
stress at sections of members located within f d from the
free end of strand shall not exceed that calculated in 420.3.2.6 Prestress Losses
420.3.2.6.t Prestress losses shall be considered in the
calculation of the effective tensile stress in the prestressed
420.3.2.4 Stress in Uubonded Prestressed
reinforcement, f se, and shall include (a) through (t):
Reinforcement at Nominal Flexural
Strength, fps
a. Prestressed reinforcement seating at transfer;
420.3.2.4.1 As an alternative to a more accurate
b. Elastic shortening of concrete;
calculation of fps, values ofps calculated in accordance
with Table 420.3.2.4.1 shall be permitted for members
c. Creep of concrete;
prestressed with unbonded tendons if f se ~ 0. 5f pu.·
d. Shrinkage of concrete;
Table 420.3.2.4.1
Approximate Values of {ps at Nominal Flexural e. Relaxation of prestressed reinforcement;
Strength for Unhonded Tendons
f. Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature
l,Jh fvs in post-tensioning tendons.
f~e + 70 + t:/(lOOp0 )
The least 420.3.2.6.2 Calculated friction loss in post-tensioning
~35 L +420
of: tendons shall be based on experimentally determined
f~v
wobble and curvature friction coefficients.
/~e + 70 + f:/(300p 0 )
The least
> 35 L+ZlO 420.3.2.6.3 Where loss of prestress in a member is
of
fvv anticipated due to connection of the member to adjoining
construction, such loss of prcstress shall be included in
design calculations.
420.3.2.5 Permissible Tensile Stresses in
Prestressed Reinforcement 420.4 Structural Steel, Pipe, and Tubing for
Composite Columns
420.3.2.5.1 The tensile stress in prestressed
reinforcement shall not exceed the limits in Table 420.4.1 Material Properties
420.3.2.5.1.
420.4.1.l Structural steel other than steel pipe or tubing
used in composite columns shall conform to (a), (b), (c),
(d), or (e):
Nationc1I Struct1Jral Co,je oi the Philippines Volurne I. 7th Edition. 2016
-
4-136 CHAPTER 4 - Structtu-al Concrete
a. ASTM A36M - carbon steel; 420.6.1.3 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements

•' b. ASTM A242M - high-strength low-alloy steel; 420.6.1.3.1 Non-prestressed cast-in-place concrete
members shall have specified concrete cover for
c. ASTM A572M high-strength, low-alloy, reinforcement at least that given in Table 420.6.1.3. J.
columbium-vanadium steel;
Table 420.6.1.3.1
d. ASTM A588M - high-strength, low-alloy, 345 MPa Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in-Place Non-
steel; Prestressed Concrete Members
e. ASTM A 992M - structural shapes. Specified

Concrete cover,
Member Reinforcement
exposure mm.
420.4.1.2 Steel pipe or tubing used in composite
columns to encase a concrete core shall conform to (a), Cast against
(h), (c) or (d): and
permanently All All 75
in contact
a. ASTM A53M Grade B - black steel, hot-dipped, with ground
zinc-coated; 20 mm 4> through
50
Exposed to 58 mm</) bars
b. ASTM A500M - cold-fonned, welded, seamless; weather or in 16 mm¢ bar,
All
contact with MW200or
c. ASTM A50lM - hot-formed, welded, seamless. 40
ground MD200
wire, and smaller
d. ASTM Al085- cold-fonned, welded.
40 mm 4> and 58 40
Slabs, mm¢ bars
420.4.2 Design Properties joists, and
Not exposed walls 36 mm 4> har and
20
to weather or smaller
420.4.2.1 For structural steel in composite columns, Beams,
in contact Primary
maximum value of f y shall be in accordance with the with ground colunms,
reinforcement,
appropriate ASTM specifications in Section 420.4. l. pedestals, 40
stirrups, ties,
and
spirals, and hoops
420.4.2.2 For structural steel used in composite columns tension ties
with a structural steel core, value of f y shall not exceed J'able 420.6.1.3.2
345 MPa. Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in-Place
Prestressed Concrete Members
420.S Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement
Specified
Concrete Reinforcement cover,
Member
420.5.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement and stud exposure mm.
assemblies shall conform to ASTM Al044M.
Cast against
and
420.6 Provisions for Durability of Steel permanently All All 75
Reinforcement in contact
with ground
420.6.1 Specified Concrete Cover Slab8,
Exposed to joists, and All 25
420.6.1.1 Unless the general building code requires a weather or in walls
greater concrete cover for fire protection, the minimum contact with
specified concrete cover shall be in accordance with ground All other All 40
Section 420.6.1.2 through 420.6. l.4.
Slabs,
joists, and All 20
420.6.1.2 It shall be permitted to consider concrete floor Not exposed walls
finishes as part of required cover for non-structural to weather or
Beams, Primary 40
purposes. in contact
columns, reinforcement
with ground
and tension Stirrups, ties,
ties soirals, and hooos
25
-
Table 420.6.1.3.3 420.6.1.3.4 For hundled bars, specified concrete cover
Specified Concrete Cover for Precast Non-Prestresscd shall be a! least the smaller of(a) and (b):
,r
or Prestressed Concrete Members
Manufactured Under Plant Conditions a. The equivalent diameter of the bundle;
Specified b. 50 mm.
Concrete cover,
Member Reinforcement
exposure
mm. and for concrete cast against and permanently in contact
40 mm ¢ and 58 mm¢ with ground, the specified cover shall be 75 mm.
bars; h:n<lons larger 40
than 40 mm diameter
420.6. 1.3.5 For headed shear stud reinforcement,
36 mm 4> bars and
Walls smaller; specified concrete cover for the heads or base rails shall
MW200 and M0200 be at least that required for the reinforcement in the
20
wire and smaller; member.
tendons and strands 40
Exposed mm </> and smaller
to 420.6.1.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements
40 mm ¢ and 58 mm ¢ for Corrosive Environments
weather
bars; tendons larger 50
or in
than 40 mm <b 420.6.1.4.l In corrosive environments or other severe
contact
20 mm ¢ through 36
with exposure conditions, the specified concrete cover shall be
ground mm ¢ bars; tendons
and strands larger than 40 increased as deemed necessary. The applicahle
All other 16 mm¢ through 40 requirements for concrete based on exposure categories in
mm¢ Section 419 .3 shall be satisfied, or other protection shall
16 mm¢ bar, MW200 be provided.
or MD200 wire, and
smaller: tendons and 32 420.6.1.4.2 for prcstrcsscd concrete members classified
strands 16 mm ¢ and as Class T or C in Section 424.5.2 and exposed to
smaller corrosive environments or other severe exposure
40 mm ¢ and 58 mm¢ categories such as those given in Section 419.3, the
bars; tendons larger 45
specified concrete cover for prestressed reinforcement
than 40 mm 
Slabs, shall be at least 1.5 times the cover in Section 420.6.1.3.2
Tendons and strands 40
joists, 20 for cast-in-place memhers and in Section 420.6.1.3.3 for
mm(/) and smaller
Not and walls pn:cast members.
36 mm¢ har, MW200
exposed
or MD200 wire, and 16
to 420.6.1.4.3 If the pre-compressed tensile zone is not in
weather smaller
Greater of tension under sustained loads, Section 420.6.l.4.2 need
orm
con!act db not be satisfied.
Beams, and 16
with columns,
ground Primary reinforcement mm and 420.6.2 Non-Prestressed Coated Reinforcement
pedestals,
need not
and
exceed 40
tension 420.6.2. 1 Non-prestressed coated reinforcement shall
mm
ties conform to Table 420.6.2.1.
Stirrups, tics, spirals,
10
and hooos Table 420.6.2.t
Non-Prestrcssed Coated Reinforcement
420.6.t.3.2 Cast-in-place prestresscd concrete members
shall have specified concrete cover for reinforcement, Type of
Applicable ASTM specificalions
ducts and end fittings at least that given in Table Coatin2
Welded
420.6.1.3.2. Bar Wire
wire
Not
420.6.1.3.3 Precast non-prestressed or prestressed Zinc-coaled A767M AI060M
permitted
concrete members manufactured under plant conditions A775M
shall have specified concrete cover for reinforcement, Epoxy-coated OT A884M /\884M
ducts, and end fittings at least that given in Tahle A934M
420.6.l.3.3. Zinc and Not Not
epoxy dual Al055M
permitted permitted
coated
1~ -'i 38 CHAPTER 4 -- Struclurc.1r Concrete
420.6.2.2 Deformed bars to be zinc-coated, epoxy- 420.7 Embcdments

coated, or zinc and epoxy dual-coated shall conform to
Sections 420.2.1.3 (a), (b) or (c). 420.7.1 Embedments shall not significantly impair the
strength of the structure and shall not reduce lire
420.6.2.3 Wire and welded wire reinforcement lo be protection.
epoxy-coated shall conform to Section 420.2. l .7(a).
420.7.2 Embedment materials shall nol be hannful to
420.6.3 Corrosion Protection for Unbounded concrete or reinforcement.
Prestressing Reinforcement
420.7.3 Aluminum embedments shall be coated or
420.6.3.J Unhon<led prestressing reinforcement shall be covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction and
encased in sheathing, and the space between the strand electrolytic aclion between aluminum and steel.
and the sheathing shall be completely filled with a
material formulated to inhibit corrosion. Sheathing shall 420.7.4 Reinforcement with an area at least 0.002
be watertight and continuous over the unbondcd h:ngth. times the area of the concrete section shall be provided
perpendicular to pipe embedments.
420.6.3.2 In corrosive environments, the sheathing shall
be connected to all stressing, intermediate, and fixed 420.7.5 Specified concrete cover for pipe emhcdments
anchorages in a watcrlight fashion. with their fittings shall he at least 40 mm for concrete
exposed to earth or weather, and at least 20mm for
420.6.3.3 Unbondcd single-strand tendons shall be concrete not exposed to weather, or not in contact with
protected against corrosion in accordance with ACI 423.7. ground.
420.6.4 Corrosion Protection for Grouted Tendons 420.7.6 Use of Quenched Tempered Thermo-
Mechanically Treated (QT/TMT)
420.6.4.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be grout-tight Reinforcing Bars in Structures Located in
and non-reactive with concrete, prestressing Seismic Zone 4
reinforcement, grout, and corrosion inhibitor admixtures.
420.7.6.1 (NZS 3101 5.3.2.1) Reinforcing bars to
420.6.4.2 Ducts shall be maintained free of water. comply with AS/NZS 4671. Reinforcement shall be
manufactured using either the micro-alloy process or the
420.6.4.3 Ducts for grouted single-wire, single-strand, or in-line quenched and tempered process. However, where
single-bar tendons shall have an inside diameter at least the in-line quenched and tempered process, or equivalent
6mm larger than the diameter of the prestressing is used, the restrictions of Section 420.7.6;2 shall apply.
reinforcement
420.7.6.2 (NZS 3101 5.3.2.2) Restrictions on In-line
420.6.4.4 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, multiple Quenched and Tempered Reinforcement:
strand, or multiple har tendons shall have an inside cross-
sectional area at least two times the cross-sectional area of Reinforcement bars manufactured by the in-line quenched
the prestressing reinforcement. and lempered process shall not be used when welding,
galvanizing, hot bending, or threading of bars occurs.
420.6.5 Corrosion Protection for Post-Tensioning
Anchorages, Couplers, and End Fittings 420.7.6.3 (NZS 3101 C5.3.2)
420.6.5.1 Anchorages, couplers, and end fittings shall be It is important to nole thal any process involving heat e.g.
protected to provide long-term resistance to corrosion. welding, galvanizing, hot bending can adversely affect the
mechanical properties of quenched and tempered
420.6.6 Corrosion Protection for External Post· reinforcing bars by modification of the micro-structure.
Tensioning
Threading of quenched and tempered bar removes some to
420.6.6.1 External tendons and tendon anchorage all hardened outer layer resulting in a disproportionate loss
regions shall be protected against corrosion. of strength.
Associi:ition of Strur;tural Eng:neers oi the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
--
CH.t\PTER 4- Structtiral Concret<:> 4-139
420.7.6.4 (NZS 3109 Amendment 2) SECTION 421

Quenched and tempered reinforcing hars shall not be
STRENGTH REDUCTION
straightened or rebent. FACTORS
420.7.6.5 (AS/NZS 1554.3:2002) 421.l Scope
Quenched and tempered reinforcing bars cannot be 421. 1.1 This section shall apply to the selection of
welded without strength loss. It is recommended that a strength reduction factors used in design, except as
suitable warning be added to the standard to this effect. permitted by Section 427.
This is covered in the amendment to NZS 3101.
421.2 Strength Reduction Factors for Structural
420.7.7 Restrictions in the Use of Quenched Concrete Members and Connections
Tempered Thermo-mechanically Treated
(QT/TMT) Reinforcing Bars in Structures 421.2.1 Strength reduction factors, </), shall be in
Located in Seismic Zone 4 accordance with Table 421.2.1, except as modified by
Sections 421.2.2, 421.2.3, an<l 421.2.4.
420.7.7.lThe restrictions prohibit the use of quenched
tempered (QT) and thermo-mechanically treated (TMT) 421.2.2 Strength reduction factor for moment, axial
reinforcing bars specifically where: force, or combined moment and axial force shall be in
accordance with Table 421.2.2.
1. There is preheating greater than 275°C;
2. Bending ofreinforcing bars requiring preheating;
3. Splicing of reinforcing bars that will reyuire welding

or lap or butt welded joints;
4. Threading of reinforcing bar ends for use of

mechanical couplers;
5. Tack welding for grounding wires will be required.
420.7.7.2 Use of QT/TMT Reinforcing Bars Not

Complying to the Foregoing Restrictions:
420.7.7.2.1 Design Engineers are reminded that the

performance of QT/TMT rebars under cyclic loading
could result in premature spalling and failure of the
concrete and the premature failure of the QT/TMT
reinforcing bars.
4207.7.2.2 Civil Engineer-in-Charge of Construction

shall inform the Design Engineer in writing if QT/TMT
reinforcing bars are to be substituted to MA reinforcing
bars.
National Structural Code or the Phitip(1ines Volume I, 7th biition, 2016

4-140 CHAPTER 4 - Strw:turnl Concrel<!
Table 421.2.1
Strength Reduction Factors, shall be in accordance with
moment and axial force with
Section 421.2.3
Section 421 .2.2
Additional requirements are given in Section 421.2.4
(b) Shear 0.75
for structures designed to resist carthQuake effects.
(c) Torsion 0.75 -
(d) Bearing 0.65 -
(c) Post-tensioned anchorage zones 0.85 -
(fl Brackets and corbels 0.75 -
Struts, ties, nodal zones, and hearing
(g) areas designed in accordance with strut- 0.75 -
and-tie method in Section 423
Components of connections of precast
(h) members controlled by yielding of steel 0.90 -
elements in tension
(i) Plain concrete elements 0.60 -
0.45 to 0.75
(j) Anch ors in concrete elements in accurdance -
with Section 4 17
Table 421.2.2
Strength Reduction Factor, </>, for Moment, Axial Force, or Combined Moment and Axial Force
Net tensile stain, Et Classification e of transverse reinforcement

s irals conformin to Sect. 425. 7.3 Other
Compression
~t S Ety 0.75 (aJ 0.65 (b)
controlled
Transition 111
(Et -Ety) (er - Ety)
Ety < Et < 0. 005 0.75 + 0.15 (c) 0.65 + 0.25 (d)
0.005 - ct 0.005 - Et
Tension
Et~ 0. 005 0.90 (e) 0.90 (t)
controlled
l•I For sections classified as transition, it ~hall be permitted to use tJ, corresponding to compre~sion-controlled sections.
421.2.2.J For deformed reinforcement, Ety shall be

f y/ Es. For Grade 280 defonncd reinforcement, it shall (421.2.3)
be permitted to take Ety equal to 0.002.
421.2.2.2 For all prestressed reinforcement, Ety shall be

421.2.4 For structures that rely on elements in (a), (b),
or (c) to resist earthquake effects, E, the value of
taken as 0.002.
q:, for shear shall be modified in accordance with Sections
421.2.4.1 through 421.2.4.J
421.2.3 For sections in· pretensioned members where
strand is not fully developed, q:, shall be calculated at each
a. Special moment frames;
section in accordance with Table 421.2.3, where l 1r is
calculated using Eq. 42 1.2.3, l db is the debonded length
b. Special structural walls;
at the end of the member, f se is the effective stress in the
prestressed reinforcement after allowance for all losses,
c. Intermediate precast structural walls in structures
and 1 4 is given in Section 425.4.8. 1.
assigned to se ismic zone 4.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. lnr; (ASEP)
-===
- =-~
- -- ~------,
CHAPTER 4 - SVuctural Concrete 4-141
421.2.4.1 For any member designed lo resist E, 421.2.4.3 For beam-column joints and diagonally
 for shear shall be 0.60 if the nominal shear strength of reinforced coupling beams, q, for shear shall be 0.85.
the member is less than the shear corresponding to the
development of the nominal moment strength of the
member. The nominal moment strength shall be
calculated considering the most critical factored axial
loads and including E.
I,
421.2.4.2 For diaphragms, </> for shear shall not exceed
the least value of </> for shear used for the vertical
components of the primary seismic-force-resisting
system.
Table 421.2.3 Strength Reduction Factor, 4>, for Section of Pretensioned Members
Condition near Stress in concrete Distance from end of member

end of member under service loadlll to section under consideration
All strands
s .e 0.75 (a)
Not applicable Linear interpolation from
(b)
bonded ftr told 0.75 to 0.90[21
) 0.75 (c)
No tension Linear interpolation from
calculated (idb + ftr) to (fdb +id) (d)
One or more 0.75 to 0.9ol2J
Strands debonded ) 0.75 (e)
Tension calculated Linear interpolation from
( .fdb +. i tr) to (fdb + Ua) (t)
0.75 to 0.9of2l
1'1 Stress calculated using gro~s cross-sectional properties in extreme concrete fiber of pre-compressed tensile zone under service loads after allowance
for all preslress losses at section under consideration.
121 It shall be permitted to use a strength reduction factor of 0.75.
National Structur<1l Ctid~ of the Philippines VohJme I, 7th Edition, 2016
.• !.
4-142 CHAPTER ·l -- Slructurnl Conc:rnft~
SE_CTION 422 422.2.2.2 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected

>' in flexural and axial strength calculalions.
SECTIONAL STRENGTH
422.2.2.3 The relationship between concrete
422.1 Scope compressive stress and strain shall be represented by a
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or other shape that
422.1.l This section shall apply to calculating nominal results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
strength al sections of members, including (a) through (g): with results of comprehensive tests.
a. Flexural strength; 422.2.2.4 The equivalent rectangular concrete stress

distribution in accordance with Sections 422.2.2.4. l
b. Axial strength or combined flexural and axial through 422.2.2.4.3 satisfies Section 422.2.2.3.
strength;
422.2.2.4. 1 Concrete stress of 0. 85/~ shall be assumed
c. One-way shear strength; uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression
zone bounded by edges of lhc cross section and a line
d. Two-way shear strength; parallel to the neutral axis located a distance a from the
fiber of maximum compressive strain, as calculaled by:
e. Torsional strength;
(422.2.2.4.1)
[ Bearing;
422.2.2.4.2 Distance from the fiber or maximum
g. Shear frktion.
compressive strain to the neutral axis, c, shall be
measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
422.1.2 Sectional strength requirements of this chapter
shall he satisfied unless the member or region of the
member is designed in accordance with Section 423. 422.2.2.4.3 Values of Pi shall he in accordance with
Table 422.2.2.4.3
422.1.3 Design strength at a section shall be taken as Table 422.2.2.4.3
the nominal strength multiplied by the applicable strength Values of P1 for Equivalent Rectangular Concrete
reduclion factor,</), given in Section 421. Stress Distribution
422.2 Design Assumptions for Moment and Axial fJ1

Strength 0.85 (a)
0.05({/ - 28)
422.2.1 Equilibrium und Strain Compatibility 28 < r; < ss 0.85 (h)
7
422.2.l. t Equilibrium shall be satisfied at each section. ! 2: 55 0.65 (c)
422.2.1.2 Strain in concrele and non·prestressed 422.2.3 Design Assumptions for Non-Prcstrcssed
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the Reinforcement
distance from neutral axis.
422.2.3.1 Deformed reinforcement used to resist tensile
422.2.1.3 Strain in prestressed concrete and in bonded or compressive forces shall conform to Section 420.2. I.
and unbonded prestrcssed reinforcement shall include the
strain due to e11ectivc prestress. 422.2.3.2 Stress-strain relationship and modulus of
elasticity for deformed reinforcement shall be idealized in
422.2.1.4 Changes in strain for bonded prestressed accordance with Sections 420.2.2. I and 420.2.2.2.
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the
distance from neutral axis. 422.2.4 Design Assumptions for Prestressing
Reinforcement
422.2.2 Design Assumptions for Concrete
422.2.4.1 For members with bonded prestressing
422.2.2. l Maximum strain at the extreme concrete reinforcement conforming to Section 420.3.l, stress at
compression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003.
Associotion o< Structural Engineers of the Philippines, !nc. (/\SEP)
hr.'
--
U1APTfR. 4 .. Struchm~i Cnncmte •l-M3
nominal flexural strength, fps, shall he calculalc<l m 422.4 Axial Strength or Combined 1-lcxurnl and
accorcumcc with Seclion 420.3.2.3. Axial Strength
422.2.4.2 For memhers wilh unbonded preslrcssing 422.4.1 General

reinforcement conforming lo Section 420.3.1, fps shall be
calculalcd in accordance with Seclion 420.3.2.4. 422.4.1.1 Nominal flexural and axial strength shall be
calculated in accordance with the assumplions of Seclion
422.2.4.3 [f the embedded length of the prestrcssing 422.2.
strand is less than f d, the design strand stress shall not
exceed the value given in Section 425.4.8.3, as modified 422.4.2 Maximum Axial Comprcssive Strength
11
by Section 425.4.8.1 (b).
422.4.2. 1 Nominal axial compressive s trength, P n, shall
422.3 Flexural Strength not exceed P 11 .max, in accordance with Table 422.4.2.1,
where PO is calculated hy Eq. 422 .4.2.2 for non-
422.3.1 General prcstressed members and composite steel and concrete
members, and by Eq. 422.4.2.3 for prcstressed members.
422.3.1.1 Nominal flexural strenglh M11 shall he
calculated in accordance with lhc assumptions of Section Table 422.4.2.1
422.2. Maximum Axial Streng th
422.3.2 Prestressed Concrete Members Member

Transverse
Reinforcement. Pn,max
422.3.2.1 Deformed reinforcement confonning to Ties conforming

to 0.80 Pi, (a)
Section 420.2.1, provided in conjunction with prestresscd
Section 422.4.2.4
reinforcement, shall be permitted lo be considered to Non-prestrcsscd
Spirals
contribute to lhc tensile force and be included in flexural conforming to 0.85 P0 (h)
strength calculations at a stress equal to f y· Section 422.4.2.5
Prestressed Ties 0.80 Pn (c)
422.3.2.2 Other non-prestressed reinforcement shall be S irals 0.85 P,. (d)
pennitted to be considered to contribute to the flexural CompQsitc steel and
strength if a strain compatibility analysis is perfonncd to concrete colunms
All 0.85 P0 (e)
calculate stresses in such reinforcement. in accordance with
Section 410
422.3.3 Composite Concrete Members
422.4.2.2 For non-prestrcssed members and composite
steel and concrete members, P O shall be c alculated by
422.3.3.1 Provisions of Section 422.3.3 apply to
members construcled in separate placemenls but
connected so thal all elements resist loads as a unit. ( 422.4.2.2)
422.3.3.2 For calculation of Mn for composite slabs and where A.(t is the total area ofnon-prestrcssed longitudinal
beams, use of the entire composite section shall be reinforcement.
permitted.
422.4.2.3 For prestresse<l members, Po shall be
422.3.3.3 For calculation of Mn for composite slabs and calculated by:
beams, no distinction shall be made between shored and
unshored members. Po= 0. 8SfiAg -Ast -Apd) + /yAst
- (fse - 0. 003 Ep)A,,1
422.3.3.4 For calculation of M11 for composite members
where the specified concrete compressive strength of (422.4.2.3)
different elements va1ics, properties of the individual
elements shall be used in design. Alternatively, it shall be Where Apt is lhe total area of prcstressing reinforcement,
pennitted to use the value of f~ for the clement that Avd is lhc total area occupied by duct, sheathing, and
results in the most crilical value of Mn. prestressing reinforcement, and the value of f se shall be
at least 0. 003Ep· For grouted, post-tens1·oned tendons, it
shall be permitted to assume A 11 d equals A pt·
:\laiionr1I Structural Cod8 of !l1(~ Phi!ippines Vd.;ine I, 7th Eoitic)I',, 2G1f;°
-- ---
--
- -
4-144 CHAPTER 4 -· Struclural Concrete
422.4.2.4 Tie reinforcement for lateral support of 422.5.1.8 Effect of axial tension due to creep and
lonwtudinal reinforcement in compression members shall shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered in
satisfy Sections 410.7.6.2 and 425.7.2. calculating Ve.
422.4.2.5 Spiral reinforcement for lateral support of 422.5.1.9 Effect of inclined flexural compression in
longitudinal reinforcement in compression members shall variable depth members shall be permitted to be
satisfy Sections 410. 7.6.3 and 425.7.3. considered in calculating V c·
422.4.3 Maximum Axial Tensile Strength 422.5.2 Geometric Assumptions
422.4.3.1 Nominal axial tensile strength of a non- 422.5.2.l For calculation of V e and Vs in prestrcssed
prestressed, composite, or prestressed member, P nt , shall members, d shall be taken as the distance from the
not be taken greater than Pnt.ma.r , calculated by: extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestresscd
and any non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement but
need not be taken less than 0. Sh.
(422.4.3.1)
422.S.2.2 For calculation of V c and V 5 in solid, circular
sections, d shall be permitted to be taken as 0.8 times the
where (fse + !J.fv) shall not exceed f py, and Apt is zero diameter and bw shall be permitted to be taken as the
for non-prestressed members. diameter.
422.5 One-way Shear Strength 422.5.3 Limiting Material Strengths
422.5.1 General 422.5.3.1 The value of ..ff'c used to calculate Vc, V ci,
and Vcw for one-way shear shall not exceed 8.3MPa,
422.5. t.t Nominal one-way shear strength at a section, unless allowed in Section 422.5.3.2.
V m shall be calculated by:
422.5.3.2 Values of ffc greater than 8.3MPa shall be
(422.5.1.1)
penniUed in calculating V,, Vci, and Vcw for reinforced or
prestrcssed concrete beams and concrete joist construction
422.S.1.2 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected to having minimum web reinforcement in accordance with
satisfy Eq. 422.5.1.2. Section 409.6.3.3 or 409.6.4.2.
(422.5 .1.2) 422.5.3.3 The values of {y and f yt used to calculate V 5

shall not exceed the limits in Section 420.2.2.4.
422.5. 1.3 For non-prestressed members, V c shall he 422.5.4 Composite Concrete Members
calculated in accordance with Sections 422.5.5, 422.5.6,
or422.5.7. 422.5.4.1 This section shall apply to members
constructed in separate placements but connected so that
422.5.1.4 For prestresse<l members, Vc, V ct, and V cw all elements resist loads as a unit.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 422.5.8 or
422.5.9. 422.5.4.2 For calculation of V n for composite members,
no distinction shall be made between shored an<l unshored
422.5.1.5 For calculation of V c, V ci, an<l V cw, .A.Shall be members.
in accordance with Section 419.2.4.
422.5.4.3 For calculation of V n for composite members
422.5.1.6 Vs shall be calculated in accordance with where the specified concrete compressive strength, unit
Section 422.5.10. weight, or other properties of different elements vary,
properties of the individual elements shall be use<l in
422.S.1.7 Effect of any openings in members shall be design. Alternatively, it shall he permitted to use the
considered in calculating V,.. properties of the element that results in the most critical
value ofVw
Association of Struc;tural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
-
422.5.4.4 If an entire composite member is assumed to Table 422.5.6.l

,, resist vertical shear, it shall he permitted to calculate V c
assuming a monolithically cast member of the same cross-
Detailed Method for Calculating V c for
Non-Prestressed Members with Axial Compression
sectional shape.
Vr
422.5.4.5 If an entire composite member is assumed to
( 0.16..l./17 + 17pw v.d•h-d)bwd (I) (a)
resist vertical shear, it shall be permitted to calculate V $ Mu-Nu-.-
assuming a monolithically cast member of the same cross- Equation not applicable if
Lesser
sectional shape if shear reinforcement is fully anchored of(a),
into the interconnected elements in accordance with (b), Mu -Nu - -
8
ch-d) :s;o (b)
Section 425.7. and
(c):
422.5.S Vc for Non-Prestressed Members without 0.29N,<
Axial Force
o.2nJ7Zbwd 1+- -
Ag
\
.. . ~11nul1an~ously
Ill Mu occurs '
with Vu at the section considered
422.5.5.1 For non-prestressed members without axial
force, Ve shall he calculated by: 422.5.7 Ve for Non-Prestressed Members with
Significant Axial Tension
(422.5.5.1)
422.5.7.1 For non-prestressed members with significant
unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance axial tension, V c shall be calculated by:
with Table 422.5.5.1.
Ve= 0.17 ( 1 + J.:~J).lfcbwd (422.5.7.1)
Table 422.5.5.1
Detailed Method for Calculating Vc where Nu is negative for tension, and V c shall not be less
v, than zero.
(1)
Least of (0.16,lJ7Z
fc + 17pw Vud)
M,, bwd (a)
422.5.8 V c for Prestressed Members
(a), (b),
and ( 0.16,lJlZ + 17pw) bwd (b)
(c): 422.5.8.1 This section shall apply to the calculation of
0.29,lJfJ b~d (c)
LIJ V c for post-tensioned and pretensioned members in
Mu occurs s1multaneously with Vu at the section regions where the effective force in the prestressed
considered
reinforcement is- fully transferred to the concrete. For
regions of pretensioned members where the effective
422.5.6 V c for Non-Prestressed Members with Axial
force in the prestrcsscd reinforcement is not fully
Compression
transferred to the concrete, Section 422.5.9 shall govern
the calculation of V c·
422.5.6.1 For non-prestressed members with axial
compression, Vc shall be calculated by;
422.5.8.2 For prestressed flexural members with
Apsfse ~ 0.4(Aps{µu + Asfy), Ve shall be calculated in
accordance with Table 422.5.8.2, but need not be less
(422.5.6.1)
than the value calculated by Eq. 422.5.5.1. Alternatively,
it shall be permitted to calculate Ve in accordance with
Section 422.5.8.3.
unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance
with Table 422.5.6.l, where Nu is positive for Table 422.5.8.2
compression. A roximate Method for CalcuJatin v
v
Least
0.05?.
J7Z + 4.8 Vudp
Mu bwd (a)
of (a),
(b),
and o.os:ifiZ + 4.8 bwd (b)
(c): 0.42?. Jb, d (c)
1'1 M,. occurs simultaneously with Vu at the scclion t:onsidcrcd
Natiorwl Structural Code of the Philippines Volum'3 I, 7th Edition 2016
- - ..A..
!i-1,rn CHr\PTEf;: 4 -- Struch1ral Ccr:crn:e
422.5.8.3 For prestresse<l members, Vc shall he 422.5.9 Vc for Pretensioned Members in Regions of
permitted lo be the lesser or Vci calculated in accordance Reduced Prestress Force
with Section 422.5.8.3.1 and Vcw calculated in accordance
with Section 422.5.8.3.2 or 422.5.8.3.3. 422.5.9. t When calculating Vc, the transfer length of
prestressed reinforcement -ftr, shall be assumed to be
422.5.8.3.1 The tlexure-shear strength, Vci> shall be the 50db for strand and 100db for wire.
greater of(a) and (b):
422.5.9.2 If bonding of strands extends to the end of the
member, the effective prestress force shall be assumed to
a. vary linearly from zero at the end of the prestressed
reinforcement to a maximum at a distance / 11• from the
(422.5.8.3.la) end of the prestrcsscd reinforcement.
(422.5 .8.3.1 b) 422.5.9.3 At locations corresponding to a reduced

effective prestress force in Section 422.5.9.2, V, shall he
where dp need not be taken less than 0. 80h, the values calculated in accordance with (a) through (c):
of Mmax and Vi shall be calculated from the load
combinations causing maximum factored moment to a. The reduced eilective prestress force shall be used to
occur at section considered, and M c,·e shall be calculated determine the applicability or Section 422.5.8.2;
by:
b. The reduced effective prestrcss force shall be used to
Mere= (;J (0. SJ.ffi+fpe - f d) (422.5.8.3.lc) calculate Vcw in Section 422.5.8.3;
c. The value or Ve calculated using Section 422.5.8.2

422.5.8.3.2 The web-shear strength, V cw, shall be shall not exceed lhe value of V cw calculated using
calculated by: the reduced effective prcstrcss force.
422.5.9.4 lf bonding of strands does not extend to the

Vcw = (0.291ffi+0.3fpc)bw'1p + VP (422.5.8.3.2) end of the member, the effective prestress force shall be
assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point where
bonding commences to a maximum al a distance / 0 . from
where dp need not be taken less than 0. 80h and VP is the the point.
vertical component of the effective prestress.
422.5.9.5 At locations corresponding to a reduced
422.5.8.3.3 As an alternative to Section 422.5.8.3.2, it effective prestress force according to Section 4225.9.4,
shall be permitted to calculate Vcw as the shear force Ve shall be calculated in accordance with (a) through (c):
corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a
principal tensile stress of 0. 33lffi at location (a) or a. The reduced effective prcstress force shall be used to
(b): dctennine the applicability of Section 422.5.8.2;
a. Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed cross b. The reduced effective prestress force shall be used to
section is in the web, the principal tensile stress shall calculate Ve in accordance with Section 422.5.8.3;
be calculated at the eentroidal axis;
c. The value of Ve calculated using Section 422.5.8.2
b. Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed cross shall not exceed the value of V cw calculated using
section is in the flange, the principal tensile stress the reduced effective prestress force.
shall be calculated at the intersection of the flange
and the web. 422.5.10 One-way Shear Reinforcement
422.5.8.3.4 In composite members, the principal tensile 422.5.10.1 At each section where Vu > (/>Vc, transverse
stress in Section 422.5.8.3.3 shall be calculated using the reinforcement shall be provided such that Eq. 422.5.10.1
cross section that resists live load. is satisfied.
(422.5.10.1)
Assr1ciation of Structural fnginPms of U1e Philiµ1.1;11~s. lnr,. (£\:3[P)

4-1'! 'f
422.5.10.2 For one-way members reinforced with 422.5.10.5.S For each rectangular tie., stirrup, hoop, or
tnmsycrse reinforcement, V.~ shall be calculated in crosstie, A,.. shall he the eftective area of all har legs or
accordance with Section 422.5.10.5. wires within spacing s.
422.5.10.3 For one-way members reinforced with bent- 422.5.10.5.6 For each circular tie or spiral, Av shall he
up longitudinal bars, V.r shall be calculated in accordance two times the area of the bar or wire within spacings.
with Section 422.5.10.6.
422.5.10.6 One-Way Shear Strength Provided by
422.5.10.4 [f more than one type of shear reinforcement Bent-Up Longitudinal Bars
is provided to reinforce the same portion ofa member, Vs
shall be the sum of the Vs values for the various types of 422.5.10.6.l The center three-fourths of the inclined
shear reinforcement. portion of bent-up longitudinal bars shall he permitted to
be used as shear reinforcement in non-prestressed
422.5.10.5 OnMvay Shear Strength Provided by members if the angle a between the bent-up bars and the
Transverse Reinforcement longitudinal axis of the member is at least 30 degrees.
422.5.10.5. 1 In non-presu·csscd and prestressed members, 422.5.10.6.2 If shear reinforcement consists of a single
shear reinforcement satisfying (a), (b), or (c) shall he bar or a single group of parallel bars having an area Av,
permitted: all bent the same distance from the suppo11, Vs shall be
the lesser of(a) and (h):
a. Stirrups, ties, or hoops perpendicular to longitudinal
axis of member;
a. (422.5.10.6.2a)
h. Axial welded wire reinforcement with wires locat~d
perpendicular to longitudinal axis of member; b. (422.5.10.6.2b)
c. Spiral reinforcement.
where a is the angle between bent-up reinforcement and
longitudinal axis of the member.
422.5.10.5.2 Inclined stirrups making an angle of at least
45 degrees with the longitudinal axis of the member and
crossing the plane of the potential shear crack shall be 422.5.10.6.3 If shear reinforcement consists of a series
permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in non- of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up bars
prestrcssed members. at different distances from the support, Vs shall be
calculated by Eq. 422.5. l 0.5.4.
422.5.10.5.3 Vs for shear reinforcement in Section
422.5.10.5.1 shall be calculated hy: 422.6 Two-Way Shear Strength
422.6.1 General
(422.5.10.3)
422.6.1.1 Provisions Sections 422.6.1 through 422.6.8
apply to the nominal shear strength or two-way members
where s is the spiral pitch or the longitudinal spacing of
the shear reinforcement and Av is given in Section
with and without shear reinforcement. Where struelural
steel J. or channel-shaped sections arc used as shear
422.5.10.5.5 or 422.5.10.5.6.
heads, two-way members shall he designed for shear in
422.5.10.5.4 Vs for shear reinforcement in Section
422.5.10.5.2 shall be calculated hy:
422.6.1.2 Nominal shear strength for two-way members
without shear reinforcement shall he calculated by
Avfy1(sin a+ cos a)d
Vs = --'---- s
- - -- (422.5.10.4)
(422.6.1.2)
where a is the angle between the inclined stirrups and the 422.6.1.3 Nominal shear strength for Lwu-way members
longitudinal axis of the member, s is measured parallel to with shear reinforcement other than shear heads shall be
the longitudinal reinforcement, and A,.. is given in Section calculated by
422.5. I 0.5.5.
Nation.81 Structural Co,le (;t the Pt1ii:ppine,, Volurne I, 71.h Et1ition, ?.Drn
-
4.143 CHAP"! ER 4 - Structur;,11 Concrt~le
and (b) shall be permitted to he defined assuming straight

(422.6.1.3) sides.
422.6.4.l.2 For a circular or regular polygon-shaped

422.6.1.4 Two-way shear shall be resisted by a scclion column, critical sections for two-way shear in accordance
with a depth d and an assumed critical perimeter b 0 as with Section 422.6.4.l (a) and (b} shall be permitted to be
defined in Section 422.6.4. defined assuming a square column of equivalent area.
422.6.l.5 Ve for two-way shear shall be calculated in 422.6.4.2 For two-way members reinforced with headed
accordance with Section 422.6.5. For two-way members shear reinforcement or single- or multi-leg stirrups, a
with shear reinforcemcnl, Ve shall not exceed the limits critical section with perimeter b0 located d /Z beyond the
in Section 422.6.6. l. outermost peripheral line of shear reinforcement shall also
be considered. The shape of this critical section shall be a
422.6.1.6 for calculalion of Ve, A shall be in accordance polygon selected to minimize b 0 •
with Section 419.2.4.
422.6.4.3 If an opening is located within a column strip
422.6.1.7 For twu-way members reinforced with single- or closer than lOh from a concentrated load or reaction
or multiple-leg stirrups, Vs shall be calculated in area, a portion of b 0 enclosed by straight lines projecting
accordance with Section 422.6.7. from the centroid of the column, concentrated load or
reaction area and tangent to the boundaries of the opening
422.6.1.8 For two-way members reinforced with headed shall be considered ineffective.
shear stud reinforcement, Vs shall be calculated in
accordance with Section 422.6.8. 422.6.5 Two-way Shear Strength Provided by
Concrete
422.6.2 Effective Depth
422.6.5. t For non-prestressed two-way members, Ve
422.6.2.1 For calculation of Ve and V 5 for two-way shall he calculated in accordance with Section 422.6.5.2.
shear, d shall be the average of the effective depths in the for prcstressed two-way members, Ve shall be calculated
two orthogonal directions. in accordance with (a) or (b):
422.6.2.2 For prestrcssed, two-way members, d need not a. Section 422.6.5.2

be taken less than 0. 8h.
b. Section 422.p.5.5, if the conditions of Section
422.6.3 Limiting Material Strengths 422.6.5.4 are satisfied
422.6.3.1 The value of .f1'c used to calculate Ve for two- 422.6.5.2 Ve shall be calculated m accordance with
way shear shall nol exceed 8.3MPa. Table 422.6.5.2.
422.6.3.2 The value offyt used to calculate Vs shall not Table 422.6.5.2
exceed the limits in Section 420.2.2.4. Calculation of Ve for 1\vo-way Shear
422.6.4 Critical Sections for Two-way Members

0.33Jc.[7l (a)
422.6.4.1 For two-way shear, critical sections shali be
located so that the perimeter b 0 is a minimum but need
nol be closer than d /2 to (a) and (b): Least of(a), (b), (b)
and (c):
a. Edges or corners of columns, concentrated loads, or
reaction areas; (c)
b. Changes in slab or footing thickness, such as edges of Note: pis the ralio of long side to short side or lhe colunm, concentrated
capitals, drop panels, or shear caps. load, or reaction areu and a, is given in Section 422.6.5.3.
422.6.4.l.t For square or rectangular columns, 422.6.5.3 The value of «s is 40 for interior columns, 30
concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical sections for for edge columns, and 20 for comer columns.
two-way shear in accordance with Section 422.6.4.l(a)
Associc:ition of Structural EnginHers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
-·
422.6.5.4 For prestressed, two-way members, it shall be Table 422.6.6.2
permitted to calculate Ve using Section 422.6.5.5 providc<l Maximum Vu for Two-Way Members with Shear
that (a) through (c) are satisfied: Rcinforccmcn t
a. Bonded reinforcement is providt:d in accordance with \1aximum Vu at critical

Sections 408.6.2.3 and 408.7.5.3; Type of shear
sections defined in
rcinforccmcn t
1--~~~~~~-t-~~~
Section 422.6.4.1
b. No portion of the column cross section is closer to a Stirrups ,j>o.som (a)
discontinuous edge than four times the slab thickness
Headed shear stud
h; <f>0.66ff( (b)
reinforcement
c. Effective prestress, f pc, in each direction is not less 422.6.7 Two-way Shear Strength Provided by
than 0.9 MPa. Single- or Multiple-leg Stirrups
422.6.5.5 For prestresscd, two-way members 422.6.7. 1 Single- or multiple-leg stirrups fabricated from
conforming to Section 422.6.5.4, Ve shall be permitted to bars or wires shall be permitted to be used as shear
be the lesser of(a) an<l (b): reinforcement in slabs an<l footings satisfying (a) and (b):
v a. d is at least 150 mm;

a. Ve = 0. 29),. ./Tc+ 0. 3/pc+ b ~ (422.6.5.Sa)
0
b. v,. = 0.083J..frc(1.s +a;:)+ 0.3/pc + ~~ b. d is at least 16db, where db is the diameter of tl1c
stirrups.
(422.6.5.Sb)
422.6.7.2 For two-way members with stirrups, V5 shall
where«.~ is given in Section 422.6.5.3, the value offpc is be calculated by:
the average of f pc in the two directions and shall not
Avfyt
execc<l 3.5 MPa, VP is the vertical component of all (422.6.7.2)
Vs= bos
effective prestress forces crossing the critical section, and
the value of ./Tc
shall not exceed 5.8 MPa. where Av is the sum of the area of all legs of
reinforcement on one peripheral line that is geometrically
422.6.6 Maximum Shear for Two-way Members similar to the perimeter of the column section, and s is
with Shear Reinforcement the spacing of the peripheral lines of shear reinforcement
in the direction perpendicular to the column face.
422.6.6.1 Fur two-way members with shear
reinforcement, the value of Ve calculated at critical 422.6.8 Two-way Sheur Strength Provided by
sections shall not exceed the limits in Table 422.6.6.1. Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement
Table 422.6.6.1 422.6.8.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be

Maximum Ve for Two-Way Members with Shear permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in slabs and
Reinforcement footings if the placement and geometry of the headed
shear slud reinforcement satisfies Section 408.7.7.
Maximum v<at Maximum v,at
critical sections critical sedio11 422.6.8.2 For two-way members with headed shear stud
Type of shear
defined in defined in reinforcement, Vs shall be calculated by:
reinforcement
Section Section
422.6.4.I 422.6.4.2
Stirrups o.1n.Jll. (a) O.J7Ji.,/f: (b) (422.6.8.2)
Headed shear
stud 0.25J ..f1J {t:) 0.17-1 .ff} (d)
rein force men I
where Av is the sum of the area or all shear studs on one
peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the
422.6.6.2 For two-way members with shear
perimeter of the column section, and s is lhe spacing of
reinforcement, effective depth shall be selected such that
the peripheral lines of headed shear stu<l reinforcement in
Vu calculated at critical sections does not exceed the
the direction perpendicular to the column face.
values in Table 422.6.6.2
National Slructural Code of t11e F'h,lipp,ne:, Volume i, ?'th biition. 20·:t;
-- -- -
4-150 GHi\PTEf~ 4 ·- Strur.liir~l C:onc1et0
422.6.8.3 If headed shear stud reinforcement is provided, b. Change in Mu in column strip over the length fv
Jlvl s shal~.iatisfy: stirrups;
c. Mv as given in Section 422.6.9.6.

(422.6.8.3)
422.6.9.8 The critical section for shear shall be
perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross each
shearhead arm at a distance (3/4)[tv - (ctf2))from the
422.6.9 Design Provisions for Two-way Members
column face. This critical section shall be located so that
with Shearhcads. b 0 is a minimum, but need not be closer than d/2 to the
edges of the supporting column.
422.6.9.1 Each shearhcad shall consist of steel shapes
fabricated with a full penetration weld into identical arms
422.6.9.9 If an opening is located within a column strip
at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be interrupted
or closer than 10h from a column in slabs with
within the column section.
shearheads, the ineffective portion of b 0 shall be one-half
422.6.9.2 A shcarhead shall not be deeper than 70 times of that given in Section 422.6.4.3.
the web thickness of the steel shape.
422.6.9.10 Factored shear stress due to vertical loads
422.6.9.3 The ends of each shearhead arm shall be shall not be greater than 0. 33<J>ffcon the critical section
pennitte<l to be cut at angles of at least 30 degrees with given in Section 422.6.9.8 and shall not be greater than
the horizontal if the plastic flexural strength, Mp, of the 0. 58q,fFc on the critical section closest to the column
remaining tapered section is adequate to resist the shear given in Section 422.6.4.1 (a).
force attributed to that arm of the shcarhead.
422.6.9.l l Where transler of moment is considered, the
422.6.9.4 Compression flanges of steel shapes shall be shearhead shall have adequate anchorage to transmit MP
within O. 3d of the compression surface of the slab. to the column.
422.6.9.5 The ratio «v between the flexural stiffness of 422.6.9.12 Where transfer of moment is considered, the
each shearhcad arm and that of the surrounding composite sum of factored shear stresses due to vertical load acting
cracked slab section of width (c:z + d) shall be at least on the critical section given in Section 422.6.9.8 and the
0.15. shear stresses resulting from factored moment transferred
hy eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical
422.6.9.6 For each arm of the shearhead, MP shall section closest to· the column given in Section
satisfy: 422.6.4. l(a) shall not exceed 0. 33q,J..fFc.
(422.6.9.6) 422.7 Torsion11) Strength
422.7.1 General
where <J> corresponds to tension-controlled members, n is
the number of shearhead arms, and iv is the minimum 422.7.1.1 This section shall apply to members if
length of each shearhead arm required tu satisfy Sections Tu ~ <J>T th, where q, is given in Section 421 and
422.6.9.8 and 422.6.9.10. threshold torsion, Tth, is given in Section 422.7.4. If
Tu < q,Tth, it shall be permitted to neglect torsional
422.6.9.7 Nominal flexural strength contrihuted to each effects.
slab column strip by a shearhead, M v, shal I satisfy:
422.7. 1.2 Nominal torsional strength shall be calculated
(422.6.9.7) in accordance with Section 422.7.6.
422. 7. 1.3 For calculation of T ,h ,tnd Ti.- , l shall be in

where q, corresponds tu tension-controlled members. accordance with Section 419.2.4.
However, Mv shall not exceed the least of(a) through (c):
422.7.2 Limiting Material Strengths
a. 30 percent of Mu in each slab column strip;
422.7.2.1 The value of used to calculate Tth and Tc,.
shall not exceed 8.3 MPa.
A:=;sociatic•n of svuctu<al l::ngineers cf the Philipp•nei,, Inc. (ASEP)
-
422.7.2.2 The values off y and f yt for longitudinal and 422.7.5 Cracking Torsion
1ransverse torsional n:inforccmeni shall not exceed the
limits .in Section 420.2.2.4. 422.7.5.1 Cracking torsion, Tcr shall be calculated in
accordance with Tahle 422.7.5.1 for solid and hollow
422.7.3 Factored Design Torsion cross sections, where Nu is positive for compression anti
negative for tension.
422.7.3.1 If Tu 2 <PTer an<l T 11 is required to maintain
equilibrium, the member shall be designed to resist T11 • Table 422.7.5.1 C1·acking Torsion
422.7.3.2 In a statically indeterminate structure where Type of member T,,.

Tu ~ </>Tc,. and a reduction of Tu in a member can occur
due to redistribution of internal forces after torsional
Non-prestrcsscd
memher
O.:m jlJ l'At,} Pc"
(a)
cracking, Tu to </>T,:r, where the cracking torsion, Tcr, is Prestressc::d O.:tU fJ1 (A~µ) Ji + {,>< (b)
calculated in accordance with Section 422.7.5. member 1'ep 0.33,l .{fj
Non-prcstresse<l
422.7.3.3 If T,. is redistributed in accordance with member o.:n..1. (i )j +
ffj .....T. 1 N" (c)
Section 422.7.3.2, lhe factored moments and shears used subjected to axial Pr:v 0.33Ag..l. ,fl}
for design of the adjoining members shall be in force
equilibrium with the rcdm.:cd torsion.
422.7.6 Torsional Strength
422.7.4 Th1·eshold Torsi!)n
422.7.6.1 For non-prestressed and prcstn.:sscd members,
422.7.4.1 Threshold torsion, Ta,, shall be calculated in T n shall be the lesser of (a) and (b):
accordance with Table 422.7.4.l(a) for solid cross
sections and Table 422. 7.4.1 (b) for hollow cross sections,
2A,,Acfyt
where Nu is positive for compression and negative for a. Tn = cot8 (422.7.6.la)
tension. s
Table 422.7.4.l(a)
Threshold Torsion for Solid Cross Sections b. (422.7.6.1 h)
Type of member Tch

where A0 shall be detcnnincd by analysis, 8 shall not be
Non-pres tressed
memher
o.osu ,fl} TA:~)
Pc~
(a) taken less than 30 degrees nor greater than 60 degrees, Ac
is the area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion,
Ae is the area of longitudinal torsional reinforcement, and
Prestress~<l
member
0.083,l ,fl} (
e
A~P)
1'ep
J1 + !,,c
0.33,l ,fl}
(b)
Ph is the perimeter of the centerline of the outermost
Non-prestressed closed stirrup.
member
suhjeded lo axial
0.083..l. !lf (tr)
Pep .
I+
Nu
O.:BAg,lfj1
(c)
422.7.6.1.1 In Eq. 422.7.6.la and 422.7.6.Jb, il shall be
force permitted to take A 0 equal to 0. 85Aoh·
Table 422.7.4.l(b) 422.7.6.1.2 In Eq. 422.7.6.la and 422.7.6.Jb, it shall be

Threshold Torsion for Hollow Cross Sections permitted to take 8 equal lo (a) or (b):
Tyoe of member T,,. a. 45 degrees for non-prestressed memhers or members

Non-prestressed
memher
0.08'.U fj1 (A::)
Pc»
(a) with ApJse < 0.4(Aps{pu + As/y)i
Prestrcsscd
member
0.083,l f1J (A:) 1 +
Pep
J fve
0.33..l.{fZ
(b) h. 37.5 degrees for prestresscd members with Avsfse ~
0.4(Ap.tfpu + Asfy)•
Non-prcstrcssed
member
subjecttx.1 to axial
0.083,l Jr,.; (A.:)
Pep .
1+
Nu
0.33A8..l.{t
(c) 422.7.7 Cross-Sectional Limits
force
422.7.7.1 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected
such that (it) or (b) is satisfied:
--
4··152 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
a. For solid sections (422.8.3.1)
. Vu )
( bwd
2
+
(
2
T 11 ph )
1. 7 A~h 5, q,
{ Ve
bwd
w)
+ O. 66 '.Jf~
for each applicable factored load combination.
422.8.3.2 Nominal bearing strength, Bn, shall be

(422.7.7.la) calculated in accordance with Table 422.8.3.2, where A1
is the loaded area and A2 is the area of the lower base of
b. For hollow sections the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the support and having its upper
base equal to the loaded area. The sides of the pyramid,
Vu)
( bwd +
( TuPh ) ( Ve
1. 7A!h '5: 4> bwd
r;,)
+ O. 66"' {~
cone, or tapered wedge shall he sloped I vertical to 2
horizontal.
(422.7.7.1 b)
Table 422.8.3.2
Nominal Bearing Strength
422.7.7.1.1 For prcstressed members, the value of d
used in Section 422.7.7.1 need not be taken less than Geometry of
0.8h. bearin area
Lesser JA 2 /A1 (0.85(:A,) (a)
422.7.7.1.2 For hollow sections where the wall thickness Supporting t--
of
varies around the perimeter, Eq. 422.7.7.lb shall be surface is wider
(a)
evaluated at the location where the term on all sides than (b)
and
the loaded area
(b)
Other cases (c)
.1s a maximum.
. 422.9 Shear Friction
422.9.1 General
422.7.7.2 For hollow sections where the wall thickness
is less than AohlPh, the tenn (ruPhl Aah 2 ) in Eq. 422.9.1.1 This section shall apply where it is appropriate
422.7.7.lb shall be taken as (T 11/1. 7 A 0 ht), where t is to consider shear transfer across any given plane, such as
the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at the an existing or potential crack, an interface between
location where the stresses are being checked. dissimilar materjaJs, or an interface between two
concretes cast at diflerent times.
422.8 Bearing
422.9.1.2 The required area of shear-friction
422.8.1 General reinforcement across the assumed shear plane, Avf, shall ' I
be calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.4.

422.8.1.1 This section shall apply to the calculation of Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use shear transfer
bearing strength of concrete members. design methods that result in prediction of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
422.8.1.2 Bearing strength provisions in this section
shall not apply to post-tensioned anchorage zones or strut- 422.9.t.3 The value of [y used to calculate Vn for shear
and-tie models. friction shall not exceed the limit in Section 420.2.2.4.
422.8.2 Required Strength 422.9.1.4 Surface preparation of the shear plane assumed
for design shall be specified in the construction
422.8.2.l Factored compressive force transferred documents.
through bearing shall be calculated in accordance with the
factored load combinations defined in Section 405 and 422.9.2 Required Strength
analysis procedures defined in Section 406.
422.9.2.l Factored forces across the assumed shear plane
422.8.3 Design Strength shall be calculated in accordance with the factored load
combinations defined in Section 405 and analysis
422.8.3.l Design bearing strength shall satisfy: procedures defined in Section 406.
Association of Structural Engineers of tM Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)
--
- I
CHAVif.F~ 4 ·· Str1.1cH1r,:il ConcrEil~; 4··1!i:3
422.9.3 Design Strength wherca is lhe angle between shear-friction reinforcement

and assumed shear plane and µ is the coefficient of
422.9.3.1 Design shear strength across the assumed friction in accordance with Table 422.9.4.2.
shear plane shall satisfy:
(422.9.3.1)
for each applicable factored load combination. 422.9.4.4 The value of V n across the assumed shear
plane shall not exceed the limits in Table 422.9.4.4.
422.9.4 Nominal Shear Strength Where concretes of different strengths are cast against
each other, the lesser value of/~ shall be used in Table
422.9.4. l Value of V11 across the assumed shear plane 422.9.4.4.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.4.2 Table 422.9.4.4
or 422.9.4.3. V11 shall not exceed the value calculated in Maximum Vn Across the Assumed Shear Plane
Condition Maximum V..
422.9.4.2 If shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular Normal weight
lo the shear plane, nominal shear strength across the concrete placed O.zf:Ac (a)
assumed shear plane shall he calculated by: monolithically or
Lc::ast of
pla1;e<l against
(a),
(422.9.4.2) har<lenc::d concrete
(h), an<l (3.3 + 0.08{()Ac (b)
intentionally (1;)
roughened to a full
where A"' is the area of reinforcement crossing the amplitude of 11Ac (c)
assumed shear plane to resist shear and µ is the aooroximatclv 6 mm.
coeilicient of friction in accordance with Table 422.9.4.2. Lesser 0.2{./Ai: (d)
Other cases of(d)
and (e) 5.5Ac (t:)
Table 422.9.4.2 Coet'ficicnts of Friction111
Coefficient of 422.9.4.5 Permanent net compression across the shear
Contact surface condition
friction plane shall be permitted to be added to Av/f y, lhe force
i---:C~o~n~c~r~
e t~e~ la~c~e~d~m
~o~n=<~>l~it~h~ic=a~ll. .._1--~----'1~.~4~A~~-f--'a) in the shear-friction reinforcement, to calculate required
Concrete placed against Avf·
hardened concrete intentionally
1.0A (b)
roughened to a full amplitude of 422.9.4.6 Arca· of reinforcement required to resist a net
a roximatel 6 mm. factored tension across an assumed shear plane shall be
Concrete placed against added to the area of reinforcement required for shear
hardened concrete not 0.6A (c) friction crossing the assumed shear plane.
intentionall rou •hencd
Concrete placed against as- 422.9.5 Detailing for Shear-friction Reinforcement
rolled structural steel that is
clean, free of paint, and with 422.9.5.1 Reinforcement crossing the shear plane to
shear transferred across the o.n (d) satisfy Section 422. 9.4 shall be anchored to develop f y on
contact surface by headed studs both sides of the shear plane.
or by welded deformed hars or
wires.
=
l'l;t = 1. O for nonnal-wcighl concrete; ). 0. 75 for all lightweight
!
concrete. Otherwise, il is calculated based on volumetric proportions
of lightweight and normal-weight aggregate as given in Section
419.2.4.1, hut shall not exceed 0.85.
422.9.4.3 Ir shear-friction reinforcement is inclined lo

the shear plane and the shear force induces tension in the
shear-friction reinforcement, nominal shear strength
across the assumed shear plane shall be calculated by:
Vn = Avtfy(µ sin a+ cos a) (422.9.4.3)
National Sm.ictura! Code of t!1e Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, :w 16
.,,
........
SECTION 423 423.3 Design Strcni.:th
STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS 423.3.1 For each applicable factored load comhination,

design strength of each strut, lie, and nodal zone in a
423.1 Scope strut-and-tic model shall satisfy <J>Sn 2! U, including (a)
through (c ):
423.1.1 This seclion shall apply lo lhe design of
structural concrete members, or regions of memhers,
where load or gcomclric discontinuities cause a nonlinear
distribution of longitudinal strains within the cross
sec lion. b. Ties <f,Fnt 2! Fut
423.1.2 Any slructural concrete member, or
discontinuity region in a memher, shall be permitted to be
c. Nodal zones <f>F,m ~ Fus
designed by modeling lhe member or region as an
idealized truss. This truss shall be designed in accordance
with lhc strut-and-lie mclhod in Section 423.
423.3.2 tJ> shall be in accordance with Section 421.2
423.2 General
423.4 Strength of Struts
423.2.1 Strut-and-tic models shall consist of struls and
423.4.t The nominal compressive strength of a strut,
ties connected at nodes to form an idealized truss.
F,.... shall be calculated by (a) or (b):
423.2.2 Geometry of the idealized truss shall be
a. Slrut without longitudinal reinforcement
consistent with the dimensions of the struts, ties, nodal
zones, bearing areas, and supports.
Fns =fceAcs (423.4.la)
423.2.3 Stn1t-and-tie models shall be capable of
lranslerring all faclored loads to supports or adjacent B- b. Strut with longitudinal reinforcement
regions.
(423.4. lb)
423.2.4 The internal forces in strut-and-tie models
shall be m equilibrium wilh the applied loads and where F ns shall be. evaluated at each end of the strut and
reactions. taken as the lesser value, Ac.< is the cross-sectional area at
the end of the strut under consideration, f ce is given in
423.2.S Ties shall he permitted to cross struts and other Section 423.4.3, A.~ is the area of compression
ties. reinforcement along the length of the strut, and {~ is the
stress in the compression reinforcement at the nominal
423.2.6 Struts shall intersect or overlap only at nodes. axial strength of the strut. It shall be permitted to take /~
equal to f y for Grade 280 or Grade 420 reinforcement.
423.2.7 The angle between the axes of any strut and
any tie entering a single node shall be at least 25 degrees. 423.4.2 Effective compressive strength of concrete in a
strut, f "'' shall he calculated in accordance with Section
423.2.8 Deep beams designed using strut-and-tie 423.4.3 or 423.4.4.
models shall salisfy Sections 409.9.2.l, 409.9.3.1, and
409.9.4. 423.4.3 Effective compressive strength of concrete in a
strut, f ce, shall be calculated by:
423.2.9 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to-depth
ratio av/ d < 2.0 designed using strut-and-tie models (423.4.3)
fee= 0.85fJsf~
shall satisfy Sections 416.5.2, 416.5.6, and Eq. 423.2.9.
(423.2.9) where Ps, in accordance with Table 423.4.3, accounts for

the effect of cracking and crack-control reinforcement on
the effective compressive strength of the concrete.
Assoc:r:it.ion of ~~lructural Eng:nefm, cf the Philippines, lnc. (P,SEP)

CHAPTER ,t ... Struc:lural Concrete 4-155
Table 423.4.3 Strut Coefficient Ps a 2 to the axis of the strut, or in one direction at an angle
a 1 to the axis of the strut. Where the reinforcement is
Strut geometry and Reinforcement placed in only one direction, a 1 shall be at least 40
location crossing a Ps degrees.
strut
Struts with uniform 423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing
cross-sectional area NA 1.0 (a}
along length 423.6.1 Compression reinforcement in struts shall be
Struts located in a region Satisfying parallel to the axis of the strut and enclosed along the
0.75 (b)
of a memher where the Section 423.5 length of the strut by closed ties in accordance with
width of the compressed Section 423.6.3 or hy spirals in accordance with Section
concrete at mid-length 423.6.4.
Not Satisfying
of the strut can spread 0.60). (c)
Section 423.5
laterally (bottle-shaped 423.6.2 Compression reinforcement in struts shall be
struts) anchored to develop f~ at the fal:e of the nodal zone,
Struts located in tension where f~ is calculated in accordance with Section
members or the tension NA 0.40 (d) 423.4.1.
zones of members
/\II other cases NA 0.60..l (e) 423.6.3 Closed ties enclosing compression
reinforcement in struts shall satisfy Section 425.7.2 and
423.4.4 lf confining reinforcement is provided along this section.
the length of a strut and its ellcct is documented by tests
and analyses, it shall be pennitted tu use an increased 423.6.3.1 Spacing of closed ties, s, along the length of
value of f ce when calculating F,15 • the strut shall not exceed the smallest of (a) through ( c ):
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Bottle-Shaped Struts a. Smallest dimension of cross scl:tion of strut;
423.5.1 For bottle-shaped struts designed using h. 48db of bar or wire used for closed tie
Ps == 0. 75, reinforcement to resist transverse tension reinforcement;
resulting from spreading of the compressive force in the
strut shall cross the strut axis. It shall be pennitted to c. 16db of compression reinforcement.
determine the transverse tension by assuming that the
compressive force in a bottle-shaped strut spreads at a 423.6.3.2 The Jirst closed tic shall be located not more
slope of 2 parallel to I perpendicular to the axis of the than 0. 5s from the face of the nodal zone at each end of a
strut. strut.
423.5.2 Reinforcement required in Section 423.5.l 423.6.3.3 Closed tics shall be arranged such that every
shall be developed beyond the extents of the strut in comer and alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral
accordance with Section 425.4. support provided by crossties or the corner of a tie with an
included angle of not more than 135 degrees and no
423.5.3 Distributed reinforcement calculated in longitudinal bar shall be farther than 150 mm clear on
accordance with Eq. 423.5.3 and crossing the strut axis each side along the tie from such a laterally supported bar.
shall be deemed to satisfy Section 423.5.1, if
{~ s;;40MPa. 423.6.4 Spirals enclosing compression reinforcement
in struts shall satisfy Section 425.7.3.
(423.5.3)
423.7 Strength of Ties
where Aiii is the total area of distributed reinforcement at 423.7.l Tic reinforcement shall be non-prestressed or
spacings, in the i-th direction of reinforcement crossing a prcstressed.
strut at an angle a; to the axis of a strut, and b 3 is the
width of the strut 423.7.2 The nominal tensile strength of a tie, F ,u, shall
be calculated by:
423.5.3.1 Distributed reinforcement required in Section
423.5.3 shall be placed orthogonally at angles a 1 and (423_7.2)
Nation~11 Structur!;il Code of the Philippines vo:um~i L ltr1 Edition, 20·10
-
423.9.3 If confining reinforcement is provided within
where (f.~e + t:.fP) shall not exceed f PY' and Atp is zero
the no<lal zone and its effccL is documented hy tests and
for n~·prestres!!ed members.
analyses, it shall be permitted to use an increased value of
423.7.3 In Eq. 423.7.2, it shall be permitted to take
f ce when calculating Fnn·
6{P equal to 420 MPa for honded prestressed
423.9.4 The area of each face or a nodal zone, Anz,
reinforcement and 70 MPa for unbonded prcstressed
shall be taken as the smaller of (a) and (b):
reinforcement. Higher values of lifp shall be permitted if
justified by analysis. a. Arca of the face of the nodal zone perpendicular to
the line of action of Fus;
423.8 Tie Reinforcement Detailing
b. Area of a section through the nodal :zone
423.8.1 The centroidal axis of the tie reinforcement perpendicular to the line of action of the resultant
shall coincide with lhe axis of the tie assumed in the strut- force on the section.
and-tie model.
423.9.5 In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie mo<lel, the
423.8.2 Tie reinforcement shall be anchored hy area of each face of a nodal zone shall be at least that
mechanical devices, post-tensioning anchorage devices, given in Section 423 .9.4, and the shape or each face of the
standard hooks, or straight bar development in a<.:cordance nodal :zone shall be similar to the shape of the projection
with Section 423.8.3. of the end of the strut onto the corresponding face of the
nodal zone.
423.8.3 Tie reinforcem<.:nt shall be developed in
a. The difference between the tie force on one side of a

node and the tie force on the other side shall be
developed within the nodal zone.
b. At nodal zones anchoring one or more ties, the tic

force in each direction shall be developed at the point
where the centroid of the reinforcement in the tie
leaves lhe extended nodal zone.
423.9 Strength of Nodal Zones
423.9.1 The nominal compressive strength of a nodal

zone, Fnn, shall be calculated by:
(423.9.1)
where f ce is defined in Section 423.9.2 or 423.9.3 and

A 11.i is given in Section 423.9.4 or423.9.5.
423.9.2 The effective compressive strength of concrete

at a face of a nodal zone, f ce, shall he calculated hy:
f ce == 0.85/Jnf~ (423.9.2)
where Pn shall be in accordance with Table 423.9.2.
Table 423.9.2 Nodal Zone Coefficient p11

Contif:mration of nodal zone IL
Nodal zone bounded hy slruts, bearing ureas, (a)
1.0
or both
Nodal zone anchorinl! one lie 0.80 (h)
Nodal :tone anclwring two or more tics 0.60 (c)
Association of Structimil Er.ginerns of the Philippines. Inc. {ASEP)

deformations that adversely affect strength or
SECTION 424 serviceahility of a slruclurc.
SERVICEABILITY
REQUIREMENTS 424.2.2 Deflections calculated m accordance wilh
Sections 424.2.3 through 424.2.5 shall not exceed the
424.1 Scope limits in Table 424.2.2.
424.1.1 This section shall apply to member design for 424.2.3 Calculation of Immediate Deflections
minimum scrvkcability, including (a) through (ti):
424.2.3. 1 lmmcdiale deflections shall he calculated
a. Section 424.2 Deflections due to service-level gravity using methods or formulas for elastic deflections,
loads; considering cflects of cracking and reinforcement on
member stiffness.
b. Section 424.3 Distribution of flexural reinforcement
in one-way slahs and beams to control cracking; 424.2.3.2 Effect of varialion of cross-sectional
properties, such as haunches, shall he considered when
c. Section 424.4 Shrinkage and temperature calculating <lellections.
reinforcement;
424.2.3.3 Uetlc<:Lions in two-way slab systems shall be
d. Section 424.5 Permissible stresses in prestrcsscd calculated taking rnlo account si1.e and shape of lhe panel,
conditions of support, and nature of restraints at the panel
flexural members.
edges.
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravity
Loads 424.2.3.4 Modulus of elasticity, Ee, shall be permitted to
be calculated in accordance with Section 419.2.2.
424.2.1 Members subjccled to flexure shall be
designed with adequate stiffness to limit deflections or
Table 424.2.2 Maximum Permissible Calculated Deflections

Member Condition Detlcction to be consid_;_
er__c:.. d.:'--_..,__;;;.
D...ce,; . fl. .c.e-'-ct,;, ci. :.::....:..
on li---m_it_a_ti---
o"" n---1
Not supporting or attached to non- Immediate <lcllection due to 11
Fial roofs maximum of L and R _ _ _---1,_ _ _ _._f_/ _l_B_o_r_ - - - - 1
strnctural elements likely to be
Floors damaged by large deflections to L I! 1360 _ _ _--1
Immediate deflection ·due:....:..;:....=._-+----...::J......::..;::..::....
likely to be
That parlor the total deflection
damaged by i/480[3 J
occurring after attachment of non-
Supporting or large
structural elements, which is lhe
attached to non- deflections
Roof or floors sum of the time-dependent
structural not likely to be deflection due to all sustained loads
elements damaged by
and the immediate deflection due to
large any additional live load 121
deflections
111 Limit not intended to safegu~nl against ponding. Ponding shall be checked by calculations of deflection, including added deflections due to ponded
water, and considering tim~-dependent effects of sustained loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability of provisions for drainage.
121 Time-dependent deflection shall be calculated in accordance with Section 424.2.4, but shall be p~nniued to be reduced by amount of defl~ction Ii
calculated to occur before auachmcnt ofnon-slrncturol clements. This amount shall be calculated 011 basis of accepted engin~ering data rdating lo time-
dctlection charncteristics of members similar to those being considered.
(.l) Limit shall b~ permitted to be exceeded if measures arc taken to pnivenc damage to supported or aUached clement~.
[4 ) Limit shall not exceed tol~rance provided for nonstn1ctural clements
424.2.3.5 For non-prestressed members, effective

moment of inertia, le, shall be calculated by Eq.
(424.2.3.Sa)
424.2.3.Sa unless obtained hy a more comprehensive
analysis, but I e shall not be greater than I g·
where Mc,· is calculated by
--
Table 424.2.4.1.3
frig Time-Dependent Factor for Sustained Loads
M = - (424.2.3.5b)
er Yt
Sustained load duration,
Time-dependent factor {
424.2.3.6 For conlinuous one-way slabs and beams, le months
shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values 3 1.0
obtained from Eq. 424.2.3.5a for the critical positive and 6 1.2
ncgalive moment sections. 12 1.4
60 or more 2.0
424.2.3.7 For prismatic one-way slabs and beams, le
shall be pennilted to he taken as the value obtained from 424.2.4.2 Prestrcssed Members
Eq. 424.2.3.5a at mid-span for simple and continuous
spans, and at the support for cantilevers. 424.2.4.2.l Additional time-dependent deflection of
prestrcssed concrete members shall be calculated
424.2.3.8 For prcstressed Class U slabs and beams as considering slresses in concrcle and reinforcement under
defined in Section 424.5.2, il shall be permitted to sustained load, and the c11ects of creep and shrinkage of
calculate deflections based on I g· concrete and relaxation of prestressed reinforcement.
424.2.3.9 For prcsu-essed Class T and Class C slabs and 424.2.S Calculation of Deflections of Composite
beams as defined in Section 424.5.2, deflection Concrete Construction
calculations shal I be based on a cracked transformed
section analysis. lt shall he permitted to base deflection 424.2.5.1 £f composite concrete flexural members are
calculations on a bilinear momcnt-dellection relationship shored during construction so that, after removal of
or le in accordance with Eq. 424.2.3.5a, where Mc,· is temporary supports, the dead load is resisted by the full
calculated as as: composite section., it shall be permitted to consider the
composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast
member for calculation of detlections.
(424.2.3.9)
424.2.5.2 If composite concrete flexural members arc
nol shored during construction, lhe magnitude and
duration of load before and after composite action
424.2.4 Calculation of Time-Dependent Deflections becomes effective shall be considered in calculating time-
dcpendent deflections.. ·
424.2.4.1 Non-Prestressed Members
424.2.5.3 Deflections resulting from differential
424.2.4.l.l Unless obtained from a more comprehensive shrinkage ofprecast and cast-in-place components, and of
analysis, additional time-dependent deflection resulting axial creep effects in prestressed members, shall be
from creep and shrinkage of t1exural members shall he considered.
calculated as the product of the immediate deflection
caused by sustained load and the factor 1 6 • 424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in
One-Way Slabs and Beams
it - { (424.2.4.1.1)
a -1 + SOp' 424.3. 1 Bonded reinforcement shall be distribuled to
control flexural cracking in tension zones of non-
prestressed and Class C prestrcssed slabs and beams
424.2.4.1.2 In Eq. 424.2.4.1.1, p' shall be calculated at reinforced for flexure in one direction only.
mid-span for simple and continuous spans, and at the
support for cantilevers. 424.3.2 Spacing of bonded reinforcement closest to the
lension face shall not exceed the limits in Table 424.3.2,
424.2.4.1.3 In Eq. 424.2.4.1.1, values of the time where cc is the least distance from surface of deformed or
dependent factor for sustained loads, {, shall be in presLressed reinforcement to the tension face. Calculated
accordance wilh Table 424.2.4.1.3. stress in defonned reinforcement, f s, and calculated
change in stress in bonded prestrcsscd reinforccmcnl,
!:t.fps, shall be in accordance with Sections 424.3.2.1 and
424.3.2.2, respectively.
CH1\i-~H:i-{ ,, ·· Structwal Co11crulc ;J 1b!l
Table 424.3.2 424.3.5 The spacing of bonded flexural reinforcement

Maximum Spacing of Bonded in non-prestressed and Class C prcstressed one-way slabs
Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed and Class C and beams subject to fatigue, designed lo be watertight, or
Prestressed One-Way Slabs and Beams exposed to corrosive environments, shall he selected
based on investigations and precautions specific to those
Reinforcement conditions and shall not exceed the limits of Section
Maximum spacing s 424.3.2.
type
380 (280)
/.~ - 2.Scr 424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
Deformed bars Lesser
or wires of: 424.4.l Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and
temperature stresses shall be provided in one-way slabs in
T
300 (280)
the direction perpendicular to the flexural reinforcement
in accordance with Section 424.4.3 or 424.4.4.
Bonded
Lesser
({) [ 380 G;P: )- 2.Scc] 424.4.2 If shrinkage and temperature movements arc
prestressed restrained, the effects of T shall be considered in
of: accordance with Section 405.3.6.
reinforcement
(~) [ 300 G:~~) J 424.4.3 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement
Combined
deformed bars
or wires and Lesser
(~) [ 380 G;P:)- 2.Scc]
424.4.3.l Deformed reinforcement to resist shrinkage
and temperature stresses shall conform to Table
420.2.2.4(a) and shall be in accordance with Sections
bonded of: 424.4.3.2 through 424.4.3.5.
prestressed
reinforcement
(~) [3soG;p~)] 424.4.3.2 The ratio of deformed shrinkage and
temperature reinforcement area to gross concrete area
424.3.2.1 Stress f s in deformed reinforcement closest to shall satisfy the limits in Table 424.4.3.2.
the tension face at service loads shall be calculated based
oo the unfactored moment, or it shall be permitted to take Table 424.4.3.2
fs as (2/3){y- Minimum Ratios of Deformed Shrinkage and
Tem1>erature Reinforcement Area to·Gross Concrete
424.3.2.2 Change in stress llfps in bonded prestressed · Area
reinforcement at service loads shall he equal to the
calculated stress based on a cracked section analysis Reinfo ..cement {y, Minimum reinforcement
type MPa ratio
minus the decompression stress f ,.fr- It shall be permitted
to take f de equal to the effective stress in the prestrcsscd Deformed bars <420 0.0020
reinforcement fu· The value of llf ps shall not exceed 0.0018 x 420
250 MPa. Ir llfps does not exceed 140 M Pa, the spacing Deformed bars
Greater fv
or welded wire ~ 420
limits in Table 424.3.2 need not he satisfied. of:
reinforcement 0.0014
424.3.3 If there is only one bonded bar, pretensioned
strand, or bonded tendon nearest to the extreme tension 424.4.3.3 The spacing of deformed shrinkage and
face, the width of the extreme tension face shall not temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
exceed s detennined in accordance with Table 424.3.2. Sh and 450 mm.
424.3.4 Ir Hanges ofT-beams are in tension, part of the 424.4.3.4 At all sections where required, defunned
bonded flexural tension reinforcement shall be distributed reinforcement used to resist shrinkage and temperature
over an effective flange width as defined in accordance stresses shall develop f y in tension.
with Section 406.3.2, but not wider than tn/10. If the
effective llange width exceeds ln/10, additional bonded
longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer
portions of the flange.
Ni'ltional Structural Cede of the Philippines \/olu1rn~ I, 7th Edition, ::'.016
-
~
424.4.3.5 For one-way preea!it slabs and one-way Table 424.S.2.1

precast,~ prestresse<l wall panels, shrinkage and Classification of Prcstressed
temperature reinforcement is not required in the direction Flexural Members Based on f ,.
perpendicular lo the flexural reinforcement if (a) through
(c) arc satisfied. Assumed Behavior Class Limi ts of f,
Uncrackcd ul1J .62J7l. I
a. Prccast members arc not wider than 3.7 rn; Transition between
uncracked and T 0.62!fl < f,_ ~ f1Z
h. Precast members are not mechanically connected to cracked
cause restraint in the transverse direction; c
Cracked J1l.
l'restrcsscd two-wiiy slabs shall be designed as Cln~s IJ witl1 '
c. Reinforcement is not required to resist transverse f, ~ 0. 5./T.:
flexural stresses. I
424.5.2.2 For Class U and T members, stresscs at service

424.4.4 Prestrcsscd Reinforcement loads shall be permitted to be calculated using the
uncracked section.
424.4.4.1 Prestressed reinforcement to resist shrinkage I
and temperature stresse!i shall conform to Table 420.3.2.2 424.5.2.3 h>r Class C members, stresses a t service loads I
and the effective prestress alter losses shall provide an shall be calculated using the cracked 1.ransformcd section.
average compressive stress of at least 0. 7 MPa on gross
concrete area. 424.5.3 Permissible Concrete Stresses at Transfor I
of Prestress
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prestrcssed Concrete
Flexural Members 424.5.3. t Calculated extreme concrete Iiber stress Ill
compression immediately after transfer of prestress, but I
424.5.1 General before time-dependent prestress losses, shall not exceed I
the limits in Tahlc 424.5.3.1.

424.5.1.l Concrete stresses in prestresscd llexural
members shall be limited in accordance with Section Table 424.5.3.1
424.5.2 through 424.5.4 unless it is shown by test or Concrete Compressive Stress Li mits
analysis that performance will not be impaired. Immediately After Transfer of Prcstress
424.5.1.2 For calculation of stresses at transfer of Con crete

prestress, at service loads, and at cracking loads, elastic Location Compressivc Stress
theory shall be used with assumptions (a) and (b): u mits
End of simply-supported
a. Strains vary linearly with distance from neutral axis members
0.7 or;i
in accordance with Section 422.2.1;
All other locations O.ti Of);
b. At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
424.S.3.2 Calculated extreme concrete fiber stress in
424.5.2 Classification of Prestressed Flexural tension immediately after transfer of presh·css, but before
Members time-dependent prestress losses, shall not exceed the
limits in Table 424.5.3.2, unless permitted by Section
424.5.2.1 Prestressed flexural members shall be 424.5.3.2.1.
classified as Class U, T, or C in accordance with Table
424.5.2.1, based on the extreme fiber stress in tension f c
in the precompressed tensile zone calculated at service
loads assuming an uncracked section.
Association cf Stwcturnl Enyinc~rs of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEPl
l
-
I
I
I
CHAPTER .-i - Structural Concrnle 4-'IG1
!
I
Table 424.5.3.2 SECTION 425

Concrete Tensile Stress Limits Immediately After
Transfer of Prestress, Without REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
Additional Bonded Reinforcement in Tension Zone
425.1 Scope
Concrete
Loc:\tion Compressive Stress 425.1.1 This section shall apply to reinforcement details,
Limits including:
End of simply-supported
members o.sfo a. Minimum spacing;
/\ll other locations o.2sJt:i b. Standard hooks, seismic hooks, and crosslics;
424.5.3.2.l The limits in Table 424.5.3.2 shall be c. Development of reinforcement;

permitted to be exceeded where additional bonded
reinforcement in the tension zone resists the total tensile d. Splices;
force in the concrete calculated with the assumption or an
uncracked section. e. Hundled reinforcement;
424.5.4 Permissible Concrete Com1>ressive Stresses f. Transverse reinforcement;

at Service Loads
g. Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers.
424.5.4.1 For Class U and T members, the calculated
extreme concrete fiber stress in compression at service 425.1.2 The provisions or Section 425.9 shall apply to
loads, after allowance for all prestress losses, shall not anchorage zones for post-lensioned tendons.
exceed the limits in Table 424.5.4.1.
425.2 Minimum Spacin~ of Reinforcement
Tnhle 424.5.4. 1
Concrete Compressive Stress Limits at Service Loads
425.2.1 For parallel non-prestressed reinforcement in a
horizontal layer, clear spadng shall be at least the greatest
Concrete
of50 mm, db, and (4/3)dagg·
Location Compressive Stress
Limits
425.2.2 For parallel non-prestressed reinforcement
Prcstrcss plus sustained load 0.45/:i placed in two or-more horizonlal layers, reinforcement in
the upper layers shall be placed directly above
J>restress plus total load 0.60//1 reinforcement in the boltom layer wilh a dear spacing
hetween layers of at least 25 mm.
425.2.3 For longitudinal reinforcement in columns.,

pedestals, struts, and boundary elements in walls, clear
spacing between bars shall be at least the greatest of 40
mm, 1. Sdb, and ( 4/3)dugg·
Table 425.2.4
Minimum Center-to-Center Spacing of Pretensioned
Strnnds at Ends of Members
Nominal strand
{~, MPa Minimums
diameter, mm.
<28 All 4d
<12mm 4d
2: 28 12mm 45 mm
l5mm SO mm
11
National Slructurnl Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2016
- 1,
11
4. rn2 CH/\PTEH 4 - Structtirol Concreie
425.2.4 For pretensioned strands at ends of a member, 425.3.4 Seismic hooks used to anchor stirrups, tics,
minimum center-to-center spacings shall be the greater of hoops, and crossties shall be in accordance with (a) and
tf;e value in·Table 425.2.4, and [(4/3)da1:g + db]. (b):
425.2.5 Fur pretensioned wire at ends of a member, a. Minimum bend of 90 degrees for circular huups and
minimum center-to-center spacings shall be the greater of 135 degrees for all other hoops;
Sdb and [(4/3)dagg + db]·
b. Hook shall engage longitudinal reinforcement and the
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crosstics, extension shall project into the interior of the stirrup
and Minimum Inside Bend Diameters or hoop.
425.3. 1 Standard hooks for the development of 425.3.S Crossties shall be m accordance with (a)
deformed bars in tension shall conform to Table 425.3.1. through ( e ):
425.3.2 Minimum inside bend diameters for bars used a. Crosstie shall be continuous between ends;
as transverse reinforcement and standard hooks for bars
used to anchor stirrups, tics, hoops, and spirals shall b. There shall be a seismic hook at one end;
conform tu Table 425.3.2. Standard hooks shall enclose
longitudinal reinforcement. c. There shall be a standard hook at other end witJ1
minimum bend of90 degrees;
425.3.3 Minimum inside bend diameters for welded
wire reinforcement used as stirrups or ties shall not be less d. Hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars;
than 4db for defonned wire larger than 06 and 2db fur
all other wires. Bends with inside diameter of less than e. 90-degree hooks of two successive crossties engaging
Sdb shall not he less than 4db from nearest welded the same longitudinal bars shall he alternated end for
intersection. end, unless erosstics satisfy Section 418.6.4.3 or
425.7. 1.6.1.
Table 425.3.1
Standard Hook Geometry for Development of Deformed Bars in Tension
Type of standard Minimum inside Straight extension II I·

Bar size Type of standard hook
hook bend diameter mm. lcxt mm.
IO mm <f, through / Point e1wn1cn

w 1a de.-elOl)ed
25 mm<J,
6db
q, 90-cegnte
t>el1d
28 mm </> through
90-degree hook 36 mmtj>
8d11 12di,
Dlem11er
l.r,
40 mm</> and
58 mm</>
10di, ,,.
IO mm </) through '*
/Polntatv.tlldl
19 d!lvelcie)ed
25 mm</>
6db
I (4,
28 mm ip through Greater of
180-degree hook 8d11
36 mmtj> 4d 11 and 65 mm D1'1'fltNlr
40mm¢ and
58 mm</> 10d11 tdlt
Association of Structurnl Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASE:P)

CHAP"f Ef{ ,·J · Structuc<1I Conc;:\,te
Table 425.3.2
Minimum Inside Bend Diameters and Standard Hook Geometry foa· Stirrups, Ties, and Hoops
Minimum inside Straight extension

TyJ>e of Ill
Bar size bend diameter Type of standard hook
standard hook
mm. fext mm.
IO mm </> !11rough Greater of

16mm¢ 4db
46b and 75 mm
90-degree hook do
Diameter
20 mm </> through t..,,
6db 12dh
25 llllU </>
IO mn1 <j, through

16mm¢
135-dcgrcc hook Greater of
6db and 75 mm
20 mm </> through
25 mm</>
IO mm </> through
16 mm</> Greater of
180-degrcc hook
6dh and 65 mm
20 mm <j, through
25mm¢
(IJ A standard hook for stirrups, tics, and hoops includes the specific inside hend diameter and straight extension length. It shall be permitted lo use a longer
straight extension at the end of a hook. A long.:r extensinn shall not be considered lo increa~e the anchorage capacity of the hook.
425.4 Development of Reinforcement 425.4.2 Development of Deformed Bars and

Deformed Wires in Tension
425.4.1 General
425.4.2.1 Development length fd for deformed bars and
425.4.1.1 Calculated tension or compression m deformed wires in tension shall be the greater of (a) and
reinforcement at each section of a memher shall be (b):
developed on each side of that section by cmhedment
length, hook_, headed defonncd bar, mechanical device, or a. Length calculated in accordance with Section
a combination lhercof. 425.4.2.2 or 425.4.2.3 using lhe applicable
modification factors of Section 425.4.2.4;
425.4.1.2 Hooks and heads shall not be used to develop
bars in compression. b. 300 mm.
425.4.t.3 Development lengths do not require a strength 425.4.2.2 For deformed bars or deformed wires, ld shall
reduction factor q,. be calculated in accordance with Table 425.4.2.2.
425.4.1.4 The values of !fc used lo calculate

development lenglh shall not exceed 8.3 MPa.
Mational Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 2016
-
4- l (,,! C;t·llW Ill; ,1 ·· i;1r1:ctural Concrn!c
Table 425.4.2.2
Development Length for Deformed Bars and J>cformcd Wires in Tension
20 mm (/> and smaller bars

Spacing and cover 25 mm (/> and larger bars
and deformed wires
Clear spacing of bars or wires being developed or lap spliced
not less than db, clear cover at least db, and stirrups or tics
throughout db not less than the Code rninimum,
or
Clear spacing or bars or wires being developed or lap spliced
at least Zd and clear cover at least d
Other cases
425.4.2.3 For deformed bars or deformed wires, id shall

be calculated hy:
Table 425.4.2.4
Modification •·nctors for Development of
(425.4.2.3a) Deformed Bars and Deformed Wires in Tension
Modilicntion Value of
Condition
factor factor
111 which the confinement term (ch+ Krr)/dh shall not I .i!!htwei11.ht concrete 0.75
exceed 2.5, and In
Lightweight Lightweight concrete,
accordance
,l where f ct is spe1:i lied
with Section 419.2.4.3
40Atr Normal-wei~hl 1:uncrele 1.0
Kii- =--- ( 425.4.2.3b) Epoxy-coated or .cine and
sn epoxy dual-coated
reinforcement with
1.5
whcrcn is the number of bars or wires being developed or clear cover less than 3d1,
lap spliced along the plane or splilling. IL shall be or ekar spacing less than
6d,
permitted to use Ktr = 0 as a design simpli!ication even Epoxy" 1
EpoxY.,-coated or 7.inc and
if transverse reinforcement is present.
"'· epoxy dual-coated
reinforcement for a II
1.2
425.4.2.4 For the calculation of fd, modification factors other conditions

Uncoated or 7.inc-coatecl
shall be in accordance with Tahlc 425.4.2.4. (galvani,cd) 1.0
425.4.3 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension rci11forccment
25 mm <band lamer bars 1.0
Si,c
425.4.3. t Development length f dh for <lclonncd bars in 20 mm <f, and smaller
Y's O.ll
bars and deformed wires
tension terminating in a standard hook shall be the greater
More than 300 mm. of
of(a) through (c): Casting fresh concrete placed
1.3
position1' 1 below horizontal
a.
( 4. tn.ffc b
r)
f y'P /P /I' d with 'I' e• 'Pe, 'I',., and .i!. given in
Section 425.4.3.2;
'I', reinforcement
Other 1.0
'.II Thcpn.1clud 1','l'c- 11ccd 1u,lex1.:ec<l
1 l. 7.
425.4.3.2 For the calculation of t,,h, modification

factors shall be in accordance with Tahle 425.4.3.2.
Factors 'I'c and 'I'r shall be permitted to he taken as 1.0.
c. 150 mm. At discontinuous ends of members Section 425.4.3.3 shall
apply.
Assoc.:iotion or Structural Engineers of tile ~"}hihppines, lne;. {ASE:P)
-
4-'165
Table 425.4.3.2 425.4.4 Development of Headed Deformed Bars in

Modification Factors for Development Tension
of Hooked Bars in Tension
425.4.4.1 Use of heads to develop deformed bars in
Modification Value of tension shall be permitted ii' condilions (a) through (g) are
Condition fador
factor satisfied:
Liehtwei1.thl concrete 0.75
In
Lightweight Lightweight concrete, aceonJancc a. Bar shall conform to Section 420.2.1.3;
,l where fct is specified with Section 419.2.4.J
Normal-wei11ht concrete 1.0 b. Barfy shall not exceed 420 KPa;
Epoxy-coated or .. inc and
epoxy dual-coated l.2
c. Bar size shall not exceed 36 mm (/, bar;
Epoxy reinforcement
"'· U11coatcd or zinc-coated

(ga Ivan ize<l) 1.0 d. Net bearing area of head Abrg shall he at least 4Ab;
reinforcement
For 36 mm</> har and e. Concrete shall be normal-weight;
smaller hooks with side
cover (normal to plane of'
Cover hook) > 65 mm. ant.I for 0.7 f. Clear cover for bar shall be at lcasl 2db;
'I'< 90-t.lcgrce hook with
cover Oil bar extension g. Clear spacing between bars shall he at least 4db.
bevond hook >: SO mm.
Other 1.0
For 90-<legrec hooks of' 425.4.4.2 Development length fdc for headed deformed
36 mm </> and smaller bars in tension shall be the greatest of(a) through (c):
bars
I. enclosed a long t dh
within ties or a.
with V'e, given in
stirrups111
perpendicular lo t.,h
Confining
rcinforcement121
al s :5 3dbor O.R Section 425.4.4.3 and value of f~ shall not exceed
2. enclosed along the bar
40 MPa;
"'· extension beyond
hook includi!lg the
bend within ties or
stil'rups[II
perpendicular to .f.,.,,
atS < 3dh
Other 1.0 c. 150 mm.
111Thc firsl 1ie or Mirrup shuU ~11clos.c the b1;nl r,or1io1\ of1h,· h1Jnk. \\'ilhin 2tl11 ofthL· out~idc of
lh~beml.
425.4.4.3 Modification factor q,e in Section 425.4.4.2(a)

shall be J.2 for epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual-
coated bars and 1.0 for uncoated or :line-coated
425.4.3.3 For bars being developed by a slandard hook (galvanized) bars.
at discontinuous ends of members with both side cover
and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 65mm, (a) 425.4.S Development of Mechanically Anchored
through (c) shall be satisfied: Deformed Bars in Tension
a. The hook shall be enclosed along ldh within tics or 425.4.5.1 Any mechanical attachment or device capable
stirrupsperpendicular to l\11i at s 5 3db; of developing f y of dcfonned bars shall be permitted,
provided it is approved hy the building official in
b. The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion accordance with Section 401. IO. Ocvclopment of
of the hook within 2db of the outside of the bend; deformed bars shall be permitted to consist of a
combination of mechanical anchorage plus additional
c. q,r shall be taken as 1.0 in calculating l d.h m embedment length of the deformed bars between the
accordam;c with Seclion 425.4.3. l(a). critical section and the mechanical attachment or device.
where dh is the nominal diameler of the hooked bar.
National S\ruc,ural Code or U1e Philippines Voiurne I. 7th Er.fition, 2016

4- 166 CHAPTER 4 -- Strncturnl Co11cn,1te
425.4.6 Development of Welded Deformed Wire section to the outermost crosswire shall be lhe greater of
,,- Reinforcement in T ension (a) and (b) and shall require a minimum of two cross
w ires within ld-
425.4.6.J Development length id for welded deformed
wire reinforcement in tension measured from the critical a. Length calculated in accordance with Section
section to the end of w ire shall be the greater of (a) and 425.4.7.2;
( b), where wires in the direction of the development
length shall all be deformed M0 200 or smaIJer. b. 150 mm.
a. Length calculated in accordance with Section 425.4.7.2 f d shall be the greater of(a) and (b):
425.4.6.2;
a. s pacing o f cross wires +50 mm;
b. 200 mm.
425.4.6.2 For welded deformed wire reinforcement, f d

shall be calculated from Section 425.4.2.2 or 425 .4 .2.3,
b. 3. 3 C/JrJ (A: ), wheres is the spac ing between
the wires to be developed, and ,l is given in Table

times welded deformed wire reinforcement factor 'P w
425.4.2.4.
from Section 425.4.6.3 or 425.4.6.4. For epoxy-coated
welded defor med wire reinforcement meeting Section
425.4.8 Development of Pretensioned Seven-Wire
425 .4.6.3, it shall be permitted to use 'Pe = 1. 0 111
Section 425.4.2.2 or 425.4.2.3 .
Strands in Tension
425.4.8.1 Development. length fd of pretensioned

425.4.6.3 Fur welded defonned wire reinforcement with
seven-wire strands in tension shall be in accordance with
at least one cross wire with in f d that is at least 50 mm.
(a) and (b) :
fro m the critical section, 'I'w s hall be the greater of (a)
and (h), and need not exceed 1.0:
a. f
d
= ('21se) d b + ('
.
ps -7 f se)d b (425.4.8. 1)
a. (fy ~:40) b. lf honding of a s trand does not extend to end of

member, and design includes tension al service loads
b. c:b) in the pre-compressed tensile :t.one, f d calculated hy

Eq. 425.4.8 .l shall be doubled.
wheres is the spacing between the wires to be developed. 425.4.8.2 Seven-wire strand shall be bonded at least
f" he yond the critical section except as provided in
425.4.6.4 For welded deformed wire reinforcemenl Section 425.4.8.3.
with no cross wires within Id or with a i.1 ngle cross wire
less than 50 mm from the critical section, 'P w shall he 425.4.8.3 Embedment less than fd shall be pcnnitted
taken as 1.0. at a section of a member provided the design strand stress
at that se<-1 ion docs not exceed values obtained from the
425.4.6.5 Where any plain wires, or deformed wires bilinear relationship defined by Eq. 425.4.8.1.
larger than MD200, arc present in the welded deformed
wire reinforcement in the direction of the development 425.4.9 Dt!velopment of Deformed Bars and
length, the reinforcement shall be developed in Deformed Wires in Compression
accordance with Section 425.4. 7.
425.4.9.1 Development length fdc for deformed bars
425.4.6.6 Zinc-coated (galvanized) welded defonned and deformed wires in compression shall be the greater of
wire reinforcement shall be developed in accordance with (a) and (b)
Section 425.4.7.
a. Length calculated in accordance with Section
425.4.7 Development of Welded Plain Wire 425.4.9.2;
Reinforcement in Tension
b. 200 mm.
425.4.7.J Development length fd for welded plain
wire reinforcement in tension measured from the critical
Associatton of Structural Engine ers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

11 li.i/
425.4.9.2 fdcshall he the greater of (a) and (h), b. At other locations where anchorage or development
multiplied hy the modification factors of Section l'ur f y is required;
425.4.9.3:
c. Where ban; arc required to he continuous:
0.24{/I',.)
a. ( - ;.ftc
- - - db
d. For headed and mechanically anchored defonm:d
reinforcement;
c. In seismic-force-resisting systems m structures

assigned to Seismic zone 4.
425.4.9.3 for the calculation oftde, modification factors

425.5 Splices
shall be in accordance with Table 425.4.9.3, except 'I',.
shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.
425.5.1 General
'fable 425.4.9.3
425.5.1.l Lap splices shall not he permitted for hars
Modification Factors for Deformed Bars
larger than 36 mm <J>, except as provided in Section
and Wires in Compression
425.5.5.3.
-Modificittion
- - Condition
- - Value of
-
factor factor 425.5.1.2 For contact lap splices, minimum clear spacing
Lil!.htwcight concrete 0.75 between the contact lap splice and adjacent splices or bars
Lightweight In accordance shall be in accordance with the requirements for
Lightweight concreLc, if/,, with Section
; is spcci lied individual hars in Section 425.2.1.
419.2.4.3
Nonnal-wcight concrcLc 1.0
Reinforcement enclosed within 425.5.1.3 For non-contact splices in flexural members,
(I), (2), (3) or (4): the transverse center-to-center spacing of spliced hars
I. a spirnl shall not exceed the lesser of one-fifth the required lap
2. a circular continuousty wound splice length and 150 mm.
tie with d1, 2: 6 mm in. and
Confining pi Leh ~ I00 mm
3. 6 mm qi bar or MD130 wire 0.75 425.S.1.4 Reduction of development length m
reinforcement
ljlT Lies in accor<lanct: with Seclion accordance with Section 425.4. I 0.1 is not permitted in
425.7.2 spaced< 100 nun on calculating lap splice lengths.
center
4. hoops in accordance with
Section 425.7.4 spaced ~ 100
425.5.1.5 Lap splices or bundled bars shall be 111
1nm 011 center accordance.: with Section 425.6.1.7.
Other 1.0
425.5.2 Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars and
425.4. 10 Reduction of Development Length for Deformed Wires in Tension
Excess Reinforcement
425.5.2.1 Tension lap splice length .fst for deformed
425.4.10.1 Reduction of development lengths defined bars and deformed wires in tension shall he in accordance
in Sections 425.4.2.1 (a), 425.4.3. l(a), 425.4.6. l(a), with Table 425.5.2.1, where fd shall he in accordance
425.4.7. l(a), and 425.4.9.J(a) shall be permitted by use or with Section 425.4.2.1 (a).
the ratio (As,pi·ovidedl As,required), except where
prohibited by Section 425.4.10.2. The modi lied
development lengths shall not be less than the respective
m1111mums specified in Sections 425.4.2.1 (b ),
425.4.3.l(b), 425.4.3.J(c), 425.4.6.I(b), 425.4.7.l(b), and
425.4.9.1 (h).
425.4.10.2 A reduction of development length in

accordam;c with Section 425.4.10. I is not permitted for
(a) through (e).
a. At the face of a non-continuous support;
N<1tionc1! structural Coclt~ ol the Philippines Volume 1, 7th Edi!iori, 2010
-
Table 425.S.2.l
Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wires in Tension
111 Maximum percent of

As,provldt!df As,re,1ulred As spliced within required Splice Type fst
over length of splice la lenoth
50 Class A Greater of: 1.0.f an<l 300 mm
2:2.0 Class B Greater of:
100 1.Jfd and 300 mm
<2.0 All cases Class O
1,1 Ratio of area ofreinforccment provided to area orrcinforce1nent rct1<1ircd by analysis at splice location.
425.5.2.2 If hars of different size arc lap spliced in where s is the spacing of cross wires and t,, is calculated
tension, l 51 shall be the greater or
f,t of the larger bar in accordance with Section 425.4.7.2(h).
and
t 91 of the smaller bar. 425.5.4.2 If As.provided/ As.re,iuired 2'.: 2. 0 over the
length of the splice, l.rr measured between outermost
425.5.3 Lap splice lengths of welded deformed wire cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall he permitted
reinforcement in tension to he the greater of (a) and (h ).
425.5.3.1 Tension lap splice length fsc of wc.:lded

deformed wire reinforcement in tension with cross wires
within the lap splice length shall be the greater of 1.3fd b. 50 mm.
and 200 mm, where ld is calculated in accordance with
Section 425.4.6.l(a), provided (a) and (b) are satisfied: where fu is calculated hy Section 425.4.7.2(b).
a. Overlap between oulennost cross wires or each 425.5.5 Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars in
reinforcement sheet shall he al least 50 mm; Compression
b. Wires in the direction of the development length shall 425.5.5.1 Compression lap splice length lsc 36 or
all he deformed MD200 or smaller in accordance mm <f, or smaller deformed bars in compression shall he
with Section 425.5.2. calculated in accordance with (a) or (b):
425.5.3.1.2 If Section 425.5.3.l(b} is not satisfied, fsc a. For {y ~ 420 MPa: l.rc is the greater of 0. 071{ ydb
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 425.5.4. and 300mm;
425.5.3.1.3 If the welded deformed wire reinforcement b. For f y > 420 MPa: lsc is the greater of
is zinc-coated (galvanized), fsc shall he calculated in (0.13{y - 24)db and 300 mm.
For/~ < 21 MPa, the length of lap shall be increased hy
425.5.4 Lap Splice Lcn~ths of Welded Plain Wire
one-third.
Reinforcement in Tension
425.5.5.2 Compression lap splices shall not be used
425.5.4.1 Tension lap splice length l st of welded plain
for hars larger than 36 mm q,, except as penniued in
wire reinforcement in tension between outermost cross
Section 425.5.5.3.
wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be al least the
greatest of(a) through (c):
425.5.5.3 Compression lap splices or 40 mm or 58
mm bars to 36 mm q, or smaller bars shall he permitted
a. s + SO mm; and shall be in accordance with Section 425.5.5.4.
425.5.5.4 Where bars of difforent size are lap spliced

in compression, fsc shall be the greater or tac of larger
c. 150 mm. bar calculated in accordance with Section 425.4.9. I and
.t\sso<::iation or StruGtural Engineers of t11e Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

f,c or smaller bar calculated ill accordance with Section 425.6.t.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated
425.5,5.1 as appropriate. within the span of flexural members shall terminate at
different points with at least. 40db stagger.
425.5.6 End-Bearing Splices of Deformed Bars in
Compression 425.6.t.S Development length for individual bars
within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that
425.5.6.1 For hars required for compression only, of the individual bar, increased 20 percent for a three-bar
transmission of compressive stress by end bearing of bundle, and 33 percent for a four-bar bundle.
square-cut ends held in concentric contact by a suitable
device shall be permitted. 425.6.1.6 A unit of bundled bars shall he treated as a
single bar with an area equivalent to that of the bundle
425.5.6.2 End-bearing splices shall be permitted only and a centroid coinciding with that or the bundle. The
in members containing closed stirrups, ties, spirnls, or diameter of the equivalent bar shall be used for db in (a)
hoops. through (e):
425.5.6.3 Ilar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces a. Spacing limitations based on dh;
within 1.5 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bars
and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing at1er b. Cover requirements based on db;
assembly.
c. Spacing and cover values in Section 425.4.2.2;
425.5.7 Mechanical and Welded Splices of
Deformed Bnrs in Tension or Compression d. Confinement term in Section 425.4.2.3;
425.5.7.1 /\. mechanical or welded splice shall develop e. q., e factor in Section 425.4.2.4.
in tension or compression, as required, at least 1. 25{y or
the bar. 425.6.1. 7 Lap splices or bars in a bundle shall be
based on the lap splice lent,>th required for individual bars
425.5.7.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform to within the bundle, increased in accordance with Section
Section 426.6.4. 425.6.1.5. Individual bar splices within a bundle shall not
overlap. Entire bundles shall nol be lap spliced.
425.5.7.3 Mechanical or welded splices need not be
staggered except as required by Section 425.5.7.4. 425.6.2 Post-tensioning Ducts
425.5.7.4 Splices in tension tic members shall be mad1: 425.6.2.1 Bundling of post-tensioning ducts shall be
with a mechanical or welded splice in accordance with permitted if shown that concrete can be satisfactorily
Section 425.5. 7. I. Splices in adjacent bars shall be placed and if provision is made to prevent the pres tressing
staggered at least 750 mm. steel, when tensioned, from breaking through the duct.
425.6 Bundled Reinforcement 425.7 Transverse Reinforcement
425.6.1 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement 425.7.1 Stirrups
425.6.1.1 Groups or parallel reinforcing bars bundled 425.7.1.1 Stirrups shall extend as close to the
in contact to act as a unit shall he limited lo four in any compression and tension surfaces of the member as cover
one bundle. requirements and proximity of other reinforcement
permits and shall be anchored at both ends. Where used as
425.6.1.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within shear reinforcement, stirrups sh,tll extend a distance d
transverse reinforcement. Bundled bars in compression from extreme compression fiber.
members shall be enclosed by transverse reinforcement al
least 12 mm</> in size. 425.7.1.2 Between anchored ends, each bend in the
continuous portion of a single or multiple U-stirrup and
425.6.1.3 Bars larger than a 36 mm shall not be each bend in a closed stirrup shall enclose a longitudinal
bundled in beams. bar or strand.
l\laUonal Struc!um! Code of tlie Philipµines Volume I. 7th Edition, 2.0·15
-
4.·170 CHAPTER 4 .. StrL1ctural Concret~,
425.7.1.3 Anchorage of deformed bar and wire shall b. In accordance with Section 425.7.l.3(a) or (b) or
b_vin accord.uice with (a), (b), or (c): Section 425 .7.1.4, where the concrete s urrounding
the anchorage is restrained against spalling hy a
a. For 16 mm q, bar and MD200 wire, and ~mailer, and flange or slab or similar member.
for 20 mm cj, through 25 mm q, bars with f yt :5 280
MPa, a standard hook around longitudinal 425.7.1.6.l Stirrups used for torsion or integrity
reinforcement; rcinl'orcement shall be permitted to be made up of two
pieces of reinforcement: a single-U stirrup anchored
b. For 20 mm cj, through 25 mm q, bars with f yt > 280 according to Section 425.7. I .6(a) closed by a crosstie
MPa, a standard hook a round a long itudinal bar plus where the 90-dcgree hook of the crosstie shall be
an embcdment between mid-height of the member restrained against spalling by a flange or slab or similar
and the out,;idc end of the hook equal to or greater member.
than 0.17dbfyc/(1JTJ, with las given in Table
425.7.1.7 Except where used for torsion or integrity
425.4.3.2;
reinforceme nt, closed stirrups arc pem1itted to be made
using pairs of U-stirmps spliced to form a closed unit
c. ln joisl construction, for 12 mm cj, bar and MD J30 where lap lengths are at least 1.3id. In members with a
wire and smaller, a standard hook. total depth of at least 450 mm, such splices with Ab[yr :::;
40 kN per leg shall be considered adequate if stitTup legs
425.7.1.4 Anchorage of each leg of welded plain wire
extend tl1e full available depth uf member.
reinforcement formin g a single U-stirrup sha!l be in
425.7.2 Ties
a. Two lo ngitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm spacing
425.7.2.l Tics shall consist of a closed loop of deformed
along U1e member at the top of the U;
bar or dcfonned wire with spacing in accordance with (a)
and (b):
b. One longitudinal wi re localed no t more than d / 4
fro m the compression face and a second wi re closer
a. Clear spacing of at least ( 4 /3)dagg;
to the compression face and spaced not less than 50
mm from the firsl w ire. The second wire shall be
permitted to be located on the stirrup leg beyond a h. Center-to-center spacing shall not exceed the least of
bend, o r on a bend with an inside diameter of bend or 16db of longitudinal bar, 48db of tie bar, and
at least 8db.
smallest di mension of member.
425.7.1.5 Anchorage of each end ofa single leg sti rrup 425.7.2.2 D iameter oftie bar or wire shall be al least (a)
of welded wire reinforcement shall be wi th two or (b):
longitudinal wires at a minimum spacing of 50 mm with
(a) and (b): a. IO mm cj, enclosing 32 mm cj, or smaller longitudinal
bars;
a. Inner wi re at least the greater of d / 4 or 50 mm from
d/2 ; b. 12 mm cj, enclosing 36 mm <J> or larger longitudinal
bars or hundled longitudinal bars.
b. Outer longitudinal wire at tension face shall not be
farther from the face than the portion of primary 425.7.2.2.1 As an alternative to deformed bars,
flexural reinforcement closest to the face. deformed wi re or welded wire reinforcement of
equivalent area to that required in Section 425. 7.2.1 shall
425.7.1.6 Stirrups used for torsion or integrity he pennitted subject to the requirements of Table
reinforcement shall be closed stirnips perpendicular to the 420.2.2.4a.
axis of the member. Where welded wire reinforce ment is
used, tra nsverse wires shall he perpendicular to the axis of 425.7.2.3 Rectilinear ties s hall be arranged to satisfy (a)
the member. Such stirrups shall be anchored hy (a) o r (b): and (b):
a. Ends shall terminate with 135-degree standard hooks a. Every corner and alternate longitudinal bar shall have
around a longitud inal bar; lateral support provided by the corner of a tic with a n
included angle of not more than 135 degrees;

CHAPTER 4 ·· Structurol Concrete 4-1'/1
b. No unsupported bar shall be forther than 150 mm where the value offyt shall not be taken greater than 700
clear on each side along the tie from a laterally MPa.
supported bar.
425. 7.3.4 Spirals shall be anchored by 1-1 /2 extra turns
425.7.2.3.1 Anchorage of rectilinear ties shall be of spiral bar or wire at each end.
provided by standard hooks that conform to Section
425.3.2 and engage a longitudinal bar. A tie shall not be 425.7.3.5 Spirals are permitted to be spliced by (a) or
made up orintcrloeking headed deformed bars. (b):
425.7.2.4 Circular ties shall be penniued where a. Mechanical or welded spli<.:cs III accordance with
longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of a Section 425.5.7;
circle.
b. Lap splices in accordance with Section 425.7.3.6 for
425.7.2.4.1 Anchorage of individual circular lies shall f yt not exceeding 420 MPa.
he in accordance with (a) through (c):
425.7.3.6 Spiral lap splices shall be at least the greater or
a. Ends shall overlap by aL least 150 mm; 300 mm and the lap length in Table 425.7.3.6.
b. Ends shall tenninate with standard hooks in
Table 425.7.3.6
accordance with Section 425.3.2 that engage a Lap Length for Spiral Reinforcement
longitudinal bar;
Ends of Lap
c. Overlaps at ends of adjacent circular ties shall be Rcinforccrncnl Coating lapped spiral length
staggered around the perimeter enclosing the bar or wire mm.
Uncoated or
longitudinal bars. zinc-coated
Hook not
n:quired 48db
(galvanized)
425.7.2.5 Ties to resist torsion shall be perpendicular to Deformed bar Epoxy-coated Hook not
the axis oflhc member anchored by either (a) or (h): or ;,:inc and rcquiretl 72db
epoxy dual
a. Ends shall terminate with 135-degree standard hooks coated Stantlartl hook of
Section 425.3.i' 1 48d,,
or seismic hooks around a longitudinal har;
Uncoated Hook not
48db
rcq_uired
h. In accordance with Section 425.7.l.3(a) or (b) or
425.7.1.4, where the concrete surrounding the Deformed wire Hook not
anchorage is restrained against spalling. n:quired 72db
Epoxy-coated
Standartl hook of
425.7.3 Spirals Section 425.J.2'' 1 1Ud1,
Hook not
425.7.3.l Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced Uncoated or 72db
required
Plain bar zinc-coah:d
continuous bar or wire with clear spacing confom1ing to (galvanized) Standard hook of
(a) and (b): Section 425.3.21' I 48clb
Plain wire Hook 1101

a. At least the greater o1'25 mm and ( 4/3)dagg; U11coatcd 72d~
reg11ircd
Standard hook or
b. Not greater than 75 mm. 4Rdb
Section 425.3.2111
1•1 Hook!:: ~hell he einhedclt:d wilhin lh.c core <.-on fined by the spic~I.
425.7.3.2 For cast-in-place construction, spiral bar or
wire diameter shall be at least 10 mm.
425.7.4 Hoops
425.7.3.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio Ps shall
satisfy Eq. 425.7.3.3. 425.7.4.t Hoops shall consisl uf a closed tie or
continuously wound tie, which can consist of several
reinforcement elements each having seismic hooks at both
Ps ::2: 0. 45 ( -Ag - 1) -f~ (425.7.3.3) ends.
Ach fyt
-
4- 1n CHAPTER 4 - Strncturi.ll Concrete
425.7.4.2 Anchorage or the ends of the reinforcement 425.9.1.5 Stressing sequence shall be considered in the
chm1cnts tha._ comprise hoops shall be provided by design process and specified as req uired by Scclion
seismic hooks that conform to Sect ion 425.3.4 and engage 426.10.
a longitudinal bar. A closed tic shall not be made up of
interlocking headed deformed bars. 425.9.2 Required Stren~th
425.8 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers 425.9.2.1 Factored preslressing force at the anchorage
device shall exceed the least of (a) through (c), where 1.2
425.8.1 Ancho rages and couplers for tendons shall is the load factor from Section 405.3. 12:
develop at least 95 percent of f vu when tested in an
unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set.
425.8.2 Anchorages and couplers for bonded tendons

shall be located so that l 00 percent of f P" shall be
developed at critical sections a1ler the post-tensioned c. Maximum jacking force designated by the s upplier
reinforcement is bonded in the member. of anchorage devices mu ltiplied by 1.2.
425.8.3 In unbondcd construction suhj (,-ct to repetitive

loads, the possibility o f fatigue of prestressed 425.9.3 Local Zone
n.:inforccment in anchorages and couplers shall be
considered . 425.9.3.1 The design of local z.one in post-tensioned
anchorages shall meet the requ irements of (a), (h), or (c):
425.8.4 Couplers shall be placed at locations approved
by the licensed design professional and enclosed in a. Mono strand or single 16 mrn or smaller diameter har
housings long enough to permit necessary movements. anchorage devices shall meet the bearing resistance
and local zone requirements of ACf 423.7;
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons
b. Basic mulli-s tnmd anchorage devices shall meet the
425.9.1 General bearing resistance requirements of At\SHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, /\rlicle 5. l 0.9.7.2,
425.9. 1.1 Anchorage regions of post-tensioned tendons except that the load factors s hall be in accordance
shall consist of two :.i:ones, (a) and (b): with Section 405.3.12 and <f, shall be in accordance
with Section 421.?. I;
a. The local 7.onc shall be assumed to be a rectangular
prism (or equivalent reclangular prism for circular or c. Special anchorage devices shall satisfy the tests
oval anchorages) of concrete immediately required in AASI ITO LRFD Bridge Design
surrounding the anchorage device and any confining Specilications, Article 5. 10.9.7.3. and described in
reinforcement; AASI ITO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications,
Article 10.3 .2.3.
b. The general zone includes the local zone and shall be
assumed to be the portion of the member through 425.9.3.2 Where special anchorage devices are used,
wh ich the concentrated preslressing force is supplementary s kin reinforcement s hall be provided in
transferred to the concrete and distributed more addition Lo the confining reinforcement specified for the
uniformly across the section. anchorage device.
425.9. l .2 The local 7.one shall be designed in accordance 425.9.3.2.1 Supplementary skin reinforcement shall be
with Section 425.9.3. similar in configuration and at least equivalent in
volumetric ratio to any supplementary skin reinforcement
425.9.1.3 The general. zone shall be designed m used in the qualifying acceptance tests of the anchorage
accordance with Section 425.9.4. device.
425.9.1.4 Compressive strength of concrete required at 425.9.4 General Zouc

time of post-tensioning shall be specified as required by
Section 426. l O 425.9.4.1 The extent of the general :.i:one is equal lo the
largest dimension of the cross section. Jn the case of slabs
with anchorages or groups of anchorages spaced along the
Association of Structural Enqineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPn=.H 4 - Structural ConcrG!e ~-173
slab edge, the depth of the general zone shall be taken as 425.9.4.3.3 Three-dimensional effects shall be
the SPJ Cing of Lhe tendons. considered in design and analyzed by (a) or (b):
425.9.4.2 For anchorage devices located away from a. Three-dimensional analysis procedures;
the end or a member, the general zone shall include the
disturbed regions ahead of and behind the anchorage b. Approximated by considering the summation of
devices. effects for two orthogonal planes.
425.9.4.3 Analysis of General Zones 425.9.4.4 Reinforcement Limits
425.9.4.3.1 Methods (a) through (c) shall be permiued 425.9.4.4.1 Tensile strength of concrete shall be
for design of general zones: neglected in calculations of reinforcement requirements.
a. Strut-and-tie models in accordance with Section 423; 425.9.4.4.2 Reinforcement shall be provided in the
general zone to resist bursting, spalling, and longitudinal
b. Linear stress analysis, including finite clement edge tension forces induced by anchorage devices, as
analysis or c4uivalent; applicable. Effects of abrupt changes in section and
stressing sequence shall be considered.
c. Simplified e4uations in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications, Article 5.10.9.6, except where 425.9.4.4.3 Fur anchorage devices located away from the
restricted by Section 425.9.4.3.2. end of the member, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided to transfer at least 0. 35Ppu into the concrete
The design of general zones by other methods shall be section behind the anchor. Such reinforcement shall be
permitted, provided that the specific procedures used for placed symmetrically around the anchorage device and
design result in prediction of strength in substantial shall be fully developed both behind and ahead of the
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. anchorage device.
425.9.4.3.2 Simplified equations as permitted by Section 425.9.4.4.4 If tendons are curved in the general zone,
425.9.4.3.l(e) shall not be used where (a), (b), (c), (d), bonded reinforcement shall be provided to resist radial
(e), ( 1), or (g) occur: and splitting forces, except for monostrand tendons in
slabs or where analysis shows reinforcement is not
a. Member cross sections arc non-rectangular; required.
b. Discontinuities in or near the general zone cause 425.9.4.4.5 Reinforcement with a nominal tensile
deviations in the force flow path; strength equal to 2 percent of the factored prestressing
force shall be provided in 011hogonal din:ctions parallel to
c. Minimum edge distance is less than 1.5 times the the loaded face of the anchorage zone to limit spalling,
anchorage device lateral dimension in that direction; except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis
shows reinforcement is not required.
d. Mulliplc anchorage devices are used in other than
one closely spaced group; 425.9.4.4.6 For monostrand anchorage devices for 12
mm. or smaller diameter st.rands in nonnal-weight
e. Centroid of the tendons is located outside the kern; concrete slabs, reinforcement satisfying (a) and (b) shall
be provided in the general zone, unless a detailed analysis
f. Angle of inclination of the tendon in the general zone in accordance with Section 425.9.4.3 shows that this
is less than -5 degrees from Lhc centerline of axis of reinforcement is not required:
the member, where the angle is negative if the anchor
force points away from the centroid of the section; a. Two horizontal bars at least 12 mm q, in size shall be
provided parallel to the slab edge. They shall be
g. Angle of inc Ii nation of the tendon in the general zone permitted to be in contact with the front face of the
is greater than +20 degrees from the centerline of axis anchorage device and shall be within a distance of
of the member, where the angle is positive if the ahead of each device. Those bars shall extend at least
anchor force points towards the centroid of the 150 mm. either side of the outer edges of each
section. device;
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 20·15
- '
4- 174 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concre\t)
b. If the ccnter-to-cenler spacing or anchorage devices b. Prcstressing reinforcement is stressed to no more than
., is 300 mm or less, the anchorage devices shall be 50 percent ofthc final prestressing force .
considered as a group. For each group of six or more
anchorage devices, tt + 1 hairpin bars or closed 425.9.5 Reinforcement Detailing
stirrups at least IO mm <f> in size shall be provided,
where n is the number of anchorage devices. One 425.9.S.l Selection of reinforcement size, spacing,
hairpin bnr or stirrup shall be placed between each cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall make
anchorage device nnd one on each side or the group. allowance~ for tolerances on fabrication anti placement or
The hairpin bars or st1rrnps sholl be placed with lhc reinforcement; for the si?.e of aggregate; and for adequate
legs extending into the slab perpendicular to the edge. placement and consolidation of the concrete.
The center portion of the hairpin bars or stirrups shall
be placed perpendiculur to the plane of the slab rrom
3 /t/8 to h /2 ahead of the anchorage devices.
425.9.4.5 Limiting Stresses in General Zones
425.9.4.5.1 Maximum design tensile stress in

reinforcement at nominal strength shall not exceed the
limits in Table 425.9.4.5.1.
Table 425.9.4.S.1
Maximum Design Tensile Stress in Reinforcement
Maximum design tensile

Type of reinforcement
stress
Non-prcstresscd
[y
reinforcement
Bonded, prestrcssed
{py
reinforcement
Unhonded, prestressed
re inforce ment
fse + 70
425.9.4.5.2 Compressive stress in concrete at nominal

strength shall not exceed 0. 7 Af~,, where A is defined in
Section 419.2.4.
425.9.4.S.3 Tf concrete is confined by spirals or hoops

and the effect of confining reinforcement is documented
by lests and analysis, it shall be pcnnitted to use an
increased value of compressive stn..-ss in concrete when
calculating the nominal strength orthe general zone.
425.9.4.S.4 Prestrcssing reinforcement shall not be

slresscd until compressive strength of concrete, as
indicated by tests of cylinders cured in a manner
consistent with curing of the member, is at least 17 MPa
for single-strand or bar tendons or at least 28 MPa for
multistrand te ndons unless Section 425.9 .4.5.5 1s
satisfied.
425.9.4.5.S Provisions of Section 425 .9.4.5.4 need not

be satisfied if (a) or (b) is satisfi ed:
a. Oversized anchorage devices arc used to compensate

for a lower concrete compressive strength;
Association of Structural Engineers of tho Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

I,
CHAVfU~ 4 ... Stn1,:t11ral Cr!n<;rHte t11n,

I
I
SECTION 426 Table 426.4. l.1.l (a)
Specifications fo1· Ctmcntitious Materials
)' CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AND INSPECTION Cemcntitious
Specification
Material
426.l Scope Portland cement ASTMCl50M I
ASTM C595M, I
Blended hydraulic
426.LI This section addresses (a) through (c): excluding Type [S(~ 70) and I
cements
T e ITS :2:: 70)
a. Design information that !he licensed design Expansive
ASTM C845M
professional shall specify m the construction hydraulic cement
documents, if applicable; Hydraulic cement /\STM Cl 157M
Fly ash an<l natural
ASTM C618
h. Compliance requirements that the licensed design ozzolan
professional shall specify in the construction Sia cement ASTMC989M I
documents, if applicable; Silica fume ASTM C\240
c. Inspection requirements that the licensed design h. All cementitious malcriab specified in Table
professional shall specify in the construction 426.4.1.1.1 ( a) and the combinations of these
documents, if applicable. materials shall be included in calculating the w/cm
of the concrete mixture.
426.2 Design Criteria 11
426.4. l.2 Aggregates

426.2.t Design Information:
426.4.1.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
a. Name and year of issue of the Code, general building
code, and any supplements governing design. a. Aggregates shall conform to (I) or (2):
I
h. Loads used in design. l. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33M;
c. Design work delegated to the contractor including 2. Lightweight aggregate: ASTM C330M.
applicable design criteria.
b. Aggregates ·not confonning to ASTM C33 M or
426.3 Member Information ASTM C330M are pennitled if they have been
shown by test or actual service to produce cone rete or
426.3.1 Design Information: adequate strength and durability and are approv cd hy
the building official.
a. Member size, location, and related tolerances.
426.4.t.3 Water
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixt.ure
Requirements 426.4.1.3.1 Compliance Requirements:
426.4.I Concrete Materials a. Mixing water shall conform lo ASTM CI602M ,
426.4.1.1 Cementitious Materials b. Mixing water, including that portion of mixing water
contributed in the form of free moisture on
426.4.1.1.1 Compliance Requirements: aggregates, shall not contain delete1ious amou nts of
chloride ion when used for prcstrcssed concre te, for
a. Ccmentitious materials shall confonn to the concrete that will contain aluminum embcdmc nts, or
specifications in Table 426.4.1.1.1 (a); for concrete cast against stay-in-place galvanized
steel forms.
National Structural Code of !he Philippines VolLrme I, 7th E<Jition. 2015
- , ..
4 -1"/fi C HAfl Tl:R 4 -· S lruc lw al Cr;ncrntt'·
426.4.l.4 Admixtures 3. Maximum wlcm applicable to most restrictive

•' assigned durability exposure class from Section
a. Admixtures shall conform to ( I) through (4): 419.3.2.1 ;
I. Water reduction and setting time modification: 4. Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate not
ASTMC494M ; to exceed the least of(a), (b), and (c):
2. Producing ilowing concrete: ASTM CI017M; a. 1/5 the narrowest dimension between sides
or forms;
3. Air entrainment: ASTM C260M;
b. 1/3 the depth of slabs;
4. Inhibiting chloride-induced corrosion: ASTM
C1 582M. c. 3/4 the minimum s pecified clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or wi res,
b. Admixtures that do not conform to the specilications bundles of bars, prcstres~ed reinforcement,
in Section 426.4.1.4.1 (,t) shall he subject Lo prior individual tendons, bundled tendons, or
review by the licensed design professional; ducts.
c. Calcium chloride or admixtures contai ning chloride These limitations s hall not apply ii; in the judgment of !he
from sources other than impurities in admixture licensed design professional, workability and methods of
ingredients shall not be used in prestresscd concrete, consolidation arc such that concrete can be placed without
in concrete containing embedded aluminum, or in honeycombs or voids.
concrete cast agai nst stay-in- place galvanized steel
forms; 5. For members assigned to Exposure Category F,
air content from Section 4 19.3.3.1 ;
d. Admixture~ used in concrete containing expansive
cements conforming to A8TM C845M s hall be 6. For members assigned to Exposure Class C,
compatible w ith the cement and produce no applicable chloride ion limits for assigned
deleterious effects. Exposure Class from 4 Section 4 19.3.2.1;
426.4.1.5 Steel Fiber Reinforcement 7. For members assigned to Exposure Category S,

type of cementitious materials for assigned
426.4.1.5.J Compliance Requirements: E xpos ure Class from 41 9.3.2. l;
a_ Steel fiber reinforcement used for shear resistance 8. For members assigned to Exposure Class S2 or
s hall satisfy (1) and (2): S3 , admixtures containing calcium chloride are
prohibited;
I. Be defonned and conform to ASTM A820M;
9. Equilibrium density of lightweight concrete;
2. Have a length-to-diameter ratio of at least 50 and
not exceeding lOO. I 0. Requirement for submittal of the volumetric
fractions of aggregate in lightweight concrete
426.4.2 Concrete Mixture Requirements mixtures for the verification of il value if used in
design;
426.4.2.1 Design Information:
11. If used for shear resistance in accordance with
a. Requirements (1) U1rough ( I 1) for each concrete Section 409.6.3. l , requirements for steel fiber
mixture, based on assigned exposure classes or reinforced concrete.
design of members:
b. At the option of the licensed dcsign professional,
1. Minimum specified compressive strength of exposure classes based on the severity of the
concrete, f~; anticipated exposure of members;
2. Test age for demonstrating compliance with f~ if c. The required compressive strength at designated
different from 28 days; stages of construction for each part of the structure
designed by the licensed design professional.
Association of Strudural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

!'
I
j .. J 7/
426.4.2.2 Compliance Requirements: Table 426.4.2.2(b)

Limits on Ccmcntitious Materials for Corn:rete
a. Ttie required compressive strength at designated Assigned to Exposure Class B
stages or construction for each part of the strncture
not designed by the licensed design professional shall Maximum percent
be submitted for review; of
Cementitious Materials
total ccmcntitious
b. The maximum percentage of pozzolans, including Jly materials hv mass
ash and silica fume, and slag cement in concrete Fly ash or other pozzolans
assigned to Exposure Class F3, shall be in accordance confonnin to ASTM C6 I 8
25
~-l-~~~~~~~--1
with Table 426.4.2.2(b) and (I) and (2). Slag cement conforming tu
50
/\STM C989M
I. The maximum percentage limits in Table Silica fume conforming tu
426.4.2.2(b) shall include the lly ash or other 10
ASTM Cl240
pozzulans, slag cement, and silica fume used in Tola l of fly ash or other
the manufacture of ASTM C595M and CI l 57M 35
ozzolans and silica fume
blended cements; Total of fly ash or ot11er
pozzolans, slag cement, and so
2. The individual limits in Table 426.4.2.2(b) shall silica fume
apply regardless of the number of cementitious
materials in a concrete mixture.
Table 426.4.2.2(c)
Requirements for F.stablishing Suitability of Combinations of
Cementitious Materials· Exposed to Water-Soluble Sulfate
IIJ The 12-monlh expansion limil applies only iflhe measured expansion exceeds the 6-monrh maximum expansion limit
c. For concrete exposed to sulfate, altemative I. Can be placed readily without segregation into
combinations of ccmcnlitious materials lu those forms and around reinforcement under
specified in Section 426.4.2.1 (a)(7) arc permitted anticipated placement conditions;
if tests for sulfate resistance satisfy the criteria in
Table 426.4.2.2(c). 2. Meets requirements for assigned exposure dass
in accordance with either Section 426.4.2.1 (a) or
d. Steel fiber-reinforced concrete used for shear 426.4.2.J(b);
resistance shall satisfy (1) and (2):
3. Conforms to strength test requirements for
l. Conform lo ASTM Cl 1 I 6M; standard-cured specimens.
2. Contain at least 60 kg of defonned steel b. Concrete mixture proportions shall be established in

fibers per cubic meter of concrete. accordance with Article 4.2.3 of ACI 30 IM or by an
alternative method acceptable to the licensed design
426.4.3 Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures professional. Alternative methods shall have a
probability of satisfying the strength requirements for
426.4.3.1 Compliance Requirements: acceptance tests of standard-cured specimens that
meets or exceeds the probability associated with the
,t. Concrete mixture proportions shall be established so method in Article 4.2.3 of ACI 30JM. If A1ticlc 4.2.3
that the concrete satisfies (1) through (3): of ACI 30 IM is used., the strength test records used
for establishing and documenting concrete mixture
proportions shall not be more than 24 months old;
National Structural Code of th~ PhilippinP-s Volume I, 7t11 Edition. 20i5
-
c. The concrete materials used to develop the concrete d. Ready-mixed and site- mixed concrete shall be
mixture proportions shall correspond to those to be hatched, mixed, and delivered in accordance with
used in the proposed Work; ASTM C94M or ASTM C685M.
d. If different concrete mixtures arc to he used for 426.S.2 Concrete Placement and Cousolidation
different portions of proposed Work, each mixture
shall comply with the concrete mixture requirements 426.5.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
stated in the construction documents.
a. Debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be
426.4.4 Documentation of Concrete Mixture occupied by concrete before placement;
Characteristics
b. Standing w,tter shall be removed from place of
426.4.4.l Compliance Requirements: deposit before concrete is placed unless a trcmie is to
he used or unless otherwise permilled by both the
a. Documentation of concrete mixture characteristics licensed design professional and the building official;
shall be submitted for review by the licensed design
professional before the mixture is used and before c. Masonry Jilter units that will be in contact with
making changes to mixtures already in use. Evidence concrete shall be pre-wetted prior to placing concrete;
of the ability or the proposed mixture to comply with
the concrete mixture requirements in the construction d. Equipment used to convey concrete from the mixer to
documents shall he included in the documentation. the location of final placement shall have capabilities
The evidence shall be based on field test records or to achieve the placement requirements;
laboratory trial batches. Field test records shall
represent conditions similar to those anticipated e. Concrete shall not be pumped through pipe made or
during the proposed Work; aluminum or aluminum alloys;
h. If field or laboratory test data arc not available, and [ Concrete shall be placed in accordance with (I)
f~ ::;; 35 MPa, concrete proportions shall be based on through (5):
other experience or information, if approved by the
licensed design professional. If /~ > 35 MPa, test 1. At a rate lo provide an adequate supply of
data documenting the characteristics of the proposed concrete at the location of placement;
mixtures are required;
2. At a rate so concrete al all times has suilicient
c. If data become available during construction that workability such that it can be consolidated by
consistently exceed the strength-test acceptance the intended methods;
criteria for standard-cured specimens, it shall be
permitted to modify mixture lo reduce the average 3. Without segregation or loss of materials;
strength. Submit evidence acceptable to the licensed
design professional to demonstrate that the modified 4. Wilhout interruptions sufficient to permit loss of
mix.lure will comply with the concrete mixture workability between successive placements that
requirements in the construction documents. would result in cold joints;
426.5 Concrete Production and Construction 5. Deposited as near to its final location as
practicable to avoid segregation due to
426.5.1 Concrete Production rchandling or flowing.
426.S.l.1 Compliance Requirements: g. Concrete that has been contaminated or has lost its
initial workability to the extent that it can no longer
a. Ccmentitious materials and aggregates shall be stored be consolidated by the intended method.s shall not be
to prevent deterioration or contamination; used;
h. Material that has deteriorated or has been h. Retempcring concrete in accordance with the limits
eonlaminatcd shall not be used in concrete; nf ASTM C94M shall be pennilted unless otherwise
restricted by the licensed design professional;
c. Equipment for mixing and transporting concrete shall
confonn to ASTM C94M or ASTM C685M;
Association of Structural Engineers of lhe Philippines, Inc (ASEP)

CH/\Vf'Ef~ 4 -- Slruci.ural C(111,:;rnt0 !)-1 i'C)
1. After starling, conrn.:ting shall be carried on as a at the same time and from the same samples as
continuous operation until the complcLion of a panel standard-cured cylinders;
or section, as defined by its boundaries or
predetermined joints; 2. Field-cured cylinders shall be cured in
accordance with the field curing rwcedure of
J· Concrete shall be consolidated hy suitable means ASTM C3 IM and tested in accordance wilh
during placement and shall be worked around ASTM C39M.
reinforcement and embe<lments and into corners of
forms; c. Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall
be considered adequate if (I) or (2) arc satisfied:
k. Top surfaces or vc11ically formed lifts shall be
generally level. I. Average strength of field-cured cylinders at test
age designated for detem1inatio11 of f~ is equal
426.5.3 Curing Concrett: to or at least 85 perccnl of that of companion
standard-cured cylinders;
426.5.3. t Design Information:
2. Average strength of field-cured cylinders at tesl
a. rr supplementary tests or field-cured specimens a1c age exceeds{;, by more than 3.5 MPa.
required to verify adequacy of curing and protection,
the number and size of test specimens and the 426.5.4 Concreting in Cold Weather
frequency of these supplementary tests.
426.5.3.2 Compliance Requirements:
426.5.4.1 (a) Temperature limits for concrete as
a. Concrete, other than high-early-strength, shall he delivered in cold weather.
maintained at a temperature or at least 10°C and in a
moist condition for at least the first 7 <lays after 426.5.4.2 Compliance Requirements:
placement, except if accelerated curing is used;
a. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating
b. High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained at a concrete materials and protecting concrete during
temperature of at least I 0°C and in a moist condition freezing or near-freezing weather;
for at least the first 3 days after placement, except if
accelerated curing is used; b. Frozen ma!erials or materials containing ice shall not
be used;
c. Accelerated curing to accelerate strength gain and
reduce time of curing is permitted using high c. Forms, fillers, and ground with which concrete is lo
pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat come in contact shall be free from frost an<l ice;
and moislurc, or other process acceplablc to the
licensed design professional. If accelerated curing is d. Concrete materials and production methods shall he
used, (I) and (2) shall apply: selected so that the concrete temperature at delivery
complies with the specified temperature limits.
I. Compressive strenb>th at the load stage
considered shall be at least the strength required 426.5.5 Concreting in Hot Weather
at that load stage.
2. Accelerated curing shall not impair the durability
or the concrete. 426.S.S.1 (a) Temperature limits for concrete as
delivered in hot weather.
d. Ir required hy the building official or licensed design
professional, results or tests of cylinders made and 426.5.5.2 Compliance Requirements:
cured in accordance with (I) and (2} shall be
provided in addition to results of standard-cured a. Concrete materials and production methods shall he
cylinder strength tests: selected so that the concrete temperature at delivery
complies with the specified temperature limits;
1. At least two 150 by 300 mm or at least three I 00
hy 200 mm field-cured cylinders shall be molded
National Siructurul Code oft.he Plliliµpines Volume I, 7th F:clilio11, 2015
...__
-
4- 180 CH.t\PTER I! · Structurd i'.:or11;retP.
b. Handling, placing, protection, and curing procedures c. Immediately before new concrete is placed,
shall limit concrete temperatures or water construction juinls shall be pre-wetted and standing
evaporation that could reduce strenglh, serviceability, water removed.
and durabilily of the member or structure.
426.5.7 Construction of Concrete Members
426.5.6 Construction, Contraction, and Isolation
Joints 426.5.7.1 Design Information:
426.5.6.1 Design Information: a. Details required to accommodate dimensional

changes resulting from prestressing, creep, shrinkage,
a. If required by the design, locations and details of and temperature;
construction, isolation, and contraction joints;
b. Identify if a slab-on-ground is designed as a
b. Details required for transfer of shear and other forces slructural diaphragm or part of' the seismic-force-
through construction joints; resisting system;
c. Surface preparation, including intentional roughening c. Details for constrnction of sloped or stepped footings
or hardened concrete surfaces where concrete is to be designed to act as a unit;
placed against previously hardened concrete;
d. Locations where slab and column concrete
d. Localions where shear is transferred between as- placcmcnls are required to be integrated during
rolled steel and concrete using headed sluds or placement in accordance with Section 415.3;
welded reinforcing bars requiring steel to he clean
and free of paint; c. Locations where steel fiber-reinforced concrete is
rc4uired for shear resistance in accordance with
e. Surface preparation including intentional roughening Section 409.6.3.1.
if composite topping slabs are to be cast in place on a
prccasl Jloor or roof intended to act structurally with 426.5.7.2 Compliance Requirements:
the precast members.
a. Reams, girders, or slahs supported by columns or
426.5.6.2 Compliance Requirements: walls shall nol be cast until concrete in the vertical
support members is no longer plastic;
a. Joint locations or joint details not shown or that differ
from those indicalc<l in construction documents shall b. Hearns, girders, haunches, drop panels, shear caps,
be submitted for review by the licensed design and capitals shall be placed monolithically as parl of
professional; a slab system, unless otherwise shown in construction
documents;
b. Except for prestressed com;rele, construction joints in
floor and roof systems shall be localed within the c. At locations where slab and column concrete
middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders placements arc required to be integrated during
unless otherwise approved by the licensed design placement, column concrete shall extend full slab
professional; depth at leasl 0.60 m into floor slab from face of
column and be integrated with floor concrete;
c. Conslruction Jomts in girders shall be offset a
distance of al least two times the width of intcrseeling d. Saw-cutting in slabs-on-ground idcnlilied in the
hcams, measured from lhe face of the intersecting construction documents as struclural diaphragms or
beam, unless otherwise approved by the licensed part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall not be
design professional; permitted unless specifically indicated or approved
hy the licensed design professional.
d. Surface of concrele construction JOmls shall he
intentionally roughened if specified. Olherwise,
construction joinls shall he cleaned and laitance
removed before new concrete is placed;
--
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction 426.6.2 Placement
Requirements
426.6.2.1 Design Information.
426.6.l General
a. Tolerances on location of reinforcement taking into
426.6.l.l Design Information consideration tolerances on d and specified concrete
cover in accordance with Table 426.6.2. I(a);
a. ASTM designation and grade of reinforcement; Table 426.6.2.l(a)
Tolerances on d and Specified Cover
b. Type, size, location requirements, detailing, and
embedment length of reinforcement; Tolerance
d, Tolerance on specified
on d)
mm. concrete cover, mm. 111
c. Concrete cover to reinforcement; mm.
-10
d. Location and length of lap splices; :S200 :!:10 Smaller or
* specified cover
e. Type and location of mechanical splices; -12
>200 ±12 Smaller or
* specified cover
f. Type and location of r.:nd-bcaring splices;
111 Tolerance for cover to fhrmc<l sollHs is -6 mm. I:
g. Type and location of welded splices and other
required welding of reinforcing bars; b. Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends
of reinforcement in accordance with Table
h. ASTM designation for protective coatings of non- 426.6.2. l(h). The tolerance for specified concrete
prestressed reinforcement; cover in Table 426.6.2.1 (a) shall also appl y at
discontinuous ends of members. I
i. Corrosion protection for exposed reinforcement

intended lo be bonded with extensions on future Table 426.6.2.l(b)
Work. Tolerances for I ,ongitudinnl Location of Bends
and Ends of Reinforcement 1,
426.6.1.2 Compliance Requirements
Tolera nces,
I ,ocation of bends 01· reinforcement ends
a. Mill test reports for reinforcement shall be submitted; mm .
Discontinuous ends of brackets and corbels ±1 2
b. Non-prestressed reinforcement with rust, mill scale, Discontinuous ends or other members :l:25
or a combination or both shall be considered Other locations ±5 0
satisfactory, provided a hand-wire-brushed
representative test specimen of the reinforcement 426.6.2.2 Compliance Requirements
complies with the applicable ASTM specification for I I
the minimum dimensions (including height of a. Reinforcement, including bundled bars, shaII he
dcfonnations) and weight per unit length; placed within required tolerances and supported to
prevent displacement beyond required tolerances
c. Prcstrcssing reinforcement shall be free of mill scale, during concrete placement; I:
pilling, and excessive rust. A light coating of rust I
shall be permitted; b. Spiral units shall he continuous bar or wire placed I
11:
with even spacing and without distortion beyot1d the
d. At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement to be tolerances f<>r the specified dimensions; I
, 1:
bonded shall be clean of mud, oil, or other deleterious
coatings that decrease bond. c. Splices of reinforcement shall be made on ly as I
I
pennitted in the construction documents, u r as
authorized by the licensed design professional; '
d. For longitudinal column bars fonning an endbearing

splice, !he bearing of square cut ends shall be h eld in
concentric contact;
Mational Structural Code of the Philippines Vo!ume I, 7ih Edition, 2015 I
-· ---~.
4-18?. C HAPlFR 4 - Slwciu1al Cc)ncrn\e
c. Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 1.5 e. For post-installed anchors, parameters associated
,, degrees of a righl angle to the axis of the bars and with the strength used for design, including anchor
shall be fitted within 3 degrees or full hearing after category, concrete strength, and aggregate type;
assembly.
f. For adhesive ancho rs, parameters associated with the
426.6.3 Bending characteristic bond stress used for design in
accordance with Section 4 17.4.5 includ ing minimum
426.6.3.1 Compliance Requirements age of concrete, concrete temperature range, moisture
condition of concrete at time or installation, type or
a. Reinforcement shall be bent cold prior to placement, lightweight concrete if applicable, and requirements
unless otherwise permiucd by the licensed design for hole drilling and preparation;
professional;
g. Qualification req uirements for installers or anchors in
b. Field bending of reinforcement partially embedded in acco rdance wi th Section 417 .8.1;
wncrete shall not he permitted, except as shown in
the construction documents or permitted by the h. Adhesive anchors installed in a horizontal or
licensed design professional; upwardl y inclined orientation, if they support
sustained tension loads;
c. Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the
forms. i. Required certifications for installers of adhesive
anchors that arc installed in a hori70ntal or upwardly
426.6.4 Welding inclined orientation to support sustained tension loads
in accordance with Sections 4 17.8.2.2 and 417.8.2.3;
426.6.4.1 Compliance Requirements.
j. For adhesive anchors, proof loading where required
a. Welding of all non-prestressed bars shall confonn to in accordance with Scclion 41 7.8.2. l;
the requirements of A WS DI .4M. ASTM
specifications for har reinforcement, except for k. Corrosion protection for exposed anchors intended
ASTM A706M, shall be supplemented to require a for attachment with future Work.
m ill test report of material properties that
demonstrate conformance to the requirements in 426.7.2 Compliance Requi r ements
AWS D l.4M;
a. Post-installed anch.ors shall be installed in accordance
b. Welding of crossing bars shall not be used for with the Manufacturer's Printed Inslallation
assembly of reinforcement unless permitted by the lnstruclions (MPII).
licensed design professional.
426.8 Embcd ntents
426.7 Anchoring to Concrete
426.8.1 Design Information:
426.7.1 Design Info rmation
a. Type, size, details, and location of ernbedmcnts
a. Requirements for assessment and qualification of designed by the licensed design professional;
anchors for the applicable conditions of use in
accordance wilh Section 417 .1 .3; b. Reinforcement required to be placed perpendicular to
pipe embedmcnls;
b. Type, size, location requirements, effective
cmbedment dcpU1, and installation requirements for c. Specified concrete cover for pipe embedmcnts with
anchors; their fittings;
c. M inimum edge distance of anchors in accordance d. Corrosion protection for exposed embedments
with Section 417.7; intended to be connected with future Work.
d. Inspection requirements in acco rdance with Section 426.8.2 Compliance Requirements:

426.13;
a. Type, size, details, and location of cmbedments not
shown in the construction documents shall be

Cl-i.l\PTH~ ,1 ··· ~-twctu, ,!I Concrete~
submitted for review by the licensed design strength, and stability until permanent connections
p~ofessional; are wmplctcd;
b. Aluminum embedmenli, shall be coated or covered to c. lf approved by the licensed design professional, items
prevent aluminum-concrete rc!lction and electrolytic embedded while the cuncrcte is in a plastic state shall
action between aluminum and steel; satisfy ( 1) through ( 4 ):
c. Pipes and fittings not shown in the construction I. Embedded items shall protrude from the prec.;ast
documents shall be designed to resist effects of the concrete members or remain exposed for
material, pressure, and temperature to which they will inspection;
be subjected;
2. Embedded items are not required to be hooked or
d. No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water not exceeding tied to reinforcement within the concrete;
32 °C or 0.35 MPa pressure, shall be placed in the
pipes until the concrete has attained its specified 3. Embedded items shall be maintained in the
strength; correct position while the concrete remains
plastic;
c. In sol id slabs, piping, except for radiant heating or
snow melting, shall be placed between top and 4. The concrete shall be consolidated around
bottom reinforcement; embedded items.
f. (',emduit and piping shall be fabricated and installed 426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed
so that cutting, bending, or displacement of Concrete
reinforcement from its specified location is not
required. 426.10.1 Design Information:
426.9 Additional Requirements for Preeast a. Magnitude and location ofprcstressing forces;
Concrete
b. Stressing sequence of tendons;
426.9.1 Design Information:
c. Type, size, details, and location of post-tensioning
a. Dimensional tolerances for prccast members and anchorages for systems selected by the licensed
interfacing members; design professional;
b. Details of lifting devices, cmbcdments, and related d. Tolerances for placement of tendons and post-
reinforcement required to resist temporary loads from tensioning ducts in accordance with Table
handling;, storage, transpmtation, and erec.;tion, if 426.6.2. l(a);
designed by the licensed design professional.
e. Materials and details of corrosion protection for
426.9.2 Compliance Requirements: unhonded tendons, external tendons, couplers, end
fittings, post-tensioning anchorages, and anchorage
a. Members shall be marked to indi cate locaLion and regions;
orientation in the structure and date of manufacture;
f. Requirements for ducts for bonded tendons;
b. Identification marks on members shall correspond to
erection drawings; g. Requirements for grouting of bonded tendons,
including maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cr)
c. Design and details of lifting devices, cmbedments, content requirements in Section 419.4. l.
and related reinforcement required to resist
temporary loads from handling, storage, 426.10.2 Compliance Requirement§:
transportation, and erection shall be provided ir not
designed by the licensed design professional; a. Type, size, details, and location of post-tensioning
anchorage systems not shown in the construction
d. During erection, precast members and structures s hall documents shall be submitted to the licensed design
be supported and braced lo ensure proper alignment, professional for review;
NB.tion;3I Structural Code of the Philippines \/olumr: I, 7th fdition, 2015
--
,J. Hltl CH/\.PTER 4 -- Struc.tur~: Concrete
b. Tendons and post-tensioning duct" shall be placed exception to these strength requirements is provided
within required tolerances and s upported to prevent in Section 426.10.2(k);
displacement beyond required tolerances during
concrete placement; k. Lower concrete compressive strength than requi red
by Section 426.1 0.2U) shall be permilled if ( 1) or (2)
c. Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the is satisfied:
licensed design professional and enclosed in housings
long enough to permit necessary movements; 1. Oversized anchorage devices are used lo
compensate for a lower concrete compressive
d. Burni ng or welding operalions in the vi<.:inity of strength;
prestressing reinforcement shall be performed in such
a manner that prestressing reinforcement is nol 2. Prestrcssing reinforcement is stres1ied to no more
s ubject to welding sparks, ground currents, or than 50 percent of the final prestressing force.
temperatures that degrade the properties of the
reinforcement; 426. t 1 F ormwork
c. Prestressing force and friction losses shall be verified 426.11. 1 Design of Formwork
by (I) and (2):
426.11. t .1 Design Information:
I. Measured elongation of prestresscd
reinforcement compared with elongation a. Requirement for the contractor to design, fabricate,
calculated using the modulus of elasticity install, and remove formwork;
determined from tests or as reported by the
manufacturer; b. Location of composite members requiring shoring;
2. Jacking force measured using calibrated c. Requirements for removal of shoring of composite
equipment such as a hydraulic pressure gauge, members.
load cell, or dynamometer.
426. t 1.1.2 Compliance Requirements:
f. The cause of any diffe rence in force dctennination
between (I) and (2) of Section 426.10.2(c) that a. Design offormwork shall consider (I) through (5):
exceeds 5 percent for pretensioned construction or 7
percent for pos t-tensioned construction shall be I.. Method of fon crcle placement;
ascertained and corrected, Lmlcss otherwise approved
by the licensed design professional; 2. Rate of concrete placement;
g. Loss of prestress force due to unreplaced broken 3. Construction loads, including vertical,
prestresscd reinforcement shall not exceed 2 percent; horizontal, and impact;
h. If the transfer of force from the anchorages of the 4. Avoidance of damage to previously constructed
pretensioning bed to the concrete is accomplished by members;
tlame cutting prestresscd reinforcement, the cutting
locations and cutting sequence shall be selected to 5. For post-tensioned members, allowance for
avoid undesired temporary stresses in pretensioned movement of the member during application of
members; the prestrcssing force without damage to the
member.
i. Long lengths of exposed p retensioned strand shall be
cut near the member to minimize shock to the b. Fonnwork fabrication and instailation shall result in a
concrete; final structure that conforms lo shapes, lines, and
dimensions of the members as required by the
j. Prcstressing reinforcement in post-tensioned construction documents;
construction shall not be stressed until the concrete
compressive strength is at least l 7 MPa for single- c:. Formwork shal1 be sufficiently tight to inhibit
strand or bar tendons, 28 MPa for multi-st rand leakage of paste or mortar;
tendons, or a higher strength, if required. An
Association of S tructur?.I Engineers t1f the Philippines. lne. (ASEP)

CHAPTFH 4 ·- Siructurnl Concr~,!.e -1-185
I
I
d. Formwork shall be braced or tied together to strength to support such additional loads and
m~intain position and shape. without impairing serviceability.
426.11.2 Removal of Formwork 426.12 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance
426.11.2.1 Compliance requirements: 426.12. t General
a. Before starting construclion, the contractor shall 426.12.1.1 Compliance Requirements:

develop a procedure and schedule for removal of
formwork and installation of rcshorcs, and shall a. A strenglh lest shall be the average of the strengths of
calculate the loads transferred to the structure during at leasl two 150x300 mm cylinders or al least three
this process; lOOx200 mm cylinders made from the same sample
of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age
h. Structural analysis and concrete strength designated for f~;
requirements used in planning and implementing the
formwork removal and reshore installalion shall he b. The testing agency performing acceptance testing
furnished hy the contractor to the licensed design shall comply with ASTM Cl077;
professional and, when requested, lo the building
otlicial; c. Qualified field tesling technicians shall perlorm lests
on fresh concrete at the job site, prepare specimens
c. No conslruction loads shall be placed on, nor any for standard curing, prepare specimens for field
fo1mwork removed from, any parl of the structure curing, if required, and record the temperature of the
under construction except when that portion of the fresh concrete when preparing specimens for strength
structure in combination wil11 remaining formwork tests;
has suilicicnl strength to support safely its weight
and loads placed thereon and wilhoul impairing d. Qualified laboratory technicians shall perform
serviceability; required laboralory tests;
d. Sufficienl strength shall be demonstrated by e. All reports of' acceptance tests shall be provided lo
structural analysis considering anticipaled loads, lhe licensed design professional, contractor, concrete
strength or formwork, and an estimate of in-place producer, and, if requested, to the owner and lhc
concrete strength; building official.
e. The estimate of in-place concrete strength shall be 426.12.2 Frequency of Testing

based on tesls or field-cured cylinders or on other
procedures to evaluate concrete strength approved by 426.12.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
the licensed design professional and, when requested,
approved by the building otlicial; a. Samples for preparing strength lest specimens of each
concrete mixture placed each day shall be taken in
[ Formwork shall be removed in such a manner not to accordance with (I) through (3 ):
impair safety and serviceability of the structure;
I. At least once a day;
g. Concrete exposed by formwork removal shall have
sufficient strength not to be damaged by the removal; 2. At least once for each 110 m3 of concrete;
h. formwork supports for post-tensioned members shall 3. At least once for each 460 m2·of surface area for
not be removed until sufficient post-tensioning has slabs or walls.
been applied to enable post-tensioned members to
support their dead load and anticipated construction b. On a given project, ii' lotal volume of concrete is such
loads: that frequency of testing would provide fewer than
live strength tests for a given concrete mixture,
i. No construction loads exceeding the strength tcsl specimens shall be made from at least
combinalion of superimposed dead load plus live five randomly selected batches or from each balch if
load including reduction shall be placed on any fewer than five balches arc used;
unshored portion of the structure under
construction, unless analysis indicates adequate
National St.ructural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th F..ditiori. 2015
- _.....
4- WG CHAPTEk 4 -- Structi;ral Cc111CH~tP.
c. If the total quantity of a given concrete mixture i!> below f~ by more than the limit allowed for
less than 38 m3, strength tests are not required if acceptance;
evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and
approved by the building official. c. Cores shall be obtained, moisture-conditioned by
storage in watertight bags or containers, transported
426.12.3 Acceptance Criteria for Standard- Cured to lhe testing agency, and tested in accordance with
Specimens ASTM C.:42. Cores shall he tested between 48 hours
and 7 days after coring unless otherwise approved by
426.12.3.1 C omp liance Requirements: the licensed design professional. The specifier or
tests referenced in ASTM C42M shall be the licensed
a. Specimens for acceptance tests shall be in accordance design professional;
with (I) and (2):
d. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be
I. Sampling of concrete for strength test specimens considered structurally adequate if ( l) and (2) arc
shall be in accordance with ASTM Cl 72M ; satisfied:
2. Cylinders for strength tests shall be made and I. The average of three cores is equal to al least 85
standard-cured in accordance with ASTM C3 IM percent of/~;
and tested in accordance with ASTM C39M.
2. No single core is less lhan 75 percent off~.
b. Strength level of a concrete mixture shall be
acceptable if (1) and (2) arc satisfied: e. Additional testing of cores extracted from locations
re presented by erratic core strength results shall be
l. Every arithmetic average of any three permiUed;
consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds /~;
f If criteria of for evaluating structural adequacy based
2. No strength test falis below f~ by more than 3.5 on core s trength results arc not met, and if the
MPa if f ~ is 35 MPa or less; or by more than structural adequacy remains in doubt, the responsible
0.10/ ~ if f ~exceeds 35 MPa. authority shall be pcrmillcd to order a strength
evaluation in accordance with Section 427 for the
c. If either of the requirements of Sectio n 426. 12.3. 1(b) questionable portion of the structure or take other
are not satisfied, steps s hall be taken lo increase the appropriate action.
average of subsequent strength results;
426.12.5 Acccptan·cc of Steel Fiber-Rcinforct.'<I
d. Requirements for investigating low strength-test Concr ete
results shall apply if Lhe requi re ments of Section
426.12.3. 1(b)(2) are not met. 426.12.5.1 Compliance Requirements:
426. 12.4 Investigation of Low Strength-Test Results a. Steel fi ber-rcinfon:ed concrete used for shear
resistance shall satisfy ( ! ) through (3 ):
426.12.4.1 Complia nce Reqoircments:
I. The compressive strength acceptance criteria for
a. If any s trength test of s tandard-cured cylinders foils standard-cured specimens;
below / ~ by more than the limit allowed fo r
acceptance, or if tests or field-cured cylinders 2. The residual strength ohtained from flexural
indicate de fi ciencies in protection and curing, steps testing in accordance with ASTM C l 609M at a
shall be taken to ens ure that structural adequacy of" mid-span deflection of 1/300 of the span length
the structure is not j eopardized; is at least the greater of (i) and (ii):
h. If the likeli hood of low-strength concrete is i. 90 percent of the measured first-peak

confinned and calculations indicate that structural strength obtained from a flexural test and;
adequacy is significantly reduced, tests of cores
drilled from the area in question in accordance witl1 ii. 90 percent of the strength corresponding
ASTM C42M shall be permitted. In such cases, three to0.62.ff'c.
cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls
l),ssociatton ol Stwclural Engineers oi the Philippines, Inc (ASEP)

3. The residual strength obtained from flexural c. The date and time ofmix.ing, quantity, proportions of
testing in accordance with ASTM CJ609M at a materials used, approximate placement location in the
- mid-span deflection of 1/150 of the span length structure, and results of tests for fresh and hardened
is al lc.:ast the greater or (i) and (ii): concrete properties for all concrete mixtures used in
thc Work;
i. 75 percent of the measured first-peak
strength obtained from a flexural test and; d. Concrete temperatures and protection given to
concrete <luring placement and curing when the
II . 75 percent of the strength corresponding ambient temperature falls helow 5 °C or rises above
to 0. 62f[';. 35°C.
426.13 Inspection 426.13.2.3 Test reports shall be reviewed to verify

compliance with Section 420.2.2.5 ir ASTM A6 I 5M
426.13.1 General deformed reinforcement is used to resist eat1h4uake-
induccd flexure, axial forces, or both in special moment
426.13.l.1 Concrete construclion shall be inspected a.,; frames, special structural walls, and componcnls of
rc4uired by the general huilding code. special structural walls including coupling beams and
wall piers.
426.13.1.2 In the ah!;ence of general building code
inspeclion requirements, concrete construction shall be 426.13.3 Items Requiring Inspection
inspected throughout the various Work stages by or under
the supervision of a licensed design professional or by a 426J3.3.I Unless olhcrwise specified in the general
4ualified inspector in accordance with the provisions of building code, items requiring verification and inspeclion
this section. shall be continuously or periodically inspected in
accordance with Sections 426.13.3.2 and 426.13.3.3.
426.13.1.3 The licensed design professional, a person
under the supervision of a licensed design professional, or 426.13.3.2 Items requiring continuous inspection shall
a qualified inspector shall verify compliance with include (a) through (d):
construction documents.
a. Placement or concrete;
426.13.1.4 For continuous construction inspection of
special moment frames, qualified inspectors under the b. Tensioning of pre.,;tressing swcl and grouting of
supervision of the licensed design pro1essional bonded tendons;
responsible for the slructural design or under the
!;Upervision of a licensed design professional with c. Installation of adhesive anchors in horizontal or
demonstrated capability to supervise inspection of these upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained
clements shall inspect placement of reinforcement and tension loads in accordance with Section 417.8.2.4;
concrete.
d. Reinforcement for special moment frames.
426.13.2 Inspection reports
426.13.3.3 hems requiring periodic inspection shall
426.13.2.1 Inspection reports shall document inspected include (a) thrnugh (g):
items and be developed throughout each construction
Work stage by the lic1:nscd design professional, person a. Placenwnt of reinforcement, embedmcnts, anti post-
under the supervision of a licensed design professional, or tcnsioning tendons;
qualified inspector. Records of the inspection shall be
preserved by the party performing the inspection for at b. Curing method and duration of curing for each
least two years after completion of the prqject. member;
426.13.2.2 Inspection reports shall document (a) c. Construclion and removal or forms and rcshoring;
through (e)
d. Sequence of erection and connection of precasl
a. General progress of the Work; members;
b. Any significant construction loadings on completed e. Verification or in-place concrete strength before
floors, members, or walls; ~tressing post-tensioned reinforcement and hefore
Nc1tion~il Structural Code c)f ths Philippim?s Volurne I, 7th Fdilion. 20·15
--
4- ·1 88 CH.A.PTEH ti ·· Strucluri-11 Concrete
removal of shores m1d fonnwork from beams and SECTION 427

structur<\l slabs;
STRENGTH EVALUATION OF
t'. Installation of cast-in anchors, expansion anchors, EXISTING STRUCTURES
and undercut am:hors in aC<.;ordance with Section
417.8.2; 427.1 Scope
g. Installation of adhesive anchors where continuous 427.l.l Provisions of this section shall apply to the
inspection is not required in accordance with Section strength evaluation of existing structures by analytical
4 I 7.8.2.4 or as a condition of the assessment in means or by load testing.
accordance with J\Cl 355.4M.
427.2 General
427.2.1 lfthcrc is doubt thal a part or all of a structure

meets the safety requirements of this Code and the
structure is to remain in service, a strength evaluation
shall be carried out as required by the licensed design
professional or building otlicial.
427.2.2 If the effect of a strength deficiency is well

understood and it is practical tu measure the dimensions
and determine the material properties of the members
required for analysis, an analytical evaluation of strength
based on Lhis in lbrnwlion is permitted. Required data
shall he detennined in accordance with Section 427.3.
427.2.3 If the effect of a strength deficiency is not well

understood or it is not practical to measure the dimensions
and determine the material properties of the members
required for analysis, a load lest is required in accordance
with Section 427.4.
427.2.4 If uncertainty about the strength of part or all

of a structure involves deterioration, and if the observed
response during the load test satisfies the acceptance
criteria in Section 427.4.5. the structure or part of the
structure is permitted lo rema in in service for a time
period speci tied by the I icenscd design professional. Ir
deemed necessary by the licensed design professional ,
periodic re-evaluations shall be conducted.
427.3 Analytical Strength Evaluation
427.3.1 Verification of As-built Condition
427.3.1.1 Dimensions of members shall be established at

critical sections.
427.3. 1.2 Locations and sizes of reinforcement shall be

determined by measurement. It shall be permitted lo base
reinforcement locations on available drawings if ficld-
verificd at reprcsenlative locations Lo confirm the
information on the dniwings.
Association uf Structural Engineers of lhe Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 4 ·· 8t1uctl"dl Concrete .1.1mi
427.3.I.3 If required, an estimated equivalent f~ shall 427.4.1.4 A precast mcmher lo he made composite with
be based on analysis or results of cylinder tests from the cast-in-place concrete shall be permitted lo be tested in
original construction or tests of cores removed from the flexure as a prccast member alone in accordance with (a)
part of the structure where strength is in question. and (b):
427.3.1.4 The method for obtaining and testing cores a. Test loads shall be applied only when calculations
shall he in accordance with ASTM C42M. indicate the isolated precast member will not fail by
compression or buckling;
427.3.1.5 The properties of reinforcement are permiucd
to be based on tensile tests of representative samples or b. The lest load, when applied to the precast member
the material in the structure. alone, shall induce the same total force in the tensile
reinforcement as would be produced hy loading the
427.3.2 Strength Reduction Factors composite member with the test load in accordance
with Section 427.4.2.
427.3.2.1 If dimensions, size and location of
reinforcement, and material properties arc determined in 427.4.2 Test Load Arrangement and Load Factors
a<.:<.:ordance with Section 427.3.1, it is pen11ittcd to
in<.:rcase </> from the design values elsewhere in this Code, 427.4.2.1 Test load arrangements shall he selected lo
however shall not exceed the limits in Table 427.3.2.1. maximize the <letlcction, load effects, and stresses in the
critical regions of the members being evaluated.
Table 427.3.2.1
Maximum Permissible Strength Reduction Factors 427.4.2.2 The lo!al lcsl load, Ti, including dead load
already in place shall be at least the greatest of (a), (b),
Maximum and (c}:
Transverse
Strength Classification Permissible
reinforcement
<b
Jllcxurc, Tt:nsion
Axial. or Controlled
All cases 1.0 a. T1 = 1. 15D + 1. SL+ 0. 4(Lror R) (427.4.2.2a)
Comprt:ssion Snirals"' 0.9
both
Cont ml bl Other 0.8
Shear, b. Ti =1. 15D + 0. 9L + 1. S(Lror R) (427.4.2.2b)
Torsion, 0.8
or both
Bearing 0.8 c. T1 == 1.3D (427.4.2.2c)
• Srirals shall salisfy Sections 410.7.6•.1. 420.2.2, and 425. 7,3.
427.4.2.3 It is permiucd to reduce L in Section 427.4.2.2

427.4 Strength Evaluation hy Load Test in accordance with the general building code.
427.4.1 General 427.4.2.4 The load factor on the live load L in Section
427.4.2.2(b) shall he pennitted lo be reduced to 0.45
427.4.1.1 Load tests shall be mnductcd in a manner that except for parking structures, areas occupied as places of
provides for safety ortifc and the structure during lhc test. public assembly, or areas where L is greater than 4.8
kPa.
427.4.1.2 Safely measures shall nol interfere with the
load test or aifoct the results. 427.4.3 Test Load Ap1>lication
427.4.1.3 The portion of the structure su~ject to the test 427.4.3.1 Total test load, Ti , shall be upplied in at least
load shall be al least 56 days old. If the owner of the four approximately equal increments.
structure, the contractor, the licensed design professional,
and all other involved parties agree, il shall be permitted
427.4.3.2 Uniform Tt shall be applied in a manner that
to perform the load test at an earlier age.
ensures uniform distribution of the load transmitted to the
structure or portion of the structure being tesLcd. Arching
of the tcsl load shall be avoided.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edilion, 2015
--
427.4.3.3 After the final load increment is applied, Tt 427.4.5.6 If Section 427.4.5.5 is not satisfied, it shall be
i;hall remain on the structure for at least 24 hours unless permitted to repeat the load test provided that the sccon<l
signs of distress, as noted in Section 427.4.5, are load test begins no earlier than 72 hours ailer removal of
observed. externally applied loads from the first load test.
427.4.3.4 Alkr all response measurements are recorded, 427.4.S.7 Portions of the structure tested in the second
the test load shall be removed as soon as practical. load test shall be considered acceptable if:
427.4.4 Response Measurements /J.2

A<-
5
L\y_
(427.4.5.7b)
427.4.4.1 Response measurements, such as deflection,
strain, slip, and crack width, shall he made at locations
where maximum response is expected. Additional 427.5 Reduced Load Rating
measurements shall be made if required.
427.S.l If the structure under investigation docs not
427.4.4.2 The initial value for all applicable response satisfy conditions or criteria of Section 427.3 or 427.4.5,
measurements shall be obtained not more than l hour the structure shall he permitted for use at a lower load
before applying the first load increment. rating, hased on the results of the load test or analysis, if
approved by the building official.
427.4.4.3 A set or response measurements shall be
recorded after each load increment is applied and after T 1
has been applied on the structure for at least 24 hours.
427.4.4.4 I\ set of final response measurements shall be

made 24 hours after T1 is removed.
427.4.5 Acceptance Criteria
427.4.5.1 The portion of the structure tested shall show

no spalling or crushing of concrete, or other evidence of
failure.
427.4.S.2 Members tested shall not exhihit cracks

indicating imminent shear failure.
427.4.5.3 In regions of members without transverse

reinforcement, structural cracks inclined to the
longitudinal axis imd having a horizontal projection
greater than the depth of the member shall be evaluated.
For variable-depth members, the depth shall be measured
at the mid-length of the crack.
427.4.S.4 In regions or anchorage and lap splices of

reinforcement, short inclined cracks or horizontal cracks
along the line ofreinforccmenl shall be evaluated.
427.4.5.5 Measured detlections shall satisfy (a) ur (b):
,2
a. /J. < t (427.4.5.5a)
l- 20,000h
il1 (427.4.5.Sb)
b. D. r<-
- 4
Association of Strur.tur,:il EngineGrs of the Philippines, Inc (ft.SEP)

SECTION 428 dependent effects, and compatibility of strains. The
11 analysis shall represent to a suitable approximation threc-
· BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS dimensional action of the shell together wilh its auxiliary
FOR CONCRETE THIN SHELLS rnem bers.
428.1 Scope and Definitions 428.1.9 Experimental Analysis
428.l.l Provisions of this section shall apply to thin An analysis procedure based on the measurement of
shell an<l folded plate concrete slrm;lurcs, including ribs deformations or strains, or both, or lhc structure or its
and edge members. model; experimental analysis is based on either elastic or
inelastic behavior.
428.1.2 All provisions or this Code nol specifically
excluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Section 428.2 Analysis and Design
428, shall apply to thin-shell structures.
428.2.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for
428.1.3 Thin Shells determining internal forces and displacements or thin
shells. This behavior shall be permitted to be established
Three-dimensional spatial structures made up or one or hy computations based on an analysis or the uncrackcd
more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are concrete structure in which lhc material is assumed
small compared to their other dimensions. Thin shells arc linearly elastic, homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's
characterized by their three-dimensional load-carrying ratio of concrete shall be permitted lo be taken equal to
hehavior, which is determined by the geometry of their zero.
forms, by the manner in which they are supported, and by
the nature or the applied load. 428.2.2 Inelastic analysis shall be permitted to be usc.:d
where il can he shown that such methods provide a safe
428.1.4 Folded Plates basis for design.
A class of shell structure formed by joining flat, thin slabs 428.2.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and
along their edges to create a three-dimensional spatial external loads shall be made lo ensure consistency of
structure. results.
428. 1.5 Ribbed Shells 428.2.4 Experimental ur numerical analysis procedures

shall be pennittcd. where it can be shown that such
Spatial structures with material placed prim,trily along procedures provide a safe basis for design.
ce11ain preferred rih lines, with lhc area between the ribs
filled with thin slabs or ten open. 428.2.5 Approximate methods of analysis shall he
permitted where it can be shown that such methods
428.1.6 Auxiliary Members provide a safe basis for design.
Rihs or edge beams thal serve to strengthen, stiffen, or 428.2.6 [n prcstressed shells, lhe analysis shall also
support lhe shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly consider behavior under loads induced during
with the shell. prcstressing, at cracking load, and at factored load. Where
tendons are draped within a shell, design shall lake into
428.1.7 Elastic Analysis account force components on the shell resulting from the
tendon profile not lying in one plane.
An analysis of deformations an<l internal forces based on
equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic 428.2.7 The thickness or a shell and its reinforcement
behavior, an<l representing to a suitable approximation !he shall be proportioned for the required strength and
three-dimensional action or the shell together with its serviceability, using either the strength design method of
auxiliary members. Section 422.1.3 or lhe design method of Section 424.
428.t.8 Inelastic Analysis 428.2.8 Shell instability shall be investigated and

shown by design lo he precluded.
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on
equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete 428.2.9. Auxiliary members shall he <lesioned 0
and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and time- accordmg to lhc applicable provisions of this chapter. lt
National Structural Code of th~ Fl1ilippines Volum,1 I, 7th Edition, 2015

shull be pcrmille \\ i1h the nuxiliary member. In such portions or the Prcstrcssed cast-in-place concrete shells shall have
shell, the rcinforccmcnl pcrpend1euh1r to the auxilwry specified cover for reinforcement, ducts, and end 11ttings
member shall he al least equal to that required for the al least that given in Table 428.4.2.
flange ofa T-bcam by Section 409.2.4.4.
Table 428.4.2
428.2.10 Strength design of shell slabs for membrane Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in Place
and bending forces shall be based on the distribution of Prestressed Concrete Shells
stresses and strains as determined from either elastic or an
inelastic analysis. Specified
Concrete
Reinforcement Cover,
428.2.11 In a region where membrane crat:king ,s exposure
mm
predicted, the nominal compressive strength parallel to Prcstrcssing tendons and
Exposed to
the cracks shall be taken ai. 0. 4/~. weather or in prcstrcssing rcinforct:mcnt; 25
25
contact with the mm ¢ bar, MW200 or MD
428.3 Design Strength ground 200 wire, and smaller
28mm d
428.3.I Specified compressive strength of concrete f ~ Not exposed to Prcstrcssing tendons and
20
at 28 days shall not be less than 21 MPa. weather or in >rc:.1ressin • reinforcement
eonlae( with the 20 mm cf> bar and larger db
428.3.2 Speciued yield strength of non-prestrcssed ground 16 mm </J bar, MW200 or
JO
reinforcement f y shall not exceed 420 M Pa. MD200 wire, and smaller
428.4 Spccilied Cover for Thin Shells Unless a greater 428.4.3 Precast Non-Prestres.-.ed or Prestre~sed
concrete cover is required by the General Building Code Concrete Manufactured Under Plant
for lire protection, spccilied concrete cover shall be in Conditions
accordance with Section 428.4.1 till'ough 428.4.3. For
shells subjected to corrosive environments, 428.4.4 shall Prccasl non-prestresscd concrete manufactured under
apply. plant conditions shells shall have specified cover for
reinforcement, ducts, and end fittings at 11.!ast that given in
428.4.1 Cast-in-place Non-Prestresscd Concrete Table 4 28.4.3.
Non-prestressed cast-in-place concrete shells shall have Table 428.4.3

spcdficd cover for reinforcement shall he at least that Specified Concrete Cover fur .Precast Non-Prcstrcssed
given in Table 428.4.1. or Prcstrcsscd Concrete Shells Manufactured Under
Plant Conditions
Table 428.4.1
Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in Place Non- Specified
Prestressed Concrete Shells Concrete
Reinforcement Cover,
exposure
mm
20 mm </J through 36 mm cf,
Concrete Speciticd
Reinforcement bars. Tendo ns and
exposure Cover, mnt
Exposed to prestressing rein forcemenl 40
Exposed lo weather or in larger than 16 mm cf,
20 mm bar, MW200 or
ground MD200 wire, and 40 MD200 wire, and smaller;
32
smaller Tendons and strands J6
Not cxposoo to 20 mm cf, or larger 20 mm and smaller
weather or in Ni)t exposed lo J>restrcssing tendons and
20
contact with the 16 mm</>, MW200 or weather or in rcstressin reinforcement
ground MD200 wire, and 12 contact with the 20 mm </J bar and larger 16
smaller ground 16 mm <P bar, MW200 or
10
MD200 wire, ,utd smaller
,l.\ssociati(m of Structural EngineEJrs of the Ph1lipp1nes, Inc (ASEP)

,1.1:.n
428.4.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements for Grade 420 reinforcement or 0.0020 for Grade 280
Corrosive Environments reinforcement.
428.4.4.1 In corrosive environmcnl or other severe 428.S.4 Rcinforcemenl for shear and bending moments
exposure conditions, the specified com:rctc cover shall be about axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be calculated
increased as deemed necessary and specified hy the in accordance with Sections 406, 407 and 408.
licensed design professional. The applicable requiremenls
for concrclc based on exposure categories in Section 428.5.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall
419.3.1.1 shall he satisfied, or other protection shall be he limited so that the reinforcement will yield before
provided. cilher crushing of concrete in compression or shell
buckling can take place.
428.4.4.2 For prestressed concrete memhcrs classified as
Class T or C in Section 424.4.2.1 and exposed to 428.5.6 [n regions of high tension, membrane
corrosive environments or other severe exposure reinforcement shall, if practical, be placed in the general
categories such as those defined in Section 419 .3.1.1, the directions or the principal tensile membrane forces.
specified concrete cover shall be at least 1.5 times the Where this is not practical, il shall be permitted to place
cover for prcstrcssed rcinlorcemenl required by Section membrane reinforcement in two or more component
405.1.2 for casl-in-place prestressed concrete members directions.
and Section 405.1.3 for precast concrete members.
428.5.7 If the direction or reinforcement varies more
428.4.4.3 The increase cover rcquiremenl of Section than 10 degrees from the direction of principal tensile
428.4.4.2 need not be satisfied if the prccomprcsscd membrane force, the amount or reinforcement shall he
tensile zone is not in tension under sustained loads. reviewed in relalion to cracking at service loads.
428.4.5 Concrete Surface Exposed to Earth or 428.5.8 If lhe magnitude of the principal tensile
Weather membrane stress within the shell varies greatly over the
area or the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total
428.4.5.1 lf concrete surface is exposed to earth or tension shall he pcrmilled to be concentrated in the
weather, concrete cover provisions shall he in accordance regions of largest tensile stress where il can be shown that
with Section 420.6.1. this provides a sate basis for design. The ratio or shell
reinforcement in any portion of the lensile zone shall be at
428.5 Shell Reinforcement lcasl 0.0035 based on the overall thickness of the shell.
428.5.l Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist 428.5.9 Reinforcement required to resist shell bending
tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to resisl moments shall he proporlioned with due regard to the
tension from bending and twisting moments, to limit simultaneous action of membrane axial forces al the same
shrinkage and temperature cracking and as reinforcement location. Where shell reinforcement is required in only
at shell boundaries, load attachments and shell openings. one face lo resist bending moments, equal amounts shall
he placed near both surfaces of the shell even though a
428.5.2 Tensile reinforcement shall be provided in two reversal of bending momenls is not indicated hy the
or more directions and shall he proportioned such that its analysis.
resistance in any direclion equals or exceeds the
component of internal forces in lhat direction. 428.5.10 Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not
be spaced farther apart than 450 mm, nor farther apart
Allernatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in than Jive times the shell thickness. Where the principal
the slab shall he calculated as the reinforcement required membrane tensile stress on the gross concrete area due to
to resist axial tensile forces plus the tensile force due to factored loads exceeds 0. 33</JJ.../Tc. reinforcement shall
shear- friction required to transfer shear across any cross not be spaced fa1ther apart than three times the shell
section of the memhrane. The assumed coerticient of thickness and 450 mm.
friction, µ, shall not exceed that specified in Section
422.9.4.2. 428.5.11 Shell reinforcement at the junction or the shell
and supporting members or edge members shall be
428.5.3 The minimum area of shell reinforcement at anchored in or extended through such members in
any section as measured in two orthogonal directions shall accordance with the requirements of Section 425, except
be at least 0.0018 times the gross area of the section for that the minimum development length shall be 1. 2.fd but
not less than 450 mm.
M,;1tional Structural Code of Ille Philippines Volurne I, 7ih Edition, .?.OHS
-
428.5.12 Splice dcvclopmcn1 lengths or shell SECTION 429
reinforcement shnll be governed by 1he provisions of
Section 425.4.2, except thm the minimum splice length of ALTERNATE DESIGN METHOD
tension bnrs shall be 1.2 times lhe value required by
Scc1ion 425, but not less lhan 450 mm. 1 he number of 429.1 Notations
splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a
practical minimum. Where splices arc necessary. they See Section 402.2.
shall be staggered at least e,, with not more than onc-
third of the reinforcement spliced at nny section. 429.2 Scope
428.6 Construction 429.2. l Non-prestresscd reinforced concrete members

shall be permitted to be designed using service loads
428.6. l When removal of fonnwork is based on a (wilhouL load factors) and permissible service load
specific modulus of elasticity or concrete because of stresses in accordance with provisions of Section 429.
stability or deflection con~i<lerations, the value or the
modulus of elasticity Ee shall he determined from fl cxurnl 429.2.2 For dei;ign o f members not covered by Section
tests of field-cured beam specimens. The number of test 424, appropriate prov isions of this Code shall apply.
specimens, the dimensions of test beam specimens, and
test procedures shall he specified by the engineer-of- 429.2.3 All applicable provisions of this Code for non-
record. prestressed concrete, except Section 406.5, shall apply to
members designed by the Alternate Design Method.
428.6.2 Contract documents shall specify the
tolerances for the shape of the shell. If construction results 429.2.4 flexural members shall meet requi rements for
in deviations from the shape greater than the specified de!1ection control in Section 424.2.1, and requirements of
tolerances, an analysis of the efiect of the deviations shall Sc..>ctions 408.7.2, 409.2.3, 409.6.1, and 409.9 or this
be made and any required remedial actions shall be taken Code.
to ensure sale behavior.
429.3 General
429.3. l Load factors and strength reduction factors ¢

shall be taken as unity for members designed by the
Alternate Design Method.
429.3.2 It shall be permitted to proportion members for

75 percent of capacities rnquired by other parts of Section
429 when considering wind or cai.thquakc forces
combined with other loads, provided the resulting section
is not less than th,tl required for the combination of dead
and live load.
429.3.3 When dead load reduces effects of other loads,

members shall be designed for 85 perc~nt of dead load in
cornhination with the other loads.
429.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses
429.4.1 Stresses in concrete shall not exceed the

following:
I. Flexure
Extreme fi her stress in compression ........ 0. 45/~
Associ.:1tion of Structur;;il En~1iooers of the Philippinos, In<;. (ASEP)

CH.I.\PT[R 4 ·· Structural Concr<·)te ,t-1~)5
2. Shear' 429.6 Flexure

Beams and one-way slabs and footings:
For investig,tlion of stresses at service loads, straight-line
Shear carried hy concrete, v c ................. ~ ffc theory for flexure shall be used with the following
Maximum shear carried by concrete plus shear assumptions:
reinforcement, Ve** ....... .................. ......... ~m 429.6.l Strains vary 1inearly as the distance from the
Joists: neutral axis, except for deep flexural members with
overall depth-span ratios greater than 2/5 for continuous
Shear carried hy concrete, vt. ..................... ~ ./H spans and 4/5 for simple spans, a nonlinear distrihution of
strain shall be considered. Sec Section 409. 9 of this
Two-way slabs and footings:
Chapter.
Shear carried by concrete,
Ve ....... - ..............,_.................................. (t
2
) (1 + 2/P..,)Jl'c 429.6.2 Stress-strain relationship of concrete is a
hut not greater than ............ .. .....................; m straight line under service loads within permissible
service load stresses.
3. Bearing on loaded areat .................................. 0. 3/~ 429.6.3 In reinforced concrete rnemhcrs, concrete
resists no tension.
429.4.2 Tensile stress in reinforcement f.~shall not
exceed the following: 429.6.4 ll shall be permitted to take the modular ratio,
1. Grade 280 reinforcement .................. .. ...... 140 MPa

n = Es/ Ec,as the nearest whole number (but not less than
6). Exccpl in calculations for deflections, value of nfor
lightweight concrete shall be assumed to he the same as
2. Grade 420 reinforcement or greater and welded wire for normal weight concrete of the same strength.
fabric (plain or dcfonned) .. ........... ........... 170 MPa
429.6.5 In doubly reinforced flexural memhcrs, an
3. For flexural reinforcement, </)10 mm or less, in onc- eJlective modular ratio of 2E8 /Ec shall be used to
way slabs of not more than 4 m span but not greater transform compression reinforcement for stress
than 200 MPa ................... .. ......... ..... .. ...... 0. 50 f y computations. Compressive stress in such reinforcement
shall not exceed pennissible tensile stress.
429.S Development and Splices of Reinforcement
429.7 Compres~ion Members With or Without
429.5.1 Development and splices of reinforcement Flexure
shall be as required in Section 425 of this chapter.
429.7.1 Combined flexure and axial load capacity of
429.5.2 [n satisfying requirements of Section compression members shall be taken as 40 percent of that
409.7.3.8.3, M11 shall he taken as computed moment computed in accordance with provisions in Section 422 of
capacity assuming all positive moment lcnsion this Chapter.
reinforcement at the section to be stressed to the
pennissible tensile stress f s, and Vu shall he taken as 429.7.2 Slenderness effects shall be included
unfactored shear force al the section. according lo requirements of Table 406.6.3.1.1 (b),
Sections 406.6.4.4.1 through 406.4.4.2, 406.6.4.5.1. In
Eqs. 406.6.4.4.1, 406.6.4.5.1 and 406.6.4.5.2 the tcnn PII
shall be replaced by 2.5 times the design axial load, and
the factor 0.75 shall he taken equal to 1.0.
• For more detailed calculation of th~ sh~ar stress carried hy concrete V c 427.7.3 Walls shall he designed in accordance with
and shear values for lightweight aggregate concrete, s~e Section 429.8.4.
** Designed in accordance with Section 406.4 of this code. Section 411 of this Chapter with flexure and axial load
tWhen th~ supporting surlace is wider on all sides tha11 the Joa(fod area, capacities htkcn as 40 percent of that computed using
r~rmissible bearing str~ss on the loaded area shall be permitted to be Section 411. In Eq. 411.5.3.1, </> shall be taken equal to
multipli~d by JA2 / A 1 but not more than 2. When the supporting 1.0.
surfoce is sloped or sleppctl, A 2 shall be permitted to be rakeo as the
area or the lower hase of the largos! frustum of a right pyramid or cone 429.8 Shear and Torsion
contained wholly within the support and having for iL~ upper base the
loacl~d area, and having side slop~s of l vertical-to 2 hori:,:ontal.
429.8.1 Design shear stress vshall he computed by
N,ltional Structurai Code of the Philippin<1s Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015
- ·-
(429.8. I) Quantity NI Ag shall be expressed in MPa.
,r
429.8.4.6 Shear stresses carried by concrete V e, apply to

where V is design shear force at section considered.
normal-weight eom:retc. When lightweight aggregate
concrete is used, one of the following modifications shall
429.8.2 When Lhc reaction, in direction or 11pplied
apply:
shear, introduces compression into the end regions or a
member. sections locntecl less than a distance d from face
When f ct is specified and concrete is proportioned in
or :.11pport shall be pcrmiLtcd to bc designed for 1hc same
accordance with Section 426.4.4, f ,t/6. 7 shall be
shear v as that computed nt a distance ti.
substilutcd for ffc but 1he value of f cc/6. 7 shall not
429.8.3 Whenever applicable, effects or torsion, in exceed ffi.
accordance with provisions or Section 409.5.4. shall be
added. Shear and torsional moment strenglhs provided by
concrete and limiting maximum s1rcogths for torsion shall
I. c,
When f is not specified, the value or .ff; sholt be
mulliplicd by 0.75 for "all-lightweight" concrete and
be taken as 55 percent of' the values given in Section 409. by 0.85 for '·sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear
intcrpoluuon sh11ll he pcrmltted \\ he11 pn11ial s,md
429.8.4 Shenr Stress Car ried by Concrete replacement is used.
429.8.4. 1 For members subject to shear nnd llcxurc 429.8.4.7 In determining shear stress carrh.:d by concrete
only, shcar slress carried by concrete Ve shall not exceed Ve, whcuevcr aprlicuble, effects or axial tension due to
0. 09ffc unless ,1 more detailed calculation is made in creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be
accordance with Section 429.8.4.4. included and it shal l be permitted to include effects of
inclined flexural compression in vnriable-<lcpth members.
429.H.4.2 For members subject to axial compression,
shear stress carried by con~retc Ve, shall not exc.eed 429.8.5 Shear Stress Carried by Shear
0. 09./f; unless a more detailed calculation is made in Reinforce mcnt
accordance with Section 429.8.4 .5.
429.8.5.l Types of Shear Reinforcement
429.8.4.3 For members st1bject to ~ignilicant axial
tension, shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry Shear reinforcement shall consist of one of the followi ng:
total shear, unless a more detailed calculation is made
usmg 1. Stirrups perpendi~ular to axis of member·;
v, = 0. 09(1 + 0. 6N/Ag)ffc (429.8.4.3) 2. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular
to axis of member making an angle of 45 degrees or
more with longitudinal tension reinforcement;
Where N is negative for tension. Quantity N / A i; shuJI be
expressed in MPa. 3. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion
making an angle of 30 degrees or more with
429.8.4.4 For members subject to shear and flexure longitudinal tension reinforcement;
only, it shall be permitted to co mpute 11, by
4. Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal
(429.8.4.4) reinforcement;
5. Spirals.
but shall not exceed 0.14ffc. Quantity Vd/ M shall not
be taken greater than 1.0., where M is design moment 429.8.5.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement
occurring simultaneously with Vat section considered. shall not exceed 420 MPa.
429.8.4.S For members subject to axial compression , it 429.8.S.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as
s hall be pennitted to compute Ve by shear rein forcement shall extend to a distance d from
extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored at both
ends according to Section 425.7. l of this section lo
v, = 0 . 09( 1 + O. 09 NI A 8 )ffc (429.8.4.5) develop design yield strength or rcin fo rcemenL
A.ssociahon or Structur.il Engineers oi the Pililfµµ1nP.s, Inc. {ASEP)

r
429.8.5.4 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinforcement 429.8.5.6.2 When shear reinforcement perpendicular to
axis of member is used:
ii
429.8.5.4.l Spacing of shear reinforcemenl placed
perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2. ( 429.8.5.6.2)
nor 600 mm.
429.S.5.6.3 When inclined stirrups arc used as shear
429.8.5.4.2 Inclined stirrups and bent longiludinal reinforcement:
reinforcement shall be so spaced that every 45-degree
line, extending toward the reaction from mid-depth of (v - v c)bws
member (d/2) to longitudinal tension reinforcement, A =------- (429.8.5.6.3)
v f s(sin «+ cos a)
shall be crossed by at leasl one line of shear
reinforcement.
429.R.5.6.4 When shear reinforcement consists of a
single bar or a single group of parallel hars, all hent up at
429.8.5.4.3 When (v-vc) exceeds ~[f;, maximum the sa1rn: distance from the support:
spacing given in Sections 429.8.5.4.1 and 429.8.5.4.2
shall be rc<lll(:cd by one-ha If. (v - v , )bwd
A =----- (429.8.5.6.4)
v f 5 sin a
429.8.5.5 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
where (v-vc:) shall not exceed (~) !fc.
429.8.S.5.I A minimum area of shear reinforcement
shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members where design shear stress v is greater than one- 429.8.S.6.5 When shear reinforcement consists of a
half the permissible shear stress Ve carried by concrete, series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-
except: up bars at different distances from the support, required
area shall be computed by Eq. 429.8.5.6.3.
I. Slabs and footings;
429.8.5.6.6 Only the center three-quarters of the inclined
2. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 408.8 portion or any longiludinal benl bar shall be considered
of this section; effective for shear reinforcement.
3. Beam wilh total depth nol greater than 250 mm, 2.5
times thickness of llangc, or one-hair lhc width or 429.8.5.6.7 When more than one type of shear
web, whichever is greatest. reinforccmenl is used to reinforce the same porlion or a
member, requir~d area shall he computed as the sum of
the various types separately. [n such computations, Ve
429.8.5.5.2 .Minimum shear reinforcement requirements
of Section 429.8.5.5.1 shall be pcnnitled lo be waived if shall be included only once.
shown by test that required ultimate flexural and shear
strength can he developed when shear reinforcement is 429.8.5.6.8 Value of (v-vc) shall not exceed G) /rc.
omitted.
429.8.6 Shear-l<'riction
429.8.5.5.3 Where shear reinforcement is required by
Section 429.8.5 .5.1 or by analysis, minimum area of shear Where it is appropriate to consider shear trans1er across a
reinforcement shall be computed by: given plane, such as an existing or potential crack, an
interface between dissimilar materials, or an interface
(429.8.5.5.3) between two concretes casl at ditforent times, shcar-
friction provisions of Section 422.9 of this Chapter shall
where bw and s arc in mm. he permitted to be applied, with limiting maximum stress
for shear taken as 55 percent of that given in Section
429.8.5.6 Design of Shear Reinforcement 422.9.4.4. Permissible stress in shear-friction
reinforcement shall he that given in Section 429.4.2.
429.8.5.6.1 Where design shear stress v exceeds shear
stress carried by concrete Ve, shear reinforcement shall be 429.8.7 Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings
provided in accordance with Sections 429.8.5.6.2 through
429.8.5.6.8. 429.8.7.1 Shear capacity of slabs amt footings in the
vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is govemed by
the more severe of two conditions:
Nc1tion:1I Structt1131 Cccle of lhe Philippine~ Volumfl I, 7th Edition, 2015
-
42 ...8.7.1.1 Beam aclion for slab or looting, wiLh a of this !;eclion shall be used, with shear strengths provided
critical seclion extending in a plane across the e ntire by concrete and limiting maximum s trengths for shcc1r
width and located at a distance d from face M taken l:IS 55 percent of the values given in Section 41 n. In
concentrated load or reaction area. For this condition, the Section 411.5.4.6, the design axial load shall be
slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with multiplied by 1.2 if compression and 2.0 if tension, and
Sections 429.8.1 through 429.8.5. substituted for Nu·
429.8.7.1.2 Two-way action for s lab or looting, with a 429.8.9 Composite Concrete Flexural Members
critical section perpendicular to plane or slab an<l located
so that its perimeter is a minimum, but need not approach For design of composite concrete llex11111 l members,
closer than d/2 to perimeter or
concentrated load or pcnnissible horizont.il s hear stress v 1t sha ll not exceed 55
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall percent of the horizontal shear s tre ng ths g iven in Sect ion
be designed in accordance with Sections 429.8.7.2 and 416.4.J.I oflhis Chf1pter.
429.8.7.3.
429.8.7.2 Design shear stress v shall be computed by
(429.8.7.2)
where V and b 0 , shall be taken at the critical section

defined in Section 429.8.7.1.2.
429.8.7.3 Design shear stress v shall not exceed Ve

given hy Eq. 429.8.7.3 unless shear reinforcemenl is
provided
(429.8.7.3)
but Ve shall not exceed G) .ff::Pc is the ratio of long

s ide to s hort s ideorconcentrated load or renolion area.
When lighlwcight aggregate concret.c is used, the
modifications o f Section 429.8.4.6 shall apply.
429.8.7.4 If shear re inforcement consisting of bars or

wires is provided in accordance with Section 408.7.6 of
this section, 1lc shall not exceed (,~) ffi, and v shall not
exceed 0.25../f'c.
429.8.7.S Ir s hear reinfo.rce ment consisting of steel 1-

or C-shapcd sections (shearheads) is provided in
accordance with Section 408.7.7 of this section, v on the
critical section defined in Sec1ion 429.8. 7. l.2 s hall 1101
exceed 0. 3frc, and von lhe c ritical section defined in
Section 422.6.9.8 s hall not exceed G) m.
In Eqs. 422.6.9.6 and 422.6.9.7, design s hear force V
shall be multiplied by 2 and substituted fo r V 11 •
429.8.8 Special Provisions for Other Members
For design of deep tJexural members, brackets and

corbels, and walls, the special provisions of Section 416.4
Associatk!n of Structural Enginet1rs of ttw Philippine'.,, Inc. (.11.SEf'J

APPENDIX A
•' 1
As an aid to users of the NSCP Vol. 1, 7 1, Edition and ACJ Building Code, information on size, areas, an<l weights of various
steel reinforcement is presented
ST~EL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION
ASTM STANDARD PHILIPPINE ST AN DARO (SI)
Bar Si:i:e Nominal Nominal Nominal Bar Size Nominal Nominal

Designation Diameter Arca mass Dcsig11alio11 Arca, mm 2 mass, kg/m
inch mm in' mm 2 lb/ft. kg/m
1 0.375 9.5 0.11 71 0.376 0,560 IO 79 0,618

4 0.500 12.7 0.20 129 0.668 0.994 12 I 13 O.H90
5 0.625 15.9 0.31 199 1.043 1.552 16 201 1.580
6 0.750 19.1 0.44 294 1.502 2.235 20 314 2.465
7 0.875 22.2 0.60 387 2.044 3.042 n.a n.a n.a
H 1.000 25.4 0.79 510 2.670 1.973 25 491 3.851
9 1.128 2/l.7 1.00 645 .1.400 5.060 28 616 4.831
10 1.270 32.3 1.27 819 4.303 6.404 32 804 6.310
I1 1.410 15,8 1.57 1006 5.313 7.907 16 1019 7.986
14 1.693 43.0 2.25 1452 7.650 11.382 40 1257 10.861
18 2.257 57.3 4.00 2581 13.60 20.240 SH 2642 20.729
·Nominal Nominal
Nominal
Type* diameter, • 2 weight,
ASTM Standard Reinforcement Bars area, m.
in. lb/ft
0.192 0.029 0.098
Nominal Nominal Prestressing 0.196 0.030 0.102
Type* Nominal
diameter, . 2 weight, wire 0.250 0.049 0.170
area, m.
in. lb/ft 0.276 0.060 0.204
l/4 (0.250) 0.036 0.122 3/4 0.44 1.50
516 (0.313) 0.058 0.197 7/8 0.60 2.04
Seven-wire Prestressing
3/8 (0.375) 0.080 0.272 I 0.78 2.67
strand bars (Type
7/16 1-1/8 0.99 3.38
(Grade 0.108 0.367 r, plain)
(0.438) 1-1/4
250) l.23 4.17
1/2 (0.500) 0.144 0.490 1-3/8 1.48 5.05
(0.600) 0.216 0.737 5/8 0.28 0.98
3/8 (0.375) 0.085 0.290 3/4 0.42 1.49
7/16 Prestrcssing 1 0.85 3.01
0.115 0.390
(0.438) bars (Type 1-1/4
Seven-wire 1.25 4.39
strand
1/2 (0.500) 0.153 0.520 rr, 1-3/8 1.58 5.56
(0.520) 0.167 0.570 deformed) 1-3/4
(Grade 2.58 9.10
(0.563) 0.192 0.650 2-1/2
270) 5.16 18.20
(0.600) 0.217 0.740 3 6.85 24.09
(0.620) 0.231 0.780 • Ava,lltble of son,c slr(utd. wire: ond l>ar size sl1ould be lnvc-sti!)lllctl rn
(0.700) advance.
0.294 l.000
Nc1tional Structural Cede oi Ille Ph1iippines Voiurne I, 7th Edition. 20·15

4 -i.l)cJ CH/>.PTEI~ 4 - Sii uctu, ,11 Concrete
,,
WRI STANDAR D WIRF: REINFORCEMENT (Customary Units)*
Nominal Nominal Nominal An.wd, in·/ftof\\idth ofvunous ,p:1cinl!S
W&Dsizi,
Diameter, arec.1, weight, Center-10-1:c111cr s11,1c111g. in.
Plain Deli)rmcd 111. 111. lb/n 2 3 4 6 I\ 10 12 16 18
W45 045 0.757 0.450 1.530 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.909 0.680 0.540 0.450 0.340 0.300
W31 031 0.628 0.310 1.054 1.860 l.240 0.930 0.620 0.470 OJ70 0.310 0.232 0.207
W30 D30 0.61 8 0.300 1.020 1.800 1.200 0.900 0.600 0.450 0.360 0.3 0(1 0.225 0.200
W28 028 0.597 0.280 0.952 1.680 1.120 0.8-10 0.560 0.420 0.330 0.280 0.2 10 0.187
W24
W22
W26 026
0 24
D22
0.575
0.553
0.529
0.260
0.240
0.220
-~ 0.884
0.748
l .560
1.440
1.320
1.040
0.960
0.880
0.780
0. 720
0.660
0.520
0.480
0.440
0.390
0.360
0.330
0.310
0.280
0.260
0.260
0.240
0.220
0. 195
0.180
0.165
0.17.l
0. 160
0.147
W20 0 20 0.5 05 0.200 0.680 1.200 0.800 0.600 0.400 0.300 0.240 0.200 0.150 0.133
W 18 DH! 0.479 0.1 80 0.612 J.080 0.720 0.540 0.360 0.270 0.216 0.180 0.135 0.120
Wl6 016 0.451 0.160 0.544 0.960 0.640 0.480 0.320 0.240 0.192 0.160 0.120 0.107
W14 [)14 0.422 0.140 0.476 0.840 0.560 0.420 0.280 0.210 0.168 0.140 0.105 0.093
W l2 Dl2 0.39 1 0.1 20 0.408 0.720 0.480 0.360 0 .240 0.1 80 0. 144 0.120 0.0()() 0.080
Wl l OJI 0.3 74 0.1 10 0.374 0.660 0.440 0.330 0.220 0. 165 0. 132 0.110 0.083 0.073
WI0.5 . 0.366 0.105 0.357 0.630 0.420 0.315 0.210 0.157 0.126 0.105 0.071 0.070
WlO DI O 0357 0.100 0.340 0.600 0.400 0.300 0 .200 0.1 50 0.1 20 0.100 0.080 0.067
W9.5 . 0.348 0.095 0.323 O..'i70 0.3RO 0.21\5 0.1 90 0. 142 0.114 0.095 O.Q75 (l.063
W9 D9 0.338 0.090 0.306 0.540 0.360 0270 0.180 0.135 O.lOR 0.090 0.068 0.060
W8.5 . 0.329 0.085 0.289 0.5 10 0.340 0.2 55 0.t70 0. 127 0.102 O.OR5 0.064 0.057
W8 08 0.319 0.080 0.272 0.480 0.320 0.240 0. 160 0.120 0.096 0.080 0.060 0.053
W7.5 . 0.309 oms 0.255 0.450 0.300 0.225 0.1 50 0.1 12 0.090 0.075 O.OS6 0.050
W7 07 0.299 0.070 0.238 0.420 0.280 0.2 10 0.1 40 0.105 0.084 O.o70 0.053 0.047
W65 . 0.288 0.065 0.22 1 0.390 0.260 0. 195 0. 130 0.097 O.Q78 0,()(,5 0.049 0.043
W6 D6 0.276 0.060 0.204 0.360 0.240 0. 180 0.120 0.090 0.072 0.060 0.045 0.040
WS.5 . 0.26 5 0.055 0.187 0.330 0.220 0.165 0. 110 0.082 0.066 0.055 0.041 0.037
W5 05 0.252 0.0 50 0. 170 0.300 0.200 0.1 50 0.1 00 O.o75 0.060 0.05 0 (J.038 0.033
W4.5 . 0.239 0.045 0.1 53 0.270 0.180 0.135 0.090 0.067 0.054 0.045 0.034 0.030
W4 04 0.226 0.040 0.136 0.240 0.1@ 0.120 0.080 0.060 0.048 0.040 0.030 0.027
W3.S . 0.2 ll 0.035 0. 119 0.210 0. 140 0. 105 0.070 0. 052 0.042 0.035 0.026 0.023
W3 . 0.195 0.030 0.1 02 0.1 1!0 0.1 20 0.090 0.060 0.045 0.036 0.030 0.023 0.020
W2.9 . 0.192 0.029 0.0')8 0.1 74 0.116 0.087 0.058 0.043 0.035 0.029 0.022 0.0 19
W2.5 . 0. 178 0.025 0.08 5 0. 150 0.100 0.075 0.050 0.037 0. 030 0.025 0.01 9 0.017
W2.I . 0. 16 1 0.020 0.070 0. 130 0.0R4 0.063 0.042 0.032 0.025 0.021 0 .016 0.014
W2 . 0.160 0.020 0.06!! 0 120 0.080 0.060 0.040 0.030 0.024 0.020 0,015 0.013
W l.4 . 0. 134 0.014 0.049 0.084 0.056 0.042 0.021! 0.028 0.017 0.014 0.0 11 0.099
• Keferencc "S1ruc111r~I Welded Wire Reinforcement Manual of St~ndard r mclicc," Wire Rcinfo,-ceincnl lnslitufc, Hartford. Cf", Sixth R,li1io11, Apr., 2001
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippine$, Inc. (ASEP)

CH.1.\Pll:.R ti·· StructurHI Cc;,-1cwl~; 4-20i
WRI STANDARD WIRE RKINFORCEMENT (Metric Units)*

Ill' Equivalf'III l\rea, mm1/m. ofwhlth of various spAcings
W & OsiZE' MW& MD~izc l'\om. Norn. Nominal
Customary tJnits Metric Units Dia., area,
2
weight,
Center-to-center ~peeing, mm.
-
mm. mnt kgfm
Plain Deformed _R!ain Deformed
-- . _
-19.23 - 2.280
- - SJ 76 102 152 20.~ 2.54 305 406 ~
W45 D45 MW290 MD290 290 5686 3816 2843 1901! 1429 I 142 951 714 635
W31 1)3 l MW200 MD200 15.96 200 1.570 3922 2632 1961 1316 985 787 656 493 438
W30 [)31 MW l94 MD194 15.70 194 1.020 3804 2553 1902 1276 956 764 636 478 425
W28 028 MW JKI MDI Ill 15.17 18 1 0.952 3549 2382 1775 11 91 892 71) 593 446 3%
W26
W24
W22
026
0 24
D22
MWJ68
MW1 55
MWl42
MD168
MDJ55
MOl42
14.61
14.04
13.44
168
155
142
0.884
0.816
0.74R
3294
3 039
2784
2211
2040
I 868
1647
1520
1392
1105
1020
934
82~
764
700
661
610
559
551
508
466
414
31\2
350
- 368
339
31 I
W20 020 MWl 29 MD129 12.83 129 l.0 JO 2540 1693 1270 847 635 508 423 318 282
Wl8 018 MWll6 MDll6 12.17 116 0.91 1 2286 1524 1143 762 572 457 381 286 254
Wl6 016 MW103 MOI03 11.46 103 0.809 2032 1355 1016 677 508 406 339 254 225
W14 Dl4 MW90 MJ.>90 10.72 90 0.708 1778 1185 R89 593 445 3:56 296 222 ...l21...
Wl2 01 2 MW77 MD77 9.93 77 0.607 1524 1016 762 508 381 305 254 190 168
WII DI ! MW7l MD71 9.50 71 0.556 1397 931 (i99 466 349 279 !75 155
- -- - 233 -149
-
.
~
WIO.S MW68 9.30 68 0.531 1334 889 667 445 332 267 222 167
WIO 1)1 0 MW65 MD65 9.07 65 0.506 1270 847 635 423 318 254 212 160 142
W9.5
W9
- MW61
MW58
-
MD58
8.84
8.59
61 0.481
0.456
1207
l 143
804
762
603
572
402
381
301
286
24 1
229
201
191
150
143
133
127
09 58
Wl\.5 . MW 55 - 8.36 55 0.430 1080 720 540 360 269 216 180 135 120
Wls 08 MW52 MD52 8.10 52 0.405 1016 677 508 339 254 203 169 128 ! 14
W7.5 . MW48 . 7.85 4R 0.379 963 635 476 31R 237 !9 1 159 118 105
W7 07 MW45 MD45 7.60 45 0.354 889 593 445 296 222 178 148 Ill 98
WG.5 . MW42 . 7.32 42 0.329 826 550 413 275 205 165 138 103 92
W6 06 MWJ9 M039 7.01 39 OJ04 762 508 381 254 191 152 127 96 85
W5.5 . MW36 MD36 6.73 36 0.278 699 466 349 2'.1:1 174 140 1!6 89 79
W5 05 MW32 MD32 6.40 32 0.253 63 5 423 318 212 159 !27 106 78 70
W4.5 . MW29 . 6.07 29 0.228 572 381 286 191 142 I 14 95.3 71 63
W4 04 MW26 MD26 5.74 26 0.202 508 339 254 169 127 102 84.7 64 57
W3.5 . MW23 - 5.36 23 0.177 445 296 222 148 110 88.9 74.I 56 50
W3 . MWl9 . 4.95 19 0.152 381 254 19 1 127 95.3 76.2 63.5 47 42
W2.5 . MWl6 . 4.52 16 0.126 317 212 159 106 78.3 63.5 52.9 39 35
W2.1 . MWl4 - 4.11 14 0.106 267 178 133 !!8.9 65.6 52.9 44.5 34 31
W2 . MWl 3 - 4.06 13 0.101 254 169 127 84.7 63.5 50.!\ 42.3 32 2R
w MWIO 3.51 10 0.076 191 127 95 3 63 .5 48.4 38.1 3 l.8 25 22
Wl.4 . MW9 . 3.40 9 0.07 1 178 1 19 88.9 59.3 44.S 36.0 29.6 22 20
National Stnicttll'al Code of the Philippines Volume I, i'th Eclition, 2.01 !.i
L .
,·l -2.02 CH.~P IER 4 - Strwt111al Con<,ret,:
~PPENl)IXB
Eqlll~alcncc hclwccn-Sf Mctrit:,
MKS-Metric, and U.S. l '11,inumry Uni, of Non·ho111ogcn1111, l-.t1uu111111, in lh~ Cotl~
lJ.S Cu,1omary uni1s stn=--s III pow1,l, per
J>ro,-ision Numhcr Sl-,nctric s1rcss in Mf>a mks-metric stress i,1 k1;flcm 2
M)lltirc inch (("1)
1 MPa 10 k11rtc111, 145ps1
f~ ~ 21 Ml'a I ~"' 210 kgli'cm' f'c 3 , 000 ps,
f~ = 28 MPa ,~ .:. 280 kgrlcm1 r:. :c 4, 000 psi
{~ =35 MPa f ~= 350 ksf/c111' f'.: = 5, 000 psi
f~ = 40 MPa f~ =420 kgflcm, {~= 6. 000 p~I
f, = 280 Mra f ,- = 2.800 kgfic-m1 / 1 • 4 0, 0 00 psi
fr=- 420 MPa f y = 4. 200 kgl'lc1111 {y = 60,000 psi

{p.,= 172SMPn {p 11 =17,600 kgl/cm' {pu = 2so, ooo psi
/ 1,,. "' 1860 MP« f,,. "" 19, 000 k1,C7cm' f P• .. 270, 000 psi
,/f;mMPa 3. 18,{f; m kgf/cm' 12,{f;i,ipsi
0. 313.{flinMl'a ,/f;inkgf!cm' 3. 77,fF._ in I'"'
0 . 083,{f; in MPo O. 27.{f.. in kgl1cni2 .{fl in psi
2
0. 17/fl inMPa O. 53,[Fc 111 kgt/cm 2/fl mpsi
406.6.4 5.4 M~·"''" = P~(l. 5 + 0. 0311) Mz.,,n =Pu( 15 + 0.03h) Mt.1111• =P.(0.6 + 0.03h)
407.3.1.1. I (o.Hfto) ( 0. 4+ 7 ~~ 0 ) (o. 4+ 10:.~no)
407.3. 1.1.2 (1. 65 - O. 0003w,).:: 1. 09 (1.65 - o.ooo:-1w.) 2 1. o9 ( 1. 65 - 0. 0003w,) 2'. 1. 09
0. 0018 x420 0. 0018 x 4200 o.ootox 60. 000
407.6.1.1 A, A$ A,
I, r.,. {y
b,$ b.,s 60 b,s
407. 7.J.5(c) o.41T ,, 4. 2 T,., r,,
40&.3. l.2(b)(c) h=
t (oo+k)
n , HOO 2:. 125 1mn h=
t (o ll+_[z_)
n . 14,000 > 12 5 h=
in ( 0 8 + 2~100) ~ 5 in
3ft + sp(a1., - 0. 2) 36 + 5/1(«,,. - o. Z) - ' cm 36 + 5P(((1.,. - o.2)
40H.3. I .2(d)(e) h =" • (0. 0+k )
t<O!L > 90 mm
- ./.'N ( 0. ff + l~~OOO) > 1 • ( o. 8 + 1q~~oo) . ,
3ft + 9/1 - - 36 + 9/1 - 9 cm "' 36 + 9/1 2:. 3 · S,..
408.3.4.1 t, s o. s o[[;, /, s 1.6ff, I, s 6[[;,

0. 0010 x 420 0. 0018 x 4200 0 . 0010 x 6 0, 0 0 0
408.6.t.l {y A, I,
A, - f, A,
0 .17..{f.: 0.53..{f; 2.[f.:
408 .6.2.3
o. 50 .fFc u,[Fc 6[f.
0.37ffrb..,II 1. 'l.{frlJwd 4.Sffr_b,.d
40ll.7.S.<i.J. I(n) and
A,= r, As = {y A, =
{y
(b)
Z. lhwd 21 b,.d 300bwd
A, =--r;- A.• -- -f ,- A . = - --
f,
408.7.7 1.2 ,PO. s ..{f.: <f>l . 6,[Fc ,P6ffi
409.3. 1.1 I f, fy
0 4+__b__
0.4+ 7 0 0 0. 4 +7000 . 100.000
409.3.1.1 .2 (t . 65 - 0. 0 003w,.) 2'. 1. 0 9 (1. 65 - O. 0003w,) 2 1. 09 (1.65 - 0 . 0005wc).:: 1.09
o. 2 sffi o.o oft~ 3fHb d

-r;-bwd ---y;- h ..d { y ...
409.6 1.2(a) "nd (b)
1.4 14 2 00
T, bwd { y b ..d T,b.., d
409.6.3 .1 Vu S <f>0. 17 ..fr.bwd Y u :S 1/)0 . 5 3 ,/I',,b..,d v,. :S ,P2 ffch.,d

.11 .... ,,. 2 o.116 2 m rbwsyt Av.mi,i 2 0. z[F._ f-,,
h s
Av,min
b s
2:. 0.75,ffif-
yt
409.6.3.l(a) and (b)
Au,,n;,1 2 0. 35
ffcb.,s
f YI r
A,,min 2'.3. S 11/wS
yt
Au.min
Sob... s
2 - ,- ,.
Assor.iation of StructtJral Engineers of 11111 Philippines, lrJl.' (ASEP)

CHt\PTf.R ,l -- Structural C,)ncre!~1
b b b
(Av+ 2A,)/s 2: 0.062!f'c / (Av+ 211,)/s 2: 0. 2ffc f"' (Av+ 2A 1 )/s 2'. O. 75frc /
yt YI YI
409.6.4.2(al n11J (hJ
0.35bw 3.5bw SObw
(A.,+ 'l.A,)/s 2: - - (A,+ 2A1 )/s 2: - , - (A.,+ 2A1 )/s 2:-,-
1yl yr yt
At,1111» <
0.4,l./flAr.,,
{y -
("') /y,
11h {y
1. 33ff'cA,p (A 1) {yt A . < Sff,A,,, - (~) fyt
409 <i 4.J(a) n,1d (h)
5 At.11<in < fy - 5 Ph [y f,mm - (r s Ph {y
0.42ff'cA,p (0.175bw) Jyt 1.33,/1'::A,._ (2Sb,.) /y,

A.r,niin :5 f - - , - - Ph T At.min :5 fy - -,- PhT
Sff,A,r, (25b.,) {y,
At.min ::5 - - - - -,- P•T
>' Y' y yr. y 1y )'I y
l>.,s bwS b.,s
409. 7.3 .S(c) 0.41- 1 .2T 60-
f yl y< f,,
409.7.6.2.2 0. 33,/T;,b,.d 1.tffcb.,d 4,[f',bwd
409.9.2 1 Vu :5 4>0. 83/f:b.,d V,. ::5 ,J>2. 65.fT::bwd v.. :5 .p1offcb,.d
Av.min 2: 0. 062
mhw-~
f yl Av.min 2: 0. 2ff.:f-
b s
YI
Av.min 2: 0. 75 m/wS
f ye
41U.6.2.2
Av.min 2: 0, 35 Jr/wS
f A11,nuu ~ 3.5
Jp/w·~
f Av.min 2: 0.35
mb.. s
·,
yt y( yr
410. 7.6.5.2 0.33ffr.bwd 1.1,/T;,hwd 4frcb..d
4J J.5.4.3 0.83/Hhd 2.6Sfi',.lld toff,.hd
4 l 1.S.4.S ond
411 5.4.o(al 0. 17>.ffchfl 0. 53AfFchd ufFchd
4 I l.5.4.6(h) ( 0.29N )
0. 17 1 + ~ Aff~b..,d 0. 53 ( 1 + J;~J 4f'cbwd 2(1 + s:O~;) ).ffrb..,,1
v. = 0.88il fjf hd + 4t v, = 3.3.i.,fT;,1111+ 1N,.d
41 l.5.4.6(d) fFc N.,d Nud
V.=0. 27A hd+ "
I
..
411.5.4.<,(c) Y,.. = 0. OSA..fT:: +

41
e (o IJ../T; +
... . ~
'"'--
v. •
:. '•"
m.)J ltd l
V, = 0.16J.ff +
..
tw ( 0.3:UJl:. +
~-!,,.
,
";::,·)1
• hd
[
V,=0, 16~,fT;_+
t. ( o. mp;:+";':·)]
4"'
f:!J._!,,.
•• z
• hd
412.5.3.3 ,IT;, ::5 11.3 in Mra [i;. $ 2 7 in kgf/cni' ,/7'. 5 100 in psi
412.5.3.4
Vu ::5 <f,O. 66'1,v ffi V• $ ef>2. 1A,vff. vu ::5 ,pa,1.. ff::
fjf :5 0.3 in Mf'a ffi. :5 27 in kgf/cm' /fl $100 in psi
4145.2.Ja M,. = 0.4'1.AfrcS.., Mn= 1.33).ffcsm M. = s;.,/T;_s",
4145.4. J(a) M,. - Pu S<f,0.42).ffc
s,11 Ai;:
~fu - ~ $ ,PL 33>.ff.
Sm Ai
;u-:u
m •
$ ,ps;.[f;
414.5.5, l(a) 4
V" =0.lV./Hhwll V n = 0. 35AfFcbwh V,. =
3 A/Hl>wh
414.5.5.l(b) and (c)

V,, = 0.11 (1 + ~jA/Hh h 0 Vn = 0.3sf1 + ;1A./T::b 0 h' v.. ,. [1 + ;i;).ml>.h
V,.: 0.2U/f:b0 h V n = O. 7U/Hb.h V n = 2 (; ).,/'T;,l>0 h)
mbws b s
Av.min ~ 0. 062
yt
f Av.mtn 2 O.zff.:...;-
I , A.,,min ~ 0. 75
mb.,.~
f YI
415.4.2 1
Av,n,ln 2 0.35 Ji:/wS

f ye Av.min 2: 3. 5
ff,,l>.,.r
yt
f bws
Av,mln 2 50{
YI
416.4.4.1 ,J,(3. 5bvd) (f,(35h.,d) <P(SOObvd)
). ( 1.8 + 0, 6 Avfyt)
bvs bvd A ( 18 + 0.6 Avfyi)l>vd A (260 + 0.6 A;::') bvd
b .• s
416.4.4.2
3.Sl>vd 3Sbvd !iOObvd
0.55bvd S.6b 0 d BOb.,d
Av,11<1n 2: 0.062 1r/wS f mbwS ff,,hws

yt
Av.rnt11 2: 0. 2 f YI Av.min 2: 0. 7S f
416.4.6. l YI
b,,,s bwS b..,s
Av,ml11 2 0.35/
(3. 3 +0. 08/;)hwd

yl
Av.min 2: 3.5/
(34 + o. oar:)b..,d
YI
Av.ntln 2 50
{480 + 0.011{;)b,.d
f ..
416.5.2.4(b) nnd(c)
llbwd 110bwd 1600b,..d
416.5.2.5(1>) ( 5. 5 - 1. 9 ';;) l>..,d (ss-2o~)hwd (sou - zso1')b..,d
g
417.4.2.2a N • = k,A,-fr:hct Nb = kc>-a [f;h./·5 N• = k,A0 [f;h,,/~
k,=10 or 7 k,=IO or 7 k,.=24or 17
417.4.2.2b N • = 3. 9A0 [f::h,//J Nh = 5.BAa!ifll.,
~/3
Nb = 16A0 ,/T;,h.,SI"
417.4.4.1 N,0 = uc.,_~A,,.Jtf N,b = 42.5ca 1 ~Aaffr. N,• = 160Ca1f;::).affc
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume t, 7th Ed11ion. 2015
- .,
:,-204 CH.A.PTF.I~ 4 ·- SttL1ctural Concreie
""
417.4.5. Id 10Jf.f,
7.6 IOda ~ 76 !Od. H&o O
.
U1 (' U?
417 5,2 2n - (f•f
d
V• -· o. 6 2 •
/i[;.A 0 ffi(c01 )
" V0 = 0 6(:,:) ,/d.,A0 ff,(c 0 .)1 < V• = 1(d")
Q
..{J:;.J.0 fi'c(c 01 ) 1 ~
-
417..S.2.21> 3. ?)..ff,(c0 i) 15
v. = llb = 3.6A0 fi;(c01 ) 1!i v. = 9A.{f,.(c01 ) 15
f O2 r 02 t 02 -
4 17.S.2.3 V•=0.66(d:) .{ci.;J..ufi'c(c..1 )
15
vh = 2.1(d:) ,f,i;.J. 0 ./T;(c01 ) 15 vb= 8C,:) Jd.).0 ./T;(c.,) 15
41 8.7.5.2 f ~ > 70 MPa / ~ > 700 kgf7cm' fr> 10. 000 '"'
418.75.3 s. ~ 100 + cso - "-·)
- -3- s. = 10+
cs - ,,.. )
-3- Sn=
c4- lt,.)
4 + - --
3
418.7.5.4{8) f ~ + o 6 2: 1 u f~ _fl_
k 1 ..
175 k, = 1750 + 0 6 2: 1 . 0 kt 25,000 + 06>10
. - .
1 . ?A/f.A; S 3).ffi_A; 20A,fHA1
418.8.4.1 1. 2 A[F.A1 4 O).[f;.AI 15Aff,A1
1. 0A .ffcA1 3.2J..ffrA1 12)..ffcA1
411!.8.S.I td• = fr,t•/(s.uff,) td.h = {y,lh/( 11;..ff't) t.,1, ~ fy<l,.1(6SA.{i'c)
418.10.2 .I O. 083A,.. A,{f; 0 21A,.A.{f, A,.A/j;.
418.10.2.2 0. 17A,-,J.ffc 0.53Ac.A.ffr 211,.;...fif
V,. = Acv(«eJ..ffi. + p,J y) Yn ~ Acv(«,J../P, + Ptfy) V,. = A,.(a,Affc + prf1 )
h., «e = O. HO It., h.,
418. 10.4.1 «,. = 0 25 for l'w S 1. 5 for l'w S 1, 5 «, =3. 0 for t., S 1.5
h., a, = 0.53 h., h.,
Uc = 0.17 fo,· f w S 2.0 l'w S 2. U ac = 0. 20 for t S 2.0
for ~
0. 66An,A.ffr 2. 12Ac,)..ffr OA,uAfif.

418.10.4.4
0.8:JA,.•J.,ffl. 2. 65A,,.A.{ff. I.OA •.,A,/1;
418.10.4.5 0. H3A,.AfFc 2.65A,.,A.ffr tOA,..J. /T::
418.10.6.S(a) 2.8/ {,. 28/f, 400/f,
418.10.6.S(h) 0.83A,.,Affc o. 21A,.A[T:, A,.A.ffc
418.10.7.2 0. 33A.{f.A,,. 1. lA/rrA,., 4A .ffcAcw
418.10.7.4 v.. =:u,..,f 1 s ln « s 0.83 /rrA,., V., = 211,.~fy SI II a S 2.65.{ff,II,,., VA ~ 211,,.,f,.s ina S 10..fifA,w
j-b,.s ff. b.,s
11. ...,i. 2: 0.062 ,:.Tyr Av.min 2: 0. 2 fFb,,,s
~T .,., A>',mln 2: 0. 75 --,-
11
418.12 7.6(b)
b s b,.s SOb. ..<
Av.min 2:- 0.35T
yr
A,...i., 2: 3.ST,., A"·"''" ~-,-.
yr
418 .12.9. 1 V 0 = A,..(0.17A..{ff.+ p,f,.) V,, =A,-(0. SJA ffi + P,f,) v. Acv(ZA[i; + P,f,-)
418.12.9.2 0.66A,~lfr 2. lZA,...{ff. OA,v ffc
418 .14.5.1 0. 29,ffi 0.93./F., J . s,/1;,
419.2.2.l(a) Ee = w~ 5 0. 43 ffi E, = iv:.so. u .[f; 11,= w,15 0.'.i3fF.
41 9.2.2. l(b) E, .. 4700.{f, E, = l S, 100/°h Ee = 57. 000 ,/ f~
419.2 .3.1 fr .. o.6ZA.{f< f ,ZJ..{ff. f, = ?.SJ.fFc
419.2.4.3 A=f.,/(0. 56,[f;;J s 1. 0 A =f "''(o. 56.{f;;;) S l.0 J.. =f,../(6.1..{Q S 1. 0
f •• +10+100
,: {,.. + 700 + lOOpP
f~
t •• + 10.000 + 100pp
fc
Pp
420.).2.4. 1
, .. +420 t•• + 1200 t .. + 60,000
r
{p., = f,. + ?O + 30;Pp [p, = f.,. + 700 + :-IOOpp
f~ .
/p, = / ... + to. ooo + 300Pp
r;.
{.,+ 210 t .. + 2100 r•• + Jo.ooo
421 .2.3 f,r = ('2l
so) db t" .. )a
=({10 h e.. ~ (3000
r•• )db
0. OS(/~ - 28) 0. 05(/~ - 280) 0. OS (f. - 4000)
422.2.2.4.3 o.as- 0.85 0.85 -
7 70 1 000
422.5.1.2 Vu S c/l(Vc + O. 66.fFcb..11) Vu S f/l (V< + 2.2.{f.b,.d) v,, s 4>(v, + a.ffcb,..d )
l', =O 11A,/F.b,.d v, = 0. 531.ffrb.,d V,. = 2J..{f.bwd
V, = (0.16).Jr.
f , +17p,. v.d)
Mu b.,d v, "' (o. 5;.ffi_ + 116p., :;:) b.,d v, = (0. 191.,ffi
/, + 2soop,. Yvd)
~ bw,s
422.S.5.I
S (o. 16A,)fl:+ 11p,..~d)b,..d S ( 0. SJ..,)fl: + t 76pw ~;:) bwd S ( 0. l 9A.f1'. + ZSOOpw ~;~) bwd
w
S0.'l<JA,/1;b,.d so.93;,..ffcb,.d $3. SA{Hbwd
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, inc (ASEP)

CH/\PTl:H ,1 ·· Slructural Conc:-~;ie 4 ·205
422.5.(,.1 V, = 0.17 ( 1 + N~ );.!f.:1, ..d Ve= 0.53(1 + ,:;,JAJ{;b,.d V, = 2 ( 1 + ZO:~AJ ). !f.:bwd

.,. 14 •
422.5.(,.1 (a) V,~ (o.t6A,m+ t7pw~,;)b.,d

Mn-NNo
~
Yr --(O SAv /<. + 176(),., v. )
<11,-, bw(l V, -(1 'IA.ff;°+ 2.'>00p., -.-~'',,,-,,)b.,cl
M11 -N,c7 M,. - N11 7
4225-6.1(1:>) v,. = 0.29).ft b,.d1 J 1 +~0, 29N 11

V, = 0, 93).fthwd 1 + J l;~ t.
v,. = 3.5). ft bwd [J 1 +-sN,,
-
OOA~
4225-7.1 Ve= 0. 17 ( l +
0.29N
~) J.ffcbwd 2: 0 v. = 0.53 ( 1 + 3:~.)Afthwd 2: 0 V, - z(1 + S Nu )Affcbwd 2: 0
. 00/ls
_ ( O.OSA ,ff. Vudp) v.d•)
Ve - fe. + 4 8 ~ b,.d V,. = ( 0. 16). ff.:
f;. + 4'1 V,.dp)
Mu b.,d V, = ( 0.6). ffc
t + 700~ bwd
422.5.8.2
v, :5 (o. os;.{fr + 4. 0)b,.d v,. :5 (0.16)./T;, + 49)b,.d V, 5 (0.6Alfc + 700)bwd
u. 17 A/T,,b.,11 ~ Ve 5 0. 42A ffcb..,tl. 0. 53).,ff,bwd ~ Vr :5 1. 33Affcbwd 2).Jf;bwd !;; V, !;; SAJT',,hwd
422.S 8,3.1.t V<i = 0. 05).
ft ViM,,.,
bwup + Vd + - - V,c = 0.16
~ V/tJ,,·,:
bwdp ·~Va+- - V«=0.6A
./1f.bwdv+Vd+--
V;Mt'r(:
Mmar 1''1,m,. Mm4X
422.5.8.J. Ih Vet ~ 0. 14J.fi:.bwd V,; = 0.45A.ffr.bwtl V,., = 1. 7).ffchwd
422 5.8 .l lc Mn-,= (~)(o. s ~ + t,.-f,i)
Y,
Mtt.,• = (f,) (1. 6Aft + { 1,, - f,1) Mm= ( ~) (6:tJf; + { 1,e - fd)
Yr
422.5.8.3,2 v,.. = (0.29)..ffc + 0.3f.,.)b.,d.,, + v.,, v,..., = (o. 93J.!fc + 11. 3/1.,)bwdp + v.,, V,w = (3. S).ft + 0.3f'w)b..,d1, + V1,
422.5.8.3.3 0 33).ft 11A/T:: 4J..ffc
422.5. I0.6,2a
422 .5. l 0.6.2b V, 5 0.25A.ffcb..,d V, 5 0. 8A.j7f:b,.d V., :5 3J..ffcbwd
422.(d. l ffi. 5 8 .3 in Ml'a 3. 11!.ft 5 27 in kgf!cm? .ff:~ 100 in psi
422.6.S.2(a) Vc=O.:n:i.ffc v,= 1.1Aft v. = 4;_.Jr:
422.<,.S.2(b) v, = o. 17 ( 1 + ; ) ).ff;, v, = o.sJ(1 +~)Aft v•. = (2+;)).m
422.6.5.2(c) Ve = 0. 083 ( 2 + a:.'') ;..ffc
ffi ~ !i. 8 in Mra

.
v•. = 0. 27 ( 2 + :·d) life v. ~ (2+ "t);.!f.:
3.18/f: 5 19 i11 kgl1c111' ffi.5 70 in psi
422.o.~5
0. 'l MPa 5 /'po 5 3. S Ml'• 9 kgf/cm 2 5 fr•
5 35 kgf/cm' 125 psi 5 f,. ~ !iOO psi
422.6.s.s. v, = (0. 29J.!fc + o.:ifrr.) + Vvf(b.d) v, = (0. 93Afi:.+0. 3f'!',) +V1,/(h0d) v< = (3.5).ft + 0.3/v,) + V11 /(b0d)
u,d) ).m
422.6.5.Sb
v, = 0. 01!3 ( 1.5 + ";") Aft
~o. :ifpr. + Vvf(b.a)

. v,. = 0. 27 ( 1.5 +
.
"/);.ffi.
+o. 3/pc + Vvf(l1.d)
(
Ve = 1. 5 + h.
+0.3/'11,. + Vp/(b0d)
f:
422,6.6. l(a), (b), (d) 0.17).,{f, 0.53J.,{f; 2i,,{f.

422.6.6.l(c) 0.'l.!i).ff, 0.80).ff, 3A./f',.
422.6.6.2(a) 0.5).,{f, l.6J.ft 6Aft
422.(i,(i.2(b) ,P0.66,ff. ,pz. tfi:. ,pa.ffc
422.6.lU (A;•) 2: 0.17.ffc~;.) (~) 2: 0.53fi:.~;J (~v) 2: 2.ffc ~y·,)
,P0.33.ffc <1>1.1ft ,P4ff,,
422.6.9. 1O
,po. ssfi:. ,f,1 .9ft ,p7ffr
422.6.1>.12 I ,po. JJ/T:: ,p1.1ffr. ,P4,{f,
422.7.2.l !f'r.5 8.3 inMPo ,ff; 5 27 in kgtlcm2 ff. 5100 in psi
422.7.4. l(nlM T,h < 0. 083A..fi'c p cp

().,, r,. < o. 21:tm(::;) <~(Azv)
T,,. P,~
422. 7.4. l(a)(b) T1h<O.OR3). J7{4~-) J
-
Pep
1+ f1ir~
0.33). h r,h < o.znffc(~~'')
cp ·
J1 + Jr.
fc
·rth < ,t,ff.c (r)
p r.p
Jl + .k_ 4).Jf:,
P J + A.,JN
Tr•< 0. Z7A,ff. (A;) J7::(pA~) J1+ 4A~).N.ff.le
11
422. 7.4.l(a)(c) T,• < 0. 083.l,ff.(:~) J 1 +
er
Nu .ff.
o. 33,1~). Jc .ff,,f,.
r.p
t T,•<A
cp
11
422.7.4. l(b)(n) r,. < o. oau.ff. (At)

-1.. ·r,h <0.27).ffc(Pep
A!) r,•< Aft ( AZ) P:
P,p
422.7.4.1lb)(b) r,.<0.083 ~(Pti:) J

.
.,,
1+ fp<~
0.33). f;
. m(A~)H
T,• < 0.27:I fe P,p ..ff', 1+ T,1, <4f'c (:c:)
422.7.4. l(h)(c) T,h < 0. 083..l J7::(ll!)j
p 1+
.,.
Nu .fH
0.33ils,l n 'I',•< 0.27).ft( A~) Pep
J1 + ~
AgA/T;..
T
rh
<A,_!_
,ff.
(pt12) Jt+--"-
•P 4,t,;.Jj;.
N
National Structural Cr.:de of the Phmppirws Volume I, lth Edition, 20·15

,1-20li CHAPH.R 4 · Structurnl Concret0
.,. 422.7.S.I (a) lf'.(p)

T,.. ~ O. 33.J.., f ,. Pc,, T., = (~)
J..fj;. P,,. T,., = 4J..ffr ( 11~,,)
- P,p
422.7.5.l(h) ·r" = 033J..fl[f~•) J•;-~

P,v o.:i:u ,fr~
T =d.ff:.(A;p)~
r., .tflf. ~ Pep T,, = 4J.. .ff:.(tl~P)
p J1 + 4,1fr,
cp
Jr.: f<
422.7 5.l{c) T" = O. J3J.. m(•)J

p
,~
I+ N. .{fr
0. 33A•,\ f'r
T"" = l.{f:. (/P)J1 + - -•-,
q,
N
A~,1/f;
T,. = 4l .ff:.(P)J
p
'P 1 + ~f , Nu
4 /IR,l
,-
V' (TP r s <1>(-2-+o.t,6.ff:.)

V y2C'Y ( v. f + (r.,. y (v, :s; 4> h.,d
.,d) + ~ ") + ~ rJi(-'
422.7.7.la v bwd 1. 7 A~1,
~ 1. ?A.h wd (-
b.,d l . 7A h
:s;
b,.d + 2,ff,.)
0
r(
+sm)
422.7.7.lb ( V• )
bwd
2(
+ 1'.P•
1.7A!h
V,
S (/1 b,..d+0.66 f~
(l . 3 + 0 OOI',) A,
ffc) V
(-")
bwd
+
2
(TPY
~
1. 7A h
{ 34
.S <1>(- r. + 2ffr)
0hwd
+ 0.08F,)A,
V f (
(bwd
v. + TuPu
1. ?A~h
r(
( 48-0 + 0 118/~)A,
V,
S </> hwd + S.{f;
·)
4 22.~.4.4(b), (c),
and (c)
UA, 11011,. J600A,
5.SA, SSA, 801111,
s = 380 ceo)
7': - 2. Sc, • = 38 (2800)
f , - 2. Sc, S = 15 - , - ,-
(40,000)
-2.5Cc
424.J.2
200)
.< = 300(7: $,...30 (2000) T s~ n('1oto)
Afp., S 250 MPa Af•• :s; 2500 kgf!cm' Af0 , :s; 36, 000 psi
424J.2.2
A/1., :s; 140 Ml'a A{•• :s; 1400 kgftcni2 A/,., :s; 20, 000 psi
0. 0018 x 420 0. 0018 x 4200 o. 0018 X 60, 000
424.4.3.2
{y l, {y
f, :s; 0.62,[F. I, :s; 2.fff !, :s; 1 . s.fff
0. 6Z[f; < f, S 1. off. 2../T; < /, :s; 3. 2../T;; 7. s ff.: < I, s 12../T;;
424.S.2.I
I,> 1.0/p; t, > 3.2-ffc I,> 12,!Fc
J, :s; o.5oF, f,:s;1. 6Ji: f,s6{r;,
424.53.1
o.so{r: 1.6F, 6F.
o.2sF, 0.8[,: 3[!:

424.4. 1.4 /1f :s; H. 3 MPa ff,$ 26.5 ki;f/cm 2
ff.~ 100 rsi
425.4.2.2 e =
(,,. ,p, t,.) ,, e. =( fyt/J,l/1.) d• . f = ({yl/Jtl/J•) d
d 2.H.fn b 6. 6-1.,fl;. d 25,1,ff. · •
425.4.2.3a
t = ___[z__ ,j,,1)1.tJi, d
d 1. tA,[f. (.......,) •
.,.
t - ___[z__ t/1,1/1.T/J. d
4
- 3. s;.ff. ('•;~··) ~ -~"'·"'·"'·d
t a - 40l ff.: ('•~:··) •
(0. 19{yt/lr) (0.06{yt/J,) (0. 016{y1/le) d

IF. ''•
---
425.4.4.2(a) - -- db
ff. ff, b
42S.4.6.3(a) (fy;y240) ('y-,:460) ('y - ;:·000)
42S.4.6.3(b) :u(-1L)(~)
l .fF. s Cft)(~) o.z,(-1L)C•)
A.[F,, s
4 2S.4.8. I (a) ('")d
21 b + (''" 7+
1
··)d h e··)" +('p· +'..
210 ' 70 )d• (-fu·}
3000 •
+(lr,+1,~)d
100(1 •
42S.4.9.2(a) (°.24{y) d
A.{fl h
(0. 0.75{y)d
l..{H b
( {y )c16
SOlff.
42S.4.9.2{b) ( o. 04Jf,)d. ( 0.0044f,)d. ( o. ooo3f,,)d.
0.071/'ydh 0.0073fydb O.OOOS{ydb
42.5 ..5.S. l(o) and (h)
(0.13{y - 24)11. (0.013{,.- 24)111, (0. 0009{,. - 24)d.
4 2S.7. I .3(b) 0. 17 " •',· U.053d•f,.. 0.014d. f ,.,

A,ffi l ,ff. A..{H
425.7.J.7 A•fyt :s; 40,000 N A•fr, :s; 4000 kllf Ab{y, $ 9000 lh
425.9.4.5.1 r,...=r.. +10 ,,,, = t .. + 700 {p, = {.., + 10, 000
426.12.S.I 0.62.ff,, 2.ff. 7.sm
Association of Structurnl Engineers of !he Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

NSCP C101-15
,r
Chapters
STRUCTURAL STEEL

VOLUME I

Tel. No.: (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@~mail.com

CHAPTER 5 - Structuial Steel 5-1
Table of Contents
PART 1 - SPECIFICATION FOR STEl!:L M~MBERS ................................................................................................... 5-11
SYMBOLS............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-11
Dl!:FINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5- l 9
SECTION 501 - GENERAL PROVISIONS....................................................................................................................... 5-35
501.1 Scupc ................................................................................. .... .................................................................... ................. 5-35
501.2 Referenced Specifications, Codes and Standards....................................................................................................... 5-35
501.3 !vlaterial .......................................................................................................................... ......................... ................... 5-38
501.4 Structural Design Drawings and Spccilications .................................... ........ .............................................. ............... 5-40
SECTION 502 - DESIGN Rl!:QUIRKl\ifENTS ................................................................................................................... 5-40
502.1 General Provisions ................................................ .. ....... .............. ............................... ..................... .. ....... ................. 5-40
502.2 Loads and Load Comhinatiuns................................ ...................................... ................................... ........... .. ............. 5-40
502.3 Design Basis................................... ....................... .,............... .... .. ....... .......... ...................................... ........................ 5-40
502.4 Classification ofScetions for Local Buckling ......... ..................................... .............................................................. 5-42
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control ...................... .............. .......................................................................... ... 5-46
502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures...................................................... ............. ...............................: .. ············ ........ ..... . 5-46
SECTION 503 - STABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESI.GN ............................................................................................... 5-47
503.1 Stability Design Requireinents ...................................... ....... .............. .......... ................. .............................................. 5-47
503.2 Calculation of Required Strengths .............................................................................. ..................... .......................... 5-48
SECTION 504- DESIGN 01<' MEMBERS FOR TENSION ............................................................................................ 5-51
504.1 Slenderness Limitations ... ....................................... ....... .............. ...................................................... ...................... .. 5-51
504.2 Tensile Strength .................................... .......... ...................................... ......... .............. ...................... ...................... .. 5-5!
504.3 Area Detennination ............. .................... .............. .............. .................................... ................... ............... .... ......... .. .. 5-5 I
504.4 Built-up Members ................................................................................................... .......... ... .................·...................... 5-52
504.5 Pin-Connected Memhcrs ................................................................................: ........................................................... 5-52
504.6 Eycbars .... ....... ..................................................... ................ .................................... ................................................... 5-52
SECTION 505- DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION ................................................................................. 5-55
505.1 General Provisions ......................................................... .............. ...... ..................... .. .... ....... .......................... ............ 5-55
505.2 Slenderness Limitations and Effective Length ...... .. ....... .................... .... ................... ...... .......... .............. ................... 5-55
505.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of Members Without Slender Elements ....... ...................................... 5-55
505.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members without Slender Elements ....... 5-55
505.5 Single Angle Compressi~m Membcrs .................... .............................................................................. ....................... 5-56
505.6 Built-up Me1nbers ........................................................ .............................................................................................. 5-57
505.7 Members with Slender Elements ............ ............... .............................................................. ....................................... 5-59
SECTION 506 - DESIGN OF Mfi'.M.BERS FOR FLEXURE ........................................................................................... 5-62
506.1 General Provisions ........................................................... .............. ........... .. .............. ........... ........... .. :........................ 5-62
506.2 Douhly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about their Major Axis .................................. 5-64
506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Compact Webs and Noncompact or Slender Flanges Bent about their
Major Axis ............................................................ ............................................. ........................... ....................... ...... 5-65
506.4 Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent about their Major Axis ...... ............................ 5-65
506.5 Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bent about their Major Axis .... 5-67
506.6 I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about their Minor Axis ........................................................................... ...... 5-68
506.7 Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-shaped Members........................................................................................... 5-68
506.8 Round I ISS .............. ......................................................... ...................................... ........ .................... ......... ............... 5-69
506.9 Tees and Oouhle Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry ...................................................................................... 5-69
Association of Structural Engineers of tt1e Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

5-2 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
506.10 Single Angles ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-70

.· 506.1 I Rectangular .Bars and Rounds ............................... ...... .................................................................... ...........................5-71
• 506.12 Unsymmetrical Shapes ......................... ........ .............. ............... ........................ ............................................. ............ 5-72
506.13 Proportions of Hearns and Girders ........................................................................... .. .... ............................................ 5-72
S~CTION 507 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR .................................................................................................5-74
507.1 General Provisions .............................................................. ...................................... ................................................ .5-74
507 .2 Members with Unstiffoncd or Stiffened Wchs ................................................................................................... ....... .5- 74
507.3 Tension Field Action .......................................................................................................................... ........................5-75
507.4 Single Angles ................................................................... ............................................ ........................................... .. .5-76
507.5 Rectangular HSS and Hox Metnbers ......................................................................................... ...................... ........... 5-76
507.6 Round HSS ..................... .............. ....................................................... .......................................... .......................... ... 5-76
507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly Symmetric Shapes ........................................................ .............................. 5-76
507 .8 Beams and Girders with W cb Openings ........................................... ......... ................................ ...................... ........ ... 5-76
SECTION 508- DESIGN OF MKMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCF,S AND TORSION ..........................................5-77
508.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Memhcrs Subject to Flexure and Axial Force...................... ................ ..................... 5-77
508.2 Unsymmetric and other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force........................................................ .............. 5-78
508.3 Members under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force .................... ............ .............. 5-79
SF,CTION 509 - DESIGN OF COMPOSITE l\fEl\'IBERS ................................................................................................5-81
509.1 General Provisions .............................................................................. .............................. ............................... .......... 5-81
509.2 Axial Memher:, .......................................................................................... ................. .................. ...... ..... ................... 5-8.l
509.3 Flexural Mcmbers .......................................................................................................................................................5-84
509.4 Flexural Strength of Concrete-Encased and Filled Memhers ....................................................... .. ........................... .5-88
509.5 Combined Axial Force and Flexure ........................................... ............................................................................. .... 5-88
509.6 Special Cases .................................................................................................. .. ................ .......................................... 5-88
SECTl'ON 510 - DESIGN <>F CONNECT.IONS ................................................................................................................5-89
510.1 General Provisions .......... ....................... ........... .. ............. .......................................................................................... 5-89
510.2 Welds .......................................................................... .... ....................................... .............................. ............. .......... 5-90
510.3 Bolts and Threaded Parts ..................................................................................................... ....................................... 5-98
510.4 Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements ........................................................... .. .. .......·............... 5- !02
510.5 Fillers.......................................................................................... .. .. ............. ........ :....................................................5-103
5 J0.6 Splices ................................................................................................................. .. ....... .................. ......... ................. 5- l 04
510.7 Bearing Strcngth..............................................................."......................... .... .......................................................... .5-104
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete .................... .... ....... .............. ................ ............................. ......... ............... 5-104
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedments .............................. .... .............................. ........................................ ................ ........5- I 04
510.10 Flanges and Webs with Concentrated forces .......... ................ ... ..............................................................................5-105
SECTION 511 - DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MF,M BER CONNECTJONS ...............................................................5·109
S11.1 Concentrated Forces on HSS ................................................... ....................... .. ........................................................ 5- l 09
511.2 HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections .......................... ................ .... ....... ....... ......................................... .......................... 5-l 1 l
511.3 HSS-to-HSS Mon1ent Connections ....................... ......................................... ................................. ...... .. .... ........ ..... 5-l 18
SECTION 512 - DES.IGN FOR SRRVICEABILITY ...................................................................................................... 5-122
512.l General Provisions .............. ................ ................................................................................ ..................................... 5-122
512.2 Camber ...................................... ........................................................................ ........... .. .. ........................ ................ 5-122
512.3 Dellections ............................ ... ........................... .................................... .. ............................................................... 5- I22
512.4 l)rift .......................................... .......................................... .............. ................... ..................................................... 5- 123
512.5 Vibration... ................................................ .................................. ...... ........................................................................ 5-123
512.6 Wind-InducedMotion ................... .......................... ................... ................................. ............................................. 5-123
512. 7 Expansion and Contraction............ ........................ .................................................................................... ...... ......... 5-123
512.8 Connection Slip ...................... .......................... ..................................... ........... ........................... .............. ...............5-123
--
CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel 5-3
SECTION 513 - FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................ 5-123

513.1 Shop and Erection Drawings ..................... ............................................................................................................... 5-123
513.2 Fabrication ......................................................................................................... ...................................................... 5- 123
513.3 Shop Painting ..................................................... ................ ............. .........................................................................5- l 25
513.4 Ercction .................................................................... .............................................. .......................................... ........ 5-125
513.5 QualityConlrol ...................................................................................... ................. .. ......... .... .................................. 5-126
APPENDIX A- INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESlGN .............................................................................................. 5-126
A-1.1 General Provisions ......................... ...................................................................................................... .............. ...... 5-126
A-1.2 Materials ................................................. ......................................................... ........................................................ 5-126
A-1.3 Moment Rcdistrihution .......................................................................................... .......... ................ ..... ................... 5-126
A- I .4 Local Buckling ........ ................................................................................................................................................. 5-126
A-1.5 Stability and Second-Order Effects .............................. .................. ...................................... ................... ................. 5-127
A-1.6 Columns and Other Compression Members ............................................................................................................ 5-127
A-1.7 Beams and Other Flexural Members ................................................................................................................ ........ 5-128
A-1.8 Members under Co1nbinc<l Forces ...................................... ..................................................................................... 5-128
A-1.9 Connections ......... ............ ......................................................................................................................................... 5-128
APPENDIX A-2- DESIGN FOR PONDING................................................................................................................... 5-129
A-2.1 Simplified Design ior Ponding .......... ...................................... .............. ................................................................... 5-129
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding ................... - ............. ........ ................................................................ ......... ............... 5-129
APPENDIX A-3 • DESIGN FOR FATIGUE ................................................................................................................... 5-130
A-3. I General Provisions ......... ......................... ............. ............... .............. ....................................................................... 5-130
A-3.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges ...... ................................................................ ........................ 5-130
A-3.3 Design Stress Range ......................................................................... .. ....... ................. .............................................. 5-131
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts ................................. ..................... ........................................................... ........................ 5-132
A-3.5 Special Fabrication and Erection Requirements ................................... ........................ ............................. .............. 5-132
APPENDIX A-4 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS ..................................................................... 5-147
A-4.1 General Provisions .. ..... ...................................... .......... .. ...................................................... .............. ......... ............. 5-147
A-4.2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions hy Analysis ................................................................... .............: ................. 5-147
A-4.3 Design by Qualification Testing ............................................................................................... ....... .............. ...... .... 5-150
APPF,NDIX A-5 - EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES.............................................................................. 5-151
A-5.l General Provisions ........................... .................... .................................................................................................... 5-151
A-5.2 Material Properties ..... ........................................................... ............................................. ........... ........................... 5-151
A-5.3 Evaluation by Structural Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 5-151
A-5.4 Evaluation by Load Tests ................................................................................. ......................................... .............. . 5-152
A-5.5 Evaluation Report ........................ .................................................................... .. ...................................................... 5-152
APPENDIX A-6 - STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND B~AMS .............................................................. 5-153
A-6. L General Provisions .. .............................................. ......... ......................................................................... .. ............... 5-153
A-6.2 Columns ........ ...... .................................... ......................... ....................................... ................................................. 5-153
A-6.3 Beams ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-153
APPENDIX A-7 - DIRECT ANALYSIS l\ilETHOD ....................................................................................................... 5-156
A-7.1 General Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 5-156
A-7.2 Notional Loa<ls ....... .... ......................... ..... ............ ..... ......... ... ........... ......................... ........................... ."............. ...... 5-156
A-7 .3 Design-Analysis Constraints ........................ ....... .. .... ..... ...... .................... ................................... ..... .... .................... 5-156

5-4 CHAPTER 5 - Structun=ll Steel
PART 2A- SE ISMIC PROV ISION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ................................................. ...... 5-157
SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................................................................................,...5-157
PART2B
SECTION 514 -STRUCTURAL STEEL BlJILDING PROVISIONS .......................................................................... 5-160
514.l Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-!60
SEC'fION 515 · REFERENCED SPRCIFICATIONS, C ODl!:S, ANO STANDARDS .................................................5-161
SECTION 516 - G ENERAL SEJSMJC DESIGN REQUIRi:MENTS ........................................................................... 5-161
SECTION 517 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS..............................................5-162
517. l Loads and Load Combinations .......... ....................................................................................................................... 5-l 62
517 .2 No1ninal Strength ... .................... ....................................................................................................... ....................... 5- 162
SF:CTlON 518 - STRUCTlJRAL DESIGN ORAWINGS AND SPECIFICAT IONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND
E RECTION DRA WINGS ..................................................................................................................................................5-162
518. l Structural Design Drawings and Spccilications ......... .... ....................................... ................................................... 5- l 62
518.2 Shop Drawings ............................................................................. ......................................... ........ ..................... ...... 5-163
518.3 Erection Drawings ............................................................................................................................ ........................ 5- I 63
SECTION 519 - MATF.RIALS .......................................................................................................................................... 5-163
519.l Material Spccifications ................ .......................................... .......................................................... ......................... 5-163
519.2 Material Properties for Determination of Required Strength of Members and Connections.................................... 5-163
519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 5-164
SECTION 520 - CONNECT IONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS .................................................................................5-165
520.l Scope .......... ....................................................................................................................................... .......................5-165
520.2 Floltcd Joints .......................................................................................................................................................... ... 5-165
520.3 Welded Joints ....... ........ ............................................................................................................................................ 5-1 65
520 .4 Protected Zone ................................................... ...................................................................................... ......... ........ 5-166
520.5 Continuity Plates and Stilfeners .......................................... ...................... ............................................................... 5-166
SF,CTION 521 - MEMBERS.......................................................................................: ......................................................5-167
521. I Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-167
521.2 Classification of Sections for Local Huckling .......................................................................................................... 5-167
521 .3 Column Strength ...... .................... .......................................................... ...................... ........... ................................. 5- !69
521.4 Colu1nn Splices .............................................................................................. ..........................................................5-169
521.5 Column Dases ........................................................................................................................................................... 5- I 69
521.6 II-Piles ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-170
SECTION A.- MOM.E NT FRAMR SYSTEMS...............................................................................................................5-171
Sli:CTION A.3 · SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) ................................................. ............................................... 5-171
522.l Scope ................................. .... ............................................. ............. ......................................................................... 5- 17!
522.2 Beam-to-Column Connections ......................................................................................................... ................. ....... 5- 171
522.3 Panel 7..onc of Beam-to-Column Connections (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web) .............................................5-172
522.4 Beam and Colu1nn Limitations ................................................................................................................................. 5- l 72
522 .5 Continuity Plates ..... ...... ................. ..... ............ ....... ............ .............................. .... .................................................... 5-l 72
522.6 Colmnn-Beam Mo1nent Ratio ...... ........................... ......................................... ......................................... ............... 5-173
522. 7 Lateral Dracing at Beam-to-Column Connections ................................................................................................... 5- I 74
522.8 Lateral Bracing of Beams .................. .................... ......... .......................................................................................... 5-174
522.9 Column Splices ......... ....... ....... ....................... ........ ................................................................... - ............................ .5-l 74
-
5-6 CHAPTER 5 - S tructu ral S teel
528.9 Protected Zone.............................. ......... .............. ..................................................... ................................. ......... ...... 5- l 87

,1528.10 Demand Critical Welds ........................... ......................................................... ................................ ...... .................. 5-187
SECTION B.4- BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) ...............................................................5-187
529.1 Scope ........................ ....... .........................._......................................................................................................... ...... 5-1 87
529.2 Bracing Members ... .. ........................................................... ............. ....................... .... ............................................. 5- 187
529.3 Bracing Connections ............................................................................... ..... ............................................................ 5- I88
529.4 Special Req uirements ..................................................................................................................... ..........................5-189
529.S Beams and Colmuns ................................................................................................................................................. 5-l 89
529 .6 Protected Zone..................................................................... ........................ ..................... ..... ........... ............. ...........5- 189
SECTION B.5 -SPECIAL PLATE SHl!:AR WALLS (SPSW).....................................................................................5-190
530.1 Scopc ......................................................................................................................... ...............................................5- l 90
530.2 Webs ....... .. ... .. ............. ....................................... ..... ............................................ .............. ....... ................ ................. 5- l 90
530 .3 Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements ............................................. ..................... ......................................... 5 -190
530.4 Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements .................................... ................ ................ ........................................ 5-190
SECTION C. - COMPOSITE MOMENT-FRAME SYSTEMS .................................................................................... 5-171
SECTION C.l - COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) ............................................................... 5-171
SECTION C.2 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-SCBF)..........................5-171
SECTION C.3 - COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) ....., ............................................ 5-171
SECTION C.4 - COMPOSITE ORDINARY SHEAR WALLS (C-OSW) ................................................................... 5-171
SECTION C.5 - COM POSITE SPECIAL SHEAR WALLS (C-SSW) .........................................................................5-171
SECTION C.6 - COMPOSITE PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-PSW) ............................................................................. 5-171
SECTION 531-QUA.LITY ASSURANCE PLAN........................................................................................................... 5-191
531 . 1 Scope ....................................................................... ................................................................... .... ..........................5-19 1
B-1. PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTlONS ............... 5-192
B-1 .l Scopc ......................................................................... ...................................... ...... ............ ................. ... ................... 5-192
B-1.2 General Requirements .................................................................................... ......: ...................................................5- I 92
B-1 .3 Tcsling Requircments ............................................................................................................................................... 5-192
B- 1.4 Prequalilication ·variables ............................ ............................. ............................................................................... 5- 192
B-1.5 Design Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................... 5- 193
B-1 .6 Prequalification Record ......................... ................ ....... ............................................................................................ 5- I93
8-2. QUAL(TY ASSURANCE PLAN .............................................................................................................................. 5-194
.R-2.1 Scope .............. .............................. ................................................ ........................................................... ................. 5- l 94
B-2.2 lnspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel......................................................:............................ ................. 5- 194
B-2.3 Contractor D()cuments .............................................................................................................................................. 5-194
B-2.4 Quality Assurance Agency Documcnts ............................................................................................................. ....... 5- I 94
B-2.5 Inspection Points and Frequencies .......................... ................ ..... .. ..... ............................. ... ..................................... 5-195
B-3. SEISMIC DESIGN COEFF(CIENTS AND APPROXIMATE PERIOD PARAMETERS .................................5-199
B-3.l Scope .................................................................................................................................................................. ......5- 199
B-3.2 Symhols .... ...................................................................................................................... ................ ......................... .5- 199
B-4. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONN l£CTIONS ...5-200
8-4.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................................................... .5-200
B-4.2 Symbols ............. ......................... .............................................................................................................................. 5-200
B-4.3 Definitions .................................. ................................................................ ............................................................. .5-200
B-4.4 Test Subasscmblage Requirements ...................................... ............................................ ........................... ............. 5-200
B-4.5 Essential Test Variables ...... ......................................................... ............................................................................ 5-201
8-4.6 Loading History.............................................................................................................................................. .......... 5-202
Association of S tructural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5.7
D-4.7 Instrumentation ........ ... ................................................................................................................................. ........... . 5-203

ll-4.8 Materials ·resti ng Requirements ................................................................................................................. ........ ..... 5-203
A-4.9 Test Reporting Requirements .................................................................................................................... ..... .......... 5-203
A-4.10 Acceptance Criteria .................... ........................................................................... .... ....... ............................... ......... 5-204
R-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS 01" BUCKLINC-RESTRA JN F,D BRACES ..................................................... 5-205
B-5.1 Scope .............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 5-205
8-5.2 Symhols ..... ............................ .................. ......................................................................................................... ........ 5-205
B-5.3 Definitions ........................................................................................................................................... ....... .... ........ . 5-205
A-5.4 Subassen1blage Test Specimen ... ............ .................................. ............................................................................... 5-205
A-5.5 Brace Test Speciinen .................................... ............................................. ................................ .. ............................. 5-206
B-5.6 Loading History ...... ......... ......................................................................................... .................................. .. ........... 5-206
8-5.7 Instrumentation .......... .... ..... .. .... ... ... .......... ... ............................................................................................................ 5-207
H-5.8 Materials Testing Requirements ............................................................... ......................... ...................................... 5-207
B-5.9 Test Reporting Requirements ....... .. ...................... .................................................... ........................................ ........ 5-207
A-5.10 Acceptant:c Criteria .... ... ................................................................................................................................ .... ..... .. 5-208
R-6. Wl:!:LDING PROVISIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 5-208
B-6. l Scope ........ ................. ... ............... ................ ..... ............ .. .............................................................. ............................ 5-208
B-6.2 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications, Shop Ornwings, and Erection Drawings ................... .. ................. 5-208
13-6.3 Personnel ............... .............. .............................. ................................................. ...................................................... 5-209
H-6.4 Nondestructive ·resting Procedures .............. .. .............. ......................................... ......................... .................. ........ 5-209
D-6.5 Additional Welding Provisions ..................................................................... ..... .......................................... ............ 5-2 IO
B-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand Critical Welds Only ................... ........................................................ 5-210
B-7 WELD METAL/WELDING PROCfWURE SPECIFICATION NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIF'ICATION
Tlf.ST .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-211
H-7 .1 Scope ............................................................ ................................. ................... .. ...................................................... 5-2 11
B-7.2 Test Condit ions ............................................ ...................................... ............................. .................................... ...... 5-21 2
B-7.3 TcstSpeci1ncns ............................................... ............................. ............... ....... .......... ......... ........ .... .......... ..... ........ 5-21 2
8-7.4 Acceptance Criteria ................. ......... ......... ..... .................................................. .............. .................. ........... ....... ...... 5-21 2
PART 2B - COMPOSIT~ STRUCTURAL STE.EL ANO REINFORCED CONCRETE RUILDINGS; ................... 5-213
SECl'JON 532 - SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-213
SECTION 533 - Rl!:FF.RENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODl!':S, AND STANDARDS ................................................ 5-213
SF.CTION 534 - GENF.RAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMF.NTS ........................................................................... 5-214
SECTION 535 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOM LNAL STRENGTHS ............................................. 5-214
535. l Loads and Load Comhinations .......................................................................................................... ......... ............. 5-214
535.2 Nominal Strength ....... ...... ......... ........ ........................ ......................................... ........................... ........................... 5-2 14
SECTION 536 - MATERIALc.; .......................................................................................................................................... 5-215
536.1 Structural Steel ............................................................. ............................... ..................................................... ...... .. 5-21 5
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforce1nent ........................................................................................................................... 5-2 15
SECTION 537 - COMPOSITI<: MEM'Bfi:RS .................................................................................................................... 5-21 5
537. 1 Scope ................ ................ ........................................................... ............................................................................. 5-215
537.2 Composite 'Flooran<l Roof Slabs ............................................................................................................................. 5-215
537 .3 Composite Beams .......................... ......................................... ................. ................................. ........................... .... 5-2 15
537.4 Encased Composite Columns ................................................................................................................................... 5-215
537.5 Filled Con1positc Colu1nns ...... ............ .... ....... .... ...................................................................................................... 5-2 18
SECTION 538 - COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 5-218
538. 1 Scope ......... ..... ........... ...................................................................... ................... .............. ............. ........................... 5-218
538.2 General Requirements ......................... ..................................................................................................................... 5-218
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 20 15

538.3 Nominal Strength of Connt:clions ........................................................................... .. ................ ............ .. ................. 5-2 I8

•·· SECTION 539-COMPOSffE PARTIALl,Y RESTRAINU> (PR) MOMENT FRAMES (C-PRMF) ...................5-220
539.1 Scope ................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 5-220
539.2 Columns ............................ ....................................................................................................................................... 5-220
539.3 Composite Beams ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-220
539.4 Moment Connections ........ ....................................................................................................................................... 5-220
SECTION 540 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOM~NT FRAMES (C-SMF) .................................................................. 5-220
540.1 Scope ..................................................................... ................................................ .................................................. .5-220
540.2 Columns ........................................ ........................................................................................................................... 5-220
540.3 Beams .................................................................... ........ ........................................ ................................................... 5-220
540.4 Moment Connections ..................... .... .............................................. ... ...................................................... ............... 5-221
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio .... .................................................................. ............................................ .. ..............5-221
SECTlON 541 -COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMF,NT FRAMES (C-IMF) .................................................... 5-221
541. l Scope ........................................................................................................................................... .............. ............... 5-22 I
541.2 Columns .......................................'. ...................... ..... .. ......... ................. .............................................................. ......5-221
541.3 .Reams .......................................................................................................................... ....................................... ...... 5-22 I
541.4 :tv1oment Connections ................................... .............................. ...................... ........................................................ 5-221
SECTION 542 - COMPOSlTE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (C-OMF) ............................................................ 5-222
542.1 Scope ................................. ............................................... .......... .................... ............................................. ............. 5-222
542.2 Columns ............................. ............................................................................ ............. ............................................. 5-222
542.3 Bean1s ................................. ................................... ..:................. ............. ,-.......................... ........... .. ................... ...... 5-222
542.4 Mmncnl Connections ...... ....................................... ................................................... ..... .................................... ...... 5-222
SECTION 543 -COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRJCALLY BRACED FRAM~S (C-CBF) .............................5-222
543. l Scope ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-222
543.2 Columns ................................ ............... ......................................... ........................................................................... 5-222
543.3 Beai.ns .......................... .......................... ......................................................: .................... ........................................ 5-222
543.4 Braces ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-222
543.5 Connections .................................................. .......................................................................................... :................. 5-222
SECTION 544 - COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES ({>OBF)................................................................5-223
544.1 Scope ....................................................... ....... .. ................................................... ..................................................... 5-223
544.2 Columns ........................................................................................................... ......................... .............................. .5-223
544.3 Hearns ............................................................................... ......................................................................................... 5-223
544.4 Braces ............................................................................... ........................................................................................ 5-223
544.5 Connections ..................................................................................... .......... ....... ............................ .................... ....... .5-223
SECTION 545 - COMPOSIT~ ECCENTRICALLY BRACIW 'FRAMES (C-RBF) ................................................... 5-223
545.1 Scope .............................. .................. ..... ....................... .....,. ............................................................,.......................... 5-223
545.2 Coluntns ................................................ ......... ... ........................................... ...... ...................................................... 5-223
545.3 Links ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-223
545.4 Hraccs ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-224
545.5 Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-224
SECTION 546 - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMEN'l'S (C-ORC\:V) ...................................................................................................................................5-224
546.1 Scope ...................................................... ........... ................. ................. ......... .... ............ ............................................ 5-224
546.2 Boundary Me1nbers ............ ............................... ....................... ....................... ............... .................... ...................... 5-224
546.3 Steel Coupling Beams ........... ................................ ...................................................... ............................................. 5-225
546.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams .................... ........................................... ........... ............................. ................ 5-225

CHAI-' 11:::'.R ~i Structur<ir Steel 5-9
Sl<:CTION 547 - SP~CIAL REINFORCEl) CO.'.'ICRF:TF.. SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL El ,EM~N'l'S (C-SRC:W) ...................................................................................................................................... 5-225
547.J Scopc .............................................................................................. -......................................................................... 5-225
547.2 Boundary l'vlembers .................................................................................................................................................. 5-225
547.3 Steel Coupling Reams ..................................................................................................................................... ......... 5-226
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Hearns ................................ ...................................................................................... 5-226
SECTION 548 -COMPOSITE STF.F,I. PLATE SHEAR WAIJ,S (C-SPW) ............................................................... 5-226
548.1 Scope ........................ ............................................................. ......... ................................................ ...................... .... 5-226
548.2 Wall F.leinents .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-226
548.3 Roundary Membcrs ....... ............................................................................................ ........................................... .... 5-227
548.4 Openings ................................................................................................................... ............................................... 5-227
S~CTION 549- STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINCS ANO SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND
F,RECTION DRA WINGS.................................................................................................................................................. 5-227
SRCTI.ON 550 - QUALITY ASSURA:'llCE Pl,AI\ ..........................................................................................................5-228
PART 3- DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MF:MRF.RS ........................................................ 5-228
SY:VIBOLS........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-228
Sf.CTlON 551 - (;:EN~RAI. PROVISIONS..................................................................................................................... 5-235
551.1 Scope, Applicability and Definitions ..... .......... ..................................... ................................................................... 5-235
551.2 Material ......................................................................................................................... ................................ ........... 5-236
551.3 Loads ..................................................................... ,........ ........ ................................................................ ....... ........... 5-238
551.4 Allowable Strength Design ............................................................ .......................................................................... 5-238
551.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design .......................................................................................................... ............... 5-239
551.7 Yield Stress and Strength Jncrease from Cold Work of Fonning ...... .............................. ........................................ 5-239
551.8 Serviceability ................................................................................................. .... ........ ................................... ........... 5-240
551.9 Referenced Documents ......................... ................................................................... .............. ....................... ........... 5-240
SECTION 552 - 1!:LF,MF,NTS ............................................................................................................................................ 5-242
552.1 Dimensional Limits and Considerations ... ............................................................................................,... ............... 5-242
552.2 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements .......................................................... .-........................................................ 5-243
552.3 Etlcctive Widths ofUnsliffencd Elements ............................................................................................................... 5-248
552.4 Effective Wi<llh oflJniformly Compressed Elements with a Simple Lip Edge StiJlener. ....................................... 5-251
522.5 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements with Single or Multiple Intenm:diate Stiffeners or Edge Stiffened Elements
with Intermediate Stiffener(s) ............ ............................................................ ............................ .......................... .... 5-253
Sli:CTION 553 -1\'IKMBF:RS ............................................................................................................................................. 5-255
553.1 Properties of Sections .............................................. :................................................................................................ 5-255
553.2 Tension Members ............................................ ............................................... .......................................................... 5-255
553.3 Flexural Nlembers ........................................... ................................................................. ........................................ 5-255
553.4 Concentrically Loaded Compression Members ............................... .. ....... ......................................................... : ..... 5-273
553.5 Combined Axial Load and Rending ............................................................ .. .......................................................... . 5-277
SECTION 554- STRUCTURAi, ASSE!VIBLIESAND SYSTEMS ...........................................................,.................... 5-280
554.1 Built-Up Sections ............................................................. .................................................................. ......... ............. 5-280
554.2 Mixed Systeins ................................................................................. .................................. ...................................... 5-282
554.3 Lateral and Stability Bracing ...................................................... ................ ................................................ ............. 5-282
554.4 Cold-Fonm:<l Steel Light-Frame Construction........................................................................................ .. ............... 5-284
554.5 Floor, Roof, or Wall Steel Diaphragm Construction ...................................... .......................................................... 5-284
554.6 Metal Roof' and Wall System ............. ......................................................................... ..... ........................... ............. 5-285
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ?th Edition, 2015
-. , - -- -1
SECTION 555 - CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS ............................................................................................................5-291

,r 555.I General Provisions ....... ............ ........................................................................................................ ...... ............. .. ... 5-291
555.2 Welded Connections........... ...................................................................................................................................... 5-291
555.3 Bolted Connection .. .............. ... ............ .... ... .................... ..... ......... .. ..... ....... ... ........... ... .. ............................... .......... ..5-299
555.4 Screw Connections ..................... .................... .............. ...................................................................................... ...... 5-301
555.5 Rupture ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-304
55 5.5 Connecting to Other Materials ..................................................... ...... ..... ............. ........... ... ......... ..... ........... ............. 5-304
SECTION 556 - TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES ............................................................................................................5-304
556. l Tests for Determining Structural Pcrformance ............. ........................................................................................... .5-304
556.2 Tests for Confinning Structural Performance .......................................................................................................... 5-307
556.3 Tests for Determining Mechanical Properties ..........................................................................................................5-307
SECTION 557 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBILRS AND CONNECTIONS FOR
CYCLIC LOADING (FATIGUE) .....................................................................................................................................5-308
557.J General ......................................... ........................................................................................................................... .5-308
557.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges ........................................................ .............................. ........ 5-310
557.3 Design Stress Range ............................................................................................... .................... ............... ............... 5-310
557.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts ................... , ................................................... .................................................................. .5-310
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements ........................................... .. ............................................................................... 5-3 l l
SECTION C-1 • DESIGN OF COLD-FOR.MED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS USING THE DIRECT
STRENGTH METHOD ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-311
C-1 Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members Using the Direct Strength Method ........................................... 5-3 I l
SECTION C-2 - SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS ........ ._ ........................... ._. ........................................................- .......... 5-318
C.2.1 General Require1nents .................................................. ............................................................................................. 5-3 18
C.2.2 Design and Analysis Constraints ............. ..................................... ........................................... ................................. 5-318
SECTION C3 - ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................................ 5-319
C.3.J Scope ........................................................................................................ ................................................................ 5-3 l 9
C.3.2 Other Steels .. ...... ......... ............... ............. ..................................... ............................................................................ 5-319
C.3.3 Loads ... ....................................................................................... .........................:.................................................... .5-31 9
C.3.4 Referenced Documents .............................................................................................................................................5-319
C.3. 5 Tension Members .. ....... .............. .... ........................... ............ .. ................................................................................. 5-340
C.3.6 Light-Frame Steel Construction ................................................... ............................................................................ 5-320
C.3.7 Welded Connections.................................................................................................................................................5-321
C.3.8 Bolted Connections ........................... ....................................................................................................................... 5-322
C.3.9 Rupture .................................................................................. ....... ................ ........................... ................................. 5-327
,........
This Chapter includes the following: PART!

Part 1 Specification for Steel Members SPEC114,ICATION FOR STEEL
MEMBERS
Appendix A
Part 2A Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

SYMBOLS
A Column cross-sectional area, mm2
Appendix B
Total cross-sectional area of member,
mm2
Part 28 Seismic Provisions for Composite Structural Steel
Loaded area of concrete, mm2
and Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Cross-sectional area of the base metal,
2
mm
Part 3 Specifications for Design of Cold-Fonned Steel
Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or
Structural Members
threaded part, mm2
Cross-sectional area of the overlapping
Appendix C branch, mm2
Cross-sectional area of the overlapped
branch, mm2
Area of concrete, mm2
Area of concrete slab within effective
width, mm2
Area of an upset rod based on the major
thread diameter, mm2 ·
Effective net area, mm2
Summation of the effective areas of the
cross section based on the reduced
effective width, be, mm2
Ate Area of compression flange, mm2
Afg Gross tension flange area, mm2
Atn Net tension flange area, mm2
Att Area of tension flange, m·m2
Ag Gross area of member, mm2
Ag Gross area of section based on design wall
thickness, mm2
Ag Gross area of composite member, mm2
Ag Chord gross area, mm2
Agv Gross area subject to shear, mm2
An Net area of member, mm2
Ant Net area subject to tension, mm2
Anv Net area subject to shear, mm2
Apb Projected bearing area, mm2
Ar Area of adequately developed longitudinal
reinforcing steel within the effective width
of the concrete slab, mm2
Area of steel cross section, mm2
Cross-sectional area of stud shear
connector, mm2
Shear area on the failure path, mm2
Area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2
Stiffener area, mm2
Net tensile area, mm2

Web area, the overall depth times the web D Outside diameter, mm
.. =
thickness, dtw, mm
2
Effective area of the weld, mm 2

D Outside diameter of round HSS mam
member, mm
Effective area of weld throat of any ith Chord diameter, mm
weld element, mm2 = Outside diameter of round HSS branch
Area of sleet concentrically bearing on a member, mm
concrete support, mm 2 Factor used in F.q. 507.3-3, dcpcn<lcnl on
Maximum area of the portion of the the type of transverse stilleners used in a
supporting surface that is gcumctrically plate girder
similar to and concentric with the lua<led In slip-critirnl connections, a multiplier
area, mm 2 that rcilects the ratio of the mean installed
B Overall width of rectangular hollow bolt pretension to the specified minimum
structural sections (HSS) member, bolt pretension
measured 90° to the plane of the E,Es Modulus of elasticity of steel 200,000 l'vlPa
conneclion, mm Ee Modulus of elasticity of concrete
B Overall width of rectangular IISS main Ecm Modulus of elasticity or concrete al
member, measured 90° to the plane of the elevated temperature, MPa
connection, mm Eilective stiffness of composite section, N-
B Faclur for lateral-torsional buckling m mm2
tees and double angles Em Modulus of elasticity of sleel al elevated
Overall width of rectangular HSS branch temperature, MPa
member, measured 90° to the plane of the Available axial stress at ll1e point of
connection, mm consideration, MPa
Overall branch width of lhe overlapping FBM Nominal strength of the base metal per unit
branch, mm area, MPa
Overall branch width of lhe overlapped Fbw Available flexural stress at the point of
branch, mm consideration about the major axis, MPa
Widt1t or plate, lransverse to the axis of Available flexural stress al the point of
the main member, mm consideration about the minor axis, MPa
Width or plate, measure 90° to the plane Fe Available stress, MPa
of connection, mm Critical stress, MPa
FC1'
Factors used in determining Mu for F,,. Buckling stress for the section as
combined bending and axial forces when deteRTiincd by analysis, MPa
first-order analysis is employed Critical stress about the minor axis, MPa
Fcry
HSS torsional constant Critical torsional buckling stress, Mra
Lalcral-torsional buckling modification Fcrz
Fe Elastic critical buckling stress, MPa
factor for non-unifonn moment diagrams
Fex = Elastic flexural buckling stress about the
when both ends of the unsupported
major axis, MPa
segment are braced
FExx Electrode classification number, MPa
Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness
and curvature Fey Elastic flexural buckling stress about the
Constant based on stress category, given minor axis, MPa
in Table.: 501-3.1 Elastic torsional buckling stress, MPa
Coefficient assuming no lateral translation A calculated stress used in the calculation
of the frame of nominal flexural strength, MP a
Ponding flexibility coefficient for primary Nominal torsional strength
member in a Hat roof Nominal tensile stress Fnt, or shear stress,
Coefficient for web sidesway buckling Fnv, from Table 510.3.2, MPa
Ponding 1lexibility coefficient for Nominal tensile stress from Table 510.3.2,
secondary member in a flat roof MP a
Web shear coefficient Nominal tensile stress modified to include
Warping constant, mm6 the effects of shearing stress, MPa
Nominal dead load Nominal shear stress from Table 510.3.2,
Outside diameter of round HSS member, MP a
Design stress range, MPa
mm
-
CHAPTER !3 - Structural Steel 5-13
Threshold faLiguc stress range, maximum G Shear modulus of elasticily of steel 77,200
stress range for indefinite design life from MPa
Table A-3.1, MPa f.H Story shear produced by the lateral forces
Specified minimum tensile strength of the used to compute /J.H, N
type of steel heing used, MPa H Overall height of rectangular HSS member,
Specified minimum tensile strength of a measured in the plane of the connection,
stud shear connector, MPa mm
Specified minimum tensile strengLh of Lhc H Overall height of rectangular HSS main
connected material, MPa member, measured in the plane of the
Specified minimum tensile strength ofHSS connection, mm
material, MPa Flexural constant
Spcdfied minimum Lensile strength of the Overall height of rectangular HSS branch
type of steel being used al elevated member, measured in the plane of the
temperature, MPa connection, mm
Nominal strength of the weld metal per Overall depth of the overlapping branch
unit area, MP a
MomenL of inc1tia in the place of hending,
Nominal stress in any ith weld clement, mm4
MP a Moment of inertia about the axis of
1
Fwix x component of stress Fwi, MPa bending, mm4
Fwiy y component of stress F wi, MPa Moment of inertia of the concrete section,
4
Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the type mm
of steel being used, MPa. As used in this Moment or inertia of the steel deck
Specification, "yield stress" denotes eiLhcr supported on secondary mcmhers.• mm4
the specified minimum yield point (for. Moment or ine1tia of primary mcmhers,
those steels that have a yield point) or mm4
specified yield strength (for Lhosc steels Moment or inc11ia of secondary members,
LhaL du not have a yield point) mm4
Specified minimum yield stress of the Moment ofinerLia of steel shape, mm4
compression flange, MPa Moment of inertia of reinforcing hars, mm4
Specified minimum yield stress of the Moment of inertia about Lhc principal axes,
column weh, M Pa mm
4
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS OuL-of-plane moment orinertia, mm4

member material, MPa
Mtnor principal axis moment of inertia,
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS 4
mm
main memher material, MPa
Moment of inertia abouL y-axis referred lo
Specified minimum yield slress of HSS
the compression flange, or if reverse
branch mcmher material, MPa
curvature bending referred to smaller
Specified minimum yield sLress of the
Fybi flange, mm4
overlapping hranch material, MPa
J Torsional constanl, mm4
Fyhj Specified minimum yield stress of the
overlapped branch material, MPa K Effective lenglh factor detem1ined m
Specified minimum yield sLress of the accordance with Section 503
Fyf
tlange, MPa Effective length factor for Lorsional
Specified minimum yield stress of the type buckling
Pym
of steel being used at elevated temperature, Effective lengLh factor in the plane of
MP a bending, calculated based on the
Specified minimum yield stress of plate, assumption of no lateral translation set
MPa equal to 1.0 unless analysis indicates that a
smaller value may be used
Specified mm1mum yield strcs~ of
reinforcing bars, MPa Effective length factor in the plane of
Specified minimum yield slress of the bending, calculated based on a sidesway
Fyst buckling analysis
stiffener material, MPa
L Story height, mm
Fyw Specified minimum yield stress of Lhe web,
MP a L Length of the member, mm
L Actual length or end-loaded weld, mm
L Nominal occupancy live load
..
L ·- Laterally unbraced length of a member, First-order moment using L RFD or ASD

mm load combinations assuming there is no
L Span length, mm lateral translation of the frame, N-mm
L Length of member between work points at Plastic bending moment, N-mm
truss chord centerlines, mm Required second-order flexural strength
Length between points that arc either under LRFD or ASD load combinations,
bniced against lateral displacemenl o f N-mm
compression flange or based against twist Required flexural strength using LRFO ur
of the cross section, nun ASD load combinations, N-mm
Distance between braces, mm Required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
Length of channel shear connector, mm Required in-plane flexural strength in
Clear distance, in the direction of the force, branch, N -mm
between the edge of the hole and the edge Mr-op - Required out-of-plane flexural strength in
o f the adjacent hole or edge of the material, branch, N-mm
mm Required flexural strength in chord using
Total effective weld length of groove and LRFD load combinations, N-mm
fillet welds to rectangular HSS, mm Yield moment about the axis of bending,
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the N-mm
limit state of yielding, mm Smaller moment, calculated from a lirst-
== Column spacing in direction of girder, m order analysis, at the ends o f that portion of
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the member unbraced in the plane of
plastic analysis, mm bending under consideration, N-mm
Maximum unbraced length for Mr (the Larger moment, calculated from a lirst-
required flexural strength), mm ordcr analysis, al lhe ends of that portion of
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the the member unbraced in the plane or
limit slate of inelaslic lateral-torsional bending under consideration, N-mm
buckling, mm N Length of bearing (not less than k for end
Column spacing perpendicular to direction beam reactions), mm
of girder, m N Bearing length o f the load, measured
Distance from maximum to zero shear parallel to the axis of the HSS member, (or
force, mm measured across the width of the HSS in
Absolute value of moment at quarter point the case of the loaded cap plates), mm
oflhe unbraced segment, N-mm N Number of stress range fluctuations in
Required flexural strength in chord, using design life
ASD load combinations, N-mm Number of bolts carrying the applied
Absolute value of moment at centerline of tension
the unbraced segment, N-mm Nt Additional lateral load
Required bracing moment, N-mm Ni Notional lateral load applied at level i, N
Absolute value of momenl at three-quarter Ns Number of slip planes
point of the unbraced segment, N-mm Ov Overlap connection coefficient
Mc(x,y) =- Available flexural strength determined in p Pitch per thread, mm
accordance with Section 506, N-mm Pbr Required brace strength, N
Available Uexural-torsional strength for Pc Available axial compressive strength, N
strong axis flexure determined in Pc Available tensile strength, N
accordance with Section 506, N-mm Available compressive strength out of the
P ea
Elastic lateral-torsional huckling moment, plane of bending, N
N-rnm P e1,Pe2 = Elastic critical buckling load for braced and
First-order moment under LRFD or ASD unbraced frame, respectively, N
load combinations caused by lateral Euler buckling load, evaluated in the plane
translation of the frame only, N-mm of bending, N
Mma.x Absolute value of maximum moment in the Pl(t,c) First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
unbraced segment, N-mm load combinations as a result of lateral
Nominal flexural strength, N -mm translation of the frame only (tension or
compression), N
•
Cf-lAPTE R 5 ·· Stnictur,11 Steel 5-1 !i
Pn(t,c) Firsl-order axial force using LRFO or J\SO Total nominal strrnglh of transverselv
load combinations, assuming thcrc is no loaded lillet welds, as determined 1 i;
lateral lmnslalion of the rrnme (tension or accordance wilh Table 510.2.5 without the
compression). N alternate in Section 510.2.4 (a)
Nominal axial slrcngth, N s Elastic section modulus of round I ISS,
1
Nominal axial compn.:ssive strength mnr
withouL consideration of length elkcts, N s Lowest elastic seclion modulus relative to
Nominal bearing strength of concrete, N the axis of bending, 1111n.1
Required sccond-order axial strength using Spacing of secondary members, m
LRFD or ASO load combinations, N Chord elastic section modulus, mn/
P,. Required axial compressive strength using Elastic section modulus to the toe in
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N comprc.:ssion relative to the axis of hending,
P,. Required strength, N mnrl
Pr Requin:d tensile strength using LRFD or Eflcclivc section modulus about m,tjor
J\Sl) load combinations, N axis, mm 3
Required axial strength in branch, N Elastic section modulus referred to tension
Required axial strength in chord, N and compression 11anges, respectively,
Required axial strength in compression, N mm 3
Member yield strength, N Elastic section modulus taken about the
principal axes, mni3
Full reduct ion factor for slender For channels, taken as the minimum
compression elements section modulus
Reduction factor for slender sti1lcned Nominal forces and deformations due to
compression elemenls the design-basis fire defined in Section A-
Chord-stress interaction parameter 4.2. J
Nominal strength of one stud shear Tension force due to ASD load
connector, N combinations_, kN
Reduction factor for slender unstiffened Minimum fastener tension given in
compression clements Table 510.3.1, kN
R Nominal load due to rainwater exclusive of Availahle torsional strength, N-mm
!llc.: ponding contrihution, MPa Nominal torsional strength, N-mm
Seismic response modification coefficient = Required torsional strength, N-mm
Required strength (ASD) Tension force due to LRFD load
Reduction factor for joints using a pair of combinations, kN
transverse fillet welds only u = Shear lag factor
Coefficient lo account for group effect u Utili7,ation ratio
Factor in Eq. 503.2-<ih dependent on type Uhs Keduction coefficient, used m calculating
of system block shear rupture strength
Cross-section monosyrnmetry parameter Stress index
Nominal strength, specified in Section 502 Stress index
through 5 J I
Required shear force introduced to column,
Nominal slip resistance, N
N
Position effect ilwtor for shear studs V' Required shear force transferred by shear
Wch plastiJication factor connectors, N
Reduction factor for reinforced or non- Available shear strength., N
rcinforced transverse partial-joint- Nominal shear strength, N
penetration (rJP) groove welds Required shear s1rcn1;th at the location of
Web plastification factor corresponding to lhc stiffener, N
the tension flange yielding limit stale v,. Required shear strength using LRFD or
Required strcngth (LRFD) ASf> load combinations, N
Total nominal strength of longitudinally Gravity load from the LRFD load
loaded fillet welds, as determined m combination or 1.6 limes the J\SD load
accordance with Table 510.2.5 combination applied at level i, N
Hole reduction coellicient, N
-
CHAPTER 5- Structural Steel 5-15
Pn(t,c) First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD Total nominal strength of transversely
load combinations, assuming there is no loaded fillet welds, as determined m
lateral translation or the frame (tension or accordance with Table 510.2.5 without the
compression), N alternate in Section 510.2.4 (a)
= Nominal axial strength, N s Elastic section modulus of round HSS,
Nominal axial compressive strength mm3
without consideration of length effects, N s Lowest elastic section modulus relative to
Nominal bearing strength of concrete, N the axis or bending, mm 3
= Required second-order axial strength using Spacing of secondary members, m
LRFD or ASO load combinations, N Chord elastic section modulus, mm 3
= Required axial compressive strength using Elastic section modulus to the toe m
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N compression relative to the axis of bending,
Required strength, N mm3
= Required tensile strength using LRFD or Effective section modulus about major
ASD load combinations, N axis, mm 3
Required axial strength in bnmeh, N Elastic section modulus referred to tension
Required axial strength in chord, N and compression flanges, respectively,
mm 3
Required axial strength in compression, N
Elastic section modulus taken about the
= Member yield strength, N
principal axes, mm3
Full reduction factor for slender For channels, taken as the minimum
compression elements section modulus
Reduction factor for slender stiffened T Nominal forces and deformations due to
compression elements the design-basis fire defined in Section A-
Chord-stress interaction parameter 4.2.1
Nominal strength of one stud shear Tension force due to ASD load
connector, N combinations, kN
Reduction factor for slender unstiilened Minimum fastener tension given in
compression clements Table 510.3.1, kN
R Nominal load due to rainwater exclusive of Available torsional strength, N-mm
the ponding contribution, MPa Nominal torsional strength, N-mm
Seismic response modification coefficient Required torsional strength, N-mm
Required strength (ASD) Tension force due to LRFD load
Reduction factor for joints using a pair of comhinations, kN
transverse fillet welds only Shear lag iiu:tor
Coefficient to account for group effect Utilization ratio
Factor in Eq. 503.2-6b dependent on type Reduction coellicient, used in calculating
of system block shear rupture strength
Cross-st:ction monosymmetry parameter Stress index
Nominal strength, specified in Section 502 Stress index
through 511 Required shear force introduced to column,
Nominal slip resistance, N N
= Position effect factor for shear studs V' Required shear force transferred by shear
Web plastification factor conne1.,-tors, N
Reduction factor for reinforced or non- Available shear strength, N
reinforced transverse partial-joint- Nominal shear strength, N
penetration (PJP) groove welds Required shear strength at the location of
Web plastification factor corresponding to the stiffener, N
the tension flange yielding limit state Required shear strength using LRFD or
Required strength (LRFD) ASD load combinations, N
Total nominal strength or longitudinally Gravity load from the LRFU load
loaded fillet welds, as determined in combination or 1.6 times the ASD load
accordance with Table 510.2.5 combination applied at level i, N
Hole reduction coeflicient, N

z Plastic section modulus about the axis of

bending, mm 3
Stiffener width for one-sided stilleners,
mm
Branch plastic section modulus about the Nominal fastener diameter, mm
correct axis of bending, mm 3 Full nominal depth of the section, mm
Zx,y Plastic section modulus about the principal Full nominal depth of tee, mm
axes, mm3 Depth of rectangular bar, mm
a Clear distance between transverse Diameter, mm
stiffeners, mm
Pin diameter, mm
a Distance between connectors in a built-up
member,mm Roller diameter, mm
Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to Beam depth, mm
a
edge of member measured parallel to the Nominal diameter (body or shank
direction of force, mm diameter), mm
a Half the length of the non-welded root face Column deplh, mm
in the direction of the thickness of the Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive
tension-loaded plate, mm being away from the branches, mm
= Ratio of two times the web area in Distance from the edge of stud shank to the
compression due to application of major steel deck web, measured at mid-height of
axis bending moment alone to the area of the deck rib, and in the load hearing
the compression flange components direction of the stud (in other words, in the
b Outside width of leg in compression, mm direction of maximum moment for a
b Full width of longest angle leg, mm simply supported beam), mm
Width of unstiffened compression element; fa Required axial stress at the point or
b
for tlanges of I-shaped members and tees, consideration using LRFD or ASD load
the width b is half the full-Hange width; combinations, MPa
f b(w,z) Required flexural stress at the point of
b ; for legs of angles and flanges of
1 consideration (major axis, minor axis)
channels and zees, the width b is the full using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
nominal dimension; for plates, the width b
is the distance from the free edge to the
first row of fasteners or line of welds, or
,~ MPa
Specified minimum compressive strength
of concrete, MPa
the distance between adjacent lines of Specified minimum compressive strength
fasteners or lines of welds; for rectangular of concrete at elevate temperatures, MPa
IISS, the width b is the clear distance fo Stress due to D + R (the nominal dead load
between the webs less the inside comer + the nominal load due to rainwater or
radius on each side, mm snow exclusive of the ponding
b Width or the angle leg resisting the shear contribution), MPa
force, mm fv Required shear strength per unit area, MPa
Width or colunm flange, mm g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage)
Reduced effective width, mm between fastener gage lines, mm
Effective edge distance; the distance from g Gap between toes of branch members in a
lhe edge of the hole to the edge of the part gapped K-connection, neglecting the
measured in the direction nonnal to the welds,mm
applied force, mm h Clear distance between flanges Jess the
Effective width of the branch face welded fillet or comer radius for rolled shapes; for
tu the chord
built-up sections, the distance between
Effective width of the branch face welded adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
beov distance between flanges when welds arc
to the overlapped brace
Flange widlh, mm used; for tees, the overall depth; for
rectangular HSS, the clear distance
Compression flange width, rrun
between the flanges less the inside comer
Width of tension flange, mm radius on each side, mm
Longer leg of angle, mm h Distance between centroids of individual
Shorter leg of angle, mm components perpendicular to the member
axis of buckling, mm
--
CHAPT EH ti - Structural Stef.:I :i-·17
Twice the distance from the centroid to the moment alone

following: the inside face of the Effective radius of gyration used iu thi.:
compression flange less the lilleL or corner determination of Lr for the lateral-
radius, for rolled shapes; the ncarcsl line of torsional buckling limit state for major axis
fastem:rs at the comprc1;sion t1ange or the bending of doubly symmetric 1.:011,pact (-
inside faces of the compression llange shaped members and channels
when welds arc used, for built-up sections, Radius or gyration ahout geometric axis
mm parallel to counected leg, mm
Distance between flange centroids, mm Radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
Twice the distance from the plastic neutral Radius of gyration for the minor principal
axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the axis, mm
compression flange or the inside face of the s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing
compression flange when welds are used, (pitch) ol' any two consecutive holes, mm
mm t Thickness of element, mm
Hole factor Wall thickness, mm
t
Factor defined by Eq, 507.2-6 for Angle leg thickness. mm
t
minimum mom1.:nt of inertia for a
t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
transverse stiffener
bending, mm
k Distance from outer face of flange to the
t Thickness of connected matcriaL mm
web toe of fillet, 111111
t Thickm:ss of plate, mm
k Outside corner radius of the HSS, which is
permitted to be taken as L5t if unknown, t Design wall thickness for IJSS equal to
mm 0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for
Coefficient for slender unsliffcncd ERW HSS and equal to the nominal wall
elements, mm coefficient thickness for SAW HSS, mm
Web plate buckling coefficient t Total thickness of fillers, mm
Largest laterally unbraced length along t Design wall thickness of HSS main
either flange at the point of load, mm member, mm
l Length of bearing, mm Design wall thickness of HSS branch
member. mm
l Length of connection in the direction of
Thickness or the overlapping branch, mm
loading, mm
Thickness of the overlapped bram:h, mm
n Number of nodal braced points within the
span Thickness of the column flange, mm
n Threads per mm Thickness of the loaded flange, mm
p Ratio of element i deformation tu its Flange thickness ()f channel shear
deformation at maximum stress connector, mm
p rrojected length or the overlapping branch Compression t1:mgc thickness, mm
on the chord Thickness of plate, mm
q Overlap length measured along the
Thickness of tension loaded plate, mm
connecting face of the chord beneath the
two branches Thickness of the attached transverse plate,
r Governing radius of gyration, mm mm
Oistance from instantaneous center of Web stiffener thickness, mm
rcit
rotation to weld element with minimum Web thickness or channel shear connector,
l).u/r; ratio, mm mm
Minimum radius of gyration of individual Beam web thickness, mm
component in a built-up member, mm Web thickness, mm
Radius of gyration of individual component Column web thickness, mm
relative to its ccntroidal axis parallel to Thickness of clement, mm
member axis of buckling, mm Width of cover plate, mm
Polar radius of gyration about the shear Weld leg size, mm
center, mm
w Subscript relating symbol to major
Radius or gyration of the flange
principal axis bending
components in flexural compression plus
one-third of the web area in compression
w Plate width, mm
due to application of major axis bending
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7lh Edition, 2015

5-18 CHAPTER S - Structural Steel
w Leg sizt: or the reinforcing or contouring width of the chord for rectangular HSS
fillet, if any, in the direction or the Load length parameter, applicahle only lo
thickness of the tension-loaded plate, mm rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
Weight of concrete per unit volume contact of the branch with the chord in the
Average width of concrete rib or haunch, plane of the connection to lite chord width
mm Slenderness parameter
Subscript relating symbol to strong axis Limiting slenderness parameter for
Coordinates of the shear center with compact element
respect to the centroid, mm Limiting slenderness parameter for
Connection eccentricity, mm compact llange
x Limiting sknd1::mess parameter for
y Subscript relating symbol to weak axis
compact web
z Subscript relating symbol to minor
Limiting slenderness parameter for
principal axis bending noncompact element
a Factor used in 8 2 equation Limiting slenderness parameter for non-
a Separation ratio for huilt-up compression compacl flange
members Limiting slenderness parameter for non-
p Reduction factor given hy Eq. 510.2-1 compact web
p Width ratio; the ratio or branch diameter to µ Mean slip coefficient for class A or B
chord diameter for round IISS; the ratio of surfaces, as applicable, or as established by
overall branch width to chord width for tests
rectangular IISS Resistance factor, specified in Section 502
Brace stiffness requirement excluding web
Pr distortion, N-mm/radian
through 511
c/)B Resistance factor for bearing on concrete
Pb1· Required brace stifiitess Resistance factor for flexure
Pett Effective width ratio; the sum of the
perimeters of the two branch memhers in a
"'4'cb Resistance factor for compression
K-connection divided hy eight times the ct,, Resistance factor for axially loaded
composite columns
chord width Resistance factor for shear on the failure
Peop Effective outside punching perimeter <Psr path
Web disto1tional stiffness, including the Resistance factor for torsion
Psec <J,T
effect of web transverse stifleners, if any, Resistance factor for tension
N-mm/radian <Pt
Resistance factor for shear
= Section property for unequal leg angles, 4'v
positive for short legs in compression and n Safety factor
negative for long legs in compression flB Salety factor for hearing on concrete
First-order intcrstory drift due to the desigo nb Safety factor for flexure
loads, mm nc Safety factor for compression
= First-order intcrslory drift due to lateral flc Safely factor for axially loaded composite
forces, mm columns
Deformation of welded elements at Salely factor for shear on the failure path
intermediate stress levels, linearly Safety factor for torsion
proportioned tu the critical deformation Salely factor for tension
based on distance from the instantaneous
Safety factor for shear
center of rotation, I'; , mm Minimum reinforcement ratio for
Deformation of weld element at maximum
longitudinal reinforcing element
stress, mm Angle or loading measured from the
(J
Deformation of welded element al ultimate
welded longitudinal axis, degrees
stress (fracture), usually in element furthest Acute angle between the hranch and chord,
(J
from instantaneous center of rotation, mm
degrees
y Chord slendemess ratio; the ratio of one- Strain co1Tesponding to compressive
half the diameter to the wall thickness for
strength, f~
round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width
Parameter for reduced Hexural stiffocss
to wall thickness for rectangular HSS
using the direct analysis method
Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between tl1e
branches of a gapped K-connection to the
Association of Structural Engineers of the Pl1llippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 5 - S tri1cll1rRI ~teot ~)· 19
BATTF,N PLATE is a plate rigidly connected tn two

DEFINITIONS
,, parallel components of a built-up column o r beam
designed to transmit shear between the components.
ACTIVE FIRF. PROT KC'J' ION is a huilding malcrial
and systems lhal arc activated by a fire lo mi ligate adverse
BEAM is a structural member !hat has the primary
effects or io notify people to take some action mitigate
function ofresi~ting bending moments.
adverse effects.
81<:AM-COLUMN is a structural member lhat resists
ADJUSTED BRACE STRENGTH is the slrcngth ofa
both axial force an<l hen<ling moment.
brace in a buckling-restrained braced frame a t
defo rmations corresponding to 2.0 times the design s tory
BEARING is the connection, limit state of ultimate shear
urill.
forces Lrans mittcd by the mechanical fa);tener to the
connection clements.
ALWWABLR STRENGTH is the nominal slrcnglh
divided by the safety factor, R11 /!1. BEARING refers lo a bolted connection, limit state of
shear forcc.s transmitted by the bolt lo the connection
A LI.OWABLE STRESS is the allowable strength clements.
di vided by the appropriate section property, such as
section modulus or cross-section area. BEARING (LOCAL COMPRESSIVE YJ£.LDING)
refers to the limit state o r local compressive yielding due
AMPLU'lCATION FACTOR is the multiplier of the to the action of a member bearing against another member
results of first -order anal ysis to reflect second-order or surface.
ellects.
Bl£ARING-TYPE C ONNECTION is a bolted
AMPLIFIED Sl!'.ISMIC LOAD is the hori~ontal connection where shear forces arc transmitted by the boll
component of earthquake load E multiplied by !1 0 , w here bearing against the connection elements.
E and the horizontal component of E arc specified in the
NSCP code. BLOCK SHEAR RUPTURE refers to a connection,
limit st1Jtc of tension fracture along one path and shear
APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE is a Building Code yielding or shear fraelure a long another path.
under which lhc structure is designed (i.e NSCP 6th
Edition). BOUNDARY MEM1l£R is a portion along wall and
diaphrngm cdg~ strengthened wilh structural steel sections
ASl) (A LI.OWABLE STRliNGTH DESIGN) is a and/or longiludinal steel reinforcement and transverse
melhud of proportioning structural components such that rein forccmcnt.
the allowable strength equals or exceeds the requi red
strength of the component under the action or the ASO BRACED FRAME is an cssentiall y vertical truss system
loa<l combinations. that provides resistance to l1Jtcral loads and provides
stabil ity for the structural system.
ASD LOAD COMJUNATION refers to load
combi nation in the NSCP code intended for allowable BRACING is a mem her or system that provides stiffness
strenglh desig n (allowable stress design). and strength to limit the out-of-plane movemenl or
another member at a hrace point.
AUTHORlTY HAVING .TURISDlCTION (AIIJ) is
the organization, political subdivision, oflice. or individual BRACE TEST SP1£ClMEN is a single buckling-
charged with the responsibility of administering and restrained brace clement used for laboratory testing
enforcing the provisions of this standard. intended tn model the brace in the Prototype.
AVAILABLF: STRENGTH is the design strength or BRANCH FACE is the Willi ofHSS branch member.
allowable strength, as appropriate.
BRANCH MEMBER refers HSS conncclions, member
AV AILABLI!; STRESS is lhe design stress or allowable that tem1inates at a cho rd member or main mcmbcr.
stress, as appropriate.
BUCKLING is a li mit state uf s udden change in the
A Vl!:RAGE RIB WIDTH is the average width of the rib geometry or a structure or an y of its elements under a
or a corrugation in a formed sleet deck. critical loading condition.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition , 2015

'>·20 CI-IN'T Ef~ f, Structural SIP.nl
BUCKLING STRl!:NGTH 1s a nominal strength for COLUMN is the. structural member that has the primary
inst.ability limits states. function ofresisti11g axial force .
BUCKLl ~G-R ESTRAlNEl> OIUCF,D FRAMF. COJ.lJMN RASE is fi n assembl<tge of structurnl sl1apcs,
(B RBF) is a diagonally braced frame satisfyin g Lhe plates, connectors, bolls, and rllds al ll1e base of a column
req uirements of' Section 529 in which all members of the used to transmit forc<.:s between the sleel superstructure
bracing system arc subjected primarily to axial forces and and the foundation .
in wh icb the limit state of compression buckling or brac.:s
is precluded at forc.:s and ddonnations corresponding to C0;\-1 BINED SYSTF.:Vl rclern to t11e structure comprised
2.0 times the design story drift. of two or more lateral load-resisting systems or different
type.
OUCKLING-RESTRAINll'iG SYSTEM is the system
of restrai nts that limits buckling of the steel core in COM PACT SECTIOJ\'. is a section capable of
HRBF. This system includes the casing on Lhe sted core developing a tillly plastic stress distrihulion and
and structural elements adjoining its connections. The possessing a rotation capacity of approximately three
buckling-restraining system is intended to permit the before the onset of local buckling.
transverse expansion and longitudinal contraction of the
steel con: for dcfonnations corresponding to 2.0 times the COMPARTMENTATION is the enclosure o ra building
design stOry driil. space with clements that have specific fire cnd11rance.
8UlLT-lJP MEMBER, CROSS-SJ!X:TIOI\, COMPI .KrE-JOINT-PJ<:NETRATION GROOVF.

S~CTIO N, SH APE refers LO the member, cross-section, W.RLD (CJP) is a groove wdd in which weld metal
section or shape. fabricated from struct ural steel elements extends through the jo int thickness, except as permitted
that are welded or bolted together. for HSS connecLions.
CAMBF,R is a curvature fabricated into a beam or COMPOSJTli: is the condi tion 111 which steel and
truss so as to compensate for deflection induced by concrete elements and members work as a uni t in the
loads. distribution of internal forces.
CASING is an element that resists forces transverse to COMPOSIT E BF.AM refers Lo stru<.:tural steel beam in
the axis of the hmce thereby restraining buckling of the contact with and acting compositely with reinforced
core. The casing requires a means of delivering this force concrete via hond or shear connectors.
to the remainder of the buckling-restraining system. T he
casing resists little or no for<.:e in the axis of the bra<.:e. COMPOSITE BRACE is a reinforced-coticrcte-encascd
stn,ctural steel section (rolled or built-up) or concretc-
C HARPY V-NOTCII IMPACT TEST is a standard filled steel section used as a bra<.:e.
dynamic tcsl measuring nolch toughness or a specimen.
COM POSITF. COJ ,lJMN is a rcinforced-concretc-
CHORD MEMBl£R refers to or HSS, prima ry member encascd structural steel section (rolled or bui lt-up) or
that extends through a truss connection. concrete-lilied steel section used as a column.
CLADl>ING is the exterior covering of structure. COMPOS.I TE li:CCENTRICALLY BRACED

FRAME (C-EBF) is a composite braced frame meeting
C OLD-FORMF.O STE~L STRUCTURAL MEMB~R the requirement'> of Section 545.
refers tu the shape manufactured by press-braking
blanks sheared from sheets, cul lengths o f coils or COMPOSITI£ INTf.RMEDlATE MOM.J<:NT FRAME
plates, or by roll forming. cold- or hot- rolled coils or (C-JMF) is a composite moment frame meeting the
sheets; both forming operations being performed at requi rements or Section 541 .
ambient room temperature, that is, without mani fest
addition of heat such as would be required for hot COM POSITF: OROlNARY BRACED FRAME
forming. (C-OBI<') is a composite braced frame meeting the
requi rements of Section 544.
COLLl£C TOR ELEMENT refers to lhe member that
serves to transfer loads between floor diaphragms and the. COMPOSITE ORDI NAR Y MOMENT FRAME
mem hers of the seismic load resisting system. (C-OMF) is a composite moment frame mecling the
requirements of Section 545.
Associa tion of Structural Engine€rs of tt1e Philippines, Inc. (AS!:P)

CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steol 5-21
COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS refrrs to the design

MOMENT FRAME (C-PRMF) is a composite moment drawings, specifications, shop drawings, and erection
frame meeting the req11iremcnts of Section 539. drawings.
COMPOSITE SH EAR WALL is a reinforced concrete CONTRACTOR is a fabricator or erector, as applicable.

wall that has unencased or reinforced-concrete encased
slructural steel sections as boundary members. CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER is the transfor of
thermal energy from a point of higher lcmpcrature to a
COMPOSITI!: SL.AB) is a concrete slab supported on poinl or lower temperature lhrough the motion of' an
and bonded to a formed steel deck that acts as a intervening medium.
diaphragm to transfer load to and belwecn clements of lhc
seismic load resisting system. COPE is a cut-out made in a structural member to
remove a flange and conform to the shape of an
COMPOSITE SPECIAi, CONCENTRICALLY intersecting member.
BRACED 1-'RAME (C-CBF) is a cornposile braced
frame meeting the requirements of Section 543. COUPLING BEAM is a structural steel or composite
beam connecting adjacent reinforced concn.:lc wall
COMPOSITI!: SPECIAL MOMF,NT FRAME elements so that they act together to resist lateral loads.
(C-SM F) is a composite moment frame mecling the
requirements of Seclion 540. COVF:R PLAT~ is a plate welded or bolted to lhe llange
of a member to increase cross-sectional area, section
COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHl£AR WALL modulus, or moment of inertia.
(C-SPW) is a wall consisting of steel plate with
reinforced concrete encasement on one or bolh sides that CROSS CONN.ECTION refers to HSS conneclion in
provides out-of-plane stiffening to prevent buckling of the which forces in branch members or connecting
steel plalc and meeting the requirements of Section 548. elemenls lransvcrse to the main member are primarily
equilibrated by forces in other branch members or
CONCRETE CRUSHING is the limit stale of connecting elements on the opposite side of the main
compressive failure in concrete having reached the member.
ultimate strain.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA is an Effective area, Ae,
CONCRETE HAUNCH is a section of solid concrete calculated using the effective widlhs of component
that results from stopping the deck on each side of the clements in accordance wilh Section 552. lf the etleclivc
girder in a composite floor system construclcd using a widths of all · component elements, determined in
formed steel deck. accordance with Section 552, are equal to the aclual flat
witllhs, it equals the gross or net area, as applicable.
CONCRETE-ENCASED BEAM is a beam that totally
encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab. CURTAIN WA LI, STUD is a mcmher in the steel
framed exterior wall s ystcm that transfers transverse (out -
CONFIRMATORY TEST is a tesl made, when desired, of-plane) loads and is limited to a superimposed axial
on members, connections, and assemblies designed in load, exclusive or sheathing materials , or not more than
accordam:c with the provisions of Section 551 through 1460 Nim, or superimposed axial load of not more lhan
Section 557, Appendices I and 2, and Section C-3 of this 890 N per slud.
Specification or its specific references, in order to
compare a"iual to calculated performance. DEMAND CRITICAL WELD weld so designated by
this chapter.
CONNECTION is a combination of structural elements
and joints used to transmit forces between two or more DESIGN-BASIS FIRE is a set of conditions that define
members. the development of a fire and the spread of combustion
products throughout a building or portion thereof.
CONTINUITY PLATES is a column stiffeners at the
top and bottom of the panel zone; also known as DESIGN EARTHQUAKE refers to the earthquake
transverse stiffeners. represenlc<l hy the design response spc"tmm as specified
in the NSCP code.

DESIGN LOAD is the applied load determined in DIRECT BOND INTERACTION is a mechanism by
accordance with either LRFD load wmbinations or which force is transferred between steel and concrete
· ASD load combinations, whichever is applicahlc. in a composite section by hond stress.
DESIGN METHODOLOGY is a set of step-by-step DIRECT STRENGTH METHOD is an alternative

procedures, based on calculation or experiment, usc<l lo design mcthod detailed in Section C-1 that providc!;
determine sizes, lengths, and details in the design of predictions of member strengths without the use of
buckling-restrained braces and their connections. effective widths.
DESIGN STORY DRIFT is an amplified story drift DJSTORTIONAL BUCKLING is a mode of buckling
(drift under the design earthquake, including the cfiects of involving change in cross-sectional shape, excluding local
inelastic action), detennined as specified in the NSCP buckling.
code.
DISTORTIONAL FAILUR~ is a limit state of an
D~SIGN STRENGTH is the resistance factor multiplied HSS truss connection based on dislorlion of a
by the nominal strength, <f>Rn. rectangular IISS chord member into a rhomboidal shape.
DESIGN STRESS RANGE refers lo magnitude of DISTORTIONAL STIFFN~SS is an out-of-plane

change in stress due to the repeated application and flexural stiffness of web.
removal of service live loads. For locations subject to
stress reversal, it is the algchraic difference of the peak DOUBLE CURVATURE is a deformed shape ofa beam
stresses. with one or more inflection points willtin the span.
DESIGN STRESS is the design strength divided hy DOUBL.E-CONCENTRATEO FORCES is the two
the appropriate section property, such as section equal and opposite forces that form a couple on the
modulus or cross section area. same side of the loaded member.
Dl!:SIGN WALL THICKNESS is the HSS wall DOUBLER is a plate added to, and parallel with, a beam
thickness assumed in the determination of section or column web to increase resistance to concentrated
prope1ties. forces.
DIAGONAL BRACING is an inclined structural DOUBLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section

members carrying primarily axial load that are employed symmetric about tw? orthogonal axes through its centroid.
to enable a structural frame to act as a truss lo resist
lateral loads. DUAL SYSTEM is a structural system with the
following features: (I) an essentially complete space
DIAGONAL STIFFENER is a wch stiffener at frame that provides support for gravity loads; (2)
column panel z:one oriented diagonally to the flanges, resistance to lateral load provided by moment frames
on one or both sides of the web. (SMF, IMF or OMF) that are capahlc of resisting at least
25 percent of the base shear, and concrete or steel shear
DIAPHRAGM is the roof; floor or other membrane walls, or steel braced frames (EBF, SCBF or OCBF); and
or bracing system that transfers in-plane forces to the (3) each system designed to resist the total lateral load in
lateral force resisting system. proportion to its relative rigidity.
DIAPHRAGM PLATE is a plate possessing in-plane DUCTILE LIMIT STATE includes member and
shear stiffness and strength, used to translcr forces to the connection yielding, bearing deformation at bolt holes, as
supporting elements. well as buckling of members that conform to the width-
thickness limitations or Table 521-1. Fracture of a
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD is the design method member or of a connection, or buckling of a connection
for stahility that captures the effects of residual stresses element, is not a ductile limit state.
and initial out-of-plumbness of frames by reducing
stiffness and applying notional loads in a second-order
analysis.
--·
CHAPTER 5 - Structl1rnl Steel '.'> ·?.3
ECCENTRICALLY BRACU) FRAME (F.RF) is a END RETURN is a length of filler weld that continues
diagonally braced frame meeting the requireme111s of around a comer in the same plane.
Section 528 that has at least one end of each bracing
member conne(;tcd to a beam a ~hort di!'.tance from F..NGINEER OF Rt<:CORD is a licensed professional
another beam-to-brace connection or a beam-Lo-column re;:sponsible for scaling the design drawings and
connection. spcciticat ions.
EFH:CTIVF. DF,SIGN WIDTH (EFFECTIVE EXF,MPTED COLUMN refers to the column not
WIDTH) is a flat width of an element reduced for design meeting the requirements of Equation 522-3 for SMF.
purposes, also known simply as the effective width.
EXPANSION ROCKER refers to support with curved
EFFECTIVE LENGTH is th(; length of an otherwise surface on which a member bears that can tilt to
identical column with the same strength when analyzed accommodate expansion.
with pinned end (;Ondilions.
EXPANSION ROLLER is a round steel bar on which a
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR is the ratio between member bears that can roll to ai.:rnmmodatc expansion.
Lhe effective length and t11e unbraced length ur Lhc
member. [XPl<'.CTF'.D TENSILE STRRNGTII is the tensile
strength of a member, equal to the specified minimum
EFFECTIVE NET AREA is a net ar(;a moditil:d to tensile strength, Fu., multiplied by Rt.
account for the effect of shear lag.
EXPECTEl> YIELD STRENGTH is the yield strength
EFFF:CTIVF, S.F.CTION MODULUS is a section in tension or a member, e;:qual lo t11e expected yield stress
modulus reduced to account for bu(;kling of slender multiplied by Ao.
compression elements. "
EXPECTED YIELD STlU:SS is the yield stress of the
EFFECTIVE WIDTH relers to reduced width or a
plate or slab wilh an assumed uniform stress material, equal lo the specified minimum yield stress, F y,
distribution which produces the same effect on the multiplied hy Ry·
behavior of a structural member as the actual plate or slab
width with its non-uniform stress distribution. EYEBAR rcfors tu pin-wnnccle<l tension member of
uniform thickness, with forged or thermally cut head of
ELASTIC ANALYSIS is a structural analysis based on greater width than the body, proportioned Lo provide
the assumption that Lhc stru(;turc returns to ils original approximately equal strength in the head and body.
geometry on removal of the load.
FACE B~ARING PL.ATES refers to stiffeners attached
ELEV A TED TEMPERATURES refers to heating to structural steel beams that are embedded in reinforced
conditions experienced hy huilding elements or structures concrete walls or columns. The plates are located at the
as a result or tire, which are in excess of the anticipated face of the reinforced concrete to provide confinement
amhient rnnditions. and to transfer loads to the concrete through dir(;Ct
bearing.
ENCASEl> COMPOSITE BEAM is a composite beam
completely enclosed in reinforced concrete. FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load factor and
the nominal load.
ENCASED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a structural
steel column (rolled or built-up) completely encased m FASTENER is a generic term for holts, rivets, or other
reinforced concrete. connecting devices.
ENCASED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a composite FATIGUF. is a limit state of crack initiation and
column consisting of a structural concrete column and growth resulting from repealed application of live
one or more embedded steel shapes. loads.
END PANEL is a wch panel with an adjacent panel on FA YING SURFACE is a (;Ontact surface of connection
one side only. elements transmitting a shear force.

FlLLED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a round or FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELD is a weld in a

_rectangular structural steel section filled with concrete. groove formed by a member with a curved surface in
contact with a planar member.
FJ LLED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a composite
column consisting of a shell of HSS or steel pipe filled FLARE V-GROOVE WELD i~ a weld in a groove
with structural concrete. formed by two members with curved surfaces.
}'ILLER is a plate used to build up the thickness of one FLASH OVER is the rapid transition to a state of total
component. surface involvement in a tire of combustible materials
within an enclosure.
FILLER MtTAL is a metal or alloy to be added in
making a welded joint. FLAT WIDTH is a nominal width of rectangular
HSS minus twice the outside corner radius. In absence
FILLET WF,LD is a weld of generally triangular of knowledge of the corner radius, the tlat width may be
cross section made hetween intersecting surfaces of taken as the total section width minus three times the
clement,;. thickness.
FILJ,Kr WELD REINFORCEMENT is a fillet welds FLAT WIDTH is the Nominal width of an element
added to groove welds. exclusive of corners measured along its plane.
FIRE refers to as destructive burning, as manifested by FLAT-WIDTH-TO THICKNESS RATIO (FLAT

any or all of the following: light, flame, heat, or smoke. WIDTH RATIO) refers lo flat width of an element
measured along its plane, divided by its thickness.
FIRE BARR IliR is an element of construction formed of
fire-resisting materials and tested in accordance with FLEXURAL BUCKLING is a buckling mode in
ASTM Standard E.119, or other approved standard fire which a compression member deflects laterally without
resistance test, to demonstrate compliance with the twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
Building Code.
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling
FIRE .ENDURANCE is a measure of the elapsed time mode in which a compression member bends and
during which a material or assembly continues to exhibit twists simultaneously without change in cross-sectional
fire resistance. shape.
"FIRE RESISTANCE is the property of assemhlies that FORCE is a resultant of distribution of stress over a
prevents or retards the passage of excessive heat, hot prescribed area.
gases or Hames under conditions of use and enables them
to continue to perfonn a stipulated function. FORMED SECTION see cold-fonned steel structural
member.
!<'IRE RESISTANCE RA TING is the period of time a
building element, component or assembly maintains the FORMED STEEL DECK refers to composite
ability to contain a fire, continues to perform a given construction, steel cold formed into a decking profile used
structural function, or both, as determined by test or as a pennanent concrete form.
methods based on tests.
l<'ULL, UNREDUCED AREA, A, is calculated without
FIRST-ORD.ER ANALYSIS is a structural analysis in considering local buckling in the component elements,
which equilihrium conditions are formulated on the which equals either the gross area or net area, as
undeformed structure; second-order effect,; are neglected. applicable.
FITTED BEARING STIFFENER is a stiflener used at FULLY COMPOSrTE BEAM is a composite beam that
a support or concentrated load that fits tightly against one has a sufficient number of shear connectors to develop the
or both flanges or a beam so as to transmit load through nominal plastic flexura l strength of the composite section.
bearing.
FULLY RESTRAIN ED MOMENT CONNECTION
FLANGE 01.<' A SECTION IN BENDING (FLANGE) is a connection capable of transferring moment with
is a flat width of flange including any intem1ediate negligible rotation between connected members.
stiffeners plus adjoining comers.

CHAPTER 5 - Strud11rnl Steel ti-25
GAGI'.: is a transverse ccnter-lu-ccntcr spacmg of HEAT RELEASE RATE is the rate at which thermal
fasteners. energy is generated by a burniug material.
GAP CONNt,:CTIOl\" refers tu IISS truss connection HOR[ZONTAL SHEAR is a Force at the interlace
with a gap or space on the chord face between intersecting between steel and concrete surfaces in a composite
bram:h members. beam.
GENERAL COLLAPSF... is a limit state uf chord HSS is a square, reclangular or round hollow structural
plastification of opposing sides ur a round HSS chord steel section produced in accordance with a pipe ur tubing
member at a cross-connection. product specification.
GEOMl!:TRIC AXIS is the axis parallel to web, flange User Note: A pipe can be designed using the same
or angle leg. design rules for round HSS sections as long as it
conforms to ASTM A53 Class B and the appropriate
GIRDF,R see Beam. parameters are used in the design.
GIRDER see Beam. INELASTIC ANALYSIS refers to structural analysis

that takes into account inelastic material hehavior,
GIRDER FILLER is a narrow piece uf sheet steel used including plastic analysis.
as a fi II between the edge of a deck sheet and the flange of
a girder in a composite floor system constructed using a INELASTIC DEFORMATlON is the permanem or
fonned steel deck. plastic portion of; t11e axial displacement in a huckling-
restraincd brace.
GIRT is a horizontal structural member that supports wall
panels and is primarily subjected tu bending under IN-PLANE INSTASI LITV. refers to limit state of a
horizontal loads, such as wind load. beam-column bent about its major axis while lateral
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is prevented by
GOUGE refers to relatively smooth surface groove or lateral bracing.
cavity resulting from plastic defonnation or removal of
material. IN-PLANE INSTABILITY refers to buckling involving
in the plane oflhe frame urthc member.
GRAVITY AXIS is the axis through the center of gravity
of a member along its length. INT~RMF..DlATE MOMENT FRAME (lMl<') is the
moment frame ·system that meets the requirements or
GRAVITY FRAME is a portion of the framing system Section 523.
not included in the lateral load resisting system.
INTERMEDIATE SKlSMIC SYSTEMS is seismic
GRAVITY I ,OAD is a load, such as that produced by systems designed assuming moderate inelastic action
dead and live loads, acting in t11e downward direction. occurs in some members under the design earlh4uakc.
GRIP (OF BOLT) is the thickness ur material through INTRRSTORY DRIFT ANGLE. refors tu intcrslory
which a bolt passes. displacement divided by story height, radians.
GROSS AREA, Ag, without deductions for holes, INST ABILITY refors LO limit stale reached m the
openings and cutouts. loading of a structural component, frame or structure
in which a slight disturbance in the loads or
GROOVE WELD is a weld in a groove between geometry produces large displacements.
connection elements. See also A WS O 1.1.
lNV~RTED-V-BRACF.D FRAMF... refers to V-braccd
GUSSET PLAT}: is a plate element connecting tmss frame.
members or a strnt or brace to a beam or column.
JOINT is an area where two or more ends, surfaces, or
edges arc attached. Categorized by type of fastener or
HEAT FLllX is the radiant energy per unit surface area.
weld used and the method of force transfer.
-
JOINT ECCl!:NTRICITY refers to HSS truss LIMIT STATE is the condition in which a strncture or
. connection, perpendicular distance from chord member component becomes unfit for service and is judged either
• center of gravity lo intersection of branch member work to be no longer useful for ils intended function
points. (serviceability limit state) or to have reached its ultimate
load-carrying capacity (strength limit state).
K-AREA is the region of the web that extends from the
tangent point of the web and the flange-web fillet (AISC LINK in EBF, the segment of a beam that is located
"k" dimension) a distance of38 mm into the web beyond between the ends of two diagonal braces or between the
the "k" dimension. end of a diagonal brace and a column. The length of the
link is defined as the clear distance between the ends of
K-BRACED FRAM~ is a bracing configuration in two diagonal braces or between the diagonal brace and
which braces connect to a column at a location with no the column face.
diaphragm or other out-of-plane support.
LINK JNTERM.EDIATE WEB STIFFENl<:RS 1s lhe
K-CONNECTION -refers to HSS connection in which vc1tical web stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
forces in branch members or connecting elements
transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated LINK ROTATION ANGLE is an inelastic angle
by forces in other branch members or connecting berween the link and the beam outside of the link when
clements on the same side of the main member. the total story drift is equal to the design story drift.
LACING is a plate, angle or other steel shape, in a LINK SHEAR DESIGN STRENGTH refers to lesser of
lattice configuration, that eonnects two steel shapes the available shear strength of the link developed from the
together. moment or shear strength of the link.
LAP JOINT is a JOmt between two overlapping · LOAD refers to force or other action that results from the
connection clements in parallel planes. weight of building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential
LATERAL BRACING is a diagonal braeing, shear movement, or restrained dimensional changes.
walls or equivalent means for providing in-plane
lateral stability. LOAD-CARRYING REINFORCEMENT 1s a
reinforcement in eomposite members designed and
LATERAL B.RACING MEMBER refers to a member detailed to resist the required loads.
that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral-
torsional buckling of primary framing members. LOAD is a force ·or other action that results from the
weight of building materials, occupants and their
LATERAL LOAD refers to load, such as that pos~essions, environmental ertects, differential
produced by wind or earthquake effects, acting in a movement, or restrained dimensional ehanges.
lateral direction.
LOAD EFFECT reters to forces, stresses and
LATERAL LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM refers to dcfonnations produced in a structural component by the
stmctural system designed to resist lateral loads and applied loads.
provide stability for the structure as a whole.
LOAD FACTOR is a factor that accounts for deviations
LATERAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling of the nominal load from the actual load, for uncertainties
mode of a flexural member involving deflection in the analysis that transfonns the load into a load effect
nonnal to the plane of bending occurring simultaneously and for the probability that more than one extreme load
with twist about the shear center of the eross-section. will occur simultaneously.
LEANING COLUMN is a column designed lo carry LOCAL. BENDING is the ultimate state of large
gravity loads only, with connections that arc not deformation of a tlange under a concentrated transverse
intended to provide resistance to lateral loads. force.
LENGTH EFFECTS is the consideration of the LOCAL BUCKLING refers to buckling of a

reduction in strength of a member based on its compression element where the line junctions between
unbraced length. elements remain straight and angles between elements do
not change.

Cl·IAPTFR :> - Structural S led 5-27
LOCAL CRlPPLING refers to limit state orloeal failure MOMENT FRAME refers to li·aming system that
of web plate in the immediate vicinity or
a concentrated provides resistance to lateral loads an<l provides stability
load or reaction. lo the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure
of the framing mcmhers and their connedions.
LOCAL YIELDING refers to yielding that occurs in a
local area of an clement. MULTIPLE-STIFFENED F,LE MENT is an clement
stirtencd between webs, or between a web and a stiffoned
LOW!l:ST ANTIC IPATED SF,RVICE edge, hy means or intermediate stiffeners parallel to the
TEMPERATURE (LAST) is the lowest I-hour average direction of stress.
temperature with a lOO-year mean recurrence interval.
NF.T AREA, An, is equal to gross area less the area of
LRFD (LOAD AND RESISTANC t( FACTOR holes, openings, and cutouls.
DESIG N) is the mclho<l of proportioning structural
components such that the design strength equals or NODAL BRACE is a brace that prevents lateral
exceeds the required strength of the component under the movement or twist independentl y of other braces at
action of the LRFD load combinations. adjacent brace points (sec relative brace).
LRFD LOAD C OMBINATION is the load combination NOMINAL DI.M.ENSION refers to the designated or
in the NSCP code intended for strength design (load and theoretical dimension, as in tl1c tables of section
resistance factor design). properties.
MAIN M l!:M BF:R refers to HSS connections, chord NOMINA L LOAD is the magnitude oftl1c load specified
member, column or other HSS member lo which branch hy the NSCP code.
mcmhcrs or other connecting clements are attached.
NOMINAL RIB HKIGHT refers to hei ght of formed
MASTER CO IL refers lo one continuous, weld-free coil steel deck measured from the underside of the lowest
as produced by 11 hot m ill, cold mill, mctall ic coating line point to the top of!hc highest point.
or paint line and identifiab le by a unique coil number. In
some cases, this coil is cut into smaller coils or slit into NOMINAL STRENGTH is a strength of a structure or
narrower coils; however, all of these smaller an<l /or componcnl (without the resislancc factor or safety factor
narrower finished coils are said to have come from the applied) to resist load effects, as determined in
same master coil if they arc traceable to the original accordance with this Specification.
mas ter coil nu mber.
NONCOMPACT St::CTION is a section that can
MF:ASURED FLEXURAL R F.SISTANCE is a bending develop the yield stress in its compression elements
moment measured in a beam at the face of the column, for before local buckling occurs, but cannot develop a
a beam-lo-column test specimen tested in accordance with rotation capacity of three.
Appendix B-4.
NOND ESTR UC'flV I!: TRSTING refers to inspection
M~CHANISM is a structural system that includes a procedure w herein no material is destroyed aud integrity
sut1icienl number of real hinges, plastic hi nges or of the matcri11l or component is nor aflected.
both, so as to be able LO articulate in one or more
rigid body modes. NOTCH TOUGH N ESS refers to energy absorbed at a
specified temperature as measured in the Charpy V-Nolch
MILL SCALF: is an oxide surface coating on steel test.
formed by Lhe hol rolling process.
NOTIONAL LOAD refers to V iruml load applied in a
MILLED SURJ<'ACI!: is a surface that has been machined structural analysis to account for destahil izing effects that
flat by 11 mechanically guided tool to a flat, smooth are not otherwise accounted for in the design provisions.
condition.
NSCP CODE refers to the building code under which the
MOMENT CONN li.:CTION is a connection that structure is designed. NSCP 6u' Edition.
transmits bending moment between connected
members.
National Structural Godo of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015
- · ,---..
ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED PARTIALLY RESTRAINED MOMENT

fRAME (OCBF) refers to a diagonally braced frame CONNECTION is a connecti on capable of
meeting the requirements of Section 527 in which all transferring moment with rotation between connected
members of the bracing system are subjected primarily to members that is not negligible.
axial forces.
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION refers to Building
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMI<) refers tu materials and systems whose ability to resist the effects of
moment frame system that meets the requirements of fire does not rely on any outside activating condition or
Section 524. mechanism.
ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR PERCENT ELONGATION is a measure of ductility,

WALL WITH ST'RUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS determined in a tensile test as the maximum elongation of
(C-ORCW) is a composite shear walls meeting the the gage length divided by the original gage length.
requirements of Section 546.
PERFORMANCE-BASED DESIGN is an engineering
ORDINARY SEISMIC SYSTEMS is a seismic systems approach to structural design that is based on agreed-upon
designed assuming limited inelastic action occurs in some performance goals and objectives, engineering analysis
members under the design earthquake. and quantitative assessment of alternatives against those
design goals and objectives using accepted engineering
OUT-OF·PLANR BUCKLING relers to limit state of tools, methodologies and performance criteria.
a beam-column bent about its major axis while
lateral buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is not PERFORMANCE TEST is a test made on structural
prevented by lateral bracing. members, connections, and assemblies whose
performance cannot be detennined in accordance with
OVERLAP CONNECTION refers HSS truss Section 551 to Section 557 of this specification or its
connection in which · intersecting branch members specific references.
overlap.
PERMANENT LOAD refers to load in which
OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR, !1 0 refers to the factor vanat1ons over time arc rare or of small magnitude.
specified by the NSCP code in order to determine the All other loads arc variable loads.
amplified seismic load, where required by these
Provisions. PIPE see HSS.
PANEL ZONE is a web area of beam-to-column PITCH is the longitudinal center-to-center spacing of
connection delineated by the extension of beam and fasteners. Center-to-center spacing of bolt threads along
column flanges through the connection, transmitting axis of bolt.
moment through a shear panel.
PLASTIC ANALYSIS refers to structural analysis based
PARTIALLY COMPOSITE BEAM is an unencased on the assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, in other
composite beam with a nominal flexural strength words, that equilibrium is satisfied throughout the
controlled by the streni,ith orthe shear stud connectors. stmcture and the stress is at or below the yield stress.
PARTIALLY RESTRAINED COMPOSITE PLASTIC HINGE refers to yielded zone that forms in a
CONNECTION is a partially restrained (PR) structural member when the plastic moment is attained.
connections as defined in the Specification that connec..1 The member is assumed to rotate further as if
partially or fully composite beams to steel columns with hinged, except that such rotation is restrained by the
flexural resistance provided by a force couple achieved plastic moment. ·
with steel reinforcement in the slab and a steel seat angle
or similar connection at the bottom tlange. PLASTIC MOMENT refers to the theoretical resisting
moment developed within a fully yielded cross section.
PARTIAl,..JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE
WELD (PJP) is a Groove weld in which the penetration PLASTIC STRESS DISTRIBUTION METHOD is a
is intentionally less than the complete thickness of the method for determining the stresses in a composite
connected element. member assuming that the steel section and the concrete
in the cross section are fully plastic.

CHAPTF.:R ~ - Structural Ste~I s-2 !=1
PLASTIFICATION refers to HSS connection, limit stale PRYING ACTION is an amplification of the tension
based on an out-of-plane flexural yield Jim: mechanism in for<.:~ in a boll caused by leverage between the point of
the chord at a branch member connt:ction. applted load, the bolt and lhc reaction of the connected
elelllenls.
PLATI( GIRDEU i!> a built-up beam.
PURLISill::D SPECJFICATION are requirements for a
PLUG WF,LD is a weld made in a circular hole in one steel listed by a manufacturer, processor, producer,
elem em or a joint fusing that element to another element. purchaser, or other body, which (I) are generally
availahle in the public domain or are ,wailable to the
POINT-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section puhlic upon request, (2) are established before the steel is
symmetrical about a point (centroid) such as a Z-section ordered, and (3) as a minimum, specity minimum
having equal flanges. mechanical properties, chemical <.:omposilion limits, and,
if coaled sheet, coating prope1ties.
PONDU\G is retention of water due solely lo the
deflc<.:lion offlal roof framing. PUNCHING LOAD is a component of branch member
force perpendicular tu a chord.
POSITIVF: FLEXlJRA.I. STR~NGTH is the load or
force that can be canicd by an element, member, or PURLJN. is a horizontal structural member that supports
frame after initial buckling has occurred. roor deck and is primarily suhjected to bending under
vertical loads such as snow, wind on.lead loads.
POST-BUCKLING STRENGTH. is the load or force
that can be carried by an clement, member, or frame P - ti ~Fl<'F.CT is the e!lcct of loads acting on the
after initial buckling has occurred. <ldlected shape of a member between joints or nodes.
PREQUALIFIED CONNECTION refers to the P - Ll EFFl!:CT is the effect or loads acting on !l1c
connection that complies with the rc4uirements of displaced location of joints or nodes in a structure. In
Appendix R-1. tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting
on the laterally displaced location or floors and roofs.
PRESCRIPTIVE 01'.:SIGN is a design method that
dO(;uments compliance with general criteria established in QUALITY ASSURANCE is system uf shop and field
a building code. activities and controls implemented by the owner or
his/her designated representative to provide confidence
PRETENSIONED JOINT is aJomt with high-strength to the owner and lhc building authority that quality
bolts tightened to the specified minimum pretension. requirements are implemented. .
PROPERLY DIW F.LOPED is a reinfon:ing bars QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN is a written description
detailed to yield in a ductile manner before crushing of qualifications, procedures, quality inspections,
or the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of resources, and records to he used to provide assurance
AC[ 318 in so far as development length, spacing and that lhc structure complies with the engineer's quality
cover shall be deemed to be properly developed. requirements, specifications and contract documents.
PROTECTED ZONF.. is an area of members in which QUALITY CONTROL is a system of shop and field
limitations apply to fabrication and attachments. Sec controls implemented by the fabricator and erector to
Section 520.4. ensure that contract and company fabrication and erection
requirements are met.
PROTOTYPE refers to the brace, connections, members,
steel prope1ties, and other design, detailing, and RATIONAL ENGINF:ERING ANALYSIS is an
construction features to be used in the actual huilding analysis based on theory that is appropriate for the
frame. situation, relevant test data if availahle, and sound
engineering judgment.
PROTOTYPE is the connection or brace design that is to
be used in the building (SMF, IMF, EBF, and BRBF). REDUCED BEAM S.ECTION refers to reduction in
cross section over a disi.:rctc length that promotes a zone
PROVISIONS refers to this document, and in reforcnce of inelasticity in t11c member.
lo the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Sted
Buildings (J\NSI/AISC 341).

RE};NTRAN'f refers to a cope or weld access hole, a cut SAFETY FACTOR, fl is the fa<:tor that accounts for
at an abrupt change in direction in which the exposed deviations or the actual strength from the nominal
surface is concave. strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal
load, uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load
REINFORCl!:D-CONCRETF.-ENCASED SHAPRS is into a load effect and for the manner and consequences of
a structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete. failure.
RF,LATIVF, BRACE is a brace that controls the relative S~COND-ORDF.R ANALYSIS refers to the stmctural
movement or two adjacent brace points along the length analysis in which equilibrium conditions are formulated
of a beam or column or the relative lateral displacement on the deformed structure; second-order effects (both
oftwu stories in a frame (sec nodal brace). P- o and P - .d, unless specified otherwise) are
included.
REQUIRED STRENGTH is the forces, stresses and
deformations acting on the strnctural component, SECOND-ORDER EFFF..CT is an cffc<:t of loads acting
determined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD on the deformed configuration of a structure; includes
or ASD load combinations, as appropriate, or as specified P - /j effect and P - ii effect.
by this Specification or Standard.
St:ISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY refers to the
RESISTANCE. See the definition of Nominal Strength. classification assigned to a building by the NSCP code
based upon its seismic use group and the design spectral
RESIST ANCI<: FACTOR, </> is a factor that accounts for response acceleration coeflicients.
unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from the
actual strength and for the manner and consequences of SEISMIC LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM (SLRS) is an
failure. assembly of strnctural elements in the building that resists
seismic loads, including struts, collectors, chords,
R£STRAINED CONSTRUCTION refers to floor and diaphragms and trusses. Seismic response modification
roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings where coefficient, R. Factor that reduces seismic load effects to
the surrounding or supporting structure is capable or strength level as specified by the NSCP code.
resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout the
range of anticipated elevated temperatures. SEISMIC RESPONSE MODIFICATION
COEFFICIENT is a factor that reduces seismic load
RESTRAINING BARS is a steel reinforcement in e1lects to stren~th level.
composite members that is not designed to carry required
loads, but is provided to facilitate the erection of other SEISMIC USE GROUP rclers to the classification
steel reinforcement and to provide anchorage for stirrups assigned to a structure based on its use as specified by the
or ties. Generally, such reinforcement is not spliced to be NSCP code.
continuous.
SERVICE LOAD is a load under which serviceability
REVERSE CURVATURE see double curvature limit states are evaluated.
ROOT OF JOINT is a portion of a joint to be welded SERVICE LOAD COMBINATION 1s a load

where the members are closest to each other. combination under which serviceability limit states are
evaluated.
ROTATION CAPACITY is the incremental angular
rotation that a given shape can accept prior to Sl<:RVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE is a limiting
excessive load shedding, defined as the ratio of the condition affecting the ability or a structure to preserve its
inelastic rotation attained to the idealized elastic rotation appearance, maintainability, durability or the comfort of
at first yic.:ld. its occupants or function of machinery, under normal
usage.
RUPTURE STRENGTH is a strength limited by
breaking or tearing of members or connecting elements. SHEAR BUCKLING is a buckling mode in whi<:h a
plale clement, such as the web of a beam, deforms
RUPTURE STRENGTH refers to a connection, strength under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
limited by tension or shear rupture.

CHAPT~f~ !i ·- Str\1clural Steel 5-31
SHEAR CONNECTOR refers lo headed stud, channel, SINGLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section

plate or other shape welded to a steel memhcr and symmetric about only one axis through its ccmroid.
embedded in concrete of a composite niembcr to
transmit shear forces at the interface hetween the two SLl::NDF.R-ELEMENT SECTION is a cross section
materiab. flOS$essing plate components of sullicient slenderness
such that local buckling in the elastk range will occur.
SHEAR CONNECTOR STRENGTH refers to limit
slate of reaching the strength of a shear connector, as SLIP refers to in a bolted connection, limit state of
govemed by the connector bearing against the concrete in relative motion of connected pmts prior to the attainment
the slab or by the tensile strength of the connector. ufthc available strength of the connection.
SHEAR RUPTURJ£ refers to limit state of rupture SLIP-CRITICAL CONNECTION refers to bolted
(fracture) due to shear. connection designed to resist movement by friction on the
faying surface of the connection under the clamping
SHEAR W ALI. is a wall that provides resistance to forces or the bolts.
lateral loads in the plane of the wall and provides stability
for the structural sysll.:m. SLOT WELD refers to weld made in an elongated hole
fusing an element to another element.
SHEAR YIF,LDING 1s a yielding that occurs due to
shear. SNIJG-TIGHTENlm JOINT is a joint with the
conJlected plies in firm contact as specified in Section
SHl!:AR YIELDING (PUNCIIING} reters to HSS SIO.
connection, I imit state based on out-of-plane shear
strength of the chord wall to which branch members are SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMF.
attached. (SCBF) is a diagonally braced frame meeting the
rcquiremen!s of Section 526 in which all members of the
SHEET STli:EL refors to a composite floor system, steel bracing system arc subjected primarily to axial forces.
used for closure plates or miscellaneous trimming m a
formed steel deck. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMl<') refers to moment
frame system that meets the rcquirements of Section 522.
SHIM is a thin layer of material used to fill a space
between faying or hearing surfaces. SPF..CIAL PLATE SHEAR WALL (SPSW) reters to
plate shear wall system that meets the requirements of
SlD~SWAY BUCKLING is a limit state of lateral Section 530. ·
buckling of the tension flange opposite the location or
a concentrated compression force. SPECIAL RF.INFORCl<:D CONCRETE SHEAR
WALLS COMJ>OS.ITE WITH STRUCTURAL
SJl)EWALL CRIPPUNG (FRAME) is a limit state of sn,:F.L ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) is a composite shear
web crippling of the sidewalls of a chord member al a walls meeting the requirements of Section 547.
HSS trnss connection.
SPl£CIAI, SEISMIC SYSTEMS is seismic systems
SIDEWALL CRUSHING is a limit state hased on designc<l assuming significant inelaslic action occurs in
bearing strength of chord member sidewall in IISS some members under the design earthquake.
truss connection.
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAM.E (STMI<'). refers
SIMPLE CONNECTION is a connection that transmits to truss moment framc system that meets the requirements
negligible bending moment between connected mcmhers. of Section 525.
SINGLF:-CONCENTRATED }'ORCE is a tensile or SPF:CIFICATION refers to the AJSC Specification for

compressive force applied normal to the flange of a Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 360).
mcmher.
SPF..CIFIED MINI.MUM Tli:NSILF, STR~NGTII
SINGI.E CURVATURE is a deformed shape of a beam is the lower limit or tensile strength specified for a
with no inflection point within the span. material as defined by ASTM.
National Structural Code uf the Philippines VolumP. I. 7th Edition. 2015

SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIF,LD STRESS is the lower STRESS refers to stress as used in this Specification
limit of yield stress specified for a material as defined by means force per unit area.
ASTM.
STRESS is a force per unit area caused by axial force,
SPLICE is a connection between two structural clements moment, shear or torsion.
joined at their ends to form a single, longer element.
STRESS CONCENTRATION is a localized stress
SS (STRUCTURAL STEEL). is an ASTM designation considerably higher than average (even in
for certain steels intended for structural applications. uniformly loaded cross sections of uniform thickness)
due to abrupt changes in geometry or localized loading.
STABILITY is a condition reached in the loading of a
structural component, frame or strm.:ture in which a STRONG AXIS is a major principal centroidal axis of a
slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not cross section.
produce large displacements.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS is a determination orload
STATIC YIELD STRENGTH is the strength of a effects on members and connections based on principles
structural member or connection detennined on the basis of structural mechanics.
of testing conducted under slow monotonic loading until
failure. STRUCTURAL COMPONENT refers to member,
connector, connecting element or assemblage.
STEEL CORE is an axial-force-resisting clement of
braces in BRRF. The steel core contains a yielding STRUCTURAL MEMBERS See the definition of Cold-
segment and connections to transfer its axial force to Fonned Structural Steel Structural Members
adjoining elements; it may also contain projections
beyond the casing and transition segments between the STRUCTURAL STEEL arc steel elements as defined in
projections and yielding segment. Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges.
STlFFENED .ELEMENT refers tu Hat compression
element with adjoining out-of-plane elements along both STRUCTURAL SYSTEM is an assemblage of load-
edges parallel to the direction of loading. carrying components that are joined together to provide
interaction or interdependence.
STIF.FENED OR PARTIALJ,Y STIFFENED
COMPRESSION ELEMENTS. is a flat compression SUB-ASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIMEN is the
clements (i.e., a plane compression tlange of a flexural combination of the brace, the connections and testing
member or a plane web or flange or compression apparatus that replicate as closely as practical the axial
member) of which both edges parallel to the direction of and flexural defonnations of the brace in the prototype.
stresses arc stiffened either by a weh, flange, stiffening
lip, intcm1ediate stiffener, or the like. SUB-ELEMENT OF A MULTIPLE STIFFENED
ELEMENT is a portion of a multiple stitlened element
STIFFENER is a structural element, usually an angle or between adjacent intermediate sti1leners, between web
plate, attached to a member to distribute load, transfer and intermediate stiffener, or between edge and
shear or prevent buckling. intermediate stiffener.
STIFFNESS is a resistance to defom1ation of a member T-CONNECTION refers to HSS connection in which

or structure, measured by the ratio of the applied force (or the branch member or connecting element is
tnoment) lo the corresponding displacement (or rotation). perpendicular to the main member and in which forces
transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated
STRAIN COMPATIBILITY METHOD is a method by shear in the main member.
for determining the stresses in a composite member
considering the stress-strain relationships of each TENSILE RUPTURE refers tu limit state of rupture
material and its location wilh respect to the neutral axis (fracture) due to tension.
of the cross section.
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MATERIAL) is the
STRENGTH LIMIT STATE refers to limiting condition maximum tensile stress that a material is capable of
affecting the safety of the structure, in which the ultimate sustaining as defined by ASTM.
load-carrying capacity is reached.

CHAPTER 5 - Structural Sleel 5-33
TF.NSILE STRENGTH (OF MEMBER) is the TURN-OF-NUT METHOD refers to procedure whereby
maximum tension force that a member is capable of the specified prctt.:nsion in high-slrenglh bolts is
sustaining. controlled by rotating the fastener component a
predetermined amount aHer the bolt has been snug
TENSILE YIELDING is the yielding lhat occurs due lo tightened.
tension.
UNBRACED LENGTH is a distance between braced
TENSION AND SHEAR RUPTURE refors lo bolt, points of a member, measured between the centers of
limit state or rupture (fracture) due to simultaneous gravity of the bracing members.
tension and shear force.
l!NF:NCASED COMPOSITE BEAM is a composite
TENSION FIELD ACTION is the behavior of a beam wherein the steel section is not completely enclosed
panel under shear in which diagonal tensile forces in reinforced concrete and relies on mechanical
develop in the web and compressive forces develop connectors for composite action with a reinforced slab or
in the transverse stiffeners in a manner similar to a slab on metal deck.
Pratt truss.
UNEVEN LOAD DISTRIBUTION refers to HSS
TESTED CONNECTION refers to connection that connection, condition in which the load is not
complies with the requirements of Appendix B-4. distributed through the cross section of connected
elements in a manner that can he readily determined.
TF.ST SPECIMEN is a brace test specimen or sub-
assemhlage test specimen. UN FRAM F.O END is the end of a member not
restrained against rotation by stiffeners or connection
THERMALLY CUT is a cut with gas, plasma or laser. clements.
THICKNESS refers lo thickness of any element or UNRESTRAINED CONSTRUCTION refers to the

section is the base steel thickness, exclusive of coatings. floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
buildings that are assumed to be free to rotate and expand
TIE PLATE is a plate element used to join two parallel throughout the range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
components of a built-up column, girder or strut rigidly
connected to the parallel components and designed to UNSTIFFEN~D COMPRESSION ELF:MENTS is a
transmit shear between them. 11at compression element stiffened at only one edge
parallel to the direction of stress.
TOE OF FILLET refers to junction of a fillet weld
face and base metal. Tangent point of a rolled section UNSTIFFENED ELEMENT refers to Hal compression
fillet. element with an adjoining out-of-plane element along one
edge parallel to the dircclion of loading.
TORSIONAL BRACING is a bracing resisting twist of
a beam or column. lJNSYMMETRIC SECTION is a section not symmetric
either about an axis or a point
TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling mode in which
a compression member twists about its shear center axis. V-BRACED FRAME is a concentrically braced frame
(SCBF, OCBF or BR.RF) in which a pair of diagonal
TORSIONAL YIELDING is the yielding that occurs braces located either above or below a beam is connected
due to torsion. to a single point within the clear beam span. Where the
diagonal braces arc below the beam, the system is also
TRANSVERS.E REINFORCEMENT refers to a steel referred lo as an inverted-V-braccd frame.
reinforcement in the fonn of closed ties or welded wire
fabric providing confinement for the concrete surrounding VARIABLE LOAD is a load not classified as permanent
the steel shape core in an encased concrete composite load.
column.
VERTICAL BRACING SYSTEM is a system of
TRANSVERSE STIFFENER is a web stiffener oriented shear walls, braced frames or both, extending through
perpendicular to the flanges, attached to the web. one or more floors of a building.
TUBING sec HSS.

VIRGIN STEEL is steel as received from the steel YIELD MOM l:NT reiers to in a member subjected to
producer or warehouse heforc being cold worked as a hcnding, the moment at which the extreme outer liber
result of fabricating operations. first attains the yield stress.
VIRGIN STEEL PROP~RTIES is a mechanical YI ELD POINT refers to firsl stress in a material al which
prope1ty of virgin steel such as yield stress, tensile an increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress as
strength, and elongation. defined by /\STM.
WEAK AXIS is a minor principal centroidal axis of a YU:LD STRENGTH refers lo stress at which a material
cross section. exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the
proportionality of stress to slrain as defined hy /\STM.
WF,ATHERING STEEL refers to high-strength, low-
alloy steel that, witl1 suitable precautions, can be used in YlELD STRESS is a generic term to denote either yield
normal atmospheric exposures (not marine) without point or yield strength, as appropriate for the material.
protective paint coating.
YIELDING is a limit state of inelastic deformation that
WEB is the portion of the section that is joined to two occurs after the yield stress is reached.
flanges, or that is joined to only one flange provided it
crosses the neutral axis. YIELDING (PLASTIC MOMENT) is a yielding
throughout the cross section of a member as the bending
WEB BUCKLING. refers to limit state of lateral moment reaches the plastic moment.
instability of a web.
YIELDING (YIEJ,D MOMENT) is a yielding at the
WEB COMPRESSION RUCKLING refers to limit extreme fiber on the cross section of a member when the
state of out-of-plane compression buckling of the web due bending moment reaches the yield moment
to a concentrated compression force.
WEB CRIPPLING is a limit state of local failure of web

plate in the immediate vicinity of a concentrated load or
reaction.
WEB SIDESWAY BUCKLING reJers to limit state of

lateral buckling of the tension flange opposite the location
of a concentrated compression force.
WELD METAL is a portion of a fusion weld that has

been completely melted <luring welding. Weld metal has
clements of filler metal and base metal melted in the weld
thermal cycle.
WEI .D ROOT See root ofjoint.
X-BRACED FRAM I!: is a concentrically braced frame

(OCBF or SCBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
crosses near the mid-length of the hraces.
Y-BRACED FRAME is an eccentrically braced frame

(EBF) in which the stem of the Y is the link of the EBF
system.
Y-CONNF,CTlON refers to HSS connection in which

the branch member or connecting element is not
perpendicular to the main member and in which
forces transverse to the main member are primarily
equilibrated hy shear in the main member.

SECTION501 501.1.3 Nuclear Applications

,, GENERAL PROVISIONS The design of nuclear structures shall comply with the
requirements of the Specification for the Design,
501.1 Scope Fabrication, and Erection of Steel Safety-Related
Structures in Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690)
Section 501 states the scope of the specification, induding Supplement No. 2 or the Load and Resistance
summarizes referenced specification, code, and standard Factor Design Specification for Steel Safety-Related
documents, and provides requirements for materials a.nd Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690L), in
contract documents. addition to the provisions of this Chapter.
User Note: User notes are intended to provide concise 501.2 Referenced Specifications, Codes and
and practical guidance in the application of the Standards
provisions.
The following specifications, codes anti standards are
This Chapter sets forth criteria for the design, referenced in this Chapter:
fabrication, and erection of structural steel buildings and
other strut:turcs, where other structures are defined as American Conc1·ete Institute (ACI)
those stru<-1:ures designed, fabricated, and erected in a manner
similar to buildings, with building-like vertical and lateral ACI 318-08 Building Code Requirements for
load resisting elements. Where conditions are not t:overed Structural Concrete and Commentary
by this Chapter, designs are permillcd to be based on tests
or analysis, subject to the approval of the authority having
ACI 318M-08 Metric Building Code Requirements .fi,r
jurisdiction. Alternate methods of analysis and design shall
Structural Concrete and Commentary
be pemiitted, provided such alternate methods or criteria are
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
ACI 349-06 Code Requirements for Nuclear Sqfety-
Related Concrete Structures and Commentary
User Note: For the design of structural members, other
than Hollow Structural Sections (HSS), that are cold-
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC)
fonncd to shapes, with elements not more than 25 mm in
thickness, the provisions in the AISJ North American
A ISC 3 03-10 Code of Stundard Practice for Steel
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Buildings and Bridges
Structural Members are recommended.
ANSI/AfSC 341-10 Seismic Provisions for
501.1.1 Low-Seismic Applications
Structural Steel Buildings
When lhc seismic response modification coefficient, R, ANSI/AISCN690-1994(R2004) Specification .fi,r the
(as specified in this Chapter) is taken equal to or less Design, Fabrication and Erection qf Steel Sqfety-Related
than 3, the design, fabrication, and erection of Structures fi,r Nuclear Facilities, including Supplement
structural-sleet-framed buildings and other structures No.2
shall comply with this Chapter.
ANSI/AISC N690L-03 Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Steel Safety-Related Structures
501.1.2 High-Seismic Applications for Nuclea1· Facilities
When the seismic response modification coeilicicnt, R, American Society of Civil F.ngineers (ASC~)
(as specified in lhis Chapter) is taken greater than 3, the
design, fabrication and erection of structural-steel-framed SEI/ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design toads for Buildings
buildings and other structures shall comply with the and Other Structures
requirements in the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings (NSCP Chapter 5 Part 2), in addition to the ASCE/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for
provisions of this Specification. Structural Fire Protection
American Society ot' Mechanical Engineers (ASM E)

ASME B 18.2.6-06 Fasteners for Use in Structural A490-08b Stcmdard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel
Applications Structural Bohs, 150 hi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASM E 846. 1-02 Sui/ace Texture, Swface A490M-08 Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel
Roughness, Waviness, and Lay Bolts, Classes 10.9 and /0.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints
(Metric)
ASTM International (ASTM)
A500-03a Standard Specification for Cold-Formed
A6/A6M-09 Standard Specification for General Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Requirements fnr Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Rounds and Shapes
Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASOl-07 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed
A36/A36M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
Structural Steel
A502-03 Standard Specification fnr Steel Structural
A53/ A53M-07 Standard Specification for Pipe. Steel, Rivets
Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless AS 14/AS I 4M-05 Standard Specification .f<ir High-
Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
Al 93/ Al 93M-08b Standard Specification for Alloy- Suitable Jo,· Welding
Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service A529/A529M-05 Standard Specification for High-
St1·ength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
Al 94/ Al 94M-09 Standard Spec[fication for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts.for High Pressure or High- A563-07a Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Temperature Service, or Both Steel Nuts
A2 l 6/A2 I6M-08 Standard Specffication for Steel A563M-07 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Castings. Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Steel Nuts [Metric}
Temperature Service
A568/ A568M-09 Standard Spec[fication for Steel, Sheet,
A242/A242M-04 Standard Specification for High- Carbon, and lligh-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Strength /,ow-Alloy Structural Steel Cold-Rolled, Generql Requirementsfor
A283/A283M-03 Standard Specification for Low A572/A572M-07 Standard SpecUication for

and fntermediClte Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
A307-07b Standard Specification .for Carbon Steel
Bolts and Stud~, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength A588/A588M-05 Standard Specification for lligh-
Strength I.ow-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
A325-09 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick
Steel, Heat Treated, 1201/05 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength A606/A606M-09 Standard Specffication for
Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-
A325M-09 Standard Specification for High-Strength Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric
Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) Corrosion Resistance
A354-07a Standard Specification J<>r Quenched and A618/A618M-04 Standard Specffication for Ho/-
Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy
Threaded Fasteners Structural Tubing
A370-09 Standard Test Methods and Definitions .for A668/A668M-04 Standard Specification for Steel
Mechanical Testing ofSteel Products Forgings, Carbon and Alloy,for General Industrial Use
A449-07b Standard Specification fur Quenched and

Tempered Steel Bolts and Studf

CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel 5.37
A673/A673M-04 Standard Spec(fication for Fl554-07a Standard Specfficationfor Anchor Bolts, Steel,
Sampling Procedure for Impact TesLing of Structural 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength
Steel
User Note: ASTM Fl554 is the most commonly
A 709/ A709M-09 Standard Specification for Carbon referenced specification for anchor rods. Grade and
and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Shapes, weldability must be specified.
Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy
Structural Steel Plates for Bridges F1852-08 Standard Specification for "Twist-Q[f' Type
Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies,
A751-08 Standard Test Method'i, Practices, and Steel, Heat Treated, 1201/05 ksi lvfinimum Tensile Strength
TerminologY,/or Chemical Analysis ofSteel Products
American Welding Society (A WS)
A847/A847M-05 Standard Specification for Cvld-
Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, [.ow-Alloy AWS DI .. 1/D I. IM-2004 Structural Welding Code-Steel
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance AWS A5.I/A5.IM-2004 Specf/ication for Carbon Steel
Electrodesfor Shielded.Metal Arc Welding
A852/A852M-03(2007) Standard Specification for
Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate AWS A5.5/A5.5M-2004 Specijkation .for Low-Alloy
with 485 MPa Minimum Yield Strength to 100 mm Thick Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
A913/A913M-07 Standard Specification for High- AWS A5 .17I AS .17M-97 Specification for Carbon Steel
Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Electrodes and Fluxer for Submerged Arc Welding
Produced by Quenching and Seif-Tempering Process
(QST) . A WS A5. I 8/A5.18M-2005 Specification/or Carbon Steel
Electrodes and Rods.for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
A992/A992M-06a Standard Specification for Steel for
Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing AWS A5.20/A5.20M-2005 Specification for Carbon Steel
Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
User Note: ASTM A992 is the most commonly
referenced specification for W shapes. A WS A5.23/A5.23M-2007 Spectfication for Low-Alloy
Steel Electrodes and Fluxe'i.for Submerged Arc Welding
AIOI I/A IOI I M-09a Standard Specffication for Steel,
Sheet and Strip, !lot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- AWS A5.25/A5.25M-97 (R2009) Specification.for Carbon
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electrogas
Improved Formability Welding
C33-03 Standard Specification for Concrete AWS A5.26/A5.26M-97 (R2009) Specffication for Carbon
Aggregates and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes/or Electrogas Welding
C330-04 Standard Specification for Lightweight AWS A5.28/A5.28M-2005 Specification for Low-Alloy
Aggr·egates for Structural Concrete Steel Electrodes and Rods/or Gas Shielded Arc Welding
Ell9-08a Standard Test Method~ for Fire Tests of AWS A5.29/A5.29M-2005 Spec{/ication for Low-Alloy
Building Construction and Materials Steel Electrodesfnr Flux Cored Arc Welding
E709-08 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Research Council on Structurlll Connections (RCSC)
Examination
Spec[/ication for Structural Joints Using ASTMA325
F436-09 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel orA490 Bolts, 2004
Washer.~
F959-09 Standard Specification for Compressible-

Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with
Structural Fasteners

501.3 Material
., 5. Bars:
501.3.1 Structural Steel Materials ASTM A36/ A36M
Material test reports or report of tests made by the ASTM A529/A529M

fabricator or a testing laboratory shall constitute sufficient ASTM A572/A572M
evidence of conformity with one or the above listed ASTM A709/A 709M
ASTM standards. For hot-rolled structural shapes, plates,
and bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with 6. Sheets:
ASTM A6/ A6M; for sheets, such tests shall be made in
accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; for tubing and ASTM A606
pipe, such tests shall be made in accordance with the AIOII/AIOI IMSS
requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed
HS LAS
above for those product forms. If requested, the fabricator
shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural steel HSLAS-F
furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified.
501.3.t.2 Unidentified Steel
501.3.1.1 ASTM Designations
Unidentified steel free of injurious defects is pennitted to
Structural steel material conforming to one of the be used for unimportant members or details, where the
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under precise physical properties and weldahility of the steel
this Specification: would not affect the strength of the structure.
I. Hot-rolled structural shapes: 501.3.1.3 Rolled Heavy Shapes
ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a tlange thickness

ASTM A529/ A529M exceeding 50 mm, used as members subject to primary
ASTM A572/ A572M (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure and
ASTM A588/ A588M spliced using complete-joint-penetration groove welds
ASTM A709/ A709M that fuse through the thickness of the member, shall be
ASTM A913/ A913M specified as follows
ASTM A992/ A992M
TI1e contract documents shall require that such shapes be
2. Structural tubing: supplied with Charpy V-Notch (CVN) impact test results in
ASTM A500 accordance with ASTM A6/A6M,
ASTM A50l
ASTMA618 Supplementary Requirement S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact
ASTM A847 Test for Structural Shapes - Altemate Core Location. The
impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 27 J
3. Pipe: absorbed energy at +21 ·c.
ASTM A53/A53M, Gr. B The above requirements do not apply if the splices and
connections are made by bolting. The above requirements do
4. Plates: not apply to hot-rolled shapes with a tlange thickness
exceeding 50 mm that have shapes with flange or web
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A242/A242M elements less than 50 nun thick welded with complete-joint-
ASTM A283/ A283M penetration groove welds to the face of the shapes with
ASTM A514/A514M thicker elements.
ASTM A529/A529M
ASTM A572/ A572M User Note: Additional requirements for joints in heavy
ASTM A588/A588M rolled members are given in Sections 510.1.5, 510.1.6,
ASTM A709/A709M 510.2.7, and 513.2.2.
ASTM A852/ A852M
ASTM AlOl l/AIOI IM

l
3. Washers:
501.3.1.4 Built-Up Heavy Shapes ASTM F436/F436M
Built-up cross-sections consisting or plates with a 4. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension

Indicators:
thickness exceeding 50 mm, used as members subject to
primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or
flexure and spliced or connected to olhcr members using ASTM F959/F959M
complete joint-penetration groove welds that fuse through
the thickness or the plates, shall be specified as follows. Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient
The contract documents shall require that the steel be evidence of conformity with the standards.
supplied with Charpy V-Notch impact test results in
accordance with ASTM A6/ A6M, Supplementary 501.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The
impael test shall be conduclcd in accordance with ASTM Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one
A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum of the following ASTM specifications is approved for use
average value of27 J absorbed energy at +21 °C. under lhis Specification:
ASTM A36/A36M
The above requirements also apply to built-up cross- ASTM Al93/A193M
sections consisting of plates exceeding 50 mm that are ASTMA354
welded with complete-joint-pcn(,'tration groove welds to the ASTM A449
face of other sections. ASTM A572/A572M
ASTM A588/A588M
User Note: Additional requirements for joints in heavy ASTM Fl554
built-up members are given in Sections 510.l.5, 510.1.6,
510.2.7 and 513.2.2. User Note: ASTM Fl554 is the preferred material
specification for anchor rods.
501.3.2 Steel Castings and Forging11
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor
Cast steel shall conform to ASTM A216/A216M, Gr. rods and threaded rods of any diameter.
WCB with Supplementary Requirement S 11. Steel
forgings shalt conform to ASTM A668/A668M. Test Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to
reports produced in accordance with the above reference the Unified Standard Series of ASME 818.2.6 and shall
standards shall constitute sufficient evidt:ncc of have Class 2A tolerances.
confonnity with such standards.
Manufacturer's ce1tification shall constitute sufficient
501.3.3 Bolts, Washers aud Nuts evidence of conformity with the standards.
Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the 501.3.S Consumables for Welding
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under
this Specification: Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the
following specifications of the American Welding
I. Bolts: Society:
ASTMA307 AWS A5.1
ASTM A325/ A325M AWSA5.5
ASTMA449 AWS A5.17/A5.17M
ASTM A490/ A490M AWS A5.18
AWSA5.20
ASTM Fl852
AWS A5.23/A5.23M
A WS A5.25/ A5.25M
2. Nuts:
A WS A5.26/A5.26M
ASTM Al94/Al94M AWSA5.28
ASTM A563/ A563M AWSA5.29
A WS A5.32/A5.32M

Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient SECTION 502

;vi<lence of confomlity with the standards. Filler metals and
tluxes that are suitable for the intended application shall be DESIGN REQ.UIREMENTS_~-----..J
selected.
502.1 General Provisions
501.3.6 Headed Stud Anchors
The design of members and connections shall be consistent
Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the with the intended behavior of the framing system and the
requirements of Structural Welding Code-Steel, assumptions made in the strnctural analysis. Unless
AWS Dl.l. restricted by this chapter, lateral load resistance and stability
may be provided by any combination of members and
User Note: Studs are made from cold drawn bar, either connections.
semi-killed or killed aluminum or silicon deoxidized,
conforming to the requirements of AS"Thf A.29/ A29M-04, 502.2 Loads and Load Combinations
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,
Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for. Tue loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by this
chapter. In the absence of a building code, the loads and
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient load combinations shall be those stipulated in Chapter 2.
evidence of confonnity with AWS D l. l. For design purposes, the nominal loads shall be taken as the
loads stipulated by this chapter.
501.4 Structural Design Drawings and
Specifications 502.3 Design Basis
Designs shall be made according to the provisions for

See Section I06.
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or to the
provisions for Allowable Strength Design (ASD).
502.3. t Required Strength
The required strength of structural members and

connections shall be determined by structural analysis
for the appropriate load combinations as stipulated in
Section 502.2.
Design by elastic, inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted.

Provisions for inelastic and plastic analysis are as
stipulated in Appendix A-1, Inelastic Analysis and
Design. The provisions for moment redistribution in
continuous beams in Appendix A-1, Section A-1.3 are
permitted for elastic analysis only.
502.3.2 Limit States
Design shall be based on the principle that no applicable

strength or serviceability limit state shall be exceeded
when the structure is subjected to all appropriate load
combinations.

502.3.3 Design for Strength Using Load and 502.3.6 Design of Connections
Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
Connection clements shall be designed in accordance with
Design according to the provisions for LRFD satisfies the the provisions of Sections 510 and 5 11. The forces and
requirements of this chapter when the design strength of defonnations used in design shall be consistent with the
each structural component equals or exceeds the required intended performance of the connection and the assumptions
strength detennined on the basis of the LRFD load used in the structural analysis.
combinations. All provisions of this chapter, except for
those in Section 502.3.4, shall apply. 502.3.6.1 Simple Connections
Design shall be in accordance with Eq. 502.3- I: A simple connection transmits a negligible moment
across the connection. In the analysis of the stmcture,
(502.3-1) simple connections may be assumed to allow unrestrained
relative rotation between the framing elements being
where connected. A simple connection shall have sunicient
rotation capacity to accommodate the required rotation
Ru required strength (LRFD)
determined by the analysis of the stmcture. Inelastic
Rn nominal strength, specified in Sections 502 rotation of the connection is permitted.
through 51 I
4> resistance factor, specified in Sections 502 502.3.6.2 Moment Connections
through 511
</>Rn = design strength
A moment connection transmits moment across the
connection. Two types of moment co1U1ections, FR and
502.3.4 Design for Strength Using Allowable PR, are pennitled, as specified below.
Strength Design (ASD)
I. Fully-Restrained (FR) Moment Connections
Design according to the provisions for ASD satisfies the
requirements of this chapter when the allowable Fully-restrained (FR) moment connections transfer
strength of each structural component equals or moment with a negligible rotation between the
exceeds the required strength determined on the basis connected members. In the analysis of the strncture,
of the ASD load combinations. All provisions of this lite connection may be assumed to allow no relative
chapter, except those of Section 502.3.3, shall apply. rotation. An FR connection shall have sufficient
strength and stitlitess lo maintain the angle between
Design shall he in accordance with Eq. 502. 3-2: the conneclcd members at the strength limit slates.
(502.3-2) 2. Partially-Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
where Partially-restrained (PR) moment co1U1ections

transfer moments, but the rotation between connected
Ra required strength (ASD) members is not negligible. In the analysis of the
Rn nominal strength, specified in Sections 502 structure, the force-defonnation response
through 511 characteristics of the connection shall he included. The
.n safety factor, specified in Sections 502 response characteristics of a PR connection shall be
through 5 I I documented in the technical literature or established
Rn/11 ~ allowable strength by analytical or experimental means. The
component elements of a PR connection shall have
502.3.5 Design for Stability sufficient strength, stiffness, and deformation
capacity at the strength limit slates.
Stability of the structure and its elements shall be
detennined in accordance with Section 503.

502.3.9 Design for Serviceability 502.4 Member Propel'ties
·rhe overall structure and the individual members, 502.4.1 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
connections, and connectors shall be checked for
serviceability. Performance rcquircmenls for Sections are classified as compact, non-compact, or
serviceability design are given in Section 512. slender-element sections. 'Por a scclion to qualify as
compact its flanges must be continuously connected to
502.3.10 Design for Ponding the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios or its
compression clements must not exceed the limiting width-
The roof system shall be investigated through structural thickness ratios Ap from Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2. If the
analysis to assure adequate strength and stability under width-thickness ratio of one or more compression clements
ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided exceeds Ap, but docs not exceed Ar from Tables 502.4.1
with a slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points and 502.4.2, the section is noncompact. If the width-
of free drainage or an adequate system of drainage is
thickness ratio of any element exceeds lr, the section is
provided to prevent the accumulation of water.
referred to as a slender-clement section.
See Appendix A-2, Design .for Ponding, for methods of
502.4.2 Unstiffened Elements
checking ponding.
For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge
502.3.11 Design for Fatigue
parallel to the direction of the compression force, lhe
width shall be taken as follows:
Fatigue shall be considered in accordance with Appendix
A-3, Design for Fatigue, for members and their
connections subject to repeated loading. Fatigue need not I. For flanges ofl-shapcd members and tees, the width b
be considered for seismic e11eets or for the effects of wind is on~halfthe foll-flange width, ht.
loading on nonnal building lateral load resisting systems
and building enclosure components. 2. For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees,
the width b is lhe full nominal dimension.
502.3.12 Design for l<'ire Conditions
3. For plates, the width b is the distance from the free
Two methods of design for fire conditions a,rc edge to the first row of fasteners or 1inc of welds.
provided in Appendix A-4, Structural Design for Fire
Conditions: Qualification Testing and Engineering 4. For stems of tees, d is taken as the full nominal
Analysis. Compliance with I.he fire protection depth or the section.
requirements in this Chapter shall be deemed to satisfy
the requirements of this section and Appendix A-4. User Note: Refer to Table 502.4.1 for the graphic
representation ofunstiffened element dimensions.
Nothing in this section is intended to create or imply a
contractual requirement for the engineer-of-record 502.4.3 Stiffened Elements
responsible for the structural design or any other
member of the design team. For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel
to the direction of the compression force, the width shall
502.3.13 Design for Corrosion Effects be taken as follows:
Where corrosion may impair the strength or serviceability

I. For wehs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear
of a structure, structural components shall be designed to
tolerate corrosion or shall be protected against corrosion.
or
distance between nanges less the fillet comer radius
at each flange; he is twice the distance from the
centroid to the inside face of the compression flange
less the fillet or comer radius.
2. For webs of !milt-up sections, h is the distance

between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
distance between flanges when welds arc used, and
he is twice lhc distance from the centroid to the nearesl ,.
line of fasteners at the compression flange or the

CHAPTER 5 - Structurnl Steel 5-43
inside face of the compression flange when welds 503 .1 Design Wall Thickness for HSS
are used; hp is lwicc tl1c distance from the plastic
neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners at lhc The design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations
compression flange or the inside face of the involving the wall thickness of hollow structural sections
compression Hangc when welds are used. (HSS). The design wall thickness, t, shall be taken equal
to 0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for clectric-
3. For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections, the resistance welded (ERW) IISS and equal to the nominal
widtl1 b is the distance between adjacent lines of thickness for submerged-arc welded (SAW) HSS.
fasteners or lines of welds.
4. For flanges of rectangular hollow slructural sections

(HSS), the width b is the clear distance between web
less the inside comer radius on each side. For webs of
rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance between the
flanges less the inside corner radius on each side. If
the comer radius is not known, b and h shall be taken
as tl1e corresponding outside dimension minus three
times the thickness. The thic.lmess, t, shall be taken as
the design wall thickness, per Section 502.3.12.
User Note: Refer to Table 502.4.2 for the graphic

representation of stiffened element dimensions.
For tapered flanges of rolled sections, lhe thickness is the

nominal value halfway between the free edge and the
corresponding face of the web.

Table 502.4.1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements

_,
Width· Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Description of Example
Case Thickness
Elements Ratio A:i, Ar
(comnact) (non-compact)
- b:i
Flexure in flanges of
t,
1 rolled I-shaped b/t 0.38 JE/Fy 1.0 jE/ f'y
sections and channels
~h
jb ,i
Flexure in flanges of .,.,
doubly and singly [a}lbJ
2 b/t 0.38JE/Fy 0.9S)kcE/Fi
symmetric I-shaped
built-up sections
Uniform compression
in flanges of rolled I-
-(/)
cQJ
shaped sections,
plates projecting from
W7~_,.
r-b·t 1
'#_.ihl
t,
~
E I-shaped
~ rolled
(.! 3 NA o.s6j£/Fy
'O
sections; outstanding b/t
I/
~ legs of pairs of angles
g in continuous contact
~
~
I;
ti and flanges of
=
;:::::, channels
17#
r-b-:1
~··
Uniform compression
in flanges of built-up
"'
• [al
I-shaped sections and
4 b/t NA 0.64JkcE/Fy
plates or angle legs
projecting from built- b
up I-shaped sections rL' J."JF.r r//////1
,r
Uniform compression
in legs of single
angles, legs of double
5 angles with b/t NA 0.45 Je/Fy
separators, and all
other unsliffened
r
clements
Flexure in legs of
6 single angles
b/t o.s4JE/Fy 0.91jE/Fy
101 kc= Jh4I tw , hut shall not b~ taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes. (Sec Cases 2 and 4)
ll>J FL =0. 7 F y for minoT-axis bending, major axis bending of slender-web built-up l-shaped members, an<l major axis bending of .:ompaet and
non-compacl web built-up I-shaped members with SxtfSxc ~ 0. 7; FL = F yS:afSx, ~ 0. SF y for major-axis bending of compact and non-compact
w~h built-up I-shaped members with S,u / Sxc < 0.7. (See Case 2)

Table 502.4.2 Limiling Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements
Width- Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Description of
Case Thickness Ap Ar Example
Elements Ratio (comoact) (non-compact)
7
Flexure in flanges of
tees
b/t 0.38JE/Fy 1.ojEff~
T ·
~
Uniform compression
8 dftw NA o.1sJe/Fy
in stems of tees
¥ ~ '/////HA
~
Flexure m webs of
9
doubly symmetric I-
hftw 3.76 JE/Fy S.70JE/Fy h ~
... :.;_._t
shaped sections and ~ w
channels ~
:>'//// ~
V////, ¥////A
,,::
Unifonn compression ~
ti in webs of doubly ,,::
i::
ll) 10 hftw NA 1.49JE/Fy h ....ll~
E
ll)
symmetric I-shaped , tw
~
1:i:l sections ~
-,:,
ll) ·gn . fl U fA
c
~
t;;}
'-
·a
17'//,
fl
V')
Flexure in webs
h, Fy
hp t
2 p~a-
11 of singly-symmetric
I-shaped sections
hcftw
( 0.54 Mp
My - 0.09 r
s; Ar
. 5.70 JE!Fy ---
... ~ l+fw
cg
10"//////~
Uniform compression
m flanges of .J, t
rectangular box and I'/. '/////////, ?)
~-
hollow structural t ~
b ~
~
sections of uniform
12
thickness subject to
b/t 1.12j£/Fy 1.40JE!Fy ~ ~
~
bending or
~.
compression; flange
~
cover plates and
/,
diaphragm plates '/§'/ //////, ~
between lines of
fasteners or welds
·--·-- '"---. ... -

Table 502.4.2 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elcmcnls (continuation)
Limiting Width-Thickness
Width- Ratios
Description of Example
Case Thickness
Elements AP ..lr
Ratio
(com act) (non-com pact)
Flexure in webs of
13
rectangular H SS
h/t 2.42 JH/Fy 5.70JE/Fy
...
<f>
t:
(I)
E
(I)
Q
',:) Unifonn compression
1.49,J E' / Fy

c 14 in all other stiffened b/t NA
~ clements
v5
Circular hollow
sections
Jn uniform D/t NA O.llE/Fy
compression
15
In Flexure D/t 0.07E/Fy 0.31£/Fy
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control
Shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection,

and quality control shall meet the requirements
stipulated in Section 513, Fabrication, Erection, and
Quality Control.
502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures
Provisions for the evaluation of existing stmctures are

presented in Appendix A-5, Evaluation of Existing
Structures.

CHAPTER 5 -- Structural Steel 5-47
SECTION503 503. 1.3 System Stability Design Requirements

STABILITY ANALYSIS AND Lateral stability shall be providcd by momcnt frames.
DESIGN braced frames. shear walls, and/or other equivalent laterai
load resisling systems. The overturning effects of drift and
503.1 Stability Design Requirements the destabilizing influence of gravity loads shall be
considered. Force transfer and load sharing between
503.1.1 General Stability Requirements clements of the framing systems shall be considered.
Braced-frame and shear-wall systems, moment frames,
Stability shall he provided for the structure as a whole and gravity framing sysLcms, and combined systems shall
for each or its clements. Any method that considers the satisfy the following specific requirements:
influence of second-order effects (including P - fl and
P - 6 eftects), flexural, shear and axial deformations, 503.1.3.1 Braced-Frame and Shear-Wall Systems
geometric imperfections, and member stiffness reduction
due to residual stresses on the stability or the structure and In structures where lateral stability is provided solely by
its clements is permitted. The methods prcscrihed in this diagonal bracing, shear walls, or equivalent means, the
secLion and Appendix A- 7, Direct Analysis Method, effective length factor, K, for compression members shall
satisfy these requirements. All component and be taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates that a
connection deformations t11at contribute to the lateral smaller value is appropriate. In braced-frame systems, it is
displacements shall be considered in the stability analysis. permitted to design the columns, beams, and diagonal
members as a vertically cantilevered, simply connected
In structures designed by elastic analysis, individual truss.
member stability and stability or the structure as a whole
are provided jointly by: User Note: Knee-braced frames function as moment-
frame systems and should be treated as indicated in
I. Calculation of the required strengths for Section 503. l.3 .2. Eccentrically braced frame systems
members, connections and other elements using function as combined systems and should be treated as
one of the methods specified in Section 503.2.2, and indicated in Section 503.1.3.4.
2. Satisfaction of the member and connection design 503.1.3.2 Moment-•'rnmc Systems

requirements in this specification based upon those
required strengths. In frames where lateral stability is provided by the
tlexural stiffncs~ of connected beams and columns, the
ln structures designed by inelastic analysis, the provisions effective length factor Kor elastic critical buckling stress,
of Appendix A-1, Inelastic Analysis and Design, shall he f~, for colunms and beam-columns shall be detenninc<l as
satisfied. specified in Section 503.2.
503.1.2 Member Stability Design Requirements 503.1.3.3 Gravity Framing Systems
Individual member stability is provided by satisfying the Columns in gravity framing systems shall be designed
provisions of Sections 505, 506, 507, 508 and 509. based on their actual length (K = 1. 0) unless analysis
shows that a smaller value may be used. The lateral stability
User Note: Local buckling of cross section components of gravity framing systems shall be provided by moment
can be avoided by the use of compact sections defined in frames, braced frames, shear walls, and/or other equivalent
Section 502.4. lateral load resisting systems. P - A eHects due to load on
the gravity columns shall be transferred to the lateral load
Where elements arc designed to function as braces to resisting systems and shall be considered in the
define the unbraced length of columns and beams, the calculation of the required strengths of the lateral load
bracing system shall have sufficient stiflhess and stren1:,rth resisting systems.
to control member movement at the braced points. Methods
of satisfying this requirement arc provided in
Appendix A-6, Stability BracingjcJr Columns and Beams.

503.1.3.4 Combined Systems For members subjected to axial compression, B 1 may be

calculated based on the first-order estimate
'The analysis and design of members, connections and other Pr= Pnt + Ptt·
clements in combined systems of moment frames, braced
frames, and/or shear walls and gravity frames shall meet the User Note: 8 1 is an amplifier to account for second
requirements of their respective systems. order effects caused by displacements between brace
points (P - &) and 82 is an amplifier to account for
503.2 Calculation of Required Strengths second order effects caused by displacements of braced
points (P - Ll).
Except as permitted in Section 503.2.2.2, required
strengths shall be determined using a second-order For members in which 8 1 < 1. 05, it is conservative
analysis as specified in Section 503.2. l. Design by either to amplify the sum of the non-sway and sway moments
second-order or first-order analysis shall meet the (as obtained, for instance, by a first-order elastic analysis)
requirements specified in Section 503.2.2. by the 8 2 amplifier, in other words,
M,. = B2(Mnt + Mlt),
503.2.1 Methods of Second-Order Analysis
Second-order analysis shall conform lo the requirements (503 .2-3)

of this Section.
503.2.1.l General Second-Order Elastic Analysis

User Note: Note that the 8 2 amplifier (Eq. 503.2-3)
Any second-order elastic analysis method that considers can be estimated in preliminary design by using a
both P - /J. and P - 8 effects may be used. maximum lateral drift limit corresponding to the story
shear L Hin Eq. 503.2-6b.
The amplified First-Order Elastic Analysis Method
defined in Section 503.2.1.2 is an accepted method for and
second-order elastic analysis of braced, moment, and
combined framing systems. a = 1. OO(LRFD) a = 1. 60(ASD)
required second-order tlexural strength using
503.2.J.2 Second-Order Analysis by Amplified LRFD or ASD load comhinalions, N-mm
First-Order Elastic Analysis first-order moment using LRFD or ASD
Mnt
load combinations, assuming there is no
User Note: A method is provided in this section to lateral translation of the frame, N-mm
account for second-order effects in frames by amplifying first-order moment using LRFD or ASD
the axial forces and moments in members and connections load combinations caused by lateral
from a first-order analysis. translation of the frame only, N-mm
required second-order axial strength using
The following is an approximate second-order analysis LRFD or ASD load combinations, N
procedure for calculating the required flexural and axial first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
strengths in members of lateral load n::sisting systems. The load combinations, assuming there is no
required second-order flexural strength, Mr, and axial lateral translation of the frame, N
strength, Pr, shall he determined as follows: total vertical load supported by the story
using LRFD or ASD load comhinations,
(503.2-Ja) including gravity column loads, N
first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
load combinations caused by lateral
(503.2-lb)
translation of the frame only, N
is a coefficient assuming no lateral
where translation or the frame whose value shall
be taken as follows:
(503.2-2)
a. For beam-columns nul subject to transverse
loading between supports in the plane of
bending,

Cm= 0.6 - 0.4(M1 /M 2 ) (503.2-4) L = story height, mm

K1 = effective length factor in the plane
Where M 1 and M 2 , calculated from a first- of bending, calculated based on the
order analysis, are the smaller and larger assumption ofno lateral translation,
moments, respectively, at the ends of that set equal to J.0 unless analysis
portion of the member unbraced in the indicates that a smaller value may
plane of bending under consideration. be used
Mi/M2 is positive when the member is K2 = eilcctive length factor in the plane
bent in reverse curvature, negative when of bending, calculated based on a
bent in single curvature. sidesway buckling analysis
b. For beam-columns subjected to transverse User Note: Methods for calculation of

loading between supports, the value of Cm K2 are discussed in the AISC Commentary.
shall be determined either by analysis or
conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. l!J.H = first-order interstory drift due to
lateral force s, mm. Where AH
elaslic critical buckling resistance varies over the plan area of the
of the member in the plane of structure, 4.H shall be lhc average
bending, calculated based on the drift weighted in proportion to
assumption of zero sidesway, N vertical load or, alternatively, the
maximum drift
EH story shear produced by the lateral
(503.2-5) forces used to compute l!J.H, N
IP e2 elastic critical buckling resistance 503.2.2 Design R equirements

for the story determined by
sidesway buckling analysis, N These requirements apply to all types of braced, moment,
and combined framing systems. Where the ratio of second-
For moment frames, where s idesway ordcr drift to first-order drift is equal to or less than 1.5, the
required strengths of members, connections and other
buckling effective length factors K 2 are
elements shall be determined by one of the methods
determined for the columns, it is permitted
specified in Sections 503.2.2.1 or 503.2.2.2, or by the
to calculate the elastic story sidesway
Direct Analysis Meth od of Appendix A-7. Where the ratio
buckling resistance as
of second-order drift to first-order drift is greater than 1.5,
the required strengths shall be determined by the Direct
(503.2-6a) Analysis Method of Appendix A-7.
User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order

drift can be represented by B 2 , as calculated using
For all types of lateral load resisting
Eq. 503.2-3. Alternatively, the ratio can be calculated
systems, it is permitted to use
by comparing the results of a second-order analysis to the
results of a first-order analysis, where the analyses are
conducted either under LRFD load combinations directly
(503.2-6b) or under ASD load combinations with a 1.6 factor applied
to the ASD gravity loads.
where
For the methods specified in Sections 503.2.2.1 or
503.2.2.2:
E = modulus or elasticity of steel =
200,000 MPa
RM = 1.0 for braced-frame systems; I. Analysis shall be conducted according to the design and
loading requirementc; specified in either Section
: 0.85 for moment-frame and
502.3.3 (LRFD) or Section 502.3.4 (ASD).
combined systems, unless a larger
value is justified by analysis
I = moment ofinertia in the plane of
4
bending, mm
National Structural Code of the Philipplnes Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015

5-fiO CHAPfF.R 5 - Structural St.eel
2. The strncture shall be analyzed using the nominal 503.2.2.2 Design hy First-Order Analysis
geometry and the nominal elastic sLiffi1es~ for all
elements. Required strengths are permitted to be determined by a
lirs1-or<ler analysis, with al I members designed using
503.2.2.1 Design hy Second-Order Analysis K = 1. 0, provided that
Where required strengths arc determined by a second-ordcr I. The required compressive strengths of all memhers
analysis: whose flexural stiffnesses arc considered to conu-ibute
to t11e lateral stability of the strudure satisfy the
I. The provisions of Section 503.2. 1 shall be satisfied. fol lowing limitation:
2. For design by ASD, analyses shall he c.micd out under aP,. ~ 0.5Py (503.2-7)
1.6 times thc ASD load combinations and the re!;ults where
shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
strengths. a= 1. 0 (LRFD) a= 1.6 (ASD)
User Note: The amplified first order analysis method of P,. required axial compressive strength under J ,RFD
Section 503.2.1.2 incorporates the 1.6 multiplier directly or ASD load combinations, N
in the B 1 and B 2 ampli liers, such that no other member yield strenglh ( = AFy ), N
modification is needed.
2. All load combinations include an additional laLeral
3. All gravity-only load combinations shall include a load, Ni, applied in combination with othcr loads at
minimum lateral load applied at each level of the
each level of the structure, where
stnicture of 0. 002¥ i, where Yi is the design gravity_
load applied at level i, N. T11is minimum lateral load (503.2-8)
shall he considered independently in two orthogonal
directions. where
User Note: The minimum lateral load of 0. 002Yi, ~ gravity load from the LRFD load
in conjunction with the other design-analysis combination or 1.6 times the ASD load
constraints listed in this section, limits the error that combination applied at level i, N
would otherwise be caused hy neglecting initial out-of~
/J./ L the maximum ratio of /J. to L for all
plumbness and member stiffness reduction due to
~torics in the structure
residual stresses in the analysis.
first-order intcrslory drift due to the design
loads, mm. Where IJ.. varies over the plan
4. Where the ratio of second-order drift to first-order
drift is less than or equal to I . I , members are area of the structure, /J. shall he the average
drift weighted in proportion to verlical
pcrmitLcd to be designed using K = 1. 0.
load or, altcrnatively, the maximum drift
Otherwise, columns and beam-columns in moment
L story height, mm
frames shall be designed using a K factor or column
buckling stress, Fe, determined from a sidcsway
buckling analysis or the structure. Stiffness User Note: The drift IJ.. is calculated under LRFD load
combinations directly or under ASO load combinations
reduction adjustment due to column inelasticity is
with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD gravity loads.
pcm1itted in the determination of the K factor. For
braced frames, K for compression members shall be This additional lateral load shall be considcn:<l
taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates a
independently in two orthogonal directions.
smaller value may he used.
3. The non-sway amplilication of beam-column moments
is considered by applying the 8 1 amplifier of Section
503.2.1 to the total member moments.
Association of Structural Engineers of tt1e Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

SECTIONS04 504.J Area Determination

DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR 504.3.1 Gross Area
TENSION
The gross area, Ag, of a rncmher is the total cross-
504.1 Slenderness Limitations sectional area.
There is no maximum slenderness limit for design of 504.3.2 Net Area

members in tension.
The net area, A 11 , of a member is the sum of the products
User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension,
of the thickness and the neL width of each element
the slenderness ratio L/r preferably should not exceed computed as follows:
300. This suggestion does not apply to rods or hangers in
tension.
In computing net area for tension and shcar, the width of a
boll hole shall be taken 2 mm greater than the nominal
504.2 Tensile Strength dimension of the hole.
The design tensile strength, 4'tPn, and the allowable For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal
tensile su·cn1:,rth, P nf!1.t, of tension members, shall be the or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall he obtained hy
lower value obtained according to the limit states of deducting from the gross widt11 the sum of the diameters or
tensile yielding in the gross section and tensile rupture in slot dimensions as provided in Section 510.3.2, of all holes
the net section. in t11e diain., and adding, for each gage space in the chain,
I. For tensile yielding in the gross section: the quantity s 2 / 4g.
where
Pn = FyAg (504.2-1)
s longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any
'Pt = 0. 90 (LRFD) flt = 1. 67 (ASD) two consecutive holes, mm
g transverse center-Lo-center spacing (gage) between
2. For tensile rupture in the neL section: fastener gage lines, mm
Pn = F uAe (504.2-2) For angles, the gage for holes in opposite a(ljacent legs
shall be the sum of the gages from the back of the angles
less the thickness.
'Pt = 0. 75 (LRFD) fit = 2. 00 (ASD)
Por slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An,
where is the gross area minus the product of the thickness and the
total width of material that is removed to form the slot. 1.n
effective net area, mm2 determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld
gross area of member, mm2 metal shall not be considered as adding to the net area.
specified minimum yield stress of the type of
steel being used, rvIPa User Note: Section 510.4.1.(2) limits An to a max.imwn of
specified minimum tensile strength of the type 0. 85Ag connection design for splice plates with holes.
of steel being used, M Pa
504.3.3 Effective Net Area
When members without holes are fully connected by
welds, the effective net area used in Eq. 504.2-2 shall be The effective area of tension members shall be
as defined in Section 504.3. When holes an.: present in a determined as follows:
member with welded end conneclions, or at the welded
connection in the case or plug or slot welds, the effective (504.3-l)
net area through the holes shall be used in Equation 504.2-2.
where U, lhc shear lag factor, is determined as shown in

Table 504.3. J.
- ..- .
Members such as single angles, double angles and WT where

:iections shall have connections proportioned such that U is Zt(a + d/2), mm2
Ast
equal to or greater than 0.60. Alternatively, a lesser value or shortest distance from edge of the pin
U is pennitted if tl1ese tension members are designed for
a
hole to the edge of the member
the effect of eccentricity in accordance with Seclion measured parallel to the direction of the
508.1.2 or Section 508.2. force, mm
2t + 16, mm but not more than the
504.4 Built-up Members actual distance from the edge oftl1c hole
to the edge of the part measured in the
For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors direction nonnal to the applied force
between elements in conlinuous contact consisting of a pin diameter, mm
plate and a shape or two plates, see Section 5 J 0.3.5.
d
t thickness of plate, mm
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without lacing 3. For bearing on the projected area of tlic pin, sec
are permitted to be used on the open sides of built-up Section 510.7.
tension members. Tic plates shall have a length not less than
two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or 4. For yielding on the gross section, use Eq. 504.2-1 .
fasteners connecting them to the components of the member.
The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less than one- 504.5.2 Dimensional Requirements
fiftieth of the distance between these lines. The
longitudinal spacing of intem1ittent welds or fasteners at The pin hole shall be located midway between the ed~es
tie plates shall not exceed 150 mm. of the member in the direction nonnal to the applied
force. When the pin is expected to provide for relative
User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors movement between connected parts while under full
between components should preferably limit the load, the diameter of the pin hole shall nol be more than I
slenderness ratio in any component between tlle mm greater than the diameter of the pin.
connectors to 300.
The width of the plate al the pin hole shall not be less
504.5 Pin-Connected Members than 2beff + d and the minimum extension, a, beyond
the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to the ax~s of tlle
504.5.1 Tensile Strength member, shall not be less than 1. 33beff·
The design tensile strength, </>tPn, and the allowable The comers beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at
tensile strength, P,Jfit of pin-connected members, shall 45° to the axis of the member, provided the net area
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states beyond the pin hole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut,
of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing, and yielding. is not less than tllat required beyond the pin hole parallel to
the axis of the member.
I. For tensile rupture on the net effective area:
504.6 Eyebars
(504.5-l)
504.6. t Tensile Strength
</>t = 0. 75 (LRFD) fit = 2. 00 (ASD) The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be
determined in accordance with Section 504.2, with Ag
2. For shear rupture on the effective area:
taken as the cross-sectional area of the body.
Pn = O. 6FuAsl (504.5-2)
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the
eyebars shall not exceed eight times its tllickness.
</>st= 0. 75 (LRFD) fist = 2. 00 (ASD)

CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel 5.53
504.6.2 Dimensional Requirements
Eyebars shall be of unifoITT1 thickness, without

reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular heads
with the periphery concentric with the pin hole.
The radius of transition between the circular head and the

eyebar body shall not be less than the head diameter.
The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times

the cyebar body width, and the pin hole diameter shall not
be more than l mm greater than the pin diameter.
For steels having F y greater than 485 MPa, the hole

diameter shall not exceed five times the plate thickness, and
the width of the eyebar body shall be reduced accordingly.
A thickness of less than 13 mm is pennissible only if

external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler
plates into snug contact. The width from the hole edge to
the plate edge perpendicular to the direction of applied
load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the purpose
of calculation, not more than three-fourths times the
cyebar body width.

5-54 CHAPTER 5 - Structurnl Steel
Tahle 504.3.1 Shear Lag Factors for Connections to Tension Members
, Case Descriution of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Examole

All tension memhers where the tcnsio11 load is transmillcd
I directly to each of cross-sectional clements hy fasteners or U= 1.0 -
welds. (exceot as in Case::s 3, 4, 5 and 6)
_ i_
All tension members., except plates and JISS, where the
tension load is transmitted to some but not all of the ,: = I=
U = 1--
2
cross-sectional deme11ts by fasteners or longitudinal welds t I ~
'~
(Alternately, for W, M, Sand HP, Case 7 rnay he used.) """
U = 1.0
All tcnsiou members where the tension load is transmitted and
3 hy transverse welds to some but not all of the cross-
sectional elements.
A.,= area of the directly -
connected elements
l ~ 2w ... U = 1.0
4
Plates where the tension load is transmiued hy longitudinal
welds only.
2w > l ~ t .5w ... U 0.87
1.Sw > l ~ w ... U 0.75
=
= ~a;v-
l ?. 1.3D ... U = 1.0
D ::,; l < 1.3D ... U = 1 - 7
5 Round HSS with a single concentric gusse::t plate.
i =/) /rr
ffi
m
i
l?.11 ... U= 1-l
with a single
concentric gusset plate
R2 + 2BH
6 Rectangular USS x- 4(8 + H)
i
with two side gusset
plates
with flange connected

with 3 or more
l>
- H ... U =·1- -l
x- 4(0 + H)
B2
b/?:.213d ... U= 0.90

ID
W, M, S or HP Shapes or Tees fasteners per line in h1< 2!3d ... U = 0.85 -
cut from tl1cse shares. (If U is direction of loading
7
calculated per Case 2, the larger witl1 web connected
value is permitted to be used) with 4 or more u~ 0.10
fasteners per line in -
direction ofloadim:
with 4 or more
fasteners pe::r line in U=0.80 -
Single angles (If U is calculated direction ofloading
8 per Case 2, the larger value is
with 2 or 3 fasteners
permitted lo he used U=0.60
per line ill the -
direction of loading
l = length of connection, mrn; w = plate width, mm; x = connection eccentricity. mm B = overall width of
rectangular HSS 1nemher, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the connection, nun; H =
overall height of
rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane of the connection, nun.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Slfml 5-!i5
SECTION SOS The nominal compressive strcn1,-th, Pn, shall be <lctennined

based on the limit state of llcxural buckling.
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR
COMPRESSION (505.3-1)
505.1 General Provisions The flexural buckling strcs!>, F"', is determim:d as follow.,;:
The design compressive strength, <f>cPn, and the allowable

compressive strength, P1Jfic, are determined as follows:
The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall he the lowest

I. when 7KL ~4.71 Fy
p; (or Fe~ 0.44Fy)
value obtained according to the limit states of Hcxural

buckling, torsional buckling and llcxurnl-torsional buckling.
Fer= [o. 658;:J Fy (505.3-2)
I.
2.
For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric members the
limit state ofllcx.urnl buckling is applicable.
For singly .symmetric and unsymmctric members, and

certain doubly symmetric members., such as cruciform
2. when -KL >4.71 -
T Py
p; { or Fe< 0.44Fy)
or built-up columns, the limit states of torsional or

Fer= 0.877Fe (505.3-3)
flexural-torsional buckling arc al.so applicable.
where
</>c = 0. 90 (LRFD) fie = 1. 67(ASD)
Fe= elastic critical buckling stress determined according
505.2 Slenderness Limitations and Effective I ,cngth to Eq. 505.3-4, Section 505.4, or the provisions of
Section 503.2, as applicable, MPa.
The eflectivc length factor, K, for calculation of column
slendemcss, KL/r., shall be determined in accordance with n2 E
Section 503, F =-- (505.3-4)
e (~L/
where
User Note: The ~o equations for calculating the limits and
L = laterally unbraced length of the member, mm applicability of Section 505.3, one based on KL/rand one
r ~ governing radius of gyration, mm based 011 Fe, provide the same result.
K :.... the effective length factor, as shown below
505.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and
User Note: For members designed on the basis of Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members
compression, the slenderness ratio KL/r preferably without Slender Elements
should not exceed 200.
This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric
505.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of members, and certain doubly symmetric members, such as
Members Without Slende1· Elements cruciform or huilt-up columns with compact and
noncompact sections, as defined in Section 502.4 for
This section applies to compression members with compact uniformly compressed clements. These provisions arc not
and noncompact sections, as defined in Section 502.4, for required for single angles, which are covered in Section
uniformly compressed elements. 505.5.
User Note: When the torsional unhracc<l length is larger The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be determined
than the lateral unbraced length, then Section 505.4 may based on the limit states of flexural-torsional and torsional
control the design of wide flange and similarly shaped buckling, as follows:
columns.
(505.4-1)

where
l. For double-angle and tee-shaped compression
l
members: gross area of member, mm2
.
warp111g constant, mm6
Fer
= (Fcry2H
+ Fcrz) [ _
1
1- 4FcryFcrzH
.
( F c,·y + F crz/ (505.4-7)
(505.4-2) X2 +yZ
H=l- <> <> (505.4-8)
-2
r <>
where Fcry taken as Fer from Eq. 505.3-2 or 505.3-3,
for flexural buckling about the y-axis of symmetry and
(505.4-9)
KL KL and
-=-
r ry
n-2E
(K://
(505.4-3) F ----
(505.4-10)
ey -
2. For all otl1er cases, Fer shall be determined according to
Eq. 505.3-2 or 505.3-3, using the torsional or flexural-
torsional elastic buckling stress, Fe, determined as n-2 ECw ) 1 (505.4-11)
follows: Fez = ( (K zL)Z + GJ Agr~
a. For doubly symmetric members:

G shear modulus of elasticity of steel
77 200 MPa
(505.4-4) moment of inertia about the principal axes,
4
mm
torsional constant, mm4
h. For singly symmetric members where y is the axis eftective length factor for torsional buckling
of symmetry: coordinates of shear center with respect to the
centroid,.mm
4FeyFezH ] polar radius of gyration about the shear center,
Fe
= (Fey2H
+ Fez) [ _
1 1 - - - " ' -- - mm
(Fey + Fez/ radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
(505.4-5)
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped sections,
c. For unsymmetric members, Fe is the lowest root Cw may be taken as Iyh~/4, where h 0 is the distance
of the cubic equation: between flange centroids, in lieu of a more precise analysis.
For tees and double angles, omit term with Cw when
computing Fez and take X0 as 0.
505.5 Single Angle Compression Members
The nominal compressive strength, P n, of single angle

members shall be determined in accordance with. Section
505.3 or Section 505.7, as appropriate, for axially loaded
(505.4-6) members, as well as those subject to the slenderness
modification of Sections 505.5(1) or 505.5(2), provided the
members meet the criteria imposed.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5-57
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members are For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than
pennitted to be neglected when the members are evaluated as 1.7 and connected lhrough the shorter leg, KL/r from
axially loaded compression members using one of the Eqs. 505.5.3 and 505.5.4 shall be increased by adding
effective slenderness ratios specified below, provided that: (1)
6[(btf bs) 2 - 1 ], but KL/r of the member shall nol
members are loaded at the ends in comprcS!;ion through the
same one leg; (2) members arc attached by welding or by he less thao 0. 82L/rz,
minimum two-bolt connections; and (3) there are no
intennediate transverse loads. where
I. For e4ual-lcg angles or unequal-leg angles connected L length of member between work points at
through the longer leg that are individual members or are lruss chord centerlines, mm
web members of planar trusses with adjacent web longer leg of angle, mm
members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or shorter leg of angle, mm
chord:
L rx radius of gyration about geometric axis
a. When O :S - < 80: parallel lo connected leg, mm
rx rz radius of gyration for the minor principal axis,
KL L mm
-=72+0.75- (505.5-1)
r rx
3. Single-angle memhers with different end conditions
b. When L from those described in Seclion 505.5(1) or 505.5(2),
->80: with leg length rat.ios greater than I. 7, or with transverse
rx loading shall be evaluated for combined axial load and
flexure using the provisions of Section 508. End
KL L connection to different legs on each c::nd or to both legs,
- = 32 + 1.25- :S 200 (505.5-2)
T l"x the use of single bolts or the attachment of adjacent web
members to opposite sides of the gusset plate or chord
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than shall eonslitute ditli:rcnt end conditions requiring the use
l.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KL/r from of Section 508 provisions.
Eqs. 505.5.1 and 505.5.2 shall be increased by adding
4[(btfbs) 2 -1]~ but KL/r of the members shall 505.6 Built-up Members
not he less than 0. 95L/rz, 505.6.1 Compressive StJ·ength
2. For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected
I. The nominal compressive strength of built-up
through the longer leg that arc web members of box or
members composed of two or more shapes that are
space trusses with adjacent web members attached to the
interconnected hy bolts or welds shall be determined in
same side of the gusset plate or chord:
accordance with Sections 505.3, 505.4, or 505.7
subject to the following modification. In lieu of
L more accurate analysis, if the buckling mode involves
a. When 0 <-<
-rx - 75: relative deformations that produce shear forces in the
connectors between individual shapes, KL/r is
KL L replaced by (KL/r)m determined as follows:
- = 60+0.8- (505.5-3)
r rx
a. For intermediate connectors that arc snug-tighl
L
b. When - > 75: bolted:
rx
KL L (505.6-1)
- = 45 + - :S 200 (505.5-4)
r rx

b. For intermedialc connectors that are welded or but rather lO prevent relative movement between the
pretensioned bolted: components at the end as the built-up member takes a
curved shape.
(-KL)
2
+o 82
a2 ( a
-
)2 At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on
base plates or milled surfaces. all components in contact with
r O - (1 + a 2) rib
one another shall be connected by a weld having a length not
(505.6-2) less than the maximum width of the member or by bolts
spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters aparl for a
where distance equal to I 1/2 times the maximum width of the
member.
modified column slenderness of
built-up member Along the length of built-up compression members between
the end connections required above, longitudinal spacing for
column slenderness of built-up
intermittent welds or bolls shall be adequate lo provide for
member acting as a unit in the
lhe transfer of the required forces. For limitations on the
buckling direction being
longitudinal spacing of fasteners between clements in
considered
continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two
distance between connectors, mm
plates, sec Section 5 I 0.3.5. Where a component of a built-
minimum radius of gyration of up compression member consists of an outside plate, the
individual component, mm maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the
radius of gyration of individual
component relative to its centroidal
axis parallel lo member axis of
thinner outside plate times j
0. 75 E / Fy , nor 300 mm,
buckling, mm when intermittent welds are provided along the edges of

the componcnls or when fasteners are provided on all gage
a separation ratio= h/2rib
lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the
h distance between centroids of
maximum spacing on each gage line shall not exceed the
individual components
perpendicular to the member axis of
buckling, mm
thickness of the thinner outside plate times 1. 12 j E/ F y
nor450 mm.
2. The nominal compressive strength of built-up members
composed of two or more shapes or plates with at least Open sides of compression members buill up from plates
one open side interconm:t:ted by perforated cover plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover plates
or lacing with tic plates shall be determined in perforated with a succession of access holes. The
accordance with Sections 505.3, 505.4, or 505.7 subject unsupported width of such plales at access holes, as
to the modification given in Section 505.6.1 (I). defined in Section 502.4, is assumed to contribute to the
available strength provided the following requirements arc
505.6.2 Dimensional Requirements met:
Individual components of compression members composed of l. The width-thickness ratio shall confomt to the
two or more shapes shall be connected to one another at limitations of Section 502.4.
inlervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka/ri
of each of the component shapes, between the fasleners, does User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting
not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness width/thickness ratio for Case 14 in Table 502.4.2 with
ratio or lhe built-up member. The least radius of gyration, the width, b, taken as the transverse distance between
ri, shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of each the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
component part. The end connection shall be welded or taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this approach, the
pretensioned bolted with Class A or B faying surfaces. limiting width thickness ratio may be determined through
analysis
User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted end connel-1ion
or a built-up compression member for the full compressive 2. The ratio oflength (in direction of stress) to width of hole
load with bolts in shear and bolt values based on bearing shall not exceed two.
values; however, the bolts must be pretensioned. The
requirement for Class A or B faying surfaces is not intended
for the resistance of the axial force in the built-up member,

3. The clear distance between holes in the direction or stress The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be determined
shall be not less than the transverse distance between based on the limit states of tlexural, torsional and flexural-
nearest lines of connecting fasteners ur welds. torsional buckling.
4. The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a

minimum radius or 38 mm. Pn = Fc,-Ag (505.7-1)
As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie

plates is pennitted at each end and at intermediate points if a. When -KL s; 4. 71 ];;,
--
r QFy
the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends
as practicable. In members providing available strength, the
end tic plates shall have a length of not Jess than the distance QFy]
hctween the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the F,,. = Q [0.658--p;;- Fy (505.7-2)
components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have
a length not less than one-half of this distance. The thickness
of tic plates shall be not Jess than one-fiftieth of the distance
between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the b. When KL> 4.71 ];;,
- --
segments of the members. In welded construction, the welding r QFy
on each line connecting a tie plate shall total not less than
one-third the length of the plate. In bolted construction, the (505.7-3)
spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not
more than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected elastic critical buckling stress, calculated using
to each segment by at least three fasteners. Eqs. 505.3-4 and 505.4-4 for doubly symmetric
members, Eqs. 505.3-4 and 505.4-5 for singly
Lacing, including Hat bars, angles, channels, or other shapes symmetric members, and Eq. 505.4-6 for
employed as lacing, shall he so spaced that the L/r ratio of unsymmctric members, except for single angles
the flange included between their connections shall not where Fe is calculated using Eq. 505.3-4.
exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio for Q 1.0 for members with compact and noncompact
the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to sections, as defined in Section 502.4, for
provide a shearing strenglh normal to the axis of the member uniformly compressed clements
equal to 2 percent of the available compressive strength of the QsQa for members with slender-element
member. The L/r ratio for lacing bars arranged in single sections, as defined in Section 502.4, fur
systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio unifofll}ly compressed clements.
shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at the
intersections. For lacing bars in compression, l is pennitted to User Note: For cross sections composed of only
be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between unstiITencd slender elements, Qa =
1 then = Qs . For
welds or fasteners connecting it to the components of the cross sections composed of only stiffened slender elements,
built-up mcmher for single lacing, and 70 percent of that Q 5 = 1 then Q = Qa. For cross sections composed of
distance for double lacing. both stiffened and unstiffened slender elements,
Q: QSQa•
User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the
member shall ereforably be not less than 60. for single
505.7.1 Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs
lacing and 45 for double lacing. When the distance
between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is
more than 380 mm, the lacing shall preferably be double The reduction factor Qs for slender unstiilencd elements is
or be made of angles. defined as follows:
For additional spacing requirements, sec Section 510.3.5. I. For flanges, angles, and plates projecting from rolled
columns or other compression members:
505.7 Members with Slender Elements
a. When !!_ s; 0. 56 {I
This section applies to compression members with slender t ~Fy
sections, as defined in Section 502.4 for unifonnly
compressed elements.
(505.7-4)

(505.7-10)
0. 56);; < ~ < 1.03);;
~ ,:; 0. 91);;
b. When
b. When O. 45);; <
Q, = 1.415 - o. 74 (~) Ji (505.7-5)

Q, = 1. 34 - 0. 76 (~) Ji (505.7-11)
c. When ->
b 1.03 );;
t-
-
F y c. When ~ > 0 . 91 [
t ~Py
(505.7-6) O.S3E
Qs = 2 (505.7-12)
Fy (i)
2. For flanges, angles, and plates projecting from built-up where
columns or other compression members:
a. When t::;;
b
0. 64
F' Fy
(505.7-7)
4.
b =
For stems of tees

full width of longest angle leg, mm
a. When ~ ,:; 0. 75);;
Qs = 1. 0 (505.7-13)
~ d {I
(505.7-8) b. When ~· 75~Fy- < t : ; 1. 03JFy
Q, = 1. 908 - 1. 22 (~) Ji (505. 7-14)
(505.7-9) c. When
where:
(505.7-15)
4 and shall not be taken less
~ than 0.35 nor greater than
v h/tw 0.76 for calculation purposes where:
b width of unstiffoned compression
=
3. For single angles element, as defined in Section 502.4, mm
d= the full nominal depth of tee, mm
t ;: thickness of element, mm
a. When

505.7.2. Slende.. Stiffened Elements, Qa l. For axially-loaded circular sections:
The reduction factor, Qa for slender stiffened elements is E D E

defined as follows: When 0.11- < -< 0.45-
Fy t Fy
(505.7-16) 0.038£ 2
where:
Q = Qa =Fy(D/t) +3 (505.7-19)
where
total cross-sectional area of member, mm2
D = outside diameter, mm
summation of the effective areas of the cross
section based on the reduced effective width, t = wall thickness, mm
be, mm2
: - 1 •• - - - - - - ~ -- _ I _: - - • ";.....
The reduced effective width, be, is determined as follows:
I. For unifonnly compressed slender elements, with
~t >- 1. 49~t
~ , except flanges of square and
rectangular sections ofunifonn thickness:
where
f is taken as Fer with Fer calculated based on
Q = 1.0.
2. For flanges of square and rectangular slender-
element sections of uniform thickness with
i;,, 1.40 ft'

/E[ 0. 38
be= 1. 92t~f 1- (b/t)~f ~ b
/El (505.7-18)
where:
f = P,if Aeff
User · Note: In lieu of calculating
f = PnlAeff wbicb requires iteration; f may be taken
equal to Fy. Tbis will result in a slightly conservative
estimate of column capacity.
\ --44---..
SECTION 506 where:
'DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR Mmax absolute value of maximum moment in

FLEXURE the unbraced segment, N-mm
MA ubsolute vulue of moment at quarter point
506.1 General Provisions of the unbraced segment, N-mm
Ma - absolute value of moment at centerline
The design flexural strength, bMn, and the allowable of the unbraced segment, N-mm
Mc ...: absolute value of moment at three--
flexural st.rcngth, Mn/!lb, shall be determined as follows:
quarter point of the unbraced segment,
N-mm
I. For all provisions in this section
Rm cross-section monosymrnetry parameter
1.0, doubly symmetric members
</>b = 0. 90(LRFD) !lb = 1. 67(ASD) 1.0, singly symmetric members
and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be subjected to single curvature bending
determined according to Section 506.2 through
Section 506.12. In s ingly symmetric members subjected to reverse
curvature bending, the laleral-torsional buckling
2. The provisions in this section arc based on the strength shall be checked for both flanges . The
assumption that points of support for beams and available flexural strength shall be greater lhan or equal
girders are restrained against rotation about their 10 the maximum required moment causing compression
longitudinal axis. within the flange under consideration.
The following terms arc common to lhe equations in this Cb is pennitted to be conservatively taken us 1.0 for all
section except where noted: cuses. For cantilevers or overhangs where the free end
is unbraced, Cb == 1.0.
lateral-torsional buckling modification
factor for nonuniform moment diagrams Use.- Note: For doubly symmetric members with no
when both ends of the unsupported segment transverse loading between brace points, Eq. 506.1-1
are braced reduces to 2.27 for the case of equal end moments of
opposite sign and to 1.67 when one end moment equals
12.SMmax zero.
~=
2 . SMmax + 3MA + 4Ma + 3Mc ~
~ 3. 0
(506.1-1)

Table 506.1.1 Selection Table for the Application of Section 506 Sections
Section in Section
Cross Section flange Slenderness Web Slenderness Limit States
506
506.2
-I -3- c c Y,LTB
506.3
·I- NC,S c LTB, FLB
506.4
·I l C,NC, S C,NC Y,LTB,FL.R,TFY
506.5
-I J
-1--f L...J.
C,NC,S s Y, LTB, FLB, TFY
506.6
·+--+ C,NC,S NIA Y,FLB
506.7
B C,NC,S C,NC Y, FLB, WLB
506.8
-e - NIA NIA Y,LB
506.9 --1-F-1-- C,NC,S NIA Y,LTB,FLB
506.10
b -- ~-
. -· NIA NIA Y,LTB,LL.R
506.11
506.12
••
Unsymmetrical shaoes
NIA
NIA
. NIA
NIA
Y = yielding, LTR = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB = flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY
flange yielding, LLB= leg local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = noncompact, S = slender
Y,LTB
AII limit states

= tension

5-64 CHAPTER 5 -· Structural Steel
506.2
... Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members User Note: The square root tenn in Eq. 506.2-4 may be
and Channels Bent about their Major Axis conservatively taken equal to 1.0.
This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members T he limiting lengths Lp and Lr are determ ined as follows:
and channels bent about their major axis, havi ng compact
webs and compact flanges as defi ned in Section 502.4.
Lp = 1. 76r1] ; ; (506.2-5)
The nominal flexu ral strength, Mn , shall be the lower
value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(pl asti c moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
J'0c
2
506.2.1. Yielding
E
Lr= 1. 9Sr 15 O. 7F,, sJi: 1 + 1 + 6. 76
(0. 7f,, S,,h0 )
- E- /c
(506.2- 1) (506.2-6)
where where
spec ified minimum yield stress of the type of z

rts =
JT;C::, (506.2-7)
steel being used, M Pa Sx
plastic section modul us about the x-axis, mm1
and
506.2.2 Lateral-Torsional BuckJing For a doubly symmetric I-shape: c = 1 (506.2-8a)
I. When the limit state of lateral- For a channel: C= ho~Y (506.2-&b)

torsional 2 Cw
buckling does not apply. where
2. When Lp < L& $ Lr h0 = distance between the flange centroids, mm
Mn= Cb [Mp - (Mp - 0. 7FySx) (~:=~;)]$Mp User Note: If the square root term in Eq. 506.2-4 is
conservatively taken equal to l, Eq. 506.2- Lr
(506.2-3)
Note that this approximation can be extremely
where conservative.
Length between points that are either braced For doubly symmetric I-shapes with rectangular flanges,
against lateral displacement of compression
flange or braced against twist or
the cross
Cw = l y h ~ and thus Eq. 506.2-7 becomes
4
section, mm
2
1+0.0785Jch (Lb)
- (506.2-4) r ts may be approximated accurate! y and conservatively as
:x o rts
the radius of gyration of the compression flanges ·plus one-
sixth of the web:
E modulus of elasticity ofste<~l = 200,000 MPa br
torsional constant, mm 4 r ts = .=== =====
Jc
Sx elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis,
3
12 (1 +! htw)
6 b1t,
mm
Association of Structural Engineers o f the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Memhcrs with User Note: I-shaped members for which this section is
Compact Webs and Noncompact or Slender applicable may be designed conservatively using Section
F langes Bent ab out their Major Axis 506.5.
This section applies to doubly symmetric I- shaped members The nominal llexural strength, M,i, shall be the lowest value
bent abo ut their major ax is having compact webs and obtained according lo the limit states of compression llange
noncompact or slender tlangcs as defined in Section 502.4. yielding, lateral-torsional buckling, compression flange local
buckling and tension fla nge yielding.
The nominal flex.urn! strength, M"' shall be the lower value
obtained according to !he limit states of lateral-torsional 506.4. l Compression Flungc Yielding
buckling and compression flange local buckling.
(506.4- 1)
506.3. 1 Later a l-Torsiona l Ruckliog
506.4.2 Latcral-Torsiunal B uckling
for lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section
506.2.2 shall apply. I. When Lb < LP the limit state oflateral-
torsional buckling does not apply.
506.3.2 Compression Fla nge Local Buckling
I. For sections with noncompact flanges 2. When
M11 = [Mp - (Mp - 0. 1FySx) (i~,--t,)]

(506.4-2)
(506.3-1) 3. When Lb> Lr
2. For sections with slender flanges
Mn= Fcr.Sxc ~ RpcMyc (506.4-3)
(506.3-2)
where
Myc = FySxc (506.4-4)
where
2
b1 Cb n 2. E I Lb
..l= - Fer - 2 1 + 0. 078 5- h (- )
2tr
A.pf = Ap is the limiting slenderness for a compact
(;:) XC O rt
(506.4-5)
flange, Table 502.4.l ant.I Table 502.4.2
Arf = Ar is the limiting slenderness for a l ye
For - ~ 0. 23. J shall be taken as zero.
noneompact flange, Table 502.4. l and Table 502.4.2 ly
4
kc = and sha ll not be taken less than T he stress, FL, is determined as fo llows:
.Jhftw
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
xt > 0 7
For
sS xc - .
506.4 Other I-Shaped M embers with Compact or
Noncompact Webs Bent about their Major Axis FL= 0. 1Fy (506.4-6a)
'nus section applies to: (a) doubly symmetric I- shaped For S xt < 0. 7
members bent about their major axis with noncompact webs; S xc
and (b) singly symmetric I-shaped members with webs
attached to the mid-wi dth of the flanges, bent about their (506.4-6b)
maj or axis, with compact or noncompa<,1 webs, as defi ned
in Section 502.4.

The limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of where
.yielding, Lp, is (506.4-11)
L1, = 1 . lr, ~Py

[£ (506.4-7)
brc compression flange width, mm
tfc ~ compression flange thickness., mm
The limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic
lateral-torsional buckling, Lr, is 2. For I-shapes with channel caps or cover plates
attached to the compression flange:
2 radius of gyration of the flange components in

E ~ Sh
Lr= 1.95rtF
l xc
1 + 1 + 6. 76 ( ; x;
F S h0 )
flexural compression plus one-third of the web area
Q in compression due to application of major axis
(506.4-8) b1mding moment alone, mm
The web plastification faelor, Rpc, is <lctcnnined as the ratio of two times the web area in compression
due to application of major axis bending moment
follows:
alone to the area of the compression flange
components
he
a. For t:::;lpw
w User Note: For I-shapes with a rectangular compression
Mp flange, rt may be approximated accurately and
Rvc =--
Myc
(506.4-9a) conservatively as the radius of gyration of the
compression flange plus one-third of the compression
he portion of the web; in other words,
b. For ->lpw
tw
R
pc
= [MP
Myc
-(Mp _
Myc
t) ( A-Avw )] < Mp
Arw - A.pw - Myc
(506.4-9b) 506.4.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling
where 1. For sections with· compact flanges, the limit state of

local buckling does not apply.
ZxFy ::s; 1.6SxcFy
elastic section modulus referred to tension and 2. For sections with noncompact flanges
compression flanges, respectively, mm 3
he
tw M11 = [RpcMyc - (RpcMyc - F1Sxc) (.i~,--A~;,)]
Ap, the limiting slenderness for a compact web,
(506.4-12)
sec Tables 502.4. land 502.4.2
Ar, the limiting slcn<lemess for a no11compact 3. For sections with slender flanges
web, see Tables 502.4. land 502.4.2
The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional (506.4-13)

buckling, Tt, is determined as follows:
where:
1. for I-shapes with a rectangular compression flange: defined in Eqs. 506.4-6a and 506.4-6b
btc the web plastilication factor, detennined by
rt = --;:::========= Eqs. 506.4-9
(506.4-l 0) kc = 4,
~ and shall not be taken less than
v n/ c.w
0.35 nor greater than 0. 76 for calculation
purposes

(brcl2trc) 506.5 Doubly Symmetl'ic and Singly Symmetric [.

Ap, the limiting slenderness for a compact flange, Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bent
Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 about their Major Axis
Art A1., the limiting slenderness for a noncompact
flange, Tahles 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 This section applies to doubly symmetric and singly
symmetric I- shaped members with slender webs attached to
506.4.4 Tension Flange Yielding the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their major axis, as
defined in Section 502.4
1. When Sxt ~ Sxc the limit state of tension flange
yielding does not apply. The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value
obtained according to the limit states of compression flange
yielding, lateral-torsional buckling, compression flange local
2. When Sxt < Sxc buckling and tension flange yielding.
(506.4-14) 506.5.1 Compression Flange Yielding

where
(506.5-1)
The web plastification factor corresponding to the tension 506.5.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
flange yielding limit state, Rpt is determined as follows:
(506.5-2)
a. For he
-t :5 Apw 1. When Lb ::; Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional
IV
buckling does not apply.
(506.4-1 Sa)
Fer= cb[Fy-(0.3Fy)(~:=1;)] :5 Fy
(506.5-3)
Mp- (Mp
Rt= [- - - 1) ( 1- Apw )] <Mp
-
P Myt Myt Arw -Ap,v - Myt
3. When Lb> Lr
(506.4-l 5b)
where
(506.5-4)
A hcftw
Apw J,, ,the limiting slenderness for a compact web,
where
defined in Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2
An the limiting slenderness for a non compact
web, defined in Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 Lp is defined by Eq. 506.4-7
L, = ,rrt JO.; F
1
(506.5·5)
Rpg is the bending s:~:gth redu(c::n factorjf,: E)

Rpg =1- - - 5. 7 - ::; 1. 0
1200 + 300aw tw Fy
(506.5-6)

..
where: T he nominal llexural strength, Mn , shall be the lower value
obtained according to the limit states of yielding (plastic
aw de fined by Eq. 506.4- 11 but shall not exceed 10 and
moment) and flange local buckling.
rt = the effective radius of gyration for lateral buckling
as defined in Section 506.4.
506.6.1 Yielding
506.5.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling
(506.6-1)
(506.5-7)
1. For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of 506.6.2 Flange Local Buckling
compression llangc local buckling does not apply.
J• For Sections with compact flanges the limit state of
2. .For sections with noncompact flanges yielding shall apply.
User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S, M, C and MC

(506.5-8) shapes excepl W21x48, W14x99, Wl4x90, Wl2x65,
Wl0xl2, W8x3 1, W8x l0, W6x l 5, W6x9, W6x8.5, and
3. For se<-'tions with slender fl ange sections

M4x6 huve compacl nanges at F y =
345 Mpa.
2. For sections with noncompact flanges

0. 9Ekc
Fer = z (506.5-9) l - lvr )]
(::,) Mn = [ Mp - (Mr - O. 7FyS y) ( Art - A.pf
where (506.6-2)
4 3. For sections with slender tlanges

kc = - -- and shal l not be taken less than 0.35
J h/ t111 nor greater than 0. 76 for calculation (506.6-3)
purposes
brcl2trc where
lp, the limiting slenderness for a 0.69E
compact fl ange, Tables 502.4.l and Fer = 2
(506.6-4)
502.4.2
Ar, the limiting slendcrne:;s for a
,l = b/t
(1~)
noncompact flange, Tables 502.4.1 and
502.4.2 i ,,1 = ;.,,,the limiting slenderness for a compact llange,
Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2
506.5.4 Tension Flange Yielding lrf == l r, the limiting slenderness fo r a noneompact
flange, Tables 502.4. 1 and 502.4.2
1. Wh en S xt ~ S xc, the lim it state of tension tlange Sy for a channel shall be taken as !he minimum section
yielding does not apply. modulus
506.7 Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-shaped

2 . When S xt < Sxc Members ·
(506.5-10) This section applies to square and reclangular HSS, and

do ubly symmetric box-shaped members benl aboul either
axis, having compact or noncompact webs and compacl,
506.6 I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about noncompacl or slender flanges as dclined in Section 502.4.
their Minor Axis The nominal fiexural strength, M,. , shall be the lowest
value obta ined according to the limit states of yielding
This section applies to I-shaped members and cha1U1els bent (plaslic momen1), flange local buckling and web local
about their minor axis. buckling under pure flexure.

f
506.7.1 Yielding moment) and local huckling.
(506.7-1) 506.8.1 Yielding

where:
(506.8-1)
Z '°""' plastic section modulus ahout the axis of bending,
mm 3
506.8.2 Local Buckling
506.7.2 Flange Local Buckling
I. For compact sections, the limit state of flange local
I. For compact sections, the limit state of flange local
buckling dues not apply.
2. For noncompact sections
2. For sections with noncompact flanges
0.021£ )
~ (506.8-2)
Mn= M, -(M, -F,S)(3.57~ ;i-4.0) SM, Mn= ( + Fy S
3. For sections with slender walls

(506.7-2)
3. For sections with slender flanges (506.8-3)
(506.7-3) where
where 0.33£
Fer= D (506.8-4)
Se{{ is the effective section modulus detennined with l11c
t
etlective width of the compression flange taken as:
S -.,, elastic section modulus, mm3
rI[
o.38
be= 1. 92t~.i; 1 - b/t ~.i; ~ b
II] (506.7-4) 506.9 Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of
Symmetry
506.7.3 Web Local Buckling This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the
plane of symmetry.
1. For compact sections., the limit state of web local
buckling does not apply. The nominal llexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value
2. For sections with noncompact webs moment), lateral-torsional buckling and flange local
buckling.
M. =M, -(M, -F,s,)(0.305 ,:Ji-o. 738) 506.9.1 Yielding
(506.9-1)
~M,,
where
(506.7-5)
Mp= FyZx ~ 1.6My for stems intension (506.9-2)
506.8 Round HSS
~ My for stems in compression (506.9-3)
This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios of less
than 0.45£ 506.9.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
Fy .
(506.9-4)
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value

'
where: The nominal flexural strength, Mn , sha\l be the lowest value

(506.9-5) moment), latcrnl-torsional buckling and leg local buckling.
506.10. t Yielding
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in tension and the (506.10-1)
minus sign applies when the stem is in compression. If the tip where:
of the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced
length, the negative value of B shall be used. My = yield moment about the axis of bending, N-mm.
506.9.3 Flange Local Budding of Tees 506.10.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
(506.9-6) For single angles without continuous lateral-torsional

restraint along the length
Sxc is the elastic se(,1ion modulus referred to the
compression flange. I. When Me ::; My
Fer is determined as follows: 0.17Me)

Mn= ( 0. 92 - My Me (506.10-2)
1. For compact sections, the limit state of flange local
2. When Me> My
2. For noncompact sections
Mn ~ ( 1.92 - 1.17~)My,; 1.SMy

(506.9-7)
(506.10-3)
where:
3. For slender sections
Me, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, 1s
0.69E determined as follows:
Fer= 2
(506.9-8)
(:t;) l. For bending ahout one ofthc geometric ax.cs of an equal-
leg angle with no lateral- torsional restraint.
506.10 Single Angles a. With maximum compression at the toe
This section applies to single angles with and without

continuous lateral restraint along their length.
1 + 0. 78 (b2)
Lt 2
-1 )
Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional restraint

along the Jen1:,11h shall be pennitted to be designed on the
(506.10-4a)
basis of geometric axis (x, y) bending. Single angles without
continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length shall be b. With maximum tension at the toe
designed using the provisions for principal axis bending
except where the provision for bending about a geometric
axis is pennitted.
1+ 0 78 (!'.) + 1)
User Note: For geometric axis design, use section
properties computed about the x- and y-axis of the angle, (506.I0-4b}
parallel and perpendicular to the legs. For principal axis
design use section properties computed about the major and My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment
minor principal axes of the angle. calculated using the geometric section modulus.

User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single angles with 506.10.3 Leg Local Buckling
.. their vertical leg toe in compression, and having a span-to-
depth ratio less than or equal to The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of
the leg is in compression.
1.64-E
-F-
(t)b 2
Fy
-l.4E
l. For compact sections, the limit state of leg local
y
2. For sections with noncompact legs

2. For bending about one of the geometric axes of an
equal-leg angle with lateral-torsional restraint at the
point of maximum moment only
(506.J0-7)
Me shall be taken as 1.25 times Me computed using
Eq. 506.I0-4a or 506.I0-4b
3. For sections with slender legs
My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated using
the geometric section modulus. (506.10-8)
where:
3. For bending about the major principal axis of equal-leg
angles:
0.71E
Fcr =--2-
(506.10-5) (i)
outside width of leg in compression, mm
4. For bending about the major principal axis of unequal- elaslic sc"1ion modulus to the toe in compression
leg angles: relative to the axis of bending, mm\ For bending
about one of the geometric axes of an equal-leg
angle with no lateral-torsional restraint,
P~ +o. os2 (!:)' + Pw) Sc shall be 0.80 of the geometric axis se"1ion
modulus.
506.11 Rectangular Bars and Rounds

(506.l0-6)
where: This section applies to rectangular bars bent about either
geometric axis and rounds.
Cb 1s computed using Eq. 506.1-1 with a maximum value
of 1.5. ,
L laterally unbraced length of a member, mm. The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower
value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
lz minor principal axis moment of inertia, mm4. (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling, as required.
rz radius of gyrati~n for the minor principal axis,
mm 506.11.1 Yielding
t angle leg thickness, mm
/Jw a section property for unequal leg angles, positive Lbd 0.08E
for short legs in compression and negative for
long legs in compression. If the long leg is in
For rectangular hars with t2 S T bent about
compression anywhere along the unbraced length their major axis, rectangular bars bent about their minor axis,
of the member, the negative value of fJw shall be and rounds:
used (506.11-1)

506.11.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling 506.12.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
0. 08E Lbd 1. 9E (506.12-3)

I. For rectangular bars with -F-- <- 2- :::; -F
y t y where:
bent about their major axis:
F , 1• = buckling stress for the section as determined by
analysis, MPa
User Note: In the case of z-shaped members, it is

(506.11-2) recommended that Fer be taken as 0. SO F c-r of a channel
with same flange and web properties.
For rectangular bars with Lbd 1. 9E
2. 7 >p
y
bent 5-06.12.3 L-Ocal Buckling
about their major axis: (506.12-4)
(506.11-3) where:
where: Fer = buckling stress for the section as detennined by
1. 9ECb analysis, MPa
Fn. = L1,d (506 .11-4)
t.2 506.13 Proportions of Beams and Girders
t width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
bending, mm ·506.13.1 Hole Reductions
d = depth ofrcctangular bar, in. mm
length between points that are either braced against This section applies to rolled or built-up shapes, and cover-
Lb = lateral displacement of the compression region or plated beams with holes, proportioned on the basis of
braced against twist of the cross section, mm flexural strength of the gross section.
3. For round and rectangular bars bent about their In addition to the limit states specified in the previous
minor axis, the limit state of lateral-torsional sections, the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be limited
buckling need not be considered. according to the limit state of tensile rupture of the tension
flange. ·
506.12 Unsymmetrical Shapes
I. For F uAtn ~ YtFyAfg, the limit state of tensile
This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes, except Rupture shall not apply.
single angles.
2. For FuA fn < Y rF yA f g, the riominal flexural
The nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall be the lowest
strength, M11 , at the location of the holes in the tension
value obtained according to the limit state of yielding (yield
flange shall not be taken greater than:
moment), lateral-torsional buckling and local buckling where
FuA/11
(506.12-1) Mn= -A
- -Sx {506.1 3-1)
fg
where: where:
s lowest elastic section modulus relative to the axis gross tension flange area, shall be calculated in
of bending, mm3 accordance with the provisions of Section 504 .3 .1,
mm2
506. 12.1 Yielding net ttinsion flange area, calculated in accordance
with the provisions of Section 504.3.2, mm2
(506.12-2) I.OforFy/Ftt $ 0.80
1.1 otherwise

CHAPTER 5 Structurnl Steel 5.73
506.13.2 Proportioning Limits for I -Shaped Partial-length cover plalcs shall be extended beyond the
•. Members thcorelical cutoff point and the extended portion shall be
attached to the beam or girder by high-strength bolts in a
Singly symmelric 1- shaped members shall satisfy the slip-critical conneclion or fillet welds. The attachment shall
following limit: he adequate, at the applicable strength given in Sections
510.2.2, 510.3.8, or 502.3.9 to develop the cover plate's porlion
0. 1 $ ;c :; :;
I
y
0. 9 (506.13-2)
of the flexural strength in the beam or girder at the theoretical
cutoff point.
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate
I- shaped members with slender webs shall also salisfy the termination to the beam or girder shall have continuous
following limits:
welds along bolh edges of the cover plate in lhc length a',
a defined below, and shall be adequate to develop the cover
I. For h~ 1.5 plate's portion of the strength of the beam or girder at lhe
distance a' from the end of the cover plate.
(h)
-
tw max
= 11 7 -
•
Jl;
Fy
(506.13-3) I. When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than
three-fourlhs ofthc plate thickness across the end ofthc
plate
2. For a a'=w (506.13-5)
h> 1.5
where:
0.42E w = width of cover plate, mm

=---
(t~)max Fy
(506.13~4)
2. When there is a continuous weld smaller than three-
where: fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
a = clear dislancc between transverse stiffeners, mm
(506.13-6)
a'= 1.Sw
In unstiffoncd girders h/tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of 3. When there is no weld across the end of the plate
the weh area to the compression flange area shall not exceed
10.
a'= 2w (506.13-7)
506.13.3 Cover Plates

506.13.4 • .Ruilt-Up Beams
Flanges of welded beams or girders may be varied in
Where two or more beams or channels are used side-by-side
thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the
to fonn a tlexural member, they shall be connected together
use of cover plates.
in compliance with Section 505.6.2. When concentrated
loads are carried fi:om one beam to another, or distributed
The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of bolted
between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiftness to
girders shall not exceed 70 percent of the total flange area.
distribute the load shall be welded or bolted between the
beams.
High-strength bolts or welds connecting Hange lo web, or
cover plate to flange, shall be propmtioned to resist the total
horizontal shear resulting from lhe bending forces on the
girder. The longitudinal distribution of these bolts or
intem1iuenl welds shall be in proportion lo the inlensily or
the shear. However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed
tl1c maximum permitted for compression or tension members
in Section 505.6 or 504.4, respectively. Bolts m· welds
connecting 1lange lo web shall also he proportioned to
transmit to the weh any loads applied directly to the tlange,
unless provision is made to transmit such loads by dirccl
bearing.

SECTION 507 b. For 1.10 j kvE/Fy<h/tw$;1.37~ kvE/Fy

DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
507.1 General Provisions
Cv
1.10 ../kv E/Fy
= - -......:....---=- (507.2-4)
h/tw
Two methods of calculating shear strength arc presented
below. The method presented in Section 507.2 does not
utilize the post buckling strength of the member (tension c. For h/tw > 1.37Jkv E/Fy
field action). The method presented in Section 507.3 utilizes
tension field action.
1. 51Ekv
(507.2-5)
The design shear strength,4>vVn, and the allowable shear Cv = ChI tw )2 Fy
strength, V nf flv, shall be detennined as follows.
where:
For all provisions in this section except Section 507.2.1(1):
2
Aw = the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw mm
</>v = 0. 90 (LRFD) flv = 1. 67 (ASD)
The web plate buckling coeflicient, kv is detennined as
507.2 Members with Unstiffened or Stiffened Webs follows:
507.2.1 Nominal Shear Strength a. For unstitfencd webs with hf tw < 260, kv = 5
except for the stem of tee shapes where kv = 1. 2.
This section applies to webs of singly or doubly symmetric .
members and channels subject to shear in the plane of the b. For stitlened webs,
web.
5
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of unstiHened or stiffened kv == S + (a/h)Z
webs, according to the limit states of shear yielding and shear 2
buckling, is 260
= 5 when a/h > 3. 0 or a/h > [h;tJ
Vn = 0.6FyAwCv (507.2-1)
where:
l. For webs of rolled I-shaped members
a clear distance hetwcen transverse stiffeners, mm
h for rolled shapes, the clear distance between flanges less
with hftw s; 2. 24 jE/Fy the fillet or comer radii, mm
for built-up welded sections, the clear distance
between flanges, mm
4>v = 1. 00 (LRFD) flv = 1. 50 (ASD)
for built-up bolted sections, the distance between
fastener lines, mm
and
for tees, the overall depth, mm
Cv = 1.0 (507.2-2)
507.2.2 Transverse Stiffcncn
2. For webs of all other doubly symmetric shapes and
Transverse stiffeners arc not required where
singly symmetric shapes and channels, except round
h/tw ~ 2.46-J EI Fy , or where the required shear strength
HSS, the web shear coefficient, Cv, is determined as
follows: is less than or equal to the available shear strength provided in
accordance with Section 507.2.l for kv = 5.
a. For hftw::;; 1.10 jkv E/Fy:
Transverse stiffeners used to develop the available web shear
strength, as provided in Section 507.2.1, shall have a momenl
Cv = 1.0 (507.2-3) of inertia about an axis in the web center for stiffener pairs or
about the fuce in contact with the web plate for single
stiffeners, which shall not be less than at!j, where

CJ-IAPT(;R 5 Structural Steol 5-75
2.5 507.3.2 Nominal Shear Strength with Tension l•ield

j = (a/h)Z - 2 2;:: 0. 5 (507.2-6)
Action
Transverse slillcncrs arc permitted to be stopped short of the When lension field action is permitted according to
tension flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a Scction 507.3.1, the nominal shear strength, Vn, with
concentrated load or reaction. The weld by which transverse lension field action, according to the limit state or tension
stiffeners are attached to the web shall he terminated not less field yielding, shall be
than four times nor more than six times lhe web thickness from
the near toe lo the web-to-flange weld. When single stiffeners
are used, thcy shall he attached to the compression flange, if it I. For h/tw ~ 1.tOJ kvE/Fy
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift lendcncy due
to torsion in the flange. When lateral bracing is attached to a
stiffener, or a pair of' stiffeners, these, in tum, shall be (507.3-1)
connected to the compression llange to transmit 1 percent of
t11e total llangc force, unless the flange is composed only of
angles. 2. For h/tw > 1.10.J kv E/Fy
Bolts connecting slillcncrs to the girder web shall be spaced
nol more than 305 mm on center. Irintcnnittcnt fillet welds are V11 :::: 0.6FyAw Cv + 1-Cv ) (507.3-2)
used, the clear dislancc between welds shall not be more than
( 1.15~ 1 + (a/lt)Z
16 times the web thickness nor more than 250 mm.
where:
507.3 Tension Field Action
kv and Cv are as defined in Section 507.2.1 .
507.3.l Limits on the Use of Tension Field
Action 507.3.3. Transverse Stiffeners
Consideration of tension field action is permitted for flanged Transverse stilleners suhjcc't to tension field action shall mec::t
members whcn lhc web plate is supported on all four sides t11c rcquirements of Section 507.2.2 and the following
by flanges or stiffeners. Consideration of tension field limitations:
action is nol pennitlc<l for:
l. end panels in all members with transverse sliffencrs;

I. (bit),.,; 0.56j/
. yst
2. mcmhers when a/h exceeds 3.0 or [260/(h/tw)JZ;
(507.3-3)
4. h/b1c or h/brt > 6. 0 where:
(b/t)st the width-thickness ratio of lhe sliffcner

where:
Fyst specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener
2 material, MPa
Ate art.'.a of compression flange, mm
2
coellkient ddinc<l in Section 507 .2.1
Art area of tension flange,mm 1.0 for stiffeners in pairs
bfc widlh of compression flange, mm 1.8 for single angle stiffcners
bo width of tension tlange, mm 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
= required shear strength at the location or the
In these cases, the nominal shear slrcngth, V n• shall he stiffener, N
determim:d according to the provisions ofSection 507.2. available shear strength; <f>vVn(LRFO) or
V11 /fiv (ASD) with Vn as defined in Section
507.3.2, N

507.4 Single Angles 507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly
.. Symmetric Shapes
The nominal shear strength, V n, of a single angle leg shall be
detennincd using Equalion (507.2-1) with Cv = 1. 0, Aw = For singly and doubly symmetric shapes loaded in the weak
bt where b = width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm axis without torsion, the nominal shear strength, V n, for
each shear resisting clemcnl shall be determined using
andkv = 1.2.
Eq. 507.2-1 and Section 507.2.1(2) with Aw = brtt and
507.5 Rectangular HSS and Box Members kv = 1.2.
The nominal shear strength, V n, of rectangular HSS and box User· Note: For all ASTM A6 W, S, Mand HP shapes, when
members shall be determined using the provisions of Fy $ 345 MPa, Cv = 1. O.
Section 507.2. l with Aw = 2ht where Ii for the width
resi~iing the shear force shall be taken as the clear distance 507.8 Beams and Girders with Web Openings
betwe(.,-n the flanges less the inside corner radius on each
side and tw = t and kv = 5. If the comer radius is not The effect of all web openings on the nominal shear
known, h shall he taken as the corresponding outside strength of steel and composite beams sha[l be determined.
dimension minus three times the thickness. Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the
required strength exceeds the available strength of the
507.6 Round HSS member at the opening.
The nominal shear strength, V n, of round HSS, according to

the limit states of shear yielding and shear buckling, is
(507.6-1)
where:
Fer shall he the larger of
1. 60E
Fer = 5
(507.6-2a)
~ (~)4
and
0. 78E
Fer = - - 3-
(507.6-2b)
(~)2
but shall not exceed 0 . 6Fy
gross area of section based on design wall
thickness, mm2
outside diameter, mm
the distance from maximum to zero shear force , mm
design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times the
nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS and equal to
the nominal thickness for SAW HSS, mm
User Note: The shear buckling equations, Equations

507.6-2a and 507.6-2b, w ill control for D/t over 100, high
strength steels, and long lengths. If the shear strength for
standard sections is desired, shear yielding will usually
control

CHAf'TEF~ 5 Structurnl ~IP.el !i-77
SECTION SOS required Jlexural strength using I.R FO load

comhinalions, N-mm
" DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR <f>hMn = design llcxural strength determined in
COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION accordance with Section 506, N-mm
resistance factor for compression= 0.90
This section addresses members subject to axial force and resistance faclor for flexure - 0. 90
nexure about one or both axes, with or without torsion, and
to members suhject to torsion only. for design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
508.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Memhcrs Subject required axial compressive strength using ASn load
to Flexure and Axial Force combinations, N
=
Pn/ftc allowable axial compressive strength,
508.1.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in dclcrmim:d in accordance with Section 505, N
Flexure and Compression M r = required flexural strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm
The interaction or flexure and compression in doubly M c = M11 /ftb = allowahle flexural strength determined
symmctri<.: members and singly symmetric members for
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm
which 0.1 ~ {Iyt./Iy) ~ 0. 9, that are constrained to s~fety factor for compression = 1.6 7
bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by safety laetor for flexure~ l.67
fqs. 508.1-la and 508.1-1 h, where I ye is the moment of
inertia about the y-axis referred to the compression flange, 508.1.2 Douhly and Singly Symmetric Memhcrs in
mm 4. Flexure and Tension
User Note: Section 508.2 is permitted to be used in lieu oftJrc The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric
provisions of this section. members and singly symmcuic members constrained lo bend
about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall he limited by
P,. F.qs. 508.1-la and 508. i-1 b,
1. For p ~ 0.2
c
where
Pr 8 (Mrx
-+- - +Mry)
- :s; 1.0 (508.1-la)
P, 9 Mex Mey For design according lo Section 502.3.3 (LRFO)
P,. - required tensile strength using LRFD load
p combinations, N
2. for ___.! < 0.2 Pc =
<f>tPn design tensile strength, determined in
Pc accordance with Section 504.2, N
Mr= required flexural strength using LRFD load
-Pr+ (Mrx
- +Mry)
- ~1.0 (508.1-lh) comhinations, N-mm
2P, Mex Mey =
Mc= <f>bMn design 1lexural strength determined
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm
where: <f>t ~ resistance factor for tension (sec Section 504.2)
Pr = required axial compressive strength, N <f>b = resistance factor for flexure - 0.90
pc ~ available axial compressive strength, N
Mr = required tlexural strength, N-mm For doubly symmetric members,
Mc=
x
available flexural strength, N-mm
subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending
Cb in Section 506 may he increased byj1 + Pu
Pey
for
y subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending axial tension that acts concurrently with flexure, where
n 2 EI
Pey =-,zy
For design according lo Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) 'b
required axial compressive strength using LRFO load For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
combinations, N
=
<f>cPn design axial compressive strength, pr required tensile strength using ASD load
determined in accordance with Section 505, N combinations, N
Pc =
Pn/ftt allowable tensilt: strength, determined
-
5-78 CHAPTER 5- Structural Steel
in accordance with Section 504.2, N 508.2 Unsymmetric and other Members Subject to
required flexural strength using ASD load Flexure and Axial Force
combinations, N-mm
=
M11 / fib allowable flexural strength determined This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm stress for shapes not covered in Section 508.1. It is
safety factor for tension (see Section 504.2) permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape
safety factor for flexure=- 1.67 in lieu of the provisions of Section 508.1.
For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Section 506 may be (508.2-1)

1.SPQ Ic . .h
increased by 1 + - - 1or axia tension t at acts
Pey
rc'l..EI where
concurrently with flexure where P ey =~
Lb
fa required axial stress at the point of .
consideration, MPa
A more detailed analysis of lhe interaction of flexure and available axial stress at the point of
tension is pennittcd in lieu of Eq. 508.1-la and 508.1-1 b.
consideration, MPa
required flexural stress at the point of
508. 1.3 Doubly Symmetric Members in Sin2Je Axis consideration, MPa
Flexure and Compression available flexural stress at the point of
consideration, MPa
For doubly symmetric members in flexure and compression subscript relating symbol to major principal
w
with moments primarily in one plane, it is pennissible to axis bending
consider the two independent limit states, in-plane instability subscripl relating symbol to minor principal
and out-of-plane buckling or flexurnl-torsional buckling,
z
axis bending
separately in lieu of the combined approach provided in
Section 508.1.1. For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
l. For the limit state of in-plane instability, Eqs. 508.1.1
shall be used with fa required axial stress using LRFD load
Pc, Mr and M, determined in the plane of bending. combinations, M Pa
<f>,Fer = design axial stress, determined in
2. For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling accordance with Section 505 for
compression or Section 504.2 for tension,
P,. (Mr)
2 MPa
(508.1-2)
P+ M s;1.o required flexural stress at the specific
location in the cross section using LRFD
co ex
where load combinations, MPa
'Pb =
Mn/S design flexural stress
P co available compressive strenglh out of the plane of determined in accordance with section
bending, N 506, MPa. Use the section modulus for the
Mex available flexural-torsional strength for strong specific location in the cross section and
axis flexure determined from Section 506, N-mm consider the sign of the stress
resistance factor for compression = 0.90
If bending occurs only about the weak axis, the moment
resistance factor for tension (Section 504.2)
ratio in Eq. 508.1-2 shall be neglected.
resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
For members with significant biaxial moments
For design according lO Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
(Mr/Mc~ 0. OS) in both directions), the provisions of
Section 508. l.1 shall be followed.
fa required axial stress using ASD load
combinations, MPa
F 0 ./0.c = allowable axial stress
determined in accordance with section 505
for compression, or Section 504.2 for
tension, M Pa

required flexural stress at the specific I. For round HSS, Fer shall be the larger of
location in the cross section using ASD
load combinations, MPa 1.23E
Fbw,Fbz M,JfibS = allowable flexural stress Fer = 5
dctennined in accordance with Section 506, (508.3-2a)
Mra. Use the section modulus for the specific $(~)4
location in the cross section and consider and
the sign of the stress
safety factor for compression = 1.67 0.60E
safety factor for tension (Section 504.2) Fer = --3-
(508.3-2b)
safety factor for flexure = 1.67
(~)2
Eq. 508.2-1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending
axes by considering the sense of the flexural stresses at the but shall not exceed 0. 6Fy, where
critical points of the cross section. The llcxural tenns are L length of the member, mm
either added to or subtracted from the axial term as appropri-
D = outside diameter, mm
ate. When the axial force is compression, second order ellccts
shall be included according to the provisions of Section 503.
2. For rectangular HSS
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and
tension is penniued in lieu ofEq. 508.2-1.
a. For h/t S 2.45 JE/Fy
508.3 Members under Torsion and Combined
Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force
Fer= 0.6Fy (508.3-3)
508.3.1 Torsional Strength of Round and
-Rectangular HSS
h. For 2.45 JE/Fy < h/t S 3.07 JE/Fy
The design torsional strength, <PrT n, and the allowable
torsional strength, T 11 /0.r, for round and rectangular HSS
shall be determined as follows: Fer= 0.6Fy(2.45 JE/Fy)/(h/t)
(508.3-4)
<Pr= 0. 90 (LRFD) Or= 1. 67 (ASD)
The nominal torsional strength, Tn, according to the limit c. For 3. 07 J E/Fy < 11/t S 260
states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling is:
Fer= 0.4581r2 E/(h/t) 2 (508.3-5)
Tn = FcrC (508.3-1)
where
User Note: The torsional shear constant, C, may be
c is the HSS torsional constant conservatively taken as:
Fc1· shall be determined as follows: 1r(D - t)2t
For a round HSS : C
= 2
For rectangular HSS:
C = 2(8 - t)(H - t)t - 4. 5(4- n)t3

508.3.2 HSS Suh_ject to Combined Torsion, Shear, 508.3.3 Strength of Non-HSS Members under
Flexure and Axial Force Torsion and Combined Stress
When the required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or The design torsional strength, </>rF n, and the allowable
equal to 20 percent or the available torsional strength, Tc, torsional strength, F11 / !lr, for non-HSS members shall be
the interaction or
torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial force l11e lowest value obtained according to the limit states or
fur HSS shall be determined by Section 508.1 and the yielding under nonnal stress, shear yielding under shear
torsional effects shall be neglected. When Tr exceeds, stress, or buckling, dctt:nnined as follows:
20 percent or Tc, the interaction of torsion, shear, tlexurc
and/or axial force shall be limited by </>r = 0. 90 (LRFD) .0.r = 1. 67 (ASD)
l. For the limit state of yielding under normal stress

(508.3-6)
(508.3-7)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding under shear stress
where
Fn = 0.6Fy (508.3-8)
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
3. or the limit state of buckling
required axial strength using LRFD load Fn = F, 1• (508.3-9)
combinations, N where
</>Pn, design tensile or compressive strength in
accordance with Section 504 or 505, N Fer = buckling stress for the section as determined by
required flexural strength using LRFO load analysis, MPa.
combinations, N-mm
q,hMn, design flexural strength in accordance Some constrained local yielding is pcm1itted
with Section 506, N-mm adjacent to areas that remain elastic
required shear strength using LRFO load
combinations, N
Vc </>17 V11 , design shear strength in accordance with
Section 507, N
Tr required torsional strength using LRFD load
combinations, N-mm
Tc </>rTn, design torsional strength in accordance
with Section 508.3.1, N-mm
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
P,. required axial strength using ASD load

combinations, N
Pc P 1J .0. , allowable tensile or compressive
strength in act:ordance with Section 504 or 505, N
Mr required tlexural strength using ASD load
combinations dctennined in accordance with
Section 502.5, N-mm
Mc = M11 / .O.b , allowable flexural strength m
accordance with Section 506, N-mm
Vr required shear strength using · ASlJ load
combinations, N
V<: V11 /.0.v, allowable shear strength in accordance
with Section 507, N
Tr required torsional strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm
Tc T nl.O.r , allowable torsional strength m
accordance with Section 508.3.1, N-mm

CHAPTER 5 Structuml Steel 5-81
SECTIONS09
• DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS 509. t.2 Material Limitations
509.1 General Provisions Concrete and steel rcinfordng bars in composite systems
shall be subject to the following limitations.
In determining load effects in members and connections of a
strncture that includes composite members, consideration I. For the detennination of the available stren1.,rth, concrete
shall be given to the effective sections at the time each
shall have a compressive strength /~ or not less than
increment or load is applied. The design, detailing and
21 MPa nor more than 70 MPa for normal weight
material properties related to the concrete and reinforcing steel
concrete and not less than 21 MPa nor more than
portions of composite construction shall comply with the 42 MPa for lightweight concrete.
reinforced concrete and reinforcing har design
specifications stipulated hy applicable building code. In the
User Note: Higher strength concrete materials may be used
absence of a building code, the provisions in Chapter 4 shall
for stiffness calculations but may not be relied upon for
apply.
strength calculations unless justified by testing or analysis.
509.l. t Nominal Strength of Composite Sections
2. The specified minimum yield stress of structural
steel and reinforcing bars used in calculaling the
Two mct110ds arc provided for detennin.ing the nominal strength
strength of a composite column shall not exceed
of composite sections: the plastic stress distribution method 525 MPa.
and the strain-compatibility method.
The tensile strength or the concrete shall be neglected in the
Higher material strengths are permitted when their use is
determination of the nominal strengt11 or composite
justified by testing or analysis.
members.
User Note: Additional reinforced concrete material
509.1.l.l Plastic Stress Distribution .Method
limitations are specified in Chapter 4.
For the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal
509. 1.3 Shear Connectors
strength shall he computed assuming that steel components
have reached a stress or F y in either tension or compression Shear ~onm:cturs shall be headed steel studs not less than
and concrete components in compression have reached a four stud diameters in length alter installation, or hot-rolled
stress of 0. 85/~. For round HSS filled with concrete, a steel channels. Sh~ar stud design values sh<\11 be taken as per
stress of 0. 95/~ is pe1miued to be used for concrete Sections 509.2.1.7 and 509.3.2.4 (2). Stud connectors shall
components in uniform compression to account for the confoim to the requirements of Sc<.,1.ion 501.3.6. Channel
effects of concrete confinement. connectors shall conform to the requirements of Section
501.3. l.
509.1.1.2 Strain-Compatibility Method
509.2 Axial Members
For the strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of
slrains across ilic section shall be assumed, with the This section applies tu two types of composite axial
maximum concrete compressive strain equal to members: encased and filled sections.
0.003 mm/mm. The stress-strain relationships for steel and
concrete shall be obtained from tests or from published
results for similar materials.
User Note: The strain compatibility method should be used

to determine nominal strength for irregular sections and
for cases where the steel docs not exhibit elasto-plastic
behavior. General guidelines for the strain-compatibility
method for encased columns are given in AISC Design
Guide 6 and Sections 410.3 and 410.4 of this Code.
-- - - .....
509.2.1 Encased Composite Columns A c = area of concrete, mm2 •

- area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2
A sr-
509.2.1.1.1 Limitations Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
To qualify as an encased composite column, the following

limitations shall be met: ( 0. 043w:·S.../""f;,MPa)
I. The cross-sectional area or the steel core shal I comprise modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
at least 1 percent of the total composite t:ross section. specified compressive strength of concrete,
MP a
2. Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be specified minimum yield stress of steel section,
reinforced with continuous longitudinal bars and MPa
lateral ties or spirals. The minimum transverse specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing
reinforcement shall be at least 6 mm2 per mm of tic bars, MPa
spacing. moment of inertia of the concrete
4
section, mm
4
3. The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous moment of inertia of steel shape, mm
longitudinal reinforcing, Psn shall be 0.004, where moment or inertia of reinforcing bars, mm4
Psn is given hy: the effective length factor determined in accordance
Asr with Section 502
Psr=- (509.2-1) L laterally unbraced length of the member, mm
Ag
weight of concrete per unit volume
where
2
area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm
( 1500 S We S 2500 ~ )
gross area or composite member, mm2
where
509.2.1.1.2 Compressive Strength
Elelf =- effective stiffness of composite section, N-mm2
The design compressive streni,rth, </>cPn, and allowable
compressive strength, Pn/0.c, for axially loaded encased {509.2-6)
composite columns shall be dctennined for the limit state or
flexural buckling based on column slenderness as follows:
where
</>c = 0. 75(LRFD) flc = 2. OO(ASD)
(509.2-7)
l. When Pe;::: 0.44P0
P11 = P 0 [o.65ae::)] (509.2-2) 509.2.1.3.3 Tensile Strength
The design tensile strength, <PtPn, and allowable tensile

2. When Pe< 0.44P0 strength, P 11 / flt, for encased composite columns shall be
detennined for the limit state or yielding as
P11 = 0.877Pe (509.2-3)
(509.2-8)
where
(509.2-4) <Pt = 0. 90(LRFD) at = 1. 67(ASD)

(509.2-5)
where
As = area of the steel section, mm2

509.2.1.4.4 Shear Strength 509.2.1.6.6 Detailing Requirements
The available shear strength shall be calculated based on At least four continuous longitudinal reinforcing bars shall
either the shear strength or the steel section alone as be used in encased composite columns. Transverse
specified in Section 507 plus the shear strength provided by reinforcement shall be spaced at the smallest of 16
tie reinforcement, if present, or the shear strength of the longitudinal bar diameters, 48 lie bar diameters or 0.5
rcinfon:cd concrde portion alone. times the least dimension of the composite section. The
encasement shall provide al least 40 mm of clear cover
User Note: The nominal shear strength of tie reinforcement to the reinforcing steel.
may be determined as A 5 cFy,-(d/s) where Ast is the
area of tie reinforcement, d is the effective depth of Shear connectors shall be provided to transfer the
required shear force specified in Section 509.2.l.S. The
the concrete section, and s is the spacing of the tie
shear connectors shall be distributed along the length of the
reinforcement. The shear capacity of reinforced concrete
may be determined according to Chapter 4 Section 411. member at least a distance of 2.5 times the depth of the
encased composite column above and below the load
transfer region. The maximum connector spacing shall be
509.2.t.S.5 Load Transfer
400mm.
Loads applied to axially loaded encased composite columns
Connectors to transfer axial load shall be placed on at least
shall be transferred between the steel and concrete in
accordance with the following requirements: two faces of the steel shape in a configuration symmetrical
about the steel shape axes.
1. When the external force is applied directly to tJ1c steel
section, shear connectors shall be provided to transfer
If the composite cross section is built up from two or
more encased steel shapes, the shapes shall be
the required shear force, V', as follow~:
interconnected with lacing, tie plates, batten plates or similar
components to prevent buckling of individual shapes due to
(509.2-9) loads applied prior to hardening of the concrete.
where
509.2.1.7.7 Strength of Stud Shear Connectors
required shear force introduced to column, N
The nominal strength of one stud shear connector embedded
area of steel cross section, mm 2
in sol id concrete is:
nominal axial compressive strength without
consideration of length effects, N .
Qn = 0. 5AscJ {~Ee S AscFu (509.2-12)
2. When the external force is applied directly to the
concrete encasement, shear connectors shall be provided where
to transfer the required shear force, V', as follows:
cross-sectional area of stud shear connector, mm 2
(509.2-10) specified minimum tensile strength of a stud shear
connector, M·Pa
3. When load is applied to the concrete or an encased

509.2.2 Filled Composite Columns
composite column by direct bearing the design bearing
strength, (/,BPp, and the allowable bearing strength, 509.2.2.1 Limitations
Pp/ .0.8 , of the concrete shall be:
To qualify as a filled composite column the following
(509.2-l 1) limitations shall be met:
I. The cross-sectional area or the steel HSS shall

4's = 0. 65(LRFD) .0.B = 2. 31(ASD) comp1ise at least I percent of the total composite cross
section.
where
2. The maximum b/t ratio for a rectangular HSS used
A 8 = loaded area of concrete, mm 2 as a composite column shall be cq ual to 2. 26J EI Fy-
Higher ratios are permitted when their use is justified

When load is applied to the concrete of an encased or filled

by testing or analysis.
composite column by direct bearing the design bearing
3. • The maximum Dft ratio for a round HSS filled strength, <P 8 Pp, and the allowable bearing strength,
with concrete shall be 0.15E/Fy. Higher ratios arc Pp/nB of the concrcle shall be:
permitted when their use is justified by testing or
analysis.
(509.2-17)
509.2.2.2 Compressive Strength
<J> 8 = O. 6S(LRFD) Jl 8 = 2. 31(ASD)
The design compressive strength, <PcP it• and allowable
compressive strength, Pn/!lc, for axially loaded filled where
composite columns shall be determined for the limit state of 2
flexural buckling based on Section 509 .2.1.2 with the As = the loaded area, mm
following modifications:
509.2.2.6 Detailing Requirements
(509.2-13)
Where required, shear connectors transferring tl1e required
C "-' 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for circular shear force shall be distributed along the lengt11 of the
2 member at least a distance of 2.5 times the width of a
sections
rectangular HSS or 2.5 times the dia!11eter or a round HSS
(509.2-14) hoth above and below the load transfer region. The maximum
connector spacing shall be 400 mm.
(509.2-15)
?09.3 Flexural Members
509.3.l General
509.2.2.3 Tensile Strength
509.3.1.1 Effective Width
The design tensile strength, </>tP n, and allowable tensile
strength, P 11 /flt, for filled composite columns shall be The effective width of the concrete slab is tl1e sum of the
detcnnined for the limit state of yielding as: effective widths for each side of the beam centerline, each
of which shall not exceed:
(509.2-16)
I. one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of
supports;
<Pt = 0. 90(LRFD) flt = 1. 67(ASD) 2. one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent
beam; or
509.2.2.4 Shear Strength 3. the distance to the edge or the slab.
The available shear strength shall be cal.culated based on 509.3.1.2 Shear Strength
either the shear strength of the steel section alone as
specified in Section 507 or the shear strength of the The available shear strength of composite beams with shear
reinforced concrete portion alone. connectors shall be determined based upon the properties of
the steel section alone in accordance with Section 507. The
509.2.2.5 Load Transfer available shear strength of concrete-encased and _fi lled
composite membe rs shall. be determined based upon the
Loads applied to filled composite columns shall he transferred properties of the steel section alone in accordance with
between the steel and concrete. When the external force is Section 507 or based upon lhe properties of the concrete and
applied either to the steel section or to the concrete infill, longitudinal steel reinforcement.
transfer of force from the steel section to the concrete core
is required from direct bond interaction, shear connection or
direct bearing. The force transfer mechanism providing the
largest nominal strength may be used. These force transfer
mechanisms shall not be superimposed.

CHAPTER 5 Structurc1I Steel 5-85
509.3.1.3 Strength During Construction provided that:

• When temporary shores are not used during construction, 1. The steel beam is compact and is adequately braced
the steel section alone shall have adequate strength to according to Section 506.
support all loads applied prior to the concrete attaining 75
percent of its specified strength f~. The available flexural 2. Shear connectors connect th~ slab to the steel beam in
strength of the steel section shall be determined according the negative moment region.
to Section 506.
3. The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam,
509.3.2 Strength of Composite Beams with within the effective width of the slab, is properly
Shear Connectors developed.
509.3.2.1 Positive Flexural Strength 509.3.2.3 Strength of Composite Beams with

Formed Steel Deck
The design positive flexural strength, </>bMn, and the
allowable positive Hexural strength, M n/D.b, shall be 1. General
determined for the limit state of yielding as follows:
The availahle flexural strength of composite construction
consisting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck
</>b = 0. 90(LRFD) D.b = 1. 67(ASD) connected to steel beams shall be detennined by the
applicable portions of Section 509.3.2a and 509.3.2b, with
l. For h/tw :5 3. 76 jE/Fy, the following requirements:
a. This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib

Mn, shall be detennined from the plastic stress distribuiion height not greater than 75 mm. The average width
on the composite section for the limit state of yielding ofeoncrctc rib or haunch, Wr, shall be not less than
(plastic moment). 50 mm, but shall not be taken in calculations as
more than the minimum dear width near the top of
User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, Sand HP shapes the steel deck.
satisfy the limit given In Section 509.3.2.2.l{l) for
Fy ~ 345MPa. b. The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel
beam with welded stud shear connectors 20 mm or
less in diameter (AWS Dl.l). Studs shall be welded
2. For h/tiv > 3.76 jE/Fy, either through the deck or directly to the steel cross
section. Stud shear connectors, after installation,
Mn, shall be determined from the superposition of elastic shall extend not less than 40 mm above the top of
stresses, considering the effects of shoring, for the limit the steel deck and there shall be at least 12 mm of
state of yielding (yield moment). concrete cover above the top of the installed studs.
509.3.2.2 Negative Flexural Strength c. The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not
less than 50 mm.
The design negative flexural strength, </>bMn, and the
d. Steel deck shall be anchored to all suppm1ing
allowable negative flexural strength, Mn/D.b, shall be
members at a spacing not to exceed 450 mm. Such
determined for the steel section alone, in accordance with
anchorage shall be provided by stud connectors, a
the requirements of Section 506.
combination of stud connectors and arc spot
(puddle) welds, or other devices specified by the
Alternatively, the available negative Hexural strength shall be
designer.
detennined from the plastic stress distribution on the
composite section, for the limit state of yielding (plastic
2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam
moment), with
Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be
neglected in determining composite section properties
<l>b = 0. 90 (LRFD) fib = 1. 67(ASD) and in calculating Ac for deck ribs oriented
perpendicular to the steel beams.
----~ --
5-86 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Sleet
3. Deck Ribs Oriented Para.!Iel to Steel Oeam 2. Load Transfer for Negative Moment
• Concrete below the top of the steel deck may be
included in detcnnining composite section properties In continuous composite beams where longitudinal
and shall be included in calculating Ac. reinforcing steel in the negative moment regions is
considered to act compositely with the steel beam, the
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams may be total hori:wntal shear force between the point of
split longitudinally and separated to fo1111 a concrete maximum negative moment and the point of zero
haunch. moment shall be taken as the lower value according to
the limit states of yielding of the steel reinforcement in
When the nominal depth of steel deck is 40 mm or the slab, or strength of the shear connectors:
greater, the average width, Wr , of the supported haunch
or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the first stud in a. Tensile yielding o[the s lab reinforcement
the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each
additional stud. (509.3-2a)
where
509.3.2.4 Shear Connectors
AT c: area of adequately developed
l. Load Transfer for Positive Moment longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
cllectivc width of the concrete slab, mm 2
The entire hori:t.ontal shear al the interface between the specified minimum yield stress of the
steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to be reinforcing steel, MPa
transferred by shear connectors, except for eoncrete-
encascd beams as defined in Section 509.3. For b. Strength of shear connectors
composite action with concrete subject Lo flexural
compression, the total horizontal shear force, V' , (509.3-2b)
between the point of maximum posi1ive momenl and
the point of zero moment shall be taken as the lowest 3. Strength of Stud Shear Connectors
value according to the limit slates of concrcle crushing,
tensile yielding of the sleet sccLion, or strength of the The nominal strength of one stud shear connector
shear connecton;: embedded in solid concrete or in a composite slab is
a. Concrete crushing
Qn = 0. S~sc.//~Ee ~ RgRpAscFu
V' = 0. 85f~Ac (509.3-la) (509.3-3)
where
b. Tensile yielding of the steel section
cross-sectional area of stud shear
V' = FyAs (509.3-lb) connector, mm 2
modulus of elasticity of concrete
c. Strength of shear connector.;
(509.3-lc)
( 0. 043wr 5 F MPa)
specified minimum tensile strength of a
slud shear connector, MPa
where
LO ; (a) for one stud welded in a steel deck
rib with the deck oriented perpendicular
area of concrete slab within effective to the steel shape; (b) for any number of
width, mm2 studs welded in a row directly to the steel
area of steel cross section, mm 2 shape; (c) for any number of studs welded
sum of nominal strenl,>thS of shear in a row through steel deck with the deck
connectors between the point of otiented parallel to the steel shape and
maximum positive moment and the the ratio of the average rib width to rib
point of zero moment, N depth ?: 1.5
0.85; (a) for two studs welded in a steel
deck rib with the deck oriented
perpendicular to the steel shape; (b) for
one stud welded t11rough steel deck with

the deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and no more than 50 percent of the top
shape and the ratio or the average rib flange of the steel shape maybe covered by
width to rib depth <1.5 decking or steel sheet, such as girder fi lier
0.7 for three ur more studs welded in a material.
steel deck rib wilh the deck oriented ** for a single stud
perpendicular to the steel shape t this value maybe increased to 0.75 when
1.0 for studs welded directly to the steel
emld-ht ~ 50 mm
shape (in other words, not through steel
deck or sheet) and having a haunch
detail with not more than 50 percent or
4. Strength of Channel Shear Connectors
the top flange covered by deck or sheet
steel closures
The nominal strength of one channel shear conneclor
0.75; (a) for sluds welded in a composile
embedded in a solid concrete slab is
slab with the deck Ol'ientcd perpendicular
to the beam and emid-ht ~ 50 mm;
(b) for !ituds welded through sleel deck, (509.3-4)
or steel sheet used as girder tiller
material, and embedded in a composite where
slab with the deck oriented parallel to the
beam t flange thickness of channel shear connector,
I
0.6 for studs welded in a composite slab mm
with deck oriented perpendicular to the web thickness of channel shear
beam and <.;Onncctor, mm
emid-ht < 50 mm . Le length of channel shear connector, mm
emid-lit = distance from the edge of stud shank to
the steel deck web, measured at mid- The strength of lhe channel shear co1mector shall be
height of the deck rib, and in the load developed by welding the channel to the beam flange for
bearing direction of the stud (in other a force equal to Qn, considering eccentricity on the
words, in the direction of maximum connector.
moment for a simply supported beam),
mm
wc weight of concrete per unit volume 5. Required Number of Shear Connectors
(1500 ~We~ 2500 kg/m3 )
The number of shear connectors required between the
User Note: The table below presents values for Rg and RP section of maximum bending moment, positive or
for several cases negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall
be equal lo lhc horizontal shear force as determined in
Sections 509.3.2.4( I) and 509.3.2.4(2) divided by the
Condition Rll Rr, nominal strenglh of one shear connector as detennincd
No Decking* l.O 1.0 from Section 509.3.2.4(3) or Section 509.3.2.4(4).
Decking oriented parallel to the steel
shape 6. Shear Connector Placement and Spacing
Wr/h,. ~ 1.5 1.0 0.75
w .. /lL < 1.5 0.85** 0.75 Shear connectors required on each side of the point of
Decking oriented perpendicular to the maximum bending momenl, positive or negative, shall
steel shape be distributed uniformly between that point and the
Number of studs occupying the same adjacent points of zero moment, unless otherwise
decking rib specified. However, the number of shear connectors
I 1.0 0.6t placed hetween any concentrated load and the nearest
2 0.85 0.6t point or zero moment shall be sufficient to develop the
3 or more 0.70 0.6t maximum moment required at the concentrated load
hr nominal rih height, mm point.
Wr average widlh of concrete rib or haunch as
defined Section 509. l.3c,mm Shear conneclors shall have at least 25 mm of lateral
* to qualify as "no decking," stud shear concrete cover, except for connectors installed in lhc ribs or
connectors shall be welded directly to the steel formed steel decks. The diameter of studs shall nut be

greater than 2.5 times the thickness of the flange to which

Ulcy are welded, unless located over the web. The minimum
<l>b = 0. 90(LRFD) !lb= 1. 61(ASD)
center-to-center spacing of stud connectors shall be six
diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting I. The nominal strength of the cross section of a composite
composite beam and four diameters transverse to the lon- member subjected to combined axial compression and
gitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam, except that flexure shall be determined using either the plastic
within the ribs of formed steel decks oriented perpendicular stress distribution method or the strain-compatibility
to the steel beam the minimum center-to-center spacing method.
shall be four diameters in any direction. The maximum
center-to-center spacing of shear connectors shall not 2. To account for the influence of length effects on the
exceed eight times the total slab thickness. axial strength of the member, the nominal axial
strength of the memhcr shall be determined by Section
509.4 Flexural Strength of Concrete-Encased and 509.2 with P O taken as the nominal axial strength of
Filled Members the cross section determined in Section 509.4 (I)
a hove.
The nominal flexural strength of concrete-encased and filled
members shall be determined using one of the following 509.6 Special Cases
methods:
When composite construction docs not confonn to the
a. The superposition of elastic stresses on the composite requirements of Section 509.1 through Section 509.4, the
section, considering the effects of shoring, for the limit strength of shear connectors and details of constrnctiun shall
state of yielding (yield moment), be established by testing.
where
<l>b = 0. 90(LRFD) !lb = 1. 67(ASD)

b. The plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone,
for the limil state of yielding (plastic moment), where
<l>b = 0. 90(LRFD) n.b = 1. 67(ASD)
c. If shear connectors are provided and the concrete

meets the requirements of Section 509. I .2, the
nominal flexural strength shall he computed based upon
the plastic stress distribution on the composite section
or from the strain-compatibility method,
where
<f>h = 0. 85(LRFD) D.h = 1. 76(ASD)

509.5 Combined Axial Force and Flexure
The interaction between axial forces and flexure in

composite members shall account for stability as required
by Section 503. The design compressive strength, </>cPn,
and allowable compressive strength, P,J!lc, and the
design flexural strength, </> bM n, and allowable flexural
slrength, M 11 /D.b, are determined as follows:
</>c = O. 75(LRFD) ilc = 2. OO(ASD)

CH/\PTER 5 Structural Steel 5-8!:l
SECTION 510 a. An axial tensile lorce of 50 percenl of the required

compressive strength of lhc member; or
DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
b. The momcnl and shear resulting from a trnnsvcrsc load
510.1 General Provisions equal to 2 pcrcenl or lhc required compressive strength
of the member. The transverse load shall be applied al the
510.1.1 Design Basis location of the splice exclusive of other loads that act on
the member. The member shall be taken as pinned for the
dclcnnination ofthc shears and moments at the splice.
The design strength, q,Rn, and the allowable strength
R 1JD., of conneclions shall be determined in accordance User Note: All compression joints should also be
with the provisions of this section and the provisions of
proportioned lo resist any tension developed by the load
Section 502 .
combinations stipulated in Section 502.2.
The required slrcnglh or lhc connections shall be determined

51 O. l.5 Splices in Heavy Sections
by structural analysis for the specified design loa<ls,
consistent with the type of conslrnction specified, or shall be
When lcnsilc forces due to applied tension or flexure are to
a proportion of the required strength of lhc connected
be transmitted through splices in heavy sections, as detined
members when so specified herein.
in Section 501.3. l.3 and 501.3.1.4, hy complete joint-
penetration groove (CJP) welds, material notch-toughness
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded
requirements as given in Section 501.3.1.3 and 501.3. l .4,
members do not intersect at one poinl, the enecls of
weld access hole details as given in Section 510.1.6 and
eccentricity shall be considered.
thennal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements
as given in Section 513.2.2 shall apply. The foregoing
510.1.2 Simple Connections provision is not applicable to splices of elements or built-up
shapes that are welded prior to assembling the shape.
Simple connections of beams., girders, or tmsses shall be
designc<l as flexible and arc pcnnitted to be proportioned for User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy sections
the reaction shears only, except as otherwise indicated in the can exhibit detrimental effects of weld shrinkage. Members
design documents. Flexible beam connections shall that are sized for compression that are also subject to tensile
accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic, forces may be Jess susceptible to damage from shrinkage if
but self-limiting deformation in the connection is permitted they are spliced using PJP groove welds on the tlanges and
to accommodate the end rotation of a simple beam. fillet-welded web plates or using bolls for some or all of
the splice.
510.1.3 Moment Connections
510.l.6 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes
End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trnsses
shall be designed for lhe combined e{kct of forces resulting All weld access holes required to facilitate welding
from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the operations shall have a length from the loe of the weld
connections. Response ctitcria for moment connections arc
provided in Section 502.3.6.2. preparation nol less than 1 ~ times lhe thickness or t11e material
in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be
User Note: See Section 503 and Appendix A- 7 for analysis 1 !. times the thickness or the material with the access hole, tw,
2
requirements to establish the required strength and stiffness but not less than 25 mm nor does it need to exceed 50 mm.
for design of connections. The access hole shall be detailed to provide room for weld
backing as needed.
510.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints
For sections that are rolled or welded prior to cutting, the
l. When columns bc,u on bearing plates or arc finished to edge of the web shall be sloped or curved from the surface
bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to of the flange to the reentrant surface of the access hole. In
hold all parts securely in place. hot-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes wilh CJP groove
welds that join the web-to-flange, all beam copes and weld
2. When compression members other than columns are access holes shall be free or nolches and sharp reenlrant
finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors corners. No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius
shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be less than lO mm.
proportioned for either (a) or (b) below. It is pennissible
to use the less severe of t11e two conditions:

5-90 CHAPTER 5 - StructLiral Steel
rn built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration 510.1.10 Limitations on Bolted and Welded
groove welds that join the weh-to-flange, all beam copes Connections
and weld access holes shall bc free of notches and sharp
reentrant comers. The access hole shall hc permitted to Pretensioned joints, slip-critical joints or welds shall bc
terminate perpendicular to the tlange, providing the weld is used fur t11e following connections:
terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size away
from the access hole. I. Column splices in all multi-story structures over 38 m
in height.
For heavy sections as defined in Section 501.3.1.3 and
Section 50 J.3.1.4, the thermally cut surfaces of bcam copes 2. Connections of all beams and girders to columns and
and weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal and any other beams and girders on which the bracing of
inspected by either magnetic particle or dye penctrant methods columns is dependent in structures over 38 min height.
prior to deposition of splice welds. If the curved transition
portion of weld access holes and beam copes arc formed by 3. In all structures carrying cranes of over 50 kN capacity:
predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or roof truss splices and connections of trusses to
cope need not be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes columns, column splices, column bracing, knee braces,
in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by <lye and crane supports.
penetrant or magnetic particle methods.
4. Connections for the support of machinery and other live
510.1.7 Placement of Welds and Bolts loads that produce impact or reversal of load
Groups of welds or bolls at the ends of any memhcr which Snug-tightened joints or joints with ASTM A307 bolts shal I
transmit axial force into that member shall be sized so that be permiW.:d except where otherwise spccilied.
the center of gravity of the group coincides with the center
of gravity of the member, unless provision is made for tl1c· 510.2 Welds
eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end
connections of statically loaded single angle, double angle, All provisions of AWS D 1.1 apply under this Specification,
and similar members. with the exception that the provisions of the listed NSCP
Specification Sections apply under this Specification in lieu
510.1.8 Bolts in Combination with Welds of the <.:ited A WS provisions as follows:
Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in NSCP Structural Steel Section 510.1.6 in lieu of AWS Dl.l
combination with welds, except that shear connections with Section 5.17.1
any grade of bolts permitted by Section 501.3.3 installed in
standard holes or short slots transverse to the direction of the NSCP Structurnl Steel Section 5 I 0.2.2a in lieu of A WS D l. I
load arc pcnnitted to he considered to share the load with Section 2.3.2
longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such connections the
available strength of the bolls shall not be taken as greater than NSCP Structural Steel Table 510.2.2 in lieu of A WS l) I_. I
50 percent of the available strength of bearing-type bolts in Table 2.1
the connection.
NSCP Structural Steel Table 510.2.5 in lieu of A WS O 1.1
In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and Table 2.3
high strength bolts tightened to the requirements for slip-
critical connections arc pem1itted to be utilized for NSCP Structural Steel Appendix A-3, Table A-3.1 in lieu of
carrying loads present at the time of alteration and the A WS DJ. ·1 Table 2.4
welding need only provide the additional required strength.
NSCP Structural Steel Section 502.3.9 and Appendix A-3
510.1.9 High-Strength Bolts in Combination in lieu of A WS D 1.1 Section 2, Part C
with Rivets
NSCP Structural Steel Section 513.2 in lieu of A WS O I.I
In both new work and alterations, in connections designed Sections 5. 15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4
as slip-critical connections in accordance with the
provisions of Section 510.3, high-strength bolts are
permitted to be considered as sharing the load with existing
rivets.
Association of Structural Engine~rs of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

510.2.1 Groove Welds The effective weld size for flare groove welds, when filled
flush to the surface of a round bar, a 90• bend in a fonned
510.2.1.1 Effective Area section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table
510.2.2., unless other effective throats are demonstrated by
The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as tests. The effective size of flare groove welds filled less
the length of the weld times the effective throat thickness. than flush shall be as shown in Table 510.2.2, less the
greatest perpendicular dimension measured from a line flush
The effective throat thickness of a complete-joint- Lo tht: base metal surface to the weld surface.
penetration (CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the
thinner patt joined. Table 510.2.2 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare
Groove Welds
Tahle 510.2.1 Effective Throat of Partial-Joint-Penetration Welding Flare Bevel Groove[al Flare V Groove
Groove Welds Process
Welding Position
F (flat), Groove Type GMAWand 5 3
Wel<ling Process H (horiz.), (AWSVI.I, Effective FCAW-G -R -R
Throat 8 4
V (vert.), Figure 3.3)
OH (overhead)
SMAW and 5 5
Shielded Metal /\re FCAW-S 16R -R
(SMAW) All 8
5 1
J or UGroove SAW -R -R
60°V 16 2
lias Metal Arc (GMA W) Depth of
l'lux Cored Arc (FCA W) All
1'lFor Flare Bevel Groove with R < 10 mm use only reinforcing
Groove fillet weld on filled flush joint. General Note: R-radius ofjoint surface
(can he assumed to he 2t for HSS), mm
J or lJ Groove
Submerged Ne (S/\ W) F 60° Reve I or V Table 510.2.3 Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Gas Mewl Ne (OMAW) 45°
Depth of Material Thickness of Thinner Minimum Effective
Flull'. Cored Arc (FCAW) F,H
Bevel Groove Part Joined, mm Throat Thickness,1• 1mm.
Depth of To 6 inclusive 3
Shielded Metal Arc 45° Groove Over6 to 13 . 5
(SMAW) All Bevel Minus 3
mm Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 to 38 8
Over 38 to 57 10
Depth of Over 57 to ISO 13
Uas Metal Arc (GMAW) 45° Groove
Flux Cored Arc (FCAW) V,OH Devel Minus3 Over 150 16
mm
l•lsee Table 510.2.1.
Larger e1lecLive throat thicknesses than those in Table 510.2.2

The effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penetration are permitted, provided the fabricator can establish by
(PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in Table 510.2.1. qualification tl,te consistent production of such larger effective
throat thicknesses. Qualification shall consist of sectioning
User Note: The effective throat size of a partial-joint- the weld nonnal to its ax.is, at mid-length and tenninal ends.
penetration groove weld is dependent on the process used Such sectioning shall be made on a number of combinations
and the weld position. TJ1e contract documents should either of material sizes representative of the range to be used in the
indicate the effective throat required or the weld strength fabrication.
required, and the fabricator should detail the joint based on
the weld process and position to be used to weld the joint.

5 I0.2.l.2 Limitations 2. Along edges of nrntcrial 6 mm or more in thickness,

not greater than the thickness of the material minus
The minimum elTcctive throat thickness of a partial-joint- 2 mm, unless the weld is especially designated on the
pcnetration groove weld shall not be less than the si,e required dmwings to be built ou1 to obtain l'ull-throat thickness. In
to transmit calculated forces nor the size shown in Table the as-welded condition, the distance between the edge
5 10.2.3. Min11num weld size is determined by the thinner or of the ba:;e metal and the toc of the weld is permitted to be
the two parts joined. less than 2 mm provided the weld size is clearly
veri fiable.
Table 510.2.4 Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
The minimum effective lcngth of fillet welds designed on
Material Thickness of Minimum size of Fillet the basis of strength shall be nol less than four times the
Th inner Part Joined, mm weld,181 mm. nominal si1.c, or else the size of the weld shall be considcred
not to exceed ~ of its effective length. If longitudinal fillet
To 6 inclusive 3
5 welds arc used alone in end connections of flat-bar tension
Over 6 to 13 members, the length o r each lillct weld shall be not less 1ha11
Over 13 to 19 6
8 the perpendicular distance hctwccn them. For the effect of
Ovcr 19 longitudinal fillet weld length in end connections upon the
1•11.eg Dinnmsion of fillet we lds. Single pass wel<IN must be used. effective area of the connected member, see Section 504.3.3.
Not~: See Section 51 0.2.2h for 1naximum size of lillet welds .
For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to I00 1imcs the
510.2.2 Fillet Welds leg dimension, it is pcrmitlcd lo take the effecti ve lenglh
equal to the actual length. When the length of the end-loaded
SJ0.2.2. t EUcctive Area fillet weld exceeds I00 times the weld size, the effecLive
length shall be determined by multiplying the actual length
The elTcctive area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length by the reduction factor, p,
multiplied by the eflecrive throat. The effective throat of a
fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from the root to the p = 1. 2 - 0. 002(L/ w) :::; 1. 0 (510.2-1)
face of the diagrammatic weld. An increase in effective throat
is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of the where
diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using the L = actual length or end-loaded weld, mm
production process and procedure variables. w = weld leg size, mm
For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length

shall be the length of the centerline of the weld along the When the length of the.weld exceeds 300 times the leg size,
center of the plane through the throat. ln the case of the value of/J shall be taken as 0.60.
overlapping fillets, the cflcetive area shall not exceed the
nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane Jntcnnittcnt ftllct welds are permitted to be used to transfer
of the faying surface. calculated stress across a joirrt or fay ing surfaces when the
required strength is less than that dcvelopcd by a continuous
510.2.2.2 Limitations fillet weld of the smallest permitted s ize, and to join
components of built-up members. The effective length of any
The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the segment of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less than
size required to transmit calculated forces, nor the size as four times the weld size, with a ininimum of38 mm.
shown in Table 510.2.4. These provisions do not apply to
fillet weld reinforcements of partial- or complete-joint- In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall he five
penctration groove welds. times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less
than 25 mm. Lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall axial stress that utilize transverse fillet welds only shall be
be: lillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where
the <letlection of lhe lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to
1. Along edges or material less than 6 mm thick, not prevent opening of the joint under maximum loading.
greatcr than the thickness of the material.
Fillet weld terminations are pe1mitted to be stopped short or
extend to the ends or sides of parts or be boxed except as
limited by the following:

l. For lap joints in which one co,mected part extends beyond The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10
an edge of anotJ1er connected part that is su~ject to times the thickness of the weld. The width of the slot shall be
• calculated tensile stress, fillet welds shall tem1inate not not less than tJ1c thickness of the pat1 containing it plus 8 mm
less than the size of the weld from that edge. rounded tu the next larger even mm, nor shall it be larger
tJ1an 2 ~ times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot
2. For connections where flexibility of the outstanding 4
shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a
elements is re4uired, when end returns are used, the
radius of not less than the thickness or the part containing it,
length of the return shall not exceed four times the
excepl those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
nominal size of the weld nor half the width of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slul welds in a direction
3. Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder
transverse to their length shall he four times the width or the
webs 19 mm thick or less shall end not less than four
slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal
times nor more than six. times the thickness of the web
direction on any line shall he two times the length of the slot.
from the web toe of the web-to-flange welds, except
where the ends of stiffeners arc welded to the flange.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in
thickness shall be cquat tu the l11ickness of the material. In
4. Fillet welds llrnt occur on opposite sides of a common
material over l6 mm thick, the thickness of the weld shall be
plane shall be interrupted at the comer common to both
at least one-hair the thickness of the material hut not less
welds.
than 16 mm.
User. Note: Fillet weld te1minations should be located

510.2.4 Strength
approximately one weld size from of the edge of the
connection to minimize notches in the base metal. Fillet • I
welds tenninated at the end of the joint, other than those The design strength, c/>R11 , and the allowable strengl11,
connecting stiffeners to girder webs, are not a cause for Rn/fl., of welds shall be the lower value of the base material
correction. and the weld metal strength detcimined according to the limit
states of tensile rupture, shear rupture or yielding as
Fillet welds in holes or slots are pennitted to be used to follows:
transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or
separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-up For the base metal
members. Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to the
provisions of Section 510.2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are (510.2-2)
not to be considered plug or slot welds.
For the weld metal
510.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds
(510.2-3)
510.2.3.1 Effectin Area
where
The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be
F BM= nominal strength of the hase metal per unit area,
considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or
MP a
slot in the plane of the faying surface.
F w ,-- nominal strength of the weld metal per unit area,
MPa
510.2.3.2 Limitations A 8 11f= cross-sectional area of the base metal,
2
mm
Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear 2
Aw effective area of the weld, mm
in lap joints or to prevent buckling of lapped parts and to join
component parts ofhuilt-up members.
The values of c/>, fl., FBM, Fw and limitations thereon are
The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less given in Table 510.2.5.
than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 nun, rounded
to the next larger even mm, nor greater than the minimum Alternatively, for fillel welds loaded in-plane the design
strength, c/>Rn and the allowable strength, Rn/0, of welds
diameter plus 3 mm or 2 ~ times the thickness of the weld.
is permitted to be detennined as follows:
The minimum center-to-center spacing or plug welds shall c/> = 0. 75 (LRFD) Jl = 2. OO(ASD)
be four times the diameter of the hole. ·

1. For a linear weld group loaded in-plane through the I. For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and
center of gravity consisting of elements that are oriented both
longitudinally and transversely to the direction of
(510.2-4) applied load, the combined stren!,rth, Rn, of the fillet
weld group shall be determined as the greater of
where
(510.2-9a}
Fw = 0.60FExx(1.0 + 0.50sin1·5 8) (510.2-5)
or
and Rn= 0.85Rwl + 1. 5Rwt (510.2-9h)
F11xx electrode classification number, MPa where

8 angle of loading measured from the weld
longitudinal axis, degrees Rwl the total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded
effective area of the weld, mm2 fillet welds, as determined in accordance with
Table 510.2.5, N
User Note: A linear weld group is one in which all elements Rwt the total nominal strength of transversely loaded
are in a line or are parallel. fillet welds, as delermined io accordance with
Table 510.2.5 without the alternate in Section
2. For weld elements within a weld group that arc loaded 510.2.4(1), N
in-plane and analyzed using an instantaneous center of
rotation method, the components of the nominal 510.2.5 Combination of Welds
strength, Rnx and Rny, are permitted to be
determined as follows: If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet,
plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, the strength of each
(510.2-6) shall be separately computed with reference to the axis of the
group in order to determine the strength of the combination.
where
Awi = effective area of weld throat of any

ith weld element, mm2
Fw1 = 0.60F 6 xx(1.0 + 0. 50 sin 1. 56)/(p) (510.2-7)
f(p) = [p(1. 9 - 0. 9p))°·3 (510.2-8}
Fwi nominal stress in any tth weld clement, MPa
Fwix X component of
, Fwi
Fwiy y component of stress, Fwi
p 4/4 111, ratio of clement i defonnation to its
deformation at maximum stress
w weld leg size, mm
r crit distance from instantaneous center of rotation to
weld element with minimum 4u/r, ratio, mm
Ai deformation of weld elements at intermediate
stress levels, linearly proportioned to the
critical deformation based on distance
from the instantaneous center of rotation, r 1,
nun
ri !:J.u/rcl'it
4m 0. 209(9 + 2)-0 ·32 w, defonnation of weld
element at maximum stress, mm
Au 1. 087(6)-0·65 w::::; 0.17w, dcfonnation of
weld element at ultimate stress (fracture), usually
in element furthest from instantaneous center of
rotation, mm
-
SJ0.2.6 Filler Metal Requirements
The choice of electrode for use with complcte-joint-

penetration groove welds subject to tension normal to the
effective area shall comply wilh the requirements for
matching filler metals given in A WS 01.1/D.lM.
User Note: The following User Note Table summarizes

the AWS DI. l provision for matching filler metals. Other
restrictions exist. For a complete list of base metals and
prequalified matching filler metals see AWS Dl.l/D.IM,
Table 3.1.
Base Metal Matching Filler Metal
A36 :5 ; in. thick 60 & 70 ksi Electrodes
A36 > ~ in. A572 (Gr. 50 &SS) SMAW: E7015, E7016, E701S,
A913 (Gr. 50) E7028
A588* A992 Other processes: 70 ksi
AIOI! AI018 electrodes
A91 3 (Gr. 60 & 65) 80 ksi electrodes
• For corrosion resistance and color similar to lhe base see AW~
DI.I, Sec(ion 3.7.3
Notes:
I. Filler metnl shall meet the requirements or AWS AS.I, AS.5
AS.! 7, AS.I 8, AS.20, A5.23, AS.28 and AS.29.
2. fn joints with base metals of different strengths u~e ~ither a fillei
metal thut matches the higher strength base metal or a filler meta
that matches the low~r strength and produces a low hydrogen
deposit.

Table 510.2.5 Available Strength of Welded Joints, N
Load Type and Nominal Effective

Required
Direction Pertinent Strength Arca
Metal <P and n (F8 M or Fw) (A 8 M or Aw)
Piller Metal
Strength Level(a][bJ
Relative to
Weld Axis N mm2
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Matching filler
metal shall
be used. For T and
Tension corner joints with
Normal to weld Strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal backing left in
ax.is place, notch tough
filler metal is
required. See
Section 510.2.6.
Filler metal with a
strength
level equal to or
Compression one
Strength of the joint is controlled strength level less
Normal to weld by the base metal
axis than
matching tiller
metal is
oermittcd.
Filler metal with a
strength
Ten!iion or Tension or compression in parts joined parallel level equal to or
Compression to a weld need not be considered in design of less than
Parallel to weld welds joining the parts. matching fi lier
axis metal is
permitted.
Matching filler
Strength of the joint is controlled metal shall
Shear by the base metal be used.[cJ
-
Table 510.2.5 Available Strength of Welded Joints, N (continuation)
• Load T ypc and Nominal Effective

Direction Required
Pertinent Strength Arca
Relative to Metal
 and .n (AoM or Aw)
f-iller Metal
(FBM or Fw) Strength Leve1!•W>J
2
Weld Axis N mm
PARTfAL-.IOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE VEE GROOVE
AND FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
Base
</> = 0.90
Fy Sec Section S I0.4
Tension .n = 1.67
Normal to weld axis </> == 0.80
Weld 0.60Fexx See Se.:tion SI 0.2.1 a
.n = 1.88
Compression
Column to base
Plate and column Compressive stress need not be considered in design of welds joining the parts.
splices designed per
Section 510.1.4(1)
Compression
</> = 0.90
Connections of Base Fy See Section SI 0.4
members designed .n = 1.67
to bear other Filler metal with a
than columns as </> = 0.80 strength
described in Weld 0.60FExx See Section 510.2.1 a level equal to or
Section 510. 1.4(2) .n = 1.88 less than
matching filler
Compression Base
= 0.90 Fy Sec Seelion 510.4 metal is
Connections not
n = 1.67 permitted
finished-to-bear </> = 0.80
Weld 0. 90Fl?.XX See Section .510.2. la
n = 1.ss
Tension or
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a weld need not be considered
Compression
in design of welds joining the parts.
Parallel to weld axis
Base Governed by Section 510.4
Shear
Weld
</> = 0.75
0.60FExx Sec Section 510.2.2a
n = 2.00
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS
Base Governed bv 510.4
Shear </>=0.75
Weld 0.60F1,xx Sec Section 510.2.3a
fl= 2.00
(a) For matching weld metal see AWS DI . I, Section 3.3.
(b) Filler metal wilh a strength level one sttenkrth level greater than matching is permitted.
(.:) Filler melals with a strength level less than matching may be used for groov.: welds belween the webs and flanges of built-up sections transferring
shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applicatiolls, the weld joint shall he detailed and the weld shall he designed
using the thickness of the material as the effective throat, cf> = 0. 80, 0. = 1. 88 and 0. 60Frxx as the nominal strength
(<l) Alteanatively, the provisions of Section 510.2.4(1) are pcnnittcd provided lhe <lefomlation compatibility of the various weld elements is considered.
Alternatively, Sections 510.2.4(2) and 510.2.4(3) arc special applications of'Seclion 5 I0.2.4(1) lhat provide for deformation coanpatihility
---
Filler metal with a specified Charpy V-Notch (CVN) Except as permitted below, installation shall be assured by
toughness of 27 J at 4 °C shall be used in the following any of the following methods: tum-of-nut method, a direct
joints: tension indicator, calibrated wrench or alternative design
bolt.
I. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded T and
corner joints with steel backing left in place, subject to Ilolts arc permitted to be installed to only the snug-tight
tension nonnal to the effective area, unless the joints condition when used in
are designed using the nominal strength and resistance
factor or safety factor as applicable for a partial -joint- 1. bearing-type connections.
penetration groove weld.
2. tension or combined shear and tension applications, for
2. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded splices ASTM A325 or A325M bolts only, where loosening or
subject to tension nonnal tu the effective area in heavy fi1tiguc due to vibration or load fluctuations are not design
sections as defined in Se<-1ion 50l.3.l.3 and 501.3.1.4. c.;onsidcrations.
The manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance shall be The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained
sufficient evidence of compliance. by either a fow impacts of an impact wrench or the full
effort of a worker with an ordinary spud wrench that brings
510.2.7 Mixed Weld Metal the connected plies into finn contact. Bolts to be tightened
only lo the snug-tight condition shall be clearly identified
When Charpy V-Notch toughness is specified, the process on the design and erection drawings.
consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root pass and
subsequent passes deposited in a joint shall he compatible to When ASTM A490 or A490M bolts over 25 mm in diameter
ensure notch-tough composite weld metal. are used in slotted or oversized holes in external plies, a
single hardened washer conforming lo A8TM F436, except
510.3 Bolts and Threaded Parts with 8 mm minimum thickness, shall be used in lieu of the
standard washer.
510.3. t High-Strength Bolts
User Note: Washer requirements are provided in the RCSC
Vsc ofhigh-strenhrth bolts shall conform to the provisions of Specification, Section 6.
the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325
or A490 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC
Specification, as approved by the Research Council on
Structural Connections, except as otherwise provided in this
Specification.
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent

tu the washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
All ASTM A325 or A325 M and A490 or A490M bolts shall
he tightened to a bolt tension not Jess than that given in
Table 510.3.1, except as noted below.
Table 5 l0.3.1 Minimum Bolt Pretension, kN*

Bolt Size, mm A325M Bolts A490M Holts
M16 91 Jl4
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
M24 205 257
M27 267 334
MJO 326 408
M36 475 595
•E(!Ulll to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off lo
m:arest kN, as specified in ASTM specifications fur i\325M and A490M
bt1lls with UNC threuds.

Table 510.3.2 Nominal Stress of Fasteners and [n slip-critical connections in which the direction of loading
Threaded Parts, MPa is toward an edge of a connected part, adequate available
bearing strength shall be.: provided based upon the applicable
requirements of Section 51 OJ. I 0.
Nominal Shear
Nominal
Stress in
Tensile.: When bolt requirements cannot he provided by ASTM A325
Description of Fasteners Bearing-Type
Stress, Fnt, and A325M, Fl852, or A490 and A490M bolts because of
Connections, F,,v,
MP a requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or diameters
MP a
exceeding 38 mm, bolts or threaded rods conforming to
ASTM A354 Gr. BC, A354 Gr. BO, or A449 are permitted
A307 holts 310(a)lbj 165[vlfr.JlfJ
to be used in accordance with the provisions for threaded
rods in Table 510.3.2.
A325 or A325M bolts, when
threads are not excluded 6201el 372[!1
When ASTM A354 Gr. BC, A354 Gr. BO, or A449 bolts
from shear planes
and threaded rods arc used in slip-critical connections, the
A325 or A325M bolts, when holt geometry including the head and nut(s) shall be equal
threads are excluded from 620[e} 457(rJ to or (if larger in diameter) proportional to that provided hy
lshcar planes ASTM A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 and A490M
bolls. Installation shall comply with all applicable
A490 or A490M bolts, when requirements of the RCSC Specification with modifications as
threads arc not excluded 780[e) required for the increased diameter and/ or length to provide
457rr1
from shear planes the design pretension.
A490 or A490M bolts, when 510.3.2. Size and Use of Holes

780[e)
threads are excluded from S79rn
shear planes The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in
Table 510.3.3, except that larger holes, required for tolerance
Threaded parts meeting the on location of anchor rods in concrete foundations, are
requirements of Section pennittcd in column hase details.
501.3.4, when threads ar~ 0. 75FJallaJ 0.450Fu
not excluded from sheai Table 510.3.3 Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm
planes
Hole Dimensions
!Threaded parts meeting the Boll
Diameter Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
requirements of Section (Wit.Ith x Length) (Width xLenglh)
0. 7SFJalfdi 0.563Fu (Dia) (Dia)
l501.3.4, when threads arc
excluded from shear planes M16 18 1Rx 22 18 x 40
20
M20 22 24 22 x26 22 x 50
a] Subject to the requirements of Appendix A-3 M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
M24 2Jl•l 30 27 x 32 27x60
[b] for A307 bolts the tabulated values snail be reduced by I percent for M27 30 35 30 x37 30 x67
each 2 mm over 5 diameter~ of length in the grip M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
(c) Tlu·eads permitted in shear planes ::M36 d+3 d+8 (d+J)x(d+lO) (ch· 3) x 2.5 d
(dj The nominal tensile strength of the threaded portion of un upset rod .•l Clearance provided allows the use of a M30 bolt if desirable.
based upon the cross-sectional area at its major thread diameter, A0
which shall be larger tban the nominal body area of the rod bcfor<
upsetting limes Fy Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to the
direction of the load shall he provided in accordance with
(el For J\325 or J\325M and J\490 or /\490M bolts suhjcet to te11silc
fatigue loading, see Appendix A-3 the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes,
shmt-slottc.:d holes parallel to the load or long-slotted holes
[fl When hearing-type connections used to splice tension members havi
a fastener pattern wbose length, measured parallel to the line of torcc are approved by the engineer-of-record. Finger shims up to
exceeds 1270 mm, tahulalcd values shall he reduced hy 20 ptm:,ml 6 mm arc permitted in slip-critical connections designed on
the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal
shear strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted
holes.
...........
Oversi7,ed holes arc permitted in any or all plies of slip- Table 510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance,[aj mm, from
critical connections, but they shall not be used in bearing- Center of Standard Ilole[b] to Edge of Connected Part
type connections. Hardened washers shall be installed over
At Rolled Edges of
oversized holes in an outer ply.
Bolt Diameter Plates, Shapes or
At Sheared Edges
(mm) Oars, or Thermally
Short-slotted holes are pem1itted in any or all plies of slip- Cul Ed es"'
critical or bearing-type connections. 'lbe slots are permitted 16 28 22
without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical 20 34 26
connections, hut the length shall be nonnal lo the direction 22 38 28
of the load in bearing-type connections. Washers shall be 24 42 30
installed over short-slotted holes in an outec ply; when high- 27 48 34
strenglh bolts are used, such washers shall be hardened.
30 52 38
36 64 46
Long-slotted holes are pcrmrtted in only one of the
Over 36 l.75d l.25d
connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-type
1' 1 Lesser edge di~Lances arc permitted LO l>e used p,ovidcd provi$iom, of Sc-clion
connection at an individual faying surface. Long-slotted holes
510.3.10, a, app<0pri•lc, a re sati,.r~d.
are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip-
critical connections, but shall be nonnal lo the direction of l•I Fo, oversized or slotted holes, see Tuolc 51 0.3.5
load in bearing-type connections. Where long-slotted holes le reduced 3 mm when the hole
is or a point where rcqutred strength docs not exceed 25 percent of the maximum
are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a continuous bar slrcni;th in the clement.
with standard holes, having a si:i:e suflicient to completely
41 ·1nese arc ~rmttted '" be 32 mm at the c11Js of beam connC\:tinn angle:- and shcnr
cover the slot after installation, shall be provided. In high- end In~.
strength holted connections, such plate washers or continuous
bars shall be not less than 8 mm thick and shall be of stn1ctural Table 510.3.5 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2 , mm
grade material, but need not be hardened. If hardened washers
are required for use of high-strength bolts, the hardened Nominal Long Axis Perpcodicular to
LougAxis
Diameter of Oversized Ed c
washers shall be placed over the outer surface of the plate Par11llel to
Fastener Holes Short Lo;J,
washer or bar. Edge
(mm) Slots Slo •J
~22 2 3
510.3.3 Minimum Spacing 24 3 3 0.75d ()
?.27 3 s
The distance between centers of standard, oversized, or 1'1 When length of slot is less lhll!l rnaximum allowable (sec Tahle S!0.3J),
C2 is permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the
slotted holes, shall not he less than 2 ~ limes the nominal maximum and act,1al slot lengths.
3
diameter, d , of the fastener; a distance of3d is preferred.
510.3.5 Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance
510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance
The maximum distance from the center of any bolt or rivet
The di stance from the center of a standard hole to an
to Lhe nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the
edge of a connected part in any direction shall not be less
thickness of the connected part under consideration, but shall
than either the applicable value from Table 5 10.3.4, or as
not exceed 150 mm. The longitudinal spacing of fasteners
required in Section 5 10.3. l 0. The distance from the center
between elements in continuous contact consisting of a plate
of an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected
and a shape or two plates shall be as follows:
part shall he not less than that required for a standard hole to
an edge of a connected part plus the applicable increment
I. For painted members or unpainted members not subject to
Ci from Table 510.3.5. corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 24 times the
thickness of the thinner plate or 300 mm. ·
User Note: The edge distances in Tables 510.3.4 are
minimum edge distances based on standard fabrication 2. For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to
practices and workmanship tolerances. The appropriate atmospheric corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14
provisions of Sections 510.3.10 and 510.4 must be time.s the thickness of the thinner plate or 180 mm.
satisfied.

510.3.6 Tension and Shear Strength of Bolts User Note: Note that when the required- stress, f, in
and Threaded Parts either shear or tension, is less than or equal to 30% of the
co?Tesponding available stress, the effects of combined stress
The design tension or shear strength, <f>Rn, and the allowable need not be investigated. Also note that Eqs. 510.3-3a and
tension or shear strcngtl1, Rn/D. of a snug-tightened or 510.3-3b can be rewritten so as to find a nominal shear
pretensioned high-strength bolt or tlm:a<lcd part shall be stress, F~v, as a function of the required tensile stress, ft·
determined according to the limit states of tensile mpture and
shear rupture as follows: 510.3.8 High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical
Connections
(510.3-1)
High-strenglh bolts in slip-critical connections arc permitted
<f> = 0. 75 (LRFD) .0 = 2. 00 (ASD) to be designed to prevent slip either as a serviceability limit
state or at the required strength limit state. The connection
where must also be checked for shear strength in accordance with
F11 nominal tensile stress Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv from Sections 5 I0.3.6 and 510.3.7 and bearing slrength in
Table 510.3.2,MPa accordance with Sections 510.3. l and 510.3. I0.
Ab nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded
Slip-critical connections shall be designed as follows, unless
part (for upset rods, sec footnoted, Table 510.3.2),
mm 2 otherwise designated by the engineer- of- record. Connections
with standard holes or slots transverse to the direction of the
load shall be designed for slip as a serviceability limit
The required tensile strength shall include any tension
state. Connections with oversized holes or slots parallel to
resulting from prying action produced by dcfonnatiun of the
the direclion or the load shall be designed tu prevent slip at
connected parts.
the required strength level.
510.3.7 Combined Tension and Shear in
Bearing-Type Connections The design slip resistance, <J>Rm and the allowable slip
resistance, Rn/D., shall be determined for the limit state of
The available tensile strength of a bolt subjected to slip as follows:
combined tension and shear shall be detennined according to (510.3-4)
the limit states of tension and shear rupture as follows:
For connections in which prevention of slip is a
(510.3-2) serviceability limi! state
<f, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD) <f, = 1. OO(LRFD) Q = 1. 50(ASD)

where
For connections designed to prevent slip at the required
F~t = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects strength level
ofsheaiing stress, MPa <f, = 0. 8S(LRFD) fi = 1. 76(ASD)
, Fnt ) where
Fnt = 1.3F11t - "'F fv s Fnt(LRFD
µ = mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as
'I' nv
applicable, or as established by tests
(510.3-3a)
0.35 for Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill
, D.Fnt scale steel surfaces or surfaces witl1 Class A coatings
Fnt = 1.3Fnt--F fv s F11t (ASD) on hlast-cleancd steel and hot-dipped galvanized and
nv roughened surfaces)
(510.3-3b)
= 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned
steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B coatings on
Fnt nominal lensile stress from Table 510.3.2, MPa blast-cleaned steel)
nominal shear stress from Table 5 I 0.3.2, M Pa Du 1.13; a multiplier that retlects the ratio or lhc mean
F nv
installed bolt pretension to tl1e specified minimum
f 11 the required shear stress, MPa
bolt pretension. The use of other values may be
approved by the engineer-of-record.
The available shear stress of the fastener shall equal or exceed
the required shear strength per unit area, f v·

hsc = hole factor detcnnined as follows: a. when deformation at the boll hole 11l service load is
(a) For standard size holes hsc = 1. 00 a design consideration
(h) For oversized and hsc 0. 85 = (5 I0.3-6a)
short-slotted holes
(c) For long-slotted holes h sc = 0. 70
Ns = number of slip planes b. when deformation at the bolt hole ,it service load is
nut a design consideration
Tb minimum faslener tension given in Table 510.3.1 ,
kN
(510.3.(,b)
User Note: There are special cases where, wilh oversize
holes and slots parallel to the load, the movement possible 2. For II bolt in a connection with Jong-sloncd holes with
due to connection slip could c11use a strnctural failure. the slot perpendicular to the direction of force:
Resistance and safety factors are provided for connections
where slip is prevented until the required strength load is (510.3-6c)
reached.
3. For connections made using bolts that pass completely
Design loads are used for either design method and all through an unstiffened box member or HSS, sec Section
connections must be checked for strength as bearing-type 510.7 and Eq. 510.7-1,
connections. where
510.3.9 Combined Tension and Shear in Slip- d = nominal bolt diameter, mm

C ritical Con neciions Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the
connected material, MPa
When a slip-critical connection is subjected to an applied L, clear distance, in the direction of the force,
tension that reduces the net clamping force, the available between the edge of the hole and the edge of the.
slip resistance per bolt, from Section 510.3.8, shall be adjacent hole ur edge of the material, mm
multiplied by the factor, k s, as follows: t thickness of connected material, mm
T For connections, U1e bea1ing resistance shall be taken as the

ks = 1 - D Tu N (LRFD) (5 J0.3-5a) sum of the bearing resistances of the individual bolts.
u b h
Bearing strength shall be checked for both bearing-type
(5 I0.3-5b) and slip-critical connections. The use of oversized holes
and s horl- and long-slotled ho les parallel Lo tho line of
where force is restricted to slip-critical connections per Section
510.3.2.
Nb number of bolts carrying the applied tension
. . tension force due to ASD lo11d combinations, kN 510.3. t 1 Special Fasteners
Ta
Tb minimum J:astencr tension given in Table 510.3.1,
kN. The nominal strength of special fasteners other than the
Tu - tension force due to LRFD load combinations, kN bolts presented in Table 510.3.2 shall be verified by tests.
SJ 0.3.10 Bearing Strength at Bolt Hules 510.3.12 Tension Fasteners
The 11vailahle bearing strength, <f>R,i and Rn/fl, at holt When bolts or other fasleners in tension are altachcd to an
holes shall be detcnnined for the limit state of bearing as unstiilened box or HSS wall, the stren1:,1th of the wall shall
follows: he determined hy rational analysis.
<J, = 0 . 15(LRFD) fl= 2. OO (ASD) 510.4 Affected Elements of Members and Connecting
Elements
I. For a bolt in a connection with standard, oversized, and
This section applies to elements of members at connections
s hort-slotted holes, independent of the di rection of
loading, or a long-slotted hole with the slot parallel and connecting elements, such as plates, gussets, angles,
and brackets.
to the direction of the bearing force:

510.4.1 Strength of Elements in Tension
(510.4-5)
The design strength, </JRn, mid lhc allowable strength,
R11/fi, of affected and connecting clements loaded in
tension shall be the lower value obtained according lo the
</> = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD)
limit states of tensile yielding and tensile rupture. where
1. For tensile yielding of connecting elements: A gV = gross area subject to shear, mm 2

Ant =net area subject to tension, mm 2
Anv = net area subject to shear, mm2
<J, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 1. 67(ASD) Where the tension stress is uniform, U hs = 1; where the
tension stress is nonuniform, U hs 0. 5. =
2. For tensile rupture of connccling elements:
User Note: The cases where U bs must be taken equal to
(510.4-2) 0.5
<J, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO{ASD) 510.4.4 Strength of Elements in Compression
where The available strength of connecting elements in

compression for the limit states of yielding and buckling
Ae = effective net area as defined in Section 504.3.3, shall he determined as follows.
mm 2 ; for bolted splice plates,
f-or KL/r ~ 25
(510.4-6)
510.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear
</> = 0. 90(LRFD) fl= 1. 67(ASD)
The available shear yield strength of affected and connecting
elements in shear shall be the lower value obtained according
For KL/r ~ 25 the provisions of Section 505 apply.
to the limit states of shear yielding and shear rupture:
I. For shear yielding of the clement: 510.5 Fillers .
In welded construction, any filler 6 mm or more in thickness

Rn= 0. 60FyAg (510.4-3)
shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall he
welded to the part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to
<J, = 1. OO(LRFD) fl = 1. 50(ASD) transmit the splice plate load, applied at the surface of the
filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be
2. For shear mpture of the element: su!licient lo transmit tl1e splice plate load an<l shall be long
enough to avoid overloading !11e filler along the toe of the
Rn = 0. 6fuAnv (5 I0.4-4) weld. Any filler less Lhan 6 mm thick shall have its edges
made t1ush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld
<[, = 0. 15(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD) size shall be lhc sum or the size necessary to carry the splice
plus the thickness of the filler plate.
where
When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers thal are
2 equal to or less than 6 mm thick, the shear strength shall he
Anv -- ncl area subiecl
" lo shear, mm
used without reduction. When a bolt that carries load passes
through fillers that arc greater than 6 mm thick, one of the
510.4.3 Block Shear Strength
following requirements shall apply:
The available strength for the limil stale of block shear
I. For fillers that are equal to or less than 20 mm thick,
rnpture along a shear failure path or path(s) and a
the shear strength of the bolts shall be multiplied by the
perpendicular tension failure path shall be taken as
factor [1 - 0.0154(t - 6)), where t is the total
thickness or the fillers up to 20 mm
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume 1, 7t11 Edition, 2015

5- 104 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
2. The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint and the lb = length of bearing, mm
fil!er extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
unifonnly distribute the total force in the 1.-onneclcd 510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
element over the combined cross section of the connected
clement and the fillers; Proper provision shall be made to transfer the column loads
and moments to the footings and foundation s.
3. The size uf the joint shall be increased to
accommodate a number of bolts that is equivalent to In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing
the total number required in (2) above; or
strength, <J,cP P' and the allowable bearing strength,
4. The joint shall be designed to prevent slip at required P pffir: , for the limit stale of concrete crushing are
stren1:,>1h levels in accordance with Section 5 l 0.3.8. permitted to be taken as follows:
SJ 0.6 Splices <1'c = 0. 65 (LRFD) .nc= 2. 31 (ASD)

Groove-wclde<l splices in plate girders and beams s hall The nominal bearing strength, Pp , is determined as follows:
develop the nominal strength of the smaller spliced section.
Other types of splices in cross sections of plate girders and I. On the full area of a concrete support:
beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at the
point o f the splice. (510.8-1)
510.7 Bearing Strength

2. On less than the full area of a concrete support:
The design bearing strength, (/,Rn, and the allowable (510.8-2)

bearing strength, Rn/0, of surfaces in contact shall be
determined for the limit state. of bearing (local compressive
yielding) as follows: where
</) = 0. 75(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD) area of steel concentricall y bearing on a concrete

s upport, mm 2
maximum area of the portion of the s upporting
The nominal bearing strength, R 11 , is defined as follows for
surface that is geometrically similar to and
the various types of bearing:
concentric with the loaded area, mm1
,~ = 7 '?? .
I. For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored
holes, and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners:
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedmcnts
(510.7-1)
Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required
where resistance to loads on the completed structure at the base of
columns including the net tensile components of any bending
FY specified minimum yield stress, MPa moment that may result from load combinations stipulated in
Apb projected bearing area, mm2 Section 502.2. The anchor rods shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements for threaded parts in
2. For expansion rollers and rockers Table 510.3.2.
a. When d $ 635 mm Larger oversized and slotted holes are pcnnitted in base
plates when adequate bearing is provided fo r the nut by
using ASTM F844 washers or plate washers.
(510.7-2)
User Note: The permitted hole sizes and corresponding
b. When d > 635 mm washer dimensions are given in the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction
(510.7-3)
where
d = diameter, mm

When horizontal forces arc present at column bases, these If the length of loading across the member flange is less
forces should, where possible, be resisted by bearing against than 0. 15bf, where bf is the member flange width,
concrete elements or by shear friction between the column Eq. 510. I0-1 need not be checked.
base plate and the foundation. When anchor rods are designed
to resist horizontal force the base plate hole size, the anchor When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a
rod setting tolerance, and the horizontal movement of the
distance from the member end that is less than 10tr, Rn,
column shall be considered in the design.
shall be reduced by 50 percent.
User Note: See Chapter 4 for embedment design and for
When required, a pair of transverse stiffoncrs shall he
shear friction design. See OSHA for special erection
requirements for anchor rods. provided.
510.10 Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces 510.10.2 Web Local Yielding
This section applies lo single-and douhle- This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both
components of double-concentrated forces.
concentratcd force applied normal to the flange(s) of
wide flange sections an<l similar built-up shapes. A single-
concentrated force can be either tensile or compressive. The available strength for the limit state or web local yielding
Double-concentrated forces arc one tensile and one shall he d(,>tennined as follows:
compressive and form a couple on the same side of the
loaded member. cf> = 1. OO(LRFD) fl = 1. SO(ASD)
When tlte required strengtl1 exceeds the availahle strength as The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
detennined for the limit states listed in this section, stiffeners
and/or doublers shall he provided and shall be si7.ed for the I. When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at
difference between the required strength and the available a distance from the member end that is greater than the
strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also meet depth of the member d,
the design requirements in Section 510.10.8. Doublers shall
also meet the design requirement in Section 510. I0.9. (510.10-2)
User Note: See Appendix A-6.3 for requirements for the 2. When the concentrated force lo be resisted is applied at
ends of cantilever members. a distance from the member end that is less than or
equal to the depth of the member d,
Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams in
accordance with the requirements of Section 510.10.7.
(5l0.I0-3)
510. l O. l Flange Local Bending where
This section applies to tensile single-concentrated forces k distance from outer face of the flange to the web
and the tensile component of double-concentrated forces. toe of the fillet, mm
specified minimum yield stress of the web, MPa
The design strength, cf>Rm and the allowable strength, length of bearing (not less than k for end beam
Rn/fl, for the limit slate of tlange local bending shall be reactions), mm
determined as follows: web thickness, mm
2
Rn= 6.2Str Fyf (510.10-1) When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler
plate shall be provided.
cf> = 0. 90(LRFD) fl= 1.67(ASD)
where
F yf specified minimum yield stress of the flange, MPa
t thickness of the loaded flange, mm
1

510.10.3 Web Local Crippling 510.10.4 Web Sidesway Buckling
This section applies to compressive single-concentrated This section applies only to compressive single-concentrated
forces or the compressive component of double- forces applied to members where relative lateral movement
concenlrated forces. between the loaded compression flange and the tension
flange is not restrained at the point of application of the
The available slrength for the limit state of web local concentrated force.
crippling shall be detennined as follows:
The available strength of the web shall be determined as
<J, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD) follows:
The nominal strength, Rn, shall he determined as follows: <J, = 0. 85 (LRFD) fl = 1. 16(ASD)
I. When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted The nominal strength, Rn, for the limit state of web
is applied at a distance from the member end that is sidcsway buckling shall be detennined as follows:
greater than or equal to d/2:
R. = O 80t~ [1 +3 (:) (:; ruEF::t' (510.10-4)

I. If the compression llange is restrained against rotation:
a. For (h/tw )/(l/bt) :::;; 2. 3
2. When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted

is applied at a distance from the member end that is less
b. For (h / t w)/(l f bt) > 2. 3, the limit
than d/ 2:
state of web si<lesway buckling does not
apply.
a. Por N / d < 0. Z
When the required strength of the web exceeds the available
Rn = O. 40t~ [1+ 3 (:) ( :;)"]jEF;:'r strength, local lateral bracing shall be provided at the
tension flange or either a pair of transverse stiffeners or a
doubler plate shall be p rovided.
(5 10.10-Sa)
2. ff the compression flange is not restrained against
b. For N/d > 0.2 rotation:
a. For
(510.10-Sb) Rn
= Crt!tt [
h2 0.4
(h/tw)
l/br
3
] (5 10. l 0-7)
where
overal\ depth of the member, mm b. For (h / tw)/ (l/ bt ) > 1. 7, the limit
flange thickness, mm state of web sidesway buckling does not apply.
When required, a transverse stiffener, or pair of transverse When the required strength of the web exceeds the available
stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending at least one-half the strength, local lateral bracing shall be provided at both flanges
depth of the web shall be provided. at the point of application of the concentrated forc es.
--·
CHAPTER 5 Stwctural Steel 5-107
In Eqs. 510.10-6 and 510.10-7, the following definitions The nominal strength, R11 shall be detem1ined as follows:
apply:
1. When the effect of panel-zone deformation on frame
br flange width, mm stability is not considered in the analysis:
Cr 6.62 x 106 MPa when Mu< My (LRFD) or
1. 5Ma < My (ASD) at the location of the force a. For Pr~ 0.4P,
3.31 x 106 MPa when Mu;;:::: My (LRFD) or (510.10-9)
1. 5Ma;;:::: My (ASD) at the location of the force
h clear distance between Hangcs less the fillet or
b. For Pr> 0.4Pc
corner radius for rolled shapes; distance between
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance
between tlanges when welds arc used for built-up
Rn= 0. 60Fydctw ( 1.4 - ::)
shapes, mm.
l largest laterally unbraced length along either flange
at the point of load, mm (510.1-10)
tf flange thickness, mm
tw ~ web thickness, mm 2. When frame stability, including plastic panel-zone
dcfonnation, is considered in the analysis:
User Note: For determination of adequate restraint, refer to
Appendix A-6. a. For
SJO.t0.5 Web Compression Buckling

Rn= 0. 60Fydctw ( 1 + 3bcft;f)
d d t .1
b cw
This section applies to a pair of compressive single-
(510.10-11)
concentrated forces or the compressive components in a pair of
double-concentrated forces, applied at both flanges of a
member at lhe same location.
The available strength for the limit state of web local buckling
shall be dctennined as follows:
(510.1-12)
24t~vJ E Fyw In Eqs. 510.10-9 through 510.10-12, the following

(510.10-8)
Rn = ---h'---- definitions apply:
cf> = 0. 90(LRFD) fi = 1. 67(ASD) column cross-sectional area, mm2

width of column flange, mm
When the pair of conccnlrnled compressive forces to be beam depth, mm
resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is column depth, mm
less than d/2, Rn shall be reduced by 50 percent. specified minimum yield stress of the column web,
MP a
When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of Py, N (LRFD)
transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate exlending lhe full
0.6Py, N (ASD)
depth of the web shall be provided.
required strength, N
510.10.6 Web Panel Zone Shear FyA, axial yield strcnglh of the column, N
thickness of the column flange, mm
This section applies to double-concenlrated forces applied tw column web thickness, mm
to one or both Hanges of a member at the same location.
The available strength of the web panel zone for the limit state When required, doubler platc(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners
of shear yielding shall be detennined as follows: shall be provided within the houndaries the rigid connection
whose webs lie in a common plane.
</> = 0. 90(LRFD) fi = 1. 67(ASD)
Sec Section 510.10.9 for doubler plate design requirements.

510.10.7 Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders 3. Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of one-
half the depth of the member except as required in
Al unframed ends of beams and girders not othe1wise Sections 510.10.5 and 510.10.7.
restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axes, a
pair of transverse stiffeners, extending the full depth of the 510.I 0.9 Additional Doubler Plate for
web, shall be provided. Concentrated Forces
510.10.8 Additional Stiffener Requirements for l)oubter plates required for compression strength shall he
Concentrated Forces designed in accordance with the requirements or Sedion
505.
Stiffeners required to resist tensile concentrated forces shall
Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed
be designed in accordance with the requirements of
in accordance with the requirements of Section 504.
Section 504 and welded to the loaded flange and the web.
The welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section
between the required strength and available limit stale 5 JO. I 0.6) s hall be designed in accordance with the
strength. The stiffener to web welds shall be sized to transfer provisions of Section 507.
to the web the alge braic difference in tensile force at the
ends of the stiffener. In addition, doubler plates shall comply with the following
criteria:
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements in I. The thickness and extent of the doubler plate shall
Sections 505.6.2 and 510.4.4 and shall either bear on or be provide the additional material necessary to equal or
welded to the loaded :flange and welded to the web. The exceed the strength requirements.
welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference between
the required strength and the applicable limit state strength. 2. The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the
The weld to the web shall be si?.ed to transfer to the web the proportion of the total force transmitted to the doubler
algebraic difference in compression force at the ends of t11e plate.
stiffener. For fitted bearing i.1iffencrs, see Section 510. 7.
Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for compressive

forces applied lo a beam or plate girder tlange(s) shall be
designed as axially compressed members (columns) in
accordance with the requirements of Sections 505.6.2 and
510.4.4.
The member properlies shall be detennined using an

effective length of 0. 7 Sh and a cross section composed of
two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of
25tw at interior stiffeners and 25tw at the ends of
members. The weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to
the web shall be sized to transmit the difference in
compressive force at each of the stiffoncrs to the web.
Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply with the

following additional criteria:
1. The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness

of the column web shall not be Jess than one-third of the
width of the flange or moment connection plate
delivering the concentrated force.
2. The thickness of a stiffener shall not he less than one-

half the thickness of the flange or moment connection
plate delivering the concentrated load, and greater than or
equal to the width divided by 16.

CHAPTER 5 Struclu<al Steel 5-109
SECTION 511
DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER q, = 0. 90(LRFD) fl= 1. 67(ASD)
CONNECTIONS where Qr is given by Eq. 511.2-1.
511.1 Concentrated Forces on HSS Addiiional limits of applicability are
511. 1.1 Definitions of Pltramctcrs I. 0.2 < Bp/D :5 1.0
B is the overall width of rectangular HSS memher, 2. D / t ::;; 50 for T-connections and D / t ::;; 40 for
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the cross-connections
connection, mm
~ is the width of plate, measured 90 degrees to the 511.1.3.2 Criteria for Rectangular HSS
plane oflhe connection, mm
- is the outside diameter of round HSS member, mm When ,t t:oncentratcd force is distrihuted transversely to the
is the specified minimum yield stress of HSS axis of the HSS the design strength, </>Rn, and the
member allowable strength, R,i/fl, shall he the lowest value
material, MPa according to the limit states of local yielding due to uneven
is the specified minimum yield stress of plate, load distribution, shear yielding (punching) and sidewall
MPa strength.
is the spcciiicd minimum tensile strength ofHSS
material, MPa Additional limits of applicability are
H is !he overall height of rectangular HSS member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm I. 0.25 < Bp/B::;; 1.0
N is t11c bearing length of the load, measured parallel
to the axis of the HSS member, (or measured 2. B / t for the loaded HSS wall ~ 35
across lhe width of lhe IISS in the case of loaded
cap plates), mm a. For the limit stale of local yielding due to uneven
- is the design wall thickness ofHSS member, mm load distribution in the loaded plate,
is the thickness of plale, mm
Rn= [10Fytf(B/t)]Bp::;; FyptpBp
511. 1.2 Limits of Applicahility
(511.1-2)
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits of applicability: q, = 0. 95(LRFD) fl = 1. 58(ASD)
I. Strength:Fy S 360MPa for HSS h. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
2. Ductility: F y/ Fu S 0. 8 for HSS Rn = 0. 6F yt[2tp + 28 ep]

(511.1-3)
3. Other limits apply for specific criteria
q, = 0. 95(LRFD) fl= 1. 58(ASD)
511.1.3 Concentrated Force Distributed
Transversely where
511. 1.3. t Criterion for Round HSS
When a concentrated force is distributed transversely to the This limit state need nut be checked when Bp >
axis of the HSS the design strength, </>Rn, and the (B - 2t), nor when Bp < 0. 858.
allowable strength, Rn/fl, for th.e limit state of local
yielding shall be delennined as follows:
(511.1-1)
- ·- --........... ~-~
c. For the limit state of sidewall under tension The nonuni fonnity of load transfer along the
loading, the available strength shall be taken as the line of weld, <lue Lo Lhe flexibility of the
strength for sidewall local yielding. For the limit HSS wall in a transverse platc-to-IISS
state of sidewall under compression loading, connection, shall be considered in
available strength shall be taken as the lowest proportioning such welds. This requirement
value obtained according to the limit states of can be satisfied by limiting the total
sidewall local yielding, sidewall local crippling effective weld length, Le, of groove and
and sidewall local buckling. fillet welds to rectangular HSS as follows:
This limit state need not be checked unless the

Le2[10/(B/t)][(Fyt)/(Fyptp)]Bp ~ 2Bp
chord member and branch member (connecting
element) have the same width (P = 1. 0). (511.1-7)
where
c. l.l For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
total effective weld length
Rn= 2Fyt[5k + N] (511.1-4) for welds on both sides of
the transverse plate, mm
<J, = 1. OO(LRFD) fi = t_ 50(ASD) In lieu of Eq. 511.1-7, this requirement may
where be satisfied by other rational approaches.
k outside corner radius of the HSS,
which is permitted to he taken as User Note: An upper limit on weld size will
be given by the weld that develops the
1. St if unknown, mm available strength or the connected element.
c. l.2 For the limit state of sidewall local
511.1.4 Concentrated l<'orce Distributed
crippling, in T- connections,
Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS
5
Diameter or Width, and Acting
Rn= 1.6t2 [1 + 3N/(H- 3t)](EFy)°' Ql Perpendicular to the HSS Axis
(511.1-5) When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally
along the axis of the HSS at the ccnlcr or the HSS diameter
<J, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl= 2. OO(ASD) or width, and also acts perp~ndicular to the axis direction of
the HSS (or has a component perpendicular to the axis
where Qf is given by Eq. 5 I 1.2-10. direction of the HSS), the design strength, <J,R 11 , and the
allowable strength, R 11 /fi, perpendicular to the HSS axis
c.1.3 For the limit state of sidewall local buckling shall be determined for the limit state of chord plastification
in cross-connections, as follows.
5 511.1.4.1 Criterion for Round HSS

Rn= [48t3 /(H - 3t)](EFy)°' Ql
(511.1-6) An additional limit of applicability is: D/t $ 50 for
I-connections and D/t $ 40 for cross-connections
<J, = 0. 90(LRFD) fl = 1. 67(ASD)
(51 l.1-8)
Where Qf is given by Eq. 5 l l.2-10.
<J, = 0. 90(LRFD) fi = 1. 67(ASD)
where Qf is given by Eq. 511.2-1 .
.......-
CHAPTER 5 · Structural Steel 5 _111
511.1.4.2 Criterion for Rectangular HSS the cap plate (of thickness tp) and disperses into the two
HSS walls of dimension B.
An additional limit of applicability is: B/t for the loaded
If (5tp + N) ~ B, the available strength of the HSS is
HSS wall~ 40
computed by summing the contributions of all four HSS
walls.
R11 ::::: [Fyt2 /(1- t 1JB)] [zN/B + 4(1- tp/B)°'!iQ1J
(511.1-9) If (Stp + N) < B, the available strength of the HSS is
computed by summing the contributions of the two walls
q, = 1. OO(LRFD) fl = 1. 50(ASD) into which the load is distributed.
where a. For the limit state of wall local yielding, for one wall,
(511.1-11)
</> = 1. OO(LRFD) fl = 1. SO(ASD)

U is given by Eq. 5 l l.2-12
b. For the limit state of wall local crippling, for one wall,
511 .1.5 Concentrated Force Distributed
Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS
15 5
Width, and Acting Parallel to the HSS Axis Rn= 0. Bt2 [ 1 + (6N /B)(t/tp) ' J [EFytp/t]°'
When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally (51 J.l-12)

along the axis of a rectangular HSS, and also acts parallel
but eccentric to the axis direction of the member, the q, = 0. 7S(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD)
conncdion shall be verified as follows:
511.2 HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
Fyptp ~ Fut (511.1-10)
HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as connections
User Note: This provision is primarily intended for shear that consist of one or more branch members that arc directly
tab connections. Equation 51 l .1- l O precludes shear yielding welded to a continuous chord that passes through the
(punching) of the HSS wall by requiring the plate (shear connection and shall be classified as follows:
tab) strength to be less than the HSS wall strength. For
bracing connections to HSS colunms, where a load is l. When the punching load (Pr sin 8) in a branch
applied by a longitudinal plate at an angle to the HSS axis, member is equilibrated by beam shear in the chord
the connection design will be governed by the force member, the connection shall be classified as a T-
component perpendicular to the HSS axis (see Section connection when the branch is perpendicular to the
511.l.4b). chord and a Y-connection otherwise.
511.1.6 Concentrated Axial Force on the 2. When lhc punching load (Pr sin 9) in a branch
End of a Rectangular HSS with a Cap member is essentially equilibrated (within 20 percent)
Plate. by loads in other branch member(s) on the same side of
the connection, the connection shall be classified as a
When a concentrated force acts on the end of a capped HSS, K-conneclion. The relevant gap is .between the primary
and the force is in the direction of the H SS axis, the design branch members whose loads equilibrate. An
strength, </>Rn, and the allowable strengtl1, Rn/il, shall be N-conneetion can be considered as a type of
determined for the limit states of wall local yielding (due to K-connection.
tensile or compressive forces) and wall local crippling (due
to compressive forces only), with consideration for shear User Note: A K-connection with one branch perpendicular
lag, as follows. to the chord is often called an N-conncction.
User Note: The procedure below presumes that the 3. When the punching load (Pr sin 6) is transmitted
concentrated force has a dispersion slope of 2.S: 1 through through the chord member and is equilibrated by
branch member(s) on the opposite side, the connection
-
!1-'112 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
shall be classified as a cross-connection. y the chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half
the diameter to the wall thickness = D /2t for
4. When a connection has more than two primary branch round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall
members or branch members in more lhan one plane, thickness =B /Zt fo.r rcctangu lar HSS
the connection shall be classified as a general or the load length parameter, applicable only to
multiplanar connection. rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of contact
of the branch with the chord in the plane of lhe
When branch members transmit pmt of their load as K- connection to Ute chord width =N / B, where
conncctions and pait or their load as T-, Y-, or cross- N = Hb/sin6
conm:ctions, the nominal strength shall be determined by 8 acute angle between the branch and churd
interpolalion on the prop01tion of each in total. (degrees)
the gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the
For the purposes of this Specilication, the centerlines or branches of a gapped K connection lo the width of
branch members and chord members shall lie in a common the chord = g/ B for rectangular HSS
plane. Rectangular HSS connections arc forther limited to
have all members oriented with walls parallel to the plane. 511.2.2 Criteria for Round HSS
For trusses lhat arc made with HSS that arc connected hy
welding branch members to chord members, eccentricities The interaclion of slress due to chord member forces and
within the limits of applicability are permitted without local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
consideration or the resulting moments fort he design or
the through the chord-stress interaction parameter Qf.
connection.
When the chord is in tension,
511.2.1 Definitions of Parameters
B overall width of rectangular HSS main member,

measured 90 degrees to the plane or the
connection, mm When the chord is in compression,
overall width of reclangular HSS branch member,
measured 90 degrees to 1he plane of the Qf = 1.0 -0.3U(1 + U) (511.2-l)
connection, mm
D outside diameter of round HSS main member, mm where U is the utilization ratio given by
outside diameter or round HSS branch member,
mm (511.2-2)
e eccentricity in a trnss conncclion, positive
being away from the branches, mm and
FY specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
member material, MPa Pr required axial strength in chord, N; for K-
F yb specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch connections, Pr is to he determined on lhe side of
member material, MPa the joint that has the lower compression stress
Fu specified minimum tensile strenglh of HSS (lower U)
material, MPa Mr required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
g gap between toes or branch members in a gapped 2
K-conncclion, neglecting the welds, mm
Ag chord gross area, mm
H overall height of rcclangular HSS main member, Fc available stress, MPa
measured in the plane of the conncclion, mm S chord elastic section modulus, mmJ
Hh overall height of rectangular IISS bnmch member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFO):
t design wall thickness or HSS main member, mm
tb - design wall thickness of nss branch member, mm Pr Pu = required axial strength in chord, using LRFO
/3 the width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to load combinations., N
chord diameter =
D bf D for round HSS; the ratio Mr Mu = required flexural strength in chord, using
of overall branch width to chord width =
B 1>! B LRFD load combinalions, N-mm
for rectangular HSS F" - Fy, MPa
pefl = the effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters
of the two branch members in a K-conncclion For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASO):
divided by eighl times lhe chord width
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, tnc. (ASEP)

P,. =
Pa required axial strength in chord, using ASD 511.2.2.2 Branches with Axial Loads in T-, Y.
load combinations, N and Cross-Connections
• Mr Ma = required flexural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinalions, N-mm For T- and Y- conneclions, the design strength ufthe branch
Fe 0. 6Fy, MPa c/>P n, or the allowable strength of the branch, P11 ID., shall
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of
511.2.2.1 Limits of Applicability chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
The criteria herein arc applicable only when lhc connection I. For the limil state of chord plaslification in T- and Y-
configuration is within lhe following limits of applicability: connections,
l. Joint eccentricity: -0. SSD Se S 0. 25D, where P n sin fJ = Fyt 2 [ 3.1 + 15. 6P2 ]y0·2 QI (51 l.2-3)
D is the chord diameter and e is positive away from the
branches. c/> = 0. 90(LRFD) fl= 1.67ASD)
2. Branch angle: c/> ~ 30°. 2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
3. Chord wall slenderness ratio of diameter to wall Pn = 0.6FytrrDb[(1 + sin8)/2sin2 8] (511.2-4)

thickness less than or equal to 50 for T -, Y - and K-
conncctions; less than or equal to 40 for cross- c/> = 0. 95(LRFD) D. = 1. 58 (ASD)
connections.
This limil slate need not be checked when
4. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to p > ( 1 -1ly).
wall lhickncss less than or equal lo 50.
3. For the limit state of chord plastification in cross-
5. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter connections,
to wall thickness less than or equal lo 0. 05 EI
F y·
(511.2-5)
6. 0. 2 < Dbl D S 1. 0 in general, and
Width ratio:
0.4 S Dbl D S 1. 0 for gapped K-conncctions. c/> = 0. 90(LRFD) fl = 1. 67 (ASD)
7. If a gap conneclion: g greater than or equal to the sum 511.2.2.3 Branches with Axial Loads in K-
of the branch wall thicknesses. Conncctions
8. If an overlap conneclion: 25% ~ Ov ~ 100%, For K-conne(,1ions, the design strenglh or the branch, q:,P11,
where Ov = (q/p) X 100%. p is the projected and the allowable strength or lhe branch, p nln, shall be
length or lhe overlapping branch on the chord; q is the the lower value obtained according to the limil stales of
overlap length measured along lhe connecling face of chord plastification for gapped and overlapped connections
the chord bencatl1 the two branches. For overlap and shear yielding (punching) for gapped connections only.
connections, the larger (or if equal diameter, the
thicker) branch is a "thru member" co1U1ected directly 1. For lhc limit state of chord plastificalion,
to the chord.
c/> = 0. 90(LRFD) fl= 1. 67 (ASD)
9. Branch thickness ralio for overlap connections:
thickness of overlapping branch to be less lhan or equal For lhe compression branch:
to the thickness of the overlapped branch.
Pnsin8 = Fyt2 [2.0 + 11.33DblD]QgQf
I0. Strength: Fy ~ 360 MP a for chord and branches. (511.2-6)
11. Ductility: FylFu S 0.8 where Db refers to the compression branch only, and
-
Fc avai !able stress, MP a

S - chor<l elastic section modulus, mm 3
For design according lo Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):

(5 l 1.2-7)
Pr = Pu = required axial strength in chord, using
In gapped connections, g (measured along the crown or the LRFD load combinations, N
chord neglecting weld dimensions) is positive. In Mr = Ma = required flexural strength in chord, using
overlapped connections, g is negative and equals q. LRFD load combinations, N-mm
Fe = Fy, MPa
For the tension branch,
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
P n sin 8 = (P n sin 8)comp1·c.sion branch (511.2-8)
Pr =Pa= required axial strength in chord, using
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching) in ASD load combinations, N
gapped K-connections, Mr =Mu= required flexural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N-mm
P11 = 0. 6Fyt1rDb[ (1 + sin8)/2sin 2 8] (511.2-9) Fe = 0.6Fy, MPa
</> = 0. 95(LRFD) fi = 1. 58 (ASD) 511.2.3. t Limits of Applicability
511.2.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits:
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated I. Joint eccentricity: -0. SSH ~ e :5 0. 25H, where
through the chord-stress interaction parameter Qf. H is the chord depth and e is positive away from the
branches
I. When the chord is in tension, 2. Branch angle: 8 ~ 30°
3. Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to

thickness less than or equal to 35 for gapped
K-connections and· T-, Y- and cross-connections; less
2. When the chord is in compression in T-, Y-, and cross-
than or equal to 30 for overlapped K-connections
connections,
(511.2-10) 4. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall

Q1=1.3-0.4U/p~1 width to thickness less than or equal lo 35
3. When the chord is in compression in gapped K- 5. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall
connections, wall width to thickness less than or equal to
o.s
1. 2 5 ( E / Fyb ) and also less than 35 for gapped
Qr= 1.3 - OAU/Peff ~ 1 (511.2-11)
K-conneclions and T-, Y- and cross-connections; less
4. Where U is the utilization ratio given by than or equal to 1.1(E/Fyb)o.s for overlapped
K-conncctions
(511.2-12)
6. Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to
where overall wall width of chord greater than or equal to 0.25
for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-connections;
Pr = required axial strength in chord, N. For gapped K- greater than or equal to 0.35 for gapped K-connc(;lions
connections, Pr is to be detcimined on the side of
the joint that has the higher compression stress
7. Aspect ratio: 0.5 !. ratio of depth to width !. 2.0
(higher U).
Mr required Hexural strength in chord, N-mm
Ag chord gross area, mm
2 8. Overlap: 25% ~ Ov ~ 100%, where
-
Dv = (q/p) X 100%. p is the projected length of This limit state need not he checked when
the overlapping branch on the chord; q is the overlap p > (1- 1/y), nor when p < 0.85 and B/t ~
length measured along the connecting face of the chord 10.
beneath the two branches. for overlap connections, the
larger (or if equal width, the thicker) branch is a "thru 3. For the limit state of sidewall strength, the available
member" connected directly to the chord strength for branches in tension shull be taken as the
available strength fur sidewall local yielding. For the
9. Branch width ratio for overlap connections: ratio of limit state of sidewall strength, the available strength
overall wall width of overlapping branch to overall wall for branches in compression shall be taken as the lower
width of overlapped branch greater than or equal to of the strengths for sidewall local yielding and sidewall
0.75 local crippling. For cross-connections with a branch
angle less than 90 degrees, an additional check for
I0. Branch thickness ratio for overlap connections: chord sidewall shear failure must be made in
thickness of overlapping branch to be less than or c4ual accordance with Section 507.5.
to the thickness of the overlapped branch
This limit state need not be checked unless the chord
I I. Strength: Fy :5 3 60 MPa for chord and branches member and branch member have the same width
CP = 1.0).
12. Ductility: Fy/Fu :5 0.8
a. for the limit state oflocal yielding,
(511.2-15)
511.2.3.2 Branches with Axial Loads in T-, Y-
and Cross-Connections </> = 1. 00 (LRFD) n= 1. 50 (ASD)
where
For T-, Y-, and cross-connections, the design strength of the
branch, <f>P n, or the allowable strength of the branch,
P n/D., shall be the lowest value obtained according to the k outside corner radius of the HSS, which
limit states of chord wall plastification, shear yielding is permitted to be taken as 1. 5t if
(punching), sidewall strength and local yielding due to unknown, mm
uneven load distribution. In addition to the limits of N bearing length of the load, parallel to
applicability in Set:tion 5 I I .2.3a, /3 shall not be less than the axis of the HSS main member
0.25. · Hb/sin8, mm
1. For the limit state of chord wall plastification, b. For the limit state of sidewall local crippling, in T-
and Y-connections,
P" sin6 =Fyt2 [211/(l - P) + 4/(1 - p)0·5 ]Q 1
(511.2-13) P 11 sin9
5
= 1. 6t2 [1 + 3N /(H - 3t)](EFy)°' Q1
</> = 1. OO(LRFD) D. = 1. 50 (ASD)
(511.2-16)
This limit state need not be checked when P > 0. 85.
</> = 0. 75(LRFD) D. = 2. 00 (ASD)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
c. For the limit state of sidewall local crippling in
(511.2-14) cross-connections,
5
</> = 0. 95 (LRFD) n= 1. 58 (ASD) P 11 sin9 = [48t3 /(H - 3t)](EFy)°' Q1
(511.2-17)
In Eq. 511.2-14, the effective outside punching
parameter peop = sp Ir shall not exceed p. </> = 0. 90(LRFD) D. = 1. 67 (ASD)
--
5·116 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
d. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven b. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
• load distribution,
Pnsin8 = 0.6FytB{2 11 + P+ Peop]
(511.2-21)
</) = 0. 95 (LRFD) .n = 1. 58 (ASD)
(511.2-17)
In the above equation, the effective outside
cf, = 0. 9S(LRFD) .n = 1. 58 (ASD) punching parameter /Jeop = 5/l/y shall not
exceedp.
where
This limit state need only be checked if
beoi = [10/(B/t)][Fyt/Fybtb]Bb :5 Bb Bb < (B - 2t) or !he branch is not square.
(511.2-19) c. For the limit state of shear yielding of the chord in
the gap, available strength shall be checked in
This limit state need not be checked when accordance with Section 507.5. This limit state
p< 0.85. need only be checked it' the chord is not square.
d. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven

51) .2.3.3 Branches witb Axial Loads in Gapped K - load distribution,
ConuecOons
For gapped K-connections, the design strength of the Pn = Fybtb[2Hb + Bb + beoi (511.2-22)
branch, <J,P n , or the allowable strength of the branch, - 4tb]
P nl 0., shall be the lowest value obtai nod according to the
limit states of chord wall plastilication, shear yielding cf,= 0. 95 (LRFD) .n = 1. 58 (ASD)
(punching), shear yielding and local yieldi ng due to uneven
load distribution. In addition to the limits of applicability in where
Section K2.3a, the following limits shall apply:
b eoi = [10/(B/t))[Fyt/(Fybtb)]Bb :5 Bh
1. Bb/B ~ O.l+y/50. (51l.2-23)
2. Pert ~ o. 35. This limit state need only be checked if the branch
is not square or B /t < 15.
3. { ~ 0. 5 (1 - /Jeff)
511.2.3.4 Branches with Axial Loads in
4. Gap: g greater than or equal to the sum of the branch Overlapped K - Connections
wall thicknesses.
For overlapped K-connections, (he design strength of the
5. The smaller B b > 0. 63 times the larger Bb. hranch,cf>Pn, or the allowable strength of the branch,
P ,JD., shall be determined from the limit state of local
a. For the limit state of chord wall plastification, yielding due to uneven load distribution,
cf, = 0. 95 (LRFD) n= 1. 58 (ASD)
(511 .2-20) For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 25% ::;;
0 11 :5 50% measured with respect to the overlapping
cf, = 0. 90 (LRFD) fl = 1. 67 (ASD) branch,
Pn = Fybttbi[(0..,/50)(2Hbi - 4tbl) + beoi + beov]

(5 l 1.2-24)

For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 50% s 511.2.3e Welds to Branches
Ov < 80% measured with respect to the overlapping
hranch, The nonuniformity of load transfer along the line of weld,
due to differences in relative flexibility of HSS walls in
HSS-to-HSS connections, shall be considered in
Pn = Fybitbi[2Hbi - 4thi + beoi + beov1 proportioning such welds. This can be considered hy
(511.2-25) limiting the total effective weld length, Le, of groove and
fillet welds to rectangular IISS as follows:
For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 80% ~
Ov $ 100% measured with respect to the overlapping 1. In T-, Y. and cross-connections, for 6 ~ 50 degrees
branch,
(5 I l.2-29)
Pn = Fybitb;[2Hbi - 4tbi + Bhi + beov1
(51 l.2-26)
for 8 ~ 60 degrees
where
2(H 1, - 1.2tb)
b eoi = is the effective width of the branch face welded to Le = __ s_i_n_8_ _ (511.2-30)
the chord,
beoi [10/(B/t)J((Fyt)/(Fybilh1)]Bhi s Bbi
Linear interpolation shall be used to determine Le for
(511.2-27) values of 8 between 50 and 60 degrees.
b eov = is the eftective width of the branch face welded to
the overlapped brace 2. In gapped K-connections, around each branch,
[10/(Bb/thi)l[(Fyhith;)/(Fybitbt)]Bbt ~ Bb1
for 8 ~ SO degrees
(511.2-28)
B bi overall branch width of the overlapping branch,
mm
Bbj overall branch width of the overlapped branch,
mm
specified minimum yield stress of the overlapping (511.2-31)
branch material, MPa
specified minimum yield stress of the overlapped for 8 ~ 60 degrees
branch material, MPa
overall depth of the overlapping branch, mm
thickness of the overlapping branch, mm (511.2-32)
thickness of the overlapped branch, mm
For the overlapped branch, Pn shall not exceed Pn of the Linear interpolation shall he used to determine Le for values
overlapping branch, calculated using Eq. 51 1.2-24, of 8 between 50 and 60 degrees. Jn lieu of the ahovc criteria
5 J 1.2-25, or 511.2-26, as applicable, multiplied by the in Eqs. 511.2-29 to 511.2-32, other rational criteria are
factor( AbJFybJ/ AbiFybi), permitted.
where
Abi = cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch

Abj = cross-sectional area of the overlapped branch

SI 1.3 HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections .,, the load length parameter, applicable only to
rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of contact
HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as of the branch with the chord in the plane of the
connections that consist or one or two branch members that connection to the chord width = N / B, where
are directly welded to a continuous chord that passes N = H 11lsin8
through the connection, with the branch or branches loaded 8 acute angle between the branch and chord
by bending moments. (degrees)
A connection shall be classified 511.3.2 Criteria for Round HSS
l. As a T -connection when there is one branch and it is The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and
perpendicular to the chord and as a Y-connection when local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
there is one branch but not perpendicular to the chord. through the chord-stress ioternction par.:uneter Qf.
2. As a cross-connection when there is a branch on each
(opposite) side of the chord. When the chord is in tension,
For the purposes of this Specification, lhe centerlines of

the branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie in
Q, =1
When the chord is in compression,
a common plane.
QI = 1.0- 0.3U(1 + U) (511.3-1)
51 J.3.1 Definitions of Parameters
overall width of rectangular HSS main member, where U is the utilization ratio given by,
B
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection, mm (51 l.3-2)
Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member,
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the where
connection, mm
D outside diameter of round HSS main member, mm Pr = required axial strength io chord, N
Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch member, Mr - required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
mm Ag chord gross area, mm2
specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
Fy
member, MPa
Fc = available stress, M Pa
specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch S chord elastic section modulus, mm3
Fyb
member, MPa
ultimate strength ofHSS member, MPa For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
Fu
H overall height of rectangular HSS main member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm Pr = Pu= required axial strength in chord, using
overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, LRFD load combinations, N
Hb
measured in the plane of the connection, mm Mr =Mu= required flexural strength in chord, using
= design wall thickness ofHSS main member, mm LRFD load combinations, N-mm
t
design wall thickness of HSS branch member, mm Ag = Fy, MPa
tb
fJ the width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to
chord diameter = Dbl D for round HSS; the ratio For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
of overall branch width to chord width = Bbl B
for rectangular HSS Pr = Pa = required axial stre.ni,ith in c'hord, using
ASD load combinations, N
the chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the
)'
Mr = Ma = required flexural strength in chord, using
diameter to the wall thickness = D / 2t for round ASD load combinations, N-mm
HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall
Fe = 0.6Fy, MPa
=
thickness B l2t for rectangular HSS
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP}
-·
511.3.2.1 Limits of Applicability 511.3.2.3 Branches with Out-of-Plane Bending

Moments in T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits of applicability: The design strength, </>Mn, and the allowable strength,
Mn/fl, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
1. Branch angle:8 ~ 30°. limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching).
2. Chord wall slendemess: ratio of diameter to wall
thickness less than or c4.ual to 50 for T - and Y- I. For the limit state of chord plastification,
connections; less than or equal to 40 for cross-
connections. Mnsin8 = Fyt2 Db[3.0/(1- 0.81P)]Qr
3. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to (511.3-5)
wall thickness less than or equal to 50.
</> = 0. 90 (LRFD) fl= 1. 67 (ASD)
4. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter
to wall thickness less than or equal to 0. OSE / F y 2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
5. Width ratio: . 2 < Dbl D ::s; 1. 0 . M 11 = 0. 6FytD![(3 + sin 8)/4sin2 6]Qr

(511.3-6)
6. Strength: Fy ::s; 360 MPa for chord and branches
4> = 0. 95 (LRFD) fl = 1. 58(ASD)
7. Ductility: Fy/Fu ::s; 0.8
This limit state need not be checked when
511.3.2.2 Branches with In-Plane Bending Moments p > (1-1/y).
in T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
511.3.2.4 Branches with Combined Bending
The design strength, </>Mn, and the allowable strength, Moment and Axial Force in T-, Y and
M11 /fl, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the Cross - Connections
limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching). Connections subject to branch axial load, branch in-plane
bending moment, and branch out-of-plane bending moment,
I. For the limit state of chord plastification, or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy the
following.
(511.3-3)
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
</> = 0. 90 (LRFD) n = 1. 67 (ASD) 2
(Pr/<f>P11) + (Mr-ip/</>Mn-ip)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching), + (M 1._0 p/</>Mn-op) S 1. 0
M 11 = 0. 6FytD~[(1 + 3sin 9)/4sin2 6] (511.3-7)

where
(511.3-4)
Pr Pit-=' required axial strength in branch, using
</> = 0. 95 (LRFD) n = 1. 58 (ASD) LRFD load combinations, N
q,P11 design strength obtained from Section 5 I I .2.2b
This limit state need not be checked when Mr-ip required in-plane Hexural strength in branch,
p > (1-1/y). using LRFO load combinations, N-mm
9Mn-ip = design strength obtained from Section 51 l.3.2b
Mr-op ~ required out-of-plane flexural strength in
branch, using LRFD load combinations, N-mm
BMn-,>p =- design slrength obtained from Section 5 l 1.3.2c

5-120 CHAPTER 5- Structural Steel
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD): Fe = Fy,MPa
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
Pr = Pa=-= required axial strength in chord, using ASO load

comhinations, N
where M1• = Ma= required flexural strength in chord, using ASD
load combinations, N-mm
Pr Pa= required axial strength in branch, using
ASD load combinations, N Fe "' 0. 6Fy, MPa
allowable strength obtained from Section
n
I
Pn .u..
511.3.3.1 Limits of Applicability
51 l.2.2b
required in-plane flexural strength in
branch, using ASD load comhinations, N- The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
mm configuration is within the following limits:
51 l.3.2b I. Branch angle is approximately 90°.
Mr-op required out-of-plane flexural strength in
branch, using ASD load combinations, N- 2. Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to
mm thickness less than or equal to 35.
· /"
Mn-op ,u, = allowable strength obtained from Section
51 l .3.2c 3. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall
width to thickness less than or equal to 35.
511.3.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS
4. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and wall width to thickness less than or equal to
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated 5
1. 25(E/Fyb{ and also less than 35.
through the chord-stress interaction parameter Qf·
5. Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to
When the chord is in tension, overall wall width of chord greater than or equal to
0.25.
6. Aspect ratio: 0. 5 :::; ratio of depth to width :::; 2. 0.

When the chord is in compression,
7. Strength: Fy S 360 MPa for chord and branches.
Q1 = (1.3 - 0.4U//J) s 1 (511.3-9)
8. Ductility: Fy/ Fu s 0. 8.
where U is the utilization ratio given by
(Sl l.3-10)
511.3.3.2 Branches with In-Plane Bending
where
Moments in T- and Cross-Connections
Pr -a: required axial strength in chord, N
Mr = required flexural strength in chord, N-mm The design strength, <J,Mn, and the allowable strength,
2
Ag = chord gross area, mm Mn/.0., shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
Fe = available stress, MPa limit states of chord wall plastification, sidewall local
S = chord elastic section modulus, mm3 yielding and local yielding due to uneven load distribution.
I. For the limit state of chord wall plastification,

Fur design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
Pr = Pu= required axial strength in chord, using LRFD M 11 ; Fyt2 H1,[(t/Zt1) + 2/(1- p)0 ·5 + 11/(l - P)]Qt
load combinations, N (511.3-11)
Mr = Mu= required flexural strenbrth in chord, using LRFD
load combinations, N-mm
.........-·
</> = 1. 00 (LRFD) 1l = 1. SO(ASD) 2. For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
This limit state need not be checked when Mn= Fy't(B - t)(Hb + St) (511.3-16)
p> 0.85.
</> = 1. 00 (LRFD) 1l = 1. SO(ASD)
2. For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
where
Mn= 0. SFy't(Hb + 5t) 2 (511.3-12)
Fy Fy for T-connections
</> = 1. 00 (LRFD) n= 1. SO(ASD) F .. 0. 8Fy for cross-connections
y
where
Fy * F y for T-connections This limit state need nol be checked when p < 0. 85.
F y * =- 0. 8Fy for cross-connections
3. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven load
distribution,
This limit state need not be checked when p < 0. 85.
3. For the Ii mit state of local yielding due to uneven load Mn= Fyb[zb - 0. 51(1 - be0 JBb)2B/tb]
distribution, (511.3-17)
M11 = Fyb[Zb - (1 - be0 dBb)BhHbtb] (51 l.3-13) </> = 0. 95 (LRFD) fi = 1. 58(ASD)

</> = 0. 95 (LRFD) n = 1. 58(ASD) where
where
[10/(B/t))[Fyt/(Fybtb)]Bb ~ Bb
(511.3-18)
beoi = [10/(B/t)](Fyt/(Fyhth)]Bb :5 Bb
branch plastic section modulus about the axis
(51 J.3-14) of hending, mm 3
= branch plastic section modulus ahout the axis of This limit state need not he checked when p < 0. 85.
bending, mm3
4. For the limit state of chord distortional failure,
This limit state need not be checked when P< 0. 85.
511.3.3.3 Branches with Out-of-Plane Bending

Moments in T- and Cross-Connections (511.3-19)
The design strength, </>Mn, and the allowable strength, </> = 1. 00 (LRFD) n = 1. SO(ASD)
Mn/fl, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
limit states of chord wall plastification, sidewall local This limit state need not he checked for cross-
yielding, local yielding due to uneven load distribution and connections or for I-connections if chord distortional
chord distortional failure. failure is prevented by other means.
I. For the limit state of chord wall plastification,
Mn= Fy t 2 [0. 5Hb(1 + /J)/(1- /J)

+ [2BBb(1 + /J)/(1 - fJ)] 0 .s]Qr
(511.3-15}
</> = 1. 00 (LRFD) fi = 1. SO(ASD)

This limit state need not he checked when p> 0. 85.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume t, 7th Edition. 2015
-
511.3.3.4 Branches with Combined Bending Moment SECTION512

and Axial Force in T- and Cross-
Connections DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
Conm;ctions subject to branch axial load, branch in-plane 512.l General Provisions
bending moment, and branch oul-o{~plane bending moment,
or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building,
its appearance, maintainability, durability, and comfort of
For design according 10 Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) its occupants arc preserved under normal usage. Limiting
values of structural behavior for serviceability (for example,
maximum deflections, accelerations) shall he chosen with
(Pr/</>Pn) + {Mr-ip/</>Mn-ip) due regard to the intended function of the structure.
+ (Mr-vp/</>Mn-op) ~ 1. 0 Serviceability shall be evaluated using appropriate load
combinations for the serviceability limit states identified.
(511.3-20)
where User Note: Additional infonnation on serviceability limit
Pu= required axial strength in hranch, using states, service loads and appropriate load combinations for
LRFD load comhinations, N serviceability requirements can be found in ASCE 7,
design strength obtained from Section Appendix B and its Commentary. The perfonnance
51 l.2.3b requirements for serviceability in this Section are consistent
re4uired in-plane flexural strength in branch, with those requirements. Service loads, as stipulated herein,
using LRFD load comhinations, N-mm are those that act on the structure at an arbitrary point in
design strength obtained from Section time. That is, the appropriate load combinations are often
5 I l.3.3b less severe than those in ASCE 7, Section 2.4, where the
required out-of-plane flexural stren1;,•th in · LRFD load combinations are given.
Mr-op
branch, using LRFD loa<l combinations,
N-mm 512.2 Camber
design strength obtained from Section
51 l.3.3c Where camber is used to achieve proper pos1t1on and
location of the structure, the magnitude, direction and
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASO) location of camber shall be specified in the structural
drawings.
(Pr/(Pn/fi)) + (Mr-ip/(Mu-ip/D.)) User Note: Camber recommendations are provided in the
+ (Mr-op/(Mn-op/11)) :s; 1. 0 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
(511.3-21)
where 512.3 Dctlections
Pa"' required axial strength in branch, using Deflections in structural members and structural systems
ASD load combinations, N under appropriate service load combinations shall not
allowable strength obtained from Section impair the serviceability of the structure.
51 I .2.3h
Mr-ip required in-plane flexural strength in User Note: Conditions to be considered include levelness
branch, using ASD load combinations, of floors, alignment of structural members, integrity of
N-mm building finishes, and other factors that aflect the normal
allowable strength obtained from Section usage and function of the structure. For composite
5 I l.3.3b members, the additional deflections due to the shrinkage
required out-of-plane flexural strength in and creep of the concrete should be considered.
branch, using ASD load combinations,
N-mm
51 l.3.3c

CHAPTER !i Struch.1rc1I Stoel 5-123
5l2.4 Drift
SECTION 513
• Drift of a structure shall be evaluated under servil:l: loads to FABRICATION, ERECTION AND
provide for sc.:rvil:eahility of the slruclurl:, including lhe QUALITY CONTROL ~ - - -
inlcgrity of interior parlitions and exterior cladding. Drift
under strength load combinations shall not cause collision Drawings
with atljacent structures or exceed the limiting values of
such drifts lhal may be specified by this code. Shop drawings shall be prepared in advance of fahrication
and give complete infonnation necessary for the fabrication
512.S Vibration of the component parts of the structure, including the
location, type and size of welds and bolls. Erection
The eilccl of vibration on the comfort of the occupanls and drawings shall he prepared in advance of erection and give
lhe function of the structure shall be considcred. The information necessary for erection of the structure. Shop
sources or vibration to be considcrcd include pedestrian and erection drawings shall clearly distinguish between
loading, vibrating machinery and others idenliiicd for the shop and field welds and bolts and shall clearly identify
structure. pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted
connections. Shop and erection drawings shall be made with
512.6 Wind-Induced Motion due regard to speed and economy in fabrication and
erection.
The effect of wind-induced motion of buildings on the
comfort of occupants shall be considered. 513.2 Fabrication
512.7 Expansion and Contraction 513.2.1 Cambering, Curving and Straightening
The effecls uf thermal expansion and contraction of a I ,ocal application of heat or mechanical means is permitted
building shall be considered. Damage to building cladding lo be used to introduce or co1Tecl <:amber, curvature and
can cause water penetration and may lead to cmTosion. straightness. The temperature of heated areas, as measured
by approved methods, shall not exceed 593 :>C for
512.8 Connection Slip A514/A514M and A852/A852M steel nor 649 °C for other
steels.
The efiecls or connection slip shall be included in the
design where slip at bolted connections may cause 513.2.2 Thermal Cutting
defom1ations that impair the serviceability or the structure.
Where appropriate, the connection shall be designed tu Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of AWS
preclude slip. For the design of slip-critical connections see DI. I, Sections 5.15.1.2, 5.15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4 with the
Sections 510.3.8 and 510.3.9. exception that thermally cut free edges that will be subject
to calculated static tensile stress shall be free of round-
User Note: For more infonnation on connection slip, refer bottom gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp V-shaped
to the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and notches shall be
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. removed by grinding or repaired by welding.
Reentrant corners, except reentrant corners or beam copes

and weld access holes, shall meet the requirements of A WS
Dl.l, Section AS.16. If another specified contour is
required it must be shown on the.: contract documents. Beam
rnpes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical
requirements of Section 510.1.6. Beam copes and welds
access holes in shapes that are to be galvanizcd shall be
ground. For shapes with a Hm1ge thickness not exceeding
50 mm the roughness of thermally cul surfaces of copes
shall be no greater than a surface roughness value of
50 µm as defined in ASME R46. l Surface Texture
(Surface Roughness, W,tviness, and Lay). For beam copes
and weld access holes in which the curved pan oflhe access
hole.: is thermally cut in ASTM A6/A6M hot rolled shapes
with a t1ange thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded built-
National Structural Code of t11e Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
l_
-
5-12~ CHAPTl::f~ 5 - Structurnl Steel
up shapes witb material thickness greater than 50 mm, a Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part
preheat temperature of not less lban 66 °C shall be applied of the splice strength shall have the hearing surfaces of
prior to thermal culling. The thermally cul s urface of access individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, sawing, or
holes in J\STM A6/A6M hot-rolled s hapes with a flange other suitable means.
thickness exceeding 50 mm and huilt-up shapes with a
material thickness greater than 50 mm shall be ground and 513.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances
inspected for cracks using magnetic particle inspection in
accordance with ASTM E709. Any crack is unacceptable Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with the
regardless or size or location. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges.
User Note: The AWS Su1face Roughness Guide for
Oxygen Cutting (A WS C4. l-77) sample 3 may be used as a 513.2.8 Finish of Column Bases
guide for evaluating the surface roughness of copes in
shapes with flanges not exceeding 50 mm thick. Column hases and hasc plates shall be finished in
accordance with the following requirements:
513.2.3 Planing of £dges
l. Steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in thickness are
Planing or finishing or sheared or thermally cut edges of pennitted without milling, provided a satisfactory
plates or shapes is not required unless specifically called for contact bearing is obtained. Steel bearing plates over
in the contract documents or included in a stipulated edge 50 mm but not over I00 mm in thickness arc permitted
preparation for welding. to be straightened by pressing or, if presses are not
available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as
513.2.4 Welded Construction noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to
obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing
The technique of welding, the workmanship, appearance plates over 100 mm in thickness shall be milled for
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting bearing surfaces ( except as noted in subparagraphs 2
nonconfonning work shall be in accordance with A WS and 3 of this section).
DI. I except as modified in Section 510.2.
2. Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases
513.2.5 Bolted Construction that are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
foundations need not be milled.
Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and
rigidly held together during assembly. Use of a drift pin in 3. Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when
bolt holes during assembly shall not distort the metal or complete-joint penetration groove welds are provided
enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for between the column and the bearing plate.
rejection.
513.2.9 Holes for Anchor .Rods
Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or Holes for anchor rods shall he pennitted to be thcnnally cut
A490 Bolls, Section 3.3 except that Lhennally cut holes in accordance with the provisions of Section 513.2.2.
shall be pcrmiued with a surface roughness profile not
exceeding 25 ~un as defined in ASME 846.1. Gouges shall 513.2.10 Drain Holes
not exceed a depth of 2 mm.
When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either
Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not during construction or during service, the member shall be
more than 6 mm within a joint, are permitted in joints sealed, provided with a drain hole at the base, or protected
without changing the strength (based upon hole type) for the by other suitable means.
design of connections. The orientation of such shims is
independent of the direction of application of the load. The 513.2.11 Requirements for Galvanized Members
use of high-strength bolts shall confonn to the requirements
of the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed,
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, except as modified in Section detailed and fabricated to provide for flow and drainage or
510.3.513.2.6 Compression Joints pickling fluids and zinc and to prevent pressure build-up in
enclosed parts.

Cf-lAi'llR S
User Note: Sec The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip 5 T.l.4.2 Bracing

Galvanized after Fabrication, American Galvanizer's
,. Association, and ASTM A 123, A 153, A384 and A 780 for The frame of steel skeleton buildings shall be carried up
useful information on design and detailing of galvanized true and plumb within the limits defined in the A!SC Code
members. of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and llridgcs.
Temporary bracing shall be provi<lcd, in accordance with
513.3 Shop Painting the requirements of the Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Rridges, wherever necessary to supp011 the
513.3.t General Requirements loads to which the structure may be subjected, including
equipment and the operation of same. Such bracing shall be
Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in left in place as long as required for safety.
accordance with the provisions of the AISC Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Shop 513.4.3 Alignment
paint is not required unless specified by the contract
<lm:umcnts. Nu permanent holting or welding shall he performed until
the adjacent allectcd portions of the structure have heen
513.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces properly aligned.
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop 513.4.4 Fit of Column Compression .Joints
assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if and .Rase Plates
required by the design documents.
La<.:k ur contact hearing not exceeding a gap of 2 mm,
513.3.3 Contact Surfaces regardless of the type of splice used ( partial-joinl-
pcnctration groove welded or bolted), is permitted. If the
Paint is permitted in hearing-type connections. For sfip- gap exceeds 2 mm, hut is less than 6 mm, and if an
critical connections, the faying surface requirements shall engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact. area
be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural does not exist, the gap shall he packed out with nontapcrc<l
Joints Using ASTM /\325 or A490 Bolts, Section 3.2.2(b). steel shims. Shims need not be other than mild steel,
regardless or the grade of the main material.
513.3.4 Finished Surfaces
513.4.5 .Field Welding
Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected against
corrosion hy a rust inhibitive coating that can he removed Shop paint on surI~cc!; a(ljacent to joints to be tield weldc<l
prior to erection, or which has characteristics that make shall be wire hrushed if necessary to assure weld quality.
removal prior to erection unnecessary. Field welding of attachments to installed embedments in
contact with concrete shall be done in such a manner as to
513.3. 5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds avoid excessive thermal expansion of the embedment which
could result in spalling or cracking of the concrete or
Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, excessive stress in the embedment anchors.
surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location shall he
free or materials that would prevent proper welding or 513.4.6 Field Painting
produce objectionable Ji.Imes during welding.
Rcsponsihility for touch-up pamtmg, cleaning and field
513.4 Erection painting shall be allocated in accordance with accepted local
practices, and this allocation shall be set forth explicitly in
513.4.1 Alignment of Column Bases the design documcnts.
Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with 513.4. 7 Field Connections
full hearing on concrete or masonry.
As erection progresses, thc strncture shall be securely bolled
or welded to support the dead, wind and erection loads.
-
513.5 Quality Control APPENDIX A

The fabricator shall proviJe qualily control procedures to INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Lhc extent that the fabricator deems necessary to assure that
the work is pcrfom1ed in accordance with this Specification. A-1.1 General Provisions
In addition to the fabricator's qualily conlrol procedures,
material and workmanship at all times may be subject 10 Inelastic analysis is permitted for design according to the
inspection by qualified inspeclors represcnling the provisions of Section 502.3.3 (LR FD). fnelastic analysis is
purchaser. If such inspection by reprcsc11tati vcs or Lhc not permitted for design acc:ording to the provisions of
purchaser will be required, it shall be so stated in lhe design Section 502.3.4 (ASD) except as provided in Section A-1.3.
documents.
A-1.2 Materials
513.S.l Cooperation
Members undergoing plastic hinging shall have a specified
As far as possible, the inspection by rcprcsematives of the minimum yield stress not exceeding 450 MPa.
purchaser shall be made al the fabricator's plan!. The
fabricator shall cooperate with the inspector, permilting A-1.3 Moment Redistribution
access fo r inspection lo all places where work is being done.
The purchaser's inspector shall schedule this work for Beams and girders composed of compact sections as
minimum intern1ption to the work or the fabricator. defined in Section 502.4 and satislyjng the unbraced length
requirements of Section A-1.7, including composite
513.5.2 Rejections members, may be proportioned for nine-tenths or the
negative moments at points of support, produced by the
Mnterial or workmanship not in conformance with the gravity loading computed by an elastic analysis, provided
provisions of this Chapter may be rejected at any time that the maximum positive moment is increased by onc-
during the progress of 1he work. The fabricator shall receive tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction is not
copies of' all reports furnished to the purchaser by the pennitte<l for moments produced by loading on cantilevers
inspection agency. and for design according to Sections A- 1.4 through A-1.8 of
this appendix.
513.S.3 Inspection of Weldjng
If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly
The inspection or welding shall be performed in accordance framed to the beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may
with the provisions of A WS DI. I except as modi ficd in be used in proportioning the column for combined axial
Section 5 10.2. When visual i nspcction is required to be force and flexure, provided that the axial force docs not
performed by A WS certified welding inspectors. it shall be exceed 0.15c/>cFyAg for LRFD or 0 . 15FyAg/D.c for
so specified in the design documents. When nondestructive ASD,
testing is required, tbe process, extent and slandards of
acceptance shall be clearly defined in the design documents. where
513.5.4 Inspection of S lip-C ritical High- gross area of member, mni2

Stt'eogth Bolted Connectfons. specified minimum yield stress of the compression
flange, MPa
The inspection of slip-critical high-strength bolted resistance factor for compression= 0.90
connections shall be in accordance with the provisions of safety factor for compression= .t .67
the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts.
A-1.4 Local Buckling
513.5.5 Identification of Steel
Flanges and webs of members subject to plastic hinging in
combined flexure and axial compression shall he compact
The fabricator shall be able to demonstrate by a written
with width-thickness ratios less than or equal to the limiting
procedure and by actual practice a method of material
identification, visible at least lhrough 1he " fit-up" operation, lp defined in Table 502.4.1 or as modifie9 as follows:
for the main structural elements of each shipping piece.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5·127
I. Fur webs uf doubly symmetric wide flange members

and rectangular HSS in combined flexure and
compression
A-1.5 Stability and Second-Order F,ffects
Continuous beams not subjected to axial loads and that do

(A-1-1) not contribute to lateral stability of framed structures may
be designed based on a first-order inelastic analysis or a
plastic mechanism analysis. Braced frames and moment
frames may be designed based on a first-order inelastic
analysis or a plastic mechanism analysis provided that
stahility and second-order effects are taken into account.
h; tw ,;; 1. 12 j:;; ( 2. 33 - </>:;J j:;;

2c: 1. 49 Structures 1:nay be designed on the basis of a second-order
inelastic analysis. For beam-columns, connections and
(A-1-2) connected members, the rc4uirc<l strengths shall be
where determined from a second-order inelastic analysis, where
equilibrium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking
E = modulus of elasticity of steel ...., 200,000 into account the change in stiffness due to yielding.
MPa
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the A-1.Sa Braced Frames
type of steel being used, MP a
h = as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm In braced frames designed on the basis of inelastic analysis,
required axial strength in compression, N braces shall be designed to remain elastic under the design
Pu= loads. The required axial strength for columns and
Py= member yield strength, N
compression braces shall not exceed, </>c = { 0. 85FyAg)·
tw = web thickness, mm
</>b= resistance factor for flexure= 0.90
where
2. For flanges of rectangular box and hollow strnctural

</>c = 0. 90(LRFD)
sections of uniform thickness subject to bending or
A-1.Sb Moment Frames
compression, flange cover plates, and diaphragm plates
between lines of fasteners or welds
In moment frames designed on the basis of irielastic
analysis, the required axial strength of columns shall not
b/t ~ 0.94jE/Fy (A-1-3) exceed </>c = ( 0. 75FyAg),
where
where
b as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm </Jc = 0. 90(LRFD)
t as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm
A-1.6 Columns and Other Compression Members
3. For circular hollow sections in flexure
In addition to the limits set in Sections A-1.5.a and A-1.5.b,
the required axial strength of columns designed on the basis
D/t ~ 0.045E/Fy (A-1-4)
of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design stren1;,rth,
where
</>cPn, determined according to the provisions of Section
505.3.
D = outside diameter of round HSS member, mm
Design by inelastic analysis is permitted if the column
J
slenderness ratio, L/ r, docs not exceed 4. 71 E/ Fy,

5-128 CHAPTER 5 ·- Structural Steel
where A-1.8 Members under Combined l<'orces
L laterally unbraced length or a member, mm When inelastic nnoly:.is is used for symmcLTic members
r governing radius of gyration, mm subject to bending anc.l axial force, the provisions in Section
508. 1 apply. Inelastic analysis is not permitted for members
User Note: A well-proportioned member will not be subject to lorsion and combined tors ion. Oexurc, shear
expected to reach this limit. and/or axial force.
A-1.7 Beams and Other Flexural Members A·l.9 Connections
Connections adjacent to plastic hinging regions of

The required moment strength, Mu, of beams designed on
connected members shall be des igned with sufficient
the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design
strength and ductility to sustain the forces and deformations
strength, </)Mn, where imposed under the required loads.
(A-1-6)
<Pc == 0. 90(LRFD)
Design by inelastic analysis is permitted for members that
are compact as defined in Section 502.4 and as modified in
Section A-1.4.
The laterally unbraced length, Lb, of the compression

flange adjacent to plastic hinge locations shall not exceed
Lpd, determined as follows.
1. For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped

members with the compression Oangc equal to or larger
than the tension flange loaded in the plane of the web:
where
smaller moment at end of unbraced length
of beam, N-mm
larger moment at end of unbraced length of
beam, N-mm
= radius of gyration about minor axis, mm
(M1/M2) is positive when moments
cause reverse curvature and negative for
single curvature.
2. For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams:
Lpd = (o.17 + 0 . 10 (::)] (:,)ry ~ (~)ry

0.10
(A-1-8)
There is no limit on Lb for members with circular or

square cross sections or for any beam bent about its
minor ax.is.
Ass ociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 5 Structur;::il Stflel 5-129
APPENDIX A-2 Us-

_ (0.8Fy - lo) (J\-2-4)
DESIGN FOR PONDING fo 5
where
A-2.1 Simplilied Design for Ponding
fo stress due to the load combination (D + R)
The roof system shall he considered stable for ponding and D nominal dead load
no further investigation is needed ir both or the following R nominal load due to rainwater or snow, exclusive of
two conditions are met: lhc ponding contribution, MPa
CP + 0. 9Cs ::::;; 0. 25 (A-2-1) For roor framing consisting of primary and secondary
members, the combined stiffness shall be evaluated as
Id~ 394054 (J\- 2-2) follows: enter Figure A-2-1 at the level of the computed
where stress index Up determined for the primary beam; move
504L5 Lt horizontally to the computed Cs value of the secondary
Cp = - - -"- heams and then downward to the abscissa scale. The
Ip combined stiflilcss of the primary and secondary framing is
sufficient to prevent ponding if the flexibility constant read
504SLf from this latter scale is more than the value of Cp computed
Cs = - - -
ls for the given primary member; if not, a stiller primary or
column spacing in direction of girder (length of secondary beam, or comhination of hoth, is required.
primary members), m
column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder A similar procedure must be followed using Figure A-2-2.
(lcnglh or secondary memhcrs), m For roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced
spacing of secondary members, m wall-bearing beams, the stiffness shall be evaluated as
Ip moment of inertia or primary members, mm 4 follows. The beams arc considered as secondary mcmhcrs
I 5 - moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4 supported on an infinitely stiff primary member. For this
Id - moment of inertia of the steel deck supponed on casc, cnlcr Figure A-2-2 with the computed stress index Us·
secondary memhers, mm 4 perm The limiting value of c~ is determined by the intercept of a
Cp flexibility constant for the supporting beam horizontal line representing the Us value and the curve for
C5 -: Flexihility constant for one foot width of the roof cv = o.
deck (s = 1. 0)
User Note: The ponding deflection contributed by a metal
For trusses and steel Joists, the moment of inertia deck is usually such a small part of the total ponding
deflection of a roof panel that it is sufficient merely to limit
Is shall be decreased 15 percent when used in the above
its moment of inertia per meter of width normal to its span
equation. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary
member when it is directly supported by the primary to 3940l4 mm 4 /m.
members.
For roof framing consisting of metal deck spanning between
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding heams supported on columns, the stiffness shall be
evaluated as follows. Employ Figure J\-2-1 or J\-2-2 using
The provisions given hclow arc permitted to he used when a as C5 the flexibility constant for a I m width of the roof
more exact determination of framing stiffness is needed deck (S = 1. 0).
than that given in Section A-2.1.
For primary members, the stress index shall he
(A-2-3)
For secondary members, the stress index shall be
-
5·130 CHAPTER 5-Structural Steel
34 -..-,--. . - -·
_,_ -r,......- APPENDIX A-3
3.2
-1-1-- -1- - - l
.... .. _ J_
DESIGN FOR FATIGUE
-- ,....,- - - --- ,- - ,l- I ·-
3.0
28
....
-- -....
t- - - -1-- -..-
,__ · •-·
.-- ,- 1--
-
-
J 1- r ·-
- ,- A-3.J General Provisions
2.6
2.4
- --- - __ ,_ -- ,....,-
-t-
I
-...-
t- ,- - -t-
-
-1 -- _ /
-t-
-
- l 1- The provisions of this Appendix apply to stresses calculated
t-1-- J I J
- on the basis of service loads. The maximum permitted stress
- - - - . °'
22
-->- __ t --;-
- ~- ,_
8-
=~- due to unfactorcd loads is 0. 66Fy·
I- -
,. 20 I _,_ '!
1-
., -
--...- -1--" 1 1- - ·- - : 1- ,-
118 -- __ ,_
I-
I I
-...- -/ If
--- : V
->- Stress range is defined as the magnitude of the change in
~
Ir - 1
~
1.6
t5 1.4
-
-
1-->- ) ~ ,- - I
~ /
- 7
II' [2 : --1·•
,_ __ stress due to the application or removal of the service live
I/ / load. In the case of a stress reversal, the stress range shall be
, .:/
12 - l/ / J
computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated
1.0 -1./
} L
v
./
I/
/
-,. ~- ; ....: ....

II :)~/
C, /
-v t--
---- 1-
-t-
tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of
-;v
0.8 t:. ,/. ,.... maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at the
...... ~ - - ~ .c:: - 1-
0.6 ;,
I/I,'
/
1- ::: ..... . ,. ... I- I-' 2~ ---. - 1 -_,_
-
..... --
-- --
-1-
point of probable crack in ifo1lion.
0.4
:::
~
~ ......
~
.....,.. 1...-
- In the case or complete-joinl-penclration groove welds, the
0.2 ....... '-
-- - ·- _,_
.......'- ; ... i,:::
0.1
--- 0.20.3
I-.
0.4 o.s
.....
06
1--
-1- -1- - · I - _._._ ,_
0.7
maxim um allowable design stress range calculated by Eq .
A-3-1 applies only to welds with internal soundness
meeting the acceptance requirements of Section 6. 12.2 or
Upper Limit of Flexibility Constant Cp
6. 13.2 of AWS D I .l.
Figure A-2- 1. Lim iting flex ibility coefficient for the
primary systems. No evaluation of fatigue resistance is requi red if the live
load stress range is less than the threshold stress range,
3. 4 F TH· See Table A-3-1.
3.2
-, I
~
J
1-->-
I
- 1- / >- -- / - --- / 1- ......... J- , - - ;-.-
- 1- - ....
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number
3 .0
2.8 - l<I
I
, __ I
I
-- f
--- ,_ __ I
,' --- of cycles of application of live load is less than 20,000.
2.6 -
I
I J --- I
The cyclic load resis tance detennined by the provisions of
J
.,, I I
·- -- ......
(
24 I this Appendix is applicable to structures with suitable
- 1- ,
2.2 I/ ,, ) - I I I/ corrosion protection or subject onl y to mi ldl y corrosive
g
j
2. 0
1.8
II'
II'
J'
I
J
~
~
I ---' . n.
_ 'I
I
/
I
/
" /
I
.....
atmospheres, such as normal atmospheric conditions. ·
J J' I/ IJ'
The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of
~ 1.6 J' / )
this Appendix is applicable only 10 structures subject to
~ f" v I/ J' / temperatures not exceed ing 300° F ( l 50°C)
I/ I' / I;]
12
10
I/
l/ J c,
,, I'
The eng ineer-of-record s hall provide either complete details
0.8
,. Lr
/
v
I./
.,,
·- including weld sizes or shall specify the planned cycle life
.,, and the maximum range of moments, shears and reactions
... v
.,. /
0.6
04 ..... ·~... v
.....
....
_,,I'
1-
/
for the connections,
02
--- 0.1 0.2
'-'
0 .3 0.4 OS 0.6 0.7

A-3.2 Calculatioo of Maximum Stresses and Stress
Ranges
Upper Lim it of Fle xibility Constant Cs
Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis.
Stresses shall not be amplified by stress concentration
Figure A-2-2 . Limiting llexibilily coefficient for the
factors for geometrical discontinuities.
secondary systems
For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the
calculated stresses shall include lhe effects of prying action,
if any. fn the case of axial stress combined with bending,

the maximum stresses, of each kind, shall be those 3. For tension-loaded plate elements connected at their
determined for concurrent arrangements of the applied load. end by cruciform, T, or corner details with complete-
joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds or partial joint-
For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners penetralion (P.IP) groove welds, fillet welds, or
and welds shall be an-anged symmetrically about the axis of combinations of the preceding, transverse to the
the member, or the total stresses including those due to direction or stress, the design stress range on the cross
eccentricity shall be included in the calculation orthe stress section of the tension-loaded plate element at the;.: toe of
range. the weld shall be determined as follows;
For axially loaded angle members where the center of a. Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on
gravity of the connecting welds lies between the line of the the tension loaded plate element the design stress range,
center of gravity of the angle cross section and the center of F SR, shall he determined by Eq. A-3-3, for stress
the connected leg, the effects of eccentricity shall be category C which is equal to
ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to 0 333
14.4 X 10 11 ) ·
joint eccentricity, shall be included in the calculation of
stress range.
FsR =( N ~ 68.9 (A-3-3)
A-3.3 Design Stress Range b. Based upon crack initiation from the root of the weld
the design stress range, F SR, on the tension loaded
The range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the plate element using transverse PJP groove welds, with
design stress range computed as follows. or without reinforcing or contouring fillet welds, the
design stress range on the cross section at the toe of the
I. For stress categories A, B, B , C, D, E and E_ the weld shall be determined hy Eq. A-3-4, stress category
design stress range, F SR, shall be detennined by C' as follows:
Eq. A-3-1.
14.4 x 1011)0.333
Fsn -
-(ct x N
329)0.333
. ~ Frn (A-3-1)
FsR = RPJP ( N
(A-3-4)
where where
FsR design stress range, MPa R PJP is the reduction factor for reinforced or nunrcinforced
c,. constant from Table J\-3-1 for the category transverse P1p groove welds detennined as follows:
N number of stress range fluctuations in
design life
= number of stress range fluctuations per day
-(1.12 - 1. 01 (!;) + 1. 24 (~))
x 365 x years of design life
threshold fatigue stress range, maximum RPJP - t0.167 ~ 1. 0
p
stress range for indefinite design life from
Table A-3-1, MPa
If RPJP = 1. 0, use stress category C.
2. For stress category F, the design stress range, F SR,
shall be detem1ined by Eq. A-3-2. 2a :.: the length of the nonwcldcd root face in the
direction of the thickness of the tension-loaded
plate, mm
0 167 w
CI x 11 x 104 ) .
(A-3-2)
the leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if
FsR =( N ~ FTH any, in the direction of the thickness of the tension-
loaded plate, mm
tp thickness of tension loaded plate, mm
--
c. Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of For joints in which the material within the grip is not
trnnsvcrse fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension limited to steel or joints which are not tensioned to the
loaded plate clement the design stress range, requirements of Table 510.3.1, all axial load and moment
FSR, on the cross section at the toe of the welds shall applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall be
be detennined by Eq. A-3-5, stress category C as assumed to be carried exclusively by the bolts or rods.
follows:
For joints in which the material within the grip is limited to
steel and which are tensioned to the requirements of
14. 4 x 1011)0.333 Table 510.3.1, an analysis of the relative stiffoess of the
(A-3-5)
FsR = RFn ( N connected parts and bolts shall be permitted to be used to
detennine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts
where due to the total service live load and moment plus effects of
any prying action. Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts
RFJL is the reduction factor for joints using a pair of shall be assumed to be equal to the stress on the net tensile
transverse fillet welds only. area due to 20 percent of the absolute value of the service
load axial load and moment from dead, live and other loads.
Rni (
0.10 + 1. 24(w
tO.t67
Jt,,)) ~ 1. 0 A-3.5 Special Fabrication and Erection Requirements
p
Longitudinal backing bars are permitted to remain in place,
and if used, shall be continuous. ff splicing is necessary for
If R FIL = 1. 0 , use stress category C. long joints, the bar shall be joined with complete
penetration bull joints and the reinforcement ground prior to
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts assembly in the joint.
The range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the rn transverse joints subject to tension, backing bars, if used,
stress range computed as follows. shall be removed and the joint back gouged and welded.
]. For mechanically fastened connections loaded in shear, In transverse complete-joint-penetration T and comer joints,
the maximum range of stress in the connected material a reinforcing fillet weld, not less than 6 mm in size shall be
at service loads shall not exceed the design stress range added at re-entrant comers.
computed using Eq. A-3-1 where Cr and Frn arc
taken from Section 2 of Table A-3. 1. The s urface roughness ·of Oame cut edges subject to
significant cyclic tensile stress ranges shall not exceed
2. For high-strength bolts, common bolts, and threaded 25 µm, where ASMG B46.l is the reference standard.
anchor rods with cut, ground or rolled threads, the
maximum range of tensile stress on the net tensile area Reentrant corners al cuts, copes and weld access holes shall
from applied axial load and moment plus load due to form a radius of not less than 10 mm by predri!ling or
prying action shall not exceed the design stress range subpunching and reaming a hole, or by thermal cutting to
computed using Eq. A-3-1. form the radius of the cut. Jfthe radius portion is formed by
thermal cutting, the cut surface shall be ground to a bright
The factor Cf shall be taken as 3.9 X 108 (as for metal surface.
stress category E'). The threshold stress, FrH shall be
taken as 48 MPa (as for stress category D). The net For transverse bull joints in regions of high tensile stress,
tensile area is given by Eq. A-3-6. run-off tabs shall be used to provide for cascading the weld
termination outside the finished joint. End dams shall not be
used. Run-off tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
1C
At = 0. 9382P) 2 (A-3-6) finished flush with the edge of the mem her.
4 (db -
See Section 5 J 0.2.2b for requirements for end returns on
where certain fillet welds su~ject to cyclic service loading.
pitch, mm per thread
the nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), mm
threads per mm

CHAPTER 5 - StrL1ctural Steel 5-133
Table A-3.1 Fatigue Design Parameters.
Constant Threshold Potential Crack

Description Stress Category
c, Fm MPa Initiation Point
SECTION J - PLAIN MATERIAL AW AY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except non-coated weathering sled,
with rnlloo or cleaned surface. flame-cul edges with Away from all welds or
A 250 x 108 165
surface roughness value of 25 i•m or less, but without structural connections
reentrallt corners.
1.2 Nnn-coated weathering steel base melal with
rolled OT cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges with Away from all welds or
8 120 X 108 110
~urfacc roughness value of 25 µnt or less, but without structural connections
reentrant comers.
1.3 Member with drilled or reamed holes. Member
with reentrant corners al copes. cuts, block-outs or
Qther geometrical Al any external edge or
disconlinuities made to B 120 x 10a 110
at hole perimeter
requirements of Appendix 3.5, except weld access
holes.
1.4 Rolled crnss sections with weld access holes made Al reentrant comer of
to requirements of Section 510.1.6 and Appendix /\- weld access hole or at
3.5. Members with drilled or reamed holes containing c 44 x 108 69 any small hole (may
bolts for attachment of light bracing where there is a contain boll for minor
small longitudinal component of brace force. connections)
SECTION 2- CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap joints connected by
Through gross section
high-strength bolts in joints satisfying all requirements B 120 x 108 110
near hQle
for slip-critical connections.
2.2 Base melal at net stx:tion of high-strength bolted
joints, designed on the basis of bearing resistance, bul In net section
B 120 X lQR 110 originating at side of
fabricated and installed to all requirements for slip-
critical connections. hole
In net ~ection
2.3 Base metal at the net section of other mechanically
D 22 x 108 48 originating at side of
fastened joints except eye bars and pin plates
hole
2.4 Rase metal at net section of eyebar head or pin In net section
E 11 X 101l 31 originating at side of
plate.
hole
- •
Table A-3. l (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters
Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 1 - PLAIN MA TERlA L AWAY FROM ANY WE LDING
1.1 and 1.2

(
l.3
(a) ~ (b) ~ (c) ~
1.4
(a) ~
~
(b)
©(c)
SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHAN ICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1
. (c) [§]
2.2
(c> @J
2.3
(a) (b)
2.4
Association or Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

Table A-3.1 (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters

c, FTnMPa Initiation Point
SECTION 3 - WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONl!:NTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1 Base metal and weld metal In memhers wilhoul Prom surface or
attachments built-up of plates or shapes connected by internal
continuous longitudinal complcte-joint-pem:tratim1 b'TOOve B 120 x 108 110 discontinuities in weld
welds, hack gouged and welded from second side, or by away from end of
conlinuous fillet welds. weld
3.2 Base metal anti weld metal in members without
attachments built-up of plates Qr shapes, connected by
- from
internal
surface or
continuous longitudinal complete-joint-pem:lration groove B' 61 X 108 X3 discontinuities in

welds with backing bars not removed, or by continuous weld, including weld
partial-joint-penelralion groove welds. allaching backing bars
rrom the wdtl
3.3 Base metal and weld metal termination of longitudinal
D 22 x 108 48 termination into the
wd<ls al weld access holes in connecled built-up members. web or flange
rn connected material
3.4 Base mdal al ends of longitudinal intermittent fillet at slm'l and stop
E 11 x 1011 31
k1cations of any weld
weld segments.
denosit
3.5 Base metal at ends of partial length welded coverplates In flange at toe of end
narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends, weld or in flange at
with or without welds across the ends of covcrplates wider termination of
than the flange with welds across the ends. longitudinal weld or
Flange thickness ~ 20 mm E 11 X lOH 31 in edge of flange with
wide coverplates
Jilange thickness > 20 min £' 3.9 x 10t1 18
3.6 Base metal at entls of tlu: partial length welded In edge oftlangc at
coverplates wider than the flange without welds across the E' 3.9 x 10a 18 end of coverplate
ends. weld
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with lniLiating from end of
lnngiludinally welded end connections. Welds shall be on any weld termination
each side of the axis of the member to halance weld extending into tlie
stresses. base metal
t ~ 20mm E 11 x 108 31
t > 20mm E' 3.9 x 108 18
--

SECTION 3 - WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1
( (c) ~
(b)
3.2
(a)
-~
3.3
(a) ~ (b)~
3.4
(a)~ (b~ (c~
3.5
(
(a)
-~(b) (c)
~
3.6
(a) No w..tt
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS

~
4.1
(b)


c, FTH Ml'a Initiation Point
SECTION 5 - WELDED .JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1 Base metal an<l weld metal in adjacent to complete- From internal
joint-penetration groove welded splices in rolled or discontinuities in filler
B 120 x lOfl 110
welded cross sections with welds ground essentially metal or along tJ1e
parallel to the direction of stress. fusion boundary
5.2 Base metal and weld metal in or adjacent to complete·
joint-penetration groove welded splices with welds b'l'ound From internal
essentially parallel t<l the direction of stress at transitions discontinuities in filler
in thickness or width made on a slope no greater than 8 to metal or along fu~ion
20% boundary or at start of
transition when
Fy < 620 Mpa B 120 x lOfl 110
Fy ~ 620 MPa
Fy ~ 620 Mpa B' 61 X 10° 83
5.3 Base metal with r,y equal to or b'l'eater than 620 MPa
Prom internal
and weld metal m or adjacent to complett:-joint-
discontinuities in filler
penetration groove welded splices with welds ground
B 120 x 108 110 metal or discontinuities
essentially parallel t() the direction of stress at transitions
along the fusion
in width made on a radius of not less than 600mm with the
boundary
point of tangency at the end ()flhe ,?move weld.
5.4 Base mel!ll and weld metal in or adjacent to the toe of From .~urfact:
complete-joint-penetration T or comer joints or splices, discontinuity at toe of
with or without transitions in thickness having slopes no c 44 x 108 69 weld extending into
greater than 8 to 20%, when weld reinforcement is not base metal or along
removed. fusion boundary.
5.5 Rase metal and weld metal at transverse end Initiating from
connections of tension-loaded plate clements using partial- geometrical
joint- penetration bun or T or comer jointi;, with discontinuity at toe of
reinforcing or contouring filleti;, FSR shall he the smaller weld extending into
of the toe crack or root crack stress range. base metal or,
initiating at weld root
Crack initiating from weld toe: c 44 x 108 69 suhject to lension
Eqn. None extending up and then
Crack initiating from weld root: C'
A-3-4 provided out through weld
-

lllustrativi:: Typic:il Examples
SECTION 5 - WELDED JOI NTS TRANSV.ERS.E TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
(a) i ,~
(b)
5.2
')t l!:.90kll (620 MPti)

. ru
(d)
CII.B'
5.3
f v+ fl+
(b) (c)
Fy dO bl (820 MPe)
cat. 8'
5.4
{O
(b) (d)
Cito fOt potontlal etack
can
5.5
lnlUotlon due u, bending
,_IJ==F:-1·"-
~ (e)
A ssociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

Table A-3.l (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters

FrH MPa c, Initiation Point
SECTION 5 - WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (cont'd)
5.6 Base metal and filler metal al lrnnsverse end Initiating from
connections of tension-loaded plate elements using a pair geometrical
of fillet welds on opposite sides of the plate FSR shall he discontinuity at toe of
1he smaller of the toe crack or root crack stress range. weld extending into
base metal or,
Crack initialing from weld toe: c 44 x 108 69
initiating at weld root
Crack initiating from weld root: C" None subject to tension
Eqn. extending up and then
A-3-5 provided
out through weld
5.7 Base metal of tension-loaded plate clements and on From geomelrical
girders and rolled beam webs or flanges at toe of discontinuity at toe of
transverse fillet welds adjacent to welded transverse c 44 x 10 8 69
fillet extending into
stiffeners. hase metal
SECTION 6 - BASE MET AL AT WELDED TRANSVERS~ MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1 Base metal at details attached by complete-joint-
penetration groove welds su~jeet to longitudinal loading
only when the detail embodie~ a transition radius R with
the weld termination ground smooth.
R ~ 600 mm B 120 x 1011 110 Near point of tangency
of radius al edge of
600mm > R ~ 150 mm c 44 x 10a 69 memher
150mm > R ~50mm D 22 X 10° 48
50 mm> R E 11 X 106 31
--
Table A-3. l (cont) Fatigue Design Parameters

Illustrative rypicnl Exam1>les
SECTION 5 - WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DlRl!:CTION OF STRESS cont' d
5.6
5.7
(a) t llfflllltllrl91 - c
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS

6.J
(c)

Conslant Threshold Potential Crack

Ct FTH MPa Initiation Point
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (cont 'd)
6.2 Base metal at detail!; of equal thickness attached by
complete-jnint·penctration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without longiludinal loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with lhe
weld termination ground smooth:
When weld reinforcement is removed:
R ~ 600mm B 120x108 II O Near points of
tangency of radius or
600 mm > R :2: 1 SO mm c 44 x 108 69 in the weld or at fusion
150 nun > R ~ 50 nun D 22 x 1011 48 boundary or member
or attachment
50 mm> R r: 11 x 1011 31
When weld reinforcement is not removed:
R :2: 600 mm c 44 x 10t1 69 At toe of the weld
either along edge of
600 mm> R :2: 150 mm c 44 x 108 69 member or the
150mm> R :2:50mm D 22 x 108 48 attachment
50nun > R E 11 x 108 31

6.3 Base metal at details uf unequal thickness attached by
complete-joint- penetration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without longitudinal loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground sm()oth.
When weld reinforcement is removed:
At toe of weld along
R > 50mm D 22 X 108 48 edge ofthinner
R :5 50 mm E 11 x 108 31 material in weld
termination in small
radius
When weld reinforcement ii; not removed:
Any radius E 11 x 108 31 Al toe of weld along
edge ofthinner
material
-

Illustrative T >ical 13xmn >les
S ECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTTONS cont'd
6.2
(c)
~
(d)
{e)
6.3
(c)
(d)

Stress Threshold FTH Potential Crack

Description Constant Ct
MPa Category Initiation Point
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (cont'd
6.4 Base metal subject to longitudinal stress at transverse
members, with or without transverse stress, attached by
fillet or partial penetration groove welds parallel to
In weld termination
direction of stress when the detail embodies a transition
or from the toe of
radius, R, with the weld lermination ground smooth: the weld extending
into member
R > 50mm D 22 x 108 4X
R :5 50 mm E 11 x 108 31
SECTION 7-BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS1
7.1 Base metal subject to longitudinal loading at details
attached by fillet welds parallel or transverse to the
dire;x;tion of stress where the detail embodies no transition
radius and with detail length in direction of stress, a, and
attachment height normal to the surface oflhe member, b:
a< SO mm c 44 x 108 69
50 mm :5 a :5 12h D 22 x 108 48 In the member at the
end of the weld
or 100 mm
a> 12b or IOOmm E 11 x 108 31
when bis::; 25 mm
a > 12b or IOOmm E' 3.9 X lOR 18

when h is > 25 mm
7.2 Rase metal subject to longitudinal stress at details
attached by fillet or partial-joint-penetration groove welds,
with or withoul transverse lnad on detail, when the detail
embodies a transition, R, with weld termination ground ln weld termination
smooth:
. extending inlo
member
R >50mm D 22 X 108 48
R :5 50 mm E 11 X 108 31
t " Attachments" as used herein, is defined as any steel detail welded to a member which, by its mere presence and independent of its
loading, causes a discontinuitv in the stress flow in the member and thus reduces the fatigue resistance.
--
5· 144 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS cont' d

6.4
(c)
(a)
SECTION 7 - BAS.E METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS

7 .1
(d)
(b)
7.2
•

c, Frn MPa lniliation Point
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal at stud-type shear connectors auached by At toe of weld in base
fillet or electric stud welding. c 44 x 108 69 metal
8.2 Shear on throat of continuous or intermittent 150 x 10 10
longitudinal or transverse fillet welds. F 55 In throat of weld
(Eq. A-3-2)
8.3 Base metal al plug or slot welds. At end ofwel<l in base

£ 11 x 108 31
metal
&.4 Shear on plug or slot wel<ls. 150 x 1010

F
(Eq. A-3-2)
SS At faying surface
8.5 Not fully tightened high-strength holts, common bolts,

threaded anchor rods and hanger rods with cut, ground or At the root of the
rolled threads. Stress range on tensile stress area due to E' 3.9 x 108 48 threads extending into
live load plus nrving action when aonlicable. the tensile slress area.
-

SECTION 8 ~ MISCELLANEOUS
8.1
8.2
8.3
~
(a)
(b)
8.4
(a)
8.5
(d)
Crack Sl19e
-
I
II
Cl·IAPTU{ 5 ·- Slluctur;il SlHol 5-14 7
,,:
APPENDIX A-4 S - nominal snow load

T ~ nominal forces and deformations due lo the
STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE design-basis fire defined in Section A-4.2.1
CONDITIONS
A lateral notional load, Ni= 0. 002Yi, as delinc<l n
A-4.l General Provisions Appendix J\-7.2, where Ni = notional lateral load applied
at framing level i and Yi = gravity load from combination
See Definitions. J\-4-1 acting on framing level i, shall be applied in
combination with the loads stipulated in Eq. A-4-1. Unles s
A-4. t. t Performance Ob,jective
otherwise stipulated by the authority having jurisdiction, D
'
Land S shall be the nominal loads specified in ASCE 7.
Structural components, members and building frame
systems shall be designed so as to maintain their load-
A-4.2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions by
bcaring function during the design-hasis fire and to satisfy
Analysis
other performance requirements specified for the building
occupancy. II
It is permitted to design structural members, componcn ts
and huilding frames for elevated temperatures in accordance
Deformation criteria shall he applied where the means of
with the requirements of this section.
providing structural fire resistance, or the design criteria for I
fire barriers., requires consideration of the deformation or A-4.2.1 Design-Basis Fire

the load-carrying stmcture.
A design-basis lire shall be identified to describe th c

Within the compartment or lire origin, forces and
heating conditions for the structure. These heati11g
deformations from the design-basis fire shall not caus5,: a
conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities an d
hrcach of horizontal or vertical compartmentation.
compartment characteristics present in the assumed fi re
area. The fuel load density based on the occupancy of th c
A-4.l.2 Design by Engineering Analysis
space shall be considered when determining the total fu el
load. Heating conditions shall be specified either in terms of
The analysis methods in Section A-4.2 are permitted to be
a heat flux or temperature or the upper gas layer created b y
used to document the anticipated performance of steel
the lire. The variation of the heating conditions with tim e
framing when subjected to design-basis fire scenarios.
Methods in Section A-4.2 provide evidence of compliance
shall he determined for the duration or
the fire.
with performance objectives established in Section A-4. l. l.

When the analysis me!l1ods in Section A-4.2 are used to
demonstrate an cqui valency as an alternative material or .
The analysis methods in Section A-4.2 are permitted to be
method as permitted by a building code, the design-bas is
used to demonstrate an equivalency for an alternative
fire shall be dctcnnincd in accordance with ASTM El 19.
material or method, as permitted hy the huilding code.
Table A-4.2.1 Properties of Steel at Elevated Temperatun:s
A-4.1.3 Design by Qualification Testing
Steel
The qualification testing methods in Section A-4.3 are Temperature ke = E, .fE
1 ky = Fym/Fy y
"C
permitted to be used to document the Jirc resistance of steel
framing subject to the standardized fire testing protocols
20 *
..* •
93 ).{)()
required by huilding codes. 204 0.90 ..
)[6
A-4.1.4 Load Combinations and Required Strength
0.78 "' *
399 0.70 1.00 1.00
427 0.67 0.94 0.94
The required strength of the structure and its elements shall 538 0.49 0.66 0.66
be determined from the following gravity load combination: 649 0.22 0.35 ().)5
760 0.11 0.16 0.16
[O. 9 or 1.2]D + T + 0. SL+ 0.2S (A-4-1) 871 0.07 1).1)7 0,07
982 0.05 0.04 0.04
where 1091 0.02 0.02 0.02
1204 0.00 0.00 0.00
D nominal dead load
* Use ambient ro erties.
L nominal occupancy live load
-
5 14(\ CHAP fER 5 St1udural Steel
A-4.2.1.1 J,ocali1,cd Fire A-4.2.2 Temperatures In Structural Systems

under Fire Conditions
Where the hcut release rate from the lire is insullicient lO
cuuse flashover, a localized fire exposure shall be ussumcd. Temperatures within structural members, components and
In such cases, the ruel composition, arrangement or the fuel frames due to the heating conditions posed by the <lesign-
array and floor area occupied by the fuel shall be used to basis tire shall be determined by a heat transfer analysis.
determine the radiant heat flux from the name and smoke
plume to the strncture. Table A-4.2.2 Properties of Concrete at Elevated
1 emperaturcs
A-4.2.J .2 Post-Flashover Compartment Fires Concrete k., == f ~m/ f ~ E."cu(%)
Tcmtlcrlllurc E,111/Ec
Where the heal release rate from lhe lire is suflicient to
oc NWC LWC LWC
20 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
cause nashovcr. a post-flashover compartment lire shall be
assumed. The determination of the temperature versus time 93 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.34
profile resulting from the lire shall include fuel load, 204 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.46
ventilation characteristics to the space (natural and 288 0.86 1.00 0.61 0.58
mechanical), compartment dimensions and thcm1al 3l(i 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.62
characteristics of the compartment boundary. 427 0.71 0.85 0 .38 0.80
538 0.54 0.7 J 0.20 1.06
A-4.2.1.3 Fire Duration 649 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.32
760 0.21 0.45 0.073 J.43
The fire duration in a pa11icular area shall be determined by 871 0.10 0.3 1 0.055 1.49
considering the total combustible mass, in other words, fuel 982 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50
load available io the space. In the case of either a localized 1093 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.50
fire or a post-llashover compartment lire, the time duration 1204 0.00 0.00 0.00
shall be determined as the total combustible mass divided
by the mass loss rate, except where determined from For lightweight concrete (LWC), values of Ecu shall be
Section A-4.2.1 .2. obtained from tests.
A-4.2.1.4 Exterior Fires A-4.2.3 Material Strengths at Elevated

Temperatures
The exposure of exterior s tructure to flames projecting from
windows or other wall openings as a resul t of a post- Material properties at elevated temperatures shall be
llashover compartment fire shall be considered along with determined from test data. Io the absence of such data, _it is
the radiation from lhe interior lire through the opening. The penniued to use the material properties stipulated in this
shape and length of' !he flam e projection shall be used along section. These relationships do not apply for steels with a
with the distance between the flame and the exterior yield strength in excess of 448MPa or concretes with
steelwork to determine the heat flux to the steel. The specified compression strength in excess of 55 MP a.
method identified in Section A-4.2.1.2 shall be used for
<lescribing the characteristics of the interior compartment A-4.2.3.1 Thermal Elongation
fire.
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For
A-4.2.1.5 Active fire Protection Systems calculations at temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of
thermal expansion shall be 1. 4 X 10-5 / 0 C.
The effects of active fire protection systems shall be
considered when describing the design-basis fire.
Thermal expansion of normal weight" concrete: For
Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in 11on- calculations at temperatures ab(>Ve 65°C, the coefficient of
sprinklcred spaces, the resulting smoke temperature ~hall be thcnnal expansion shall be 1. 8 x 10-s /°C.
determined from calculation.
Thermal expansion of lightweight concrete: For calculations
at temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of thennal
expansion shall be 7. 9 x 10- 6 / °C.
-
A-4.2.3.2 Mechanical Properties at Elevated A-4.2.4.3 Methods of Analysis

Temperatures
A-4.2.4.3a Advanced Methods of Analysis
The deterioration in strength and stiffness of structural
members, components, and systems shall be taken into The methods of analysis in this scclion arc permitted for the
account in the structural analysis or lhe frame. design of all steel building structures for fire conditions.
The design-basis fire exposure shall be that determined in
The values Fym, Fum, Em, f~m, Ecm, and £cu at elevated Section A-4.2.1. The analysis shall include both a thermal
lcmpcraturc to be used in structural analysis, expressed as response and the mechanical response to the design-basis
the ratio with respect to lhc property at ambient, assumed lo fire.
be 20"C, shall be defined as in Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
It is pennilted to interpolate between these values. The thermal response shall produce a temperature field in
each structural element as a result of the design-basis fire
A-4.2.4 Structural Design Requirements and shall incorporate temperature dependent thermal
properties of the structural elements and !ire-resistive
A-4.2.4.1 General Structural Integrity materials as per Section A-4.2.2.
The structural frame shall be capable or providing adequate The mechanical response resulls in forces and deflections in
slrcngth and deformation capacity to withstand, as a system, the structural system subjected to the thermal response
the structural actions developed during the fire within the calculated from the design-basis fire. The mechanical
prescribed limits of deformation. The structural system shall response shall take into account explicitly the deterioration
be designed to sustain local damage with the structural in strength and slifliless with increasing temperature, the
system as a whole remaining stable. effects of thermal expansions and large deformalions.
Boundary conditions and connection fixity must represent
Continuous load paths shall be provided lo translcr all the proposed strnctural design. Material properties shall be
forces from the exposed region to the final point or defined as per Section A-4.2.3.
resistance. The foundation shall be designed to resist the
forces and to accommodate the deformations developed The resulting analysis shall consider all relevant limit slates,
during the design-basis fire. such as excessive deflections, connection fractures, and
overall or local huckling.
A-4.2.4.2 Strength Requirements and Deformation
Limits A-4.2.4.Jb Simple Methods of Annlysis
Conformance of the structural system to these requirements The methods of ~nalysis in this section are applicable for
shall be demonstrated by constructing a mathematical the evaluation of the performance or individual members at
model of the structure based on principles or structural elevated temperatures during exposure to fire.
mechanics and evaluating this model for the internal forces
and defonnations in the members of lhe structure developed The support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and
by the temperatures from the design-basis fire. boundary conditions) applicable at normal temperatures
may be assumed to remain unchanged throughout the Lire
Individual members shall be provided with adequale exposure.
strength to resist the shears, axial forces and moments
determined in accordance with these provisions. I. Tension members
Connections shall develop the strength or the conneclcd It is permitted to model the thermal response of a
members or the forces indicaled above. Where the means of tension element using a one-dimensional heat lransrer
providing fire resistance requires lhc consideration of equation with heat input as directed by the design-hasis
deformation criteria, the deformation of the structural lire defined in Seclion A-4.2.1.
system, or members thereot: under lhe design-basis fire The design strength of a tension member shall be
shall not exceed the prescribed limits. detennined using the provisions of Section 504, with
steel properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3 and
assuming a uniform temperature over the cross section
using the temperature equal to the maximum steel
temperature.
National Struclural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
-
5-150 CHArTER 5 - Structural SIP-al
2. Compression members A-4.3 Design by Qualification Testing
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a A-4.3. 1 Qualification Standards

compression elemen1 using a one-dimensional heat
lransler equation with heat input as directed by the Str·uctural members nncl components in s11;:el buildings shall
design-basis fire defined in Section A-4.2.1. be qualified for the rating period in conformance with
ASTM El 19. It shall be pcrmillcd to demonstrate
The design strength uf a compression member shall be compliance with these requirements usrng the procedures
determined using the provisions of Section 505 with specified for steel constructio11 in Section 5 of' ASCE/SFPF
steel prope,ties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3. 29.
3. Flexural members t\-4.3.2 Restrained Construction
lt is pennitted to model the thermal response of flexural For fluor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
elements using a one-dimensional heat transfer buildings, a restrained condition exists when the
equation to calculate bottom flange temperature and to surrounding or supporting strncturc is capable of resisling
assume that this bottom flange temperature is constant actions caused by thermal expansion lhroughout the rnngc
over the depth of the member. of anticipated elevated temperatures.
The design slrength or a flexural member shall be Steel beams, girders and frames supporting concrete slabs
determined using the provisions of Section 506 with that are welded or bolted to integral framing members (in
steel properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3. other words, culumns, girders) shall he considered
restrained construction.
4. Composite floor members
A-4.3.3 Unrestrained Construction
It is permitted to model the thennal response of flexural
elements supporting a concrete slab using a one- Steel beams, girders and frames thal do not support n
dimcnsional heat transfer equation tu calculate bottom concrete slab shall be considered unrestrained unless the
flange temperature. That temperature shall be taken as members arc bolted or welded to surrounding construction
constant between the bottom flange and mid-deplh of that has been specifically designed and detailed to resist
the web and shall decrease linearly by no more than 25 actions caused by thermal expansion.
percent from the mid-depth of the web to the lop flange
ofthc beam. A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the
end span of multiple spans shall be considered unrestrained
The design strength or a composite t1exural member unless the wall has been designed and detailed to resist
shall be detennined using the provisions of Section effects nfthcrmal expansion.
509, with reduced yield stresses in the steel consistent
with the temperature variation described under thermal
response.
A-4.2.4.4 Oesign Strength
The design strength shall be dete,mincd as in Section

502.3.3. The nominal strength, Rn, shall be calculated using
material properties, as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3, at the
temperature developed by the design-basis fire.
Association of Structura l Enginee rs of the Philippine~. tnc. (ASEP)

CHAPTl::R 5 Stn1ctu1;:il Steel ti-151
APPENDIX A-5 A·S.2.4 Base Metal Notch Toughness
EVALUATION OF EXISTING Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as
STRUCTURES defined in Sect ion 501.3.1 d arc critical to the performance
or the structure, the Charpy V-Notch toughness shall he
A-5.J General Provisions determined in accordance with the provisi~ns of Section
501.3.1 d. If the notch toughness so determined does nut
These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of meet the provisions or Section 501.3.1 d, the cngineer-uf-
an existing steel structure is specified for (a) verification of record shall determine ifrcmcdial actions are required.
a specific set of design loadings or (b) determination of the
available strength ofa load resisting member or system. The A-5.2.5 Weld Metal
evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis
(Section A-5.3), by load tests (Section A-5.4), or by a Where structural performance is dependent on ex,stmg
combination of structural analysis and load tests, as welded connections, representative samples of weld metal
specified in the contract documents. Where load tests arc shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and mechanical tests
used, the engineer-of-record shall first analyze the strncture, shall be made lo charnctc1ize the weld metal. A
prepare a testing plan, and develop a wrillen procedure to determination shall be made of the magnitude and
prevent excessive permanent deformation or catastrophic consequences of imperfections. If the requirements of A WS
collapse during testing. DI. I are not met, the engineer-of-record shall determine if
remedial actions arc required.
A-5.2 Material Properties
A-5.2.6 Bolts and Rivets
A-5.2.l Determinat.ion of Required Tests
Representative samples of bolts shall be inspected to
The Engineer-of-Record shall determine the specific t.ests detennine markings and classifications. Where bolts cannot
that are required from Section A-5.2.2 through A-5.2.6 and be properly identified visually, representative samples shall
specify the locations where they are required. Where be removed and tested to detem1ine tensile strength in
available, the use of applicable project records shall be accordance with ASTM 1"606 or ASTM F606M and the bolt
permitted to reduce or eliminate the need for testing. classified accordingly. Alternatively, the assumption that
the holts arc ASTM A307 shall be permitted. Rivets shall he
A-5.2.2 Tensile Properties assumed to be ASTM A502, Grade I, unless a higher grade
is established through documentation or testing.
Tensile properties of members shall be considered in
evaluation by structural ru1alysis (Section A-5.3) or load A-5.3 Evaluation by Structural Analysis
tests (Section A-5.4). Such properties shall include the yield
stress, tensile strengtl1 and percent elongation. Where A-5.3.1 Dimensional Data
available, certified mill test reports or certified reports of
tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in All dimensions used in the evaluation, such as spans,
accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as column heights, member spacings, bracing loc.:alions, cross
applicable, shall be permitted for this purpose. Otherwise, section dimensions, thicknesses and connection details,
tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively, when
ASTMA370 from samples cul from components or the available, it shall be permitted to determine such
structure. dimensions from applicable project design or shop drawings
with Held verification of critical values.
A-5.2.3 Chemical Composition
A-5.3.2 Sta·ength F,valuation
Where welding is anticipated for repair or modification of
existing structures, the chemical composition of the steel Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be
shall be detem1ined for use in preparing a welding determined by structural analysis applicahle to the type of
procedure specification (WPS). Where available, results structure evaluated. The load effects shall he determined for
from certified mill test reports or certified repo1ts of tests the loads and factored load combinations stipulated in
made hy the fahricator or a testing laboratory in accordance Section 502.2. The available strength of members and
with ASTM procedures shall be permitted for this purpose. connections shall be determined from applicable provisions
Otherwise, analyses shall be conducted in accordance with of Sections 502 through 511 of this Specification.
ASTM A751 from the samples used to determine tensile
properties, or from samples taken from the same locations.
National Structural Code of the F'hilippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015
\
A-5.3.3 Serviceability ~valuation A-5.4.2 Serviceability Evaluation
Where required, the deformations at service loads shall be When load tests arc prescribed, the structure shall be loaded
calculated and reported. incrementally to the service load level. Doformolions shall
be monitored for n period of one hour. The s1ructure shall
A·5.4 Evaluation by Load Tests then be unloaded and the deformation recorded.
A-5.4.1 Determination of J,oad Rating by Testing A-5.5 Evaluation Report
To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof Afier the evaluation of an ex1st111g structure has been
structure by testing, a test load shall be applied co111plc1ed, the engineer-of-record sholl prepare a report
incrementally in accordance with the engineer of record's documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate
plan. The structure shall be visually inspected for signs of whcLher the evaluation was performed by structural
distress or imminent failure at each load level. Appropriate analysis, by load testing or by a combination or structural
measures shall be taken if these or any other unusual anulysis and load testing. Purlhcrmore, when testing is
conditions arc encountered. perfom1ed, the report shall include the loads and load
combination used and the load-deformation anu time-
The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as the dcformalion relntionships observed. All relevant
maximum applied test load plus the in-situ dead load. The information obtained from design drawings, mill test reports
live load rating of a floor stmcturc shall be determined by and auxiliary material testing shall also be reported. Finally,
setting the tested strength equal to 1. 2D + 1. 6L, where the report shall indicate whether the structure, including all
D is the nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load members and connections, is adequate to withstand the load
rating for the structure. effects.
The nominal live load rating of the floor slructure shall not
exceed that which can be calculated using applicable
provisions of the specification. For roof structures, Lr , S,
or R as defined in the Symbols, shall be substituted for L.
More severe load combinations shall be used where
required by this code. Periodic unloading shall be
considered once the service load level is attained and after
the onset of inelastic strnclural behavior is identified to
document the amount of pennanent set and the magnitude
of the inelastic deformations. Deformations of the structure,
such as member deHectioos, sball be monitored at critical
locations during the test, referenced to the initial position
before loading. It shall be demonstrated, while maintaining
maximum test load for one hour that the defonnation of the
structure does not increase by more than IO percent above
that at the beginning of the holding period. lt is permissible
to n..-peat the sequence if necessary to demonstrate
compliance.
Deformations of the structure shall also he recorded 24

hours after the test loading is removed to determine the
amount of permanent set. Because the amount of acceptable
permanent defonnation depends on the specific structure, no
limit is specified for permanent defonnation at maximum
loading. Where it is not feasible to load test the entire
structure, a segment or zone of not less than one complete
bay, representative of the most critical conditions, shall be
selected.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel G-153
APPENDIX A-6 Fur design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)

STABILITY BRACING FOR
p = required axial compressive strength using LRFLJ
COLUMNS AND BEAMS r load combinations, N
A-6.1 General Provisions For design according to Section 5023.4 (J\SD)
Bracing is assumed to he perpendicular to the members to
be braced; for indim:<l or diagonal hracing, the brace p ~ required axial compressive strength using ASO load
strength (force or moment) and stiffness (force per unit ,. combinations, N
displacement or moment per unit rotation) shall be adjusted
for the angle of inclinaLion. The evaluation of Lhc stiffness A-6.3.2 Nodal Bracing
furnished hy a hrace shall include its member and geometric
properties, as well as the effocLs of connections and The required brace strength is
anchoring details.
(A-6-3)
Two general types of bracing systems are considered,
relative and nodal. A relative brace controls the movement The required brace stiffness is
or the brace point with respect to adjaccnL braced points. A
nodal brace controls the movement at the braced point
1(8Pr) = fl (8Pr)
wiLhout direct interaction with adjacent braced points. The
available strength and stiffness of the bracing shall equal or Pbr = cf> Lb (LRFD) Phr Lb (ASD)
exceed the required limits unless analysis indicates that
smaller values are justified by analysis. (A-6-4)
A second-order analysis that includes an initial out-of- <f, = 0. 75(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD)

straightness of the member to obtain brace strength and
sti11ness is pennitted in lieu of the requirements or Lhis
appendix. For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
A-6.2 Column Bracing Pr :.= required axial compressive strength using LRFD
load combinations, N
It is permitted to brace an individual column at end and
intermediate points along its length by either relative or For design accordfog Lo Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
nodal bracing systems. It is assumed that nodal braces are
equally spaced along the column. Pr ~ required axial compressive strenglh using ASD load
combinations, N
A-6.2.1 Relative Bracing
A-6.3 Beams Bracing
The required brace strength is
At points of support for beams, girders and trnsscs, resLrainL
against rotation about their longitudinal axis shall be
(A-6-1)
provided. Beam bracing shall prevent the relative
displacement of the top and bottom flanges, in other words,
The required brace stiJlitess is twist of the section. Lateral stability or beams shall be
provided by lateral bracing, torsional bracing or a
Pbr = cf>1 (2Pr)
Lb (LRFD)
2P,.) (ASD)
Pbr = fl (,:;; combination of the two. In members subjected to double
curvature bending, the inflection point shall not be
considered a brace poinl.
(A-6-2)
where
<f, = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD)

Lb = distance between braces, mm
\
5-154 CHAPTE:R 5 - Structural Steel
A-6.3.1 Lateral Brncing where
Bracing shall be auached near the compression t1angc, ¢ = 0. 75(LRFD) fl = 2. OO(ASD)

except for a cantilevered member, where an end brace s hall
be attached near the top (tension) flange.. Lateral bracing For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
shall be attached to both flanges at the brace point nearest
the inflection point for beams subjected to douhlc curvature required flexural strength using LRf;D load
bending along the length to be braced. M = . .
r combmatwns, N-mm
A-6.3.1.1.1 Relative Bracing For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
The required brace strength is M _ required llexural strength using ASD load
r - combinations, N-mm
(A-6-5)
When Lb is less than Lq, the maximum unhraced length for
The required brace stiffness is
Mr, then Lb in
Pbr Eq. A-6· 8 shall he permitted to he taken equal to Lq.

= fl (4Z;l:d) (ASD )
A-6.3.2 Torsional Bracini:
(A-6-6)
where IL is permitted to provide either nodal or continuous
torsional bracing a lo ng the beam length. ll is permillcd to
</> = 0. 75 (LRFD) fl = 2. OO (ASD) attach the bracing at any cross-sectional location and it need
not be attac hed near the compression nangc. The
connection between a torsional brace and the beam shall be
h0 distance between flange centroids, mm
able to support Lhe required moment given below.
Cd 1.0 for bending in single curvature; 2.0 for double
curvature; Cd = 2. 0 only applies to the brace A-6.3.2.2.1 .Nodal Bncing
closest to the inflection point
Lb = laterally unbraced length, mm The required bracing moment is
For design according lo Section 502.3.3 (LRrD) 0. 024M1.L 1•

M,. = - - - - - (A-6-9)
Mr = required flexural strength using LRFlJ load nCblb
combinations, N-mm
The required cross-frame or diaphragm bracing stiffness is
Pr
Mr = required flexural strength using ASD load Pro= (1--r-
p ) (A-6-10)
combinations, N -mm P sec
where
A-6.3.1.1.2 Nodal Bracing
The required brace strength is Pr = - 1(2.4LM~)2 (LRFD) Pr= fi ( 2.4LM~)

2 (ASD)
</> nElyCb nEly Cb
(A-6-7) (A-6-11)
The required brace stiffness is _ 3. 3£ (1.

P sec - - h-
Sh12 t!, +12b~)
0 t5
(A-6- 12)
0
10MrCd)
Pbr == fl ( . Lhlio (ASD) where
(A-6-8) ¢ = 0. 75(LRFD) n = 3. OO (ASD)

CHAPTER 5 Sl,udu,al Steel 5-155
User Note: fi =
1. 52/</> = 3. 00 in Eq. A-6-11 because A-6.4 Bcaam-Column Bracing
the moment lcrm is squared.
For bracing of beam-columns, the required strength an<l
span length, mm sliffocss for the axial force shall be detem1ine as specified
number of nodal braced points within the span in Section 6.2, and the required strength and stiffness for the
modulus of elasticity of steel= 200,000 MPa llexure shall be dctcrmined as specified in Section 6.3. The
out-of-plane moment of inertia, mm
4 values so determine shall be combines as follows:
modification factor <lclinc<l in Section 506
a. When relative lateral bracing is used, the required
beam web thickness, mm
strength shall he taken as the sum of the values
web stiffener thickness, mm determined using Eq. A-6-1 and A-6-5, and the
sliffem:r width for one-sided stiffeners (use twice required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the
the individual stiffener width for pairs ur values determined using Eqs. A-6-2 and A-6-6.
stiffeners), mm
Pr brace stiffness excluding web distortion, b. When nodal lateral bracing is used, the required
N-mm/radian strength shall be taken as the sum of the values
Psec web distortional stilfocss, induding the cffect of detenuined using Eqs. A-6-3 and A-6-7, and the
web transverse stiffeners, if any, N-mm/radian required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the
values determined using Eqs A-6-4 and A-6-8. In E4s.
l;ur design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) A-6-4 and A-6-8, Lb for beam-columns shall be taken
as the actual unbraced length; the provisions in Section
Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD load 6.2.2 and 6.3.1 b that Lb need not be taken less than the
combinations, N-mm
maximum pennitted etlective length based upon Pr
and Mr shall nut be applied.
c. When torsional bracing is provided for flexure in
Mr required flexural strength using ASD load
combination with relative or nodal bracing for axial
combinations, N-mm
force, the required strength an<l stiffness shall be
combined or distributed in a manner that is consistent
If Psec < Pr,
Eq. A-6-10 is negative, which indicates that with the resistance provided by the element(s) of the
torsional beam bracing will not be effective due to actual bracing details.
inadequate web distortional stiffness.
When required, the web stHlener shall extend the full depth
of the braced member an<l shall be attached to the flangc if
the torsional brace is also attached to the flange.
Alternatively, it shall be permissible to stop the stiffener
short by a distance equal to 4tw from any beam flange that
is not directly attached tu the torsional brace. When Lb is
less than Lq, then Lh in Eq. A-6-9 shall be pennitted to be
taken equal to Lq-
A-6.3.1.2.2 Continuous Torsional Bracing
For continuous bracing, use Eqs. A-6-9, A-6-10 and A-6-13

with L/n taken as 1.0 and Lb taken as Lq; the bracing
moment and stiffness arc given per unit span length. The
distortional stiffness for an unstiffoned web is
3. 3Etfv
(A-6-13)
Psec = 12ho

where
APPENDIXA-7
required axial compressive strength under
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD LRFD or ASD load combinations, N
A-7.1 General Requirements n:2El/L2, evaluated in the plane of bending
and a= 1. O(LRFD) « = 1. 6(ASD)
Members shall satisfy the provisions of Section 508.1 with
the nominal column strengths, P n, determined using 2. A notional load, Ni = 0. 002Yi, applied
K = 1. 0. The required strengths for members, independently in two orthogonal directions, shall be
connections and other structural elements shall be applied as a lateral load in all load combinati?ns. This
determined using a second order elastic analysis with tlte load shall be in addition to other lateral loads, 1f any,
constraints presented in Section A-7.3.
where
All component and connection deformations that contribute
to the lateral displacement of the structure shall be notional lateral load applied at level i , N
considered in the analysis. gravity load from the LRFD load combination
or 1.6 times the ASD load combination
A-7.2 Notional Loads applied at level i, N
Notional loads shall be applied to the lateral framing system The notional load coefficient of 0.002 is based on an
to account for the effects of geometric imperfections, assumed initial story out-of-plumbncss ratio of 1/500.
inelasticity, or both. Notional loads are lateral loads that are Where a smaller assumed out-of-plumbness is justified,
applied at each framing level and specified in tenns of the the notional load coefficient may be adjusted
gravity loads applied at that level. The gravity load used to proportionally.
determine the notional load shall be equal to or greater than
the gravity load associated with the load combination being For frames where the ratio of second-order dritl to first-
evaluated. Notional loads shall be applied in the direction order drifl is equal to or less than 1.5, it is permissible
that adds to the destabilizing effects under the specified load
lo apply the notional load, Ni, as a minimum lateral
combination. load for the gravity-only load combinations and not in
combination with other lateral loads.
A-7.3 Design-Analysis Constraints
For all cases, it is permissible to use the assumed out-
I. The second-order analysis shall consider both P - o of-plumbness geometry in the analysis or the structure
and P - L1 effects. It is permitted to perfonn the in lieu or applying a notional load or a minimum lateral
analysis using any general second-order analysis load as defined above.
method, or by the amplified first-order analysis method
of Section 503.2, provided that the B 1 and B 2 factors User Note: The unreduced stiffnesses (El and AE) are
arc based on the reduced stiffnesses defined in used in the above calculations. The ratio of second-
Eqs. A-7-2 and A-7-3. Analyses shall be conducted order drift to first-order drift can be represented by Bz,
according to the design and loading requirements as calculated using Eq. 503.2-3. Alternatively, the ratio
specified in either Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) or Secti~n can be calculated by comparing the results of a second-
502.3.4 (ASD). For ASD, the second-order analysis order analysis to the results of a first-order analysis,
shall be carried out under 1.6 times the ASD load where the analyses are conducted either under LRFD
combinations and the results shall be divided by 1.6 to load combinations directly or under ASD load
obtain the required strengths. combinations with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD
gravity loads.
Methods of analysis that neglect the effects or P - li
on the lateral displacement of the structure arc
pennitted where the axial loads in all members whose
flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the
lateral stability of the structure satisfy the following
limit:
«Pr< 0.15Pel (A-7-1)

3. A reduced flexural stiffness, E /*, PART2A

(A-7-2) SElSMIC PROVISION FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
shall be used for all members whose flexural stiffness is
considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the SYMBOLS
structure,
Cross-sectional area of a horizontal boundary
where
element (HBE), mm2
Cross-sectional area of a vertical boundary
I moment of inertia about the axis of bending, element (VBE), mm2
4
mm Flange area, mm2
'tb I.OforaPr/Py~0.5 Gross area, nun2
4[aPr/Py(1- «Pr/Py)]for Area of the yielding segment of steel core,
«Pr/Py~ 0.5 mm2
Pr required axial compressive streni,,th under Minimum area of tie reinforcement, mm2
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N Horizontal area of the steel plate in
Py AFy, member yield strength, N composite shear wall, mm2
Area oflink stiffener, mm2
and a= 1.0(LRFD) a= 1.6(ASD) Link web area, mm2
Ratio of required strength to available
strength
In lieu of using Tb < 1. 0 where aP rl Py ~ O! 5, Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness
Tb = 1. 0 may be used for all members, provided that and curvature
an additive notion!ll load of O.OOlft is added to the Deflcdion amplification
notional load required in (2). Parameter used for determining the
approximate fundamental period
4. A reduced axial stiffness, EA*, D Dead load due to the weight of the structural
elements and permanent features on the
EA*= 0.8EA (A-7-3) building
D Outside diameter of round HSS, mm
shall be used for members whose axial stiffness is E Earthquake load
considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the E Effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-
structure, where A is the cross-sectional member area. induced loads
E Modulus of elasticity of steel, 200,000 MPa
El Flexural elastic stiffness of the chord
members of the special segment, N-mm2
Specified minimum yield stress of the type
of steel to be used, MPa. As used in the
Specification, "yield stress" denotes either
the minimum specified yield point (for
those steels that have a yield point) or the
specified yield strength (for those steels that
do not have a yield point)
F y of a beam, MPa
Fy of a column, MPa
Specified minimum yield stress of the ties,
MP a
Fysc Specified minimum yield stress of the steel
core, or actual yield stress of the steel core as
determined from a coupon test, MPa
Specified minimum tensile strength, MPa

5-158 CHAPTER 5 - Strur.tural Steel
H Height of story, which may be taken as the Required axial strength of a column using
distance between the centerline of lloor ASD load combinations, N
framing at each of the levels above and Required compressive strength using ASD
below. or the distance between the top of load combinations, N
floor slabs at each of the levels above und Required strength of lateral brace at ends of
below, mm the link, N
4
Moment of inertia, mm Available axial strength of a column, N
Moment of inertia of a vertical boundary Nominal axial strength of a column, N
element (VRE) taken perpendicular to the Nominal compressive strength of the
4
direction oflhe web plate line, mm composite column calculated in accordance
K - Effective length factor for prismalic member with the Specification, N
L Live load due to occupancy and moveable Nominal axial compressive strength of
equipment, kN diagonal members of the special segment, N
Span length of the truss, mm Nominal axial tensile strength of diagonal
Distance between VBE centerlines, mm members of the special segment, N
= Leni,>th between points which are either Nominal axial strength of a composite
braced against lateral displacement of column at ,ero eccentricity, N
compression flange or braced against twist of Required compressive strength, N
the cross section, mm Required axial strength of a column or a link
= Link length, mm using LRFD load combinations, N
Clear distance between VBE llanges, mm Required axial slrength of a composite
column, N
= Distance between plastic hinge locations, mm
P1,c Required compressive strength using LRFD
Limiting laterally unbraced length for full toad combinations, N
plastic Hexural strength, unifonn moment Nominal axial yield strength of a member,
case, mm
equal to F y AR, N
- Limiting latetally unbraced length for pluslic
analysis, mm Axial yield strength of steel core, N
Length of the special segment, mm Maximum unbalanced vertical load cflect
Required flexural strength, using ASD load applied to a beam by the braces, N
combinations, N-mm Axial forces and moments generated by at
Additional moment due to shear least l .25 limes the expected nominal shear
amplification from the location or the plastic strength of the I ink
hinge to the column centerline based on ASD Seismic-response modification coefficient
load combinations, N-mm Nominal strength, N
--= Nominal flexural strength, N-mm Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the
Nominal flexural strength or the chord specified minimum tensile strength Fu, as
member of the special segment, N-mm related to over strength in material yield
Nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm stress
· · Nominal plastic flexural strength modified by Ry
axial load, N-mm Required strength
= Nominal plastic flexural strength of the Panel zone nominal shear slrength
beam, N-mm Ratio of the expected yield stress to the
Expected plastic moment, N-mm
M p,exp specified minimum yield stress, F y
Mpc Nominal plastic Llexural strength of the Required shear strength using ASD load
column, N-mm combinations, N
Expected flexural strength, N-mm Nominal shear strength of a member, N
Additional moment due to shear Expected vertical shear strength of the
amplification from the location of the plastic special segment, N
hinge lo the column centerline based on Nominal shear strength of the steel plate in a
LRFD load combinations, N-mm composite plate shear wall, N
Required tlexural strength, using LRFD load Nominal shear strength of an active link, N
combinations, N-mm
Nominal shear strength of an active link
Mu,exp Expected required flexural strength, N-mm
modified hy the axial load magnitude, N

::.;tructur;JI S\C!(·)I '~ I '.iD
Rcquired shear strength using Liff]) load t Thickness of di.;mcm, mm

eomhinations, N Thickness of colunm web or doubler plaLc,
t
Y,,nn Dislancc from top of steel beam to top or mm
c.;0111.:rcLc slah or encaserm:nl. mm Thickness ol'bcam llange, mm
YPNA - Maximum distance from the maximum
Thickness of column flange, mm
concrete compression iibi.;r lo the plastic
neutral axis, mm Thickness or flange, mm
Plastic section modulus of a member. mm1 Minim um wall thickness of concrete-fi Iled
- Plastic section modulus of the beam, mm1 rcctangular HSS, nun
PlasLic sci.;tion modulus of the column, mm) Thidrness of panel zone including doubler
Plastic section modulus x-axis, mm 3 plates, mm
Thickness of web, mm
Minimum plastic section modulus at the
reduced beam section, mm) - Width of panel zone between column
llangc!;, mm
b Width of compression element as <letim:d in
- Parameter used for determining the
Specification Scclion502.4. I, mm x
Width of column flange, mm approxirnalc fundamental period (I-R2)
Minimum plastic section modulus at the
- Plange width, mm reduced heam section,mrn1
Width of the concrete cross-section minus the Moment at beam and column centerline
width of the structural shape measured determined by projecting the sum of the
perpendicular to the direction of shear, mm nominal column plastic moment strength,
Nominal fastener diameter, mm reduced by the axial stress P ucl Aa,
O
from the
Overall beam depth, mm top and bouom or lhe heam moment
Overall column depth, mm connection
Overall panel zone depth bclwccn continuity · Moment al thi.; intersection of the beam and
plates, mm column centerlines detennincd by prorecting
e EBF link length, mm the beam maximum developed moments
from the column face. Maximum developed
f'c Specified comprc.:ssive strength of concrete,
moments shall he determined from test
MPa
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet re.suits
or i.;orner radius for rolled shapes; and for p Compression strength adjustment factor
built-up si.;i.;lions, the distance between LI Design story drift
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear Deformation quantity usi.;d to i.;ontrol loading
Llb
distance bet ween flanges when welds arc of test spei.;imen (total hrace end rotation for
usi.;d; for tees, the overall depth; and for the suhassemblage test specimen; total brace
rectangular HSS, the dear distance between axial Ddornmtion for the brace lest
the flanges less the inside corner radius on specimen)
each side, mm Value of dcformalion quantity.
h Distance bet ween horizontal houndary
c01Tesponding to the design story drill
ekmcnt centerlines, mm
Cross-sectional dimension of the confined Value of deformation quantity, Llb, at first
core region in composite columns measured signilicant yield or test specimen
center-to-center of the transverse Safety factor
reinforcement, nun Safety factor for flexure= 1.67
ho Distance between flange centroids, mm Safoty factor for compression - l .67
l Unhraccd length between stitches or built-up Horizontal seismic overstrength factor
bracing members, mm Safety factor for shear strength of panel zone
l Unbraced length of compression or bracing of beam-lo-column connections
member, mm a Angle of diagonal members with the
Governing radius of gyration, mm horizontal
Radius of gyration about y-axis, mm a ~ Anglc or web yielding in radians, as
measured relative lo the vertical
Spacing of transverse reinforcement
measured along thi.; longitudinal axis of the Deformation quantity used to control loading
oftest specimen
su·ucturnl i.;omposite member, mm
t Thickness of connected part, mm Value of deformation quantity /j at first
significant yield of test specimen
National Structural Cod.; uf Ille f'l1ilippines Volume I 7111 Edition, 2015
"""\
p' Ratio of required axial force Pu to required PART2B

shear strength Vu of a link
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact
SECTION 514
clemenl STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING
({) Resistance factor PROVISIONS
'Pb Resistance factor for flexure
'Pc Resistance factor for compression 514.1 Scope
'Pv Resistance factor for shear strength of panel
zone or beam-to-column connections The Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
Resistance factor for sheAr hereinafter referred to as these Provisions, shall govern the
'Pv
Resistance factor for the shear strcnglh of a design, fabrication and erection of structural steel members
'Pv
composite column and connections in the seismic load resisting systems
8 - lnterstory drill angle, radians (SLRS) and splices in columns that are not part or the
Link rotation angle SLRS, in buildings and other ~tructurcs, where other
Ytotal
Strain hardening adjustment factor structures are defined as those structures designed,
w fabricated and erected in a manner similar to buildings, with
building-I ike vc1tical and lateral load-resisting-clements.
These Provisions shall apply when the seismic response
modification coefficient, R, (as specified in the NSCP code)
is taken greater than 3, regardless or the seismic design
calegory. When the seismic response modification
coefficient, R, is taken as 3 or less, the struclure is not
required to satisfy these Provisions, unless specifically
required by Lhe NSCP code.
These Provisions shall be applied in conjunction with

Chapter 5 Steel and Metal, hcrcinaller referred to as the
Specification. Members and connections of the SLRS shall
satisfy the requirements or the NSCP code, the
Specification, and these Provisions.
Wherever these provisions refer to the NSCP code and Lhere

is no local building code, the loads, load combinations,
system limitations and general design requirements shall be
those in SE[/ASCE 7.
User Note: The NSCP code generally restricts buildings

designed with an R factor or 3 or less to seismic design
categories (SDC) A, B or C; however, some systems such as
cantilever columns that have R factors less than 3 are
permitted in SDC D and above and these Provisions apply.
See the NSCP code for specific system limitations.
Part 2A includes a Glossary that is specifically applicable to

this Part, and Section B-1, B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5, B-6 and B-7


REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN
CODES, AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS
The documents referenced in these Provisions shall include The required strength and other seismic prov1s1ons for
those listed in Specification Section 501.2 with the seismic Zones 2 and 4 including limitations on height and
following additions and modifications: irregularity shall be as specified in the NSCP code.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) The design story drift shall be determined as required in the
NSCPcode.
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ANSJIAISC
360-05 Prequalified Connections for Special and
Intermediate Steel Momeni Frames for Seismic
Applications, ANSI/A/SC 358-05
American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
Recommended Practice for the Training and Testing of

Nondestructive Testing Personnel, ASNT SNT TC-la-2001
Standard for the Qualification and Certification of

Nondestructive Testing Personnel, ANSVASNT CP-189-
2001
American Welding Society (AWS)
Standard Methods for Detennination of the Diffusible

Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Fenitic
Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding, A WS A4.3-
93R
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds-U.S.

Customary, ANSI/ A WS 84.0-98
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds-Metric

Only, ANSVAWS 84.0M:2000
Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors, AWS

05.1:2003
Describing Oxygen-Cut Surfaces, A WS C4. l
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel

Moment-Frame Buildings, FEMA 350, July 2000
DAO 07:2008 Mandatory PNS for Equal Leg Angle Beams
DAO 05:2002 Mandatory PNS for Steel Bars
...
5-162 CHM' TER 5 - Structural Steel

LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS
AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP
DRAWINGS, AND ERECTION
517.1 Loads and Load Combinations
DRAWINGS
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by
the NSCP code. Where amplified seismic loads are requtrcd 518.J Structural Design Drawings and Specifications
by these Provisions, the horizontal portion vf the earthquake
load E (as defined in the NSCP code) shall be multiplied by Structural design drawings and specifications shall show the
work to he performed, and include items required by the
the overstrcngth factor, fi 0 , prescribed hy the NSCP code.
Specification and the following, as applicable:
517.2 Nominal Strength
l. Designation of the 1>eismic load resisting system
(SLRS)
The nominal strength of systems, members and connections
shall comply with the Specification, except as modified
2. Designation of the memhcrs and connections that are
throughout these Section.
pan of lhe SLRS
3. Configuration of the connections
4. Connection material specifications and si1,es
5. Locations of demand critical welds
6. Lowest anticipated service temperature (LAST) of the

steel structure, if the structure is not enclosed and
maintained at a temperature of 10 "C or higher
7. Locations and dimensions of protected zones
8. Locations where gusset plates arc to be detailed to

accommodate inelastic rotation
9. Welding requirements as specified in Section B-6,

Section 8-6.2.
User Note: These Provisions should be cousistent with the

Code of Standard Practice, as designated in Section 50 1.4 of
the Specification. There may be specific connections and
applications for which details are not specifically addressed
by the Provisions. If such a condition exists, the contract
documents should include appropriate requirement's for
those applications. TI1esc may include nondestructive
testing requirements beyond those in Section B-2-, bolt hole
fabrication requirements beyond those permitted by the
Specification, bolting requirements other than those in the
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts, or welding requirements other than those in
Section B-6.
Associntion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 5 Structurnl Steel 5-163
518.2 Shop Drawings

SECTIONS19
Shop drawings shall include items required by the MATERIALS
Specification and the following, as applicable:
I. Designation of the members an<l connections that arc 5 t 9. I Material Specifications
pa11 of the SLRS
Strnctural steel used in the seismic load res1stmg system
2. Connection material specifications
(SLRS) shall meet the requirements of Specification Section
3. Locations of demand critical shop welds 501.3.1.1, except as modified in these Provisions. The
specified minimum yield stress of steel lo be used for
4. Locations and dimensions of protected zones members in which inelastic behavior is expected shall not
5. Gusset plates drawn to scale when they are detailed to exceed 345 MPa for systems defined in Sections 522, 523,
accommodate inelastic rotation 525, 526, 528, 529, and 530 nor 380 MPa for systcms
defined in Sections 524 and 527, unless the suitability of the
6. Welding requirements as specified in Section B-6, material is determined by lcsling or other rational criteria.
Section B-2.2. This limitation docs not apply to columns for which the
only expected inelastic behavior is yielding at the column
User Note: There may be specific connections and base.
applications for which details are not specifically addressed
by the section. If such a condition exists, the shop drawings The structural steel used in the SLRS described in Sections
should include appropriate requirements for that 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527, 528, 529 and 530 shall meet
application. These may include bolt hole fabrication one of the following ASTM Specifications: A36/ A36M,
requirements beyond those permitted by the Specification, A53/A53M, i\500 (Grade R or C), A501, i\529/A529M,
bolting requirements other than those in the RCSC A572/i\572M [Grade 42 (290 Mpa), 50 (345 Mpa) or 55
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325· or (380 Mpa)J, /\588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grndc 50 (345
A490 Bolts, and welding requirements other than those in Mpa), 60 (415 Mpa) or 65 {450 Mpa)), A992/A992M, or
Section B-6. See Section 513 of the Specification for AlOI I HSLAS Grade 55 (380 Mpa). The structural steel
additional provisions on shop drawings. used for column base plates shall meet one of the preceding
ASTM specifications or ASTM A283/A283M Grade D.
518.3 Erection Drawings
Other steels and non-steel materials in buckling-restrained
Erection drawings shall include items required hy the braced frames are permitted to be used subject to the
Specification and the following, as applicable: requirements of Section 529 and Section B-5.
l. Designation of the members and connections that are
part of the SLRS User Note: This section only covers material properties for
structural steel used in the SLRS and included in the
2. Field connection material specifications and sizes definition of structural steel given in Section 2.1 of the
3. Locations of demand critical field welds A[SC Code of Standard Practice. Other steel, such as cables
for permanent bracing is not included.
4. Locations and dimensions of protected zones
5. Locations of pretensioned bolts 519.2 Material Properties for Determination of
Required Strength of Members and
6. Field welding requirements as specified in Section B-6, Connections
Section B-2.3
When required in these Provisions, the required strength of
User Note: There may be specific connections and an element (a member or a connection) shall be detennined
applications for which details are not specifically addressed from the expected yield stress, RyFy, of an adjoining
by the Provisions. If such a condition exists, the erection
member, where Fy is the specified minimum yield stress of
drawings should include appropriate requirements for that
application. These may include bolting requirements other the grade of steel to be used in tl1c adjoining members an<l
than those in the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Ry is the ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, and welding minimum yield stress, F y, of that material.
requirements other than those in Section B-6. See Section
Ml of the Specification for additional provisions on
erection drawings.

Table 519-1 Ry and R, Values for 519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requirements
Different Member Types
For structural steel in the SLRS, in addition to the
Application Rv R1 requirements of Specification Section 501.3.1 c, hot rolled
Hot-rolled slructural shapes and bars: shapes wilh flanges 38 mm thick and thicker shall have a
• ASTM A36/36M 1.5 1.2 minimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at
1.3 I.I 70 °F (21 °C), tested in lhe altematc core location as
• ASTM A572/572M Grade 290
l.l I. I described in ASTM A6 Supplementary Requirement S30.
• ASTM A572/572M Grade 345 Plates 50 mm thick and lhicker shall have a minimum
or 380
ASTM A913/A913M Grade Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at 70 °F
345, 415, 450 (21 °C), measured at any location pcrmiued by ASTM
ASTM A588/ A588M A673, where the plate is used in the following:
ASTM A992/A992M, AlOI I
HSLAS Grade 380 I. Members built-up from plate
1.2 1.2
• ASTM A529 Grade 345
I. I 1.2 2. Connection plates where inelastic !itrain under seismic
• ASTM /\529 Grade 380
Hollow structural sections (HSS) loading is expecled
• ASTM A500 (Grade B or C), 1.4 1.3
ASTM A501 3. At the steel core of buckling-restrained braces
Pipe
1.2 User Note: Examples of connection plates where inelastic
• ASTM A53/A53M 1.6
behavior is expected include, but are not limited to, gusset
Plates
1.2 plates intended to function as a hinge and allow out-of-
• ASTM A36/A36M 1.3
plane buckling of braces, some bolted flange plates for
I.I
• ASTM A572/A572M Grade 345 1.2
moment connections, some end plates for bolted moment
ASTM A588/A588M
connections, and some column base plates designed as a pin
The available strength of the clement, q>Rn for LRFD and

Rn/fl for ASO, shall be equal to or greater than the
required strength, where Rn is the nominal strength of the
connection. The expected tensile strength, RtFu, and the
expected yield stress, RyFy, are pennitted to be used in lieu
of Fu and F y, respectively, in determining the nominal
strength, Rn, of rupture and yielding limit states within the
same member for which the required strength is determined.
User Note: In several instances a member, or a connection

limit state within lhat member, is required to be designed
for forces corresponding to the expected strength of the
member itself. Such cases include brace fracture limit states
(block shear rupture and net section fracture in the brace in
SCBF), the design of the beam outside of the link in EBF,
etc. In such cases it is pcnniued to use the expected material
strength in the detennination of available member strength.
For connecting elements and for other members, specified
material strength should be used.
The values of Ry and Rt for various steels are given in

Table 519-1. Other values of Ry and Rt shall be permitted
if the values are detennined by testing of specimens similar
in size and source conducted in accordance with the
requirements for the specified grade of steel.

CHAl'l l::1~ 5
Structur<1r Steel 5-165
SECTION520 User Note: A member force, such as a brae" ,, · fl

. d h . .,. ..x,a1 orcc,
must be res1ste at t e connecti011 enlir:ely by f
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND . . (' h .h . Or,e type o
Jomt m ot er words, en er entirely by bol1s or e 1· b
FASTENERS . . I. I b I n ire1y y
we Ids ) . A connection m w uc 1 o ts resisL a fQroc U,at is
normal to the force resisted by welds, s uch as a mo :ne t
1
520.1 Scope connection in which welded flanges trans mit flexure ~nd ~
holted web transmits shear, is not c0nsidored Lo be sharing
Connections, joints and fasteners that are part of the seismic the force.
load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with
Spct:ification Section 510, and with the additional 520.3 Welded Joints
requirements of this Section.
Welding shall be performed in accordance with Section B-
The design of connections for a member that is a part of the 6. Welding shall be performed in accordance with a welding
SLRS shall be configured such that a ductile limit slate in procedure specification (WPS) as required in AWS DI. I
either the connection or the member controls the design. and approved by the engineer-of-record. The WPS variables
shall be within the parameters established by the filler metal
User Note: An example of a ductile limit state is tension manufacturer.
yielding. It is unacceptable to design cormcctions for
members that are part of the SLRS such that the strength 520.3.1 General Requi,·emcnts
limit state is governed by non-ductile or brittle limit states,
such as fracture, in either the connection or the member. All welds used in mernbers and connections in the SLRS
shall be made with a Jilter metal that can produce welds that
520.2 Bolted Joints have a minimum Charpy V-Nutch toughness of 20 ft-lb
(27 J) at O °F (minus 18 °C), as determined by the
All bolts shall be pretensioned high stamgth bolts and shall appropriate AWS AS classification test method or
meet the requirements for slip-critical faying surfaces in manufacturer certification. This requirement for notch
accordance with Specification Section 510.1.8 with a Class toughness shall also apply in other cases as required in these
A surface. Bolts shall be installed in standard holes or in Provisions.
short-slotted holes perpendicular to the applied load. for
hrace diagonals, oversized holes shall be permitted when 520.3.2 Demand Critical Welds
the connection is designed as a slip-critical joint, and the
oversized hole is in one ply only. Alternative hole types arc Where welds are dcsignated as demand critical, they shall
permitted if designated in the Pre4ualified Connections for he made with a tiller metal capahlc of proyiding a minimum
Special and Intermediate Moment Frames for Seismic Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of 27 .I at 29 °C as
Applications (ANSI/AISC 358), or if otherwise determined dete1mined by the approp1iatc A WS classification test
in a connection prequalification in accordance with Section method or manufacturer cc11ification, and 54 .I at 21 °C as
B-1, or if determined in a program of qualification testing in determined by Section B-7 or other approved method, when
accordance with Section 8-4 or B-5. The available shear the steel frame is nonnally enclosed and maintained at a
strength of bolted joints using standard holes shall be temperature of 10 °C or higher. For structures with service
calculated as that for bearing-type joints in m:cordance with temperatures lower than IO °C, the qualification
Specification Sections 510.1.3 and 510. J. J0, ex.ccpt that the temperature for Section B-7 shall be 11 °C above the lowest
nominal bearing strength at bolt holes shall not be taken anticipated service temperature, or at a lower temperature.
greater than 2. 4dtFu.
SMJ\ W electrodes classified in A WS /\5. I as E7018 or
Exception: F,7018-X, SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.5 as
E7018-C3L or E8018-C3, and GMAW solid electrodes are
The faying su,faces for end plate moment connections are exempted from production lot testing when the CVN
permitted to be coated with coatings not tested for slip toughness of the electrode equals or exceeds 27 J at a
resistance or with coatings with a slip coefficient less than temperature not exceeding 29 °C as determined hy A WS
that ({/'a Class A faying surface. classification test methods. The manufacturer's certificate
of compliance shall be considered sufficient evidence of
Rohs and welds shall not be designed to share force in a meeting this requirement.
joint or the same force component in a connection.
User Note: Welds designated demand critical are
specifically identified in the Provisions in the section
applicable to the designated SLRS.

5-166 CHAPTER 5 - Structurnl Steel
There may be specific welds similar to those designated as 3. Welded, bolted, screwed or shot-in attachments for
demand critical by these Provisions that have not been perimeter edge angles, exterior facades, partitions, duct
specifically identified as demand critical by these work, piping or other construction shall not be placed
Provisions that warrant such designation Consideration of within the protected zone.
the demand critical designation for such welds should be
based upon the inelastic strain demand and the consequence Exception:
of failure. Complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds
Welded shear studs and other connections shalt be
between columns and base plates should be considered
permi1ted when designated in the PreqMlifled Co1111ectio11s
demand critical similar to column splice welds, when CJP
for Special and !nlermediate Moment Frames for Seismic
groove welds used for column splices in the designated
Applications (ANSI/AJSC 358), or as otherwise determined
SLRS have been designaLcd demand critical.
in accordance with a co1111eclio11 prequalification in
accordance with Section B- 1, or as determined in a
For special and intermediate moment frames, typical
program of qualification testing in accordance with Section
examples of demand critical welds include the following
B-4.
CJP groove welds:
Outside the protected zone, calculations based upon the
J. Welds of beam flanges to columns
expected moment shall be made 10 demonstrate the
adequacy of the member net section when connectors that
2. Welds of single plat.e shear connections to columns penetrate the member are used.
3. Welds of beam webs to columns 520.S Continnity Plntes and Stiffeners
4. Column splice welds, including column bases Comers of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in the
webs of rolled shapes s1iall be clipped as described below.
For ordinary moment frames, typical examples include CJP Along the web, the clip shall be detailed so that the clip
groove welds in items 1, 2, and 3 above. extends a distance of at least 38 mm beyond the published k
detail dimension for the rolled shape. Along the flange, the
For Eccentrically Brace<l Frames (EBF), typical examples clip shall be detailed so that the clip docs not exceed a
of demand critical welds include CJP groove welds between distance or 12 mm beyond tbe published k I detail
link beams and columns. Other welds, such as those j oining dimension. The clip shall be detailed to facilitate suitable
the web plate 10 Oange plates in bui lt-up EBF link beams, weld terminations for both the flange weld and the web
and column splice welds when made using CJP groove weld. If a curved clip is used, it shall have a minimum
welds, should be considered for designation as demand radius of J 2 mm.
critical welds.
At the end of the weld adjacent to the column web/flange
520.3.3 Recommended Joint juncture, weld tabs for continuity plates shall not be used,
except when permitted by the engineer-of-record. Unless
The use of Type l welded joints is not allowed in seismic specified by the engineer-of-record that they be removed,
Zone 4. Type .11 joints are recommended as in the use of weld tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.
Proprietary Welded Joint.
520.4 Protected Zone
Where a protected zone is designated by these Provisions or

ANST/AlSC 358 , it shall comply with the following:
1. Within the protected zone, disconlinuities created by

fabricatfon or erection operations, such as tack welds,
erection aids; air-arc gouging and thermal cutting shall
be repaired as required by the engineer-of-record.
2. Welded shear studs and decking attachments that

penetrate the beam flange shall not be placed on beam
tlanges within the protected zone. Decking arc spot
welds as required to secure decking shall be pennittcd.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASl:P)
r
SECTION521
MEMBERS
521.1 Scope
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall

comply with the Specification and Section 521. For
columns that are not part of the SLRS, see Section 521.1.2.
521.2 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
521.2. t Compact
When required hy these Provisions, members or the SLRS

shall have flanges continuously connected to the web or
wehs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression
clements shall not exceed the limiting width-thickness
ratios, Ap, from Specilication Tahlc 502.4.1.
521.2.2 SeismicaHy Com1)act
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS

must have flanges continuously connected to the web. or
webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression
elements shall not exceed the limiting width-thickness
ratios, Aps, from Provisions Table 521 - I .
Table 521-l Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements

Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios
Width - Thickness
Description of Element ip..
Ratio
Seismically Compact
Flexure in tlangcs of rolled or built-up [-shaped sections .
ral,lcl,r el,rgUhl
b/t o.3ojE/Fy
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled or built-up I-
shaped sections rbl,fhl b/t 0.3oJE/fy
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled or built-up I-
c"' shaped sections [d) b/t 0.3Bjt:JFy
0
e Uniform compression in flanges of channels, outstanding
Li3 legs of pairs of angles in continuous contact, an<l hraces b/t 0.30 JE/Fy
-0
0 fc]Jg]
c:
Uniform compression in tlanges ofH-pile sections
~,:: b/t 0.45~
"'
:) Flat Bars [f1 b/t 2.5
Uniform compression in legs of single angles, legs of
dnuble angle members with separators, or tlanges of tees b/t 0.30JE/Fy
[21
Unifonn compression in stems of tees rgl
b/t 0.30 jE/Fy
Webs in flexural compression in beams in SMF, Section
522,unless noted otherwise h/tw 2.45JE/Fy
-0
0 ~ "'
c Q) Webs in flexural compression nr combined flexun: and
~ e axial compression [a]J cl,[ g],[h),[i),Li] for Ca ~ 0.125 [kJ
·- "'
(/) iii h/tw
3.uF, (1 - 1.51Ca)
,.
For Ca S 0.125 [k]
1.14 E /Fy (2.33Ca) ~ 1.49 E/Fy

Round HSS in axial and/or flexura l compre:.sion [cJ,[g]
D/t
Rectangular HSS in axial and/or flexural compression
[c],[g] b/t or h/tw 0.64
Webs of II-Pile sectionti
0.94
[nj Required for beams in SM f· Sccl1011 .522 and Sl'S\V Section 530
[h) Required for columns in SMF Section 522, unless Lhc ratios from F.q.522-3 are greater than 2.0 where it is permitted to use;.,, in specification Table 502.4. l
[c] Req11ircJ for braces and columns in SCBF S<.-ction 526 and brace, in OCBF Sec1ion 527
(d) It is pcrmiltcd to use A,, in Specification Table 502.4. l for culumns in STMF S,:ction .522 and col11n111s in EBF S<.'Cti,1n S28
[c] Required for link in EDI' Se~tion 528 excepr 11 i$ pcnnitted to use A,, in Table 502.4. \ of the spec1fic•ti<Jn for flanges of links of length 1. 6M,,/Vp
are delincd in Section 528
lfJ Diagonal web members within the special segment of STMF Section 525
[&) Chord members ofSTMF Section 525
[hj Required for beaJDS and colul!VlS in BRBf Sect100 529
[i] RequircJ fn, columns in SPSW Section 530
UJ For columnti in STMf Section 522 columns in SMF, if the ratios frorn E11. 522-3 ore greater than 2.0; tor columns in EB F Section 528; or EBF wcb.q of links
of length 1. 6 M,,;v ,,or less, it i~ rermilted to u8c the following for lp
For C0 $ 0.125,..l,, = 3. 76.J El Fy (1 - 2. 7SCa)
fo< C., > 0.125,,t,, = 3. 76.JE! F.,(2. 33 - Ca)~ 1.49JE/F.,
[k]tbr LRFD,C4 = (P,./ ,PbPy)
torASD,C0 = (nbPa/P 1 )
where
Pa ~ required compressive slreoglh (ASD), N
p u ~ required comprcs~ive Slrn!gth (I .RFD), N
.bn ,
p Y = axial yield sm:ngth, N
=0.90
- 1.61
b
CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5·16Sl
521.3 Column Strength 2. The available streni,rth for each flange splice shall be at
least equal to 0. SRyFyA,(LRFD) or
When P 11 /</>Pn (LRFD) > 0.4 or O.cPa/Pn (ASD) > (0. 5/1. 5)RyFyA1(ASD), as appropriate, where
0. 4, as appropriate, without consideration of the amplified
seismic load, RyFy is the expected yield stress of the column
material and Ar is the flange area of the smaller
where column connected.
</>c = 0. 90(LRFD) fie = 1. 67(ASD) l3cvclcd transitions arc not required when changes in
thickness and width of flanges and webs occur in column
Pu required axial strength of a column using ASO Load
combinations, N splices where PJr groove welded joints arc used.
P11 nominal axial strength of a column, N
Pu required axial strength of a column using LKFO Column web splices shall be either bolted or welded, or
load combinations, N welded lo one column and bolted to the other. In moment
frames using bolted splices, plates or channels shall be used
The following requirement shall be met: on both sides oflhc column web.
I. . The required axial compressive and tensile strcni,rth, The centerline of column splices made with fillet welds or
considered in the absence of any applied moment, shall partial-joint-penecration groove welds shall be located 1.2 m
be determined using the load combinations stipulated or more away from the beam-to-column connections. When
by the NSCP code including the amplified seismic load the column clear height between beam-to-column
connections is less than 2.4 m, splices shall be at half the
2. The required axial compressive and tensile strength clear height.
shall not exceed either of the following:
a. The maximum load transferred to the column 521.4.2 Columns Not Part of the Seismic Loud
considering Resisting System
1. 1Ry (LRFD)or(l. 1/1. S)Ry(ASD),as
Splices of columns that are not a part of the SLRS shall
appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the
satisfy the following:
connecting beam or brace elements of the building.
I. Splices shall be located J.2 m or more away from the
b. The limit as dete1mined from the resistance or the
beam-lo-column connections. When t11c column clear
foundation to overturning uplift.
height betweeii beam-to-column connections is less
than 2.4 m, splices shall be al half the clear height.
521.4 Column Splices
2. The required shear strength of column splices with
521.4.1 General
respect to both orthogonal axes of the column shall be
The required strength of column splices in the seismic load
Mpc/H(LRFD) or Mpc/1. SH(ASD), as
resisting system (SLRS) shall equal the required strength of appropriate, where Mpc is the lesser nominal plastic
the columns, including thal delerrnined from Sections 521.3, flexural strength or the column sections for the
522.9, 523.9, 524.9, 526.5 and 529.5.2. direction in question, and H is the storey height.
In addition, welded column splices that are subject to a 521.5 Column Bases
calculated nel tensile load effect determined using the load
combinations stipulated hy the NSCP code including the The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in
amplified seismic load, shall satisfy both of the following accordance with Sections 521.5.1, 521.5.2, and 521.5.3. The
requirements: available strength of anchor rods shall be determined m
accordance with Specification Section 510.3.
1. The available strength of partial-joint-penetration (P JP)
groove welded joints, if used, shall be at least equal to The available strength of concrete clements at the column
200 percent of the required strength. base, including anchor rod embedmcnl and reinforcing
sleet, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Appendix D.

User Note: When using concrete reinforcing steel as part of 521.S.2 Required Flexural Strength
the anchorage cmbedment design, it is important to
understand the anchor failure modes and provide The required flexural strength of column bases, including
reinforcement that is developed on both sides of the their auachment to the foundation, shall be the summation
expected failure surface. See AC! 318, Appendix D, Figure of the required strengths of the steel elements that arc
RD.4.1 and Section D.4.2.1, including Commentary for connected to the column base as follows:
additional infonnation.
I. For diagonal bracing, the required flexural strcni:,rth
Exception: shall be at least equal to the required strength of
bradng connections for the SLRS.
The special requirements in AC! 318, Appendix D, for
"regions of modemte or high seismic risk, or for structures 2. For columns, the required flexural strength shall be at
assigned to intermediate or high seismic pe,:fvrmance or least equal lo the lesser of the following:
design categories " need not be applied.
a. 1. 1RyFyZ(LRFD)or
521.5.1 Required Axial Strength (1.1/1. 5)RyFyZ(ASD) as appropriate, of the
column or
The required axial strength of column hascs, including their
attachment to the foundation, shall be the summation of the
b. the moment calculated using tl1e load combinations
vertical components of the required strcnglhs of the steel
of the NSCP code, including the amplified seismic
clements that are connected to the column base.
load.
521.5.2 Required Shear Strength
521.6 ff-Piles
The required shear strength of column hases, including their
521.6.1 Design of H-Piles
attachments to the foundations, shall be the summation of
the horizontal component of the required strengths of the
Design of H-piles shall comply with the provisions of the
steel elements that are connected to the column base as
Specification regarding design of members subjected to
follows:
combined loads. H-piles shall meet the requircmcnlS of
Section 521.2.2.
I. For diagonal bracing, the horizontal component shall be
determined from the required strength of bracing
connections for the seismic load resisting system
521.6.2 Battered H-Pilcs
(SLRS).
If battered (sloped) and vertical piles arc used in a pile
group, the ve1tical piles shall he designed to support the
2. For columns, the horizontal component shall he at least
comhincd effects of the dead and live loads without the
equal to the lesser of the following:
participation of the battered piles.
a. 2RyFyZx/H (LRFD) or (2/1.5) RyFyZxf 521.6.3 Tension in H-Pile

H (ASD), as appropriate of the column.
Where Tension in each pile shall be transferred to the pile cap by
mechanical means such as shear keys, reinforcing hars or
H height of storey, which may be taken studs welded to the embedded portion of the pile. Directly
as the distance between the centerline below the bottom of the pile cap, each pile shall be free of
of floor framing at each of the levels attachments and welds for a length at least equal to the
above and hclow, or the distance depth of the pile cross section.
between the top of floor slabs at each
of the levels above and below, mm
b. The shear calculated using the load combinations

of the NSCP code, including the amplified seismic
load.

CHAPTER !'> Struclurc:il StP-P-1 o 1i'1
SECTION 522 522.2.2 Conformance Ocmonstration
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) Heam-to-column conm.:t:lions used in the SLRS shall satisfy
the requirements of Section 522.2 by one of the following:
522.1 Scope
I. Use of SMI' conncclions designed in accordance with
Special moment frames (SMF) arc expected to withstand ANSI/AlSC 358.
signifo:anl inclasLic deformations when subjecled lo the
forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. 2. Use of a connection prequalified for SMF m
SMF shall satisfy the requirements in this Seclion. at:cordancc with Section H-1.
522.2 Beam-to-Column Connections 3. Provision of qualifying cyclic test results in accordance

with Section B-4. Resulls or al least two cyclic
522.2.1 Requirements connection Lesls shall be provided and arc permitted Lo
be based on one of the following:
Beam-to-column connections used in the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the following three a. Tests reported in the research literature or
requircmenls: documented tests performed for other projects that
represent the projecl condilions, wilhin !he limits
I. The connection shall be capable of sustaining an specified in Section 8-4.
interstory drift angle of at least 0.04 radians.
h. Tests that are conducted specifically for t11e projccl
2. The measured flexural resislanu: of the connection, and are rcprcscmaLivc of projccl member sizes,
determined at the column face, shall equal at least material strengths, connection configuralions, and
0.80 Mp of the connected beam aL an inu.:rstory &ill matching connection processes, within the limits
angle of0.04 radians. specified in Section B-4.
3. The required shear strength of the connection shall be 522.2.3 Welds

determined using the following quantily for the
ear1hquake load effect E: Unless otherwise designated by ANSl/AlSC 358, or
otherwise determined in a connection prequalitication in
(522-1) accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program
or 4ualilication h;sting in accordant:c wi.th Section B-4,
complete-joint-penetration groove welds of beam tlanges,
where shear plates, and beam webs to columns shall be demand
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2.
ratio of the expected yield stress to the
specified minimum yield stress, F y User Note: for the designation of demand critical welds,
nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm standards such as ANSI/AISC 358 and tests addressing
distance between plastic hinge locations, mm specific connections and joints should be used in lieu of the
more general terms of these Provisions. Where these
When E as defined in Eq. 522-1 is used in ASD load Provisions indicate that a pai1icular weld is designated
combinations that are additive with other transient demand critical, but the more specific standard or test does
loads and that arc based on SEI/ASCE 7, the 0.75 not make such a designation, the more specific standard or
test should govern. Likewise, these standards and tests may
combination factor for transient loads shall not be
designate welds as demand critical that are not identified as
applied to E.
such by these Provisions.
Connections that accommodale lhe required inlerstory
drift angle within the connection elements and provide
the measured flexural resistance and shear slrengths
specified above are permitted. In addition to satisfying
the requirements noted above, the design shall
demonstrate that any additional d1iil due to connection
deformation can be at:commodated by the structure.
The design shalt include analysis for stability ellec!s of
the overall frame, including second-order clfrcls.

522.2.4 Protected Zones Alternatively, when local buckling of the column web and
doubler plate is prevented by using plug welds joining them,
The region at each end of the beam subjcel to inelastic the lolal panel zone thickness shall satisfy Eq. 522-2.
straining shall be designated as a protected zone, and shall
meet the requirements of Section 520.4. The extent of the 522.3.3 Panel Zone Doubler Plates
protected zone shall be as designated in ANS[/AISC 358, or
as otherwise dctcnnined in a connection prequalification in Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges using
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program either a complete joint-penetration groove-welded or fillet-
of qualification testing in accordance wilh Section B-4. welded joint thal develops the available shear stren1;,rth of
the full doubler plate thickness. When doubler plales are
User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of SMF placed against the column web, they shall be welded across
beams should be treated as protected zones. The plastic the top and bottom edges to develop the proportion of the
hinging zones should be established as part of a total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate. When
prequalification or qualification program for the connection, doubler plales are placed away from the column web, they
per Section 522.2.2. In general, for unreinforced shall be placed symmetrically in pairs and welded to
connections, the protected zone will extend from the face of continuily plates to develop the proportion of the total force
the column to one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic thal is transmitted to the doubler plate.
hinge point.
522.4 Beam and Column Limitations
522.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections
(Beam Web Parallel to Column Web} The requirements of Section 521 shall be salisfied, 111
addition to lhe following.
522.3.1. Shear Strength
522.4.1 Width·Thickness Limitations
The required thickness of the panel zone shall be
determined in accordance with the method used in Beam and column members shall meel the requirements of
proportioning the panel zone of the tested or prequalified Section 521.2.2, unless otherwise qualified by tests.
connection. As a minimum, the required shear strength of
the panel zone shall be determined from the summation of 522.4.2 Beam Flanges
the moments at the column faces as determined by
projecting the expccled moments at the plastic hinge points Abrupl changes in beam flange area are not permitted in
lo the column faces. plastic hinge regions. The drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or
The design shear strength shall be <PvRv and the allowable qualification demonslrates that the resulting configuration
shear strength shall be Rvffiv where can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be
consistent with a prequalified connection designated in
= 1. SO(ASD) ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a
<pv = 1. 0 (LRFD) fiv
connection prequalificalion in accordance with Section B-1,
or in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
and the nominal shear strength, Rv, according to the limit Section B-4.
state of shear yielding, is detcnnined as specified in
Specification Section 510.10.6.
522.5 Continuity Plates
522.3.2 Panel Zone Thickness Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prcqualilied
connection designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise
The individual thicknesses, t, of column wehs and doubler detennined in a connection prequalification in accordance
plates, if used, shall conform to the following requirement: with Scclion B-1, or as determined in a program of
qualification testing in accordance wilh Section B-4.
(522-2)
where
t thickness of column web or doubler plate, mm
dz panel zone depth between continuity plates, mm
wz panel zone width between column flanges, mm

CHAPTER 5 Struclural Steel 5-173
522.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio required compressive strength using ASO load
combinations, (a positive number) N
The following relationship shall be satisfied at beam-to- required compressive strength using LRFD load
column connections: combinations, (a positive number) N
plastic section modulus of the beam, mm3
plastic section modulus of the column, mm 3
LMpc) > l.O (522-3)
( LMpb minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced
beam section, mm.1
where
Exceplion:
or
the sum the moments in the column ahove and
This requirement does not apply il either of the following
below the joint at the intersection of the beam
two conditions fa sati.~fied:
and column centerlines. L M pc is determined by
summing the projections of the nominal flexural
I. Columns with Pre < 0. 3Pc for all load combinations
strengths or the columns (including haunches
other than those determined using the amplified seismic
where used) above and below the joint to lhc
load that satisfy either ofthe following:
beam centerline with a reduction for the axial
force in the column. It is pennitted to take
a. Columns used in a one-story huilding or the top
:EMpc story ofa multisto,y building.
Lzc(Fyc - Puc! Ag)(LRFD) or
:E Zc[(Fyc/1. 5) Pac/ Ag](ASD), b. Columns where: (1) the sum ofthe available shear
as appropriate. When the centerlines of opposing strengths of all exempted columns in the story is
beams in lhc same joint do not coincide, the mid- less than 20 percent of the sum of' the available
line between centerlines shall be used shear strengths ofalt moment frame columns in the
the sum of the moments in the heams at the story acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum
intersection of the beam and column centerlines. of the available shear strengths of all exempted
columns on each moment frame column line within
:EMpb is dctennincd by summing the thut story is less than 33 percent ({/' the available
projections of the expected flexural strengths or shear strength of all moment frame columns on
the beams at the plastic hinge locations to the thal column line. For the purpose of this exception,
column centerline. It is pem1itted to take a column line is de.lined as a single line ofcolumns
:EMvb = or parallel lines of columns located within JO
( 1.1RyFybZb + Muv) (LRFD) or percent of." the plan dimension perpendicular to the
line <?(columns.
:E[(t.1/1. S)RyFybZb + Mav](ASD) as
appropriate. Alternatively, it is permitted to
where
determine :EMpb consistent wilh a prequalilied
connection design as designated in ANSI/AISC For design according to Specification Section
358, or as olherwisc detennined in a connection 502.3.3 (I.RFD),
prequalification in accordance with Section B-1,
or in a program of qualification testing in
accordance with Section 13-4. When connections
FycAg, N
with reduced beam sections are used, it is P UC, requi1·ed com!J)ressive strength.
permitted to take using LRFD load combinations, N.
:EMpb = I,(1.1RyFyb ZRBS + For design according to Specification Section
Muv) (LRFD) or 502.3.4 (ASD),
:E[(1.1/1. 5)RyFyb ZRBS +
Mav] (ASD) appropriate Pc FycAr,/ 1. 5, N
gross area of column, mm 2 Pre - P ac, required comp1·es.dve strength,
using ASD load combina1ions, N
specified minimum yield stress of column, MPa
the additional moment due to shear amplification
2. Columns in any story that has a rntio ofavailable shear
from the location of the plastic hinge to the
strength to required shear strength that is 50 percent
column centerline, based on ASO load
greater than the story above.
combinations, N-mm.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l, 7th Edition. 2015

f>-174 Cl JAi 'TU { !J 8;ruciuml steel
522.7 J .aternl Rracini.: al .Ream-to-Column applicarion of the beam tlange force specifi ed in
Connections Section 522.7.2 in addition to the second-order moment
due lo the resulting column flange displacement.
522.7.1 Braced Conneclio ns
522.8 Lateral Rracing of Beams
Column flanges at beam-to-column connections require
lateral bracing only al the level of the top fl anges or the Both nangcs of beams sha ll be laterally braced, with a
beams, when the webs of the beams and column are maximum spacing of Lb = 0. 06ryE / F y· Braces shall
coplanar, and a column is shown to remain <.:l::1stic outi;ide of meet the provisions of Eqs. J\- 1-7 and J\-1-8 of Appendix
the pant:! zone. ft shall be pcrmined to assume that the
column remains e lastic when the ratio calculated using
A-1.6 or the Specification, where M,. = M11 =
RyZFy( LRFD) or M ,. = M,. = RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD) ,
f.<:q. 522-3 is greater than 2.0.
as appropriate, of the beam and Cd = 1. 0 .
When a column cannot be shown to remain elastic outside
oftht.: panel zone, the following requirements shall apply: In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrnted
forces, changes in cross-section, and other locations where
The column flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels of analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will form during
both the lop and bottom beam flanges. Lateral bracing shall inelastic dcfonnations of the SMF. The placement of lateral
he either direct or indirect. bracing s hall be consistent with that documented for a
prequalificd connection designated in ANSJ/AJSC 358, or
User Note: Direct lall:ral support (bracing) of the column as otherwise determined in a connection prequali fi cation in
tlange is achieved through use of braces or other members, accordance with Section 13-1. or in a program of'
deck and slab, attached to the column flange at or near the qualification testing in accordance with Section U-4 .
desi red bracing point to resist lateral buckling. lndirect
lateral support refers to bracing that is achieved through the The required strength of lateral bracing provided adjacent to
stiffness of members and connections that are not directly plastic hinges shall be P 11 = 0. 06 Mu /h 0 ( LRFD) or
attached to the column flanges, but rather act through the Pa = 0. 06M (I / h 0 (ASD) ,as appropriate, where h 0 is
column web or stiffener plates. the distance between flange centroids; and the required
stiffness shall meet the provisions of Eq. A-1 -8 of Appendix
1. Each column-flange lateral brace shall be designed for A - 1.6 of the Specification.
a required strength that is equal to 2 percent of the
available beam flange strength F ybfthf ( LRFD ) or 522.9 Column Splices
Fy bftbrf1 . 5 (ASD) , as appropriate.
Column splices shall comply with the requirernentc; of
Section 521 .4.1 . Where ~move welds are used to make the
522.7.2 Un hracccl Connections splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetration groove
welds that meet the requirements of Section 520.3.2. Weld
A column containing a beam-to-column connection with no
tabs shall be removed. When column splices arc not made
lateral bracing transverse to the seismic frame at the with groove welds, they shall have a required flexural
wnnection shall he designed using the distance bclween
strength that is al least equal to RyF yZx(LRFD ) or
adjacent htteral braces as the column height fo r buckling
transverse to the seismic frame and shall confo1m to RyF yZ x/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, of lhc smaller
Spt.:dficalion 508, except that: column. The required sJ1ear strength of column web splices
shall be at least equal to 'f. M pc/ H (LRFD) or
I. The required column strength shall he determined from
the appropriate load combinations in the NSCP code, 'f. Mpc/1. 5H (ASD), as appropriate, where 'f. Mpc is the
except that E shall he taken as the lesser of: sum or the nominal plastic flexura l strengths of the columns
above and below the splict.:.
a. The amplified seismic load .
b. 125 percent of the frame available strength based Exception:
upon either the beam available flexural strength or The ,·equired strength of the column splice considering
panel zone available shear strength. appropriate stress concentration factors or fi'acture
mechanics stress intensity factors need not exceed that
2. The slenderness L/r for the column shall not exceed
determined by inelastic ana~vses
60.
3. The column required llexural strength transverse to the
seismic frame shall include that moment caused by the
Associa tion of Struclura l Engineers of the Philippines . Inc. (ASEP)
- I
CHAPTER 5 Struclural Sloel 5-175
SECTIONS23 User Note: for the designation of demand critical welds,

standards such as ANSI/ AISC 358 and tests addressing
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES specific connections and joints should be used in lieu of the
(IMF) more general terms of these Provisions. Where these
Provisions indicate that a particular weld is designated
523.1 Scope demand critical, but the more specific standard or test does
not make such a designation, the more specific standard or
Intermediate moment frames (IMF) arc expected to test should govern. Likewise, these standards and tests may
withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members designate welds as demand critical that are not identified as
and connections when subjected to the forces resulting from such hy these Provisions.
the motions of the design earthquake. IMF shall meet the
m1uirements in this Section. 523.2.4 Protected Zone
523.2 Beam-to-Column Connections The region at each end of the beam subject to inelastic
straining shall be treated as a protected zone, and shall meet
523.2.1 Requirements the requirements of Section 520.4. The extent of the
protected zone shall be as designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or
8cam-to-column connections used in the seismic load as otherwise determined in a connc<.:tion prequalification in
resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the requirements of accordance with Section ll-1, or as determined in a program
Section 522.2, with the following exceptions: ol'qualilication testing in accordance with Section R-4.
I. The required intcrstury drift angle shall be a minimum User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of IMF
of 0.02 radian. beams should be treated as protected zones. The plastic
hinging zones should be established as part of a
2. The required strength in shear shall be delemtined . as prequalification or qualification program for the connection.
specified in Section 522.2.1, except that a lesser value In general, for unreinforced connections, the protected zone
will extend from the face of the column to one half of the
of Vu or Va, as appropriate, is pennitted irjustilied by
beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point.
analysis. The required shear strength need not exceed
the shear resulting from the application of appropriate
load combinations in the NSCP code using the 523.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections
amplified seismic load. (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web)
No additional reqt~irements beyond the Specification.

523.2.2 Conformance Demonstrution
Conformance demonstration shall be as described in Section 523.4 Beam and Column Limitations.
522.2.2 to satisfy the requirements of Section 523.2.1 for
IMF, except that a connection prequalified for IMF in The requirements of Section 52 l.l shall be satisfied, m
accordance with ANSI/ AISC 358, or as otherwise addition to the following.
determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
with Section 13-1, or as determined in a program of 523.4.J Width-Thickness Limitations
qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of
523.2.3 Welds Section 521.2.1, unless otherwise qualified by tests.
Unless otherwise designated by ANSI/AISC 358, or 523.4.2 Beam Flanges

otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program Abrupt changes in beam tlange area arc not permitted in
or qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4, plastic hinge regions. Drilling of 1lange holes or trimming
complete joint-penetration groove welds of beam flanges, of beam flange width is pcnnitted if testing or qualification
shear plates, and beam webs to columns shall be demand demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2. stable plastic hinges. The configuration sh,tll be consistent
with a prequalified connection designated in ANSI/AISC
358, or as otherwise detennined in a connection
prcqualificalion in accordance with Section 8- I, or in a
program of qualification testing in accordance with Section
8-4.

5-1 ?fi CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
523.5 Continuity Plates SECTIONS24

Continuity plates shall he provided to be consistent with the
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES
prequalified connections designated in ANSI/AISC 358, or (OMF)
as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Section R-1, or as determined in a program 524.t Scope
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
Ordinary momenl frames (OMF) are expected to withstand
523.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio minimal inelastic deformations in their members and
connections when subjected to the forces resulting from lhc
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. motions or
lhe design carlhquake. OMF shall meet the
Laleral Rracing at beam-to-column connections no requirements of this Section. Connections in conformance
additional requirements beyond the Spedlication. Lateral with Sections 522.2.2 and 522.5 or Sections 523.2.2 and
bracing of heams both flanges shall be laterally braced 523.5 shall he permitted for use in OMF withoul meeting
directly or indirectly. The unbraced length between lateral the requirements of Sections 524.2.1, 524.2.1, and 524.5.
hraces shall not exceed 0. 17 Ry E/ Fy· Braces shall mccl
the provisions of L::qs. A-l-7 and A-1-8 of Appendix A-1.6 User Note: While these provisions for OMF were primarily
of the Specification, where M,. = Mu = RyZFy (LRFD) developed for use with wide flange shapes, with judgment,
they may also be applied to olher shapes such as channels,
or M,. =Mu= RyZFy/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, of built-up sections, and hollow structural sections (HSS).
the beam, and Cd = 1. 0.
524.2 Beam-to-Column
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated
loads, changes in cross-section and olher locations where Connections heam-to-column connections shall be made
analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will form during with welds and/or high-strength bolts. Conneclions are
inelastic deformations of the IMF. Where the design is permitted to be fully restrained (fR) or partially restrained
based upon assemblies tested in accordance with (PR) momcnl connections as follows.
Section 8-4, the placement of lateral bracing for the beams
shall be consistent with that used in the tests or as required 524.2.l Requirements for l<'R Moment Connections
for prequalification in Section H-1. The required strength of
lateral bracing provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall be FR moment connections thal are part of the seismic load
Pu=0.06Mu/h0 (LRFD) or Pa= 0.06Ma/ resisting system (SLRS) shall be designed for a required
h 0 (ASD), as appropriate, where ho = distance between flexural strength that is .equal tu 1.1 Ry Mp(LRFD) or
flange cenlroids; and the required stiffness shall meet the
(1.1/1. 5)RyMp(ASD), as appropriate, of the hcam or
provisions of' Eq. A-1-8 of Appendix A-1.6 or the
girder, or the maximum moment that can be developed hy
Specification. Column Splices Column splices shall comply
with the requirements of Section 521.4.l. Where groove the system, whkhever is less.
welds arc used to make the splice, they shall be complete-
joint-penetration groove welds that meet the requirements FR connections shall meet the following requirements.
of Section 520.3.2.
I. Where steel backing is used in connections with
Complete-Joint-Penetration (CJP) beam flange groove
welds, sleet backing and tabs shall be removed, except
thal top-flange hacking attached to the column by a
continuous fillet weld on !he edge below the CJP
groove weld need not be removed. Removal of steel
backing and tabs shall he as follows:
a. Following the removal of backing, the root pass

shall he back gouged to sound weld metal and back
welded with a reinforcing fillet. The reinforcing
fillet shall have a minimum leg size of8 mm.
Association of Structural Engineers or t11e Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

b. Weld tab removal shall extend to within 3 mm of

the base metal surface, except at continuity plates
where removal to within 6 mm of the plate edge is
acceptable. Edges of the weld tab shall be finished
to a surface roughness value of 13 µm or better.
Grinding to a flush condition is not required.
Gouges and notches are not permitted. The
transitional slope of any area where gouges and
notches have been removed shall not exceed I :5.
Material removed by grinding that extends more
than 2 mm below the surface of the base metal
©
shall be filled with weld metal. The contour of the
weld at the ends shall provide a smooth transition,
free of notches and sharp corners.
2. Where weld access holes are provided, they shall be as

shown in Figure 524-1. The weld access hole shall have
a surface roughness value not to exceed 13 µm, and
shall be free of notches and gouges. Notches and ©
gouges shall be repaired as required by the cngincer-of-
record. Weld access holes arc prohibited in the beam
web adjacent to the end-plate in bolted moment end-
plate connections.
3. The required strength of double-sided partial-jolnt-

pcnetration groove welds and double-sided fillet welds
that resist tensile forces in connections shall be
1.1RyFyAg (LRFD) or
(1. 1/1. 5) RyFyAg (ASD), as appropriate, of the
User Note:
connected element or part. Single-sided partial-joint-
penetration groove welds and single-sided fillet welds 1. Bevel as required for selected groove weld
shall not be used to resist tensile forces in the 2. Larger of tbf or.!. in (plus!. tbf or minus!. tbf
connections. .2 2 4
3. 4
3 tbf to tbf, 3.m mmunwn
. . (+
_ 1.m) (+6 . )
_ mm.
4 4
4. For FR moment connections, the required shear 4. ~ in minimum radius (plus not limited, minus 0)
strength, Vu or Va, as appropriate, of the connection
shall he determined using the following quantity for the 5. 3tbf (±iin) (±13 mm)
earthquake load effect E:
Tolcra.iicc shall not accumulate lo the extent that the angle of the access
hole cut to the flange surface exceeds 25°
(524-1)
Figure 524-1 Weld-Access Hole Detail (from FEMA 350,
Where this E is used in ASl) load combinations that "Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel
are additive with other transient loads and that are Moment-Frame Buildings")
based on SET/ASCE 7, the 0.75 combination factor for
transient loads shall not be applied to E. 524.2.2 Requirements for PR Moment Connections
Alternatively, a lesser value ofVu or Va is permitted if PR moment connections are pem1ittcd when the following
requirements are met:
justified by analysis. The required shear strength need
not exceed the shear resulting from the application of
appropriate load combinations in the NSCP code using 1. Such connections shall be designed for the required
the amplified seismic load. strength as specified in Section 524.2.labove.
2. The nominal flexural strength of the connection, Mn,

shall be no less than 50 percent or Mp ol'thc connected
beam or column, whichever is less.

5-178 CHAPTER 5 ·· Structural Steel
3. The stifli1ess and strength of the PR moment The welded joints of the continuity plates to the column
connections shall be considered in the design, including tlanges shall be made with either complctc-joinl-penetration
the cffccl on overall frame stability. groove welds, two-sided partial-joint penetration groove
welds combined with reinforcing fillet welds, or two-sided
4. For PR moment conncclions, Vu or Va, as appropriate, fillet welds. The required slrcngth of these joints shall nol
shall be <lclermined from the load combination above be less than the available strength of the contact area of the
plus the shear resulting from the maximum end plate with the column flange. The required strength or the
moment that the connection is capable of resisting. welded joints of the continuity plates to the column weh
shall be lhe least of the following:
524.2.3 Welds
a. The sum or lite available strenglhs at the
Complctc-joinl-penetration groove welds of beam flanges, connections of the continuity plate to the column
shear plates, and beam wehs to columns shall be demand flanges.
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2.
The available shear strcnglh of the contact area of
524.3 Panel Zone of Ream-to-Column Connections the plate with the column web.
(Beam Web Parallel To Column Weh)
b. The weld available strength that develops lhe
No additional requirements beyond tl1c Specification. available shear strength of the column panel zone.
524.4 Beam and Column Limitations c. The actual force transmitted hy the stiffener.
No requirements beyond Section 521.1 . 524.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio
524.5 Continuity Plates No additional requirements beyond the specification
When FR moment connections are made by means of welds 524.7 Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column
or beam flanges or beam-flange connection plates directly Connections
to column flanges, continuity plates shall he provided in
accordance with Section 510 of the Specification. No additional requirements beyond the Specification.
Continuity plates shall also be required when:
524.8 Lateral Bracing of Beams
No additional requirements beyond the Specification.

or when
524.9 Column Splices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of

Where continuity plates arc required, the thickness of the Section 521.4.1.
plates shall he determined as follows:
I. For one-sided connections, continuity plate thickness

shall be at least one halfofthe lhickness of the beam
flange.
2. For two-sided connections the continuity plates shall be

at least equal in thickness to the thicker of the beam
flanges.

SECTION 525 525.3 Strength of Special Sc~ment Members
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES The available shear strength or the special segment shall be
(STMF) calculalcd as the sum orlhc available shear slrcnglh of the
chord members through tlexurc, and the shear strength
525.1 Scope corresponding to the available tensile slrcngth and 0.3 times
the available compressive strength of the diagonal members,
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected lo when they are used. The lop and bottom chord members in
withstand signi !icant inelastic deform al ion within n the special segment shall be made of identical sections and
specially designed segment or the truss when subjcclcd to shall provide at leasl 25 percent or the requircd vertical
the forces from the motions of the design earthquake. STMF shear strength. The required axial strength in the chord
shall he limited to span lengths between columns not to mcmhers, determined according to the limit state of tensile
exceed 20 m and overall depth 1101 lo exceed 1.8 m. The yielding, shall not exceed 0.45 times <(JP11 (LRFD) or
columns and truss segments outside of the special segments Pn/f! (ASD), as appropriate,
shall be designed to remain elastic under the forces that can
he generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened <fJ = 0. 90 (LRFD) fl = 1. 67(ASD)
special segment. STMF shall meet the requirements in this
Section. where
525.2 Special Segment
Each horizontal truss that is part of the seismic load The end connection of diagonal weh members in the special
resisting system (SLRS) shall have a special segment that is segment shall have a required strength that is at least equal
located between the quarter points of the span or the truss. to the expected yield strength, in tension, or lhe web
The length or the special segment shall he between 0.1 and member, RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAg/1. 5 (ASD), as
0.5 times the truss span lenglh. The length-to-<leplh ratio of appropriate.
any panel in the special segment shall neither exceed 1.5
nor be less than 0.67.
525.4 Strength of Non-Special Segment RS
Panels within a special segment shall either be all Mcmhers and connections of STMF, except those in the
Vierendecl panels or all X-braced panels; neither a special segment specified in Section 525.2, shall have a
combination thereof nor the use or other truss diagonal required strength based on the appropriate load
configuralions is permitted. Where diagonal members arc combinations in-the NSCP code, replacing the earthquake
used in the special segment, they shall bc arranged in an X
load term E with the lateral loads necessary lo develop the
pattern separated by vertical memhers. Such diagonal
expected vertical shear strength of the special segment
members shall he interconnected at points where they cross.
The interconnection shall have a required strength equal to Yne (LRFD) or Vne/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, at mid-
lcngth, given as:
0.25 times the nominal tensile strength of the diagonal
member. Bolted conneclions shall not be used for web
members within the special segment. Oiagonal web 3. 75RyMnc (L - Ly)
members within the special segment shall be made of flat Vne = L + 0.075£/
bars ofidcnlical sections.
s L,3
+ Ry(Pnt + 0. 3Pn,) sin a
(525-1)
Splicing of chord members is not permitted within the
where
special segment, nor within one-half the panel length from
the ends of the special segment. The required axial strength
of the diagonal web members in the special segment due to Mn,= nominal flexural strength of a chord mcmbcr or the.:
special segment, N-mm
dead and live loads within the special segment
shall not exceed 0. 03FyAg (LRFD) or (0. 03/
EI Ilcxural elastic segment of a chord membcr or the
special segment, N-mm 2
1. 5) F yAg (ASD), as apprup1iatc. span length of the truss, mm
length of the special segment, in
The special segment shall be a protected zone meeting the nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of
requirements of Section 520.4. the special segment, kips (N)
Pn,,..., nominal compressive.: strength of a diagonal
member of the special segment, kips, N
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7lh Edition, 2015

a = angle of diagonal members with the horizontal SECTION 526

525.5 Width-Thickness Limitations
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
BRACEDFRAMES~CB~
Chord members and diagonal web memhers within the
special segment shall meet the requirements of Section 526.1 Scope
521.2.2.
Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) are expected
525.6 Lateral Bracing to withstand significant inelastic deformations when
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the
The top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the requirements in this
braced at the ends of the special segment, and at intervals Section.
not to exceed Lp according to Specification Section 506,
along the entire length of the truss. The required strength or User Note: Section 527 (OCBF) should be used for the
each lateral hrace at the ends of and within the special design of tension-only bracing.
segment shall be
526.2 Members
526.2. t Slenderness
where
Pa= (0. 06/1. 5)RyPnc(ASD), as appropriate.
Bracing members shall have Kl/r:::; 4 Jt;
Exception:
P nc = is the nominal compressive strength of the special
segment chord member Braces with 4.JE/Fy < Kl/r:::; 200 are permitted in
frames in which the available strength of the column is at
Lateral braces outside of the special segment shall have a least equal to the maximum load transferred to the column
required strength of considering Ry (LRFD) or (1/1. S)Ry(ASD), as
appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the connecting
Pu= 0. 02RyPnc(LRFD) or brace elements of the building. Column forces need not
exceed those determined by inelastic analysis, nor the
Pa= (0. 02/1. S)RyPnc(ASD), as appropriate. maximum load e.ff'ects that can be developed by th.e system.
526.2.2 Required Strength

The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of
Eq. A-1-4 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Spccilication, where
Where the effective net area of bracing members is less than
the gross area, the required tensile strength of the brace
based upon the limit state of fracture in the net section shall
be greater than the lesser of the following:
Pr= Pa= RyPnc/1.5(ASD),asappropriate.
l. The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing
member, detennined as RyFyAg (LRFD) or
RyFyAg/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate.
2. The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that

can be transferred to the brace by the system.
User Note: lbis provision applies to bracing members

where the section is reduced. A typical case is a slotted HSS
brace at the gusset plate connection.

526.2.3 Lateral Force Distribution RyFyAg/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate.
Along any line of bracing, braces shall be deployed in 2. The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that
alternate directions such that, for either direction of force can be lransferred to the brace by the system.
parallel to the bracing, al lcasl 30 percent but no more than
70 percent of the total horizontal force along that line is 526.3.2 Required Flexural Strength
resisted by braces in tension, unless the available strength of
each brace in compression is larger than the required The required flexural strenglh of bracing connections
strength resulting from the application of the appropriate
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code including shall be equal to 1. 1Ry Mp (LRFD) or (1.1/
the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this 1. S) RyMp (ASD), as appropriale, of the brace about the
provision, a line of bracing is defined as a single line or critical buckling ax.is.
parallel lines with a plan oflset of IO percent or less of the
building dimension perpendicular to lhe line of bracing. Exception:
Braced connections that meet the requirements of Section
526.2.4 Width-Thickness Limitations 526.3.l and can accommodate the inelastic rotations
associated with braced post-buckling deformations need not
Column and brace members shall meet the requiremenls of meet this requirement.
Section 521.2.2.
User Note: Accommodation of inelastic rotation is typically
User Note: HSS walls may be stiffened to comply with this accomplished by means of a single gusset plate with the
requirement. brace terminating before the line of restraint. The detailing
requirements for such a cotmection are described in the
526.2.5 Built-up Members AISC commentary.
The spacing of stitches shall he such that the slenderness 526.3.3 Required Compressive Strength
ratio l/r of individual elements between the stitches does
not exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of the Bracing connections shall be designed for a required
built-up member. compressive strength based on buckling limil
states that is at least equal to 1.1RyPn(LRFD) or
The sum of the available shear strengths of the stitches shall
equal or exceed the available tensile strength of each (1. 1/1. 5) RyP n (ASD), as appropriate, where Pn is the
element. The spacing of stitches shall be uniform. Not less nominal compres~ive strength of the brace.
than two stitches shall be used in a built-up member. Bolted
stitches shall not be located within tl1e middle one-fourth of 526.4 Special Bracing Configuration Requirements
the clear brace length.
526.4.1 V-Type and Inverted V -Type Bracing.
Exception:
V-type and inverled V-typc SCBF shall meet lhe following
Where the buckling <4' braces about their critical buckling requirements:
axis does not cause shear in the stitches, the spacing of the
stitches shall be such that the slenderness ratio l/r of the 1.. The required strength of beams intersected by braces,
individual elements between the stitches does not exceed their connections, and suppo11ing members shall be
0. 75 times the governing slenderness ratio qf the built-up detennined based on the load combinations of the
member. NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no
support for dead and live loads. For load combinations
526.3 Required Strength of Bracing Connections that include earthquake effects, the earthquake effect,
E, on the beam shall he determined as follows:
526.3. l Required Tensile Stt·ength
a. The forces in all braces in tension shall be assumed
The required lensile strength of bracing connections to be equal to RyFyAg.
(including beam-to-column connections if part of the
bracing system) shall be the lesser of the following:
b. The forces in all adjoining braces in compression
shall be assumed to be equal to 0. 3Pn,
I. The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing
member, determined as RyFyAg (LRFD) or

5-182 CHAPTFR 5 - Structural Steel
2. Reams shall he continuous beLween columns. Both SECTION527

flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of Lb = Lpd, as spccilied by ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY
Eq. A-1.1 -7 and A-1.1-8 of Appendix A-I of the BRACED FRAMES (OCBF)
Specification. Lateral braces shall meet the provisions
of Eqs. A -1.6-7 and A- l.6-8 of Appendix A- l.6of the 527.1 Scope
Specification, where Mr = Mu = R yZFy (LRFD)
or Mr= Mu= RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD). as Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) are expected
to withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members
appropriate, of the beam and Cd = 1. 0. and connections when subjected to the forces resulLing from
the motions of the design earthquake. OCBF shall meet the
/\s a minimum, one set of laLeral braces is required at requiremenls in this section. OCBF above the isolation
the point of intersection or the V-type (or inverted V- systl!m in seismically isolated structures shall meet the
type) bracing, unless !he beam has sufficient oul-of- requirements of Sections 527.4and 527.Sand need not meet
planc strengU1 and stiffness to ensure stability between the requirements of' Sections 527.2and 527 .3.
adjacent brace points.
527.2 Bracing Members
User Note: One method of demonstrating sufficicnL
out-of-plane strength and stifTness of the beam is to Ilracing members shall meet the requirements of Section
apply the bracing force defined in Eq. A-1.6-7 of 521.2.2.
Appendjx A-1.6 of the Specification to each flange so
as to form a torsional couple; this loading should be in Exception:
conjunction with the flexural forces defined in item (l)
above. The stiffness of the beam (and its restraints) HSS braces that are filled with concrete need not comply
with respect to this torsional loading should be with this provi.vion.
sufficient to satisfy Eq. A-1.6-8.
Bracing members in K, V, m· inverted V-type configurations
526.4.2 K-Typc shall have Kljr $ 4jE!Fy
Bracing K-type brnced frames arc not pcnnitted for SCDF. User Note: Bracing members that are designed as tension
only (that is, neglecting their strength in compression) are
526.5 Column Splices not appropriate for K, V, and inverted V configurations.
Such braces may be used in other conligurations and are not
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 52 l .4, required to satisfy this provision. Such members may
column splices in SCDF shall be designed to develop SO include slender angles, plate, or cable bracing, which are not
percent of the lesser available llexural strength of the excluded by Section 519 .1.
connected members. The required shear strength
shall be IMpc / H (LRFD) or l:Mpc/1. SH (ASD), as 527.3 Special Bracing Configuration
appropriate, where L M pc, is the sum of the nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the columns above and below the Requirements Reams in V-type and inverted V-type OCBF
splice. and columns in K-type OCDF shall be continuous at bracing
connections away from the beam-to-column connection and
526.6 Protected Zone shall meet the following requirements:
The protected zone of bracing members in SCBF shall I. The required strength shall be determined based on the
include the center one-quarter of the brace length, and a load combinations of the NSCP code assuming that the
zone adjacent to each connection equal to the brace depth in braces provide no support of dead and live loads. For
tbe plane of buckling. The protected zone of SCB.F shall load combinations that include earthquake effects, the
include elements that connect braces to beams and columns earthquake effect, E, on the member shall be
and shall satisfy the requirements of Section 520.4. determined as follows:
a. The forces in braces in tension shall be assumed Lo

be equal to RyFyA 8. For Y-type and inverted V-
type OCBF, the forces in braces in tension need
not exceed the maximum force that can be
developed by the system.
b. The forces in braces in compression shall he 527.S OCBF above Seismic Isolation Systems
assumed to be equal to 0. 3P n-
527.5. t Bracing Members
2. Both flanges shall be laterally braced, with a maximum
spacing of Lb= Lpd, as specified by Eqs. A-1.7-7 and Bracing members shall meet the requirements of Section
A-1.8-8 or Appendix A-1 of the Specification. Lateral 521.2.2 and shall have
braces shall meet the provisions ofEqs. A-1.6-7 and A-
1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Specification,
where Mr= Mu= RyZFy (LRFD) or
Kl/r ~ 4 )E/Fy
Mr= Mu= RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate,
527.5.2 K-Type Bracing
of the beam and Cd = 1. 0. As a minimum, one set of
lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of
K-lypc braced frames are not permitted.
the bracing, unless the member has sufficient out-of-
plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
adjacent brace points. 527.5.3 V-Type and ln"erted-V-Type Bracing.
Beams in V-type and inverted V-lype bracing shall be

User Note: See User Note in Section 526.4 for a
cootinuous between columns.
method of establishing sufficient out-of-plane strength
and stiffness of the beam.
527.4 Bracing Connections
The required strength of bracing connections shall be

determined as follows.
1. For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength or

bracing connections shall be that determined using the
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code, not
including tJ1c amplified seismic load.
2. For other limit states, the required strength of bracing

connections is the expected yield strength, in tension,
of the brace, determined as RyFyAg(LRFD) or
RyFyAg/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate.
Exception:
The required strength of the brace connection need not
exceed either ofthe following:
I. The maximum force that can he developed by the
system
2. A load effect based upon using the amplified
seismic load

SECTION 528 Pu~ 0.15Py (LRFD) or

ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
Pa ~ (0.15/1. S)Py (ASD), as appropriate.
FRAMES (EBF)
where
528.1 Scope
pu = required axial strength using LRFD load
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) arc expected to combinations, N
withstand significant inelastic deformations in the links pa = required axial strength using ASD load
when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of combinations, N
the design earthquake. The diagonal braces, columns, and py = nominal axial yield strength = FyAg , N
beam segments outside of the links shall he designed to
remain essentially elastic under the maximum forces that
can be generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened If Pu> 0.15Py (LRFD) or
links, except where permitted in this Section. In buildings Pa> (0.15/1. 5) Py (ASD), as appropriate, the
exceeding five stories in height, the upper story of an EBF
following additional requirements shall be met:
system is pennitted to be designed as an OCBF or a SCBF
and still be considered to be pa1t of an EBF system for the
I. The available shear strength or the link shall be the
purposes of determining system factors in the NSCP code.
EBF shall meet the requirements in this section. lesser of 'PvV pa and 2q, 11 Mpa/ e (LRFD) or
V paffiv and 2 (Mpa/e)/fiv (ASD), as appropriate,
528.2 Links
where
528.2.1 Limitations
'Pv = 0. 90 (LRFD) !lv 1.67 (ASD)
Links shall meet the requirements of Section 521.2.2.
(528-1)
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doubler-plate
reinforcement and web penetrations are not pennitted. {528-2)
528.2.2. Shear Strength Pr= Pu (LRFD) or

Except as limited below, the link design shear strength, Pa (ASD), as appropriate
q,vVn, and the allowable shear strength, V,Jnv, according
to the limit state of shear yielding shall be determined as
follows:
Pc = Py (LRFD) or Py /1. 5 (ASD), as
appropriate
Vn = nominal shear strength of the link, equal to the
2. The length of the link shall not exceed:
lesserofVp or 2Mp/e ,N
a. [1.15-0.Sp'(Aw/Ag)] 1.6Mp/Vp
q,v = 0. 90(LRFD) !111 = 1. 67 (ASD)
where When p'(Aw/Ag) ~ 0.3 (528-3)
FyZ, N-mm nor

0.6FyAw, N
link length, mm
(d- zt,)tw When (528-4)
The effect of axial force on the link available shear strength

need not be considered if where

CHAPTF.:R 5 Structural Steel S-'18!:i
meeting the requirements of(a) and (b) above.
where 4. Intermediate web stiffeners are not required in links uf

V1• Vu(LRFD) ur Va(ASD), as appropriate kngt11s greater than 5Mp/Vp·
Vu required shear strength based un LR FD
load combinaLions, N 5. Intermediate wch stiffeners shall be full depl11. For
V0 required shear strength based on ASD links that are less than 635 mm in depth, stiffeners arc
load combinations, N required on only one side of the link web. The
thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not he less Lhan
528.2.3 Link Rotation Angle tw or IO mm, whichever is larger, and the width shall
he not less than ( b I /2) - tw. For links thal are
The link rotation angle is rhe inelastic angle hctween the 635 mm in depth or greater, similar intennediatc
link and lhc beam outside of the link when the loLal slory stiffeners are required on botli sides of the wch.
drift is equal to the design story drill, /1. The link rotation
angle shall noL exceed the following values: The required strength of fillet welds connecting
a link sLilfoner to the link web is AstFy (LRFD) or
I. 0.08 radians for links of length 1. 6Mp/VP or less. AstFy/ 1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, where Ast is the area
of the sliJlencr. The required strength
2. 0.02 radians for links of length 2. 6Mp/VP or greater. of fillet welds connecting the stiffener lo the link flanges is
AstFy/ 4(LRFD) or AstFy/ 4(1. 5) (ASD).
3. The value detennined by linear interpolation between
the above values for links orlength between 528.4 Link-to-Column Connections
1. 6Mv/Vv and 2. 6Mv/Vp·
Link-to-column cunncclions must he capable of sustaining
528.3 Link Stiffeners the maximum link rotation angle based on the length of the
link, as specified in Section 528.2.3. The strength of the
Full-depth web stiffeners shall be prnvided on both sides of connection measured at the column face shall equal at least
the link web at the diagonal brace ends of the link. These the nominal shear strength of the link, V n, as specified in
stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than Section 528.2.2 al the maximum link rotation angle. Link-
(bf - 2t111) and a thickness not less than 0. 75tw or 10 to-column connections shall satisfy the above requirements
mm, by one of the following:
Whichever is larger, where bf and tw arc the link flange 1. Use a connection prcqualificd for EBF in accordance
with Section H-1.
width and link web thickness respectively.
2. Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with
Links shall be provided with intem1ediate web stilleners as
Section B-4. Results of al least two cyclic connection
follows:
tests shall be provided and are permitted to be based on
one of the following:
l. Links of lengths 1. 6Mp/VP or less shall he provided
with intermediate web stiffeners spaced al intervals not a. Tests reported in research literature or documented
exceeding (30t111 - d/5) for a link rotation angle of tests performed for other projects that are
0.08 radian or (52tw - d/S)for link rotation angles of representative of project conditions, within the
0.02 radian or less. Linear interpolation shall be used limits specified in Section B-4.
for values between 0.08 and 0.02 radian.
b. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project
and are representative of project member sizes,
2. Links of length greater than 2. 6Mp/Vp and less than
material strengths, connection configurations, and
SMp/VP shall be provided with intem1ediale web malching connection pruccsscs, within the limits
stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5 times bf from each specified in Section B-4.
end of the link.
3. Links ortenglh belween 1.6Mp/Vp an<l 2.6Mp/Vp

shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners
National Structural Code of the Pt1ilippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

Exception: 528.6.2 Beam Outside Link

Where reil!{orcemenl al the beam-to-column connection at The required combined axial and flexural strength of the
the link end precludes yielding of the beam over the beam outside of the link shall be determined based on load
reinforced length, the link is permitted to be the heam combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For load
segmelll .fi'om the end qf the ,·einforcemenf to the brace
combinations induding seismic effects, a load Q1 shall he
connection. Where such link~ are us(id and the link lenf?th
substituted for the term E where Q 1 is defined as the forces
does not exceed 1. 6Mp,./V,., cyclic testing of the reinforced
generated by at least 1.1 times the expected nominal shear
connection is not required if the available strength qf the
reinforced section and the connection equals or exceeds the strength of the link, RyVn, where V11 is as defined in
required strength calculated based upon 1he strain- Section 528.2.2. The available strength of the heam outside
hardened link as described in Section 528.8. Full depth of the link shall be determined by the Specification,
stiffeners as required in Section 528.2.Jsholl be placed at multiplied by Ry-
the link-to-reinforcement interface.
User Note: The diagonal brace and beam segment outside
528.5 Lateral Bracing of Link of the link are intended to remain essentially elastic under
the forces generated by the folly yielded and strain hardened
Lateral bracing shall be provided at both the top and bottom link. Both the diagonal brace and beam segment outside of
link llanges at the ends of the link. The required strength of the link arc typically subject to a combination of large axial
each lateral brace at the ends of the link shall force and bending moment, and therefore should be treated
be Ph = 0. 06 Mr/lt 0 , where h 0 is the distance as beam-columns in design, where the available strength is
between Hange centroids in mm. defined by Section 508 of the Specification.
For design according to Specification Section 502.3.3 At the connection hctween the diagonal brace and the beam
(LRFD) at the link end of the brace, the intersection orthe brace and
beam centerlines shall be at the end of the link or in the link.
For design according tu Specification Section R3.4 (ASD) 528.6.3 Bracing Connections
The required strength of the diagonal brace connections, at

Mr= Mu,exp/1.5 both ends of the braces, shall be at least equal to the
required strength of the diagonal brace, as defined in
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of
Section 528.6.1. The diagonal brace connections shall also
Eq. A-1.6-8 of the Specification, where Mr is defined satisfy the requirements of Section 526.3 .3.
above, Cd = 1, and Lb is the link length.
No part or the diagonal brace connection al the link end of
528.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link the brace shall extend over the link length. If the brace is
designed to resist a po1tion of the link end moment, then the
528.6.1 Diagonal Brace diagonal hracc co,mection at the link end of the brace shall
he designed as a fully-restrained moment connection.
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the
diagonal hrace shall be <lctennined based on load 528.7 Beam-to-Column Connections
combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For load
combinations including seismic effects, a load Q1 shall be If the EBF system factors in the NSCP code require moment
substituted for the term£, where Q 1 is defined as the axial resisting connections away from the link, then the beam-to-
forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times the column connections away from the link shall meet the
expected nominal shear strength of the link RyVn, where requirements for beam-to-column connections for OMF
V n is as defined in Section 528.2-2. The available strength specified in Sections I 1.2 and 11.5.
of the diagonal brace shall comply with Specification
If the EBF system factors in the NSCP code do not require
Section 508.
moment resisting connections away from the link, then the
beam-to-column connections away from the link arc
Brace members shall meet the requirements of Section
permitted to he designed as pinned in the plane of the web.
521.2.1.

528.8 Required Strength of Columns SECTION 529

In addition lo the requirements in Section 521.3, the BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED
required strength of columns shall be detennined from load FRAMES (BRBF)
combinations as stipulated by Lhe NSCP code, except that
the seismic load E shall be the forces generated by 1.1 times 529.1 Scope
the expected nominal shear strength or all links above the
level under consideration. The expected nominal shear Huckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) are expected to
strength of a link is RyVn, where V n is as defined in withstand significant inelastic deformations when subjected
Section 528.2.2. to the forces resulting from the motions or the design
earthquake. BRBf shall meet the requirements in this
Column members shall meet the requirements of Section Section. Where the NSCP code does not contain design
52 J.2.2. coefficients for BRBF, the provisions of Section B-3 shall
apply.
528.9 Protected Zone
529.2 Bracing Memhers
Links in EBFs are a protected zone, and shall satisfy the
requirements of Section 520.4. Welding on links is Bracing members shall be composed or a strut:tural steel
permitted for attachment of link stiffeners, as rc4uircd in core and a system that restrains the steel core from
Section 528.3. buckling.
528.10 Demand Critical Welds 529.2.t Steel Core
Complete-joint-penetration groove welds attaching the link The steel core shall be designed to resist the entire axial
flanges and the link web to the column are demand critical force in the brace.
welds, and shall satisly the requirements of Section 520.3.2.
The brace design axial strength, q,Pysc (LRFD), and the
brace allowable axial strength, P ysc /n (ASD), in tension
and compression, according to the limit state of yielding,
shall be determined as follows:
(529-1)
0.90 (LRFD) fi =1. 67 (ASD)

where
Fysc specified minimum yield stress of the steel core,

or actual yield stress of the steel core as
determined from a coupon test, MPa
net area of steel core, mni2
Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater

shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness requirements of
Section 519.3.
Splices in the steel core are not pennitted.
529.2.2 Buckling-Restraining System
The buckling-restraining system shall consist of the casing

for the steel core. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered parts of
this system.

The buckling-restraining system shall limit local and overall The compression strength adjustment factor, fJ, shall be
buckling of the steel core for deformations corresponding to calculated as the ratio of the maximum compression force to
2.0 times the design story drift. The buckling-restraining the maximum tension force of the test specimen measured
system shall not be permitted to buckle within deformations from the qualification tests specified in Section B-5, Section
corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift. 8-5.6.3for the range of deformations corresponding to 2.0
times the design story drift. The larger value of~ from the
User Note: Conformance to this provision is demonstrated two required brace qualification tests shall be used. In no
by means of lesting as described in Section 529.2.3. case shall ~ be taken as less than 1.0.
529.2.3 Testing The strain hardening adjustment factor, w, shall be

calculated as the ratio of the maximum tension force
The design of braces shall be hased upon results from measured from the qualification tests specified in
qualifying cyclic tests in accordance with the procedures Section B-5, Section B-5.6.3 (for the range of deformations
and acceptance criteria of Section B-5. Qualifying test corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift) to F ysc of
results shall consist or al least two successful cyclic tests: the test specimen. The larger value of u> from the two
one is required to be a test of a brace subassemblage that required qualification tests shall be used. Where the tcsled
includes brace connection rotational demands complying
steel core material docs not match that of the prototype, <»
with Section 8-5, Section 8-5.4 and the other shall he either shall be based on coupon testing of t11e prototype material.
a uniaxial or a subassemblage test complying with Section
529.3. Bracing Connections.
8-5, Section B-5.5. Both test types are permitted to be
based upon one of the following:
529.3 Bracing Connections
1. Tests repoitcd in research or documented tests
performed for other projects.
The required strength of bracing conneclions in tension and
2. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project.
compression (including beam-to-column connections if part
of the bracing system) shall be 1.1 times the adjusted brace
Inlerpolation or extrapolation of test results for
strength in compression (LRFD) or 1.1/1.5 times the
different member sizes shall be justified by rational
adjusted brace strength in compression (ASD).
analysis that demonstrates stress distributions and
magnitudes of internal strains consistent with or less
529.3.2 Gusset Plates
severe than the tested assemblies and that considers the
adverse effects or variations in material properties.
The design of connections shall include considerations of
Extrapolation oftest results shall be based upon similar
local and overall buckling. Bracing consistent with that used
combinations of steel core and buckling-restraining
in the tests upon which the design is based is required.
system sizes. Tests shall be permitted to qualify a
design when the provisions of Section 13-5 are met.
User Note: This provision may be met by designing the
gusset plate for a transverse force consistent with transverse
529.2.4 Adjusted Brace Strength
bracing forces d~termined from testing, by adding a
stiffener to it to resist this force, or by providing a brace to
Where required by these Provisions, bracing connections
the gusset plate or to the brace itself. Where the supporting
and adjoining members shall be designed to resist forces
tests did not include transverse bracing, no such bracing is
calculated based on the adjusted brace strength.
required. Any attachment of bracing to the steel core must
be included in the qualification testing.
The adjusted brace strength in compression shall be
PwRyPysc· The adjusted brace strength in tension shall be
<uRyPysc·
Exception:
The factor Ry need not he applied fl P ysc is established

using yield stress determined.from a coupon test.

529.4 Special Requirements 529.5.2 Required Strength
Related to Bracing Configuration. V-type an<l inverted-V- The required strength of beams and columns in BRBF shall
type braced frames shall meet the following requirements: he determined from load combinations as stipulated in the
NSCP code. For load combinations that include earthquake
I. The required strength or beams intcrsccte<l by braces, effects, the earthquake effect, E, shall be dclermined from
their connections, and supporting members shall be the adjusted brace strengths in tension and compression.
<letermincd based on the load combinations of the
NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no The required strength or beams and columns need not
support for dead an<l live loads. f-or load combinations exceed the maximum force that can be developed by the
that include earthquake effects, the vertical and system.
horizontal earthquake eHect, E, on the beam shall be
determined from the adjusted brace strengths in tension User Note: Load effects calculated based on adjusted brace
an<l compression. strengths should not be amplified by the overstrength factor,
fio.
Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both
flanges of beams shall be laterally braced. Lateral 529.5.3 Splices
braces shall meet the provisions or Eqs. t\-1.6-7 and
J\-1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Specification, In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 521.4,
where Mr= Mu= Ry ZFy (LRFD) or Mr= Mu = column splices in BRRF shall be designed to develop 50
Ry ZFy /1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the beam and percent of the lesser available flexural strength ·of the
connected members, determined based on the
Cd = 1. 0. J\s a minimum, one set of lateral braces is
limit state of yielding. The required shear
required at the point of intersection of the V-type (or
inverted V-typc) bracing, unless the beam has sufficient strength shall he 'f.Mpc/H (LRFD) or
out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability IMpc/1. SH (ASD), as appropriate, where 'EMpc is the
between adjacent brace points. sum of the nominal plastic flexural strcngllts of the columns
above and below the splice.
User Note: The beam has sufficient out-of-plane strength
and stiffness if the beam bent in the horizontal plane meets 529.6 Protected Zone
the required brace strength and required brace stiffness for
column nodal bracing as prescribed in the Specification. Pu The protected zone shall include the steel (;()fC of bracing
may be taken as lhe required compressive strength of the members and clements that connect llte steel core to beams
brace. and columns, and shall satisfy the requirements or Section
520.4.
For purposes of brace design and testing, the calculated
maximum deformation of braces shall be increased by
including the effect of the vertical dcHection of the beam
under the loading defined in Section 529.4.
K-type braced frames are not permitted for RRRF.
529.5 Beams and Columns
Beams and columns in BRBF shall meet the following

requirements.
529.5.1 Width-Thickness Limitations
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements or

Section 521.2.2.

SECTION530 530.2.2 Pane) Aspect Ratio
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS The mlio of panel length to height, L/ h, shall be limited to
(SPSW) 0. 8< L/h '.$ 2. 5.
530.1 Scope 530.2.3 Openings in Webs
Special plate shear walls (SPSW) arc expected to withstand Openings in webs shall be bounded on all sides by H BE and
signi ficanl inelastic deformations in the webs \\ hen VBE extending the full width and height of the panel,
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the respectively, unless otherwise justified by testing and
design earthquake. The horizontal boundary elements analysis.
(HBEs) and vertical boundary elements (V BEs) adjacent 10
the webs shall be designed lo remain essentially elastic 530.3 Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements
under the maximum forces that can be generated by the
fully yielded webs, except that plastic hinging at the ends of The required strength of web connections to the surrounding
I IBEs is permitted. SPSW shall meet the requirements of HRE and VBE shall equal the expected yield strength, in
this Section. Where the NSCP code does not contain design tension, of the web calculated at an angle a, defined by
coefficients for SPSW. the provisions or Section B-3 shall F.q. 530-2.
apply.
530.4 Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Element~
530.2 Webs
530.2.1 Shear Strength
Jn addition to th~ requirements of Section 521.3, the
The panel design shear strength, <pV n (LRFD), and the required strength of VBE shall be based upon the fo rces
allowable shear strength, Vn/G ( ASD) , according to the corresponding to the expected yield strength, in tension, of
limit state of shear yielding, shall be determined as follows: the web calculated at an angle a.
The required strength of HBE shall be the greater of the

forces corresponding to the expected yield strength, in
<p = 0. 90 (LRFD)D. = 1. 67 (ASD) tension, of the web calculated at an angle a or that
determined fi·om the load combinations in the NSCP code
where assuming the web provides no support for gravity loads.
tw = thickness orthe web, mm The beam-column moment ratio provisions in Section 522.6
Let= clear distance between VBE :flanges, mm shall be met for all HBE/VBE intersections without
consideration of the effect,; of the webs.
a is the angle of web yielding in radians, as measured
relative to the vertical, and it is given by: 530.4.2 HBE·to-VBE Connections
HBE-to-VBE connections shall satisfy the requirements of

1 + twL Section 524.2. The required shear strength, V111 of a HBE-
4 - 2Ac (530-2)
tan - (1 h3 ) lo· VBE connection shall be determined in accordance with
1 + twh Ab+ 360/ cL the provisions of Section 524.2, except that the required
shear strength shall not be less lhan the shear corresponding
distance between HBE centerlines, mm Lo moments at each end equal to 1. 1RyMp (LRFD) or
== cross-sectional area or a H BE, mm 2 (1. 1/1. 5) R yMp (ASD), as appropriate, together with
= cross-sectional area of a VBE, mm2 the shear resulting from the expected yield strength in
moment of inertia of a VBE taken perpendicular to tension of the webs yielding al an angle a.
the direction of the web plate line, mm 4
L = distance between VBE centerlines, mm 530.4.3 Width-Thickness Limitations
HBE and VBE members shall meet the requirements of

Section 52 I .2.2.
,
530.4.4 Lateral Bracing SECTION 531

HBE shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBE QUALlTY ASSURANCE PLAN
and at a spacing not to exceed 0. 086 RyE/Fy. Both
flanges of HBE shall be braced either directly or indirectly. 531.1 Scope
The required strength of lateral bracing shall be at least 2
When required by the NSCP code or the engineer-of-record
percent of the HBE flange nominal strength, F yb1t f· The
a quality assurance plan shall be provided. The qualit;
required stiffness of all lateral bracing shall be determined assurance plan shall include the requirements of
in accordance with Eq. A-1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Section B-2.
Specification. In these equations, Mr shall be
computed as RyZFy (LRFD) or Mr shall be User Note: The quality assurance plan in Section B-2 is
computed as RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, and considered adequate and effective for most seismic load
Cd ::: 1. 0. 530.4. 5. VBE Splices. VBE splices shall resisting systems and is strongly encoura~d for use without
comply with the requirements of Section 521.4. modification. \Vh.ile the NSCP code requires use of a
quality assurance. plan based on the seismic design category,
530.4.5 Panel Zones use of the quahty assurance plan for any seismic load
resisting system with an R greater than 3 is strongly
The VBE panel zone next to the top and base HBE of the encomaged independent of the seismic design category. Use
SPSW shall comply with the requirements in Section 522.3. of a response modification factor of 3 or more indicates an
assumption of system, element, and coDnection ductility to
530.4.6 Stiffness of Vertical Boundary Elements reduce design forces. The quality assurance plan is intended
to ensure that the seismic load resisting system is
The VBE shall have moments of inertia about an ax.is taken significantly free of derects that :would greatly reduce the
ductility of the system. There may be cases (for example,
perpendicular to the plane of the web, I c, not less than
non-redundant major transfer members, or where work is
0. 00307twlt4 / L. performed in a location that is difficult to access) where
supplemental testing· might be advisable. Additionally,
where the contractor's quality control program has
demonstrated the capability to perfonn some tasks this plan
has assigned to quality assurance, modification of the plan
could be considered.

APPENDICES B-1. Section B- t .3 Testing R equirements
PREQUALIFICATION OFBEAM- Data used to support connection prcqualiiication shall be

COLUMN AND LINK·T~OLUMN based on tesls conducted in accordance with Section 13-4.
The CPRP shall determine the number of tests and the
CONNECTIONS variables considered hy the tests for connection
prcqualificati on.
Appendix B·l.1 Scope
The CPRP shall also provide the same information when
This appendix contains m1mmum requirements for limits are to be changed the connection has the ability and
prequalilicatiun of beam to-column moment connections in reliability to undergo the required intcrstory drifi. angle for
special moment frames (SMF), intermediate moment frames SMF and rMF and the required link rotation angle for EBF,
(I MF), and link-to-column connections in eccentrically where the link is acljacent to columns. The limits on
braced frames (EBF). Prcqualilicd connections are member sizes for prequalilication sball nol exceed the limits
permitted to be used, within the applicable limits of specified in Section B-4, Section B-2.5.2.
prequalification, without the need for further qualifying
cyclic tests. When the limits of prequalilication or design
8-1.4 Prequalification Variables
requirements for prequalificd connections conflict with the
requirements of these Provisions, lhe limits of In order to be prequali ficd, the effect of the fo llowing
prequalification and design requirements for prequalified variables on connection performance shall be considered.
connections shall govem. Limits on Lhe pcnnissiblc values for each variable shall be
established by the CPRP for the prequalirie<I connection.
B-1.2 General Requirements
I. Beam or link parameters:
B-1.2.1 Basis for .Prequalification
a. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or other
Connections shall be prcqualified based on lest data b. Cross-section fabrication method: (rolled shape,
satisfying Section B-1.3, supported by analytical studies and welded shape, or other)
design models. The combined body of evidence for
prequalification must be sufficient to assure that the c. Depth
connection can supply the required intcrstory drift angle for
d. Weight per foot
SMF and .I MF systems, or the required link rotation angle
for EBF, on a consistent and reliable basis within the c. Flange thickness
specified limits of prequalification. All applicable limit
f. Material specification
states for the connection thal affect the stiffness, strength
and deformation capacity of the connection and the Seismic g. Span-to-depth ratio (for SMF or IMF), or link
Load Resisting System (SLRS) must be identified. These length (for 'EBF)
include fracture related limit states, stability related limit
h. Width thickness ratio of cross-section elements
states, and all other limit states pertinent fo r the connection
under consideration. The effect of design variables listed in i. Lateral bracing
Section B-1.4 shall be addressed for connection
prequalitication. j. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
connection under consideration
B-1.2.2 Authority for Prequalification
2. Column parameters:
Prequalilication of a connection and the associated limits of a. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or other
prequalification shall be established by a Connection
Prequaliiication Review Panel (CPRP) approved hy the b. Cross-se<-1.ion fabrication method: (rolled shape,
authority having jurisdiction. welded shape, or other)
c. Column orientation with respect to beam or link:
(beam or link is connected to column Jlangc, beam
or link is connected to column web, beams or links
are connected to both the column flange and web,
or other)
d. Depth

CHAPTER!) Structural Steel '.}-Hn
e. Weight per foot 7. Workmanship: All workmanship parameters that

exceed AISC, RCSC and A WS rcquiremenLs, pc.:rtim:nl
f. Flange thickness
to the specific connection under consideration, such as:
g. Material specification
a. Surface ronghness of thermal cut or ground edgcs
h. Width-thickness ratio of cross-section elements
b. Cutting tolerances
1. Lateral bracing
c. Weld reinforcement or contouring
j. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
connection under consideration d. Presence of holes, fasteners or welds for
attachments
3. Heam (or link) column relations:
8. Additional connection details: All variahles pertinent lo
a. Panel zone strength
the specific connection under consideration, as
b. Doubler plalc attachment details established hy the CPRP
c. Column-beam (or link) moment ratio
B-1.5 Design Procedure
4. Continuity plates:
A comprehensive design procedure must be available for a
a. Identification of conditions under which continuity prequalified connecLion. The design procedure must address
plates are required all applicable limit states within the limits of
prequalification.
b. Thickness, width and depth
c. Allachmcnt details ll-t.6 Prequalit1cation Record
5. Welds: A prcqualiiicd connection shall be provided with a written

prequalification record with the following information:
a. Location, extent (including returns), type (CJP,
PJP, fillet, etc.) and any reinforcement or
I. General description of the prequalified connection and
contouring required
drawings that clearly identify key features and
b. Filler metal classification strength and notch components of the connection
toughness
2. Description of the expected behavior of the connection
c. Details and treatment of weld backing and weld in the elastic aqd inelastic ranges of behavior, intended
tabs location(s) of inelastic action, and a description of limit
states controlling the strength and deformation capacity
d. Weld access holes: size, geometry and finish
of the connection
e. Welding quality control and quality assurance
3. Listing of systems for which connection is prequalified:
beyond that described in Section 18, including the
SMF, JMF, or F.RF
Non Destructive Testing (NDT) method,
inspection frequency, acceptance criteria and 4. Listing of limits for all prequalification variables listed
documentation requirements in Section B-1.4.
5. Listing of demand critical welds
6. Holts:
6. Definition or the region of the connection that
a. Holt diameter comprises the protected zone
h. Bolt grade: ASTM A325, A490, or other 7. Detailed description of the design procedure for the
c. Installation requirements: pretensioned, snug-tight, connection, as required in Section B-1.5.
or other 8. List of references of test reports, research reports and
d. Hole type: standard, oversize, short-slot, long-slot, other publications that provided the basis for
or other prcqualificaLion
e. Hole fabrication method: drilling, punching, suh- 9. Summary of quality control and quality assurance
punching and reaming, or other procedures
f. Other parameters pertinent to the specific

connection under consideration

The following documents shall be available for review hy

B-2. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN the engineer-of-record or dcsignee prior to fabrication or
erection, as applicable, unless specified to be submitted:
B-2.1 Scope
I. Material test reports for structural steel, bolts, shear
Quality Control (QC) and Quality Assurance (QA) shall be connectors, and welding materials
provided as specified in this Section.
2. Inspection procedures
Visual welding inspection and Non Destructive Testing
(NDT) shall be conducted in accordance with a written
3. Nonconforrnance procedure
practice by personnel 4ualified in accordance with Section
B-6. 4. Material control procedure
User Note: Section B-6, Section B-6.3 contains items to be
5. Bolt installation procedure
considered in determining the qualification requirements for
welding inspectors and NDT technicians.
6. Welder Performance Qualification Records (WPQR),
including any supplemental testing requirements
B-2.2 Inspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel
7. QC Inspector qualifications
Bolting inspct:lion shall be conducted in accordance with a
written practice by qua Ii lied personnel.
B-2.4 Quality Assurance Agency Documents
8-2.3 Contractor Documents
The agency responsible for quality assurance shall submit
the following documents lo the authority having
The following documents shall be submitted for review by
jurisdiction, the engineer-of-record, and the owner or
the enginecr-o{:.record or <lcsignee, prior to fabrication or
owner's dcsignee:
erection, as applicable:
1. Shop drawings 1. QA agency's written practices for the monitoring and
t:ontrol of the agency's operations. The written practice
2. Erection drawings
shall include:
3. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS), which shall
specify all applicable essential variables of A WS [)I. I a. The agency's procedures for the select.ion and
and the following, as applicable administratiol). of inspection personnel, describing
the training, experience and examination
a. power source ( constant t:un-ent or constant voltage)
requirements for qualification and ce11ificalion of
b. for demand critical welds, electrode manufacturer inspection personnel, and
and trade name
b. The agency's inspection procedures, including
4. Copies of the manufacturer's typical t:ertificate of
general inspection, material controls, and visual
confonnance fur all electrodes, lluxes and shielding
welding inspection
gasses to be used. Certificates of confonnance shall
satisfy the applicable A WS AS requirements.
2. Qualifications of management and QA personnel
5. For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's designated for the project
certifications that the filler metal meets the
supplemental notch toughness requirements, as 3. Qualification records for Inspectors and NDT
applicable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not technicians designated for the project
supply such supplemental certifications, the contractor
shall have the necessary testing perfonned and provide 4. NDT procedures and equipment calibration records for
the applicable test rep011s. NDT to he performed and c4uipment to be used for the
6. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog data for project
SMAW, FCI\.W and GMA W composite (cored) filler
metals to be used. The data sheets shall describe the 5. Daily or weekly inspection reports
product, limitations of use, recommended or typical
welding parameters, and storage and exposure 6. Non-conformance reports
requirements, including baking, if applicable.

Cl·I/\P.I ff< b ~3tructur,JI SIP.HI r,-195
B-2.5 Inspection Points and Frequencies Magnetic partidc testing shall be performed by QA
according lo the procedures prescribed in Section H-6,
Inspection points and frequencies of Quality Control (QC) Section R-6.2.
and Quality ;\ssurance (QA) tasks anti documentation for
the Seismic Load Re.~isting System (SLRS) shall he as 2. Required NOT
pruvitled in the following tables.
a. k-Arca NOT
The following entri1.:s ari.; us1.:d in the tables:
When welding of doubk:r plates, continuity plates.
Observe (0) - The inspector shall observe thcsi.; fum:tions or stilleners has been pcrfonned in the k-arca, the
on a random, daily basis. Welding operations need not be web shall he tested for cracks using Magnetic
delayed pending observations. Particle Testing (MT). The MT inspection area
shall include the k-arca hasc metal within 75 mm
Perform (P) - These inspections shall he p1.:rformed prior LU of the weld.
the final acceptance or the item. Where a task is noted to be
performed by both QC and QA, it shall he permitted to h. C.TP Groovi.; Weld NOT
coordinate the inspection function between QC and QA su
that the inspection fonctions need be performed by only one Ultrasonic testing shall be performed on I 00
party. Where QA is to rely upon inspection functions percent of CJP groove welds in materials 8 mm
p1.:rfonned by QC, the approval of the engineer-of-record thick or greater. Ultrasonic testing in materials less
and the authority having jurisdiction is required. than 8 mm thick is not required. Magnetic pa11icle
testing shall he performed on 25 percent of all
Document (D) - The inspector shall prepare reports beam-lo-column CJP groove welds.
indicating that the work has been performed in accordance
with the contract documents. The report need not prov·idc c. Base Met.ti NDT for Lamellar Tearing and
detailed measurements for joint fit-up, WPS sctlings, Laminations
completed welds, or other individual items listed in the
Tables in Sections H-2.5.1, 13-2.5.3, or 13-2.5.4. For shop After joint completion, base metal thicker than 38
fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the mm loaded in tension in the through thickness
piece inspected. For field work, the report shall indicate the direction in tee and corner joints, wh1.:re the
reference grid lines and Hoor or elevation inspected. Work connected material is greater than 19 mm and
not in compliance with the rnntracl documents and whether contains CJP groove welds, shall he ultrasonically
the noneumpliru1ce has been sar.isfactorily repaired shall he tested for discontinuities behind and adjacent to the
noted in the inspection report. fusion line of such wdds. Any base metal
discontinuities found within t/4 of the swcl
B-2.5.1 Visual Welding Inspection surface shall he accepted or rcjccl1.:d on the basis of
criteria of A WS DI. J Table 6.2, where t is the
Visual inspection of welding shall he the primary method thickness of the pmt subjected to the through-
used to confinn that the procedures, materials, and thickness strain.
workmanship incorporated in construction arc thusi.; that
have heen specified and approved for the project. As a d. Beam Cope and Access Hole NDT
minimum, tasks shall be as follows:
Al welded splices and connections, thermally cut
ll-2.5.2 Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of Welds surfaces of hcam copes and access holes shall be
tested using magnetic particle testing or pcnetrant
Nondestructive testing of welds shall he performed by testing, when the Ilange thickness exceeds 38 mm
quality assurance personnel. for rolled shapes, or when the weh thickness
exceeds 38 mm for huilt-up shapes.
I. Procedures
Ultrasonic testing shall be perfonned by QA according

to the procedures prescribed in Section R-6, Section B-
6. l.
Nc.1tional Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition. 2015

e. Reduced Beam Section Repair NDT

Visual Inspection Task QC QA
Magnelic par1icle testing shall be performed on Before Welding Task Doc. Task Doc.
an)' weld and adjnccnt area of the reduced beam Material identification 0 - 0 -
sec!ion (RBS) plastic hinge region that has been (Tvoe/Grade)
repaired by wcldiog, or on 1he base metal of the Fit-up of Groove Welds
RBS plaslic hinge region if a sharp notch has been (includingjoint geometry)
removed by grinding. - Joint oreoaration
- Dimensions (alignment,
f. Weld Tab Removal Sites root opening, root face, PIO** - 0 -
bevel)
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on lhe - Cleanliness {condition of
end of welds from which the weld tabs have been steel surfaces)
removed, except for continuity plate weld tabs. - Tacking (tack weld
quality and location)
g. Reduction of Percentage of Ultrasonic Testing - Backing type and fit (if P/0** - 0 -
aeel icable)
The amount of ultrasonic testing is permitted to be Configuration and finish of 0 - 0 -
reduced if approved by the engineer-of-record and access holes
the authority having jurisdiction. The Fit-up ofFillet Welds
nondestructive testing rate for an individual welder - Dimensions 9 alignment,
or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, gaps at rout)
provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be 5 - Cleanliness 9 condition of P/0** - 0 -
percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or steel surfaces)
welding operator. A sampling of at least 40 - Tacking (tack weld
completed welds for a job shall be made for such aualitv and location)
reduclion evaluation. Reject rate is the number or **Following performance of this inspection task for ten
welds containing rejectablc defects divided by the welds to be made by a given welder, with the welder
number of welds completed. For evaluating the demonstrating adequate understanding of requirements and
reject rate of continuous welds over l m in length possession of skills and tools to verify these items, the
where the effective throat thickness is 25 mm or Perform designation of this task shall be reduce to Observe,
less, each 300 nun increment or fraction thereof and the welder shall perform this task, the task shall be
shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the returned to Perfom1 uqtil such time as the Inspector has
reject rate on continuous welds over 1 m in length reestablished adequate assurance that the welder will
where the effective throat thickness is greater than pcrfonn the inspection tasks listed.
25 mm, each 150 mm of length or fraction thereof
shall be considered one weld.
h. Reduction of Percentage of Magnetic Particle

Testing
The amount of MT on CJP groove welds is

permitted to be reduced if approved by the
engineer-of-record and the authority having
jurisdiction. The MT rate for an individual welder
or \.Velding operator may be reduced to 10 percent,
provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be S
percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or
welding operator. A sampling of at least 20
completed welds for a job shall be made for such
reduction evaluation. Reject rate is the number of
welds containing rejectable defects divided by the
number of welds completed. This reduction is not
permitted on welds in the k-area, at repair sites,
weld tab and backing removal sites and access
holes.

Visual Inspection Task QC QA Visual Inspection Task QC QA

During Welding Task Doc. Task Doc. After Welding Task Ooc. Task Doc.
WPS followed Welds cleaned 0 - 0 -
- Setting on welding Welder identification
equipment legible
0 - 0 -
- Travel speed Verify size, length, and
- Selected welding location of welds
0 - 0 -
materials Visually inspect welds to
- Shielding gas type/flow acceotance criteria
rate 0 - 0 - - Crack porhibition
- Preheat aonlied - Weld/base-metal fusion
- lnterpass temperature - Crater cross-section p D p D
maintained (min./max.) - Weld profiles
- Proper position (F, V,H, - Weld size
OH) - Undercut
- Intermix of filler metals - Porosity
avoided unless approved Placement of reinforcement
Use of qualified welders 0 - 0 - p D p D
fillets
Control and handling of Backing bars removed and
welding consumables weld tabs removed and
0 - 0 - p D p D
- Packaging finished (if required)
- Exposure control Repair activities p - p D
Environmental conditions
- Wind soeed within limits 0 - 0 -
- Precipitation and Inspection Task Prior to QC QA
temperature Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
Welding techniques Proper bolts selected for
- lnterpass and final 0 - 0 - the ioint detail
0 - 0 -
cleaning Proper bolting procedure
- Each pass within profile selected for ioint detail
0 - 0 -
Imitations Connecting clements are
- Each pass meets qua Iity
0 - 0 - fabricated properly,
requirements including the appropriate
No welding over cracked faying surface condition 0 - 0 -
tacks
0 - 0 - and hole preparation, if
specified, meets applicable
requirements
Pre-installation verification
testing conducted for p D 0 D
fastener assemblies an<l
method used
Proper storage provided for
bolts, nuts, washers, and 0 - 0 -
other fastener components

lnspeelion Task During QC QA B-2.5.4 Other Inspections

Bolting Task Doc. Task
-
Doc.
Fastener assemblies placed Where appl icable, the following inspection shall be
in all holes and washers (if performed:
required) arc properly
0 - 0 -
positioned Other Inspection Task QC QA
JoinL brought to the snug Tnsk Doc. Task Doc.
tight condition prior to thw 0 - 0 - Reduce beam section
pretensioning operation (RBS) requirements, if
Fastener components not a licablc p D p l)
returnes by the wrench 0 - 0 - - contour and finish

prevented from rotating - dimensional tolerances
Bolts are pretensioned Protected zone no holes
progress systematically and unapproved
from most rigid point
0 - 0 - attachments made by
p D p 0
toward free edges contractor
Inspection Task After QC QA

Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
Document accepted and p D p 0
rejected connections
3. Documentation
All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop

fabrication, the NOT report shall identify the tested weld by
piece mark and location in the piece. For Held work, the
NDT report shall identify the tested weld by location in the
structure, piece mark. and location in the piece.
B-2.S.3 Inspection of Bolting
Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary

method used to confirm that the procedures, materials, and
workmanship incorporaLed in construction are those that
have been specified and approved for the project. As a
minimum, the tasks shall be as follows:

CHAF'H::R 5 Structural SteHI 5 199
B-3. SEISMIC DESIGN User Note: The design coefficients and parameters
presented in this appendix are taken from the 2003 NEHRP
COEFFICIENTS AND Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New
APPROXIMATE PERIOD Buildings and Other Structures. TI1is appendix will be
PARAMETERS deleted from these Provisions once SEiiASCE 7 and this
codes add the BRBF and SPSW to their list of acceptable
structural systems. It is expected that such parameters will
B-3.1 Scope
be included in an appendix to SEI/ ASCE 7 which is
expected to he published in mid to late 2005.
This appendix contains design coefficients, syirn.:m
limitations and design parameters for Seismic Load
B-3.2 Symbols
Resisting Systems (SLRS) that are included in these
Provisions but not yet defined in this code for Huckling-
The following symbols are used in this appendix.
Restraincd Hraced Frames (IlKHF) and Special Plate Shear
Walls (SPSW). The values presented in Tables B-3-1 and
B-3-2 in this appendix shall only he used where neither the
Cd Deflection amplification factor
NSCP code nor SEI/ASCE 7 contain su1.;h values. C,., x Parameters used for determining !he approximate
fundamental period
00 Syslem uvcrslrcngth factor
R Response modification coefficient
Table B-3. I Design Coefficients and factors for Basic Seismic Load Resisting Systems
System Height J.imit

Response Deflection
Basic Seismic Over Seismic Design Category
Modification Amplification
Load Kesisting Strength
Coefficient Fat:tor B&C E F
System Factor D
R Cu (Zone 2) (Zone 4) (Zone 4)
.a..
Building Frame Systems
Buckling-Restrained Braced
Frames, non-moment-
7 2 5 1/2 160 160
resisting beam-column NL 160
connections
Special Plate Shear Walls 7 2 6 NL 160 160 100
Ruckling-Rcstraincd Braced
Frames, moment-resist mg 8 2 1/2 5 NL 160 160 100
beam-column connections
Dual Systems with Special Moment Frames Capable ofResisLini': al Least 25% of the Prescribed Seismic Forces
Buckling-Restrained .Rraced
Frame
8 2 1/2 5 NL NL NL NL
Special Plate Shear Walls 8 2 1/2 6 1/2 NL NL NL NL
N1'-=Not Limited)
~-
5-?.00 CHAP.I ER ~-; - Stn1r:turri l Steel
B-4. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS Inelastic rotation. The permanent o r plastic portion of' the
rotation angle hctween a beam and the column or between a
OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN AND LINK- link and the column of the test specime n, measured in
TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS radians. The inelastic rotation shall be computed hased on
an analysis of tc~t specimen deformations. Sources of
B-4.J Scope inelastic rotation include yielding of members, yielding of
connection clements a nd connectors, and slip between
This appendix includes requirements for q1rnlifying cyclic members and connec tion clements. For beam-to-column
tests of heam-tu-colu mn moment connections in special and moment connections in special and intermediate moment
intennediatc moment frames and link-to-column frames, ine lastic rotation is computed based upon the
connections in eccentrically braced frames, when required assumption that inelastic action is concentrated a t a single
in these Provisions. The purpose of the testing desc ri bed in point located nt the interseclion of the centerline of the
this appendix is to provide evidence that a beam-lo-column bc::im with the centerline of the column. For link-lo-column
connection or a link-to-column connection satis(ies the connections in eccentrically braced frames, ine lai,tic
requirements for strength and interstory drift angle or link rotation shall be computed based upo n the assumption that
rotation angle in these Provisions. Alternative testing inelastic action is concentrated at a single point located at
requirements arc permitted when approved by the Engincer- the intersection of the centerline o f the link with the face of
ol~Record and the authority having jurisdiction. the column.
This appendix provides minimum recommendations for Prototype. The connections, member sizes, steel prope1tics,
simplified test conditions. and other design, detailing, and construction features to be
used in the actua l building frame.
Table B-4.1 Values of Approximate Period Pammeters
Test specimen. A portion of a frame used for laboratory
Cr and x
testing, intended to model the prototype.
Structure Type Cr x
Buc kline.-Restrained Braced Frames 0.03 0.75 Test setup. The s upporting fi xtures, loading equipment, and
Special Plate Shear Walls 0.02 0.75 lateral bracing used to support and load the test specimen.
Values of Approximate Period Parameters from (AISC) Test subassemblagc. T he comhination of the tes t 5pccimen
and pertinent portions ufthe test setup.
User Note: The values in this table arc intended to be used
in the same ways as those in Table 9.5.2.2 ofSEUASCE 7. Total link rotation angle. The relative displacement of one
end of the link with respect to the other end (measured
B-4.2 Symbols transverse to the longitudinal axis of the undeformed link),
divided by the link length . The total link rotation angle shall
'fhe numbers in parentheses alter t he definition of a symbol include both elastic and inelas tic components or
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first deformation of the link and the members attached to the link
used. ends.
8 lntcrstory drift angle (Section 13-4.6) B-4.4 Test Subassemblage Requirements

y total T otal link rotation angle (Section H-4.6)
The test subasscmblagc sha ll replicate as closely as is
practical the conditions thal will occur in the prototype
B-4.3 Definitions
during earthquake loading. The test subasscmblagc sha ll
include the following leaturcs:
Complete loading cycle. A cycle of rotation taken from
zero force tu zero force, including one positive and one
1. The test specimen shall consist of at least a single
negative peak.
column with beams or links attached to one or both
sides ofthc column.
lntcrstory drift angle. lnterstory displacement divided by
story height, radians.
2. Points of inflection in the test assemblage shall
coincide approximately with the anticipated points of
inflection in the Prototype under earthquake loading.

CHAPTF-R 5 Structural Steel 5-201
3. Lateral bracing of the test .subassemblage is permitted B-4.5.3 Connection Details

near load application or reaction points as needed to
provide lateral stability of the test subassemb!age. The connection details used in the test specimen shall
Additional lateral bracing of the lest suhassemblagc is represent the prototype connection details as closely as
not permitted, unless it replicates lateral bracing to be possible. The connection elements used in the lest specimen
used in the prototype. shall be a foll-scale representation of the connection
elements used in the prototype, for the member sizes being
B-4.5 Essential Test Variables tested.
The lest specimen shall replicate as closely as is practical B-4.5.4 Continuity Plates
the pertinent design, detailing, construction features, and
material properties of the prototype. The following variables The size and connection details of continuity plates used in
shall be replicated in the test specimen. the test specimen shall be proportioned to match the size
and connection details of continuity plates used in the
B-4.5.1 Sources of Inelastic Rotation prototype connection as closely as possible.
Inelastic rotation shall be developed in the test specimen by Design Coefficients and Factors for basic Seismic Load
inelastic action in the same members and connection Resisting Systems From (AISC)
elements as anticipated in the prototype (in other words, in
the beam or link, in the column panel zone, in the column B-4.5.5 Material Strength
outside of the panel zone, or in connection elements) within
the limits described below. The percentage of the total The following additional requirements shall he satisfied for
inelastic rotation in the test specimen that is developed in each member or connection element of the test specimen
each member or connection clement shall be within 25 that supplies inelastic rotation by yielding:
percent of the anticipated percentage of the total inelastic
rotation in the prototype that is developed in the I. The yield stress shall be determined by material tests on
corresponding member or connection element. the actual materials used for the test specimen, as
specified in Section B-4.8. The use of yield stress
8-4.S.2 Size of Members values that arc reported on certified mill test reports are
not permitted to be used for purposes of this Section.
The size of the beam or link used in lhc test specimen shall
be within the following limits: 2. The yield stress of the beam shall not be more than 15
percent below RyFy for the grade of steel to he used
I. The depth of the test beam or link shall be no less than for the corresponding elements of the prototype.
90 percent of the depth of the prototype beam or link. Columns and connection elements with a tested yiekl
stress shall not be more than 15 percent above or below
2. The weight per foot of the test beam or link shall be no
R yFy for the grade of steel to be used for the
less than 75 percent of the weight per foot of the
prototype beam or link. corresponding elements of the prototype. RyFy shall
be determined in accordance with Section 519.2.
The size of the column used in the test specimen shall
properly represent the inelastic action in the column, as B-4.5.6 Welds
per the requirements in Section B-4.5.J. In addition, the
depth of the test column shall be no less than 90 percent Welds on the test specimen shall satisfy the following
oflhe depth of the prototype column. requirements:
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this I. Welding shall he pe1fo1med in strict conformance with
Section shall be permitted subject to qualified peer Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) as required in
review and approval by the authority having AWS Dl.1. The WPS essential variables shall meet the
jurisdiction. requirements in A WS D l.1 and shall be within lhc
parameters established by the filler-metal manufacturer.
The tensile strength of the welds used in the tested
assembly and the Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
used in the tested assembly shall be determined by
material tests as specified in Section B-4.8.3. The use
of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that arc

reported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of

confonnancc is not permitted to be used for purposes of
this section, unless the report includes n:sults specific 3. When inelastic rotation is to be developed either by
to Section D-7 requirements. yielding or by slip within a bolted portion of lhc
connection, the method used to make the bolt holes
2. The specifi ed minimum tensile strength of the filler (drilling, sub-punching and reaming, or other) in the
metal used for the test specimen shall be the same as test specimen shall be the same as that to be used in the
that to be used for the corresponding prototype welds. corresponding bolt holes in the prototype.
The tested tensile strength of lhe tcsl specimen weld
shall not be more tha n 125 MPa above the tensile 4. Holts in the tcsl specimen shall have the same
strength classification of the filler metal specification installation (pretensioned or other) and faying surface
specified for the prototype. preparation (no specified slip resistance, Class A or R
slip resistance, or other) as that to be used for the
3. The specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler corresponding bolts in the prototype.
metal used for the test specimen shall not exceed the
specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler metal B·4.6 Loading History
to be used for the corresponding prototype welds. The
tested CVN toughness of the test specimen weld s hall B-4.6.1 General R equiremen ts
not be more than 50 percent, nor 34 kJ, whichever is
greater, above the minimum CVN toughness that will The test specimen shall be s ubjected to cydic loads
be specified for the prototype. according to the requirements prescribed in Section Section
13-4.2 for beam-to-column moment connections in special
4. The welding positions used to make the welds on the and intermediate moment frames, and according to the
test ~'pecimcn shall be the same as those to be used for requirements prescribed in Section Section B-4.3 for link.-
the prototype welds. to-colu mn connections in eccentrically braced frames.
5. Details of weld backing, weld Labs, access holes, and Loading sequences other than those specified in Sections
similar items used for the test specimen welds shall be Section B-4.2 and Section B-4.3 may be used when they are
the same as those to be used for the corresponding demonstrated to be of equivalent or greater severity.
prototype welds. W eld backing and weld tabs shall not
be removed from the test specimen welds unless the B-4.6.2 Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Column
corresponding weld backing and weld tabs are removed Moment Connections
from the prototype welds.
Qualifying cyclic tests or
beam-to-column moment
6. Methods of inspection and nondest ructi ve testing and connections in special and intermediate moment frames
standards of acceptance used for test specimen welds shall be conducted by controlling the intcrstory dri fl angle,
shall be the same as lhose to be used for the prototype 0, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below:
weld'>.
I. 6 cycles ate c.: 0.00375 rad
B-4.S.7 Bolts
2. 6 cycles at 8 = 0.005 rad
The bolted portions of the test specimen shall replicate the
bolted portions or the prototype connection as closely as 3. 6 cycles ate =0.0075 rad
possible. Additionally, bolted portions of the test specimen
shall satisfy the following requirements: 4. 4 cycles at 0 = O.Gl rad
1. The bolt grade (for example, ASTM A325 , A325 M, 5. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.015 rad
ASTM A490, A490M, ASTM Fl 852) used in the test
specimen s hall be th e same as that to be used for the 6. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.02 rad
prototype, except that ASTM A325 bolts may be
s ubstituted for ASTM F.1852 bolts, and vice versa. 7. 2 cycles at 0 =- 0.03 rad
2. The type and orien tation of bolt holes (standard, 8. 2 cycles at 0 = 0.04 rad
oversize, short slot, long slot, or other) used in the test
specimen shall be the same as those to he used for the
corresponding bolt holes in the prototype.

Cl IAPT( r-i !i St,,u:tu1c1t Steel 5-203
based upon tesling that 1s conducted in al:cordance wilh

Conlinue loading aL incrernenls or 8 = 0. 01 rntlian, wilh Section U-4.8.2.
two cycles of loading at each step.
Tl:nsion tl:sling shall he rnnductl:d and reported for the
B-4.6.3 Loading Sequence for Link-to-Column following portions of the test specimen:
Connections
I. Flange(s) and web(s) of beams and columns at standard
Qualifying cyclic tests of' link-to·column momenl locations.
connection!; in eccentrically hraccd frames shall be
conducted by controlling the total link rotation angle, 2. Any element of the connection thal supplies inelastic
Ytotal, imposed on the test specimen, as follows: rotation hy yielding.
I. 6 cycles at y total = 0.00375 rad B-4.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing for Struclurnl
Steel
2. 6 cycles at y t 11tal = 0.005 rad
Tension tc!iling shall be conducted in accordance wilh
ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM A370, and ASTM L::8, with the
3. 6 cycles al y total = 0.0075 rad following exceptions:
4. 6 cycles al y total= 0.0 I rad 1. The yield stress, F y, that is reported from the test shall
be based upon the yield strength definition in ASTM
5. 4 cycles al y total = 0.015 rad A370, using the ol'Jsct ml:thod al 0.002 strain.
6. 4 cycles at Ytotal - 0.02 rad 2. The loading rate for lhe tension lest shall replicate, as
closely as practical, the loading rate to be used for the
7. 2 cycles at y total = 0.03 rad test specimen.
8. I cycle at Ytotal = 0.04 rad B-4.8.3 Weld Metal Testing Requirements
9. I cycle at Ytotul - 0.05 rad The lensik strength of the welds used in the tested assembly
and the CVN toughness used in the tested assembly shall be
10. I cycle al Ytotal - 0.07 rnd detem1ined by material tests as specified in Section B-7.
The use of tensile strength and CVN toughness values thal
are repor!ed on the mam1fa.cturer's typical certificate of
1l. I cycle at Ytotal = 0.09 rad conformance is not permitted to he used for purposes of this
section, unless that report includes results specific ro
Continue loading at increments of Yt 11tal = 0.02 radian, Section Il-7 requirements.
with one cycle of loading at each step.
A single test plate may he used if the WPS for lhe lest
R-4.7 Instrumentation specimen welds is within plus/minus 0.8 kJ/mm of the WPS
for the test plate.
Sufficient instrnmentation shall be provided on !he lest
specimen to permit measurcmenl or calculation of the Tensile specimens and CVN specimens shall be prepared in
quantities listed in Section 8-4.9. accordance with ANSI/A WS 84.0 Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds.
R-4.8 Materials Tcstini: Requirements
B-4.9 Test Reporting Requirements
8-4.8.1 Tension Testing Requirements for
Structural Steel For each test specimen, ,t wriuen test report meeting the
requirements or the authority having jurisdiction and the
Tension tcsling shall be conducted 011 samples of steel laken requirements ur this Section shall be prepared. The rcpor1
from the material adjacenl lo each lest specimen. Tcnsiun- shall thoroughly document all key features and results or lhc
test results from l:crliiied mill test repo11s shall be reported test. The report shall include the following information:
but arc not permitted to be used in place of sped men testing
for !he purposes of this Section. Tension-test results shall be I. A drawing or clear description of the test
subasscmhlagc, including key dimensions, boundary
National Structural Cude of the Philippines Vol1.11rn~ I, 7th Edition, 201 ~

conditions at loading and reaction points, and location welding inspection reports.
of lateral braces.
Additional drawings, data, and discussion of the test
2. A drawing of the connection detail showing member specimen or test results are permitted to be included in the
sizes, grades of steel, the si:.i:es of all connection report.
elements, welding details including filler metal, the sile
and location of holt holes, the size and grade of ho Its, B-4.10 Acceptance Criteria
and all other pertinent details of the connection.
The test !>pecimen must satisfy the strength and interstory
3. A listing of all other essential variables for the test drift. angle or link rotation angle requirements of these
specimen, as listed in Section 8-4. Provisions for the special moment frame, intermediate
moment frame, or eccentrically braced frame connection, as
4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or applicable. The test specimen must sustain the required
displace ment history of the test specimen. intcrstory driH angle or link rotation angle for at least one
complete loading cycle.
5. A listing of all demand critical welds.
6. Definition of the region of the connection that

comprises the protected zones.
7. A plot of the applied load versus the displacement of

the test specimen. The displacement reported in this
ploL shall be measured al or near the point of load
application. The locations on the tesl specimen where
the loads and displacements were measured shall be
clearly indicated.
8. A plot of beam moment versus intcrstory driH angle for

beam-to-column moment connections; or a plot of link
shear force versus link rotation angle for link-to-
column connections. For beam-to-column connections,
the beam moment and the interstory drift angle shall be
computed with respect to !he centerline of the column.
9. The interstory drift angle and the total inelastic rotation

developed by the test specimen. The components of the
test specimen contributing lo U1e total inelastic rotation
due to yielding or slip shall be identified. The portion
of the total inelastic rotation contributed by each
component of the test specimen shall be reported. The
method used to compute inelastic rotations shall be
clearly shown.
l 0. A chronological listing of significant test observations,

including observations of yielding, slip, instability, and
fracture of any portion of the test specimen as
applicable.
11. The controlling failure mode for the test specimen. If

the test is terminated prior to failure, the reason for
terminating the test shall be clearly indicated.
12. The results of the material tests specified in Section 8-

4.8.
13. The Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and
'.
r-HAPTFR :, Structuml Steel 5-205
8-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS B-5.3 Definitions
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED Sec Section for definitions.

BRACES
R-5.4 Suhassemhlagc Test Specimen
B-5.1 Scope
The subassemblage test specimen shall satisfy the following
This appendix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic requirements:
tests of individual buckling-restrained hraces and buckling-
restrained brace subasscmhlages, when required in these I. The mechanism for accommodating inelastic rotation in
provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is the subassemblage test specimen hracc shall be the
to provide evidence that a buckling-restrained hrace same as that of the prototype. The rotational
satisfies the requirements for strength and inelastic deformation demands on the suhassemblage test
deformation by these provisions; it also permits the specimen brace shall he equal to or greater than those
determination of maximum brace forces for design of of the prototype.
adjoining elements. The purpose of testing of the brace
subassemblage is to provide evidence that the brace-design 2. The axial yield strength of the steel core, P ysc, of the
can satisfactorily accommodate the deformation and brace in the subasscmblage test specimen shall not he
rotational demands associated with the design. Further, the less than that of' the prototype where both strengths arc
suhassemblage test is intended lo demonstrate that the based on the core area, Aw multiplied by the yield
hysteretic behavior of the brace in the subassemblagc is strength as determined from a coupon test.
consistent with tl1at of the individual brace elements tested
uniaxially. 3. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel
core projection of the subasscmblagc test specimen
Alternative testing requirements are permitted ,,,;hen brace shall be the same as that of the brace in the
approved by the engineer-or-record and the authority having prototype.
j uris<liction.
4. The same documented design methodology shall be
This appendix provides only minimum recommendations used for design of the subassemblage as used for the
Ior simpli!icd test conditions. prototype, to allow comparison of the rotational
dcfonnation demands on the subassemblage brace to
B-5.2 Symbols the prototype. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol parts of this system.
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first
used. 5. The calculated margins of salety for the prototype
connection design, steel core projection stability,
Deformation quantity used to control loading of overall buckling and other relevant subassemblage test
the test specimen (total brace end rotation for the specimen brace construction details, excluding the
subassemblage test specimen; total brace axial gusset plate, for the prototype, shall equal or exceed
deformation for the brace test specimen) (Section those of the subasscmblage lest specimen construction.
B-5.6).
Value of deformation quantity, 4.b, cmTcspon<ling 6. Lateral bracing of the subassemhlage test specimen
to the design story drift (Section B-5.6). shall replicate the lateral bracing in the prototype.
Value of deformation quantity, Jl.b, at iirst
significant yield oftest specimen (Sc<.:tion B-5.6). 7. The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be
manufactured in accordance with the same quality
control and assurance processes and procedures.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this

section shall he permitted subject to qualified peer
review and approval by the authority having
jurisdiction.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th E:dition, 2015

B-5.5 Brace Test Spedmen 8-5.S.4 Connection Details
The brace test specimen shall replicate as closely as is The connection details used in the brace lest specimen shall
practical the pertincnl design, detailing, construction represent the prototype connection details as closely as
features, and material properties of the prototype. practical.
8-5.5.1 Design of Brace Test Specimen B-5.5.5 Materials
The same documented design methodology shall be used for I. Steel core: The fo llowing requirements shall he
the brace test s pecimen and the prototype. The design satisfied for the steel core of the brace test specimen:
calculations shall de monstrate, at a minimum, the following
requirements: a. The specified minimum yield stress of the brace
test specimen steel core shall be the same as that of
I. The calculated margin of safety for stability against the prototype.
overall buckling for tl1e prototype shall equal or exceed
that of the brace test specimen. b. The measured yield stress of the material of the
steel core in the brace test specimen shall be at
2. The calculated margins of safety for the brace test least 90 percent of thnt of the prototype as
specimen and the prototype shall account for detcnnined {rom coupon tests.
difterences in material properties, including yield and
ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness. c. The specified minimum ultimate stress and strain
of' the brace test specimen steel core shall not
lJ-S.5.2 Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen exceed those of the prototype.
The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be 2. Buckling-restraining mechanism
manufactured in accordan.c e with the same quality control
and assurance processes and procedures. Materials used in Lhe buckling-restraini ng mechanism
of the brace test specimen shall be the same as those
B-5.5.3 Similarity of Brace Test Specimen and used in the prototype.
Prototype
B-5.5.6 Connectiuns
The brace test specimen shall meet the following
requirements: The welded, bolted, and pinned joints on the test specimen
shall replicate those on the prototype as close as practical.
I. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel
core shall he the same as that orthe prototype. 8-5.6 Loading History
2. The axial yield strengU1 of the steel core, Pysc , of the B-5.6.1 General Requirements
brace test specimen shall not vary by more than 50
percent from that of' the prototype where both strengths The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads
are based on the core area, Ase:, multiplied by the yield according to the requirements prescribed in Sections B-
strength as determined from a coupon test. 5.6.2 and B-5.6.3. Additional increments of loading beyond
those described in Section 13-56.3 arc permitted. Each cycle
3. The material for, and method of, separation between shall include a Jull tension and full compression excursion
the steel core and the buckling restraining mechanism to the prescribed dcfonnation.
in the brace test specimen shall be the same as lhat in
tbe prototype. B-5.6.2 Test Control
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this section The test shall be conducted by controlling the level of axial
shall be permitted subject to qualified peer review and or rotational deformation, .db, imposed on !he test
approval by the authority having jurisdiction. specimen. As an alternate, the maximum rotational
deformation may he applied and maintained as the protocol
is followed for axial defonnation.

B-5.6.3 Loading Sequence B-5.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing
Loads shall be applied to the test specimen to produce the Tension tesling shall be conducted in accordance with
following deformalions, where the deformation is the steel ASTM Mi, ASTM A370, and ASTM 128, with the following
core axial deformation for lhc test spe<.:i1m:11 and the exceptions;
rotational deformation demand for !he suhassernblagc test
specimen brace: I. The yield stress that is reported from lhc test shall be
based upon the yield strength definition in ASTM
I. 2 cycles of loading at the deform al ion cones ponding to A370, using the offact method or0.002 strain.
Llb = Llby
2. The loading rate for the tension lest shall replicate. as
2. 2 cycles orloading at the deformation corresponding to closely as is practical, lhc loading rate used for the test
Lib = 0. SO.db,,. specimen.
3. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to 3. The coupon shall he machined so thal its longitudinal
axis is parallel lo the longitudinal axis of the steel core.
.1,, = 1..1b 111
4. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation co1Tesponding lo B-5.9 Test Reporting Requirements

Llb = 1. 5L1bm For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the
requirements of this Section shall he prepared. The report
5. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding lo
shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the
.1 11 = 2. OL1bm test. The report shall include the following information:
6. Additional complete cycles of loading at the l. A drawing or clear description or lhe test specimen,
deformation corresponding to Llb = 1. 5Llbm as including key dimensions, boundary conditions at
required for lhc brace test specimen to achieve a loading and reaction points, and location or lateral
cumulative inelastic axial deformation of at least 200 bracing, if any.
times lhe yield deformation (not required for lhc
subassemblage test specimen). 2. A drawing of the connection details showing member
sizes, grades of steel, the sizes of all connection
The design story drift shall not he taken as less than clements, welding details including filler metal, the size
0.0 I times the story height for the purposes of and location of boll or pin holes, the size and grade of
calculating Llb,w Olher loading sequences are connectors, ai1d all other per1inent details or lhe
pcnnitled lo be used to qualify the test specimen when connections.
they are demonstrated to be or equal or greater severity
in tenns of maximum and cumulative inelastic 3. A listing of all other essential variables as listed in
deformation. Seclion 8-5.4 or B-5.5, as appropriate.
B-5.7 Instrumentation 4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or

displacement history.
Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test
specimen lo permit measurement or calculation or the 5. A plot of the applied load versus the deformation, L\b.
quantities listed in Section B-5.9. The method used to detenninc lhe deformations shall
be clearly shown. The locations on the test specimen
B-5.8 Materials Testing Requirements where the loads and deformations "".Crc measured shall
.1
he clearly identified.
R-5.8.1 Tension Testing Requirements
6. A chronological listing of significant test observations,
Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel taken including observations of yielding, slip, instability,
from the same material as lhat used to manufacture the steel transverse displacement along the test specimen and
core. Tension test results from certified mill test reports fracture of any p01tion of the test specimen and
shall be repo1ted but are not permitted lo be used in place of connections, as applicable.
specimen testing for the purposes of this Section. Tension-
test results shall he hased upon testing that is conducted in 7. The results of the material tests specified in Section B-
accordance wilh Section R-5.8.2. 5.8.

8. The manufacturing quality conlrol and quality B-6. WELDING PROVISIONS

assurance plans used for the fahricalion of the test
specimen. These shall be included with the welding B-6.1 Scope
procedure specificalions and welding inspection
reports. This appendix provides additional details regarding welding
and welding inspection, and is included on an interim basis
Additional drawings, data, and discussion or the test pending adoption of such criteria by A WS or other
specimen or test results arc permitted to be included in the accredited organization.
repmt.
B-6.2 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications,
8-5.10 Acceptance Criteria Shop Drawings, and Erection Drawings
At lcasl one subassemblagc test that salisfies the R-6.2.1 Structural Design Drawings and
requirements of Section B-5.4 shall be pcrfonned. Al least Specifications
one brace test that satisfies the requirements of Section B-
4.5 shall be performed. Within the required protocol range Structural design drawings and specifications shall include,
all tests shall satisfy the following requirements: as a minimum, the following information:
I. The plot showing the applied load vs. displacement I. Locations where backup bars are required to be
history shall exhibit stable, repeatable behavior with removed.
positive incremental stiffness.
2. Locations where supplemental fillet welds are required
2. There shall be no fracture, brace instability or brace end when backing is permitted to remain.
connection failure.
3. Locations where fillet welds are used to reinforce
3. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater t11an groove welds or to improve connection geometry.
LJby the maximum tension and compression forces
shall not be less lhan the nominal streni:,'1:h of the core. 4. Locations where weld tabs are required to he removed.
4. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than 5. Splice locations where tapered transitions are required.
ilby the ralio of the maximum compression force to
lhe maximum tension force shall not exceed 1.3. User Note; Bult splices subject to tension greater than 33
percent of the expected yield strength under any load
Other acceptance criteria may be adopted for the brace tcsl combination should have tapered transitions. The stress
specimen or subasscmblage test specimen subject to concentration at a nontapered transition, based upon a 90°
qualified peer review and approval by the authority having comer, could cause local yielding when the tensile stress
jurisdiction. exceeds 33 percent of yield. Lower levels of stress would he
acceptable with the stress concentration from a nontapered
transition.
6. The shape of weld access holes, if a special shape is

required.
7. Joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly

order, welding sequence, welding technique or other
special precautions are required.

CHAPTi::;R ti Slructurnl Stenl 5-209
B-6.2.2 Shop Dn".,.ings R-6.3.3 Nondestructive Testing Technicians
Shop drawings shall include, as a minimum, the following NLJT technicians shall he qualified as follows:
information:
I. In accordance with their employer's written practice
I. Access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish which shall meet or exceed the criteria of the American
requirements. Society for Nondestructive Testing, Inc. SNT TC-I A
Recommended Practice for the Training and Testing of
2. Locations where backing bars arc lo he removed. Nondestnictive Personnel, or of ANSI/ASNT CP- I89,
Standard for the Qualification and Certification or
3. Locations where weld tahs are to be removed. Nondestrnctive Testing Personnel.
4. NOT to be performed hy the fabricator, if any. 2. Ultrasonic Testing for QA may be performed only by
UT technicians certified as ASNT Level m through
B-6.2.3 Erection Drawings examination by !he ASNT, or certified as Level JI by
their employer for tlaw detection. If the engim:cr-of-
Erection drawings shall include, as a minimum, the record approves the use of flaw sizing techniques, UT
following information: technicians shall also be qualified and ce1ti!ied by their
employer for Haw sizing.
I. Locations where backing hars to be removed.
3. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) and Dye Penetrant
2. Locations where supplemental fillets are required when Testing (PT) for QA may he performed only by
backing is permitted to remain. technicians certified as Level Jl by their employer, or
certified as ASNT Level IJI through examination by the
3. Locations where weld tabs arc to he removed. ASNT and cc11ificd hy their employer.
4. Those joints or groups of joints in which a specific B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures
assembly order, welding sequence, welding technique
or other spedal precautions are required. B-6.4.1 Ultrasonic Testing
B-6.3 Personnel Ultrasonic Testing shall be performed according to the

procedures prescribed in A WS 1) I. I Section 6, Pait F
B-6.3.1 QC Welding Inspectors following a writ~en procedure containing the clements
prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F
QC welding inspection personnel shall be associate welding procedures shall be qualified using weld mock-ups having
inspectors ( AW I) or higher, as defined in A WS B5. I l.5 mm-diameter side drilled holes similar to Annex K,
Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors, or Figure K-3.
otherwise qualified under the provisions or A WS D 1.1
Section 6.1.4 and to the satisfaction of the contractor's QC B-6.4.2 Mai.:nctic Particle
plan by the fabricator/erector.
Magnetic particle testing shall be pcrfonncd according to
B-6.3.2 QA Welding Inspectors procedures prescribed in A WS DI.I, following a written
procedure util i7,ing the Yoke Method that confonns to
QA welding inspectors shall he welding inspectors (WI), or ASTM E709.
senior welding inspectors (SWI), as defined in A WS BS. I,
except A Wis may be used under the direct supervision of
Wis, on site and available when weld inspection is being
conducted.
---- -.
B-6.5 Additional Welding Provisions B-6.5.5 Weld Tabs
B-6.5.1 Intermixed Filler Metals Where practicable, weld rnbs shall extend beyond the edge
of the joint a minimum of one inch or the thickness of the
When FCA W-S filler metals are used in combination with part, whichever is greater. Extensions need not exceed
filler metals of other processes, including FCA W-G, a test 50mm.
specimen shall be prepared and mechanical testing shall be
conducted to verify that the notch toughness of the Where used, weld tabs shall be removed to within 3 mm of
combined matciials in the intermixed region of the weld the base metal surface, except at continuity plates where
meets the notch toughness requirements of Section 520.3. I removal to within 6 mm of the plate edge is acceptable, and
and, if required, the notch toughness requirements for the end of the weld finished. Removal shall be by air carbon
demand critical welds of Section 520.3.2. arc cutting (CAC-A), grinding, chipping, or thermal cutting.
The process shall he controlled to minimize errant gouging.
8-6.5.2 Filler Metal .Diffusible Hydrogen The edges where weld tabs have been removed shall be
linished to a surface roughness of 13 µm or belier.
Welding clcclrodcs and electrode-nux combinations shall Grinding to a nush condition is not required. The contour or
meet the rcqu irem ems for H 16 ( 16 mL maximum di ffusiblc the weld end shall provide a smooth transition, free ot
hydrogen per I00 grams deposited weld metal) as tested in nolches and sharp comers. Al T-joints, a minimum radius in
aecordnncc with /\ WS A4.3 Standard Methods for the comer need not be provided. The weld end shall be free
DeLermination or the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of of gouges and notches. Weld defects not greater than 2 mm
MartensiLic. Bainitic, and Fcrritic Steel Weld Metal deep shall be fa ired to a slope not greater than I :5. Olher
Prnduced by Arc Welding. (Exception: GMA W solid weld defects shall be excavated and repaired by welding in
electrodes.) The manufacturer's typical certificate or accordance with an applicable WPS.
conformance shall be considered adequate proof that the
supplied electrode or electrode-flux combination meets this 8-6.5.6 Bottom Flange Welding Sequence
requirement. No testing or tiller metal samples or or
production welds shall be required. When using weld access holes to facilitate CJP groove
welds of beam bottom flanges to column tlangcs or
B-6.5.3 Gas-Shielded Welding Processes continuity plates, the groove weld shall he sequenced as
follows:
GMA W and FCAW-G shall not be performed in winds
exceeding 5 km/hr. Windscreens or other shelters may be I. As far as is practicable, starts and stops shall not be
used to shield the welding operation from excessive wind. placed directly unclcr the beam web.
2. Each layer shall be completed across the full width of

B-6.5.4 Maximum Jnterpnss Temperatures the flange before beginning the next layer.
Maximum interpass temperatures shall not exceed 290 °C, 3. For each layer, the weld starts and stops shall be on the
measured at a distance not exceeding 75 mm from the sta1t opposite side of the beam weh, as compared to U1e
of the weld pass. The maximum interpass temperature may previous layer.
be increased by qualification testing that includes weld
metal and base metal CVN testing using AW S DI. 1 B-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand
Annex Ill. The steel used for the qualification testing shall Critical Welds Only
be of the same type and grade as will be used in production.
8-6.6. l Welding Processes
The maximum heat input lo be used in production shall be
used in the qualification testing. The qualified maximum SMAW, GMA W (except short circuit transfer). FCA W and
interpass temperature shall be the lowest interpass SAW may be used LO fabricate and erect members governed
temperature used for any pass during qualification testing. by this specification. Olher processes may be used, provided
Both weld metal and HAZ shall be tested. The weld metal that one or more oflhe following criteria is mcl:
shall meet all the mechanical properties required by
Section 520.3.1, or those for demand critical welds of I. The process is part of the prequalificcl connection
Section 520.3.2, as applicable. The heal affected tone CVN details, as listed in Section B-1,
toughness shall meet a minimum requirement of 27 J al
2 1 °C with specimens taken al both I and 5 mm from 1hc 2. The process was used to perfonn a connection
fusion line. qualification test in accordance wilh Section H-4, or

CHAPTER 5 Structural SIP.el 5-211
3. The process is approved by the engineer-of-record.

B-7 WELD METAL/WELDING
B-6.6.2 Filler Metal Packaging PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
NOTCH TOUGHNESS
Electrodes shall be provided in packaging that limits the
ability of lhc electrode to absorb moisture. Electrode from VERIFICATION TEST
packaging that has been punctured or lorn shall be dried in
accordance.: with the manufacturer's recommendations. or This appendix provides a proccdure for qualifying the weld
shall not be used for demand critical welds. . mctal_tough'.1ess and is included on an interim basis pending
adoption ot such a procedure by the American Weldino
Modification or lubrication of the electrode allcr Sociely (AWS) or other accrcdited organization. b
manufacture is prohibited, except that drying is permitted as

recommended by the manufacturer. B-7.l Scope
B-6.6.3 Exposure Limitations on FCA W Efoctrodcs This appendix provides a standard method for qualification
testing of weld filler metals required to have specified notch
Afler removal from protective packaging, the penuissible toughness for service in joints designated as demand
critical.
atmospheric exposure time of FCA W electrodes shall be
limited as follows:
Testing of weld metal to be used in produclion shall be
I. Exposure shall not exceed the electrode manufacturer's performed by filler metal manufacturer's production lot, as
guidelines. defined in AWS A5.0 I, Filler Metal Procurement
Guidelines, as follows:
2. Jn the absence of manufacturer's recommendations the
total accumulated exposure time for FCA W eiectr;>des I. Class C3 for SMAW electrodes.,
shall not excccd 72 hours. \:Vhen the electrodes are not
in use, they niay be stored in protective packaging or a 2. Class S2 for GMA W-S and SAW electrodes,
cabinet. Storage time shall not be included in the
accumulated exposure time. Electrodes that have been 3. Class T4 for FCA Wand GMA W-C, or
exposed to the atmosphere for periods exceeding the
above time limits shall he dried in accordance with the 4. Class F2 for SAW fluxes.
electrode manufacturer's recommendations, or shall not
be used for demand critical welds. The electrode Filler metals produced by manufacturers audited and
manufacturer's rccommendations shall include time approved by ·one or more of the following agencies shall be
temperature, and number or drying cycles permitted. ' exempt from these production lot testing requirements,
provided a minimum of 3 production lots of material, as
B~6.6.4 Tack Welds defined ahove, are tesled in accordance with the provisions
of this appendix:
Tack welds attaching backing bars and weld tabs shall be
placed where they will he incorporated into a final weld. l. American Bureau of Shipping (ABS),
2. Lloyds Register of Shipping,
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),
4. ISO 9000,
5. US Department of Defense, or
6. A quality assurance program acceptable to the

engineer-of-record.
Under this exemption from production Jot testing, the

tiller metal manufacturer shall repeat the testing
prescribed in this appendix at least every three years un
a random production lot.

5-212 CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel
B-7.2 Test Conditions The test assembly shall be tack welded and heated to the
specified preheat temperature, measured by temperature
Tests shall be conducted at the range of heat inputs for indicating crayons or surface temperature thermometers one
which the weld filler metal will be qualified under the inch from the center of the groove at the location shown in
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). lt is recommended the fi gures cited above. Welding shall continue until the
that tests be conducted at the low heat input level and high assembly has reached the interpass temperature prescribed
heiit input level indicated in Table B-7.2-1. in Table 8 -7.2-1. The intcrpass temperature shall be
maintained for the remainder or the weld. Should it be
Table B-7.2-1 WPS Toughness Verification Test necessary to interrupt welding, the assembly shall be
Welding and Preheat Conditions allowed to cool in air. The assembly shall then be heated to
the prescribed intcrpass temperature before welding is
Cooling Preheat 0 f Interpass 0 f resumed.
Heat [nput
Rate (°C) (°C)
Low heat 30 k.J/in. 200±50 No thennal treatment of weldmcnt or test specimens 1s
70±25 permitted, except that machined tensile test specimens may
input test (l.2kJ/mm) (2 1±14)
(21+14) he aged at 200 °F (93 °C) to 220 °F ( I04 °C) for up to 48
High heat 80 kJ/in. 300±25 500±50 hours, then cooled to room temperature before testing.
input test (l.2kJ/mm) (149±14) (260+28)
B-7.4 Acceptance Criterfa
Alternatively, the liller metal manufacturer or contractor
may elect to test a wider or narrower range of heat inputs The lowest and highest Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
and interpass temperatures. The range of heat inputs and values obtained from the five specimens from a single test
interpass temperatures tested shall be clearly Slated on the plate shall be disregarded. l'wo of the remaining three
test reports and user data sheets. Regardless of the method . values shall equal, or exceed, the specified toughness of 54
of selecting test heat input, the WPS, as used by the J energy level at the testing tcmperalure. One of the three
contractor, shall fall within the range of heat inputs and may he lower, but not lower than 41 J, and the average of
intcrpass lempcratun:s tested. the three shall not be less than the required 54 J energy
level. All test samples shall meet the notch toughness
8-7.3 Test Specimens requirements for the electrodes as provided in Section
520.3.2.
Two test plates, one for each heat input, shall be welded
following Table 8-7.2-1. Five CVN specimens and one For filler metals classified as E70, materials shall provide a
tensile specimen shall be prepared per plate. Each plate minimum yield stress of 58 ksi, a minimum tensile strength
shall be steel, of any AISC-listed structural grade. The test of 70 ksi, and a minim.um elongation of 22 percent. For
plate shall be 19 mm thick with a 13 mm root opening and filler metals classified as E80, materials shall provide a
45° included groove angle. The test plate and :.pecimens minimum yield stress of 68 ksi, a minimum tensile strength
shall be as shown in Figure 2A in A WS A5.20, or as in of 80 ksi, and a minimum elongation of 19 percent.
Figure 5 in AWS A5 .29. Excepl for the root pass, a
minimum of two passes per layer shall be used to fill the
width.
All Lest specimens shall be taken from near the centerline of

the weld al the mid-thickness location, in order lo minimize
dilution effects. CVN and tensile specimens shall be
prepared in accordance with A WS 84.0, Standard Methods
for Mechanical Testing of Welds. The test assembly shall be
restrained during welding, or preset at approximately 5° to
prevent warpage in excess ef 5°. A welded test assembly
that has warped more than 5° shall be discarded. Welded
test assemhlies shall not be straightened.
\
Cl IJI.P I Ff~ !'i '.;trucltffHI Steel !>-21'.l
PART28 SECTION 533

COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL STEEL REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
AND REINFORCED CONCRETE CODES,AND STANDARDS
BUILDINGS
The documents referenced in these provisions shall include
those listed in Part 2J\ Seclion 515 with the following
SECTION 532 addilions:
SCOPE
American Society of Civil F.ngineers Standard for the
These Provisions shall govem the design, fabrication, and Structural Ocsign of Composite Slabs, ASCE 3-91
erection of composite stnictural steel and reinforced
concrete members and conncc!ions in Lhc Seismic Load American Welding Society Structural Welding Codc-
Resisting Systems (SLRS) in buildings and other structures., Reinforcing Steel, A WS D 1.4-98
where olher structures arc dclincd as those designed,
fabricated, and erected in a manner similar to buiklings,
with building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting
systems. These provisions shall apply when the seismic
response modification cm:nicient, R, (as specified in the
NSCr code) is taken greater than 3.
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R., is

taken as 3 or less, the structure is not required lo satisfy
these provisions unless required by the NSCP code.
The requirements of Part 28 modify and supplement the

requirements of Pai1 2A and form these Provisions. They
shall be applied in conjunction with the AJSC Specification
for StrucLural Steel Buildings, ANSI/AISC 360, hereina1ler
referred to as the Specification. The applicable requirements
of the Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
and Commentary, ACI 318, as modified in these Provisions
shall be used for the design of reinforced concrete
components in composite SLRS.
For seismic load resisting systems incorporating reinforced

concrete components dc!iigm:<l according to ACI 318, the
requirements for load and resistance factor design as
specified in Section 502.1 of the Specification shall be used.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness

properties of the component members of composite systems
shall reflect their condition at the onset or significant
yielding of the structure.
Wherever these Provisions rcier to Lhe NSCP code and there

is no local building code, the loads, load combinations,
system limitations and general design requirements shall be
those in SEl/ASCE 7.
Part 2B includes a Glossary which is speci1ically applil:ablc

lo this Pait. The Part 2A Glossary is also applicable to rart
28.


GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS,
REQUIREMENTS AND NOIVITNAL STRENGTHS
The required srrenglh and other provisions for Seismic 535. l Loads and Load Combinations
Design Categories (SDCs) and seismic use groups and the
limitations on height mid irregulariry shall be as specified in Where amplified seismic loads arc required by these
the NSCP code. Provisions, U1e horizontal po11ion of the eanhquakc load E
(as defined in rhe NSCP code) shall be multiplied by the
The design story drift and story drift limits shall be overstrength focLor !2 0 prescribed by the NSCP code.
detennined at. required in the NSCP code.
For the Seismic Load Resisting System (SLRS)
incorporating reinforced concrete components designed
according to ACT 318, the requirements or Section 502.3 of
the Specification shall be used.
User NoteI Wbtn not defined in the NSCP co~, 110 should
be taketl :frOltl SEI/ASCE 7.
535.2 Nominal Strength
The nominal strength orsystems, members, and connccLions

shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of
the Specilication, except as modified lhroughoul Utesc
Provisions.

SECTION536 SECTION537
MATERIALS COMPOSITE MEMBERS
536.1 Structural Steel 537.1 Scope
Structural steel members and connections used in composite The design of composite members in the SLRS described in
Seismic Load Resisting Systems (SLRS) shall meet the SccLions 539 through 548 shall meet the requirements of
requirements of Specification Section 501.3. Structural steel this Section and the material requirements ofSecLion 536.
used in the composite SJ.RS described in Sections 539, 540,
543, 545, 547 and 548 shall also meet the requirements in 537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs
Part 2A Sections 519 and 520.
The design of composite floor and roof slabs shall meet the
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement requirements of ASCE 3. Composite slab diaphragms shall
meet the requirements in this Section.
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite
components in composite SLRS shall meet the requirements 537.2.1 Load Transfer
of ACI 318, Sections 21.2.4 through 21.2.8.
Exception: Details shall be designed so as lo lransler loads between the
diaphragm and boundary members, collector elements, and
Conaete and steel reinforcement used in the composite elements of the horizontal framing system.
ordinary seismic systems described in Sections 542. 544,
and 546 shall meet the requirements ofSection 509 and AC/ 537.2.2 Nominal Shear Strength
318, excluding Chaplet· 21.
The nominal shear strength of composite diaphragms and
concrete-filled steel deck diaphragms shall be taken as the
nominal shear strength or the reinforced concrclc above the
top of the steel deck ribs in accordance with ACI 318
excluding Chapter 22. Alternatively, the composite
diaphragm nominal shear strength shall be determined by
in-plane shear tests of concrete-filled diaplu·agms.
537.3 Compos.itc Beams
Composite beams shall meet lhe requirements of Section

509. Composite beams thal are part of Composite-Special
Moment Frames (C-SMF) shall also meet the requirements
of Section 540.3.
537.4 F:ncascd Composite Columns
This section is applicable to columns that:
I. Consist or reinforced-concrete encased shapes with a

stmctural steel area that comprises at least l percent of
the total composite column cross section; and.
2. Meet the additional limitations of Specification Section

509.2. l. Such columns shall meet the requirements of
Specification Section 509, cx.cept as modified in this
Section. Additional requirements, as specified for
intermediate and special seismic systems in
Sections 537.4.2 and 537.4.3 shall apply as required in
the descriptions or the composite seismic systems m
Sections 539 through 548.

Columns that consist of reinforced-concrete-encased shapes 4. Load-carrying reinforcement shall meet the detailing
shall meet the requirements for reinforced concrete columns and splice requirements of ACI 318 Sections 7.8. I and
of ACI 318 except as modified for: 12.17. Load-carrying reinforcement shall be provided
at every corner of a rectangular cross-section. The
I. The structural steel section shear connectors in Section maximum spacing of other load carrying or restraining
537.4.2. longitudinal reinforcement shall be one-half or the least
side dimensions of the composite member.
2. The contribution of the reinforced-concrete-encased
shape to the strength of the column as provided in ACI 5. Splices and end bearing details for encased composite
318. columns in ordinary seismic systems shall meet the
requirements or the Speci Iication and AC'I 318 Section
3. The seismic requirements for reinforce<l concrete 7.8.2. The design shal l comply with ACI 318 Sections
columns as specified in the description of the 2 1.2.6, 2 1.2. 7 and 21.10. The design shall consider any
composite seismic systems in Sections 539 through adverse behavioral effects due to abnipt changes in
548. either the member stiffness or the nominal tensile
strength. Such locations shall include transitions to
537 .4.1 Ordinary Seismic System Requirements reinforced concrete sections without embedded
structural steel members, transitions to bare structural
The following requirements for encased composite columns steel sections, and column bases.
are applicable to all composite systems, including ordinary
seismic systems: 537.4.2 Intermediate Seismic System Requirements
I. The available shear strength of U1c column shall be Encased composite columns in intcnnediate seismic
determined in accordance with Specification Section systems shall meet the following requirements in addition to
509.2.l.ld. The nominal shear strength of the tic those of Section 53 7.4. l:
reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with
ACI 3 18 Sections 11.5.6.2 through 11.5.6.9. In ACI l. The maximum spacing or transverse bars at the top and
3 18 Sections 11.5.6.5 and 11 .5.6.9. the dimension b w bottom shall be the least of the following:
shall equal the width of the concrete cross-section
minus the width or the stnictural shape measured a. one-half the least dimension orthe section
perpendicular to the direction of shear.
b. 8 longitudinal bar diameters
2. Composilc columns designed to share the applied loads .
between the strucn,ral steel section and the reinforced c. 24 tie bar diameters
concrete encasement shall have shear connectors that
meet the requirements of Specification Section 509.2. l. d. 300 mm
3. The maximum spacing of transverse ties shall meet the These spacings shall be maintained over a vertical
requirements of Specification Section 509.2. l. distance equal to the greatest of the following lengths,
measured from each joint face and on both sides of any
Transverse ties sholl be located vertically within one-half of section where flexural yielding is expected to occur:
the tic spacing above the top of the footing or lowest beam
or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein a. one-·sixth the vertical clear height of the column
within one-half of the tie spacing below the lowest beam or
slab framing into the column. b. the maximum cross-sectional dimension
Transverse bars shall have a diameter that is not less than c. 450 mm
one-fiftieth of the greatest side dimension of the composite
member, except that ties shall not be smaller than Diameter 2. Tie spacing over the remaining column length shall not
IOmm bars and need not be larger IJ1an Diameter 16 mm exceed twice the spacing defined above.
bars. Alternatively, welded wire fabric of equivalent area is
permilled as transverse reinforcement except when 3. Welded wire fabric is not permitted as transverse
prohibited for intem1ediate and special seismic systems. reinforcement in intermediate seismic systems.

CI-IAPli::R ~) Strt1cturn1 Steel 5 217
537.4.3 Special Seismic System Requirements c. When spccilicd in Sections 537.4.3(4), 537.4.3 (5)
or 537.4.3 (6), the maximum spacing or transverse
Encased composite columns in special seismic systems shall reinforcement shall be the lesser of one-fourth the
meet the following requirements in addition to those of least member dimension or I 00 lllrn. Fur this
Sections 537.4.1 and 537.4.2: reinforcemenr, cross ties, legs or overlapping
hoops, and ot11er confining reinforcement shall be
I. The required axial strength for encased composite spaced not more than 350 mm on centt:r in the
columns and splice details shall meet the requirements transverse direction.
in Part 2A Section 521.3.
4. Encased composite columns 111 braced frames with
2. Longitudinal load-carrying reinforcement shall meet nominal compressive loads that are larger than 0.2
the requirements of AC[ 318 Section 21.4.3. times P n shall have transverse reinforcement as
specified in Section 537.4.3 (3)(iii) over the total
3. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop reinforcement clement length. This requirement need not be satisfied
as defined in ACl 318 Chapter 21 and shall meet the if the nominal strength of the reinforced-concrete-
following requirements: encased steel section alone is greater tJian the load
effect from a load corn bi nation of 1. OD + 0. SL.
a. The minimum area of tie reinforcement Ash shall
meet the following: 5. Composite columns suppmting reactions from
discontinued stiff members, such as walls or braced
frames, shall have transverse reinforcement as specified
in Section 537.4.3 (3)(iii) over the full length hcneath
the level at which the discontinuity occurs if the
(537-1) nominal compressive load exceeds 0.1 times Pn·
where Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
discontinued member for al least the length required lo
hcc cross-dectional dimension of the develop full yielding in the reinforced-concrete-encased
confined core measured center-to-center shape and longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
of the tie reinforcement, mm need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the
s spacing or transverse reinforcement rcinforcc<l-concrctc encased structural steel section
measured along the longitudinal axis of alone is greater than the load effect from a load
the structural mcmher, mm combination of' 1. OD + 0. SL.
specified minimum yield srress of the
structural steel core, MPa 6. Encased composite columns used in a C-SMF shall
cross-sectional area of the structural meet the following requirements:
core, mm2
nominal compressive strength of the a. Transverse n:inforccmcnl shall meet the
composite column calculated 111 requirements in Section 537.4.3 (3)(c) at the top
accordance with the Specification, N and bottom of the column over the region specified
specified compressive strength of in Section 537.4.2.
concrete, MPa
Fy1t - specified minimum yield stress or the b. The strong - column I weak - beam design
tics, MPa requirements in Section 540.5 shall be satisfied.
Column bases shall be detailed to sustain inelastic
Eq. 537-1 need not be satisfied if the nominal flexural hinging.
strength of the reinforced-concrete-encased
structural steel section alone is greater than the c. The required shear strength of the column shall
load effect from a load combination of 1. 0 D + meet the requirements of ACI 318 Section
0.5L. 21.4.5.1.
b. The maximum spacing oflransvcrsc reinforcement

along the length of the column shall be t11e lesser
of six longitudinal load-carrying bar diameters or
150 mm.
National Structufal Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 2015

5-21e CHAPTl=R !:> Structural Steel
7. When the column terminates on a footing or mat SECTION 538

krnndation, the transverse reinforcement as specified in
this section shul I extend into the footing or mat at least COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS
300 mm. When lhc column terminates on a wall, the
transverse reinforcement shall extend into the wall for 538.1 Scope
at k:ast the length required to develop full yielding in
the reinforccd-concrete-cm:ased shape und longitudinal This Section is applicable to connections in buildings that
rci n forcement. utili:l.e composite or dual steel and concrete systems wherein
seism ic load is transferred between !>lructural steel and
8. Welded wire fabric is not permitted as transverse rein forced concrete components.
reinforcement for special seismic systems.
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have
537.5 Filled Composite Columns strength, ductility and toughness comparable lo lhat
exhibited by similar structural steel or reinforced concrete
This Section is applicable lo columns that meet the connections that meet the require ments or Part 2A and ACI
limitalions of Specification Section 509.2.2. Such columns 318, respectively. Methods for calculating the connection
shall be designed to meet the requirements or Specification strength shall meet the requirements in this Section.
Section 509, except as modified in this Section.
538.2 General Requirements
I. The nominal shear strength or the composilc column
shall he the nominal shear strength or the structural C..onnections shall have adequate deformation capacity Lo
steel section alone, based on its effective shear area. resist lhe requi red strength at the design story drift.
The concrete shear capacity may be used in conjunction Additionally, connections that are required for the lateral
with the shear strength from the steel shape provided stability of the building under seismic loads shall meet the
the design includes an appropriate load transferring requirements in Sections 539 through 548 hased upon the
mechanism. speci fi c system in which the connection is used. When the
available strength of the connected memhcrs is based upon
2. In addition to the requirements of Section 537.5(1 ), in no minal material strengths and nominal dimensions, the
the special seismic systems described in Sections 540, determination of the available strength or the conncc.lion
543 and 545, the design loads and column splices for shall account for any cflects that result from the increase in
til led composite columns shall also meet the the actual nominal strength of the connected member.
requirements of Part 2a Section 521.
538.3 Nominal Strength of Connections
3. Filled composite columns used in C-SMF shall meet
the following requirements in addition to those of The nominal strength of conm:clions in composite stn1ctural
Sections 6.5(1) and 6.5(2): systems shall he determined on the basis of rational models
that satisfy both equilibrium of internal forces and the
a. The minimum required shear strength of the strength limitation of component materials and clements
column shall meet the requirements in ACT 318 based upon potential limit states. Unless the connection
Section 21.4.5.1 . strength is dctcnnined by analysis and testing, the models
used for analysis of connections shall mccl the requirements
b. The stmng-column/weak-bcam design of Sections 538.3(1) through 538.3(5).
requirements in Section 521.5 shall be met.
Column bases shall be designed to sustain inelasti<: I. When required, force shall be transferred between
flexural hi nging. s tructural steel and reinforced concrete thrnugh
(a) direct bearing of headed shear studs or suitable
c. The minimum wall thickness of concrcte-fi.lled alternative devices; (b) by other me.c hanical means;
rectangul ar HSS shall be: (c) by shear friction w ith the necessary clamping force
provided by reinforcement normal to the plane of shear
transfer; or (d) by a combination of these means. Any
tmin = jFy/2E (537-2) potential hond strength between structural steel and
reinforced concrete shall be ignored for the purpose of
the connection force transfer mechanism. The
for the flat width b of each face, where b is as contribution of different mechanisms can be combined
defined in Specification Table 502.4. J.
only if the stillness and dcfonnation capacity of the
mechanisms are compatible.
Association of Structural Engineers of lhe Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

The nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths shall b. I Structural steel sections framing into the
meet the requirements of ACI 318 Chapters IO and connections are considered to provide
11. Unless a higher strength is substantiated by cyclic confinement over a width equal to that of face
testing, the nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths bearing plates welded to the beams between lhc
shall be reduced by 25 percent for the composite flanges.
seismic systems described in Sections 540, 543, 545,
547, and 548. b.2 Lap splices are pennitted for perimeter lies when
confinement of the splice is provided by face
2. The available strength or structural steel components in bearing plates or other means that prevents
composite connections shall be determined in spalling of the concrete cover in the systems
accordance with Part 2A •and the Specification. described in Sections 541, 542, 543 and 546.
Structural steel elements that are encased in confined
reinforced concrete are permitted to be considered to be b.3 The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in
braced against out-of-plane buckling. Face bearing reinforced concrete and composite columns shall
plates consisting of stiffeners between the flanges of be detailed to minimize slippage of the bars
steel beams are required when beams are embedded in through the beam-to-column connection due lo
reinforced concrete columns or walls. high force transfer associated with the change in
column moments over the height of the
3. The nominal shear strength of rcinforce<l-concrete- connection.
cncased steel panel-zones in beam-to-column
connections shall be calculated as the sum or the
nominal strengths of the structural steel and confined
reinforced concrete shear elements as determined in
Pait 2/\. Section 540.3 and ACl 318 Section 21.5,
respectively.
4. Reinforcement shall he provided to resist all tensile

forces in reinfon.:cd concrete components of the
connections. Additionally, the concrete shall be
confined with transverse reinforcement. All
reinforcement shall be fully developed in tension or
compression, as appropriate, beyond the point at which
it is no longer required to rcsisl t11e forces.
Development lengths shall be determined in accordance
with ACI 318 Chapter 12. Additionally, development
lengths for the systems described in Scclions 540, 543,
545, 547, and 548 shall meet the requirements of AC£
318 Section 2 l.5.4.
5. Connections shall meet the following addilional

requirements:
a. When the slab transfers horizontal diaphragm

forces, the slab reinforcement shall be designed
and anchored to carry the in-plane tensile forces at
all critical sections in the slab, including
connections to collector beams, columns, braces,
and walls.
b. For connections between structural steel or

composite beams and reinforced concrete or
encased composite columns, transverse hoop
reinforcement shall be provided in the connection
region of the column to meet the requirements of
ACI 318 Section 21.5, except for the following
modifications:

5-2LO CHAPTER 5 -· Structural Steel

COMPOSITE PARTIALLY COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT
RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF)
FRAMES (C-PRMF)
540.l Scope
539.l Scope
This section is applicable to moment frames that consist of
This section is applicable to frames that consist of structural ci1her composite or reinforced concrete columns and either
steel columns and composite beams that are connected with structural steel or composi1e beams. Composite special
partially restrained (PR) moment connections that meet the moment fmmcs (C-SMF) shall be designed assuming that
requirements in Specification Section 502.3.6b (b). significa11t inelastic defonnations wil l occur under the
Composite parcially restrained moment frames (C-PRMF) design earthquake, primarily in the beams, but with limited
shall be designed so that under earthquake loading yielding inelastic defomiations in the column and/or connections.
occurs in the ductile components of the composite PR
beam-to-column momem connections. Limited yielding is 540.2 Columns
permitted at other locations, such as column base
connections. Connection flexibility and composite beam Composite columns shall meet the requirements fo r special
action shall be accounted for in determining the dynamic seismic systems of Sections 537.4 or 537.5, as appropriate.
characteristics, strength and drift of C-PRMF. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements of
ACI 3 18 Chapter 21, excluding Section 21. l O.
539.2 Columns
540.3 Beams
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements of
Section 519 and 521 and the specification. Composite beams that are part of C-SM F shall also meet the
following requirements:
539.3 Composite Beams
l. The distance from the maximum concrete compression
Composite beams shall be unencased, fully composite m1d fiber to the plastic neutral axis shall not exceed.
shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 509.
For purpose of analysis, the s1iffness of the beams shall be Ycon + db
determined with an effective momem of inertia of the y PNA = (1700F ) (540-1)
composite section. .1 + y
E
539.4 Moment Conneetfons where
The required strength of the beam-to-column PR moment Y ,on distance from the top of the steel hcam to
connections shall be determined considering the effects of the lop of concrete, mm
connection flexibility and second-order moments. Jn depth of the steel beam., mm
addition, composite connections shall have a nominal specified minimum yield stress of the steel
strength that is at least equal to 50 percent of Mp , where beam, MPa
elastic modulus of the steel beam, MPa
Mp is the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connected
strnctural steel beam ignoring composite action.
2. Beam flanges shali meet lhe requirements of Part 2A
Connections shall meet the requirements of Section 520 and
shall have a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radians that is Section 540.4, except when reinforced-concrete-
substantiated by cyclic testing as described in Section encased compression clements have a reinforced
522.2b. concrete cover of at least 50 mm and confinement is
provided hy hoop reinforcement in regions where
plastic hinges are expected to occur under seismic
deformations. Hoop reinforcement shall meet the
requirements of ACf 318 Section 21.3.3.
l
)
Neither structural steel nor composite trusses arc

permitted as flexural members to resist seismic loads in
SECTIONS41
C-SMF unless it is demonstrated by testing and COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE
analysis that the particular system provides adequate MOMENT FRAMES (C-IMF)
ductility and energy dissipation capacity.
541.1 Scope
540.4 Moment Connections
This Section is applicable to moment frames that consist of
The required strength of beam-to-column moment either composite or reinforced concrete columns and either
connections shall be determined from the shear and flexure structural steel or composite beams. Composite intermediate
associated with the expected flexural strength, moment frames (C-[MF) shall be designed assuming that
RyMn (LRFD) or RyMn/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, inelastic deformation under the design earthquake will
of the beams framing into the connection. The nominal occur primarily in the beams, but with moderate inelastic
strength of the connection shall meet the requirements in defonnation in the columns and/or connections.
Section 538. [n addition, the connections shall be capable of
sustaining a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radian. When 541.2 Columns
beam flanges are interrupted at the connection., the
connections shall demonstrate an interstory drill angle of at Composite columns shall meet the requirements for
least 0.04 radian in cyclic tests that is substantiated hy intermediate seismic systems of Section 537.4 or 537.5.
cydic testing as described in Part 2ASection 540.2.(b). For Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements of
connections to reinforced concrete columns with a beam ACI 318 Section 21.12.
that is continuous through the column so that welded joints
are not required in the flanges and the wnncction is not 541.3 Beams
otherwise susceptible to premature fractures, the inela.stic
rotation capacity shall be demonstrated by testing or other Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the
substantiating data. requirements of the Specification.
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio 541.4 Moment Connections
The design of reinforced concrete columns shall meet the The nominal strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements of ACI 318 Section 21.4.2. The column-to- requirements of Section 538. The required strength of
beam moment ratio of composite columns shall meet the beam-lo-column connections shall meet one of the
requirements of Part 2A Section 522.6 with the following following requirements:
modifications:
I. The required strength oft11c connection shall be based
I. The available flexural strength of the composite column on the forces associated with plastic hinging of the
shall meet the requirements of Specification Section beams adjacent to the connection.
509 with consideration of the required axial strength,
Pre· 2. Connections shall meet the requirements of Section 538
and shall demonstrate a total interstory dritl angle of al
2. The force limit for Exception (a) in Parl 2A Section least 0.03 radian in cyclic tests.
522.6 shall he P ,·c < 0. 1Pc·
3. Composite columns exempted by the minimum tlexural

strength requirement in Part 2A Section 522.6(a) shall
have transverse reinforcement that meets the
requirements in Section 537.4.3(3).

5 222 CHAPTER 5 - Stnicturnl SIP.el
SECTION 542 SECTIONS43

COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT COMPOSITE SPECIAL
FRAMES CONCENTRICALLY BRACED
(C-OMF) FRAMES (C-CBF)
542.1 Scope 543.1 Scope
This Section is applicahlc to moment frames that consist of This Section is applicable lo braced frames lhat consist of
either composite or reinforced concrete columns and concentrically connected members. Minor eccentricities arc
structural steel or composite beams. Composite ordinary permitted if lhey are ac.counled for in U1e design. Columns
moment frames (C-OMF) shall be designed assuming that shall he structural steel, composite structural steel, or
limited inelastic action will occur under the design reinforced concrete. Beams and braces shall be either
earthquake in the beams, columns and/or connections. structural steel or composite structural steel. Composite
special concentrically braced frames (C-SCBF) shall be
542.2 Columns designed assuming that inelastic action under the design
earthquake will occur primarily tlmiuih tension yielding
Composite columns shall meet the requirements for and/or buck) ing of braces.
ordinary seismic systems in Section 537.4 or 537.5, as
appropriate. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the 543.2 Columns
requirements of ACI 318, excluding Chapter 21.
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements of Part
542.3 Beams 2A Sections 537 and 539. Composite columns shall meet
the requirements for special seismic systems of Section
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the 537.4 or 537.5. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet U1e
requirements of the Specification. requirements for structural truss clements o f ACI 318
Chapter 21.
542.4 Moment Connections
543.3 Beams
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in
accordance with Specifaation Sections 502.3.3 and 502.3.4, Strnctural steel beams shall meet the requirement.'> for
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the special cor.iccntcically braced frames (SCBF) of Part 2A
requirements in Section 520 and Section 524.2 of Part 2A. Section 526. Composite bc,uns shall meet the requirements
of lhe Specification Section 509 and the requirements for
special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) of Part 2A
Section 526.
543.4 Braces
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for SCBF

of Part 2A Section 526. Composite braces shall meet the
requirements for composite columns of Scction 543.2.
543.S Connections
Bracing connections shall meet the requirements of Section

538 and Part 2A Section 526.

CHAPTr=R (, ~trtlC!ural Steel 5-L?.3

COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY
FRAMES (C-OBF) BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF)
544.t Scope 545.t Scope
This Section is applicahle to concentrically braced frame This Section is applicahlc to braced frames for which one
systems thal consist of composik or reinforced concrete end of each brace intersects a beam at an eccentricity from
columns, structural steel or composite beams, and strucLUral the intersection of the centerlines of the.: beam and column,
steel or composite hraccs. Composite ordinary braced or intersects a beam at an eccentricity from the intersection
frames (C-OBF) shall be designed assuming that limited of the centerlines of the beam and an adjacent brace.
inelastic action under the design earthquake will occur in Composite eccentrically braced lhunes (C-F.BF) shall he
the beams, columns, braces, and/or connections. designed so that inelastic deformations under the design
earthquake will occur only as shear yielding in the links.
544.2 Columns
Diagonal braces, columns, and beam segments outside of
Encased composite columns shall meet the requirements for the link shall he designed to remain essentially elastic under
ordinary seismic systems of Sections s:n.4. Filled the maximum forces that can be generated by rhe fully
composite columns shall meet the n.:quirc1m:nts of Section yielded and strain-hardened link. Columns shall be either
537.5 for ordinary seismic systems. Rcinfon:cd concrete composite or reinforced concrete. Ilraces shall be structural
columns shall meet the requirements of ACl 318 excluding steel. Links shall be structural steel as described in this
Chapter 21. Section. The avai !able strength of members shall meet the
requirements in the Specification, except as modified in this
544.3 .Reams Section. C-F.HF shall meet the.: requirements of Part 2A
Section 528, except as modified in this Section.
Structural steel and composite beams shall mcc.:t the
requirements of the Specification. 545.2 Columns
544.4 Braces Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements

for structural truss elements or /\Cl 318 Chapter 21.
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements of the Composite columns shall meet the requirements for spc.:cial
Specification. Composite braces shall meet the requirements seismic systems of Sections 537.4 or 537.5. Additionally,
for composite columns of Sections 537.4a, 53 7.5, and where a link is adjacent to a reinforced co1icrcte column or
544.2. encased composite column, transverse column
reinforcement meeting the requirements of ACI 318
544.5 Connections Section 21.4.4 (or Section 537.4c(6) a for composite
columns) shall be provided above and below the link
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in connection. All columns shall meet the requirements of Par1
accordance with Specification Sections 502.3.3 and 502.3.4, 21\. Section 528. I 0.
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements in Section 538. 545.3 Links
Links shall be unencased structural steel and shall meet the

requirement for eccentrically brace<l frame (EBF) links in
Part 2A Section 528. IL is pennitted to encase the portion of
the beam outside of the link in reinforced concrete. Beam.~ I
containing the link are permitted to act compositely with the

tloor slab using shear connectors along all or any portion of '
the beam if the composite action is considered when
determining the nominal strength of the link.
'
National Strl1ctural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015
,.-_
1,
!..i-224 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
545.4 Braces SECTION546

Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for ERF ORDINARY REINFORCED
of Part 2A Section 528. CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS
COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
545.5 Connections
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW)
ln addition to the requirements for EBF of Part 2A
Section 528, connections shall meet the requirements of 546.1 Scope
Section 520.
The requirements in this Section apply when reinforced
concrete walls are composite with s11uctural steel clements,
either as infill panels, such as reinforced concrete walls in
structural steel frames with unencascd or reinforccd-
concrete encased structural steel sections that act as
boundary members, or as structural steel coupling beams
that connect two adjacent rein forced concrete walls.
Reinforced concrete walls shall meet the requirements of
ACl 318 excluding Chapter 21.
546.2 Bound11ry Members
Boundary members shall meet the requirements of this

. Section:
I. When unencascd structural steel sections function as

boundary members in reinforced concrete infill panels,
lhe structura l steel sections shall meet the requirements
of the Specification. The required axial strength of the
boundary member shall be determined assuming that
the shear forces arc carried by the reinforced concrete
wall and the entire gravity and overturning forces are
carried by the boun~ary members in conjunction with
the shear wall. The reinforced concrete wall shall meet
the reqlLLremenls of ACI 318 excluding Chapter 21.
2. When reinforced-concrete-encased shapes function as

boundary members in reinlorced concrete infill panels,
the analysis shall be based upon a transformed concrete
section using elastic material properties. The wall shall
meet the requirements of AC! 318 excluding
Chapter 2 1. When the reinforced-concrete-encased
structural steel boundary member qualifies as a
composite column as defined in Specification Section
509, it shall be designed to meet the ordinary seismic
system requirements of Section 537.4a. Otherwise, it
shall be designed as a composite column to meet the
requirements of AC! 3 J8 Section I0.16 and
Section 509 of the Specification.
3. Headed shear studs or welded reinforcement anchors

shall be provided to transfer vertical shear forces
between the structural steel and reinforced concrete.
I-leaded shear studs, if used, shall meet the
requirements of Specification SecLion 509. Welded
reinforcement anchors, if used, shall meet the

CHAI"' TEH b 8tructur<1I Steel 5-:?.25
requirements of A WS D 1.4. SECTION547

546.3 Steel Coupling Reams SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE
SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH
Structural steel coupling beams lhal arc used between l wo
adjacent reinforced concrete walls shall meet lhi.:
STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS
requirements oflhc Spi.:c.:ilication and this Section: (C-SRCW)
1. Coupling beams shall lmvc an embedmenl length into 547.1 Scope
lhe reinforced concrete wall that is sufficient to develop
the maximum possible combination of moment and Special reinforced concrete shear walls composite with
shear that can be generated by the nominal bending and structural steel clements (C-SRCW) systems shall meet the
shear strength of the (;Oupling beam. The embedmenl requirements of Section I5 for C-ORCW and the shear-wall
length shall be considered to begin inside the first layer requirement of ACI 318 including Chapter 21, except as
of confining reinforcement in the wall boundary modi lied in this Section.
mcmbcr. Connection strength for the transfer of loads
between the coupling beam and the wall shall meet the 547.2 Boundary :Vlcmbcrs
requiremcnts ofScction 538.
In addition to the requirements or Section 547.2(1),
2. Vertical wall reinforcement with nominal axial strength unencased structural steel columns shall meet t11c
equal to the nominal shear strength of the coupling requirements of Parl 2A Sc<.:lions 519 and 521.
beam shall he placed over thc cmbedmcnt length or the
beam with two-thirds of the steel located over the first In addition lo the requirements of Section 15.2(2), the
half of the embedment length. This wall reinforcement requirements in this Section shall apply to walls with
shall extend a distance of at least one tension reinforced-concrctc-encasc<l structural steel boundary
development length above and below the flanges of the members. The wall shall meet the requirements of ACI 318
coupling beam. It is pem1itted to use vertical including Chapter 21. Reinforced-concrete-encased
reinforcement placed for other purposes, such as for stru(;tural steel boundary members that qualify as composite
vertical boundary members, as part of the required columns in Specification Section 509 shall meet the special
vertical reinforcement. seismic system requirements of Section 537.4. Otherwise,
such members shall he designed as composite compression
546.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams members to meet the requirements of ACI 318
Section I 0.16 including the special seismic requirements for
Encased composite sections serving as coupling beams shall boundary members in ACI 318 Section 21.7.6. Transverse
meet the requirements of Section 546.3 as modified in this reinforcement for confinement of the composite boundary
Section: member shall extend a distance of 2h into the wall, where h
is the overall depth of the boundary member in the plane of
I. Coupling beams shall have an embedment length into the wall. Headed shear studs or welded reinforcing bar
the reinforced concrete wall that is sufficient tu develop anchors shall be provided as specified in Section 546.2(3).
lhc maximum possible combination of moment and For connection to unencased structural steel sections, the
shear capacities of the encased rnmposite steel nominal strength of welded reinforcing bar anchors shall be
coupling beam. reduced hy 25 percent from their static yield strength.
2. Thc nominal shear capacity of the encased composite

steel coupling beam shall be used to meet l111.:
requirement in Section 546.3( I).
3. The stiffness or the encased composite steel coupling

beams shall be used for calculating the required
strength of the shcar wall and coupling beam.

5-226 CH AP TER 5 - Slt uctural Steel
547.3 Steel Coupling Beams SECTION 548

In addition tc1 the requirements or Section 546.3. structural COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR
steel coupling beams shall meet the requirements of Pa11 2A WALLS (C-SPW)
Sections 528.2 and 528.3. When required in Part 2A Section
528.3, the coupling rotation shall be assumed as 0.08 radian 548.1 Scope
unless a smaller value is justified by rational analysis of the
inelastic deformations that arc expected under the design This Section is applicable to structural walls consisting uf
earthquake. Face bearing plates shall be provided on both steel plates with reinforced concrete encasement on one or
sides of the coupling beams at the face of the reinforced both sides of the plate and structural steel or composite
concrete: wall. These stiffeners shall m~t the detailing boundary memhcrs.
requirements of Part 2A Section 528.3.
548.2 Wall F.lcments
Vertical wall reinforcement as specified in Section 528.3(2)
shall be confined by transverse reinforcement that meets l11e The available shear strength shall be cp Vns ( LR FD) or
requirements for boundary members of ACT 318
V nsffl (ASD), as appropriate, according to the limit state
Section 21.7 .6.
of shear yielding of composite steel plate shear walls
(C-SPW) with a :.tiffened plate conforming to
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams
Section 530.2(1) shall be
Encased composite sections serving as coupling beams shall
meet the rcquircmcnls of Section 546.3, except the
requirements of Part 2A Section 528.3 need not be met.
cp = 0. 90 ( LRFD) n = 1. 67 (ASD)
V ns nominal shear strength of the steel plate, N
Asp horizontal area of stiffened steel plate, mm2
FY specified minimmn yield stress of the plate, MPa
The available shear strength of C-SPW with a plate that

does not meet the stiffening requirements in Section
530.2(1) shall be based upon the strength of the plate,
excluding the strength of the reinforced concrete, and meet
the requirements of the Specification Sections 507.2 and
507.3.
1. The steel plate shall be adequately stiffened by

encasement or attachment to the reinforced concrete if
it can be demonstrated with an elastic plate buckling
analysis that the composite wall can resist a nominal
shear force equal to V n.~· The concrete thickness shall
be a minimum of 100 mm on each side when concrete
is provided on both sides of the steel plate and 200 mm
when concrete is provided on om:. side orthe sleel plate.
Headed shear stud connectors or other mechanical
connectors shall he provided to prevent: local buckling
and separation of the plate and reinforced concrete.
Horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall he provided
in the concrete encasement to meet or exceed the
detailing requirements in ACI 318 Sect ion 14.3. The
reinforcement ratio in both directions shall not be less
than 0.0025; the maximum spacing between bars shall
not exceed 450 mm.
--,-
'
Cll/\Pll~r< fi Str11ct11rc1l Sl€<el :1-?.?.7
Seismic forces acling perpendicular 10 the plane of the

SECTION 549
wall as specified hy this code shall be considered in the
design of the composite wall system. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS
AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP
2. The steel plate shall be continuously connected on all
cdg1:s tu structural steel framing and houndary
DRAWINGS,AND ERECTION
members with welds and/or slip-critit:al high-strength DRAWINGS
bolts to develop the nominal shear strength of the plate.
The design of welded and bolted connectors shall meet Structural di.:sign drawings aml spi.:cifications, shop
the additional requirements of Part 2A Section 520. drawings, and erection drawings for composite sled and
steel building construclion shall meel thi.: requirements of
548.3 Boundary Members Part 2A Section 518.
Structural steel and composite boundary members shall be For rcinfori.:i.:d com:rclc and composite steel huilding
designed to resist the shear capacity of plate and any construction, the contract documents, shop drawings, and
reinforced concrete portions of the wall active at the design erection drawings shall also indicate the following:
story drift. Composite and reinforced concrete boundary
members shall also meet the requirements or Section 547.2. I. Har placement, cutoffs, lap and mechanical splices,
Steel houndary memhcrs shall also meet the requirements of hooks and mechanical anchorages.
Part 2A, Section 530.
2. Tolerance for placement of ties and other transverse
548.4 Openings ri.:inforccmi.:nl.
Boundary memhcrs shall he provided around opening~ as 3. Provisions for dimensional changes resulting from
required by analysis. temperan1re changes, creep and shrinkage.
4. Location, magnitude, and sequencing of any

prcstrcsssing or post-tensioning present.
5. If coni.:rctc floor shtbs or slabs on grade serve as

diaphragms, connection delails between the diaphragm
and the main lateral-load resisting system shall be
clearly idemit}ed.
User Note: for reinforced concrete and composite steel

huilding construction, the provisions of the following
documents may also apply: ACl 315-04 (Details and
Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement), ACT 315R-94
(Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for
Reinforced Concrete Structures), and ACI SP-66 (ACI
Detailing Manual), including modifications required by
Chapter 21 of ACI 318-02 and ACI 352 (Monolithic Joints
in Concrete Structures).
National Structural Code of tt1e Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015

SECTION 550 PART3

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
When required by this code or the engineer-of-record, a
quality assurance plan shall be provided. For the steel
pm1ion of the construction, the provisions of Part 2A, SYMBOLS
Section 531 apply.
A - Full unreduced cross-sectional area or
User Note: For the reinforced concrete portion, the member
provisions of ACI 121 R~98 (Quality Management Systems A Area of directly connected clements or gross
for Concrele Construction), ACI 309.3R-'97 (Guide to area
Consolidation of Concrete in Congested Areas and Di fiicult b 1 t + A s, for bearing stiffener at interior
Placing Conditions), ACI 311.IR-OI (ACI Manual of support and or under concentrated load,
Concrete Inspection) and ACI 3 I I .4R-00 (Guide for and b2t + Asr for bearing stiffeners at end
Concrete Inspection) may apply. support
or
Gross cross-sectional area bolt
-= 18t2 + A51 , for
bearing stiffener at
interior support or under concentrated load,
+
and 10t2 A 51 ,for bearing stiffeners at
end support
- EHective area at stress F n
=- Effective net area
Cross-sectional area of compression tlange
plus edge stiffener
Ag Gruss area or element including stiffeners
Ag Gross area of section
Agv Gross area subject to shear
A,it Net area subject to tension
A1lv = Net area subject to shear
An Net area of cross-section
Ad Reduccd·area due to local buckling
Ap Gross~sectional area or roof panel per unit
width
As Cross-sectional area of bearing stiffener
As - Gross area of sti ffoner
Ast Gross area of shear stiffener
At ·· Net tensile area
Aw -' Area of web
Awn Net web area
a ·· Shear panel length of unreinforced web
element, or distance between shear stiffeners
of reinforced web elements
a Intermediate faslener or spot weld spacing
a =- Fastener distance from or outside web edge
a Length of bracing interval
Be Tem1 for detem1injng tensile yield point of
comers
b ·· Effective design width of compression
element
b Flange width
bd - Effective width for deflection calculation
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER G Structural Steel 5-229
Effective width of clements, located at D Dead load

centroid of element including stiffeners D2,D3 Lip dimension
Effective width Depth of section
d
Effective width determined either by section Nominal screw diameter
d
552.4 or Section 552.5.1 depending on Flat depth of lip defined in Figure 552-9
stiffoess of stiffeners
d
d Width of arc seam weld
Total flat width of stiffened element
d ~ Visible diameter of outer surface of arc spot
= Total flat width of edge stiffened element
weld
Largest suh-clemcnt flat width Diameter or bolt
= Effective widths Average diameter of arc spot weld at mid-
Effective widths of bearing stiffeners thickness or t
= For compression members, ratio of total Average width of scam weld
corner cross-sectional area to total cross- Nominal diameter (body or shank diameter)
sectional area of full section; for llexural Ellective diameter of fused area
memhers, ratio of total corner cross-sectional
Effective width or arc seam weld at fused
area of controlling 1lange to Ii.111 cross-
surfaces
sectional area of controlling flange
Diameter of hole
== Coefficient
Depth of hole
Bearing factor
Diameter of standard hole
== Bending coefficient dependent on moment
gradient Distance along roof slope between the ith
Constant from Table 557.1 purlin line and the /h anchorage device
Web slenderness coefficient Reduced effective width of stiffener
End moment coefficient in interaction Depth of stiffener
formula Effective width of stiffener calculated
End moment coefficient in interaction according to Section 552.3
fonnula Screw head or washer diameler
End moment coefficient in interaction Larger value of screw head or washer
fonnula diameter
Bearing length coefficient E Modulus of elasticity of steel, 203,000 Mpa,
Correction factor or 2,070,000 kg/cm2
E Live loJ3d due to earthquake
Inside bend radius cocllicient
Twist of stud from initial, ideal, unbuc.kled
Coefficient for lateral-torsional huckling
shape
End moment coefficient in interaction
Reduced modulus of elasticity for flexural
formula and axial stillness in second-order analysis
Cv = Shear stiffener coetJicient
e Distance measured in line of force from
Cw Torsional warping constant or cross-section center of a standard hole to nearest edge of an
Cwf Torsional warping constant of flange adjacent hole or to end of connected part
Cy Compression strain factor toward which the force is directed
e Distance measured 111 line or force from
C1,C2, :::; Axial buckling coefficients
center or a standard hole to nearest end of
C3 connected part
C1 to C6 Coefficients tabulated in Tables 554-3 to Minimum allowable distance measured in
554-5
line of force from centerline of a weld to
C</> Calibration coetlicient nearest edge of an adjacent weld or to end of
c Strip of flat width adjacent to hole connected part toward which the force is
c Distance directed
Amount of curling displacement Eccentricities of load components measured
= Horizontal distance from edge of clement to from the shear center and in the x and y
directions, respectively
centerline of sti ffencr
Outside diamcler of cylindrical tuhc Yield strain= F y/ E
D
D Overall depth of lip Fabrication factor
D Shear stiffener coefficient Design stress range

fi -230 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
Fm Threshold fatigue stress range Computed compressive stress in element

Fe Critical buckling stress being considered. Calculations are based on
Plate elas tic buckling stress effective sectio n at load for which deflections
Fer
Elastic distortional buckling stress are dctcnnincd
Fd
Elastic buckling stress Computed stresses f 1 and f 2 in unsli ffencd
Fe
element, as defined in Figures 552-5 to
Fm Mean value of fabrication factor
552-8. Calculations arc based on effective
Fn Nominal buckling stress
section at load for which serviceability is
Fn - Nominal strenglh res istance of bolts determined
Nominal tensile strength resistance or bolts
Fnt
Nominal shear strength resistance of bolts
Iv Required shear stress on a boll
Fnv f1.f2 Stresses on unstiffened clement defined by
F'nt Nominal tensile strength resistance fo r bolts Figures 552-6 to 552-8
subject to combination of shear and tension f 1,/2 Stresses at the ~pposite ends of web
= Yield stress as specified in Section 55 1.2.1, G Shear modulus of steel, 78,000 Mpa or
551.2.2, 55 l.2.3 795,000 kglcm2
Nominal tensile stress in flat sheet g Vertical distance between two rows of
Tensile strength as specified in Section connections nearest to top and bottom flanges
551.1.1, 551.2.2, or 551.2.3 g ~ Transverse center-to-center spacing between
Tensile strength of virgin steel spcci!ied by fastener gage lines
Section 55 l.2 or established in accordance g Gauge, spacing of fastener perpendicular to
with Section 556.3.3 force
Fwy Lower value of F y for beam web or F y.~ for H A permanent load due to late ral earth
bearing stiffeners pressure, including groundwater
Tensile strength of elect rode classification h Depth of tlat portion or web measured along
Fxx
Tensile strength of members in contact with plane of web
Fu1
screw head h Width of elements adjoining stiilened
:- Tensile strength of member not in contact element
Fu1. Lip height as defined in Figures 555-1 5 to
wi th screw head h
Nominal shear stress 555-18
Fv Overall depth of unstiffened C-scction
Fy Yield stress used fo r design, nol to exceed
member as defined in Figure 552-8
specified yield stress or established in
Depth of soil s upported by the structure
accordance with Section 556, or as increased
for cold work of forming in Section 551.7.2 Coped fl at web depth
or as reduced for low ductility steels in x distance from the centroid of fl ange to the
section fl ange I web junction
Average yield stress of section lrnporlance factor for earthquake
Fya
Tensile yield stress of corners Importance factor for w ind
Fye
Adequate moment of inc1tial of stiffener, so
Fyf = Weighted average tensile yield stress of t1at
portions that each component element will behave as a
stiffened e lement
Fys = Yield su·ess of stiffener steel
Effective moment of inertia
Fyv Tensile yield stress of virgin steel specified
Gross moment of inertia
by Section 551.2 or established in accordance
with Section 556.3.3 Actual moment of inertia of ii.Ill stiffener
f = Stress in compression dement computed on about its own centroidal axis parallel to
basis of effective design width clement to be stiffened
f av . . Average computed stress in full unreduced lsmin Minimum moment of inertia of shear
stiffencr(s) with respect to an axis in plane of
flange width
::- Stress al service load in cover plate or sheet web
fe
Moment of inertia of stillener about
f bending Normal stress due to bending alone at the center! inc of flat portion of element
maximum no11nal on the cross section due to
combined bending and torsion lx,ly Moment of inertia of foll unred uced section
about principal axis
f torsion Normal stress due to torsion alone at the
x-axis moment of inertia of the flange
maximum normal stress on the cross scclio11
due to combined bending and torsion Product of inertia of full unreduced section
ahoul major and minor centroidal axes
,
\-l·IAP I FR 5 ::;tructurcil Ster.I 0-23'1
ProducL or inertia or Jlange about major and L - LengLh of longitudinal welds

minor ccntroi<lal axes L Length of scam weld not including ciri.:ular
MomcnL or inertia of compression portion of ends
section about centroidal axis of entire section L - LcngLh or connection
parallel Lo web using unreduced section L Unbraced length of mcmh<.;r
lyf - y-axis moment or iuerLia of tlange Overall length
L
i Index of stiffener L Liv<.; load
i - Index ofeaeh purlin line L - Minimum ur Lc:r and Lm
J - Saint-Venant torsion constant Distance hetwccn hra<.;es on one compression
Lb
Saint-Venant torsion constant of compression member
It flange plus edge stiffener aboul an x.-y axis Unsupported length h<.;twecn hrac<.; points or
localed at Lhe centroid of the flange other rcslrainls which restrict distortional
j Section property for torsional-llexural buckling of element
buckling Summation of critical path lengths of each
j Index for each anchorage device segment
K EJlective length factor Criti<.;al unbraced length of clist011ional
K' A constant buckling
Lateral stiffness of anchorage device - Gross failure path length parallel to force
Ku
Parameter for detennining axial strength of Length of hole
Kar
Z-SecLion member having one llange DisLance between discrew restraints that
fastened to shealing restrict distorlional buckling
Keffi,j Effe<.;Live lateral stiffness of /h anchorage - NeL failure palh length parallel to fore<.;
device with respect to ith purlin Overhang length measured from the edge of
Required sti ffncss bearing to the end of member
Lo Length at whi<.;h local buckling stress equals
- Lateral sLiifoess of roof system, ncglc<.;ling flexural buckling stress
anchorage devices - Net failure path length inclined to for<.;e
Kt Effeclivc lcngLh factor for torsion
Length of hearing sLiffoner
Ktutali Effective lateral sLi11iless of all elements
Unbraced length of compression member for
resisting force
torsion
Effective length fa<.;Lor for buckling about x-
Net failure path length normal Lo force due to
axis
dir~ct tension
Effective length fa<.;tor for buckling about y-
- LimiL of unbraced lcnglh below which
axis
lateral-torsional buckling is not <.;onsidcred
Plate buckling cocffkienl
Unbraced length of compression member for
Plate buckling coefficient for distorlional
bending about x-axis
buckling Unbraced length of compression member for
k1oc - Plate buckling coeffi<.:ient for local sub-
bending about y-axis
element huckling Distance from concentrated load to a brace
Shear buckling coefficient l
M - Required allowahl<.; flexural strength, ASO
- Rotational stilfoess
M Rending moment
Elastic rotational stiffrn:ss provided by the Distortional buckling moment
flange to Lhe llange/web juncture M,1·d
Mere Overall buckling moment
Geometric rotational stiflncss demanded by
the llange from the flange /weh juncture Merl Local buckling moment
Md - Nominal moment with consideration of
Elastic rotational stiffness provid<.;d by the deflection
web to th<.; llange/web juncture Mf Faclored momenl
Geometric rotational sti11iless demanded by M fx• M fy = Momenls due to facLored loads with resp<.;ct
the web from the flange/web juncture to ccnlroidal axes
L Full span for simple heams, distance hetw<.;en Mm Mean value of material facLOr
inllection point for continuous beams, twice Mmux Absolute value of moment m unbraced
memh<.;r length for cantilever heams segment
L Span length used for determining Cb
L - Length of weld
National Structural Code of the Pl1 ilippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015
Nominal Oexural strength nb -= Number of bolt holes

Nominal llexural strength for distortional nc -= Number of compression flange stiffeners
buckling nw Numhcr of web stiffeners and/or fold-;
M11e = Nominal llcxural strength for overall nt Number of tension flange stiffeners
buckling p Required allowable strength for concentrated
M111 Nominal llexurnl strength for local buckling lo1:1d reaction in presence of bending moment
M,.x, Nominal llexural strengths about for ASD
Mny Section 553. P Required allowable strength (nominal force)
Nominal llexural strengths [resistance] about transmitted by weld for ASD
Mnxo,
centroidal axes detennincd tn accordance p Required allowable compressive axial
Mnyo strength for ASD
with Section 553.1 excluding provisions of
Section 553.l.l .h p -- Professional factor
M,ut, Nominal flexural strength about ccntroidal p -= Required concentrated load (factored load)
M,,yt axes determined using gross. unreduced within a distance of 0. 3a on each side of a
cross-section properties brace, plus 1. 4(1 - l/a) times each
Mx, My Required allowable llcxural strength with required concentrated load localed farther
respect to centroidal axes for ASD than 0. 3a but not farther Lhan 1. Oa from the
Mu Required flexural strength with respect to brace
Miiy Centroiclal axes for LRFD p =- Re<1uired nominal brace strength resistance
My moment causing maximum strain ey for a single compression member
My Yield moment ( = SrFy) PEx• PEy · - Elastic huckling strengths resistance
M1 Smaller end moment in an unbraced segment PL1,Pl2 -= Lateral brnciog forces
M2 Larger and moment in an tmbmced segment Pii Lateral force to be resisted by the ;th
M = Required flexura l strength factored moment anchorage device
Mx,My Required tl.e.xurnJ strength factored moment Pcrd = Distortional buckling load
P crl Local buckling load
Mz Torsional moment of required load P about
Pere Overall buckling load
shear center
Degrees of freedom Pr -- Axial force due to factored loads
m
m Tem1 for determining tensile yield point of Pr Concentrated load or re1:1ction due to factored
corners loads
m Distance from shear center of one C-seclion Lateral force introduced into the system at
to mid-plane of web the ith purlin
mr Modification factor for type of bearing '"' Mean value of the tested-to-predicted load
connection ratios
N Actual length olbearing =- Nominal web crippling strength
N · · Number or stress range fluctuations in design Nominal axial strength resistance of member
life Nominal axial strength resistance of bearing
Number of anchorage devices along a line of sliffencr
anchorage Nominal strength resistance of connection
Notional lateral load applied at level i componenl
Numher of purl in lines on roof slope Numin1:1l bearing strength
Coefficient -· Nominal tensile strength resistance of welded
Number of stiffeners member
Number of holes = Nominal bolt strength
Number of tests Nominal web crippling strength resistance of
C- or Z-Scction with overh1:1ng(s)
Number of equally spaced intermediate brace
Nominal 1:1xial strenglh for distorlional
locations
buckling
n Number of anchors in test assembly with
Nominal axial strength for overall buckling
same Lributary area (for anchor failure), or
number of panels with identical spans and Nomin1:1l axial strength for local buckling
loading to failed span (for non-anchor =- Nominal axial strength resistance of member
failure) determined in accordance with Section
n Number ofthre1:1ds per inch 553.3.4 with F n = F y

CHI\P I cR !j .Structural Stoel 5 23:3
Pnot. Nominal pull-out strength resistance per Nominal strength

screw Nominal block shear rupture strength
Pnov Nominal pull-over strength resislanec per - Average value of all test results
screw Reduction factor
Pn.~ Nominal shear strength resistance per screw - Required strength for I ,Rfl)
Pnt Nominal tension strength resistance per Correction factor
screw - Least radius of gyration or full unrcduce<l
P,. Required axial compressive strength cross-section.
resistance r Centerline bend radius.
Coneentrnted load or reaction Minimum radius of gyration of Ii.ill
Nominal shear strength resistance of screw as unreduced cross-section
reported by manufactun.:r or determined by Polar radius of gyration of <.:ross-scction
independent laboratory testing ahout shear center
Nominal tension strength [resistance] of Radius of gyration of cross-section about
screw as reported by manufacturer or ccntruidal principal axis
determined by independent lahorato1y testing s 1.28 JE/f
Required axial strength for LRFD
Factored force required strength transmitted
s Variable load due to snow, including ice and
associated rain or rain
by weld. for LRFD ~ Elastic section modulus of effective section
P.u - Required strength for concentrated load calculated relative to extreme compression
reaction in presence or bending moment for
fiber at F c
LRFO
Elastic section modulus or ellective section
Nominal web crippling strength resistance for
calculated relative to extreme compression or
C-Section flexural member
tension fiber at F y
- Components of required load P parallel to x
and y axis, respectively Sr - Elastic section modulus of full unreduced
section relative to extreme compression fiber
Member yield strength
Section modulus of full unreduced section
Required strength for concentrated load or relative to extreme tension fiber about
reaction concentrated load reaction due lo appropriate axis
factored loads in presence of bending Elastic section modulus of full unreduced
moment section relative co extreme fiber in first yield
p Required compressive axial strength In-plane diaphragm nominal shear strength
p Pitch (mm per thread for SI units and cm per resistance
thread for MKS units) s Center-to-center hole spacing
Required allowable shear strength of
- connection
s Spacing in line of stress of welds, rivets, or
bolts connecting a compression cover plate or
Required shear strength (factored shear sheet to a non-integral s!ilfoncr or other
force) of connection element
Load efJi.:cl
s Sheet width divided by number of bolt holes
Ocsign load in plane of web in cross-section being analyzed
Reduction factor s Weld spacing
Required allowable strength for ASD s Pitch, spacing of fastener parallel lo force
Modification factor s' J,ongitudinal cenu:r-to-cenler spacing or any
Reduction factor consecutive holes
Reduction lhctor determined from uplift tests Send Clear distance from the hole at ends of
in accordance with J\ISI S908 member
Coefficient Maximum permissible longitudinal spacing
[nsi<lc bend radius or
welds or other connectors joining two C-
sections to form an I-section
Radius of outside bend surface
T Required allowable tensile axial strength for
Isla~ 1 ASD
Allowable design strcnglh Rc(1uired allowable tension strength of
T
Reduction factor connection
Reduction factor T - Load due to contraction or expansion caused
Eflect of factored loads by temperature changes
National Stru~tural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

Width of tlange projection beyond web for

Tension due to factored loads for LSD )-beams and similar sections; or half
Factored tensile force of connection for LSD dist~nce between webs for box or U-type
Design strength factored resistance sections
connection in tension Required distributed gravity load supported
Required tensile axial strength for LRFD by the itlt purlin per unit length
Required tension strength of connection for Out-to·oul width
LRFD Leg of weld
Required tensile axial strength factored Leg of weld
f
tensile force Non-dimensional fastener location
Required tension strength of connection
f Nearest distance between web hole and cdoe
factored tensile force of bearing "'
Ilase steel thickness of any element or Distance from shear center to centroid along
t
section principal x-axis
Thickness of coped web Distance from flange/web junction to the
Total thickness of two welded sheets centroid of the flange
Thickness ofthinnest connected part Distance from flange or web junction to the
Lesser of depth of penetration and t 2 centroid of the flange
Effective throat dimension of groove weld Distance from shear plane to centroid of
Thickness of uncompressed glass fiber cross-section
blanket insulation y Yield point of web steel divided by yield
Thickness of stiffener point of stiffener steel
Effective throat of weld y. Gravity load from the LRFD or 1.6 times the
Based thickness connected with fillet weld ' ASD load combinations applied at level i
Thickness of member in contact with screw y distance from centroid of flange to shear
Yo center of tlange
head .
Thickness of member not m contact with a Coefficient for purlin directions
screw head a Coefficient for conversion of units
Reduction coefficient a Load factor
Re4uired allowable strength for ASD Coefficient for strength resistance increase
a
Coefficient of variation of fohrication factor due to overhang
Shear force due to factored loads for LSD Coefficient accounts for the benefit of an
a
Factored shear force of connection for LSD unbraced length, Lm, shorter than L,r
Coefficient of variation of material factor l/a:,,l/ay Magnification factors
Nominal shear strength Coefficient
Coefficient of variation or tested-to-
fJ A value accounting for moment gradienl
predicted load ratios
fJ Required brace stiffness for a single
fJbr,l
Coefficient of variation of load effect compression member
Required shear strength for LRFD Target reliability index
Required shear strength of connection for Lateral displacement of purlin top flanoe at
LRFD the line restraint .,
v Required shear strength factored shear
Wind load, a variable load due to wind
o,oi,Y,Yi·"'·Wt "" Coefficient
w Required strength from critical toad
{web Stress gradient in web
w combinations for ASD, LRFD, or LSD
Yi Load factor
0 Angle between web and bearing surface >
Total required vertical load supported by 45° hut no more than 90°
itll purlin in a single bay Angle between vertical and plane of web of
8
Components of required strength W Z-section, degrees
Fial wid(h of element exclusive of radii 62, 83 Angle of segment of complex lip
Flat width of beam flange which contacts A,Ac Slenderness factors
l1,lz Parameters used in determining compression
bearing plate
Flat width of narrowest unstiffened A3,A4 strain Factor
w Slenderness factor
compression element tributary to At
connections Ad Slenderness factor
\
µ Poisson's ration for steel= 0.30 SECTIONSSl

p Reduclion faclor
GENERAL PROVISIONS
(rr2£)/ (KxLx/r x)2
(n2£)/(Lx/r x) 2 551.1 Scope, Applicability and Definitions
2
(rr2£) I ( KyLy/r y)
2 551. 1.1 Scope
(rr2E)/( Ly/r y)
Torsional buckling stress This specification applies to the design of structural
Resistance factor members cold-formed to shape from carbon or low-alloy
Resistance factor bending steel sheet, strip, plate, or bar not more than 25 mm in
Resistance factor for concentrically loaded thickness and used for load-carrying purposes in
compression strength
Resistance factor for diaphragms l. Buildings; and
Resistance factor for tensile strength
2. Structures other than buildings provided allowances arc
Resislancc factor for fraclure on net section
made for dynamic effects.
Resistance factor for shear strenb,th
Resistance faclor for web crippling strength 551.t.2 Applicnbility
lti/fil
Parameter for reduced stiffness using sccond- This Specification includes Symbols and Definitions,
order analysis Section 551 through Sct;lion 557, Section C-1, to Section C-
Safoty factor 3 thaL shall apply as follows:
Safety factor for bending strength
Safoty factor for concentrically loaded Section C-l Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
compression strength Members Using Direcl Design Strength
Safety factor for diaphragms Method
Safety factor for tension strength Section C-2 Second-Order analysis.
Section C-3 Additional J>rovisions
Safety factor for shear strength
Safety faclor for web crippling strength
This Specification includes design provisions for
I. Allowable Str~ngth Design (ASO), and

2. Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
The nominal strength and stiffness of cold-formed steel

clements, members, assemblies, connections, and details
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions in
Section 552 to Section 557, Section C-1 lo Section C-3 of
the Specification.
Where the composition or configuration of such
components is such that calculation of strength and/or
slillitess cannot be made in accordance with those
provisions, structural performance shall be established from
either of the following:
1. Available strength or stiffness by tests, underlaken and

evaluated in accordance with Section 556,
2. Available strength or stiffness by rational engineering

analysis based on appropriate Lhcory, related testing if
data is available, and engineering judgment.
Specifically, the available strength is detennined from
the calculated nominal strenglh by applying the
following safety fat;tors or resistance factors:

5-23n CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
For Members ASTM A606, Standard Specification for Stcd, Sheet and
Strip, High-Strength, Low- Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
</> = 0. 80 (LRFD) Rolled, with improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
!1 = 2. 00 (ASD)
ASTM A 653M/A653M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa,
For Connections
340 MPa Class I, Class 3 and Class 4, and 380 MPa;
HSLAS and HSLAS-f, 275 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa Class
!1 = 2. 50 (ASD) </> = O. 65 (LRFD)
1 and 2, 410 MPa , & 480 MPa and 550 MPa , Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
551 .1.3 Definitions Zinc -.Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) hy the Hol-Oip
Process
In this Specification, "shall" is used to express a mandatory
requirement, i.e., a provisions that the user is obliged to
ASTM A792/A792M. (230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa, and
satisfy in order to comply with the Specification; and '>ha~l 340 MPa Class 1 and Class 4), Standard Specification for
be permitted " is used it express an option or that which is
Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-
permissible within the limits of the Specification.
Dip Process.
551.1.4 Units of Symbols and Terms ASTM A847/A847M, Standard Specification for Cold-
Formcd Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy
The unit systems considered in those sections is SI units. Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
551.2 Material
ASTM A875/A875M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa,
551.2.1 Applicable Steels and 340 MPa Class J and 3; HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 340
MPa, 410 MPa, 480 MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard
This Specification requires the use of steels intended for Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-
structural applications as defined in general hy the Coated by the Hot -Dip Process
specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials
listed in this section. The term SS shall designate sheet ASTM Al003/Al003M (ST 340 MPa H, 275 MPa H, 255
material and the terms HSLAS and HSLAS-F shall MPa H, 230 MPa H}, Standard Specification for Steel
designate high- strength low-alloy steels. Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-
Formed Framing Members
ASTM A36/ A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon
Stn1ctural Steel ASTM AJ008/Al008M (SS 170 MPa, 205 MPa, 230 MPa
Types I and 2, and 275 MPa Types 1 and 2; HSLAS
ASTM A242/A242M, Standard Specification for High- Classes I and 2, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa, 410 MPa,
Strcngth Low- Alloy Structural Steel 450 MPa, and 480 MPa; HSLAS-F 340 MPa, 410 MPa, 480
MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard Specification for Steel,
ASTM A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardcnable
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Fonned
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in ASTM A IOI I/AIOI IM (SS 205 MPa, 230 MPa, 250 MPa
Rounds and Shapes Types 1 and 2, 275 MPa, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, and 380 MPa
· HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa,
ASTM A529/A529M, Standard Specification for High - 410 MPa 450 MPa and 480 MPa ;HSLAS-F 340MPa, 410
Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Structural Quality MPa, 480 MPa, a;d 550MPa), Standard Specification for
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Strnctural,
ASTM A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High- High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low- Alloy
Strength Low-Alloy Columbiwn-Vanadium Structural Steel with Improved Fonnability
ASTM A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-

Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to IOOmm thick

CHAPTr R 5 '.~tructurc1t Sleet 5-2J7
AST:Vl A I 039/ A I 039M (SS 275 :vi Pa., 340 MPa, 380MPa, 551.2.3.2 Steels
410 MPa, 480 MPa, aud 550 MPa), Standard Specificalion
for Steel, Sheer, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and Steels conforming to ASTM A653/A<>53M SS (550 N!Pa).
StruclUraL Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process. Al008/ Al008M SS (550 Mpa), A792/A792M (550 Mp,1),
Thicknesses of 380 Mf>a and higher that do not meet the A875/ i\875M SS (550 Mpa), thicknesses of ASTM AI039
minimum 10% elongation requirement are limited per Grades (380Mpa), (410 MPa), (480 MPa). and (S50MPa)
Section 55 1.2.3.2. that do not meet the minimum IO percent elongation
requirement in Section 551.2.3.1, and other steels that do
551.2.2 Other Steels not meet the provisions or
Section 551.2.:U shall he
permitted for concentrically loaded closed box section
Sec Section 55 1.2.2 of Section C-3 compression memhcrs as given in Exception 2 below and
for nmltiplc-wcb configurations such as roofing, siding, and
551.2.3 Ductility floor decking as given in Exception 1 provided that:
Steels 1101 listed in Section 551.2.1 and used for stmctural 1. The yield stress, F y, used for determining nominal
memhers and connections in accordance with Section strength nominal resistance in Sections 551 to Section
551.2.2 shall comply with ductility requirements in either is taken as 75 percent of'thc specified minimum
Section 551.2.3.1 or Section 551.2.3.2: yield stress or 410 MPa, whichever is less, and
551.2.3. 1 General 2. The tensile strength, Fu, used for determining nominal
strength nominal resistance in Section 555 is taken as
The ratio of tensile strength ro yield stress shall not he less 75 percent or the specified minimum tensile strength or
than 1.08, and the total elongation shall not be less than 427 MPa, whichever is less.
IO percent for a 50 mm gauge length or 7 percent for a ~00
mtn gauge length standard specimen tested in accordance Alternatively, the suitahility of such steels for any multi-
with J\STM J\370. Ir t11ese requirements cannot be met, the wch configuration !>hall be demonstrated by loads tests in
following criteria shall be satisfied: accordance with the provisions of Section 556. A vailahlc
strengths based on these.: tests shall not exceed the available
1. Local elongation in a 12.7 mm gauge length across the strengths calculated in accordance with Section 552 through
fracture shall not be less than 20 percent, and Section 557, Section C-1 to Section C-3, using the specified
minimum yield stress, Fsy, and the specified minimum
2. Uniform elongation outside the fracture shall not be
tensile strength, Fu·
less than 3 percent. When material ductility is
determined on the basis or the local and uniform
Exception I:
elongation criteria, the use or such material shall be
restricted to the design orpurlins, girts, and cuitain wall For multiple-web configurations, a reduced 5pecified
studs in accordance with Sections 553.3.1 (a), Section minimum yield stress, RbFsy, shall he permitted .for
553.3.2, Section 554.(i. l, Section 554.6.2, Section determining the nominal .flexural s1rength in Section
554.6.2a, and requirements given in Section C-3.2.1 or
553.3.la, for which rhe reduction factor, Rh, .shall be
the Section C-3. !<or purlins, girts, and curtain wall
determined in accordance with (a) or (u):
studs subject to combined axial load and hcmling
moment (Section 553.3.5) llcP / Pn shall not exceed a. For stiffened and partially stfflened compression
0.15 for ASD, P uf <PcPn shall not exceed 0.15 for .flanges
tf
LR Fl), P </)cPn shall not exceed 0.15 for LSD.
(551.2-1)
Fur W ft :::; 0. 067 E / Fi;y
For 0. 067E / F sy < w/t < 0. 914E/Fsy

04
Rb= 1- 0.26l(wFsy/(tE))- 0.067] .
For 0. 974 E/Fsy s; w/t s; 500
l\lational Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edilion. 20·15

Rb= 0.75
551 .2.4 DeJivered Minimum Thickness
b. For unstiffened compression.flanges
The uncoated minimum steel thickness of the cold-formed
steel product as delivered lo the job site shalt not at any
Por w/t ~ 0 . 0173E/Fsy (551. 2-2) location be Jess than 95 percent of the thickness , t, used in
its design; however, lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at
bends, such as corners, due to cold-forming effects.
For 0.0173E/Fsy < w/t ~ 60 551.3 Loads
Loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the
Rh = 1. 079 -
~
0. 6~(tE)
applicable provisions in Section C-3.3 of Section C-3.
551.4 Allowable Strength Design

where 551.4. t Design Basis
w Flat width ofcompression flange
t Thickness ofsection Design under this section of the Specification shall be based
Modulus of'elasticity ofsteel on Allowable Strength Design (ASD) principles. All
E
provisions of this Specification shall apply, except for those
Fsy Specified minimum yield stress determined in
in Sections 551.5 and in Section 553 and Section 556
accordance with Section 551.6 ~ 550 MPa
designated for LRFD.
The above exception shall not apply to the use of steel deck
for composite slabs, for which the steel deck acts as the
551.4.1.1 ASD Requirements
tensile reinforcement of slab.
A design satisfies the requirements of this Specification
when the allowable strength of each structural component
Exceptinn 2:
equals or exceeds the required strength, determined on the
For concentrically loaded compression members with a basis of the nominal loads, for all applicable luad
closed box section, a reduced yield stres~·, combinations.
0. 9F sy, shall he permitted to be used in place of' F y in
Eqs. 553.4.2, 553.4.3, and 553.4.4 jhr determining the axial The design shalt bt perfonned in accordance with
strength in Section 553.4. A reduced radius of gyration Eq. 551.4.1-1:
(Rr)(r) shall be used in Eq. 553.4.J when the value ofthe
effective length KL is less than 1. 1Lo is given by R $ Rn/D. (551 .4 -l)
Eq. 551-3, and R r is given by Eq. 551-4. where
R Required strength
(55 l.2-3)
Rn Nom inal Strength specified in Section 552
through Section 557 and section C-1
.n Safety factor specified in Section 552 through
Section 557 and sci.;lion C-1
0.35 (KL) Rn/ .n = Allowable strength
(551.2-4)
Rr = 0.65 + l. lLo
551.4.1.2 Load Combinations for ASD
where
Load combination for ASD shalt be as stipulated by Section
Lo Length at which local buckling stress equals C-3.3 .1.1 a of Section C-3.
flexural buckling stress
r =- Radius gyration offull unre.duced cross secJion
Fer .Minimum critical buckling stress for section
calculated by Eq. 552.2
Rcr = Reduction factor
KL Effective length

551.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design 553.3.1.l(b)), 553.3.4, 553.3.5, 554.4, and 554.6.1. The
limils and methods for determining F ya shall be in
551 .5.1 Design Basis accordance with (a), (b) and (c).
Design under this section of the Specification shall be based I. For axially loaded compression members and flexural
on Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) principles. members whose proportions arc such that the quantity p
All provisions or this Specification shall apply except for for strength detennination is unity as determined in
those in Sections 551.4 and in Chapters 553 and 556 accordance with Section 552.2 for each of the
designated for ASD and LRFD. component clements of the section, the design yield
stresses, F ya, or lhe steel shall be detemlinc::d on the
551.5.1.1 LRFD Requirements
basis of one of the following methods:
A design satisfies the requirements of this Specification
a. 1:u11 section tensile tests fsee paragraph (a) of Section
when the design strength of each structural component
556.3.11,
equals or exceeds the required strength determined on the
basis of the nominal loads, multiplied by the applicable load
b. Stub column tests [see paragraph (b) of Section
factors, for all applicable load combinations.
556.3.1),
The design shall be performed in accordance with the
Eq. 551.5-1: c. Computed in accordance with Eq. 551.7-1.
(551.5-1) (551.7-1)
where where
Required strength F ya ~
Average yield stress of full unreduced section of
Resistance factor specified in Section 552 through compression members or full Hangc sections of
557 and Appendix C-J flexural members
Nominal strength specified in Section 552 through C for compression members, ratio of total corner
557 and Appendix C-1 cross-sectional area to total cross-sectional area of
Design strength full section; for tlexural members, ratio of total
corner cross-sectional area of controlling flange to
55l.5.1h Load Factors and Load Combinations for full cross-sectional area of controlling nange
LRFD Fye= BcFyv/(Rit)m, tensile yield stress corners of
(551.7-2)
Load factors and load combinations for LRFD shall be
stipulated by Section C-3.3.1.1 b of Section C-3. Eq. 55 I .7-2 applies only when
551.7 Yield Stress and Strength Increase from Cold
Fuv/Fyv ~ 1. 2, R/t $ 7, and the included angle~ 120°
Work of Forming
551.7.1 Yield Stress where
The yield stress used in design, F y, shall not exceed the Be= 3.69 (Fuv/Fyv) - 0.819 (Fm.,/Fyv)2 -1. 79
specified minimum yield stress of steels as listed in Section (551.7-3)
551.2.2.1 or 5512.3.2, as established in accordance with F yv = Tensile yield stress of virgin steel specified by
Section 556, or as increased for cold work of t<mning in Section SS 1.2 or estahlishcd in accordance with
Section 551. 7.2. Section 556.3.3
R Inside bend radius
551.7.2 Strength Increase from Cold Work t Thickness of section
of Jt'orming. m 0.192 (FuvfFyv) - 0. 068 (551.7-4)
Fuv = Tensile strength of virgin steel specified by Seclion
Strength increase from cold work of fonning shall be 551.2 or established in accordance with Section
pennitted by substituting F ya for F y, where F ya is the 556.3.3
average yield stress of the full section. Such increase shall
be limited to Sections 553.2, 553.3.1 (excluding Section
-----~--
5-240 C HAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
Weighted average tensile yield stress of llat Note:* A!Sl tesr procedures previously designated as
portions established in accordance with Section ATS! TSn-xx are re-designated to AISI S9n-xx, where
556.3.2 or virgin steel yield s tress if tests are not "n" is the test procedure sequence number and ''xx" is
made the year the standard was developed or updated.
2. For axially loaded tension members, the yield stress of 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),
the steel shall be determined by either method (I) or 1828 L Street, NW, Washington, De 20036:
method (3) prescribed in parngraph (a) of this section.
ASME 846. 1-2000, Surface Texture, Surface
3. The effect of any welding on mechanical properties or a Roughness, Waviness, ,md Lay
member shall be determined on the basis of testc; of full
section specimens containing, within the gauge length, 3. American Society for Testing and M1:1terials (ASTM),
such welding as lhc manufacturer intends to use. Any I 00 Barr Harbour Drive, West Conshohocken,
necessary nllownncc for such effect shall be made in Pennsylvania 19428-2959:
the structural use of the member.
ASTM A36/ A36m-05, Standard Specification for
551.8 Serviceability Carbon Structural Steel
/\. structure shall be designed to perfonn its required ASTM A 194/ Al 94M-06, Standard Specification for
functions during its expected life. Serviceability limit slates Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-
shall be chosen based on tlte intended function of the Prcssure and High-Temperature Service, or Both
structure and shall be evaluated using realistic loads and
load combinations. ASTM A242/ A242 M-04el, Standard Specification for
High-Strcngth l<>w-A 1loy Structural Steel
551.9 Referenced Documents
ASTM A307-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
The following documents or portions thereof are referenced Steel Bolts and Sn1ds, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
in this Specification and shall be considered part or the
requirements of this Specification. ASTM A325-06, Standard Specification for Structural
Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/1 05 ksi M inimum
1. Amedcan Iron and Steel Institute (A/SI), J 140 Tensile Strength
Connecticut Ave., NW, Washington, DC 20036:
ASTM A325M-Q5, St1:1ndard Specification for
AtSI S200-07, North American Slandard for Cold- Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa
Fonncd Steel Framing - General Provisions Minimum Tensile Strength [Metric]
AISI S210-07, North American Standard for Cold- ASTM A354-04, Standard Specification For Quenched
Formed- Floor and Roof System Design and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners
AISI S211-07, North American Standard for Cold-
Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud Design ASTM A370-05, Standard Specifications for Standard
Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
AISC S212-07, North Americ.m for Cold-Formed Steel of Steel Products
Framing - Header Design
ASTM A449-04b, Standard Specification for Hex Cap
AISI 5214-07, North American Standard for Cold- Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
Forrncd Steel Framing- Truss Design 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General
Use.
AlSl 5901 -02*, Rolational Lateral Stiffness Test
Method for Beam-to- Panel Assemblies ASTM A490-06, Standard Specification for Structural
Bolt,;, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum
AISI S902-02, Stub-Column Test Method for Effective Tensile Strength
Arca of Cold-Formed Steel Columns
ASTM A490M-04a, Standard Specification for High
AISI S906-04, Standard Procedures for Panel and Strength Steel Bolls, Classes l 0.9 and 10.9.3, for
Anchor Structural Tests Structural Steel Joints [Metric]

ASTM A500-03a, Slandard Specification for Cold ASTM Al 039/ A I039M-04, Standard Specification for
formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Structural, Produced hy the Twin-Roll-Casting Process
ASTM A529/ A529M-05, Standard Specification for ASTM El 592-0 l, Standard Test Method for Structural
High Strength Carhon-Mangancse Steel of Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding System
Quality by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM /\563-04, Stan<lard Specification for Carbon ASTM f-'436-04, St11ndard Specification for Hardened
and Alloy Steel Nuts Stcd Washers
ASTM A563M-04, Standard Specification for Carbon ASTM F436M-04, Standard Specilication for
and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric] Hardened Steel Washer (Metric]
ASTM A572/A572M-06, Standard Specification for ASTM F844-04, Standard Specification for Washers,
High -Strength Low Alloy Columhium-Vanadium Skc.:I, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
Structural Steel
ASTM F959-05a, Standard Specification for
ASTM A588 I A588M-05, Standard Specification for Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
High- Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi for Use with Strnctural Fasteners
[345 MPaJ Minimun Yield f)oint to 4-in. [lOOmm]
Thick ASTM F959M-04, Standard Specification for
Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
ASTM A606-04, Standard Specification for Steel, for Use with Structural Fasteners [Metric]
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength , Low alloy, Hot- l{ollcd
and Cold- Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric 4. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:CEGS-07416, Guide
Corrosion Resistance Specification for Military Construction, Structural
Standiog Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR) System, 1995
ASTM A653/ A653M-06, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 5. Factory Mutual, Corporate Onices, 1301 Atwood
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process Avenue, P.O. Box 7500,Johnston, RI 02919: FM 4471,
Approval Standard for Class 1 Melal Roofs, 1995
ASTM A847 I A847M-05, Standard Specification for
Cold Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength,
Low alloy Stmctural Tubing with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion l{esistance
ASTM A875 I A875M-05, Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Zim:-5% Aluminum Alloy- Coated hy the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A I 00:V A I003M-05, Standard Specilication for

Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Non Metallic-
Coated for Cold Fonned framing Members
ASTM AJ008/ Al008M-05b, Standard Specification

for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High- Strength Low Alloy, High- Strength Low Alloy
with Improved Fonnability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardenable
ASTM Al O11 I A IO I I M-05a, Standard Specification for

Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low alloy
with Improved Formability
National Structural Code of the Philippines VolulT'e I, 7th Edition. 2015

2. Flange Curling. Where the flange of a flexural member

SECTION552 is usually wide and it is desired to limit the maximum
ELEMENTS amount of curling or movement of ilie flange toward
the neutral axis, Eq. 552. 1-1 shall be pennitted to be
552.1 Dimensional Limits and Considerations applied to compression and tension flange, either
stiffened or unstiffened as follows:
552.1.1- Flange-Flat-Width-to-Thickness
I.
Considerations
Maximum Flat-Width-to-Thickness ratios, Maximum w, = ( fav

J
0. 06 ttdE) 4 lOOcf
d
allowable overall flat-width-lo-thickness ratios wit,
disregarding intermediate stiffeners and taking t as the (522.l - l)
actual thickness of the element , shall be determined in where
accordance with this section as follows:
width of flange projecting beyond web; or
a. Stiffened compression element having one half of distance between webs for box-or U-
longitudinal edge conn ected to a web or Hauge type beams
element, the other stiffened by: t flange thickness
d depth of beam
Simple lip, w ft, ~ 60 f av average stress in full unreduced tlange
w idth. Where members arc design by the
Any other kind of stiffener e!Tective design width procedure, the
average stress equals the maximum stress
(i) when Is< la, w/t ~ 60 multiplied by the ratio of the effective
design width to the actual width)
(ii) when 19 ~ I a, w/t ~ 60 cf = a mount of curling dis placement
where 3. Shear Lag Effects - Short Spans Supporting
Aclual moment of inertia of full stiffener

about its own centroidal axis parallel to
less than 30 w,
Concentrated Loads. Where tl1e beam has a span of
(wr as defined below) and it carries
one concentrated load, or several loads spaced farther
element to be stiffened apart than zw1 , lhe effective design width of any
adequate moment of inertia of stiffener, flange, whether in tension or compression, shall be
so that each component element will limited by the values in Table 552-1.
behave as a stiffened clement
b. Stiffened compression element with both Table 552-1 Short Span, Wide Flanges - Maximum
longitudinal edges connected to other stiffened Allowable Ratio of Effective Design Width (b)
elements, w ft ::; 500 to Actual Width (w )
c. Un~tiffened compression clement, w ft ~ 60

Lfw· Ratio b/w L/w Ratiob/w
Il shall be not.eel that unstiffened compression element<; that 30 1.00 14 0.82
25 0.96 12 0.78
have w /t ratios exceeding approximately 30 and stiffened
20 0.91 10 0.73
compression elements that have w /t ratios exceeding
18 0.89 8 0.67
approximately 250 arc likely to develop noticeable
16 0.86 6 0.55
deformation at the full available strength,without affecting
the ability of the me mber lo develop the requi red strength.
Stiffened clements having W /t ratios greater than 500

provide adequate available strength to sustain the required
loads; however, substantial deformations of such elements
usually will invalidate the design equations of this
Specification.

where where
L full Span for simple beams; or the distance between w = flat width as shown in Figure 522-1
inflection points for continuous beams; p Local reduction factor
w, width or flange projection beyond web for I-beam
and similar sections; or half the distance between
(t - o. 22 / l) I l (552.2-3)
;t slenderness factor
webs for box-or U-typc sections
For flanges ofl-bcams and similar sections stiffened by lips

at the outer edges, wf shall be taken as the sum of flange
projection beyond the web plus the depth of the lip.
Jt (552.2-4)
552.1.2 Maximum Web nDepth-To-Thickness

Ratios
w
The ratio, h/t, of the webs of flexural members shall not
exceed the following limits:
1. For unreinforced webs: (h/t)max = 200

i'
2. For webs which are provided with bearing stiffeners -------- lTTI1TJl....---,
satisfying the req ui rcmcnts of Section 55 3.3. 7a:
•
________ lllllllJ
a. Where using bearing stiffeners only, (h/t)max
260
=
--------~
-------- w
b/2 b/2
o. Where using bearing stiffeners and intcnncdiatc
stiffeners, (h/t)max = 300
Effective Element. b, end St,-, f,
on Effective Elements
where
depth of Oat portion of web measured Figure 552-1 Stiffened Elements

h
along plane of web where
t weh thickness. Where a web consists
of two or more sheets, the h/t ratio f -= stress in compression element computed as follows:
is computed for the individual sheets
For flexural members:
552.2 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements
a. Ir Procedure r of Section 553.1.l is used:
552.2.1 Uniformly Compressed Stiffened Elements
• When initial yielding is in compression in
I. Strength Detennination
the element considered, f =
Fy
The effective width, b, shall be cakulatcd from either
• When the inilial yielding is in tension, the
Eq. 552.2-1 or Eq. 552.2-2 as follows:
compressive stress f in the element
considered is determined on the basis of
b = w when As; 0.673 {552.2-1)
effective section at My (moment causing
initial yield)
b = pw when.A > 0.673 (552.2-2)
b. If Procedure II of Section 553.1. I is used, f is

the stress in the elements considered at Mn
detennined on the basis or the effective
section.
'\
c. If Section 553 .1.2. l is used, f is the stress F c p == (1. 358 - O. 461 / l) / l when
as described in that Section in determining
effective section modulus Sc
0.673 < l < Ac
(552.2-8)
For compression members, f is taken equal to
F n as determined in accordance with Section p = (0.41 + 0 . 59 jFy// d - 0.22/l )/ l
533.4
Ac
n E
Fer= k 12(1- µ2 )
2
(t) W
2
(552.2-5)
p ~
when).~
1 for au cases
(552.2-9)
where where
A = A value as defined by Eq. 552.2-4, except
k = plate buckling coefficient
that f d is substituted for f
4 for stiffened elements supported by a
web on each longitudinal edge values ). : 0.256 + 0.328(w/t)j(Fy/E)
for different types of elements are given
in the applicable sections (552.2-10)
E Modulus of Elasticity of steel
t thiclmess of unifonnly compressed 552.2.2 Uniformly Compressed Stiffened with
stiffened elements Circular or Non- .Circular Roles
µ Poisson's ratio of steel
l. Strength Detennination
2. Serviceability Determination
For circular holes:
The effective width bd used in determining
serviceability shall be calculated from either as follows: The effective width, b, shall be calculated by either
Eq. 552.2-J 1 or Eq. 552.2- 12 as follows:
bd = W whenl ~ 0.673 (552.2-6)
bd = pw when A~ 0.673 (552.2-7) For

dh
0.50 ~ - ~ 0,
w
and tw $ 70,
where distance between centers of holes ~ 0. SOw and

~ 3d1t
w == flat width
p == Reduction factor determined by either of the when ). ~ O. 673 (552.2-11)
following two procedures:
a. Procedure I:
A conservative estimate of the effective width is

obtained from Eqs. 552.2-3 and 552.2-4 by (552.2-)2)
when l $ 0. 673
substituting f d for f , where fa is the computed
compressive stress in the element being
considered. In all cases, b ~ w - dh
where
b. Procedure II:
= flat width
thickness of element
For stiffened clements supported by a web on each
longitudinal edge, an improved estimate of tJ1e diameter of holes
effective width is obtained by calculaling p as a value as defined in Section 552.2.1
follows:
p == 1 wheo l ~ 0. 673

For non-circular holes: h. Clear distance from the hole at ends, send
~ 254mm,
A uniformly compressed stiffened element with
non-circular holes shall be assumed Lo consist or two c. Ucpth of hole, dh::; 63. 5 mm,
unstiffom:d strips of flat widlh, c, adjacent lo the holes d. Length of hole, L1i ::; 114 mm, and
(see Figure 552-2). The effective width, b, of each
unstiffcm:d strip adjacent to Lhc hole shall be c. Ratio of the depth of hole, dh, to the out-to-out
determined in accordance with 552.2.1 (a), except that widlh, W 0 , d1Jw 0 ::; 0. 5.
plate buckling cocnicicnt, k, shall be taken as 0.43 and Alternatively, lhc effective width, b, shall he
was c. These provisions shall be applicable within the pcrmilled lo be determined by stub-column tests in
following limits: accordance with lhc test procedure, AISI S902.
a. Ccnlcr Lo center hole spacing, s ~ 610 mm
drr-- ·-
I. .1 s
Figure 552-2 Uniformly Compressed Stiffened Elements with Non-Circular Holes
2. Serviceability Oetermination tf, = 1'2/'11 (absolute value)

The effective width, bd, used in detennining serviceability
J. Strength Determination
shall be equal to b calculated in accordance with Procedure
I or Section 552.2.1 (b ), except that f d is substituted for f, a. For webs .under stress gradient (/1 in compression
where f d is the computed compressive stress in Lhe element and f 2 ) in tension as shown in Figure 552-3 (a),
being considered. the effective widths and plate buckling coefficient
shall be calculated as follows:
552.2.3 Webs and Other Stiffened Elements Under
Stress Gradient
k = 4 + 2(1 + l/J) 3 + 2(1 + t/J) (552,2-13)
The following notation shall apply in this section:

For
bi = effective width, dimension defined m Figure

. 552-3 (552.2-14)
Effective width, dimension defined in Figure
552-3 when tf, > 0. 236 (552.2-15)
Effective width, b, determined in accordance
wilh section 552.2. I. J, with f 1 substituted for f b2 = be - b 1 when tf, > 0. 236 (552.2-16)
and with k detcnnincd as given in this section
out-to-out width of the compression Hange as In addition, b 1 + b2 shall not exceed the
defined in Figure 552-4 compression portion of the weh calculated on the
stresses shown in Figure 552-3 calculuted on the basis of effective section.
fvfz
basis ur effective section. Where f 1 and f 2 are
both compression, f 1 ~ f 2
Out-tc,-out depth of web as defined in Figure
552-4
k plate buckling coefficient

h. For other stiffened elements under stress gradient ( f 1

and fz in compression as shown in Figure 522-3 (b))
bi= be/(3 + t/J) (552.2-17)
k = 4 + 2 (1 -1/)) 3 + 2 (1 - t/J) (552.2-19)
bz = be/(1 + l/1) - bi (552.2-18)
bi = be /(3 - 1/J) (552.2-20)
(552.2-21)
t1(Compr81Slon)
'1 (Compression)
' \
I
I
f2(Compression)
Etfedive Elements and Stress

on Effective Elements
(a) Webs under Stress Gradient (b) Other Stiffened Elements under Stres.! Gradient
Figure 552-3 Webs and Other Stiffe ned Elements under Stress Gradient

CHAPTER 5 Structurnl Steel 5-247
Figure 552-4 Out-to-Out Dimensions of Webs and Stiffened Elements under stress Gradient
l. Serviceability Determination where
The effeclivc widths used in determining serviceabilily shall '-- depth of web hole
be calculated in accordance with Section 552.3(a) except depth of flat pmtion of web measured along
that f dl and f dZ are substituted for f 1 and f z, where f dt plane of web
and f dZ are the computed stresses f 1 and f 2 based on the thickness of web
effective section at the load for which serviceability is length of web hole
determined. e1lectivc widths defined by Figure 522-3
Effective Widths of Unsliffoned Elements
522.2.4 C-Section Webs with Holes under Stress Effective Widths ofUnstiffened Elements
Gradient
I. Strength Determination
The provisions of Section 552.2.4 shall apply wilhin the
following limits: a. When dh/h < 0. 38, the effective widths b 1 and
bz shall he determined in accordance with Section
552.2.3a by assuming no holes exist in the web.
2. HJ t :s; 200, b. When d1i/ h < 0. 38, the ellective widlh shall be
determined in accordance with Section 552.3. la,
3. Holes centered at mid-depth or web, assuming the compression portion of the web
consists of an unstiffened elemenl adjacenl lo lite
4. Clear dislance between holes 2: 457mm, hole with f = f 1 as shown in Figure 522-3.
5. Non-cil'cular holes, comer radii ~ 2t, 2. Serviceabilily Delennination
6. Non-circular holes, dh :::;; 64mm and L11 :5 l 14mm, The effective widths shall be determined in accordance
with Section 552.2.3b by assuming no hole exists in the
7. Circular holes, diameter~ 152mm,and web.
8. dh ~ 14mm.
National Structural Code of the Philippine3 Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

S-248 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
552.3 Effective Widths of Unstiffened Elements 1. Strength Determination
552.3.1 Uniformly Compressed Unstiffened The effective width, b, shall be detennined in

Elements accordance with Section 552.2.1 a, except that plate
buckling coefficient, k , shall be taken as 0.43 and W as
defined in Figure 552-5.
w
~ 1
i'
laual Element
Figure 552-5 Unstiffened Element with Unifonn Compression
2. Serviceability Determination "' overall depth of unstiffened C-section member

as defined in Figure 552-8
The effective width, bd, used in determining serviceability k plate buckling coc!ftcient defined in this section
shall be calculated in accordance with Procedure I of or, otherwise, as defined in Section 552.2. la
Section 552.2.1 (b), except that f d is substituted for f and t thickness of element
k = 0.43. w "' flat width of unstiffened element, where
w/ t s; 60 ·
522.3.2 Unstiffened and Edge Stiffeners with Stress If1/f 2 I (absolute value) (552.3-1)
Gradient slenderness factor defined in section 552.2.J (a)
=
withf Ji
The Following notation shall apply in this se<-tion: p reduction factor defined in this section or,
otherwise, as defined in Section 552.2.I(a)
b effective width measured from the supported
edge, determined in accordance with Section
552.2. la, with f equal to f 1 and with k and p
being detennincd in a accordance with this
section
overall width of unstiffened element of
unstifleoed C-section member as defined in
Figure 552-8
/1,/2 stresses shown in Figures 552-6,552-7, and 552-
8 calculated on the basis of the gross section.
Where f 1 and f 2 are both compression,
/1 ~ fz

-+ +- f2 {fenslon)
, I I
. . !.J +- f2(Tenelon)
(8) lhupport8d Edie In Coqnasion (b) &c,por1ld Edge nCorqM111ion
Figure 552-6 Unstiffened Element under Stress Gradient Both Longitudinal Edges in Compression
----ho----
!
:•·: f1 (ComJ)NMlelon)
__l!!!!P.J_A,ljs__ b {Tension)
(a) Unsuptld fdCtt In Co~
Figure 552-7 Unstiffcncd Elements under Stress Gradient One Longitudinal Edge in Compression and the Other Longitudinal
Edge in Tension
'
,--.-, t1(Compression)
~• ~(Compression)
••
'
- ~ f1(Compresslon) '''
•''
....
I
...,
-~ · ·:- f2(Compresslon) I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
..
..
It
I I
,,,,
I I
•,,•
NeunUldl V --~ !~ __ J. __
----·-----'·-
(1) lrMrd feclnl Up (b) Outward Feclf1& Up
Figure 552-8 Unstiffened Elemenls ofC Section under Stress Gradient for Alternative Methods
The effective width, b, of an unstifft: ned element under c. If the unsupported edge is in compression
stress gradient shall be determined in accordance with Figure 552-?(a)):
Section 552.2.1 a with f equal to f 1 and the plate
buckling coefficient, k, determined in accordance with p= 1 when l :5 0. 673(1 + 1/J)
this section, unless otherwise noted. For the cases
where f 1 is in compression and f2 is in tension, p in p = (1 + t/J) (1 + 1/J)
Section 552.2.la shall be determined in accordance A
with this section.
when l >. 0. 673(1 + 1/J) ( 552.3-4)
a. When both f 1 and f2 are in compression

(Figure 552-6), the plate buckling coeffici ent shall k = 0. 57 + 0. Zlt/J + 0. 07t/J 2 (552.3-5)
be calculated in accordance with either Eq. 552.3-2
or Eq. 552.3-3 as follows: d. If the supported edge is in compression
Figure 552-8(b):
If the stress decreases toward the unsupported edge
(Figure 552-6): For 1/J < 1
0.578 p = 1 when A :::; 0. 673
k = 1/J + 0. 34 (552.3-2)
(1 0. 22)
If the stress increases toward the unsupported edge
p = ( 1 + t/J) - l-x- + t/J
(Figure Be.2-1 (b)):
when A :5 O. 673 (522.3-6)
k = 0. 57 - 0. 211/J + 0. 07t/J 2 (552.3-3)

k = 1. 70 + 51/J + 17.11/)2 (522.3-7)
b. When f 1 is in compression and f 2 intension For 1/J < 1, p= 1

(Figure 552-7), the reduction factor and plate
buckling coefficient shall be calculated as foJJows:

The effective width, b, of the unstiffened elements of an 552.4 Effective Width of Uniformly Compressed
unstiffened C- section member shall be permitted to be Elements with a Simple Lip Edge Stiffener
detennined using the following alternative methods as
applicable: The effective widths of uniformly compressed elements
with a simple edge stiffener shall be calculaled in
a. Alternative I for Unstiffened C-section:
accordance with (a) for strength detennination and (b) for
serviceability determination.
When the unsupported edge is in compression and the
supported edge is in tension (Figure 552-8 (a)):
b=w when l :s; 0. 856 (552.3-8) For w /t :::; 0. 3285:
b = pw when l :s; 0. 856 (552.3-9) la 0 (no edge stiffener needed)
where b w (552.4-1)
0.925 bi b 2 = w /2 (see Figure 552-9) (552.4-2)

p=-- (552.3-10)
-11 (552.4-3)
ds d~
k == 0. 145(b0 /h0 ) + 1. 256 (552.3-1 l)
For w/t ~ 0.328S
b1 (b/2)(Rl) (sec Figure 552-9) (552.4-4)

b. Altcmative 2 for Unstiffened C-sections:
bz (b - b1) (sec Figure 552-9) (552.4-5)
When the supported edge is in compression and the
unsupported edge in tension (Figure 552-8(b)), the dz d~(Rl) (552.4-6)
effective width is determined in accordance with
Section 552.2.3. where
In calculating the effective section modulus Se m s =

1. 28.j E/f (552.4-7)
section 553.3.1.1 or Sc in Section 553.3.1.1, w= flat dimension defined in
Figure 552-9
The extreme compression fiber in Figures 552-6 (h), t = thickness of section
and B3.2-3(a) shall be taken as the edge oflhe effective
section closer to the unsupported edge. In calculating /a = adequate moment of inertia of
the effective section modulus Se in Section 553.3.l, the stiffener, so that each component
extreme tension fiber in Figures 552-7(b) and 552-S(b) clement will behave a stiffened
shall he taken as the edge of the effective section closer element
to the unsupported edge.
= 399t4 [<w~w) - 0. 328r ~ t 4 [11s (w:t)] + 5
(552.4-8)
The effective width bd used in detennining
b = effective design width
serviceability shall be calculated in accordance with bi, b 2 = Portions of effective design width as
defined in Figure 552-9
Section 552.3.2(a), except that f dZ are substituted for
d5 = Reduced effective width of stinener
f 1 and f z, respectively, where f d1 and f d2 are the as defined in Figure 552-9, and used
computed stresses f 1 and f z as shown in Figures 552- in computing overall effective section
6, 552-7, and 552-8, respectively, based on the gross pro petties
section at the load for which serviceability is d' = Effective width of stiffener calculated
determined. s in accordance with Section 552.3.2
(Figure 552-9)
(RI) = I5 /Ia ~ 1 (552.4-9)
i
where
= Moment of inertia of full section
of stiffener about parallel to
element to be stiffened. For edge
stiffeners, the round comer
between stiffener and clement to
be stiffened is not considered as a
part of the stiffener
(dt sin2 8) / 12 (552.4-1 O)
See F igure 552-9 for Definitions of other Dimensional
Variables.
D, d • ~ I stlffeiwdlmenslonl
----·-·-·-·-·-·- ·- ·- ·- ·- ·-·-·-·-·
Centroldal Alli
Figure 552-9 Elements with Simple Lip Edge Stiffener
The effective width, b, in Eq.552.4-4and Eq.552.4-5 shall where

be calculated in accordance with Section 552.2.1 with the
plate buckling coefficient, k, as zgiven in Table 552-2
below: (552.4-11)
Table 552-2 Determination of Plate Buckling Coefficient k

Simple Lip Edge Stiffener ( I40°::::: e::::: 40°)
D/w < 0.25 I 0.25 < D/w < 0.8 The effective width bd, used in determining serviceability
3.57(Rnn + 0.43 s 4 I (4.82 - (SD Jw)(Rl)n + 0.43 ::;; 4 shall be calculated as in Section 552.4 except that f d is
substituted for f, where f d is computed compressive stress
in the effective section at the load for which serviceability is
detennined.
•
522.5 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements with

Single or Multiple Intermediate Stiffeners or
Edge Stiffened Elements with Intermediate
Stiffener(s)
522.5.1 Effective Widths of Uniformly Compressed

Stiffened Elements with Single or Multiple
Intermediate Stiffeners
The following notation shall apply as used in this section Figure 552-10 Plate Widths and Stiffener Locations
Gross area of element including sti mmcrs

Gross area of stiffener
Effective width of element, located at centroid of
clement including stiffeners; figure 552-11
- - · - · · · -·f\\-;
H - -
. · ·-, F....· - - -~~·· · - -
Centroid
•·=-=·= ···~\-/..::. r-· r. -..- ·
,w.-...
Total flat width or stiffened element; sec
Figure 552- LO
1.o.~ .I -1:.,, ~/ I. O,Sbo .I
Largest sub-element flat width; see Figure 552-10
Horizontal distance from edge of element to Figure 552-11 Effective Width Locations
centerline(s) ofstiffener(s); see Figure 552-10
Plate elastic buckling stress The effective width shall be calculated in accordance with
Fer
Uniform compressive stress acting on tlat Eq. 552.5-1 as follows:
f
clement
h Width or elements adjoining stiffened eleme·nt (552.5-1)
(e.g., depth of weh in hat section with multiple
intennediate stiffeners in compression flange is
where
equal to h; if adjoining clements have different
widths, use smallest one)
Moment of inertia of stiffener about centerline of
p=1 when A ~ 0. 673
!lat portion of element. The radii that connect the
stiffener to the flat can he included p = (1. 0. 22/l)/1 when A> 0. 673 (552.5-2)
Plate buckling coetlicient of element
where
Plate buckling l:ocfficicnt for distmtional
buckling
Plate buckling l:ocffidcnt for local sub-clement
buckling
Unsuppmtcd length between brace points or
Other restraints which restrict distortional
i- F')
.~\Ji;;)
(552.5-3)
where
Buckling of element
R Modification factor for disto1tional plate
Buckling coeniciem
Number of stiffeners in clement
nZE
Fer= k ( 12(1 - µ2)
)(t)z
bo (552.5-4)
n
t Element thickness
i Index for stiffener "i"
A skndemess factor The plate buckling coefficient, k, shall be detennined from
p Reduction factor the minimum of Rkd and ktoe, as detennincd in accordance
with Section 552.5.1. I or 552.5.1.2, as applicable.
K the minimum of Rkd and k1oc (552.5-5)

R 2 when b 0 /h < 1
=
R
11 - bo)
h ~
1
when b 0 /h ~1 (552.5-6)
( 5 2
i
522.S.1.1 Specific Cases: Single or Identical I. Strength Determination

Stiffeners, Equally Spaced
For uniformly compressed elements with single, or multiple (552.5-12)

idenlical and equally spaced stiffeners, the plate huckling
coefficients and effective widlhs shall be calculated as
follows:
1. Strength Determination
( (1+ pz)2 + 2 Li=t YiWi)
kd = ...;....----------'-- (552.5-13)
(P2(1+21:f=1 6iwi))
lc.zoc = 4(n + 1)2 (552.5-7)
where
k
d
= ((1p+ pz)Z+ + + + n))
2 (1
y(1
6(n 1))
(552.5-8)
(5 52.5-14)
where where
1/4
p= (1 +y(n + 1) ) (552.5-9)
(552.5-15)
where
= (10. 92 lsp) (552.5-10)

(552.5-16)
y b 0 t 3.
6· = (As), (552.5-17)
(552.5-11) l b0 f
If Lhr < /Jb 0 , Lbrfb0 shall be permitted to be suhstituted If Lbr < Pb 0 ,Lbr f b 0 shall be permitted to be
for ~ to account for increased capacity due to bracing. substituted for p to account for increased capacity due
to bracing.
2. Serviceability Detennioation
The effective width, bd, used in detennining
serviceability shall be calculated as in Section
The effective width bd used in detennining
552.5. 1. l , except that f d is substituted for f , where f d
serviceability shall be calculated as in Section
is the computed compressive stress in the element
being considered based on the effective section at !he 552.5.1.2. J, except that f d is substituted for f, where
luad for which serviceability is determined. f d is the computed compressive stress in the element
being considered based on the eftective section at the
552.5.1.2 General Cases: Arbitrary Stiffener Size, load for which serviceability is determined.
Location, and Number
552.5.2 Edge Stiff'ened Elements with lntermedjate
For uniformly compressed stiffened elements with Stiffener(s)
stiffeners of arbitrary size, location and number, the plate
buckling coefficients and effective widths shall be I. Strength Determination
calculated as follows: For edge stiffened elements with intennediate
stiffcner(s), the effective width, b 0 shall be determined
as foll ows:

a. If b 0 lt ~ 0. 328S, the element is fully clfoctivc SECTION553

and no local buckling required.
l\IEMBERS
b. If b 0 lt > 0. 328S, then the plate buckling
coefficient, k, is determined in accordance with 553.1 Properties ol' Sections
Section 552.4, but with b 0 replacing w in all
expressions: Properties of sections (cross-sectional area, moment of
inertia, section modulus, radius of gyration, etc.) shall be
Ir k calculated from Section 552.4 is less than determined in accordance with conventional methods of
4. O(k < 4), the intermediate stitlener(s) is structural design. Properties shall be based on the full cross-
ignore and the provisions of Section 522.4 are section of the members ( or net sections where the use of net
followed for calculation of the effective width. section is applicable) except where the use of a reduced
cross-section, or effective design width, is required.
If k calculates from Section 552.4 is equal to
553.2 Tension Members
4. 0 (k = 4), the effective width of the edge
stiffened element is calculated from the provisions
Sec Section 553.3.5 of Section 553.3.
or Section 552.5.1, with the following exception:
R calculated in accordance with Section 552.5.1 is 553.3 Flexm·al Members
less than or equal to I.
553.3.1 Bending
where
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the smallest or
total flat width of edge stiffened element the values calculated in accordance with sections 553.3. l.l,
see Sections 552.4 and 522.5.1 for 553.3.1.2, 553.3.1.3, 553.3. l.4, 554.6.1.1, 554.6.1.2, and
definitions of other variables 554.6.2.1, where applicable.
2. Serviceability Determination See Section 553.3.6, as applicable for laterally unrestrained

flexural members subjected to both bending and torsional
The effective width, bd, used in determining loading, such as loads that do not pass through the shear
serviceability shall be calculated as in Section 552.5(b), center of the cross-section, a condition which is not
except that f d is substituted for f, where f d is the considered in the provision or this section.
computed compressive stress in the clement being
considered based on the effective section at the load for 553.3.1.1 Nominal Section Strength
which serviceability is determined.
The nominal tlexural strength, Mn, shall be calculated
either on the basis of initiation of yielding of the effective
section (Procedure I) or on the basis of the inelastic reserve
capacity (Procedure II), as applicable. The applicable safety
factors and the resistance factors given in this section shall
he used to determine the allowable strength or design
strength in accordance with the applicable design method in
Section 551.4, or 551.5.
For sections with stiffened or partially compression

Flange:
fib = 1. 67 (ASD) 4'b = 0. 95 (LRFD)

For sections with unstiffened compression flanges:
fih = 1. 67 (ASD) 4'b = 0. 90 (LRFD)
"(
l. Procedure l -Based on Initiation of Yielding (i) Stiffened compression elements without

intermediate stiffeners
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for the effective yield
moment shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 553.3-1 For compression elements without intermediate
as follows: stiffeners, Cy, shall be calculated as follows:
(553.3-1) Cy = 3 when w/t ::; l.1
where
Elastic section modulus of effective section

calculated relative to extreme compression or
tension fiber at F y
Design yield stress determined in accordance with (553.3-2)
Section 551.7. l
where
2. Procedure II - Based on [nelastic Reserve Capacity 1.11
A1- --
- (Fv (553.3-3)
The inelastic flexural reserve capacity shall be permitted to
be used when the following conditions are met: ~ii
where
a. The member is not subject to twisting or to lateral,
torsional, or flexural-torsional buckling. 1. 28
lz = - -
!t
(553.3-4)
b. The effect of cold work of forming is not included in
determining the yield stress Fy·
(ii) Unstiffened compression elements
c. The ratio of the depth of the compressed portion of the For unstiffened compression elements, Cy, shall
web to its thickness does not exceed ..l1. be calculated as follows:
d. The shear force does not exceed 0. 3 SF y for ASD, and ( ii- 1) Un stiffened compression elements under
0 . 6Fy for LRFD times the web area (ht for stimmed stress gradient causing compres.<;ion at one
longitudinal edge and tension at the other
elements or Wt for unstiffened clements).
longitudinal edge:
e. The angle between any web and the vertical does not
exceed 30.
Cy = 3. 0 when l ::; .A.3
Cy =3- 2 [(.A - l.3)/(l4 - 13)] (553.3-5)

The nominal flexural strength, Mn , shall not exceed either
1. 25 SeFy , as determined in accordance with Procedure I when il.3 < l < A.4
of Section 553.3.3(a) or that causing a maximum
compression strain of Cyey (no limit is placed on the Cy= 1
maximum tensile strain).
where
where
.A3 = 0. 43
h flat depth of web A4 = 0. 673 (1 + 1/J) (553.3-6)
t = base steel lhickness of element 1/J = a value defi ned in Section
ey yield strain 552.3.2
Fy/ E
clements flat width (ii-2) Unsliffened compression elements under
w
stress gradient causing compression at
E modulus of elasticity
both longitudinal edge.<;:
compression strain factor calculated as follows:
Cy = 1
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP}

CHAPTF.R 5 StructurRI Steel 5-257
(ii-3) Unstilfoned compression ekments under For laterally unbraced segments of singly-, doubly-, and
uniform compression: point-symmetric sections subject to lateral-torsional
buckling, the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. 553.3-7)
(iii) Multiplc-stiilcned compression elements and (553.3-7)

compression elements with edge stiffeners h>r
multiple-stiflened compression elements and where
compression elements with edge stiffeners, Cy,
Elasti<: section modulus or clkctivc section
shall be taken as follows: calculated relative to extreme compression
fiber al Fe
Cy= 1
I. F c shall be detennined as follows:
When applicable, effective design widths shall
be used in calculating section properties. Mn
shall he calculated considering equilibrium of
stresses, assuming an ideally elastic-plastic
The member segment is not subject to lateral-torsional
stress-strain curve, which is the same in tension
as in compression, assuming small deformation, buckling at bending moments less than or equal to My-
and assuming that plane sections remain plane Thc available flexural strength shall be determined in
during bending. Combined bending and web accordance with Section 553.3.1 a.
crippling shall be checked by the provisions of
Section 533.3.3.5. 2. For 2. 78Fy >Fe> 0. 56Fy
553.3.1 .2 Latcrul-Torsional Buckling Strength F =
c
10 F
9 Y
(1 - lOFy)
36Fe
(553.3-8)
The provisions of this section shall apply to members with
either an open cross-section as specified in Section 3. For Fe~ 0. 56Fy
553.3.1 (b.1) or closed box sections as specified in Section
553.3. l(b.2). (553.3-9)
where
Unless otherwise indicated, the following safely factor and
resistance factors and the nominal strengths calculated in
accordance with Sections 553.3.l(b.1) and 553.3.J(b.2)
Fy = design yield stress as determined in accordance
with Section 551.7.1
shall be used to determine the allowable flexural strength or
design flexural strength in accordance with the applicable
Fe = elastic critical lateral-torsional huckling stress
calculated in accordance with (a) or (b)
design method in Section 551.4, or 551.5.
a. For singly-, doubly-, and point-symmetric
nb = 1. 67 (ASD) </>b = 0. 90 (LRFD) sections:
553.3.3.1.2.l Lateral- Torsional Buckling Strength of (i) For bending about the symmetry axis:
Open Cross-Section Members
The provisions of this section shall apply to I-, Z-, C-, and
other singly-symmetric section flexural members ( not (553.3-l 0)
including multiple-web deck, U- and closed box-type
members, and curved or arch members) subject to lateral-
torsional buckling. The provisions of this section slutll not for singly-am! doubly-symmetric sections
apply to laterally unbraced compression llanges of
otherwise laterally stable sections. See Section 554.6.1 a for
C- and Z-purlins in which the tension flange is attached to
sheathing.
For point-symmetric sections (553.3-11)

where
where
12.SMmax G Shear modulus
ch =---------------
2. SMmax + 3MA + 4 +MB+ 3Mc J Saint-Venanl torsion constant of cross-
section
(553.3-12) Cw Torsional warping constant of cross-
where section
Kt Effective length factors for twisting
Absolute value of max.imum moment in Lt Unbraced length of member for twisting
Mmax
unbraced segment
Absolute value of moment at quarter For singly-symmetric sections, x-axis of
point of symmetry oriented such that the shear center
unbraced segment has a negative x.-coordinate.
Absolute value of moment at centerline
of For point-symmetric sections, such as Z-
unbraced segment sections, x-axis shall be the centroidal axis
Mc Absolute value of moment at tbrce- perpendicular to the web.
quarter point of unbraced segment
shall be permitted to be conservatively Alternatively, Fe shall be permitted to be
taken as unity for all cases. For calculated using the equation given in (b) for
cantilevers or overhangs where the free doubly-symmetric J-scctions, singly-
end is unbraced, Cb shall be taken as symmetric C-scctions, or point-symmetric
unity. Z-sections.
Polar radius of gyration of cross-section
about shear center (ii) for singly-symmetric sections bending about
the ccntroidal axis perpendicular to the axis
jrx2 + ry2 + x 0 2 (553.3-13) of symmetry:
where
Radii of gyration of cross-section about F

e
= CsAO'ex(
C S }
. + Cs
centroid principal axes TF I
Distance from shear center to centroid
along principal x-axis, taken as negative (553.3-16)
Full unreduced cross-sectional area where
Elastic section modulus of full
unreduced section relatively to extreme Cs + I for moment causing compression on
compression fiber shear center of side of centroid
2
n E - l for moment causing tension on shear
center side of centroid
(553.3-14)
""=(Ki~')' rr 2 E
(1 -----
where ex - KL 2 (553.3-17)
modulus or elasticity of steel

( :xx)
effective length factors for bending about where
y-axis
unbraced length of member for bending
Effective length factors for bending about
about y-axis
x-axis
2 Unbraced length of member for bending
1 ( 1r ECw)
<Tt = Ar/ GJ + (KtLt) 2 about x-axis
CrF = 0. 6 - 0 . 4 (Mi/M2 ) (553.3-18)
(553.3-15)

where 533.3.1.2.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling Strength of

Closed Box Members
the smaller and the larger bending
moment, respectively, at the ends of For closed box members, the nominal flexural strength,
the unbraced length in the plane of Mn, shall be determined in accordance with this section.
bending; M1 and M2, the ratio of end
moments, is positive when M 1 and If the laterally unbraced length of the member is less than or
M2 have the same sign (reverse equal to Lu, the nominal flexural strength shall be
curvature bending) and negative when determined in accordance with Section 553.3.1. l. Lu shall
they are of opposite sign (single be calculated as follows:
curvature bending). When the bending
moment at any point within an
unbraced length is larger than that at (553.3-22)
the hoth ends of this length, CTF shall
be taken as unity.
See Section 553.3.1.2.1 for definition of variables.
j = 2~ [J
y .A
J
x 3 dA + xy2 dA]-x
A
0
lf the laterally unbraced length of a member is larger than
Lu , as calculated in Eq. 553.1-22, the nominal flexural
strength shall he determined in accordance with Section
553.3.1.2.1, where the critical lateral-torsional buckling
(553.3-19)
stress, Fe, is calculated as follows:
b. For I- sections. Singly-symmetric C-seetions, or
Z- sections bent about the centroidal axis
perpendicular to the web (axis), the following (553.3-23)
equations shall be permitted to be used in lieu of
(a) lo calculate Fe:
where
torsional constant of box section

(553.3-20)
moment of inertia of Juli unreduced section ahout
centroidal axis parallel to web
For doubly-symmetric I-sections and singly- See Section 553.3. lb. l for definition of other variables.
symmetric C-sections
553.3.1.3 Flexural Strength of Closed Cylindrical
Tubular Members
(553.3-21)
For closed cylindrical tubular members having a ratio of
outside diameter to wall thickness, D / t, not greater than
0.441 E/ Fy, the nominal flexural strength [moment
For point symmetric Z- sections
resistance], M11 , shall be calculated in accordance with
Eq. 553.3-24.lhe satety factor and resistance factors given
where
in this section shall be used to determine the allowable
flexural strength or design flexural strength [factored
Depth of section moment resistance] in accordance with the applicable
Moment of inertia of compression design method in Section 551.4, or Section 551.5.
portion of section about centroidal axis
of entire section parallel to web, using
(553.3-24)
full unreduced section see (a) for
definition of other variables
<l>b = 0. 95 (LRFD) fib = 1. 67 (ASD)
'i
ForD/t $ 0.0714£/Fy where
Fe== 1.25 Fy (553.3-25) (553.3-30)
For 0. 0714 E/Fy < D/t $ 0. 318 E/Fy (553.3-31)
[o. 970 + 0.020 (e:::)] Fy

where
Fe
Elastic section modulus of full unreduced section
(553.3-26} relative to extreme compression fiber
Elastic distorsional buckling slress calculated in
For0.318 E/Fy < D/t $ 0.441 E/Fy accordance with either Section 553.3. Id (a), (b), or
(c)
Fe= 0. 328 E/(D/t) (553.3-27) 1. Simplified Provisions for Unrestrained C- and Z-
Sections with Simple Lip Stiffeners
where
For C- and Z- sections that have no rotational restraint
D outside diameter of cylindrical tube of the compression flange and are within the
t thickness
= dimensional limits provided in this section, Eq. 553.3-
32 shall be pcm1itted to be used to calculate a
Fc critical flexural buckling stress
conservative prediction of the distorsional buckling
Sf = elastic section modulus of full unreduced cross
section relative to extreme compression fiber stress, Fd. See section 553.3. ld(b) or 553.3.ld(c) for
alternative provisions and for members outside the
See Section 553.3. lb. l for definitions ofother variables. dimensional limits of this section.
553.3.1.4 Distortional Buckling Strength The following dimensional limits shall apply:
The provisions of this section shall apply to I-, Z-, C-, and a. 50 S h 0 /t $ 200,
other open cross- section members that employ compression
flanges with edge stiffeners, with the exception of members b. 25 $ b 0 /t S 100,
that meet the criteria of Section 554.6. I .1, 554.6.1.2 when c. 6.25 < D/t $ 50,
the R factor of Eq. 554.6.1.2- 1 is employed, or 554.6.2.1.
The nominal flexural strength shall be calculated in d. 45• $ 8 < 90°,
accordance with Eq. 553.1-28 or Eq. 553.3-29. The safety
factor and resistance factors given in this section shall be e. 2 $ h 0 /b 0 $ 8, and
used to determine the allowable flexural sLrength or design f 0. 04 $ D sin 6/ b 0 $ 0. S
flexural strength in accordance with the applicable design
method in Section 551.4, or 551.5. where
'IJb = 0. 90 (LRFD) fib = 1. 67 (ASD) h0 = Out-to-out web depth as defined in Figure

552-4
For Ad $ 0. 673 t = Base steel thickness
b0 : Out-to-out flange width as de.fined in Figure
(553.3-28) 552-4
D Out-to-out lip dimension as defined in
ror..l.d > 0.673 Pigure 552-9
9 Lip angle as defined in Figure 552-9
M 11 = ( 1- 0. 22 (
M
:r:d)o.s) (M;,:d)o.s My The distorsional buckling stress, F d, shall be calculated
as follows:
(553.3-29)
7r2£ ( t )2 (553.3-32)
Fd = Pkd 12(1 - µ') bo
\
where where
p A value accounting for moment gradient, p A value accounting for moment gradient,
which is pennitted to be a conservatively which is permitted to be a conservatively
taken as l.O taken as 1.0
1. O ~ 1 + 0. 4(L/Lm) 0·7 (1
- M1/M2)°·7 ~ 1. 3 1. 0 ~ 1 + O. 4(L/Lm) 0 ·7 (1
(553.3-33} - Mi/M2 ) 0 ·7 :s; 1.3
(553.3-37)
where
where
L Minimum of Lcr and Lm
L Minimum of Lcr and L,n
where
06
where
b0 Dsin6) ·
Lcr = 1. 2h 0 ( hot ~ 10h0
(553.3-34)
where
Lm = Distance between discrete restraints that
restrict distorsional buckling (for continuously
restrained members Lcr = Lm)
M 1 ,M2 The smaller and the larger end moment ,
respectively, in the unbraced segment (L 111 ) of
the beam; M ifM2 is negative when the (553.3-38)
moments cause reverse curvature and positive
when bent in single curvature where
b0 Dsin8)o., h0 = Out-to-out web depth as defined in Figure
kd = 0. 5 ~ 0. 6 ( hot ::::; 8. 0
552-4
(553.3-35)
µ = Poisson's ratio
t Base steel thickness
where x-axis moment of inertia of the flange
E Modulus of Elasticity = x distance from the centroid of the flange
µ Poisson's ratio to the shear center of the flange
x distance from the centroid of the Hange
2. For C- and Z- Sections or any Open Section with a to the flange /web junction
Stiffened CompressioQ Flange Extending to One Side Warping torsion constant of the tlange
of the Web where the Stiffener is either a Simple Lip or
Product oflhe moment of inertia of the
a Complex Edge Stiffener
flange
y-axis moment of ine1tia of the flange
The provisions of this section shall be permitted to
apply to any open section with a single web and single
edge stiffened compression flange; including those In the above, I xf, I yf, I xyf· Cwf,Xo, and hx are
meeting the geometric limits of Section 553.3.ld (a). properties of the compression flange plus stiffener
The distorsional buckling stress, F d, shall be calculated about an x-y axis system located at the centroid of the
in accordance with Eq. 553.3-36) as follows: flange, with the x-axis measured positive to the right
from the centroid, and the y-axis positive down from
the centroid.
k<pfe+ F <pwe + kq,
Fd = fJ ~ 8.0 (553.3-36)
kqtfg + k<pwg

Lm Distance hetween discrete restrai nts that where

restrict distorsional buckling (for
continuously restrained members A1 == Cross-sectional area of the compression
Lcr = Lm) flange plus edge stiffener about an x-y axis
Mi, M 2 = The smaller and the larger end moment , located at the centroid of the flange, with the
respectively, in the unbraced segment (L 11J x-axis measured positive to the right from the
of the beam; M 1 /M2 is negative when the centroid, and the y-axis positive down
moments cause reverse curvature and from the centroid
positive when bent in single curvature yO y distance from the centroid of the flange to
the shear center orthe flange
kq,wg = Geometric rotational stiffness ( divided by
kq,fe = Eli:1stic rotational stiffness provided by the
the stress F d ) demanded by the flange from
flange to the flange I web juncture
the flange I web juncture
h:~Y + ECwf -
(:J
4
(n/ L) (Elxr (Xo - 2
= k11 = [45360(1- fweb) + 62160 ]

£';,/ (x 0 - hx)2) + (rr/ L) 2 GJr
yf k12 4481r2
2
(553.3-3)
k13 = (~) [53 + 3(1 - { web)]n4
where
2
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel h 0 trc ( k11 + k12 + k13 )
+ 28rr (L
n;;)2 + 4 20 (L)4
G Shear modulus 13440 4 2
1t ri;;
It = St. Vcnant torsion constant of the
compression flange, plus edge Stiffener
(553.3-42)
about an x-y axis located at the centroid of
the flange, with the x-axis measured positive where
to the right from the centroid, and the y-axis
positive down from the centroid fweb = C/1 - '2)//i, tress gradient in the web,
Elastic rotational stiffness provided by the where f 1 and f 2 are the stresses at the
web to the flange /web j uncturc opposite ends of the web, f 1 < f z,
2 compression is positive, tension is negative,
Et 3 ( 3 1r 2 19h
12c1 - µ 2 ) h o + C1) To and the stresses are calculated on the basis of
the gross- section, ( e.g., pure symmetrical
1r 4h3) bending, f 1 = f 2, f web = 2)
+ (,:-) 2;0 where
(553.3-40)
fweb == (fi - fi.) / {i,s
k q, = Rotational stiffness provided by a restraining
clement (brace, panel, sheathing) to the
flange I web juncture oF a member (zero if 3. Rational Elastic Buckling Analysis
the compression nangc is unrestrained)
k rpfg = Geometric rotational stiffness ( divided by A rationa l elastic buckling analysis that considers
the stress Fd ) demanded by the fl ange from clistorsional buckling shall be permitted to be used in
the flange I web juncture lieu of the expressions given in Section 553.3.1.4 shall
apply. The safety and. resistance factors in Section
= z2(Ar (Cxo - hx)
2
(f;f/ - 553.3.1.4.
2yo(X0 - hx) (1;) + h/ + y/) +

lx1+lyt)
(553.3-41)

553.3.2 Shear kv = Shear buckling coefficient calculated in

accordance with (I) or (2) as follows:
553.3.2.1 Shear Strength of Webs without Holes
(I) For unreinforced webs, kv = 5. 34
The nominal shear strength, V n, shall be calculated in
(2) For webs with transverse stiffeners
accordance with Eq. 553.3-43. The safety factor and
satisfying the requirements of Section
resistance factors given in this section shall be used lo
553.3.7
determine the allowable shear strength or design shear
strcn1:,rth in accordance with the applicable design method in
Section A4, A5, or A6. When a/h :5 1. 0
Vn = AwFy (553.3-43) (553.3-48)
</>v = 0. 95 (LRFD) ilv = 1. 60 (ASD)

When a/h > 1. 0
I. Fo, Jh/t < ~ 4.00

kv = 5.34 +-- 2 (553.3-49)
(i)
Fy = 0.60Fy (553.3-44)
where
~ h It :51.51 ~Py
~ a = Shear panel length of unreinforced web
2. For element
~Py<
= Clear distance between transverse
stiffeners of reinforced web elements
Fy = Design yield stress as determined in
accordance with Section 551.7.1
(553.3-45) µ = Poisson's ratio
= 0.3
For a web consisting of two or more sheets, each sheet shall
be considered as a·separate element carrying its share of the
J~~
shear force.
3. Fo, h/t > 1.51 553.3.2.2 Shear Strength of C-scction Webs with
Holes
The provisions of this section shall apply within the

(553.3-46)
following limits:
where
Vn = Nominal shear strength (resistance] 2. h/t :5 200,
Aw Area of web element
ht (553.3-47)
3. Holes centered at mid-depth of web,
where 4. Clear distance between holes~ 457mm,

h = Depth or Hat portion of web measured along
5. Non-circular holes, corner radii ~ Zt,
plane of web
t = Web thickness
6. Non-circular holes, dh :5 64 mm and Lh :5 114
Fy Nominal shear stress
mm,
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel
7. Circular holes, diameter :5 152 mm, and
'
Safety factor for bending (see Section

8. dh < 14mm. 553.3.l(a)
where
Mnxo = Nominal flexural strength about centroidal x-
axis determined in accordance with Section
dh = Depth of web hole 553.3.l(a)
h Depth of flat portion of web measured along Safety factor for shear (see Section 553.3.2)
plane of web Nominal shear strength when shear alone is
t Web thickness considered
Lh Length of web hole
553.3.3.2 LRFD Method
For C-Section webs with holes, the shear strength shall
For beams subjected to combined bending and shear, the
be calculated in accordance with Section 553.3.2. l,
required flexural strength M, and the required shear
multiplied by the reduction factor, qs, as defined in this
section. strength ii, shall not exceed <f,bMn and </>vVn•
respectively.
When c/t ~ 54 q 5 = 1. 0
For beams with unreinforced webs, the required flexural
strength, M, and the required shear strength, V, shall also
When 5 ~ c/t < 54 q 5 = c/(54t) (553.3-50) satisfy the following interaction equation:
where 2 2
c = h/2- dh/2.83 for circular (553.3-51) n. v
M ) + _v_ S 1.0 (5533-55)
holes
( 'PbMnxo ( Vn )
== h/2 - dh/2 for non-circular holes
(553.3-52) For beams with transverse web stiffeners, when
M/(<f,bMnxo) > 0. 5 and V/(</>vV > 0 . 7, M and V
11 )
553.3.3 Combined Bending and Shear shall also satisfy the following interaction equation:
553.3.3.J ASD Method

0.60 ( M ) + (-v-) < 1.30
For beams subjected to combined bending and shear, the 'PbM11xo </>vV11 -
required flexural strength, M , and required sbear strength, (553.3-56)
V shall not exceed Mn/fi 17 , respectively.
where
For beams with unreinforced webs, the required flexural Mn Nominal flexural strength when bending
strength, M, and required shear strength, V, shall also alone is considered
satisfy the following interaction equation: M Required flexural strength
= M1, (LRFD)
'Pb = Resistance factor for bending (see Section
(553.3-53) 553.3.la)
Mnxo = Nominal flexural strength [movement resistance]
about centroida\ x-axis detennined in accordance
For beams with transverse web stiffeners, when with Section 533.3. la
V Required shear strength
fibM/Mnxo > 0. 5 and fivV JVn > 0. 7, Mand V shall
also satisfy the following interaction equation: == Vu (LRFD)
'Pv = Resistance factor for shear (see Section 553.3 .2)
Vn Nominal shear strength when shear alone is
0. 60 (:bM)
nxo
+ (';V) S1.30
n
(553.3-54) considered
where
Mn = Nominal flexural strength when bending
alone is considered

553.3.4 Web Crippling where

Overhang length measured from edge of bearing to
553.3.4.1 Web Crippling Strength of Webs without
the end of the member
Holes
Nominal web crippling strength with end one-
tlangc loading as calculated by 553.3-57 and
The nominal web crippling strength, Pn, shall be Tables 553-2 and 553-3 Eq. 553.3-58 and shall be
detennined in accordance with Eq. 553.3-57 or
limited to 0. 5 ::;; L0 /h ~ 1. 5 and h/t::;; 154.
Eq. 553.3-58, as applicable. The safety factors and
resistance factors in Tables 553-1 to 553-5 shall be used to For L 0 /h or h/t outside these limits, a= 1.
determine the allowable strength or design strength in
accordance with the applicable design method in Section Webs of members in bending for which h/t is greater than
551 .4, or 55J .5. 200 shall be provided with means of transmitting
concentrated loads or reactions directly into the web(s).
P. = C~F,sine( 1-c, fi)( c. fi)(

1+ 1 Pn and Pnc shall represent the nominal strengths for load
or reaction for one solid web connecting top and bottom
flanges. For webs consisting of two or more such sheets, Pn
-c. ft) and P nc shall be calculated for each individual sheet and
the results added to obtain the nominal strength for the full
section.
(553.3-57)
where One-flange loading or reaction shall be defined as the
condition where the clear distance between the bearing
Pn = Nominal web crippling strength [resistance] edges of adjacent opposite concentrated loads or reactions is
c = Coefficient from Table 553.3-4(a. I) to 553.3-4(a.5) equal to or greater than 1. 5h.
t = Web thickness
Fy = Design yield stress as detennined in accordance Two-flange loading or reaction shall be defined as the
with Section 551.7. I condition where the clear distance between the bearing
e Angle between plane of web and plane of bearing edges of adjacent opposite concentrated loads or reactions is
surface, 45° ::;; 9 :$; 90° less than 1. Sh.
CR Inside bend radius coefficient from Tahle 553.3-
4a.1 to 553.3.4(a.5) Table 553-1 shall apply to I-beams made from two channels
R Inside bend radius connected back-to-back where:
CN = Bearing length coefficient from Table 553.3-4a. l to h/t::;; 200, N/t::;; 210, N/h::;; 1.0 and 6 = 90·.
553.3-4(a.5)
Bearing length 19mm minimum See Seclion 553.3.4.l or commentary for further
N
explanation.
ch Web slenderness coefficient from Table 553.3-
4(a. l) to 553.3-4(a.5) Table 553-2 shall apply to single web channel and
It :::: Flat dimension of web measured in plane of web C-Sections members where:
h/t::;; 200, N /t::;; 210, N /h ~ 2. 0, and(}= 90·.
Alternatively, for an end-one-flange loading condition on a
Jn Table 553-2, for interior two- flange loading or reaction
C- or Z-scction, the nominal web crippling strength, Pnc of members having flanges fastened to the support, the
shall not be larger than the interior-one-flange loading distance from the edge of bearing to the end of the member
condition:
shall be extended at least 2. Sh. for unfastened cases, the
distance from the edge of bearing to the end of the member
Pnc = aPn (553.3-58)
shall be extended at least 1. Sh.
where
Pnc = Nominal web crippling strength of C and

Z-sections with overhang(s)
L )0.26
1.34 ( h0
a= h ~ 1.0 (553.3-59)
0. 009 (-t)
+ o. 3

Table 553-3 shall apply to single web Z-section members Table 553-4 shall apply to single hat section members
where h/t $ 200, N/t :5 210, N/h :5 2.0, and where h/t $ 200, N/t $ 200, N/h $ 2.0, and
= 90°. In Table 553-3, for interior two-flange loading or 6 = 90°.
reaction of members having flanges fastened to the support,
the distance from the edge of bearing to the end of the Table 553-5 shall apply to multi-web section members
member shall be extended at least 2.5h; for unfastened where h/t :5 200, N ft$ 210, N /h $ 3, and
cases, the distance from the edge of bearing to the end of 45° $ 9 :5 90°.
the member shall be extended at least I .Sh.
Table 553-1 Safety factors, Resistance Factors and Coefficients for Built-Up Sections
Support and ASD LRFD

Flange Lnad Cases c CR CN c,l a.., (/),v
Limits
Conditions
Stiffened or
One-Flange End IO 0.14 0.28 0.001 2.00 0.75 Rlts 5
Fastened to Partially
Loading or
Support Stiffoned
Reaction Interior 20.S O.l 7 0.11 0.001 1.75 0.85 R/\$5
Flanges
One-Flange 0.14 0.28 0.001 2.00 0.75 R/t-;: :S
End 10
Loading or
Stiffened or
Reaction Interior 20.S 0.17 0.11 0.001 1.75 0.85 R/t53
Partially
Stitlcned Two-
Flanges Flange End 15.5 0.09 0.08 2.00 2.00 0.75 R/~3
Unfastened
Loading or
Reaction Interior 36 0.14 0.08 2.00 2.00 0.75 R/t::::3
One-Flange
Unstiffened End 10 0.14 0.28 2.00 2.00 0.75 R/~5
Loading or
Flanges
Reaction Interior 20.5 0. 17 0.1I 0.001 1.75 0.85 R/t<3

Table 553-2 Safety Factors, Resistance Factors and Coefficients for Single Web Channel and C-Sections
c ASD LRFD
Support and Flange Condition~ Load Cases CR CN ch fiw <Pw
Limits
One-Flange
End 4 0.14 0.35 0.02 l.75 0.85 R/t::,9
Stiffened or Loading or
Fastened to Partially Reaction
Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 1.65 0.90 R/t::,5
Support Stiffened
Two-Flange
Flanges End 7.5 0.08 0.12 0.048 1.75 0.85 R/t::,12
Loading or
Reaction Interior 1.75
20 0.10 0.08 0.031 0.85 R/t<l2
One-Flange
End 4 0.14 0.35 0.02 1.85 0.80
Loading or R/tS::5
Stitlcncd or Reaction Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 1.65 0.90
Partially
Unfastened
Stiffened Two-Flange End 13 0.32 0.05 0.04 1.65 0.90
Flanges Loading or R/t::,3
Reaction
Jnterior 24 0.52 0.15 0.001 1.9 0.80
End 4 0.40 0.60 0.03 1.8 0.85 ltlt::,2

One-Flange
Loading or
Reaction
lnteriur 13 0.32 0.10 0.01 1.8 0.85 R/t$1
Unstiffened
Unfastened
Flanges
End 2 0.11 0.37 0.01 2.00 0.75
Two-Flange
Loading or R/t51
Reaction
Interior 13 0.47 0.25 0.04 1.90 0.80
i
Table 553-3 Safoty Factors, Resistance Factors and Coefficients for Single Multi-Weh Deck Sections
ASD LRFD
Support nnd rlange Conditions I ,oad Cases c CR CN ch n... r
Stiffened or
Reaction Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 1.65 0.90
Fastened to Partially Rlt<5.5
Support Stiffened Two-
Flanges Flange End 9 0.05 0.16 0.052 l.75 0.85 Rft:$12
Loading or
Reaction Interior 24 0.07 0.07 0.04 1.85 0.80 Rlt:$12
One-Flange 0.02 0.00 1 L80 0.85
End 5 0.09
Loading or R/1$5
Stiffened or Reaction lnterior 13 0.23 0.14 O.DI 1.65 0.90
Partially
Stiffened Two- End 13 0.32 0.05 0.04 1.65 0.90
Flanges Flange
R/tS3
Loading or
Unfastened 0.85
One-Flange End 4 0.40 0.60 0.03 1.80 R/t!:2
Loading or
Reaction 1llterior 13 0.32 0.10 0.01 1.80 0.85 R/t::,l
Unstiffened
rlanges
Two- End 2 0.11 0.37 0.01 2.00 0.75
Flange R/t:::, 1
Loading or
Table 553-4 Safoty Factors, Resistance Factors and Cocllicicnts for Single Hat Sections
Support and AS D LRFD

Flange Load Cases c Cn Crv ch nw Limits
Conditions t/l111
One-Flange End 4 0.25 0.68 0.04 2.00 0.75 R/155
Loading or
Fastened to Reaction Interior 17 0.13 0.13 0.04 1.80 0.85 R/t5 10
Support Two-Flange End 9 0.10 0.07 O.Q3 1.75 0.85
Loading or Rlt:$10
One-Flange End 4 0.25 0.68 0.04 2.00 0.75 R/t:::,4
Unfastened Loading or
Reaction Interior 17 0.13 0.13 0.04 1.80 0.85 R/t:$4

Table 553-5 Safety Factors, Resistance Factors and Coefficients for Multi-Web Deck Sections
Support and
ASD LRFD
Flange Load Cases c CR CN ch nw Limits
Condition:.- 'Pw
One-Flange End 4 0.04 0.25 0.025 1.70 0.90 R/t~20
-
Loading or
Fastened to Reaction Interior 8 O.!O 0.17 0.004 1.75 0.85 R/t510
Support Two-Flange End 9 0.12 0.14 0.040 1.80 0.85
Loading or R/L:::10
One-Flange End 3 0.04 0.29 0.028 2.45 0.60
Loading or RltS20
Reaction Interior 8 0. 10 0.17 0.004 1.75 0.85
Unfastened
Two-Flange End 6 0.16 0.15 0.050 1.65 0.90
Loading or Rlt$5
Reaction lnlerior 17 0.10 0.10 0.046 1.65 0.90
553.3.4b Web Cripplin2 Strength of C-Section where

Webs with Holes
dh Depth of web hole
Where a web hole is within the bearing length, a bearing h Depth of fiat portion of web measured along plane
stiffener shall be used. for beam webs with holes, the of web
available web crippling .strength shall be calculated in t Web thickness
accordance with Section 553.3.4(a), multiplied by . the
d = Depth of cross-section
reduction factor, R e, given in this section.
Lh Length of web hole
The provisions of this section shall apply within the
following limits: For end-one flange reaction (Eq. C3.4. l-l with Table 553.3-
4a.2) where a web hole is not within the bearing length, the
1. dh/ h $ 0. 7, reduction factor, Re, shall be calculated as follows:
2. h/t $ 200,
Re = 1. 01 - 0 ..325dh/h + 0. 083x/h ~ 1. O
3. Hole centered at mid-depth of web, (553.3-59)
N ;::: 75 mm
4. Clear distance between holes~ 457 mm,
where
5. between end or member and edge of hole ~ d ,
x = Nearest distance between web hole and edge of
6. Non-circular holes, corner radii ~ 2t, bearing
N Bearing length
7. Non-circular holes, dh::;; 64 mm and
Lh::;; 114 mm, 553.3.5 Combined Bending and Web Crippling
8. Circular holes, dh ~ 152 mm, and 553.3.5.1 ASD Method
Unreinforced flat webs of shapes subjected to a combination

9. dh > 14 mm.
of bending and concentrated load or reaction shall be
designed such that the moment, M , and the concentrated
load or reaction, P, satisfy M $ Mnxoffib , and
P ::;; P nl Ow. In addition, the following requirements in
(a), (b) and (c), as applicable, shalJ be satisfied.

5-270 CHAPTER 5 -· Structural Steel
I. For shapes having single unreinforced webs, d. The ratio of the thicker to the thinner part does not
Eq. 553.3-60 shall be satisfied as follows: exceed 1.3.
(p) + (-Mnxo
The following conditions shalt be satisfied;
0.91 - - $ -1.33
M )
- (553.3-60)
Pn fl
M Required fle xural strength at, or
immediately adjacent to, the point of
Exception:
appl ieation of ihe concentrated load or
At the interior supports of continuous spans, Eq. 553.3- reaction, P
60 shall 1101 (lf)J)ly to deck or beams with two or more p Required strength for concentrated load
singles webs. provided the compression edges of or reaction in the presence of bending
adjacent webs are later(ll/y supported i11 the negative moment
moment region by conti1111011s or i11ter111iflent(\1 = Nominal flexural strength about
Mnxo
connected flange elements, rigid cladding, or lateral centroida! x-axis determined in
braci11g. and the spc1ci11g bet1Veen ndjnce11t webs does accordance with Section 553.3.1. I
not e.xceed 254 mm, Safety factor for bending (See Section
553.3.l.1)
2. For shapes having multiple unreinforced webs such as Nomina l strength for concentrated load
I-sections made or two C-sections connected back-to- or reaction in absence of bending
back, or similar sections that provide a high degree or moment determined in accordance w ith
restraint against rotation of the web (such as l-sections Section 553.3.4
made by welding lwo angles to a C-section), Safety factor for web crippling (Sec
Eq. 553.3-61 shall be satislied as follows: Section 553.3.4)
n Safety factor for combined ben<.ling and
p) ( M ) 1.46
0.88 (p + ~ $!! (553.3-61)
web crippling.
1.70.
n nxo
3. For the support point of two nested Z-shapes, Eq. 553.3.Sh LRFD Methods
553.3-62 shall be satistie<.I as follows:
Unreinforced flat webs of shapes subjected to a combjnation
(pP) + (~
M) s1.65 of bending and concentrated load or reaction shall be
0.86
n nxo
!l (553.3-62) designed such that the moment, M , and the concentrated
load or reaction,. P, satisfy M $ <PbMnxo and
Eq. 553.3-62 shall apply to shapes that meet the P S 4'wPn. In a<.ldition, the following requirements in (a),
following limits: (b), (c),, as applicable, shall be satisfied.
h/t $ 150, J. For shapes having single unreinforced webs,

Eq. 553.3-63 shall be satisfied as follows:
N/t $140,
F y $ 483 Mpa, and (553.3-63)
R/t s 5. 5
where
The following conditions shaJJ also be satisfied:
<f, = 0. 90(LRFD)
a. The ends of each section arc connecte<.I lo the other
section by a minimum of two 12.7 mm diameter Exception:
A307 bolts through the weh. Al the interior supports of continuous spans. Eq. 553.3-
62 shall to deck or beams with two or more single webs
b. The combined section is connected to the support , provided the compression edges of adjacent wehs are
by a minimum of two 12.7 mm diameter A307 laterally supported in the negati ve moment region by
bolts through the 11anges. continuous or intermittently connected flange elements,
rigid cladding, or lateral bring , and the spacing
c. The webs of the two sections are in contact. between adjacent webs does not exceed 254 mm.
•
2. For having multiple unreinforced webs such as The following nutation shall apply in this section:
[-Sections made of two C-sections connected back-to-
back, or similar sections that provide a high degree or Required flexural strength at, or
restraint against rotation of the web (such as I-sections immediately adjacenl to, the point of
made by welding two angles to a C- section), application of the concentrated load or
Eq. 553.3-63a shall be satisfied as follows: reaction, P
= Mu (LRFD)
o. 88 (:)+(MM
n nxo)~ 1.46ef, (553.3-63a)
= required strength for concentrated load or
reaction [factored concentrated load or
reaction in presence to bending moment
where
= Pu (LRFD)
<J, = 0.90 (LRFD) resistance factor for bending (See Section
553.3.1.1)
3. For two nested Z-shapcs, Eq. 553.3-64 shall be satisfied Mnxo = Nominal flexural strength about centroidal
x-axis determined m accordance with
as follows:
Section 553.3.1.1
ef>w Resistance factor for web crippling (See
0.88 (~) + (M~xJ ~ 1.65<J, (553.3-64)
P 11
Section 553.3.4)
= Nominal strength for concentrated load or
reaction in absence of bending moment
where determined in accordance with Section
553:3.4
<J, :::; 0.90 (LRFD)
553.3.6 Combined Bending and Torsional Loading
Eq. 553.3-64 shall apply to shapes that meet the
following limits: For laterally unrestrained flexural members subjected to
both bending and torsional loading, tJ1e available flexural
strength [factored moment resistance} calculated in
h/t ~ 150, accordance with Section 553.3.1 a (a) shall be reduced by
multiplying it by a reduclion factor, R.
N/t ~ 140,
Fy ~ 483 Mpa, and As specified in Eq. 553.3-65, the reduction factor, R. shall
be equal to the t'atio of the normal stresses due tu bending
R/t ~ 5.5 alone divided by the combined stresses due to both bending
and torsional warping at the point of maximum combined
The following conditions shall also be satisfied: stress on the cross-section.
a. The ends or each section are connected to the other

section by a minimum of two 12. 7 mm diameter a R = f bending ~l (553.3-65)
307 bolts through the web. f be11<llng + f torsion
b. The combined section is connected lo the support Stresses shall be calculated using full section properties for
by a minimum of two 12.7 mm diameter A307 the torsional stresses and efleclive section properties for the
bolts through flanges. bending stresses. For C-sections with edge stiffened flanges,
if the maximum combined compressive stresses occur at the
c. The webs of the two sections arc in contact. junction of the web and flange, the R factor shall be
permitled to be increased by 15 percent. But the R factor
d. The ration of the thicker to the thinner part does shall not be greater than 1.0
not exceed 1.3.
The provisions of lhis section shall not be applied when the
provisions of Section shall not be applied when the
provisions of Section 554.6. la and 554.6.1 bare used.
i
553.3.7 Stiffeners The w /t 5 ratio for the sti ffened and unstiffe ned clements of
553.3.7a Bearing Stiffeners the bearing stiffener shall not exceed 1. 28) E / Fys and
Hearing Stiffeners attached Lo beam weh1. at points of

concentrated loads or reactions shall be designed as
0.42) E / F ys, respectively, where F ys is (he yield stress,
compression members. Concentrnted loads or reactions and t 5 is the thickness orthe stimmer steel.
shall be applied directl y into the stiffeners o r each stiffener
shall he fitted accurately to the flat portion of the !lange to 553.3. 7h Bea ring Stiffene rs in C-Scction
provide direct load bearing into the end of the stiffener. Flexural Members
Means for shear transfer between the stiffener and the web
shall be provided in accordance with Section 555. For For two-flange loading or C-section flexural me mbers wiLh
concentrated loads or reactions, the nominal strength, P n , hearing stiffeners that do not med tl1e requirements of
shall be the smaller val ue calculated by (a) and (b) of this Section 55 3.3.7a, the nominal strength [resistance], P n,
section. The safety factor and resistance factors provided in shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 553.3-73. The
this section shall be used to determine the allowable safety factor ru1d resist.ance factors in this section shall be
strength or design strength [factored resistance] in a used to dclermine the allowable strength or design strength
accordance with the applicable design method in Section in accordance with the applicable design method in Section
551.4, or 551 .5. 551.4, or 551.6.
</>c = 0. 85 (LRFD) fie =2 . 00 (ASD) (553.3-73)
I. Pn = FwyAc (553.3-66) </) = 0. 90 (LRFD) n = 1. 70 (ASD)

where
2. P11 = Nominal axial strength [resistance] evaluated in
accordance with Section 553.4. l (a), with A e Pwc ~ Nominal web crippling strength [resistance] for
replaced by Ab C-section flexura l member calculaled in
accordance with Eq. 553.3-57 for single web
where
members. at end or interior lm;ations
Fwy Lower value of f y for beam web, or F ys for Effective area of bearing stiffener subjected to
stiffener section unifmm compressive stress, calculated at yield
stress
Ac 18t 2 + A s for hearing s tiffener at interior Yield s tress of bearing stiffener steel
support or under concentrated load (553.3-67)
Eq. 553.3-73 shall apply within the following
10t 2 + A 5 for bearing stiffener at end support limi ts:
(553.3-68)
I. Full hearing of the stiffener is required. Ir the hearing
where w idth is narrower than the stiffener such that one of the
t = I3ase steel tl1ickncss of heam weh stiffener flanges is unsupported, P 11 is reduced hy 50
Cross-sectional area of bearing stiffener percent.
As
Ab =- b 1 t + A.~, for bearing stiffener at interior support 2. Stirteners are C-scction stud or trac k members wiU1
or under concentrated load (553.3-69)
minimum web depth of 89 mm and a minimum base
b2t + As, for beari ng stiffener at end support steel thickness of 0.84 mm.
(553.3-70)
3. The stiffener is attached to the flexural member web
where
with at least three fasteners (screw or bolts).
b1 =25t[O. 0024 (L tft) + 0. 72] ~ ZSt
5 (553.3-7 1)
4. The distance fro m the fl exural member flanges to the
bz = 12t[O. 0044(Lstft) + 0. 83] ~ 12t (553.3-72) first fastener (s) is not less than d/8, where d is the
overall depth of the flexural member.
where
5. The length of tl1e stiffener is not less than the depth of
Lst = Length of bei ng stiffener the flexural member minus 9 mm.

6. The bearing width is not less than 38 mm. where

y = Yield stress weh steel
553.3.7c Shear Stiffener
Yield slress stiffener steel
D 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
Where shear stiffeners arc required, the spacing shall be
1.8 for single-angle stiffeners
based on the nominal shear strength. V n, permitted by
2.4 for single-plate stineners
Section 553.3.2, and the ratio a/h shall not exceed
l 260 / (h/t)] 2
nor 3.0.
5S3.3.7d Non-Conforming Stiffeners
The actual momcnl of inertia, Is, of a pair of attached shear The available strength of members with stiffeners that do
stilleners, or of a single shear stiffener, with reference to an not meet the requirements of Section 553.3.7.1, 553.3.7.2,
axis in the plane of the web, shall have a minimum value or 553.3.7.3, such as stamped or rolled-in stiffeners, shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. 553.3-73 as follows: determined by tests in accordance with Section 556 or
nllional engineering analysis in accordance with Section
551.1.2 (b).
lsmin = 5ht3 [h/a - 0. 7(a / h)]::::: (h / 50) 4
(553.3-73) 553.4 Concentrically Loaded Compression Members
where The availahlc axial strength shall be the smaller of the

values calculated in accordance with Sections 553 .4.1,
hand t Values as defined in Section 552.1.2
553.4.2, 554.1.2, 554. 1.2, 554.6.1.3 and 554.6.1.4, where
a Distance between shear stiffeners applicable.
The gross area or shear sliffeners shall not be less than: 553.4.1 Nominal Strength for Yielding,
Flexural-Torsional and Torsional Buckling
This section shall apply lo members in which the resultant

of all loads acting on the member is an axial load passing
through the centroid of the effoctive section calculated at
the stress, Fn, defined in this section.
(553.3-74)
I. The nominal _axial strength, P11, shall be calculated in
where accordance with E4. 553.4-1. The safety factor and
resistance factors in this section shall be used to
determine the allowable axial strength or design axial
strength in accordance with the applicable design
when Cv ~ 0. 80
method in Section 551.4, 551.5.
(553.4-1)
when Cv > 0. 80 (553.3-75)

</>c =0. 85 (LRFD) !l, = 1. 80 (ASD)
where
where
Ae = Effective area calculated at stress Fn. Fur
5.34 sections with circular holes. Ae is determined
k 11 = 4.00 +--
2 when a/ h ~ 1.0 from the effective width in accordance with
(*) (553.3-76)
Section 552.2.2 (a), subject to the limitations of
that section. If the number of holes in the
effective lcngtl1 region times the hole diameter
4.00 divided by the ellective length docs not exceed
= 5.34+--2 when a/ h > 1.0 0.015, it is permitted to detennine Ae by ignoring
(*) (553.3-77)
the holes. For closed cylindrical tubular members,
Ac is provided in Section 553.4.1.5.

a. F n shall be calculated as follows : that a smaller value is suitable. [n a frame that depends upon
its own bending stiffness for lateral stability, the effective
For Ac~ 1. 5 length, KL, of the compression members shall be
determined by a rational method and shall not be less than
the actual unbraced length.
F11 = (0.658.il;)Fy (553.4-2)
553.4.1.2 Doubly or Singly-symmetric Sections
For Ac> 1. 5 Subject to Torsional or }'lexural-
Torsional Buckling
o. a11]
F11 = [~ Fy (553.4-3)
For singly-symmetric sections subject to llexural-torsional
buckling, Fe shall be taken as the smaller of Fe calculated
where
in accordance with Section 553.4.1.(d) and Fe calculated as
follows:
(553.4-4)
Fe= ~ [Coex
2
+ O't) - J(aex + ai) 2 - 4PO'exO't]
Fe The least of the applicable elastic flexural,
torsional and flexural-torsional buckling stress (553.4-6)
determined in accordance with Sections 553.4.1.1
through 553.4.1.5 Alternatively, a conservative estimate of Fe shall be
2. Concentrically loaded angle sections shall be design for permitted to be calculated as follows:
an additional bending moment as specified in the
definitions of Mx and My(ASD) or Mx and
(553.4-7)
My(LRFD or LSD) in Section 553.5.2.
553.4. 1.1 Sections Not Subject to Torsional or where

Flexural-Torsional Buckling (553.4-8)
Por doubly-symmetric sections, closed cross-sections, and
any other sections that can be shown not to be subjected to at and n ex = Values as defined in Section 553.3.1 h. l
torsional or flexural-torsional buckling, the elastic flexural
For singly-symmetric sections, the x-axis shall be selected
buckling stress, Fe, shall be calculated as follows:
as the axis of symmetry.
For doubly-symmetric sections subject to torsional

(553.4-5) buckling, Fe shall be taken as the smaller of Fe calculated
in accordance with Section 553.4.1.1 and Fe = <J' t, where
where u tis defined in Section 553.3.1 b. I.
E Modulus of elasticity of steel For singly-symmetric unstiffened angle sections for which
K Effective length factor the effective area (Ae) at stress Fy is equal to the full
L Laterally unbraced length of member unreduced cross-sectional area (A), Fe shall be computed
r Radius or gyration of full unreduced cross section using Eq.553.4-5 where is the least radius of gyration.
about axis of buckling
553.4.l.3 Point-Symmetric Sections
In frames where lateral stability is provided by diagonal
bracing, shear walls, attachment to an adjacent structure For point-symmetric sections, Fe shall be taken as the ·
having adequate lateral stability, or floor slabs or roof deck lesser of <ft as defined in Section 553.3.lb.l and Fe as
secured horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel to calculated in Section 553.4. Ll using the minor principal
the plane of the frame, and in trusses, the effective length axis of the section.
factor, K, for compression members that do not depend
upon their own bending stiffness for lateral stability of the
frame or truss shall be taken as unity, unless analysis shows

553.4.1.4 .Nonsymmetric Sections In this section shall be used to determine the allowable
compressive strength or design compressive strength 111
for shapes whose cross-sections do not have any symmetry, accordance with the applicable design method in Section
either ahout an axis or about a point, Fe shall be determine 551.4, or 551.5.
hy rational analysis. Altematively, compression memhcrs
composed of such shapes shall be permitted to be tested in </>b = 0. 85 (LRFD) fie = 1. 80 (ASD)
accordance with Section 556.
For Jl.d :5 0. 561
553.4.l.S Closed Cylindrical Tubular Sections
(553.4-12)
for closed cylindrical tubular members having a ratio of
outside diameter to wall thickness, D / t, not greater than
0.441E/Fy and in which the resultant of all loads and
moments acting on the member is equivalent to a single
force in the direction or !he member axis passing through
for Pn =( 1-0 2s(p;:dft;J 6
Py
the centroid or the section, the elc1stic flexural buckling (553.4-13)

where
tress, Fe shall he calculated in accordance with Section
553.4.l(a), and the effective area, Ac, shall be calculatc<l as
follows: (553.4-14)
(553.4-9)
Pn :.:... Nominal axial strength
l
where
(553.4-15)
where
0. 037
A 0 = ~/ + 0. 667 A :5 A
[ Ag Gross area of the cross-section
Fy ~ Yield stress
for D/t $ 0.441E/Fy (553.4-10)
(553.4- I 6)
where
where
D Outside diameter of cylindrical tube
Fy ...,, Yield stress Fd - Elastic distortional buckling stress calculated m
accordance with either Section 553.4.2(a), (b), or
t Thickness (c)
E Modulus of elasticity of steel
A Area of full unreduced cross-section l. Simplified Provision for Unrestrained C- and Z-
R Fy(2Fe) :51.0 (553.4-11) Sections with simple Lip Stiffeners
553.4.2 Distortional Buckling Strength For C- and Z-Sections that have no rotational restraint
of the flange and that are within the dimensional limits
The provisions or this section shall apply to /-, Z-, C-, Hat, provided in this Section 553 shall be permitted to be
and other open cross section members that employ flanges used to calculate a conservative prediction of
with edge stifLeners, wilh the exception of members that are dislorlional huckling stress, F d· See Section 553.4.2(h)
designed in accordance with Section 554.6.1.2. The nominal or 553.4.2(c) for alternative options for mcmhers
axial strength shall he calculated in accordance with outside the dimensional limits.
Eqs. C4.2-I and C4.2-2. The safety factor and resistance
factors
'
The following dimensional limits shall apply: E Modulus of elasticity of steel

µ Poisson's ratio
a. 50 s; h 0 /t $ 200,
2. For C- and Z-Sections or Hat Sections or any Open
h. 25 S b 0 S 100, Sec tion with Stiffened Flanges of Equal Dimension
c. 6 . 25 < D/ t s; 50, where the Stiffener is either a Simple Lip or a Complex
Edge Stiffener
d. 45• s; 9 S 90°,
The provisions of this section shall apply to any open
c. 2 S h 0 /b 0 $ 8, and section with sti ffened llangcs of eq ual dimension, including
f. 0 . 04 s; D sin8 / b 0 s; 0. 5 those meeting the geometric limits of553.4.2a.
where
(553.4-21)
ho O ut-to-out web depth as defined in figure

552-4 where
bo O ut-to-out fla nge w idth as defined in Figure
552-4 k q,fe Elastic rotational stiffness provided by the flange
D O ut-to-out li p dimens ion as defined in Figure Lo the flange/web juncture, in acco rdance with
552-9 Eq. 553.3-39
t Base steel thickness kq,we Elastic rot.ational sti flhes.'l provided by the web to
(J Lip angle as defined in Fig ure 552-9 the flange/web juilcture
Et3
(553.4-22)
The distortional buckling stress, F d , shall be calculated in 6h0 (1 - µ 2 )
accordance w ith Eq.C4.2-6: Rotational stiffness provided by restraining
elements (brace, panel, sheathing) to the
Hangc/weh juncture of a member (zero if the
(553.4- 17) flange is unrestrained). IL' rotational stiffness
provided to the two flanges is d issimilar, the
smaller rotational stillness is used
where Geometric rotational stiffness ( divided by the
stress F d) demanded by the tlange from the
a: = A value that accounts for the benefit o r an unbraced
flange/web - juncture, in accordance with
leng tl1, Lm, shorter than L,r, but can be Eq. 553.3-41
co nservatively ta ken as 1.0 Geometric rotational stiffness {divided by the
J.0 for Lm ~ Lcr stress F d) demanded by the we b fl ange/web
= (Lm/ Lcr)ln(Lm/Lcr) for Lm < Lcr (553.4-1 8) juncture
2 (553.4-23)
where (n/L) (;;)
L m =- Distance be tween discrete restraints that restrict L Minimum of Lcr and Lm

distortional buckling (for continuously restrained
members Lm =
Lcr but the restraint can be whe re
included as a rotational spring, k,p , in accordance
with the pro visions in 553.4.2(b) or (c)
Lcr = 1. 2h 0 (
b D sin
° hot
9) 06
·
s; 10'10 (553.4-19)
(55 3.4-20)
(553 .4-24)

Distance between discrete restraints that restrict Nominal flexural strengths about centroidal
distortional buckling (for continuously restrained axes determined in accordance with Section
members Lm = Lcr) 553.3.1
See Section 553.3.1.4 (b) for definition of variables 111 553.5.lb J,RFD Method
Eq. 553.4-24.
The required strengths T, Mx, and My shally satisfy the
3. Rational Elastic Buckling Analysis following interaction equations:
A rational elastic buckling analysis that considers

distortional buckling shall be permitted tu be used in (553.5-4)
lieu of the expressions given in Section 553.4.2(a) or
(b) the safety and resistance factors in Section 553.4.2
shall apply.
(553.5-5)
553.5 Combined Axial Load and Bending
where
553.5.1 Combined Tensile Axial Load and
Bending
Required flexural strengths [factored
moments] with respect to centroidal axes
553.5.la ASD Method
Mx = Mux,My = Muy (LRFD)
The required strengths T, Mx, and My, shall satisfy the For flexural strength (Section 553.3.1.l),
following interaction equations: <Pb= 0. 90 or 0. 95 (LRFD)
For laterally unbraced beams (Section
553.3.1.2), <Pb =
0. 90 (LRF D)
(553.5-1) For closed cylindrical tubular members
(Section 553.3.1.3), <Pb =
0. 90 (LRFD)
and (553.5-6)
where
(553.5-2) ·section modulus of full unreduced section
relative to extreme tension fiber about
appropriate axis
where
Design yield stress determined in
1.67 accordance with Section 55 I. 7. I
Required flexural strengths with respect to Required tensile axial strengt11
ccntroidal axes of section Tu(LRFD)
=
Mnxt• Mnyt SrtFy (553.5-3) 0. 9S(LRFD)
Nominal tensile axial stren,b'1h determined
where in accordance with Section 553.2
Section modulus of full unreduced section Nominal flexural strengths about centroidal
relative to extreme tension fiber about axes determined in accordance with
appropriate axis Section 553.3.1
Design yield stress determined in
accordance with Section 551. 7.1
1.67
Required tensile axial stren1;,>th
Nominal tensile axial strengtl1 determined in
accordance with Section 553.2
i
553.5.2 Combined Compressive Axial Load and ficP

Bending a = 1 --> 0 (553 .5- 1 J)
y Pay
where
553.5.2a ASD Method
(553.5-12)
The required strengths P, Mx, and My shall be determined
using Jirst order elastic analysis and shall satisfy the
following interaction equations. Alternatively, the required
strengths P, Mx, and My shall be determined in accordance (553.5- 13)
with Section C-2 and shall satisfy the following interaction
equations using the values for Kx, Ky, ax, ay, Cmx, and where
Cmy specified in Section C-2. In addition, each individual
Ix Moment of inertia of full unreduced cross-
ratio in Rqs. 553.5-4 to 553.5-6 shall not exceed unity. scclion about x-axis
Kx Effective length factor for buckling ahout x-
For singly-symmetric unsiiffoned angle sections wilh axis
unreduced effective area, My sh al I he permitted to be 1.aken Lx Unhraeed length for bending about x-axis
as the requi red llexural strength only. For other angle IY Moment of inertia of full unreduced cross-
sections or singly-symmetric unstiffoned angles for which section ahout y-axis
the effective area (Ae) at stress F y is less than the full KY Effective Length factor for buckling ahout y-
unreduced cross-sectional area (A), My shall be taken axis
either as the required flexural strength or the required Ly ~ Unbraced length for bending about y-axis
flexural strength plus PL/1000, which results in a lower P no Nominal axial strength determined in
permissible value of P. accordance with Section 553.4, with Fn = Fy
Cmx, Cmy ~ C'..ocflicients whose values are dciennined m
accordance with (a), (h), or (c) as follows:
(553.5-7)
a. For compression members in frames subject to joint
translation (sideways)
(553.5-8)
Cm= 0.85
b. For restrained colTlpression members in frames hra.ced

When fl cP / P n :5 0. 15, the following equation shall be against joint translation and not subject to transverse
pennilled to be used in lieu of the above two equations: loading between their supports in the plane of bending
Cm= 0 . 6 - 0.4(M i/M2 ) (553.5- 14)

(553.5-9)
where
where Ratio of the smaller lo the larger moment at

the ends of that portion of the member under
1.80 consideration which is unbraced in the plane
= Required compressive axial strength of bending. M i/ M 2 is positive when lhe
Nominal axial strength detennined member is bent in reverse curvature and
accordance with Section 553.4 negative when it is bent in sing!~ curvature.
1.67
Required flexural strengths with respect to c. For compression members in frames braced against
centroidal axes of effective section determined joint translation in the plane of loading and subject to
for required compressive axial strength alone transverse loading between their supports, the value of
Nominal flexural strengths ahout centroidal Cnt is to be dctennined by rational analysis. However,
axes determined in accordance with Section in lieu of such analysis, the following values are
553.3. I permitted to be used:
flcP
ax= 1 - p > O (553.5-10)
Ex

(I) For members whose ends are restrained, =

Mx = Mux,My Muy (LRFD)
For flexural strength (Section 553.3.1.1),
Cm = 0. 85, and q,b--' 0.90 or 0.95 (LRFD)
For laterally unbraced flexural members
(2) For members whose ends are unrestrained, (Section 553.3.1.2), </>b = 0.90 (LRFD)
For closed cylindrical tuhular member
Cm= 1.0. (Scclion 553.3.1.3), <l>b = 0.95 (LRFD) and
0.90 (LSD)
553.5.2b LR•·o Method Nominal flexural strengths about centroidal
axes determined in accordance with Section
The required strengths P, Mx, and My shall be delermined 553.3.l
using firsl order elastic analysis and shall satisfy the p
following interaction equations. Alternatively, the required a -1-->0 (553.5-18)
x - PEx
strengths P,Mx, and My shall be determined in accordance p
with Section C-2 and shall satisfy the following interaction ay= 1 - - > 0 (553.5-19)
PEy
equations using the values for K x• Ky, ax, ay, Cm.x, and
Cmy !ipccificd in Section C-2. In addition, each individual where
ratio in Eqs. 553.5-7 to 553.5-9 shall nol exceed unily.
(553.5-20)
For singly-symmetric unstiffoncd angle seclions wilh
unreduced effective area, My shall be pcnnittc<l to be taken
as the required flexural strength [factored moment] only.
(553.5-21)
For other angle sections or singly-symmetric unstiffened
angles for which the effective area (Ae) at stress Fy is less
than the full unreduced cross-sectional area (A), My shall where
be taken either as the required flexural strength or the
required flexural strength plus (P)L/1000, whichever Moment of incrlia or foll unreduced cross-
results in a lower permissible value of P. section about x-axis
Effective length faclor for buckling about x-
axis
(553.5-15) Unbraced lenglh for bending about x-axis
Moment of incrlia or foll unreduced cross-
scclion about y-axis
Effective Lcnglh factor for buckling about y-
(553.5-16) axis
- Unbraced length for bending about y-axis
Nominal axial strength determined in
When P/ <Pc:Pn ~ 0. 15, l11c following equation shall be
accordance with Section 553.4, with F n = Fy
permitted to be used in lieu of the above two equations:
Coefficients whose values are determined in
accordance with (a), (b), or (c) as follows:
(553.5-17)
a. For compression members in frames subject to joint
translation (sideways)
where
Cm= 0.85
Required compressive axial strength
Pu (LRFD) b. For restrained compression members in frames braced
0.85 (LRFD) against joint translalion and not subject lo transverse
Nominal axial strength Lresistance] determined loading between their suppo1ts in the plane of bending
in accordance with Section 553.4
Required flexural strengths with respect lo Cm= 0.6- 0.4(Mi/M2 ) (553.5-22)
centroi<lal axes of effective section delennined where
for required compressive axial strengtl1 alone.

5-280 CHAPTER 5 -- Structural Steel
Ratio or the smaller lo the larger SECTION 554

moment at the ends of that portion of
lhe member under consideration which STRUCTURALASSEMBLIESAND
is unbraced in the plane of bending. SYSTEMS
M 1 / M2 is positive when the mcmhcr
is bent in reverse curvature and 554.1 Built- Up Sections
negative when it is bent in single
curvature. 554.1.l Flexural Members Composed of Two Rack-
to-Back ( > Sections
c. For compression me mbers in frames braced against
joint translation in the plane of loading and subject to The maximum longitudinal spacing of weld or other
transverse loading between their supports, the value or connectors, Smax, joining two C-sections to form an l-
Cm is to be detcnnined by rational analysis. However, se1.;tion shall be:
in lieu of such analysis, the following val ues are
permitted to be used: L ZgTs
S max =- <
- -- (554.1 -1)
6 mq
(i) For members whose ends are restrained,
where
Cm == 0. 85, and
L Span of beam
(ii) For members whose ends are unrestrained,
g Vertical distance between two rows of connections
nearest to top and bottom flanges
Cm= 1.0. Available strength of connection in tension (Section
55 5)
m Distance from shear center of one C-section to rnid-
plane of web
q Design load on beam for spacing of connectors (See
below for methods of detcr01ination.)
The load, q, shall be obtained by dividing the concentrated

loads or reactions by the length of bearing. For beams
designed for a unifonnly_distribu1ed load, q shall be taken
as equal 10 three times the uniform ly distributed load, based
on the critica l load combinations for ASD, LRFD, and LSD.
rr the length of bearing of a concentrated load or reaclion is
smaller than the weld spacing, s, the available strength of
the welds or connections closes to the load or reaction shall
be calculated as follows:
P5 m
T =- (554. 1-2)
s 2g
where
p s = Concentrated load [factored load] or reaction based

on critical load comhinations for ASD, and LRFD.
\
The allowahle maximum spm.:ing ur

connections, Smax, In addition, the fastener strength and spacing shat I satisfy
shall depend upon the intensity of the load directly ,tl the the following:
connection. Therefore, if uniform spacing or connections is
used over the whole length or the beam, it shall be I. The intermediate faster or spot weld spacing, a, is
determined ul Lhe point of maximum local load intensity. In limited such that a/ri docs not exceed one-hair the
cases where this procedure would result in uneconomically governing slenderness ratio of the huilt-up member.
dose spacing, either one of the following methods shall be
permitted to be adopted: 2. The ends of a built-up compression member are
connected by a weld having a length not less than the
l. the connection spacing varies along the heam according maximum width of the member or by connectors
Lo the variation of the load intensity, or spaced longitudinally not more than 4 diameters apart
for a distance equal to 1.5 times the maximum width of
2. reinforcing cover plates welded to the flanges at points the member.
where concentrated loads occur. The availahle shear
strength of the connections joining these plates lo the 3. The intennediate fastencr(s) or weld(s) at any
flanges is then used for Ts, and g is taken as the depth longitudinal member tie location are capable or
of the beam. transmitting a force in any direction of 2.5 percent of
the nominal axial strength of the built-up member.
554.1.2 Compression Members Composed of Two
Sections in Contact 554. l.3 Spacing of Connections in Cover Plated
Sections
For compression members composed of two sections in
contact, the available axial strength shall be determined in The spacing, s, in the line or stress, of welds, rivets, or bolls
accordance with Section 553.4.l (a) subject to the following connecting a cover plate, sheet, or a non-integral stiffener in
modification. If the buckling mode involves relative compression to another element shall not exceed (a), (b),
deformations that produce shear forces in the connectors and (c) as follows:
between individual shapes, KL/r is replaced by (KL/r)m
calculated as follows: a. that which is required to transmit the shear
between the connected parts on the basis of the
available strength I factored resistance] per
(554.1-3) connection specified elsewhere herein;
where b. 1.16t if
(KL/r) 0 Overall slenderness ratio of entire section where
about built-up member axis
Intermediate fastener or spot weld spacing t Thickness of the cover plate or sheet
Minimum radius of gyration of full unreduced fc Compressive stress at nominal load in the cover plate
cross-sectional area of an individual shape in a or sheet
built-up member
c. three times the flat width, w, or the narrowest
Sec Section 553.4. l(a) for definition of other symbols. unstiffened compression clement tributary to the
connections, but need not be less than 1. 11t fl

--J l'y
ifw/t < 0.50 fl
--JFy
or 1.33t fl
..JFy
ifw/t ~ 0. 50 ft; , unless closer spacing is
required hy (a) or (b) above.

In the case of intermittent fillet welds parallel to I. For uniform loads

the direction of stress, the spacing shall be taken as
the clear distance between welds, plw, 12 mm. In Pit= 1. S{WyK' - (Wx/2) + (Mz/d)) (554.3-1)
all other cases, the spacing shall be taken as the
center-to-center distance between connections.
Pa= 1. S{WyK' - (Wx/2) - (Mz/d)} (554.3-2)
Exception:
The requirements Qj" this section do nut apply to When the uniform load, W, acts through the plane of the
cover ~·heels that act only as sheathing material
and are not considered load-carrying elements.
web, i.e., W y =
W:
Pu == - P ti = 1. 5(m/ d)W for C section (554.3-3)
554.2 Mixed Systems
Pu == Pi2 == 1. 5(1xyf21x) W for Z section (554.3-4)
The design of members in mixed systems using cold-formed
steel components in conjunction with other materials shall where
confonn to this S pecification and the applicable Components of design factored load W
specification of the other material. parallel to the x- and y- axis, respectively.
W x and W y arc positive if pointing to the
554.3 Latenil and Stability Bracing
positive x- and y- direction, respectively
Braces shall be designed to restrain lateral bending or where
twisting of a loaded beam or column, and lo avoid local
crippling at the points of attachment. w Design load (applied load determined in
accordance with the most critical load
combinations fur ASD or LRFD, whichever is
554.3.1 Symmetricul Beams and Columns
applicable) within a distance of 0.5a each side
of the hrace.
Braces and bracing systems, including connections, shall be
designed considering strength and stiflhess requirements. where
554.3.2 C-Section and Z-Section Beams a Longitudinal distance between centerline of

braces
The following p rovisions for bracing to restrain twisting o f
K' Ofor C-sections
C-sections and 7 -scctions used as beams loaded in !he plane I xy / (21x) for Z-scetions
of the web shall apply only when neither flange is where
connected to deck or shca!hing material in such a manncr as
to effectively restrain lateral deflection of the connected Product of inertia of full unreduced section
flange. When only the top tlange is so connected, see Moment of inertia of lull unreduced section
Section 554.6.3.1. about x-axis
- Wxesy + Wyesx, torsional moment of W
Where both flanges are so connected, no further bracing is
about shear center
required.
where
554.3.2.l Neither Flange Connected to Sheathing that
Eccentricities of load components meas ured
Contributes to the Strength and Stability 01·
from the shear center and in the x- and y-
the C- or Z- section
directions, respectively
Each intermediate brace at the top and bottom flanges of C- d Depth of section
or Z-section members shall be designed with resistance of m Distance from shear center to m id-plane of
web of C-section
PL1 and P LZ , where PL:l is the brace force required on the
tlange in the quadrant with both x and y axes positive, and
PLZ is the brace force on the other flange. The x-axis shall
be designated as the ccntroidal axis parallel to the web. The
x and y coordinates shall be oriented such thm one of the
fl anges is located in the quadrant with both positive x and y
axes. See 17igure 554.4-1 for illustrations of coordinate
systems and positive force directions.
\
·-·+
.....·-••1\2 ~ -. . - - - i.... pL2
Figure 554.4-1 Coordinate Systems and Positive Force Directions
2. For concentrated loads where
(554.3-5) l = Distance from concentrated load to the brace
(554.3-6) See Section 554.3.2.1 (a} for definitions or other variables.
When a design load (factored load] acts through the plane or The bracing force, PL1 or PL2, is positive where restraint is
required to prevent the movement of the corresponding
the web, i.e., Py = P:
flange in the negative x-direction.
Pu= -Pi2 = (m/d)P for C section
(554.3-7) Where braces are provided, they shall be attached in such a
manner to effoctively restrain the section against lateral
for Z section (554.3-8) deflection of ·both flanges at the ends and at any
intermediate brace points.
where
When all loads and reactions on a beam are transmitted
Components of design load P parallel to the x- through members thal frame into the section in such a
and y- axis, respectively. P x and Py are manner as to effectively restrain the section against
positive if pointing to the positive x- and y- torsional rotation and lateral displacement, no additional
direction, respectively braces shall be required except those required for strength in
-Pxesy + P yesx, torsional moment of P accordance with Section 553.3. lb. l.
about shear center
p Design concentrated load within a distance of
0.3a on each side of the brace, plus
1. 4{1 - l/ a) times each design
concentrated load located further than 0. 3a
but not farther than l .Oa from the brace. The
design concentrated load is the applied load
factored load detennined in accordance with
'the most critical load combinations for ASD,
LRFD, LSD, whichever is applicable
,...
i
554.3.3 Bracing of Axially Loaded Co mpression perpendicular to the stud axis.

Members
4. Framing for floor and roof systems in buildings shall be
The requ ired brace strength to restrain lateral translation at a designed in accordance with AlSJ S210 or solely in
brace point for an individual compression mem ber shall be accordance with this Specification.
calculated as follows:
See Section 553-3 for additional requ irements.
Pbr,1 = 0. 01 Pn (554.3-9)
554.4. l All-Steel Design of Wall Stud Assemblies
The required brace stiffness to restrain lateral translation at
a brace point for an individual compression member shall Wall stud assemblies using an all-steel design shall he
be cnlculated as follows: designed neglecting the structural contribution of the
attached sheathings and shall comply with the requirements
of Section 553. For compression members with circular or
non-circular web perforations, the effective section
(554.3-10) properties shall be determined in accordance with Section
552.2.2.
where
554.5 Floor, Roof, or Wall Steel Oiaphragm
Required nominal brace strength resistance for a Construction
single compression member
Nominal axial compression strength of a single The in-plane diaphragm nominal shear strength, Sn, shall
compression member he established by calculation or test. The safety factors and
Pbr.1
Required brace stiffness for a single compression resistance factors for diaphragms given in Table 554.5-1
member shall apply to both methods. If the nominal shear strength is
n Number of equally spaced intermediate brace only established by test without defining a ll limit state
locations thresholds, the safety factor~ and resistance factors shall be
i == Distance between braces on one compression limited by the values given in Table 554-1 for connection
member types and connection-related failure modes. The . more
severe factored limit state shall control the design. Where
554.4 Cold-Formed Steel Light-Frame Construction fastener combinations are used within a diaphragm system,
the more severe factors shall be used.
The design and installation of structural members and non-
structural members utilized in cold-formed steel repetitive .nd As specified in Table 554-1 (ASD)
framing applications where lhe spccilied mi nimum base
steel thickness is between 0.455 mm and 2.997 mm shall be <!>d = As specified in Table 554-1 (LRFD)
in accordance with the A 1SI S200 and the following, as
applicable: Table 554-1 Safety Factors and Resistance Factors for
Dia lhragms
I. Headers, including box and back-to-back headers, and Limit Slate
double and single L-headers, shall be designed in I.cod Type"' Coonc,.1i<ln Connection Panel Bucklin,•
C"ctntbi11acions
a ccordance with AISI S2 l 2 or solely in accordance (11clud ing
Typo
nd "'d nd <l>i1.
with this Specification. ASl>) (LRFD) (ASD) LRFD)
Welds 3.00 0.55
1.!11rthquakc
2. Trusses shall he designed in accordance with AISI Screws 2.:50 0.65
S214. Welds
Wind 2.35 0.70 2.00 0.80
Screws
Welds 2.65 0.60
3. Wall studs shall be designed i"n accordance with AISI All Others
Screws 2.5 0.65
S21 l, or solely in accorda nce with this Specification Note:
either on the basis of an all-steel system in accordance
with Section 554.4.1 or on the basis of sheathing braced •Panel buckling is 011t-nj-pla11e and not local huclcling (1/jasteners.
design in accordance with an appro priate theory, tests,
o r rational engineering analysis. Both solid and
perforated webs shall be permitted. Both ends of the
s tud shall be connected to restrain rotation about the
longin1dinal stud axis and horiwntal displacement

CHAPTU~ 5 Strnclural Steel 5·285
For mechanical fasteners other than screws: (554.6-1)
1. fid shall not be less than the Table 554- I values for fl,, = 1. 67 (ASD) <J,1, = 0. 90 (LRFD)
screws. and
where
2. 'Pd shall not he greater than the Tahlc 554-1 values for R is ohtained f'rom Table 554.6.1. 1-1 for simple span C- or
screws. 7-sections, and
111 addilion, the vah1e of fid .111cl <Pd using mechanical R 0.60 for continuous span C-sections
fasteners other than screws shall bi.: limited by the fl and </> 0.70 for conlinuous span 7'.-sections
values est.1blished through calihration of the individual
fastener shear slrrnglh, unless sulficienl dale exist to Se and F y = Values as defined in Section 553.3. J. I
cslablish a diaphragm system effect in accmdance with
Section 556.1.1. rasti.:ncr shcllr strength calibration shall
include the diaphragm material type. Calibration or The reduction factor, R, shall be limited to roof' and wall
individual li1stcncr shear strengths shall be in acnmlam:l' systems meeling the following conditions:
with Section 556.1. l. The test assembly slrnll be such lhal
the tested fai!uri.: mode is rcprcscntalivc or the design. The I. Member depth ~ 295 mm,
impact of the thickness of the supporting nrnterial on the
failure mode shall he considered. 2. Member flanges with edge stiffeners
554.6 Metal Roof and Wall System 3. 60 ~ depth I thickness ~ 170
The provisions or Section 554.6.1 through 554.6.3 shall 4. 2. 8 ~ di.:pth I llangc width ~ 4. 5
apply to metal roof and wall systems that include wld-
formcd slccl purlins, gi,ts, through-fastened wall/roof and 5. 16 ~ flat width I thickness of flange is ~ 43,
wall panels, or standing seam roof panels, as applicable.
6. For continuous span systems, the lap lcnglh at each
554.6.1 Purlins, Girts and Other Members interior suppmt in each direction (distance from center
of support to end of lap) is not less than 1.5d,
554.6.t.t Flexural Members Having One Flange
Through-Fastened to Deck or Sheathing 7. Member span length is nol greater than IO m
This section shall not apply to a continuous heam for the 8. Roth flanges arc prevented from moving laterally at the
region between inflection points adjaccnl to a support or to supports,
a cantilever beam.
9. Roof or wall panels arc steel sheets wilh 340 MPa
The nominal llexural strength. M11 , of a C- or Z-section minimum yield stress, and a minimum of0.45 mm base
loaded in a plane parallel to the web, with the tension flange metal thickness, having a minimum rib depth of 30
allached Lo deck or sheathing and with the compression mm, spaced a maximum of 300 mm on center~ and
flange laterally unbraced, shall be calculated in accordance attached in a manni.:r effectivc,ly inhibit relative
with Eq. 554.6-1. The safoly factor and resistance factors movement bclween the panel and purl in flange,
given in this section sha!I be uscd lo dctem1ine the
allowable flexural strength or design flexural strength in IO. lnsulalion is gh:ss fiber blanket O to 150 mm thick
accordance wilh the applicable design method in Section compressed between the memher and panel in a manner
55 I .4, 551.5. consistent with the fastener being used,
11. Fastener type is, at minimum, No.12 self-drilling or

selt~tapping sheet metal screws or 5 mm rivets, having
washers 12 mm diameter,
12. Fasteners is nol standoff type screws,
13. Fasteners arc spaced not greater than 300 mm on

centers and placed near the center of the beam flange,

5-286 CHAPTER 5 - Structural S tee l
and adjacent to the panel high rib, and I. The weak axis nominal strength shall be calculated in
accordance with Eq. 554.6-2. The safety factor and
14. The design yield stress of the member does not exceed resistance factors given in this section s hall be used to
410 MPa. determine the allowable axial strength or design axial
strength in accordance with the applicable design
If variables fall outside any of the above stated limits, the method in Section 551.4, or 551.5.
user shall perform full-scale tests in accordance with
Section 556.1 of this Specification or apply a rational (554.6-2)
engineering analysis procedure. For continuous purlin
systems in which adj acent bay span lenglhs vary by more .Q = 1. 80 (ASD) </> = 0. 85 (LRFD)
than 20 percent, the R values for the adjacent bays shall be
taken from Table 554-2. The user shall be permitted to where
perform tests in accordance with Section 556.1 as an
alternate to the procedure described in this section.
C1 = (0. 79x + 0. 54) (554.6-3)
Table 554-2 Simple Spam C or Z Section R Values
C2 = (1.17at + 0. 93) (554.6-4)
Depth range
(mm)
Profile R C3 = a(2. Sb - 1. 63d) + 22. 8 (554.6-5)
d:::165 C or Z 0.70
t65<dg 1s CorZ 0.65 where
2J5<dS295 z 0.50
x = For 7..-sections, the fastener distance from the
215<dS295 c 0.40
outside web edge divided by the flange width,
as shown in Pigure 554.6.1.3
For simple span members, R shall be reduced for the effects For C-scctions, the flange width mi nus the
of compressed insulation between the sheeting and the fastener distance from the outside web edge
member. The reduction shall be calculated by multiplying divided by the flange width, as shown in Figure
R from Table 554-2 by the following correction factor, r: 554.6.1.3.
a = Coefficient for conversion of units
r = 1. 00 - 0. 0004ti when ti is in millimeters = 0. 0394 when t, b, and dare in mm
(554.6.1.J -3) = C- or 2-section thickness
t
where b = C- or Z-section flange width
ti = Thickness of uncompressed glass fiber blanket
d = C- or Z-section depth
insulation A = Full unreduced cross-sectional area of C- ur Z-
section
554.6.1.2 Flexural Members Having One Flange
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel
Fastened to a Standing Seam Roof System = 203,000 MPa for SI units
See Section 554.6.1 b of Section 553-3 or H for the Eq. 554.6.1.3-1 shall be limited to roof and wall system
provisions or this section. meeting the following conditions:
554.6.1.3 Compression Members Having One Flange a. t :5: 3 mm,

Through-Fastened to Deck or Sheathing
b. 150 mm :5: d :5: 300 mm,
These provisions shall apply to C- or Z-scctions
concentrically loaded along their longitudinal axis, with c. Flanges are edge stiffened compression elements,
only one tlange attached to deck or sheathing with through
fasteners. d. 70 ::;: d/ t ::;: 170,
The nominal axial strength of simple span or continuous C- e. 2.8 :5: d/b s; 5,
or Z-sections shall be calculated in accordance with (a) and
(h).
f. 16 s; flange t1atwidth/t :5: 50

g. Both flanges arc prevented from moving laterally 2. Exisling tests conducted in accordance with CEGS
at the supports, 07416 uplill lcsl procedure prior to lhc adoption of
these provisions shall be permitted.
h. Steel roof or steel wall panels with fasteners
spaced 300 mm on center or less and having a The open-open end configuration, although nol prescrihcd
minimum rotational lateral stiffness of I 0,300 N/ by the ASTM El 592 test procedure, shall be permitted
m/ m (fastener at mid-flange width for sliffness provided lhe tested end conditions represent lhc installed
detennination) determined in accordance wilh condition, and the lest follows the requirements given in
AISI S901, AISI S906. All test results shall be evaluated in accordance
with this section.
i. C- and Z-seclions having a minimum yield stress
of230 MPa, and For load combinations lhat include wind upliil, additional
provisions are provided Section 554.6.2.1 a of Section
J· Spanlcngthnotcxcccding !Om. 553-3.
2. The strong axis available strength shall be determined When the number of physical lesls assemblies is 3 or more,
in accordance wilh Scclions 553.4.1 and 553.4.1.1. safely factors and resistance factors shall be determined in
accordance with the procedures of Section 554.1.1 (b) with
the following definitions for the variables:
Po Target reliability index

= 2.0 for panel flexural limits
2.5 for anchor limits
Fm Mean value of the fabrication factor
= 1.0
Mm = Mean value of the material factor
= I. I
V111 = Coctficicnt of variation of lhe malerial faclor
0.08 for anchor failure mode
= 0.10 for other failure modes
Vp = Coelficienl uf varialion of the fabrication factor
Figure 554.6. J.3 Definition of x 0.05
VQ = Cocfficic.nt of variation of the load effect
For Z-section, x = a/b (554.6,6) = 0.21
Vp = Actual calculated cocfficicnl or variation of the test
For C-section, x = (b - a)/b (554.6-7) results, without limit
n = Numhcr of am;hors in the test assemhly with the
same tributary area (for anchor failure) or number
of panels with identical spans and loading to the
554.6.2 Standing Scam Roof Panel Systems failed span (for non-anchor failures}
554.6.2a Strength of Standing Seam Roof Panel The safety faclor, !!, shall not he less limn 1.67, and the
Systems
resistance faclor, </>, shall not he greater than 0.9 (LRFD)
Under gravily loading, the nominal strength of standing
When the number of physical test asscniblies is less than 3,
seam roof panels shall be determined in accordance with
Seclion 552 and 553 of this Specification or shall be lesled a safety factor, !!, of 2.0 and a resistance factor, <J,, of 0.8
in accordance with ATSI S906. Under uplitt loading, the (LRFO) shall be used.
nominal slrenglh of standing seam roof panel systems shall
be determined in accordam:e with AISI S906_ Tests shall be
performed in accordance with AISI S906 with the following
exceptions:
I. The Uplift Pressure Test Procedure for Class 1 Panel

roofs in FM 4471 shall be permitted.
i
554.6.3 Roof System Bracing and Anchorage where
554.6.3.1 Anchorage of Bracing for Purlin Roof Cl, C2, C3, and C4 = Coefficients tabulated in 'fables
Systems Under Gravity Load with To)) 554.6.3.1-1 to 554.6.3.1-3
Flange Connected to Metal Sheathing Wpi Total required vertical load supported hy the ith
purlin in a single bay
Anchorage, in the fonn of a device capable of transferring = wiL (554.6-10}
force from the roof diaphragm to a support, shall be
provided for roof sysLcms with C-seclions or Z-sections, where
designed in accordance with Sections 553.3. l and 554.6.1,
having tl1rough-fnstencd or stru1ding seam sheathing Required distributed gravity loa<l supported by the
attached to the top flanges. Each anchorage device shall be
wi =
ith purlin per unit length (determined from the
designed lo re.sis! lhe force . P L, determined by Eq. 554.6-8 critical load combination for ASD, or LR(;D)
and shall satisfy the minimum sti ffness requirement of Eq. Product of ine1tia of full unreduced section about
lxy ==
554.6-14. 111 addition, purlins shall be restrai11ed laterally centroidal axes parallel and perpendicular to the
by the sheathing so that the maximum top llange lateral purlin weh (lxy = 0 for C-sections)
displacements between lines of lateral anchorage at nominal
L Pudin span length
loads do not exceed the span leng1J1 divided l:ly 360.
m Distance from shear ccnler to mid-plane of web
Anchorage devices shall be loc<1led in e11ch purlin bay and (m = 0 for Z-sections)
shall connect to the purl in at or near Lhe purlin lop Oange. Ir b Top flange width of purlin
anchorage devices are no.l directly connected to all purlin t Purlin thickness
lines of each purlin bay. provision shall be made to transmit Ix Moment of inertia of full unreduced section about
= centroi<lal
the forces from otJ1cr purlin lines to the anchorage devices. axis perpendicular to the purlin web
It shall be demonstrated that the required force, Pi, can be d depth of purl in
transferred to the anchorage device through the roof a + 1 for top tlangc facing in the up-slope direction
sheathing and ils fastening system. The lateral sti finess of - I for top tlange facing in lhe down slope
the anchorage device shall be determ ined by analysis or direction
testing. This analysis or testing shall acco1mt for the 8 Angle between vertical and plane of purlin weh
flexibility of th.e purlin web above the auachme nt or the
Kett·,,,· = Effective lateral stilfoess of the /h anchorage
anchorage device connection. device with respect to the ith purl in
- 1
Np 1 dp··
. IJ
P =~
,., ~
i=1
(P· Ket.
'K
!1,1)
LoUll;
(554.6-8} [Ka+ (C6)LAvE ]
(554.6-11)
where
where
dp·.
l,J
Distance along roof slope between the ic 11 purlin
Lateral force to he resisted by the /h anchorage line and the /h anchorage device
device (positive when restraint is required to prevent
Ka = Lateral stiffness of the anchorage device
purlins from translating in the upward ruof slope = Coefficient tabulated in Tables 554.6.3.1-1 to
C6
direction} 554.6.3. I -3
== Number of purl in lines on roof slope Gross cross-sectional area of roof panel per unit
Index for each purl in line { i = 1, 2 ... , Np) width
= Index for each anchorage device (j = 1, 2 ... , Na) E = Modulus of elasticity of steel
Effective lateral stiffness of all clements resisting
where force Pi
N,.
Na Number of anchorage devices along a line or
pi
anchorage
== Lateral force introduced into the system at the purlin
I(
j=l
Ke/fi,J) + Ksys (554.6-12)
= (Cl)W · {[(~) lxyl. + (C3) (m+O.ZSb)t]

P, 1000 I xd 2 d
a cos 8 -
(C4)sin9}
(554.6-9)

where
Ksys Lateral stiffness of the roof system, neglecting

anchorage <levii.:es
CS ) ELtz
K ,., = (:) ( 20 t P, Id) (lRFD (554.6-16)
( 1000 ( N P) d2 (554.6-13) n = 2. 00 (ASD) <f, = 0. 75 (LRFD)

In lieu of' the Eqs. 554.6-8 through 554.6-13, lateral restraint
for multi-span systems, force P,, calculated in accordance
forces shall he permitted to be determined from alternate
with Eq. 554.6-9 and coefficients C1 to C4 from Tables analysis. Alternate analysis shall include Lhc first or second
554-3 to 554-5 for the "Exterior Frame Line", "End Bay", order effect and account for the effects of roof slope, torsion
or "End Hay Exterior Anchor" cases, shall not he taken as resulting from applied loads eccentric to shear center,
less than 80 percent of the force determined using the torsion resulting from the lateral resistance provided by the
coefficients C2 to C4 for the corresponding ''All Other sheathing, and load applied ob!i4ue lo the principal axes.
1,ocations" case. Alternate analysis shall also include the effects of the lateral
and rotational restraint provided by sheathing attached to
For systems with multiple spans and anchorage tlevi<.:es al Lhe top flange. Stiffness of the anchorage device shall be
supports (support restraints), where the two adjacent bays considered and shall account for flexihility of the pur!in
have different section properties or span lengths than the web above the attachment of the anchorage device
following procedures shall be used. The values for Pi in connection.
Eq. 554.6-8 and Eq. 554.6-14 to 15 shall be taken as the
average of the values found from Eq. 554.6-9 evaluated When lateral restraint forces are determined from rational
separately for each of the two hays. The values of Ksys analysis, the maximum top flange lateral displacement of
and Kci·i·1,/
.. in Eq. 554.6-8 and Eq. 554.6-12 shall he . the purl in between lines or lateral bracing at nominal loads
shall not exceed the span length divided by 360. The lateral
calculated using Eq. 554.6-11 and Eq. 554.6-13, with L, t, displacement of' the purl in top flange at the line or restrainL,
and d taken as the average values of the two bays. LJtf, shall he calculated at factored load levels for LRFD
and nominal load levels for ASD and shall be limited to:
For systems with multiple spans and anchorage devices at
ciLher 1/3 points or mid-points, where the adjacent bays
have different section properties or span lengths than the (ASD) (554.6-17)
buy under consideration, the following procedures shall be
used to account for the influence of the adjacent bays. The
value of Ksys in Eq. 554.6-12 shall he calculated using Eq. (LRFD) (554.6-18)
554.6-13, with L, t, and d taken as the average of the values
from the three bays. ,.,
The values of Kett·. shall be
554.6.Jh Alternate Lateral and Stability Bracing for
calculated using Eq. 554.6-11, with L taken as the span PurJin Roof System
length of the hay under consideration. At an end bay, when
computing the average values for Pi or averaging the Torsional bracing that prevents twist about the longiLudinal
properties for computing Ksys, the averages shall be found axis of a member in combination with lateral that resist
hy adding the value from the first interior bay and two limes lateral displacement of the top flange at the frame line shall
the value frotn the end hay and then dividing the sum by be permitted in lieu of the requirements of Section
three. 554.6.3.1. A torsional brace shall prevent torsional rotation
of the cross-section at a discrete location along the span of
The total effective sliilhess at each purl in shall satisfy the the member. Connection of braces shall be made al or near
following equation: both flanges of ordinary open sections., including C- and Z-
scctions. The effectiveness of torsional braces in preventing
(554.6-14) torsional rotation at the cross-section and the required
strength of lateral restraints at the frame line shall be
deLennined by raLional engineering analysis or testing. The
where lateral displacement or the top Ilange of the C- or Z-section
at the frame line shall be limited to d/(200.) for ASD
calculated at nominal load (specified loadl levels or
(ASD (554.6-15) q,d/20 for LRFD calculated at factored load levels, where
dis the depth of the C- or Z-section member, !l is the safety

factor for ASD, .ind q, is the resistance factor for LRFD where
Lateral displacement between f'rnmc lines, calculated nl !! = 2. 00 (ASD) q, = 0. 75 (LRFD)
nominal load levels, sh:111 he hnuted to L/180, "here.! L is
the spnn length ol'the member. 17or pairs of adjacclll purl ins
that provide bracing 11g11inst twist Lo each other, external
anchorage of torsional brace forces shall not be required.
Table 554-3 Coefficients for One Third Point Restraints
~~~~~~~~~~~~-t-~~--~-
Cl C2 C3 C4 CS C6
Simple
Through Fastened (TF) 0. 5 7.8 42 0.98 0.39 0.40
San
Standin • Scam SS 0.5 7.3 21 0.73 0.19 0.18
End Ony F.xlerior Anchor 0.5 15 17 0.98 0.72 0.043
End Bay Interior Anchor and I' Interior Oay 0.5
TF 2.4 50 0.96 0.82 0.20
Exterior Anchor
Multiple
All Other Locations 0.5 6.1 41 0.96 0.69 0.12
Span
EndBn F.xteriorAnchor
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1--~-~~-
0.5 13 13 0.72 0.59 0.035
End Bay fnterior Anchor and I'' Interior Oay O5
SS Exterior Am:hor . 0.84 56 0.64 0.20 0.14
All Other Locations 0.5 3.8 45 0.65 0.10 0.0 14
Table 554-4 Coefficients for Mid Point Restraints
CI C2 C3 C4 cs C6
Simple
Through l·astened (TF) 1.0 7.6 44 0.96 0.75 0.42
San
1.0 7.5 15 0.62 0.35 0.18
1.0 8.3 47 0.95 3.1 0.33
TF First Interior Ba 1.0 3.6 53 0.92 3.9 0.36
Multiple
Span
End Ba 1.0 7.9 19 0.54 2.0 0.080
SS First Interior Ba 1.0 2.5 4.1 0.47 2.6 0.13
All Other Locations 1.0 4 .1 31 0.46 2.7 0.15
Table 554-5 Coefficients for Support Restraint:!
Cl C2 C3 C4 cs C6
Simple
Through Fastened (TF) 0.5 8.2 33 0.99 0.43 0.17
San
Standin, Seam SS 0.5 8.3 28 0.61 0.29 0.051
End Exterior Frame Line 0.5 14 6.9 0 .94 0.073 0.085
TF First Interior Frame Line 1.0 4.2 18 0.99 2.5 0.43
Multiple
A II Other Location 1.0 6.8 23 0.99 1.8 0.36
Spim
End Exterior Frame Line 0.5 13 II 0.35 2.4 0.25
SS First Interior Frame Line 1.0 1.7 69 0.77 1.6 0.13
\
SECTION555
CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS q, = 0. 80 (LRFD) fl = 1. 90 (ASD)
(555.2-3)
555.l General Provisions
Connections shall be designed to transmit the required

strength acting on the connected members with q, = 0. 90 (LRFD) fl = 1. 70 (ASD)
consideration of eccentricity where applicable.
where
555.2 Welded Connections Pn Nominal strength [resistance) of groove weld
L Length of weld
The following design criteria shall apply to welded te Effective throat dimension of groove weld
connections used for cold-fonned steel structural members FY Yield stress of lowest strength base steel
in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is 5
F xx Tensile strength or clcdrodc classification
mm or less. For the design of welded connections in which
the thickness of the thinnest connected pait is greater than 5
mm, refer to the specifications or standards stipulated in the 555.2.2 Arc Spot Welds
corresponding Section 555.2(a) of Section 553-3 or 552.
Arc spot welds, where permitted by this Spccilication, shall
Welds shall follow the requirements of the weld standards he for welding sheet !>tee! to thicker supporting members or
also stipulated in Section 555.2(a) of Section 553-3 or 552. sheet-to-sheet in the flat position. Arc spot welds (puddle
For diaphragm applications, Section 555.5 shall apply. welds) shall not be made on steel where the thinnest
connected part exceeds 4 mm in thickness, nor through a
555.2.1 Groove Welds in Butt Joints combination of steel sheets having a total thickness over 4
mm.
lhc nominal strength, P n, of a groove weld in a butt joint,
Weld washers, as shown in Figures 555-1 and 555-2, shall
welded from one or both sides, shall be determined in
be used where the thickness of the sheet is less than 0. 7 mm.
accordam:c with (a) or (b), as applicable. The
Weld washers shall have a thickness between 1.25 mm and
corresponding safety factor and resistance factors shall be
2.0 mm with a minimum pre-punched huh; of 9.50 mm
used to determine the allowable strength or design strength
diameter. Sheet-to-sheet welds shall not require weld
in accordance with the applicable design method in Section
washers.
551.4, or 551.5.
Arc spot welds shall be specified by minimum effective
1. For tension or compression normal to the effective area
or parallel to the axis of the weld, the nominal strength, diameter or fused area, de. The minimum allowable
encctivc diameter shall be 9.5 mm.
P n, shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 555.2-1:
q, = 0. 80 (LRFD) fl = 1. 90 (ASD)
2. For shear on the eftective area, the nominal strength,
P n, shall be the smaller value calculated in accordance
with Eq. 555.2-2 and 555.2-3:
Pn = Lte0,6Fxx (555.2-2)
q, = 0. 90 (LRFD) fl = 1. 70 (ASD)
(555.2-2)

.n = 2. 20 (ASD) </J = 0. 70 (LRFD)

Fu/Fsy < 1. 08
f! = 2. 55 (ASD) <JJ = 0. 60 (LRFD)

r""...
...L.........
where
p Required shear strength (nominal force)
transmitted hy weld (ASO)
Tensile strength as determined in accordance
with 55 1.2.1 , 551.2.2, or 551.2.3.2
Figure 555-1 Typical Weld Washer t Total combined base steel thickness (exclusive
of coatings) of sheet(s) involved in shear
transfer above plane maximum shear transfer
Required shear strength transmitted by weld
Pu (LRFD)
= Yield stress as detennined in accordance with
Section 551.2. I , 551.2.2, or 551.2.3.2
In addition, the distance from the centerline of any weld to

!he end or boundary of the connected member shall not be
less than 1. Sd. In no case shall the clear distance between
welds and the end of member be less than 1. Od.
Figure 555-2 Arc Spot Weld Using Washer
555.2.2 Shear
555.2.2. l Minimum Edge Distance
The distance measured in the line of force from the

centerline of a weld to Lhe nearest edge of an adjacent weld
or to the end of the connected part towa rd which the force is
directed shall not l>e less than the value of em!n determined
in accordance with Eq. 555.2-4 or Eq. 555.2-5, as
applicable. See Figures 555-3 and 555-4 for edge distance Figure 555-3 Edge Distance for Arc Spot Welds - Single
of arc welds. The corresponding safety factors and Sheet
resistance factors shall be used to determine the allowable
strength or design strength in accordance with the
applicable design method in Section 55 l.4, or 551.5.
For ASO (555.2-4)
ForLRFD (555.2-5)
when

CHAPTER 5 Steel and Metal 5-293
3. For 0. 815 r:
~Fu
<(daft)< 1. 397 /E
~~
P 11 = 0. 280 1 + S. 59 {El t
'1d{
F";; daFu
r
(555.2-8)
fl = 2. 80 (ASD) q, = 0. 55 (LRFD)
4. for (daft) ~ 1. 397 {I

'1Fu
Figure 555-4 Edge Distance for An.: Spot Welds - Douhlc
Sheet Pn = 1.40 t daFu (555.2-9)
555.2.2.2 Shear Strength for Shcct(s) Welded to a

n= 3. 00 (ASD) q, = 0. 50 (LRFD)
Thicker Supporting Member
where
The nominal shear strength, Pn, of each arc spot weld
between the sheet or sheets and a thicker supporting
= Nominal shear strength of arc spot weld
member shall be deter.mined by using the smaller of either Effective diameter of fused area at plane of
(a) or (b). The corresponding safety factor and resistance maximum shear transfer
factors shall be used to determine the allowable strength or 0. 7 d - 1. St s; 0. SSd
design strength [factored resistance! in accordance with the
applicable design method in Section 551.4, or 551.5. where
Visible diameter of outer surface of arc spot weld

I. Pn = (1l'!e) 0. 75Fxx (555.2-6)
d
t
Total ~omhined hase steel thickness (exclusive of
coatings) of sheets involved in shear transfer
above plane of maximum shear transfer
fi = 2. 55 (ASD) q, = 0. 60 (LRFD) Tensile strength of electrode classification
A vcragc diameter or arc spot weld al mid-
thickness of t where da = (d - t)for single
2. for (d 4 /t) ,; 0. 815 );,; sheet or multiple sheets not more than four
lapped sheets over a suppmting member. See
Figures 555-5 and 555-6 for diameter definitions
Pn = 2. 20 t daFu (555.2-7) E Modulus of elasticity of steel
Tensile strength as determined in accordance
with Section 551.2.1, 551.2.2, or 551.2.3.2
fi = Z. 20 (ASD) q, = 0. 70 (LRFD)
i
where
d Visible diameter of the outer surface of arc spot

weld
de Effective diamete r of fused area at plane of
maximum shear transfer
0 . 7d - 1. 5t ~ 0. 5Sd (555.2-1 J)
Fu c: Tensile strength of sheet as determined in
accordance w.ith Section 551.2. I or 551 .2.2
fn addition, the following limits shall apply:
Figure 555-5 Arc Spot Weld - Single Thickness of Sheet
' Fu~ 407 Mpa,
Fxx >Fu , and
0. 70 mm $ t $ 1. 60 mm.
d.-0.7d· 1.SSO.lid
da•d·t
de•d-t
rigure 555-6 Arc Spot Weld - Double Thickness of Shce
di,• 0.7d-Ut s 0.55d
d.
555.2.2.3 Shear Strength rResistanceJ for Sheet-to- ---d.---..
Shcet Connections
Figure 555.7 Arc Spot Weld - Sheet-to-Shec
The nominal shear strength fresistanceJ for each weld
between two sheets of equal thickness shall be determined
in accordance with Eq. 555.2-10. The safety factor and 555.2.2.2 Tension
resistance factors in this section shall be used to determine
the allowable strength or design strength in accordance with The uplift nominal tensile strength, P n, or
each
the applicable design method in Section 551.4, or 551.5. concentrically loaded arc spot weld connecting sheets and
supporting member shall be computed as the smaller of
(555.2-10) either Fg. 555.2- 12 or Eq. 555.2-13 as follows. The safety
factor and resistance factors shall be used to determine the
.0 = 2. 20 (ASD) cJ, = 0. 70 (LRFD) allowable strength or design strength in accordance with the
applicable design method in Section 551.4, 551.5.
where 1rde 2
(555.2-12)
Pn = -4-Fxx
Nominal shear strength [resistance] ofsheet-to-
shect connection
Total combined base steel thickness (exclusive of (555 .2-13)
t
coatings) of sheets involved in shear transfer above
plane of maximum shear transfer
For panel and deck applications:
Average diameter o r arc s pot weld at mid-thickness
of t. See Figure 555-7 for diameter definitions
(d- t)
fl = 2. 50 (ASD) q, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
For panel and deck applications:
.n = 3. 00 (ASD) q, =0. 50 (LRFD)

The following limits shall apply: where
I. t daFu :5 13. 34 kN, p 11 Nominal shear strength [resistance] of arc scam

weld
2. emin ~ d, de = Effective width of scam weld at fused surfaces
= 0.7d-1.5t (55:5.2-16)
3. Fxx ~ 410 MPa
where
4. Fu::::; 565 MPa (of connecting sheets), and
d Width ofarc scam weld
L Length of seam weld not including circular ends
(For computation purposes, L shall nol exceed
Sec Section 555.2.2.1 for definitions of variables. 3d)
da = A vcrage width of scam weld
h>r eccentrically loaded arc spot welds subjected to an (d - t) for single or double sheets (555.2-17)
uplift tension load, the nominal tensile strenglh shall be Fu, Fxx, and t = Values as defined in Section 555.2.2. l
taken as 50 percent of the above value.
The minimum edge distance shall be as determined for the
For connections having multiple shcels, the strength shall be arc spot weld in accordance with Section 555.2.2.1.
determined by using the sum of the sheet thickness as given See Figure 555.9 for details.
by Eq. 555.2.2-2.
At the side lap connection within a deck system, the

nominal tensile strength of the weld connection shall be 70
percent of the ahovc values.
Where it is shown by measurement that a given weld

procedure consistently gives a larger effective diameter, de,
or average diameter, da, as applicable, this larger diameter
shall be permitted to be used prnvided the parlicular
welding procedure used for making those welds is followed.
555.2.3 Arc Seam Welds

figure 555-8 Arc Scam Welds - Sheet to Supporting
Arc seam welds (See Figure E2.3- I) covered by this Member in Fial Position
Specification shall apply on to the following joints:
l. Shccl to thicker suppurling member in the tlat position,
and
2. Sheet to sheet in the horizonlal or tlat position.
The nominal shear strength, Pn, of arc seam welds shall be

determined by using the smaller of either Eq. 555.2-14 or
Eq. 555.2-15. The safety factor and resistance factors in
this section shall be used to detem1ine the allowable
applicable design method in Section 551.4, 551.5.
11:de 2 ] 0. 75Fxx
P 11 = [ - 4 -+Lde (555.2-14)
Figure 555-9 Edge Distances for Arc Scam Welds

P 11 = 2. St Fu(O. 2SL + 0. 96da) (555.2-15)
fi = 2. 55 (ASD) </> = 0. 60 (LRFD)
'
555.2.4 Fillets Welds
Fillet welds covered by this Specitication shall apply to the

welding of joints in any pos ition, either sheet to sheet, or
sheet to thicker steel member.
The nominal shear strength, Pn, or a fillet weld shall he

detcm1ined in accordance with this section. The
corresponding safoty factors and resistance factors given in
this section shall be used to determine the allowable
applicahk design method in Section 551.4, or 551 .5.
1. For longitudinal loading:
Fur L/ t < 25 Figure 555-11 Fillet Welds T Joint
0. 01L) (555.2-18)
In addition, t > 2. 50 mm, the nominal strength
Pn= ( 1 - - t - LtFu determined in accordance with (I) and (2) shall not exceed
the following value of Pn:
.n = 2. 55 (ASD) <J, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
For L/ t ~ 25 Pn = 0. 15tw L Fxx (555.2-21)
Pn == 0. 75 t L Fu (555.2-19)
!l = 2. 55 (ASD) <J, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
.n = 3. 05 (ASD) <J, = 0. 50 (LRFD)
2. For transverse loading: where
Pn = Nominal strength of fillet weld

Pn = t L Fu (555.2-20) L = Length of fillet weld
F 11. and F xx = Values as defined in Section 555.2.2.1
.n = 2. 35 (ASD) <J, = 0. 65 (LRFD) tw = Effecti ve throat .
where = 0. 707w 1 or 0. 707w2 , whichever is smaller. A

larger effective throat is pcnnitted if measurement
shows that the welding procedure to he used
t = Least value or t 1 or t 2 , as shown in Figures 555.10 consistently yields a larger value of tw
and 555.11)
where
w1 and w 2 = leg of weld (see Figures 555-10 and 555-11)

and w1 ~ t 1 in lap joints
555.2.5 Flare Groove Weld~
Flare groove welds covered by this Specification sha!! apply

to welding of joints in any position, either sheet to sheet for
flare-V groove welds, sheet to sheet for flare-bevel groove
welds or sheet to thicker steel member for flare-bevel
groove welds.
Figure555-l OFillet Welds - Lap Joint The nominal shear strength, P n, of a Hare groove weld shall
he determined in accordance with this section. The
corresponding safety factors and resistance factors given in
this section shall be used to dctennine the allowable

strength or design strength in accordance with the where

applicable design method in Section 551.4, or 551.5.
I. For flare-bevel groove welds, transverse loading (see
pn Nominal strength of flare groove weld
Figure 555-12) t = Thickness or welded member as defined in Pigures
555-12 to 555-18
Pn = 0. 833 t L Fu (555.2-22)
fi = 2. 55 (ASD) <f, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
Figure 555-13 Shear in Flare Revel Groove Weld
Figure 555-12 Flare-Bevel Groove Weld
2. For flare groove welds, longitudinal loading (see

Figures 555-13 through 555-18):
p
a. Fort :;:; tw < 2t or if the lip height, h, is less than

weld length, L:
(555.2-23)
fl = 2. 80 (ASD) </> = 0. 55 (LRFD) figure 555-14 Shear in Flare V-Groove Weld
b. For tw ~ 2t with the lip height, h, equal to or greater .., t !-

than weld length, L: -----
Pn=1.50tLFu (555.2-24)
fl = 2. 80 (ASD) q, = 0. 55 (LRFD)
In addition, for t > 2. 50 mm, the nominal strength
detennined in accordance with (a) and (b) shall not exceed
the value of P n calculated in accordance with Eq. 555.2-25)
(555.2-25)
fl = 2. 55 (ASD) q, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
Figure 555-15 Flare Bevel Groove Weld (Filled flush to
surface, w 1 =
R)
i
;
'
L = Length of weld
F11 and Fx;c Values as defined in Section 555.2.2.1
h = llcighl orl 1p
,·
tiv = Effcc1 1ve thront ul !lure groove weld filled flush to
surface (Sec rigurl! 555-15 and 555-16):
= (5/ 16)R for flare bevel groove weld
= (1 / 2)R when R::; 1/2 in. ( 12.77 mm) for tlare
V-gruove weld
= (3/8)R when R > 1/2 in . (12.77 mm) for flare I
V-groove weld
= Effective throat of ltare groove weld not filled Hush
I
10 surface:
0. 707w 1 or 0. 707Wz, whichever is smaller (sec
Figures 555-17 and 555-18)
A larger eflective throat than those above is I
Figure 555-16 flare Bevel Groove Weld (Filled flush to pennilted if measurement shows that the welding
surface, w 1 = R) procedure to be used consistently yields a larger
value of t 111
t
-----.f r- ,I
where
R Radius of outside bend surface

w 1 and w2 c.= Leg ufweld (see figures 555-17 and 555-18)
555.2.6 Resistance Welds
The nominal s hear strent:,'1h, P n, of spot welds shall be

detennincd in accordance with this section. The safety
factor and resistance factors given in this section shall be
used to determine the allowable strength or design strength
in accordance with the .applicable design method in Section
551.4, or 55 I .5.
Figure 555-17 Flare. Bevel Groove Weld (Not filled flush to fl= 2. 35 (ASD) R )
1. When tis in millimeters and Pn is in kN :
For 0. 25 mm ::; t 5 3. 56 mm
Pn = 5. 51t1 ·4 7 (555.2-26)
For 3. 56 mm S t $ 4. 57 mm
Pn=7.6t+8.57 (555 .2-27)
where
p 11 Nominal strength [resistance] of resistance weld

t Thickness of thinnest outside sheet
Figure 555-18 Flare Revel Groove Weld (Not filled flush to

surface, w 1 < R)

555.2.7 Rupture in Net Section of Members other 555.3 Bolted Connection

than Flat Sheets (Shear Lag)
The following design criteria and the requircmenls
The nominal tcnsil<.: strength of a welded member shall be stipulated in Section 555.3(a) of Section C-1 and C-2 shall
determined in accordance with Seclion 553.2. Fur rupture apply to holted connections used for cold-formed steel
and/ or yielding in the eHectivc net section of the connected structural members in which the thickness of the thinnest
part, the nominal tensile strength, P n, shall be determined connected part is less than 5 mm. For bolled rnnnection in
in accordance with Eq. 555.2-28. The safety factor and which the thickness of lhe thinnest connected part is equal
resistance factors given in this section shall be used to lo or greater than 5 mm, the specifications and slan<lards
determine the allowable strenglh or design strength in stipulated in Section 555.3(a) of Section 553-3 or 552 shall
accordance wilh the applieahle design method in Section apply.
551.4., or 551.5.
Dolls, nuts, and washers conforming to one of the following
Pn = AeFu (555.2-28) ASTM specification shall be approved for use under this
Specification:
n = 2. 50 (ASD) q, = 0. 60 (LRFD)
ASTM Al94/ Al94M, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuls for
where Bolts for High-Pressure and Iligh-Temperalure Service
Fu = Tensile strcnglh of the connected part as
ASTM A307 (Type A), Carbon Steel Bolts an<l Sluds,
detennined in accordance with Section 551.2.1 or
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
551.2.3.2.
Ae = AU, effective net area with U defined as follows: ASTM /\325, Slruetural Dolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/ I 05
When the load is transmitted only by transverse welds: ksi Minimwn Tensile Strength
A = Arca of directly connected elements
ASTM A325M, High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
U 1.0 Joints [Metric)
When the load is transmitted only by longitudinal welds or ASTM A354 (Grade BD), Qm:nched and Tempered Alloy
by longitudinal welds in combinalion with transverse welds: Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
(for diameter of boll smaller than 12 mm.)
A Gross area of member, Ag
ASTM A449, Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolls and
u 1.0 for members when load is transmitted directly
Studs (for diameter of bolt smaller than 12 mm)
to all of the cross-sectional elemenls
Otherwise lhe reduction coefficient U shall be determined ASTM A490, Heat-Treated Steel Strnctural Bolts, 150 ksi
in accordance wit11 (a) or (h): Minimum Tensile Strength
for angle members ASTM a490M, High Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10. 9 and
I 0.9.3, for Structural Steel Joinls [Metric)
U = 1.0 -1.20x/L < 0. 9 (555.2-29)
J\STM /\563, Carbon and Alloy St.eel Nuts
but U ~ 0.4
ASTM A563M, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (MetricJ
For channel members
ASTM F436, Hardened Steel Washers
U = 1.0- 0.36x/L < 0.9 (555.2-30)
ASTM fl6M, Hardened Steel Washers [MetricJ
hut U ~ 0. 5
ASTM F844, Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for
where General Use
Distance from shear plane to centroid of cross- ASTM F959, Compressible Washer-type Direct Tension
section Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
L Length of longitudinal weld
ASTM F959M, Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension
i
Indicators for Use with Stnictural Fasteners I Metric] Table 555.3- 1 Bearing Factor, C
When other than the :ibovc are used, drawings shall indicate Ratio of Fastener
clearly the type and size of fasteners to be employed and the Thickness of
Diameter to
nominal strength assumed in design. Connected Part I ,
Member c
mm
Thickness. d/t
Bolls shall be installed and tightened to achieve satisfactory d t < 10 3.0
performance of the connections. 0.60 St $ 5.0 10 S d t S 22 4 - 0.l(d/t)
d t > 22 1.8
555.3.1 Shear, Spacing, and Edge Distance
Table 555.3-2 Modification Factor, mt: for Type of Beari ng
See Section 555.3.1 oflhc Section 553 -3 or 13 for the Connection
provisions of this section
Type of Bearing Connection m
555.3.2 Rupture in Net Section (Shear La~)
S ingle Shear and Outside Sheets or
Sec Section 555.3.2 of the Section 553-3 or 552 for the Double Shear Connc.ction with Washers J.00
provisions oftJtis section. under Both Bolt Head and Nut
Single Shear and Outside Sheets of
555.3.3 Bearing Double Shear Connection without
Washers under Both Dolt Head and
0.75
The nominal bearing strength of bolled c-0nncctions shall be Nut, or with 0111 One Washer
determined in occorda11ce with Sections 555.3.3.1 and
555.3.3.2. . For conditions not shown, the available bearing Inside Sheet of Oouble Shear l .33
strength of bolted connections shiill be determined by tests. Connection with or without Washers
555.3.3.J Strength without Consideration of Bolt 555.3.3.2 Strength with Consideration of Bolt Hole
Hole Deformation Defo r mation
When defonnation around the boll holes is not a design When defonnation around a bolt hole is a design
consideration, the nomi,,al bearing strcng1h, P n• of the consideration, the nominal bearing strength, P 11 , shall be
connected sheet for each loaded bolt shall be determined in calculated in accordance with Eq. 555.3-2. The safely
accordance with Eq. 555.3-1. The salbty factor and factor and resistance factors given in this section shall be
resistance factors given in this section shall be used to used to determine the available strength factored in
determine tbe allowable strength or design strength in acwrdancc with the applicable design method in Section
accordance with the applicable design method in Section 551.4, 551.5. In addition, the avai lable strength shall not
551.4, or 551.5. exceed the available strength obtained in accordance with
Section 555.3.3. 1.
(555.3-1)
Pn = (4 . 64at+ 1. 53)dtFu (555.3-2)
n = 2. 50 (ASD) <J, = 0. 60 (LRFD )
n= 2. 22 (ASD) <J, = 0 . 65 ( LRFD)
where
where
c = Bearing factor, determined in accordance with
a == Coefficient for conversion of unil-.
Table 555.3-1
m, = Modification factor for type of bearing
connection, which sha.11 be determined according
= 0 . 0394 for SJ units (with t in mm)
to Table 555.3-2 See Section 555.3.3. 1 for defi nitions of other variables
d = Nominal bolt diameter
t Uncoated sheet thickness 555.3.4 Shear and T ension in Bolt~
Fu = Tensile strength of sheet as defined in Section
551.2. l or 551 .2.2 See Section 555.3.4 of the Section 553-3 or 552 for
provisions provided in this section .

555.4 Screw Connections 555.4.2 Minimum Rdge and End Distances
All Section 555.4 requirements shall apply to screws with The distance from the center ol"a fastener to the edge of any
(2. 0 mm) $ d $ 6. 5 mm. The screws shall be thread- part shall not he less than 1. Sd. If the end distance is
forming or thread-cutting, wilh or without a selt~drilling parallel to the force on the fastener, the nominal shear
point. Screws shall be installed and tightened in accordance strength per screw, Pns, shall be limited by Seclion
with lhe manufacturer's recommendations. 555.4.3.2.
The nominal screw connection strengths shall also be 555.4.3 Shear

limited by Seclion 553.2.
555.4.3.1 Connection Shear Limited by Tilting and
For diaphragm applications, Seclion 554.5 shall be used. Bearing
Except where otherwise indicated, the following safety The nominal shear strength per screw, P ns, shall be
factor or resistance factor shall be used to delermine the dclcrminc<l in accordance with this scclion.
allowable strength or design strength in accordance with the
applicable design method in Section 551.4, or 55 l .5.
I. For t 2 /t1 ~ 1. 0, P,..~ shall be taken as the smallest of
fl = 3. 00 (ASD) </> = 0. 50 (LRFD) 3 )1/2

Pns = 4. 2 ( t2· d F«i (555.4-1)
Alternatively, design values for a pmticular application shall
he permitted to be based on tests, with the safety factor, fl, (555.4-2)
and the resistance factor, </>, determined according to
Section 556. (555.4-3)
The following notation shall apply lo Section 555.4:

2. For tzf t 1 ~ 2. 5, Pns shall he taken as the smaller of
d Nominal screw diameler (555.4-4)
dh = Screw head diameter or hex washer head
integral washer diameter
(555.4-5)
dw Steel washer diameter
d' w = Effective pull-over resistance diameter
Pns = Nominal shear strength per screw 3. For 1. 0 < tzl t1 < 2. 5, P ns shall be calculated by
Pss Nominal shear strength of screw as reported by linear interpolation between the above two cases.
manufacturer of determined by independent
laboratory testing 555.4.3.2 Connection Shear Limited by End Distance
Pnvt = Nominal pull-out strength per screw
Pnov Nominal pull-over strength per screw See Section 555.4.3.2 of the Section 553-3 or 552 for
provisions of this section.
Pu Nominal tension strength of screw as reporled
by manufacturer or determined by independent
laboratory tesling 555.4.3.3 Shear in Scre,vs
t1 = Thickness or memher in contact with screw
head or washer The nominal shear strength of the screw shall he taken as
tz = Thickness of member not in contact wilh screw Pss·
head or washer
[n lieu of the value provided Section 555.4, the safely factor
tc = Lesser of depth of penetration and thickness lz or the resistance factor shall be pcnnillcd lO be determined
Fu1 = Tensile strength or member in contact with in accordance with Section 556.1 and shall be taken as
screw head or washer
1. 250 ~ 3. 0 (ASD). or <J>/1. 25 ~ 0. 5 (LRFD).
Fu2 Tensile strenglh of member nut in contact with
screw head or washer
555.4.1 Minimum Spacing
The distance between the centers or fasteners shall not be

less than 3d.

6
555.4.4 Tension
for screws that carry tension, the head of the screw or

washer, ii" a washer is provide<l, shall have a diameter dh or
dw not less than 8 mm. Washers shall be at least 1.3 mm
rJ@l
thick.
555.4.4.1 Pull-Out
The nominal puJI-QUt strength, P not, sha!l be calculated as ---1-1w

follows:
.......c:::::======:i.. =i: ~
(555.4-6)
555.4.4.2 Pull-Over
(2) Flat Steel Washer beneath Hex Washer Screw Head
The nominal pull-over strength [resistance], Pnov, shall be
(IIWH has Integral Solid Washer)
calculated as follows:
(555.4-7)
where
d' w """' Effective pull-over diameter determined in

accordance with (a), (b), or (c) as follows:
l. For a round head, a hex head (Figure 555-19), or hex
washer head (Figure 555-19 (2)) screw with an
,-c====~=:::1.c
i--~~---~~~=i~
---1 ti
independent and solid steel wai;her beneath the screw
head.
(3) Domed Washer (Nun-Solid) beneath Screw Head

Figure 555.19 Screw Pull-Over witJ1 Washer
(555.4-8)
where
Screw head diameter or hex washer head integral

washer diameter
Steel washer thickness
Steel washer diameter
2. For a round head, a hex head, or hex washer head screw

(1) Flat Steel Washer beneath Hex Head Screw Head without an independent washer beneath the screw head:
d' w = dh but not larger than 12 mm
\
I. 0. 0285 in. (0. 724 mm) ~ t 1 ~

3. For a domed (non-solid and independent) washer 0. 0445 in. (1. 130 mm),
beneath the screw head (Figure 555-19(3)), it is
2. No. 12 and No. 14 self-drilling screw with or without
permissible to use d' w was calculated in Eq. 555.4-8,
washers,
with dh, tw, and t1 as defined in Figure 555.19(3). In
the equation, d' w cannot exceed 16 mm. Alternatively, 3. dw s; 0. 75 in. (19.1 mm),
pull-over design values for domed washers, including
the safety factor, fi, and the resistance factor, <J,, shall 4. Fu 1 ~ 483 MPa, and
be pcrmilte<l to he determined by test in accordance
with Section 556.
5.
555.4.4.3 Tension in Screws
For eccentrically loaded connections that produce a non-
The nominal tension strength of the screw shall be taken as uniform pull-over force on the fastener, the nominal pull-
Pts· over strength shall be taken as 50 percent of P nov·
In lieu or the value provided io Section 555.4, the safety 555.4.5.2 LRFD Method
factor or the resistance factor shall be permitted to be
detcnnined in accordance with Section 556.1 and shall be For screw connections subjected to a combination of shear
taken as 1. 25fl ~ 3. 0 (ASD), or and lens ion forces, the following requirements shall be met:
<J,/1. 25 ~ 0. 5 (LRFD).
555.4.5 Combined Shear and Pull-Over

PQ + 0. 71 PT ~ 1. 10<J, (555.4-12)
ns nov
555..4.5. t ASD Method In addition, Q and T shall not exceed the corresponding
design strength [factored resistance] determined in
For screw connection subjected to a combination or shear accordance with Section 555.4.3 and 555.4.4, respectively.
and tension forces, the following requirement shall be met:
Q T 1.10 where
-+0.71--~-- (555.4-9)
Pns Pnov fi Q Required shear strength of connection
Vu for LRFD
In addition, Q and T shall not exceed the corresponding T Required tc~sion strength of connection
allowable strength determined by Section 555.4.3 and = Tu for LRFD
555.4.4, resp~ctivcly. Pns Nominal shear strength of connection
where ""' 2. 7t1dFu 1 (555.4-13)
Q = Required allowable shear strength of connection P11ov Nominal pull-over strength [resistance] of
T Required allowable tension strength of connection connection
P11S Nominal shear strength of connection (555.4-14)
2. 7tidFu 1 (555.4-10)
P nov Nominal pull-over strength of connection
where
1. St1dwFu1 (555.4-l l)
dw Larger of screw head diameter or ,vasher
where diameter
q, 0.65 LRFD
dw Larger of screw head diameter or washer
diameter Eq. 555.4-12 shall be valid connections that meet the
.n 2.35 following limits:
Eq. 555.4-9 shall be valid for connections that meet t11c

following limits: I. 0. 75 mm ~ t 1 ::::;; 1. 15 mm,

No. 12 and No. 14 self-d1illing screw wi!h or without SECTIONS56

2.
washers, TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES
3. dw 5 19 mm, Tests shall be made by an independent tei;ting laboralory or
by a testing laboratory of a manufacturer.
4. Fu 1 5 483 MPa, and
The provisions of Section 556 shall not apply to cold-
5. formcd steel diaphragms. Reier to Section 554.5.
556.1 Tests for Determining Structural Performance

For eccentrically loaded conneclions lhat produce a non-
unifonn pull-over force on the fastener, the nominal pull- 556. J. t Load and Resistance Factor Design and
over strength shall be !aken as 50 percent of P nov· Limit States Design
555.5 Rupture J\ny structural perfonnance that is required to be established

hy tests shall be evaluated in accordance wi1h the following
Sec Section 555.5 of Section 553-3 or 552 for the performance procedure:
provisions of this section.
1. Evaluation of lhe test results shall be made on lhe basis
555.S Connecting to Other Materials of the average value of test data resulting from tests of
not fewer than three identical specimens, provided the
555.6.l Bearing deviation of any individual test result from the average
value obtained from all tests does not exceed ± 15
Provisions shall be made 10 lransfcr bearing forces from percent. If such deviation l'rom the average value
steel components covered by U1is Specification to adjacent exceeds 15 percent, more 1es1s oftbc same kind shall be
stmctural components made of other malerials. made until the deviation of any individual lesl result
from the average value obtained from all tests does not
555.6.2 Tension exceed ±15 percent or until al least three additiona l
tests have been made. No test result shall be eliminated
The pull-over shear/ tension forces in Lhe steel sheet around unless a rationale for its exclusion is given. The
the head or the fastener shall be considered, as well as the average value of all tests made shall then be regarded
pull-out force resuliing from axial loads and bending as the nominal stren~th, Rn, for the series of the tests.
moments lransmitlcd onto the fastener from various Rn and the coefficient ol' variation V p of the test
adjacent structural componenls in the assembly. results shall be determined hy statistical analysis.
The nominal tensile strcnglh of the fastener and the nominal 2. The strength of the tested elements, ai,semblies,
cmbe<lmcnt strength of the adjacent structural component connections, or members shall satisfy Eq. 556. 1-1 or
shall be determined by applicable product code approvals, Eq. 556.1-2 as applicable.
product specifications, product literature, or combination
thereof. for LRFD (556.1-J)
555.6.3 Shear
where
Provisions shall be made to Lransfer shearing forces from
steel components covered by this Spcci ficalion lo adjacent Required strength [faclored loads] based
struclural components made of other materials. The on the most critical load combination
required shear and/or bearing strength on the steel determined in accordance with Section
components shall not exceed that allowed by this 551.5.1.2 for LRFD. Yi and Q, arc load
Specification. The available shear strength on the faslcners factors and load effects, respectively
and other material shall not be exceeded. Embedment Resistance factor
requirements shall be met. Provisions shall also be made
for shearing forces in combination with other forces.
(556. 1-2)

where The listing in Tahle 556-1 shall not exclude the use of
other documented statistical data if they arc established
C4> calibration coefficient from sunicient results on material properties and
1.52 for LRFD fabrication.
= 1.6 for LRFD for beams having tension
flange through-fastened to deck or sheathing For steels not listed in Section 551.2.1, values of MM
and with compression flange laterally and
unbraced V M shall be determined by the statistical analysis for
Mm Mean value of material factor, M, listed in the materials used.
Table 556-1 for type of component involved
Fm Mean value of fabrication factor, F, listed in When distortions interfere with the proper functioning
Table 556-1 for type of component involved of the specimen in actual use, the load cffoets based on
Pm Mean value of professional factor, P, for the critical load combination al the occurrence of the
tested component acceptable distortion shall also satisfy Eq. 556.1-1 (a) or
1.0 Eq. 556.1-2, as applicahlc, except that the resistance
e Natural logarithmic base factor q, shall be taken as unity and the load factor for
2.718 dead load shall be taken as 1.0.
/Jo Target reliability index
3. The mechanical prope11ies of the steel sheet shall be
2.5 for stmctural members and 3.5 for
dctennined based on representative samples of the
connections for LRFO
material taken from the test specimen or the flat sheet
l .5 for LRFD for beams having tension
used to fonn the test specimen. Mechanical properties
tlange through-fastened to deck or sheathing
reported by the steel supplier shall not be used in the
and with compression flange laterally
evaluation of the test results. Ir the yield stress of the
unbraced
steel from which the tested sections arc formed is larger
VM Coefficient or variation of material factor
than the specified value, the lest results shall be
listed in Table 556-1 for type or component
adjusted down lo the specified minimum yield stress of
involved
the steel that the manufacturer intends to use. The test
VF = Coetlicient of variation of fabrication factor
results shall not be adjusted upward if the yield stress
listed in Table 556- I for type of component
of the test specimen is less than the minimum specified
involved
yield stress. Similar adjustments shall be made on the
Cp = Correction factor
basis or tensile strenb,th instead or yield stress where
(1 + 1/n) m/(m- 2) forn;:::: 4 tensile strength js the critical factor.
5.7forn=3
Consideration shall also be given to any variation or
where differences between the design thickness and the
thickness of the specimens used in the tests.
n Number of tests
m Degrees of freedom
n-1
Vp Coefficient of variation oftest results, but not
less than 6.5 percent
VQ Coefficient of variation of load eflect
0.21 for LRFD
0.43 for LRFD for beams having tension
flange through-fastened to deck or sheathing
and with compression flange laterally
unbraced
Rn Average result of all test results

Table 556-1 Statistical Data for the Determination of Welds

Resistance Factor l. l O 0.80 ~ -
• Plate Failure
r!are Groove Welds
00
-
0.15
-
Type of Component MM VM Fm Vt • Shear Strength or
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Transverse Stiffeners 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Welds
~car Stiffeners 1.00 0.06 1.00 0.05 • Plate Failure 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
-f-
Tension Members 1.10 0.10 l.00 ~ Resistance Welds I. IO 0.10 1.00 0.10
Flexural members 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Rolled Connections
• n cnding Strcnc.th 1.00 0.06 1.00 0.05 • Shear Strength of
1.10 0.08 l.00 0.05
• Lateral Torsional Bolts
1.10 0.10 J.00 0.05
Uucklinl! Sirena.th • Tensile Strength of
1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
Bolts
• One Flange Through
Fastened to Deck or
1. 10
0.10 l.00 0.05 • Minimum Spacing
- - ,-
I. IO 0.08 l.00 (l.05
and Edge Distance
Shcalhinl.!
• Shear Strength 1.10 0 .10 1.00 0.05 • Tension Strength on
--
1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
• Combined Bending Net Section
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 1.1 ()
and Shear • Bearing Strengt.h 0.08 1.00 0.05
• Web Crippling Screw Connections
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Strength ,..__ Shear StrcnS?.lh of Screw 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
• Combined Bending Tensile Strength of
1.10 0.10 l.00 0.05 J.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
and Web Criooling Screw
Concentrically Loaded Minimum spacing and
1.10 0.10 l.00 0.10
Compression 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Edee Distance
Members Tension Strength 011 Net
1. 10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Combined Axial and Section
l.05 0.10 1.00 0.05
Bending Tilting and Bearing
I.IO 0.08 1.00 {l.05
Cylindrical Tubular Strength
1.10 0. 10 1.00 0.05
Members Pull-Out I. IO 0.10 1.00 0.10
• Oending Strength 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Pull-Over 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
• Axial Compression J.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Combined Shear and
1.10 0. 10 1.00 0.10
Wall Studs and Wall Pull-Over
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05 Connections Not Listed .
Studs Assemblies 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.15
• Wall Studs in Above
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Comoression
• Wall Studs in 556.1.2 Allowable Strength Design
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Bending
Where the composition or configuration of elements,
• Wall Studs with
l.05 0.10 1.00 0.05 assemblies, connections, or details of cold-fonned sleel
Combined Axial and
structural members are such that calculation o1' their
Bending
strength cannot be made in accordance with the provisions
Structural Members nol
1.00 0.10 1.00 0.05 of this Specification, their structural performance shall he
listed above
established from tests and evaluated in accordance with
Welded Connections
Section 556.1.1, except as modified in this section for
Arc Spot Welds
allowahlc strength design.
• Shear Strength of
1.10 0.10 l.00 0.10
Welds The allowable strength shall be calculated as follows:
• Tensile Strength of
1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Weld (556.1-3)
• Plate Failure 1. 10 0.08 1.00 0.15
Arc Seam Welds where
• Shear Stren1:,rth of the
1.10 0.10 J.00 0.10 Rn = average value of all test results
Welds
• Plate Tearin2 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10 11 = Safety factor
Fillet Welds :...: 1.6
(556.1-4)
• Shear Strenlrth of 1. 10 0.10 1.00 0.10
"'
where a portion of the web of such Oat width ration that the
value of p for the specimen is unity.
<J, = A value evaluated m accordance with Section
556.1.1 d. For acceptance and control purposes, one full section
test shall be made from each master coil.
The required strength shall be determined from nominal
loads and load combinations as described in Section 551.4.
e. At the option of the manufacturer, either tension or
compression tests shall be permitted to he used for
556.2 Tests for Confirming Strnctural Performance routine acceptance and control purposes, provided the
manufacturer demonstrates that such tests reliably
For structural members, connections, and assemblies for indicate the yield stress or the section when subjected
which the nominal strength is computed in accordance with lo the kind of stress under which the member is to be
this Specification or its specific references, conlim1atory
used.
tests shall be permitted to be made to demonstrate the
strength is not less than the nominal strength, Rn, specified 556.3.2 Flat Elements of Formed Sections
in this Specification or its specific references for the type or
behavior involved. Tests for determining mechanical properties of flat elcmcnis
of formed sections and representarive mechanical properties
556.3 Tests for Determining Mechanical Properties or virgin steel to be used in Section 551. 7.2 shall be made in
556.3. l .Full Section
The yield stress of flats, F yf, shall he estahlished by means
Tests for determination of mechanical properties of full
or a weighted average of the yield stresses of standard
sections lo be used in Section 551.7.2 shall be conducted in
tensile coupons taken longitudinally from the flat portions
or a representative cold-fonned member. The weighted
average shall be the sum of the products or the average
I. Tensile testing procedures shall agree with ASTM
yield stress for each flat portion times its cross-sc.:ctional
A370.
area, divided by the total area of flats in the cross-section.
Al though the exact number or such coupons wi 11 depend on
2. Compressive yield stress detemiinations shall he made.: the shape of the member, i.e., on the number of flats in the
hy means of compression tests or short specimens of cross-section, at leasL one tensile coupon shall be taken from
the section. See AISI S902. the middle of each flat. If the actual virgin yield stress
The compressive yield stress shall be taken as the exceeds the specified_ minimum yield stress, the yield stress
smaller value of either the maximum compressive.: of the 1lats, F yf• shall he adjusted by multiplying Lhe test
strength of the sections divided by the cross-sectional values hy the ratio or the specified minimum yield stress to
area or the stress defined by one of the following the actual virgin yield stress.
methods:
556.3.3 Virgin Steel
a. For sharp yielding steel, the yield stress is determined
hy the autographic diagram mcl110d or by the total The following provisions shall apply Lo steel produced Lo
strain under load method. other than tlte ASTM Specifications listed in
Section 55 l.2. I when used in sections for which the
b. For gradual yielding steel, the yidd stress is detem1ined increased yield stres/ of the steel aller cold forming is
hy the strain under load method or by the 0.2 percent computed from the virgin steel propc1tics in accurdanec
offset method. wilh Section 551. 7.2. For acceptance and control purposes,
at least four tensile specimens shall be taken from each
When the total strain under load method is used, there master coil for the establishment of the representative
shall be evidence that the yield stress so determined values of the virgin tensile yield stress and tensile strength.
agrees within 5 percent with the yield stress that would Specimens shall be taken longitudinally from the quarter
be determined by the 0.2 percent offset method. points of the width near the outer end of the coil.
c. Where the principal effect of the loading to which the

member will be suhjccted in service will be to produce
bending stresses, the yield stress shall be determined
for the flanges only. In detcnnining such yield stress,
each specimen shall consist of one complete flange plus

5-308 CHAPTER 5 - Struclural Steel
SECTION 557 S ince the occurrence of full design wind or earthquake

loads is too infreq ue nt to warrant consideration in fatigue
DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL design, the evaluation of fatigue resistance shall not be
STRUCTURAL MEIVIBERS AND required for wind load applications in bui ldings. If the live
load stress range is less than the threshold stress rnnge,
CONNECTIONS FOR CYCLIC FrH , given in Table 557.1, eva luation o f fatigue s trength
LOADING (FATIGUE) shall also not be required.
This design procedure s hall a pply to cold-formed steel

slructural members and connections subject to c yclic
loading within the elastic range of stresses of frequency and
magnitude sufficient t o initiate cracking and progressive
fa ilure (fatigue).
557.l General
When cyclic loading is a design consideration, the

provisio ns of this chapter shall apply to stresses calculated
on the bas is of unfactored loads. The maximum permitted
tensile stress due to unfactored loads shall be 0. 66 F y·
Stress ran ge shall be delined as the magnitude of the change

in stress due to the application or removal of the unfactored
Jive load. In the case of a stress n:versal, the stress range
shall be compute<l as the sum of the absolute values of
maximum repeated tensile and compressive stresses or the
sum of the absolute values of maximum shearing stresses of
opposite direction at the point of probable crack initiation.
Table 557- 1 Fatigue Design parameters for Cold-Fonncd Steel Structures
Threshold
Stress Reference
Description Constant Cr FrH
Category Figure
(M a)
As-received base metal and components with
as-rolled surfaces, including sheard edges and 172 557-1
cold fonned corners
As-received base metal and weld metal in
members connected by continuous longitudinal II l.Oxl 0 10 103 557-2
welds
Welded attachments to a plato or a beam,
transverse fillet welds, and continuous
557 ..l-3
longitudinal fillet welds less than or equal to llT 3.2xl09 110
557.1 -4
50mm, bolt and screw connections and spot
welds
Longitudinal fillet weldsed attachments greater
than 50mm parallel to the direction of the
JV l.Oxl 09 62 557. 1-4
applied stress, and inlermittent welds parallel to
the direction of the a lied force.

Cold-Formed Comer
Weld
/
Welded I Beam, Stress Category II
., 557-1 Typical Detail for Stress Category I
fioure
Figure 557-2 Typical Detail for Stress Category
---....- ------
{a) TranMl'llt Welds,~ Ill (b) l.oni1tudlna1 Welds

ro, Cetel>rY m,LS 2In. (50.8 mm)
ro, CeteeorY w, 2 ,n. (50.8 mm)< Ls 4 In. (102 mm)
Figure 557-3 Typical Attachments for Stress Calcgorics III and IV
National Structural Code of the Phi.1.ippines

. Volume 1• 7th Edition, 2015
Evaluation of fatigue strength shall not be required if the For ttXin lly lomlcd angle members, where the center of
number of cycles of application of live load is less than gravity of lhe conncct111g welds lies bel\,ccn the line of the
20,000. center of gravity of 1hc angle cross-section and the center of
the connected leg, the ctlccts or eccentricity shal l he
The fatigue strength determined by the provisions of this ignored. If the center of gravity orthc connecting wcl<ls lies
chapter shalt be applicable to structures with corrosion outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to
protection or subject only to non-aggressive atmospheres. j oint eccentricity, shall be included in the calculation of
stress range.
The fatigue strength detennined by the provisions of this
chapter shall be applicable only to stmctures subject to 557.3 Oesign Stress Range
temperatures not exceeding 300°F (149°C).
The range o f stress at service loads [specified) shall not
The contract documents shall either provide complete exceed the design stress range computed using Eq. 557-1
details including weld sizes, or specify the planned cycle for all stress categories as follows:
life and the maximum range of moments, shear, and
reactions for the connections.
FsR = ( ac1 /N ) 0.333 ~ Frn (557.3-1)
where
•• 0 0 FsR
a
Design stress range
Coefficient for conversion or units
• • 0 0 329 for SI units
. ...
Constant from Table 557- 1
............. Number of stress range fluctuations in design life

Number o f stress range fluctuations per day x 365
x years of design li fe
Threshold fatigue stress range, maximwn stress
Figure 557-4 Typical Attachments for Stress Category JII
range for indefin ite design life from Table 557-1
557.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and StresN
557.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts
Ranges
For mechanically fastened-connections loaded in s~ear, the
Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis.
maximum range of stress in connected material at service
Stresses shall not be amplified by stress concentration
loads shall not exceed the design stress range computed
factors for geometrical discontinuiiies.
using Eq. 557.3-1. The factor Cf shall be taken as 22 x 108.
For bolts and threaded rods s ubject to axial tension, the The threshold stress, F 7 n, shall be taken as 48 MPa.
calculated stresses shall include the effecti; of prying action,
if applicable. In the case of axial stress combined with For not-fully-tightened high-strength bolts, and threaded
bending, the maximum stresses of each kind shall be those anchor rods with cul, ground, or rolled threads, the
detennined for concurrent arrangements of applied load. maximum range of tensile stress on the net tensile area from
applied axial load and moment plus load due to prying
For members having symmetric cross-sections, the fasteners action shall not exceed the design stress range computed
and weld shall be arranged symmetrically about the axis of using Eq. 557 .3-1. The factor CI shall be taken as
the member, or the total stresses including those due to 3.9 x J0 8. The threshold stress, FTH, shall be taken as
eccentricity shall be included in the calculation of the stress 48 MPa. The net tensile rirea shall be calculated by Eqs.
range. 557.4-1.
At = (n/4)[db - (O. 9382p)] 2 for SI units

(557 .4-1 )
where
At == Net tensile area
db Nominal diameter (body or shrank diameter)
\
p Pitch (mm per thread for SI units)

SECTION C-1
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS USING
Backing bars in welded connections that are parallel to the THE DIRECT STRENGTH METHOD
stress field shall be permitted to remain in place, and if
used, shall be continuous.
C-1 Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members Using the Direct Strength Method
Backing bars that are perpendicular to the stress field; if
used, shall be removed and the joint back gouged and
C-1.1 General Provisions
welded.
C-1.1.1 Applicability
Flame cut edges subject to cyclic stress ranges shall have a
surface roughness not 10 exceed 25 µm in accordance with
The provisions of this Section shall be permitted to be used
ASME 846.1.
to determine the nominal axial (Pn) and flexural (M11 )
strcncrths
b of cold-fonned steel members. Sections C.1.2. l
Re-entrant corners at cuts, copes, and weld access holes
and C.l.2.2 present a method applicable to all cold-fonncd
shall form a radius of not less than IO mm by predrilling or
steel columns and beams. Those members meeting the
subpunching and reaming a hole, or by thermal cutting to
geometric and material limitations of Section C.1.1. I. I for
form the radius of the cut. [f the radius portion is fonned is
columns and Section C.1.1. l .2 for beams have been
formed by thermal cutting, the cut surface shall be ground
prequalified for use, and the calibrated satety factor, Q, and
to a bright metal contour to provide a radiused transition,
resistance factor, <f,, given in C. l.2.1 and C.1.2.2 shall be
free of notches, with a surface roughness not to exceed not
permitted to apply. The use of the provisions of Section
to exceed 25 µm in accordance with ASME 846. l or
C.1.2.1 and C.1.2.2 for other columns and beams shall be
another equivalent approved standards.
pennitte<l, hut the standard fi and <f, factors for ration~!
enoineering analysis (Section Al .2 (b) of the main
For transverse butt joints in regions of high tensile stress,
Sp:cification) apply. The main American Specification for
run-off tabs shall be used to provide for cascading the weld
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
termination outside the finished joint. End dams shall not
be used. Run-off tabs shall be removed and the end of the
Currently, the Direct Strength Method provide~ no expl!cit
weld finished flush with the edge of the member.
provisions for members in tension, shear, combmed bendmg
Exception and shear, web cr[ppling, combined bending and web
crippling, or combined axial load and bending (beam-
Run-of/tabs shall not be required for sheet material if the
columns). Further, no provisions are given f'.n structur~I
welding procedures used result in smooth, flush edges.
assemblies or connections and joints. As detailed m mam
Specification, Section 551.1.2, the provisions or the main
Specification, when applicable, shall be used for all cases
listed above.
It shall be permitted lo substitute the nominal strength,

resistance factors, and safety factors from this Appendix for
the corresponding values in Sections 553.3.1, 553.4.1.1,
553.4.1.2, 553.4. l.3, 553.4. 1.4, 554.6.1.1, and 554.6. I.2 of
the main Specification.
For members of situations to which the main Specification

is not applicable, the Direct Strength Method of this
Appendix shall be penniued to be used, as applicable. The
usage of the engineering analysis procedure, as detailed in
Section 5511.2 (b) of the main Specification:
"'
I. Applicable provisions of the main Specification shall C.1.2 Members

be followed when they exist, and
C.1.2.l Column Design
2. Increased safety factors, fl, and reduced resistance
factors, <J,, shall be employed for strength when The nominal axial strength Lresistance], P n, shall be the
rational engineering analysis is conducted. minimum of Pne, P nl!• and P nd as given in Sections
C. l.2.1.l to C. 1.2.1.3. for columns meeting the geometric.
C.l.1.1.1 Pre-qualified Columns and material criteria of Section C.1.1.1 a, fie and 'Pc shall
be as follows:
Unperforated columns that fall within the geometric and
material limitations given in Table C-1 shall be pcnnittcd to flc = 1. 80(ASD) </>c = 0. 85(LRFD)
be designed using the safety factor, fl, and resistance factor,
cp, defined in Section C.1.2. I. For all other columns, n and <P of the muin Specification,
Section 551. I .2(b), shall apply. The available strength shall
C.1.I.1.2 Pre-qualified Beams be determined in accordance wilh applicable method m
Section 551.4. or 55 1.5 or thl! main Spl!cifkation.
Unperforated beams that fall within the geometric and
material limitations given in Table C-2 shall be pcnnitted to C.1.2.1.1 Flexural, Torsional, or Flexural-Torsional
be designed using the safety factor, il, and resistance factor, Buckling
</>, defined in Section C.1.2.2.
The nominal axial strength, P ne, for flexural, torsional, or
C.1.J.2 Elastic Buckling flcxural-lorsional buckling shall be calculated in accordance
with the following:
Analysis shall be used !or the determination of the elastic
buckling loads and/or moments used in this Appendix. For a. Fur Ac $ 1. 5
columns, this includes the local, distortional, and overall
buck Ii ng loads (Pere, P crd, and Pere of Section C. 1.2.1 ). Pne == ( 0. 658.:t~) Py (C.1-2)
For beams. this includes lhe local, distortional, and overall
buckling moments (M crt, M c,·d, and M ere of SccLion b. For Ac $ 1 . 5
C. 1.2.2). In some cases, for a given column or beam, all
three modes do not exist. In such cases, the non-existent 0.877)
mode shall be ignored in 1he calculations of Seclions Pne = ( ~ Py (C.1-3)
C. 1.2. I and C. I .2.2. The commentary to this Appendix
provides guidance on appropriate analysis procedures for where
elastic buckling determinaLion.
(C. l-4)
C.1.1.3 Serviceability Dete rmination
The bending deflection at any moment, M , due to nominal where

loads shall be permitted to be detennined by reducing the
gross moment of inertia, I g• to an effective moment or (C.1-5)
inertia for deflection, as given in Eq. C. 1- l: Minimum of the critical elastic column buckl ing
P ere
load in flexural, torsional, or flexural-torsional
(C.l-1) buckling dclermined by analysis in accordance
where with Section C.1.1.2
Md a: Nominal flexural strength, Mn, de tined in Section

C.1.2.2, but with My replaced by M in all
equations of Section C. l .2.2
M Moment due to nominal loads on member to be
considered (M $ My)

C.1.1.l.2 Local Buckling C.1.2.2 Beam Design
The nominal axial strength, P111, for local buckling shall be The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the minimum
calculated in accordance with the following: of Mne, M11e, and Mnd as given in Sections C.1.2.2.1 tu
C.1.2.2.3. For beams meeting the geometric and material
l. For .il.1 s; 0. 776 criteria of Section C.1.1.1.2, !l.h and <l>b shall be as follows:
Pnt = Pne (C.1-6) D.b = 1. 67(ASD) <l>b = 0. 90(LRFD)

2. For it> 0. 776 For all other beams, D. and </> of the main Specification,
Section 551.1.2.(b), shall apply. The available strength
Pnt = r1- 0.15 (:::J o.

4
]
4
(:~:)°· Pne (C.1-7)
[factored resistance] shall be detennined in accordance with
applicable method in Section 551.4, or 551.5 of the main
Specification.
where
C.1.2.2.1 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
(C.1-8)
The nominal flexural strength, Mne, for lateral-torsional
buckling shall be calculated in accordance with the
P ne - A value as defined in Section C.1.2.1.1 following:
P crl Critical elastic local column buckling load
determined by analysis in accordance with I. For Mere< 0. 56My
Section C.1.1.2
Mne = M,Te (C.1-12)
C. t .2.1 c Distortional Buckling
2. For 2. 78My 2:: Mere 2:: 0. 56My
The nominal axial strength, Pnd, for distortional buckling
shall be calculated in accordance with the following:
(C.1-13)
I. For ild $ 0. 561
(C.1-9) 3. For Mere> 2. 7_8My
2. For ..ld > 0. 561 (C. l-14)
Pnd = [1- 0.25 ( p;:d)0.6] (p;:d)0.6 Py

where
(C.1-10)
Mere = Critical elastic lateral-torsional buckling
moment determined by analysis in accordance
where
with Section C. l.1.2
= SfFy (C.1-15)
(C.l-11)
where
where
pY = A value as given in Eq. C. 1-5
s, = Gross section modulus referenced to the
extreme fiber in first yield
P crd = Critical elastic distortional column buckling load
determined by analysis in accordance with
Section C.1.1.2

C.J.2.2.2 Local Buckling C.J.2.2.3 Distortional Buckling
The nominal 11exural strength, Mni , for local buckling shall The nominal 11exural strength, Mnd, for dis tortional
be calculated in accordance with the following: buckling shall be calculated in accordance with the
following:
1. For le :$ 0. 776
I. For ld :$ 0. 673
(C.1-16)
(C. l-19)
2. Fod., > 0. 776 2. For Ad > 0. 673
=(1- 0. 22 (M )o.s) (M
M o.4) (M 0.4
(
Mnt = 1- 0.15 (Mne
cr·f
) Mne) Mne cr-e
(C. 1- 17)
Mnd :r:d ;,:d)o.s My
(C.1 -20)
where
where
11 .JMne/Mcrt (C.1-18) (C.l-21)
ld
A value as defined in Section .JM,,/Mcrd
C. 1.2.2.1
Critical elastie local buckling moment
My A value as given in Eq. C. 1.2.2-4
M crt determined by analysis in accordance w ith Mcrd = Critical elastic distortional buckling moment
Section C. 1.1.2 detcnnined by analysis in accordance with
Section C.1.1 .2

Table C-1
Limits fol' Pl't- uaUOed Columns•
Lipped C'-Sections For all C-stctions
Simple Lips: h.ft < 472
b0 /t <. 159
4 < Dlt < 33
T ho
0.7< 14/b.,<5.0
0.05 < Dlb. < 0.41
0-90'
1 E/Fy > 340[F,, < 86 ksl (593 MPa 01· 6050 kg/cm 2 )]
For C-secrions with complete lips:
D2 /t < 34
Complex Lips: D2 /D < 2
D3 /t < 34
I• bo • I D3 /D2 < 1
~ ~ ~d']D Note:
a) 82 is pennined ro very (D2 lip is penuitted to angle inward.
outward. etc.)
f r'e>,~ b) 82 I spcrmined ro vary {D3 lip is J)fflllitted to angle up.
down.etc.)
Lipped C-Scctions with Web Stiffener (s) For one or two intermediate stiffeners:
h.ft < 489
b.ft < 160
Tho
6 <·D/t < 33
1.3 < h.fb. < 2.7
0.05 < D/b. < 0.41
1 E/F.y > 340[F,, < 86 bi (593 MPa or 6050 kg/cm2 )]
Z-Scction h.ft < 137

b.ft < 56
0 < D/t < 36
1.5 < h./b. < 2.7
0.00 < D/b. < 0.73
o- so·
E/Fy > 590(Fy < 50 ksi (345 MPa or 3520 kg/cm 2 )]
Rack Upright
See C-Secrion wifh Complex Lips
-j
T D
""
J_
Hat h.ft < 50
b.ft < 43
4 < D/t < 6
1.0 < h.fb. < 1.2
D/b. - 0.13
E/Fy > 428[fy < 69 ksi (476MPa or 4850 kg/cm 2 )J
Note: •r/t < 10, whc::re r is the cmtcrline bend radius

b0 =overall width: D =overall lip depth; t =base metal thickness; ~= overall depth
""
TableC-2
Limits ror Pl't--Quallned Beams•
C·Sections For alI C-s«tions -
Simple Lips: hJt < 321
b0 It< 15
l+bo..
T~cro O<D/t<34
1.S < h.,/b0 < 17.0
0 < D I b. < 0. 70
44' < 9 < 90·
ho E/Fy > 421[.F;, < 70 ksi (483 MPa or 4920 kg/cm 2 )]
lL_J{n For C-Sections with complex tip§:

Dzft < 34
Dz/D<l
Complex lips:
D3 /t < 34
1.. be, .. 1 D3 /D 2 < 1
t~
t \..
JT}
0t .. 1
Note:
a) 92 is permitted to very (D2 lip is pcnu.itted to angle inward or
outward
b) 62 is permitted to vary (D3 lip is pcnnittcd to angle up or down).
Lipped C·Sections with Web Stiffener h./t < 358

b.l t < 58
l+b....
T~lTo 14<.D/t< 17
S.5 < 11. I b0 < 11.7
0.27 <DI b. < 0.56
8 < 90•
ho E/F,, > 578[.f,, < 51 ksi (352 MPa or 3590 kg/cm 2 )]
lL.JjD
t
Z-Scctions For all Z-sc:ctions
h.ft < 183
Simple Lips: b(J t < 71
lO<D/t< 16
2.5 < holb.<4.1
0.15<0/bo<0.34
36. < 8 < 90"
E/F,, > 440[F,, < 67 ksi (462 MPa cn-4710 kg/crn 2)]
For Z-Scclions with complex lips:
D:dt < 34
D2 /D < 2
Complex lips: D-,/t < 34
D3/D2 < 1
,.. be,
Note:
J. a) 62 is pcnuitted to very (D2 lip is permitted to angle inward or outward
~ b) 92 is permitted to vary (D3 lip is permitted to angle up. down. etc.)
t
ca
I.Jmltatloas for Pt'f roallfltd BtamS Cont1nned

Hat (Decks) with Stift'ened f1anite in
COJD.Pl'Ssion . h.ft < 97
b0 /t<467
0 < ds/ t < 26 ( d, =Depth of stitrcner)
0.14 < h.lb.<0.87
0.88 < bo/ bi< S.4
0 < n s 4 (n ""Number of compression flange sttffengrs)
E/F,, > +40[Fy < 67 ksi (462MPa or-4110 kg/cm 2)j
Trapezoids (Decks} with Stiffened Flange in

Compzession h./t < 203
b./t < 231
0.42 < h.f sin 9 /b. < 1.91
1.10< b..lb.< 3.38
0 < n.: S 2 (ne;::, Numbtrr of compression flangestiffffll1T's)
0 < nw s 2 (nw = Numb.r of w•b ttlf{trttflt'I and /or folda)
0 < 1lt S 2 (ni = Number of tenstun flanse stiffeners)
< 1lt S 2 (11t = Number of tension flange stifferu,rs)
s2· < e < 8•f{9 =Angle between web and horizontal plane)
E/Fy > 310(Fy < 9Shi (6SSMPa or6680kg/cm2)}
No1e: •r/f < I0. where r is tlte cenrerline bend radius.

Sec Section C.1.1.1 for definitions ofother variables given in Table C·l and Table C.2.

5-31 8 CHAPTER 5 - Slluc;tur<1I Steel
SECTIONC-2 where
SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS l.OforaPr/Py ~ 0.5
This Section C.2 addrc~ses second-order analysis for 4[aP1'/Py(1 - aPri P y)l for
structural systems comprised of moment frames, braced «Pr/Py > 0. 5
frames, shcur wulls, or combinations thereof. Pr Required axial compressive strength [factored axial
compressive force I, (N)
C.2.1 General Requirements Member yield strength ( = AFy , where A is the f'ul I
unreduced cross-sectional area). (N)
Members shall satisfy the provisions of Section 55 3.5 with a 1.6 (ASU
the nominal column strengths (nominal axial rcsistaoce], 1.0 (LRl;D)
=
P n, determined using K x and Ky 1. 0 , as well as
=
ax= 1. 0, ay 1. 0, Crnx = 1. 0, and Cmy = 1. 0. In cases where flcx ibilily or other structural components
The required strengths [factored forces <111d moments] for such as connections, flexible column base details, or
members, connections, an<.I other structural elements slrnl\ horizontul trusses acling as diaphragms is modeled
be determined using a second-<>rder analysis as specified in explicitly in the analysis, the stiffnesses or the otl\er
this Section. All component and connection deformations structural components shall be reduced by a factor of0.8.
that contribute to the lateral displacement of the structure;
shall be considered in the analysis. If notional loads are used, in lieu of using Tb < 1. 0 where
aP r/ Py > 0. 5, -rb = 1. 0 shall be permitted to be used
C.2.2 Design and Analysis Constraints for all members, provided that an additional notional load of
0.00 I Yi is added lo the no[i(',nal load required in Section
C.2.2.1 General C.2.2.4.
The second-order analysis shall consider both the effect of C.2.2.4 Notional loads
loads acting on the deflecLed shape of a member beLwecn
joi nts or nodes (P - li effects) and the e11ect of loads Notional loa<.ls shall be applied to the lateral framing system
acting on the displaced location of joints or nodes in a to account for the effects of geometric imperrections.
structure (P - ~ effects). It shall be permitted to Notional loads arc lateral loads that arc applied al ea<.:h
perform the analysis using any general second-order framing level and specified in terms of the gravity loads
analysis mclhod. Analyses shall he conducted according to applied al that level. The gravity load used to determine the
the design and loading requirements specified in Sc.:tion notional load shall he-equal to or greater thun the gravity
55 1. For the ASD, the second-order analysis shall be carricd load associated with the load combination being evaluated.
out under 1.6 times the ASD load combinations and the Notional loads shall be applied in the direction that adds to
results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required the destabilizing effects under the specified load
strengths at allowable toad levels. combination.
C.2.2.2 Types of Analysis =

A notional loud, Nt (1/240) Yt , shall he applied
independently in two orthogonal directions as a lateral load
Jt shall be permissible to carry out the second-order analysis in all load combinations. This load shall be in addition to
either on the out-of-plumb geometry without notional londs other lateral loads. if any.
or on Lhe plumb geometry by applying notional loads or
minimum lateral loads as defined in Section C.2.2.4. Notional lateral load applied at level !, kips (N)
Gravity load from the LRFU load combination or
For second-order elastic analysis, axial and flexural stiflhess 1.6 times the ASD load combination applied at level
shall be reduced as specified in Section C.2.2.3. 1, N
C.2.2.3 Reduced Axial and Flexural Stiffnesses The notional load coefficient of 1/240 is based on an
assumed initial story out-of-plumbness r'dtio of 1/240.
Flexural and axial stiffness shall be reduced hy using E* in Where a difTerenl assumed out-of-plumbness is justified, the
notional load <.:oellicicnl shall be permitted to he adjusled
place of E as fo llows for all members whose llexural and
proportionally to a value 1101 less than 1/500.
axial stiffnesses are considered lo contribute lo the lateral
stability of the structure:
(C.2-1)

SECTION C3
C.3.2.1 Ductility
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
111 seismic design category D, E or F (as defined by
This Section provides design provisions or supplements lo ASCE/SEI 7), when material ductility is cle1..ermincd on the
Seclion 551 through 557. basis of the local and uniform elongation cri1..eria of Section
C.1.3. I, crn1ain wall studs shall be limited to the dead load
C.3.1 Scope of the curtain wall assembly divided by its snrface area, hut
2
no greater than 0.75kN/m .
Designs shall be made in accordance with the provisions for
Load and Resistance Factor Design, or with the provisions C.3.3 I .oads
for Allowable Strength Design.
C.3.3.t Nominal Loads
C.3.2 Other Steels
The nominal loads shall be as stipulated by the applicable
The listing in Section C.3. I shall not exclude the use or building code under which lhc structure is designed or as
steel up to and including 25 mm in thickness, ordered or dictated hy the conditions involved. In the absence of a
produced to other than the listed specifications, provided the building code, the nominal loads shall be those stipulated in
following requirements are met: the /\SCE/SEJ 7.
I. The steel shall conform to the chemical and mechanical C.3.3.1.1 Load Combinations for ASI>
requirements or one or the listed specifications or other
published specification. The structure and its components shall be designed so that
the allowable strengths equal or exceed the effects of the
2. The chemical and mechanical prope1ties shall be nominal loads and load comhinations as stipulated by the
determined by the producer, the supplier, or the applicable building code under which the structure is
purchaser, in accordance with the following designed or, in the absence of an applicable building code,
specifications. For rnalcd sheets, ASTM A924/ as stipulated in the ASCE/SEI 7.
A924M; for hot-rolled or cold-rolled sheet and strip,
ASTM A.568/ A568M; for plate and har, ASTM A6/ C.3.3.1.2 Load Facton and Load Combinations for
A6M; for hollow structural sections, such tests shall be LRFD
made in accordam;c with the requirements of A500 (for
carbon steel) or A847 (for HSLA steel). The structure and iJ,s components shall be designed so that
design strengths equal or exceed the effects of the factored
3. The coating properties of coated sheet shall be loads and load combinations stipulated by the applicable
determined by the producer, the supplier, or the building code under which the slructun.: is designed or, in
purchaser, in accordance with ASTM A924/ A924M. the absence of an applicable building code, as stipulated in
the ASCE/SEI 7.
4. The steel shall meet the requirements of Section C.3.3.
C.3.4 Referenced Documents
5. If the steel is to be welded, its suitability for the
intended welding process shall he estahlished by the The following documents arc referenced in Section C-3 :
producer, the supplier, or the purchaser in accordance
with A WS D 1.1 or D 1.3 as applicable. I. American Institute or Steel Construction (AlSC), One
East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, Illinois 60601-
If the identification and documentation of the production of 1802: ANSI/ AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural
the steel have not been established, then in addition to Stc.:cl Buildings
requirements (I) through (5), the manufacturer of the cold-
formed steel product shall establish that the yield stress and 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), 1140
tensile stn.:ngth or the master coil are at least IO percent Connecticut Avenue, NW, Washington, OC 20036:
greater than specified in the referenced published
speci lication. AISI S2 I 3-07, North American Standard for Cold-
Formed Steel Framing · · Lateral Design AISI S908-04,
Base Test Method for Pllrlins Supporting a standing
Seam Roof System

3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 180 I C.3.6 Light-l<'rame Steel Construction
Alexander Bell Drive, Rcston VA, 20191: ASCE/SEI
7-05, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other In addition to the cold-formed steel framing standards listed
Structures in Section 554.4, the following standard shall be fo!!owect,
as applicable:
4. American Welding Society (A WS), 550 N. W. LeJcunc
Road, Miami, Florida 33135:AWS Dl.3-98, Structural I. Light-framed shcnr walls. diagonal strap hracing (that
Welding Code-Sheet Steel AWS Cl.I/Cl. I M-2000, is part of a structurnl wall) nnd diaphragms to resist
Rccommended Practices for Resistance Welding wind, seismic and other in-plane lateral loads shall be
designed in accordance with AlSI S2 l 3.
C.3.5 Tension Members
C.3.6.1 .Flexural Members Having One Flange
For axially loaded tension members, the nominal tensile Fastened to a Standing Seam Roof System
strength, T n, shall be the smallest value obtained in
accordance with the limit stales of (a), (b) and (c). Unless The available flexural strength of a C- or Z-section, loaded
otherwise specified, the corresponding safety factor and the in a plane parnllcl to the web with the top llange supporting
resistance;. factor provided in this section shall be used to a standing seam roof system shall be delennined using
determine the available strengths in accordance with the discrete point bracing and the provisions of Section
applicable method in Section 551.4 or 551.5. 553.3.l.2.J, or shall be calculated in accordance with this
section. The safety factor and the resistance factor provided
1. For yielding in gross section in this section shall be applied to the nominal strength, Mn ,
calculated hy Eq. 554.6.1.2-1 to determine the available
strengths in accordance with the applicable method in
(C.3-1 ) · Section 551.4 or 551.5.
fit = 1. 67(ASD) </> = 0. 90(LRFD) (C.3-3)
where
ilb = 1. 67(ASD) <l>b = 0. 90(LRFD)
Nominal strength of member when loaded in
where
tension
Gross area of cross section
R Reduction factor determined in accordance with AfSl
Design yield stress as determined m accordance S908
with Section 5 51.7. I
Sec Section 553.3.1. 1 for definitions of Se and Fy ·
2. For mpture in net section away from connection
C.3.6.2 Compression of Z-Section Members Having
(C.3-2) One l<'langc Fastened to a Standing Seam
Roof
ilt = 2. 00 (ASD) cf>t = 0. 75 (LRFD)
These provisions shall apply to Z-scctions concentrically
where loaded along their longitudinal axis, with on ly one llangc
attached to standing scam roof panels. Alternatively, desig n
An Net area of cross section values for a particular system shall be permilled Lo be based
Fu Tensile strength as specified in either Section on discrete point bracing locations, or on tests in accordance
55 1.2.l or 551.2.3 .2 with Section 556.
3. For rupture in net section at connection The nominal axial strength of simp le span or continuous Z-
sections shall he calculated in accordance with (a) and (b).
The available tensile strength shall also be limited by Unless otherwise specified, the safety factor and tbc
Sections 555.2.7, 555.3, and 555.5 for tension members resistance factor provided in this section shall be used to
using welded connections, bolted connections, and screw detcnnine the available strengths in accordance with the
connections. applicable method in Section 551.4 or 55 1.5.
-
I. For weak axis available strength C.3.6.3 Strength of Standing Seam Roof Panel Systems
(C.3-4) In addition to the provisions provided in Section 554.6.2.1,

for load combinations that include wind uplit1, lhc nominal
wind load shall be penniued to be multiplied hy 0.67
fl = 1. 80 (ASD) q, = 0. 85 (LRFD) provided the tested system and wind load cvalualion
where salisfies the following condilions:
I. The roof syslem is tested in accordance with A[Sl
a. For d/t ~ 90 S906.
kar = 0.36 2. The wind load is ealculaled using ASCE/SET 7 for

componenls and cladding, Method 1 (Simplified
Procedure) or Method 2 (Analytical Procedure).
b. For 90 < d/t ~ 130
3. The area of the roof being evaluated is in Zone 2 (edge
d zone) or Zone 3 (corner zone), as defined in ASCE/SEI
kaf = 0. 72 - 250t (C.3-5)
7, i.e. the 0.67 factor does nol apply to the field of the
roof (Zone I).
c. for d/t ~ 130
4. The base melal lhickness of lhe standing scam roof
ka/ = 0. 20 panel is greater than or equal to 0.60 mm and less than
or equal lo 0.80 mm.
R Reduction factor detennined from uplift tests 5. For trapezoidal profile slanding seam roof panels, lhe
performed using A[SJ S908 distance between sidclaps is no greater than 600 mm.
A Full unreduced cross-sectional area of Z-section
d ~ Z-section depth 6. For verlical rib pm file slanding scam roof panels, the
t . . : Z-section thickness distance hetween sidelaps is no greater than 450 mm.
7. The observed failure mode of the tested system is one
Sec Section 553.3.1.1 for definition of F y- of the following:
(i) The standing seam roof clip mechanically fails hy
Eq. 554.6.1-4-1 shall be limited to roof systems meeting the
separating from the panel sidclap
(ii) The standing seam roof clip mechanically fails hy
a. Purlin lhickncss, 1. 37 mm ~ t ~ 3. 22 mm the sliding·lab separaling from lhe slalionary base.
b. 150 mm ~ d ~ 300 nun
C.3.7 Welded Connections
c. flanges are edge stiffened compression elements
Welded connections in which the thickness of the thinnest
d. 70 :5 d/t :5 170
connected part is greater than 5 mm shall be in accordance
e. 2. 8 :5 d/ b < 5, where b = Z section flange width. with ANSI/AISC-360.
f. 16 < flu11geflflt willth < SO

- t Except as modified herein, arc welds on steel where al least
one of the connected parts is 5 mm or less in thickness shall
g. Both flanges are prevented from moving laterally at the be made in accordance with AWS Dl.3. Welders and
supports welding procedures shall e qualified as specified in A WS
01.3. These provisions are intended lo cover the welding
h. Yield stress, Fy :5 483 MPa
positions as listed in Table C.3.1.
2. The available strength aboul lhe strong axis shall he
Rcsislance welds shall be made in confonnanee with the
determined in accordance with Section 553.4.1 and
procedures given in AWS Cl.l or AWS Cl.3.
553.4.1.1.
"'
Table C.3-1 Welding Position Covered Table C. 3-2 Maximiz.e Size of Bolt Holes , millimeters
Wcl<lim Position Nominal Standard Ovt rsi7.td Short Long

Square fillcl I lore Bolt Hole l!olc Slotted S lotted
Arc Arc FIHrc
Groove
Scam
Wt:ld,
Bevel
v Diameter, Diameter l)i11mctt r, Hole Hole
Connection Spot
Butt Lap Groo ve d dh dh Dimensions Oimensions
Weld Weld Grnove
Weld or T Weld mm 11U1l mm mm mm
F . I' I' F F
Sheet 10 II . H H H H < 12. 7 d+ 0 . 8 d +1.6 (d + 0.8) (d+ 0 .8)
sheet v . . v v v by by
OH . Oil OJI OH (d + 6.4)
. (21/ 2 d )
F F 1' F
Sheet 10 . - . ll H . ~ 12. 7 d +1.6 d + 3.2 (d + t. 6) (d + 1. 6)
Supporting . . . v v . by by
Member . . . .
OH OH
(d+ 6.4) ( 21/ 2d)
(F = flat, H = horizontal, V =vertical, Oil =over heud)
C.3.8 Bolted Connections C.3.8.J Shear, Spacing and Edge Distance
In addition to the design criteria given in Section C3.8 of The nominal shear strength, P n, of the connected part as
this Specification, the following design requirements shall affected by spacing and edg1! distance in the direction of
also he followed for bolted connections used for cold- applied force shall be calculated in accordance with
formed steel structural members in which the thickness of Eq.C3-6. The corresponding safety factor and the resistance
the thinnest connected part is less than 4.76 mm. Ooltcd factor provided in this section shall be used to determine the
connections in which the thickness of the thinnest connected available strength in accordance with the applicable method
part is equal to or greater than 4. 76 mm shall be in in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
accordance with ANSI /AISC-360.
The holes for bolts shall not exceed the sizes specified in
Table C.3-2, except that larger holes are permitted lo be a. When Fuf Fsy ~ 1. 08
used in column base details or structural systems connected
to concrete walls.
!l = 2. 00 (ASD) <J, = 0. 70 (LRFD)
Standard holes shall he used in bolted connections, except
that oversized and slotted holes shall be permitted to be b. When F uf F sy ,1. 08
used as approved by the designer. The length of slotted
holes shall be normal to the direction of the shear load.
Washers or backup plates shall be installed over oversized
!l =2. 22 (ASD) </> = 0. 60 (LRFD)
or slotted boles in an outer ply unless suitable performance where

is demonstrated by tests in accordance with Section 556. fn
the situation where the holes occurs within the lap oflapped Nominal strength per bolt
and nested ~ee members, the above requirements regarding
= Distance measured in line of force from center of a
the direction of the slot and the use of washers shall be
standard hole to nearest edge of a adjacent hole or
permitted not to apply, suhject to the following limits:
to end of connected part
Thickness of thinnest connected part
l. 12.7 mm diameter bolts only,
"" Tensile strength or connected part as specified in
Section 551 .2. 1,55 I .2.2 or 55 1.2.3
2. Maximum slot size is 14.3 mm x 22.2 mm slotted
= Yield stress of connected part as specified in
vertically,
Section 55 1.2. 1,55 1.2.2 or 55 1.2.3
3. Maximum oversize hole is 16 mm diameter,
fn addition, the minimum distance between centers of boll
holes shall provide sufficient clearance for bolt hends, nuts,
4. Minimum member thickness is 1.52 mm nominal,
washers and the wrench but shall not be less lhan 3 times
Lhe nominal bolt diameter, d. also, the distance from the
5. Maximum member yield stress 4 10 MPa,
center of any standnrd hole to the end or other boundary of
6. Minimum lap length measured from center of frame to the connecting member shall not be less than 1 11..t d .
end oflap is l.S times the member depth.
-
For oversized and slotted holes, the distance between edges for multiple bolls in the line parnllcl to the force
of two adjacent holes and the distance measured from the
edge of the hole to the end or other boundary of the Ft= Fu (C.3-11)
connecting mcmher in the line of stress shall not be less
than the value of e - (dh/2), in which e is the required fl= 2. 22 (ASD) <J, = 0. 65 (LRFD)
distance used in Eq. C.3-6, and dh is the diameter of a
standard hole defined in Table C.3-2. In no case shall the where
clear distance between edges of two adjacent holes be less
than 2d and the distance between the edge of the hole and Net Arca of conncclcd part
the end of the member be less than d. Nominal Tensile stress in flat sheet
Nominal bolt diameter
C.3.8.2 Rupture in Net Section (Shear Lag)
s Sheet width divided by number of'boll holes in
cross section being analyzed (when evaluating
The nominal tensile strength of a bolted member shall be
Ft)
determined in accordance with Section 553. For rupture in
the effective net section of the connected part, the nominal
Fu = Tensile strength of connected part as specified
in Section 551.2.1, 551.2.2 or 551.2.3
tensile strength, P n shall be determined in accordance with
this section. Unless otherwise specified, the corresponding b. For llal sheet connections having staggered hole
safety factor and the resistance factor provided in this patterns
section shall be used to detenninc the available strengths in
accordance with the applicable method in Section 551.4 or
551.5.
fl= 2. 22 (ASD) </> = 0. 65 (LRFD)
a. For flat sheet connections not having staggered hole .
patterns where
(C.3-7) Determined in accordance with Eqs. E3.2-2

to E3.2-5.
l. When washers arc provided under hoth the bolt head 0. 90[Ag - nbdht + (ts' 2 /4g)t]
and the nut
(C.3-13)
For single bolt, or a single row of bolts perpendicular to Gross area of member
the force · Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of any
two consecutive holes
Ft= (0.1 + 3d/s)Fu ~ Fu (C.3-8)
Transverse center-to-center spacing between
g s:
fastener gauge lines
For multiple bolts in the line parallel to the force
Number of bolt holes in the cross section
being analyzed
Ft= Fu (C.3-9) Diameter of a standard hole
For double shear:
Sec Section C.3.8.1 for the definition oft.
fl = 2. 00 (ASD) <J, = 0. 65 (LRFD)
(c) For other lhan flat sheet
For single shear:
(C.3-14)
fl = 2. 22 (ASD) <J, = 0. 55 (LRFD)
fl = 2. 22 (ASD) </> = 0. 65 (LRFD)
2. When either washers are not provided under the holt
head and the nut, or only one washer is provided under
where
either the bolt head or the nut
AnU, effective net area with U defined as
For single bolt, or a single row of bolts perpendicular to follows:
the force u 1.0 for members when the load is transmitted
directly to all of the cross-sectional elements.
Ft= (2.S + d/s)Fu ~ Fu (C.3-10)
Otherwise, the reduction coefficient U is

detennined as follows: For ASD
I. For Angle members hav ing two or mo re bolts in the

line of force (C.3-1 8)
U = 1. 0 - 1. 20 x/ l < 0. 9 (C.3-15) For LRFD
But U ;:::: 0.4 , Fnt

Fnt = 1.3Fnt - ;1,p fv $ Fnt (C.3-1 9)
'#' nv
2. For channel members having two or more bolts in the
line of force where
U = 1. 0 - 0. 36 x / L < 0. 9 (C.3- 16) F~t Nominal tensile stress modified to include the
effects of required shear stress, MPa
but U ;:::: 0.5 Fnt :1 Nominal tensile stress from Table C.3-3
F nv - Required shear stress, MPa
where n = Safety factor for sheiu· from Table C.3-3
q, Resistance factor for shear from Table C.3-3
x Distance from shear plane to centroid of the
cross In addition, the required shear stress, f 11, shall not exceed
L Length of connection the allowable shear stress, Fnvf .O.(ASD) or the design
shear stress, </>F1111 (LRFD), of the fastener.
C.3.8.3 Shear and Tension in Bolts
Jn Table C.3-3, the shear strength sha ll apply to bolls in
The nominal bolt strength, P11, resulting from shear, tension holes as limited by Table C.3-2. Washers or back-up plates
or of combination of shear and tension shall be calculated in shall be installed over k>ng-sloltccl holes nnd lhe capacity of
accordance with this section. The corresponding safely connections using long-sloued holes shall be dctennined by
factor and the resistance factor provided in Table C.3-3 load tests in accordance with Section 556.
shall be used to determine the available strengths in
accordance with the applicable method in Section 551.4 or C.3.8.3.la Connection Shear Limited by E nd
551.5. Distance
(C.3- 17)
where The nominal shear strength per screw, P 115 shall not exceed
that calculated in accordance with Eq. C.3-20 where the
Gross cross-sectional area of bolt distance lo an end of the connected part is parallel to the
line of the applied force. The safety factor and the resistance
Nominal strength ksi (MPa) is determined in
factor provided in this section shall be used to determine the
accordance with (a) or (b) as follows:
avai lable strengths in accordance with the applicable
method in Section 551.4 or 551.5 .
(a) When bolts are subjected to shear only or tension only
F 11 shall be given by F nv or F 11i in TablcC.3-3.
Pns = teFu (C.3-20)
Corresponding safety and resistance factor, .0. and <f,,

shall be accordance with Table C.3-3.
.0. = 3. OO (ASD) (/) = 0. 50(LRFD)
where
The pullover strength of the connected sheet at the bolt
head, nul or washer shall be considered where bolt
tension is involved. See Section 555.6. t -· Thickness of part in which end distance is measured
Distance measured in line of force from center of a
e standard hole to nearest end of connected part
(b) When bolts are subjected to a combination of shear and
Tensile strength of part in which end distance is
tension, Fn , is given by F~t in Eq.C.3- 18 or C.3-1 9 as
measured
follows

Table C.3-3 Nominal Tensile and Shear Strengths for Bolts

Tensile Strength Shear Strength
Safety Resistance Nominal Safoty Resistance Nominal
Factor Factor Stress Factor Factor Stress
Bolts
n Fnt n F,iv
(ASD) (LRFD) Mpa (ASD) (LRFD) Mpa
A307 Bolts Grade A
6.4 mm :5 d < 12.7 mm
2.25 279 165
A307 Bolts Grade A
2.25 310 186
d~ 12.7 mm
A325 Bolts, when threads arc not
621 372
excluded from shear planes
A325 Bolts, when threads are excluded
621 496
from shear planes
A354 Grade BD Bolts
6.4 mm :5 d < 12.7 mm, when threads 696 407
arc not excluded from shear olanes
A354 Grade BD Bolts
6.4 mm~ d < 12.7 mm, when threads 696 621
0.75 2.4 0.65
are excluded from shear planes
A449 Holts
2.00
6.4 mm;::: d < 12.7 mm, when threads 558 324
arc not excluded from shear planes
A449 Bolls
6.4 mm :S d < 12. 7 mm; when threads 558 496
are excluded from shear planes
A490 Bolts
when tlircads arc not excluded from 776 465
shear planes
A490 Bolts
when threads are not excluded from 776 621
shear planes
CC(
C.3.9 Rupture C.3.9.3 Block Shear Rupture
C.3.9.1 Shear Rupture When the thickness of the thinnest connected part is less
than 4.76 mm, the block shear rupture nominal strength,
At beam-end connections, where one or more flanges llre Rn, shall he determined in accordance with this section.
coped and failure might occur along a plane through the Connections in which the thickness of the thinnest
fasteners, the nominal shear strength, V n, shall be connected part. is equul to or grellter than 4.76 mm shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. C.3-21. The safety factor in accordance with ANSI/ AISC-360.
and the resistance factor provided in this section shall be
used to determine the available strengths in accordance with The nominal block shear rupture strength, R11 , shall be
the applicable mclhod in Section 551 .4 or 551.5. determined as Lhc lesser of Eqs. C.3-22 and C.3-23. The
corresponding safety factor and the resisumce factor
Vn = 0. 6FuAwn (C.3-21) provided in this section shall be uscu lo determine the
available strengths in accordance with thl! applicable
11 =2. OO(ASD) </) =0. 15(LRFD) method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
where (C.3-22)
= (hwc - ndh)t (C.3-23)

Coped flat web depth
Number of holes in critical plane
For bolted connections
Hole diameter
Tensile strength of connected part as specified
in Section 551.2.l or 551 .2.2 11 = 2. 22(ASD) <J, = 0. 65 (LRFD)
t ,:: Thickness of coped web
For welded connections
C.3.9.2 Tension Rupture
The available tensile strength along a path in the affected fl = 2. SO(ASD) </> = 0. 6 0(LRFD)
elements of connected members shall be determined by
Section 555.2.7 or 555.3.2 for welded or bolted where
connections, respectively.
Gross area subject lo shear
Net area subject lo shear
Ncl area subject to tension

NSCP C101·15
Chapter&
WOOD

VOLUME I
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippinest Inc.

Suite 713t Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
Tel. No.: (+632) 410.0483

Fas No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: as@online@email.com
<
CHAPTER 6 - Wood 6-1
Table of Contents
SF,CTION 601 - GENERAL REQUIREl\iJENTS .................................................................................................................... 4

601.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
601.2 Design Method .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
SF,CTION 602-NOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................ 4
602.1 Notations ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
602.2 Dclinilions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
SECTION 603 - MINIMUM QUAI,ITY ................................................................................................................................. R
603.1 Quality and Identification ............................................................................................................................. ................ 8
603.2 Minimun1 Capacity or Grade .................................................................................................... ...... ............................... 8
603.3 Titnber Connectors and Fasteners .................................... ........................................................ ..................................... 8
603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture ....................................................... ...... ........................................................ 8
SECTION 604- DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUlREMENTS ............................................................................. 9
604.l Ueneral ......................................................................................................................... ......... ........................................ 9
PART I - REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO ALL DESIGN PROC~DURES ........................................................... 10
SECTION 605 - DRCA Y AND TERMITE PROTECTION ................................................................................................ 10
605.1 Preparation of Building Site ......................................................... ......................................... ...................................... 10
605.2 Wood SupportEn1bedded in Uround .................. ........................................................................................................ 10
605.3 Under-Floor Clearance ....................................... .".............................................................................. .............. ............ 10
605.4 Plates, Sills and Sleepers ........................................................................... ......... ................ ......................................... 10
605.5 Columns and Posts .................................................................... ....................................... .............. ............................. IO
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete Walls .......................................................... ....................... ............................ 10
605.7 Under-Floor Ventilation .......................................................................................... ................................................ .... 10
605.8 Wood and Earth Separation ............................................................................................................ ............................. II
605.9 Wood Supporting Routs and Floors .......................................................... .................. ............................................ .... 11
605.10 Moisture Content of Treated Wood ............................................... ........ ................................................................. .... 11
~~;:~~ ~~:!~~~·gE%~!:;;~·:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::·:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~:

605.13 Water Splash .................................................................................. .......... ................................................. .................. 11
SECTION 606 - WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY OR CONCRETE ........................................................................... 12
606.1 Dead Load ................................................................................................................................................................... I 2
606.2 Horizontal Force .......... .................................. .................................................. ... ............................... ....................... .. 12
SECTION 607 - WA LL FRAJ\IIING ...................................................................................................................................... 12
SECTION 608 • FLOOR FRAMING .................................................................................................................................... 13
SECTION 609 - F,XTERIOR WALL COVERINGS............................................................................................................ 14
609.1 Ueneral ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14
609.2 1.4
Siding .................................................................. ....... ...... ............ ............... .................................................................
609 .3 Pl)'\'VOOd ····· .................... .................... ... ........................... .. .........................................................................................
15
609.4 Shingles or Shakes ................................ ...................................................................... ....................... ......................... 15
609 .5 Particlehoard .................................................................................. .. ........................................................................... 15
609 .6 Hardboard.................................................................................................................................................................... 15
609.7 Nailing............................ .............................................................................. ............................................................... 15
<
6-2 CHAPTER 6 - Wood
S~CTION 610- JNTERI<>R PANELING ............................................................................................................................. 18

SECTION 611 - SIIEATIIING ............................................................................................................................................... 18
611 . 1 Structural Floor Sheathing........................................................................................................................................ 18
611.2 Structural Roof Sheathing ............................................................................ ............... ... ....... ..... ... ........ ...... ... ,.... .. ...... 18
S~CTION 612 - MECUANICAJ ,LY-LAMINATED FLOORS AN D DECKS ..................................................................22
SECTION 613 - POST-811:AM CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................22
PART 11 - REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO DESIGN OF WIND ANO F'.ARTHQliAKI!: LOAD-RESISTING
SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................................................................................23
SECTIO N 614 - WOOD SIIEAR WALLS ANO DIAPHRAGMS ...................................................................................... 23
614. 1 General .............................................................................................................. ....................................................... 23
6 14.2 Wood Members Resisting Hori7.ontal Forces Contributed by Masonry and Concrete .... .. ............................. ........... 24
6 14.3 Wood Diaphragn,s ...................................................................................................................................... ................. 24
614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms..................................................... ..... .... ....... ....... ....... .. . .. ... . ............................ 25
614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4 ........................ ...................................................................... 25
614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Oiaphrag,ns ... .......................... ........................................................... ...................................... 26
SECTION 615 - DESIGN V ALOES FOR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ............................................................................ 27
615.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 27
615.2 Reference Design Values ............. ....................... .... ..................... ......... ......................................... .................... ......... 27
615.3 Adjustment of Reforencc Design Valucs ...................................................................................... ....................... ........ 27
SECTION 616 - Dl!:SIGN PROVISIONS ANO EQUATIONS ............................................................................................40
616.1 General ............ ..... .. ........... ............................................ .................................................. ................. ........................... 40
616.2 Bcndi~g Members - General ........................................................... ........ ......................... ........ ......... .......................... 41
616.3 Bending Me,nbers · Flexure ........... ............................................................................................................................ 4 1
616.4 Bending Members - Shear ......................................... .............. ....... ....... ..................................................................... 43
616.5 Bending Members - DefkcLion ............. ..... ... .............................................................................................................. 45
616.6 Compression Members - General ..................... ..................... ...................................................................................... 45
616.7 Solid Columns ... .................. ......... ............................ ................................................ ................................................... 46
616.8 Tension Mc1nbers .......... .. ............... ... ................................................................... ,.......................................,.............. 47
616.9 Combined Bending and Axial Loading ............................................................................. .... ........................ .............. 47
616.10 Design fo r Oearing ........ .......... .. .................................................................................................................................. 48
SECTION 617 - SAWN J,UMBF,R ...........................................................................,.............................................................50
617.1 General ......... ....... ....... .............. ............................... .......................... ........... ............................................................... 50
617.2 Reference Design Values ....... ..................................................................................................................................... 5 t
617.3 Adjuslmentol"Reforcnce Design Values ..................................................................... .............................. .... ............ .. 52
6 J 7.4 Special Design Considerations ................ ................ ........................................................ ............................................ 54
SEC"llON 618 - STRUCTURAL GLUIW LAMINATED TIMBER .................................................................................. 56
618.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................................ 56
618.2 Rclerencc Design Valuci> ........................... ......... ..... .................. ...................................... ........................................... 56
618.3 Adjustment of Reference Design Values ..................................................................... ................................... .. ........... 58
618.4 Special Design Considerations ... ... ........................................................................ ...................................................... 60
SECTION 619 -TIMBER CONNECTORS AND t'ASTENERS ........................................................................................ 63
619.1 General ... .... .................... ..................................................................................................... ........................... ............. 63
619.2 Bolts ............................................ ........ ......................................................... ............................................................... 63
619.3 Nails and Spikes ......... ........................................................................................................ ......................................... 68
619.4 Joist Hangers and Fraining Anchors ........ ........... ... .......................................................... ...................................... ...... 7 1
6 19.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners .. .... ..... .................._..................................................................................................... ........... 7 I

SECTION 620 - CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION DESIGN PROVISIONS ............................. 73

620.1 General ......................................................................................................... ...................... ..............., ......................... 73
620.2 Design of Portions ......................................................... .............................................................................................. 73
620.3 Additional Requirements for Conventional Construction in High-wind Areas .......................................................... 73
620.4 Additional Requirements for Conventional Construction in Seismic Zone 2 .............. ........................................... 73
620.5 Girders ......................................................................................................................................................................... 74
620.6 Floor Joists .................................................................................................................................................................. 74
620. 7 Subflooring.......... .. ............ .......................................................................................................................................... 75
620.8 Particleboard Underlaytnent. .............................................................................. ......................................................... 75
620.9 Wall Framing ...... .............. ..... ......................... ............... ............................................ ........ .. .............. ......................... 75
SECTION 621-METAL PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSS DESIGN ................................................................... 83
62 l .1 Design and Fabrication ............................................................................................................................................... 83
621.2 Performance ................................................. ......... .................................................. ........................... ..... .................... 83
62 l .3 In-Plant Inspection .............. ......................... .................................................................... ................ ....... .................... 83
621.4 Marking ..................................................................................................................................................................... .. 83
SECTION 622 - us~ OF MACHINE-GRADED LUMBER (MGL) .................................................................................. 83
622.l General ................ .............. .......................................................................................................................................... 83
622.2 Design Properties for Machine-Graded Lumber ................................................................ ......................... :............... 83
622.3 Design Using Machine-Graded Lumber ........... ..... ........................................................................ .... ......... ................ 83
622.4 Preservative Treatment. .................................................................................................... ................ ........................... 83
622.5 Moisture Content.. ............... .. ................................................... - ............ .......................................... .. ............ ............. 83
622.6 Markings ........ ..................... .. .............................. ...... .......................................... ..... ........................ ........................... 83
<

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
601.1 Scupe 602.l Notations
The provisions or this chapter shall govcm the malerials, Except where otherwise noted, the symbols used in this
design, construction, and quality of wood members and Chapter lrnve the following meanings:
their fasteners.
A area of cross section. mm1
601.2 Design Method
cross-sectional .irea of notched member, mm 2
Design shall be based on one of the following methods:
Co load duration factor
601.2.1 Working Stress Design (WSD) size ractor for sawn lumber
Des ign using working stress tksign methods shall resist stress interaction factor for tapered glued
the different load combinations in accordance with the laminated timbers
applicable requirements of Section 604.
CL he11 m stab1lily factor
601.2.2 Conventional Light-Frame Construction
wd service factor
The design and conslruetion of conventional light-frame Cp column stability facto r
wood structures shall he in accordance wilh the applicable
requirements of Section 604 and the NSCP Volume III - buckling stiffness factor for dimension
Housing. lumber
Cv volume factor for structural gl ued laminated

timber
bearing area factor
curvatun: factor for structurnl glued

lamin_!!tt:d timber
empirical constant derived from relationship

or equations for deflection oflttpered straight
heams and prismatic heams
c,,. tlal use factor
c, incising factor for dimension lumber
repetitive member fador for dime nsion

lumber
t:mpirieal load-shape radia I stress reduction

factor for double-tapered curved structural
glued laminated timber bending members
temperature factor
C,,r she11r reduction factor for structural glued

laminated timber
tapered structural glued !arninaled timber

beam deflection factor
coefficient of variation for modulus of

elasticity

E,E' = reference and adjusted modulus of elasticity, F,., F/ = reference and adjuslt:u compression <lesign
MPa value parallel lo grain, MPa
modulus of elasticity ofstructurnl glued F c' = r<::f<::rem;e compression design value parallt:I
laminated timber for extensional lo grain multiplied by all applicable
deformations, M Pa adj11sttncnt factors except Cp, Ml'a
reference and adjusted modulus of elasticity critical buckling design value for
for beam stability and column stability compression members, MPa
calculations, MPa
Fen, Feel critical buckling design value for
(EI)m111, refen:nce and adjusted El for heam stability compression member in planes oflatcral
(E/) 111,,/ and column stability calculations, MPa support, MPa
modulus of elasticity or structural glued reference an<l adjusted compression design

laminated timber for deflections due to value perpendicular to grain, M Pa
bending about the x-x axis, MPa
reference compression design value for
modulus of elasticity of structural glued bearing loads on the wide face of the
laminated timber for beam and column laminations of structural glued laminated
stability calculations for buckling about the timber, MPa
x-x axis, MPa
F,.1y reference compn::ssion design value for
modulus of elasticity of structural glued bearing loads 011 the narrow edges of the
laminated timber for denections due lo laminations of structural glued laminated
bending about the y-y axis, MPa timber, MPa
Eymin modulus of elasticity of structural glued reference and adjusled radial compression
laminated timber for beam and column design value for curved structural glued
stability calculations for buckling about the laminatt:<l timher members, MPa
y-y axis, MPa
reference and adjusted radial tension design
reference and adjusted bending design value, value perpendicular to grain for strnctural
MP a glued laminated timber, MPa
reference bending desibrn value multiplied by F 1, F/ reference and adjusted tension design value
all applicable adjustment factors except C1., pi)railel to grain, MJ'a
Ml'a
reft:r<::nce and 11djusted shear design value
Fh'* reference bending design value multiplied by parallel lo b'fain (hori:wntal shear), Ml'a
all applicable adjustment factors except Cv,
MPa F.,x, F.,/ reference and adjusted shear design value for
structural glued laminated timber members
adjusted edgewise bending design value, with loads causing bending about the x-x
Ml'a axis, MPa
adjusted flatwise bending design value, Ml'a reference shear design value for structural
glued laminated limber members with lnads
critical buckling design value for bending causing bending about the y·y axis, MPa
members, MPa
adjusled bearing design value aL an angle to
reference bending design value for positive grain, MJ'a
hending of structural glued laminated
timhers, MPa I moment of inertia, mm4
Fbx- rcterencc bending desib'll value for negative time dependem defonuation (creep) factor
bending of structural glued laminated
timbers, MPa buckling length coefficient for compression
members
reference bending design value of strudural
glued laminated timbers bent about the y-y Kr., empirical radial stress factor for dnuble-
axis, MPa tapered curved structural glue<l laminated
limber bending members
<
6 -6 CHAPTER 6 - Wood
K = empirical bending stress shape tiu..:tor for d., depth of double-tapered curved s tructural
double-tapered curved structural glued glued laminated tirnher bending member at
laminated timber ends, mm
L span length of bending member, mm de depth Ht the small end ofa tapered straight
s tructural glued laminated timhc:r bending
M max.imum bending moment, N-m member, mm
N, N' reference and adjusted lateral design value at dequi11 depth of an equivalent prismatic s!rudural
an angle to gr.iin for a single bolt or a single glued laminated timber member, mm
split ring connector or shear plate connector
unit, N dmax 1he maximum di1m:nsion for that face of a
tapered column, mm
P,P' reference ttnd adjusted lttteral design value
parallel to grain for a single bolt or a single dmin the minimum dimcm,ion for that face ofa
split ring connector or shear plate connector tapered column, mm
unit, N
dn depth of member remaining at 11. notch
Q,Q' reference and adjusted hlteral design value measured perpcndicu lar to the length of the
perpendicular to grain for a single bolt or a member, mm
single split ring connector or shear plate
connector unit, N drep representative dimension for tapered w lumn,
mm
Q statical moment of an area 11.bout the neutral
axis, mm 3 dy dep th of structural glued laminated timber
pttrallcl to the wide face of the laminations
R raditL~ of eurvau1rc of inside face of structural when lottded in hending about the y-yaxis,
glued laminated limber member, mm mm
RB slendemcss ratio of bending mcmher d1 , d z cros-;-sectional dimensions ol'rectangular

compression member in planes oflateral
Rm radius of curvature al center line of s!ructurnl support, mm
glued lamin11.t.ed timber member, mm
e - the distance the notch c:xtends fro m the inner
s section modulus, 1111113 e<lge of the support, mm
T Temperature, °C lb actual Qcnding stress, MPa
v shear force, N fc actu11I compression stress parallel to grain,

MPa
Vr, V,.' reference and adjusted design shear, N
f rJ. actual compression stress perpendicular lo
a support condition factor for tapered columns grain, MPa
b hreadth (thickness) of rectangular bending fr actual radial stress in curved bending

member, mm member, MPa
c distance rrom neutral axis to extreme fiber, ft actual tension s1rcss parallel to grain, Ml'a
mm
fv actual shear stress parallel to grain, MPa
c constant for column stability factor
h vertical distance from tbe c:nd of the double-
d depth (width) of bending member, mn1 tapered curved structural glued lamim:1ted
timber beam to mid-span, mm
d least di mc:nsion of rectangular compression
member, mm ha = vertical distance from the top of the double-
tapered curved structural glued laminated
de depth at pcttked section of double-tapered limber supports to the beam apex, mm
curved structural glued laminated timber
bending mc:mber, mm l span length of bending member, mm
de etkctive depth of member at u connc:ction, l distance between points oflateral support of

nun compression member, mm
-~
CHAPTER 6 -Wood 6-7
bearing length, mm 602.2 Definitions

clear span, mm See Section 202.
Ic length between tangent points for double-
timber members, mm
Ie effective span length of bending member,

mm
te cffoctive length of compression member, mm
I et, I eZ effective length of compression member in

planc::s of lateral support, mm
le/d slenderness ration of compression member
t,. laterally unsupported span length of bending

member, mm
t thickness, mm
x distance from beam support face to load, nun
t,.8 horizontal deflection at supports of

symmetrical double-tapert:<l curved structure,!
glued laminated timber members, mm
air = immt:<liate detlection due to the long-term

component of the design load, mm
l':.sr detlcction due to the short term or normal

component of the design load, mm
t:.r total deflection from long-term and short-

term loading, mm
l:,.c vertical deflection at mid-span of doubl~

timber members, mm
8 angle of taper on the compression or tension

face of structural glued laminated timber
members, degrees
(J = angle between the direction of load and the

direction of grain (longin1dinal axis of
mc::mher) for split ring or shear plate
connector design, degrees
4'8 angle of soffit slope at the ends of double-

timber member, degrees
lf>r angle of roof slope of double-tapered curved

structural glued laminated timber memher,
degrees
w uniformly distributed load, N/mm
.
603.4 Fabrication, lnstaJlation und Manufacture

SECTION 603
MINIMUM QUALITY Fahrication, installation, and manufacture of woud
clements shall be in accordance with the following
603.I Quality and Identification guidelines:
All lumber, wood structurnl panels, parliclcbourd, 603.4. t Gcnerul

structural glued-laminated lumber, cm.I-jointed lumber,
fiberboard sheathing (when used strncturally). hardbo11rd Preparation, f'abricnlion and installation ol wood members
siding (when used structurally), piles and poles regulated nnd their fastenings :,hall conform lo accepted engineering
by this chapter shall conform to the applicable standards practices and to the requirements of this chapter. All
or grading mies spcci!ied in this chapter and shall be so members shall be framed , anchored, tied and braced lo
identilicd by the grade mark or a cert ificate or inspection develop the sirength and rigidity necessary for the
issued by an approved agency. purposes ror which they arc used.
603.2 Minimum Capacity or Grade 603.4.2 Timber Connectors and Fasteners
Minimum capacity ofstructurnl framing members may be The installation of timber connectors and fasteners shall
established hy performance tests. When the rests arc not be in accordance with the provisions set forth in Section
made, capacity shall be based on design va lues specified 61 9.
in Section 615 and design calculations specified in
Sections 616 to 618. 603.4.3 Metal Plate-Connected Wood Trusses
Approved end-jointed lumber may be used Metal plate-connected wood trusses shall conform to the
interchangeably with solid-sawn members of the same provisions of Section 62 1. Each manufacturer or trusses
species and grade. Such use shall include, but not be using metal plate connectors shall retain an approved
limited to. light-framingjoists, planks and decking. agency having no !inancial interest in the plant being
inspected to nrnkc nonscheduled inspections of tn1ss
Wood structural panels shall be of grades specified in fabrication , delivery, and operations. The inspection shall
accordance with Philippine National Standards ( PNS) . cover all phases or tniss operation, including lumber
storage. hand Iing, cutting, lixturcs, presses or rol lers,
603.3 Timber Connectors and Fasteners fabri calion, b11ndling and banding. lrnndling and delivery.
Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors 603.4.4 Structural Glued-Laminated Timber
and fasteners not mentioned or fully covered in Section
619, may be detennincd in a manner approved by the The manufacture and fabrication of structural glucd-
Building Otlicial. Jamioatcd timber shall be under the supervision of
qualified personnel.
The number and sile or nails connecting wood members
shall be in accordunce with the .ipplicable provisions or 603.4.5 Dried l''ire Retardant-Treated Wood
Section 619. Other connections shall be fastened ro
provide equivalent strength. End nnd edge distnnces and Fire retardant-treated wood shall have been dried,
nail pcnetrntions shall be in accordance with the following treatment, to moisture content (MC) not
applicable provisions of Section 619. exceeding:
Fasteners for pressure preservative-treated and fire 19% - for solid sawn lumber up to 50 mm thick
retardant-treated wood shall be of hot-dipped :line coated I 5% - for plywood
galvaniled, stainless steel, silicon bronze or copper.
Fasteners required to be corrosion resistant shall he either
zinc-coated fasteners, aluminum alloy wire fasteners or
stainless steel fasteners.
Connections depending on Joist hangers or framing

anchors, ties, and other mechanical fastenings not
otherwi~e covered may be used where approved hy the
Building Olfieial.

603.4.6 Size of Structural Members

SECTION 604
Sizes of lumber referred to in this chapter are nominal DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
sizes. Computations to determine the required sizes of REQUIRE_1 M
~ E_N_TS
_ ~~~~~---1
members shall be based on the net dimensions (actual
size) and not the nominal sizes. The rough size lumber 604.1 General
shall not be less than the nominal size and the reduction in
face dimensions of dressed Jwnber shall not be more than The following design requirements apply.
6 mm of the nominal size.
604.1.1 All wood structures shall be designed and
603.4.7 Shrinkage constructed in accordance with the requirements of
Section 601 up to Section 613.
Consideration shall be given in the design to the possible
effect of cross-grain dimensional changes considered
vertically which may occur in hunber fabricated in a 604.l.2 Wind and earthquake load-resisting 1,ystems for
given condition. all engineered wood strnctures shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of
603.4.8 Rejection Section 614.
The building official may deny permission for the use of a User Note: Alternatively, laleral load-resisting systems
wood member where permissible grade characteristics or for single family dwellings may be proportioned
defects are present in such a combination that they affect according to lhe provisions of NSCP Volume IIJ -
detrimentally the serviceability of the member. Housing.
604.1.3 The design and construction of wood stmctures

using working stress design (WSD) methods shall be in
accordance with Section 615 to Section 618.
604.1.4 The design and construction of conventional

light-frame wood strnctures shall be in accordance with
Section 620.
604.l.S The design and installation of timber connectors

and fasteners shall be· in accordance with Section 619.
604.1.6 Metal plate-connected wood trusses shall confonn

to the provisions of Section 621.
<
6 -10 CHAPTER 6 -Wood
PART I - REQUIREMENTS 605.4 Plates, Sills and Sleepers
APPLICABLE TO ALL DESIGN AII foundation plates or sills and sleepers on a concrete or
PROCEDURES masonry slab, which is in direct contact with earth, and
sills that rest on concrete or masonry foundations, shall be
treated wood, u\l marked or branded by an approved
SECTION605 agency. Foundation wood marked or branded by an
approved agency may be used for sills in localities subject
DECAY AND TERMITE lo moderate hazard, where termite da mage is not frequent
PROTECTION and when specilically approved hy the building official.
Jn localities where hazard of tennitc is slight, any species
605.1 Preparation of Building Site or wood permitted by this chapter may be used for sills
when specifically approved hy the huildi ng official.
All stumps and roots shall be removed from the soil to a
depth of at least 300 mm below the surface of the ground 605.5 Columns and Posts
in the area to he occupied hy the building.
Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry floors
All wood fo1ms which have been used in placing or decks exposed to the weather or to water splash or in
concrete, if within the ground or between foundation sills basements and which suppo1t permanent structures shall
:md the ground, shall be removed before a building is be supporled by concrete piers or metal pedestals
occupied or used for any purpose. Before completion, projecting above floors unless approved wood or natural
loose or casual wood shall be removed from direct contact resistance to decay or treated wood is used. The pedestal
with the ground under the building. shull project at least 200 mm above exposed earth or 01
least 25 111111 above finish floor level or such lloors.
605.2 Wood Support Embedded in Ground
Individual concrcle or masonry pier~ shall project al least
Wood embedded in the ground or in direct contact with 200 mm above exposed ground unless the supported
the earth and used for the support of permanent structures columns or posts are treated wood or of approved wood
shall be treated wood unless continuously below the with natural resistance to decay.
ground waterline or submerged in fresh water. Round or
rectangular posts, poles and sawn timber columns 605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete Walls
supporting permanent structures which are embedded in
concrete or masonry in direct contact with the earth or Ends of wood girder.entering masonry or concrete walls
embedded in concrete or masonry exposed to the weather shall he provided with a 15 mm air space ori tops, sides
shall be treated wood. The wood shall be treated for and ends unless approved wood of natural resistance to
ground contact. decay or treated wood is used.
605.3 Under-Floor Clearance 605.7 Under-Floor Ventilation
When wood joists or the bouom of wood structural lloors Under-floor areas shall be ventilated by an approved
without joists are locntcd closer than 450 mm or wood mechanical means or by openings in under-floor area
girders arc located closer than 300 mm to exposed ground walls. Such openings shall have a net area of not less than
in crawl spaces or uncxcavatcd areas located within the 0.07 m2 for each 10 m2 of under-floor area. Openings
periphery of the building foundation, the tloor assembly shall be localed as close to corners as practical and shall
including posts, girders, joists and subf1oor, sball be provide cross venlilation. The required area of such
approved wood of natural resistance to decay or treated openings shall be approximately equally distributed along
wood. the length of at least two opposite sides. They shall he
covered with corrosion-resistant wi re mesh with mesh
When the above under-lloor clearances arc required, the openings or 6 mm dimension. Where moisture due to
under-floor area shall he accessible. Accessible under- climate and groundwater conditions is not considered
Lloor areas shall be provided with a minimum 450 mm by excessive, the Building Official may allow operable
600 mm opening unobstructed by pipes, ducts and similar louvers and may allow the required net area of vent
construct ion. All under-floor access openings shall be opening Lo be reduced to l O percent of lhc above,
effectively screened or covered. Pipes, ducts and other provided the under-Aoor ground surface area is covered
construction shall not interfere with the accessibility to or with an approved vapor barrier.
within under-floor areas.

CHAPTER 6-Wood 6-11
605.8 Wood and Earth Separation All wood structural panels, when designed to be exposed
in outdoor application, shall be of exterior type, except as
Protection of wood against deterioration as set forth in the provided in Section 605.2.
previous sections for specified applications is required. In
addition, wood used in construction of permanent In geographical areas where experience has demonstrated
structures and located nearer than 150 mm to earlh shall a specific need, approved wood of natural resistance to
be treated wood or wood of natural resistance lo decay. decay or treated wood shall be used for those structural
Where located on concrete slabs placed on earth, wood components or buildings or similar permanent building
shall be treated wood or wood of natural resistance to appurtenances when such members are exposed to the
decay. Where not subject to water splash or to exterior weather and arc without adequate protection provided by
moisture and located on concrete having a minimum a roof, eave, overhang or other covering against moisture
thickness of 75 mm with an impervious membrane or water accumulation on the surface or al joinls between
installed between concrete and earth, the wood may be members. Such members may include: horizontal
untreated and of any species. members such as girders, joists and decking; or vertical
members such as posts, poles and columns; or both
Where planter boxes are installed adjacent to wood frame horizontal and vertical members.
walls, a 50-mm air space shall at least be provided
between the planter and the wall. Flashing shall be 605.13 Water Splash
installed when the air space is less than 150 mm in width.
Where flashing is used, provisions shall be made to Where wood-frame walls and partitions arc covered on
pennil circulation of the air in the air space. The wood the interior with plaster, tile or similar materials and are
frame shall be provided with an exterior wall coveiing subject to water splash, the framing shall be protected
confonning to the provisions of Section 609. with approved waterproofing.
605.9 Wood Supporting Roofs and Floors
Wood structural members supporting concrete or masonry

slabs which arc permeable to moisture and are exposed to
the weather shall be approved wood of natural resistance
to decay or treated wood unless separated from such
floors or roofs by an impervious moisture barrier.
605.10 Moisture Content of T1·eated Wood
When wood which has heen pressure-lreated with a

water-horn preservative is used in enclosed locations
where drying in service cannot readily occur, such wood
must have a moisture content of 19 percent or less before
being covered with insulation, interior wall finish floor
covering or other materials.
605.11 Retaining Walls
All wood used as permanent parts of retaining or crib

walls shall be treated wood.
605.12 Weather Exposure
Those portions of glued-laminaled timbers that form the

structural supports of a building or other slructure and
which are exposed to weather and not properly protected
by a roof or eave overhangs of similar covering, shall be
pressure-treated with an approved preservative or be
manufactured from wood of natural resistance to decay.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume r. 7th Edition, 2016
<
6-12 CHAPTER 6- Wood

WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY WALL FRAMING
OR CONCRETE
The framing of exterior and interior walls shall be in
accordance with provisions Sl){.'{;i fied in Section 620
606.1 Dead Load
unless a specific design is furnisht:d.
Wood members shall not hl: used to permanently supporl
dead load of ,:Illy masonry or concrete except in cases Wood studs, walls and bearing partitions i;hall 11ot supporl
listed hdow or allowed hy relevanL sections of NSCP more Lhan two tloors and a roof unless an analysis
~atisfaclory to the building official shows that shrinkage
Volume Ill - Housing.
of wood fra ming will not have adverse e ffect upon the
structure nor any plumbing, electrical, mechanical
Erceptions:
,;yslcms nor other equipment installed therein due to the
cx.eessive shrinkage or difforential movements caused by
l. J\.1asonry or concrete non-structural floor or roqf' shrinkage. The analysis shall also show that the roor
swfucing not more 1han JOO 111111 thick may he drainage system and the foregoing systems or equipment
supported by wood members. wi 11 not he adversely affected or, as an alternate, such
systems shall he designed to accommodate the differential
2. Any structure may rest upon wood piles construc1ed shrinkage or movements.
in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 on
"Earthworks and Foundations"
3. Veneer of brick or concrete stone may he supported

by approved treated wood foundations when the
maximum height of veneer does not exceed 9.0 m
above the foundations. Such veneer used as an
interior ·wall finish mC1y also be supported on wood
.floors which are designed 10 support the additional
load, and he designed to limit the deflection and
shrinkage to 1/600 of the span of the supporting
members.
4. Wood may be used to support gloss block masonry

having an installed weight of" 98 kglm1 or less. When
glass block is supported on wood floors, the floors
shall be designed to limit deflection and shrinkage to
1/600 of the span of' the supporting members and the
allowable stresses for !he .framing members shall be
reduced in accordance with Section 615. 3.4.
606.2 Horizontal Force
Wood ml:mberll shall not be used to resist horizontal

forces contributed by masonry or concrete construction in
huildings over one story in height except where allowed
hy provisions of Section 614.2 of this chapter.

CHAPTER 6 - Woo<I 6-13
under the Oooring that will exceed 9.3 m2 in area

SECTION 608 and such space shall be filled solidly under all
FLOOR FRAMING permanent partitions so that there is no
communication under the flooring between
Wood-juisled floors shall be framed and constructed and adjoining rooms.
anchored to supporting wood stud or masonry walls.
3. Fire blocks shall consist or 50 mm nominal lumber or
Fire block and drafl slops shall be in accordance with the one th ickncss or 18 111111 plywood with joints backed
following provisions: by 18 mm plywood or one thickness of 19 mm Type
2-M pai1iclcboard. Fire blocks may also be of
I. In combustible construction, fire blocks and drat1 gypsum board, cement fiber hoard, mineral fiber,
regulators shall be installed to cut off all concealed glass fiber or other approved materials securely
draft openings (both vertical and horizontal) and shall fastened in place. Loose-fill insulation materials shall
form an effective barrier between 11oors, bctwccn a not be used as a fire block unless specifically tested
top story and a roof or auic space, and shall subdivide in the form and manner intended for use tu
auic spaces. concealed roof spaccs and tloor-ceiling demonstrate its ability to remain in place and to
assemblies. The integrity or all fire and drall slops retard the spread of fire and hot gases. Walls having
shall be maintained. parallel or staggered studs for sound-transmission
control shall have fire blocks of baus or blankets of
2. Fire blocks shall be provided 111 the following mineral fiber or glass fiber or other approved non-
locations: rigid materials.
a. In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, 4. Draft slops shall be provided 111 lhe following
including furred spaces, al the ceiling and tloor locations:
levels, and at 3 m intervals at both horizontal ai1d
vertical length of the wall. a. Floor-Ceiling Assemblies.
Exception: a. I Single-family dwellings. As recommended

Fire blocks may be omitted at floor and ceiling in NSCP Volume Ill - Housing or when
there is usable space above and below the
levels when approved smoke-actuated .fire
concealed space of a floor-ceiling assembly
dampers are installed at these levels. in a single-family dwelling, <lrall stops shall
be installed so that the area of the concealed
b. At all interconnections between concealed space docs not exceed 90 m2 • Draft stops
vertical and horizontal spaces such as those that shall divide the concealed space into
occur at soffits, drop ceilings, and cove ceilings. approximately equal areas.
c. In concealed spaces between stair stringers, at a.2 Two or more dwelling units and hotels.
the top and bottom or the run, and between studs Oran stops shall be installed in floor-ceiling
along and in line with the run of lhe stairs if the assemblies of building having more than one
walls under the stairs a.re unfinished. dwelling unit and in hotels. Such drnil stops
shall be in line with walls separating tenants
d. In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, from each other and separating tenants from
chimneys, fireplaces, an<l similar openings which other areas.
afford a passage for the fire at ceiling and tloor
levels, with noncombustible materials. a.3 Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in
floor-ceiling assemblies of buildings or
e. At opening between attics spaced and chimneys portions or buildings used for other than
chases for factory-built chimneys. dwelling or hotel occupancies so thal the
area of concealed space does not exceed 90
f. Where wood sleepers are used for lying wood m2 and so that the horizontal dimension
flooring on masonry or concrete fire-resistive between slops does not exceed 18.0 m.
floors, the space between the floor slab and the
underside of the wood flooring shall be filled
with noncombustible material or fire blocked in
such a manner that there will he no open spaces
<
6-14 CHAPTER 6 -Wood
Exception: SE'CTION609
Where approved automatic sprinklers are EXTERIOR WALL COVERINGS
installed within the concealed ~pace, the area
between draft stops may be 270 m 2 and the 609.1 General
horizontal dimension may be 30 m.
Exterior wood studs, walls shall be covered on the mn:;idc
with the malerials and in the manner specified in this
b. Attics
section or clscwhcre in this chapter. Studs or sheathing
shall be covered on the outside face with a wealher-
b. I Single-family dwellings. Refer to NSCP
resistive barrier when required. Exterior wall coverings of
Volume lll - Hous ing.
the minimum thickness specifi ed in this section are based
upon a maximum stud spacing of 400 mm unless
b.2 Two or more dwelling unit and hotels.
otherwise specified.
Drafts stops shall be installed in the altics,
mansards, overhangs, false fro nts set out
609.2 Siding
from walls and similar concealed spaces or
buildings containing more than one dwelling
Solid wood siding shall have an average thickness of
unit and hotels. Such drafts stop shall be
9 mm unless placed over sheathing permitted by this
above and in line with walls separating
chapter.
tenants from each other and from other uses.
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding or shiplap
Exceptions:
shall have an average thickness in place or nol less than
Drqfl stops may be omitted along one of the 15 mm and shall have a minimum thickness measured not
corddor walls. provided draft stops at less than 9 mm. Bevel siding shall have a minimum
tenant ~eµarat ion walls extend to the thickness measured at the butl section of nol less than 11
remaining corridor draji stop. mm and a tip thickness of not less than 5 mm. Siding of
Where appro\led sprinklers are installed, lesser dimensions may be used, provided such wall
draft stopping mc,y be as specified in the covering is placed over sheathing which conforms to the
exception below. provisions specified elsewhere in this chapter.
b.3 Other uses. Dran stops shall be installed in All weatherboarding or siding shall be securely nailed to
attics, mansards, over-hangs, false fronts set each stud with not less than one nail, or to solid 25 mm
out from walls and similar concealed spaces nominal wood sheathing or 12 mm plywood sheathing or
of buildings having uses other than 13 mm particleboard sheathing with not k·ss than one line
dwellings or hotels so that the area between of nails spaced not more than 600 mm on center in each
drnfl stops docs not exceed 270 1112 and the piece of the weatherboarding or siding.
greatest horizontal dimension docs not
exceed 18.0 m. Wood board siding applied horizontally, diagonally or
vertically shall be nailed to studs, nailing strips or
Exception: blocking set maximum 600 mm on center. Fasteners shall
be nails or screws with a penetration of not less than 40
Where approved automatic sprinklers are
mm into studs, studs and wood sheathing comhined, or
installed, the area between the draft stops
blocking. Distance between such fastenings shall not
may be 800 m 2 and the greatest horizontal
exceed 600 mm for horizontally or vertically applied
dimens ion may be 30 m.
sidings and 800 mm for diagonally applied sidings.
b.4 Draft stopping materials shall be not less
than 12 mm gypsum board, 9 mm plywood,
9 mm Type M-2 particleboard or other
approved materials adequately supported.
Openings in the partitions shall be protected
by self-dosing doors with automatic latches
constructed as required for the partitions.
-......
CHAPTER 6 -Wood 6-15
609.3 Plywood 609.6 Hardboard
Where plywood is used for covering lhe exterior or When hardboard siding is used for covering the outside of
outside walls, il shall be of the exterior type not less lhan exterior walls, it shall conform lo Table 609.6-1. Lap
9 mm thick. rlywood panel siding shall be installed in siding shall be installed horizontally and applied to
accordance with Table 609.3-1. Unless applied over 25 sheathed or unsheathed walls. Corner bracing shall be
mm wood sheathing or 12 mm wood structural panel installed in conformance with Section 620.9.3. A
shealhing or 13 mm particleboard sheathing, joints shall weather-resistive barrier shall be installed under the lap
occur over framing members and shall be protected with a siding.
continuous wood batten, approved caulking, !lashing,
vertical or horizontal shiplaps or joinls shall be lapped Square-edged, non-grooved panels and shiplap grooved or
horizontally or otherwise made waterproof. non-grooved siding shall he applied vertically to sheathed
or unsheathed walls. Siding that is grooved shall not be
609.4 Shingles or Shakes less than 6 mm thick in the groove.
Wood shingles or shakes may he used for exterior wall Nail size and spacing shall follow Table 609.6-1 and shall
covering, provided the frame or lhe structure is covered penetrate framing 40 mm. Lap siding shall overlap 25 mm
with huilding paper. All shingles or shakes auached to minimum and be nailed through both courses and inlo
sheathing other than wood sheathing shall be secured with framing members with nails located 12 mm from bottom
approved corrosion-resistant fasteners or on furring strips of the overlapped course. Square-edged, non-grooved
attached to the studs. Wood shingles or shakes may he panels shall be nailed 9 mm from the perimeter of the
applied over fiberboard shingle hacker and sheathing with panel and intennediately into studs. Shiplap edge panel
annular grooved nails. The thickness of wood shingles or siding with 9 mm shiplap shall be nailed 9 mm from the
shakes hctwecn wood nailing boards shall not be less than edges on both sides of the shiplap. The 19 mm shiplap
9 mm. Wood shingles or shakes or siding may he nailed· shall be nailed 9 mm from the edge and penetrate through
directly to approved fiberboard nail-based sheathing not both Lhc overlap and underlap. Top and bottom edges of
less than 13 mm nominal thickness with annular grooved the panel shall be nailed 9 mm from the edge. Shiplap and
nails. lap siding shall not be force fit. Square-edged panels shall
maintain a 3-mm gap at joints. All joints and edges of
The weather exposure of wood shingle or shake siding siding shall be over framing members, and shall be made
used on exterior walls shall not exceed maximum set forth resistant to weather penetration with battens, horizontal
in Table 609.4-1. owrlaps or shiplaps to the satisfaction of the huilding
official. A 3-mm gap shall he provided around all
609.5 Particleboard openings.
When particleboard is used for covering the exterior of 609.7 Nailing

outside walls, it shall be of the M-1, M-S and M-2
Exterior Glue grades. Particleboard panel siding shall be All fasteners used for the attachment or siding shall be or
installed in accordance with Tahle 609.5-1. Panel shall be a corrosion-resistant type.
gapped 3 mm and nails shall he spaced not less than 9 mm
from edges and ends of sheathing. Unless applied over 16
mm net wood sheathing or 13 mm plywood sheathing or
13 mm particleboard sheathing, joints shall occur over
framing members and shall be covered with a continuous
wood hatt; or joints shall be lapped horizontally or
otherwise made waterproof to the satisfaction of th~
building official. Parlicleboard shall be sealed and
protected with exterior quality finishes.
<
Table 609.3-1 Exposed rlywood Panel Siding
Stud Spacing
Minimum Thickness I Minimum Number of Plies Plywood Siding Applied Directly to Studs or Over Sheathing
JO mm 3 400 ·
12mm 4 600
Thickness ofgrooved panels is measured at boltum ofgrooves.
61}() mm may be used ifp(~·wood ~·iding applwd with face grai11 perpenclicular to stud, or over one 1!f'1he following:
(I) 25 mm hoard sheathing, (2) 10 nun wood s1ructurcil panel sheC1thing or {.I) 10 mm ''"od s111-1c111ral panel ~·heothing with
strength axis (which is the fonK direction o/rhe panel ,ml~.,s othenvi.w marked) of.~heathing perpendicular to studY.
Table 609.4-1 Wood Shingle and Shake Side Wall Exposures
Shingle or Shake Maximum Weather Exposures (mm)

Single-Coursing Double-Coursing
Length and Type
No. I No. 2 No. 1 No.2
400 mm shingles J 80 180 JOO 250
450 mm shingles 210 210 350 275
600 mm shingk:s 290 290 400 350
450 mm resawn shakes l.80 350
450 mm straight-split shakes 180 400
600 mm resawn shakes 290 500
Table 609.5-1 Al!owable Spans for Exposed rarticleboard Panel Siding
Minimum Thidmess
Grade Stud Spacing Siding Exterior Ceilings and Soffits
Direct to Studs Continuous Support Direct to Supports
M-1
400 J6mm lOmm lOmm
M-S
M-2 "Exterior Gluc" 600 J6mm lOmm 10 mm

Table 609.6-1 Hardboard Siding
Minimal Framing Nai I Size '· • Nail Spacing

Nominal (SOmm x IOOmm) General Bracing Panels 3
SIDING
Thickness Maximum Spacing
(mm) (mm)
1. Lap Siding
Direct to Studs 10 400mm o.c. 65 400mmo.c. Not applicable
Over Sheathing 10 400mmo.c. 75 400mmo.c. Not applicable
2. Square Edge Panel Siding
I50 mm o.c. al edges; 100 mm o.c. al edges;
Oirecl to Studs IO 600mmo.c. 50 300 mm o.c. at 200 mm o.c.
intermediate supports intermediate supports
.
150 mm o.c. at edges; 100 mm o.c. at edges;
Over Sheathing 10 600 mmo.c. 65 300 mm o.c. at 200mmo.c.
3. ShipJap Edge Panel Siding
Direct to Studs 10 400mm o.c. 50 300 mm o.c. at 200 mm o.c.
intermediate suppons intermediate supports
Over Sheathing IO 400mmo.c. 65 300 mm o.c. at 200mmo.c.
Nails shall be corrosion resistant in accorda11ce with Section 603.3.
1\linimum acceptable nail dimensions (mm).
Panel Siding (mm) Lap Siding (mm)
Shank diameter 2.5 2.5
Head diameter 6.0 6.0
When used to comply wilh Section 620. 9.3.
.
6-18 CHAPTER G - Wood

INTERIOR PANELING SHEATHING
All softwood wood structurnl panels shall conform to the 611.1 Structural Floor Sheathing
provisions of the interior finishes and shall be installed in
accordance with Table 619.3- l. Panels shall comply with Structural floor sheathing shall be designed in accon.Jance
UI3C Standard 23-3 or its equivalent Philippine National with the general provisions of this chapter and the spc<:ial
Standards (PNS). provisions in this section.
Sheathing used as subllooring shall he designed to
support all loads specified in this chapter and shall be
capable of supp011ing concentrated loads of not less rhan
1.33 kN without failure. The concentrated load shall be
applied by a loaded disc, 75 nun or smaller in diameter.
Flooring, including the finish floor. undcrlayment and

subfloor, where used, shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Deflection under uniform design load limited to
1/360 of the span between suppottingjoists or beams.
2. Deflection of flooring relative w joists under a
25 mm diameter concentrated load of0.90 kN limited
to 3 mm or less when loaded midway between
supporting joists or beams not over 600 mm on center
and I /360 or the span for spans over 600 mm.
Floor sheathing conforming to the provisions or Tables

611.1-1, 611.1-2, 611.1-3, or 611.1-4 shall be deemed to
meet the requirements orthis Section.
611.2 Structural Roof Sheathing
Structural roof sheathing shall be designed in accordance

with the general provisions of this chapter and the special
provisions in this section. Strnctural roof sheathing shall
be designed to support all loads specified in this code and
shall be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not
less than 1.33 kN without failure. The concentrated load
shall he applied by a loaded disk, 75 mm or smaller in
diameter.
Det1ection of structural roof sheathing under uniform

design live and dead load shall be limited lo 1/180 of the
span between supporting rafters or beams and 1/240 under
live load only.
Roof sheathing confonning to the provisions of

Tables 611.1-1 or 611.1-2 and 611.1-3 shall be deemed to
meet the requirements of this Section.
Wood structural panel roof sheathing shall he bonded by

intermediate or exterior glue. Wood structural panel roof
sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with
exterior glue.

CHAPTER 6-Wood 6-19
I
Table 611.1-1 Allowable Spans for Lumber Floor and Roof Sheathing
Minimum Net Thickness(mm) ofLumher Placed
Perpendicular lo Supports Diagonally to Supports
Span
Surfaced Dry' I Surfaced Unseasoned I
Surfaced Dry 2
I Surfaced Unscasoiled
FLOOR
600 20 I 20 I 20 I 20
400 16 l IX I 16 I 18
ROOF
600 16 I 18 I 20 I 20
Floor or ,w,fsheathing conforming lo this table shall be deemed to mef'l ihe design criteria ofSection ti{ I.
Maxirm,m J9% moisrure ,·onten1.
Table 611, 1-2 Allowable Spans and Loads for Wood Structural Panel Sheathing and Single-Flour Grades Continuous Over
1 2
Two or More Spans with Strength Axis Perpendicular to Supports •
Sheathing Grades ROOF 3 FLOOR •

Panel Span Load 5 (kN/m2)
Maximum Span (mm) Maximum Span
Rating Panel Thickness
Roof/Floor Span (mm) With Edge Without Edge (mm)
Total Load Live Load
(mm/mm) Support r. Support
300/0 8 300 300 1.92 1.44 0
400/0 8, 9 400 400 1.92 l.44 0
500/0 8, 9 500 500 1.92 1.44 ()
600/0 JO, 12 600 500' l.92 l.44 0

600/400 12 600 600 2.40 1.92 400
800/400 12, 16 800 700 1.92 1.44 400"
16, 20, 22 1000 800 1.92 1.44 500/J, 9
1000/500
1200/600 20, 22 1200 900 2.16 1.68 600
1350/800 22, 25 1350 1000 2.16 l.6X 800
1500/1200 22, 25, 30 1500 1200 2.16 1.68 1200
Single-Floor Grades ROOF 3 FLOOR '
Panel Span Maximum S11im (mm) Load 5 (kN/m 2)
Rating(mm) Panel Thickness Maximum Span
(mm) With Edge Without F.dge (mm)
Roof/Floor Span Total Load Live Load
Support 6 Support
400 o.c. 12, 16 600 (>00 2.40 1.92 400
500 o.c. 16,20 800 800 1.92 1.44 500
600 o.c. 20 1200 900 J .68 1.20 600
800 o.c. 22 1200 1000 2.40 1.92 800
1200 o.c. 28,30 1500 1200 2.40 2.40 1200
Applies to punels 600 mm or wide1·.
Floor and roofsheathing conforming to this table shall be deemed to meet the design crit<,ria ofSeciion 6/ I.
Uniform load deflection limilations l//!10 o_fspan under Jive load plus dead load, 1/140 under live load on~y.
Panel edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove joints 01· shall be supported wirh blocking unless 6 mm minimum thickness
underlaymenl or 40 mm of appmved cellula,· or lightweight concmle is plm:ed over the subjloor. or fmish floor is 20 mm wood
strip. Allowable unffi.,rm load based on deflection of I1360 of span is 4.8 kN!nr. Note: rh1: span rating of 1200 mm on cenrer is
based on u total load of3.l kN/11/.
Allowable load at maicimum span.
Tongue-and-groove edges, panel edge clips (one midway between each support. except two equally spaced between supports 1200
mm on center), lumber hlockinK, or other. Only lumber blocking shall satisfy blocked diaphragms ,-equiremenrs.
For 12 mm panel, ma.timum span shall be 600 mm.
May be 600 mm on center where 20 mm wood strip flooring is inswl/ed at right angles t0Jois1.
May be 600 mm on center for floors where 40 mm of cellulw or lightweight concrete is applied over the panels.

Table 611.1-3 Allowable Loads for W ood Structural Panel Roof Sheathi ng Continuous Over Two or More Spans and
Strength Axis Parallel to Supports (Plywood structural panel~ are five-ply, live-layer unless otherwise noted) '· ·1
-
Panel Grade Th ickness (mm)
Maidmum Span
(mm)
Load at Maximum Span (kN/m 2)
Live Total
1.44
-
Structural l 12 600 0.96
5
2. l6j
12
12
600
600
1.68
1.92 1 2.40
1 -
16 600 3.35 3.83
20 600 4.31 4 .79
Other Grades Covered in 12 400 1.92 2.40
Ul3C Standard 23-2 or 23-3 12 600 0.96 1.20
12 600 1.20 l.44
16 600 1.925 2.40
5
16 600 2.16.s 2.63j

20 600 2.87'' 3. 1 l j
Roof.,heathing conjiJrmin1; to this table shall he deemed to meet the design criteria of Section 61 I.
Uni/im11 load dl:'jlection limitafinm. J/180 of span under /hoe load plus de,.u/ load. 11240 under live fond only EtiReS shall be
blocked with lumber or other approved type nfedJ!e supports.
For ,:omposite and jimr-ply plywood slruefural panel, load shall be reduced by O.72 l,Nlm 1.
Table 611.1 -4 Allowable Span for Wood Structural Panel Combination Subfl oor-Underfloor-Underlayment (Single Floor) '· 2
Panels Continuous over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Perpendicular to Supports
Maximum Spacing of Joists (mm)

Identification
400 500 600 800 1200
Species Group T hickness (m m)
r 12 16 20
11, III 16 20 22
IV 20 22 25
Span rating 400 o.c . 500 o.c. 600 o.c. 800 o.c. 1200 o.c.
Sj1ans Iimired to value shown because ofpossible effeus of concentrated loads. Allowable uniform loads based on deflection of /1360 o.fspan
is 4.8 kNlnl. Note-: the allowable toral uniform loud.for .W mm wood strul'/ural panels over j oists spaced 1200 mm on center is 3. J kN/m2•
Panel edges shall have approved tongue-and-,::rwve joints or shall he supported with bloclcing. unless 6 mm minimum thickness 11nderluymenl
or 38 mm nfapproved cellular or ligh tweighl concrete is placnl over the subjlonr, or.finish floor is 20 mm wood ship.
Floor panels conforming to this table shall be deemed to me111 the design c:riteria o.f'Section 61I.
Applir:able to all grodes o.f'sanded exterior·type plywood. See UBC Standard 23-2for p(ywnod species grnup1,·.
Appliwhle to 11ndl:'rlayment grade and C·C (pl11¥SedJ pl),1'11(J{u/, and sin1:lejl1Kir grade wood structural panel,.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines , Inc. (AS EP)

Table 611.1-5 Allowable Spans for Particleboard Subfloor and Combined Subfloor-Underlayment 1•2
Maximum Spacing of Supports (mm) J

Grade Thickness (mm)
Subfloor Combined Subfloor-Underlaym.ent 4• >
12 400 -
2-M-W 16 500 400
20 600 600
2-M-3 20 500 500
All panels are continuous over two or more spans.
Floor sheathing conforming to this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria <>,(Section 611
J
Uniform deflection limitation: 11360 ofthe span under 4.8 kN!m2 minimum load.
Edges shall have tongue-end-groove joints or shall be supported with blocking. The tongue-and-groove panels are installed with
the long dimension perpendicular to supports.
A finish wearing surface is 10 be applied to the top ofthe panel.
-- =- -- - - -- - - -- - I
- - ~ - . I
·"'

MECHANICALLY-LAMINATED POST- BEAM CONNECTIONS
FLOORS AND DECKS Where post and beam or girder construction is used, the
design shall be in accordance with the provisions of this
A laminated lumber floor or deck buill up of wood chapter. Positive connection shall be provided to ensure
members set on edge, when meeting the following against uplift and laleral displacemcnl.
requirements, may be designed as a solid floor or roof
deck of the same lhickness and conlinuous span may be
designed on the basis of the full cross section using the
simple span moment coefficient
Nail length shall not be less than 2Y2 times the net
thickness of each lamination. When deck supports arc
1.20 m on center or less, side nails shall he spaced not
more than 750 mm on center and staggered one-third of
the spacing in adjacent laminations. When supports arc
spaced more than l .20 m on center, side nails shall be
spaced not more than 450 mm on center alternately near
top and bottom edges, and also staggered one-third of the
spacing in adjacent laminations. Two side nails shall be
used at each end of butt-jointed pieces.
Laminations shall be toe-nailed to supports witl1 l 00 mm

or larger common nails. When supports are 1.20 m on
center or less, alternate laminations shall be toe-nailed to
altcrnale supports; when supports are spaced more than
1.20 m on center, alternate laminations shall be toe-nailed
to every support.
A single-span deck shall have all laminations full length.
A continuous deck of two spans shall not have more than

one splice every fourth lamination and placed within
quarter spans of adjoining supports.
Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered

across the deck but within the adjoining quarter spans.
No lamination shall be spliced more than twice in any

span.

PART II - REQUIREMENTS Where shear walls with openings are designed for force
translcr around the openings, the limitations of
APPLICABLE TO DESIGN OF Table 614.1-1 shall apply to the overall shear wall
WIND AND EARTHQUAKE LOAD- including openings an<l to each wall pier at the side or an
opening. The height of a wall pier shall be defined as the
RESISTING SYSTEMS clear height of the pier al the side of an opening. The
wi<llh or a wall pier shall be dclinctl as the sheathed width
SECTION 614 of the pier at the si<lc of an opening. Design for force
WOOD SHEAR WALLS AND transfer shall be based on a rational analysis.
DIAPHRAGMS Table 614.1-1 Maximum Diaphragm Dimension Ratios
614.t General l lorizonlal Vertical

Diaphragms Diaphragms
Unless permilled by the Building Official or by relevant Material Maximum Maximum
provisions of NSCP Volume m - Housing, use of wood
Span-Width Height-Width
shear walls and diaphragms shall be limited to I to 2-story
Ratios Ralios
dwellings. Where applicable, succeeding provisions of
I. Diagonal sheathing, 1
this Section shall be used as bases for their design. 3:1 1:1
conventional
Pa11icleboard vertical diaphragms and lumber and wood 2. Oiagonl:11 shealhing, 1
4:l 2:1
structural panel horizontal and vertical diaphragms may sped at
be used to resist horizontal forces in horizontal and 3. Wood structural panels
1
vertical distributing or resisting clements, provided the and particleboard, nailed 4:1 2:1
deflection in the plane of the diaphragms, as determined · all edges
by calculations, tests or analogies drawn therefrom, does 4. Wood structural panels
not exceed the permissible deflection of attached and particleboard, j
4:1
distributing or resisting elements. blocking omittc::d at
intermediate joints.
Permissible detlection shall be that deflection up to which I ..
Jn Se1.1m1c Zone 2. the maximum ratio may be 2.1 .
a diaphragm and any auached distributing or resisting in Seismic Zone 2, the maximum ratiu may he 30: 1.
clement will maintain its structural integrity under Not permilled.
assumed load conditions, i.e. continue to support assumed
loads without danger to occupant of the structure. In buildings of wood-frame construction where rotation
is provided for, the depth of the diaphragm normal to the
Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the
open side shall not exceed 7.50 m or two-thirds the
design forces shall he provided between the diaphragms
and the resisting elements. Openings in diaphragms which diaphragm width, whichever is the smaller depth.
materially affect their strength shall be fully detailed on Straight sheathing shall not he permitted to resist shears
the plans and shall have their edges ade4uatcly reinforced in diaphragms acting in rotation.
to transier all shearing stresses.
Exceptions:
Size and shape of each horizontal diaphragm and shear
wall shall be limited as set forth in Table 614.1-1. The I. One-story, wood-framed structures with the depth
height of a shear wall shall be defined as: normal to the open side not greater than 7.50 m. may
I. The maximum clear height from foundation to have a depth equal to the width.
bottom of diaphragm framing above, or 2. Where calculations show that diaphragm deflections
2. The maximum clear height from top of diaphragm to can be tolerated, the depth normal to the open end
bottom of diaphragm framing above. may be increased lo a depth-to-width ratio not
greater than l'h:1 for diagonal sheathing or 2:1 for
The width of a shear wall shall be defined as !.he width of special diagonal sheathed or plywood or
sheathing. particleboard diaphragms.
In maso111y or concrete buildings, !umber and wood

stmctural panel diaphragms shall not be considered as
transmitting lateral forces by rotation.
z
Diaphragm sheathing nails or other a pproved sheathing 614.3 Wood Diaphrngms

conneclors shall be driven flush but shall not fracture the
surface of the sheathing. Wood diaphragms shall conform to the following
guidelines:
614.2 Wood Members Resisting florizontal Forces
Contributed by Masonry and Concrete 614.3.1 Conventional Lumber Diaphragm
Construction
Wood membe rs shall not he used to resist horimntal
forces contributed by masonry or concrete construction in Such lumber diaphragms shall be made up of 25 mm
buildings over one story in height. nominal shea thing boards laid a t an angle of
approximately 45 degrees lo s upports. S heathing boards
Exceptions:
shall be direclly nailed lo each imermecliate bearing
J. Wood floor and roof members may be used in member with nut less than two 65-nmi nails for 25 mm hy
horizontal trusses and diaphragms to resist 150 mm nominal boards and three 65-mm nails for boards
horizontal forces imposed by wind, earthquake or 200 mm or wider; and in addition, three 65-mm nails and
earth pressure, provided such .forces are not four 65-mm nails shall be used for 150 mm and 200 mm
reJ·isted by rotation ofthe truss or diaphragm. boards, respec tively, al the diaphragm boundaries. End
joints in adjace nt boa rds shall be sepa rated by at least one
2. Vertical wood stmclur(I/ panel-sheathed shear
walls may be used to provide resistance to wind or joist or stud space, and there shall be at least two boards
ec,rthquake forces i11 two-sto1J• buildings of between joints on the same support. Boundary mem bers
ma,~0111y or concrete constn1c1io11, provided the at edges of diaphragms shall be designed tu resist direct
following requirements are met tensi le or compressive c hurd stresses and adequately tied
together at corners.
a. Story-to-story wall heights shall not exceed
3.6m. 614.3.2 Special Lumber Diaphragm Construction
b. Horizontal diaphrag m shall not be Special diagonally s heathed diaphragms shall conform to
considered to transmit lateral forces by conventional cons1ruction and in addition, shall have all
rotation or cantilever action. elements des igned in conformance with Lhe provis ions of
this chapter.
c. Deflection of horizontal and vertical
diaphragms shall not permit per~story .Each chord or pottion thereof maybe cons idered as a
deflection of supported masonry or concrete beam loaded with a uniform load per mete r cqunl lo 50
walls to e.xceed 0.0025 times each story percent of the unit shear clue lo diaphragm action. The
height. load shall be assumed as acting nom1al to the chord, in lhe
plane of the d iaphragm and either towards o r away fro m
d. Wood structural panel sheathing in the diaphragm.
horizontal diaphragms shall have all
unsupported edges blocked. Wood structural The span of chord, o r portion thereof, shall be the distance
panel sheathi11g f or both stories of verlicci! between structural members of the diaphragm such as the
diaphragms shall have all unsupported edges joists, studs a nd blocking, which serve to transfer the
blocked a11d for rhe lower-story walls shall assumed load tu the sheathing.
have a minimum thick11ess of 12 mm.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall include
e. There shall be no out-qf-plane horizontal conventional diaphragms sheathed with two layers of
offsets between the first and second stories of diagonal sheathing at 90 degrees to each other and _o n the
wood structural panel shear walls. same face of the supporting me mbers.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (AS EP)

614.3.3 Wood Structural Panel Diaphragm Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance
with Table 611.1-4 shall not be considered as blocked
Horizontal and vertical diaphragms sheathed with wood diaphragms unless blocking or other means or shear
structural panels may be used to resist horizontal forces transfer is provided.
for horizontal diaphragm and for vertical diaphragms, or
may be calculaled by principles of mechanics without 614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms in
limitation by using values of nail strcn1;,rth and wood Seismic Zone 4
structural panel shear values as specified elsewhere in this
chapter. Wood structural panels for horizontal diaphragms Section 614.5.1 to 614.5.5 shall be used for wooden shear
shall be as set forlh in Tables 611.1-2 and 611.1-3 for walls and diaphragms design in Seismic Zone 4 areas.
corresponding joist spacing and loads. Wood structural
panels in,;hcar walls shall be al least 8 mm thick for studs 614.5.1 Scope
spaced 400 mm on center and 9 mm thick where studs are
spaced 600 mm on center. Design and construction of wood shear walls and
diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4, as allowed by provisions
Maximum spans for wood structural panel suhfloor of Section 614.1 and NSCP Volume Ill - llousing, shall
undcrlayment shall be as set forth in Table 611.1-4. Wood conform to the requirements of this section.
structural panels used for horizontal and vertical
diaphragms shall conform to UBC Standard 23-2 and 614.5.2 Framing
UBC Standard 23-3 or equivalent PNS.
Collector members shall be provided lo transmit tension
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced and compression forces. Perimeter members at openings
where necessary to transmit direct stresses. Framing shall he provided and shall he detailed to distrihute lhe
members shall be at least 50-mm nominal in the shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing shall not be used
dimension to which the plywood is attached. In general, to splice these members.
panel edge!; shall bear on the framing members and hull
along their centerlines. Nails shall be placed not less than Diaphragm chords and tics shall be placed in, or tangent
IO mm from the panel edge, shall he spaced not more than to, the plane of the diaphragm framing unless it can be
150 mm on center along panel edge bearings, and shall be demonstrated that the moments, shear and deflections and
firmly driven into the framing members. No unhlockcd deformations resulting from other arrangements can be
panels Jess than 300 mm wide shall he used. tolcraled.
Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance
614.5.3 Wood Strµctural Panel
with Tables 611.1-2, 61 1.1-3 and 611.1-4 shall not be
considered as blocked diaphragms unless blocking or Wood stmctural panels shall be manufactured using
other means of shear transfer is provided.
exterior glue.
614.4 Pnrticleboard Diaphragms Wood structural panel diaphragms and shear walls shall
be constructed with wood structural panel sheets not less
Vertical diaphragms sheathed with particleboard may be than 1.20 m hy 2.40 m, except al boundaries and changes
used to resist horizontal forces. in framing where minimum sheet dimension shall be 600
mm unless all edges of the undersized sheets are
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced supported by framing members or blocking.
where necessary to transmit direct stresses. Framing
members shall be at leasl 50-mm nominal in the Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the
dimension to which the particleboard is atta(;hcd. In edges of all sheets in shear walls.
general, panel edges shall bear on the framing members
and bull along their centerlines. Nails shall be placed not Wood structural panel sheathing may be used for splicing
less than IO mm from the panel edge, shall be spaced not members, other than those noted in Section 614.5.2,
more than 150 mm on center along panel edge bearings, where the additional nailing required to develop the
and shall be firmly driven into the framing memhcrs. transfer of forces will not cause cross-grain bending or
Unblocked panels less than 300 mm wide shall not be cross-grain tension in the nailed member.
allowed or used.
4
614.S.4 Heavy Wood Panels shall be backed . with 50 m_m nomina.1 or wider framing.
Sheets :ire pcn111ttcd lo he 111stalled either horizontally or
Diagonally sheathed panels utilizing 50-mm nomi nal verticall y. l'or I 0-mm particleboard sheets inst.ailed with
boards may be used to resist the same permissible shear as the long dimension parallel 10 the studs spaced 600 mm
25-mrn nominal lumber, except that 90 mm nails shall be on center, nails shall be spaced at 150 mm on center along
used instead or 65 mm. intermediate framing members. For all other conditions
nails of the same size shall he spaced at JOO mm on ccnte,'.
Panels utili1.ing straight decking overlaid wi1h plywood along intermediate framing members.
may be used to resist shear forces using the some shear
values as permiucd for the wood structural panel alone. 614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms
Wood stnictural panel joints parallel to the decking shall
be located at least 25 mm onset from any parnllel decking Wood stud walls sheathed with fiberboard sheathing may
joint. be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set
forth in this chapter. TI1c fihcrboorcl sheathing, 1.2 m by
Heavy decking panels utilizing dowel pins, or vertically 2.4 m, shall be applied vc11ically to wood studs 1101 less
laminated panels connected by nailing units to one than 50 mm nominal in thickness spaced 400 mm on
another, resist shear forces based on the permissible shear center. Nailing shown in Table 6 14.6-1 shall be provided
values of Lheir connectors. at 1hc- perimeter of the sheathing board and at the
intermediate s tuds. Blocking of not less than 50-mm
614.5.5 Particleboard nominal lhickncss shttll be provided al horiirontnl joints
when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel, ond
Particleboard shall not he Jess than Type M "Exterior sheathing shall be fostcncd to the blocking with noils
G lue" . sized as shown in Table 6 16.6- 1 spaced 75 mm on centers
each side or joint. Nails shall be spaced not less than IO
Shear walls shall be sheathed with particleboard sheets mm from edges and ends of sheathing. Marginal studs of
not less than 1.20 m by 2.40 m except at boundaries and shear walls or shear-resisting elements shall be adequately
changes in framing. The required nail size and spacing in anchored at the top and bottom and designed to resist all
Table 6 19.3-1 apply to panel edges only. All panel edges forces. The maximum height-width ratio shaJI be I ~: I .
Table 6 14.6-1 Allowable Shears for Wind or Seismic Loading on Vertical Diaphragms of Fiberboard Sheathing Board for
Type V Construction Only I
Shear Value in 75 mm Nail Spaciog

Size and Application Nail Size Around Perimeter and 150 mm at
Intermediate Points, (N/mm)
12 x I 200 x 2400 mrn Galvani1.cd roofing nail 40 mm long, IO mm head 182 i
20 x I 200 x 2400 mm Galvanized roofi ng nail 45 mm long, IO mm head 256
Fiberboard sheathing diaphragms shall not be u.~ed to brace concrrde or masonry walls.
The shear value may be 780 N fo,· 12 hy 1200 by 2400 mm fiberboard nail-ba.~e sheathing.

CHAPTER 6 -- Wood 6 -27
SECTION 615 615.3.2 Load Duration Faclor, Cn

DESIGN VALUES FOR 615.3.2.1 Wood has the property of carrying substantia lly
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS greater maximum loads for short durations than for long
durations or loading. Reforenc.:c dc!iign values apply to
615.1 General normal load duration. Normal load duralion repre!ients a
load that Ii.illy sLrcsses a member to its allowahle des ign
615. l.l General Requirement
value hy the application or lhc full design load fu r a
Each wood structural member or connection shall be of cumulative duration of approximately ten years. When the
sufficient size and capacity to carry the applied loads cumulative duration of the full maximum load does not
without exceeding the adjusted design values specified exceed the spccificd time period, all reference des ign
herein. values except modulus of elasticity, E, modulus or
elasticity for beam and column !>tabilily, Emin• and
Calculalion of adjusted design valm:s shall he determined
using the applicable adjustment factors specified herein. compression perpendicular to grain, F cl, based on a
deformation limit (see 617.2.6) shall be multiplied by the
615.1.2 Responsibility of Designer to Adjust for appropriate load duration factor, C0 , from Tahle 615. 3-1
Conditions of Use to take into account the change in strength of wood w·iLh
changes in load duration.
Adjusted design values for wood members and
connections in particular end uses shall be appropriate tor (jl 5.3.2.2 The load duration factor, C0 , for the shortest
the conditions under which the wood is used, taking into duration load in a combination of loads shall apply for
account the dillercm:es in wood strength properties with that load combination. All applicahle load combinations
different moisture contents, load durations, and types of shall be evaluat<:d to determine the critical I<,ad
treatment. Common end use conditions are addressed in combination. Design of structural members and I
this Specification. Il shall be the final responsibility of the connections shall be based on the critical oad
designer to relate design as!>umptions and reference combination.
design values, and to make design value adjustments
appropriate lo the end use. 615.3.2.3 The load duration factors, Cn., in Table 615. 3-1
are independent of load comhination factors, and bulh
615.2 Reference Design Values shall be permitted to he used in design calculations.
Reference design values arc set forth in Table 615.2-1. Table 615.3-1 Load Ouration Factors 1• C0
Stress grading may be based on Table 615 .2-3. Design
Load Duration Co Typical Design Loads
value adjustments for wood products are based on
methods specified in each of the wood product sections. Permanent 0.9 Dead J.oad
Sections 617 lo 618 contain design provisions for sawn Ten years 1.0 Occupancy Live Load
lumber and glued laminated timber. Section 619 contains Seven days 1.25 Construction Load
design provisions for connections. Relercncc design
One day 1.33 Emthquake Load '
I
values are for normal load duration under the moisture
service conditions specified. One day 1.33 Wind Load (Connections
and Fasteners only)
615.3 Adjustment of Reference Design Values Ten minutes 1.60 Wind Load (members)
Impact 2.0 Impact Load
615.3.1 Applicability of Adjustment Factors I
When using the Alternative llllsic Load Combinatiom of
Chapter 2, 1h11 one-third im:rease shall no/ he 11sed
Relerencc design values shall be multiplied by all <:oncurrently wi//1 the Load D11rofio11 Factor, Cn,
applicable adj ustmcnt factors lo determine adjusted 1
Lolld duration .{lie/or greater ilwn 1.6 shall not apply' to
design values. The applicability of adjustment factors for St/'llcluml members presnire-tremed with water·borne
sawn lumber and structural glued laminated timber is preserrntives or fire retardant chemicals. Tl,e impact load
dura1im1 shall not apply 10 1:onnections.
defined in Section 617 to 618.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. First Printing, 2015
'
G
615.3.3 Temperature Factor, C,
Reference design values shall be multiplied by the

kmperature factors, Ct, in Table 615.3-2 for structural
members that will experience suslaincd exposure to
elevated temperatures up to 66°C.
Table 61 5.3-2 Temperature Factor, Cc
Reference In Service Ct
Design Moisture < S2° :::;66°
Values Conditions' T :::; 38°C T - T
> 38° >52°
Ft, E Wet or Dry 1.0 0.90 0.90
F b, Fv, Dry l.O 0.80 0.70
Fe and Fc1. Wet 1.0 0.70 0.50

I
Wet service condition for SHWII lumber is defined as in service
moisnire contt:nt greater than 19%. Wet. i;ervice condition for glued
laminated timber is defined aS in service moisture content of J6%
or 1:,rreatc:r.
615.3.4 Fire Retardant treatment
The effects of fire retardant chemical treatment on

strength shall be accounted for in the design. Adjusted
design values, including adj uste<l connection design
values, for lumber and structural glued laminated timber
pressure-treated with fire retardant chemicals shall be
obtained from the company providing the treatment and
redrying service. Load duration factors greater than l .6
shall not apply to structural members pressure-treated
with fire retardant chemicals. (See Table 615.3-l)

Table 615.2-1 Reference Values for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods'
80% Sti·ess G.-adc
Bending and Modulus of Compression Compression Shear
Species Tensiun Elasticity in Parallel to Perpcndkular Parallel lo
(Common and Botanical Names) Poralltl to Bending Grain to Grain Grain
Grain
Fb,F, E F, F,, Fv
MPa x IOJ MPa MPa MPa MPa
I. Hii::h Strength Group
/\goho (Casuarina equitetifolia Forsl) 26.3 8.22 14.S 5.91 2.95
Liusin (Parinari corymbosa (Dlumc) Miq.) 25.0 9.36 15.6 4.31 2.64
Malahayahas (Tristania spp.) 21!.7 8.30 15.8 8.70 3.02
Manggachapui (llopea spp.) 25.8 9.63 16.0 6.03 2.78
Molave (Vi lex parviflora Juss.) 24.0 6.54 15.4 6.34 2.81\
Narig (Vatica spp.) 21.!! lU3 13.7 4.97 2.61
Sasalit [Teijma1mioden<lron ahcmianum (Merr) Bkh.] 31.3 9.72 21,60 J0.2 3.38
Yakal (Shorca spp.) 24.5 9.7R 15.8 6.27 2.49
II. Mudcr11tely High Strength Group
Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) 18.6 5.35 10.8 3.90 2.06
Bingga~ (Tcrminalia spp.) 18.9 6.57 11.4 3.27 2.24
Bokbok [Xanthophyllum tm:dsum (Blume) Miq.] 18.1 6.36 11.J 3.41 2.IR
Dao (Oracontomelon spp.) 16.2 5.43 9.44 2.27 1.92
Gatasan [Garcinia venulosa (Blanco) Choisy] 20.8 6.84 13.5 3.52 2.36
Guijo (Shorea ~pp.) 21.8 8.47 13.2 4.26 2.40
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 20.9 7.20 11.7 4.39 2.47
Kamatog lErythrophloeum densillorum (Elm) Men.] 19.0 7.56 11.2 3.95 2.35
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 18.8 6.82 11.9 4.84 2.29
Kalo (Amoora spp.) 18.4 8.04 10.6 3.46 1.96
Lomarau (Swintonia foxworthyi Elm.) 19.R 7.92 I l.K 2.98 2.18
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swieteniu ma1:rophylla King) 16.5 4.66 10.5 3.83 2.71
Makaasim (Sysygium nitidum Benlh) 20.S 6.72 11.4 3.70 2.40
Malakauayan {Decusocarpus philippinensis (Foxw.) de Laub.] 18.9 6.66 11.12 2.32 2.14
NaiTa (Plerocarpus indicus Willd) ll\.O 5.94 l 1.4 3.07 1.91
Pahutan (Mangifora spp.) 16.6 6.53 10.0 2.50 2.05
Ill. Medium Strength Group
i\pitong (Dipterocarpus spp.) 16.S 7.31 . 9.56 2.20 l.73
Bagtikan f Parashorca malaanonan (Blanco) Mcrr.J 16.6 6.48 9.89 2.33 1.82
J>angkalan (Calophyllum spp.) 16.3 6.38 9.20 2.48 1.98
Gisau (Canarium spp.) 14.3 5.33 8.16 1.99 1.90
Lanutan-hagyo fGonystylus macrophyllum (miq.) Airy Shaw] 15.0 6.06 8.96 2.02 1.84
Lauan (Shorca spp.) 13.9 5.l\3 8.lR 1.72 1.48
Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) 13.R 5.41 8.54 1.96 1.59
Malasaging (Aglaia spp.) 16.8 5.94 9.51 2.92 I.KS
Malugai (Pometia spp) 15.4 6.30 9.33 3.07 2.07
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) 15.7 6.50 8.83 2.71! 2.06
Nall> (Palaquium spp.) !6.2 S.56 9.17 2.33 1.98
Palosapis (Anisoptcra spp.) 13.8 5.98 !!.38 2.73 1.68
Pine (Pin,1& spp.) 14.7 6.66 8.29 l.8R 1.56
Salakin (Aphanumixis spp.) 15.7 5.67 8.83 2.94 1.88
Vidal latmtan {Hibiscus campylosiphon Turc:i:. var. glabrecens
(Har. Ex. Perk.) J 19.5 5.83 8.54 2.65 2.39
IV. Moderately I.ow Stren1,'1h Group
Almaciga [Aguthis dammara (Lamh.) Rilh.J I I.I! .5.47 6.27 1.44 1.47
Bayok (Pterospermum spp.) 12.6 4.75 7.33 1.30 1.20
Lingo-lingo (Vitex turc:taninowii Meir.) 13.2 4.13 6.85 2.00 1.66
Mangasinorn (Shorca spp.) 12.R 5.36 7.46 1.97 l.44
Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) MeJT.] 11.9 2.75 7.23 3.32 2.07
Yemanc (Gmelina arborea R. Br.) 12.6 4.09 7.87 3.40 1.96
I See Table 615.2-2/m· Reference /laluesjiJ1' Other Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Srruct11ral Timher ofPhilippine Woods
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, First Printing, 2015
<
Table 615.2-l (Cont'd) Reference Values for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods'
63'1n Stress Grade
Bending and Moduh.1sor Compression Compression Shear
Species Tension Elasticity in Parallel to Perpendicular Parallel to
Parallel to Bending Grain to Grain G,·ain
(Common and Botanical Names)
Grain
F1,,F1 E F, FcJ. Fv
MPa x 10 MPa Mra MPa MPa
l. High Strength Group

Agoho (Casuarina equiselifolia Forst) 20.7 6.47 11.4 4.65 2.32
l.iusin [Parinari corymbosa (Ulume) Miq.] 19.7 7.37 12.3 J.39 2.08
22.6 6.53 12.5 6.85 2.38
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.)
20.) 7.58 12.6 4.75 2.19
Manggachapui (Hopea spp.)
18.9 5.15 12.1 5.00 2.27
Molave (Virex parviflora Juss.)
17.2 6.56 10.8 3.92 2.06
Na rig (Vutica spp.)
Sasalit [Teijma1111iodcudron ahemianum (Merr) Bkh.J 24.7 7.65 17.0 R.07 2.67
19.3 7.70 12.0 4.94 1.96
Yakal (Shorea spp.)
ll. Moderately High Strength Group
14.7 4.21 8.53 3.07 1.62
Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.)
14.9 5.17 8.91! 2.57 1.77
Binggas (Terminalia spp.)
Uokbok (Xanthophyllum cxccls11m (Blume) Miq.) 14.3 5.01 8.90 2.68 J.72
12.l\ 4.28 7.43 1.79 1.51
Dao (Dracontomclon spp.)
Uatasan ((;arcinia venulosa (Blanco) Choisyj 16.4 5.39 l0.6 2.77 1.86
17.1 6.67 10.4 3.35 J.89
Guijo (Shorca spp.)
16.6 S.67 9.21 3.46 1.95
Kamagong (Oiospyros spp.)
Kamatog (Erythrophloe11m dcnsiflorum (Elm) Merr.] 15.0 5.95 8.79 3.11 1.8'.'i
14.8 5.37 9.3R 3.RI 1.80
Katmon (Dillenia spp)
14.5 6.33 8.34 2.73 1.54
Kato(Amoora spp.)
15.6 6.24 930 2.34 1.71
Lomarau (Swintonia fox.worthyi Elm.)
Mahogany, Dig-leafed (Swintonia macrophylla King) 13.0 3.67 R.24 3.01 2.13
16.1 5.29 8.95 2.92 J.89
Makaasim (Sysygium nititlum Bcnth)
Malakauayan [Dec11socarp11s philippincnsis (foxw.) de Laub.] 14.9 5.24 8.79 1.83 1.69
14.2 4.68 8.97 2.42 1.51
Narra (Pterocarpus indicus Willd)
13.1 5.15 7.8R J.97 1.61
Pahutan (Mangi lera spp.)
111. Medium Strength Group
/\pitong (OipLerocarpus spp.) 13.0 5.76 7.53 1.73 1.36
5.10 7.79 1.84 1.43
Bagtikan f Parashorea malaanonan (Blanco) Merr.) 13.1
12.8 S.03 7.24 1.96 1.56
Dangkalan (Calophyllum spp.)
11.2 4.20 6.41 1.56 1.49
Gisau (Canarium spp.)
l.anulan-bagyo [Gonystylus macrophyllum (miq.) i\iry Shaw] 11.8 4.77 7.06 1.59 1.45
J0.9 4.59 6.44 1.35 1.17
Lauan (Shorea spp.)
10.9 4.26 6.72 1.54 1.25
Malaanonang (Shorea spp.)
13.3 4.68 7.49 2.30 1.46
Malasagiog (Aglaia spp.)
12.1 4.96 7.35 2.42 1.63
Malugai (Pomelia spp.)
12.3 5.12 6.96 2.19 1.62
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.)
12.7 4.38 7.22 1.84 1.56
Nato (Palaquium spp.)
10.9 4.71 6.60 2.15 1.33
Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.)
11.6 5.24 6.53 1.48 1.23
Pine (Pious spp.)
12.4 4.47 6.96 2.32 1.48
Salakin (Apbanamixis spp.)
Vidal lanutan (Hibiscus campylosiphon Turcz. var. glahreccns
4.59 6.73 2.09 1.88
(Har. Ex. Perk.) I 15.4
JV. Moderately Low Strength Group
9.26 4.30 4.94 1.13 1.16
Almuciga j/\gathis dummara (Lainh.) Rilh.J
9.94 3.74 5.78 1.03 0.95
Rayok (Ptcrospermum spp.)
10.4 .3.25 5.39 I.SR 131
Lingo-lingo (Vitex turczaninowii Mcrr.)
10.0 4.22 5.87 1.55 1.14
Mangasinoro ( Shorea spp.)
9.37 2.16 5.70 2.61 1.63
Raintrcc [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Mc1T.]
9.90 3.22 6.20 2.68 1.55
Ycmane (Gmelina arbo(ea R. Br.)
I See Table 615.Z-2.fur Reference Values for Other Visually S1ress-Graded Unseasoned Siructural Timber o.f'Philippine Wood~
.
Table 615.2-1 (Cont'd) Reference Values for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods'
50% Sh'ess Grade
Bending mad ModulusCJf Compression Compression Shear
Species Tcn~ion Elasticily in Par•allcl to Perpendicular Parallel to
(Common and Botanical Names) Parallel 10 Bending Grain to Gn1in Grain
Grain
Fb,F, E F, FcJ. F.,
MPa x IO' MPa MPa MPa MPa
l. High Strength Group
Agoho (Casuarina equisetifolia Forst) 16.4 S.14 9.06 3.69 1.84
Liusin [Parinari corymbosa (Blume) Miq. I 1.5.6 S.85 9376 2.69 l.65
Malahayabas (Tristania spp.) 17.9 5.19 9390 5.44 l.89
Manggachapui (llopea spp.) 16.1 6.02 10.0 3.77 1.74
Molave (Vitex 1mvillora Juss.) 15.0 4.09 9.60 3.96 l.80
Nijrig (Vatica spp.) 13.6 5.20 8.59 3.11 1.6)
Sasalit [Teijmannioclen<lmn ahcrnianum (Mcrr) Bkh.) 19.6 6.0fl 13.5 6.40 2.12
Yakal (Shorea spp.) I 5.3 3. II 9.55 3.92 1.55
11. Moderately High Strength Group
Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) l 1.6 3.34 6.77 2.44 1.29
Ringgas (Tcrminalia spp.) l l.l! 4.11 7.13 2.04 1.40
Rokbok (Xa11thophyllum exc:dsum (Blume) Miq.J 11.3 3.97 7.06 2.13 1.36
Dao (Dracontomelon spp.) 10.l 3.39 5.90 1.42 l.20
Galasan [Garcinia venulosa (Rlanco) Choisyj 13.0 4.27 8.42 2.20 l.47
Gu\io (Shorea spp.) 13.6 5.30 8.22 2.66 l.50
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 13.1 4.50 7.3 l 2.74 1.54
Kamatog [Erythrophloeum dcnsiflornm (Elm) Merr. J 11.9 4.72 6.9K 2.47 1.47
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 11.7 4.26 7.44 3.03 1.43
Kato (Amoora spp.) 11.5 5.02 6.62 2.17 1.23
Lomarau (Swintonia liixworlhyi Elm.) 12.4 4.95 7.38 2.1\6 1.36
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swintonia mac:rophylla King) 10.3 2.91 6.54 2.39 1.69
Makaasim (Sysygium niti<lum Ben th) 12.8 4.20 7.10 2.31 1.50
Malakauayan (Decusocarpus philippinensis (Foxw.) de Laub.] 11.!! 4.16 6.98 1.45 1.34
Nana (Pterocarpus indicus Wille!) I 1.2 .,.71 7.12 1.92 1.20
Puhutan (Mangilera spp.) I0.4 4.08 6.25 1.56 1.28
Ill. Medium Strength Group
Apitong Diplcrocarpus spp.) I0.3 4.57 5.97 1.37 1.08
13agtikan [Parashorca malaanonan (Blanco) Mcrr.] I0.4 4.05 6.18 1.46 1.14
Dangkalan (Calophyllum spp.) 10.2 3.99 5.75 1.55 1.24
Gisau (Canarium spp.) l!.93 .1.33 5.10 J.24 1.18
Lanutan-hagyo IGooystylus macrophyllum (miq.) Airy ShawJ 9.39 3.79 S.60 J.26 1.15
I.auan (Shorca spp.) 8.61! J.64 5.11 1.07 0.93
Malaanonang (Sho~a spp.) 8.63 3.38 5.34 1.23 0.99
Malasaging ( Aglaia spp.) 10.5 3.71 5.95 U!3 l.16
Malugai (Pometia spp.) 9.62 3.94 5.83 1.92 1.30
Miau (J>ysoxylum spp.) 9.80 4.06 S.52 1.74 1.29
Nalo (Palaquium spp.) IO.l 3.48 5.73 1.46 1.24
Palosapis (Anisoptcra spp.) 8.65 3.73 5.24 l.70 1.05
Pine (Pin us spp.) 9.19 4.16 5.1 g 1.18 0.98
Salakio (Aphimamixis spp.) 9.83 3.54 5.52 1.84 1.18
Vidal lanutan !Hibiscus campylosiphon Turcz. var. glabrccens
(Har. Ex. Perk.) ) 12.2 3.64 5.34 1.66 1.50
IV. Moderately Low Strength G1·oup
Almaciga (Agathis darnmara (Lamh.) Rilh.] 7.35 3.42 3.92 0.90 0.92
Bayok (Pterospennum spp.) 7.89 2.97 4.58 O.RI 0.75
Lingo-lingo (Vi1ex turci:aninowii Merr.) 8.27 2.58 4.28 1.25 1.04
Mangasiooro (Shorea spp.) 7.98 3.35 4.66 1.23 0.90
Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr.J 7.43 1.72 4.52 2.o7 1.30
7.86 2.55 4.92 2.13 1.23
Ycmam: (G111clina arborea R. Br.)
I See Table 615.2-2/or Reference Values for Other Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timher of Philippine Woodf
<
11
a ues f,or V'1suaII •Stress-GradetIU nseasonedS tructura Timber ofPhT
Tab Ie 61 5.2- 2 Re fiercnce VI I inome Woods ·
Additional Species 80% ~~rRESS GRADE 50% STRESS GRADE
(Common and Botanical Names) Fb,Ft E F, F,J. Fv Fb,F, E F, FcJ. Fp
-- -
MPa
-
GPa
- --
MPa
-- -
MPa MPa
- -
MPa
---
ora MPa
-
MPa MPs
I High Strength Gro11p
A. Commerci1tl Species
Alupag 8JTIO I Litchi chinensis Soon. ssp. philippineosis
28.13 7.98 9.74 6.39 3.49 17.58 4.99 6.09 4.00 2.18
(Radlk)Lccnh. \
Ata-ata (Diospyros mindanu.msis Mcrr.) 27.00 8.28 . . . 16.!!7 S.J 8 . .
Bakauun (RJ1in,phord apiculata Blume) 31.45 9.60 8.90 6.30 3.05 19.65 6.00 5.56 3.93 1.90
Katilmn (Diospyros nitida Mcrr) 26.17 8.31 8.03 3.54 2.66 16.35 5.19 5.02 2.21 J.li6
Kubi {Artocarpus nilidus Trccc. spp. niti<lus) 31.21 7.92 l 1.04 5.47 2.RS 19.Sl 4.95 6.90 3.42 1.78
Narig (Vatica n11111gaclmpoi 13lunco ssp. ma11gach11poi) 24.47 8.15 9. 13 4.19 2.44 IS.29 5.09 5.70 2.62 l.53
Narig, Thick lcafet.l (Vutica pcchyphylla Merr) 27.04 R.34 J0.29 6.42 2.89 16.90 5.21 6.43 4.01 1.81
Tiga (Tristeniopsis micrantha (Merr) Wils. & Waterh. I :ll.92 9.00 I0.18 9.71 :l.41 19.95 5.63 636 6.07 2.13
Tindalo [Afzelia rhomboi<lca (Rlanco) Vid.] 30.17 8.R8 11.39 7.56 3.41 18.86 5.55 7.12 4.73 2.13
Yakal (Shorea astylosa Foxw.) 25.05 9.92 10.14 6.72 2.33 !5.66 6.20 6.34 4.20 l.46
Yakal-yamban (Shore11 falcifcroides ssp. fokifcroidcs) 29.17 9.50 9.81 6.31 2.43 18.23 5.94 6.l3 3.94 1.52
Y11kal-malibato (Shorea malibato Foxw) 38.22 R.70 10.14 6.15 2.64 23.89 5.44 6.34 3.84 l.65
Yakal-saplungan IHopea plagala (J:llanco) Vid.} 41.79 l lJ& 12.76 9.00 2.91 26.12 6.99 7.97 5.62 1.82
Diospyros sp. 24.67 7.98 8.48 5.71 2.64 15.42 4.99 5.30 3.57 l.65
B. Lnser-Known Specie.~
Anl~oan (Cassi~javanica L. ~sp. javenica) 27.47 7.li2 9.44 5.08 3.00 17.17 4.76 5.90 3.17 1.87
Arangen fGam1phyllum obliquum {Blanco) Mw.J 26.85 7.86 9.82 6.88 3.00 16.78 4.91 6.1 4 4.30 1.87
Bansilui (Ochna foxworthyi Elm) 27.99 9.24 10.72 8.00 2.88 17.49 5.78 6.70 5.00 ..
I.RO
Sati nwood (Chloroxylon sw ictenia DC.) 32.92 8.40 11.39 5.47 3.09 20.57 5.25 7.12 3.42 J.93
, ..
Atld111011al Specie., to Table 615.2-1
1
linear inierpolation between vulues for 80% Stress Grade and 50"/o Stress Grade may be used to d(!lermine values for the 63% Strl!.'ls Grade

Table 615.2-2 (Cont'd) Rclcrcncc Values for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timher of Philippine Woods'·i
Additional Spt:cit:s 80% STRESS GRADE 50% STRESS GRADie
(Common an<l Botanical Names) F1,.F, E F, F,J. Fv Fb,F, E F, F,J. Fv
MPu GPa MPa MP~ MPa MPa GPa :V11'a MPa MPa
II. Moderately High Strength Group
A. Commercial Species
Aklc [Albizia acle (Blanco) Mcrr.J 2 1.01! 7.20 7.36 4.78 2.71\ 13.17 4.50 4.60 2.99 l.74
Amugis [Koordersiodendron pinm1lum (Blanco) :Vlcrr.] 19.41! 6.71 6.92 J.'>0 2.42 12.17 4.20 4.33 2.43 1.51
Anang (Diospyros pyrrhcorpa Miq.) 22.00 7.02 7.62 3.05 2.49 13.75 4.39 4.76 l.91 1.56
Auang-gulod [Oio~pyros myrmecocalyx (Hi"m) BakhJ 20.20 6.15 7.41 3.61 2.57 12.62 3.85 4.63 2.26 1.61
Batino (Alstonia macrophylla G. Dot,) . . . . - - - - .
Bingas LTcrminalia citrina (Ga~rln.) Roxh. ex. l'lcm.j 18.01 7.20 8.07 4 .34 2.72 I 1.26 4.50 5.05 2.71 1.70
Rolon fPlatymitra arborea (Blanco) Kesler] 25.34 7.62 8.38 3.63 2.29 15.84 4.76 5.24 2.27 1.43
Bolong-cta (Diospyros pilosanthern 20.46 8.21! 5.50 - . 12.79 5.18 3.44 - -
Blanco var philosanthern] 19.35 7.38 6.38 5.37 2.68 12.09 4.61 3.99 3.36 1.68
Oungon (Hcriticra sylvatici1 Vidal) 23.73 7.20 9.52 6.15 2.72 14.83 4.50 5.95 J.84 l.70
Dysoxylum sp. 17.10 6.18 6.81! 2.38 2.00 l0.69 .U6 4.30 1.49 1.25
lpil [lntsia bijuga (Colebr) 0. Ktzc] 27.09 7.44 . 5.37 . 16.93 4.65 - 3.36 .
Kamagong (Diosp)TOS discolor Willd.) 25.04 7.74 8.54 6.49 3.00 15.65 4.84 5.34 4.06 1.87
Kamagong ponce (Oiospyro~ poncei Mcrr.) 22.00 6.30 6.86 4.82 2.19 13.75 3.94 4.29 3.01 1.37
Katmon-bayani (Oillenia megalantha Jvlc1T.) 21.17 7.56 6.46 4.51 2.13 D.23 4.73 4.04 2.112 1.33
Katong-lakihan (Dysoxylum crytoholryum Miq.) 19.56 8.22 6.69 3.42 l.90 12.22 5.14 4.18 2.14 l.19
I ,i thocarpus sp. 18.52 8.04 6.30 3.98 1.49 I I .S7 5.03 3.94 2.49 0.93
Lutlek {Ludckia bernardoi (Merr.) Ridsd.J 24.30 7.44 6.78 4.18 2.56 15.18 4.65 4.24 2.61 l.60
Malakatmon [J>illenia lu:.mnicnsis (Vidal) Martelli ex 5.40 2.46 14.75 4.63 4.61 3.38 l.54
23.60 7.40 7.37
Dur. et .lacks.]
Malapanau (Dipterocarpus kerrii King) 17.26 6.1!6 6.12 2,09 1.70 l0.79 4.29 3.83 1.31 1.07
Malugai (Pometia pinnata Forst & Forst.) 17.10 6.36 5.99 2.80 2.15 10.69 3.98 3.75 1.75 1.34
Malugai-liitan (Pomctia pinnata forma repanda Jacobs) 17.06 6.05 6.38 3.93 2.36 10.67 3.78 3.99 2.45 1.47
Palak-palak (Palaquium lanceolatum Blanco) 21.43 7.85 7.29 2.64 1.88 13.39 4.90 4.56 1.65 1.18
Panau, leal~tailcd (Diptcrocarpus caudatus Foxw.) 19.23 7.32 5.66 2.61 1.62 12.02 4.51! 3.54 1.63 1.02
Pianga [Ganua obovatifolia (Merr.) Assemj I R.27 7.03 5.70 2.66 1.94 11.42 4.39 3.56 1.66 1.21
Sakal (Terminalia nitens PresI.) 23.63 5.66 . 2.77 - 14.77 3.54 . 1.73 .
Ulaian [f.ithocarpus llanosii (A.DC.) Rehd.J 17.67 5.55 6.93 3.38 2.21 11.04 3.47 4.33 2.11 UR
Talisai-gubat (Terminalia foetidissima Griff.) 21.79 7.32 6.88 2.83 2.06 13.62 4.58 4.30 1.77 l.28
Toog (Petersianthus quadrialatus (Me1T .) Mcrr.J 19.70 653 6.77 2.74 2.03 12.31 4.08 4.23 1.71 l.27
Yakal kaliot (Hopca malibato Fnxw.) 23.96 !!.25 7.62 3.45 2.55 14.98 5.16 4.76 2.16 l.59
B. Lesser-Known Spedcs
Balakat (Zi:liphus talanai (Blanco) Meer.] 16.!!9 4.87 8.03 3.02 2.17 10.55 3.05 5.02 1.1!8 1.36
Balikbikan (DrypcLes Jongifolia (Hlumc) P~x & K Hollin.] 24.82 7.74 7.62 3.78 2.08 15.51 4.84 4.76 2.36 1.30
Kalamansanai Group (Nco11auclea sp.) 14.94 5.50 - 3.56 2.14 9.34 3.44 - 2.23 1.34
Kalingag (Cinnamomum mercadoi Yid.) 21.03 5.R3 7.12 2.78 2.22 13.14 3.64 4.45 1.74 1.39
Kupulasan (Nephelium mutabile Blume) 16.36 6.47 - :t68 2.26 10.22 4.04 - 2.30 1.41
Langi I [Albizia lcbbek (L.) Bcnth.) 22.69 6.66 8.35 5.12 2.78 14.18 4.16 5.22 3.20 1.74
Patangis [Magnoli8 can<lollei (Blome) Keng var. candollei) 21.03 7.08 6.34 3.56 2.61 13.14 4.43 3.96 2.23 1.63
Siar [l'eltophorum pterocarpum (DC.) K. Heynel 21.45 5.94 7.17 7.37 2.30 B.41 3.71 4.48 4.61 1.44
Uas [Harpulia arborea (Blanco Radik] 17.05 5.39 5.66 3.02 2.13 10.66 3.37 3.54 1.89 l.33
C. Plantation Species
Acacia crnssica.rpa A. Cunn. ex F!enth 20.08 6.78 5.31 2.64 2.04 12.55 4.24 :U2 1.65 1.27
Acacia cincinnata 15.25 5.77 6.46 2.97 2.28 9.53 3.61 4.04 Ul6 1.42
13anaba (Lagcrstroemia speciosa (L.) Pers.] 16.72 5.36 5.92 3.1!1 2.27 10.45 3.35 3.70 2.38 1.42
lpil-ipil, Giant ILcucaena leucocephala (Lam.) de wit] 15.54 5.43 5.50 3.20 2.50 9.71 3.40 3.44 2.00 1.56
I
Add1'/1(>11al
. Speues to Table. 615.2-1
l Unear interpolation between vC1lues for 80% Stress Grade and 50% &res.~ Grade mC1y be used to determine values.for the 6}% Stress Grade.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. First Printing. 2015
•
Table 61 5.2-2 (Cont' d) Rcforence Values for Visua lly Stress-Graded Unseasoned Struclurnl Timber of Philippine Woods 1· 2
~
-- Additional Species 80% SI RESS GHADE 50% STRESS GRADE
111.
(Common and Oolanical Narncs)
MC'dium Strength Grnup

F•• F,
MPa
E
Gl'a
F,.
MP.i
F,J.
MPu
Fv
~1Pa
Fh,F,
._
MPa
_ E
-li ra
F,
MPa
FCJ.
,....__
M PH -
Mra
Fv
A. Commercial Specie~
Apilong (Di1>temcarp11s gruudifloru~ Rlanco) 17.67 !\.01 (i. 26 2.42 2.00 11.05 5 01 3.\) l 1.5 l 1.25
Apiwng, Oasilan {DipterOCllrpus curynchus Miq) 18.26 7.62 5.87 1.93 1.66 l 1.41 4.76 3.67 I 21 1.04
Apilong Oroad-winged (Di p<crocarpus kunstleri
16.57 6.76 5.5 1 1.90 1.59 10. 36 4.23 3.44 1. l <) 1.0()
King)
Ditaog(Calophyllurn inophylluin L.) 14.1 6 6.30 4.80 159 1.38 8.1:(5 3.94 3.00 0.99 0 .86
Dagang (J\nisoptern au rc~ Foxw.) 14.98 5.84 5.24 2.58 1.63 9.36 3.65 3.28 1.61 1.02
Hagakhak (Dipterrn.:arpus validus Olume) 16.98 6.23 5.59 l.59 l.54 10.61 3.90 3.50 0.99 0 .96
Kalumpil (Tcnninalia microcarpa Decne.) 18.52 4.60 6. 11 3.32 2.47 I 1.57 2.87 3.1!2 2.08 1.54
KatfllOn (Dille11ia phili ppinensis Roll~) 18.38 516 <,.4() 3.79 2.28 11.48 3.22 4.00 2.37 I 42
Kuling-baboi (Dysoxylurn cxcelsum Blume) 14.49 5.72 5.7 3 1.6 1 1,76 9.06 J.5 7 J.58 l.Ol I.JO
Kuling-manuk 1AglAin lulOlticnsis (Vici.) Merr &
18.42 S.25 7 St! 3.08 2.06 11.51 3.28 4 .7 4 1.92 1.29
Rolfe]
Lamio [Oracontomelon cdn le ( Blanco) Skeels) 15.61! 4.36 4.77 J.83 1.58 9.80 2.72 2.91! 1.1 4 0.99
Lanipau (Tcrminalia copelandii Elm.) 1:5.63 5.94 6.11 UM l.58 9.77 3.71 3.82 I 15 O.<J9
Lok inai l'Dacrytliurn beccarii Parl.) 15.44 ] .35 3.65 2.09 1.70 9.65 2.10 2.28 1.3 t 1.06
Lumog (Plan chonia spec tuhilis Merr.) 19.13 5.08 5.63 4.65 2.09 l l .% 3.17 3.52 2.91 1.31
Magahuyo (Cellis luzonic.i Warb.) 11.51 4.0t 5.06 2. 12 1.78 7.19 2.50 3.16 t .32 l.l I
Nalo VillaU1il [Poutcrif> villamilli (Mcrr) l.lnehuil 16.34 5.06 5.57 2.59 2.06 10.21 3. 17 3.48 1.62 1 29
Philippine m.iplc ( Acer la11rin11m 15.77 6.30 7.46 1.86 J.88 9.86 3.94 4.66 1.17 1.17
Hassk. AJ)ttd Hocven & de Vriese) - - - - - - - - - -
Pi!ing-li iwn [Canarium luzonicum (l.lhnne) /\. Gray] 15.89 4.66 5.41 2.09 2.0l! 9.93 2.91 3.38 1.31 1.30
Tangile [Shorca polyspcrm11 ( Bla nco) Merr.l 15.8., 6.23 5.50 1.79 1.54 9.89 3.89 3.44 1.12 0.%
R. Lesser-Known Species
/\nang (Oi!)Spyros pyrrhocnrpa M iq.) IS.SR 5.16 - 2.J8 1.86 9.92 3.23 - 1.49 1.16
/\munat (Omphea cumingi1111a Yid) 16.86 6.42 6.34 2. 14 1.75 10.54 4.01 3.96 1.34 1.09
ApaniL IMastixia pcnrnndra Blume ssp. philippincns is
17.10 6.48 5. 12 1.69 1.65 10.69 4.05 ).20 1.06 1.03
(Wang.) Matl.J
Ualukanag [Ch isochcton cumingianui, (C.DC.)
16.24 6.60 5.57 2.43 1.60 10. 15 4.13 3.48 J.52 1.00
Harms]
Ranai-banHi [Radcrtnachcra pinnnla ( Blanco) Seem] 20.60 5.15 7 .01 3.07 2.02 12.88 3.22 4.31! 1.92 1.26
Ritangbol (C:alophyllum blancoi Pl. & Tr.) 10.31 4.67 - 1.63 J.51 6.44 2.92 - 1.02 0.94
Dahmg (Phyllocladus hypophyllus Hook f.) 20.51 5. 70 6.8R 2.55 2.04 12.8 2 3.56 4.3() 1.59 1.27
Uapas-gapas [Cumptostcmon philippinensc (Yid.)
~ecc.l
I R.04 5.36 7.26 1.85 1.44 11.28 :us 4.54 1.16 0.90
llllngan {Wcinrnannia luzoniensis Vid.) 13.92 4.85 4.74 1.67 1.62 8.70 3.03 2.96 I.OS I.OJ
Java sala [Slo~ ocajavanica (Miq.) Koord & Val. I 17.85 5.36 6.3 0 2.24 2.00 11.16 3.3 5 3.94 1.40 1.25
Km1gk<J [J\ph:mamixis polystachya Wall.) R.N .
16.08 5.71 5.73 21!3 I.R9 10.0.'i 3.57 3.58 1.77 1.18
Porker I
Mala kmalak [Pa laquium philippensc (Perr.) C.13.
13.3 7 4 .70 5.71 2.05 1.80 8.36 2.9 4 3.57 1.28 1.1 3
Rush.]
Nato [Paloquium luzonitmsc (F. Viii.) Yid] 16.72 5.45 5.57 2.14 1.86 10.45 3.40 3.48 1.34 1.16
Pagsahingin-bulog (Canariu rn a.sp<l(\Ull Benlh) 16.51:( 6.66 5.63 1.64 1.86 I 0.36 4.16 3.52 1.02 1.16
Panang (l'alaquium sp.)
..
14.44 S.48 - 2.59 2.01 9.03 3.42 - l.62 l. 25
I
Add1flonal Spcwt.\ lo Tabfe 615.2-1
2
Linc-ar inte1pola1ion be1we,,n values for fi0% Stre.\'s Grade and 50% Stres.,· Grade may l>e used to de1ermine value~ .for the 6.1% Stress Grade

Table 615.2-2 (Cont'd) Rcforcncc Values for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Struclural Timber of Philippine Woods'·2
Additional Species 80"/., STRESS GRADE 50% STRESS CRADE
(Common and Botanical Names) Fb,F, E Fr F,1 F, Fb,Ft E F, F« F,
MPa GPa MPa MPa MPa MPa GP a MPa MPa MPa
lit Medium Slrength Group (cont'd)
B. Lesser-Known Species (cont'd)
Philippin~ ch~stnul [Ca~tanopsis philipincnsis
14.02 4.98 4.90 2.34 1.75 8.76 3.1 I 3.06 1.46 1.09
(~lanco) Yid]
Sagimsim [Syzgium brevi-stylum (C.R. Rob.) Mcrr. j 16.87 4.03 . 2.21 2.03 10.54 2.52 - 1.3& 1.27
Santiki [Cleidion spiciflornm (Bum. F.) Merr.J 15.72 4.25 4.48 3.1 !! . 9.83 2.66 2.80 1.99 -
Syzgium sp. 12.05 4.21 - 1.89 1.7!! 7.53 2.63 - 1.18 1.12
Tan-ag (Klt:inhovia hospita L) 15.34 4.48 5.95 2.47 l.91 959 2.80 3.72 1.55 1.20
Ulaian [Lilhocarpus celebicus (Miq.) Rehd.) 18.81 5.09 . 4.51 2.63 I l.76 3.18 - 2.82 1.64
Usuang-saha (F'.ndiandra Jaxiflora Mcrr.) 15.49 5.39 4.99 2.81 1.80 9.68 3.37 3.12 1.76 l.12
Temslroemia S(). 19.51 S.32 6.94 2.65 2.12 12.20 3.33 4.34 1.66 1.33
Acacia mangium Willd. 15.51 5.60 7.36 2.49 1.95 9.70 3.50 4.60 I .56 1.22
Nangka (Artocarpus heterophyllus Lamk.) 20.55 5.26 7.04 2.04 1.92 12.115 3.29 4.40 1.27 1.20
River red gum (Eucalyptus camaldu\cnsis Dchnh.) 16.22 6.14 - 3.49 1.51 10.14 3.84 - 2.18 0.94
T~ak (Tectona grandis Lf.) JR.94 4.99 4.93 2.81 2.01 11.84 3.12 3.0R 1.76 l.26
I
Additional Species to Tuhle 615.2-1
2
Linear ime11>olation between valuesfi,r 80% Stress Gmde and 50% Stress Grade may he uw,d to determine values/or the 63% Stress Grade
aq
T able 615.2·2 (Cont ' d) Reference V alues for Visually Strcss-Grnded Unseasoned SlrucLural Timbe r of Philippine Woods ' 2
Additional Species 80'Yo STRESS GRADE 50% STRESS GRAD~;
(Common and Botanical N ames) F&,Ft E F, F,J. Fv Fb,F, E F, f'c L Fv
MPa GPa MPa MP~ Ml'a MPa GPa MPH MPa MPa
JV. Moderntely Low Strength Group
A. Comnwrd11l Species
Almon (Shorca Hlmon foxw.) 15.32 6.14 5.48 1.(,3 1.41 9.57 3.83 3.43 1.02 0.81\
/\nubing (.A.rlocarpus ovHlllS Blanco) 19.46 4.04 5.34 4. 19 l.87 12.17 2S~ 3.34 2.62 1.17
Balikuling (Litst:a leytcns1s Mcrr.) 13.32 4.86 6.0R 1.41 1.36 8.33 3.04 3.80 0.RR 0.1\5
Dulit [Canurmm hirsutum 12.41 3.52 4.64 l.2 1 1.38 7.76 2.20 2.90 0.75 0.86
Willd. Fortna multip ionalum (Lla nos) H J. Lam. I - . . . . - . -
!gem [Dacycarpus imbricatus (Bl.) var. patulus de
12. 17 4.95 4.26 1.24 1.45 7.61 3.09 2.66 0.77 0.91
Laub.]
llo-ilo [Aglaia argcnlca Fllumc) 16.86 5.50 4.83 I.SO 1.42 10.54 3.44 J.02 0.94 0.89
K.nlunti IShorca hopeifolia (Heim) Symj )4.ll 4.97 5.50 l.61 1.44 R.82 3.J I 3.44 1.00 090
Loktob (Duabanga moluccnna Ulu1ne) 11.64 1.79 4 ..'il l.30 I.I ] 5.40 1.12 2.82 O.l!I 0.69
Manggasinoro fShorca assnmicH 14. l I 5.65 5.13 1.54 1.40 8.82 3.53 3.21 0.96 O.R7
Dyer, ssp. philippinensis (Orandis) Sym] . . . . - . .
Munggasi1rnrong-lakihan (Shorea virescens Parijs) 14.44 5.59 5.57 J.88 t.35 9.03 3.50 3.48 1.18 0.84
Mayapis [Shoren palosapis (Blanco) Merr. l 14.60 5.81 5.20 1.53 1.34 9.12 J .63 3.25 0.96 0.84
Paguringon (C,ratoxylum sumatranum (Jack) Blume
15.77 4.76 6.05 2.32 2.06 9.86 2.97 3.71\ 1.45 J.29
ssp. s11matranu01 Rohs.].
"J'uai (Bischofiajavanica Ulun)e) 14.75 4. 14 4.66 4. 10 1.80 9.22 2.59 2.91 2.56 l.13
Shorea sp. 13.92 4.84 4.26 1.04 1.15 8.70 3.03 2.66 0.65 0.72
B. Lesser-Known Species
Anongo (Turpinia ovulifolia t; lm.) 11.70 3.68 3.78 1.44 l.30 7.31 2JU 2.36 0.90 0.81
Balukst-gubal [Sapium lu.r.onicum (Vid.) Mt:rr.] . . . !.38 I.SS . . - 0.86 0.97
llalanti I Homalanthus populnc11s (Geisel.) Pax var. .
populncus]
l 1.32 3.83 - J.65 l.31 7.07 2.39 l.03 0.!!2
Ba !etc (ficu~ balt:lc Meir.) 13.84 5.20 . 2.JO l.72 8.65 3.25 . 1.44 l.OR
Balobo (Diplodiscus paniculalus 'furc1.) 16.59 4. 71 - 3.12 2.02 10.37 2.94 - l.95 l.26
Bayok (Pterospermum divcrsil"olium Hlum") 15.44 4.40 5.41 l.69 1.44 9.65 2.75 3.38 1.06 0.90
Bayok-hayokan (Pterospenm1Tl'lllivcum Vid.) 13.56 4.69 5.62 l.45 i.29 8.48 2.93 3.51 0.91 O.Rl
llinm1ga {Macaranga tanarius ( L.) Mucll-Arg.J 9.79 .l.39 . 150 1.37 6. 12 2.12 - 0.94 O.ll5
Buta-buta (Exocccana agallocha L.) 10.61 3.40 3.61\ 1.40 l.33 6.63 2.12 2.30 0.87 0.83
Duguan (Myristica philippensis !.a m.) 8.39 4.38 - l.92 1.38 5.25 2.74 - 1.20 0.86
Himbaba o [t.lroussonctia lu:r.onica (Blam:o) Bur. var.
12.113 4.04 4.45 2.24 2.00 8.02 2.53 2.78 1.40 l.25
h1zonicsl
Katong-muLsin fChi,ochcton peniamlrns (Bl11nco)
14.49 J.56 4.26 l.51 1.32 9.06 2.23 2.66 0.95 0.83
Merr.]
Tu!o [A!phitonia philippinensis (Braid.) Gordnnia
14.J I 3.81 4.6 1 J.63 l.S4 R.82 2.38 2.81\ 1.02 0.97
sp.J
C. Plantation Spedes
Bagrns (Eucalyptus deglupta R!ume) l l.7 1 4.05 4.80 1.23 1.05 7.32 2.53 3.00 0.77 0.66
Durian (Durio zihcthim1s MeJT.) 13.88 4.90 5.15 1.80 1.42 !!.67 3.06 3.22 l.!J 0.!!9
Para-rubber 1.Hevca hrasi licn~;s (HBK) Muell-Arg.J I J.! J 3.91 3.33 2.19 l.67 6.96 2.45 2.08 1.37 l.05
Santo! [Sandoricum koetjape (!3um1. f".) merr.J 11.84 2.91 3.62 1.44 1.31 7.40 l.f\2 2.26 0.90 0.82
1
!ldditwnal 5jJecies to Table r,/5.2-1
1 Linear interpolcition between values for 80% Stress Grade and 50% Stress Grade mny be used to determine va/11es.fiJr the 63% Stress Grc,de
·-
Table 615.2-2 (Cont'd) Reference Values for Visually Stress-Gradc::d Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Wonds'·2
Additional Species 80% STRESS GRADE SO'X, STRESS GRADE
(Common and Botanical Names) Fh,Ft E Fe F,.L Fv Pb.Ft E F~ Fc1 Fv
MPa GPa MPa MPa MPa MPa GPa MPa MPa MPa
v. Low Strength Group
A. Commcrdnl Species
Kalanras (Toona calantas Merr. & Rolfe) 9.66 3.70 3.04 0.86 0.88 6.04 2.3 I 1.90 0.54 0.55
Malakalumpang (S1erculia 7 72 3.74 3.S8 1.08 0.91 4.82 2.34 2.24 0.68 0.57
Rarang [Erythrina subumbrnns (I IHssk) Merr.) 5.23 I .83 2.22 0.73 0.78 3.27 LIS L39 0.45 0.41!
Tiaong (Shorea ovara Oyer ex Brandis) 11.56 4.97 4.02 0.91 L07 7.22 3.1 I 2.51 0.57 0.67
Taluto [Ptcrocymbium tinctorium (Ulanco) Merr.] 9.50 3.09 3.30 0.92 LOI 5.93 1.93 2.06 0.58 0.63
B. l.c~scr-t<nown Species
Anabiong [Trema orientalis (L.)) 5.56 2.36 2.46 1.01 1.02 3.48 I .48 1.54 0.63 0.(i.1
Bagalunga (Melia azedarach L.) 10.32 3.76 3.71 1.54 1.72 6.45 2.35 2.32 0.96 1.08
Banilad (S1erculia camosa Wall.) 6.07 2.15 . O.!n 0.81 3.79 1.34 - O.S2 0.50
Binuang (Octomeles sumalrnna Miq.) 9.09 3.66 3.11 0.74 0.88 5.68 2.29 1.94 0.47 0.55
Dita [Alstonia scholaris (I,.) 4.64 1.91 . 0.55 0.80 2.90 1.20 - 0.34 0.50
R. Br. var. scholarisis] I0.14 3.42 3.84 1.14 0.86 6.33 2.14 2.40 0.84 0.54
Kaitana [Zanthoxylum Jimonella (Dennsl.) Alston l I I .37 4.36 4.26 0.96 1.29 7.IO 2.72 2.66 0.60 0.81
Tangisang-bayawak (Ficus variegata Blume var. .
variegala)
4.32 1.56 0.64 0.78 2.70 0.97 - 0.40 0.49
Alnus sp. 9.66 2.53 2.RI 1.78 1.80 6.04 158 1.75 I.I I 1.13
Balsa (Ochroma pyramidale (Cav.) Urh.) 8.76 2.77 3.65 uo - 5.48 1.73 2.28 0.81 -
Bayabas (Psidium guajava L.) 12.55 2.68 - - . 7.84 1.68 - - -
llang-ilang [Cananga odorata (Lam.) Hook f. & . . .
Thoms.]
- - - - - -
Guhas (Endospermum pe\tatum Merr.l 9.66 2.96 1.74 2.36 1.02 6.04 1.85 2.34 1.48 0.64
Kaatoan bm1gkal (Anthocephalus chincnsis (Lamk.) 1.7] 2.00 0.88 0.83
11.08 2.77 3.20 1.40 1.33 6.93
Rich. ex. Walp)
Kapok (Cciha pcntandra (L.) Gaertn.] 4.27 J.35 1.80 0.74 0.63 2.67 0.84 1.13 0.46 0.19
Lumhang [Alcuritcs moluccana (J..) Willd.) 6.39 2.47 1.63 0.71 0.88 4.00 1.55 1.02 0.44 0.55
Malapapaya [Polyscias nodosa (Rlume) Seem] 10.92 4.04 5.25 0.97 1.17 6.82 2.53 3.28 0.61 0.73
Moluccan sau [Paraserianthes fakataria (L.) Nielsen] 10.75 3.87 4.26 I.I I 1.21 6.72 2.42 2.66 0.70 0.75
Spanish cedar (Cedrda odorata L.) 10.94 3.61 4.22 IJI 1.20 6.84 2.26 2.64 0.1!2 0.75
Tulip, African (Spathodea cumpanulaui Beauv.) 6.06 l.63 2.33 0.85 0.98 3.79 l.02 1.46 0.53 0.61
I
Additional Species lo Tuhle 615.2-I
1 Uneur inrerpolation between values for 80% Stt·ess Grade and 50% Stress Grade may be used 10 determine values.for the 63% Stress Grade
q
Table 615.2-3 Limits of Defects by Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned Wood
Stress Grade
Kind of Defecrs --- 80"/o 63% 50%
A. Natural Dcfectll
I. Worm holt:s, avcn:1ge diameter

(maximum allowable size in mm)
a. Individual Not permilled 2 6
b. Quantity limitation Not permitted Not clustered Not el uslered
2. Slope of Grain (maximum variation in 20 25 32

mm from longitudinal axis per 300 mm
within middle half of length)
3. Checks and Shakes

3
a. Si7.c of each check and shake, or Y. of thickness Y. of thickness /8 of thickness
if in co mbination, the sum oflhe
sizes ofall checks and shakes
within middle halfof depth of the
piece ~hall not exceed:
3
b. End penetmti<1n: Checks and Y. of thickness Y. of thickness /x of thickness
splits at the middle half of the
depth oftl1e piece shall not extend
a distance grea.ter than:
4. Knnts (Maximum allowable size of

Narrow Narrow Narrow
individual knot in mm 1)
face <iron face or <>n face or on
edge of edge of edge of
wide face, Along wide face, Along wide face, Along
within the center line within the center line within the center line
middle of wide middle · ofwi<le middle of wide
third of face third of face third of face
IcngtJ1 of length of length of
piece piece piece
Nominal widlh of face, in mm
50 6 12 20
75 12 20 25
100 20 20 25 40 40 38
125 25 25 30 40 50 50
ISO 30 30 45 50 60 60
200 35 40 50 60 70 75
250 40 50 55 80 80 100
300 45 55 65 90 90 I JO
350 50 65 70 JOO 95 125
400 50 70 75 I 00 100 125
450 and over 50 75 75 100 100 125
The size ofknots on the na"ow face within the middle third oflength may be increased proportionately towards the ends ofthe piel·e oftwice
the .~ize pem1i1ted on the narrow.fai.;e but not to exceed that allowable a/on,: the center line ofthe wide fl,ce. The size of knots on the edJre of
wide }ace within the middle third oflength may be increased proportionately toward~· the center ofthe wide.fai.;e and towards the ends of the
piece to the size permilted a/on~ the center line of the wide face . The sum ofthe sizes of all knotr in <.IJ'IY 150 mm of length of the piece
shall not exceed /Wice the maximum permissible size of knot.v. Two knols of maximum size sha/11101 be allowed in the same J50 mm oflength
on any fac:e. Cius fer knots and knot.,· in group shall not be permitted.

Table 615.2-3 (cont'd) Limits of Defects by Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned Wood
.Kind of Defects Stress Grade

80% 63% 50%
B. Handling, Manufacture or Processing Defects
1. Wane (maximum allowable size in mm)
Nominal face dimension in mm
50 3 12 12
75 3 12 12
100 6 15 15
125 6 15 15
150 IO 20 20
200 12 22 25
250 15 25 30
300 18 28 38
350 20 38 45
400 25 45 50
450 and over 30 50 55
2. Torn grain (allowable depth in mm) 2 2 3
3. Skips, allowable size not to exceed:
surface area (Width x length, mm) width x 100 width x. 100 width x 100
Depth (mm) I 2 3
Quantity I skip per 5 m or I skip per 5 m or I skip per 5 m or
shorter length shorter length shorter length
- 1 • I - . - - - ~ ~ ,- - - - - -=-- -- - -,
• - ~- l ---- _ 1
<
the split ring or shear plate groove w ithin the member (see
SECTION616
Figure 616.1 -2). Where split ring or shear plate
DESIGN PROVISIONS AND connectors arc staggered, adjacent connectors s hall be
EQUATIONS considered as oceu1Ting al the same critical section jf the
parallel to grain spacing between connectors in adjacent
6.16.1 General rows is less than or equal to one connector diameter (see
Figure 616. l • l ).
616.1.J Scope
This section establishes general design prov1s1ons that

apply to all woocJ structural members ancJ connections
covered under this Specification. Each wood structural
member or connection shall he of suffi cient size4 and
capacity to carry the applied loads without exceeding tbe
adjusted design values specified herein.
616.1. 2 Net Section Arca
616.J .2.1 The net section area is obtained by deducting

rigure 6 16 .1 -2 Net Cross Section at a Split Ring or Shear
from the gross area the projected area of all material Plate Connection
removed by boring, grooving, <lapping, notching, or other
means. The net section area shall he used in calculating
the load carrying capacity of the member, except as 616.1.3 Connections
specified in 6J 6.6.3 for columns. The effects of any
eccentricity or
loads applied to the member al the critical Stmctural members and fasteners shall be arranged
net section shall be taken into account. symmetrically at connections, unless the bending moment
induced by an unsymmetrical arrangement (such as
616.1.2.2 For parallel to grain loading with staggered lapped joints) has been accounted for in the design.
bolts, drift bolts, drift pins, or lag screws, adjacent Connections shall be designed and fabricutcd to insure
fasteners shall be considered as occurring at the same that each individual me inher carries its proportional
critical section if the parallel to grain spacing between stress.
fasteners in adj acent rows is less than four fastener
diameters (see Figure 6 J6. 1-J ). 616 ..1.4 Time Dependent Deformations
Where members of structural frames are composed of two

or more layers or sections, the effect of time dependent
"""'-
- ..........
deformations shall he accounted for in the design (see
61 6.5.2).
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
616.1.5 Composite Construction
'-- 0
~
.\ \ .\
- Co mposite constructions, such as wood-concrete, wood-
stecl, and wood-wood composites, s hall be designed in
accordance with pri nciples of engineering mechanics
using the adjusted design values for structural members
f igure 6 16. 1-1 S pacing of Staggered Fasteners and connections specified herein.
616.J .2.3 The net section area at a split ring or shear plate
connection shall be determined by deducting from the
gross section area the projected areas of the bolt hole and

616.2 Bending Members - General

(616·2)
616.2.l Span of Bending Members
616.3.2.2 For solid rectangular bending memhcrs with
For simple, continuous and canlilc.:vercd bending the neutral axis perpendicular to depth at center:
members, the span shall be taken as the distance from
face to face or suppo1t, plus one hair the required bearing
bd3
length at each end. I =--
12
:::: moment of inertia, mm1 (616-3)
616.2.2 Lateral Distribution of Concenti·ated Load I bd2

S = - = - - = section modulus mm:i (616-4)
c 6 '
Lateral distribution of concentrated loads from a critically
loaded bending member to adjacent parallel bending
members by flooring or other cross members shall be 616.3.3 Beam Stability Factor, CL
permitted to be calculated when determining design
bending moment and ve11ical shear force. 616.3.3.1 When the depth of a bending member docs
not exceed its breadth, d ~ b, no lateral support is
616.2.3 Notches required and Ci = 1. 0.
616.2.3.1 Bending members shall not be notched except 616.3.3.2 When rectangular sawn lumber bending
as permitted by 617.4.3 an<l 618.4.5. A gradual taper cut members are laterally supported in accordance with
from the reduced depth of lhe member lo the full depth of 617.4.1, Ci= 1.0.
the member in lieu of a square-cornered notch reduces
stress concentrations. 616.3.3.3 When the compression edge of a bending
member is supported throughout its length to prevent
616.2.3.2 The stiffness of a bending member, as lateral <lisplacemenl, and the ends at points of bearing
dctcm1ined from its cross-section, is practically have lateral support to prevent rotalion, CL =
1. 0.
unallecled by a notch with the following dimensions:
616.3.3.4 Where the depth or a bending member
notch depth s (l/6)(beam depth) exceeds its breadth, d > b, lateral supports shall be
notch length s (l/3)(beam depth) provided at points @f bearing to prevent rotation. When
such lateral support is provided at points of hearing,
616.2.3.3 See 616.4.3 for cflccl or notches on shear
but no additional lateral support is provided throughout
strength.
the length of the bending member, the unsuppo11cd
616.3 Bending Members - Flexure length, fu, is the distance between such points of end
bearing, or the length of a cantilever. When a bending
616.3. t Strength in Bending memher is provided with lateral support to prevent
rotation at intermediate points as well as at the ends,
The actual bending slress or moment shall not exceed the the unsupported length, fu, is the distance between
adjusted bending design value. such points or intermediate lateral support.
616.3.2 Flexural Design Equations 616.3.3.5 The effective span length, .fe, for single span
or cantilever bending members shall be determined in
616.3.2.1 The actual bending stress induced by a bending
accordance with Table 616.3-1.
moment, M, is calculaled as follows:
616.3.3.6 The slenderness ratio, R8 , for bending
Mc M
lb = -1= - (616-1) members shall be calculated as follows:
S
For a rectangular bending member of breadth, b, and

(616-5)
depth, d, this becomes:
c
616.3.3.7 The slenderness ratio for bending members, where:

R 8 , shall not exceed 50. Fii Reference bending design value multiplied
by all applicable adjustment factors except
616.3.3.8 When lateral support to eompres.c;ion side of Crm Cv , and C1,,, MPa
beam may permit beam to buckle laterally, the beam
F.uler-base<l WSD critical buckling value
stability factor, Ci, shall be calculated as follows: for bending members
1. ZOEmin '
2
1 + (Fbs / Fi, )] FbBIFi, R/
f 1.9 0. 95
616.3.3.9 Members su~jccted to flexure about both
(616-6)
principal axes (binxia! bending) shall be designed in
accordance with 616.9.2.
Table 6 16.3-1 Effective Length, i e, for Bending Members
Cn ntilcvcr1 where l' .Id < 7 where l / d 2:: 7

Uniformly distribuled load .f. =1. 33.e i = 0.-90l' + 3d
Concentrated load at unsupponcd end l = 1 .87.e I = 1.44l' + 3d
Single Span Bcam 1•1 where lu/ d <7 wherd'u/d 2:: 7
Uniform! distributed load t. ·= 2. 06/ i = 1.63/ + 3d
Concentrated load at center with no
intermediate lateral su )On
Concentrated load at center with lateral support
at center
Two equal concentrated loads at 1/3 points with
lateral s u ort at I/3 oints
Three equal concentrated loads at 1/4 points
with lateral su ort al 1/4 Joints
Six equal concentrated loads at I17 points with

lateral su ort at 1/7 oints
Seven or more equal concentrated loads, evenly
spaced, with lateral support at points of
load a Jlication
i = 1.84/
' For single span or cantilever bending members with loading conditions nol specified in Table 616.3-1:
t. = Z.06iu where t.,/d<7
le = 1 .63lu + 3d where 7-::;; l,Jd-::;; 14. 3
t. = 1.84.-l,. where l,j d > 14. 3
2
Multiple span application.~ shall be based on table values or engineering unalysis.
-~
., 1,
616.4 Bending Members - Shear
616.4.1 Strength in Shear Parallel to Grain

(Horizontal Shear)
616.4.1.1 The actual shear stress parallel to grain or shear

force at any cross section of the bending member shall not
exceed the adjusted shear design value. A check of the
strength of wood bending members in shear perpendicular
to grain is not required.
616.4.1.2 The shear design procedures specified here in See 616.4.3.1 for load
for calculating f v al or near points or vertical support are calculation criteria
limited to solid flexural members such as sawn lumber,
structural glued laminated timber, stmctural composite
Figure 616.4- I Shear at Suppm1s
lumber, or mechanically laminated timber beams. Shear
design at supports for built-up components containing
(b) The largest single moving load shall be placed at a
load-bearing connections at or near points of support,
distance from the support equal to the depth of the
such as between the web and chord of a truss, shall be
bending member, keeping other loads in their normal
based on test or other techniques.
relation and neglecting any load within a distance from a
suppo11 equal to the depth of the bending member. This
616.4.2 Shear Design Equations
condition shall be checked at each support.
The actual shear stress parallel to grain induced in a sawn
(c) With lwo or more moving loads of about equal weight
lumber, structural glued laminated timber, structural
and in proximily, loads shall be placed in the position that
composite lumber, or timber pole or pile bending member
shall be calculated as follows: produces the highest shear force, V, neglecting any load
within a distance from a support equal to the depth of the
VQ bending member.
fv=Ti, (616-7)
616.4.3.2 For oot~hed bending members, shear force, V,
For a rectangular bending member of breadth, b, and shall be detennined by principles of engineering
depth, d, this becomes: mechanics ( except those given in 616.4.3.1 ).
3V
=
Iv 2bd (616-8) (a) For bending members wilh rectangular cross section
and notched on the tension face (see 6 I6.2.3), the adjusted
design shear, V,.', shall he calculated as follows:
616.4.3 Shear design
616.4.3. 1 When calculating the shear force, V , in bending (616-9)

members: where:
(a) For beams supported by full hearing on one surface d depth ofunnotched bending member, mm
and loads applied to the opposite surface, unifonnly du depth of member remaining at a notch
distributed loads within a distance from supports equal to measured perpendicular to length of
the depth or the bending member, d, shall be pennitted to member, mm
be ignored. For beams supported by full bearing on one
F'
v adjusted shear design value parallel lo grain,
MP a
surface and loads applied to the opposite surfat:c,
concentrated loads wilhin a distance, d, from supp011s (b) For bending members with circular cross section and
shall be permitted to be multiplied by x/d where x is the notched on the tension face (see 616.2.3), the adjusted
distance from the beam support face to the load (see design shear, V r', shall be calculated as follows:
Figure 616.4-1).
.
c
6-44 CHAPTER 6- Wood
supported hy such fasteners or other cases as shown in

(616-IO)
Figures 616.4-3 and 616.1 0-1) the shear force, V, shall be
where: determined by principles of engineering mechanics
2
An cross sectional area of notched member, mm (except those given in 616.4.3.1)
(c) For bending members with other than re<..-tangular or (n) Where the connection is less than five times the depth,
circular t.:ross section and notched on the tension face (see 5d, of the member from its end, the adjusted design
616.2.3), the adjusted design shear. Vr', shall be based on shear, V r'. sha II be calculated as fo Hows:
conventional engineering analysis of stress concentrations
at notches.
(616-12)
(d) A gradual change in cross section compared with a
where:
square notch decreases the actual shear stress parallel to
grain nearly to that computed for an unnotchcd bending for split ring or shear plate connections:
member wilh a depth of dn. de depth of member, less the distance from the
unloaded edge of the member to the nearest
(c) When a bending member is notched on the edge of the nearest split ring or shear plate
compression face at the end as shown in Figure 616.4-2, connector (see rigure 616.4-3), mm.
the adjusted design shear, v,:, i.hall be calculated as
for boll or lag screw connections:
follows:
depth of member, less 1he distance from the
unloaded edge of the member to the center of
(616-1 l) the nearest bolt or lag screw (see Figure 616.4-
3}, mm.
where:
e the distance the notch extends from U1e inner (b) Where the connection is at leas1. five times the depth,
edge of the support and must be less than or 5d, of the member from its end, the adjusted design
equal to the depth remaining at the notch, shear, Vr', shall be calculated as follows:
e S d 0 • Ire> dn , dn shall be used~
calculate f v using Equation 616-8
(616-13)
deplh of member relliaining at a notch meeting
the provisions of 616.2.3, measured
perpendicular Lo length of member. If the end (c) Where concealed hangers arc used, the adjusted design
of the beam is beveled, as s hown by the shear, Vr' , shall be calculated based on the provisions in
dashed line in Figure 616.4-2, dn is measured 616.4.3.2 for notched bending members.
from the inner edge of the support, mm
Unloaded Edge
T"
•
-~
••
,_,• -f T d
*
,,... .,
1
d.
d
d.
l ..!-L -----.J
l j
T
d 0
1d, Unloaded Ed ge
_l
Figure 616.4-2 Bending Member End-Notched at
1 -0-
Compression Face Unloaded Edge
616.4.3.3 When connections in bending members are Figure 616.4-3 Effective depU1, de, of Members at
Connections
fastened with split ring connectors, shear plate
connectors, bolts, or lag screws (including hcams

616.5 Bending Members· Deflection 616.6.2 Simple Solid Wood Columns
616.5.1 Deflection Calculations Simple columns consist of a single piece or or pieces

properly glued together to form a single member (see
If detlectioo is a factor in design, it shall be calculated by Figure 616.6-1).
standard methods of engineering mechanics considering
bending deflections and, when applicable, shear
deflections. Consideration for shear deflection is required
when the reference modulus of elasticity has not been
adjusted to include the effects of shear deflection.
616.5.2 Long-Term Loading
Where total deflection under long-tcnn loading must be

limited, increasing member size is one way to provide
extra stiHhess to allow for this Lime dependent
deformation. Total detlection, 11r, shall be calculated as
follows:
(616-13)
where:
Ker time dependent deformation (creep) factor.
1.5 for seasoned lumber and structural glued
laminated timber used in dry service
conditions as de lined in 617 .1.4 and
618.1.4, respectively.
2.0 for structural glued laminated timber

used in wet service conditions as defined in Figure 616.6-1 Simple Solid Columns
618.1.4.
2.0 for unseasoned lumber or for seasoned 616.6.3 Strength in Compression Parallel to Grain
lumber used in wet service conditions as
defined in 617.1.4 The actual compression stress or force parallel to grain
shall not exceed the alljusted compression design value.
!>,LT immediate deflection due to the term
Calculations offc shall be based on the net section area
component of the design load, mm.
(see 616.1.2) where the reduced section occurs in the
IJ.sr deflection due to the short-term or normal critical part of the column length that is most subject Lo
component of the design load, mm. potential buckling. Where the reduced section does not
occur in the critical part of the column length that is most
616.6 Compression Members - General subject to potential buckling, calculations offc shall be
based on gross section area. In addition, f c based on net
616.6.1 Terminology
section area shall not exceed the reference compression
For purposes or this Specification, the tenn "column" design value parallel to grain multiplied by all applicable
refers to all types of compression members, including adjustment factors except t11e column stability factor, Cp.
members forming part of trusses or other structural
components. 616.6.4 Compression Members Bearing End to F..nd
For end grain bearing of wood on wood, and on metal

plates or strips see 616.10.
c
616.6.5 Eccentric Loading or Combined Stresses
For compression members subject to eccentric loading or •'• ~

I
.,. j
I
' ,
\ I
I I I I
combined flexure and axial loading, see 616.9. ! I
Buc:l<lhig modn I
I
' I
I I
I
I
I
I
616.6.6 Column Bracing

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
,'
I
I
' I I
I
Column bracing shall be installed where necessary to

resist wind or other lateral forces. In buildings, for forces
TheoratiCi1 Xe v,1u• 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.0 2.0 1,0
acting in a direction parallel to lhe truss or beam, column
R<c<>mmeMed de,lgft K.:
brncing shol l be permitted to he provided by knee brnccs when rdeal conditions 0.65 0.80 1.2 1.D 2,10 2.4
1ppro1,dm1ted
or, in the case of trus:.cs, by extending the column to the
¥ Ro1ttion fixed, tnMl1tion fixed
top chord or the truss where the botlom und top of chords End condition code
T Rot.ii on free, translation fixed
are separated sufficiently to provide Hdcquatc brncing
action. In a direction perpendicular to the truss or beam, • ~
Rotation fil<ed. tr1mlwon free
Rotation fret, translation fr~e
bracing shall be permitted to be provided by wall Figure 616.7-1 Buckling Length Coefficienls, Ke
construction, knee braces, or bracing between columns.
Such bracing between columns should be installed
preferably in the same bays as the bracing between 616.7.1.4 The slenderness ratio for solid columns, ie/d,
trusses. shall not exceed 50, except that <luring construction f e/d
s hall not exceed 75.
616.7 Solid Column~
616.7.J.S The column stability factor shall be calculated
616.7.1 Column Stability Factor, Cp as follows:
616.7.1.1 When a compression member 1s supported 1 + Fee/Fe'
throughout its length to prevenl lateral displacement in all C,.=-- z-c--
directions, Cp = 1.0. (616-14)
where:
616.7.1.2 The effective column length, I e, for a solid
Fc' reference compression design value parallel
column shall be determined in accordance with principles to grain multiplied by all applicable
of engineering mechanics. One method for determining adjustment factors except Cp (see 615.3),
effective column length, when end-fixity conditions are MPa
known, is to multiply actual column length by the c = 0.8 for sawn lumber
appropriate effective length factor or buckling length 0.85 for round timber poles and piles
coefficients, le = (Ke)(.f). (sec Figure 616.7-1 for 0.9 for structural glued laminated limber,
values of Ke) . structural composite lumber, and cross-
larninated timber.
616.7.J.3 For solid columns with rectangular cross
616.7.1.6 For especially severe service conditions and/or
section, the slenderness ration, .fe / d, shall be taken as the
extraordinary hazard, use or
lower adjusted design values
larger of the ratios .f et/d 1 or i ezl
dz (see Figure may be necessary.
616.6-1) where each ratio has been adjusted by the
appropriate buckling length coefllcient, K 6 , from Figure
616.7-J.

616.7.2 Tapered Columns 616.8 Tension Members
For design of a column with rectangular cross section, 616.8.1 Tension Parallel to Grain
tapered at one or both ends, the representative dimension,
drep, for each face of the column shall he derived as The actual tension stress or force parallel to grain shall be
based on the net section area (see 616.1.2) and shall not
follows:
exceed the adjusted tension design value.
drep = dmin + (dmax - dmin) [a - 0.15 ( 1 - :miu)]
max
616.8.2 Tension Perpendicular to Grain
(616-17)
where: Designs that induce tension stress perpendicular to grain
shall be avoided whenever possible. When tension stress
representative dimension for tapered column,
perpendicular to grain cannot he avoided, mechanical
mm
reinforcement sufficient to resist all such stresses shall he
the minimum dimension for that face of the considered.
column, mm
the maximum dimension for that face of the 616.9 Combined Bending and Axial Loading
column, mm
616.9.1 Bending and Axial Tension
Support Conditions
Members subjected to a combination of bending and axial
Large end fixed, small end unsupported or a = 0. 70 tension (see Figure 616.9-l) shall be so proportioned that:
simply supported
ft lb <
-F , + ~ _ 1. 0 (616-19)
Small end fixed, small end unsupported or a = 0. 30 t /J
simply supported and
Both ends simply supported: (616-20)

Tapered toward one end a= 0.50 where:
Tapered toward both ends a= 0. 70
reference bending design value multiplied
For all other support conditions by·all applicable adjustment factors except
1 Ci, MPa.
drep = dmln + 3 (dmaK - dm1n) (616-18)
Fb'" reference bending design value multiplied
by all applicable adjustment factors except
Calculations of fc and CP shall be based on the
Cv,MPa.
representative dimension, drep· In addition, fc at any
cross section in the tapered column shall not exceed the
reference compression design value parallel to grain
multiplied by all applicable adjustment factors except the
column stability factor, CP.
616.7.3 Round Columns
The design of a column of round cross section shall be

based on the design calculations for a square column of
the same cross-sectional area and having the same degree
or-taper.
Figure 616.9-1 Combined Bending and Axial Tension
aq
6J6.9.2 Bending and Axial Compression
Members subjected to a combination of bending abou t

one or both principal axes and axial compression (see
Figure 616.9-2) shall be so proportioned that:
2
/,] IJ, 1 + fbz
Fe' + Fhi' [1 - A] (1 - iL _ (fu)
[ 2
p 1
]
F,o bZ F,Ez FhE
~ 1.0 (616-21)
and
z Figure 616.9-2 Combined Bending and Axial Tension
.I!_+
Feliz
[ht]
Fbli
$ l (616-22)
where:
616.lU Design for Bearing
0 . 822Emtn' for either uniaxial
f c < Fd,t = 2 edgewise bending or 616.10.1 Bearing Parallel to Grain
(~) biaxial bending
616.10.1 ..1 The actual compressive bearing stress parallel
and
1 to grain shall be based on the nel hearing area and shall
0. 822Emin for uniaxial flatwise
ft• < F,E2 = i bending or hiaxial not exceed the reference compression design value
(~) bending parallel to grain multiplied by all applicable adjustment

factors except the column stability factor, Cv.
and
1. 20Emin'
hi< F,,,; == (Rs? for b iaxial bending 616.10.1.2 F/, the reference compression design values
parallel to grain multiplied by all applicable adjustment
f bi actual edgewise bending stress (bending load
factors except the column stahility factor, applies to cnd-
applied to narrow face of member), MP a
to-end bearing of compression members provided there is
f bZ actual flat wise bending stress (bending load adequate lateral support and the end cuts are. accurately
applied to wide face of member, MPa squared and parallel.
d1 wide face dimension (see Figure 616.9-2),
mm 616.10.J.3 When fc > 0. 75F/, bearing shall be on a
d2 narrow face dimension (see Figure 616.9-2), metal plate or strap, or on other equivalently durable,
mm rigid, homogenous material with sufficient stiffness to
distri bute the applied load. Where a rigid insert is required
Effective column lengths, i et and t e2, shall be for end-to-end bearing of compression members, it shall
determined in accordance witl1 6J6.7.1.2 . F/, Fc1i1, and be equivalent to I mm a metal plate 1 mm thick or better,
F cE2 shall be determined in accordance w ith 615.3 and inserted with a snug fit between abutting ends.
616.7. Fb1', Fbz', and FbE shall be determined in
accordance with 615.3 and 616.3.3. 616.10.2 Bearing Perpendicular to Grain
The actual compression stress perpendicular to grain shall

be based on the net bearing area and shall nol exceed the
adjusted compression design value perpendicular to grain,
f cJ. -S F cl.'. When calculating bearing area at I.he ends of
bending members, no allowance shall be made for the fact
that as the member bends, pressure upon the inner edge of
the bearing is greater than at the member end.
Association of Structural EngineBrs of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
-
616.10.3 Bearing at an Angle to Grain 616.10.4 Bearing Area Factor, Cb
The adjusted bearing design value at an angle to grain Reference compression design values perpendicular to
(sec:: Figure 616.10-1) shall be calculated as follows: grain, F c.L, apply to bearings of any length at the ends of a
member, and to all bearings 150 mm or more in length at
, F/F,J.' any other location. For bearings less than 150 mm in
(616.23)
F8 = F/sin 2 9 + Fc 1 'cos 2 9 length and not nearer than 75 mm to the end ofa member,
where: the reference compression design value perpendicular to
() angle between direction of load and grain, F,J., shall be permitted to be multiplied by the
direction of grain (longitudinal axis of following hearing area factor, Cb:
member), degrees
(616-24)
where:
lb bearing length measured parallel to grain, mm
Equation 616-24 gives the following bearing area factors,

Cb, for the indicated bearing length on such small areas as
plates and washers.
The bearing length factors, Cb, for some values of tb arc

given in Table 616.10-1.
Figure 616.10-1 Be<ctring at an Angle to Grain

Table 616.10-1 Bearing Length Factor, Cb
150
fb
l3 25 38 50 75 100 or
(mm)
more
Cb 1.73 1.38 1.25 1.19 l.13 1.10 1.00
For round bearing areas such as washers, the bearing

length, t b• shall be equal to the diameter.
- c -
j,... • "1 I I_. I • 1
1
- t IL.I
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, First Printing. 2015
4
SECTION617 the decking in contact with the supporting members, as

normally installed.
SAWN LUMB
== E=
R~ ~ ~ ~ - - -
6 t 7.J .4 Moisture Service Condition of Lumber
617.1 General
617 .J.1 Scope The reference design values for lumber specified herein
arc applicable to lumber that will be used under dry
Section 617 applies to engineering design with sawn service conditions such as in most cove red structures,
lumber. Design procedures, reference design values, and where the moisture content (MC) in used will be a
other information herein apply only to lumber complying maximum of I 9%, regardless of the moisture content at
\.Vilh the requirements specified below. the time of manufacture. For lumber used under
conditions where the moisture content of the wood in
617.1.2 ldentification of Lumber service will exceed 19% for an extended period of time,
the design values shall be multiplied by the wet service
When the reference design va lues spccilicd hcre111 nrc
factors, CM , specilied in Tables 617.J-l(a) and 6 17.1 -
used, the lumber, includi11g encl-jointed or edge-glued
l(b).
lumber, sh11ll be idcntilicd by lhc grade mark of, or
certificate of inspection issued by, a lumber grading or
Table617. 1-l(a) Wet Service Factor, CM
inspection bureau or agency recognized as being Visually Graded Sawn Lumber (MC> 19%)
competent.
Stren •lh Pro ,crt
617.1.3 Definitions Fi, ft Fv FcJ.. Fe E and
E
617 .1.3 ..1 Structural sawn lumber consists of lumber Dimension
0.851 1.00 0.97 0.67 0.80 1 0.90
classi{ications known as "Dimension", "Beams and Lumber
Stringers", "Post and Timbers", and "Decking'', with Timbers 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.91 l.00
design values assigned to each grade. Deckin 0.85 0.67 0.90
I
When (F1,}{CF) $ 8 MPu, CM =I.O
617.1.3.2 "Dimension" refers to lumber from 50 mm to 1
When (FcJ(Cf) ~ 5 MPa. CM = UJ
100 mm (nominal) thick, and 50 mm (nominal) or more in
width. Dimension lumber is further classified as Table 617.1-l(h) Wet Service Factor, CM
Structural Light Framing, Light Framing, Sluds, and Glued Laminated Timber (MC> 16%)
Joists and Planks. Stren •lh Pro ert
Fb Fe Fv FcJ. Fe E and F,.L
617. 1.3.3 "1:3eams and Stringers" refers to lumher ol' E
rectangular cross section, 125 mm (nominal) or more
thick, with width more Lhan 50 mm grealer than thickness, 0.80 0.80 0.875 0.53 0.73 0.833 0.875
graded with respect to its strength in bending when loaded
on the narrow face. 617.t.5 Lumber Sizes
617. J.3.4 "Posts and Timbers" refers lo lumber of square 617.1.5.1 Lumber sizes a·eferred to in this Specification
or approximately square cross section. 125 mm x 125 mm are nominal sizes. Computations Lo detcm1 ine the required
(nominal) and larger, with width not more than 50 mm sizes of members shall be based on the net dimensions
greater than thickness, graded primarily for use as posts or (actual sizes) and not the nominal sizes.
columns carrying longitudinal load.
617.1.5.2 For JOO mm (nominal) or thinner lumber, the
617. 1.3.5 "Decking" refers to lumber from 50 mm to 100 net DRY dressed sizes shall be used in all computations
mm (nominal) thick, tongued and grooved. or grooved for of structural capacity regardless of the moisture content at
spline on the narrow face, ru1d intended for use as a roof, the time of munufacture or use.
noor, or wal l membrane, Decking is graded for
application in the llatwisc direction, with the wide face of

CHAPTER 6 Wood (i-!i1
(iJ 7 .1.5.3 For 125 mm (nominal) and thicker lumber, the mcmbcr, carries or is responsible for carrying its Ii.ill
net GREEN dressed sizes shall be used in computations design load . ...-or repetitive member uses see 617.3.9.
of st ruct11ral capacity regard less of the moisture.: contcnt at
the time ol' 111an11facture or use. <it 7.2.3.2 Visually Graded Lumber. Rdcrenc.e design
valucs for visually grade lumber in Tables (j 15.2-1 and
(iJ7.t.S.4 Where a design is based on rough sizes or 615.2-2 are based on the provisions of ASTM Standards
special sizes, the applicable moisture content and size D 245 and O 1990.
usect in design shall be clearly indicated in plans or
specification!>. 617.2.3.3 Machine Stress Rated (MSR) Lumber and
Machine Evaluated Lumbcr {MEL). Reference design
617.1.6 F.nd-Jointcd or Edi,:c-Glued Lumber values for machine stress rnlcd lumber and machine
evaluated lum bcr in Ta hies 622.2-1 and 622.2-4 arc
Reference design values for sawn lumber are applicable to determined by visual grading and nondestructive
structural end-jointed or edge-glucd lumber or the same pretesting of individual pieces.
species and grade. Such use shall includc, but nol be
limited to light framing, studs,joists, planks, and decking. 617.2.4 Modulus of Elasticity, E
617.1.7 Rcsawn or Rcmanufactured Lumber 617.2.4.1 Average Values. Rcforcncc design values for
modulus or elasticity assigned to the visually graded
617.1.7.1 When structural lumber 1s rcsawn or species and grades of lumher Iiswd in Ta hies 615.2-1 and
remanulactured, it shall be regraded, and refercncc design 615.2-2 are average values which conform lo ASTM
values for the regraded material shall apply. Standards D 245 and D l 9~)0. Adjustments in modulus of
elasticity have been taken to rcfkt:t increases for
617.1.7.2 When sawn lumber is t:ross cut to sho11er seasoning, increases for density wht:re applicable, and,
lengths, the requirements of 617.1.7.l !>hall not apply, where required, reductions have been made to account for
cxcept for reference bending design values for those the effect of grade upon stiffness. Rcforcnce modulus of
Beam and Stringer grades whcre grading provisions for elasticity design values are based upon thc species or
lhc middle 1/3 of the length of the piece dillcr from species group average in accordance with ASTM
grading provisions for the outer thirds. Standards D 1990 and D 2555.
617.2 Reference Design Values 617.2.4.2 Special Uses. Average relerence modulus of
elasticity design values listed in Tables 615.2-1 and
617.2.1 Reference Design Values 615.2-2 are to be used in dt:sign of repetitive memher
systems and in calculating the immediate deflection of
Reterence design values for visually graded lumber arc single members which carry l11eir full design load. In
specific<l in Tables 615.2-1 and 615.2-2. special applications where deflection is a critical factor, or
where amount of dcfonnation under long-term loading
617.2.2 Other Species and Grades must be limited, the nt:ed for use of a reduced modulus of
elasticity design value shall be determined.
Reforcnt:t: design values for species and gradt:s of lumber
not otherwise providc<l herein shall be established in 617.2.S Bending, Fb
accordance with apprnpriate ASTM standards and other
technically sound criteria. 617.2.5.1 Dimcnsion Grades. Adjusted bending design
values for Dimension grades apply to members with the
617.2.3 Basis for Reference Design Values load applied lo either the narrow or wide fat:c.
617.2.3.1 The rcfcrcnce design values in Tahlcs 615.2-1 617.2.5.2 Decking Grades. Adjusted bending design
and 615.2-2 arc for the design of structurt:s whcrc an values for Decking grades apply only wht:n the load is
individual member, such as a heam, girder, post or other applied to the wide fat:c.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, First Printing, 2015
c
617.2.5.3 Post and Timber Grades. Adjusted bending 617.3 Ad_justment of Reference Design Values
design values for Post and Timber grades apply to
members with the load applied to either the narrow or 617.3.1 General
wide face.
Reference Design values (Fb, Fe, Fv, Fc1., Fe , E, Enun)
617.2.5.4 Beam and Stringer Grades. Adjusted bending from Tables 615.2-1 and 615.2-2 shall be multiplied by
design values lor Beam and Stringer Grades apply to the adjustment factors specified in Table 617.3-1 to
members with the load applied to the nun·ow face. When determine adjusted design values (Fb' , F/, Fv', Fc.t', Fe',
Post and Timber sizes or lumber arc grodcd to Beam and E', Emtn' ).
Stringer grade requirements, design values for the
applicable Beam and Stringer grades shall be used. Such Table 617.3-1 Applicability of Adjustment Factors
lumber shall be identified in accordance with 617.1.2.1 as for Sawn Lumber
confonning to Beam and Stringer grades. ... ...8
0 ...0 ... B... .8 ...
..
(.)
0 0 ~ ~ ... ...0 £ ,:_._,"'u u.."' 0c

....
617.2.5.5 Continuous or Cantilevered Beams. When
Beams and Stringers arc used as continuous or
"' u."' ...."' u.. B... 8
µ...
c 0
5 "'
0
..
~ µ.. 5 "' u..
(.) V>
<I)
"'
·~.... .E0 a :.0 u...,"'
<I) 0 u.. u..
.::: j i <~
0 <I)
<I) I)()
cantilevered beams, the design shall include a requirement :::, 0 "'... "' "' "Iii ·E Cll a 00
;::i
c
...,Cl 'ii E czis v: ii:0$ ·13.s a E:::,c .s .s~
<I) N
(/) 01)
that the grading provisions applicable to the middle 1/3 of Q.
the length shall he applied to at least the middle 2/3 of the "'0 ;$'. I- "'
<I)
<I) ~ ~ 0
....J i:ll 0
()
0
;:s
CQ
length of pieces to be used as two span continuous beams. Ill

,
and 10 the entire length of pieces to be used over three or Fb = Fb x CD CM Ct Ci c,
Cp Crt• Cr - .
-
more spans or as cantilevered hcams. F/ = Ft x Co CM Ct - CF . c, - . - -
Fv I = Fv x Cv CM c, - - - c, - - - -
617 .2.6 Compression Perpendicular to Grain, F c .l Fe' = F., x Co CM Cc - CF - c, - Cr - -
Fc.t I = FcJ. x - CM Ct - - . c, - - - Cb
For sawn lumber, the reference compression design
values perpendicular lo grnin arc based on a defomiation
E' == E x - CM Ct - - - Ci - - - .
limit Lhal has been shown by experience to provide for
Em,n ' = Emtn x - CM c, . - - ct - - Cr -
adequate service in typical wood frame constrnclion. The
reference compression des ign va lues perpendicular Lo where:
grain specilicd in Tables 615.2- 1 and 6 15.2-2 are species Re.thence modulus of elasticity value
group average values associated with a deformation level multiplied by all applicable adjustment
or I mm for a steel plate on wood member loading factors
condition. One method for limiting deformation in special Reference modulus of elasticity for heam
applications where it is critical, is use or a reduced and column stability
compression design va lue perpendicu lai· to grain. T he E~ 05 (1.03)/(1.66)
fo llowing equation sh.ill be used to calculate the Eo.os Modulus of elasticity level exceeded by
compression design value perpendicular to grain for a about 95% of the individual pieces
reduced deformation level of 0.5 mm. E [1 - 1. 645COVeJ
E Reference modulus of elasticity
Fcl.0.5 ::: 0. 73Fcl. (617-1)
COVe coctlicient of variation in modulus of
where: elasticity
FC.l0.5 compression perpendicular to grain design 0.25 for Visually graded sawn lumber
value at 0.5 mm dcfonnation limit, MPa
0 .1 J for Machine Stress Rate lumber
Fc.l = reference compression perpendicular to 1.03 adjustment factor to convert E values to a
grain design value at I mm deformation
pure bending basis
limit (as tabulated in Tables 615.2-1 and
615.2-2), MPa 1.66 factor of safety

CHAPTER 6 - Wood 5_ 53
617.3.2 Load Duration Factor, C0 617.3.7 Flat Use Factor, c,..
/\II reference design valucR except modulus of elasticity, Bending design adj us ted by size factors ( c1 ) are based 011
E, modulus of elasticity for beam and column stability, loads applied to narrow face. When sawn lumber is used
E min, and compression perpendicular to grain, F c1., shall flatwise, (i.e. load applied to wide face) bending design
be multiplied by load duration factors , CD, as speci lied in value, F b , s hall also be multiplied by lhc foll owing flat-
615.3.2. use factors:
Table 6 17.3-2 Visually-Graded Sawn Lumber

617.3.3 Wet Service Factor, CM
Flat-use Factors, Cfu
Reference design values for structural sawn lumber arc Width 'l11ickness (breadth}
(dcnth) 50mm & 75mm lOOmm
ba.~ed on the moisture service conditions specified in
61 7.1.4. Whcn the moisture content of structural members
50mm & 75mm l.O -
in use differs from these moisture service cond itions,
lOOmm I.I 1.0
reference design values shall he m ulliplied by the wet
125rnm I. I 1.05
service factors, CM, specified in Table 617. 1-l(a). 150mm 1.15 1.05
200mm 1.1 5 1.05
617.3.4 Temperature Factor Ct 250m m & wider 1.20 1. I
When structural members will experience sustained Table 617.3-3 Machine-Graded 1 Sawn Lumber
Flat-use Factors, Cfu
expos ure to elevated temperatures up to 66°C, rcforenc~
design values s hall be multiplied by the temperature Wid th Thickness (breadth)
factors, Ct , specified in 6 15.3.3. (depth) 50mm
SOrnm & 75mm l.O
617.3.5 Beam Stability Factor, Ci IOOmm 1.1
125mm 1.1
Reference bending design values, F b, shall be multiplied ISOmm 1.15
by the beam stability factor, C,., specilicd in 616.3.3. 200mm 1.15
250mm &.wider 1.20
I
617.3.6 Size Factor, C11 Refer to SecMn 622
617.3.8 Incising Factor, C1

617.3.6.1 Where the depth of a rectangular sawn lumber
bending member 125 mm or thicker exceeds 300 mm, the
Many species readily accept preservative trea.tments,
reference bending design values, F b, shall he multiplied
while others don't. For species that arc not easily treated,
by the following size factor:
incising is used to make th<.: treatment e1lective.
_(300)l/lJ
Cp- - - (6 17-2) Some design values for sawn lurnber must be adjusted if
d incising is used to increase the penetration of the
preservatives. The incising factors, Ct , to be used shall be
where:
as follows:
CF size factor
d depth of beam, mm Table 61 7.3-4 Incising Factor, Ci
617.3.6.2 For beams of circular cross section with a E

diameter greater than 340 mm, or for 300 mm or larger 0.95 0.80 0.80 1.0
square beams loaded in the plane of the diagonal, the size
factor shall be determined in accordance with 617 J .6.1 For compression perpendicular to grain as well as for
on the basis of an equivalent conventi onally loaded square non-incised treated lumber, C1 1 . 0. =
beam of the same cross-sectional area.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, First Printing, 201 5
z::a
617.3.9 Repetitive Member Factor, Cn 617.4 Special Design Considerations
A repetitive member system is defined as one that has: 617.4.1 Stability of Bending Members
I. Three or more parallel members of Dimension 617.4.t.1 Sawn lumber hending members shall be
lumher or structural composite lumber; designed in accordance with the lateral stability
calculations in 616.3.3 or shall meet the lateral support
2. Members space<l not more than 600 mm on center; requirements in 617.4.1.2 and 617.4.1.3.
3. Members connected together by a loa<l-<listributing
617.4.1.2 As an alternative to 617.4.1.l, rectangular sawn
element such as roof, floor, or wall sheathing lhat has
lumber beams, rafters, joints, or other bending members,
been designed or has been proven hy experience to
shall be designed in accordance with the following
transmit the design load to adjacent members without
provisions to provide rcslntint against rotation or lateral
displaying structural weakness or unacceptable
displacement. If the depth to breadth, d/b, based on
deflection.
nominal dimen~ions is:
For a repetitive member system, the reference F b may be
(a) d/b ::; 2; no lateral support shall be required.
=
multiplied by a repetitive memhcr factor, C,. 1. 15. For
=
all other framing systems, C1• 1. 0. (b) 2 < d/b ::; 4; the ends shall be held in position, as by
full depth solid blocking, bridging, hangers, nailing, or
617.3.10 Column Stability Factor, Cp bolting to other framing members, or other acceptable
means.
Rc1erence compression design values parallel to grain, Fc,
shall be multiplied by the column stability factor, Cp, (c) 4 < d/b ~ 5; the compression edge of the member
specified in 616.7. shall be held in line for its entire length to prevent lateral
displacement, as by adequate sheathing or subflooring,
617.3. 1 t Buckling Stiffness Factor, Cr and ends at point of bearing shall be held in position to
prevent rotation and/or lateral displacement.
Reference modulus of elasticity for beam and column
stahility, E111 ; 11 , shall be permitted to be multiplied by the (d) S < d/b::; 6; bridging, full depth solid blocking or
buckling stiffoess factor, c.,. , as specified in 617 .4.2. diagonal cross bracing shall be installed at intervals not
exceeding 2.40 m, the compression edge of the member
shall be held in line as by adequate sheathing or
617.3.12 Bearing Area Factor, Cb
sub11ooring, and the ends at points of bearing shall he
Reference compression design values perpen<licuhu to held in position to prevent rotation and/or lateral
displacement.
grain, Fc1., shall he permitted lo be multiplied by the
hearing area factor, Cb, as specified in 616.10-4.
(e) 6 < d/b::; 7; both edges of the member shall he held
in line for their entire length and ends at points of bearing
617.3.13 Pressure-Preservative Treatment
shall be held in position to prevent rotation and/or lateral
displacement.
Reference design values apply to sawn lumber prcssure-
treated hy an approved process and preservative. Load 617.4.t.3 Tf a bending member is subjected to both
duration factors greater than 1.6 shall not apply tu flexure and axial compression, the depth to breadth ratio
structural members pressure-treated with water-home shall he no more than 5 to I if one edge is firmly held in
preservati vcs. line. If un<lcr all combinations of load, the unbraced edge
of the member is in tension, the depth to breadth ratio
shall be no more than 6 to l.
cw
617.4.2 Wood Trusses 617.4.3 Notches
617.4.2.1 Increased chord stiffness relative to axial loads 617.4.3.1 End notches, located at the ends of sawn
where a 50 mm x JOO mm or smaller sawn lumber truss lumber bending members for bearing over a support, shall
compression chord is subjected to combined flexure and be permitted, and shall not exceed Yi the beam depth (see
axial compression under dry service condilion and has 9 Figure 617.4-1).
mm or thicker plywood sheathing nailed to the narrow
face of the chord in accordance with code required roof 617.4.3.2 Interior notches, located in the outer tllir<ls of
sheathing fastener schedules, shall be permitted to be the span of a single span sawn lumber bending member,
accounted for by multiplying the reference modulus of shall be permitted, and shall not exceed 1/6 the depth of
elasticity design value for beam and column stability, the member. Interior notches on the tension side of 90
Emi,i, by the buckling stiffness factor, C7 , in column mm or greater thickness ( 100 mm nominal thickness)
stability calculations (see 616.7). When fe s 2.40 m, c.,. sawn lumber bending members are not permitted (see
shall be calculated as follows: Figure 617.4-1).
617.4.3.3 See 616.1.2 and 616.4.3 for eflect of notches

(617-3) on strength.
where:
effective column length of truss
compression chord, mm
_ _ _ _ _"'-t-_._.f• · - D
0.62 for wood seasoned to 19% moisture · dn~'J,d d
content or less at the time of plywood
attachment
0.33 for unseasoned or partially seasoned
wood at the time of plywood attachment
1 - 1. 645COV E
0.59 for visually graded lumber
0.75 for machine evaluated lumber (MEL)
Figure 617.4-1 Notch Limitations for Sawn Lumber
0.82 for products with COVE s 0.11 Beams
When .fe > 2.40 m, Cr shall be calculated based on

fe = 2.40m
c
specified in Tables 617. l -1 (h) when the moisture content

SECTION 618 in service is 16% or greater, as may occur in exterior or
STRUCTURAL GLUED s uhmerged construc1ion, or humid environments.
LAMINATED TIMBER - - - - - ~ ~
618.2 Reference Design Values
618.1 General
618.2.1 Reference Design Values
618.1.1 Scope
Reference design values for soltwood and hardwood
618.1.l.1 Section 618 applies to engineering design with struclural glued laminated timber shall be based on other
structural glued laminated limber. I3asic requirements are substantiated information from an approved source.
provided in this Specification.
618.2.2 Orientation of Member
618.1. 1.2 Design procedures, reference design values and
other infonnat1on provided herein apply only to structural Reference design values for structural glued laminated
glued laminated timber conforming io all pertinent timber arc depcndenl on the orientation of the laminations
provisions of the specifications. relative lo the applied loads. Subscripts arc used to
indicate design values corresponding to a given
618.1.2 Definition orientation. The orientations of the cross-sectional axes
for structural glued lamin~ted timber are shown in Figure
The term "structural glued laminated Limber'' refers to an
618.2-1. The x-x axis runs parallel to the wide face of the
engineered, stress rated product of II timber laminating
laminations. The y-y 11xis runs perpendicular to the wide
plant, comprising assemblies of specially selected and
face of the laminations.
prepared wood laminations bonded together with
adhesives. The grain of all lamin11tions is approximately
y
parallel longitudinally. The separate laminations shall not
exceed 50 mm in net thickness and arc pennitted to be
comprised of:
• one piece
• pieces joined end-to-end to form any length
x
• pieces placed or glued edge-to-edge to make wider
ones
• pieces bent lo curved form during gluing.
618. L3 Standard Sizes

y x
618.J.3.1 Standard finished widths of structural glued
Figure 618 .2-1 Axis Orientations
laminated members s hall meet the size requirements of a
design or other special requirements.
618.2.3 Balanced and Unbalanced Layups
618.1.3.2 The length and nc.t dimensions of all members
shall be specified. Additional dimensions necessary to Structural glued lmninated timbers are permitted to be
define non-prismatic members shall be specified. assembled with laminations of the same lumber grades
placed symmetrically or asymmetrically about the neutral
6UI.J .4 Service Conditions axis of the member. Symmetrical hiyups arc referred to as
"balanced" and have the same design values for positive
618.J.4.1 Reference design v11lues for dry service and negative bending. Asymmetrical layups arc referred
conditions shall apply when the moisture content m to as "unbalanced" and have lower design values for
service is Jess than 16%, as in most covered structures. negative bending than for positive bending. The top side
of unbalanced members is required to be marked "TOP"
618.1.4.2 Reference design values for glued lami nated
by the manufacturer.
timber shall be multiplied by the wet service factors, CM ,
-
prismati c me mbers incl ude, but not li mited Lu: arches,

tapered bea ms, curved beams, and notched membe rs.
The reference bending design values F bx+ and F hx , shall
apply lo members with loarls causing bending about the The reference shear design value parallel to grain, Fvy , is
x-x ax is. The reference bending design value for positive ta bulated for membe rs with four o r more lam inations. For
bending, F bx+, :;hall apply for bending stresses ca using members with two or three laminations, the reference
tension at the bottom of the beam. The reference bending design value shall be multiplied by 0.84 o r 0.95,
design value for negati ve bending, F bx- , s hall app ly for respectively.
bending stresses causing tension at the to p of the bea m. 618.2.7 Modulus of l!:lasticity, Ex, Ex min, Ey , E y min
The reference be nding des ig n values, Fhy, shall apply tu
members w ith loads causing bending about the y-y axis. The reference modulus of elasticity, Ex., shall be used for
dclcrminat ion of dellections due to bendi ng about the x-x
618.2.5 Compression Perpendicular to Grain, F l.'.Lx, axis.
F e.Ly
The reference modulus of elasticity, Ex niin , shall be used
The reference compres1,ion design value perpendic ula r to for beam and column s tability calcu lations for members
grnin, F c:.Lx, shall apply to members with hearing loads on buckling about the x-x axis.
the wide faces o f the laminations.
The reference modulus o r elasticity, Ey, shall he used for
T he refere nce compress ion des ign value perpendicu lar tu determ ination of deflections due to bending about the y-y
grain, Fc.1y, shall apply to members with bearing load~ on axis.
the narrow edges of the laminations.
The reference modules of elasticity, Eymin, shall be used
The reference compression design values perpendicular to for beam and column stability calculations for members
grain arc based on a deformation limit of I mm obtained buckling about the y-y axis.
from testing in accordance with ASTM 0143. The
compression perpendicular to grain s tress associate.xi with For the calculation of extensional deformations, the axial
a 0.5 mm deformation limit s hall be permitted lo be mod ulus of elastic.ity shall be penni tted to he estimated as
calculated as 73% of the reference value (Sec also Euxiut - 1.05 Ey,
61 7.2.6).
618.2.8 Radial ·Tension, F ,·t
618.2.6 Shear Parallel to Grain, Fvx. Fvy
For curved bending members, the radial tension design
The reference s hear desig n value parallel to grain, F vx values perpendicular to grain, F,.t, s hall be based on other
shall apply to members w ith shear loads causing bending substa1uiated information from an approved source.
abo ut the x-x axis. The rderence shear design val ue
parallel to grain, F vy, shall apply to members with s hear 618.2.9 Radjal Compression, Fri:
loads causing bending about the y-y axis.
For curved hcnding members, the reference radial
The reference shear design values parallel tu grain shall compression design value, F rc:, shall be taken as the
apply to prismatic mcmbe.rs except those subject to reference compression perpendicular to grain design value
impact or repetitive cyclic loads. For non-prismatic on the side face, Fe.Ly·
members and for all members subject to impact or
repet itive cyclic loads, the reference shear design values 618.2.10 Other Species and Grades
parallel to grain shall he multiplied by the shear reduction
Reference design values for species and grades of
facLor specified in 618.3. J0. This reduction shall also
structural glued laminated timber not otherwise provided
apply to the design of conn ections transferri ng loads
herein s hall be based on other s ubstantiated infonna tion
through mechanical fasten ers (see 616.4.3).
from an approved source.
Prismatic members shall be defined as straight or
cambered members with constant cross-section. No n-
c
618.3 Adjustment of Reference Design Values 618.3.2 Lead Duration Factor, C0
All reference design values except modulus of elasticity,

618.3.1 General
E. modulus of d.tsticity for beam and column stabilily,
Reference Design values (Fb, Ft, F.,, Fe, Frc, E, Em1n) E',n;n, an<l compression perpendicular lo grain,
shall be multiplied by lhe adjustment factors specified in Fe, shall be multiplied by load duration factors, C0 , as
Table 618.3-1 to determine adjusted design values (Fb', spccilied in 616.3.2.
F/, Fv', Fe', F,.,', E', Em;n').
618.3.3 Wet Service Factor, CM
Table 618.3· I Applicability of Adjustmcnl Faclors for Reference design values for struclural glued laminated
Structural Glued Laminated Timber timber are based on the moisture service conditions
specified in 618.1.4. When the moisture content of
structural members in sue differs from these moisture
service conditions, reference design values shall be
multiplied by the wer service factors, CM, specified in
Table 617.1-l(b).
618,3.4 Temperature Factor, Ct
When structural members will expericm:c sustained

Fb' = Fb x Co CM Ct C,_ Cv Cru C,. C, - - • exposure to elevated temperatures up to 66°C, reference
design values shall be multiplied by the temperature
F/ = Ft x Cv C,11 C1 • - • - • - - •
factors, Ct, specified in 615.3.3.
Fv' = Fv x Cv CM Cc · - • - • Cv - -
Frc' = Frt x C" C,., C 1 • - - - - - - -
618.3.5 Beam Stability Factor, Ci
F,:' = Pc x Co Ci11 Cc • - - - - - Cp - Reference bending design values, Fh, shall be mulliplied
Fc1.' = Fc1. x - CM Ct · - - - - • - Cb by the beam slability factor, C,_, specified in 616.3.3. The
E' = E x - CM Ct - - - - - • - - beam stability factor, CL, shall not apply simultaneously
1 with lhc volume factor, Cy, for struclural glued laminated
Em1n = E111i11 x
- Cu C1 • - - - - - - -
1
The beam stability factor, Ci, sh,111 not apply simultaneously with timber bending members (see 618.3.<i). Therefore, the
tlie volume factor, Cv, for structural glued laminated timber lesser of these adjusln'lent factors shall apply.
bending member.~ (sec 618.3.6). Therefore, the lesser of these
adjustment faclors apply. 618.3.6 Volume Factor, Cv
where: When structural glued laminated timher members are
Relerence modulus of claslidty value loaded in bending about the x-x axis, the reference
multiplied by all applicable adjustment
bending design values, F bx+, and F hx-, shall be
factors
multiplied by the following volume factor:
Em111 Reference modulus of clasticily for beam
(6/Y c: t (1! r~
and column slability 1 1 1
0 0 (618-1)
Eo.os(l. 03)/(1. 66)
Cv = 1.0
Eo.os Modulus of claslicily level exceeded by
about 95% of the individual pieces where:
E[t - 1.645COVF] L length of bending member between points
of zero moment, m
E Reference modulus of elasticity
d depth of bending member, mm
COVF. cocffkicnl of variation in modulus of
elasticity b width (breadth) of bending member. For
multiple piece width layups, b = width of
0.10 for Structural Glued Laminated timber widest piece used in the layup. Thus,
1.03 adjustment factor to convert E values to a b ::; 275 mm.
pure bending basis x IO ifspccifie value has not been established
1.66 factor of safely for the species used
...
The volume factor, Cv, shall not apply simultaneously 618.3.9 Slress lnt.eraction Factm·, CI
with lhc beam stability factor, c,.
(sec 616.3.3).
Therefore, the lesser of these adjustment factors slmll For the tapered portion or bending members tapered on
apply. the compression face, the reference bending design value,
Fbx, shall he multiplied by the following stress interaction
618.3.7 Flat Use Factor, Cru factor:
When s\t'll(;lural glued laminated timber is loaded in 1

bending about the y-y axis and the member dimension
c, == -;::===========
(618-4)
parallel to the wide lace of the laminations, dy (see Figure
618.3- I), is less than 300 mm, the reference hcnding
where:
design value, Fhy, shall he permitted to be multiplied by
the tlat use factor, Cfu, calculated by the following
8 = angle of taper, degrees
formula:
For memhers tapered on the compression face, the stress
c,u - -(300)
dy
119
(618-2)
interaction factor, C1, shall not apply simultaneously with
the vohum: factor, Cv, lherefore, the lesser or these
adjustment factors shall apply.
For the lapered portion of the bending members lapcrcd

on !11e tension face, the reference bending design value,
F bx, shal I be multiplied hy the following stress interaction
factor:
dy (In.) 1
c, = -;::===========
z
1+ (Fb tan 8)
F,,C,,r
2
+ (Fb tan
Frt
8) 2 (618-5)
where:
Figure 618.3-1 Depth, dy, for Flat Use Factor 8 = angle of taper, degrees
618.3.8 Curvature Factor, C, For members tapered on the tension face, the stress
inleraclion factor, C1, shall nol apply simultaneously with
For curved portions of bending members, the reference
the beam stability factor, c,.,
therefore, the lesser of these
bending design value shall be multiplied by the following
adjuslment factors shall apply.
curvature factor:
Taper cuts on the tension face of structural glued
(618-3) laminated timber beams are not recommended.
where: 618.3.lO Shear Reduction Factor, C,,,.

t thickness of laminations, mm
The re!erence shear design values, F vx and Fvy, shall be
R radius of curvalure or inside face of
member, mm multiplied by the shear reduction factor, Cvr """0.72 where
any oflhe following condilions apply:
t 1
R
::: - - for hardwoods
100 1. Design of non-prismatic members.
t 1 2. Design of members su~jccl to impact or repetitive
R
s - - for so1lwoods
125 cyclic loading.
The curvature factor shall not apply to reference design 3. Design or members at notches (616.4.3.2).
values in !11e slraight portion of a numher, regardless of 4. Design of members at connections (616.4.3.3).
curvature elsewhere.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition. First Printing, 2015
<
618.3.11 Column Stability Factor, Cp reinforcing sufficient to resist all radial stresses is used. In
no case shall fr exceed (1/3)F /.
Reference compression design values parallel to grain, Fc,
shall be multiplied by the column stability factor, Cp, Where the bending moment is in the direction tending to
specified in 616.7. increase curvature (decrease the radius), the radial stress
shall not exceed the adjusted radial compressional design
618.3.12 Bearing Area J<'actor, Cb fr~ Frc'·
Reference compression design values perpendicular to 618.4.l.4 The deflection of curved bending members
grain, Fc.1., shall be permitted to be multiplied by the with constant cross section shall be determined in
bearing area factor, Cb, as specified in 616. 10.4. accordance with 616.5. Horizontal displacements at the
s upports shall also be considered.
618.3.13 Pressure-Preservative Treatment
618.4.2 Double-Tapered Curved Bending Members
Reference design values apply to strnctural glued
laminated timber trealed by an approved process and 618.4.2.1 The bending stress induced by a bending
preservative. Load duration factors greater than 1.6 shall moment, M , at tl1e peaked section of a double-tapered
not apply to :structural members pressure-treated with curved bending member (see Figure 618.4-1) shall he
water-home preservatives. calculated as follows:
618.4 Special Design Considerations 6M

h == Kt/I bd z (618-7)
618.4.1 Curved Bending Members with Constant c
Cross Section where:
empirical bending stress shape factor
618.4.1.l Curved bending members with constant
rectangular cross section shall be designed for tlexural 1 + 2. 7tanq,7
strength in accordance with 616.3. 'Pr angle of roof slope, degrees
M bending moment, N·m
618.4.1.2 Curved bending members with wnstant
de depth at peaked section of member, mm
rectangular cross section shall be designed for she<1r
strength in accordance with 6 16.4, except thi:!l the
provisions or 616.4.3.1 shall not apply. The shear
reduction factor from 618.3. 10 shall apply.
618.4.1.3 The radial stress induced by a bending moment

in a curved bending member of constant rectangular cross
section is:
(61 8-6)
where:
M bending moment, N·m Figure 618.4-1 Double-Tapered Curved Bending
R radius of curvature at center line of Member
member, mm
Where tbe bending moment is in the direction tending to The stress interaction factor from 618.3.9 shall apply for
decrease curvature (increase the radius), the radial stres:s flexural design in the straight-tapered segments of double-
shall not exceed the adjusted radial tension design value tapercd curved bending members.
perpendicular to the grain, fr ~ Frt', unless mechanical
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP}

618.4.2.2 Ooublc-tapcred curved members shall be

designed for shear strength in accordance with 616.4, (618-9)
exccpl lhal the provisions of 616.4.3.1 shall not apply.
The shear reduction factor from 618.3.10 shall apply. where:
vcrl ical dcllcd ion al midspan, mm
618.4.2.3 The radial stress induced by bending moment
uniformly distrihutcd load, N/mm
in a double-tapered curved member shall be calculated as
follows: (de+ dJ(O. 5 + 0. 735 tan 4>r)
- 1.41dc tan q, 8
depth at the ends of the member, mm
(618-8) depth at the peaked section of member, mm
angle of roof slope, degrees
where: <J> 8 soffit slope at the ends of the member,
empirical radial stress faclor degrees
K·,·s
0.29(dJR,,i) + 0.32tan1·2 4>r
The horizontal dcllcction at Lhc supports of symmclrical
c,.s empirical load-shape radial stress reduction douhlc-tapcrcd curved beams shall be permitted lo be
lac Lor estimated as
0.27ln(tan¢r) + 0.28ln(f/te)-
O. 8(dc/ Rm) + 1 ~ 1. 0 for uniformly
loaded members where de/R 111 ~ 0.3 (618-10)
= 1.0 for members subject to constant
where:
moment
t:,.H horizontal deflection at either support, mm
f = span length, mm
length belween langent points, mm
h ha - dJ2 - de/2
le
M bending moment, N·m (f /2) tan 4>r + de
de depth at peaked section of member, mm
Rm radius of curvature at center line of 618.4.3 Lateral Stability for Tudor Arches
member, mm
The ratio of tange;1t point depth to breadth (d/b) of tudor
R + de/Z arches (see Figure 618.4-2) shall not exceed 6, based on
R radius of curvature of inside face of actual dimensions, when one edge of the arch is braced by
mcmber,mm
decking fastened directly to the arch, or braced at frequent
Where the bending moment is in the direction tending to intervals as by girts or roof purlins. Where such lateral
decrease curvature (increase the radius), the radial stress bracing is not present, d/b shall not exceed 5. Arches
shall not exceed lhe adjusted radial tension design value shall be designed for laleral slability in accordance with
perpendicular tu grain, f,. ~ Frc, unless mechanical the provisions of616.7 and 616.9.2.
reinforcing sufficient to resist all radial stresses is used. In
no case shall fr exceed (l/3)Fvx'·
Where the bending moment is in the direction tending to

increase curvature (decrease the radius), the radial sll'css
shall not exceed the adjusted radial compression design
value, fr ~ F,./.
618.4.2.4 The deflection of double-tapered curved

members shall be determined in accordance with 616.5,
except that the mid-span deflection of a symmetrical
double-tapered curved beam subject to uniform loads
shall be pennilted to be calculated hy the following
Figure 618.4-2 Tudor Arch
empirical formula:
<
6-62 CHAPTER 6 ·- Wood
618.4.4 Tapered Straight Bending Members
618.4.4.l Tapered straight beams (see Figure 618.4-3)

shall be designed for flexural strength in accordance with
~~~111=1
d,[Q@]_ l1:
- - - -~. L
1
6 l 6.6. The stress interaction factor from 6 J 8.3. 9 shall (a)
apply. For field-tapered members, the reference bending

design value, FIm and the reference modulus of elasticity,
-= I
•. IJ-=- ----- ------
Ex, shall be reduced according to the manufacturer's
recommendations tu account for the removal of high
_lJ
i--~~~~~~~ L ~~~~~~~~
grade material near the surface ol'the member. (b)
618.4.4.2 Tapered straight beams shall be designed tor

figure 618.4-3 Tapered Straight Bending Members
shear strength in accordance with 616.4, except that the
provisions of 6 I 6.4.3. l shall not apply. The shear
reduction factor from 618. 3. IO shall apply.
618.4.5 Notches
618.4.4.3 The deflection of tapered straight beams shall
be determined in accordance with 616.5, except that the 618.4.5.J The tension side of structural glue<l laminated
maximum deflection of a tapered straight beam subject lo timber bending members shall not be notched, except at
uniform Joads shall be permitted to be calculated as ends of members for bearing over a support, and notch
depth shall not exceed the lesser of 1II O the depth of the
equivalent to the depth, d equiv, of an equivalent
member or 75 mm.
prismatic member of the same width where:
618.4.5.2 The compression side of structural glued
laminated timber bending members shall not be notched,
(618- 11)
except at ends of members, and the notch depth on the
compression side shall not exceed 2/5 the depth or the
where:
member. Compression side end-notches shall not extend
depth at the small end of the member, mm into the middle 1/3 of the span.
Cdt empirical constant derived from
relationship of equations for deflection of Exception:
tapered straight beams and prismatic
beams. A taper cut on the compression edge at the end of a
structural glued laminated timber bending member shall
For symmetrical double-tapered beams:
not exceed 213 the depth of the member and the length
C,1c 1 + 0.66Cy when O < Cy $ 1 shall not exceed three times the depth Qf the member, 3d.
Cdt 1 + 0.62Cy when 1 < C1 $ 3 For tapered beams where the taper extends into the
middle 1/3 ofthe span, design shall be in accordance with
For single-tapered beams: 618.4.4.
1 + 0. 46Cy whc-n O < Cy$ 1.J
618.4.5.3 Notches shall not be permitted on both the
1 + 0.43Cy when 1.1 < Cy$ 2 tension and compression face at the same cross-section
Por single- and double-tapered beams:
618.4.5.4 See 616.1.2 and 616.4.3 for the effect of
notches on strength. The shear reduction factor from
618.3.10 shall apply for the evaluation of members at
notches.

SECTION 619 Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors
and fasteners not mentioned or fully covered may be
TIMBER CONNECTORS ANO detennined in a manner permitted by the Building
FASTENERS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Official.
619.1 Genera] 619.2 Bolts
Timber connectors and fasteners may be used to transmit Safe loads in kN for bolts in shear in seasoned lumber
forces between wood members and between wood and shall not exceed the values set forth in Table 6 I 9.1-1.
metal members. The allowable loads and installation of
timber connectors and fasteners shall be in accordance Allowable shear values used to connect a wood to
with the tables as provided in this Chapter. The allowable concrete or masonry are permitted to be detcnnincd as
loads and installation of timber connectors shall he as set one half the tabulated double shear values for a wood
forth in Tables 619.1-1 , 619.1-2, 619.1-3 and 619. l-4. member twice the thickness of the member attached to the
concrete or masonry.
Table 619.1-1 Grouping of Species for Detennining Allowable Loads for Timber Joints
r II IJT IV
Species Relative Species Relative Species Relative Species Relative
Density Density Density Density
Malabayabas 0.90 Makaasim 0.74 Malugai 0.61 Lingo-lingo 0.48
Sasalit 0.90 Kamagong 0.72 Dangakalan 0.58 Raintrce 0.48
Agoho 0.84 Guijo 0.70 Apitong 0.57 Bayuk 0.44
Liusin 0.79 Binggas 0.70 Salak in 0.56 Almaciga 0.42
Vaka\ 0.76 Katmon 0.68 Pine 0.55 Manggasinoro 0.42
Narig 0.72 Gatasan 0.67 Lanutan-bagyo

-
0.53 Yemane 0.42
Manggachapui 0.7 J Bok-bok 0.64 Miau 0.52
Molave 0.69 Kamatog 0.64 Palosapis 0.52
Lomarau 0.64 Malasaging 0.51
Kato 0.59 Vidal Lanutan 0.50
Pahutan 0.55 Gisau 0.50
Mahogany,
0.54 Nato 0.49
big leaf
Anti polo 0.52 Bagtikan 0.44
Narra 0.52 Malaanonang 0.41
Malakauayan 0.50 Lauan 0.40
Dao 0.48
Table 619.1-2 Reference Values on One 13olt ( Double Shear) in Semmned Wood Loaded at Both Ends
I .ength of Ooh in Diameter Loaded parallel to grain (0°) Loaded perpendicular lo grain (90")
Mntn Mcmher of Bolt Design value, P , flCf bolt, kN Design value, Q, per bolt, kN -
-
L d Species Group Species Ciroup
(mm) (mm) I II Ill lV I II Ill IV
12 7.08 4.86 4.20 3.26 3.76 2.07 1.98 1.82 -
16 6.01 4.01 4.19 2.:lO 2.21
40 20
8.75
11.0 7.55
5.20
6.53 5.02 4.85 -- 2.67 2.56
2.02
2.35
22
25
12.1
13.7
8.30
9.43
7.19
8.16
4.98
5.52
6.27 - 5.Cl4
5.47
4.70
2.77
- 3.01 - 2.66
2.89
2.48
2.43
2.64
12 8.38 5.75 3.99 2.59 2.27
16 l0.8 7.42 6.43 5.00 5.23 2.88 2.76 2 .53
-
50 20 13.7 9.38 8.12 6.27 6.07 3.34 3.20 2.93
22 15. 1 10.3 8.95 6.90 6.30 .H6 3.32 3.04
25 17.2 11.8 10.2 7.84 6.83 3.76 3.61 3.JO
12 9.29 6.38 5.52 4.68 6.11 3.36 3.23 2~
- 16
-
13.0 8.95 7.74 6.29 6.80 3.74 3.59 3.29
65 20 17.4 11.9 10.3 8.10 7.89 4.34 4.16 3.84
22 19.3 13.2 11.4 8.97 8.19 4.50 4.32 3.96
25 22.2 15.2 13.2 10.2 8.88 4.89 4.69 4.29
12 9.35 6.42 5.% 4.79 6.84 3.76 3.61 3.JO
16 13.8 9.4!\ 8.21 6.85 7.85 4.32 4.14 3.79
75 20 19.4 13.3 11.5 9.22 9.10 5 .01 4.8 1 4.40
22 21.9 15.0 13.0 l0.2 9.45 5.20 4.99 4.56
25 25.5 17.5 15.2 11.8 10.2 5.64 5.41 4.95
12 9.41 6.45 5.59 4.84 7.L4 3.93 3.77 3.45
16 14.l 9.66 8.36 7.09 8.37 4.61 4.42 4.05
80 20 20.3 14.0 12. 1 9.77 9.71 5.34 5.13 4.69
22 22.9 15.7 13.6 10.9 10.1 5.54 5.32 4.87
25 26.9 18.4 L6.0 12.5 10.9 6.01 5.77 .5.28
l2 9.39 6.44 5.58 4.84 7.42 4.08 3.92 3.59
16 14.3 9.79 8.48 7.28 9.20 5.06 4.86 4.45
90 20 21.3 14.6 12.7 10.5 10.9 6.04 5.77 S.28
22 24.9 17.I 14.8 12.0 11.3 6.24 5.98 5.48
25 29.4 20.2 17 .5 13.9 12.3 6.77 6.49 5.94
12 9.40 6.45 5.58 4.84 7.40 4.07 3.91 3.58
16 14.2 9.78 8.47 7.34 9.84 5.4 1 5.19 4.76
JOO 20 22.0 15.1 13.1 l l.l 12.l 6.68 6.41 5.87
22 25.9 17.8 15.4 12.8 12.(i 7.35 6.65 6.4.5
25 31.8 2J.R 18.9 l5.3 13.7 7.52 7.2 1 6.60
12 9.38 6.44 5.57 4.83 6.92 3.81 3.65 :U4
J6 )42 9.77 8 .46 7.33 10.1 5.56 5.33 4.89
20 22.3 15.~ 13.2 11.5 14.3 7.85 7..53 6.R9
125
22 26.9 18.S 16.0 13.8 15.3 8.44 8.10 7.42
25 34.4 23.6 20.4 17.3 17.l 9.40 9.02 8.26
28 41.8 28.7 24.8 20.5 18.5 10.2 9 .78 8.95
Tabulated de.1·ign values apply£" ONE bolt in double she(//·
1
To obtain adjusted lateral d1>sigr1 values (P'. Q'}, tabulated lateral design vcilues (P. QJ.for bolt.• shall be multiplied to all t1pphcable adjustment
fi,cJors based ,m National t>esi~n Specification jilr Wood Co11structlon (,"IDS) 20 I 5 Edition
When loaded at an angle 8 to grain, lateral de.sign value shall be comp1.1r<1d using N' = P' : ' ~,
s 11l2 + cos 2 0

Table 619.1-2 (cont'd) Reference Values on One Boll(Double Shear) in Seasoned Wood Loaded al llolh Ends
Le11gLh of Bolt Diameter Loaded parallel ro grain (0°) Loaded perpendicular to grain (90°)
in Main Member of Roll. Design value, P, per bolt, kN Design value, Q, per bolt, kN
L d Spedt:s Group Species Group
(mm) (mm) I II Ill IV I II III IV

12 9.38 6.44 5.57 4.83 6.92 3.81 3.65 3.34
16 14.2 9.77 8.46 7.33 IO.l 5.56 5.33 4.89
20 22.3 I 5.3 13.2 I 1.5 14.3 7.85 7.53 6.89
140 7.42
22 26.9 18.5 16.0 13.8 15.3 R.44 8.10
25 34.4 23.6 20.4 17.3 17.1 9.40 9.02 8.26
28 41.8 28.7 24.8 20.5 18.5 I0.2 9.78 8.95
16 14.2 9.76 8.45 7.33 9.59 5.28 5.06 4.64
20 22.3 15.3 13.2 l 1.5 )4.7 8.11 7.78 7.13
150 22 26.9 18.5 16.0 13.8 16.7 9.21 8.84 8.09
25 34.6 23.8 20.6 17.8 19.7 10.9 10.4 9.54
28 43.5 29.9 25.9 22.1 21.9 12.1 11.6 10.6
16 14.2 9.72 8.42 7.32 8.1!4 4.86 4.66 4.27
20 22.2 15.2 13.2 I 1.4 14.1 7.76 7.45 6.82
180 22 26.9 18.5 16.0 13.9 16.6 9.)2 !$.75 8.01
25 34.8 23.9 20.6 17.9 20.8 11.4 11.0 10.0
28 43.7 30.0 25.9 22.5 24.6 13.5 13.0 11.9
16 14.2 9.75 8.44 7.30 8.59 4.7'.l 4.54 4.15
20 22.2 15.3 13.2 11.4 13.8 7.61 7.30 6.69
190 22 26.9 18.5 16.0 13.9 16.3 8.99 8.63 7.90
25 34.8 23.9 20.7 17.9 20.7 11.4 10.9 10.0
28 43.6 29.9 25.9 22.5 25.0 13.8 13.2 12.1
16 14.2 9.90 8.44 7.30 8.37 4.61 4.42 4.05
20 22.2 l 5.2 13.2 11.4 13.5 7.40 7.13 6.50
200 22 26.8 18.4 16.0 13.9 16.1 8.84 8.48 7.77
25 34.6 23.8 20.6 17.8 20.S 11.3 I0.8 9.91
28 43.6 29.9 25.9 22.4 25.3 13.9 13.3 12.2
20 22.2 15.2 13.2 11.4 12.7 6.97 6.69 6.12
22 26.8 18 .4 15.9 11.9 IS.I 8.32 7.98 7.31
230 25 34.7 23.8 20.6 17.9 19.7 10.9 10.4 9.54
28 43.S 29.9 25.9 22.5 24.8 13.7 13.1 12.0
32 56.8 39.0 3'.l.8 29.3 31.9 17.5 16.8 15.4
20 22.2 15.2 13.2 11.4 12.4 6.81 6.54 5.98
22 26.8 18.4 16.0 13.8 14.8 8.15 7.83 7.16
240 25 34.7 23.8 20.6 17.9 19.4 10.7 10.2 9.37
28 43.6 29.9 25.9 22.5 24.G I '.l.S 13.0 11.9
32 57.0 39.1 33.9 29.4 '.l 1.9 17.5 16.8 15.4
22 26.8 18.4 15.9 13.8 14.4 7.93 7.61 6.97
25 34.7 23.8 20.6 17.9 18.8 10.4 9.93 9.09
260 25.8 22.4 24.0 13.2 12,7 11.6
28 43.5 29.8
32 56.7 38.9 33.7 29.2 31.5 17.3 16.6 15.2
1
Tabulated design values apply to ONF bolt in double shear
1 fo obtain adjusted lateral design values (P', Q'). tabulated lateral design values (P, Q) for ho!I.f shall be multiplied lo all applicable adju.~tment
.factors based on National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS) 2015 Hdition
P'Q'
J When loaded at an angle 8 to grain, lateral desi1;n vctlue shall be computed using N' = P' Sl1t
• ;,: 9 +Q' COS :.i 9
<
Table 619.1-2 (cont'd) Reference Values on One Oo\t (Double Shear) in Seasoned Wood Loaded al Both En<ls
Lcnglh of Bolt Diameter Lm1ded pijrallel to grain (0°) Loaded pt:rpendicular to grain (90°)
in Main Member of'Bolt Dtsign value, P, per bolt, kN Design value, Q, per bolt, kN
L d Species (i rou p Species Group
(mm) (mm) II Ill IV 11 Ill IV
17.9 18. 1 9.94 9 ..53
280
25
28
34.6
43.4
23.8
29.9
20.6
25.8 22.4 23.0 12.6 12.1 - 8.73
I 1.1
32 56.9 39.0 33.8 29.3 30.8 17.0 16.3 14.9
25 34.7 23.8 20.6 17.9 17.8 9.79 9.39 8.60
290 28 43.5 29.9 25.9 22.4 22.7 12.5 12.0 I 1.0
32 56.8 39.0 33.7 29.3 30.4 16.7 16.J 14.7
25 34.7 23.8 20.6 17.8 17.3 9.5 1 9.13 8.36
305 28 43.4 29.8 25.8 22.4 22.2 12.2 I l.7 10.7
32 56.8 39.0 33.8 29.3 29.8 16.4 15.8 14.4
I
Tabulated design values apply to ON!i bolt in double shear
2
Tu obtain adjusted lateral desi1;n value.r (P'. Q') , tabulated lateral design value.~ (P, Q).for bolts shall be multiplied to all applicable adjustment
factors based on National Design Specification for Wood Conr/ructiun (NDS) 2015 Edi1ion
J When loaded at an angle 9 to grain. lateral desi1;n value shall be mmputed usi.ng N' =P' sm. 2 : '+~ ,
cos2 9
1 1
Table 619.1-3 Split Ring Connector Unit Rclerence Design Values '
Split ring nou Number of faces Net thickne1,s of Loaded parallel to grain (0°) Loaded perpendicular to grain (90°)
diameter Diameler of mem ber with member Design value, P, per connector unit Design value, Q, per connector uni t
connectors on and bolt, kN and bolt, kN
same bolt
Species Group Species Group
(mm) (mm) (mm) I I[ Ill IV I II l!I !V
25 minimum l 1.7 10. l 8.45 7.30 8.45 7.21 6.0l 5.16
1
40 or thicker 14 .1 12.1 10.2 8.72 10.J 8.63 7.21 6.19
65 12
40 minimum 10.8 9.34 7.83 6.72 7.79 6.67 5.56 4.76
2
50 or th icke::r 14.1 12. 1 10.2 8.72 10.1 5 8.63 7.2 1 6. 19
25 minimum 18.2 15.6 13.0 11.2 12.6 10.9 9.08 7.83
1 40 26.8 23.0 19.0 16.5 18.6 16.0 1:U 11.5
thicker than 40 27.3 23.4 19.5 16.9 19.0 I (>.3 13.6 11.7
100 20 40 minimum 18.3 15 .7 13.I l 1.3 13 .3 10.9 9.08 7.83
50 22.0 18.9 15.7 13.6 15.3 13.2 10.9 9.43
2
65 25.9 22.2 18.5 16.0 18.0 15.5 12.9 11.1
75 or thicker 27.3 23.4 19.5 16.9 19.0 16.3 13.6 I 1.7
1
Tabulated design valui-.t apply to ONE ~plit ring cmd bolt in single shear.
2
Tu obtain adjusted lateral de.tign w,lues (P', Q'), tabulated lmeral de~ ign value.~ (P, Q) Ji>r split ring connector unhf shall he multiplied to all
applicable adjustmelllfac:tors based on Nationa l Design Sper.ijlcation for Wood Cons/ruction (NDS) 2IJ 15 Edition
J When loaded at an angle 6 tu grain, lateral design value shall he computed using N' =P 1
•
sm2 o+
P' ~ ,
cos 2 8
Association of Structmal Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

Table 619.1-4 Shear Plate Connector Unit Reference Design Values ,.z. 3.,4, 5
Shear Bolt Numher offaecs Net thickness of Loaded parallel to grain (0") Loaded perpendicular to grain (90°)
plate Diameter of member with memher Design value, P, per connector unit Design value, Q, per connector unir
diameter connectors on and bolt, kN and bolt, kN
same bolt
Species Group Species (iroup
(mm) (mm) (mm)) I II Ill IV I II Ill IV
I 40minimum 13.8* 11.9 9.88 8.94 9.66 8.28 6.90 5.92
40 minimum 10.8 9.26 7.70 6.67 7.52 6.45 5.38 4.63
65 20
2 50 14.2"' 12.2 IO.I 8.72 9.88 8.50 7.03 6.10
65 or thicker 14.8* 12.7 l0.6 9.17 10.1 8.86 7.34 6.41
40 minimum 19.4 16.7 13.9 12.0 13.5 11.7 9.66 8.28
I
45 or thicker 22.6* 19.4 16.2 14.0 15.7 13.5 11.3 9.79
20
45 minimum 15.I 12.9 10.8 9.30 10.5 8.99 7.48 6.27
100 or 50 16.9 14.4 12.0 10.4 11.7 IO.I 8.37 7.25
2 65 19.2 16.4 13.7 11.8 13.3 11.3 9.52 8.23
22
75 21.5* 18.4 15.3 13.3 14.9 12.8 10.7 9.17
90 or thicker 22.4* 19.2 16.0 13.8 15.(, 13.3 11.2 9.61
I
Tabula!ed design values apply to ONI!: shetir plate and bolt in single sheur.
2
To obtain C1djusted lateral design values (P', Q'), tuhulated IC1leral design values (P, Q) for split ring conne,:wr units shalt be multiplied to all
applicable adjustment Jae/Ors bused on National Design Spec,ficutionflw Wood Construction (NDS) 2015 Edition
.i When loaded at an angle< (J ro ~rain, lateral design value shu/1 be computed using N' = , . p' Q'
P sin 2 8+Q 1 cos 2 8
4
Allowable design values for shear plate connector units shC11l nor e..tc:eed the following:
(a) 65 mm shear plate ....... . . . ........... l2.9kN
(b) /00 mm shear plate with 20 mm boll . ...... !9.6 kN
(c) JOO mm shear plate with 22 mm ho/I . ...... 26. 7 kN
The design values in Footnote 3 shall be permirted to be increused in accordance with the American lns1itule ofSteel Construction (A/SC)
1
M,muC1l ,!(Steel Construction, 9 h edilion, Section 15.2 ''Wind ,md Seismic Stresses", except wben design loadv have ulreud_p he.en redut:ed by
/nod combination.factors.
s Load~flJl/owed hy,m asterisk(") exceed those permitted by Footnme 3, hut C1re neededfo,- determination of'design values for other angles of
load to grain. Footnote 3 limi/Cltions apply in all cases.
.I
EQ
619.3 Nails and Spikes
619.3.l Nailing Schedule
The number and size of nails connecting wood members

shall not be less than that set forth in Tables 619.3-1 and
619.3-2. Other connections shall he fastened to provide
equivalent strength.
619.3.2 Safe Lateral Strength
A common wire nail driven perpendicular w grain or the

wood, when used to fm,ten wood members together, shall
not be subjected to a greater load causing shear and
bending Lhan the safe lateral c;trenglh of the wire nail or
spike m, set forth in Table 619.3-3.
A wire mtil tlrivon parallel lo the grain of Ute wood shall

not be subJcctc<l more thm1 t\\ o thirds of the lateral load
allowed when driven perpendicular to the grnin. Toenails
shall not be subjcctetl more than five sixths of the lateral
load allowed for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.
619.3.3 Safe Resistance to Withdrawal
A wire nail driven perpendicular Lo grain of woud shall

not be sul,jected tO a greater load, tending to cause
withdrawal, than the safe resistance of the nail tu
withdrawal, as set forth in Table 619.3-3.
619.3.4 Spacing and Penetration
Com mon wire nails shall have penetration into the piece
receiving the point as set for1h in Table 619.3-J. Nails or
spikes for which the wire gauges or lengths are not set
forth in Table 619.3-3 shall have a required penetration of
not less Lhan I I diameters. nnd allownble loads may be
interpolated. Design vnlucs shall be increased when the
penetration of nails into the member holding the point is
larger than the required by this item.
For wood-to-wood joints, the spacing center to 1,;enter of

nails in the direction of stress shall not be less than one
half of the required penetration. Edge or end distances in
the direction of stress shall not be less one half of the
required penetration. All spacing and edge and end
distances shall be such as lo avoid splitting of the wood.
Holes for nails, where necessary to prevent splitting, shall

be bored of a diameter smaller than that of the nails.

Tahle 619.3-1 Nailing Schedule
Connection Nailing'
I. Joist to sill or girder, to.:nail 3 -65 mm
2. Rridging to joist, toen11il each eud 2 - (iS mm
3. 25 m x 150 mm suhlloor or less to each joist. face nail 2-65 mm
4. Wi<lcr than 25 mm x 150 nun suhlloor to ead1 joist, focc nail ;\-65 flllll
5. 50 mm subfloor to joist or girder, hlinu anti face nail 2-90111111
6. Sole plate to joist or blocking, typical face nail 90 mm al 400 mm o.c.
Sole plate to joist or blocking, ,,1 hnu:ed wall 1>ancls J-90 mm per 400 111111
7. Top plate to sluu, entl nail 2-90mm
!!. Stud to sole plate 4-65 mm, toenail or 2-90 mm, en<l nail
9. Double studs, race nail 90 mm al 600 mm o.c.
I 0. Doubled top plates, typical face nail 90 mm at 400 mm o.c.
Double top plates, lap splice 8-90 mm
I I. Blocking between joists or rafters to top plate, toenail 3-65 mm
12. Rim joist to top plate, toenail 65 nun al 150 mm o.c.
I '.l. Top plates, laps and intersections, face nail 2-90mm
I4. Continuous header, two pieces 90 mm at 400 mm o.c. along each edge
I 5. Ceilingjoists to plate, toenail 3-65 mm
16. Continuous header to slu<l, toenail 4-65 mm
17. Ceiling joists, laps over partitions, face nail 3-90 mm
I8. Ceiling joists to pan1llel raflcrs, face nail 3-90 mm
19. Rafter to plalc, toenail 3-65 inm
20. 25 mni brace to each stud and plate, face nail 2-65 mm
21. 25 mm x 200 mm sheathing or Jess to each bearing, face nail 2-65 mm
22. Wider than 25 mm x 200 mm ~heathing to each beuring, face nai I 3-65 mm
23. Buill-up comer studs 90 mm at 600 mm n.c.
24. B11ilt-11p gir<ler and heams IOO mm at 800 mm o.c. at top an<l hnttom
and staggered 2-100 mm al e11ds and at each splice
25. 50 mm planks 2-90 mm at each bearing
26. Wood s1ruclL1ral panels and particleboard 1 :
Suhfloor and wall sheathing (to frnming):
12 mm and less 50mm 1
16mm 20 mm 65 mm ·1 or 50 mm J
22 nun- 25 mm 65mm 1
28n11n-32 mm 75mm'or65mrn! •
Combination subfloor-un<lcrlayment (to framing):
20 mm and kss 50mm 5
22mm 25 mm 65 mm·'
30 111111- 32 mm 75 mm 'or 65 mm 5
27. Panel siding (to framing)1:
12 mm or less 50mm 6
16mm 65111111 6
1
2K. Fiberboard sheathing :
12mm 10mmx40mm 8
50mm'
10 mm x :rn mm 9
20nun 10 mm x 45 nun'
65mm'
IOm1nx40mm 9
29. Interior paneling
6mm 40mm 111
10mm 50mm II
Notes.for Tal>le 619.3-1:
Common or box nails may be used except where otherwise staled.

Nails spaced at I50 111111 on center al edges. 300 mm at intermediate suppol'ls ex1:ept 150 mm at all supports where spans al'e 1200
mm or more.
For m1iling of wood structw·al panel and particleboard diaphragms and shear wt1lls, refer Jo Sections 614.3.3 and 6/4.4. Nails for
wull shealhing may be common, box or casing.
Common or deformed shank.
G
Common.
Deformed shunk.
6
Corrosion-resistant siding or casing nails conji>rming to 1he rcqu1rem<-nt.1· o.fSectwn 603.3.
Fa.ftene,·s .1paced 75 111111 on cen1e1· at exterior edges and 150 mm on center a t ifllermecli" te supports
Corrosio11-rcsistan1 roofing 1wils with l O mm head and 40 mm length fi>r 12 mm sheathing and 45 mm length fin· 20 mm shec,thi11g
conformi11g to the requirements qfSccti<)II 603.3.
Corrosion-re.,istant stapft,s with nominal JOmm crown 30 mm length for 12 mm sheatlung and 40 mm length for 20 mm .~ltcathirrg
c:onforming to the requin:menrs ofSection 603. 3.
1/J Panel supports at 400 mm (500 mm if.rtrength axis in the long direction 0/1/te panel, unless othe1wise marked). Casing orf,nish
naifs spac:Pd 150 mm on pC111e/ e.dges. 300 mm at interme.diatp supports.
11
Punel support.t at 600 mm. Casing or finish nails spaced 150 mm on panel ,·dges, 300 mm at intc'l'lne.diate supports.
I
Table 619.3-2 Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheath ing Nailing Schedule
ROOF FASTENING ZONE

PANEL 2 3
WfND REGION NAILS
LOCATION Fastening Schedule
(mm on center)
Panel edges 150 150 100
Greater than 145 kph 65 mm common
Panel Field 150 150 150
Greater than 129 kph Panel edges 150 150 100
65 mm corrunon
to 145 kph Panel Field 300 150 150
Panel edges 150 150 ISO
129 kph or less 65 nun common
Panel Ficl<i 300 300 300
Applies only to mean roofheights up lo 10.5 m. Fur mean roofheighrs over 10.5 m., the nailing shall be designed
7'he rooffa.~terring zone.:; ,,,.e shown in Hgure 619.3-1.
Edge spacing also t1pplies over rooffra ming ar gable-end wcdlf.
Use 65mm ring-shank nail.~ in this zone !f'mean roof height is greater than 7. 50 m
~
__ 1.20-m
r-11•+--
_.,.........,,--
,.20,11-,
~--.-.~j_l.20 m
II J
_ -;------1--;------t- _IT.SOm (Inc luding 300 mrn ovcrh~ng)
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I rj'\ I I I
I \..:_/ II I
I I I
I I I
I
I
--i----
Figure 619.3-1 Roof Fastening Zones

Table 619.3-3 Allowable Loads in Seasoned Wood for Common Wire Nails and Spikes (Normal Duration)
Withdrawal Load from Side Grain per

Si:i:e of Nail or Spike (mm) 25 mm of Penelralion of Nail or Spike into Lateral Load in Side Grain, (N)
the Member Iloltlinl! the Point (N)
Length Diameter Soccics Grouo Snceics Grouo
Designation (mm) (mm) [ II Ill IV I II III IV
N 150 150 6.5 805 550 340 215 1320 1135 930 775
125 140 6.0 750 510 315 200 I lllO IOIO 830 695
A 110 125 5.75 690 470 290 180 1045 895 735 615
105 115 5.25 685 435 265 170 920 790 650 540
I 100 100 4.75 590 400 245 155 825 705 580 485
90 90 4.00 495 340 210 130 640 550 450 375
L 75 75 3.75 455 310 190 120 555 480 395 330
65 65 3.25 400 275 170 105 465 400 325 275
s 50 50 3.00 345 235 145 90 370 320 260 220
s 3/8 215 9.5 1035 705 435 275 2020 1735 1425 1190
3/ll 180 8.0 860 590 360 230 1535 1320 1085 905
p 150 150 7.0 780 535 325 205 1325 1140 935 780
140 140 7.0 780 536 325 205 1325 1140 935 780
I 125 125 6.75 725 495 305 195 1185 1020 840 700
110 115 6.0 675 460 280 180 1060 910 750 625
K I00 JOO 5.75 620 425 260 165 940 805 665 555
90 90 5.25 570 390 240 150 83() 710 585 490
E 80 80 5.0 530 .360 220 140 740 635 525 435
s 75 75 5.0 530 360 220 140 740 635 525 435
619.4 Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors
Connections depending upon joist hangers or framing

anchors, ties and other mechanical fastenings not
otherwise covered may be used where approved.
619.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners

T.OBULATEO LOAOSARE
PERMLI OF PENtlkATlOH
619.5.1 Drift Bolts or Drift Pins
Figure 619.5-l Rasic Withdrawal Connection
Connections involving the use of drill bolts or pins shall
be designed in accordance with the provisions set forth in
this Chapter. NAIL
SIDER
619.5.1.1 Withdrawal Design Values
Drift holt and drift pin connections loaded in withdrawal P/2 f t P/2
shall be designed in accordance with good engineering HOLDING
practice. Figures 619.5-1 to 619.5-3 are examples of MEMBER
withdrawal connections.
Figure 619.5-2 Withdrawal from F.nd Grain

(not allowed)
G
Additional penetration of pin into members should be

SIDE P/2 provided in lieu of the washer, head and nut 011 a cummon
MEMBER \ TOENAIL IN
--'---~-.i..( WITHDRAWAL boll.
P- -
__ MAIN 619.5.2 S1>ikc Grids
MEMBER
Wood-to-woud connections involving spike grids for
latent) load transfer shall be designed in accordance with
Figure 619.5-3 Toenail Connection Withdrawal from good engineering practice.
Side Grain
619.5.3 Wood Screws and Lag Screws
619.5. 1.2 Lateral Design Values Wood and lag screws shall be used where there is limited
penctmtion, especially in a withdrawal design, as Lhese
Allowable lateral design values for driil bolts and drift provide greater resistance. Design or
the screws shall be
pins driven in the side grain of wood sball not exceed 75 in accordance with Table 619.5-J and the provisions set
percent of the allowable lateral design values for common forth in I.his Chapter.
bolts of the same diameter and length in main member.
Table 619.5-1 Allowahlc Loads in Wood Scn:ws for Seasoned Wood (Normal Duration)
Withdrawal Load from Side (irain per 25 mm of

Screw Si7.e Lateral Load in Side Grain, (N)
Penetration of Threaded Por1ion, (N)
Diameter Species Group Species Group
(mm) I JI JJI IV l II l1I IV
9.5 2695 1985 1370 950 3100 2665 2190 1825
8.0 2315 1710 1180 X20 2295 1970 1620 1350
7.5 2130 1570 1085 750 1935 1665 1370 1140
7.0 1940 1430 985 685 1610 J:180 1135 945
6.0 1750 1290 890 620 131 5 11 30 925 770
5.5 1565 1155 795 550 1045 900 740 615
5.0 1375 1015 700 485 810 695 570 475
4.5 1280 945 650 450 700 605 495 41 5
4.0 I IX5 875 605 420 605 520 425 355
3.8 1095 805 555 385 510 440 360 300
3.5 1000 735 510 355 425 365 300 250

SECTION 620 620.4.2 Veneer
CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME Anchored masonry and stone wall veneer shall not exceed
CONSTRUCTION DESIGN 125 mm in thickness.
PROVISlc.O_.;_
. : : N~S_ _ _ _ _ _ __ 620.4.3 Unusually Shaped Buildings
620.l General
When of unusual shape, buildings of light-frame
construction shall have a lateral-force-resisting system
The requirements in this section are intended for
designed to resist the forces specified in Chapter 2. One
conventional light-frame construction. Other methods
or more of the following shall be considered to constitute
may be used provided a satisfactory design is submiltcd
an unusual shape:
showing compliance with other provisions oftbis code.
620.4.3. I When exterior braced wall panels, as required
Only the following occupancies may he constructed in
by Section 620.9.3, are not in one plane vertically from
accordance with this division:
the foundation to the uppermost story in which they are
1. One-, two- or three-story residential buildings. required.
2. One-story Occupancy Category IV buildings, as
defined in Table 103-1, when constructed on a slah-
Exceptions:
on-gradc floor. Floors with ca111i/evers or setbacks not exceeding/our
3. Category V Occupancies times the nominal depth o/thejloorjoists may support
braced wall panels provided:
4. Top-story walls and roofs of Occupancy Catcgo~ IV
buildings not exceeding two stories of wood framing. 1. Floor joists are 50 mm by 250 mm or larger and
spaced at nnt more than 400 mm on center.
5. Interior non-load bearing partitions, ceilings and
2. The ratio of the adjacent span to the cantilever is at
curtain walls in all occupancies.
leust 2 to 1.
Other approved repetitive wood members may be used in 3. Floor joists at ends of braced wall panels are
lieu of solid-sawn lumber in conventional construction doubled.
provided these members comply with the provisions of
4. A continuous rim joists is connected to ends of all
this code.
cantilevered joists. The rim Joist may be spliced
using a meial tie not less than 1.5 mm and 38 mm
620.2 Design of Portions
wide fastened with six 90 mm nails.
620.3 Additional Requirements for Conventional 5. Gravity loads carried at the end ofcantilevered joists
Construction in High-wind Areas are limited to uniform wall and roof load and the
reactions from headers having a span of 2. 40 m or
Provisions for conventional construction in high-wind less.
areas shall apply when specifically adopted.
620.4.3.2 When a section of floor or roof is not laterally
620.4 Additional Requirements for Conventional supported by braced wall lines on all edges.
Construction in Seismic Zone 2
Exception:
620.4.1 .Braced Wall Lines
Portions qf roofs or floors which do not support braced
wall panels above may extend up to 1.80 m beyond a
In areas under Seismic Zone 2 and where the basic wind
braced wall line.
speed obtained from Chapter 2 is not gr~atcr th~n 1?5
kph, buildings shall be provided with exterior and ~ntcnor
620.4.3.3 When the end of a required braced wall panel
braced wall lines not exceeding 10.0 m on center m both extends more than 300 mm over an opening in the wall
the longitudinal and transverse directions in each story.
below. This provision is applicable to braced wall panels
off.c;et in plane and to braced wall panels off.'let out of
plane as pennitted by Section 620.5.3.1 with this
exception.
Nationa l Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. First Printing, 201 5
.
Exception: 620.S Girders

Braced wall panels may extend over an opening not more Unless otherwise permitted by provisions m
than 2.40 m. in width when the header is a JOO mm by NSCP Volume JI! - Housing, girders for single-story
300 mm or larger member. construction or girders supporting loads from a single
floor shall not be less thun 100 mm by 150 mm for spans
620.4.3.4 When an opening in a floor or roof exceeds the 1.80 m or less, provided that girders are spaced not more
lesser of 3.60 Ill or 50 percent or the least floor or roof than 2.40 in on center. Other girders shall be designed to
dimension. support the loads specified in this code. Girder end joints
shall occur over supporls. When a girder is spliced over a
support, an adequate Lie shall be provided. The end of
620.4.3.5 Construction where portions of a floor level are beams or girders supported on masonry or concrete shall
vertically offset such that the framing members on either not have less than 75 mm of bearing.
side of the offset cannot be lapped or tied together in an
approved manner as required by Section 620.7.3.
620.6 Floor Joists
Exception:
620.6.1 General
Framing supported directly by foundations.
The limits of defects by grade in joists and planks for
620.4.3.6 When braced wall lines do not occur in two seasoned wood arc set forth in Table 61 5. 1-1.
perpendicular directions.
620.6.2 Bearing
620.4.3.7 Other configurations which, in the opinion of
the building official, create irrcgularitie~ or discontinuities Except where supported on a 25 mm by 100 mni ribbon
which are not addressed by this Section. strip and nailed to the adjoining stud, the ends or each
joist shall not have less 1han 38 mm of bearing on wood
620.4.4 Lumber Roof Decks or metal, or less than 75 mm on masonry.
Lumber roof decks shall have solid sheathing. 620.6.3 Framing Details
620.4.5 Interior Braced Wall Support Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends and at each
supporl by solid blodcing except where the ends of joists
In one-story buildings, interior braced wall lines shall be are nailed to a header,band or rim joist or to an adjoining
supported on continuous foundations al intervals not stud or by other approved means. Solid blocking shall not
cx.cecding l 5.0 m. In buildings more than one-story in be less 50 mm in thickness and the full depth of joist.
height, all interior braced wall panels shall be supported
on continuous foundations. Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one-fourth
1hc joist depth. Holes bored in joists shall not be wilhin
Exception: SO mm of the lop or bottom of the joist and lhe diameter
of any such hole shall not exceed one-third the depth of
1\vo-sto,y buildings may have interior braced wall lines
the joist. Notches in the lop or botlom of joists shall not
supported on continuous foundations at intervals not
exceeding 15.0 m. provided:
exceed one-sixth the depth and shal l nol be located in the
middle third of the span.
1. Cripple wall height does not exceed 1.20 n,.
Joist framing from opposite sides of a beam, girder or
2. First-floor braced wall panels are supported on partition shalt be lapped at least 75 mm or the opposing
doubled .floor joists, contirruour blocking. or floor joists shall be tied together in an approved manner.
beams.
Joists framing into the side of a wood girder shall be
3. Di.stance between bracing lines does not e.xceed twice
supported by framing anchors or on ledger strips not less
the building width parallel to the braced wall line.
than 50 mm by 50 mm.

620.6.4 Framing Around Openings 620.7.3 Plank Floorin~
Trimmer and header joists shall be doubled, or of lumber Plank flooring shall be designed in accordance with the
of equivalent cross secLion, when the span of the header general provisions or this code.
exceeds 1.20 m. The ends or header joists more than
1.80 m long shall be supported hy framing anchors or In lieu of such design, 50 mm tongue-and-groove
joist hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall. planking may be used in accordance with Table 620.9-1.
Tail joists over 3.60 m long shall be suppo1tcd at header Joints in such planking may be randomly spaced,
by framing anchors or on ledger sLrips not less than 50 provided Lhc system is applied to not less llum three
mm by50mm. continuous spans, planks are center-matched and end-
matched or splined, each plank bears on at least one
620.6.5 Supporting Bearing Partitions support and joints arc separated by at least 600 mm in
adjacent pieces. 25 mm nominal strip square-edged
Bearing partitions perpendicular lo joists shall not be flooring; 13 mm tongue-and·groove flooring or 9 mm
ollsct from supporting girders, walls or partitions more wood structural pru1cl shall he applied at right angles to
than the joist depth. the span of the planks. The 9 mm plywood shall be
applied with the face grain at right angles to the span of
Joists under and parallel to bearing partitions shull he the planks.
doubled.
620.7.4 Particleboard
620.6.6 Blocking
Where used as structural subflooring or as combined
Floor joists shall be blocked when required by the subfloor underlayment, particleboard shall be as set forth
provisions or Section 617.4.1.2. in Table 611.l ·5.
620.7 Subflooring 620.8 Particleboard Undcrlayment
620.7.1 Lumber Subfloor fn accordance with approved recognized standards,

particleboard floor un<lcrlayment shall conform to Type
Sheathing used as a structural suh-floor shall conform to PBU. Undcrlayment shall not be less than 6 mm in
the limitations set forth in Table 611.1-1. thickness and shall he identified by the grade mark of an
approved inspection agency. Underlayment shall be
Joints in subllooring shall occur over supports unless end- installed in acconiance with this code and as
matched lumber is used in which case each piece shall recommended by the manufacturer.
bear on at least tv,o joists.
620.9 Wall Framing
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing docs not
exceed 400 mm and 25 mm nominal tongue-and-groove 620.9.1 Size, Height and Spacing
wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular to the joists.
The size, height and spacing of studs shall he in
620.7.2 Wood Structural Panels accordance with Table 620.9-2 except that utility grade
studs shall not be spaced more Lhan 400 mm on center, or
Where used as st111ctural subflooring, wood structural support more than a roof and ceiling, or exceed 2.40 m in
panels shall be as set forth in Tables 61 l.l-2 and 611.1-3. height for exterior walls and load-hearing walls or 3.00 m
Wood structural panel combination subfloor for interior non load-hearing walls.
underlayment shall have maximum spans as set forth in
Table 611.l-4.
When wood structural panel floors are glued to joists with

an adhesive in accordance with the adhesive
manufacturer's directions, fasteners may be spaced a
maximum or 300 mm on center at all supports.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. First Printing. 2015
"
Tahlc 620.9-1 Allowable Spans for 50 mm Tongue and Groove Decking
Table 620.9-1 Allowable Spans for 50 mm Tongue and Groove Decking
Deflection Limit
SPAN' LIVE LOAO f 1/240 l/360
E
(mm) (kPa) (MPa) x 103 MPa
ROOF
0.96 I.IO 1.17 1.76
1200 1.44 1.45 1.76 2.65
l.92 J.86 2.30 3.52
0.96 1.38 l.67 2.10
1350 1.44 1.86 2.50 2.79
1.92 2.41 3.33 5.00
0.96 1.72 2.29 3.45
1500 1.44 2.27 3.4 1 5.1 1
l.92 2.89 4.55 6.89
0.96 2.07 3.05 4.5 5
1650 1.44 2.76 4.56 6.88
1.92 3.44 6.09 9. 16
0.96 2.48 3.96 5.94
1800 1.44 3.31 5.94 8.92
1.92 4.14 7.92 1 J.9
0.96 2.89 4.10 6.15
1950 1.44 3.86 6.1 5 9.23
1.92 4.82 8.20 11.9
0.96 3.38 6.27 9.37
2100 J.44 4.48 9.44 13.8
1.92 5.58 12.5 18.8
0 .96 3.86 7.75 11.6
2250 1.44 5. 17 1 l.6 17.4
1.92 6.41 15.5 23.3
0 .96 4.41 9.37 14.06
2400
1.44 5.86 14. l 21.1
FLOOR
1200 1.92 5.79 6.90
1350 1.92 6.55 9.00
1500 1.92 7.30 11.0

I 1
Spans a,·e based on simple beam '1Clion with 0.50 kN/m dead load and provisions for a 1300 N wncenft·ated load on a 300 mm width of
floor decking. Random fay-up permit1ed in accordance with the provisions ofSection 6:ZO.7. 3 or 620.9.11.9. Lumber thickness assumed
al 40 mm, net.
•
CHAP fcl-{ 6 - Wood 6-77
Table 620.9-2 Size, Height and Spacing of Wood Studs

Hearing Walls Non-Hearing Walls
Supporling Supporling
Latcrally Supporling Laterally
Stud Size One Floor, Two Floors,
Unsupported Roof and l Jnsuppo11ed Spacing
Roof and Roof and
Stud Height I Ceiling Only Stud Height I
Ceiling Ceiling
(mm) (mm) Spacing (mrn) (m) (mm)
50 x 75 1 . - - - 3.0 400
50 x 100 250 600 400 - 4.2 600
75 x 100 250 600 600 400 4.2 600
50 x 125 250 600 600 - 4.8 600
50 x 150 250 600 600 400 6.0 600
l.isted heighls are distances between points oflaf1,,ra/ support placed perpendicular lo 1/,e pla11e of tire wall. Increases in 1111suppor1ed
height are p<!rmifled where justified by a11 a11a(vsis.
Shall r101 be used i11 ex/erior wafls.
620.'>.2 Framing Delails When bearing studs are spaced at 600 mm intervals and
top plates arc less than 50 mm by 150 mm or 70 mm by
Studs shall be placed with their wide dimension I00 mm members and when the floor joists, floor trusses
perpendicular to the wall. Not less than three studs sh~ll
or roof trusses which they support are spaced at more than
be installed at each corner or an exterior wall.
400 mm intervals, such joists or trusses shall bear wilhin
Exceptions: 125 mm or the studs beneath or a third plate shall he
installed.
At corners, a third stud may be omilted through the use of'
wood spacers or backup cleats of 9 mm wood structural
Interior non-bearing parltllons may be capped with a
panel, 9 mm Type M "Exterior Glue" particle-hoard,
25 mm lumber or other approved devices that will serve single top plate installed to provide overlapping at corners
as an adequate backing for the attachment of facing and at intersections with other walls and parlilions. The
materials. Whe1·e fire resistance rulings or shear values plate shall be continuously tied al joints by solid blocking
are involved. wood spacers, backup cleats m· othe,- at least 400 mm in length and c.:4ual in size to the plate or
devices shall not he used unless specifically approved for by 3 mm by 38 mm metal tics with spliced sections
such use. fastened with lwo 90 mm nails on each side of the joint
Bearing and exterior wall sluds shall he capped with
double top plates installed to provide overlapping al Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than
comers and at intersections with other pa1titions. End 50 mm thick having a width not less than that of the wall
joints in double top plates shall be offset at least 2.40 m. studs.
F.xceptions:
A single top plate may he used, provided the plate is
adequately tied at joints, corners and intersecting walls
hy at least the equivalent c!f' 75 mm by 150 mm hy 0. 9 mm
galvanized steel that is nailed to each wall or segment of
wall by six 65 mm nails or equivalent, pmvided the
rqfiers,joists or trusses are centered over the studs with u
tolerance of no more than 25 mm.
q
620.9.3 Bracing For Method 5, each braced wall panel must be at least
2.40 m in length when applied to one face of a braced
Braced wall lines shall consists or braced wall panels wall panel and 1.20 m when applied to both faces.
which meet the requirements for location, type and
amount of bracing specified in Table 6.24 and arc in line All vertical joints or punel sheathing shall occur over
or offset from each other by not more than I .20 m.
studs. Horizontal joints shall occur over blocking equal in
Braced wall panels shall start at not more than 2.40 m
from each end of a braced wall line. All braced wall size 10 the studding except where waived by the
panels shall be clearly indicated on the plans. insrnllation requirements for lhc spccilic sheathing
Construction of braced wall panels shall be by one or the materials.
following methods:
Braced wall panel sole plates shall be nailed to the floor
l. Nominal 25 mm by I00 mm continuous diagonal framing; and top plates shall be connected to the framing
braces let into top and bottom plates and intervening above in accordance with Tahle 619.3-1. Sills shall be
studs, placed at an angle not more than 60 degrees or bolted to the foundation or slab. Where joists are
less than 45 degrees from the horizontal, and attached perpendicular to braced wall lines above, blocking shall
tu the framing in conformam;e with Table 61 9.3-1. be provided under and in line with the braced wall panels.
2. Wood boards or 16 mm net minimum Lhickness 620.9.4 Alternate Braced Panels

applied diagonally on studs spaced not over 600 mm
on center. Any bmced wall panel required by Section 620.9.3 may
be replaced by an alternate braced wall panel constructed
3. Wood structural panel sheathing with a thickness not in accordance with the following:
less Lhan 8 mm for 400 mm stud spacing and not less
than 9 mm for 600 mm stud spacing in accordance I. In one-story buildings, each panel shall have a length
with Tables 609.3-1 and 620.9-3. of not less than 800 mm and a height of not more
than 3.0 m. Each panel shall be sheathed on one face
4. Fiberboard sheathing l .20 m by 2.40 m panels not with 9 mm plywood sheathing nailed with 65mm
less than 13 mm thick applied vertically on studs common or galvanized box nails in accordance with
spaced not over 406 mm on center when installed in Table 619.3-1 and blocked at all plywood edges. Two
accordance with Section 614.6 and Table 614.6-J. anchor bolts installed shall be provided in each panel.
Anchor bolts shall be placed at panel quarter points.
5. Gypsum board (sheathing J 3 mm thick by 1.20 m Each panel end stud shall have a tie-down device
wide, wallhoard or veneer base) on studs spaced not fastened to the foundation, capable of providing an
over 600 mm on center und nailed at I 75 mm on approved uplifi capacity of not less than 820 kN. The
center with nails as required by Table 620.9-5 . tie-down device shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. The panels
6. Particleboard wall sheathing panels where installed in shall be supported directly on a foundation or on
accordance with Table 620.9-6. floor framing supported directly on a foundation
which is continuous across the entire length of the
7. Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 400 mm on braced wall line. This foundation shall be reinforced
center installed in accordance with Tahle 620.9-5. with not less than one J 2 mm bar top and bottom.
8. Hardboard panel siding when installed in accordance 2. In the first story of two-story buildings, each braceu
with Section 609.6 and Table 609.6-1. wall panel shall be in accordance with Section
620.9.4, Item J, except that the plywood sheathing
User Note: Method I is not permitted in the Philippines. shall he provided on both faces, three anchor bolts
shal1 be placed at one-fifth points, and tie-down
For cripple wall bracing, sec Section 620.9.5. For device uplift capacily shall not be less than 13 .5 kN.
Methods 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8, each braced panel must be at
least 1.20 m in length, covering three stud spaces where
studs are spaced 400 mm apart and covering two stud
spaces where studs are spaced 600 mm apart.

I
Table 620.9-2 Braced Wall Panels
Seismic Construction Mt:thod 1· 1 Braced Panel Location and Length

Condition 4
Zone I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 Ont:-story, top of two or thrt:t:- x x x x x x x x Each end and not more than 7.5 m
story on center
First- s101y of two-story or x x x x x x x x
second-story of thrct:·story
first-story ofthret:-story x x x X' x x x
4 One-story, top of two-story or x x x x x XQ x Each end and not more than 7.5 m
thrt:t:·Slory on ct:ntt:r
First-story of two-story or x x x X' x x<• x Each end and not more than 7.5 m
second of three-story on centt:r but not less than 25% of
7
building lt:nglh
First-story of thrt:t:-slory x x x x5 x x• x Each end and nol more than 7 .5 m
on center but not less than 40% of
7
building lt:nglh
This table specifies minimum requirements for braced panel~ whid1form interior or ex/erio,· braced wall line.,·.
See Section 620.9.3.for full descrip1ion.
See Section 620. 9.4 for alternate brac:ed panel req11iremen1.
Building length is the dimension parallel to the bi-aced wall length.
Gypsum wa/lbo,wd applied 10 supports al 400 mm on center.
Not permilfed.for brucing cripple wall~ in Seismic Zone 4. See Sec1ion 620.9.5.
The requil'ed lengths 8hull be doubled.for gypsum board apP_lied to only one.face ofct brw:ed wall panel.
Table 620.9-3 Cripple Wall Bracing
Seismic Amount of Cripple Wall Bracing

Condition
Zone (mm)
2 One-story above I Omm wood structural panel with 65mm at 150 / 300 mm nailing on 30 percent of wall length minimum
cripplt: wall
Two-story above IOmm wood structural panel with 65mm at I 00 I 300 mm nailing on 40 percent of wall length minimum
cripplt: wall or
!Omm wood structural pane l with 6Smm at 150 / 300 mm nailing 01160 percent of wall length minimum
4 One-story above lOmm wood structural panel with 65mm at 150 / 300 mm nailing on 60 percent o f wal l length 111inimt1m
cripple wall
Two-story above l Omm wood strnctural panel with 65mrn al I00 / 300 mm nailing on SO percent of wall lcnglh minimum
cripple wall or
IOmm wood structurul panel with 65mm al 150 / 300 mm nailing on 75 percent of wall length minimum
Brac:ed panel length sh,tfl be a, least two times 1he height (?/'the c:ripple wall, but not le8s 1han 1200 mm.
J All panel~ along a w,tfl shall be nearly equal in length and shall be near(y equally spaced along the length of the wall.
Table 620.9-4 Wood Structural Panel Wall Sheathing'

(Not exposed to the weather, stren1:,,t,h axis parallel or perpendicular to studs)
Stud Spadng (nun)

Minimum Si<ling Nailed to Sheathing undt:r Coverings Spt:cilicd in
Thickness Panel Span Rating Stu<ls Section 620.9.3
Sheathing Parallel t(1 S heall1ing
(mm)
Studs Perpendic ular to Studs
400
10 16/0, I (i/0, 20/0 Wall- 400 mm o.c. 400
400 600
10, 12 16/0, 20/0, 24/0, 32/16 Wall- 600 mm <>.c. 600
(\()() 600
10, 12 24/0, 24/16, 32/16 Wall - !iOO mm. o. c. 600
In referem:e to Section 620.9. 3, blocking ofhorizon1aljoints is not required.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l, 7th Edition, First Printing. 2015
c
Table 620.9-5 Allowable Shear for Wind or Seismic forces in Newtons per m for Vertical Diaphragms of Lath
and Plaster or Gypsum Board Frame Wall Assemblies I
Nail Spacing I
Thickness of Wall Shear
Type of Material Maximum Minimum Nail Size 1 (mm)
Material (mm) Construction Value
I. Expanded metal, or
(mm)
- ---- -
woven wire lath 40 mm long, I Omm head
22 mm Unblocked 150 2628
and portland Staple, 22 mm legs
cement plaster
2. Gypsum lath IO mm lath and Staple, 30 mm long, 6 mm head,
Unblocked 125 1460
12 mm plaster plasterboard blued nail
3. Gypsum sheathing 12 mm x 600 mm x 45 mm long, l Omm head,
Unblocked 100 1095
board 2400mm diamond-point, galvanized
12 mm x 1200 mm Blocked 100 2555
12 mm x 1200 mm Unblocked 175 1460
4. Gypsum wallboard 2 mm dia., 40 mm lo ng, 6 mm
175 1460
or veneer base head) or wallboard (2 mm dia.
12mm Unblocked
40 mm long,
100 1825
6 mm head)
175 1825
81m:ked
100 2 190
175 1679
Unblocked (2 .5 mm dia., 45 mm long, 6
100 2 117
mm head) or wallboard (2.5 mm
175 21 17 dia. 50 m m long,
16 mm Hlocked
100 2555 6 mm head)
Base ply - (2.5 mm dia. 50 mm
long, 6 mm head) o r wallboard
(2.3 nun dia. 50 mm long, 6 mm
head)
Blocked Base ply: 22 5
3650 Face ply- (3.0 mm dia., 60 mm
Two ply Face ply: 175
long, 6 mm head) or wallboard
(3.0 mm dia., 60 mm long, 10
mm head)
These vertical diaphragms shall not be used to re.,ist load, imposed by masonry or c~mcrete construction. Values shown are.for short-term
loading due to wind or due to seismic loading. Values shown must be reduced 25 percent.for normal loading. The values shown in ftem.v 2,
3 and 4 shall be reduced 50 percentjor loading due to earthquake in Seismh: Zone 4.
lfpplie., to nailing at af/ .,tuds, top and bottom plates, nnd blockmg.
Alternate nails may be used if their dimensions are nor less than the specified dimension.
Table 620.9-6 Allowable Spans for Particleboard Wal1 S heathi ng l

(Not exposed to lhe weather.• long dimension of the panel parallel or perpendicular to studs)
Stud Spacing (mm)

Sheathing under Coverings Specified
GRAOE TK1CKNESS (mm)
Siding Nailed to Studs in Sectio n 620.9.3 Parallel or
Perpendicular to Studs
M-1
10 400 400
M-S
M-2 "Exterior Gluc" 12 400 400
In reference to Section 620.9.3, blocking ofhoriwntaljoinL, is not required.
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
•
620.9.5 Cripple Walls 620.9.8 Bridging
f.oundation cripple walls shall be framed of studs nol less Unless covered by interior or exterior wall coverings or
in size than the studding above with a minimum lc.:nglh of sheathing meeting the minimum requirements of this
350 mm, or shall be framed or solid blocking. When Chapter, all stud partitions or walls with studs having a
exceeding 1.20 m in height, such walls shall be framed of height-to-lea!!l thickness rntio exceeding 50 shall have
bridging not less than 50 mm in thickness and of the same
studs having the size required for an additional story.
width as the studs filled snugly and nailed thereto to
provide adequate lateral support.
Cripple walls having a stud height exceeding 350 mm
shall be braced in accordance with Table 620.9-4. Solid 620.9.9 Cutting and Notching
blocking or wood structural panel sheathing may he used
to brace cripple walls having a stud height of 350 mm or In exterior walls and bearing partitions, any wood stud
less . In Seismic Zone 4, Method 7 is mJl permitted for may he cut or notched to a depth not exceeding 25 percenl
bracing any cripple wall studs. or its width. Cutting or notching of studs to a depth not
greatcr than 40 percent of the width of the stud is
Spacing o r boundary nailing for required wall bracing permitted in nunbearing partitions supporting no loads
shall not exceed 150 mm on center along the foundation other than the weight of the partition.
plate and the top plate of the cripple wall. Nail size, nail
620.9.lU Bored Holes
spacing for field nailing and more restrictive boundary
nailing requirements shall be as required elsewhere in the Bored holes may be permitted in any wood stud provided
Chapter for the specific bracing material used. the holes arc not greater than 40 percent of the stud width.
Bored holes not greater than 60 percent of the width of
620.9.6 Headers the study is pennitted in nonbearing partitions or in any
wall where each bored stud is doubled, provided not more
Headers and lintels shall conform to the requirements set than two such successive doubled studs are so bored.
foith in this paragraph and together with their supporling
systems shall be designed to supporl the loads specified in In no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than
this code. All openings 1.20 m wide or less in bearing 16 mm to the edge of the stud. Bored holes shall not be
walls shall be provided wiUt headers consisting of either located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch.
two pieces of 50 mm framing lumber placed on edge and
sccurely fastened together or I00 mm lumber of 620.9.11 Root: and Ceiling Framing
equivalent cross section. All openings more than 1.20 m.
wide shall be provided with headers or lintels. Each end 620.9.11.l General
of lintel or header shall have a length of bearing of not
less than 38 mm for the full width of the lintel. The framing details required in this section apply to roof<.
having a minimum slope of 3 units vertical in 12 units
620.9.7 Pipes in Walls horizontal (25% s lope) or greater. When the roof slope is
less than 3 units vertical ln 12 units horizontal (25%
Stud partilions containing plumbing, heating, or other slope), members supporting ratters and ceiling joists such
pipes shall be so framed and lite joists underneath so as ridge board, hips and valleys shall he designed as
spaced as 10 give proper clearance for the piping. Where beams.
a partition containing such piping runs parallel to 1he floor
joists, lhc joists underneath such partitions shall be 620.9.11.2 Framing
doubled and spaced to permil lhc passage of such pipes
and shall be bridged. Where plumbing, heating or other Ratlcrs shall be framed directly opposite each other at the
pipes arc placed in or partly in a partition, necessitating ridge. There shall be a ridge board al least 25 mm nominal
the cutting of the soles or plates. a metal tie not less lhan tl1ickncss at all ridges and not less in depth U1an the cut
1.5 mm (16 galwmizecl gage) and 38 mn, wide shall be end of the rafier. At all va lleys and hips there shall be a
fastened to each plate across and to each side of the single valley or hip railer not less than 50 nun nominal
opening with nol less than six 90 mm nails. thickness and not less than the cut of the rafter.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, First Printing, 201 5
•
6-82 CHAPTER 6 - Wcod
620.9.11.3 Notches and Holes Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over support unless
approved end-matched is used, in which case each piece
Nmching at the onds or rnncrs or ceiling joists shnll not shall bear on at least two supports.
c.xcccd one fourth the depth. Notches in the lop or bollom
of' the ra iler or ceil ing joist shnll 1101 exceed one sixth the Wood stmctural panels used for roof sheathing shall be
dcplb and shall not be located in the middle one third of bonded by intermediate or exterior glue. Wood structural
the span, except that a notch 1101 exceeding one third of panel roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be
the depth is pennillcd in the top of the rnfl:cr or ceiling bonded with exterior glue.
joist not further from the face or the support than the
depth of the member. 620.9.11.9 Roof Planking
Holes bored in rafters or ceiling joists shall not be within Planking shall be designed in accordance with the general
50 mm of the lop and bottom and their diameter shall not provisions of this Chapter.
exceed one third the depth of the member.
In lieu of such design, 50 mm tongue-and-groove
620.9.1 1.4 Framing Around Openings planking may be used in accordance with Table 620. 7-1.
.Joints in such plnnking may be randomly spaced,
Trimmer and header rafters shall be doubled, or of lumber provided the system is upplicd to not less than three
of equivalent cross section, when the span or the header continuous spans, the pl11nks are cc11ter-ma1chcd and cnd-
exceeds 1.20 m. The ends of header rollers more than matched or splined, each plank bears on at least one
1.80 111 long shall be supported by framing anchors or support, and 1hc joi111s arc scparntcd by nt lcr1st 600 111111 in
rafter hangers unless bearing on a benm, partition or" nil. adjacent pieces.
620.9.1 1.S Rafter Ties 620.10 Exit Facilities
Railer shall be nnilcd to adjacent ceiling joists to form a In Seismic Zone 4, exterior exit b:ilconies. stairs and
continuous lie between exterior walls when such joists are similar exit facilities slrn ll be positively anchored to the
pnrnllel 10 the rafters. Where not parallel. railer shall be primary structure al not over 2.40 m. on center or shall be
tied lo 25 mm by 100 mm (nominal) minimum-size designed for lateral forces. Such allachment shall not be
crosstics. Rafter ties shall be spaced not more than 1.20 m accomplished by used of toenails or nails subject to
on center. withdrawal.
620.9.11.6 Purlins
The maximum span of50mm by 150 mm purlins shall be

1.80 m but in uo case shall the purlins be smaller lhan 50
mm by I 00 mm members. The unbraced length of struts
shnll not exceed 2.40 m and the minimum slope of the
struts shalJ be 45 degrees from the horizontal.
620.9.11.7 Blocking
Roof railers and ceiling joists shall be supported latcraJly

to prevent rotation nnd lateral displacement when required
by Seel ion 6 16. Roof trusses shall be supponed laterally
at points or bearing by solid blocking or by other
equivalent means lo prevent rotation nnd lateral
displacement.
620.9.11.8 Roof Sheathing
Roof sheathing shall be in accordance with Tables 61 1.1 -

2 and 611. 1-3 for wood structural panels, and Table
61 1.1-1 forlumber.
•
SECTION 621 SECTlON 622

METAL PLATE-CONNECTED USE OF MACHINE-GRADED
WOOD TRUSS DESIGN ~~~~~~~----'
LUMBER (MGL)
621.1 Design and Fabrication 622.1 General
The design and fabrication of metal plate connected wood fn cases where the identification of a particular wood
trusses shall be in accordance with ANSJ/TPI 1-1995, species is not known, therefore working stresses cannot
National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected be found in Table 615.2-1, machine graded lumber can be
Wood Truss Constmction of the Truss Plate Institute. used for general and structural applications.
621.2 Performance 622.2 Design Properties for Machine-Graded

Lumber
Full-scale load tests in accordance with ANSI/TPI 2 may
be required at the option of the building official to provide The design properties for machine graded lumber
a means of demonstrating that minimum adequate developed by the forest Products Research and
perfonnance is obtainable from specific metal plate Development Institute are shown in Table 622.2-1 to
connector plates, various lumber types and grades, .a 622.2-4. These properties are applicable for dry lumber
particular truss design and a particular fabrication (moisture content~ 16%) only. In green lumber (moisture
procedure. ANSI/TPI 2 provides procedures for testing content ~ 28%), the design strength shall be reduced by
and evaluating wood tmsscs designed in accordance with 40% and modulus of elasticity by 20% For lumber with
ANSJ/TPI I. moisture content between 16% and 28%, the design
properties may be obtained by direct interpolation.
621 .3 In-Plant Inspection
622.3 Design Using Machine-Graded Lumber
Each truss manufacturer shall retain an approved agency
having no financial interest in the plant being inspected to The reference values given in Section 622.2 may be used
make nonscheduled inspections of truss fabrications and to design timber structures in accordance with the rules
delivery operations. The inspections shall cover all phases given by NSCP and olher appropriate national and/or
of the truss operation, including lumber storage, handling, international standards.
cutting, fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication, bundling
and banding handling, and delivery. 622.4 Preservative Treatment
621.4 Marking To ensure the durability of MGL against bio-detcriorating

agents such as fungi and insects, MGL should he treated
Each truss shall be legibly branded, marked or otherwise with an environment-friendly preservative.
have permanently affixed thereto the following
information located within 600 mm of the center of the 622.S Moisture Content
span on the face of the bottom chord:
A given piece of lumber is considered dry, partially
I. Identity of the company manufacturing the truss. seasoned, and green, when their respective moisture
2. The design load. contents is above I 0%, 22 - 28%, and greater than 28%.
3. The spacing of trusses. 622.6 Markings
Prior to use, each machine graded lumber should be

inspected for a mark that contains the mill in which the
lumber was graded, organization that certifies the quality
of the grading procedure, timber size, stress grade and
moisture content.
•
Table 622.2-1 Reference Values for Dry Machine-Graded Lumber

Reference Values
Machine
Bending, Tension, Compression, Shear, Modulus of Elasticity,
s1~Gradc
F (MPa F (M P:i) F. MPa) F MPa) E (GPa
MS 5 3 4 1.48 5.68
MJO 10 6 8 1.64 8.57
MIS 15 9 12 J.79 I l.45
M20 20 12 16 J.95 14.34
M25 25 15 20 2.10 17.23
Table 622.2-2 l3asic Working Loads for ails in Lateral Loading (MGL)
Machine Load Ca acil (N/mm)
- --
Stress Grade D*=2.5 D=-2.8 u~-3.15 D==3.75 D""'4.S D=S D=-5.6
M5 92 112 138 188 258 310 378
M IO 136 166 204 276 380 457 557
MIS 182 222 272 369 508 61 1 745
M20 229 279 279 466 641 77 1 940
M25 279 340 340 566 779 937 1143
•D=1wil diameter (mm)
Table 622.2-3 Basic Workiog Loads for Nails in Withdrawal (MGL)

Machine Load Capacity (N/mm)
Stress Grade D*~2.5 ~
0
2.8 0°-3.15 0 ""'3.75 D--=4.5 0,.,-5 0=:5.6
M5 47 52 59 70 84 94 105
MIO 85 96 108 128 154 171 191
Ml5 134 150 168 201 241 267 300
M20 192 215 24 1 287 345 383 429
M2S 259 290 327 389 466 51 8 581
*D~nail diame1er (mm)
Table 622.2-4 Reference Values for Macbine-Oradcd Lumber
Machine Stress Grade

Reference Values
M5 MIO M15 M20 M25
Bending, Fb (M Pa) 5 10 .15 20 25
Tension Parallel to grain, Ft (MPa) 3 6 9 12 15
Tension Perpendicular to grain, Fu (M Pa) 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.30
Compression Parallel to grain, F c (MPa) 4 8 12 16 20

Compress ion Perpendicular to grain, Fn (MP a) 2.3 3.3 4.3 5.2
Modulus of Elasticity (mean), E (GPa) 6.2 8.8 11.3 13.9
Modulus of Elasticity (20th percentile), E (G Pa) 5. l 7.6 10.l 12.6
Shear Modulus, Gv (GPa) 0.39 0.52 0.65 0.78

NSCP C101·15
Chapter7
MASONRY

VOLUME I

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium l
112 Paoay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@imail.com
•
CHAPTER 7 - Masonry 7-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 701 -G~NERAl, .................................................................................................................................................. 7-4

701.1 Scope ........................... ..............-.......... .................................................................................................................... .. 7-4
701.2 Design Melhods............................................... ........ .................................... ............................................................... 7-4
701.3 Oefinitions .................................................... .................... .................................... ...................................................... 7.4
701.4 Notations ......................................... ................................................................................................. ............ .. ............ 7-5
SF:CTION 702 - l\1ATERIAL STANDARDS ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
702.1 Quality ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
702.2 Slandar<ls of Quality................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
SECTION 703 • MORT AR AND GROUT........................................................................................................................ 7-9
703.1 General ...................................................................... .............. ................................. ............. ..................... ................ 7-9
703.2 Materials ................................... .... .............................................................................................................. ................ 7-9
703.3 Mortar......................................................................................................................................................... ................ 7-9
703.4 Grout ................................................................................ ........................................................................................ 7-IO
703.5 Additives and A<ln1ixtures .............. .......................................................................................................................... 7-10
SECTION 704 ·CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 7-1 t
704. l General ............................................................. ............................................ ............................................................ 7-11
704.2 Malcrials, Handling, Storage and Preparation ................................ ...................................................... ..... ............... 7-11
704.3 Placing Masonry Units ............................................. ............ ...................................................................... .............. 7-1 I
704.4 Rcinfi>rcement Placing ...................................... .. ..: .......... ..................................................................... ................... 7-11
704.5 Grouted Masonry...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 12
SECTION 705 - QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................ 7-14
705.1 General ............................................................................................. ................................................ .. ...................... 7-14
705.2 Scope ................................................................. ................................................................................ .............. ......... 7-14
705.3 Con1pliance wilh f m' .............................................................................................................................................. 7-14
705.4 Mo11ar Testing ................................................ ................................................... ............................ ........................... 7-16
705.5 Grout Tcsting...................................... ........... ................. - ......... .. ............................................................................. 7-16
705.6 Recycled Aggregates .......................... .............................. .......... ..................... :................ ............... .............. ........... 7-16
SECTION 706 - GENERAL DESIGN RtQUJRF,MENTS .............................................................................................. 7-16
706.1 Gcncral ............ ................................................. ... ......... .................... ................................ ....... ............................. .. .. 7-16
706.2 Allowable Stress Design an<l Strength Design Requirements for Unreinforced and Reinforced Masonry .............. 7-20
706.3 Alternative Strength Design (ASD) and Strength Design Requirements for Reinforced Masonry .......................... 7-22
S~CTION 707 - ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) OF MASONRY .................................................................. 7-24
707.1 Oeneral ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
707 .2 Design of Reinforced Masonry ................................................................................................................................ 7-27
707.3 Design ofUnreintorced Masonry ............................................................................................................................. 7-31
SECTION 708 - STRENGTH DESIGN OF l\'IAS<)NRY.................................................................................................. 7-32
708.1 General .............................. ......... ........... ........... ................ .............................. ........................................... ............... 7-32
708.2 Reinlorcc<l Masonry ................................ .......... ........... ....................... ............................... ................. ..................... 7-34
.
7-2 CHAPTER 7 - Masonry
SECTION 709- SEISMIC DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................7-44

709.1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................................... ............... 7-44
709.2 General ... ..................................................................................................................................................................7-44
709.3 Seismic Performance Category A .............................................................................................................................7-44
709.4 Seismic Performance Category B ................................................................. ... ......... 7-Error! Bookma rk not defined.
709.5 Seism ic Performance Catego ry C .. ........................................................................ ................................................... 7-44
709.6 Seismic Perfonnance Category D ........... ........................... ............................................... ................................ ........ 7-45
709.7 Seismic Perfo rmance Category E .... . .... .. ....... ......................................................................... ...................7-46
SECTION 710- EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY .................................................................................................7-47
710.1 Hcight ........................................... ............................................................................................................................7-47
7 10.2 Latera l Stability ....... ...... ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47
710.3 Compressive Stresses ...... ................ ......................................................... ................................................................ 7-47
710.4 Lateral Support ..................................................................... ............................................................ ...... .... ..............7-47
710.5 Mini1num Thickness ............ ................................................................................................................... ..................7-49
710.6 Bond .................... ........................................................................................................................... .......................... 7-50
710.7 Anchorage ...... .................. .......... ............................................ ........ .... ...................................................................... .7-50
710.8 Unburned Clay Masonry ............................ ....................................................... .......................................................7-5 I
71 0.9 Sto ne Masonry ............ ................ ................................................................................ ......................... ................. .... 7-51
SECTION 711 - GLASS MASONRY ......................................... .........................................................................................7-52
71 1.I General .......... ...... .............. .............. ....................................... .................................... ......................................... .....7-52
7 11.2 Mortar Joints .... ................................................................................................................................. ....... ................. 7-52
711 .3 Lateral Support .. .. .............. ............................... ..... ..... .".............................................................................. ...... ... ......7-52
711 .4 Reinfon;c1nent .............................................. ......... ..... .. ....................................... .................................................. ...7-52
711.S Size of Panels ........ :.......................................................................................................... .............. .......................... 7-52
7 l. 1.6 Expani:iion Joints .................................................................. ................................... .................................................. 7-52
711 .7 RcuseofUnits .......... .... ................................................................... ............................................. ............................7-52
SECTION 712 - MASONRY FIREPJ,ACES .....................................................................................................................7-55
712.1 Definition ........................................................................................... ... ............... ................ ..... ..................... .... ....... 7-55
712.2 Footings and Foundation~ .................................................................................... .. .............................. .....................7-55
712.3 Seismic Reinforcing ......................... ........ ............................................................ :.................... ...................: .......... .7-55
712.4 Seismic Anchorage ......................................................... ....................... ....................................................... .. .......... 7-55
71 2 .S Firebox Walls .. .... ................ ................ ..................... ........................................................................................ ........ 7-55
71 2.6 Firebox Dimensions .......... .......................... .............. ........................................................................... ..................... 7-55
7 12.7 Lintel and Throat ........................ ................. ........................................................................................ ............... ...... 7-56
712.8 Smoke Chamber Walls .......................... ............ ........................................................................................... ............ 7-56
712.9 Hearth and Hearth Extension ............... ......... ... ................... .............................................. .............. .. ........................7-56
712.10 Hearth Extension Dimensio ns ......................... ...... ................. ............................................... ....... ............................7-56
7 12.11 Fireplace Clearance ................................................... ............................................................ ................................... 7-57
712. 12 Fireplace Fireblocking ........................... ........ ........................ ................................ .................................. .................7-57
71 2.13 Exterior Air............................................. ........... ....................................... ................................................................7-57

SECTION 713 - MASONRY CHIMNEYS.........................................................................................................................7-58

713.1 Definition ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-58
713.2 Footings and Foundations ........................................................................................................................................ 7-58
713.3 Seismic Reinforcing ................................................................................................................................................. 7-58
713.4 Seismic Anchorage................................................................................................................................................... 7-59
713.5 Corbeling ............................................................................................................................................... ................... 7-59
713.6 Changes in Dimension.................................................................. ............................................................................ 7-59
713.7 Offsets ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-59
713.8 Additional Load........................................................................................................................................................ 7-59
713.9 Termination .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-59
713.10 Wall Thickness ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-59
713.11 Flue Lining (Material) ........................................ ........................................................................... ........................... 7.59
713.12 Clay Flue Lining (Installation) ................................................................................................................. ................ 7-61
713.13 Additional Requirements .......................................................................................................................................... 7-61
713.14 Multiple Flues .................................................... .. ....... ............................................................................................. 7-61
713.15 Flue Area (Appliance) .............................................................................................................................................. 7-61
713.16 Flue Area (Masonry Fireplace) ................................................................................................................................ 7-61
713.17 Inlet .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-62
713.18 Masoruy Chimney Cleanout Openings..................................................................................................................... 7-62
713.19 Chimney Clearances ................................................................................................................................................. 7-63
713.20 Chimney Fireblocking ......................................................................................... :.................................................... 7-63
q
7.4 CHAPTER 7 - Masonry
AREA, TRANSFORMED is the equivalent area or one

SECTION701 material to a second based on the ratio of modulus or
GENERAL elasticity of' the first material to the second.
701.J Scope BONO, ADHESION is the adhesion between masonry

units and mortar or grout.
The materials, design, cons truction and quality assu rance of
masonry shall be in accordance with this chapter. BOND, REINFORCING is the adhesion between steel
reinforcement and mortar or grout
701.2 Design Methods
BOND BEAM is a horizontal grouted element with in
Masonry shall comply with the provisions of one of the masonry in which reinforcement is embedded.
follow ing design methods in this chapter as well as the
requirements of'Sections 701 through 705. CELL is a void space having a gross cross-sectional area
greater than 900 mm2.
701.2.J Allowable Stress Design
CLEANOUT is an opening to the bottom of a grout space
Masomy designed hy allowable stress design method shall of' suflicient site and spacing to allow the removal o r
comply with the provisions of Sections 706 and 707. debris.
701.2.2 Strength Design COLLAR JOINT is the mortared or grouted space

between wythes of masonry.
Masonry designed by the strength design method shall
comply with the provisions of Sections 706 and 708. COLUMN, REINFORCED is a vertical structural
memhcr in which both the reinforcement and masonry resist
701.2.3 limpirical Design compression.
Masonry designed by the empirical design method shall COLUMN, UNREINFORCED is a vertical structural
comply with the provisions of Sections 706. J and 710. member whose horizontal dimension measured at right
angles to the thickness does not exceed three times the
701.2.4 Glass Masonry thidcness. ·
Glass masonry shall comply with the provisions or Section OlMENSJONS, ACTUAL arc the measured dimensions of
7 11. a designated item. The actual dimension shall not vary
from the specified dimension by more than the amount
701.3 Oetinitions allowed in the appropriate standard or quality in Section
702.
For the purpose orthis chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows: DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL o f masonry units are equal lo
its specified dimensions plus the thickness of the j oint with
AREA, BEDDED is the area of the surface of a masonry which the unit is laid.
unit which is in contact with mortar or the surface of
another masonry unit in the plane of the joint. DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED arc the dimensions specified
for the manufacture or construction of masonry, masonry
AREA OF REINFORCEMENT, EFFECTIVE is the units, joints or any oilier component of a structure.
cross-sectional area of reinforcement multiplied by the
cosine or the angle between the reinforcement aod the GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the
direction for which effective area is to be determined. total grout pour.
ARIJ:A, GROSS is the total cross-sectional area of a GROUT POUR is the total height of masonry wall to be
specified section. grouted prio r lo the erection of additional masonry. A grout
pour will consist of one or more grout lifts.
AREA, NET is the gross cross-sectional area minus the
area of ungroute<l cores, notches, cells and unbe<lded areas. GROUTED HOLLOW-UNIT MASONRY is that fonn
Net area is the actual surface area of cross section of of grouted masonry construction in which certain
masonry.

designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit
grout. in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe.
GROUTED MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY is that foml 701.4 Notations

of grouted masonry construction in which the space
2
between the wythcs is solidly or periodically filled with cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, mm
grout. effective area of masonry, mm2
gross area of wall, mm2
.JOINT, BED is the joint with or without mortar that 1s
total area of special horizontal reinforcement
horizontal at the time the masonry units are placed. through wall frame joint, mm2
net area of masonry section bounded by wall
JOINT, HEAD is the joint with or without mortar having a thickness and length of section in direction of
vertical transverse plane. shear force considered, mm2
area of tension (pullout) cone of embedded
MASONRY UNIT is brick, tile, stone, glass block or anchor bolt projected onto surface of masonry,
concrete block conforming to tl1c requirements specified in mm 2
Section 702. effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement
2
in column or flexural member, mm
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose effccti vc area of reinforcement,
net cross-sectional areas (solid area) in any plane parallel to total cross-sectional area of rectangular tie
the surface containing cures, cells or deep frogs is Jess than reinforcement for confined core, mm2
75 percent of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the area of reinforcement required for shear
same plane. reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal
reinforcement, mm2
SOLID-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit who.se net cllcctive cross-sectional area of compression
cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the surface reinforcement in flexural member, mm
2
containing the cores or cells is at least 75 percent of the depth of equivalent rectangular stress block, mm
gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
nominal balance depth of equivalent rectangular
strength stress block, mm
MORTARLESS MASONRY SYSTEM is a method of
nominal shear strength of anchor bolt, kN
masonry wall construction that eliminates the use or mortar.
allowable tensile force on anchor boll, kN
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar (if nominal tensile strength of anchor boll, kN
present) with or without grout used as a test specimen for allowable shear force on anchor bolt, kN
determining properties of the masonry. effective width of rectangular member or width
of flange for T and [ sections, mm
REINFORCIW MASONRY is that form of masonry b.m factored shear force supported by anchor bolt,
construction in which reinforcement acting in conjunction kN
with the masonry is used to resist forces. computed tensile force on anchor bolt, kN
factored tensile force supported hy anchor bolt,
SHELL is the outer portion of a hollow masonry unit as kN
placed in masonry. computed shear force on anchor bolt, kN
- width of web in Tor I section, mm
WALL, BONDED is a masonry wall in which two or more nominal shear strength coefficient as obtained
wythes are bonded to act as a structural unit. from Table 708-2
c distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber, mm
WALL, CAVITY is a wall containing continuous air space D dead loads, or related internal moments and
with a minimum width or 50 mm and a maximum widtlt of forces
I 00 mm between wythes which are tied with metal ties. d distance from compression face of flexural
member to centroid of longitudinal tensile
WALL TIE is a mechanical metal fastener which connects reinforcement, mm
wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials. diameter of reinforcing bar, mm
diameter of largest beam longitudinal
WEB is an interior solid portion of a hollow-masonry unit reinforcing bar passing through, or anchored in a
as placed in masonry. joint, mm

diameter of largest beam longitudinal gross, cracked moment of inertia of wall cross
4
reinforcing bar passing through, or anchored in a section, mm
joint, mm j ratio or distance between centroid of flexu ral
E load cllects of earthquake, or related internal compressive forces and centroid of tensile forces
moments and forces of depth, d
Em modulus or elasticity or masonry, MPa K reinforcement cover or clear spacing, whichever
e •· eccentricity of P uf, mm is less, mm
maximum usable compressive strain of masonry k ratio of depth of compressive stress in flexural
loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or member to depth, d
related moments and forces L live loads, or related internal moments and
- allowable average axial compressive stress in forces
columns for centroidally applied axial load length of wall, mm
only, MPa - length of wall or segment, mm
allowable flexural compressive stress in embedmcnl depth of anchor bolt, mm
members suhjccted to bending load only, MPa anchor bolt edge distance, the least distance
allowable bearing stress in masonry, MPa measured from edge of masonry to surface of
allowable stress in reinforcement, MPa anchor bolt, mm
allowable compressive stress in column required development length of reinforcement,
reinforcement, MPa mm
allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry, design moment, kNm
MP a maximum momcnl in member al s lage
allowable shear stress in masonry, MPa deflection is computed, kNm
computed axial compressive stress due to design or
moment capacity compression rcinforcemenl
axial load, MPa in tlexura! member about centroid of tensile
computed flexural stress in extreme Jiber due to force, kNm
design bending loads only, MPa nominal cracking moment strength in masonry,
fmb = computed compressive stress due to dead load kNm
only, MPa moment of compressive force in masonry about
fr modulus of ruptw·c, MP a centroid ortensile fon:c in reinforcement, kNm
computed stress in reinforcement due to design nominal moment strength, kNm
fs
loads, Mra moment of tensile force in reinforcement about
ccnlroid of compressive force in masonry, kNm
Iv computed shear stress due to design load, MPa
service molflent at midheight of panel, including
{y tensile yield stress of reinforcement, MPa Mser
tensile yield stress of horizontal reinforcement, P !J. effects, kNm
{yh
MPa factored moment, kNm
specified compressive strength of grout at age of modular ratio
f~ 28 days, MPa EJEm.
I'm specified compressive strength of masonry at
age of 28 days, MP a
design axial load, kN
allowable ccntroidal axial load for reinforced
G shear modulus of masonry, M Pa masonry columns, kN
H loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water nominal halanced design axial strength, kN
in soil or related internal moments and forces load from tributmy Boor or rour area, kN
= height of wall between poinls of support, mm nominal axial strength in masonry, kN
hcam depth, mm nominal axial load strength in masonry without
cross-sectional dimension of grouted core llexure, kN
measured center to center of confining facwred axial load. kN
reinforcement, mm factored load from tributary floor or roof loads,
pier depth in plane of wall frame, mm kN
effective height of wall or column, mm Puw factored weight of wall tributary to section
under consideration, kN
I = moment or inertia about neutral axis of cross- weight of wall tributary to section under
sectional area, mm4 consideration, kN
effective moment of inertia, mm 4 T nidius of gyration (base<l on specified unit

dimensions or Tables 711-1, 711-2 and 711-3), SECTION 702 ~~i~ ~ t'.i·r; ~:..~fo,:..~ ·r.1ii~~.;1 :~.
mm
ratio or area of reinforcing bars cut off to total MATERIAL STANDARDS ,.:}~ , ,--~
area of reinforcing bars at the section
s section modulus, mm3 702.1 Quality
s spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in direction
parallel to that of main reinforcement, mm Materials used in masonry shall conform to the
effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage and requirements stated herein. lfno requirements are specified
T
differential settlement in this section for a material, quality shall be based on
effective thickness of wythc, wall or column, generally accepted good practice, subjeeL to the approval of
t
mm the building oflicial.
u required strength to resist factored loads, or
Reclaimed or previously used masonry units shall meet the
related internal moments and forces
bond stress per unit of surface area of applicable requirements as for new masonry units of the
u
reinforcing bar, MPa same material for their intended use.
total design shear force, kN
total horizontal joint shear, kN 702.2 Standards of Quality
nominal shear strength of masonry, kN The standards listed below labeled a "UBC 97 Standard"
nominal shear strength, kN arc also listed in Chapter 35, Part I I of UHC, and are pa1t of
nominal shear strength of shear reinforcement, this code. The other standards listed below are recognized
kN standards. See Sections 3503 and 3504 ofUBC
required shear strength in masonry, kN
wind load, or related internal moments in forces 1. Aggregates
factored distributed lateral load
horizontal deflection at mid height under I, I ASTM C 144, Aggregates for Masonry Mortar
factored load, mm
~u deflection due to factored loads, mm 1.2 ASTM C404, Aggregates for Grout
p - ratio of area of flexural tensile reinforcement,
As, to area bd 2. Cement
reinforcement ratio producing halanced strain
conditions 2. I ASTM C9 l-93, Cement, Masomy. (Plastic
ratio of distributed shear reinforcement 011 plane cement conforming to the requirements of UBC
Pn Stai1dard 25-l may be used in lieu of masonry
perpendicular to plane of Amv
~ sum of perimeters of all longitudinal
cement when it also conforms to ASTM C 91-
93).
reinforcement, mm
square root of specified strength of masonry at
the age of 28 days, MPa 2.2 ASTM Cl 50, Portland Cement
strength-reduction factor
2.3 ASTM C270, Mortar Cement
3. Lime
3. I ASTM C5-79, Quicklime for Structural

Purposes
3.2 ASTM C207-91, Hydrated Lime for Masonry

Purposes. When Types N and NJ\ hydrated
lime arc used in masonry mortar, they shall
comply with the provisions of UHC Standard
ASTM C270-95, Section 21.1506.7, excluding
the plasticity requirement.
Nation~! Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015
q
4. Masonry Units of Clay or Shale 6.4 ACI-704, Cast Stone
4.1 ASTM C34, Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall 6.5 ASTM E92b, Test Method for Compressive
Tile Strength of Masonry Prisms
7. Connectors
4.2 ASTM C56, Structural Clay Nonload-bearing
Tile
7. 1 Wall tics and anchors made from steel wire
shall conform 10 unc Standard 2 1- 10, Part II ,
4.3 ASTM C62-87, Building Brick (solid units) and other steel wall ties and anchors shall
conform to A36 in accordance with UBC
4.4 ASTM C 126, Ceramic Glazed Stnictural Clay Standard 22-1. Wall tics and anchors made
Facing Tile, racing Brick and Solid Masonry from copper, brass or other nonfcn-ous metal
Units. Load-bearing glazed brick shall conform shall huve minimum tensile yield strength of
lo the weathering and structura l requirements of
200 MPa.
ASTM C73-85. Section 21.106, Facing Brick
7.2 All such items not fully embedded in mortar or
4.5 ASTM C2!6-86, Facing Brick (solid units) grout shall either be corrosio11 resistant or shall
be coated ancr lilbrication wilh copper, zinc or
4.6 ASTM C90-85, Hollow Brick a metal havrng at least equivalent corrosion-
resistant properties.
4.7 ASTM C67, Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile 8. Mortar
4.8 ASTM C212, Structural Clay Facing Tile 8.1 ASTM C270-95, Mortar for Unit Masonry and
Reinforced Masonry other than Gypsum
4.9 ASTM C530, Structural Clay Non-Load
bearing Screen Tile. 8.2 ASTM C270, Field Tests Specimens for Mortar
5. Masonry Units of Concrete 8.3 ASTM C780, Standard Test Method for
Flexural Bond Strength of Mortar Cement
5.1 ASTM C55-85, Concrete Building Brick 9. Grout
5.2 ASTM C90-85, Hollow and Solid Load-bearing 9.1 ASTM C1019-84, Method of Sampling and
Concrete Masonry Units Testing Grout
5.3 ASTM Cl29-85, Non -load bearing Concrete 9.2 ASTM C476-83, Grout for Masonry
Masonry Units
}0. Reinforcement
5.4 ASTM Cl40, Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units 10. l ASTM A82, Part I, Joint Reinforcement for
Masonry
5.5 ASTM C'A26, Standard Test Method for Drying
Shrinkage of Concrete Block 10.2 ASTM A615, A616, A617, A706, A767 and
A775 Deformed and Plaio Billet-steel Bars,
6. Masonry Units of Other Materials Rail-;teel Defonned and Plain Bars, Axle-slcel
Deformed and Plain Bars, and Deformed Low-
6.1 Calcium silicate alloy Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
6.2 ASTM C73-85, Calcium Silicate Face Brick 10.3 ASTM A496, Part II, Cold-drawn Steel Wire
(Sand-lime Brick) for Concrete Reinforcement
6.3 ASTM C216, C62 or C652, Unburned Clay

Masonry Units and Standard Methods of
Sampling and ASTM C 67, Testing Unburned
Clay Masonry Units

SECTION 703 703.3 Mortar

MORTAR AND GROUT 703.3.1 General
703.1 General Mortar shall consist of a mixture of cementitious materials
and aggregate to which sufficient water and approved
Mo11ar and grout shall comply with the provisions of this additives, if any, have been added to achieve a workable,
section. Special mortars, grouts or bonding systems may be plastic consistency.
used, subject to satisfactory evidence of their capabilities
when approved by the building official. 703.3.2 Selecting Proportions
703.2 Materials Mortar with specified proportions of ingredients that differ

from the mortar propo11ions of Table 703-1 may be
Materials used as ingredients in mortar and grout shall approved for use when it is demonstrated by laboratory or
confonn to the applicable requirements in Section 702. field experience that this mortar with the specified
Cementitious materials for grout shall be one or both of the proportions of ingredients, when combined with the
following: lime and Portland cement. Cementitious masonry units to be used in the structure, will achieve the
materials for mortar shall be one or more of the following: specified compressive strength {~1 • Water content shall be
lime, masonry cement, Portland cement and mortar cement. adjusted to provide proper workability under existing field
Cementitious materials or additives shall not contain epoxy conditions. When the proportion of ingredients is not
resins and derivatives, phenols, asbestos fibers or lire clays. specified, the proportions by mortar type shall be used as
Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of given in Table 703~1.
deleterious amounts of acid, alkalies or organic material or
other ha1mful substances.
Table 703-1 Mortar Proportions for Unit Masonry
PROPORTIONS BY VOLUM~ (CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS}
AGGREGATE
Portland Masonry Hydrated
Mortar Cement 2 MEASURED IN A
Cement Cement 1 l,imc or
DAMP, LOOSE
or Blended
MORTAR TYPE
Cemeot
M s N M s N Lime Putty CONDITION
Cement- .
Lime
M I - - - - - y..
s I - - - - - - over Y.. to 'l'2
N I - - - - - - over Yi to I Y.
0 I - - - - - - over I Y. to 2 y;
Mortar Not less than 2 Y. and
M l - - - - - I
cement not more than 3 times
M - - - - I - - the sum of the
s Yz - - - - - I separate volumes of
s - - - - - I - cementitious
N - - - - - - I materials
Masonry
cement
M I - - I - - -
M - I - - - - -
s y; - - I - - -
s - - I - - - -
N - - - I - - -
0 - - - I - - -
I
Masonry cement conforming to 1he requirements ofUBCStandard 2/-1 I.
Mortar cement conforming to the requirementv of UBC Standard 21-14.
q
703.4 Grout 703.4.2 Selecting Proportions
703.4.1 General Water content <;hall be n<lj11s1cd lo provide proper

worknbilily nnd le> enable proper placement under existmg
Grout shall consist of a mixture of cemcntitious materials licld conditions. v. ilhout scgregntion. Grout shall be
and aggregate to which water has been added such that the specified by one <>fthc following methods:
mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents. I. Propo11ions of ingredients and nny ,idditivcs shall be
The specified compressive strength of grout, f~, shall not based on laboratory or field experience with the grout
be less than 15 MPa ingredients and the masonry units to be used
2. The grout shall be specified by the proportion of its

constituents in tenns of parts by volume, or
3. Minimum compressive strength which will produce the

required prism strength, or
4. Proportions by grout type shall be used as given in

Table 703-2.
I
Table 703-2 Grout Proportions by Volwne
PARTS BY AGGREGATE MEASURED JN A DAMP,
VOLUME O'I<' PARTS BY VOLUME LOOSE CONDITION
PORT LAND OF HYDRATED
TYPE
CEMENT OR UME ORUME
BLENDE D
Fine Coarse
PUT TY
CEMENT
2 4I to 3 times
.
the sumo f the
Fine
Oto .2... volumes of the ccmentitious
grout 10
materials
2 2. to 3 times the sum of the 1 to 2 times the sum of the
Coarse 4
O to .2... volumes of the cementitious volumes of the ccmentitious
grout JO
materials materials
I
Grout shall allain a minimum compre;·sive stren,?th at 28 days of I 3.8 MPa. The building official may require a compressive fieldslrenf?lh test ofgrout
made in accordance with U8C Standard 21-18.
703.5 Additives and Admixtures
703.5.1 General
Additives and admixtures to mortar or grout shall not be

used unless approved by the building official.
703.5.2 Air Entrainment
Air-entraining substances shall not be used in mortar or

grout unless tests arc conducted to detenn.ine compliance
with the requirements of this code.
703.5.3 ColOl'S
Only pure mineral oxide, carb-On black or synthetic colors

may be used. Carbon black shall be limited to a maximum
of 3 percent of the weight of the cement.
_.., .
.. --
SECTION704 Exceptions:
CONSTRUCTION _ _ _ _ __ Dry mixes for mortar and grout which are blended in the
factory and mixed at the job site shall be mixed in
mechanical mixers until workable, but not to exceed l O
704.1 General minutes.
Masonry shall be constructed according lo the provision of
704.3 Placing Masonry Units
this section.
704.3.1 Mortar
704.2 Materials, Handling, Storage and Preparation
The mortar, when used shall be sufficiently plastic and units
All materials shall comply with applicable requirements of
shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude mortar
Section 702. Storage, handling and preparation at the site
from the joint and pr~duce a tight joint. Deep furrowing
shall conform also the following:
which produces voids shall not be used.
l. Masonry materials shall be stored so that al the time of

When m011ar is used, the initial bed joint thickness shall nol
use the materials are clean and structurally suitable for
be less than 6 mm or more than 25 mm; subsequent bed
the intended use.
joints shall not be less than 6 mm or more tlrnn 16 mm in
thickness.
2. All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust
and other coatings that would inhibit reinforcing bond.
704.3.2 Surfaces
3. At the time of laying, burned clay units and sand lime
Surfaces to be in contact with mortar or grout shall be clean
units shall have an initial rate or absorption not
and free or deleterious materials.
exceeding 1.6 liter per square meter during a period of
one minute. In the absorption test, the surface of the
704.3.3 Solid .Masonry Units
unit shall be held 3 mm below the surface of the water.
Solid masonry units shall have fall head and bed joints.
4. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted unless
otherwise approved.
704.3.4 Hollow Masonry Units
5. Materials shall be stored in a manner such that
Except for mortarless system all head and bed joints shall
deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is
be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face
prevented and thal the material will ~c capab(e. of
of the unit not less than the thickness of the shell.
meeting applicable requirements at the time of m1xmg
or placement.
Head and bedded joints of open-ends units with beveled
ends that are to be fully grouted need not be mortared. The
6. The method or measuring materials for mortar and
beveled ends shall form a grout key which permits grout
grout shall be such that proportions of the materials can
within 16 mm of the face of the unit The units shall be
he controlled.
tightly butted to prevent leakage of grout.
7. Mortar or grout mixed at the joh site shall he mixed for
704.4 Reinforcement Placing
a period of time not less than three minutes or more
than IO minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount
Reinforcement details shall conform to the requirements of
of water required to provide the desired workability.
this chapter. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
Hand mixing of small amounts or mortar is pennitted.
accordance with the plans and specifications.
Mortar may be re-tempered. Mortar or grout which has
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior
hardened or stiffened due to hydration or the cement
to grouting by wire positioners or other suitahle devices at
shall not be used. In no case shall mortar be used two
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters.
and one-half hours, nor grout used one and one half
hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to
the dry ingredients at the jobsite.
"4
Tolerances for the placement of reinforcement in walls and mortar joint, except the top of the wall. Where bond beams
flexural elements shall be plus or minus 12 mm for occur, the grout pour shall be stopped a minimum of IO mm
effective depth d equal to 200 mm or less,± 25 mm ford below the top of the masonry.
equal to 600 mm or less but greater than 200 mm, and 32
mm for d greater than 600 mm. Tolerance for longitudinal Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall
location of reinforcement shall be± 50 mm not be less than shown in Table 704-1. Higher grout pours
or smaller cavity widths or cell size than shown in Table
704.S Grouted Masonry 704-1 may be used when approved, if it is demonstrated
that grout spaces will be properly fil led.
704.S.l General Conditions
Clean.outs shall be provided for all grout pours over 1.50 m
Grouted masonry shall be constructed in such a manner that in height.
all elements of the masonry act together as a structural
element. Where required, clcanouts shall be provided in the bottom
course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced mon;
than 800 mm on center for solidly grouted masonry. When
Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all
spaces to be filled with groul clo not contain mortar cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed alter inspection
projections grcalcr than 12 mm, mortar droppings or other and before grouti ng.
foreign material. Grout shall be placed so that all spaces
designated lo be grouted shall be lilled with grout and the Where clcanouts arc not provided, special provisions must
grout shall be confined to those specific spaces. be made to keep lhe bottom and sides of the grout spaces,
as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table
Grout materials and water content shall be controJJed to 704-1, clean and clear prior to grouting.
provide adequate fluidity for placement without segregation
orthe constituents, and shall be mixed thoroughly. Units may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and
grout shall be placed in a continuous pour in grout lilts not
The grouting of any section of wall shall be completed in exceeding 1.8 m. When approved, grout lifts may be greater
one day with no interruptions greater than one hour. than l. 8 m if it can be demonstrated the grout spaces can he
properly Lilied.
Between grout pours, a hori1.ontal construction joint shall
be formed by stopping all wythes at the same elc~ation and All cells and spaces containing reinforcement shall be filled
with the grout stopping a minimum or 40 mm below a with grout.
Table 704-1 Grouting Limitations
MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OF THE TOTAL CLEAR

AREAS WITHIN GROUT SPACES AND CELLS
(mm
GROUT TYPE GROUT POUR MAXIMUM HEIGHT
Ol I
Multi-w the Masonr Hollow-unit Masonr

Fine .30 20 35 x 50
Fine 1.50 35 35 x 50
Fine 2.40 35 35 x 50
Fine 3.60 35 45 x 75
Fine 7.20 50 75 x 75
Coarse .30 35 35 x 75
Coarse 1.5 50 65 x 75
Coarse 2.40 50 75 x 75
Coarse 3.60 60 75 x 75
Coarse 7.20 75 75 x 100
I
See a(,10 Section 2104. 6.
1
The actual grout space or grout cell dimen,ions must be larger lhan the sum ofthi: jiJllowing itl!ms (]) The required mmtmum dimen.<wns of r01al dear
areas in 1'able 704-1; (2) The widrh of any mortar pn1icclions wirhin the space; and (3) The horizontal pr(!iections l!{the diameter~ of the horizontal
reinforcing har., within a cro.;·s section ofthe grout .space or cell.
J The minimum dimcn.,tons ofrhe total dear aroo.< shall be mode up ofone m· more open areas with ar least one area being 19 mm or greater in width.

704.5.2 Construction Requirements 704.5.4 Joint Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Bolts shall Wire joint reinforcement used in the design as principal
be accurately set with templates or by approved equivalent reinforcement. in hollow-unit construction shall be
means and held in place 10 prevent dislocation during continuous between suppo11s unle!;s splices arc made by
grouting. lapping:
Segregation of the grout materials and damage to the I. Fifty wire diameters in a grouted cell, or
masonry shall be avoided during the grouting process.
2. Seventy-five wire diameters in the mmtared bed joint,
or
Grout shall he consolidaled hy mechanical vibration during
placement before loss or plasticity in a manner to lilt the 3. In alternate bed joints or running bond masonry a
grout space. Grout pours greater than 300 mm in height distance not less than 50 diameters plus twice the
shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to spacing of the bed joints, or
minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 300 mm or
4. As required by calculalion and specific location in
less in height shall be mechnnically vibrated or puddled.
areas of minimum stres!i, such as points of inflection.
In nonstruclural clements which do not exceed 2.4 m in
Side wires shall be deformed and shall conform to ASTM
height above the highest point of laternl support, including
A82 Joint Reinforcement for Masonry.
fireplaces and residential chimneys, mortar or pouring
consistency may be substituted for grout when the masonry
is constructed and grouted in pours of 300 mm or less in
height
Tn multi-wythc grouted masonry, vertical barriers of

masonry shall be buHt across the grout space the entire
height of the grout pour and spaced not more than 9 m
horizontally. The grouting of any section of wall between
barriers shall be completed in one day with no interruption
longer than one hour.
704.5.3 Aluminum Equipment
Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utilizing aluminum

equipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials
and equipment lo be used that there will be no deleterious
effect on the strength of the grout.
"4 ·-----....--
SECTION705 construction. Verification by masonry prism testing shall

meet the following:
QUALITY ASSURAN
______.C
. ....._E_ ~ - ~
I. A set or five masonry prisms shall be bui lt and t~sted in
705. l General accordance with ASTM E447 prior to the stan ol
construction. Mnteria ls used l"or the construction or the
Quality assurance shall be provided to ensure that materials, prisms sball be taken from those speci liecl 10 be used in
constrnclion nnd workmanship arc in compliance with the the project Prisms shall be constructed under lhe
plans and specifications, and the applicable require ments of observation of' the engincor-of-rccorcl or special
this chapter. When required, inspeclion records slrnll be inspcctC>r or a11 approved ngency and tested by an
maintuined and made avai lable to the building official. approved agency.
705.2 Scope 2. When full allowublc stresses arc used in design, a set or
three prisms shall be built and tested during
Quality assurance shall include, hut is not limited to, construc!ion in accordance with ASTM E447 for each
assurance that: 450 m2 of wall area, but not less than one set of three
masonry prisms for the projecl
l. Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate
and all other materials meet the requirements of the 3. When one hnl I" the allowable mal>onry stresses arc used
applicable standards of quality and that they are in design. testing during construction is not required.
properly stored and prepared for use. A lcller of eertiticotion from the manufacturer and/or
supplier of the materials used to verify the / ;11 in
2. Mortar and grout arc properly mixed using specified accordance with Section 705.3.2, Item I. shall be
proportions of ingredients. The method of measuring provided m the time or: or prior to, deli very of the
materials for mortar and grout shall he such !hat materials 10 the job site to ensure the materials used in
proportions of materials are control led. constniction are representative or lhc materials used to
construct the prisms prior to construct ion.
3. Construction details, procedures and workmanship are
in accordance with the plans and specifications. 705.3.3 Masonry Prism Test Record
4. Placement, splices and reinforcement si:7.es are in Compressive strength verification by masonry prism test
accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the records shall meet the following:
plans and specifications.
I. A masonry prism test record approved by lhe building
official of al least 30 masonry prisms which were built
705.3 Compliance with f 'm and tested in accordance with ASTM E447. Prisms
shall have been constrncted 11nder the observation of an
705.3.J General engineer or special inspector or an approved agency
and shall have been tested by an approved agency.
Compliance with lhe requirements for the specified
compressive strength of masonry I'm shall be in accordance 2. Masonry prisms shall be representative of the
.with one orthc sections in this subsection. corresponding construction.
3. The average compressive strength of the test record
The actual compressive strength of masonry I'm shall not shall equal or exceed 1. 33 f:,,,,.
be less than 4 MPa.
4. When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of
705.3.2 Masonry Prism Testing three masonry prisms shall be built during construction
in accordance with /\STM E 447 for each 450 n? of
The compressive strength of masonry determined in wall area, but not less lhan one set of three prisms for
accordance with ASTM E447 for each set of prisms shall the project.
equal or exceed /'m_. Compressive strength of prisms shall
be hased on tests at 28 days. Compressive streng1h at seven
days ur three days may be used provided a relationship
between seven-day and three-clay and 28-day strength has
hcen established for the project prior to the start of
T
Table 705-1 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f'm (MPa) Based on Specifying the Compressive
Strength of Masonry Units
COMPRESSIVE STRE NGTHOFCLAY SPECIFIED COMPRESSIV[ STRENGTH OF MASONRY r:,.
MASONRYU NITS i,2 Type Mor S Mortar 3 Type N Mortar '
(MPa ) IM Pn ) <M P:1)
96.50 more 36.50 JOJ O

82.70 32.40 2 6.20
68.90 27.60 22.70
55.IO 23.10 18.60
41.30 18.60 15.20
2 7.60 13.80 11.00
COMPRESSIVE S'l'RENGTHOF SPEClFl1£D COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY, r:..
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 2~ Tvuc M or S Mor tnr1 Tyne N Mortor'
MPa (Ml'a) <MPn)
33. IOorm ore 20.70 19.30

25.80 17.20 16 19 1
19.30 13.80 12.70
13.10 10.30 9.30
8.60 6.90 6.50
I
Compre.,sive .f/rength of.mlid clay masonry 1mitf is based on gross areu. Compressive s1re.11gtl, of hollow clay ma,onrJ• units fr based 011 minimum net
m1•11.Vahl('.t 1111~1· IH! """'I:J(1/ate1l W/ten hollcrn rim• mawm:r 1111i1.1 11re grm111•cl. 1/,e grout shall conform tt>tht• pmpurtiu11 m Table 703-2.
,iswmU!d tt.Ss£·111hlr1g,,. Tl,~• lfll!t'if/ed C<Jlllprevsl\•<• fll'l!t1gtl1o/111c1.1rn11)' { ;,. i., 1111,·qc/ on gro.,s ar<?a strer1gth ll'lte1111si11g solid unit., or solid grouted masom:v
m1t/ Ill.It lll'Cll .l'l/'l!llg /1, 11'/ t<J1111.vlng 1111gm 11ted hollow uoits.
I
Monar for 111111 masOIIIJ'. /IITI/Hlrlum spcet,/i('ll/to11, as s111•1·ified i11 Tobie 7()3-1 The.,c vulue., apply to JH>l'lltmd <'e111e11t - lime mortar.~ without added
air - c111n1111111g 1111,terioff
' Vah1es 111a.1• l1t• i11terpol11texi. In grouted f'Oncrcte ma.wnry. /he compre.u ive strength ufgrour shall be equal ro or greater thun the r.ompres.s'ive ,strength of
the <:QIIC/YJ/(' /11(/fll/ll}I llllifs.
5. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used 2. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used
in design, field testing during construction is not in design, testing is not required for the units. A letter
required. A letter of certification from the supplier or of certification from the manufacturer of the units shall
the malerials to the j ob site shall be provided at the be provided at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the
Lime of, or prior tt,, delivery or the materials Lo assure units to the job site to assure the units comply with the
the materials used in construction are representative of compressive strength requi red in Table 705- 1; and
the materials used to develop the prism test record in
accordance with Section 705.3.3, Item 1. 3. Mortar shall comply with the mortar type required in
Table 705-1; and.
705.3.4 Unit Strength Method
4. When full stresses are used in design for concrete
Verification by lbc u nit strength method shall meet the 2
masonry, grout shall he tested for each 450 m of wall
following:
area, but not less than one test per project, to show
compliance with the compressive strength requir ed in
l. When full allowab le stresses are used in design, units
Table 705-1, Footnote 4.
shall be tested p rior to construction and test units
2
during construction for each 450 m of wall area for
5. When one half the allowable stresses are used in design
compressive strength to show compliance with the
for concrete masonry, testing is not requi red for the
compress ive streng th required in Table 705- l; and
groul A letter of certification from the supplier of the
grout shall be provided at the time or, or prior to,
Exception: delivery of the grout to the job site to assure the grout
Prior to the start ofconstruction, prism testing may be used complies with the compressive strength required in
in lieu of testing the u nit strength. During construction, Table 705-1, Footnote 4 ; or
prism testing may also be used in lieu of testing the unit
strength and the grout as required by Section 705.3.4, 6. When full allowable stresses are used in design for clay
item 4. masonry, grout proportions shall be verified by the
engineer-of-record or special inspector or an approved
agency to conform w ith Table 703-2.
. " -
--
- -
•
7. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used SECTION 706
in design for day masonry, a letter ur certification from
the supplier of the grout shall be provided at the time
GENERAL DESIGN
of, or prior to, delivery of the grout to the job site to REQUIREMENTS
assure the grout conforms lo the proportions or Table
703-2. 706. l General
705.3.5 Testing Prisms from Constructed Masonry 706.1.l Scope
When approved by the building official, acceptance of The design of masonry structures shall comply with the
masonry which does not meet the n.:quiremcnts of Section allowable stress design provisions or Section 707, or the
705.3.2, 705.3.3 or 705.3.4 shall be permitted to be based strength design provisions of Section 708 or tJ1e empirical
on tests of prisms cut from the masonry construction in design provisions o I' Section 710, and with the provisions of
accordance with the following: this section. Unless otherwise stated, all calculations shall
be made using or based on specified dimensions.
1. A set of three masonry prisms that are at least 28 days
old shall he saw cul from the masonry for each 450 n/
of the wall area that is in question hul not less than one 706.1.2 Plans
set of three masonry prisms for the projcct. The length,
Plans submitted for approval shall describe the required
width and height dimensions of the prisms shall
design strengths of masonry materials and inspection
comply with the requirements of ASTM E 447.
requirements for which all parts of the structure were
Transporting, preparation and testing of prisms shall bc
designed, and any load test requirements.
in accordance with ASTM E 447.
2. The compressive strength of prisms shall be the value 706.J.3 Design Loads
calculated in accordance with UBC 97 Standard 21-17,
Section 21.l707.2, except that the net cross-sectional See Chapter 2 for design loads and load combinations.
area of the prism shall be based on the net mortar
bedded area. 706.1.4 Stack Rond
3. Compliance with the requirement for the specified
In bearing and nunbearing walls, except veneer walls, if
compressive strength of masonry, f'm, shall be
less than 75 percent of the units in any transverse vertical
considered satisfied provided the modified compressive
plane lap the ends of the units below a distance less than
strength equals or exceeds the specified f'm. Additional
one half the height of _the unit, or less than one fomth the
testing of specimens cut from locations in question
length of the unit, the wall shall be considered laid in stack
shall be permitted.
bond.
705.4 Mortar Testing
706.1.5 Multi-wythe Walls
When required, mo11ar shall be tested in accordance with
ASTMC 270. 706.1.5.1 General
705.S Grout Testing All wythes of multi-wythc walls shall be bonded by grout
or tied together by corrosion-resistant wall ties or joint
When required, grout shall be tested in accordance.: with reinforcement conforming to the requirements of Section
ASTM C 476-83. 702, and as set forth in this section.
705.6 Recycled Aggregates 706.1.5.2 Wall Ties in Cavity Wall Construction
Recycled aggregates shall rcler to those materials whose Wall ties shall be of suflicient length to engage all wythcs.
mixtures arc part of masonry blocks or concn.:le debris that The portion of the wall tics within the wythc shall be
have been crushed for re-use. Recycled aggregates shall completely embedded in mortar or grout. The ends of the
pass the necessary tests before considered for re-use. wall tics shall he bent to 90-degree angles with an extension
not less than 50 mm long. Wall ties not completely
embedded in mortar or grout between wythes shall be a
single piece with each end engaged in each wythe.

CHAPTER 7 M
- asonry
There shall be at least one <f,10 mm wall tie for each 0.40 706.1.6 Vertical Support
2
m of wall area. For cavity walls in which the width of the
cavity is greater than 75 mm, but not more than 115 mm, at Structural members providing vertical sup" l f
least one IO mm diameter wall tie for each 0.25 m2 of wall .d . ,,or Q 111a,<;(,nry
s hal I prov1 ea bearmg surface on which the 1·n·t· 1 b J • .
area shall be provided. I la C< JOlllt
shall not be less than 6 mm or more 1hari 2S .
· d
thickness an shall be of noncomhus1iblc mater' .•,
mn, in
. , lh , except
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The maximum where masonry 1s a nonstructural clccon1ti ve "'eat
. " ure or
vertical distance between tics shall not exceed <iOO mm and weanng surface.
the maximum horizontal distance between ties shall not
exceed 900 mm. 706.1.7 Lateral Suppol't
Additional ties spaced not more than 900 mm apart shall be Lateral support of masonry may be provided by cross walls
provided around openings within a distance of 300 mm columns, pilasters, countcrforts or huttresses wher;
from the edge of the opening. spanning horizontally or by tloors, heams, girts or roofs
where spanning vertically.
Adjustable wall tics shall meet the following requirements:
The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall
I. One tie shall be provided for each 0.16 ni2 of wall area. not exceed 32 times the least width of the compression area.
Horizontal and vertical spacing shall not exceed
400 mm. Maximum misalignment of bed joints from 706.1.8 Protection of Tics and Joint Reinforcement
one wythe to the other shall he 30 mm.
A minimum of 16 mm mortar cover shall be provided
2. Maximum clearance between the connecting parts of between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face.
the tie shall be 1.5 mm. When used, pintle ties shall The thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units
have at least two 5 mm diameter pintle legs. and joint reinforcement shall not be less than 6 mm, except
that 6 mm diameter reinforcement or holts may be placed in
Wall ties of diflerent size and spacing that provide hed joints which are at least twice the thickness of the
equivalent strength hetween wythes may he used. reinforcement or holts.
706.1.5.3 Wall Ties for Grouted Multi-,l'ythe 706.t.9 Pipes and Conduits Embedded in Masonry
Construction
Pipes ur conduit shall not be emhedded in any masonry in a
Wythes of multi-wythe walls shall be bonded together with manner that will .reduce the capacity or the masonry to less
at least 4.8 mm diameter stc.:cl wall tie for each 0.20 m2 of than that necessary for required strength or required fire
area. Wall tics of different size and spacing that provide protection.
equivalent strength between wythes may be used.
Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow-
706.1.5.4 Joint Reinforcement unit masonry shall not be wnsidered as cmbedment.
Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry wall shall Exceptions:

have at least one cross wire of at least No. 9 gage steel for 1. Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in structural
2
each 0.20 m of wall area. The vertical spacing of the joint masonry when their locations have been detailed on
reinforcement shall not exceed 400 mm. The longitudinal the approved plan.
wires shall be thoroughly cmhedded in the bed joint mortar.
The joint reinforcement shall engage all wythes. 2. Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally
through (my masomJ' by means qf a sleev.e al least
Where the space between tied wythcs is solidly tilled with
grout or mortar, the allowahle stresses and other provisions
large enough to pa.s·s any hub or cl)11pling on
tire
pipeline. Such sleeves shall 1101 be µlaced closer lha11
for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is three diameters, cenler 10 center. nor shall they tm(}uly
not filled, tied walls shall conform to the allowahle stress, impair the strength ~/'construction.
lateral support, thickness (excluding cavity), height and tie
requirements for cavity walls.
.
706.1.10 L oad Test 706.1.12.2 Special Provisions for Seismic Zone 2
When n load test is re<Juired, rhc member or portion or the Masonry structures in Seismic Zone 2 shall comply with the
stniclure under consideration shall be subJectcd to a following special provisions:
superimposed load equal to twice the design live load plus
one half of the dead load: 0 . 5 D + 2 L I. Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sections
706.3.6, 706.3.7 11nd 707.2.13.
This load shall be lefl in position for a period or 24 hours
before removal. If, during the test or u1>on remo\'al of 1he 2 Yenical wall rcinforl·emcnt or at least 130 111111 ' in
load, the 1m:mbcr or portion oflhc structure shows evidence cross-sectional area shall be provided contmuously
of fa ilure, such changes or modifications as nre necessary to from support to support at each corner, at each side or
make the structure adequate for the rilled capacity sha ll be each opcuing, at rhe ends of walls and at maximum
made; or where approved, n lower rating shull be spacing of 1.20 m apart hori1.ontally throughout walls.
cstabl ishcd.
1. 1l(>ri,wntal wall reinforcement not less than 130 mni2 in
I\ flexural member shall be considcrecl to have passed the cross-sectional area shall be provided (I) al the bottom
test if the maximum <.JcOection D al the end of the 24-hour and Lop or wall openings and shnll extend not less rhnn
period docs not exceed the value or Eq. 706-1 or 706-2 and 600 mm or less than 40 bar diameters past the opening,
the beams and slabs show a recovery of at least 75 percent (2) continuously at structurally connected roof and
of the observed dcllection within 24 hours aller remova l of noor levels and at the Lop of walls, (3) at the bottom or
the load. walls or in the top of' foundations when doweled in
walls, and (4) 111 maximum spacing of 3.0 m unless
f uni fonn ly distributed joint reinforcement is provided.
D =- (706-1) Reinforcement at the top and bouom of openings when
200 continuous in walls may be used in clctcm1ining the
maximum spacing specified in Item I of this
t2 paragraph.
D= -4 , 000t
- - (706-2)
4. Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal
reinforcement ratio shall be 0. 0007 bt. This ratio
shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed joint
706.1.11 Reuse ufMasonry Units reinforcement or by horizontal reinforcement spaced
not over 1.2 m and fully embedded in grout or mortar.
Masonry units may be reused when clean, whole and
confom1ing to lhe olher requirements of this section. All 5. The following materials shall not be used as part of the
structural properties of masonry of reclaimed units shall be vertical or lateral load-resisting system: Type O mortar,
determined by approved test. ma.sonry cement, plastic cement, non-load bearing
masonry units and glass block.
706. 1.12 Special Provisions in Area of Seismic Risk
706.1.12.3 Special Provisions for Seismic Zone 4
706.1.12.J Genernl
All masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 4 shall be
Masonry structures constructed in the seismic zones shown dc!iigncd and con!itructcd in accordance with requirements
in Figure 208- 1 shall be designed in accordance with the for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additional
design n,-quiremenls or this chapter and the special requirements and limitations:
provisions for each seismic zone given in this section.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (AS EP)

I. Column Reinforcement Ties 2.2 Bond

Multi-wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed
[n columns that are stressed by tensile or compressive axial with consideration of the adhesion bond strength hetween
overturning forces from seismic loading, the spacing of the grout and masonry units. When bond strengths are not
column ties shall not exceed 200 mm for the full height of known from previous tests, the bond strength shall be
such columns. detem1ined by tests.
In all other columns, ties shall he spaced a maximum of
2.3 Wall Rtinforcement
0.20 m in the tops and bottoms of the columns for a
distance of the greatest among (I) one sixth of the clear All walls shall he reinforced with both vertical and
column height, (2) 450 mm, or (3) the maximum column horizontal reinforcement. The sum of the areas or
cross-sectional dimension. horizontal and ve11ical reinforcement shall be at least 0.002
times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall, and the
Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall not minimum area of reinforcement in either direction shall not
exceed the lesser of 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diameters, the be less than 0.001 times the gross cross-sectional area of the
least column cross-sectional dimension, or 450 mm. wall. The minimum steel requirements for Seismic Zone 2
in Section 706.1.12.2, Items 2 and 3, may be included in the
Column ties shall terminate with a minimum 135° hook sum. The spacing of rcinfon:cmcnt shall not exceed l .2 m.
with extensions nut less than six bar diameters or I 00 The diameter of reinforcement shall not be less than 10 mm
mm. Such extensions shall engage the longitudinal column except that joint reinforcement may be considered as a part
reinforcement and project into the interior of the column. or all of the requirement for minimum reinforcement.
Hooks shall comply with Section 707.2.2.5, Item 3. Reinforcement shall be continuous around wall comers and
through intersections. Only reinforcement which is
Exceptions: continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in
computing the mm,mum area of reinforcement.
Where ties are placed in horizontal bed joints, hooks shall Reinforcement with splices conforming to
consist of a 90-degree bend having an inside radius of not Section 707 .2.2.6 shall be considered as continuous
less than four tie diameters plus an extension of 32 tie reinforcement.
diameters.
2.4 Stack Bond
2. Shear Walls
Where stack bond is used, the m1mmum horizontal
2.1 Reinforcement reinforcement ratio shall be 0. 0015 bt. Where open-end
units are used and grouted solid, the minimum hori:tontal
The porlion of the reinforcement required to resist shear
reinforcement ratio shall be 0. 001 bt.
shall be uniformly distributed and shall he joinl
reinforcement, deformed bars or a combination thereo£
Reinforced hollow-unit stacked bond construction which is
The spacing of reinforcement in each direction shall not
part of the seismic-resisting system shall use open-end units
exceed one half the length of the element, nor one half the
so that all head joints are made solid, shall use bond hcam
height of the element, nor 1.2 m.
units to facilitate the flow ur grout and shall be grouted
solid.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in
the determination of the shear strength of the member shall
3. Type N Mortar
be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 385
& A 641.
Type N mortar shall not be used as part of the vertical- or
lateral-load-resisting system.
Reinforcement required to resist in-plane shear shall be
tenninated with a standard hook as defined in
Section 707.2.2.5 or with an extension of proper
embedment length beyond the reinforcement at the end of
the wall section. The hook or extension may be turned up,
down or horizontally. Provisions shall be made not to
obstruct grout placement. Wall reinforcement tcnuinating
in columns or beams shall be fully anchored into these
elements.
'4
7-20 CHAPTER 7 • Masonry
4. Concrete Abutting Structural Masonry 706.2.3.3 Cavity Walls
Concrete abutting stniclural ma:.onry. such as at starter Where both wythcs ora cavity wall ore axially loaded, euch
courses or al wnll intcn;ections 1101 designed as true wythe shall be considered 10 act 111de1m1dcntly and the
separation joints. shall be roughened to a full amplitude of effective thickness of each ,, ythe is as defined in
1.5 mm and shall be bonded to the masonry in accordance Section 70(,.2.3. 1. Where only one wythc is axially loaded,
"ith the requrrcmcnts of this chapter as ir ii were masonry. the effective thickness of the ca, it) wall is taken as the
Unless keys or proper rcinforccmenl rs provided. , crtical square root of the sum or the squares of the specil red
,1orn1s as specified 111 Section 706.1.4 shall he considered to thicknesses of'the wythcs.
be stack bond and the reinforcement as required for stack
bond shall extend through the joint and be anchored into the Where a cavity wall is composed ur a single wythe nnd a
concrete. multi-wythe, and both srdes arc axially loaded, each side or
the ca, ity wall ,;hall be considered to act indepc11den1ly and
706.2 Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design the effective thickness of each srdc rs a:. delincd 111
Requirements for Unreinforced and Reinforced Section:. 706.2.3. 1 and 706.2.3.2. Where only one srde is
Masonry axial!) loaded. lhc effective thickness of the cavity wall is
the square root of the sum of the square!> or the specified
706.2.1 General thicknesses of the sides.
In ndditron to the rc<1uircments of Section 706. I. the design 706.2.3 .4 Columns

of masonry structures by the allo\\able stress design method
and strength design method shall comply with the The effective thicknes:, for rcc1angular columns in the
requirement:. of this section. Addi1ionally, the design of direction considered is the specified thickness. The
reinforced masonry slructures by these design methods effective thickness for non-rectangular columns is the
~hall comply with the requirements of Section 706.3. thickness or the square column with the same moment of
inertia about its axis as that about the 8:\is considered in the
706.2.2 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry actual column.
The allowable stresses for the design of masonry shall be 706.2.4 Effective Hejght
based on value of f'm selected for the construction.
The effective height of columns and walls shall be taken as
Verification of the \'aluc or /~, shnll be based on the clear height of members laterally supported at the top
compliance with Section 705.3. Unless otherwise specified, and bottom in a direct.ion nom1al to the member axis
considered. for members not supported at the top normal
f;n shall be based on 28-day tests. If other than a 28-day
10 the axis considered, the eflective height is twice the
test age is used. the value of f'm shall be as indicated in height of the member above the support. EOcctivc height
design drawings or specifi cations. Design drawings shall
less than clear height may be used ifjustified.
show the vnluc of r:n for which each part of the structure is
desjgocd. 706.2.S Effective Arca
706.2.3 Effective Thickness The effective cross-sectional area shall be based on the
minimum bedded area of hollow units. or the gross area of
706.2.3.1 Single-Wythe Walls solid units plus any grouted area. Where hollow units arc
used with cells perpendicular to the direction of slrcss, the
The effective thickness of single-wythe walls of either solid effective area shall be the lc:sser or the minimum bedded
or hollow units is the specified thickness of the wall. area or the minimum cross-sectional area. Where bed joints
are raked. the effective area shall be correspondingly
706.2.3.2 Multi-wythe Walls reduced. Effective areas for cavity wulls shall be that of the
loaded wythes.
The effective thickness or multi-wythc walls is the specified
thickness of the wall if the space between wythes is filled
with mortar or grout. For walls with an open space between
wythes, the effective thickness shall be determined as for
cavity walls.

706.2.6 Effective Width of Intersecting Walls 706.2.11 Walls Intersecting with Floors and
Roofs
Where a shear wall is anchored to an intersecting wall or
walls, the width or the overhanging flange formed by the Walls shall be anchored to all noors, roofs or other
intersected wall on either side of the shear wall, which may clements which provide lateral support for the wall. Where
be assumed working with the shear wall for purposes of floors or roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to
llexural stiffness calculations, shall not exceed six times the walls, the anchorage to such walls shall be designed to
thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective resist the horizontal force.
tlange may be waived if justified. Only the effective area
of the wall parallel to the shear forces may be assumed to 706.2.12 Modulus of Elasticity of Materials
carry horizontal shear.
706.2.12.1 Modulus of Elasticity of Masonry
706.2.7 Distribution of Concentrated Vertical Loads
in Walls The moduli for masonry may be estimated as provided
below. Actual values, where required, shall be established
The length of wall laid up in running bond which may be by test. The modulus of clasticily of masonry shall be
considered capable of working at the maximum allowable determined by the secant method in which the slope of the
compressive stress to resist vertical concentrated loads shall line for the modulus of elasticity is taken from 0. 05 f~n to
not exceed the center-to-center distance between such
loads, nor the width of bearing area plus four times the wall
a point on the curve at 0. 33 nn· These values are not to
be reduced by one half as set forth in Section 707. J.2.
thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be assumed
to be distributed across continuous vertical mortar or Modulus of elasticity of clay or shale unit masonry.
control joints unless elements designed to distribute the
concentrated vertical loads are employed. 20.5 GPa maximum (706-3)
706.2.8 Loads on Nonbearing Walls Modulus of elasticity of concrete unit masonry.
Masonry walls used as interior partitions or as exterior

20.5 GPa maximum (706-4)
surfaces of a building which do not carry vertical loads
imposed by other elements of the building shall be designed
to carry their own weight plus any superimposed finish and 706.2.12.2 Modulus of Elasticity of Steel
lateral forces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbearing walls
Es= ZOOGPa (706-5)
shall be adequate to support the walls and to transfer lateral
forces to the supporting elements.
706.2.13 Shear Modulus of Masonry
706.2.9 Vcrtical Deflection
G = 0.4Em (706-6)
Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their
vertical deflection will not exceed 1/600 of the clear span 706.2.14 Placement of Embedded Anchor Bolts
under total loads. Lintels shall bear on supporting masonry
on each end such that allowable stresses in the supporting 706.2.14. t General
masonry arc nol exceeded. A minimum hearing length of
l 00 mm shall be provided for lintels bearing on masonry. Placement requirements for plate anchor bolts, headed
anchor bolts and bent bar anchor bolts shall he determined
706.2.10 Structural Continuity in accordance with this subsection. Bent bar anchor bolts
shall have a hook with a 90-degree bend with an inside
Intersecting strnctural elements intended to act as a unit diameter of three bolt diameters, plus an extension of one
shall be anchored together to resist the design forces. and one half bolt diameters at the free end. Plate anchor
bolts shall have a plate welded to the shank to provide
anchorage equivalent to headed anchor bolts.
q
I he effoctive cmbcdmem depth l1, for plate or headed 706.3.3 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement
anchor bolts shall be the length of cmbcdmcnt measured
pcrpcndit·ular from the surface of the masonry 10 the The elcnr distance between parallel bars, except in columns,
bearing surface or the plate or head or the anchorngc, nnd s hnll not be less than the nominal diameter of the bars 01 25
lb for bcm bar anchors shall be the length of crnbcdmcnl mm, except lhat bars in n splice may he in contact. Tlus
mensured perpendicular from the surface or the masonry to clear distance rcqu1remcn1 applies to the clear distnncc
the bearing surface of the bent end minus one nnehor bolt between a contact splice ond adjacent splices or burs.
diameter All bolls slrn ll be grouted in place wi th a l least
25 mm or grout hetwecn the bolt and the masonry, Cl\Cept The cle.ir distance between the surface of a bar and any
that 6 mm bolts may be placed in bed joints which area nt surface of' n masonry unil sh,t!I nol be less than 6 mm for
least 12 mm in thickness. fine grout and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of
hollow units may be used as support for horizontal
706.2.14.2 Minim um Edge Distance reinforcement.
The minimum anchor bolt edge distance lbe measured from 706.3.4 Anchorage of Flexural Reinforcement
the edge of the masonry parallel with the anchor bolt to the
surface of the anchor bolt shall he 38 mm. The tension or compression in any bar al any sect ion shnll
be developed on each side of lhat section by the required
706.2.14.3 Minimum Embedment Depth development length. The development length or the bar
may be achieved by n combination of'an embcdmcnt length.
anchorage or, for tension only, hooks.
The minimum embedment depth of anchor bolts lb shall be
four boll diameters but not less than 50 mm.
Except at supports or at the free end of canti lcvcn,, every
reinforcing bar shall be extended beyond the point at which
706.2.14.4 Minimum Spacing between Bolts
it is no longer needed to resist tensile stress for a distance
equal Lo 12 bar diameters or the depth of the beam,
The minimum center-to-ceritcr distance hetwecn anchor
whichever is greater. No fl ex ura l bar shall be terminated in
bolts shall be four bolt diameters.
a tensi le zone unless at least one of the following conditions
706.2.15 Flexural Resistance ot' Cavity Wans lh . The shear is not over one half that permitted, including
allowance for shear reinforcement where provided.
For computing the flexural n:sistimce of cavity wal Is, lateral
I. Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that
loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be
required is provided each way from the cutoff a
distributed to the wylhes according to their respective
flexurnl rigidities. distance equal 10 the depth of the beam. The shear
reinforcement spacing shall not exceed d/8r b.
7fl6.3 Alternative Strength Oesign (ASD) and
Strength Design Requirements for Reinforced 2. The continuing bars provide double the area required
Masonry for flexure at that point or double the perimeter
required for reinforcing bond.
706.3.1 General
At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for
In addition to the requirements of Sections 706. 1 and 706.2, negative moment at the support shall be extended beyond
the design of reinforced masonry structures by the working the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
stress design method or lhe sLrcngth design method shall sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar,
comply with the rcquirern.ents of this section. not less !l1an 1/16 of the clear span, or the depth d of the
member, whichever is greater.
706.3.2 Plain Bars
Tensile reinforcement for negative moment in any span of a
The use of plain bars larger than 6 mm in diameter is not continuous restrained or cantilever beam, or in any member
permitted. of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by
reinforcement bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or
through the supporting member.

CHAPTER 7 · Maso111y 7-2::l
At least one third or Lhc required positive moment 706.3.6 I .aleral Ties
reinforeemcnl in simple hcams or at the freely supported
end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face All longitudinal bars for columns shall he enclosed by
of the beam inlo the support al lcasl 150 mm. Al least one lateral ties. Lateral support shall he provided to the
fourth of the required positive moment rcinforcen1enl al the Jongiludinal bars by the corner of a complete tic having an
continuous end or continuous beams shall extend along the included angle of not more than 135 degrees or by a
same face of the beam into the support at least 150 mm. standard hook al the end of a tie. The corner bars shall have
such suppo11 provided by a complete tic enclosing the
Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be. longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have
anchored by lies or stirrups not less than 6 mm in diameter, such lateral support provided by tics and no bar shall he
spaced not farther apa,1 than 16 bar diameters or 48 tie farther than 150 mm from such laterally supported bar.
diameters, whichever is less. Such lies or slirrups shall bi.:
used throughout the distance where compression Lateral tics and longitudinal bars shall be placed not Jess
reinforccmenl is required. than :l8 mm aud not more lhan 125 mm from the surface of
the column. Lateral tics may be placed against rhe
706.3.5 Anchorage of Shear Reinforcement. longitudinal bars or placed in thi.: horizontal bed joints
where the requirements of Section 706.1.8 c1re met
Single, separate bars used as shear reinforccmcnl shall he Spacing of ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar
anchored at each end by one of the following methods: diameti.:rs. 48 tic diameters or the least dimension of the
column but not more t11an 450 mm.
I. I-looking lighlly around the longitudinal reinforcement
through 180 degrees. Ties shall be at leasl 6 mm in diameter for 20 mm or
smaller longitudinal bars and at least IO mm for
2. Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the heam longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm. Ties smaller than IO
on lhc compression side a distance sul1foient lo mm may be used for longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm,
develop the sLress in the bar for plain or deformed bars. provided the lolal cross-sectional area of such smaller ties
crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to Lhat or lhc larger
3. Uy a standard hook, as defined in Scclion 707.2.2.5, ties at lheir required spacing.
(;()nsidcrcd as developing 50 MPa, plus embedrncnt
706.3.7 Column Anchor Rolt Ties
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to
which the har is subjected. The elfoctivc i.:mbcddcd
Additional ties shall be provided around anchor bolts which
length shall not be assumed to exceed the distance
are sr.:L in the top of columns. Such ties shall engage at least
between the mid-depth of the beam and the langcnl uf
four bolts or, allematcly, al least four ve11ical column bars
the hook.
or a combination of bolts and bars totaling at least four.
Such ties shall be located within the top 125 mm of the
The ends of bars forming a single lJ or multiple U stirrup
column and shall provide a total of 260 mm2 or more in
shall he anchored hy one of the methods set forth in hems I
cross-sectional area. The uppermost tic shall be within 50
through 3 above or shall be bent through an angle of at leasl
mm of the top of the column.
90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not
less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project
706.3.8 f.ffcctivc Width of Compression Area
beyond the bend at least 12 stirrup diameLers.
In computing flexural stresses in walls where reinforcement
The loops or closed ends of simple U or mulliple U stirrups
occurs, the effective width assumed for runni11g bond
shall be anchored by bending around the longitudinal
masonry shall nol exceed six times the nominal wall
reinforcement through an angle of at least 90 degrees and
thickness or rhe center-to-center distance between
project beyond the end or the bend al kast 12 stirrup reinforcement. Where stack hond . is used, the effective
diameters.
width shall not exceed three limes the nominal wall
thickness or the center-to-center distance between
reinforcement or the lenglh of one unit, unless solid grouted
open-end units arc used.
•
7-24 CHAPTER 7 • Masonry
SECTION707 707.1.3.2 Columns
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN The least nomi nal dimension of a reinforced masonry
(ASD) OF MASONRY ~~~~~~~~~~~
column shall be 300 mm except that, for /\SD, if the
allowable stresses are reduced by one half, the mi nimum
707.t General nominctl dimension shall be 200 mm.
707.1.1 Scope 707. l.4 Design Assumptions
The des ig n of masonry structures using allowable stress The working stress design procedure is based on wo rk ing
design shall comply with the provisions of Section 706 and stresses and linear stress-strain <lislribution assumptions
this section. Stresses in clay or concrete masonry under with all stresses in the elastic range as follows:
service loads shall not exceed lhe values given in this
~ection. I. Plane sections before bending remain plane oner
bending.
707.1.2 Allowable Masonry Stresses
2. Stress is propo11ional to strain.
When quality assurance provisions do not include
requirements for special inspcclion as prescri bed in Section 3. Masonry elements combine to for

NSCP 2015 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NSCP 2015 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NSCP C101-15

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483

Copyright@2015, The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

ISSN No.: 2094-5477

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

First Edition, 1972

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

2. Changes and Developments

This NSCP 7th edition is referenced fron1 the follo\ving:

b. International Building Code lBC-2009

c. A1nerican Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI 7-10

d. American Concrete Institute ACI318-14M

f. American Iron and Steel Institute AISI SI 00-2007

g. Reinforced Masonry Engineering I-Iandbook of America

h. Concrete Masonry Handbook, 6th Edition

i. American National Standard Institute ANSI E!Aff!A-222-G-1-2007

J. A1nerican Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards

Significant revisions are su1n1narized as follo\vs:

The changes n1ade in this chapter are the follo\ving:

a.1 Section 102 - Definition of Failure

a.2 Section l 03 - Classification of Structures

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

b. Chapter 2 - Minimum Design Loads

• directional procedure for buildings of all heights,

c.9 Provisions pertaining to n1inimu1n dimensions of ditches have been 1nodified;

d. Chapter 4 - Structural Concrete

d.2 Section 402: Notation and Terminology

d.3 Section 403: Referenced Standards

The follo\ving referenced specifications have been added to Section 403.2.4:

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

• AS/NZS 4671: 200 I, Steel Reinforcing Materials

The follo\ving referenced specifications have been deleted:

• ASTM Cl 09/CI09M-08, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

d.4 Section 404: Structural System Requirements

d.5 Section 405: Loads

d.6 Section 406: Structural Analysis

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

(d). Diaphrag1ns of interconnected precast elements ,vithout cast-in-place concrete

d.10 Section 418: Earthquake-Resistant Structures

Sub-section 420.2.2.5 requires "Defonned non-prestressed longitudinal reinforce111ent resisting earthquake

3. Section 423, Anchoring to Concrete, is no,v Section 417, ,vith no significant

4. Section 421, Earthquake-Resistant Stn1ctures, no,v Section 418.

5. Section 427, Strut-and-Tie Models is no,v Section 423, ,vith no significant

6. Section 420, Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures, is 110\.v Section 427.

7. Section 419, Shells and Folded Plates, is now Section 428.

9. Section 425, Alternative Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete

e. Chapter 5: Structural Steel.

e.2 Change of headings and terms.

510.10.3 Web Crippling to Web Local Crippling

e.3 Creation of ne,v subtopic.

SECTION 529 BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF)

5 l 0.8 Colun1n Bases and Bearing on Concrete

2 0lO: $, =0.60(LRFD) n, =2s(ASD)

2015: </>, = 0.65(LRFD) ll, = 2. 31(ASD)

e.5 Revision in equations

B-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES

Q ,[, 0.2<,'' ] (511.2-7)

APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE

A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts

The revisions n1ade in this Chapter are the follo\ving:

f.5 Other Sections affected are adjusted accordingly.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)